Docucolor 12dccs50

DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Service Manual
CAUTION
Certain components in the DocuColor 12/
DCCS50 are susceptible to damage from electro-
static discharge. Observe all ESD procedures to
avoid component damage.
January 2005
NOTICE
While every care has been taken in the preparation of this manual, no liabil-
ity will be accepted by Xerox Corporation arising out of any inaccuracies or
omissions.
NOTICE
All service documentation is supplied to Xerox external customers for infor-
mational purposes only. Xerox service documentation is intended for use by
certified product trained service personal only. Xerox does not warrant or
represent that such documentation is complete, nor does Xerox represent
or warrant that it will notify or provide to such customer any future changes
to this documentation. Customer performed service of equipment, or mod-
ules, components or parts of such equipment may affect the warranty
offered by Xerox with respect to such equipment. You should consult the
applicable warranty for its terms regarding customer or third party provided
service. If the customer services such equipment, modules, components or
parts thereof, the customer releases Xerox from any and all liability for the
customer actions, and the customer agrees to indemnify, defend and hold
Xerox harmless from any third party claims which arise directly or indirectly
from such service.
Prepared by:
Xerox Corporation
800 Phillips Road
Bldg. 845-17S
Webster, New York 14580-9791 USA
© 2001, 2002, 2004 by Xerox Corporation.

Xerox® and The Document Company®
are trademarks of Xerox Corporation.
Xerox product names mentioned in this publication are trademarks of the
XEROX CORPORATION.
manuals4you.com
Introduction
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... iii
About This Documentation.............................................................................................. iv
Organization.................................................................................................................... iv
Reference Symbology..................................................................................................... vi
AC and DC Voltage Nomenclature ................................................................................. ix
Translated WARNINGS .................................................................................................. ix
Reissue 1/05 Introduction

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 i
Introduction 1/05 Reissue
ii DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Introduction Photoreceptor Drum Light Shock
Safety CAUTION
Protect the Photoreceptor Drum from the light by covering it with the bag when the Drum is
WARNING removed from the machine or exposed to light. The bag is stored in the Tray 1 storage com-
The DocuColor 12/DCCS50 contains an invisible laser. There is no visual indication that partment. The Drum can be damaged by light shock.
the laser beam is present. During servicing, the DocuColor 12/DCCS50 is a Class 3B
product because of the invisible laser. the laser beam could cause eye damage if looked
Electrostatic Discharge Damage
at directly. Service procedures must be followed exactly as written without change. The CAUTION
service representative must observe the established local laser safety precautions Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when accessing parts of the machine
when servicing the DocuColor 12/DCCS50. Do not place tools with a reflective surface other than those normally accessed by the operator. The Kit and procedures must be used
in the area of the Charge Corotron or the ROS opening. Do not look in the area of the even though PWBs are not touched directly. Components of the machine can be damaged by
Charge Corotron or the ROS window if the power is On and the laser is energized with electrostatic discharge.
the Toner Cartridge Unit removed. Toner, Developer and Drum
The following symbol and statement appear on a label in the machine when the Toner CAUTION
Cartridge Cover or the Toner Cartridge Unit are removed. The symbol by itself, or the
Do not store the Toner, the Developer, or the Drum in the service vehicle.
symbol and the statement may also appear in the service documentation and in the
training program. When this symbol appears, the service representative is warned that Disconnecting and Reconnecting Electrical Connectors.
conditions exist that could result in exposure to the laser beam. CAUTION
WARNING Disconnecting and reconnecting electrical connectors while power is “On” can cause damage
Do not try to bypass any laser interlocks for any reason. Permanent eye damage could to PWBs and other electrical components. Always switch “OFF” power before disconnecting or
result if the laser is accidentally directed into your eye. reconnecting electrical connectors.
Figure 1 Laser Hazard Symbol
Laser Hazard Statement
DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO

BEAM.
CAUTION
The use of controls or adjustments other than those specified in the Laser Safety Training Pro-
gram may result in an exposure to dangerous laser radiation.
For additional information, review the Laser Safety Training program.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 iii
About This Documentation Organization
This Service Manual is part of the multinational documentation system for the DocuColor 12/ In printed form, this publication is divided into ten sections, which are described below. The
DCCS50 Machine. This manual will help in the isolation and repair of faults that may occur in electronic format is also divided into the same ten sections for editing purposes; however,
the machine. these sections are rarely apparent to the user. For ease of access, the information contained in
the principles of operation, installation, and training are electronically integrated.
Section 1. Service Call Procedures

This section contains the following:
• Call Flow
• Initial Actions
• Repair Actions
• Detailed Maintenance Activities
• Cleaning Procedures
• Final Actions
• Service Log
Call Flow
Call Flow is a summary of the sequence of the major activities of the service call procedures.
Initial Actions
The purpose of the Initial Actions is to gather information about the service call and the condi-
tion of the machine and to classify the information.
Repair Actions
This is the overall procedure to diagnose and repair problems.
Detailed Maintenance Activities

This section provides the information needed for the High Frequency Service Items (HFSI).
Cleaning Procedures
This section provides the information needed to clean the DocuColor 12/DCCS50.
Final Actions
The Final Actions are intended to ensure that the DocuColor 12/DCCS50 is operating correctly
and is in good condition when it is returned to the customer.
Service Log
A master Service Log sheet is provided to be copied and used by the service representative.
Section 2. Status Indicator Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs)

This section contains the Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs) necessary to repair the faults
other than the image quality faults. When using a RAP, always exit the procedure when the fault
is fixed. Do not perform the remaining steps.

iv DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Section 3. Image Quality Repair Analysis Procedures (IQ RAPs)
This section contains the Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs) necessary to repair the image
quality faults. When using a RAP, always exit the procedure when the fault is fixed. Do not per-
form the remaining steps.
Section 4. Repairs and Adjustments

This section contains the repair and adjustment procedures for the DocuColor 12/DCCS50.
Section 5. Parts List

This section contains the detailed Parts List for the DocuColor 12/DCCS50.
Section 6. General Procedures

This section contains General Procedures, Diagnostic Procedures, Product Specifications, and
Tools and Supplies information.
Section 7. Wiring Data

This section contains the Plug/Jack Listings, Plug/Jack Location Drawings, PWB Location Dia-
grams, Power Distribution Wirenets, and the Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs).
NOTE: Chain 1 of the BSDs shows the generation of power. The Power Distribution Wirenets
show how the power is distributed to the machine.
Section 8. Accessories / Options

This section contains a separate service document for each of the accessories. The service
representative will be directed to Section 8 from the main service documentation when it is
appropriate.
Section 9. Installation and Removal

This section contains instructions for installation of the machine at the customer’s site. It also
contains instructions for repacking and removal when appropriate.
Section 10. Principles of Operations

This section contains information on how the machine operates.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 v
Reference Symbology
Figure 1 General Information

vi DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 vii

viii DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
AC and DC Voltage Nomenclature Translated WARNINGS
ACH is used in the documentation to designate the hot, or power, side of the AC line. The volt-
age level on this line depends upon the local AC power supplied to the machine.
WARNING
For some installations, (typically Xerox Europe), the ACN line may NOT be neutral. It
may have power applied. Check local power standards.
ACN is used in the documentation to designate the neutral side of the AC line. The voltage
level on this line depends upon the local AC power supplied to the machine.
DC Voltage Levels
DC voltages should be measured between the test point and the machine frame, unless
instructed otherwise. The table below shows the values of the voltages.
Table 1 DC Voltage Levels

Nominal
Logic State Actual Voltage Ranges
Voltage
+5 VDC H +4.5 to +5.3 VDC
L 0.0 to +1.0 VDC
+3.5 VDC H +3.0 to +4.2 VDC
L 0.0 to +1.0 VDC
+12 VDC H +10.0 to +13.2 VDC
L 0.0 to +1.5 VDC
-12 VDC H -10.0 to -13.2 VDC
L 0.0 to -1.5 VDC
+13.3 VDC H +11.0 to +14.2 VDC
L 0.0 to +1.5 VDC
+24 VDC H +22.0 to +25.7 VDC
L 0.0 to +3.0 VDC
o u.c om
als 4 y
u
man

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 ix
Publication Information WARNING
WARNING Do not try to bypass any laser interlocks for any reason. Permanent eye damage could
result if the laser is accidentally directed into your eye.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions documentation, may cause inter- DANGER: Ne pas essayer de shunter les contacts de sécurité laser, quelle que soit la
ference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits raison. Si le faisceau laser est dirigé accidentellement vers les yeux il peut en résulter
for a Class A computing device pursuant to subpart J of part 15 of FCC rules, which are des lésions oculaires permanentes.
designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a AC and DC Voltage Nomenclature
commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to WARNING
cause interference in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to cor-
For some installations (typically Xerox Europe), the ACN line may NOT be neutral. It may
rect the interference.
have power applied. Check local power standards.
DANGER: Cet équipement génère, utilise et peut émettre des fréquences radio, et, s'il
DANGER: Lors de certaines installations (particulièrement en Europe), le neutre peut
n'est pas installé et utilisé selon les recommandations du manuel d'instructions, peut
avoir une faible tension (10 à 20 volts). Vérifier l'alimentation client.
causer des interférences aux communications radio. Il a été testé et jugé conforme aux
limites des systèmes de catégorie A, conformément à la partie 15 de l'alinéa J des règle- 3 Image Quality RAPs
ments FCC, établis pour protéger contre de telles interférences pendant le fonctionne- Image Quality RAPs
ment en milieu commercial. Dans une zone résidentielle, il peut causer des IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure
interférences; dans ce cas, l'utilisateur devra corriger le problème à ses propres frais.
Introduction WARNING
Introduction Electrocution Hazard! Do not disconnect the red lead labeled \nC (Charge Supply Wire).
WARNING This wire carries over 8000VDC.
The DocuColor 12/DCCS50 contains an invisible laser. There is no visual indication that DANGER: Risque d'électrocution! Ne pas déconnecter le fil rouge identifié \nC (fil d'ali-
the laser beam is present. During servicing, the DocuColor 12/DCCS50 is a Class 3B mentation de charge). Une tension de plus de 8000 VCC est présente.
product because of the invisible laser. the laser beam could cause eye damage if looked IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP
at directly. Service procedures must be followed exactly as written without change. The
service representative must observe the established local laser safety precautions WARNING
when servicing the DocuColor 12/DCCS50. Do not place tools with a reflective surface Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be
in the area of the Charge Corotron or the ROS opening. Do not look in the area of the
tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or
Charge Corotron or the ROS window if the power is On and the laser is energized with the meter leads while testing the circuits.
the Toner Cartridge Unit removed.
DANGER: Risque de choc électrique. Dans la procédure suivante, des circuits de haute
DANGER: DocuColor 12/DCCS50 contient un faisceau laser invisible et aucune indica- tension CC doivent être testés. Faire très attention en vérifiant ces circuits. Ne pas
tion visible signale la présence du faisceau laser. De ce fait le produit est classé 3B pour
toucher le multimètre ou ses fils pendant les tests des circuits.
tout ce qui concerne la maintenance. L'exposition directe des yeux au faisceau laser
IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP
peut entraîner des lésions visuelles. Les procédures de maintenance doivent être réal-
isées sans aucun changement comme indiqué dans la documentation. Le représentant
Xerox lors d'interventions sur DocuColor 12/DCCS50 doit respecter les consignes de WARNING
sécurité locales concernant les faisceaux laser. Ne pas placer d'objet réfléchissant dans Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be
la zone du corotron de charge ou de la fenêtre du ROS. Ne pas intervenir dans la zone tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or
du corotron de charge ou de la fenêtre du ROS lorsque la machine est sous tension et the meter leads while testing the circuits.
que le laser est en fonctionnement quand le module cartouche toner est enlevé. DANGER: Risque de choc électrique. Dans la procédure suivante, des circuits de haute
The following symbol and statement appear on a label in the machine when the Toner tension CC doivent être testés. Faire très attention en vérifiant ces circuits. Ne pas
Cartridge Cover or the Toner Cartridge Unit are removed. The symbol by itself, or the toucher le multimètre ou ses fils pendant les tests des circuits.
symbol and the statement may also appear in the service documentation and in the IQ 39 Preclean Corotron HVPS RAP
training program. When this symbol appears, the service representative is warned that
conditions exist that could result in exposure to the laser beam. WARNING
DANGER: Ces symboles et instructions sont indiqués sur des étiquettes dans la
Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be
machine quand la cartouche toner ou le module toner est retiré. Dans la documentation tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or
technique et dans le manuel de formation ces informations sont indiquées. Quand ce
the meter leads while testing the circuits.
symbole s'affiche le représentant Xerox est prévenu des risques encourus concernant
DANGER: Risque de choc électrique. Dans la procédure suivante, des circuits de haute
une exposition au rayon laser.

x DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
tension CC doivent être testés. Faire très attention en vérifiant ces circuits. Ne pas DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
toucher le multimètre ou ses fils pendant les tests des circuits. 2. PAPER TRANSPORT
IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP
REP 2.1.1 Tray 1 Set Sensor
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be WARNING
tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or Turn the power off and disconnect the power plug.
the meter leads while testing the circuits. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
DANGER: Risque de choc électrique. Dans la procédure suivante, des circuits de haute REP 2.1.2 Tray 2/3/4 Size Sensor
tension CC doivent être testés. Faire très attention en vérifiant ces circuits. Ne pas
toucher le multimètre ou ses fils pendant les tests des circuits. WARNING
IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
WARNING
REP 2.4.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feeder
Failure to operate ALL the dC330 output components listed below will result in perma-
nent damage to the photoreceptor.
WARNING
DANGER: À défaut de faire fonctionner TOUS les éléments de sortie dC330 énumérés ci-
dessous, le photorécepteur sera endommagé définitivement.
4 Repairs and Adjustments
REP 2.5.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly
REPAIRS
1. DRIVE WARNING
REP 1.3.1 Belt (Developer Drive)
WARNING REP 2.6.1 Feed Lift Motor
WARNING
REP 1.4.1 Belt (2nd BTR, Auger) Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 2.6.2 Retard Roll
Turn the power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING
REP 1.5.1 Tray 5/Regi. /Tray 1 Take Away Drive Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 2.7.1 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive
WARNING
REP 1.6.1 Exit Drive
WARNING REP 2.7.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed T/A Clutch
WARNING
REP 1.6.2 Fuser Drive Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 2.7.3 T/A Motor

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 xi
WARNING WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
REP 2.8.1 Tray 1 Feed-out Sensor, T/A Sensor REP 2.15.2 Regi. Roll
WARNING WARNING
REP 2.8.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed-out Sensor REP 2.15.3 Regi. Motor
WARNING WARNING
REP 2.9.1 Tray 5 REP 2.16.1 Pre Regi. Sensor
WARNING WARNING
REP 2.11.1 Tray 5 Nudger Roll REP 2.16.2 Pre Regi. Roll
WARNING WARNING
REP 2.11.2 Tray 5 Feed Roll REP 2.17.1 Vacuum Transport
WARNING WARNING
REP 2.12.1 Tray 5 Lift Motor REP 2.17.2 Vacuum Transport Belt
WARNING WARNING
REP 2.12.2 Tray 5 Retard Roll REP 2.21.1 Duplex Path Sensor
WARNING WARNING
REP 2.14.1 Regi. Unit REP 2.21.2 Duplex Out Sensor
WARNING WARNING
REP 2.15.1 Regi. Sensor REP 2.21.3 Duplex Belt 1/2

xii DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
WARNING REP 3.3.1 Carriage Cables
WARNING
REP 2.23.1 Inverter 1 Turn power off disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 3.3.2 Carriage Motor
WARNING
REP 2.23.2 Inverter 2 Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 3.4.1 Exposure Lamp
WARNING
REP 2.24.1 Inverter Motor
WARNING REP 3.4.2 Lamp Wire Harness
WARNING
REP 2.24.2 Release Solenoid Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 3.5.1 IPS Chassis
WARNING
REP 2.26.1 Exit Roll Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING 4. ROS
REP 4.1.1 ROS
3. IIT WARNING
REP 3.1.1 Platen Glass Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING 5. XEROGRAPHICS
REP 5.1.1 Erase Lamp
REP 3.1.2 IIT Opening/Closing WARNING
WARNING
REP 5.3.1 Drum Unit
REP 3.2.1 CCD PWB WARNING
WARNING
REP 5.3.3 Cleaning Brush

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 xiii
WARNING REP 6.1.4 Bias Brush
WARNING
REP 5.3.4 Cleaning Blade Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 6.2.1 Toner Cartridge Unit
WARNING
REP 5.4.1 Charge Corotron Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 6.3.1 Toner Cartridge Housing (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)
WARNING
REP 5.4.2 PCC Wire
WARNING REP 6.3.2 Cartridge/Dispense Motor (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)
WARNING
REP 5.5.1 Waste Toner Auger Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 6.4.1 Dispense PWB
WARNING
REP 5.5.2 Auger Belt Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 6.6.1 Development Housing
WARNING
6. DEVELOPMENT
REP 6.1.1 Rotary PWB WARNING
Do not put the Developer or Developer Unit into a fire. If the Developer or Developer Unit
WARNING is placed into a fire, it may explode and cause injury.
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Ne pas brûler du développeur ou le module développeur. Si du développeur
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. ou un module développeur est brûlé, il y a des risques d'explosion et d'accidents cor-
REP 6.1.2 Rotary Home Position Sensor porels.
REP 6.6.2 Developer Replacement
WARNING
Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord. WARNING
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
REP 6.1.3 Rotary Latch Lever DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
WARNING
WARNING Do not put the Developer or Developer Unit into a fire. If the Developer or Developer Unit
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. is placed into a fire, it may explode and cause injury.
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. DANGER: Ne pas brûler du développeur ou le module développeur. Si du développeur

xiv DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
ou un module développeur est brûlé, il y a des risques d'explosion et d'accidents cor- WARNING
porels. Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
REP 6.7.1 Rotary Auger (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
REP 7.6.4 Contact Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. WARNING
REP 6.7.2 Trickle Auger
REP 7.9.1 2nd BTR
WARNING
7. IBT
REP 7.1.1 IBT REP 7.10.1 2nd BTR Roll
WARNING WARNING
8. FUSER
REP 7.1.2 IBT Cleaner
REP 8.1.1 Fuser Unit

WARNING
WARNING DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
Do not put the IBT Cleaner into a fire. If the IBT Cleaner is placed into a fire, it may REP 8.2.1 Donor Roll Assembly
explode and cause injury.
DANGER: Ne pas brûler le système de nettoyage IBT. Si le système de nettoyage IBT est WARNING
brûlé, il y a des risques d'explosion et d'accidents corporels. Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
REP 7.5.1 IBT Belt DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
REP 8.3.1 Heat Roll
WARNING
REP 7.6.1 Bias Roll
REP 8.3.2 Heat Roll Heater Rod
WARNING
REP 7.6.2 Drive Roll
REP 8.3.3 Pressure Roll
WARNING
REP 7.6.3 Back-up Roll

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 xv
REP 8.3.4 Pressure Roll Heater Rod Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 9.2.2 IOT Drive PWB
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. WARNING
REP 8.3.5 Heat Roll Stripper Finger Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 9.2.3 Half-tone PWB
REP 8.4.1 Web Motor/EXT-HR Retract Motor Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 9.3.1 Power Chassis
REP 8.7.1 Oil Pump Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 9.3.2 IOT LVPS
REP 8.7.2 Oil Wick Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 9.3.3 Printer B3H LVPS [AP Only]
REP 8.8.1 External H/R Heater Rod Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING REP 9.5.1 Control Panel
REP 8.8.2 External Heat Roll Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING 10. AIR SYSTEM
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 10.2.1 Fuser Fan
REP 8.10.1 Pressure Roll Stripper Finger
WARNING
WARNING Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 10.2.2 Blower Suction
9. ELECTRICAL
WARNING
REP 9.2.1 Opening/Closing the IOT Control PWB Chassis Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING 11. COVER

xvi DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 11.1.1 Platen Cushion REP 12.4.3 Feed Roll
WARNING WARNING
12. DADF REP 12.5.1 Document Feed Lower Chute
REP 12.1.1 DADF WARNING

WARNING DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. REP 12.5.2 Retard Roll
WARNING WARNING
The DADF is heavy (37.5lbs). Take care to avoid injury when handling the DADF. Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
DANGER: Le Chargeur de Documents est lourd (17kg). Le manipuler avec précaution DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
afin d'éviter tout risque d'accident. REP 12.5.3 Set Gate Solenoid
REP 12.2.2 Registration Gate Solenoid
WARNING
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.5.4 Registration Sensor
REP 12.3.1 Left/Right Counter Balance
WARNING
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.5.5 Size Sensors 1/2 (Rear/Front)
WARNING
The DADF is heavy (37.5lbs). Take care to avoid injury when handling the DADF. WARNING
DANGER: Le Chargeur de Documents est lourd (17kg). Le manipuler avec précaution Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
afin d'éviter tout risque d'accident. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
REP 12.3.2 DADF Control PWB REP 12.6.1 DADF Belt Motor
WARNING WARNING
REP 12.4.1 Feed Motor REP 12.7.1 Duplex Sensor
WARNING WARNING
REP 12.4.2 Nudger Roll REP 12.8.1 Registration Pinch Roll
WARNING WARNING

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 xvii
REP 12.9.1 Exit Motor Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING 14. OCT
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 14.1.1 Offset Motor
REP 12.10.1 Platen Belt
WARNING
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. ADJUSTMENTS
13. MAIL BOX SORTER 3. IIT
REP 13.3.1 Decurler ADJ. 3.4.1 FULL RATE/HALF RATE CARRIAGE POSITION
WARNING WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. TURN POWER OFF AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG.
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. DANGER: METTRE LA MACHINE SUR ARRÊT ET DÉBRANCHER LE CORDON D'ALI-
REP 13.5.1 Vertical LED/Sensor MENTATION.
6. DEVELOPMENT
WARNING
ADJ 6.6.1 ROTARY DEVELOPMENT HOUSING POSITION
REP 13.5.2 Bin Tray 1
TURN POWER OFF AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG.
DANGER: METTRE LA MACHINE SUR ARRÊT ET DÉBRANCHER LE CORDON D'ALI-
WARNING MENTATION.
12. DADF
REP 13.6.1 Bin Trays 2 - 10 ADJ 12.3.1 LEFT/RIGHT COUNTER BALANCE
WARNING WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. TURN POWER OFF AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG.
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. DANGER: METTRE LA MACHINE SUR ARRÊT ET DÉBRANCHER LE CORDON D'ALI-
REP 13.13.1 Decurler Rolls 1/2 MENTATION.
ADJ 12.3.2 DADF PARALLELISM
WARNING
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. TURN POWER OFF AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG.
REP 13.13.2 Gear and Cam DANGER: METTRE LA MACHINE SUR ARRÊT ET DÉBRANCHER LE CORDON D'ALI-
MENTATION.
WARNING ADJ 12.3.3 DADF HEIGHT
WARNING
REP 13.14.1 Decurler Stepping Motor TURN POWER OFF AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG.
DANGER: METTRE LA MACHINE SUR ARRÊT ET DÉBRANCHER LE CORDON D'ALI-
WARNING MENTATION.

xviii DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
8 Accessories/Options WARNING
HCF To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power
REP 2.7.5 HCF Assembly Cord.
DANGER: Afin d'éviter tout risque d'électrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrêt et
WARNING débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power REP 2.8.35 HCF Front/Rear Spring
Cord.
DANGER: Afin d'éviter tout risque d'électrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrêt et WARNING
débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power
REP 2.7.6 HCF Elevator Motor Cord.
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power REP 2.8.36 HCF Baffle Assembly
Cord.
REP 2.7.7 HCF Elevator Long/Short Cables Cord.
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power REP 2.8.37 HCF Feed Belt
Cord.
REP 2.7.8 HCF Brake Cord.
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power REP 2.8.38 HCF Feed/Nudger/Retard Rolls
Cord.
REP 2.7.9 HCF Control PWB Cord.
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power REP 2.8.39 HCF One-Way Feed/Gear Clutch
Cord.
REP 2.8.26 HCF Feed Motor Cord.
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power REP 2.8.40 HCF Friction Clutch
Cord.
REP 2.8.27 HCF Feeder Assembly Cord.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 xix
débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. WARNING
REP 2.8.41 HCF Feed Clutch To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
WARNING DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod-
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
Cord. REP 15.1.5 Entrance Lower Chute and Pinch Roll
REP 2.8.42 HCF TAR Sensor To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
Cord. REP 15.1.6 Exit Lower Baffle and Pinch Roll
REP 2.8.43 HCF Tray Empty/Stack Height Sensors To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
Cord. REP 15.1.7 Decurler PWB
FINISHER To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
REP 15.1.1 Decurler the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod-
WARNING ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.1.8 Cam Drive Shaft
DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod- WARNING
ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
REP 15.1.2 Decurler Rolls 1 and 2 the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher Cable Connector. Switch off REP 15.1.9 Torque Limiter Gear and Stopper
REP 15.1.3 Reflector and Cam the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.1.10 Decurler Drive Roll 2
REP 15.1.4 Decurler Stepper Motor the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.

xx DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 15.1.11 Decurler Drive Roll 1 the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.1.18 SCT Static Eliminator
REP 15.1.12 Decurler Entrance Roll the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.1.19 SCT Exit Sensor
REP 15.1.13 Decurler Exit Roll the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.1.20 SCT Pinch Roll
REP 15.1.14 Entrance Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.1.21 Finisher Transport Roll 1
REP 15.1.15 Finisher Transport Motor the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.1.22 Finisher Transport Roll 2
REP 15.1.16 Finisher Drive Belt the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.1 Compiler Tray Solenoid
REP 15.1.17 Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 xxi
REP 15.2.2 Stacker Tray Assembly the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.10 Stacker Tray
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
REP 15.2.4 Stacker Full Sensors the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.11 Tamper Motor
REP 15.2.5 Stacker Upper and Lower Limit Sensors the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.12 Tamper Home Sensor
REP 15.2.6 Stacker Tray Paper Sensor the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.13 Compiler Paper Sensor
REP 15.2.7 Stacker Motor the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.14 End Wall Open Sensor
REP 15.2.8 Lower Exit Chute Assembly the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.15 Tamper Motor Drive Belt
REP 15.2.9 Stacker Tray Drive Belts the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.16 End Wall Motor

xxii DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.23 Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly
REP 15.2.17 Eject Clamp Sensor the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.24 Upper Exit Chute Assembly
REP 15.2.18 Stacker Offset Home Sensor the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.25 Exit Roll
REP 15.2.19 Eject Bracket Assembly the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.26 Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly
REP 15.2.20 Eject Paddle Motor and Drive Belt the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.27 Paddle Drive Belt
REP 15.2.21 Eject Shaft Assembly the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.28 Stacker Height Sensor
REP 15.2.22 Compiler Cover Assembly the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.2.29 Unload While Run Switch

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 xxiii
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.3.3 Stapler Cover Assembly
REP 15.2.30 Compiler Entrance Sensor the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.3.4 Decurler Door Assembly
REP 15.2.31 Eject Paddle Home Sensor the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.3.5 Mailbox Door Assembly
REP 15.2.32 Eject Motor the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.3.6 Left Lower Cover
REP 15.2.33 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.3.7 Rear Upper Cover
REP 15.3.1 Finisher the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.3.8 IOT Connector Cover
REP 15.3.2 Stapler Door Assembly the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off REP 15.3.9 Finisher PWB Cover

xxiv DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. WARNING
DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod- To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
REP 15.3.10 Left Upper Cover DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod-
ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
WARNING REP 15.3.17 Stapler Position Sensors
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
REP 15.3.11 Top Cover DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod-
WARNING REP 15.3.18 Stapler Rail Belt
REP 15.3.12 Decurler Top Cover DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod-
WARNING REP 15.3.19 Stapler Position Motor
REP 15.3.13 Decurler Rear Cover DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod-
WARNING REP 15.3.20 Mailbox Drive Motor
REP 15.3.14 Decurler Inner Cover DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod-
WARNING REP 15.3.21 Mailbox Drive Belt
REP 15.3.15 Rear Lower Cover DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod-
WARNING REP 15.3.23 Docking Interlock Switch
REP 15.3.16 Stapler Assembly DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod-

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 xxv
REP 15.3.25 Decurler Door Interlock Switch the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off WARNING
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod- the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. DANGER: Afin d'éviter des accidents ou une électrocution, débrancher la prise du mod-
REP 15.3.28 Finisher PWB ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
9 Installation
WARNING High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Installation
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Installation
The underside of the HCF has very sharp edges! Use caution when adjusting.
REP 15.3.29 Finisher PWB EPROM
DANGER: La partie inférieure du magasin grande capacité (HCF) a des bords très
coupants! Faire très attention lors de réglages dans cette zone.
WARNING
Foreign Interface Install Instructions
WARNING
Power-OFF the machine and disconnect the Power Plug.
REP 15.3.30 Vertical LED and Sensor
WARNING 10 Principles of Operation
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off 12. Finisher
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. Finisher Power Components
ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrêt et débrancher le cordon d'alimentation. WARNING
REP 15.3.31 Bin Tray 1 In the undocked condition, +24VDC to the finisher is NOT interrupted.
DANGER: Avec les modules séparés, le +24VCC au module de finition N'EST PAS
WARNING coupé.
REP 15.3.32 Bin Trays 2 - 10
WARNING
ADJ 15.3.1 Staple Position Adjustment
WARNING

xxvi DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
1 Service Call Procedures
Service Strategy ............................................................................................................. 1-3
Initial Actions ................................................................................................................... 1-3
Call Flow ......................................................................................................................... 1-4
Detailed Maintenance Activities (HFSI)........................................................................... 1-6
Cleaning Procedures....................................................................................................... 1-8
Final Actions.................................................................................................................... 1-8
Reissue 1/05 Service Call Procedures

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1-1
Service Call Procedures 1/05 Reissue
1-2 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Service Strategy Initial Actions
The service strategy of the DocuColor 12 copier/printer is to perform any High Frequency Ser- Purpose
vice Item (HFSI) actions before attempting to repair any problems. Some problems will be cor- The purpose of the Initial Action section of the Service Call Procedures is to determine the rea-
rected by this strategy without the need to diagnose them. The Repair Analysis Procedures
son for the service call and to identify and organize the actions which must be performed.
(RAPs) will be used for any remaining problems.
Problems that occur in the BASIC COPIER mode will be repaired before problems that occur
Procedure
when using the accessories. 1. Gather the information about the service call and the condition of the copier/printer.
a. Question the operator(s). Ask about the location of most recent paper jams. Ask
Image Quality problems will be repaired after all other problems are repaired. about the image quality and the copier/printer performance in general, including any
unusual sounds or other indications.
Service Call Procedures b. Check that the power cords are in good condition, correctly plugged in the power
The Service Call Procedures are a guide for performing any service on the DocuColor 12 source, and free from any defects that would be a safety hazard. Ensure that the
copier/printer. The procedures are designed to be used with the DocuColor 12 Service Manual. connector for the IDFE Wiring Harness is properly connected. Repair or replace the
Perform each step in order. power cords as required. Check that the circuit breakers are not tripped.
c. Inspect any rejected copies. Inquire as to, or otherwise determine, the paper quality
The Service Call Procedures contain the following sections: and weight. The specified paper for optimum image quality with the DocuColor 12
copier/printer is 24# Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or Colotech + 90 gsm
Initial Actions (ESG). Look for any damage to the copies, oil marks, image quality defects, or other
The Initial Actions gather information about the condition of the copier/printer and the problem indications of a problem.
that caused the service call. d. Record the billing meter readings.
e. Enter the Diagnostics Mode. Go to the Dark Screen RAP IN SECTION 2 if the Diag-
Call Flow nostic Mode can not be entered. Return here after repairing the Diagnostics entry
Call Flow summarizes the sequence of the Service Call Procedures. problem.
Detailed Maintenance Activities NOTE: If a Fault Code is displayed while performing a Diagnostics Procedure, go to
that Fault Code RAP and repair the fault. Return to Diagnostics and continue with
This section provides the information needed to perform the DC135 High Frequency Service
the DC Procedure that you were performing.
Item (HFSI) actions.
f. Go to DC135 HFSI Table and determine what HSFI action is required based on the
Cleaning Procedures customer output volume. Refer to the Detailed Maintenance Activities section for the
This section provides the information needed to clean some components of the copier/printer. detailed HSFI information. Record any items that require action.
g. Select the History File. Display and record the information in the Fail History, Jam
Final Actions History, Fail Counter, and Jam Counter. Classify this information into categories:
The Final Actions test the copier/printer and return it to the customer. Administrative activities Information that is related to the problem that caused the service call.
are also performed in the Final Action. Information that is related to secondary problems.
Information that does not require action, such as a single occurrence of a prob-
lem.
h. Check the Service Log for any recent activities that are related to the problem that
caused the service call or any secondary problem.
2. Perform any required HSFI activities. Refer to the Detailed Maintenance Activities section.
3. Exit diagnostics. Try to duplicate the problem by running the same type jobs, as the cus-
tomer was running.
4. Check the image quality in the BASIC COPIER MODE. Select the tray that is loaded with
11 X 17 or A3 paper. If unable to complete this step, go to step 5.
a. Set the copier/printer controls:
Output Color to Auto
Original Type to Photo and Text Halftone
Reduce/Enlarge Auto

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1-3 Service Strategy , Initial Actions
Lighter/Darker to Auto Contrast Call Flow
Sharpness to Normal
Preset Color Balance Normal This procedure should be performed at every service call.
Color Shift to Normal

Procedure
Color Saturation to Normal
The machine is a DC12 Printer.
Copy Position to No Shift
Y N
Variable Color Balance Normal Place the Color Test Pattern on the Document Glass. Make a copy from each paper tray.
b. Run four copies of the Color Test Pattern. The Copier/Printer can copy from all trays.
c. Check the image quality. If the customer has identified any Image Quality Defects or Y N
problems, Go to IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP.
NOTE: Not all fault codes can be displayed on the UI. Connect the PWS and launch
5. If there is a problem in the BASIC COPIER MODE, go to the Call Flow. the DC12 diagnostic tool to ensure that any fault code is displayed. Some codes will
6. For DC12 with a Digital Front End (DFE): if there is a problem associated with the DFE or appear only the Last 40 Faults list.
Print mode, refer to the service documentation for the installed DFE.
A fault code is displayed.
For DCCS50: if there is a problem associated with the DFE or Print mode, go to the
Y N
OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP.
Go to the GP 4 Intermittent Problem RAP.
7. If there are no problems in the BASIC COPIER MODE, go to Final Actions.
NOTE: Most RAPs are in Section 2, but the RAPs for Accessories are located in
Section 8. Sorter fault code appear in both sections; the Chain 11 RAPs in Section
8 are for the Sorter bins of the optional Finisher - be sure to select the correct
RAP when troubleshooting Chain 11 faults.
Go to the RAP for the displayed fault code.
Place two originals into the DADF and program a duplex job. The Copier/Printer can
copy from the DADF
Y N
Y N
The problem is with jam recovery.
Y N
Check the DADF Document Sensors for debris or damage. Check the
document mechanical drives and Feed Rolls for contamination, wear,
damage, or binding.
.Go to the OF5-1 DADF Jam Recovery RAP.
Check for installed Accessories (Foreign Interface, Edit Pad, EPC, Finisher, Convenience
Stapler, or HCF). Check for correct operation. The Accessories function correctly.
Y N
Y N
• For Foreign Interface problems go to the 3-333 Foreign Interface RAP.
• For Stapler problems go to the ST-1 Convenience Stapler RAP.
• For EPC failures, go to the OF3-1, Fault Entry RAP.
• For Edit Pad problems, go to the 02-282 Edit Pad PWB Communication
Fail RAP.
A B C
Initial Actions, Call Flow 1-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
Go to the RAP in Section 8 for the displayed fault code.
The Image Quality of the copies produced is acceptable.

Y N
Go to the IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP.
The machine is a DCCS50 or a DC12 C/P with DFE.

Y N
Go to Final Actions
Send a simple print job. The Copier/Printer produces acceptable prints.

Y N
For DC12 with a Digital Front End (DFE): refer to the service documentation for the
installed DFE.
For DCCS50: go to the OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP.
Go to Final Actions
The Printer can print from all trays.

Y N
Connect the PWS. Print test pattern 99. The test pattern can be printed
Y N
NOTE: Not all fault codes can be displayed on the UI. Connect the PWS and launch
the DC12 diagnostic tool to ensure that any fault code is displayed. Some codes will
appear only the Last 40 Faults list.

Y N
Go to the GP 4 Intermittent Problem RAP.
NOTE: Most RAPs are in Section 2, but the RAPs for Accessories are located in
Section 8. Sorter fault code appear in both sections; the RAPs in Section 8 are for
the Sorter bins of the optional finisher - be sure to select the correct RAP when trou-
bleshooting Chain 11 faults.
Refer to the service documentation for the installed DFE. If this does not resolve the prob-
lem, check the DDI Cables. and VSEL PWB for loose or damaged connectors.
Check for installed Accessories (Finisher, Convenience Stapler, or HCF). Program jobs to
check for correct operation. The Accessories function correctly.
Y N
Go to the RAP in Section 8 for any displayed fault code.
For Convenience Stapler problems go to the ST-1 Convenience Stapler RAP.
The Image Quality of the prints produced is acceptable.

Y N
Go to the IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP.
Go to Final Actions

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1-5 Call Flow
Detailed Maintenance Activities (HFSI) 4. Perform the Service Action in Table 1 for High Frequency Service Item (HFSI) counters
that are over threshold or approaching the threshold. Using the customer's output volume
Procedure numbers (high, medium, or low volume), evaluate which HFSI actions should be accom-
1. Clean the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5) on every call. plished now to avoid an additional service call in the near future.
2. Check Developer Housings for loose bearings or worn shaft at every service call 5. Refer to Cleaning Procedures for detailed cleaning instructions.
3. Enter Diagnostics and select dC 135.
Table 1 HFSIs
Chain-
Component Increment Criteria Threshold Service Action Required
Link
006-801 Counter only Feed Count -1 No service required - counter only
006-802 Counter only Scan Count -1 No service required - counter only
007-800 HCF Feed Counter Total feeds from HCF 100K Replace the HCF Feeder Nudger Assembly (PL 15.14) and Retard Assembly (PL 15.15). Reset
the counter.
008-801 Tray 1 Feed Roll Total feeds from Tray 1 300K Replace the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (PL 2.5) and Retard Assembly (PL 2.6). Reset the
counter.
counter.
counter.
counter.
counter.
008-825 Duplex Aligner Roll Total feeds from Duplex 9999K Run-to-failure
009-805 IBT Belt: CV, PV Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 120K Replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Reset this counter and counter 009-806.
009-806 IBT Belt: Cycle Total IBT Belt revolutions 660K Replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Reset this counter and counter 009-805.
009-807 1st BTR Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 9999K Run-to-failure
009-808 Back Up Roll Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 9999K Run-to-failure
009-809 2nd BTR Unit Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 400K Replace the 2nd BTR (PL 7.9). Reset the counter.
NOTE: Perform GP 20 2nd BTR Service Procedure at 100K intervals

009-812 CC Assy Discharge time (0.1 hr./count) 9999K This location does not automatically reset when CRU is replaced -DISREGARD
009-819 Transfer Trim Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 120K Clean inside of Transfer Module and reset the counter.
009-823 Bracket Assembly - Oil 9999K No longer used - DISREGARD
009-835 Belt Cleaner Blade Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 9999K Run-to-failure
009-838 Drive Roll Cleaner Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 9999K Run-to-failure
009-841 Ozone Filters Each color pass (4C = 4, B/W = 1) 320K Replace both Ozone Filters (PL 10.2) and reset the counter.
009-843 Suction Filter Each color pass (4C = 4, B/W = 1) 320K Replace the Suction Filter (PL 10.2) and reset the counter.
009-846 CC Dust Filter Each color pass (4C = 4, B/W = 1) 9999K This location does not automatically reset when CRU is replaced -DISREGARD
009-850 Developer Housing - K Developer Motor ON time (0.1 hr./count) 1000 Replace Developer Housing (PL 6.6).
009-851 Developer Housing - Y Developer Motor ON time (0.1 hr./count) 1000 Replace Developer Housing (PL 6.6).
009-852 Developer Housing - M Developer Motor ON time (0.1 hr./count) 1000 Replace Developer Housing (PL 6.6).
009-853 Developer Housing - C Developer Motor ON time (0.1 hr./count) 1000 Replace Developer Housing (PL 6.6).
009-880 Trickle Bottle Dispense Motor ON time (0.01 hr./count) 200 This location does not automatically reset when CRU is replaced -DISREGARD

Detailed Maintenance Activities 1-6 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 HFSIs
Chain-
Component Increment Criteria Threshold Service Action Required
Link
010-800 Heat Roll Total sheets through Fuser 80K Replace the Heat Roll (PL 8.3) and reset the counter.
010-802 Pressure Roll Total sheets through Fuser 80K Replace the Pressure Roll (PL 8.3) and reset the counter.
010-803 External Heat Roll Total sheets through Fuser 80K Replace the External Heat Roll (PL 8.8) and reset the counter.
010-811 Oil System Total sheets through Fuser 80K Replace the Oil System Kit (PL 8.2). Reset this counter and counter 010-814.
010-814 Fuser Wick Total sheets through Fuser 80K Replace the Fuser Wick (PL 8.7) and reset the counter.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1-7 Detailed Maintenance Activities
Cleaning Procedures Final Actions
Purpose Purpose
These cleaning procedures are to be performed at every call. The intent of this procedure is to be used as a guide to follow at the end of every service call.
Procedure Procedure
CAUTION 1. Reset the History File.
Do not use any solvents unless directed to do so by the Service Manual. 2. Ensure that the exterior of the copier/printer, IDFE and the adjacent area are clean. Use a
General cleaning dry cloth or a cloth moistened with water to clean the copier/printer. Do not use solvents.
Use a dry lint free cloth or a lint free cloth moistened with water for all cleaning unless directed 3. Check the supply of consumables. Ensure that an adequate supply of consumables is
otherwise by the Service Manual. Wipe with a dry lint free cloth if a moistened cloth is used. available according to local operating procedures.
4. Conduct any operator training that is needed. Ensure that the operator understands that
Feed Components (Rollers and Pads). the Tools Mode should be used to adjust the default colors. Ensure that the operator can
– Follow the General cleaning procedure above perform color calibration and print a configuration report. If necessary, obtain permission
for access to the customer’s workstation.
ESV Sensor
5. Complete the Service Log.
CAUTION
6. Perform the following steps to make a copy of the Demonstration Original for the Cus-
Do not use a vacuum on the ESV Sensor.
tomer:
Carefully brush or wipe the ESV Sensor.
a. Load Paper Tray 2 with 8 1/2 x 11 inch (A4) or 11 x 17 inch 24# Xerox COLOR
Toner Dispense Units Xpressions (NASG) A4, A3 Colotech + 90 gsm (ESG).
– Vacuum the Toner Dispense Units. b. Place the Color Test Pattern on the platen, with the short edge of the test pattern
registered to the left edge of the platen. Select Tray 2, make the following copier/
ADC and Jam Sensors
printer settings, and make a single copy.
– Clean the sensors with a dry cotton swab.
Output Color - Auto
Optics Cleaning
Original Type - Photo and Text Halftone
1. Switch power off and allow the Exposure Lamp to cool off.
Reduce/Enlarge - Auto
2. Using the optical Cleaning Cloth, clean the front and rear of the Document Glass, Docu-
Lighter/Darker - Auto Contrast
ment Cover, White Reference Strip, Reflector, and Mirror.
Sharpness - Normal
3. Clean the Exposure Lamp with a clean cloth and film remover.
Preset Color Balance - Normal
IBT Cleaning
Color Shift - Normal
– Check the IBT Belt surface and wipe with a dry lint free cloth. If the surface is excessively
dirty, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Color Saturation - Normal
Copy Position - No Shift
Fuser Components (best cleaned when HOT).
Variable Color Balance - Normal
1. Heat Roll and Pressure Roll;
c. Print a Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports).
– wipe with a lint free cloth moistened with fuser oil.
2. External Heat Roll, Cleaning Roll, and Pickup Roll; d. Print a Test Page (for the printer only) (GP 13 Printing a Complex Test Page).
– use a lint free cloth and oil. For heavy contamination, use the edge of a rolled up e. Present the copies to the customer.
tube of paper to scrape off the chunks of toner. 7. Issue copy credits as needed.
3. Donor Roll and Metering Blade 8. Discuss the service call with the customer to ensure that the customer understands what
has been done and is satisfied with the results of the service call.
– wipe with a lint free cloth moistened with fuser oil.

Cleaning Procedures, Final Actions 1-8 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
2 Status Indicator RAPs
STANDBY POWER 3-535 Whole Image NG RAP .......................................................................................... 2-28
1-300 Front Door Interlock Open RAP ............................................................................ 2-5 3-536 Platen No Original ................................................................................................. 2-29
1-304 L/H Cover Interlock Open RAP ............................................................................. 2-5 3-537 Repeat NG - Number RAP.................................................................................... 2-29
+3.5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP ............................................................................ 2-6 3-538 Repeat NG-MAG RAP .......................................................................................... 2-30
+5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP .................................................................................... 2-6 3-539 MPE MAG NG RAP .............................................................................................. 2-30
+5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS) RAP.......................................................................................... 2-7 3-541 APS NG RAP ........................................................................................................ 2-31
+12 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP ................................................................................. 2-7 3-542 AMS NG RAP........................................................................................................ 2-31
-12 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP ................................................................................... 2-8 3-543 Rotation NG RAP .................................................................................................. 2-32
+13.3 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP .......................................................................... 2-8 3-550 Original Patch Not Exist RAP................................................................................ 2-32
+24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP .................................................................................. 2-9 3-560 Copy Limit Exceed RAP........................................................................................ 2-33
+24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP ............................................................................. 2-10 3-580 IOT System Timing Fail RAP ................................................................................ 2-33
AC Power RAP................................................................................................................ 2-10 3-581 Dead Cycle Fail RAP ............................................................................................ 2-34
Interlock Relay Failure RAP ............................................................................................ 2-11 3-600 Billing Adjust NVM Failure RAP ............................................................................ 2-34
Power Save and LED RAP ............................................................................................. 2-12 3-601 Billing Adjust IOSS Failure RAP............................................................................ 2-35
3-602 Billing Adjust Half-Tone Failure RAP .................................................................... 2-35
USER INTERFACE
2-310 UI Panel Fail RAP ................................................................................................. 2-13 DRIVES
2-340 UI RAM Fail RAP .................................................................................................. 2-13 OF4-001 Main Motor RAP............................................................................................... 2-37
Dark Screen RAP ............................................................................................................ 2-14 OF4-002 Drum Motor RAP.............................................................................................. 2-38
Two Sided Copy Feature Not Available RAP .................................................................. 2-14
DADF
MACHINE RUN CONTROL 5-110 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam RAP .............................................. 2-39
3-311 IOT-SYS Logic Fail RAP ....................................................................................... 2-15 5-111 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam RAP ............................................ 2-40
3-315 IOT/IPS Communications Fail RAP ...................................................................... 2-15 5-112 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam (during Original Reverse) RAP ..... 2-41
3-317 UI/IOT Communications Fail RAP ........................................................................ 2-16 5-113 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam (during Original Reverse) RAP ... 2-42
3-318 IOT/IPS Communications Fail RAP ...................................................................... 2-16 5-115 DADF Exit Sensor ON Dynamic Jam RAP ........................................................... 2-42
3-319 MailBox Communication Failure RAP ................................................................... 2-17 5-116 DADF Exit Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam RAP.......................................................... 2-43
3-327 2nd DDI IOSS I/F Failure RAP.............................................................................. 2-17 5-189 No Object Sensor Static Jam RAP........................................................................ 2-44
3-328 DDI IOSS Communication Failure RAP ................................................................ 2-18 5-195 No Mix - Size Mismatch Jam RAP ........................................................................ 2-45
3-329 DDI IISS Communication Failure RAP.................................................................. 2-18 5-196 DADF Document Sensor Static Jam RAP ............................................................ 2-45
3-330 2nd DDI IISS Communication Failure RAP........................................................... 2-19 5-197 DADF Registration Sensor Static Jam RAP.......................................................... 2-46
3-333 Foreign Interface RAP .......................................................................................... 2-19 5-198 DADF Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP....................................................................... 2-46
3-340 IOT RAM Fail RAP ................................................................................................ 2-20 5-199 DADF Duplex Sensor Static Jam RAP.................................................................. 2-47
3-356 IOT NVM Failure RAP........................................................................................... 2-20 5-274 Original Size Sensor Fail RAP .............................................................................. 2-47
3-380 TR0 Fail RAP ........................................................................................................ 2-21 5-275 DADF RAM Check Fail RAP ................................................................................. 2-48
3-393 Half-Tone EEP-ROM Limit Failure RAP ............................................................... 2-22 5-301 Top Cover Open RAP ........................................................................................... 2-49
3-394 IOT EEP-ROM Limit Failure RAP ......................................................................... 2-22 5-500 DADF No Originals RAP ....................................................................................... 2-50
3-395 Half-Tone EEP-ROM R/W Failure RAP ................................................................ 2-23 5-501 DADF Document Size Irregular RAP .................................................................... 2-50
3-396 IOT EEPROM R/W Failure RAP ........................................................................... 2-23 5-503 Miss Doc Reset RAP............................................................................................. 2-51
3-397 X ID DATA NG Failure RAP.................................................................................. 2-24 5-999 ADF Document Misfeed RAP................................................................................ 2-52
3-510 APS NG-Image Loss RAP .................................................................................... 2-24 OF5-1 DADF Jam Recovery RAP ................................................................................... 2-52
3-511 APS NG-Not in Position RAP................................................................................ 2-25
3-512 APS NG-No Paper RAP........................................................................................ 2-25
OPTICS
6-275 Angle Sensor Fail RAP ......................................................................................... 2-53
3-518 APS Mix NG Image Loss RAP.............................................................................. 2-26
6-277 IISS - DADF Communications Fault RAP ............................................................. 2-54
3-527 Original Change During Job RAP ......................................................................... 2-26
6-300 Platen Cover Open RAP ....................................................................................... 2-54
3-528 Platen Document Size Unknown RAP .................................................................. 2-27
6-312 Memory Hotline Fail RAP...................................................................................... 2-55
3-529 AMS Mix NG RAP................................................................................................. 2-27
6-340 Pre IPS RAM Test Error RAP ............................................................................... 2-55
3-530 AMS NG RAP ....................................................................................................... 2-28
Reissue 1/05 Status Indicator RAPs

6-345 Pre IPS EEPROM Failure RAP............................................................................. 2-56 8-172 Tray 2 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP....................................................... 2-99
6-355 IPS Fan Fail RAP .................................................................................................. 2-56 8-173 Tray 3 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP....................................................... 2-100
6-360 Carriage Position Failure RAP .............................................................................. 2-57 8-174 Tray 4 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP....................................................... 2-100
6-361 Scan Initialize Regi Sensor Failure RAP............................................................... 2-58 8-175 Tray 5 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................. 2-101
6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP...................................................................................... 2-59 8-176 Tray 1 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................. 2-101
6-389 Carriage Overrun Fail (Scan End) RAP ................................................................ 2-59 8-177 Tray 2 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................. 2-102
6-390 Carriage Overrun Fail (Home End) RAP............................................................... 2-60 8-178 Tray 3 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................. 2-102
6 391 Scan Initialize Failure RAP.................................................................................... 2-60 8-179 Tray 4 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................. 2-103
6-500 Lamp Not Ready RAP........................................................................................... 2-61 8-305 Tray 5 Interlock Open RAP ................................................................................... 2-103
6-615 b* Failure RAP ...................................................................................................... 2-61 8-306 Drawer Interlock Open RAP.................................................................................. 2-104
6-620 Reflection Rate Failure RAP ................................................................................. 2-62 Main Motor 2 RAP ........................................................................................................... 2-104
Takeaway Motor RAP ..................................................................................................... 2-105
PAPER SUPPLY Registration Motor RAP................................................................................................... 2-105
7-281 Tray 1 Lift Motor Failure RAP ............................................................................... 2-63
7-282 Tray 2 Lift Motor Failure RAP ............................................................................... 2-64 XEROGRAPHICS
7-283 Tray 3 Lift Motor Failure RAP ............................................................................... 2-66 9-271 Yellow Toner Empty RAP...................................................................................... 2-107
7-284 Tray 4 Lift Motor Failure RAP ............................................................................... 2-67 9-272 Magenta Toner Empty RAP .................................................................................. 2-107
7-286 Tray 5 Broken (UP) RAP....................................................................................... 2-69 9-273 Cyan Toner Empty RAP........................................................................................ 2-108
7-287 Tray 5 Broken (Down) RAP .................................................................................. 2-71 9-274 Black Toner Empty RAP ....................................................................................... 2-108
7-340 All Tray Broken RAP ............................................................................................. 2-72 9-311 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Type Mismatch RAP .................................................... 2-109
7-500 Tray out of position during Job RAP ..................................................................... 2-73 9-342/9-432 2nd BTR Contact Fail RAP ......................................................................... 2-109
7-501 Tray No Paper RAP .............................................................................................. 2-75 9-343/9-433 2nd BTR Retract Fail RAP .......................................................................... 2-110
7-502 Tray 5 Paper Size Mismatch (Width) RAP ............................................................ 2-76 9-344/9-434 IBT Cleaner Contact Fail RAP .................................................................... 2-111
7-503 Tray 5 Paper Size Mismatch (Length) RAP .......................................................... 2-77 9-345/9-435 IBT Cleaner Retract Fail RAP ..................................................................... 2-112
7-504 Tray Size Change during Job RAP ....................................................................... 2-78 9-354 Yellow Toner Dispenser Broken RAP ................................................................... 2-112
7-600 Tray 5 Adjustment Side Guide out of specified Range RAP ................................. 2-80 9-355 Magenta Toner Dispenser Broken RAP................................................................ 2-114
9-356 Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP ..................................................................... 2-115
PAPER FEED 9-357 Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP ..................................................................... 2-117
8-104 Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP .................................................................... 2-81 9-358 Cleaning Auger Full RAP ...................................................................................... 2-118
8-105 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................. 2-82 9-363 Rotary Home Position Fail RAP ............................................................................ 2-119
8-107 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On RAP ......................................................................... 2-83 9-365/9-450 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Yellow RAP ................................................ 2-120
8-109 Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP .................................................................... 2-83 9-366/9-451 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Magenta RAP............................................. 2-120
8-110 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................. 2-84 9-367/9-452 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Cyan RAP .................................................. 2-121
8-112 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor On RAP ......................................................................... 2-85 9-368/9-453 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Black RAP .................................................. 2-121
8-114 Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP .................................................................... 2-86 9-369 Rotary Lock Fail RAP............................................................................................ 2-122
8-115 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................. 2-87 9-370 Rotary Release Fail RAP ...................................................................................... 2-123
8-117 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor On RAP ......................................................................... 2-88 9-372 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Not In Position RAP ..................................................... 2-124
8-119 Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP .................................................................... 2-88 9-374 Waste Bottle Not In Position RAP ......................................................................... 2-124
8-120 Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................. 2-89 9-376 Waste Bottle Full RAP........................................................................................... 2-125
8-122 Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor On RAP ......................................................................... 2-90 9-378 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Change RAP................................................................ 2-125
8-135 Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................. 2-91 9-379 Trickle Bottle Full RAP .......................................................................................... 2-126
8-139 Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor On RAP ......................................................................... 2-92 9-400 Black Toner Near Empty RAP............................................................................... 2-126
8-147 Tray 1 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................ 2-92 9-402 Yellow Toner Near Empty RAP............................................................................. 2-127
8-148 Tray 2 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................ 2-93 9-403 Magenta Toner Near Empty RAP ......................................................................... 2-127
8-149 Tray 3 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................ 2-94 9-404 Cyan Toner Near Empty RAP ............................................................................... 2-128
8-150 Tray 4 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................ 2-95 9-410 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Change Soon RAP ...................................................... 2-128
8-152 Takeaway Sensor On RAP ................................................................................... 2-96 9-420 Waste Bottle Near Full RAP.................................................................................. 2-129
8-154 Pre Registration Sensor On RAP.......................................................................... 2-97 9-423 Trickle Bottle Near Full RAP ................................................................................. 2-129
8-157 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ........................................................................ 2-97 9-424 Cleaning Auger Near Full RAP ............................................................................. 2-130
8-158 Pre IBT Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................................... 2-98 9-601 Humidity Out Of Range RAP................................................................................. 2-130
8-163 Pre IBT Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................................... 2-98 9-610 VPatch Out Of Range RAP ................................................................................... 2-131
8-171 Tray 1 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP....................................................... 2-99 9-612 TRC RADC Out Of Range RAP ............................................................................ 2-131
Status Indicator RAPs 1/05 Reissue

manuals4you.com
9-614 VClean Out Of Range RAP................................................................................... 2-132 10-379 Power On External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP.................................................... 2-168
9-619 VClean TRC Out Of Range RAP .......................................................................... 2-132 10-382 Stand By External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP ..................................................... 2-169
9-634 ADC Out Of Range RAP ....................................................................................... 2-133 10-383 Job Complete External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP.............................................. 2-169
9-662 LD Out Of Range RAP.......................................................................................... 2-133 10-384 Job Incomplete External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP ........................................... 2-170
9-667 VH/VM Out Of Range RAP ................................................................................... 2-134 10-386 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP ............................ 2-171
10-387 External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP ......................... 2-172
FUSING, EXIT TRANSPORTATION 10-389 Fuser Nip Contact Failure RAP........................................................................... 2-173
10-102 Pre Fuser Sensor On Jam RAP.......................................................................... 2-135 10-390 Fuser Nip Retract Failure RAP............................................................................ 2-174
10-103 Pre Fuser Sensor On RAP.................................................................................. 2-135 10-391 Fail Unit Failure RAP........................................................................................... 2-175
10-105 Fuser Exit Sensor On Jam RAP ......................................................................... 2-136 10-398 Fuser Fan Failure RAP ....................................................................................... 2-175
10-106 Fuser Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP ......................................................................... 2-137 10-399 Fuser Intake Fan Failure RAP............................................................................. 2-176
10-107 Fuser Exit Sensor On RAP ................................................................................. 2-138 10-421 Fuser Oil Level RAP............................................................................................ 2-176
10-110 Machine Exit Sensor On Jam RAP ..................................................................... 2-138 10-422 Web CRU RAP.................................................................................................... 2-177
10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP ..................................................................... 2-140 10-500 Fuser Web CRU Not Present RAP ..................................................................... 2-177
10-112 Machine Exit Sensor On RAP ............................................................................. 2-141 10-900 Fuser Cycle Down RAP ...................................................................................... 2-178
10-115 Exit Path Sensor On Jam RAP ........................................................................... 2-141 OF10-1 OCT Detection Failure RAP ............................................................................... 2-178
10-117 Exit Path Sensor On Jam RAP ........................................................................... 2-142 OF10-2 Fuser Oil Pump RAP.......................................................................................... 2-179
10-120 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP ..................................................................... 2-143 OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP................................................................................... 2-179
10-125 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP ..................................................................... 2-143 OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP ............................................................................ 2-181
10-126 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP ..................................................................... 2-145 OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP..................................................................... 2-182
10-127 Duplex Registration Sensor On Jam RAP .......................................................... 2-146 OF 10-6 Fuser Out of Oil Rap ......................................................................................... 2-183
10-128 Duplex Pre Regi. Sensor On Jam RAP .............................................................. 2-147
10-130 Duplex In Sensor On Jam RAP .......................................................................... 2-148 SORTING
10-132 Duplex Path Sensor On Jam RAP ..................................................................... 2-149 11-107 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP .................................................................. 2-185
10-133 Duplex Out Sensor On Jam RAP ....................................................................... 2-150 11-108 OCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP ........................................................................... 2-186
10-160 Duplex In Sensor On Jam RAP .......................................................................... 2-151 11-109 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP................................................................. 2-187
10-162 Duplex Path 1 Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................... 2-151 11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long RAP ............................................ 2-189
10-163 Duplex Out Sensor On Jam RAP........................................................................ 2-152 11-111 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Short RAP ........................................... 2-189
10-280 OCT Offset Sensor Failure RAP ......................................................................... 2-152 11-115 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On Jam RAP ....................................... 2-190
10-300 Inverter Cover Open RAP ................................................................................... 2-153 11-116 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off Jam RAP ....................................... 2-191
10-341 Fuser Oil Empty RAP .......................................................................................... 2-154 11-142 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Long RAP.................................................................... 2-192
10-342 Fuser Web Change RAP .................................................................................... 2-154 11-143 V-Tra In Sensor Off Jam RAP............................................................................. 2-193
10-355 External Heat Roll Contact Failure RAP ............................................................ 2-155 11-144 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Short RAP ................................................................... 2-194
10-356 External Heat Roll Retract Failure RAP ............................................................. 2-156 11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP ............................................................ 2-196
10-359 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP .......................................................... 2-157 11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP............................................................ 2-198
10-360 Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP ....................................................... 2-157 11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP............................................................ 2-200
10-361 Power On Heat Roll Not Ready RAP .................................................................. 2-158 11-191 Paper Remains at Mail Box Vertical Sensor / 1 Bin Sensor RAP ....................... 2-200
10-362 Standby Heat Roll Not Ready RAP..................................................................... 2-158 11-192 Paper Remains at OCT Exit Sensor RAP ........................................................... 2-201
10-363 Job Complete Heat Roll Not Ready RAP............................................................ 2-159 11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP ................................................................. 2-201
10-364 Job Incomplete Heat Roll Not Ready RAP ......................................................... 2-159 11-273 Mail Box OCT Offset Fail RAP ............................................................................ 2-202
10-366 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP .......................................... 2-160 11-301 Front Cover A Interlock Open RAP ..................................................................... 2-203
10-367 Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP ....................................... 2-161 11-302 Front Cover B Interlock Open RAP ..................................................................... 2-204
10-368 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP ................................................... 2-162 11-303 Docking Interlock Open RAP .............................................................................. 2-204
10-369 Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP ................................................ 2-162 11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP ............................................................................................ 2-205
10-370 Power On Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP ........................................................... 2-163 11-512 Offset Catch Tray / Simple Catch Tray Full Stack RAP ...................................... 2-207
10-371 Stand By Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP ............................................................ 2-163 11-911 Bin 1 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 2-207
10-372 Job Complete Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP..................................................... 2-164 11-912 Bin 2 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 2-208
10-373 Job Incomplete Pressure Roll Not Ready Failure RAP....................................... 2-164 11-913 Bin 3 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 2-208
10-375 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP ................................... 2-165 11-914 Bin 4 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 2-209
10-376 Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP ................................ 2-166 11-915 Bin 5 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 2-209
10-377 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP ............................................ 2-167 11-916 Bin 6 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 2-210
10-378 External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP......................................... 2-167 11-917 Bin 7 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 2-210

11-918 Bin 8 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 2-211
11-919 Bin 9 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 2-211
11-920 Bin 10 Full Stack RAP......................................................................................... 2-212
11-921 Offset Catch Tray Full Stack RAP....................................................................... 2-212
11-922 Sorter Stacker Full RAP...................................................................................... 2-213
ROS
14-372 ROS Motor Fail RAP ........................................................................................... 2-215
14-376 Half Tone PWB Fail RAP .................................................................................... 2-215
........................................................................................................................................ 14-380
SOS Fail 1 RAP .............................................................................................................. 2-216
14-384 SOS Fail 2 RAP .................................................................................................. 2-216
14-388 XPC ASIC Fail RAP ............................................................................................ 2-217
IPS
15-270 Coordinate Bus Fail RAP .................................................................................... 2-219
15-281 Pre-IPS X Recognize Fail RAP ........................................................................... 2-219
15-284 POST IPS X Recognize Fail RAP ....................................................................... 2-220
15-342 IPS NVM Fail RAP .............................................................................................. 2-220
15-361 POST IPS PWB Fail (Self Test) RAP ................................................................. 2-221
15-362 X Hard Fail RAP.................................................................................................. 2-221
15-363 IIT Memory Fail RAP........................................................................................... 2-222
15-365 X Comm Fail RAP............................................................................................... 2-222
15-367 X - Fail 4 RAP ..................................................................................................... 2-223
15-370 X - Fail 5 RAP ..................................................................................................... 2-223
15-371 X - Fail 6RAP ...................................................................................................... 2-224
15-380/15-381 / 15-382 / 15-383 / 15-384 / 15-385 CCD AGC Fail RAP ....................... 2-224
15-386 / 15-387 / 15-388 / 15-389 / 15-390 / 15-391 CCD AOC Fail RAP ..................... 2-225
15-560 Expected Time Margin Fault RAP....................................................................... 2-226
IDFE
OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP ........................................................................................ 2-227
19-001 DC Power Fault RAP .......................................................................................... 2-230
19-002 BIOS/Self-Test Fault RAP................................................................................... 2-231
19-003 Hard Disk Fault RAP ........................................................................................... 2-231
19-004 Printer DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP ............................................................ 2-232
19-005 Printer DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP ............................................................ 2-232
19-006 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP ......................................................... 2-233
19-007 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP ......................................................... 2-233
19-012 Network Connection Fault RAP .......................................................................... 2-234
19-013 Network Connection Fault RAP .......................................................................... 2-235
19-014 Ethernet Speed Detection Fault RAP ................................................................. 2-236
19-015 Token Ring Speed Detection Fault RAP............................................................. 2-237
19-016 Token Ring Troubleshooting RAP ...................................................................... 2-237

manuals4you.com
1-300 Front Door Interlock Open RAP 1-304 L/H Cover Interlock Open RAP
The Control Logic has detected that the Front Door Cover is open. This RAP should be used to repair the Left Hand Cover Interlock circuit.
Initial Actions Initial Actions

• Refer to BSD 1.4 in the following procedure • Refer to BSD 1.4 in the following procedure:
• Visually inspect the Front Door Interlock Switch (PL 9.1) and the Drawer Accessory (PL • Visually inspect the L/H Cover Interlock Switch (PL 2.8) for damage, misalignment, dirt or
2.18) for damage, misalignment, dirt or any other visible mechanical or electrical cause any other visible mechanical or electrical cause for malfunction. Make sure the Left Lower
for malfunction. Cover actuates the switch when it closes.
Procedure Procedure
PO/PO the Machine Fault Code 1-300 is still declared. PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 1-304 is still declared.
Y N Y N
Inspect and reseat connectors P/J712, P/J14, P/J419B, P/J724, and P/J11A. Reseat connectors P/J800 and P/J805.
Open the Front Door. +5 VDC is measured at P/J712-3. Perform the following:
Y N • Close the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 1.4, and check for
Perform the following: continuity through the switch while it is closed.
• Observe the operation of the Drawer Interlock Switch while opening and closing the • Open the L/H Cover Interlock Switch, and go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.4.
drawer. +24 VDC is measured at P/J805-1.
• Check the Drawer Interlock Switch for damage or misalignment. Y N
• Go to Flag 1 and Flag 7 on BSD 1.4, and check the wires between P/J712-3 and P/ Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
J724-2 for an open circuit.
Close the L/H Cover Interlock Switch, and go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.4. +24 VDC is measured at
• Replace the Drawer Interlock Switch (PL 2.18).
P/J805-2 on the Tray PWB.
Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. +5 VDC is measured at P/J712-4 Y N
Perform the following:
Y N
+5VDC is measured at P/J19-4 on the AC Driver PWB. • Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 1.4. Check for an open circuit between P/J805-1
and P/J805-2 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). • Replace the L/H Cover Interlock Switch (PL 2.8).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 7 on BSD 1.4, and check the wiring between P/J14-1 on the AC Perform the following:
Driver PWB and P/J19-4 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.2) for an open or a short. If the • Go to BSD 1.4, and check for an open/short circuit at P/J801B-4.
problem continues, • Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
• Replace the Front Door Interlock Switch (PL 9.1).
• Replace the Drawer Interlock Switch (PL 2.18).

• Go to the Interlock Relay Failure RAP.
• Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-5 1-300 Front Door Interlock Open RAP, 1-304 L/H
+3.5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
This RAP is used to repair failures in the +3.5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) circuit when directed This RAP is used to repair failures in the +5 VDC Power circuit when directed by another RAP.
by another RAP.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Use BSD 1.2 in the following procedure:
• Use BSD 1.3 in the following procedure: • P/O P/O the machine, and look for symptoms of a blank UI and a machine locked into the
Power Save Mode.
Procedure
Disconnect J5. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.3, and check for ACH between J5-3 and J5-2 on the
Procedure
harness side. ACH is measures between J5-3 and J5-2 on the harness side. The machine exits Energy Saver Mode when the Main Switch is switched ON.
Y N Y N
Go to the AC Power RAP. Refer to BSD 1.2. Check for +5 VDC between P/J25-1 and P/J25-2 on the IOT LVPS.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J25-1 and P/J25-2.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-1. Y N
Y N Perform the following:
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-13. • Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 1.2, and check for an open circuit.
Y N • Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3).
Perform the following: • Replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
• Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). • Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
• Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2). • Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to the Power Save and LED RAP.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.3, and perform the following:

Go to the Power Save and LED RAP.
1. Check the wiring at P/J31 for an open/short circuit to the POST IPS.
2. Replace the IIT LVPS (PL 3.5).
3. Replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
4. Replace the POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5).

+3.5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP, +5 VDC Power 2-6 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
+5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS) RAP +12 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
This RAP is used to repair failures in the +5 VDC Power circuit (IIT LVPS) when directed by This RAP is used to repair short circuits in the +12 VDC Power circuit when directed by another
another RAP. RAP.

• Use BSD 1.3 in the following procedure: • Use BSD 1.2 in the following procedure:
Procedure Procedure
Disconnect J5. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.3, and check for ACH between J5-3 and J5-2 on the Disconnect P/J22 from the IOT LVPS and check for +12 VDC at P/J22-1 on the IOT LVPS.
harness side. ACH is measures between J5-3 and J5-2 on the harness side. +12 VDC at P/J22 on the IOT LVPS checked OK.
Y N Y N
Go to the AC Power RAP. Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3).
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-1. Disconnect the following connectors from their respective PWBs:
Y N • P/J395 from the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-13. • P/J411 from the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N Reconnect P/J22 to the IOT LVPS, and check for +12 VDC at P/J22-1. +12 VDC is mea-
sured at P/J22-1.
• Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Y N
• Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 1.2, and check the wires for a short circuit to ground.
Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Measure for +12 VDC at P/J22-1 after reconnecting P/J395, and P/J411 one by one to their
respective PWBs. Note what PWB, if any, loads down the +12 VDC. +12 VDC was OK after
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 1.3, and perform the following: reconnecting P/J395 to the Half Tone PWB.
1. Check the wiring at P/J33 for open/short circuits (between the IIT/IPS LVPS and the Y N
DADF, and the PRE IPS). Perform the following:
2. Replace the IIT LVPS (PL 3.5). • Go to Wirenet +12/-12V DC involving the Half Tone PWB and disconnect all compo-
nents from the Half Tone PWB which are supplied with +12 VDC.
• Reconnect the components one-by-one to the Half Tone PWB, while checking which
component/circuit loads down the +12 VDC.
• Check the wiring to the suspected component for an open/short circuit.
• Replace the component, which loads down the +12 VDC.

• Go to Wirenet +12/-12V DC involving the IOT Drive PWB and disconnect all components
from the IOT Drive PWB which are driven by +12 VDC (and not checked earlier in this
RAP).
• Reconnect the components one-by-one to the IOT Drive PWB, while checking which com-
ponent/circuit loads down the +12 VDC.
• Replace the component, which loads down the +12 VDC.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-7 +5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS) RAP, +12 VDC Power (IOT
-12 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP +13.3 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP
This RAP is used to repair short circuits in the -12 VDC Power circuit when directed by another This RAP is used to repair failures in the +13.3 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) circuit when
RAP. directed by another RAP.

• Use BSD 1.2 in the following procedure: • Use BSD 1.3 in the following procedure:
Procedure Procedure
Disconnect P/J22 from the IOT LVPS and check for -12 VDC at P/J22-4. -12 VDC at P/J22- Disconnect P/ J5. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.3, and check for ACH between P/ J5-3 and P/ J5-2
4 on the IOT LVPS checked OK. on the harness side. ACH is measures between P/ J5-3 and P/ J5-2.
Y N Y N
Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3). Go to the AC Power RAP.
Disconnect the following connectors from their respective PWBs: Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-1.
• P/J395 from the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). Y N
• P/J411 from the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-13.
Reconnect P/J22 to the IOT LVPS, and check for -12 VDC at P/J22-4. -12 VDC is measured Y N
at P/J22-1.
Y N • Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 1.2, and check the wires for a short circuit to ground. • Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Measure for -12 VDC at P/J22-4 after reconnecting P/J395, and P/J411 one by one to their Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
respective PWBs. Note what PWB, if any, loads down the -12 VDC. -12 VDC was OK after
reconnecting P/J395 to the Half Tone PWB. Go to Flag 6 on BSD 1.3, and perform the following:
Y N 1. Check the wiring from P/J34 on the IIT/IPS LVPS to the PRE IPS and the CCD for an
Perform the following: open/short circuit.
• Go to Wirenet +12/-12V DC involving the Half Tone PWB and disconnect all compo- 2. Replace the IIT/IPS LVPS (PL 3.5).
nents from the Half Tone PWB which are supplied with -12 VDC. 3. Replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
• Reconnect the components one-by-one to the Half Tone PWB, while checking which 4. Replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2).
component/circuit loads down the -12 VDC.
• Replace the component, which loads down the -12 VDC.

• Go to Wirenet +12/-12V DC involving the IOT Drive PWB and disconnect all components
from the IOT Drive PWB which are driven by -12 VDC (and not checked earlier in this
RAP).
• Reconnect the components one-by-one to the IOT Drive PWB, while checking which com-
ponent/circuit loads down the -12 VDC.
• Replace the component, which loads down the -12 VDC.

-12 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP, +13.3 VDC Power 2-8 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
+24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP • Reconnect the components one-by-one to the IOT Drive PWB, while checking which com-
This RAP is used to repair short circuits in the +24 VDC Power circuit when directed by another
RAP.
• Replace the component which loads down the +24 VDC.
Initial Actions Disconnect P/J24 from the IOT LVPS and check for +24 VDC at P/J24-2,3. +24 VDC at P/
• Use BSD 1.2 in the following procedure: J24-2, 3 on the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3) checked OK
Y N
Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3).
Procedure
Disconnect P/J23 from the IOT LVPS and check for +24 VDC at P/J23-1,2,3 on the IOT Perform the following:
LVPS. +24 VDC at P/J23-1, 2, 3 on the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3) checked OK. • Disconnect P/J14 from the AC Driver (PL 9.3)
Y N • Check for +24 VDC at P/J24-2,3 at the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3).
Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3).
• Go to BSD 1.2, Flag 3, and check for open/short circuits.
• Reconnect P/J23 to the AC Driver (PL 9.3) and check for +24 VDC at P/J23-1,2,3.
Disconnect the following connectors from their respective PWBs:
• P/J800 from the Tray PWB (PL 9.3) • Go to Wirenet +24 VDC involving the AC Driver PWB and disconnect all components from
• P/J14 from the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). the AC Driver PWB which are driven by +24 VDC (and not checked earlier in this RAP).
• P/J411 from the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). • Reconnect the components one-by-one to the AC Driver PWB, while checking which
Reconnect P/J23 to the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3) and check for +24 VDC at P/J23-1,2,3. +24 VDC
is measured at P/J23-1,2,3.
Y N • Replace the component which loads down the +24 VDC.
Go to BSD 1.2, Flag 1, Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to • Go to the Interlock Relay Failure RAP. Check for a short circuit of +24 VDC.
ground.
Measure for +24 VDC at P/J23-1,2,3 after reconnecting P/J800, P/J14, and P/J411 one by
one to their respective PWBs. Note what PWB, if any, loads down the +24 VDC. +24 VDC
was OK after reconnecting P/J800 to the Tray PWB.
Y N
• Go to Wirenet +24 VDC involving the Tray PWB and disconnect all components from
the Tray PWB which are driven by +24 VDC.
• Reconnect the components one-by-one to the Tray PWB, while checking which com-
+24 VDC was OK after reconnecting P/J14 to the AC Driver PWB.

Y N
• Go to Wirenet +24 VDC involving the AC Driver PWB and disconnect all components
from the AC Driver PWB which are driven by +24 VDC.
• Reconnect the components one-by-one to the AC Driver PWB, while checking which

• Go to Wirenet +24 VDC involving the IOT Drive PWB and disconnect all components from
the IOT Drive PWB which are driven by +24 VDC.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-9 +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
+24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP AC Power RAP
This RAP is used to repair failures in the +24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) circuit when directed This RAP is used to repair failures in the AC Power circuit when directed by another RAP.
by another RAP.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Check that the specified level of AC Line voltage is present at the wall receptacle.
• Use BSD 1.3 in the following procedure:
Procedure
Procedure With the machine plugged into the AC source and the Circuit Breaker and Main Switch
Disconnect P/ J5. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.3, and check for ACH between P/ J5-3 and P/ J5-2 switched on, check that AC Line voltage is measured between P/J17-1,2,3 (ACH) and P/J17-
on the harness side. ACH is measures between P/ J5-3 and P/ J5-2. 4,5,6 (ACN). AC Line voltage checked OK between P/J17-1,2,3 and P/J17-4,5,6.
Y N Y N
Go to the AC Power RAP. Check for AC Line voltage between P/J16-1 (ACH) and P/J16-4 (ACN) on the AC Driver
PWB (PL 9.3). AC Line voltage checked OK between P/J16-1 and P/J16-4.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-1. Y N
Y N Check for AC Line voltage between P/J15-1and P/J15-3 on the AC Driver PWB (PL
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-13. 9.3). AC Line voltage is present between P/J15-1 and P/J15-3.
Y N Y N
Perform the following: Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.1, and check for an open circuit between P/J16 on the
• Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). AC Driver PWB and the AC Plug on the Line Cord.
• Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
With the machine plugged into the AC source, and the Circuit Breaker switched on, check
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 1.3, and perform the following: for 18 VAC between P/J19-6 and P/J19-12 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). 18 VAC is
1. Check the wiring from P/J35 for an open/short circuit between the DADF Control PWB or present between P/J19-6 and P/J19-12.
Lamp Ballast PWB. Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.1, and check for an open circuit.
2. Replace the IIT/IPS LVPS (PL 3.5).

• Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, Flag 3, Flag 4, and Flag 5 on BSD 1.1 and check for open cir-
cuits. Also check for short circuits to ground at Flag 3, Flag 4, and Flag 5.
• Replace the Main Switch (PL 9.1).
• Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J11B-17 and P/J11B-19.

Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.1, and check for an open circuit. If the circuit is OK, replace the AC
Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
+24 VDC is measured between P/J11AB-15 and DC COM when the Main Switch is
switched ON.
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.1, and check for an open/short circuit. If the circuit is OK, perform
the following:
• Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and check for an open/short circuit.
A
+24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP, AC Power RAP 2-10 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
Replace the Main Power Switch (PL 9.1). Interlock Relay Failure RAP
This RAP is used to repair +24 VDC Interlock Relay (located on the AC Driver PWB) Failures.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 1.4, Power Interlock Switching, in the following procedure:
Procedure
• Go to Figure 7 (BSD 1.4) and check that the fuses F1, F2 and F5 on the AC Driver PWB
are OK.
• Check that +5 VDC is available at P/J19-4 on the AC Driver PWB.
+5 VDC is measured at P/J19-4 on the AC Driver PWB.
Y N
Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
+24 VDC is measured at P/J45-5 on the Distribution PWB.

Y N
Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. +24 VDC is measured at P/J14-10 on the AC Driver
PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.4, and perform the following:
• Check for an open circuit between P/J45-5 on the Distribution PWB and P/J14-10
on the AC Driver PWB.
• Replace the Front Door Interlock Switch (PL 9.1).

• Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.4,and check for an open circuit.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-11 AC Power RAP, Interlock Relay Failure RAP
A
Power Save and LED RAP Check for +5VDC at P/J11A-A7 on the AC Driver PWB. +5VDC is measured at P/J11A-A7
on the AC Driver PWB.
This RAP is used to repair failures in the Power Save and LED Circuit.
Y N
Preform the following:
Initial Actions • Go to Flag 1 on BSD 2.3 and check for a short circuit
• Use BSD 2.3 in the following procedure: • Go to +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
• Check if the Power Save Mode activates continuously or will not activate.
Procedure • Go to Flag 2 on BSD 2.3, and check for an open circuit.
• Replace the Control Panel (PL 9.2).
PO/PO the machine. The machine remains in the Power Save (Sleep) Mode.
Y N • Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
The machine wakes up. Check for +5 VDC at P/J11A-A7 on the AC Driver PWB. • Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
+5 VDC is measured at P/J11A-A7 on the AC Driver PWB. • Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3).
Y N
• Go to BSD 2.3, Flag 1 and check for a short circuit.
• Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Enter dC330 001-200 Power Save Button, and exercise the Power Save Mode using the
following procedure:
1. Press Start.
2. Press and hold the [Power Save Button]. For normal operation the status indicator
should indicate Logic (H) and the counter should increment.
3. Release the Power Save Button and the status should change to Logic (L), and the
counter should increment again.
The Power Save Mode behaved normally when it was exercised in the preceding
steps 1 through 3.
Y N
Check the voltage at P/J11A-A12 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). +5 VDC is mea-
sured at P/J11A-A12 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
Y N
• Check the wire between P/J11A-A12 on the AC Driver PWB, and P/J492-
2 on the Control Panel for a short circuit.

• Check the wire between P/J11A-A12 on the AC Driver PWB, and P/J492-2 on
the Control Panel for an open circuit.

• Go to Flag 2 on BSD 2.3, and check for an open circuit.
A
Power Save and LED RAP 2-12 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
2-310 UI Panel Fail RAP 2-340 UI RAM Fail RAP
This Fault Code indicates that the UI Panel failed. This Fault Code is detected at power on and indicates that the UI PWB RAM Test failed.

• Refer to BSD 2.1, Control Panel (UI Panel) Switches and LEDs, in the following proce- • Refer to BSD 2.2 UI Display in this procedure:
dure:
• Observe all LEDs on the top of the Control Panel for functional operation. Procedure
• Check all push-buttons on top of the Control Panel for electrical/mechanical function. PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 2-340 is still declared.
• Check the Touch Panel at the UI for functional operation. Y N
Procedure • Inspect the connections and connectors to the UI PWB, VR PWB, the Display, and
the Power Supply.
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 2-310 is still declared.
• Reseat connectors P/J484, P/J486, CN5, CN6, and CN1.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 2.2, and check for +24 VDC UI Power Supply voltage at P/J486-1. +24
• Check the connectors to the Control Panel.
VDC is measured at P/J486-1 on the UI PWB.
• Reseat connectors P/J482A, CN2, CN3, and CN1. Y N
All push-buttons are electrically and mechanically operational.
• Go to Flag 1 on BSD 2.2, and check the wires for an open/short circuit.
Y N
• Replace the Power Supply (PL 9.5).
Replace the Control Panel (PL 9.5).

All LEDs functioned in Initial Action.
• Go to Flag 2 on BSD 2.2, and check between P/J486-2 and INVCN1 for an open/short
Y N
circuit.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 2.1, and check for +5 VDC at P/J482A-9,10 and CN1-9,10.
+5VDC is measured at P/J482A and CN1. • Replace the VR PWB (PL 9.5).
Y N • Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5).
Perform the following: • Replace the Display (PL 9.5)
• Go to Flag 4 on BSD 2.1, and check the harness between P/J482A on the UI
PWB and CN1 on the Display Power Supply for a short/open circuit.
• Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5).
Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5).

• Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, and Flag 3 on BSD 2.1, and check the harness for open/short cir-
cuits.
• Replace the Touch Panel (PL 9.5).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-13 2-310 UI Panel Fail RAP, 2-340 UI RAM Fail RAP
Dark Screen RAP Two Sided Copy Feature Not Available RAP
This RAP is used to analyze and repair a Dark Screen at the UI. If the UI is still illuminated, but The Duplex option is not shown on the UI.
no customer message is displayed go to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions Ensure that the Left Side Option Memory PWB (side 2) is installed and properly seated on the
• Refer to BSD 2.2 UI Display in this procedure: MEM SYS PWB.
Procedure Procedure
PO/PO the machine. The Dark Screen is still displayed. Refer to 15-363 IIT Memory Fail RAP.
Y N
If the Dark Screen Display is intermittent, perform the following:
• Go to BSD 2.2, UI Display. Inspect the connections and connectors to the UI PWB,
VR PWB, the Display, and the Power Supply in the UI Assembly.
• Reseat connectors P/J484, P/J486, CN5, CN6, and CN1.
NOTE: If the failure occurred immediately after installing or reconnecting the optional Edit Pad,
check that P/J 800 is connected correctly. It is possible to partially connect this plug upside
down, which will create a power supply short circuit. Check F3 on the Distribution PWB. This
may have also corrupted the UI software, requiring a reload of the software.
Check Fuses F1, F2, F3, F4, and F5 on the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3).
Check Fuses F1, F2, F3, and F5 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
Go to BSD 2.2, UI Display and perform the following:
• Inspect the connectors and connections to the UI PWB, VR PWB, the Display, and the
Power Supply in the UI Assembly.
• Reseat connectors P/J484, P/J486, CN5, CN6, and INVCN1.
• Replace the VR PWB (PL 9.5).
• Replace the Power Supply (PL 9.5).
• Replace the Display (PL 9.5).

Dark Screen RAP, 2-14 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-311 IOT-SYS Logic Fail RAP 3-315 IOT/IPS Communications Fail RAP
The IOT-SYS Software Logic Failure was detected after a certain time period (the NVM value). The 3-315 Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the
Post IPS PWB was detected.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure: Initial Actions
• Ensure that P571 is firmly connected to the Post IPS PWB.
Procedure • Refer to BSD 3.2 PWB Communications (IPS) and BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this proce-
Perform the following: dure:
• PO/PO the machine Procedure

• Reset the connectors on the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) There is +3.5 VDC from J 570 pin 1 to pin 6 on the Post IPS PWB.
• Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 3.2. Check for an open or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are OK,
replace the IIT LVPS (PL 3.5).
There is +3.5 VDC from J 517 pin 3 to pin 4 on the Pre IPS PWB.
Y N
There is +5 VDC from J 517 pin 1 to pin 2 on the Pre IPS PWB.
Y N
There is +13.3 VDC from J 517 pin 7 to pin 5 on the Pre IPS PWB.
Y N

• PO/PO the machine
• Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 3.2. Check the following wires for a short/open circuit:
– Between Post IPS PWB P571-23 and IOT CPU PWB P/J404-A13
• Replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
• Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
• Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
• Replace the MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-15 3-311 IOT-SYS Logic Fail RAP, 3-315 IOT/IPS Com-
3-317 UI/IOT Communications Fail RAP 3-318 IOT/IPS Communications Fail RAP
This Fault Code indicates that a communications failure between the UI PWB and the IOT This Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the IPS
PWB was detected. PWB was detected.

• Refer to BSD 3.1 PWB Communications (UI) and BSD 3.12 Monitoring, in this procedure: • Refer to BSD 3.2 PWB Communications (IPS) and BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this proce-
dure:
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If Fault Code 3-317 is still declared, perform the following: Procedure
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 3.1. +24 VDC is measured at J490-7, and +5 VDC is measured at Perform the following:
J490-2 on the UI PWB (PL 9.5).
Y N • PO/PO the machine. If Fault Code 3-318 is still declared, perform the following:
Perform the following: • Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 3.2. Check the following wires for short/open circuit:
• Go to the +24 VDC-1 Wirenet and check for an open/short circuit
• Go to the +24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP
• Go to the +5 VDC-1 Wirenet and check for an open/short circuit
• Go to the +5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS) RAP
Perform the following: • Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
• Go to Flag 1 on Flag 2 on BSD 3.1 and check the following wires for an open/short circuit: • Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
– Check the wire between IOT CPU PWB P/J404-B14 and UI PWB P/J490-10
• Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5)

3-317 UI/IOT Communications Fail RAP, 3-318 IOT/IPS 2-16 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-319 MailBox Communication Failure RAP 3-327 2nd DDI IOSS I/F Failure RAP
The 3-319 Fault Code indicates a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the Mail- • 3-327 Fault Code indicates a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the DDI
Box PWB. IISS.
Initial Actions
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 3-319 Finisher/
Refer to BSD 16.1 Printer IDFE.
Sorter Communication Failure RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Initial Actions Procedure

Refer to BSD 3.4 PWB Communications (MailBox) and to BSD 3.12, Monitoring, in this proce- Perform the following:
dure.
Procedure • Go to BSD 16.1 (Figure 1). Check the communications cables. Ensure that the cables are
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-319 is still declared. seated properly and that there is no damage
Y N • Reset the IOT CPU connectors and reseat the IOT NVM PWB.
If an intermittent is suspected, perform the following: • Reload IDFE System Software
• Check the connections to the IOT CPU PWB and the MailBox Control PWB, and the • Go to GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs and replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
interconnecting harness
• Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1)
• Reseat P/J405 at the IOT CPU PWB, P/J550 at the MailBox Control PWB, and
J880, the Double Plug
Go to Flag 1 BSD 3.4, and check for +5 VDC at P/J569-1. +5 VDC is measured at P/J569-1
on the MailBox Control PWB.
Y N
• Go to Flag 1 on BSD 3.4, and check for an open/short circuit
• Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 3.4, and check for +24 VDC at P/J563-1 on the Mail box Control PWB.
+24 VDC is measured at P/J563 -1.
Y N
• Go to Flag 1 on BSD 3.4, and check for an open/short circuit

• Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 3.4, and check the following wires for an open/short cir-
cuit:
– Check the wire between Mailbox Control PWB P/J550-1 and IOT CPU PWB P/
J405-1
J405-2
J405-3
J405-4
• Replace the MailBox Control PWB (PL 13.10)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-17 3-319 MailBox Communication Failure RAP, 3-327
3-328 DDI IOSS Communication Failure RAP 3-329 DDI IISS Communication Failure RAP
• The 3-328 Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and • 3-329 Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the
the DDI IISS was detected. DDI IISS was detected.
• The 3-328 Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and This RAP is incomplete pending full information disclosure.
the DDI IOSS was detected.
Refer to BSD 16.1, Printer IDFE in this procedure. Refer to BSD 16.1, Printer IDFE in this procedure.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the following: Perform the following:
• PO/PO the machine • PO/PO the machine

• Go to BSD 16.1 (Figure 1). Check the communications cables. Ensure that the cables are • Go to BSD 16.1 (Figure 1). Check the communications cables. Ensure that the cables are
seated properly and that there is no damage seated properly and that there is no damage
• Reset the IOT CPU connectors and reseat the IOT NVM PWB • Reset the IOT CPU connectors and reseat the IOT NVM PWB.
• Reload IDFE System Software • Reload IDFE System Software
• Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) • Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
• Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1) • Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1)

3-328 DDI IOSS Communication Failure RAP, 3-329 2-18 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-330 2nd DDI IISS Communication Failure RAP 3-333 Foreign Interface RAP
• 3-330 Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the This Fault Code indicates that a communications failure was detected between the Foreign
DDI IISS was detected. Interface PWB and the IOT CPU PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1, Printer IDFE, in this procedure.
Initial Actions
• Check the connection between the Foreign Interface PWB and the Foreign Accessory (P/
J 940).
Procedure
• If you were sent to this RAP from Call Flow for a nonrecognized Foreign Device, go to
Flag 1 on BSD 3.6 and check for an open circuit.
• Use BSD 3.6, Foreign Interface Accessory, and BSD 3.12, Monitoring, for this procedure.
• Go to BSD 16.1 (Figure 1) and check the communications cables.
• Reset the IOT CPU connectors and reseat the IOT NVM PWB.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-333 is still present.
• Reload IDFE System Software
Y N
If intermittent performance is suspected, reseat P/J406 at the IOT CPU PWB, P/J45 at
• Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1) the Distribution PWB, and P/J 941at the FI PWB.
There is +24 VDC from J 941, pin 5 to pin 7.

Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 3.6. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, go to the 24 VDC
wirenets to troubleshoot.
There is +5 VDC from J 941, pin 10 to pin 8.

Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 3.6. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, go to the +5 VDC
wirenets to troubleshoot.

• Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 3.6, and check for an open/short circuit.
• Replace the Foreign Interface PWB (PL 9.4).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-19 3-330 2nd DDI IISS Communication Failure RAP, 3-
3-340 IOT RAM Fail RAP 3-356 IOT NVM Failure RAP
This Fault Code indicates that it was detected at power on that the IOT PWB RAM Test failed. This Fault Code indicates that the IOT PWB NVM test failed and was detected at Power On.

• Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure: • Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure:
• Check the NVM settings related to the IOT-SYS logic.
Procedure
Procedure PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-356 is still declared.
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-340 is still declared. Y N
Y N If intermittent performance is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB, and the IOT NVM
If intermittent behavior is suspected, perform the following: PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction.
• Inspect the IOT NVM PWB and the IOT CPU PWB connections.
Replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2).
• Reseat connectors between the IOT NVM PWB and IOT CPU PWB
Replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2).

3-340 IOT RAM Fail RAP, 3-356 IOT NVM Failure RAP 2-20 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
3-380 TR0 Fail RAP Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.2 and check the +5 VDC circuit to the AC Driver PWB.
A 3-380 fault indicates that the TR0 signal was not received on time.
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 7 on BSD 1.4. Check the circuit for Interlocked +5 VDC.
Initial Actions
NOTE: The following step requires the use of the Fluke 87 DVM, or other test meter with a volt-
• Refer to BSD 9.8 for the following procedure.
age type diode test function.
• Ensure that the TR0 Patch (reflector) on the IBT Belt is clean and in good condition.
• Ensure that the Belt is installed correctly, with the reflector toward the Inboard edge. Perform the following:
• Ensure that P/J398 on the Half Tone PWB, P/J345 on the LDD PWB, P/J416 on the 1. Set the meter rotary switch to the diode test position.
IOT Drive PWB, P/J140 on the TR0 Sensor, and Double Plug P702A/ J702A are con- 2. Disconnect P/J 395 and P/J398 on the Half Tone PWB.
nected before beginning this RAP. 3. Connect the red (+) lead to J395 pin 1 and the black (COM) lead to J398 pin 1
• Ensure that the Drum CRU is properly installed. The meter reads 0.3 VDC or less
Y N
Procedure If the meter reads OL in both directions, CR13 on the Halftone PWB is open; replace the
If Tag 38 is installed on the machine, it is possible that there is a shorting condition between the PWB (PL 9.2).
EPC Scan Cable and the FPC-ROS Flat Cable connector ( P/J398). Foam on top of the con-
Reverse the leads. The meter reads OL.
nector is intended to insulate the pins from contact. However, the foam can be compressed by
Y N
the EPC Scan Cable and the pins may stick through and short against the Scan Cable connec-
CR13 on the Halftone PWB is shorted; replace the PWB (PL 9.2).
tor housing.
Using a sheet of transparency or shim stock, cut a strip 45mm X 12mm and adhere to the top
There is +24 VDC from pin 3 to pin 4 of P/J2030 on the Drum Motor.
of the foam on the FPC-ROS Cable connector ( P/J398). This strip will function as an insula-
Y N
tor.
Go to Flag 6 of BSD 4.1. Check for an open circuit. Refer to the 24 VDC wirenets as
If this does not resolve the problem, or if Tag P-38 is not installed, continue with this procedure.
required.
NOTE: The PWS display may not update the logic level display fast enough to show the state
of the TR0 Sensor. Observe the event Counter. If the event counter advances, the display is Check the connections to the Drum Motor. If the connections are secure, replace the Drum
changing. Motor (PL 1.1). If the problem persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to dC330. Stack the following codes. 004-007 Main Motor, 004-021 Drum Motor, 003-213
TRO Sensor. The display is H and changes to L momentarily.
Y N
The display is always H.
Y N
Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J416A-7 and DC Com.
Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.8. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is
good, replace the TR0 Sensor (PL 7.5).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J416A-8 and DC COM

Y N
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, replace the TR0 Sensor (PL 7.5).
There is +5 VDC from J395 pin 1 to J395 pin 11 on the Half Tone PWB (BSD 6.5).
Y N
There is +5 VDC from J19 pin 4 on the AC Driver PWB to GND (BSD 1.4).
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-21 3-380 TR0 Fail RAP
3-393 Half-Tone EEP-ROM Limit Failure RAP 3-394 IOT EEP-ROM Limit Failure RAP
This fault code is declared when the limit of the allowable number of times to write on to the This fault code is declared when the limit of the allowable number of times to write on the EEP-
EEP-ROM of the Half-Tone PWB is reached. ROM of the IOT CPU PWB is reached.

• Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure: • Refer to BSD 3.12, Monitoring in this procedure:
Procedure Procedure
PO/PO the machine. PO/PO the machine.
Fault Code 3-393 is still declared. Fault Code 3-394 is still declared.
Y N Y N
If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB and the Half-Tone PWB If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB, and the Half-Tone PWB
for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction.
Replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).

3-393 Half-Tone EEP-ROM Limit Failure RAP, 3-394 2-22 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-395 Half-Tone EEP-ROM R/W Failure RAP 3-396 IOT EEPROM R/W Failure RAP
This fault code is declared when writing to the EEP-ROM of the Half-Tone PWB failed. This fault code is declared when writing to the EEPROM of the IOT CPU PWB failed.

• Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure: • Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring (2 of 2) in this procedure.
• Enter Diagnostics Mode and compare the NVM last entry to the Half-Tone PWB with • Enter Diagnostics Mode and compare the NVM last entry to the Half-Tone PWB with
those to the IOT NVM PWB and to the IOT CPU PWB. those to the IOT NVM PWB and to the IOT CPU PWB.
Procedure Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-395 is still declared. PO/PO the machine. Fault Code is still declared.
Y N Y N
If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB, and the Half-Tone PWB If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) and the Half-
for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Tone PWB (PL 9.2) for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for
malfunction.
Replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-23 3-395 Half-Tone EEP-ROM R/W Failure RAP, 3-396
3-397 X ID DATA NG Failure RAP 3-510 APS NG-Image Loss RAP
The machine serial number and billing data are stored in three locations: The 3-510 fault code indicates that a tray containing the size of paper closest to the size of the
• IOT NVM PWB image was not detected while APS was enabled.
• IOT CPU PWB
• Half Tone PWB
Initial Actions
This fault is declared when the data stored are mismatched, or when an automatic correction If the fault occurs while performing Max Setup, ensure that Automatic Tray switching for Trays 1
was impossible after a billing mismatch occurred. - 4 is enabled in Customer Tools.
Ensure that appropriate paper is loaded when APS is enabled. If the fault code persists with
Initial Actions correct paper loaded, continue with the RAP.
• PO/PO the machine.
• If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB, the IOT NVM PWB, and Procedure
the Half Tone PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for
malfunction.
Y N
Refer to the User Guide, Selecting Document Size, and help the customer to understand
Procedure how to avoid recurrence of the problem.
Connect the PWS. Select dC132 from the DC Quick pull-down menu. Refer to GP 10 Replac-
ing Billing PWBs . Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Compare the displayed Serial Numbers for the IOT CPU PWB, the IOT NVM PWB, and the
Half Tone PWB with serial number printed on the machine label. All three PWB Serial Numbers
should agree with the label.
CAUTION
To maintain intergrity of the serial number and billing data, NEVER replace more that one PWB
at the same time. Follow the procedure in GP10.
The IOT NVM PWB serial number is correct.
Y N
Attempt to synchronize the serial numbers (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ). If unsuc-
cessful, replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2). After replacing the IOT NVM PWB, set the
serial number (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ).
The IOT CPU PWB serial number is correct.

Y N
Attempt to synchronize the serial numbers (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ). If unsuc-
cessful, replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2). After replacing the IOT CPU PWB, set the
serial number (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ).
Attempt to synchronize the serial numbers (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ). If unsuccessful,
replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). After replacing the Half Tone PWB, set the serial number
(GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ).

3-397 X ID DATA NG Failure RAP, 3-510 APS NG-Im- 2-24 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-511 APS NG-Not in Position RAP 3-512 APS NG-No Paper RAP
The 3-511 Fault Code indicates that the Tray selected by the APS was not in position. The 3-512 Fault Code indicates that the Tray selected by the APS had no paper.

Refer to the User Guide in this procedure. Refer to the User Guide in this procedure.
Procedure Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-511 is still declared. PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-512 is still declared.
Y N Y N
Refer to the User Guide, Selecting a Paper Tray, and help the customer to understand Refer to the User Guide, Loading Paper, and help the customer to understand how to
how to avoid recurrence of the problem. avoid recurrence of the problem.
Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-25 3-511 APS NG-Not in Position RAP, 3-512 APS NG-
3-518 APS Mix NG Image Loss RAP 3-527 Original Change During Job RAP
The 3-518 Fault Code indicates that the Tray selected by the APS had no paper. The 3-527 Fault Code indicates that the original returned according to the original return
instruction did not match the size or color of the original recognized by the machine because it
Initial Actions was returned by mistake on the part of the user.
Refer to the User Guide in this procedure.
Initial Actions
Procedure Refer to the User Guide in this procedure.

Y N Procedure
Refer to the User Guide, Loading Paper, and help the customer to understand how to PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-527 is still declared.
avoid recurrence of the problem. Y N
Refer to the User Guide, Storing Frequently-used Job Settings (Stored Programming),
Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2). and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem.

3-518 APS Mix NG Image Loss RAP, 3-527 Original 2-26 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-528 Platen Document Size Unknown RAP 3-529 AMS Mix NG RAP
The 3-528 Fault Code indicates that the machine does not recognize the document size auto- The 3-529 Fault Code indicates that the result of the magnification calculation was outside of
matically detected. the range of 25%~400%.

Refer to the User Guide in this procedure. Refer to the User Guide in this Procedure.
Procedure Procedure
Y N Y N
Refer to the User Guide, Loading Documents, Document Size Sensing, and help the cus- Refer to the User Guide, Reducing/Enlarging Copies, and help the customer to under-
tomer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. stand how to avoid recurrence of the problem.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-27 3-528 Platen Document Size Unknown RAP, 3-529
3-530 AMS NG RAP 3-535 Whole Image NG RAP
The 3-530 Fault Code indicates that the result of the magnification calculation was outside of The 3-535 Fault Code indicates that the whole image did not fit to the paper.
the range of 25%~400%.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions Refer to the User Guide in this procedure.
Procedure
Procedure PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-535 is still declared.
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-530 is still declared. Y N
Y N Refer to the User Guide, Reducing/Enlarging Copies, and help the customer to under-
Refer to the User Guide, Reducing/Enlarging Copies, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem.
stand how to avoid recurrence of the problem.

3-530 AMS NG RAP, 3-535 Whole Image NG RAP 2-28 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-536 Platen No Original 3-537 Repeat NG - Number RAP
The 3-536 Fault Code indicates that no original is on the platen. The 3-537 Fault Code indicates that the specified number of images did not fit on the paper.

Procedure Procedure
Y N Y N
Refer to the User Guide, Reducing/Enlarging Copies, and help the customer to under- Refer to the User Guide, Copying Several Documents onto One Copy, and help the cus-
stand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. tomer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-29 3-536 Platen No Original, 3-537 Repeat NG - Num-
3-538 Repeat NG-MAG RAP 3-539 MPE MAG NG RAP
The 3-538 Fault Code indicates that no image fit to paper. The 3-539 Fault Code indicates that magnification of the output was specified at beyond 400%
at continuous enlargement copying mode.
Initial Actions
Refer to the User Guide in this procedure. Initial Actions
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-538 is still declared. Procedure
Y N PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-539 is still declared.
Refer to the User Guide, Reducing/Enlarging Copies, and help the customer to under- Y N
stand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Refer to the User Guide, Reducing/Enlarging Copies, and help the customer to under-
stand how to avoid recurrence of the problem.

3-538 Repeat NG-MAG RAP, 3-539 MPE MAG NG RAP 2-30 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-541 APS NG RAP 3-542 AMS NG RAP
The 3-541 Fault Code indicates that the tray corresponding to the standard size of paper The 3-542 Fault Code indicates that the calculated magnification was beyond the range of
slightly larger than the size of the image did not exist while executing the APS. 400%~25%.

Refer to the User Guide during this procedure. Refer to the User Guide in this procedure.
Procedure Procedure
Y N Y N
Refer to the User Guide, Selecting a Paper Tray, and help the customer to understand Refer to the User Guide, Reducing/Enlarging Copies, and help the customer to under-
how to avoid recurrence of the problem. stand how to avoid recurrence of the problem.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-31 3-541 APS NG RAP, 3-542 AMS NG RAP
3-543 Rotation NG RAP 3-550 Original Patch Not Exist RAP
The 3-543 Fault Code indicates that the rotation could not be done because the magnification The 3-550 Fault Code indicates that there was no position-detection patch on the original while
exceeded 100%. executing an automatic “KAICHO” revision.

Procedure Procedure
Y N Y N
Refer to the User Guide, Document Rotation, and help the customer to understand how to Refer to the User Guide, Loading Documents, and help the customer to understand how
avoid recurrence of the problem. to avoid recurrence of the problem.

3-543 Rotation NG RAP, 3-550 Original Patch Not Ex- 2-32 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-560 Copy Limit Exceed RAP 3-580 IOT System Timing Fail RAP
The 3-560 Fault Code indicates that it reached the pre-set copy limit value (specified for/by the This Fault Code is declared when the machine was not able to receive the print from/against
User Password at the Auditron Administrator Mode) during the copying operation. the Hint within the specified time.

Refer to the User Guide in this procedure. • Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure:
Procedure Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-560 is still declared. PO/PO the machine. Fault Code is still declared.
Y N Y N
Refer to the User Guide, Using the Auditron Administration Mode, and help the Customer/ Inspect the IOT CPU PWB, and the IOT NVM PWB for loose connections or any obvious
Auditron Administrator to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction.
Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2). Perform the following:
• Replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-33 3-560 Copy Limit Exceed RAP, 3-580 IOT System
3-581 Dead Cycle Fail RAP 3-600 Billing Adjust NVM Failure RAP
The Dead Cycle continued for more than two minutes. This Fault Code is declared when after the job ended, the billing mismatch occurred, and auto-
matic correction implemented.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure:
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code is still declared. Procedure
Y N PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-600 is still declared.
Inspect the IOT CPU PWB and the IOT NVM PWB for loose connections or any obvious Y N
electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB and the IOT NVM PWB
for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction.
• Replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2) Enter [DC122, Failure History]. If this failure has occurred many times, replace the IOT NVM
• Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) PWB (PL 9.2).

3-581 Dead Cycle Fail RAP, 3-600 Billing Adjust NVM 2-34 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-601 Billing Adjust IOSS Failure RAP 3-602 Billing Adjust Half-Tone Failure RAP
After the job ended, the billing mismatch occurred, and automatic correction implemented. This Fault Code is declared when after the job ended, the billing mismatch occurred, and auto-
matic correction was implemented.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure:
Procedure
PO/PO the machine and make a billable copy. Fault Code 3-601 is still declared. Procedure
Y N PO/PO the machine, and make a billable copy. Fault Code 3-602 is still declared.
If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB and the IOT NVM PWB Y N
for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB and the Half Tone PWB
for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction.
Enter [DC122, Failure History]. If this failure has occurred many times, replace the IOT CPU
PWB (PL 9.2). Enter [DC122, Failure History], If this failure has occurred many times, replace the Half-Tone
PWB (PL 9.2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-35 3-601 Billing Adjust IOSS Failure RAP, 3-602 Billing
3-601 Billing Adjust IOSS Failure RAP, 3-602 Billing 2-36 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
OF4-001 Main Motor RAP – P/J417B-5, Logic (L)
– P/J417B-4, +2.5 VDC
This RAP is used to repair the Main Motor and Drum Motor circuit failures when directed by
another RAP. – P/J417B-3, Logic (L)
– P/J417B-2, Logic (L)
Initial Actions • Go to Flag 4 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open /short circuit.
• Refer to BSD 4.1, Main and Drum Drive Control, in the following procedure: • Replace the Main Motor (PL 1.2).
• Check the Drive Mechanism for damage, jams, and obstructions. • Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure Perform the following:

• While in [04-007] Component Control and the Main Motor is running, check for the follow-
Go to Flag 1 BSD 4.1 and check for +5 VDC at P/J42-14 on the Distribution PWB. +5 VDC is
ing conditions at
measured at P/J42-14 on the Distribution PWB.
– P/J417B-5, Logic (L)
Y N
Perform the following: – P/J417B-4, +2.5 VDC
• Go to Flag 1 BSD 4.1 and check for a short/open circuit. – P/J417B-3, Logic (L)
• Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. – P/J417B-2, Logic (L)
• Go to Flag 4 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open /short circuit.
• Replace the Main Motor (PL 1.2).
• Enter DC330 004-007 Main Motor, Press Start and Stop.
• Check for a change of state from (L) to +5 VDC at P/J417B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB.
The voltage at P/J417B-5 switched between (L) and +5 VDC at P/J417B-5 on the IOT
Drive PWB.
Y N
• Go to Flag 3 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open/short circuit.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 4.1 and check for +24 VDC at P/J42-11 and 12, on the Distribution PWB.
+24 VDC is measured at P/J42 -11 and 12, on the Distribution PWB.
Y N
• Go to Flag 2 on BSD 4.1 check for an open/short circuit.
Enter DC330 004-007 Main Motor. Press Start. The Main Motor runs.
Y N
Check for Logic (L) at P/J417B-5. Logic (L) is measured at P/J417B-5.
Y N
• Go to on Flag 4 BSD 4.1 and check for an open/short circuit.

• While exercising [04-021] in Component Control, check for a change of state on the
Main Motor On line P/J417B-5.
• While in [04-021] Component Control and the Main Motor is running, check for the
following conditions at
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-37 OF4-001 Main Motor RAP
A
OF4-002 Drum Motor RAP – P/J417B-17, +2.5 VDC
– P/J417B-16, Logic (L)
This RAP is used to repair the Main Motor and Drum Motor circuit failures when directed by
another RAP. – P/J417B-15, Logic (L)
– P/J417B-14, Logic (L)
Initial Actions • Go to Flag 8 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open /short circuit.
• Refer to BSD 4.1, Main and Drum Drive Control, in the following procedure: • Replace the Drum Motor (PL 1.1).
• Check the Drive Mechanism for damage, jams, and obstructions. • Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure Perform the following:

• While in [04-021] Component Control and the Drum Motor is running, check for the follow-
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 4.1 and check for +5 VDC at P/J42-4 on the Distribution PWB. +5 VDC
ing conditions at
is measured at P/J42-4 on the Distribution PWB.
– P/J417B-18, Logic (L)
Y N
Perform the following: – P/J417B-17, +2.5 VDC
• Go to Flag 5 on BSD 4.1 and check for a short/open circuit. – P/J417B-16, Logic (L)
• Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. – P/J417B-15, Logic (L)
– P/J417B-14, Logic (L)
• Go to Flag 8 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open /short circuit.
• Enter DC330 004-021 Drum Motor. Press Start and Stop.
• Replace the Drum Motor (PL 1.1).
• Check for a change of state from (L) to +5 VDC at P/J417B-18 on the IOT Drive PWB.
The voltage at P/J417B-18 switched between (L) and +5 VDC on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 4.1 and check for +24 VDC at P/J42-2 on the Distribution PWB. +24
VDC is measured at P/J42-2 on the Distribution PWB.
Y N
• Go to Flag 6 on BSD 4.1 and check for a short/open circuit.
Enter DC330 004-021 Drum Motor. The Drum Motor runs.

Y N
Check for Logic (L) at P/J417B-18 Logic (L) is measured at P/J417B-18
Y N

• While exercising DC330 004-021 Drum Motor, check for a change of state on the
Drum Motor On line P/J417B.
• While in [04-021] Component Control and the Drum Motor is running, check for the
following conditions at
– P/J417B-18, Logic (L)
A
OF4-002 Drum Motor RAP 2-38 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
5-110 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam RAP Y N
Check the belt on the DADF Feed Motor. Repair or replace the Belt (PL 12.4) as required.
The DADF Registration Sensor did not actuate within 650 msec after the DADF Transport
Motor was energized. Observe the Set Gate Fingers. Enter dC330 005-012 Set Gate Solenoid Close. Press Start.
Enter dC330 005-011 Set Gate Solenoid Open. Press Start. The Set Gate fingers rise up,
Initial Actions then fall back.
Y N
Check for the following:
Enter dC330 005-012 Set Gate Solenoid Close. Press Start. The Set Gate Solenoid
• Obstructions in the document transportation path.
energizes.
• Contamination on the DADF Registration Sensor. Y N
• Sufficient normal force at the Nudger Rolls +24 VDC is measured between P/J586-1and P/J586-2 on the Set Gate Sole-
• Nudger Rolls and Feed Rolls that are glazed or contaminated noid.
Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J580 are seated correctly on the DADF Control
PWB and DADF Registration Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. +24 VDC is measured between P/J598-2 and P/J598-1 on the DADF Con-
trol PWB.
• Refer to BSD 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 and 5.6 for the following procedure.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J550-3 and P/J550-1 on the DADF
Procedure Control PWB.
Enter dC330 005-110 Regi Sensor. Press Start. Block the DADF Registration Sensor. The Y N
display changed from L to H. Go to the IIT/IPS +24VDC Wirenet and the DC COM (24V RET)
Y N Wirenet. Check the wires between P/J550-2 and-1 on the DADF
With paper at the DADF Registration Sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/ Control PWB and P/J35-1 and -2 on the IIT/IPS LVPS, and the wires
J599-2 on the DADF Control PWB. between P/J550-4 and-3 on the DADF Control PWB, and P/J35-5
Y N and -6 on the IIT/IPS LVPS for an open circuit.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J599-1 and P/J599-3 on DADF Control PWB.
Y N Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 5.3. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If
the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 5.2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 5 on BSD 5.3. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires
are good, replace the DADF Registration Sensor (PL 12.5). Replace the Set Gate Solenoid (PL 12.5).
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Enter dC330 005-011 Set Gate Solenoid Open. Press Start. The Set Gate Solenoid
deenergizes.
Enter dC330 005-040 Feed Motor. Press Start. DADF Feed Motor cycles. Y N
Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J598-2 and P/J598-1 on the DADF Control
+24 VDC is measured between P/J598-7 and P/J598-8 on the DADF Control PWB PWB.
with the motor on. Y N
Y N Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.2. Check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good,
replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3) +24 VDC is measured between P/J586-1 and P/J586-3 on the Set Gate Sole-
noid.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J588-1 and P/J588-2 on the DADF Feed Motor Y N
with the motor on. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 5.2 and check the wires for an open circuit or a short cir-
Y N cuit. If the wires are good, replace the Set Gate Solenoid (PL 12.5).
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.2. Check the wires for an open circuit.
Replace the Set Gate Solenoid (PL 12.5).
Check the in line fuse for an open circuit. If the fuse is good, replace the DADF Feed
Motor (PL 12.4) Perform the following:
• Check the Solenoid for binding.
Feed rolls turn. • Check the Set Gate Fingers for binding.
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-39 5-110 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam
A
• Replace the Set Gate Solenoid (PL 12.5). 5-111 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam RAP
• Obstructions in the document path. The DADF Registration Sensor did not actuate within 640 msec. after the DADF Transport
• Sufficient normal force at the Nudger Rolls Motor was energized while feeding the original.
• Nudger Rolls and Feed Rolls that are glazed or contaminated
Initial Actions
• Contamination on the DADF Registration Sensor.
• Contamination on the DADF Belt.
• Contamination on the Platen Glass.
PWB and DADF Registration Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
• Refer to BSD 5.1, 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 for the following procedure.
Procedure
The trail edge of the document is past the Registration Sensor.
Y N
Enter dC330 005-055 Belt Motor CW. DADF Belt Motor energizes.
Y N
Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Check the Fuse (F1) on the DADF Control PWB.
The fuse is good.
Y N
Install a new fuse. If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Belt Motor (PL
12.6). If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J595-2, P/J595-3, P/J595-4 P/

J595-5 and GND on the DADF Control PWB.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J595-1 and GND.
Y N
Y N
Y N
Go to the IIT/IPS +24VDC Wirenet and the DC COM (24V RET)
Wirenet. Check the wires between P/J550-2 and-1 on the
DADF Control PWB and P/J35-1 and -2 on the IIT/IPS LVPS,
and the wires between P/J550-4 and-3 on the DADF Control
PWB, and P/J35-5 and -6 on the IIT/IPS LVPS for an open cir-
cuit.
Ensure that Fuse F1 on the DADF Control PWB is good. If the Fuse
is good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 5.1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If
the wires are good, replace the DADF Interlock Switch (PL 12.3).
A B C D
5-110 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam 2-40 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C D
Enter dC330 005-055 Belt Motor CW. Approximately +23 VDC is measured 5-112 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam (during
between pins 2, 3, 4, and 5 of P/J595 and GND
Y N Original Reverse) RAP
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
The DADF Registration Sensor did not actuate within 500 msec. after the DADF Transport
Motor was energized during reversal of the original.
Replace the DADF Belt Motor (PL 12.6).
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good,
Initial Actions
replace the DADF Belt Motor (PL 12.6). Check for the following:
The Platen Belt runs, without generating excessive noise. • Clean Document Belt
Y N • Refer to BSD 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 for the following procedure.
Check the Platen Belt and the Platen Belt Drive components. Repair or replace as
required. If the problem continues perform ADJ 12.3.3.
Procedure
Check the following parts for wear slipping, damage or contamination. Enter dC330 005-056 Belt Motor CCW. The DADF Document Transport is moving in the
• Feed Roll Assembly reverse direction.
• Registration Roll Y N
• Registration Pinch Roll
required. If the problem continues perform ADJ 12.3.3. If the problem continues replace
• Document Belt the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Belt Motor
(PL 12.6).
Enter dC330 005-110 Regi Sensor. Press Start. Block the DADF Registration Sensor. The
display changed from L to H. Check the following parts for wear, slipping, or damage.
Y N • Duplex Drive Roll 1
With paper at the DADF Registration Sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/
• Duplex Drive Roll 2
J599-2 on the DADF Control PWB.
Y N • Registration Roll
+5 VDC is measured between P/J599-1 and P/J599-3 on the DADF Control • Registration Pinch Roll
PWB. • Document Belt
Y N If the above items are good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 12.5).
the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 5 on BSD 5.3. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires
are good, replace the DADF Registration Sensor (PL 12.5).
Check the following parts for wear slipping, damage or contamination.

• Feed Roll Assembly
• Registration Roll
• Registration Pinch Roll
• Document Belt
If the above items are good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 12.5).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-41 5-111 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam
5-113 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam 5-115 DADF Exit Sensor ON Dynamic Jam RAP
(during Original Reverse) RAP The DADF Exit Sensor did not actuate within 800 msec. after the DADF Transport Motor was
energized, while exchanging or discharging the original.
The DADF Registration Sensor did not actuate within 1,150 msec. after the DADF Transport
Motor was energized during reversal of the original.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions Check for the following:
Check for the following: • Obstructions in the document transportation path.
• Obstructions in the document transportation path. • Contamination on the DADF Exit Sensor.
• Clean Document Belt • Ensure that connectors P/J595, P/J599 and P/J589 are seated correctly on the DADF
• Refer to BSD 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 for the following procedure. Control PWB and DADF Exit Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-056 Belt Motor CCW. The DADF Document Transport is moving in the
Procedure
reverse direction. The lead edge of the document is past the Exit Sensor.
Y N Y N
Check the Platen Belt and the Platen Belt Drive components. Repair or replace as Enter dC330 005-081 Exit Motor. The DADF Exit Motor energizes.
required. If the problem continues perform ADJ 12.3.3. If the problem continues replace Y N
the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Belt Motor Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Check the Fuse (F2) on the DADF Control PWB.
(PL 12.6). The fuse is good.
Y N
Check the following parts for wear, slipping, or damage. Install a new fuse. If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL
• Duplex Drive Roll 1 12.9). If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
• Duplex Drive Roll 2 Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J596-2, P/J596-3, P/J596-4 P/
• Registration Roll J596-5 and GND. on the DADF Control PWB.
• Registration Pinch Roll Y N
• Document Belt +24 VDC is measured between P/J596-1 and GND on the DADF Control
If the above items are good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 12.5). PWB.
Y N
Ensure that Fuse F2 on the DADF Control PWB is good. If the Fuse is
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 5.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9).
Enter dC330 005-081 Exit Motor. Press Start. Approximately +17 VDC is mea-
sured between pins 2, 3, 4, and 5 of P/J596 and GND on the DADF Control
PWB.
Y N
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). If the problem continues, replace
the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9).
Replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9).
required. If the problem continues perform ADJ 12.3.3. If the problem continues check the
following parts for wear, slipping excessive contamination or damage.
• Exit Roll Drive Belt
A
5-113 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam 2-42 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
• Exit Roll 5-116 DADF Exit Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam RAP
• Exit Pinch Roll
• Document Belt The DADF Exit Sensor did not deactuate within 650 msec after it was actuated.
Platen Glass
Initial Actions
Enter dC330 005-115 Exit Sensor. Press Start. Block the DADF Exit Sensor. The display Check for the following:
changed from L to H. • Obstructions in the document transportation path.
Y N • Contamination on the DADF Exit Sensor.
With paper at the DADF Exit Sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-19 on • Ensure that connectors P/J595, P/J599 and P/J589 are seated correctly on the DADF
the DADF Control PWB.
Control PWB and DADF Exit Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J589-1 and P/J589-3 on the DADF Exit Sen-
sor.
Y N Procedure
Go to Flag 3 BSD 5.5. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If The trail edge of the document is past the Exit Sensor.
the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Y N
Enter dC330 005-081 Exit Motor. The DADF Exit Motor energizes.
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, Y N
replace the DADF Exit Sensor (PL 12.9). Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Check the Fuse (F2) on the DADF Control PWB.
The fuse is good.
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Y N
Install a new fuse. If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Exit Motor. If the
Check the following parts for wear, slipping excessive contamination or damage. fuse blows again, replace the DADF Control PWB.
• Exit Roll Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between pins 2, 3, 4, 5 of P/J596 and GND.
on the DADF Control PWB.
• Exit Pinch Roll
Y N
• Document Belt
+24 VDC is measured between P/J596-1 and GND on the DADF Control
• Platen Glass PWB.
If the above items are good and free from excessive contamination, replace the DADF Exit Y N
Sensor (PL 12.9). Ensure that Fuse F2 on the DADF Control PWB is good. If the Fuse is
good, replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9).
Enter dC330 005-081 Exit Motor. The Press Start. Approximately +17 VDC is
measured between pins 2, 3, 4, and 5 of P/J596 and GND on the DADF Control
PWB.
Y N
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). If the problem continues, replace
the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9).
Replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9).
required. If the problem continues perform ADJ 12.3.3. If the problem continues check the
following parts for wear, slipping excessive contamination or damage.
• Exit Roll
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-43 5-115 DADF Exit Sensor ON Dynamic Jam RAP, 5-
A
• Exit Pinch Roll 5-189 No Object Sensor Static Jam RAP
• Document Belt
The Control Logic has detected the document Handler was raised while running a DADF job.
Enter dC330 005-115 Exit Sensor. Press Start. Block the DADF Exit Sensor. The display
changed from L to H. Initial Actions
Y N Ensure that then document handler is fully closed.
With paper at the DADF Exit Sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-19 on
the DADF Control PWB.
Y N
Procedure
+5 VDC is measured between P/J589-1 and P/J589-3 on the DADF Exit Sen- If the document Handler was not opened during a DADF job, go to 6-300 Platen Cover Open
sor. RAP to troubleshoot the Platen Open Switch.
Y N
Go to Flag 3 BSD 5.5. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If
the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good,
replace the DADF Exit Sensor (PL 12.9).
Check the following parts for wear slipping or damage.

• Exit Roll
• Exit Pinch Roll
• Document Belt
• Platen Glass
If the above items are good and free from excessive contamination, replace the DADF Exit
Sensor (PL 12.9).

5-116 DADF Exit Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam RAP, 5- 2-44 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
5-195 No Mix - Size Mismatch Jam RAP 5-196 DADF Document Sensor Static Jam RAP
The DADF Control PWB detected different sized documents when the mixed sized feature has The DADF Document Sensor detected paper when power was switched on.
not been selected.
Initial Actions
Procedure Check for the following:
This is a message Fault and requires operator actions. If this Fault occurs and the originals are • Refer to BSD 5.2 for the following procedure.
all the same size, check that the Side Guide can be properly adjusted against the stack. If so, • Contamination on the DADF Document Sensor.
go to the 5-274 Original Size Sensor Fail RAP.
PWB and DADF Document Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
• Ensure that the DADF Entrance Tray is free of any paper or debris.
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-102 Document Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J599-5 and GND on the DADF Control PWB.
Y N
good, replace the DADF Document Sensor (PL 12.5).
The problem appears to be intermittent. Replace the DADF Document Sensor (PL 12.5). If the
problem continues, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-45 5-195 No Mix - Size Mismatch Jam RAP, 5-196
5-197 DADF Registration Sensor Static Jam RAP 5-198 DADF Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP
The DADF Registration Sensor has detected the presence of a document after the power was The DADF Exit Sensor has detected the presence of a document after the power was switched
switched on and the DADF Top Cover was closed. on and the DADF Top Cover was closed.

Check for the following: Check for the following:
• Ensure that no documents remain in the DADF. • Ensure that no documents remain in the DADF.
• Contamination on the DADF Registration Sensor. • Contamination on the DADF Exit Sensor.
• Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J580 are seated correctly on the DADF Control • Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J589 are seated correctly on the DADF Control
PWB and DADF Registration Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. PWB and DADF Exit Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
• Refer to BSD 5.3 for the following procedure. • Refer to BSD 5.5 for the following procedure.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 005-110 Regi Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Enter dC330 005-115 Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is L.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J599-2 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J599-19 and GND on the DADF Control PWB.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.3.Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.5.Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is
good, replace the DADF Registration Sensor (PL 12.5). good, replace the DADF Exit Sensor (PL 12.9).
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
The problem appears to be intermittent. Replace the DADF Registration Sensor (PL 12.5). If The problem appears to be intermittent. Replace the DADF Exit Sensor (PL 12.9). If the prob-
the problem continues, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). lem continues, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).

5-197 DADF Registration Sensor Static Jam RAP, 5- 2-46 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
5-199 DADF Duplex Sensor Static Jam RAP 5-274 Original Size Sensor Fail RAP
The DADF Duplex has detected the presence of a document after the power was switched on The Control Logic has detected a DADF Size Sensor 1 or DADF Size Sensor 2 failure or a
and the DADF Top Cover was closed. DADF Ram Test failure after switching the power on or placing the originals in the Entrance
Tray.
Refer to BSDs 5.3 for the following procedure.
Initial Actions
Check for the following: • Ensure that the Document Handler is free of any paper or debris.
• Ensure that no documents remain in the DADF. • Ensure that connectors P/J599, P/J582 and P/J583 are seated correctly on the DADF
• Contamination on the DADF Duplex Sensor. Control PWB and DADF Size Sensors 1 and 2, and there are no obvious crimped or bro-
• Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J589 are seated correctly on the DADF Control ken wires.
PWB and DADF Exit Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. • Refer to BSD 5.3 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Procedure Enter dC330 005-150 #1 Size Sensor. Press Start. Block DADF Size Sensor 1. The display
Enter dC330 005-119 Dup Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. changed from H to L.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J599-14 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-8 on the DADF
Y N Control PWB.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 5.3. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is Y N
good, replace the DADF Duplex Sensor (PL 12.7). With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J582-2 on DADF
Size Sensor 1.
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J582-1 and P/J582-3 on the DADF Size Sen-
The problem appears to be intermittent. Replace the DADF Duplex Sensor (PL 12.7). If the sor 1.
problem continues, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 5.3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the
wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Replace the DADF Size Sensor 1 (Rear) (PL 12.5).
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 5.3 and check the wire for an open circuit.
Enter dC330 005-151 #2 Size Sensor. Press Start. Block DADF Size Sensor 2. The display
changed from H to L.
Y N
With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-11 on the DADF
Control PWB.
Y N
With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J583-2 on the
DADF Size Sensor 2.
Y N
sor 2.
Y N
A B C D
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-47 5-199 DADF Duplex Sensor Static Jam RAP, 5-274
A B C D
Replace the DADF Size Sensor 2 (Front) (PL 12.5). 5-275 DADF RAM Check Fail RAP
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 5.3 and check the wire for an open circuit. The Control Logic has detected a DADF Size Sensor 1 or DADF Size Sensor 2 failure or a
DADF Ram Test failure after switching the power on or placing the originals in the Entrance
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Tray.
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Initial Actions

• Ensure that the Document Handler is free of any paper or debris.
• Ensure that connectors P/J599, P/J582 and P/J583 are seated correctly on the DADF
Control PWB and DADF Size Sensors 1 and 2, and there are no obvious crimped or bro-
ken wires.
Procedure
Y N
Control PWB.
Y N
With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J582-2 on DADF
Size Sensor 1.
Y N
sor 1.
Y N
Replace the DADF Size Sensor 1 (Rear) (PL 12.5).
Y N
Control PWB.
Y N
DADF Size Sensor 2.
Y N
sor 2.
Y N
A B C D
5-274 Original Size Sensor Fail RAP, 5-275 DADF 2-48 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C D
Replace the DADF Size Sensor 2 (Front) (PL 12.5). 5-301 Top Cover Open RAP
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 5.3 and check the wire for an open circuit. The DADF Control PWB detected a signal from the Top Cover Front and/or Rear Interlock
Switches indicating that the DADF Top Cover is open at the start of print or during print run.
Initial Actions
• The magnetic latches or actuators for the top cover are not damaged or loose.
• The magnet plate on the top cover fully contacts the magnetic latches.
Procedure
Open the Top Cover. Enter dC330 005-301 Top Cover Interlock Switch. Actuate both Top
Cover Switches. The display changes. from H to L
Y N
Go to BSD 5.1. Check both Interlock Switches with a meter. Ensure that there is continuity
across the switch contacts when the switches are closed. Replace any defective switches
(PL 12.2). If the switches are good, go to Flag 1, Flag 2, Flag 3, and Flag 4 on BSD 5.1,
and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control
PWB (PL 12.3).
Check that the Top Cover Interlock Switches are correctly installed. If the problem continues,
replace both interlock switches (PL 12.2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-49 5-275 DADF RAM Check Fail RAP, 5-301 Top Cover
5-500 DADF No Originals RAP 5-501 DADF Document Size Irregular RAP
The DADF Control PWB detected that the original was removed from the Entrance Tray after The Control Logic has detected that a automatically-detected size of the original was irregular.
the DADF started operating.
Initial Actions
Return the removed originals to the Entrance Tray and attempt to run the job again. If no origi- • Ensure that the Document Handler is free of any paper or debris.
nals were removed, proceed with this RAP. • Ensure that connectors P/J599, P/J582 and P/J583 are seated correctly on the DADF
Control PWB and DADF Size Sensors 1 and 2, and there are no obvious crimped or bro-
ken wires.
• The Side Guide can be properly adjusted against the stack.
• Contamination on the DADF Document Sensor.
• Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J581 are seated correctly on the DADF Control Procedure
PWB and DADF Document Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Y N
Procedure With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-8 on the DADF
Enter dC330 005-102 Document Sensor. Press Start. Block the DADF Document Sensor. Control PWB.
The display changes from H to L. Y N
Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J582-2 on DADF
Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-5 on the DADF Control PWB. Size Sensor 1.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J581-1 and P/J581-3 on the DADF Document There is +5 VDC between P/J582-1 and P/J582-3 on the DADF Size Sen-
Sensor. sor 1.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 5.2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the harness Go to Flag 6 on BSD 5.3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the
and connectors are OK, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 5.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, Replace the DADF Size Sensor 1 (Rear) (PL 12.5).
replace the DADF Document Sensor (PL 12.5).
Replace the DADF Document Sensor (PL 12.5). If the problem continues, replace the DADF
Control PWB (PL 12.3). Enter dC330 005-151 #2 Size Sensor. Press Start. Block DADF Size Sensor 2. The display
Y N
Control PWB.
Y N
DADF Size Sensor 2.
Y N
sor 2.
Y N
Replace the DADF Size Sensor 2 (Front) (PL 12.5).

A B C
5-500 DADF No Originals RAP, 5-501 DADF Document 2-50 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 5.3 and check the wire for an open circuit. 5-503 Miss Doc Reset RAP
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). The Missing Document Reset fault code (05-503) is displayed when the Control Logic has
detected that after counting and returning the originals, there is a mismatch between the num-
Replace the following until the problem is resolved ber of pages counted and the actual number of pages.
• DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
• DADF Size Sensor 1 (Rear) (PL 12.5) Procedure
• DADF Size Sensor 2 (Front) (PL 12.5). • Ensure that the Document Handler is free of any paper or debris.
• Remove and reinsert the originals in the DADF Entrance Tray.
• Run the job again.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-51 5-501 DADF Document Size Irregular RAP, 5-503
5-999 ADF Document Misfeed RAP OF5-1 DADF Jam Recovery RAP
A document misfeed occurred during or after ADF Jam Recovery. Jam Recovery problems occur when a jam clearance activity results in the complete re-copying
of a set of documents, instead of resuming the copy job at the point where the jam occurred.
Procedure
Procedure
• Check the set of originals for torn or damaged documents. Replace or recreate the origi-
Check the Tag Matrix for TAG P19. If the Tag is not marked off, install the Tag 19 DADF Soft-
nal as required.
ware Upgrade to V2.2 Kit, by replacing U2 on the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3) with the
• Remove and reinsert the originals in the ADF.
EProm contained in the kit.
• Run the job again.

5-999 ADF Document Misfeed RAP, OF5-1 DADF Jam 2-52 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
6-275 Angle Sensor Fail RAP Go to Flag 2 on 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are
OK, replace the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2).
The Control Logic has detected the Platen Angle Sensor is not in the correct state for the Job
Programed. +5VDC is measured between P/J515-4 and GND on the Pre IPS PWB.
Y N
Initial Actions Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires
are OK, replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
• Refer to BSD 6.2 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
• Check the Document Handler for dirt or debris.
Clean and check the Platen Angle Sensor for damage. If the problem continues, replace
• Check that the Document Handler Cover opens and closes without binding. the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2).
Procedure Clean and check the Platen Angle Sensor for damage. If the problem continues, replace the
Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2)
Close the Document Handler Cover. Enter dC330 006-301 Angle Sensor. Press Start. The
Display is HIGH.
Y N
Open the Document Handler Cover. The Display is Low.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J531-1 and P/J531-3 on the Platen Angle Sen-
sor.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J515-6 and P/J515-2 on the Pre IPS PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If
the wires are OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB. (PL 3.5).
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the
wires are OK, replace the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2).
+5VDC is measured between P/J515-4 to GND on the Pre IPS PWB.

Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 6.2 and check the wire for an open or short. If the wire is
OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
Clean and check the Platen Angle Sensor for damage. If the problem continues,
replace the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2).
Block and unblock the Platen Angle Sensor. The Display changes.
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 6.2 and check the wire for an open or short circuit.
Clean and check the Platen Angle Sensor for damage. If the problem continues, replace
the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2)
Open the Document Handler Cover. The Display is Low.

Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J531-1 and P/J531-3 on the Platen Angle Sensor.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J515-6 and P/J515-2 on the Pre IPS PWB.
Y N
wires are OK, replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-53 6-275 Angle Sensor Fail RAP
6-277 IISS - DADF Communications Fault RAP 6-300 Platen Cover Open RAP
The Pre IPS PWB detected a communication fault between the DADF Control PWB and the A fault code for Platen Cover Open appears even when the Platen Cover is physically closed.
Pre IPS PWB.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Refer to BSD 6.2 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
• Refer to BSD 3.3 in the following procedure. • Check that the Platen Cover closes properly.
• Ensure that P/J551 on the DADF Control PWB is firmly seated.
• Ensure that J543B on the communication line is firmly seated. Procedure
Close the Platen Cover. Enter dC330 006-300 Platen Interlock Switch (IISS). Press Start.
Procedure The Display is H.
PO/PO the machine. The Fault Code is still declared. Y N
Y N Manually actuate the Platen Open Switch. The display changes.
Inspect the PRE IPS PWB the MEM SYS PWB, the POST IPS PWB for loose connec- Y N
tions or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Disconnect P/J530. +5VDC is measured between P/J515-3 and GND on the
Pre IPS PWB.
+5VDC is measured between P/J550-5 and P/J550-6 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N
Y N Replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
Go to the +5VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Reconnect P/J530. Open the Platen Cover. The voltage at P/J515-3 goes to less
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 3.3 and check the wiring for an open circuit. If the wiring is OK, then than +1 VDC.
replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). If the problem continues, replace the following: Y N
• Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5) Go to Flag 4, Flag 5, and Flag 6 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open
• MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5) circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Platen Open Switch (PL 3.2).
• Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5)

Check the Platen Open Switch for intermittent operation. If the switch is good,
replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5). If the problem continues, replace the Platen
Open Switch (PL 3.2).
Check the Platen Open Switch for alignment and /or damage. If the Fault continues,
replace the Platen Open Switch (PL 3.2).
Open the Platen Cover The display is L

Y N
Check the Platen Open Switch for alignment and /or damage. If the Fault continues,
replace the Platen Open Switch (PL 3.2).
Check the Platen Open Switch for alignment and /or damage. Go to Flag 4, Flag 5, on BSD 6.2
and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Platen Open
Switch (PL 3.2).

6-277 IISS - DADF Communications Fault RAP, 6-300 2-54 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
6-312 Memory Hotline Fail RAP 6-340 Pre IPS RAM Test Error RAP
The Control Logic has detected a communication error between the POST IPS PWB and the The Pre IPS PWB Ram Test detected a failure at power on.
MEM SYS PWB.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Refer to BSD 6.7 in this procedure:
• Refer to BSD 3.2 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: • Ensure that the PRE IPS PWB, the MEM SYS PWB and the Post IPS PWB are firmly
seated.
• Check that P/J560 and P/J561 on the MEM SYS PWB are seated.
• Check that the Option Memory PWBs are fully seated on the MEM SYS PWB.
Procedure
Procedure PO/PO the machine. The fault code is still declared.
Y N
PO/PO the machine. The fault code is still declared.
Inspect the PRE IPS PWB the MEM SYS PWB, the POST IPS PWB for loose connec-
Y N
tions or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction.
Inspect the PRE IPS PWB the MEM SYS PWB, the POST IPS PWB for loose connec-
tions or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Perform the following:
• Replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
Replace the following:
• Replace the MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5).
• Option Memory PWBs (PL 3.5) on at a time.
• Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
• MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5).
• POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
• Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-55 6-312 Memory Hotline Fail RAP, 6-340 Pre IPS RAM
6-345 Pre IPS EEPROM Failure RAP 6-355 IPS Fan Fail RAP
A Failure was detected when writing to the NVM and a communication failure with the The IIT Driver PWB detected a control error caused by an IPS Fan failure. This error is not
EEPROM when writing into the Pre IPS PWB NVM. detected during document scan.

• Refer to BSD 3.3 PWB Communications (DADF) in this procedure: Refer to BSD 6.1 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
• Ensure that P/J551 on the DADF Control PWB is firmly seated.
Procedure
Procedure Enter dC330 006-013 Cooling Fan High Speed. Press Start. The IPS Fan rotates.
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code is still declared. Y N
Y N Press Stop. Enter dC330 006-003 Cooling Fan Low Speed. Press Start. The IPS Fan
Inspect the PRE IPS PWB the MEM SYS PWB, the POST IPS PWB for loose connec- rotates.
tions or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Y N
+3.5VDC is measured between P/J524-4 and GND on the IIT Driver PWB.
Perform the following: Y N
• Replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Go to Flag 5 on the BSD 6.1 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. If
• Replace the MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5). the wire is OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
• Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5).

+24VDC is pulsed between P/J523-2 and P/J523-4 on the IIT Drive PWB.
Y N
Replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2).
Press Stop. Select [06013]. Press Start. +5VDC is measured between P/J524-3
and GND on the IIT Driver PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 on the BSD 6.1 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. If
the wire is OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
+24VDC is measure between P/J523-1 and P/J523-4 on the IIT Driver PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires
are OK, replace the IPS Fan (PL 3.2).
Press Stop. Select [06-013]. Press Start. +5VDC is measured between P/J524-3 and
GND on the IIT Driver PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 on the BSD 6.1 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. If the
wire is OK, replace the IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
+24VDC is measured between P/J523-1 and P/J523-4 on the IIT Driver PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are
OK, replace the IPS Fan (PL 3.2).
+5VDC is measured between P/J515-16 and GND on the Pre IPS PWB.

6-345 Pre IPS EEPROM Failure RAP, 6-355 IPS Fan 2-56 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Y N 6-360 Carriage Position Failure RAP
Replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
The Control Logic detected the Carriage out of position during Carriage Initialization
+ 5VDC is measured at P/J523-3 and GND on the Driver PWB.
Y N Initial Actions
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 6.1 and check the wire for an open or short. If the wire is OK, replace • Refer to BSD 6.3 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
the IPS Fan (PL 3.2). • Check the Carriage assembly for wear, dirt and debris, and misalignment of the compo-
nents.
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, • Verify that the IIT Regi Sensor is correctly aligned and free from contamination.
replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2).
• Verify that the Carriage and Carriage Cable are installed correctly and free of damage.
Procedure
Go to the 6-361 Scan Initialize Regi Sensor Failure RAP.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-57 6-355 IPS Fan Fail RAP, 6-360 Carriage Position
A
6-361 Scan Initialize Regi Sensor Failure RAP Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 6.3 and check the wires for an open circuit or short circuit. If the
The IIT Driver PWB detected an inability to control the Carriage during carriage during initial-
wires are OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
ization.
+5VDC is measured between P/J520-1,4,5,6,3 and GND on the IIT Driver PWB.
Initial Actions Y N
• Refer to BSD 6.3 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure Replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2).
• Check the Carriage assembly for wear, dirt, debris, and misalignment of the components.
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 6.3 and check the wires for an open circuit or short circuit. If the
• Verify that the IIT Registration Sensor is correctly aligned and free from contamination.
wires are OK, replace the Carriage Motor (PL 3.3).
• Verify that the Carriage and Carriage Cable are installed properly and free from damage.
Continue to run the Carriage through the full range of travel using dC330 006-005 IIT Scan
Procedure Motor (Scan) and 006-006 IIT Scan Motor (Return). Observe the motion and listen for any
Enter dC330 006-212 Registration Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the Full Rate Car- abnormal sounds in the Carriage motor and assembly. The Carriage motor and assembly
riage from the full left position to the full right position and back full left. The display changes appear to be defect free.
from L to H then back to L. Y N
Y N Inspect the assembly for damage, misalignment, dirt, or debris. Verify that the Carriage
Actuate the IIT Regi Sensor with a piece of paper. The display is L. Cables are properly installed and free from damage. Repair or replace as required.
Y N
Disconnect P/J532 on the IIT Registration Sensor. The display is H. Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, Flag 3, and Flag 4 on BSD 6.3 and check the wires for an open or short
Y N circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the following:
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.3 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the • Carriage Motor (PL 3.3)
wires are OK, replace the Pre-IPS PWB (PL 3.5). • IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2)
• Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
Replace the IIT Registration Sensor (PL 3.2).
Deactuate the IIT Registration Sensor. The display is H.

Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J532-2 and GND on the IIT Registration Sen-
sor.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.3 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. If the
wire is OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
There is +5 VDC between P/J532-1 and P/J532-3 on the IIT Regi Sensor.
Y N
wires are OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
Clean and align the IIT Regi Sensor. If the problem continues, replace the IOT PWB
(PL 9.2).
Clean the IIT Regi Sensor and check for damaged and proper aligned. If the problem con-
tinues, replace the IIT Regi Sensor (PL 3.2).
Enter dC330 006-005 IIT Scan Motor (Scan) and 006-006 IIT Scan Motor (Return). The
Carriage moves Right [06-005] and Left [06-006].
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J524-12 and P/J524-8 on the IIT Driver PWB
A
6-361 Scan Initialize Regi Sensor Failure RAP 2-58 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP 6-389 Carriage Overrun Fail (Scan End) RAP
The IIT Driver PWB detected a control error caused by an Exposure Lamp power failure. The IIT Regi (Registration) Sensor detected an overrun during Full Rate Carriage scanning.

Refer to BSD 6.1 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330 006-002 ITT Exposure Lamp. Press Start. The Exposure Lamp lights.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J524 -1 and GND on the IIT Driver PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 6.1 and check the wire. If the wire is OK, replace the Pre IPS
PWB (PL 3.5).
0 VDC is measured between P/J534-3 and P/J534-2 on the Lamp Ballast.

Y N
are OK, replace the IIT Driver PWB
Set the DMM to max recording mode (+ peak hold). +5VDC is measured between P/
J524-2 and GND on the IIT Driver PWB.
Y N
are OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
Set the DMM to max recording mode (+ peak hold). +5VDC is measured between P/
J534-6 and P/J534-2 on the Lamp Ballast PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 10 on BSD 6.1 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. If the wire
is OK, replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2).
+24VDC is measured between P/J534-5 and P/J534-2 on the Lamp Ballast PWB.
Y N
wires are OK, replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2).
Replace the Flash Lamp Ballast PWB (PL 3.4) if the problem continues, replace the
Exposure Lamp (PL 3.4).
If the Fault continues, perform the following:

• Ensure that the connectors are fully seated.
• Go to Flag 7, Flag 8, Flag 9 and Flag 10 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for damage.
• Replace the following in order:
– Exposure Lamp (PL 3.4)
– Lamp Ballast PWB (PL 3.4)
– IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2)
– Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-59 6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP, 6-389 Carriage
6-390 Carriage Overrun Fail (Home End) RAP 6 391 Scan Initialize Failure RAP
The IIT Regi (Registration) Sensor detected an overrun during Full Rate return. The IIT Regi (Registration) Sensor Changed to high when the Carriage Initialization Started.

• Refer to BSD 6.3 and 6.7 in the following procedure:
• Ensure that P/J515 on the Pre IPS PWB is firmly seated.
• Verify that the IIT Regi Sensor is correctly aligned and free from contamination.
• Verify that the Full Rate Carriage and Carriage Cables are installed correctly. • Ensure that P/J532 on the IIT Regi Sensor is firmly seated.
• Check the Full Rate Carriage Assembly for wear, foreign matter, and alignment of the
components. Procedure
Enter dC330 006-212 Registration Sensor. Press Start. Move the Full Rate Carriage from the
Procedure Home position to the full left position. The display changes from High to Low.
Y N
Move the Full Rate Carriage to the Home Position. The display changes to High.
Y N

6-390 Carriage Overrun Fail (Home End) RAP, 6 391 2-60 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
6-500 Lamp Not Ready RAP 6-615 b* Failure RAP
The Control Logic has detected that the Exposure Lamp Light did not reach the specified value The Control Logic has detected that the measured b* is out of the specific range.
at Start.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Refer to BSD 6.2 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
• Refer to BSD 6.1 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: • Ensure that the PRE IPS PWB, CCD PWB, MEM SYS PWB and the POST IPS PWB and
their connectors are seated properly.
Procedure • Check that the Option Memory PWBs are fully seated on the MEM SYS PWB.
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues go to the 6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an
open or short circuit. If the fault continues, replace the following:
• CCD PWB (PL 3.2).

• Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
• MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5).
• POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-61 6-500 Lamp Not Ready RAP, 6-615 b* Failure RAP
6-620 Reflection Rate Failure RAP
The Control Logic has detected that the measured reflective rate for each color is out of the
specific range.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 6.1 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
• Ensure that the Exposure Lamp Light Path is not blocked or dirty.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the Fault continues go to the 6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP.

6-620 Reflection Rate Failure RAP 2-62 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
7-281 Tray 1 Lift Motor Failure RAP Enter dC330 008-008 Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor (Feed) Tray1 Feed/Lift Motor. Press Start and
Stop several times. The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes.
The Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor failed to change state within the specified time after Tray 1 Y N
Feed/Lift Motor was energized. +24 VDC is measured between P/J414A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
Initial Actions Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK.
Y N
• Refer to BSD 7.5 and BSD 7.10 for the following procedure.
Replace fuse (PL 9.3).
• Ensure there is paper loaded in the Tray 1.
• Ensure connector P/J414A on the IOT Drive PWB is properly seated (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 on the IOT LVPS and GND.
• Check for crimped or broken wires to connectors on the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Y N
• Pull out Paper Tray 1. Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
• Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
• Remove the Screw and open the Tray 1 Feed Assembly (PL 2.2).
+24 VDC is measured between P/J414A-A15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Procedure Y N
Cheat the L/H Cover INTLK Switch. Remove the Tray 1 Feed Assembly without disconnecting Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK.
P/J791. Enter dC330 008-221 Tray 1 Level Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 1 Y N
Stack Height Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Replace fuse (PL 9.3).
Y N
+0 VDC is measured at P/J414A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 on the IOT LVPS and GND.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured at P/J130-2 on the Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor. Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Y N
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 7.5 and check the harness and connectors. If Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.5 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and
the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. connectors are OK, replace the Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.2).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J130-1 and P/J130-3 on the Tray 1 Stack Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.5 and check the wires for an open or a short circuit. If
Height Sensor. the wires are OK replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace
Y N the Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS.
Y N Enter dC330 008-231 Tray 1 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 1 No
Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Paper Sensor. The display changed from H to L.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J414A-11 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 +0 VDC is measured at P/J414A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB.
on the IOT LVPS. Y N
Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor.
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.5 and check the harness and connectors. If
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.5 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
+5VDC is measured between P/J129-1 and P/J129-3 on the Tray 1 No Paper
Check that the mechanical flag on the Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor is not bent. If the Sensor.
sensor flag is OK, replace the Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor (PL 2.5). Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.5 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are Y N
OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Push the Tray in. Enter dC330 008-007 Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor (Lift) Tray1 Feed/Lift Motor. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.5 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
Press Start and Stop several times. OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
A B C
A B C
Replace the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5). 7-282 Tray 2 Lift Motor Failure RAP
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.5 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are The Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor failed to change state within the specified time after Tray 2 Lift/
OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Feed Motor was energized.
Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any Initial Actions
parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing.
• Tray 1 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4)
• Tray 1 Assembly (PL 2.1)
• Ensure connector P/J803 on the Tray PWB is properly seated (PL 9.3).
• Wiring Harness
• Check for crimped or broken wires to connectors on the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Pull out Paper Tray 2.
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover INTLK Switch. Remove the Tray 2 Feed Assembly without disconnecting
P/J792. Enter dC330 008-222 Tray 2 Level Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 2
Stack Height Sensor. The display changed from H to L.
Y N
+0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured at P/J130-2 on the Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor.
Y N
the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J130-1 and P/J130-3 on the Tray 2 Stack

Height Sensor.
Y N
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J803-A11 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5

on the IOT LVPS.
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.6 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
Replace the Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor (PL 2.5).
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.6 and check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is
Push the Tray in. Enter dC330 008-012 Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor (Lift), 008-013 Tray 2 Feed/
Lift Motor (Feed) Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor. Press Start and Stop several times.

manuals4you.com
A B C
CAUTION Y N
Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be
hard to pull out and may cause component damage. +5 VDC is measured between P/J803-A8 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on
the IOT LVPS.
The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes.
Y N
Y N
Replace the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5).
+24 VDC is measured between P/J803-A14 on the Tray PWB and GND.
Y N
Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 on the IOT LVPS and GND.
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.6 and check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is
Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any
connectors are OK, replace the Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6).
+24 VDC is measured between P/J803-A15 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. • Tray 2 Assembly (PL 2.1)
Y N • Wiring Harness
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS and P/J803-
A15 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness and connectors. If the
harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem con-
tinues, replace the Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6).
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness and connectors. If the har-
ness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
Enter dC330 008-232 Tray 2 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 2 No
Paper Sensor. The display changed from H to L.
Y N
+0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-A16 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J129-1 and P/J129-3 on the Tray 2 No Paper

Sensor.
Y N
A B C
7-283 Tray 3 Lift Motor Failure RAP CAUTION
Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To
The Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor (PL 2.5) failed to change state within the specified time after lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be
Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor was energized. hard to pull out and may cause component damage.
Initial Actions Y N
• Refer to BSD 7.7 and BSD 7.10 for the following procedure. +24 VDC is measured between P/J803B-14 and GND on the Tray PWB.
• Ensure there is paper loaded in the Tray 3. Y N
• Ensure connector P/J803 on the Tray PWB is properly seated (PL 9.2).
Y N
• Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8). +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS.
• Remove the Screw and open the Tray 3 Feed Assembly (PL 2.4). Y N
Procedure Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and
Cheat the L/H Cover INTLK Switch. Remove the Tray 3 Feed Assembly without disconnecting connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6).
P/J793. Enter dC330 008-223 Tray 3 Level Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 3
Stack Height Sensor. The display changed from H to L. +24 VDC is measured between P/J803B-15 and GND on the Tray PWB.
Y N Y N
+0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB. Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured at P/J130-2 on the Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor. Replace fuse (PL 9.3).
Y N
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness and connectors. If +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS.
the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. Y N
Height Sensor. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.7 and check the wires and connectors. If the wires and con-
Y N nectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6).
Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.7 and check the wires and connectors. If the wires and
Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6). If the problem continue
place the Tray PWB (PL 9.2).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J803B-11 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5
on the IOT LVPS. Enter dC330 008-233 Tray 3 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 3 No
Y N Paper Sensor. The display changed from H to L.
+0 VDC is measured at P/J803B-7 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.7 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are Y N
OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor.
Y N
Replace the Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor (PL 2.5). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness and connectors. If
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.7 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace
the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J129-1 and P/J129-3 on the Tray 3 No Paper
Sensor.
Enter dC330 008-017 Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (Lift), 008-018 Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (Feed)] Y N
Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor. Press Start and Stop several times. +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS.
A B C
manuals4you.com
A B C
Y N 7-284 Tray 4 Lift Motor Failure RAP
The Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor failed to change state within the specified time after Tray 4
+5 VDC is measured between P/J803B-8 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on Feed/Lift Motor was energized.
the IOT LVPS.
Y N Initial Actions
OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). • Ensure connector P/J804 on the Tray PWB is properly seated (PL 9.2).
Replace the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5). • Pull out Paper Tray 4.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.7 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace
the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any Procedure
parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Cheat the L/H Cover INTLK Switch. Remove the Tray 4 Feed Assembly without disconnecting
• Tray 3 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) P/J794. Enter dC330 008-224 Tray 4 Level Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 4
• Tray 3 Assembly (PL 2.3) Stack Height Sensor. The display changed from H to L.
• Wiring Harness Y N
+0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-9 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured at P/J130-2 on the Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor.
Y N

Height Sensor.
Y N
Y N
Go to the +5VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J804-11 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on

the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and con-
nectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Push in the Tray. Enter dC330 008-022 Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor (Lift), 008-023 Tray 4 Feed/
Lift Motor (Feed) Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor. Press Start and Stop several times.

A B C
CAUTION Y N
Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
hard to pull out and may cause component damage. +5 VDC is measured between P/J804-6 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on
the IOT LVPS.
Y N
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J804-14 and GND on the Tray PWB.
Y N
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and con-
Y N
nectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and
+24 VDC is measured between P/J804-15 and GND on the Tray PWB. • Tray 4 Assembly (PL 2.3)
Y N • Wiring Harness
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.7 and check the wires and connectors. If the wires and
connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6). If the problem continue
place the Tray PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 008-234 Tray 4 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 4 No
Paper Sensor. The display changed from H to L.
Y N
Y N
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J129-1 and P/J129-3 on the Tray 4 No Paper

Sensor.
Y N
A B C
manuals4you.com
A
7-286 Tray 5 Broken (UP) RAP Y N
+5 VDC is measured at P/J147-2 on the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor.
The Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor failed to change state within 3 seconds after the Tray 5 Feed/Lift Y N
Motor Up was energized. Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If
Initial Actions
+5 VDC is measured between P/J147-1 and P/J147-3 on the Tray 5 Down Sen-
sor.
• Ensure the Tray 5 top cover is closed.
Y N
• Ensure there is paper loaded in the Tray 5. +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS.
• Ensure connector P/J416A on the IOT Drive PWB is properly seated. Y N
• Check for crimped or broken wires to connectors on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-5 and P/J21-5 on the IOT Drive

Procedure PWB.
Cheat the Tray 5 Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-226 Tray 5 (Bypass) Level up Sensor. Y N
Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor. The display changed from H to Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
L.
Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.9 and check wires between P/J147 and P/J416 for an
+0 VDC is measured at P/J416B-6 on the IOT Drive PWB. open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor
Y N (PL 2.12).
+5 VDC is measured at P/J145-2 on the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor.
Y N Replace the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor (PL 2.12).
the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.9 and check the wire for a short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace
+5 VDC is measured between P/J145-1 and P/J145-3 on the Tray 5 Stack Up
Sensor. Enter dC330 [008-040 Tray 5 Lifter Motor CCW]. Press Start and Stop several times.
Y N CAUTION
Y N
hard to pull out and may cause component damage.
PWB. Y N
Y N Press Start. +24 VDC is measured between P/J416B-20 and GND on the IOT Drive
PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.9 and check wires between P/J145 and P/J416 for an +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS.
Y N
open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor
(PL 2.11). Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Replace the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor (PL 2.11).
connectors are OK, replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). If the problem continues,
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.9 and check the wire for a short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 5 on BSD and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace
Cheat the Tray 5 Switch. Enter dC330 008-227 Tray 5 (Bypass) Level Down Sensor. Press the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL
9.2).
Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor. The display changed from L to H.
Y N
Enter dC330 008-042 Tray 5 Lifter Motor CW. Press Start and Stop several times.
+0 VDC is measured at P/J416B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB.
A
B
CAUTION Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any
Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing.
lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be • Tray 5 Assembly (PL 2.9)
hard to pull out and may cause component damage. • Wiring Harness
Y N
Press Start. +24 VDC is measured between P/J416B-19 and GND on the IOT Drive
PWB.
Y N
Y N
connectors are OK, replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). If the problem continues,
replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.9 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK,
replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive
PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 008-236 Tray 5 Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Paper
Sensor. The display changed from H to L.
Y N
Y N
+5 VDC is measured at P/J146-2 on the Tray 5 Paper Sensor.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J146-1 and P/J146-3 on the Tray 5 Paper Sen-
sor.
Y N
Y N

PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.5 and check wires between P/J146 and P/J416 for an
open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the Tray 5 Paper Sensor (PL 2.1).
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 7.9 and check the wire for a short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace
B
manuals4you.com
A B
7-287 Tray 5 Broken (Down) RAP Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness
The Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor failed to change state within 3 seconds after the Tray 5 Feed/ and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
Lift Motor Down was energized.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J147-1 and P/J147-3 on the Tray 5 Stack Down
Initial Actions Sensor.
Y N
• Ensure the Tray 5 top cover is closed.
Y N
• Ensure there is paper loaded in the Tray 5. Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
• Ensure connector P/J416A on the IOT Drive PWB is properly seated (PL 9.2).
• Check for crimped or broken wires to connectors on the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/
J21-5 on the IOT LVPS.
Y N
Procedure Replace the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor (PL 2.12).
Cheat the Tray 5 Switch. Enter dC330 008-226 Tray 5 (Bypass) Level up Sensor. Press
Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.9 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
Y N OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N Replace the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor (PL 2.12).
+5 VDC is measured at P/J145-2 on the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor.
Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness
and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. Enter dC330 008-042 Tray 5 Lifter Motor CW. Press Start and Stop several times.
CAUTION
+5 VDC is measured between P/J145-1 and P/J145-3 on the Tray 5 Stack Up
Sensor.
Y N
Y N The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J416B-20 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/ Y N
J21-5 on the IOT LVPS.
Y N
Y N
Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.9 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and
OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). connectors are OK, replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12).

Enter dC330 [008-040 Tray 5 Lifter Motor CCW]. Press Start and Stop several times.
CAUTION
Cheat the Tray 5 Switch. Enter dC330 008-227 Tray 5 (Bypass) Level Down Sensor. Press Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To
Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor. The display changed from H to L. lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be
Y N hard to pull out and may cause component damage.
+0 VDC is measured at P/J416B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured at P/J147-2 on the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor. +24 VDC is measured between P/J416B-19 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
A B C D
C D
Y N 7-340 All Tray Broken RAP
The IOT detected that all Paper Trays are not functional.
connectors are OK, replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). Initial Actions
• Ensure the L/H Cover is securely closed.
Enter dC330 008-236 Tray 5 Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Paper • Ensure connectors P/J801A, P/J802A and P/J802B on the Tray PWB are properly
Sensor. The display changed from H to L. seated (PL 9.3).
Y N • Check for crimped or broken wires to connectors on the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
+0 VDC is measured at P/J416B-8 on the IOT Drive PWB. • Check the fuse on the Tray PWB (PL 9.3) to ensure it is good.
Y N
• Check the fuses on the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3) to ensure they are good.
+5 VDC is measured at P/J146-2 on the Tray 5 Paper Sensor.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 and Flag 7 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If Procedure
the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J800-3 and P/J800-4 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J146-1 and P/J146-3 on the Tray 5 Paper Sen- +5 VDC is measured between P/J44-9 and P/J44-13 on the Distribution PWB.
sor. Y N
Y N Check the fuse on the Distribution PWB. Fuse is OK.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N
Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/ Y N
J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Y N
Replace the Tray 5 Paper Sensor (PL 2.1). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 1.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
OK, replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3).
OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.3).
Replace the Tray 5 Paper Sensor (PL 2.1). +5 VDC is measured between P/J420A-1 and P/J420A-2 on the IOT CPU PWB.
Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J44-8 and GND on the Distribution PWB.
Y N
Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any Check the fuse on the Distribution PWB. Fuse is OK.
parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Y N
• Tray 5 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.9) Replace fuse (PL 9.3).
+5VDC is measured between P/J21-1, 2, 3, or 4 and GND on the IOT LVPS.
• Wiring Harness
Y N
Go to +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 1.2 and check for an open or short circuit.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK,
replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.3).
+24 VDC is measured between P/J800-1 and P/J800-2 on the Tray PWB.

manuals4you.com
Y N 7-500 Tray out of position during Job RAP
Y N The machine detected that the Tray is out of position during the Job.
Initial Actions
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.2 and check for an open wiring. If the wiring is OK, replace the
• Refer to BSD 7.1 through BSD 7.3 for the following procedure.
Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
• Ensure the Tray attributes selected match the paper loaded in the Tray.
Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). • Ensure that the End Guides are properly adjusted to the paper in the Tray.
• Ensure Connector PJ802 on the Tray PWB is seated properly for Trays 2,3,4.
• Ensure that there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Tray 2 was in use when the fault occurred.
Y N
Tray 3 was in use when the fault occurred.
Y N
Enter dC330 and Active Stack 008-250 Tray 4 size switch 1, 008-251 Tray 4 size
switch 2, 008-252 Tray 4 size switch 3, 008-253 Tray 4 size switch 4 for the Tray 4
Size Sensor and press Start. Open Tray 4. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors.
The four Tray Sensor States displayed corresponds with Table 3.
Y N
Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 3 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured
at TP-8 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 3 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is mea-
sured at P/J415B-14 on the IOT PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.3 and check the harness and connec-
tors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 4 Size Sen-
sor (PL 2.1).
Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved.
Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
• Tray 4 Assembly (PL 2.4).
• Tray 4 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
Enter dC330 and Active Stack 008-245 Tray 3 size switch 1, 008-246 Tray 3 size switch
2, 008-247 Tray 3 size switch 3, 008-248 Tray 3 size switch 4 for the Tray 3 Size Sensor
and press Start. Open Tray 3. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The four Tray
Sensor States displayed corresponds with Table 2.
Y N
Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 2 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at
TP-7 on the Tray PWB.
A B
A B
Y N Table 2 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 3)
Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 2 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured XVDC at
at P/J415B-14 on the IOT Drive PWB. 008-245 008-246 008-247 008-248 Test
Y N
Tray 3 SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point
Open Tray L L L L 4.64
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.2 and check the harness and connectors. If No Unit L L L L 5.0
the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
Table 3 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 4)
XVDC at
Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. 008-250 008-251 008-252 008-253 Test
Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Tray 4 SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point
• Tray 3 Assembly (PL 2.4). Open Tray L L L L 4.64

• Tray 3 Size Sensor (PL 2.1). No Unit L L L L 5.0
Enter dC330 and Active Stack 008-240 Tray 2 size switch 1, 008-241 Tray 2 size switch 2,
008-242 Tray 2 size switch 3, 008-243 Tray 2 size switch 4 for the Tray 2 Size Sensor and
press Start. Open Tray 2. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The four Tray Sensor
States displayed corresponds with Table 1.
Y N
Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 1 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at TP-6
on the Tray PWB.
Y N
Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 1 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at P/
J415B-14 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 2 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any
parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.

XVDC at
008-240 008-241 008-242 008-243 Test
Tray 2 SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point
Open Tray L L L L 4.64
No Unit L L L L 5.0

manuals4you.com
A B C
7-501 Tray No Paper RAP Y N
The machine detected no paper in the paper tray selected. tors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
NOTE: This RAP should be used when the presence of paper is not detected in any of the Replace the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5).
Paper Trays or if the paper tray selected ran out of paper and the Auto Tray Selection (ATS)
could not find paper of the same orientation from another tray to finish the job. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace
Check the following items for dirt, binding, freedom of movement or excessive wear: Tray No any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing.
Paper Sensor, Tray Level Sensor, and Tray Nudger Solenoid. • Tray 2 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4)
• Verify that the Trays are not jammed.
• Wiring Harness
• Ensure that all paper sizes are correct.
• Ensure paper is properly loaded in the Trays. Select Tray 3 on the Control Panel while observing the UI. Paper is detected in Tray 3 and
• Ensure all paper Trays are closed. the message Ready to Copy appears.
Y N
Procedure Enter dC330 008-233 Tray 3 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 3
No Paper Sensor. The display changed from L to H.
Select Tray 1 on the Control Panel while observing the UI. Paper is detected in Tray 1 and
Y N
the message Ready to Copy appears.
Y N Y N
Enter dC330 008-231 Tray 1 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray
1 No Paper Sensor. The display changed from L to H.
Y N
Y N
tors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor. Replace the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5).
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.5 and check the harness and connec- Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace
any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing.
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). • Tray 3 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4)
Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace • Wiring Harness
any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing.
• Tray 1 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) Select Tray 4 on the Control Panel while observing the UI. Paper is detected in Tray 4 and
the message ready to copy appears.
Y N
• Wiring Harness
Enter dC330 008-234 Tray 4 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 4
No Paper Sensor. The display changed from L to H.
Select Tray 2 on the Control Panel while observing the UI. Paper is detected in Tray 2 and
Y N
the message Ready to Copy appears.
Y N Y N
Enter dC330 008-232 Tray 2 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 4 No Paper Sensor.
2 No Paper Sensor. The display changed from L to H.
Y N
Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connec-
Y N
A B C D E F G
D E F G
Replace the Tray 4 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5). 7-502 Tray 5 Paper Size Mismatch (Width) RAP
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). The machine detected that the paper size width is not being detected correctly in Tray 5.
Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace Initial Actions
any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. • Perform ADJ 9.1.17.
• Tray 4 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) • Refer to BSD 7.4 for the following procedure.
• Tray 4 Assembly (PL 2.1) • Check for obstructions in the paper path.
• Wiring Harness • Go to the Control Panel, ensure that Tray 5 Paper Size indicator is set to the correct paper
size loaded in Tray 5, and that the width guide is against the paper.
Check the wire harnesses and connectors of all the Tray paper feed assemblies for an intermit-
• Ensure that the NVM location for the Market is the correct country code, 752-001 = 2
tent problem.
Procedure
The paper size being utilized for this procedure matches the paper size selected on the
Touch Screen.
Y N
Voltage is measured at P/J146-B15 on the IOT PWB and GND on the Tray 5 Size
Sensor.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J148-3 on the Tray 5 Paper Size Sensor and
GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an open circuit or short to GND.
If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Paper Size Sensor (PL 2.13).
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an open circuit or short to GND. If the
harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Paper Size Sensor (PL 2.13). If that does not correct
the problem, replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2).
• Spring (PL 2.13).
• Link (PL 2.13).

manuals4you.com
A
7-503 Tray 5 Paper Size Mismatch (Length) RAP Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any
parts that are worn, binding, or missing.
The machine detected that the paper size length is not being detected correctly for Tray 5. • Tray 5 Feed Clutch (PL 2.9)
• Tray 5 Retard Roll (PL 2.12)
Initial Actions • Tray 5 Feed Roll (PL 2.9)
• Perform ADJ 9.1.17. • Tray 5 Lifter Motor (PL 2.12)
• Check for obstructions in the paper path.
• Go to the Control Panel, ensure that Tray 5 Paper Size indicator is set to the correct paper
size loaded in Tray 5.
Procedure
Touch Screen.
Y N
Sensor.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured at P/J148-2 on the Tray 5 Size Sensor.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J148-1 and P/J148-3 on the Tray 5 Size Sen-
sor.
Y N
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-B4 and P/J21-5 on the IOT Drive

PWB.
Y N
Replace the Tray 5 Size Sensor (PL 2.13).
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an open circuit or short to GND. If the
harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Size Sensor (PL 2.4). If that does not correct the prob-
lem, replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Registration
Sensor. The display changed from H to L.
Y N
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit or short to
GND. If the harness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15).
A
A
7-504 Tray Size Change during Job RAP Y N
Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 2 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at
The machine detected that the paper size changed during the Job. TP-7 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
Initial Actions Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 2 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured
• Refer to BSD 7.1 through BSD 7.4 for the following procedure. at P/J415B-14 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
• Ensure the Tray attributes selected match the paper loaded in the Tray.
• Ensure that the End Guides are properly adjusted to the paper in the Tray.
• Ensure Connector PJ802 on the Tray PWB is seated properly for Trays 2,3,4. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.2 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness
• Ensure that there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
• If 12x18 paper is being used in Trays 2,3,or 4 go to ADJ 9.1.19.
Procedure Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved.
Tray 2 was in use when the fault occurred. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
Y N • Tray 3 Assembly (PL 2.4).
Tray 3 was in use when the fault occurred. • Tray 3 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
Y N
Enter dC330 and Active Stack 008-250 Tray 4 size switch 1, 008-251 Tray 4 size Enter dC330 and Active Stack 008-240 Tray 2 size switch 1, 008-241 Tray 2 size switch 2,
switch 2, 008-252 Tray 4 size switch 3, 008-253 Tray 4 size switch 4 for the Tray 4 008-242 Tray 2 size switch 3, 008-243 Tray 2 size switch 4 for the Tray 2 Size Sensor and
Size Sensor and press Start. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The four
press Start. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The four Tray Sensor States dis-
Tray Sensor States displayed corresponds to the paper size loaded in Tray 4.
played corresponds to the paper size loaded in Tray 2. (Refer to Table 3 for the correct
(Refer to Table 3 for the correct Tray Sensor States for the matching paper
Tray Sensor States for the matching paper size).
size).
Y N
Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 1 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at TP-6
Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 3 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured on the Tray PWB.
at TP-8 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
Y N
Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 1 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at P/
Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 3 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is mea-
J415B-14 on the IOT Drive PWB.
sured at P/J415B-14 on the IOT PWB.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.3 and check the harness and connectors. If the
connectors are OK, replace the Tray 2 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 4 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the PROBLEM is resolved. Replace
Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the PROBLEM is resolved.
any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
Enter [DC330] and Active Stack 008-245 Tray 3 size switch 1, 008-246 Tray 3 size
switch 2, 008-247 Tray 3 size switch 3, 008-248 Tray 3 size switch 4 for the Tray 3 Size XVDC at
Sensor and press Start. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The four Tray Sensor 008-240 008-241 008-242 008-243 Test
States displayed corresponds to the paper size loaded in Tray 3. (Refer to Table 2 Paper Size Paper Size SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point
for the correct Tray Sensor States for the matching paper size). 8.5 x 13 SEF 215.9 x 330.2 L H H L 2.74
8.5 x 10 LEF 254 x 203 H H H L
A
manuals4you.com
Table 1 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 2) Table 3 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 4)
XVDC at XVDC at
008-240 008-241 008-242 008-243 Test 008-250 008-251 008-252 008-253 Test
Paper Size Paper Size SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point Paper Size Paper Size SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point
8.5 x 14 SEF 215.9 x 355.6 L L H L 3.99 A3 SEF 297 x 420 L H L L 3.37
A3 SEF 297 x 420 L H L L 3.37 B4 SEF 257 x 364 L L H H
B4 SEF 257 x 364 L L H H 11 x 17 SEF 279.4 x 431.8 L L L H 4.31
11 x 17 SEF 279.4 x 431.8 L L L H 4.31 A4 SEF 210 x 297 H H H L 2.14
A4 SEF 210 x 297 H H H L 2.14 B5 LEF 257 x 182 H L H H
B5 LEF 257 x 182 H L H H B4 SEF 257 x 364 L L H H
B4 SEF 257 x 364 L L H H 8.5 x 11 SEF 8.5 x 11 SEF H L H L 1.51
8.5 x 11 SEF 8.5 x 11 SEF H L H L 1.51 A4 LEF 279 x 210 H H L L 0.91
A4 LEF 279 x 210 H H L L 0.91 8.5 x 11 LEF 279.4 x 215.9 H L H L 0.61
8.5 x 11 LEF 279.4 x 215.9 H L H L 0.61 Open Tray 949 L L L L 4.64
Open Tray 949 L L L L 4.64 No Unit 255 L L L L 5.0
No Unit 255 L L L L 5.0

XVDC at
008-245 008-246 008-247 008-248 Test
Paper Size Paper Size SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point
8.5 x 13 SEF 215.9 x 330.2 L H H L 2.74
8.5 x 10 LEF 254 x 203 H H H L
8.5 x 14 SEF 215.9 x 355.6 L L H L 3.99
A3 SEF 297 x 420 L H L L 3.37
B4 SEF 257 x 364 L L H H
11 x 17 SEF 279.4 x 431.8 L L L H 4.31
A4 SEF 210 x 297 H H H L 2.14
B5 LEF 257 x 182 H L H H
B4 SEF 257 x 364 L L H H
8.5 x 11 SEF 8.5 x 11 SEF H L H L 1.51
A4 LEF 279 x 210 H H L L 0.91
8.5 x 11 LEF 279.4 x 215.9 H L H L 0.61
Open Tray 949 L L L L 4.64
No Unit 255 L L L L 5.0

XVDC at
008-250 008-251 008-252 008-253 Test
Paper Size Paper Size SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point
8.5 x 13 SEF 215.9 x 330.2 L H H L 2.74
8.5 x 10 LEF 254 x 203 H H H L
8.5 x 14 SEF 215.9 x 355.6 L L H L 3.99

7-600 Tray 5 Adjustment Side Guide out of specified Range
RAP
The machine detected that Tray 5 Side Guide was outside the specified range.
Initial Actions
• Go to the Control Panel, ensure that Tray 5 Tray Paper Size icon is set to the correct paper
size that is loaded in Tray 5.
Procedure
Touch Screen.
Y N
Sensor.
Y N
+5 VDC between J703B-7 on the Tray 5 Paper Size Sensor and GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an open circuit or
short to GND. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Size Sensor (PL 2.13).
Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 7.4 and check the harnesses for an open circuit or short
to GND. If the harness is OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any
parts that are worn, binding, or missing.
• Spring (PL 2.5)
• Link (PL 2.5)

manuals4you.com
A B
8-104 Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP There is +24 VDC at P/J414A-A2 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
The Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed Go to Flag 7 on BSD 7.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
started. good, replace the Tray 1 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5).
Initial Actions Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J414A-A2 goes to less than +2.0 VDC.
Y N
• Ensure that the No Paper Sensor is properly installed in the Paper Tray Feed Head.
• Refer to BSD 8.1, BSD 7.5, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Replace the Tray 1 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5).
• Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8). Check/replace the Tray 1 Feeder Assembly. Replace any components that are worn, broken,
binding, or slipping (PL 2.4).
• Open the Tray 1 Feeder (PL 2.4).
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-104 Tray 1 Pre feed Sensor. Press
Start. Block the Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H
to L.
Y N
The display indicates a constant H.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is
good, replace the Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5).
Connect the meter from P/J414A-A4 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the
Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J414A-A4 goes from +5
VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the senor is
blocked.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J414A-A5 and P/J414A-A3 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the har-
ness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the
harness is OK, replace the Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5). If the problem continues,
replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Press Stop. Enter dC330 008-008 Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor (Feed). Press Start and Stop sev-
eral times. The Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes.
Y N
Go to the 7-281 Tray 1 Lift Motor Failure RAP.
Press Stop. Enter dC330 008-006 Tray 1 Nudger Roll Solenoid. Press Start and Stop sev-
eral times. The Tray 1 Nudger Solenoid energizes.
Y N
Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J414A-A1 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-81 8-104 Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP
A
8-105 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
The Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed good, replace the Tray 1 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 1.5).
started.
Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J414B-B12 goes to less than +2.0 VDC.
Initial Actions Y N
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Replace the Tray 1 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 1.5).
Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any compo-
Procedure nents that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
• Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Left Cover (PL 2.8)
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-105 Tray 1 feed out Sensor and
press Start. Block the Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes • Tray 1 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4)
from H to L.
Y N
Y N
good, replace the Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8).
Connect the meter from P/J420A-B8 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the
Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at J420-B8 goes from +5
VDC when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is
blocked.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J420A-B9 and P/J420A-B7 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
harness is OK, replace the Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem contin-
ues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. The Main Motor 2 energizes.
Y N
Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP.
Enter dC330 008-009 Tray 1 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start. The Tray 1 Takeaway
Feed Clutch energizes.
Y N
Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J414B-B11 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
There is +24 VDC at P/J414B-B12 on the IOT Drive PWB.
A
8-105 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP 2-82 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
8-107 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On RAP 8-109 Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP
The Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was The Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed
switched on. started.

• Refer to BSD 8.1 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. • Ensure that the No Paper Sensor is properly installed in the Paper Tray Feed Head.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. • Refer to BSD 8.2, BSD 7.6, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
Procedure • Pull out Paper Tray 2
Enter dC330 008-105 Tray 1 feed out Sensor and press Start. The display indicates H. • Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
Y N • Open the Tray 2 Feeder (PL 2.4).
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good,
replace the Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8).
Procedure
If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-109 Tray 2 Pre feed Sensor and
fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.1 and check the press Start. Block the Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes
harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 1 Feed Out Sen- from H to L.
sor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Y N
Y N
Connect the meter from P/J415A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the
Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J415A-14 goes from +5
VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0VDC when the senor is
blocked.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J803-5 and P/J803-3 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
ness is good, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
Enter dC330 008-013 Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor (Feed). Press Start and Stop several times.
The Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes.
Y N
Go to the 7-282 Tray 2 Lift Motor Failure RAP
Enter dC330 008-011 Tray 2 Nudger Roll Solenoid. Press Start and Stop several times.
The Tray 2 Nudger Solenoid energizes.
Y N
Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J803-1 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-83 8-107 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On RAP, 8-109 Tray
A B
There is +24 VDC at P/J803-2 on the Tray PWB. 8-110 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP
Y N
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is The Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed
good, replace the Tray 2 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5). started.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J803-2 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Initial Actions
Y N
Press Start. There is +5 VDC at P/J801B-11 of the Tray PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness for an open or short circuit. If • Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
press Start. Actuate the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor. The display changes from L to H.
Replace the Tray 2 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5).
Y N
Enter dC330 008-014 Tray 2 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times.
Y N
The Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes.
Y N
Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-14 on the Tray PWB.
Y N Connect the meter from P/J415A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Actuate the
Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor. The voltage at P/J415A-7 goes from less than +1.0 VDC
when the sensor is not actuated, to +5.0 VDC when the sensor is actuated.
There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-13 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J802A-9 and P/J802A-7 on the Tray PWB.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is Y N
good, replace the Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A).
Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-13 goes to approximately 0 VDC.
Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the
Y N
ues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har- PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A).
Y N
Check/replace the Tray 2 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4). Replace any components that are worn,
Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-14 on the Tray PWB and
broken, binding, or slipping.
GND.
Y N
There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-13 on the Tray PWB and GND.
Y N
A
8-109 Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-110 Tray 2-84 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
Y N 8-112 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor On RAP
Y N The Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har- switched on.
Initial Actions
Replace the Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). • Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
• Check the actuator for the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor.
Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press Start. The Takeaway Motor energizes.
Y N Procedure
Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP
Enter dC330 008-110 Tray 2 feed out Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L.
Y N
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
nents that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
ness is good, replace the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8).
• Tray 2 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4) If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the fault
code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.2 and check the har-
ness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor
(PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-85 8-110 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-112
A B
8-114 Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP There is +24 VDC at P/J803B-2 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
The Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed Go to Flag 7 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
started. good, replace the Tray 3 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5).
Initial Actions Press Start. The voltage at P/J803B-2 goes to approximately 0 VDC.
Y N
• Ensure that the No Paper Sensor is properly installed in the Paper Tray Feed Head.
Y N
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Go to Flag 8 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness for an open or short circuit. If
• Pull out Paper Tray 3 the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Open the Tray 3 Feeder (PL 2.4).

Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-114 Tray 3 Pre feed Sensor and Enter dC330 008-019 Tray 3 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times.
press Start. Block the Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes The Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes.
from H to L. Y N
Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-12 on the Tray PWB.
The display indicates a constant H. Y N
Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
good, replace the Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5). There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-11 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
Connect the meter from P/J415A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J415A-11 goes from +5 good, replace the Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A).
VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is
blocked. Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-11 goes to approximately 0 VDC.
Y N Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J803B-5 and P/J803B-3 on the Tray PWB. There is +5 VDC at P/J801B-7 on the Tray PWB.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the har- Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). ness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A).
Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Check/replace the Tray 3 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4). Replace any components that are worn,
Y N
Y N
Y N
A B
8-114 Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP 2-86 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
8-115 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP Y N
The Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed Y N
started. Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
Initial Actions
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Replace the Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A).
Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press the Start button. The Takeaway Motor ener-
Procedure gizes.
Y N
press Start. Actuate the Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor. The display changes from L to H. Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP.
Y N
Y N
good, replace the Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). • Tray 3 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4)
Connect the meter from P/J415A-6 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Actuate the
Y N
Y N
PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
GND.
Y N
Y N
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-87 8-115 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP
8-117 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor On RAP 8-119 Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP
The Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was The Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed
switched on. started.

• Refer to BSD 8.3 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. • Ensure that the No Paper Sensor is properly installed in the Paper Tray Feed Head.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. • Refer to BSD 7.8, BSD 8.4, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
Procedure • Pull out Paper Tray 4.
Enter dC330 008-115 Tray 3 feed out Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. • Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
Y N • Open the Tray 4 Feeder (PL 2.4).
Procedure
If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the fault Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-119 Tray 4 Pre feed Sensor. Press
code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.3 and check the har- Start. Block the Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H
ness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, ensure that the sensor actuator to L.
moves freely. If the actuator is OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem Y N
continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). The display indicates a constant H.
Y N
Connect the meter from P/J415A-8 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the
Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J415A-8 goes from +5
VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is
blocked.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J804-5 and P/J804-3 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
Y N
Y N
Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J804-1 on the Tray PWB.
Y N
A B
8-117 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor On RAP, 8-119 Tray 4 2-88 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
There is +24 VDC at P/J804-2 on the Tray PWB. 8-120 Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP
Y N
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is The Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed
good, replace the Tray 4 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5). started
Press Start. The voltage at P/J804-2 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Initial Actions
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness for an open or short circuit. If • Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-120 Tray 4 feed out Sensor. Press
Start. Actuate the Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor. The display changes from L to H.
Y N
Y N
Y N
Press Stop. There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-10 on the Tray PWB.
Y N Connect the meter from P/J415A-5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Actuate the
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is Y N
Press Start. The voltage at P/J802B-9 goes to approximately 0 VDC.
Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the
Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har- PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Check/replace the Tray 4 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4). Replace any components that are worn,
GND.
Y N
Y N
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-89 8-119 Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-120
A
Y N 8-122 Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor On RAP
Y N The Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har- switched on.
ness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB
Initial Actions
Replace the Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). • Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press the Start button. The Takeaway Motor ener- Procedure
gizes. Enter dC330 008-120 Tray 4 feed out Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L.
Y N Y N
Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP. Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
nents that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the fault
• Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Left Cover (PL 2.8) code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.4 and check the har-
• Tray 4 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4) ness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, ensure that the sensor actuator
moves freely. If the actuator is OK, replace the Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem
continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).

8-120 Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-122 2-90 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
8-135 Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP Press the Start button to energize the Tray 5 Feed Clutch. The voltage at P/
J414B-B8 goes to approximately 0 VDC.
The Tray 5 Feed Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the feed started Y N
Initial Actions
Replace the Tray 5 Feed Clutch (PL 2.9).
• Refer to BSD 7.9, BSD 8.5 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
• Remove the Tray 5 Upper Cover (PL 2.10).
Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any com-
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. ponents that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
• Tray 5 Feed Roll and related components (PL 2.9)
Procedure • Takeaway Pinch Roll, Pinch Roll, and Springs (PL 2.10)
Ensure there is paper in Tray 5. Attempt to feed a single sheet of paper from Tray 5. The • Tray 5 Nudger Roll, Tray 5 Feed Roll, and related components (PL 2.11)
sheet of paper attempts to feed.
Y N Enter dC330 008-135 Tray 5 Feed Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Tray 5 Feed Sensor.
Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press the Start button. Main Motor 2 energizes. The display changes from L to H.
Y N Y N
Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. The display indicates a constant H.
Y N
Press the Stop button. Enter dC330 008-039 Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid. Press the Start Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.5 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is
button. The Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid energizes. good, replace the Tray 5 Feed Sensor (PL 2.10).
Y N
Press the Stop button. +24 VDC is measured at P/J416B-17 on the IOT Drive Connect the meter from P/J416B-7 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Actuate the
PWB. Tray 5 Feed Sensor. The voltage at P/J416B-7 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when
Y N the sensor is not actuated, to +5.0 VDC when the sensor is actuated.
There is +5 VDC between P/J416B-5 and P/J416B-3 on the IOT Drive PWB.
+24 VDC is measured at P/J416B-18 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N
Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.5 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the har-
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
ness is good, replace the Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.11).
Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J416B-18 goes to approximately 0 harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Feed Sensor (PL 2.10). If the problem continues,
VDC. replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.11). Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any compo-
Enter dC330 008-037 Tray 5 Feed Clutch. Press Start. The Tray 5 Feed Clutch ener- • Tray 5 Feed Roll and related components (PL 2.9)
gizes. • Takeaway Pinch Roll, Pinch Roll, and Springs (PL 2.10)
Y N • Tray 5 Nudger Roll, Tray 5 Feed Roll, and related components (PL 2.11)
Press the Stop button. +24 VDC is measured at P/J414B-B7 on the IOT Drive
PWB.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured at P/J414B-B8 on the IOT Drive PWB.

Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Tray 5 Feed Clutch (PL 2.9).
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-91 8-135 Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP
8-139 Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor On RAP 8-147 Tray 1 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP
The Tray 5 Feed Sensor detects paper at all times. The Takeaway Sensor did not actuate within 0 - 80 msec after the Tray 1 feed started.

• Refer to BSD 8.5 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. • Refer to BSD 8.1, BSD 8.6, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
• Open the Tray 5 Assembly. • Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
• Open the Tray 5 Upper Assembly (REP 2.11.1). • Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
• Check the Actuator for the Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor.
Procedure
Procedure Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor. Press Start.
Enter dC330 008-135 Tray 5 Feed Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, The display indicates a constant H.
replace the Tray 5 Feed Sensor (PL 2.10). Y N
If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the good, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8).
fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.5 and check the
harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Feed Sensor Connect the meter from P/J420A-B5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the
(PL 2.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J420A-B5 goes from +5
blocked.
Y N
Y N
harness is OK, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues,
Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes.
Y N
Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP.
Y N
Press Stop. There is +24 VDC between P/J414B-11 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
There is +24 VDC between P/J414B-12 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
good, replace the Tray 1 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 1.5).
A B
8-139 Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor On RAP, 8-147 Tray 1 2-92 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J414B-12 goes to less than +2.0 VDC. 8-148 Tray 2 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP
Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). The Takeaway Sensor did not actuate within 220 - 320 msec after the Tray 2 feed started.
Replace the Tray 1 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 1.5). Initial Actions
• Pinch Rolls and Springs (PL 2.8) • Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
• Check for burrs on the Baffle (PL 2.8).
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor. Press Start.
Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L.
Y N
Y N
good, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8).
Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J420A-B5 goes from +5
blocked.
Y N
Y N
Y N
Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP.
Y N
Y N

Y N
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-93 8-147 Tray 1 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-148
A B
Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-13 goes to approximately 0 VDC. 8-149 Tray 3 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and The Takeaway Sensor did not actuate within 450 - 520 msec after the Tray 3 feed started.
connectors are good, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
Initial Actions
There is +24 VDC between P/J801B-8 on the Tray PWB and GND. • Refer to BSD 8.3, BSD 8.6, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
Y N
good, replace the IOT Drive PWB • Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
Replace the Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Procedure

Y N
• Pinch Rolls and Springs (PL 2.8)
• Check for burrs on the Baffle (PL 2.8) Y N
• Gears in the Takeaway Drive Assembly (PL 2.7A) Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is
blocked.
Y N
Y N
Y N
Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP.
Y N
Press Stop. There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-12 on the Tray PWB and GND.
Y N
Y N
A B
8-148 Tray 2 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-149 2-94 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
Press Start. The voltage at P/J802B-11 goes to approximately 0 VDC. 8-150 Tray 4 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP
Y N
There is +5 VDC at P/J801B-7 on the Tray PWB. The Takeaway Sensor did not actuate within 620 - 720 msec after the Tray 4 feed started.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har- Initial Actions
ness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB • Refer to BSD 8.4, BSD 8.6, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Y N
• Check for burrs on the Baffle (PL 2.8) The display indicates a constant H.
• Gears in the Takeaway Drive Assembly (PL 2.7A) Y N
blocked.
Y N
Y N
Y N
Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP
Y N
Press Stop. There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-10 on the Tray PWB and GND.
Y N

Y N
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-95 8-149 Tray 3 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-150
A B
Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-9 goes to approximately 0 VDC. 8-152 Takeaway Sensor On RAP
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J801B-6 on the Tray PWB and GND. The Takeaway Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was
Y N switched on.
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB Initial Actions
Replace the Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). • Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any compo- Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor. Press the
Start button. The display indicates H.
• Check for burrs on the Baffle (PL 2.8) Y N
• Gears in the Takeaway Drive Assembly (PL 2.7A) Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is OK,
replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8).
If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the
harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL
2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

8-150 Tray 4 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-152 2-96 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
8-154 Pre Registration Sensor On RAP 8-157 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP
The Pre Registration Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was The Registration Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was
switched on. switched on.

• Refer to BSD 8.8 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. • Refer to BSD 8.8 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. • Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H. Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is OK, Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is OK,
replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15).
If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the
fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the
harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sen- harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor
sor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). (PL 2.15). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-97 8-154 Pre Registration Sensor On RAP, 8-157 Reg-
8-158 Pre IBT Sensor On Jam RAP 8-163 Pre IBT Sensor On Jam RAP
The Pre IBT Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was switched The Pre IBT Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the Registration Feed
on. started:

Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 008-163 Pre IBT Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H. Enter dC330 008-163 Pre IBT Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is OK, +5 VDC is measure between P/J420A-A8 on the IOT Drive and GND.
replace the Pre IBT Sensor (PL 7.10). Y N
If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the good, replace the Pre IBT Sensor (PL 7.10).
harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre IBT Sensor (PL Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre IBT Sensor with a sheet of
paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-163 Pre IBT Sensor. Press Start. The
display is L.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J420A-A9 and P/J420A-A7 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
ness is OK, replace the Pre IBT Sensor (PL 7.10). If the problem continues, replace the
IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start. The Registration Motor energizes.
Y N
Go to the Registration Motor RAP.
• Gears on the 2nd BTR (PL 7.10)
• Check for burrs on the Inlet Plate (PL 7.10)
• 2nd BTR Assembly (PL 7.9)

8-158 Pre IBT Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-163 Pre IBT Sen- 2-98 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
8-171 Tray 1 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP 8-172 Tray 2 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP
The Pre Registration Sensor did not actuate with 80 - 180 msec after the feed started from Tray The Pre Registration Sensor did not actuate with 320 - 420 msec after the feed started from
1. Tray 2.

Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measure between P/J419A-13 on the IOT Drive and GND. +5 VDC is measure between P/J419A-13 on the IOT Drive and GND.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is
good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16).
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Registration Sensor with a Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Registration Sensor with a
sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor
and press Start. The display is L. and press Start. The display is L.
Y N Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J419A-14 and P/J419A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB. There is +5 VDC between P/J419A-14 and P/J419A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N Y N
good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har- Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
ness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, ness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues,
replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes. Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes.
Y N Y N
Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP.
Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any compo- Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any compo-
nents that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. nents that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
• Pre Registration Roller and Bearings (PL 2.16) • Pre Registration Roller and Bearings (PL 2.16)
• Rollers and Springs (PL 2.16) • Rollers and Springs (PL 2.16)
• Check for burrs on the Chute and Upper Chute in the Pre Registration Assembly (PL • Check for burrs on the Chute and Upper Chute in the Pre Registration Assembly (PL
2.16). 2.16).
• All components in the Main Motor 2 Assembly (PL 1.5) • All components in the Main Motor 2 Assembly (PL 1.5)
• Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Lower Left Cover (PL 2.8) • Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Lower Left Cover (PL 2.8)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-99 8-171 Tray 1 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP,
8-173 Tray 3 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP 8-174 Tray 4 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP
The Pre Registration Sensor did not actuate with 520 - 620 msec after the feed started from The Pre Registration Sensor did not actuate with 720 - 820 msec after the feed started from
Tray 3. Tray 4.

Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N Y N
Y N Y N
good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16).
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Registration Sensor with a Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Registration Sensor with a
sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor
and press Start. The display is L. and press Start. The display is L.
Y N Y N
Y N Y N
ness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, ness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues,
Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes. Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes.
Y N Y N
Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP.
• Pre Registration Roller and Bearings (PL 2.16) • Pre Registration Roller and Bearings (PL 2.16)
• Rollers and Springs (PL 2.16) • Rollers and Springs (PL 2.16)
• Check for burrs on the Chute and Upper Chute in the Pre Registration Assembly (PL • Check for burrs on the Chute and Upper Chute in the Pre Registration Assembly (PL
2.16) 2.16)
• All components in the Main Motor 2 Assembly (PL 1.5) • All components in the Main Motor 2 Assembly (PL 1.5)
• Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Lower Left Cover (PL 2.8) • Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Lower Left Cover (PL 2.8)

8-173 Tray 3 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP, 8- 2-100 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
8-175 Tray 5 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP 8-176 Tray 1 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP
The Registration Sensor did not actuate with 562 - 1010 msec after the feed started from Tray The Registration Sensor did not actuate with 316 - 416 msec after the feed started from Tray 1.
5.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Refer to BSD 8.8 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
• Refer to BSD 8.8 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. • Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
Procedure
Procedure Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N
Y N +5 VDC is measure between P/J421A-11 on the IOT Drive and GND.
+5 VDC is measure between P/J421A-11 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N
Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15).
good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15).
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Registration Sensor with a
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and press
sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and Start. The display is L.
press Start. The display is L. Y N
Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J421A-12 and P/J421A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB.
There is +5 VDC between P/J421A-12 and P/J421A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N
Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the problem continues, replace
ness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start. The Registration Motor energizes. Y N
Y N Go to the Registration Motor RAP.
Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
nents that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. • Registration Roller and Roller, Springs, and Bearings in the Registration Assembly (PL
• Registration Roller and Roller, Springs, and Bearings in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15)
2.15) • Gear in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15)
• Gear in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15) • Check for burrs on the Upper Chute and Chute in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15).
• Check for burrs on the Upper Chute and Chute in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-101 8-175 Tray 5 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-
8-177 Tray 2 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP 8-178 Tray 3 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP
The Registration Sensor did not actuate with 556 - 656 msec after the feed started from Tray 2. The Registration Sensor did not actuate with 756 - 856 msec after the feed started from Tray 3.

Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N Y N
Y N Y N
good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15).
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Registration Sensor with a Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Registration Sensor with a
sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and
press Start. The display is L. press Start. The display is L.
Y N Y N
Y N Y N
ness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the problem continues, replace ness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the problem continues, replace
the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start. The Registration Motor energizes. Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start. The Registration Motor energizes.
Y N Y N
Go to the Registration Motor RAP. Go to the Registration Motor RAP.
• Registration Roller and Roller, Springs, and Bearings in the Registration Assembly (PL • Registration Roller and Roller, Springs, and Bearings in the Registration Assembly (PL
2.15) 2.15)
• Gear in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15) • Gear in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15)
• Check for burrs on the Upper Chute and Chute in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15). • Check for burrs on the Upper Chute and Chute in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15).

8-177 Tray 2 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-178 2-102 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
8-179 Tray 4 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP 8-305 Tray 5 Interlock Open RAP
The Registration Sensor did not actuate with 956 - 1056 msec after the feed started from Tray The Tray 5 Interlock is detected open.
4.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions Refer to BSD 7.4 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Procedure
Enter dC330 008-305 Tray 5 Interlock Switch. Press Start. Actuate, then deactuate, the Tray
Procedure 5 Interlock Switch. The display changes from L when the switch is actuated to H when
Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. the switch is deactuated.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measure between P/J421A-11 on the IOT Drive and GND. Connect the meter from P/J416B-9 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Actuate,
Y N then deactuate, the Tray 5 Interlock Switch. The voltage at P/J416B-9 goes from less
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is than +1.0 VDC when the switch is actuated, to +5.0 VDC when the switch is deactu-
good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). ated.
Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
good, replace the Tray 5 Switch (PL 2.12).
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Registration Sensor with a
sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
press Start. The display is L.
Y N If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the
There is +5 VDC between P/J421A-12 and P/J421A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.4 and check the
Y N harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Switch (PL
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is 2.12). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
ness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the problem continues, replace
Y N
• Registration Roller and Roller, Springs, and Bearings in the Registration Assembly (PL
2.15)
• Gear in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15)
• Check for burrs on the Upper Chute and Chute in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-103 8-179 Tray 4 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-
8-306 Drawer Interlock Open RAP Main Motor 2 RAP
The Drawer Interlock is detected open. Main Motor 2 is inoperative.

Refer to BSD 8.9 for the following procedure.
Refer to BSD 1.4 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start and Stop several times. Main Motor 2 ener-
Enter dC330 008-306 Drawer Interlock Switch. Press Start. Open, then close, the Drawer.
gizes and deenergizes.
The display changes from H when the Drawer is open to L when the Drawer is closed.
Y N
Y N
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J414B-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB
Connect the meter from P/J419B-18 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Open,
and machine frame.
then close, the Drawer. The voltage at P/J419B-18 goes from +5 VDC when the
Drawer is open to less than +1.0 VDC when the Drawer is closed. Y N
Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J414B-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and machine
frame.
Connect the meter from P/J11A-3 on the AC Driver PWB to machine frame. Open,
then close, the Drawer. The voltage at P/J11A-3 goes from +5 VDC when the Y N
Drawer is open to less than +1.0 VDC when the Drawer is closed. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Connect the meter from P/J14-8 on the AC Driver PWB to machine frame.
harness and connectors are OK, replace Main Motor 2 (PL 1.5).
Open, then close, the Drawer. The voltage at P/J14-8 goes from less than
1.0 VDC when the Drawer is open to +5.0 VDC when the Drawer is closed.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J414B-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approx-
Y N
imately +23 VDC.
There is + 5 VDC from P/J19-4 on the AC Drive PWB to machine
Y N
frame.
Replace Main Motor 2 Motor (PL 1.5).
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 1.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the
If the problem is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.9 and check the har-
harness is good, replace the Drawer Interlock Switch (PL 2.18).
ness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Main Motor 2 (PL 1.5).
Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace Main Motor 2 (PL 1.5). If the problem still continues, replace
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 1.4 and check the harness for an open circuit.
harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, go to Flag 7 on BSD 1.4 and
check the wire for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the
Drawer Interlock Switch (PL 2.18). If the problem continues, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL
9.3). If the problem still continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

8-306 Drawer Interlock Open RAP, Main Motor 2 RAP 2-104 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Takeaway Motor RAP Registration Motor RAP
The Takeaway Motor is inoperative. The Registration Motor is inoperative.

Refer to BSD 8.7 for the following procedure. Refer to BSD 8.9 for the following procedure.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press Start. The Takeaway Motor energizes. Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start and Stop several times. The Regis-
Y N tration Motor energizes and deenergizes.
Press the Stop button. Connect the meter from P/J801B-5 on the Tray PWB to machine Y N
frame. Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J801B-5 goes from +5 VDC to less Press the Stop button. +24 VDC is measured between P/J419A-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT
than +1.0 VDC when the Start button is pressed. Drive PWB and machine frame.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is +24 VDC is measured between P/J419A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and machine
good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). frame.
Y N
The voltage at P/J802B-6 on the Tray PWB is less than +1.0 VDC. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the
harness and connectors are OK, replace the Registration Motor (PL 2.15).
Check the following:
• Check if the drives for Takeaway Motor Assembly are binding (PL 2.7A). Replace Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J419A-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB goes
any damaged gears. to approximately +18 VDC.
• Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. Y N
• If the harness is good, replace the Takeaway Motor (PL 2.7A) Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
• If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3)

Replace the Registration Motor (PL 2.15).
If the problem is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.7 and check the har- If the problem is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.9 and check the har-
ness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Takeaway Motor (PL
ness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Registration Motor (PL
2.7A). If the problem continues, replace the Takeaway Motor Assembly (PL 2.7A). If the prob-
2.15). If the problem still continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
lem still continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem still continues, replace the

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-105 Takeaway Motor RAP, Registration Motor RAP
Takeaway Motor RAP, Registration Motor RAP 2-106 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
9-271 Yellow Toner Empty RAP 9-272 Magenta Toner Empty RAP
Control Logic has detected that the Yellow dispenser is empty. Control Logic has detected that the Magenta dispenser is empty.

This is a message fault only. An operator action is required This is a message fault only. An operator action is required
NOTE: If this code doesn’t clear after the Toner cartridge is replaced, go into NVM 776-372 NOTE: If this code doesn’t clear after the Toner cartridge is replaced, go into NVM 776-373
Toner Cartridge Y Empty and set the value to 0. Then, go into NVM 776-060 and set the value Toner Cartridge M Empty and set the value to 0. Then, go into NVM 776-061 and set the value
to 0. to 0.
Procedure Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-354 This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-355
Yellow Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem. Magenta Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-107 9-271 Yellow Toner Empty RAP, 9-272 Magenta
9-273 Cyan Toner Empty RAP 9-274 Black Toner Empty RAP
Control Logic has detected that the Cyan dispenser is empty. Control Logic has detected that the Black dispenser is empty.

NOTE: If this code doesn’t clear after the Toner cartridge is replaced, go into NVM 776-374 NOTE: If this code doesn’t clear after the Toner cartridge is replaced, go into NVM 776-371
Toner Cartridge C Empty and set the value to 0. Then, go into NVM 776-062 and set the value Toner Cartridge K Empty and set the value to 0. Then, go into NVM 776-063 and set the value
to 0. to 0.
Procedure Procedure
Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem. Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem.

9-273 Cyan Toner Empty RAP, 9-274 Black Toner 2-108 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
9-311 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Type Mismatch RAP 9-342/9-432 2nd BTR Contact Fail RAP
Xerographic CRU (Drum) Type Mismatch. The Control Logic detected that the Xerographic The Control Logic has detected that the 2nd BTR failed to contact the IBT.
CRU (Drum) that is installed in the machine is not the correct type for this product.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Refer to BSD 9.10 and 9.15 for the following procedure.
• Refer to BSD 9.1 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. • Ensure that P/J421A and P/J414A on the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2), P/J255 on the 2nd
• Ensure that P/J422B on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J713 and P/J704 on the EP ROM PWB BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4), and P/J159 on the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor
are connected before beginning this RAP. (PL 7.9) are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Check the Type of Xerographic CRU (Drum) that is installed in the machine, NVM 774-056 Stack the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Contact.
Drum Unit Type. The Xerographic CRU (Drum) is the approved type. Press Start. The Main Motor energizes.
Y N Y N
Install an approved Xerographic CRU (Drum). Go to the OF4-001 Main Motor RAP.
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 9.1. Check the harness for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the harness Enter dC330 009-215 2nd BTR H/Position Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H)
is good, replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive Y N
PWB (PL 9.2). Press Stop for the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll
Contact. Rotate the Indicator (Item 3 PL 7.9) to block the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position
Sensor. The display changes to (H)
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J421A-2 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J421A-3 and P/J421A-1 on the IOT Drive
PWB.
Y N
Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on
the IOT LVPS and P/J421A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM
(IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS and
P/J421A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 9.10 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Go to
Flag 3 on BSD 9.10. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good,
replace the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9).
Check the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor for intermittent operation. If the
sensor is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Stack the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Con-
tact. The 2nd BTR raises to the contact position.
Y N
Press Stop for the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-058 2ND Belt Trans-
fer Roll Contact. +24 VDC is measured at P/J414B-10 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Y N
Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and check the fuse F1 on the AC Drive PWB.
If the fuse is good, check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS
and P/J414B-9 on the IOT Drive PWB.
A B C D
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-109 9-311 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Type Mismatch
A B C D
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.10. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. 9-343/9-433 2nd BTR Retract Fail RAP
If the wires are good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem con-
tinues, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4). The Control Logic has detected that the 2nd BTR failed to retract.
Enter dC330 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Contact. There is less than +1 VDC Initial Actions
at P/J414B-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. • Refer to BSD 9.10 and 9.15 for the following procedure.
Y N
• Ensure that P/J421A and P/J414A on the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2), P/J255 on the 2nd
BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4), and P/J159 on the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor
Check the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch for slipping, binding or intermittent operation. (PL 7.9) are connected before beginning this RAP.
Check for mechanical damage in the 2nd BTR components (PL 7.10), gears and
drives. Procedure
Enter dC330 009-215 2nd BTR H/Position Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (L).
Check the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch for binding or intermittent operation. If the 2nd BTR Y N
Retract Clutch is good, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9). If Stack the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Contact.
the problem continues, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4). Press Start. The Main Motor energizes.
Y N
Check the Main Motor for slow or intermittent operation. Refer to the OF4-001 Main Motor Go to the OF4-001 Main Motor RAP.
RAP.
Check the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9) for intermittent operation. If the Enter dC330 009-215 2nd BTR H/Position Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (L).
sensor is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Y N
less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J421A-2 and GND on the IOT Drive
PWB.
Y N
PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 9.10 and check the wire for an open circuit. If
the wires are good, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL
7.9).
Check the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4) for binding, slipping, or intermittent operation.
If the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch is good, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sen-
sor (PL 7.9). If the problem continues, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4).
Check the Main Motor for slow or intermittent operation. Refer to the OF4-001 Main Motor
RAP.
Check the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4) for slipping, binding or intermittent operation.
Check for mechanical damage in the 2nd BTR components (PL 7.10), gears and drives. If the
2nd BTR Retract Clutch is good, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9).
If the problem continues, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4). If the problem contin-
ues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

9-342/9-432 2nd BTR Contact Fail RAP, 9-343/9-433 2-110 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
9-344/9-434 IBT Cleaner Contact Fail RAP Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.11 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3).
The Control Logic has detected that the IBT Cleaner failed to contact the IBT.
Check the Cleaner Retract Clutch for binding or intermittent operation. If the Cleaner
Initial Actions Retract Clutch is good, replace the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor (PL 7.3). If the
• Refer to BSD 9.11 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. problem continues, replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3).
• Ensure that P/J417A and P/J418B on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J252 on the Cleaner
Retract Clutch, and P/J111 on the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor are connected
before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Stack the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-066 IBT Cleaner Contact.
Enter dC330 009-216 IBT Cleaner Retract Home Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H)
Y N
Remove the IBT REP 7.1.1 (Reinstall IBT after test is completed). Manually block the IBT
Clean Home Position Sensor. The display changes to (H)
Y N
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J418B-6 and P/J418B-4 on the IOT Drive
PWB.
Y N
Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21 -1
on the IOT LVPS and P/J418B8-6 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC
COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT
LVPS and P/J418B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Flag 3 on BSD 9.11. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good,
replace the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor (PL 7.3).
Enter dC330 009-059 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Retract. Press Start. Enter dC330 009-067
IBT Cleaner Retract. Press Start. The Cleaner Retract Clutch energizes.
Y N
PWB.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-9 and GND on the IOT Drive
PWB.
Y N
Go to the +24 VDC-4 Wirenet and check the wires between P/J24-2 on
the IOT LVPS and P/J417A-9 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.11. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
tinues, replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3).
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-111 9-344/9-434 IBT Cleaner Contact Fail RAP
9-345/9-435 IBT Cleaner Retract Fail RAP 9-354 Yellow Toner Dispenser Broken RAP
The Control Logic has detected that the IBT Clean Blade failed to retract from the IBT. This fault code appears when any one of the following conditions occurs: the Low Toner Sensor
detects that there is no toner for a period of 2 seconds; the low toner sensor detects that there
Initial Actions is no toner for a period of 500 seconds (approximately 8 minutes); or when the toner dispense
• Refer to BSD 9.11 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. motor remains energized.
• Ensure that P/J417A and P/J418B on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J252 on the Cleaner
Retract Clutch, and P/J111 on the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor are connected
Initial Actions
before beginning this RAP. Refer to BSD 9.4, 9.6 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure.
Ensure that P/J432, P/J433B, and P/J434 on the Dispense PWB, P/J421B on the IOT Drive
Procedure PWB, P/J214 on the Yellow Cartridge Motor and P/J118 on the Yellow Low Toner Sensor are
Stack the dC330 codes 4-007 and 9-067. Enter dC330 009-216 IBT Cleaner Retract Home connected before beginning this RAP.
Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (L)
Y N NOTE: If the code doesn’t clear and the auger isn’t broken, go to NVM 776-060 and set the
Remove the IBT REP 7.1.1 (Reinstall IBT after test is completed). Manually unblock the value to 0. Then, go to NVM 776-372 Toner Cartridge Y Empty and set the value to 0.
IBT Clean Home Position Sensor. The display changes to (L)
Y N Procedure
+0 VDC is measured between P/J418B-5 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Check the Yellow Toner Cartridge. The toner cartridge is empty.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J418B6 and P/J418B-4 on the IOT Drive
PWB. NOTE: The Cartridge Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed.
Y N The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will ener-
Go to the +5 VDC-3 Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the gize the Cartridge Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get
IOT LVPS and P/J418B-6 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (+5 an accurate reading.
V Ret.)-3 Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS
Remove the Yellow Toner Cartridge to see the Toner Cartridge Coupling (PL 6.3). Cheat
and P/J418B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. the Front Door Interlock. Enter dC330 009-012 Cartridge Motor Y. Press Start. The Yel-
low Toner Cartridge Coupling rotates.
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 9.11 and check the wire for an open circuit. Go to Flag 3
Y N
on BSD 9.11. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace
Press Start. The Yellow Cartridge Motor operates.
the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor (PL 7.3).
Y N
+12 VDC is measured at P/J433B-9 and at P/J433B-7 on the Dispense
PWB.
Y N
Enter dC330 009-059 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Retract. Press Start. Enter dC330 009-067
+24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dis-
IBT Cleaner Retract. Press Start. The Cleaner Retract Clutch de-energizes.
pense PWB.
Y N
Y N
Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on
Y N
the IOT LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.11. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between
P/J23-4 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB.
tinues, replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3).
+5VDC is measured between P/J421B-4 and GND on the IOT Drive
Replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3).
PWB when the display indicates Off.
Y N
Check the Cleaner Retract Clutch for binding or intermittent operation. If the Cleaner
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 9.4. Check the wire for an open or a short cir-
Retract Clutch is good, replace the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor (PL 7.3). If the
cuit. If the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the
problem continues, replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3). problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC.
A B C D
9-345/9-435 IBT Cleaner Retract Fail RAP, 9-354 Yel- 2-112 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C D A E
Y N Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.4 and check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit
to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Low Toner (M) Sensor (PL 6.3). If the
Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4) problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.4. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If Vacuum the Yellow Dispense Housing. Reinstall the Yellow Toner Cartridge. Enter
the wires are good, replace the Cartridge Motor (Y). (PL 6.3). dC330 and stack the codes 009-032 Dispense Motor Y and [009-257 Low Toner
Sensor Y]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed.
Check the Coupling and Spring (PL 6.3) for damage or contamination. Clean, repair Y N
or replace as required. Connect the DVM from J 432 pin 3 to GND. +5 VDC is measured between P/
J433A-6 and P/J433A-4.
NOTE: The Dispense Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. Y N
The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will ener- Go to+5VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and check the wires between P/J21-1
gize the Dispense Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get on the IOT LVPS and P/J118-1 on the Low Toner Sensor (Y).
an accurate reading. Go to DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J21-
5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J118-3 on the Low Toner Sensor (Y).
Enter dC330 009-032 Dispense Motor Y. Press Start. Watch the Dispense and Conveyor
Gears to see if they rotate. The Toner Dispense Motor (Y) operates. Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.4 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Check
Y N the wires between P/J118-1and P/J433A-6 and between P/J118-3 and P/
+12 VDC is measured at P/J434-6 and at P/J434-5 on the Dispense PWB.
J433A-4 for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Low Toner (Y)
Y N
Sensor (PL 6.3).
+24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense
PWB.
This should resolve the problem. Ensure that there is no blockage in the dispense
Y N area. Check the machine for proper operation.
Go to the ++24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on
The sensor indicates that toner is present in the Toner Dispense Housing and is being dis-
Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J23- pensed. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
4 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB.
Replace the Yellow Toner Cartridge (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
+5VDC is measured between P/J421B-3 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB
when the display indicates Off.
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.6. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If
the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem con-
tinues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC.

Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4)
check the toner dispense gears (PL 6.3) and (PL 6.4) for damage. If the gears are
OK, replace the Toner Dispense Motor Y (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace
the Toner Dispense Assembly Y (PL 6.4).
Reinstall the Yellow Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-032 Dispense
Motor Y] and [009-257 Low Toner Sensor Y]. The sensor changes state as toner is
dispensed.
Y N
Connect the DVM from J 432 pin 3 to GND. The meter reads a constant +5 VDC.
A E
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-113 9-354 Yellow Toner Dispenser Broken RAP
A B C D
9-355 Magenta Toner Dispenser Broken RAP Y N
This fault code appears when any one of the following conditions occurs: the Low Toner Sensor
detects that there is no toner for a period of 2 seconds; the Low Toner Sensor detects that Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4)
there is no toner for a period of 500 seconds (approximately 8 minutes); or when the toner dis-
pense motor remains energized. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.5. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If
the wires are good, replace the Cartridge Motor (M). (PL 6.3)
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.5, 9.6 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Check the Coupling and Spring (PL 6.3) for damage or contamination. Clean, repair
or replace as required.
Ensure that P/J432, P/J433B, and P/J434 on the Dispense PWB, P/J421B on the IOT
NOTE: The Dispense Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed.
DRIVE PWB, P/J215 on the Magenta Cartridge Motor and P/J119 on the Magenta Low Toner
The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will ener-
Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
gize the Dispense Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get
an accurate reading.
NOTE: If the code doesn’t clear and the auger isn’t broken, go to NVM 776-061 and set the
value to 0. Then, go to NVM 776-373 Toner Cartridge M Empty and set the value to 0. Enter dC330 009-033 Dispense Motor M. Press Start. Watch the Dispense and Conveyor
Gears to see if they rotate. The Toner Dispense Motor (M) operates.
Procedure Y N
Check the Magenta Toner Cartridge. The toner cartridge is empty. +12 VDC is measured at P/J434-4 and at P/J434-3 on the Dispense PWB.
Y N Y N
NOTE: The Cartridge Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. +24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense
PWB.
Y N
gize the Cartridge Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get
Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT
LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB.
Remove the Magenta Toner Cartridge to see the Toner Cartridge Coupling. Cheat the Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J23-
Front Door Interlock. Enter dC330 009-013 Cartridge Motor M. Press Start. The 4 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB.
Magenta Toner Cartridge Coupling rotates.
Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J421B-5 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB
Press Start. The Magenta Cartridge Motor operates. when the display indicates Off.
Y N Y N
+12 VDC is measured at P/J433B-6 and at P/J433B-4 on the Dispense Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.6. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If
PWB. the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem con-
Y N tinues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
+24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dis-
pense PWB. Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC.
Y N Y N
Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4)
P/J23-4 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB.
+5VDC is measured between P/J421B-6 and GND on the IOT Drive check the toner dispense gears (PL 6.3) and (PL 6.4) for damage. If the gears are
PWB when the display indicates Off. OK, replace the Toner Dispense Motor M (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace
Y N the Toner Dispense Assembly M (PL 6.4).
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 9.5. Check the wire for an open or a short cir-
cuit. If the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the Reinstall the Magenta Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-033 Dispense
problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Motor M] and [009-258 Low Toner Sensor M]. The sensor changes state as toner is
dispensed.
Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC
A B C D A
9-355 Magenta Toner Dispenser Broken RAP 2-114 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
Y N 9-356 Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP
Connect the meter between P/J432-2 and GND. The meter reads a constant +5
VDC. This fault code appears when any one of the following conditions occurs: the low toner sensor
Y N detects that there is no toner for a period of 2 seconds; the low toner sensor detects that there
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.5 and check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit is no toner for a period of 500 seconds (approximately 8 minutes); or when the toner dispense
to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Low Toner (M) Sensor (PL 6.3). If the motor remains energized.
problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Vacuum the Magenta Dispense Housing. Reinstall the Magenta Toner Cartridge. Refer to BSD 9.5, 9.6 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure.
Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-033 Dispense Motor M] and [009-258 Low Toner
Sensor M]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed. Ensure that P/J432, P/J433B, and P/J434 on the Dispense PWB, P P/J421B on the IOT
Y N DRIVE PWB, P/J216 on the Cyan Cartridge Motor and P/J120 on the Cyan Low Toner Sensor
+5 VDC is measured between P/J433A-9 and P/J433A-7.
are connected before beginning this RAP.
Y N
Go to +5VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and check the wires between P/J21-1 NOTE: If the code doesn’t clear and the auger isn’t broken, go to NVM 776-062 and set the
on the IOT LVPS and P/J119-1 on the Low Toner Sensor (M).
value to 0. Then, go to NVM 776-374 Toner Cartridge C Empty and set the value to 0.
Go to DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J21-
5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J119-3 on the Low Toner Sensor (M). Procedure
Check the Cyan Toner Cartridge. The toner cartridge is empty.
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.5 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Check
Y N
the wires between P/J119-1and P/J433A-9 and between P/J119-3 and P/
J433A-7 for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Low Toner (M) NOTE: The Cartridge Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed.
Sensor (PL 6.3). The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will ener-
This should resolve the problem. Ensure that there is no blockage in the dispense an accurate reading.
area. Check the machine for proper operation.
Remove the Cyan Toner Cartridge to see the Toner Cartridge Coupling. Cheat the Front
The sensor indicates that toner is present in the Toner Dispense Housing and is being dis- Door Interlock. Enter dC330 [009-014 Cartridge Motor C]. Press Start. The Toner Car-
tridge Motor C operates.
pensed. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Replace the Magenta Toner Cartridge (Section 6, Machine Consumables). +12 VDC is measured at P/J433B-3 and at P/J433B-1 on the Dispense PWB.
Y N
PWB.
Y N
Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J23-
Y N
Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC

Y N

A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-115 9-355 Magenta Toner Dispenser Broken RAP, 9-356
A B C A D E
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.5. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the Vacuum the Cyan Dispense Housing. Reinstall the Cyan Toner Cartridge. Enter
wires are good, replace the Cartridge Motor (C). (PL 6.3) dC330. Stack the codes [009-034 Dispense Motor C] and [009-259 Low Toner Sen-
sor C]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed.
NOTE: The Dispense Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. Y N
The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will ener- +5 VDC is measured between P/J433A-12 and P/J433A-10.
gize the Dispense Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get Y N
an accurate reading. Go to+5VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and check the wires between P/J21-1
on the IOT LVPS and P/J120-1 on the Low Toner Sensor (C).
Enter dC330 009-034 Dispense Motor C. Press Start. Watch the Dispense and Conveyor
Gears to see if they rotate. The Toner Dispense Motor (C) operates.
5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J120-3 on the Low Toner Sensor (C).
Y N
+12 VDC is measured at P/J434-2 and at P/J434-1 on the Dispense PWB. Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.5 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Check
Y N
the wires between P/J120-1and P/J433A-12 and between P/J120-3 and P/
J433A-10 for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Low Toner (C)
PWB.
Sensor (PL 6.3).
Y N
This should resolve the problem. Ensure that there is no blockage in the dispense
area. Check the machine for proper operation.
Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J23-
Replace the Cyan Toner Cartridge (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
Y N
Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC.

Y N
check the toner dispense gears (PL 6.3) and (PL 6.4) for damage. If the gears are
OK, replace the Toner Dispense Motor C (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace
the Toner Dispense Assembly C (PL 6.4).
Reinstall the Cyan Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-034 Dispense
Motor C] and [009-259 Low Toner Sensor C]. The sensor changes state as toner is
dispensed.
Y N
Connect the meter between P/J432-1 and GND. The meter reads a constant +5
VDC.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.5 and check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit
to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Low Toner (M) Sensor (PL 6.3). If the
problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
A D E
9-356 Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP 2-116 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
9-357 Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.4. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the
wires are good, replace the Cartridge Motor (K). (PL 6.3)
Fault code appears when any one of the following conditions occurs: the low toner sensor
detects that there is no toner for a period of 2 seconds; the low toner sensor detects that there NOTE: The Dispense Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed.
is no toner for a period of 500 seconds (approximately 8 minutes); or when the toner dispense The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will ener-
motor remains energized. gize the Dispense Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get
Initial Actions Enter dC330 009-031 Dispense Motor K. Press Start. Watch the Dispense and Conveyor
Refer to BSD 9.4, 9.6 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Gears to see if they rotate. The Toner Dispense Motor (K) operates.
Y N
Ensure that P/J432 and P/J433B on the Dispense PWB, P/J421B on the IOT DRIVE PWB, P/ +12 VDC is measured at P/J434-8 and at P/J434-7 on the Dispense PWB.
P/J213 on the Black Cartridge Motor, and P/J117 on the Black Low Toner Sensor are con- Y N
nected before beginning this RAP. +24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense
PWB.
NOTE: If the code doesn’t clear and the auger isn’t broken, go to NVM 776-063 and set the Y N
value to 0. Then, go to NVM 776-371 Toner Cartridge K Empty and set the value to 0. Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT
Procedure Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J23-
Check the Black Toner Cartridge. The toner cartridge is empty. 4 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB.
Y N
NOTE: The Cartridge Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed.
Y N
Remove the Black Toner Cartridge to see the Toner Cartridge Coupling. Cheat the Front tinues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
Door Interlock. Enter dC330 009-011 Cartridge Motor K. Press Start. The Toner Car-
tridge Motor K operates. Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC.
Y N Y N
+12 VDC is measured at P/J433B-12 and at P/J433B-10 on the Dispense PWB. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4)
PWB.
Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.6 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK,
Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT check the toner dispense gears (PL 6.3) and (PL 6.4) for damage. If the gears are
LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB. OK, replace the Toner Dispense Motor K (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace
Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J23- the Toner Dispense Assembly K (PL 6.4).
Reinstall the Black Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-031 Dispense
+5VDC is measured between P/J421B-2 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB Motor K] and [009-255 Low Toner Sensor K]. The sensor changes state as toner is
when the display indicates Off. dispensed.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 9.4. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If Connect the meter between P/J432-4 and GND. The meter reads a constant +5
the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem con- VDC.
tinues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.4 and check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit
Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Low Toner (K) Sensor (PL 6.3). If the
Y N problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

A B C A D E
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-117 9-357 Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP
A D E
Vacuum the Black Dispense Housing. Reinstall the Black Toner Cartridge. Enter 9-358 Cleaning Auger Full RAP
dC330. Stack the codes [009-031 Dispense Motor K] and [009-255 Low Toner Sen-
sor K]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed. The Control Logic has determined that 130 copies have been made since the Cleaning Auger
Y N Stopped.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J433A-3 and P/J433A-1.
Y N Initial Actions
Go to +5VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and check the wires between P/J21-1
on the IOT LVPS and P/J117-1 on the Low Toner Sensor (K).
• Ensure that P/J418B on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J115 0n the Auger Sensor are con-
nected.
5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J117-3 on the Low Toner Sensor (K).
• Check that the Auger sensor is clean and properly installed.
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.4 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Check
the wires between P/J117-1and P/J433A-3 and between P/J117-3 and P/ Procedure
J433A-1 for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Low Toner (K) Enter dC330 009-248 Waste Auger Rotate Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H)
Sensor (PL 6.3). Y N
Check the Auger Sensor for intermittent operation. If there is intermittent operation,
This should resolve the problem. Ensure that there is no blockage in the dispense replace the Auger Sensor (PL 5.5). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB
area. Check the machine for proper operation. (PL 9.2).
The Waste Bottle is full
Y N
The Waste Toner Junction is packed with toner
Replace the Black Toner Cartridge (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
Y N
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J418B-3 and P/J418B-1 on the IOT Drive

PWB.
Y N
Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the
IOT LVPS and P/J418B-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (IOT)
Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418B-
1 on the IOT Drive PWB.
replace the Auger Sensor (PL 5.5).
Clean the Waste Toner Junction. If large particle of fused toner are present, replace the
Waste Toner Junction (PL 5.5).
Replace the Waste Toner Bottle and clean the Waste Toner Junction (Section 6, Machine Con-
sumables).

9-357 Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP, 9-358 2-118 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
9-363 Rotary Home Position Fail RAP Enter DC920. Select Home Position and press Start. The Rotary returns to the Home
position.
Control Logic detected that the Rotary did not reach the Home position Y N
Check the Rotary Drive Components (PL 6.1) and (PL 6.6) for contamination and or
Initial Actions binding. If the problem continues, replace the Rotary Motor (PL 6.1).
• Refer to BSD 9.2 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure
Press Start again. Visually inspect the Rotary Assembly. Ensure smooth operation of the
• Ensure that P/J420A, P/J418A and P/J412A on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J260, P/J261,
Rotary Motor. The Rotary Assembly goes to the Y, M, C, K, positions and then to the
and P/J262 on the Rotary PWB, and P/J110 on the Rotary Home Position Sensor are
Home position without binding.
connected.
Y N
• Verify that the Xerographic CRU (Drum) unit is firmly seated and secured. Replace the Rotary PWB (PL 6.1).
• Adjust the Rotary Home Position Sensor (ADJ 6.1.1).
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, check the Rotary
Procedure Drive Components (PL 6.1) and (PL 6.5) for contamination and or binding. Check the
Rotary Home Position Sensor for contamination. If the problem continues, replace the
The fault is declared after long runs of black-and-white prints or copies
Rotary Home Position Sensor (PL 6.1).
Y N
If erratic operation or intermittent faults continue, perform dC301 NVM Initialization.
Enter dC330 009-220 Rotary Home Position Sensor. Press Start. Ensure that the Rotary
is in the home position The Display indicates (H). Remove the Black Development Housing. If binding is present, replace the Black Developer
Y N
(REP 6.6.2).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J418A-7 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Perform the following NVM modification to resolve the problem:
Y N
• Enter dC131 from the machine UI.
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.2. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire
is good, replace the Rotary Home Position Sensor (PL 6.1). • Change the value in location 776-066 to 300.
• Change the value in location 776-480 to 300.
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). • Exit UI diagnostics.
Enter DC920. Select Yellow Position and press Start. The Rotary goes to the Yellow
Developer position
Y N
Check the Fuses on the Rotary PWB. One or both of the fuses are open
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J14-11 on the AC Driver PWB and P/J24-
4 on the IOT LVPS.
Y N
Y N
Go to the +24 VDC wirenet, and check the fuse F5 on the AC Drive PWB.
If the fuse is good, check the wire and circuit between P/J14-11 on the AC
Driver PWB and P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS for an open circuit.
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 9.2. Check the wires for an open or a short circuit. If the
wires are good, replace the Rotary PWB (PL 6.1). If the problem continues,
Replace the Rotary Motor (PL 6.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT
Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the Fuses. If the fuses become open again, replace the Rotary Motor (PL
6.1).
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-119 9-363 Rotary Home Position Fail RAP
9-365/9-450 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Yellow RAP 9-366/9-451 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Magenta RAP
Control Logic has detected that the Yellow dispenser is almost empty. Control Logic has detected that the Magenta dispenser is almost empty.

Procedure Procedure

9-365/9-450 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Yellow 2-120 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
9-367/9-452 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Cyan RAP 9-368/9-453 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Black RAP
Control Logic has detected that the Cyan dispenser is empty. Control Logic has detected that the Black dispenser is almost empty.

Procedure Procedure
Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem. Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-121 9-367/9-452 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Cyan
A
9-369 Rotary Lock Fail RAP Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
The Control Logic has detected that the Rotary Latch Solenoid failed to lock
Initial Actions
Ensure that P/J412A and P/J418A on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J272 on the Rotary Latch Sole-
noid, and P/J116 on the Rotary Latch Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 009-237 Rotary Lock Mech Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H)
Y N
Actuate the Rotary Latch Sensor. The display changes to (H)
Y N
Y N
PWB.
Y N
the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J116-1 on the
Rotary Latch Sensor and P/J418A-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC
COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J116-3 on the Rotary
Latch Sensor and P/J418A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. If the wires are good,
replace the Rotary Latch Sensor (PL 6.1).
Enter dC330 009-018 Rotary Lock Mech Latch. Press Start. The Rotary Latch Sole-
noid Latches
Y N
PWB.
Y N
the wires are good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem contin-
ues, replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid (PL 6.1).
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid (PL 6.1).
Check the Rotary Latch Solenoid for binding or intermittent operation. If the Rotary Latch
Solenoid is good, replace the Rotary Latch Sensor (PL 6.1). If the problem continues,
replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid(PL 6.1).
A
9-369 Rotary Lock Fail RAP 2-122 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
9-370 Rotary Release Fail RAP Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
The Control Logic has detected that the Rotary Latch Solenoid failed to unlock
Initial Actions
Ensure that P/J412A and P/J418A on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J272 on the Rotary Latch Sole-
noid, and P/J116 on the Rotary Latch Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 009-237 Rotary Lock Mech Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (L)
Y N
Deactuate the Rotary Latch Sensor. The display changes to (L)
Y N
Y N
PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.2 and check the wire for an open. Go to the +5 VDC
(IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J116-1 on the Rotary Latch Sen-
sor and P/J418A-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (IOT) Wirenet
and check the wires between P/J116-3 on the Rotary Latch Sensor and P/
J418A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. If the wires are good, replace the Rotary Latch
Sensor (PL 6.1).
Enter dC330 009-018 Rotary Lock Mech Latch. Press Start. The Rotary Latch Sole-
noid releases.
Y N
PWB.
Y N
the wires are good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem contin-
ues, replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid (PL 6.1).
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid (PL 6.1).
Check the Rotary Latch Solenoid for binding or intermittent operation. If the Rotary Latch
Solenoid is good, replace the Rotary Latch Sensor (PL 6.1). If the problem continues,
replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid(PL 6.1).
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-123 9-370 Rotary Release Fail RAP
9-372 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Not In Position RAP 9-374 Waste Bottle Not In Position RAP
Xerographic CRU (Drum) not in Position. The Control Logic detected that the Xerographic CRU This status code is declared when the sensor detects the there is no Waste Bottle, or that the
(Drum) is not installed in the machine. Waste Bottle has been improperly installed.

Refer to BSD 9.1 for the following procedure. Refer to BSD 9.13 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure.
Ensure that P/J422A on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J713 are connected and that the Xero- Check that the Waste Bottle is in place, and that the actuator is not deformed. Check the Waste
graphic CRU (Drum) is properly installed before beginning this RAP. Toner Bottle Sensor for dirt or foreign matter.
Procedure Procedure
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 9.1. Check the harness for an open or a short circuit. If the harness is Enter dC330 009-249 Waste Bottle Position Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (L)
good, replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum). Y N
Check the Waste Toner Bottle Sensor for intermittent operation. If there is intermittent
If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). operation, replace the Waste Toner Bottle Sensor (PL 5.2). If the problem continues,
NOTE: Check GP 15 Setting the Machine for a Time & Materials (T & M) Account, to ensure
that the CRU is compatible with the machine service contract. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J413-B4 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.13. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good,
replace the Waste Toner Bottle Sensor (PL 5.2).

9-372 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Not In Position RAP, 2-124 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
9-376 Waste Bottle Full RAP 9-378 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Change RAP
Waste Bottle Full. This status code is declared when the number of copies reach a specific Control Logic has detected that the count in the Xerographic CRU (Drum) Eprom has reached
count after the Waste Toner Full Sensor has detected a full toner bottle. 40k.
NOTE: The specified count is programmable in NVM location 774-020 Bottle Full The default Initial Actions
value of 300 may cause overfilling of the Waste Toner Bottle if many high coverage prints are
This is a message fault only. An operator action is required.
made after detection. If this occurs, set the value to a lower number.

• Refer to BSD 9.13and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. This fault should not require any service action. The Xerographic CRU (Drum) is specified as a
• Check the Waste Toner Full Sensor for dirt or foreign matter Customer Replaceable Unit.
Check that the / P/J114 on the Waste Toner Full Sensor, and P/J413B on the IOT Drive PWB
are firmly connected.
Procedure
The Waste Toner Bottle is full.
Y N
Enter dC330 009-250 Waste Bottle Full Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H)
Y N
Check the Waste Toner Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If there is intermittent
operation, replace the Waste Toner Full Sensor (PL 5.2). If the problem continues,
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J413B-8 and P/J413B-6.

Y N
Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT
LVPS and P/J413B-8 on the Waste Toner Full Sensor. Go to the DC COM (IOT)
Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-3 on the IOT LVPS and P/J413B-6 on
the Waste Toner Full Sensor.
Go to Flag 4 and Flag 6 on BSD 9.13. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, replace the Waste Toner Full Sensor (PL 5.2).
. Replace the Waste Toner Bottle (Section 6, Machine Consumables).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-125 9-376 Waste Bottle Full RAP, 9-378 Xerographic
9-379 Trickle Bottle Full RAP 9-400 Black Toner Near Empty RAP
Trickle Bottle Full. This status code is declared when the number of copies reach a specific Control Logic has detected that the Black dispenser is almost empty.
count after the Trickle Toner Full Sensor has detected a full trickle bottle.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions This is a message fault only. An operator action is required
• Check the Trickle Toner Full Sensor for dirt or foreign matter Procedure
Check that the P/J122 on the Trickle Toner Full Sensor, and P/J417A on the IOT Drive PWB This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-356
are firmly connected. Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
Procedure
The Trickle Toner Bottle is full.
Y N
Enter dC330 009-251 Trickle Bottle Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H)
Y N
Check the Trickle Toner Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor appears
to be good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace
the Trickle Toner Full Sensor (PL 6.5).
Y N
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J417A-1 and P/J417A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Go to the +24 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J23-1 on the IOT
LVPS and P/J417A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB for an open circuit. Go to the DC COM
(24 VRET) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J23-4 on the IOT LVPS and P/
J417A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB for an open circuit.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.3. Check the wire for an open circuit. Check the wires between P/
J122-1 of the Trickle Toner Full Sensor and P/J417A-1 of the IOT Drive PWB and
between P/J122-3 of the Trickle Toner Full Sensor and P/J417A-3 of the IOT Drive PWB
for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Trickle Toner Full Sensor (PL 6.5).
Replace the Trickle Toner Bottle (Section 6, Machine Consumables).

9-379 Trickle Bottle Full RAP, 9-400 Black Toner Near 2-126 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
9-402 Yellow Toner Near Empty RAP 9-403 Magenta Toner Near Empty RAP
Control Logic has detected that the Yellow dispenser is almost empty. Control Logic has detected that the Magenta dispenser is almost empty.

Procedure Procedure

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-127 9-402 Yellow Toner Near Empty RAP, 9-403 Magen-
9-404 Cyan Toner Near Empty RAP 9-410 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Change Soon RAP
Control Logic has detected that the Cyan dispenser is almost empty. Control Logic has detected that the Xerographic CRU (Drum) is almost at the end of life.

Procedure Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-356 This fault should not require any service action.
Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem.

9-404 Cyan Toner Near Empty RAP, 9-410 Xerograph- 2-128 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
9-420 Waste Bottle Near Full RAP 9-423 Trickle Bottle Near Full RAP
Control Logic has detected that the Waste Bottle is almost full. Control Logic has detected that the Trickle Bottle is almost full.

Procedure Procedure
Waste Bottle Full RAP to troubleshoot the problem. Trickle Bottle Full RAP to troubleshoot the problem.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-129 9-420 Waste Bottle Near Full RAP, 9-423 Trickle
9-424 Cleaning Auger Near Full RAP 9-601 Humidity Out Of Range RAP
Control Logic has detected that the Cleaning Auger is almost full. The measured humidity was out of the prescribed range.

This is a message fault only. An operator action is required • Refer to BSD 9.14 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure.
• Check the Temp Humidity Sensor (PL 7.1) for dirt or foreign matter
Procedure Check that the P/J142 on the Temp Humidity Sensor, and P/J422A on the IOT Drive PWB
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-358 are firmly connected.
Cleaning Auger Full RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
Procedure
+5 VDC is measured between P/J422B-2 and P/J422A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 9.14. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If
the wires are good, replace the Temp Humidity Sensor (PL 7.1). If the problem continues,

9-424 Cleaning Auger Near Full RAP, 9-601 Humidity 2-130 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
9-610 VPatch Out Of Range RAP 9-612 TRC RADC Out Of Range RAP
The measured toned ADC patch was to light. The measured toned TRC patch density is out of range.

• Clean the ADC Sensor. • Clean the ADC Sensor.
• Clean the IBT Belt. • Clean the IBT Belt.
• Check that P/J139 on the ADC Sensor PWB, IBT connector J702A, J702B and P/ • Check that the P/J139 on the ADC Sensor PWB, IBT connector J702A, J702B and P/
J416A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected. J416A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the following in the order listed. Perform the following in the order listed.
• Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for • Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for
proper operation. proper operation.
• Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition. • Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition.
• Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP and check the Developer Power Supply for • Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP and check the Developer Power Supply for
• Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. • Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5). If the problem continues, replace If the wires are good, replace the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5). If the problem continues, replace
• Replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum) (Section 6, Machine Consumables). • Replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum) (Section 6, Machine Consumables).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-131 9-610 VPatch Out Of Range RAP, 9-612 TRC RADC
9-614 VClean Out Of Range RAP 9-619 VClean TRC Out Of Range RAP
The measured untoned ADC patch was out of range. The measured untoned TRC patch density was out of range.

• Clean the ADC Sensor. • Clean the ADC Sensor.
• Clean the IBT Belt. • Clean the IBT Belt.
• Check that the P/J139 on the ADC Sensor PWB, IBT connector J702A, J702B and P/ • Check that the P/J139 on the ADC Sensor PWB, IBT connector J702A, J702B and P/
J416A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected. J416A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the following in the order listed. Perform the following in the order listed.
• Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for • Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for
• Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition. • Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition.
• Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. • Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5). If the problem continues, replace If the wires are good, replace the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5). If the problem continues, replace
• Replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum) (Section 6, Machine Consumables). • Replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum) (Section 6, Machine Consumables).

9-614 VClean Out Of Range RAP, 9-619 VClean TRC 2-132 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
9-634 ADC Out Of Range RAP 9-662 LD Out Of Range RAP
The selected gain for ADC was out of range. The selected LD value was out of range.

• Refer to BSD 9.8 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. • Refer to BSD 9.1and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure.
• Clean the ADC Sensor. • Clean the ESV Sensor.
• Clean the IBT Belt. • Check that P/J141 on the ESV Sensor, and P/J422A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly
• Check that the P/J139 on the ADC Sensor PWB, IBT connector J702A, J702B and P/ connected.
J416A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected.
Procedure
Procedure Perform the following in the order listed.
Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the • Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for
wires are good, replace the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5). If the problem continues, replace the IOT proper operation.
Drive PWB (PL 9.2). • Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition.
• Go to Flag 6 and Flag 7 on BSD 9.1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the ESV Sensor (PL 5.1). If the problem continues, replace
• Replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum) (Section 6, Machine Consumables).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-133 9-634 ADC Out Of Range RAP, 9-662 LD Out Of
9-667 VH/VM Out Of Range RAP
The selected LD value was out of range.
Initial Actions
• Clean the ESV Sensor.
• Check that P/J141 on the ESV Sensor, and P/J422A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly
connected.
Procedure
Perform the following in the order listed.
• Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for
proper operation.
• Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition.
• Go to Flag 6 and Flag 7 on BSD 9.1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit.
If the wires are good, replace the ESV Sensor (PL 5.1). If the problem continues, replace
• If the fault was declared during the VH portion of dC933, replace the Xerographic Module
(Drum CRU) (Machine Consumables, Section 6).
If the fault was declared during the VM portion of dC933, replace the ROS Assembly (PL
4.1).

9-667 VH/VM Out Of Range RAP 2-134 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-102 Pre Fuser Sensor On Jam RAP 10-103 Pre Fuser Sensor On RAP
The Pre Fuser Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the Pre IBT Sensor actu- The Pre Fuser Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was
ated. switched on.

Refer to BSD 10.1 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Refer to BSD 10.1 and 10.12 for the following procedure.
Check for the following: Check the following:

• Clean the Pre Fuser and Pre IBT Sensor. • Check for paper on the Pre Fuser Sensor
• Skewed sheets with LE corner damage. • Clean the Pre Fuser Sensor
• Obstructions in the paper path or damage on lead edge of sheets • Ensure that connectors P/J420 and P/J157 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB
• Contamination on the 2nd BTR Roll and/or Vacuum Transport. and the Pre Fuser Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
• Ensure that connectors P/J420 and P/J157 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB • Ensure the Front Cover is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
and the Pre Fuser Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Procedure Enter dC330 010-100 Pre Fuser Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H.
Enter dC330 010-100 Pre Fuser Sensor. Press Start. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Y N
Fuser Sensor with a sheet of paper. Close the Drawer. The display changes from H to L. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good,
Y N replace the Pre Fuser Sensor (PL 7.10).
Y N If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.1 and check the
good, replace the Pre Fuser Sensor (PL 7.10). harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre Fuser Sensor (PL
Open the Drawer (the paper should still be blocking the sensor). Connect the meter from
P/J420-A11 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Close the drawer. The voltage at P/J420-
A11 goes from +5 VDC when the drawer is open, to less than +1.0 VDC when the
drawer is closed.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J420-A12 and P/J420-A10 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If
the harness is good, replace the Pre Fuser Sensor (PL 7.10). If the problem contin-
nents that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping:
• Drives for the 2nd BTR Roll (PL 7.10)
• 2nd BTR Roll (PL 7.10)
• Guide (PL 7.10)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-135 10-102 Pre Fuser Sensor On Jam RAP, 10-103 Pre
A
10-105 Fuser Exit Sensor On Jam RAP Enter dC330 004-009 Fuser Motor. Press Start and Stop several times. The Fuser Motor
energizes and deenergizes.
The Fuser Exit Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the IBT Entrance Sensor Y N
actuated. Press Stop. + 5 VDC is measured between P/J417B-11 and GND on the IOT Drive
PWB.
Initial Actions Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J42-8 and P/J42-7 on the Distribution PWB.
• Refer to BSD 10.7, 10.12 and 10.4 for the following procedure.
Y N
• Ensure that 605K91060 Pressure Roll Finger Assembly Kit, Tag 11, is installed.
Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3).
NOTE: This problem is common when heavyweight paper is fed from the tray long-edge first.
All heavyweight and extra-heavyweight paper should be fed from the tray short-edge first. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.4 and check the harnesses for an open circuit. If
the harnesses are good, replace the Fuser Motor (PL 1.6)
• Clean the Fuser Exit Sensor Press Start. The voltage a P/J417B-11 go to less than +1.0 VDC.
• Cheat the Front Door Interlock and remove the Oil Bottle. Visually observe the paper on Y N
the Vacuum Transport to see that it stays down. If not, orient the paper so it feeds from the Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
tray short-edge first. If the problem remains, ensure that the Fuser Nip is cammed in
before the sheet arrives. +24 VDC is measured between P/J42-6 on the Distribution PWB and GND.
Y N
• Skewed sheets with LE corner damage.
• Obstructions in the paper path or damage on lead edge of sheets
• Ensure that the Fuser Inlet Baffle is correctly positioned Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.4 and check the harnesses for an open circuit. If the
• Contamination on the Vacuum Transport harnesses are good, replace the Fuser Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace
• Damage to Vacuum Transport Drive Gears the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Ensure that connectors P/J413A, P/J417B, P/J418B and P/J168 are seated correctly
on the IOT Drive PWB and the Fuser Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or
nent that is worn, broken, bent, deformed, binding or slipping:
broken wires.
• Heat Roll Stripper Fingers (PL 8.3) and Pressure Roll Stripper Fingers (PL 8.10)
• Heat Roll Finger Assembly (PL 8.3) and the Pressure Roll Finger Assembly (PL 8.10)
Procedure
• Gears and shafts on the Fuser Exit Drive Assembly (PL 1.6)
Enter dC330 010-105 Fuser Exit Sensor. Press Start. Block the Fuser Exit Sensor with a
Ensure that the rubber sleeve on the Exit Roll (shaft) (located under the Fuser Exit Sensor) is
sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L.
not torn, damaged or contaminated with Fuser Oil. Clean the sleeve or repair it by replacing the
Y N
Exit Roll (shaft) (PL 8.10).
Y N
good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10).
Connect the meter from P/J413A-4 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Block the Fuser Exit
Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J413A-4 goes from +5 VDC when the
sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-14 and GND on the on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
the harness is good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). If the problem contin-

A
10-105 Fuser Exit Sensor On Jam RAP 2-136 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
10-106 Fuser Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
good, replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25).
The Fuser Exit Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the Registration Feed
started. Press Start. The voltage at P/J412B-9 momentarily goes to less than +1.0 VDC.
Y N
Initial Actions Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Refer to BSD 10.7, 10.12 and 10.9 for the following procedure.
Replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25).
Enter dC330 010-006 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Invert). Press Start. The Inverter Gate Sole-
• Clean the Fuser Exit Sensor
noid energizes.
• Obstructions in the paper path or damage on lead edge of sheets Y N
• Contamination on the Regi Roll, 2 nd BTR or Vacuum Transport. +24 VDC is measured between P/J412B-7 and GND.
• Ensure that connectors P/J412B, P/J413A, P/J418B and P/J168 are seated correctly Y N
on the IOT Drive PWB and the Fuser Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
broken wires. good, replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25).
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412B-7 momentarily goes to less than +1.0 VDC.
Procedure Y N
Enter dC330 010-105 Fuser Exit Sensor. Press Start. Block the Fuser Exit Sensor with a Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N Replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25).
Y N Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start and Stop several times. The Exit Motor ener-
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is gizes and deenergizes.
good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). Y N
Press Stop. Approximately +7 VDC is measured between P/J418B-17 on the IOT
Connect the meter from P/J413A-4 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Block the Fuser Exit Drive PWB and GND.
Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J413A-4 goes from +5 VDC when the Y N
sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If
Y N the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6).
There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-14 and GND on the on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N Press Start. The voltage at P/J418B-17 goes to less than +1.0 VDC.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the har- Y N
ness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If +24 VDC is measured between P/J418B-19 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB.
the harness is good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). If the problem contin- Y N
ues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive
Enter dC330 010-005 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Exit). Press Start. The Inverter Gate Sole- PWB (PL 9.2).
noid energizes.
Y N Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Fuser Exit Drive gear assemblies and drive
+24 VDC is measured between P/J412B-9 and GND. belts that would cause the paper to be slow to leave the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 1.6). Also,
Y N cheat the Front Door Interlock and remove the Oil Bottle. Visually observe the paper as it feeds
+24 VDC is measured between P/J412B-8 and GND. into and through the Fuser. Ensure that the Fuser Nip stays engaged until the trail edge of the
Y N sheet exits the Fuser.
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Ensure that the rubber sleeve on the Exit Roll (shaft) (located under the Fuser Exit Sensor) is
not torn, damaged or contaminated with Fuser Oil. Clean the sleeve or repair it by replacing the
Exit Roll (shaft) (PL 8.10).
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-137 10-106 Fuser Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP
10-107 Fuser Exit Sensor On RAP 10-110 Machine Exit Sensor On Jam RAP
The Fuser Exit Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was The Machine Exit Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the Fuser Exit Sensor
switched on. actuated.

Refer to BSD 10.7 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Refer to BSD 10.7, 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure.

• Check for paper on the Fuser Exit Sensor. • Obstructions in the paper path or damage on lead edge of sheets
• Clean the Fuser Exit Sensor • Contamination on the Fuser Exit Roll and/or M/C Exit Roll.
• Ensure that connectors P/J413A and P/J168 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB • Ensure that connectors P/J412B, P/J418B, and P/J149 are seated correctly on the IOT
and the Fuser Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Drive PWB and the Machine Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken
• Ensure the Front Cover is closed. Switch the power Off then On. wires.
• Open the Inverter Door (PL 2.23) and clean the Machine Exit Sensor. Also, ensure that
Procedure the sensor actuator is not bent or damaged; that it does not contact the harness or baffles;
and that it is seated in the bracket correctly.
Enter dC330 010-105 Fuser Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H.
Y N • Clean the Fuser Exit Sensor.
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, • Cheat the Front Door Interlock and observe the paper as it feeds out of the Fuser Exit
replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). Assembly and into the Inverter Top Chute Assembly. Ensure that the lead edge is not
catching on the baffles or cutouts.
fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.7 and check the Procedure
harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL Enter dC330 010-110 Machine Exit Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Machine Exit Sensor
actuator. The display changes from L to H.
Y N
The display is a constant H.
Y N
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an short circuit. If the harness is
good, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25).
Connect the meter from P/J412B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Actuate the Machine
Exit Sensor actuator. The voltage at P/J412B-5 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when
the sensor is deactuated, to +5 VDC when the sensor is actuated.
Y N
Y N
the harness is good, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25). If the problem con-
tinues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 010-105 Fuser Exit Sensor. Press Start. Block the Fuser Exit Sensor with a

10-107 Fuser Exit Sensor On RAP, 10-110 Machine 2-138 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
Y N Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start and Stop several times. The Exit Motor ener-
The display indicates a constant H. gizes and deenergizes.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is Press Stop. Approximately +7 VDC is measured between P/J418B-17 on the IOT
good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
Connect the meter from P/J413A-4 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Block the Fuser Exit Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If
Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J413A-4 goes from +5 VDC when the the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6).
sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked.
Y N Press Start. The voltage at P/J418B-17 momentarily goes to less than +1.0 VDC.
There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-14 and GND on the on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N
ness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J418B-19 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
the harness is good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). If the problem contin-
ues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 010-005 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Exit). Press Start. The Inverter Gate Sole- Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Fuser Exit Drive gear assemblies and drive
noid energizes. belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 1.6).
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J412B-9 and GND.
Y N
Y N
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412B-9 momentarily goes to less than +1.0 VDC.
Y N
Enter dC330 010-006 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Invert). Press Start. The Inverter Gate Sole-
noid energizes.
Y N
Y N
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412B-7 goes to less than +1.0 VDC.
Y N

A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-139 10-110 Machine Exit Sensor On Jam RAP
A
10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP Y N
When using either the inversion path or exit path, the Machine Exit Sensor did not deactuate Y N
within the specified time after it actuated. Go to Flag 8 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the har-
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.7, 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure.
the harness is good, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25). If the problem con-
Make ONE single-sided set of 10 or more originals. (This causes the copies to go through the tinues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
inversion path and exit the machine face down.) Repeat this job several times. Next, make
TWO single-sided sets of 10 or more originals. (This causes the copies to bypass the inversion
path and exit the machine face up.) Repeat this job several times. If a fault occurs ONLY when
Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start and Stop several times. The Exit Motor ener-
the copies exit the machine face down, replace the Exit Roll Assembly (PL 2.26) as follows:
with Tag 23 install the Tag 23 Exit Roll Assembly, machines with an Offset Catch Tray install
Y N
the Offset Roller Kit, machines without an Offset Catch Tray install the Corrugation Mark Roller
Press Stop. Approximately +7 VDC is measured between P/J418B-17 on the IOT
Kit. If the fault occurs when the copies exit the machine face down AND face up, continue with
Drive PWB and GND.
Initial Actions below:
Y N
the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6).
• Obstructions in the inverter and exit paper path
• Equal Pinch-roll (PL 2.25) force at the Machine Exit Roll (PL 2.26) nips. Press Start. The voltage at P/J418B-17 goes to less than +1.0 VDC.
• Binding of the Machine Exit Roll (PL 2.26) or Pinch Roll Shafts (PL 2.25). Y N
• Ensure that the Inverter Pinch Rolls (PL 2.26) have proper nip pressure. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Remove the Inverter Door Cover (PL 2.25) and tape down the Exit Chute (PL 2.25) to pre-
vent jamming. Look for skew along the lead edge of the paper as it inverts and exits the
Y N
machine. If skewing occurs, check for movement in the Door Latch area by pressing on
the door. If the door moves in, hold it closed at the latch area to see if feeding improves. If
feeding improves, check the (door) Lever (assembly) (PL 2.26) for loose or damaged
components. To minimize movement in the Inverter 2 Assembly, loosen the two screws
holding the white plastic latch and metal latch bracket. Move both parts to the right and
PWB (PL 9.2).
then tighten the screws.
• Clean the Machine Exit and Inverter Rolls (PL 2.26). Check for binding, obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and
• Ensure that connectors P/J412B, P/J418B and P/J149 are seated correctly on the IOT drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to leave the Machine Exit Sensor. If OK,
Drive PWB and the Machine Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken replace these components in the following order: Exit Roll (Assembly) (PL 2.26), Inverter 2
wires. Upper Chute (PL 2.25), Inverter 2 Assembly (PL 2.23).
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-110 Machine Exit Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Machine Exit Sensor
actuator. The display changes from L to H.
Y N
Y N
good, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25).
Connect the meter from P/J412B-5 on the IOT PWB to GND. Actuate the Machine Exit
Sensor actuator. The voltage at P/J412B-5 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the
sensor is deactuated, to +5 VDC when the sensor is actuated.
A
10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP 2-140 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-112 Machine Exit Sensor On RAP 10-115 Exit Path Sensor On Jam RAP
The Machine Exit Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was The Exit Path Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the Fuser Exit Sensor actu-
switched on. ated.

Refer to BSD 10.7 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Refer to BSD 10.7, 10.4, and 10.12 for the following procedure.

• Obstructions in the paper path. • Obstructions in the paper path or damage on lead edge of sheets
• Ensure there is no paper on the Machine Exit Sensor. • Contamination on the Fuser Exit Roll.
• Ensure that connectors P/J412B and P/J149 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB • Cheat the Front Door Interlock and observe the paper as it feeds out of the Fuser Exit
and the Machine Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Assembly and into the Inverter Top Chute Assembly. Ensure that the lead edge is not
• Ensure the Inverter is closed. Switch the power Off then On. catching on the Inverter 1 Baffle or Inverter Gate. Also, check the function and position of
the Inverter gate and Inverter Gate Solenoid dC330 010-005 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Exit)
and 010-006 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Invert).
Procedure
• Open the Inverter Door (PL 2.23) and clean the Exit Path Sensor. Also, ensure that the
Enter dC330 010-110 Machine Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L.
sensor actuator moves freely.
Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J412B, P/J417A, and P/J164 are seated correctly on the IOT
Drive PWB and the Exit Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
ness is good, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25).
• Ensure that the front Fuser Pin Bracket (PL 8.1) is installed and correctly positioned on
If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the the semi-perfs.
fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.7
and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Procedure
Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 010-115 Exit Path Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Exit Path Sensor actuator.
The display changes from L to H.
Y N
Y N
good, replace the Exit Path Sensor (PL 2.25).
Connect the meter from P/J412B-2 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Actuate the Exit Path
Sensor actuator. The voltage at P/J412B-2 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the
sensor is not actuated, to +5 VDC when the sensor is actuated.
Y N
Y N
the harness is good, replace the Exit Path Sensor (PL 2.25). If the problem contin-
Enter dC330 004-009 Fuser Motor. Press Start and Stop several times. The Fuser Motor
energizes and deenergizes.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-141 10-112 Machine Exit Sensor On RAP, 10-115 Exit
Y N 10-117 Exit Path Sensor On Jam RAP
Press Stop. + 5 VDC is measured between P/J417B-11 and GND on the IOT Drive
PWB. The Exit Path Sensor detected paper when closing the Inverter Cover or when the power was
Y N switched on.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J42-8 and P/J42-7 on the Distribution PWB.
Y N Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.7 and 10.12 for the following procedure.
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.4 and check the harnesses for an open circuit. If
the harnesses are good, replace the Fuser Motor (PL 1.6)
• Open the Inverter Door (PL 2.23) and clean the Exit Path Sensor. Also, ensure that the
Press Start. The voltage at P/J417B-11 momentarily goes to less than +1.0 VDC. sensor actuator is moving freely.
Y N • Ensure that connectors P/J412B and P/J164 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). and the Exit Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
• Ensure the Inverter is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J42-6 on the Distribution PWB and GND.
Y N Procedure
Enter dC330 010-115 Exit Path Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.4 and check the harnesses for an open circuit. If the
harnesses are good, replace the Fuser Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Exit Path Sensor (PL 2.25).
Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive
fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 10.7
belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Exit Path Sensor.
and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Exit
Path Sensor (PL 2.25). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

10-115 Exit Path Sensor On Jam RAP, 10-117 Exit 2-142 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-120 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP 10-125 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP
The Inverter Path Sensor detected paper when closing the Inverter Cover or when the power The Inverter Path Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the Fuser Exit Sensor
was switched on. actuated.

Refer to BSD 10.8 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Refer to BSD 10.8, 10.9 and 10.12 for the following procedure.

• Clean the Inverter Path Sensor. • Obstructions in the paper path
• Ensure that connectors P/J412B and P/J151 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB • Proper Nip Drive force on the Inverter Rolls
and the Inverter Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. • Cheat the Front Door Interlock and check the function and the position of the Inverter
• Ensure the Inverter is closed. Switch the power Off then On. Gate and Inverter Gate Solenoid dC330 010-005 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Exit) and 010-
006 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Invert).
Procedure • Clean the Inverter Path Sensor and Inverter Roll 2. Also, ensure that the sensor actuator
moves freely.
Enter dC330 010-125 Inverter Path Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L.
Y N • Ensure that connectors P/J412A, P/J417A and P/J151 are seated correctly on the IOT
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for a open circuit. If the har- Drive PWB and the Inverter Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken
ness is good, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24). wires.
If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the Procedure
fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.8 Enter dC330 010-125 Inverter Path Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Inverter Path Sensor
and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Inverter actuator. The display changes from L to H.
Path Sensor (PL 2.24). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Y N
good, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24).
Connect the meter from P/J412A-8 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Actuate the Inverter
Path Sensor actuator. The voltage at P/J412A-8 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when
the sensor is not actuated, to +5 VDC when the sensor is actuated.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J412A-9 and P/J412A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
the harness is good, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24). If the problem con-
Enter dC330 010-025 Inverter Roll Solenoid Nip. Press Start. The Release Solenoid ener-
gizes.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-14 and GND.
Y N
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-143 10-120 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP, 10-125
A B C
Y N Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Inverter Path Sensor.
good, replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24).
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 decreases momentarily then returns to +24
VDC.
Y N
Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24).
Enter dC330 010-026 Inverter Roll Release Solenoid (Release). Press Start. The Release
Solenoid energizes.
Y N
Y N
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 decreases momentarily then returns to +24
VDC.
Y N
Enter dC330 010-020 Inverter Motor Forward. Press Start and Stop several times. The
Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes.
Y N
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive
PWB and GND.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
harness and connectors are OK, replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24).
Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to
approximately +18 VDC.
Y N
Replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24).
Enter dC330 010-021 Inverter Motor Reverse. Press Start and Stop several times. The
Y N
C
10-125 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP 2-144 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
10-126 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
The Inverter Path Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the Fuser Exit Sen-
sor deactuated. Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 decreases momentarily then returns to +24
VDC.
Initial Actions Y N
Refer to BSD 10.8, 10.9, 10.11 and 10.12 for the following procedure.

• Proper Nip Drive force on the Inverter Roll
Enter dC330 010-026 Inverter Roll Solenoid Release. Press Start. The Release Solenoid
• Obstructions in the paper path energizes.
• Clean the Inverter Path Sensor and ensure that the sensor actuator moves freely. Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J412A, P/J417A and P/J151 are seated correctly on the IOT +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-12 and GND.
Drive PWB and the Inverter Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken Y N
wires. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
Procedure Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-12 decreases momentarily then returns to +24
Enter dC330 010-125 Inverter Path Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Inverter Path Sensor VDC.
actuator. The display changes from L to H. Y N
Y N Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24).
good, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-020 Inverter Motor Forward. Press Start and Stop several times. The
Connect the meter from P/J412A-8 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Actuate the Inverter Y N
Path Sensor actuator. The voltage at P/J412A-8 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive
the sensor is deactuated, to +5 VDC when the sensor is actuated. PWB and GND.
Y N Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J412A-9 and P/J412A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the har- Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If harness and connectors are OK, replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24).
the harness is good, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24). If the problem con-
tinues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to
gizes. Replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24).
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-14 and GND. Enter dC330 010-021 Inverter Motor Reverse. Press Start and Stop several times. The
Y N Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-13 and GND. Y N
belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Inverter Path Sensor.
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-145 10-126 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP
A B C
10-127 Duplex Registration Sensor On Jam RAP Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
The Registration Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the start of Paper Feed
in Duplex Mode. Press Start. The voltage at P/J412B-9 goes to less than +1.0 VDC.
Y N
Initial Actions Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start and Stop several times. The Regis-
• Obstructions in the paper path.
tration Motor energizes and deenergizes.
• Contamination on the Regi Roll, 2nd BTR or Vacuum Transport. Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J421A, P/J419A, P/J412A and P/J162 are seated correctly Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J419A-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB
on the IOT Drive PWB and the Registration Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or and GND.
broken wires. Y N
• Clean the Registration Sensor. +24 VDC is measured between P/J419A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. Block the Registration Sensor with a Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the
sheet of paper The display changes from H to L. harness and connectors are OK, replace the Registration Motor (PL 2.15).
Y N
The display indicates a constant H. Press Start. The voltage at P/J419A-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approx-
Y N imately +18 VDC.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is Y N
good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Connect the meter from P/J421A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Block the Registra- Replace the Regi. Motor (PL 2.15).
tion Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J421A-11 goes from +5 VDC
when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive
Y N belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Registration Sensor.
There is +5 VDC between P/J421A-12 and P/J421A-10 on the on the IOT Drive
PWB.
Y N
harness is good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the problem contin-
Enter dC330 010-005 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Exit). Press Start. The Inverter Gate Sole-
noid energizes.
Y N
There is +24 VDC between P/J412B-9 and GND.
Y N
There is +24 VDC between P/J412B-8 and GND.
Y N
A B C
10-127 Duplex Registration Sensor On Jam RAP 2-146 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
10-128 Duplex Pre Regi. Sensor On Jam RAP Y N
The Pre Registration Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the start of Paper
Feed in Duplex Mode. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the
harness and connectors are OK, replace Main Motor 2 (PL 1.5).
Initial Actions
Press Start. The voltage at P/J414B-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approx-
imately +23 VDC.
Check the following: Y N
• Proper Nip Drive force.
• Obstructions in the paper path. Replace Main Motor 2 Motor (PL 1.5).
• Contamination on the Pre Regi Roll or 2 nd BTR.
• Ensure that connectors P/J419A, P/J414B and P/J162 are seated correctly on the IOT Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive
Drive PWB and the Pre Registration Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Pre Registration Sensor.
wires.
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. Open the Drawer. Insert a piece
of paper to black the Pre Registration Sensor. Close the Drawer. The display changes from
H to L.
Y N
Y N
good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16).
Connect the meter from P/J419A-13 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Block the Pre Regis-
tration Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J419A-13 goes from +5 VDC
when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J419A-14 and P/J419A-12 on the on the IOT Drive
PWB.
Y N
harness is good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem con-
Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start and Stop several times. Main Motor 2 ener-
Y N
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J414B-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB
and GND.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J414B-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-147 10-128 Duplex Pre Regi. Sensor On Jam RAP
A B C
10-130 Duplex In Sensor On Jam RAP Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
The Duplex In Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the start of Reverse Feed.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to
Initial Actions +15 VDC then returns to +24 VDC.
Refer to BSD 10.8, 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Y N
• Skewed sheets with LE corner damage. Enter dC330 010-026 Inverter Roll Solenoid Release. Press Start. The Release Solenoid
• Ensure that the Upper Inverter Roll (PL 2.24) has proper nip pressure. energizes.
• Ensure that connectors P/J412A, P/J417A and P/J150 are seated correctly on the IOT Y N
Drive PWB and the Duplex In Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-12 and GND.
Y N
Procedure good, replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24).
NOTE: In the following step, to block the Duplex In Sensor, open the Inverter Door. Slide a
sheet of paper up, and under, the mylar guides at the bottom of the Inverter 1 Upper Chute. Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-12 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to
+15 VDC then returns to +24 VDC.
Enter dC330 010-130 Duplex In Sensor. Press Start. Open the Inverter Cover and block the Y N
Duplex In Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from L to H. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
There display is a constant H. Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24).
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for an short circuit. If the harness Enter dC330 010-020 Inverter Motor Forward. Press Start and Stop several times. The
is good, replace the Duplex In Sensor (PL 2.24). Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes.
Y N
Connect the meter from P/J412A-5 on the IOT PWB to GND. Block the Duplex In Sen- Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive
sor. The voltage at P/J412A-5 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is not PWB and GND.
blocked, to +5 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N
Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
There is +5 VDC between P/J412A-6 and P/J412A-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N
ness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the
the harness is good, replace the Duplex In Sensor (PL 2.24). If the problem contin- Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to
ues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). approximately +18.5 VDC.
Y N
Enter dC330 010-025 Inverter Roll Solenoid Nip. Press Start. The Release Solenoid ener- Replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24).
gizes.
Y N Enter dC330 010-021 Inverter Motor Reverse. Press Start and Stop several times. The
+24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-14 and GND. Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes.
Y N Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-13 and GND. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive
belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Duplex In Sensor.
A B C
10-130 Duplex In Sensor On Jam RAP 2-148 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
10-132 Duplex Path Sensor On Jam RAP Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
The Duplex Path Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the start of Reverse
Feed. Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to
Initial Actions Y N
Refer to BSD 10.8, 10.9, 10.10, and 10.12 for the following procedure.

• Contamination on the Duplex In Roll (PL 2.21). deenergizes.
• Ensure that connectors P/J412A, P/J417A, and P/J420 are seated correctly on the IOT Y N
Drive PWB and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-12 and GND.
Y N
Procedure Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
Enter dC330 010-132 Duplex Path Sensor. Ensure the Drawer is closed. Press Start. The
display indicates L. Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-12 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to
Y N
Connect the meter from P/J420-A2 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. The meter indi- Y N
cates less than +1.0 VDC.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J420-A3 and P/J420-A1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24).
Y N
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 10.10. Check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness
Enter dC330 010-020 Inverter Motor Forward. Press Start and Stop several times. The
is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Check the actuator for the Duplex Path Sensor. If it is good, go to Flag 7 and Flag 8
on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good,
PWB and GND.
replace the Duplex Path Sensor (PL 2.21). If the problem continues, replace the IOT
Y N
Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
NOTE: In the following step, to block the Duplex Path Sensor, open the Drawer then open the
baffle (Jam Clearance Lever 3) on the bottom of the Drawer. Place a sheet of paper on the baf-
fle then close the baffle. CLose the Drawer.
Block the Duplex Path Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display indicates H. Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to
Y N approximately +18 VDC.
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.10. Check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, Y N
replace the Duplex Path Sensor (PL 2.21). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 010-025 Inverter Roll Solenoid Nip. Press Start. The Release Solenoid ener- Replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24).
gizes.
Y N Enter dC330 010-021 Inverter Motor Reverse. Press Start and Stop several times. The
+24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-14 and GND. Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes.
Y N Y N
Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive
belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Duplex Path Sensor.
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-149 10-132 Duplex Path Sensor On Jam RAP
A B C
10-133 Duplex Out Sensor On Jam RAP Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
The Duplex Out Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the start of Reverse
Feed. Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to
Initial Actions Y N

• Proper Nip Drive force at Drive Rolls (Baffle latches properly).
• Obstructions in the paper path. deenergizes.
• Contamination on the Duplex Path Roll (PL 2.21). Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J412A, P/J417A, and P/J420 are seated correctly on the IOT Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-12 and GND.
Drive PWB and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Y N
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-133 Duplex Out Sensor. Ensure the Drawer is closed. Press Start. The Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-12 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to
display indicates L. +15 VDC then returns to +24 VDC.
Y N Y N
Connect the meter from P/J420-A5 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. The meter indi- Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
cates less than +1.0 VDC.
Y N Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24).
There is +5 VDC between P/J420-A6 and P/J420-A4 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N Enter dC330 010-020 Inverter Motor Forward. Press Start and Stop several times. The
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 10.10. Check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes.
is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Y N
Check the actuator for the Duplex Out Sensor. If it is good, go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 PWB and GND.
on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, Y N
replace the Duplex Out Sensor (PL 2.21). If the problem continues, replace the IOT +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Y N
NOTE: To block the Duplex Out Sensor, open the Drawer then open Jam Clearance Lever 3 harness and connectors are OK, replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24).
on the bottom of the Drawer. Place a sheet of paper on the baffle, close the baffle and Drawer.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to
Block the Duplex Out Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display indicates H.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.10. Check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good,
replace the Duplex Out Sensor (PL 2.21). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24).

gizes.
Enter dC330 010-021 Inverter Motor Reverse. Press Start and Stop several times. The
Y N
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-14 and GND.
Y N Y N
Y N
belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Duplex Out Sensor.
A B C
10-133 Duplex Out Sensor On Jam RAP 2-150 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-160 Duplex In Sensor On Jam RAP 10-162 Duplex Path 1 Sensor On Jam RAP
Duplex In Sensor Paper Static Jam. Duplex Path Sensor Paper Static Jam.


• Clean the Duplex In Sensor (PL 2.24). • Clean the Duplex Path Sensor (PL 2.21).
• Ensure that connectors P/J412A and P/J150 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB • Ensure that connectors P/J420 and P/J154 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB
and the Duplex In Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. and the Duplex Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
• Ensure the Inverter is closed. Switch the power Off then On. • Ensure the Drawer is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 010-130 Duplex In Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Enter dC330 010-132 Duplex Path Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for a open circuit. If the har- Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for a open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Duplex In Sensor (PL 2.24). ness is good, replace the Duplex Path Sensor (PL 2.21).
If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the
fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.10 fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.10
and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Duplex and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Duplex
In Sensor (PL 2.24). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). In Sensor (PL 2.21). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-151 10-160 Duplex In Sensor On Jam RAP, 10-162 Du-
10-163 Duplex Out Sensor On Jam RAP 10-280 OCT Offset Sensor Failure RAP
Duplex Out Sensor Paper Static Jam. • At initialization, the home position was not detected by the Offset Home Sensor after OCT
reversal.
Initial Actions • During offset, movement of the Stacker to the offset position was not detected by the Off-
Refer to BSD 10.10 and 10.12 for the following procedure. set Home Sensor
• During offset, movement of the Stacker to the home position was not detected by the Off-
Check for the following: set Home Sensor
• Clean the Duplex Out Sensor (PL 2.21). Initial Actions
• Ensure that connectors P/J420 and P/J153 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB Refer to BSD 10.11 and 10.12 for the following procedure.
and the Duplex Out Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
• Ensure the Drawer is closed. Switch the power Off then On. Check for the following:
• Ensure that connectors P/J422A and P/J422B is seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB
Procedure and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Enter dC330 010-133 Duplex Out Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L.
Y N Procedure
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for a open circuit. If the har- Manually move the OCT toward the front of the system (Home Position). Enter dC330 010-086
ness is good, replace the Duplex Out Sensor (PL 2.21). Offset Motor Forward. Press Start. The OCT moves toward the rear (offset position).
Y N
If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.11 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 10.10 good, replace the OCT Offset Motor (PL 14.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT
and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Duplex Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Out Sensor (PL 2.21). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Press Stop. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J422B-12 and GND.
Y N
Press Start. The voltage between P/J422B-12 and GND goes to +24 VDC.
Y N
Enter dC330 010-085 Offset Motor Reverse. Press Start. The OCT moves toward the
front (Home Position).
Y N
good, replace the OCT Offset Motor (PL 14.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT
Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 010-298 OCT Home Sensor. Press Start. Enter dC330 010-086 Offset Motor
Forward. Press Start. Enter dC330 010-085 Offset Motor Reverse. Press Start. The dis-
play changes from H to L to H.
Y N
Y N
good, replace the OCT Offset Home Sensor (PL 14.1).
A B
10-163 Duplex Out Sensor On Jam RAP, 10-280 OCT 2-152 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
Connect the meter from P/J422A-9 on the IOT PWB to GND. Manually move the Stacker 10-300 Inverter Cover Open RAP
Tray toward the rear until it stops, and then toward the front, until it stops. The voltage at
P/J422A-9 goes from than +5.0 VDC when the tray is to the front, to less than +1.0 The Inverter Cover is detected open.
VDC when the tray is moved off the front position.
Y N Initial Actions
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.11 and check the harness for an open circuit. If Refer to BSD 10.8 and 10.12 for the following procedure.
the harness is good, replace the OCT Offset Home Sensor (PL 14.1).
• Open and close the Inverter Cover. While physically pushing on the Inverter Cover, switch
the power off then on. If the Fault Code does not appear, check Inverter Cover latch and
Enter dC330 010-299 OCT Position Sensor. Press Start. Enter dC330 010-086 Offset Motor
Forward. Press Start. Enter dC330 010-085 Offset Motor Reverse. Press Start. The dis- alignment for damaged parts.
play changes from L to H to L. • Ensure that connectors P/J412A and P/J152 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB,
Y N and the Inverter Cover Switch and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Y N Procedure
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.11 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is Enter dC330 010-300 Inverter Cover Interlock. Open the Inverter Cover. Manually actuate the
good, replace the OCT Offset Position Sensor (PL 14.1).
Inverter Cover Switch. The display changes from H to L when the switch is actuated.
Y N
Connect the meter from P/J422A-8 on the IOT PWB to GND. Manually move the Stacker
Connect the meter from P/J412A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Manually actuate the
Tray toward the rear until it stops, and then toward the front, until it stops. The voltage at
Inverter Cover Switch. The voltage at P/J412A-11 goes from +5 VDC to less than +1.0
P/J422A-8 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the tray is to the front, to +5.0 VDC
VDC when the switch is manually actuated.
when the tray is moved to the rear position.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.8. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
good, replace the Inverter Cover Switch (PL 2.24).
the harness is good, replace the OCT Offset Position Sensor (PL 14.1).
Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Offset Motor gear assemblies.
harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Inverter Cover Switch
(PL 2.24). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-153 10-280 OCT Offset Sensor Failure RAP, 10-300 In-
10-341 Fuser Oil Empty RAP 10-342 Fuser Web Change RAP
Fuser Oil Empty. This status code is declared when approximately 2000 - 4000 pages (Prints The Web Supply Roll is empty. The customer should install a new Web CRU.
or Copies) have been made since Oil Near Empty Condition.
NOTE: The Web Empty condition occurs when the web supply roll has been emptied. when
NOTE: The Oil Near Empty Condition occurs when the sensor detects that the oil is low this occurs, two metal contacts touch the empty Web Supply Roll and complete a circuit. This
(approximately 40k prints have been printed). The machine issues a warning when it detects causes two things to happen: a 10-342 fault code is declared and a “Replace Cleaning Web”
Fuser Oil Near Empty. When another 2000 to 4000 prints are printed out without servicing the message is displayed. The machine will not operate until a new Web is installed.
Fuser Oil, the machine issues a stop message and then stops printing.
NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 777-077 and cannot be reset by Power Off/
NOTE: Oil usage varies depending on the types of images and paper being used. 30 - 40k On. Replacing the empty Web CRU with a new one will automatically reset NVM location 777-
prints per bottle is typical. However, when an oil metering system (Metering Blade, Donor Roll, 077 Web Status from “2” to “0” and NVM location 777-078 Web Motor On Time from “17” to “0”.
etc.) is in need of service, it can use oil at two to three times the normal rate. The “Replace Cleaning Web Soon” message will first appear when 777-075 Web Near Empty
changes from 0 to 1.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.5 (2 of 2) and 10.12 for the following procedure. Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.5 (1 of 2) and 10.12 for the following procedure.
1. Open the Drawer. Procedure
2. Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). Verify that there is oil in the bottle. If not, install a new Perform the following:
Oil Cartridge Machine Consumables. 1. Open the Drawer.
3. Close the Drawer. 2. Remove and inspect the Web CRU. The web supply roll should be empty and two metal
4. Switch the power Off and then On. clips should be touching the metal supply roll. If it is, install a new Web CRU (Machine
Consumables) the fault code should disappear. If the web supply roll is not empty, install a
Procedure new Web CRU (Machine Consumables). If the fault codes is still displayed, replace the
NOTE: This RAP assumes that there is fuser oil in the bottle and therefore is not a cause of the
10-341 Fault Code.
Enter dC330 010-222 Oil Empty Sensor. Press Start. The Oil Empty Sensor status is H.
Y N
Press Stop. There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.5 (2 of 2) and check the harness for an open circuit. If the
harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on the
Distribution PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.5 (2 of 2) and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Oil Empty Sensor (PL 8.7). If the problem continues, replace the

10-341 Fuser Oil Empty RAP, 10-342 Fuser Web 2-154 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-355 External Heat Roll Contact Failure RAP Y N
The External Heat Roll Retract Sensor did not go L within 5 seconds after the External Heat Y N
Roll Retract Motor started rotating. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on the
Distribution PWB.
Y N
Perform the following: Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3).
1. Open the Drawer Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the
2. Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1)
harness is good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor (PL 8.4). If the problem
3. Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1) continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
4. Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2)
5. Close the Drawer. Enter dC330 010-221 External Heat Roll Retract Sensor. Press Start. The display indi-
6. Switch the power off, then on. cates L.
Y N
Procedure • The actuator for the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor
NOTE: When using component control to energize the External Heat Roll Retract Motor, the • Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit.
following conditions occur: • Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open or short circuit.
• When the code[10-027] (contact) is first entered, the motor will drive until the External • If the harness is good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor (PL 8.4)
Heat Roll Retract Sensor senses that the External Heat Roll is in the contact position.
Then the code switches to off. Check the following:
• Subsequent attempts to enter [10-027] have no effect. In order to test code [10-027] • Missing and/or broken External Heat Roll Retract Motor gear (PL 8.4)
again, code [10-028] (retract) must be entered first in order to drive the External Heat Roll • Binding in the linkage of the contact/retract mechanism for the External Heat Roll (PL 8.4)
to the retracted position. • Loose connectors and pins for the External Heat Roll Retract Motor and Sensor
Enter dC330 010-027 External Heat Roll Retract Motor (Contact). Press Start. The Exter-
nal Heat Roll Retract Motor energizes.
Y N
Press Stop. + 24 VDC is measured at P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Y N
good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Motor (PL 8.4).
NOTE: In the next step, the drop in voltage may be momentary or may be for a longer
duration, but a drop in voltage should occur.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J413A-1 drops to less than +20.0 VDC.
Y N
Replace the External Heat Roll Retract Motor (PL 8.4).
The External Heat Roll Retract Motor stops after several seconds.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-155 10-355 External Heat Roll Contact Failure RAP
A B
10-356 External Heat Roll Retract Failure RAP Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the
The External Heat Roll Retract Sensor did not go H within 5 seconds after the External Heat harness is good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor (PL 8.4). If the problem
Roll Retract Motor started rotating. continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
Initial Actions Enter dC330 010-221 External Heat Roll Retract Sensor. Press Start. The display indi-
cates H.
Y N
Perform the following: Check the following:
• The actuator (on the Camshaft) for the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor. If the actu-
1. Open the Drawer ator binds, ensure that the Bracket (PL 8.4) on which the sensor is mounted is free
from damage.
2. Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1)
• Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for a short circuit.
3. Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1)
• If the harness is good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor (PL 8.4)
4. Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2)
5. Close the Drawer. Check the following:
6. Switch the power off, then on. • Missing and/or broken External Heat Roll Retract Motor gear (PL 8.4)
• Binding in the linkage of the contact/retract mechanism for the External Heat Roll (PL 8.4)
Procedure • Loose connectors and pins for the External Heat Roll Retract Motor and Sensor
Enter dC330 010-027 External Heat Roll Retract Motor (Contact). Press Start. The Exter-
nal Heat Roll Retract Motor energizes.
Y N
Press Stop. + 24 VDC is measured at P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Y N
good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Motor (PL 8.4).
NOTE: In the next step, the drop in voltage may be momentary or may be for a longer
duration, but a drop in voltage should occur.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J413A-1 drops to less than +20.0 VDC.
Y N
Replace the External Heat Roll Retract Motor (PL 8.4).
The External Heat Roll Retract Motor stops after several seconds.
Y N
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on the
Distribution PWB.
Y N
A B
10-356 External Heat Roll Retract Failure RAP 2-156 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-359 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP 10-360 Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP
The Heat Roll Control Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously for more The Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously for
than 1500 msec (Heat Roll Control Thermistor disconnected). more than 1500 msec (Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor disconnected).

• Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following: • Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following:
– Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). – Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1).
– Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). – Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1).
– Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2). – Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2).
• Check the Heat Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at • Check the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at
the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is
worn, replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat worn, replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat
Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL
8.3). 8.3).
• Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Check the • Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Check the
mating connector on the IOT, and ensure that the mounting plate for the IOT connector is mating connector on the IOT, and ensure that the mounting plate for the IOT connector is
not bent or misaligned. not bent or misaligned.
Procedure Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Heat Roll NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Heat Roll
Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty
Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxida- pins. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to
tion. oxidation.
Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. Measure the Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J172 on the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. Measure the
resistance between P/J171-1 and P/J171-2 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resis- resistance between P/J172-1 and P/J172-2 on the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. The resis-
tance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when tance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when
cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. The resistance of the cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. The resistance of the
Thermistor is in specification. Thermistor is in specification.
Y N Y N
Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4).
Reconnect P/J171 to the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect P/ Reconnect P/J172 to the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect P/
J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-7. The J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-8. The
resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%). resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%).
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.2. Check the harness for an open circuit. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.2. Check the harness for an open circuit.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-157 10-359 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP,
10-361 Power On Heat Roll Not Ready RAP 10-362 Standby Heat Roll Not Ready RAP
The Heat Roll did not reach the Ready temperature within 12 minutes after Power On. The Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 90 seconds during Standby Mode, but the Heat
Roll did not reach operating temperature.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater Rod illuminates Procedure
after self-test completes. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater Rod illuminates
Y N after self-test completes.
Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Y N
Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP.
Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT
Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413 -13 and J413-A7 of the harness. The resis- Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT
tance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413-13 and J413-A7 of the harness. The resis-
cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. tance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when
Y N cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification.
Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance from pin 1 to pin Y N
2 should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the
cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room tempera-
Y N ture). The resistance is within specification.
Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Y N
Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermit-
tent short circuit to ground. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermit-
tent short circuit to ground.
• Check the H/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the Check the following:
point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. • Check the H/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the
• If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly.
• Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the • If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4).
Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3). • Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the
If the problem continues, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). If the fault persists, Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). If the fault persists,

10-361 Power On Heat Roll Not Ready RAP, 10-362 2-158 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-363 Job Complete Heat Roll Not Ready RAP 10-364 Job Incomplete Heat Roll Not Ready RAP
The Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 3 minutes after the current job completed, but the The Heat Roll declared Not Ready during a job and the Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously
Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature. for 4 minutes after the machine stopped, but the Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature.

Procedure Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater Rod illuminates Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater Rod illuminates
after self-test completes. after self-test completes.
Y N Y N
Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP.
Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT
Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413 -13 and J413- A7 of the harness. The resis- Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413- A7 of the harness. The resis-
tance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when tance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when
cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification.
Y N Y N
Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the
range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room tempera- range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room tempera-
ture). The resistance is within specification. ture). The resistance is within specification.
Y N Y N
Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermit- Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermit-
tent short circuit to ground. tent short circuit to ground.
Check the following: Check the following:

• Check the H/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the • Check the H/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the
point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly.
• If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). • If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4).
• Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the • Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the
Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3). Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
If the problem continues, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). If the fault persists, If the problem continues, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). If the fault persists,

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-159 10-363 Job Complete Heat Roll Not Ready RAP, 10-
A B
10-366 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP Y N
This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the Heat Roll Control
The Heat Roll Control Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230° C (446° F) on the Thermistor (PL 8.4).
Heat Roll.
Replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
Power On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 777- Go to Flag 9 (Flag 19 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for a short circuit
160 Fuser Over heating Failure from 1 to 0. to ground. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.2 and check for a short circuit to ground between P/J171-1 and P/
Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure. J413A-7 If OK, replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). If the problem continues,
• Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following:
– Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1).
– Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1).
– Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2).
• Check the Heat Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at
the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is
worn, replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat
Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL
8.3).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Heat Roll
Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins.
disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxida-
tion.
Ensure NVM location 777-160 is reset to 0. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Inter-
lock Switch. Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance of the
Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot, to 150K Ohms when cool (room
temperature). The resistance is in specification.
Y N
Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4).
Reconnect the connector. Close the Drawer. Switch on the power. The 10-366 fault is
declared immediately after self-test completes.
Y N
Switch off the power. Check the voltage at P/J105-4 on the SSR and GND. Switch on the
power. There is 0 VDC present when self-test completes.
Y N
The voltage at P/J105-4 increases to approximately +4.3 VDC within 12 min-
utes.
Y N
The Heater Rod remains illuminated while P/J105-4 still reads approximately
+4.3 VDC.
A B
10-366 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure 2-160 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
10-367 Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Failure Y N
This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the Heat Roll Overheat
RAP Thermistor (PL 8.4).
Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230° C (446° F) on the
Heat Roll.
Go to Flag 9 (Flag 19 w/ Tag P31) on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for a short circuit
to ground. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Power On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 777-
160 Fuser Over heating Failure from 2 to 0.
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.2 and check for a short circuit to ground between P/J172-1 and P/
Initial Actions J413A-8. If OK, replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4). If the problem continues,
Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure. replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Check the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at
the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is
worn, replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat
Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL
8.3).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Heat Roll
Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty
pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to
oxidation.
lock Switch. Disconnect P/J172 on the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. The resistance of the
Y N
Replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4).
Y N
Y N
utes.
Y N
+4.3 VDC.
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-161 10-367 Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat
10-368 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP 10-369 Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP
The Pressure Roll Control Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously for The Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously
over 1500 msec (Pressure Roll Control Thermistor disconnected). for over 1500 msec (Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor disconnected).

• Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following: • Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following:
– Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). – Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1).
– Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). – Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1).
– Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2). – Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2).
• Check the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear • Check the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive
at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. If the surface of the Ther- wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. If the surface of the
mistor is worn, replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the surface Thermistor is worn, replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the
of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pres-
if necessary (PL 8.3). sure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
• Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Check the • Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins.
mating connector on the IOT, and ensure that the mounting plate for the IOT connector is
not bent or misaligned. Procedure
Procedure NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Pressure
Roll Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Heat Roll dirty pins. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants
Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. due to oxidation.
Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxida-
Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J174 on the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor. Measure
tion.
the resistance between P/J174-1 and P/J174-2 on the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor.
Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. Measure The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K
the resistance between P/J173-1 and P/J173-2 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The Ohms when cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. The
resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms resistance of the Thermistor is in specification.
when cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. The resistance Y N
of the Thermistor is in specification.
NOTE: To remove the harness guard (PL 8.6) around the thermistor wires, press the tab
Y N
on the guard that is located below the front cam (PL 8.6).
Replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6).
Reconnect P/J174 to the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect
Replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-10.
The resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%).
Reconnect P/J173 to the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect P/ Y N
J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-9. The Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.2. Check the harness for an open circuit.
resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%).
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.2. Check the harness for an open circuit.

10-368 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP, 2-162 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-370 Power On Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP 10-371 Stand By Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP
The Pressure Roll did not reach the Ready temperature within 8 minutes after Power On. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod was On continuously for 90 seconds during the Standby Mode,
but the Pressure Roll did not reach operating temperature.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Procedure
Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod illuminates momentarily. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll
Y N Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod illuminates momentarily.
Go to the OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP. Y N
Go to the OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP.
Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413-A9 of the harness. The resis- Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT
tance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413-A9 of the harness. The resis-
cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. tance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when
Y N cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification.
Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in Y N
the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room tempera- Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in
ture). The resistance is within specification. the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room tempera-
Y N ture). The resistance is within specification.
Replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Y N
Replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6).
tent short circuit to ground. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermit-
• Check the P/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the Check the following:
point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. • Check the P/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the
• If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly.
• Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. • If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6).
Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3). • Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor.
If the problem continues, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). If the fault persists, Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). If the fault persists,

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-163 10-370 Power On Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP, 10-
10-372 Job Complete Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP 10-373 Job Incomplete Pressure Roll Not Ready Failure
The Pressure Roll Lamp was On continuously for 3 minutes after the current job completed, RAP
but the Pressure Roll did not reach operation temperature.
The Pressure Roll declared Not Ready during a job and the Pressure Roll Lamp was On con-
tinuously for 3 minutes after the machine stopped, but the Pressure Roll did not reach opera-
Initial Actions tion temperature.
Initial Actions
Procedure Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure.
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll
Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod illuminates momentarily. Procedure
Y N
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll
Go to the OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP. Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod illuminates momentarily.
Y N
Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413-A13 and J413-A9 of the harness. The resis-
tance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT
cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification.
Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413-A9 of the harness. The resis-
Y N
tance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when
Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in
cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification.
the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room tempera-
Y N
ture). The resistance is within specification.
Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in
Y N the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room tempera-
ture). The resistance is within specification.
Y N
Go to Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an
intermittent short circuit to ground.
• Check the P/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the
point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. Check the following:
• If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). • Check the P/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the
• Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly.
Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3). • If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6).
If the problem continues, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). If the fault persists, • Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor.
replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
If the problem continues, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). If the fault persists,

10-372 Job Complete Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP, 2-164 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
10-375 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure The Heater Rod remains illuminated while P/J105-3 still reads approximately
+4.3 VDC.
RAP Y N
This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the Pressure Roll Con-
The Pressure Roll Control Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230° C (446° F) on
the Pressure Roll. trol Thermistor (PL 8.6).

Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.2 and check for a short circuit to ground between P/J173-1 and P/
J413A-9. If OK, replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). If the problem contin-
• Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following: ues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

• Check the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear
at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. If the surface of the Ther-
mistor is worn, replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the surface
of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll
if necessary (PL 8.3).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Pressure
Roll Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty
pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to
oxidation.
lock Switch. Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance of the
Y N
Replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6).
Y N
Y N
utes.
Y N
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-165 10-375 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Overheat
A B C
10-376 Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat The Heater Rod remains illuminated while P/J105-3 still reads approximately
+4.3 VDC.
Failure RAP Y N
This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the Pressure Roll Over-
The Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230° C (446° F)
on the Pressure Roll. heat Thermistor (PL 8.6).

Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.2 and check for a short circuit to ground between P/J174-1 and P/
J413A-10. If OK, replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6). If the problem con-
• Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following: tinues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

• Check the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive
wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. If the surface of the
Thermistor is worn, replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the
surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pres-
sure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Pressure
Roll Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and
dirty pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due
to oxidation.
lock Switch. Disconnect P/J174 on the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor. The resistance of
the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot, to 150K Ohms when cool
(room temperature). The resistance is in specification.
Y N
Replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6).
Y N
Y N
utes.
Y N
A B C
10-376 Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat 2-166 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-377 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP 10-378 External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure
The External Heat Roll Control Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously RAP
for 1500 msec (External Heat Roll Control Thermistor disconnected).
The External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continu-
ously for 1500 msec (External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor disconnected).
Initial Actions
– Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). • Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following:
– Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). – Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1).
– Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2). – Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1).
• Check the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive – Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2).
wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the External Heat Roll. If the surface of • Check the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and exces-
the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). sive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the External Heat Roll. If the surface
Inspect the surface of the External Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor.
of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.8).
Replace the External Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.8). Inspect the surface of the External Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor.
Replace the External Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
Procedure • Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins.
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (External
Heat Roll Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and Procedure
dirty pins. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants
due to oxidation.
Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent
Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J175 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. Mea- and dirty pins. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contami-
sure the resistance between P/J175-1 and P/J175-2 on the External Heat Roll Control Ther- nants due to oxidation.
mistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot, to
150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J176 on the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. Mea-
sure the resistance between P/J176-1 and P/J176-2 on the External Heat Roll Overheat Ther-
The resistance of the Thermistor is in specification.
mistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to
Y N
150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification.
Replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8).
The resistance of the Thermistor is in specification.
Y N
Reconnect P/J175 to the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect
P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-11. Replace the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.8).
The resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%).
Reconnect P/J176 to the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Discon-
Y N
nect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-
12. The resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-167 10-377 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Fail-
10-379 Power On External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP Y N
Replace the External Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.8).
The External Heat Roll did not reach the Ready temperature within 5 minutes after Power On.
Initial Actions • Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for an open circuit.
Refer to BSD 10.2, 10.3, and 10.12 for the following procedure. • Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for an open circuit.
• If the harness is good, go to Flag 14 on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for an open cir-
• Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following: cuit.
– Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). • Disconnect the connectors to the components (External Heat Roll Thermostat, AC Driver
– Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). PWB, SSR, and the IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent, or dirty pins.
– Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2). Disconnect, then reconnect, the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to
oxidation.
– Ensure that connectors P/J422B, P/J193, P/J196, P/J105, and P/J100 are seated
correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, AC Driver PWB, SSR, Heat Roll Thermostat, and • Check the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Replace the Thermistor if worn,
or dirty.
the External Heat Roll Heater Rod and there are no obvious crimped or broken
wires. • Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins.
• Ensure that NVM location 777-003 External Heat Roll Temperature Control = 178
Procedure (NASG), 193 (ESG) and NVM location 777-012 External Heat Roll Ready Temperature =
165 (NASG), 188 (ESG).
Close the Drawer. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-029
External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 • Replace the SSR (PL 9.3) if no problems is found with the connectors.
on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB). • If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J105-1 on the SSR and GND.
Y N
Y N
There is +4.5 VDC between P/J105-2 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND
Y N
Press Start. The voltage at P/J105-2 decreases momentarily to less than +1.0 VDC.
Y N
good, replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance
across the External Heat Roll Heater Rod ( P/J193-1 to P/J196-1). The resistance is less
than 10 Ohms.
Y N
Replace the External Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.8).
Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less
than 10 Ohms.

10-379 Power On External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP 2-168 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-382 Stand By External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP 10-383 Job Complete External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP
The External Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 1 minute during the Standby Mode, but The External Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 3 minutes after the current job com-
the External Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature. pleted, but the External Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature.

Procedure Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll
Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/ Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/
J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB). J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB).
Y N Y N
Go to the OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Go to the OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP.
Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance
across the External Heat Roll Heater Rod ( P/J193-1 to P/J196-1). The resistance is less across the External Heat Roll Heater Rod ( P/J193-1 to P/J196-1). The resistance is less
than 10 Ohms. than 10 Ohms.
Y N Y N
Replace the External Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.8). Replace the External Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.8).
Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less
than 10 Ohms. than 10 Ohms.
Y N Y N
Replace the External Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.8). Replace the External Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.8).
Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT
Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413-A13 and J413-A11 of the harness. The resis- Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413-A11 of the harness. The resis-
tance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when tance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when
cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification.
Y N Y N
Disconnect P/J175 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should Disconnect P/J175 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should
be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room tem- be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room tem-
perature). The resistance is within specification. perature). The resistance is within specification.
Y N Y N
Replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8).
Go to Flag 6 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.3. Check for an intermittent open circuit or short circuit Go to Flag 6 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.3. Check for an intermittent open circuit or short circuit
to ground. to ground.
Check the following: Check the following:

• Check the External Heat Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear • Check the External Heat Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear
at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed cor- at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed cor-
rectly. rectly.
• If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor • If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor
(PL 8.8). (PL 8.8).
• Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the • Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the
Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.8). Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
If the problem continues, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). If the fault If the problem continues, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). If the fault
persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-169 10-382 Stand By External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP,
10-384 Job Incomplete External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP • If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor
(PL 8.8).
The External Heat Roll declared Not Ready during a job and the External Heat Roll Lamp was • Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor.
On continuously for 3 minutes after the machine stopped, but the External Heat Roll did not
• Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
reach operating temperature.
If the problem continues, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8).
If the fault persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll
Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/
J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB).
Y N
Go to the OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP.
than 10 Ohms.
Y N
than 10 Ohms.
Y N
Check the resistance of the harness as follows:

• Switch off the power.
• Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch.
• Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB.
• Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413-A11 of the harness. The resistance
should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool
(room temperature).
The resistance is within specification.
Y N
Disconnect P/J175 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should
be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room tem-
perature). The resistance is within specification.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.3. Check for an open circuit or short circuit to ground.

• Check the External Heat Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear
at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed cor-
rectly.

10-384 Job Incomplete External Heat Roll Not Ready 2-170 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
10-386 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Y N
This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the External Heat Roll
Failure RAP Control Thermistor (PL 8.8).
The External Heat Roll Control Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230° C (446° F)
on the External Heat Roll.
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If OK,
Initial Actions J413A-11. If OK, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). If the problem
Refer to BSD 10.3 and 10.12 for the following procedure. continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Check the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage, or excessive
wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the External Heat Roll. If the surface of
the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8).
Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the
External Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
Procedure
Heat Roll Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and
dirty pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due
to oxidation.
lock Switch. Disconnect P/J175 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance
of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when cool
(room temperature). The resistance is in specification.
Y N
Y N
Y N
utes.
Y N
+4.3 VDC.
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-171 10-386 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Over-
A B
10-387 External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Y N
This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the External Heat Roll
Failure RAP Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.8).
The External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230° C (446°
F) on the External Heat Roll.
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If OK,
Initial Actions J413A-12. If OK, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). If the problem
Refer to BSD 10.3 and 10.12 for the following procedure. continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Check the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage, or excessive
wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the External Heat Roll. If the surface of
the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.8).
Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the
External Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
Procedure
Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent
and dirty pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants
due to oxidation.
lock Switch. Disconnect P/J176 on the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. The resis-
tance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when
cool (room temperature). The resistance is in specification.
Y N
Replace the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.8).
Y N
Y N
utes.
Y N
+4.3 VDC.
A B
10-387 External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Over- 2-172 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
10-389 Fuser Nip Contact Failure RAP NOTE: In the following step, if the Pressure Roll latches against the Heat Roll but does not
remain latched, answer Yes to the statement.
The Nip Sensor did not go L within 5 seconds after the Fuser Nip Clutch was energized (Pres-
Enter dC330 010-023 Fuser Nip Clutch (Nip). Press Start. The Pressure Roll latches
sure Roll started moving against the Heat Roll).
against the Heat Roll.
Y N
Initial Actions Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB and
Refer to BSD 10.6, BSD 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure. GND.
Y N
Check for the following: +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
• Ensure that connectors P/J413A and P/J169 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, Y N
and the Nip Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Check Fuse F1 on the AC Driver PWB. If the fuse is blown, replace it (PL 9.3). If the fuse
blows again, go to the +24 VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and check for a short circuit in the Go to Flag 6 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
harness. good, replace the Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).
• Open the Drawer and extend it to the Service Position. Rotate the Gear on the latching
Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-12 decreases to less than +1.0 VDC.
mechanism in the CCW direction (as viewed from the front of the machine) and ensure it
Y N
rotates freely and the Pressure Roll moves up and down as the Gear is rotated (PL 8.6).
Leave the Pressure Roll unlatched.
Replace the Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).

Procedure
Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start. The Exit Motor energizes. The Pressure Roll remains latched against the Heat Roll.
Y N Y N
Press Stop. There is +24 VDC from P/J411 pin 6 to P/J411 pin 8. Press Stop (the Exit Motor should still be running). Enter dC330 010-220 Nip Sensor.
Y N Press Start. Enter dC330 010-023 Fuser Nip Clutch (Nip). Press Start. As the Pres-
Refer to Wirenets +24VDC-1 (Figure 1) and +24VDC-1 (Figure 5). troubleshoot the sure Roll latches and unlatches, the status of the Nip Sensor changes from L to H
24V input power from the IOT LVPS to the Exit Motor. to L.
Y N
Approximately +7 VDC is measured between P/J418B-17 on the IOT Drive PWB and The status is a constant H.
GND. Y N
Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the har-
+24 VDC is measured between P/J418B-19 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. ness is good, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6).
Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on
Press Start. The voltage at P/J418B-17 goes to less than +1.0 VDC. the Distribution PWB.
Y N Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3).
+24 VDC is measured between P/J418B-19 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Go to and Flag 5 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
Y N ness is good, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6).
Replace the Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).
ness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Check for obvious damage and/or broken Exit Motor and Fuser Nip Clutch gear assemblies
Drive PWB (PL 9.2). that would cause the Pressure Roll latching mechanism to be slow to actuate the Nip Sensor. If
the problem continues, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6). If the problem continues, replace the
Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-173 10-389 Fuser Nip Contact Failure RAP
10-390 Fuser Nip Retract Failure RAP Y N
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB and
The Nip Sensor did not go H within 5 seconds after the Fuser Nip Clutch was energized to GND.
retract the Pressure Roll. Y N
Initial Actions Y N
Refer to BSD 10.6, BSD 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure.
good, replace the Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).
• Ensure that connectors P/J413A and P/J169 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB,
and the Nip Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-12 decreases to less than +1.0 VDC.
• Check Fuse F1 on the AC Driver PWB. If the fuse is blown, replace it (PL 9.3). If the fuse Y N
blows again, go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and check for a short circuit in the harness. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Open the Drawer and extend it to the Service Position. Rotate the Gear on the latching
mechanism in the CCW direction (as viewed from the front of the machine) and ensure it Replace the Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).
rotates freely and the Pressure Roll moves up and down as the Gear is rotated (PL 8.6).
Leave the Pressure Roll unlatched. The Pressure Roll remains latched against the Heat Roll.
Y N
Procedure Press Stop (the Exit Motor should still be running). Enter dC330 010-220 Nip Sensor.
Press Start. Enter dC330 010-023 Fuser Nip Clutch (Nip). Press Start. As the Pres-
Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start. The Exit Motor energizes.
sure Roll latches and unlatches, the status of the Nip Sensor changes from L to H
Y N
to L.
Press Stop. There is +24 VDC from P/J411 pin 6 to P/J411 pin 8. Y N
Y N
The status is a constant H.
Refer to Wirenets +24VDC-1 (Figure 1) and +24VDC-1 (Figure 5). troubleshoot the
Y N
24V input power from the IOT LVPS to the Exit Motor.
ness is good, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6).
Approximately +7 VDC is measured between P/J418B-17 on the IOT Drive PWB and
GND. +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on
Press Start. The voltage at P/J418B-17 goes to less than +1.0 VDC.
the Distribution PWB.
Y N
Y N
Go to and Flag 5 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
Y N
ness is good, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6).
Replace the Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).
Check for obvious damage and/or broken Exit Motor and Fuser Nip Clutch gear assemblies
PWB (PL 9.2). that would cause the Pressure Roll latching mechanism to be slow to actuate the Nip Sensor. If
the problem continues, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6). If the problem continues, replace the
NOTE: In the following step, if the Pressure Roll latches against the Heat Roll but does not
Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).
remain latched, answer Yes to the statement.
Enter dC330 010-023 Fuser Nip Clutch (Nip). Press Start. The Pressure Roll latches
against the Heat Roll.

10-390 Fuser Nip Retract Failure RAP 2-174 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-391 Fail Unit Failure RAP 10-398 Fuser Fan Failure RAP
The Failure detection circuit (hardware) indicated an abnormal operation but a failure did not The Fuser Fan Failed.
occur for the Heat Roll, Pressure Roll and External Heat Roll.
Initial Actions On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 772-017 Fuser
Fan from “1” to “0”.
Initial Actions
Procedure Refer to BSD 10.1 and 10.12 for the following procedure.
Close the Drawer. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater
Rod illuminates after self-test completes. Ensure that connector P/J11B is seated correctly on the AC Driver PWB and there are no obvi-
Y N ous crimped or broken wires.
Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater
Switch the power Off then On. Enter dC330 010-004 Fuser Fan-Low Speed. Press Start.
Rod illuminates momentarily.
Press Stop. The Fuser Fan switches from High Speed to Low Speed and back to High
Y N
Speed.
Go to the OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP
Y N
Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momen- +12 VDC is measured between P/J11B-13 on the AC Driver PWB and GND.
Y N
tarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC
Driver PWB).
good, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
Y N
+12 VDC is measured between P/J11B-13 and P/J11B-14 on the AC Driver PWB.
Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance Y N
across the External Heat Roll Heater Rod ( P/J193-1 to P/J196-1). The resistance is less Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
than 10 Ohms.
Approximately +4 VDC is measured between P/J11B-12 on the AC Driver PWB and
Y N
GND.
Y N
Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less Go to Flag 8 and Flag 9 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If
the harness is good, replace the Fuser Fan (PL 10.2).
than 10 Ohms.
Y N
Approximately +4 VDC is measured between P/J419B-13 on the IOT Drive PWB and
GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 11 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness
• Disconnect the connectors to the components (Heat Roll, Pressure Roll, and External
is good, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the
Heat Roll Thermostats; AC Driver PWB; SSR; and the IOT Drive PWB). Check for broken,
bent, or dirty pins. Disconnect, then reconnect, the connectors several times to remove
contaminants due to oxidation. Replace the Fuser Fan (PL 10.2).
• Check the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4), Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL
8.6), or External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Replace the Thermistor if worn, or Less than +1.0 VDC is measured between P/J419B-12 on the IOT Driver and GND.
dirty. Y N
• If no problem is found with the connectors, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 10 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is
• If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). good, replace the Fuser Fan (PL 10.2). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive
PWB (PL 9.2).
• If the problem persists, replace these components in the following order until the problem
is resolved: IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2), IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the Fuser Fan (PL 10.2). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL
9.2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-175 10-391 Fail Unit Failure RAP, 10-398 Fuser Fan Fail-
10-399 Fuser Intake Fan Failure RAP 10-421 Fuser Oil Level RAP
The Fuser Intake Fan Failed. The Oil Empty Sensor detected the Oil Near Empty Condition continuously for 5 seconds.
NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 772-018 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ NOTE: The Oil Near Empty Condition occurs when the sensor detects that the oil is low
On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 772-018 Fuser (approximately 40k prints have been printed). The machine issues a warning when it detects
Intake Fan from “1” to “0”. Fuser Oil Near Empty. When another 2000 - 4000 prints are printed out without servicing the
Fuser Oil, the machine issues a stop message and then stops printing.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.1 and 10.12 for the following procedure. NOTE: Oil usage varies depending on the types of images and paper being used. 30 - 40k
prints per bottle is typical. However, when an oil metering system (Metering Blade, Donor Roll,
Check for the following: etc.) is in need of service, it can use oil at two to three times the normal rate.
• Ensure that connectors P/J413B and P/J283 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB Initial Actions
and Fuser Intake Fan.
and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure 1. Open the Drawer.
Open the Front Door. Cheat the Interlock. Enter dC330 010-061 Fuser Intake Fan-High Speed. 2. Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). Verify that there is oil in the bottle. If not, install a new
Press Start. Press Stop. The Fuser Intake Fan switches from Low Speed to High Speed Oil Cartridge.
and back to Low Speed. 3. Close the Drawer.
Y N
4. Switch the power Off and then On.
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J413B-13 on the IOT Drive PWB and
GND.
Y N Procedure
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). NOTE: This RAP assumes that there is fuser oil in the bottle and therefore is not a cause of the
10-421 Fault Code.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J413B-13 and P/J413B-14 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N Enter dC330 010-222 Oil Empty Sensor. Press Start. The Oil Empty Sensor status is H.
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If Y N
the Harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Press Stop. There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
Approximately +2 VDC is measured between P/J413B-12 on the IOT Drive PWB and Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
GND. good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the Harness There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on the
is good, replace the Fuser Intake Fan (PL 10.1). Distribution PWB.
Y N
Replace the Fuser Intake Fan (PL 10.1). Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3).
Less than +1.0 VDC is measured between P/J413B-11 on the IOT Driver and GND. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
Y N good, replace the Oil Empty Sensor (PL 8.7). If the problem continues, replace the IOT
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
replace the Fuser Intake Fan (PL 10.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive
PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the IOT Driver PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the Fuser Intake Fan (PL 10.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB
(PL 9.2).

10-399 Fuser Intake Fan Failure RAP, 10-421 Fuser Oil 2-176 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
10-422 Web CRU RAP 10-500 Fuser Web CRU Not Present RAP
A faulty connection has occurred between the Web CRU and the IOT Drive PWB. The Web CRU detection circuit detected that the CRU was not present or was not fully seated.
NOTE: A legitimate Fuser Web Near Empty Condition occurs when 1458 minutes of Web On NOTE: This condition occurs when the Web CRU is not installed, or is not seated fully. It will
Time has been reached. The machine issues a warning when it detects Fuser Web Near also occur if the small 3-pin connector (under the oil bottle) is not connected when the Fuser
Empty. With a legitimate “Web Near Empty” condition, only a message is displayed, not a fault Assembly is installed.
code.
Initial Actions
NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 777-077 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ Refer to BSD 10.5 and 10.12 for the following procedure.
On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 777-077 Web
Status from “1” to “0”. NOTE: Before proceeding into this procedure, clean the contacts on the CRU connector. Oxi-
Initial Actions dation on the connector has been known to cause this problem. Also try reseating the CRU
several times to see if the problem remains.
Ensure that connectors P/J419A and P/J722 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, Web
Perform the following: CRU Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
1. Open the Drawer.
2. Remove and inspect the Web CRU. If the web supply roll is near empty, then replace it Procedure
and proceed to the next step. Enter dC330 010-223 Web CRU Home. Press Start. The Web CRU status signal is H.
3. Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). Y N
4. Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness and connectors for a short circuit to
GND. If the harnesses and connectors are OK, replace the Web CRU.
5. Close the Drawer.
6. Switch the power Off, then On.
Press Stop. Power Off. Remove the Fuser Web CRU. Enter dC330 010-223 Web CRU Home.
Press Start. The Web CRU Sensor status is L.
Procedure Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J413A-2 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Install the Fuser Web CRU. +5 VDC is measured between P/J419A-17 and GND.
Y N Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J440-1 on the Web Drive PWB and GND. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is Check for obstructions or damage that would cause the Web CRU Sensor status to be
OK, replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). blocked (H). There are no obstructions and/or damage.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J440-2 on the Web Drive PWB and GND. Remove the obstructions and/or damage.
Y N
Check the Web Motor (PL 8.4) for an open circuit. If it is OK, replace the Web Drive +2.2 VDC is measured between P/J419A-16 and GND.
PWB (PL 8.4). Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter DC330 010-032 Web Motor. Press Start. The voltage at P/J413A-2 decreases from Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK,
+24 VDC to less than +1.0 VDC. replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Install the Web CRU, Front Cover and Oil Car- Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Fuser Web Drive gear assemblies. Install
tridge. the Fuser Web CRU.
Replace the Web Drive PWB (PL 8.4). If that does not correct the problem, replace the Web
Motor (PL 8.4).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-177 10-422 Web CRU RAP, 10-500 Fuser Web CRU Not
10-900 Fuser Cycle Down RAP OF10-1 OCT Detection Failure RAP
The Fuser temperature fell below the normal value during the job. The machine cycled down The system does not detect an OCT when one is installed.
and temporarily stopped the copying job; and when it reached the operating temperature, can-
celed the above condition and started again automatically (the job resumes). Initial Actions
NOTE: This condition should be expected to happen occasionally, especially when running a
long job. (No recovery steps are necessary.) If this condition occurs frequently, continue with
this RAP. Procedure
Enter dC330 010-296 OCT Detect. The display indicates L.
Initial Actions Y N
• Refer to BSD 10.2, 10.3 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.11. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
• Ensure that the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor (PL 8.4) is fully seated. ness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

Procedure
Close the Drawer. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater
Rod illuminates after self-test completes.
Y N
Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP.
Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater
Rod illuminates momentarily.
Y N
Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momen-
tarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC
Driver PWB).
Y N
than 10 Ohms.
Y N
than 10 Ohms.
Y N

• Disconnect the connectors to the Heat Roll, Pressure Roll, and External Heat Roll Ther-
mostats; AC Driver PWB; SSR; and the IOT Drive PWB. Check for broken, bent, or dirty
pins. Disconnect/reconnect the connectors several times to remove oxidation.
• Check the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4), Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL
8.6), or External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Replace if worn, or dirty.
• If no problem is found with the connectors, replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
• If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).

10-900 Fuser Cycle Down RAP, OF10-1 OCT Detec- 2-178 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
OF10-2 Fuser Oil Pump RAP OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP
The Fuser Oil Pump is not dispensing Fuser Oil. Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.5 and 10.12 for the following procedure. • Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following:
Procedure – Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1).
Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start and Stop several times. Approximately 100 – Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2).
VAC is measured between P/J199-1 and P/J199-2 on the Fuser Oil Pump. • Ensure that connectors P/J422B, P/J419B, P/J194, P/J191, P/J105, P/J100, P/J11A,
Y N and P/J18 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, AC Driver PWB, SSR, Heat Roll
Approximately 100 VAC is measured between P/J18-3 and P/J18-1 on the AC Thermostat, and the Heat Roll Heater Rod and there are no obvious crimped or broken
Driver PWB. wires.
Y N
Press Stop. +5.8 VDC is measured between P/J11A-14 on the AC Driver PWB
and GND.
Procedure
Y N Close the Drawer. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. ACH is measured
+5 VDC is measured between P/J19-1 and P/J19-7 on the AC Driver PWB. between P/J100-4 on the SSR and P/J18-2 on the AC Driver PWB.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the ACH is measured between P/J100-4 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB
harness is OK, replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). (ACN into the AC Driver PWB).
Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har- ACH is measured between P/J100-3 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver
ness is OK, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). PWB.
Y N
Press Start. The voltage at P/J11A-14 goes to less than +1.0 VDC. ACH is measured between P/J18-4 on the AC Driver PWB and P/J15-1 on
Y N the AC Driver PWB.
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Y N
Open the drawer. There is +24 VDC between P/J11A-4 on the AC
Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Driver PWB and GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
replace the Fuser Oil Pump (PL 8.7).
There is +24 VDC between P/J419B-17 on the IOT Drive and GND.
Replace the Fuser Oil Pump (PL 8.7). Y N
Go to Flag 6 (Flag 16 w/ Tag P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an
open circuit.
Close the drawer. The voltage at P/J419B-17 decreases to less than

+1.0 VDC.
s4 you.com Y N
manual Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 15 (Flag 26 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit.
If TAG P31 is present, replace the Varistor PWB if the problem persists.
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-179 OF10-2 Fuser Oil Pump RAP, OF10-3 Heat Roll AC
A B C
Y N Go to Flag 20, Flag 23, and Flag 27 on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are
Go to Flag 8 (Flag 18 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. OK, replace AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Varistor PWB (PL 9.6) if the problem per-
If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). sists.
If the problem continues, replace the SSR (PL 9.3), then the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
There is approximately +4.3 VDC between P/J105-4 on the SSR and GND when
the lamp is off.
Y N
Check for an open wire at pin 4 of P/J105. If OK, replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
Enter dC330 010-030 Heat Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The voltage at P/
J105-4 decreases to less than +1.0 VDC.
Y N
Go to Flag 9 (Flag 19 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. If the
wires are OK, replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
across the Heat Roll Heater Rod. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms.
Y N
Replace the Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.3).
Check the resistance across the Heat Roll Thermostat. The value is less than 10 Ohms.
Y N
Replace the Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.4).
Switch off the power. Disconnect the connectors to the Heat Roll Thermostat, AC Driver PWB,
SSR, and the IOT Drive PWB. Check the connectors for broken, bent, or dirty pins. Discon-
nect, then reconnect, the connectors several times to remove oxidation. TAG P31 is present.
Y N
Go to Flag 10 and Flag 13 on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK,
replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
If the problem persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Switch on the power. There is +5 VDC from J73 to J74 on the Surge SSR.
Y N
There is +5 VDC from J73 on the Surge SSR to frame ground
Y N
Go to Flag 28. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the AC Driver
PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the Surge SSR (PL 9.6).
Go to Flag 30. Check for an open circuit. If the wires and the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3) are
Switch off the power. Disconnect P/J70. The resistance from J70-1 to J70-2 is 55 ohms +/-
20%.
Y N
Replace Surge Resistor (PL 9.6).
C
OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP 2-180 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C D
OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP Go to Flag 15 (Flag 26 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit.
The Pressure Roll did not reach the Ready temperature within 8 minutes after Power On. There is +5 VDC between P/J105-1 on the SSR and GND.
Y N
Initial Actions Go to Flag 8 (Flag 18 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for an
Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure. open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following: There is approximately +4.3 VDC between P/J105-3 on the SSR and GND when
– Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). the lamp is off.
Y N
Check for an open connection at pin 3 of P/J105. If OK, replace the SSR (PL
9.3).
– Ensure that NVM location 777-002 Pressure Roll Temperature Control = 130
(NASG/ESG) and NVM location 777-011 Pressure Roll Ready Temperature = 123 Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The voltage at P/
(NASG), 125 (ESG). J105-3 decreases to less than +1.0 VDC.
– Ensure that connectors P/J422B, P/J419B, P/J195, P/J192, P/J105, P/J100, P/ Y N
J11A, and P/J18 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, AC Driver PWB, SSR, Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Pressure Roll Thermostat, and the Pressure Roll Heater Rod and there are no obvi-
ous crimped or broken wires. Go to Flag 7 (Flag 17 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for an open
circuit. If the harness is good, replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
Procedure
Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance
between P/J100-2 on the SSR and P/J18-1 on the AC Driver PWB. across the Pressure Roll Heater Rod. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms.
Y N
Y N
Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-2 on the SSR and P/
Replace the Pressure Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.3).
J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into the AC Driver PWB).
Y N
Measure the resistance across the Pressure Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less than
ACH is measured between P/J100-3 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver
10 Ohms.
PWB.
Y N
Y N
Replace the Pressure Roll Thermostat (PL 8.6).
ACH is measured between P/J18-4 on the AC Driver PWB and P/J15-1 on
the AC Driver PWB. Go to Flag 11 and Flag 12 (Flag 21 and Flag 22 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an
Y N
open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). If Tag P31 is present,
Open the drawer. There is +24 VDC between P/J11A-4 on the AC replace the Varistor PWB (PL 9.6) if the problem persists
Driver PWB and GND.
Y N
• Disconnect the connectors to the components (Pressure Roll Thermostat, AC Driver
PWB, SSR, and the IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent, or dirty pins.
Disconnect, then reconnect, the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to
There is +24 VDC between P/J419B-17 on the IOT Drive and GND.
oxidation.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 (Flag 16 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an • Check the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Replace the Thermistor if worn or
open circuit. dirty.
• Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Check the
Close the drawer. The voltage at P/J419B-17 decreases to less than mating connector on the IOT, and ensure that the mounting plate for the IOT connector is
+1.0 VDC. not bent or misaligned.
Y N • If no problem is found with the connectors, replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
• If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
A B C D
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-181 OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP
OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP • Flag 14 (Flag 24 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2.
If the wires s are OK, check the following:
The External Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 1 minute during the Standby Mode, but • Disconnect the connectors to the components (External Heat Roll Thermostat, AC Driver
the External Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature.
PWB, SSR, and the IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent, or dirty pins.
Disconnect, then reconnect, the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to
Initial Actions oxidation.
Refer to BSD 10.2, 10.3, and 10.12 for the following procedure. • Check the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Replace the Thermistor if worn,
or dirty.
• Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Check the
• NVM location 777-003 External Heat Roll Temperature Control = 178 (NASG), 193 (ESG) mating connector on the IOT, and ensure that the mounting plate for the IOT connector is
NVM location 777-012 External Heat Roll Ready Temperature = 165 (NASG), 188 (ESG). not bent or misaligned.
NVM location 777-008 External Heat Roll Power Save Temperature = 165 (NASG) and If the problem continues, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). If the problem persists, replace the Varistor
120 (ESG). PWB (PL 9.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Ensure that connectors P/J422B, P/J193, P/J196, and P/J100 are seated correctly on
the IOT Drive PWB, AC Driver PWB, SSR, Heat Roll Thermostat, and the External Heat
Roll Heater Rod; and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1
on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB).
Y N
Y N
Y N
There is +4.5 VDC between P/J105-2 on the SSR and GND.

Y N
Press Start. The voltage at P/J105-2 decreases momentarily to less than +1.0 VDC.
Y N
good, replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
Check the following areas of the harness for an open circuit:

• Flag 2 on BSD 10.3.
• Flag 3 on BSD 10.3.

OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP 2-182 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
OF 10-6 Fuser Out of Oil Rap
The purpose of this RAP is to resolve problems where the machine runs out of Fuser Oil with-
out declaring a Low Oil or Out of Oil fault.
NOTE: to decrease the interval between detection of low oil level and fault declaration change
NVM location 777-056 to 500, and location 777-058 to 3.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-222 Oil Empty Sensor. Press Start. The Oil Empty Sensor status is L.
Y N
Perform the following steps
1. Open the Front Door and pull out the Drawer Assembly.
2. Remove the Fuser Top Cover (PL 8.2) and Front Cover (PL 8.1).
3. Slide the Fuser back in position. Latch the Drawer Assembly
4. Remove the Oil Empty Sensor from the Oil Tank (PL 8.7). Thoroughly clean the sen-
sor, but do not disconnect it or reinstall it.
5. Install a cheater in the Front Door Interlock, and allow the machine to come to
Ready.
The UI displays “Replace the Fuser Oil Cartridge soon.”
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J167 pins 1 and 3.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.5 (2 of 2) and troubleshoot the +5V circuit.
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.5 (2 of 2) and check the wire between P/J167-2 on the Oil
Empty Sensor and P/J413A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB for an open circuit or a short
circuit to a voltage source. If the wire is OK, replace the Oil Empty Sensor (PL 8.7). If
the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Reinstall the Sensor. Make Sure that the green circuit pwb faces AWAY from the Heat
Lamps. Close the Front Door. If the “Replace the Fuser Oil Cartridge soon” message
remains, check for a loose connection at P/J167or P/J413A. If the harness is good,
replace the Oil Empty Sensor (PL 8.7).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-183 OF 10-6 Fuser Out of Oil Rap
OF 10-6 Fuser Out of Oil Rap 2-184 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C D E F
11-107 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10).
The OCT Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft.
the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
• Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D,11-107 SCT Exit • Check the Drive Belt for Damage
Sensor On Jam Long RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
• Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
NOTE: “Long” indicates that the trail edge of the paper has not passed through the Decurler
Exit Sensor. Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
• Entrance Roll
Initial Actions • Pinch Rollers
Refer to BSD11.2 and BSD 11.4 and BSD 11.8 for the following procedure. • Exit Roll
• Drive Belt
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
• Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path The OCT Gate is in the Up or OCT position
• Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mail Box Transport Roll and the Oct Exit Y N
Roll. Enter dC330 011-081 OCT Gate Solenoid OCT On. Press Start. The OCT Gate
• Ensure that connectors P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J566 on the OCT Solenoid energized.
Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J562-2 and P/J562-1 on the Mail Box
Procedure Control PWB.
Y N
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Oct Exit Sensor.
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J562-2 Mail Box Control PWB and
Y N
GND
The paper entered the Vertical Transport.
Y N
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control
Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport PWB and GND.
Roll is rotating.
Y N
Y N
Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between
The Mail Box Drive Belt is moving.
P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J45-6 on the Dis-
Y N tribution PWB
The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating
Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10)
+24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the
Mail Box Drive Motor
Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J562-1 and GND
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10)
the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL
13.10). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires
are good, replace the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND.
Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If good, ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and
the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9)
and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3
and GND.
Ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves
Y N
freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10)
Solenoid (PL 13.9).
A B C D E F A G
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-185 11-107 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP
A G
• Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper to enter the 11-108 OCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP
Vertical Transport.
• Ensure that the OCT gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT The OCT Exit Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the OCT Exit Sensor
Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). actuated.
Enter dC330 011-107 OCT Exit Sensor. Manually actuate the OCT Exit Sensor actuator. The NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-108 SCT Exit
display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Sensor Off Jam RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Y N
The display is always H
Initial Actions
Y N Refer to BSD 11.2 and 11.4 for the following procedure.
Go to Flag 1on BSD 11.4. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Oct Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). Check for the following:
+5 VDC is measured between P/J562-4 and P/J562-6 • Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path
Y N • Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mail Box Transport Roll and the Oct Exit
CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Roll.
Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J566 on the OCT
Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/
Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
J44-6 on the Distribution PWB.
• Ensure that the OCT Full Stack Sensor is operating correctly. Refer to the 11-921 Offset
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Catch Tray Full Stack RAP.
Go to Flag 2 and Flag 4 on BSD11.4. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness Procedure
is good, replace the Oct Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). The trail edge of the paper is past the Oct Exit Sensor
Y N
With paper at the sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J562-5 and GND.
Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll
Y N
is rotating.
Replace the OCT Exit Sensor (PL 13.9).
Y N
The Mailbox drive Belt is moving.
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Y N
• Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating
• Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) Y N
• Exit Roll (PL 13.9) +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail
Box Drive Motor
• Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the
wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).

Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the
wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and

GND.
Y N
Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10).
Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft.
A B C
11-107 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP, 11-108 2-186 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
• Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. 11-109 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP
• Check the Drive Belt for Damage
• Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls The OCT Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after
the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the trail edge of the same paper.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-109 SCT Exit
• Entrance Roll (PL 13.9)
Sensor On Jam Short RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
• Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9)
• Exit Roll (PL 13.9) NOTE: “Short” indicates that the trail edge of the paper has passed through the Decurler Exit
Sensor.
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.2 and BSD 11.4 and BSD 11.8 for the following procedure.
Check the OCT Exit Sensor Actuator for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. The
actuator is binding. Check for the following:
Y N
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path
belts that would cause the copy to be slow to actuate the OCT Exit Sensor.
• Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mail Box Transport Roll and the Oct Exit
Replace the OCT Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). Roll.
• Ensure that connectors P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J566 on the OCT
Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Oct Exit Sensor
Y N
Y N
Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport
Roll is rotating.
Y N
Y N
Y N
Mail Box Drive Motor
Y N
Go to Flag 1on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If
13.10).

Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If
the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).

and GND.
Y N
A B C D E F
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-187 11-108 OCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP, 11-109 OCT
A B C D E F A G H
Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10). Ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves
freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate
Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Solenoid (PL 13.9).
• Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. • Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper to enter the
• Check the Drive Belt for Damage Vertical Transport.
• Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls • Ensure that the OCT gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT
Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
• Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) Enter dC330 011-107 OCT Exit Sensor. Manually actuate the OCT Exit Sensor actuator. The
display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor.
Y N
• Exit Roll (PL 13.9) The display is always H
• Drive Belt (PL 13.10) Y N
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Go to Flag 1on BSD 11.4. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Oct Exit Sensor (PL 13.9).
The OCT Gate is in the Up or OCT position
Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J562-4 and P/J562-6
Y N
Enter dC330 011-081 OCT Gate Solenoid OCT On. Press Start. The OCT Gate CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on.
Solenoid energized. Y N
Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/
+24 VDC is measured between P/J562-2 and P/J562-1 on the Mail Box J44-6 on the Distribution PWB.
Control PWB.
Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J562-2 Mail Box Control PWB and
GND Go to Flag 2 and Flag 4 on BSD11.4. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness
Y N is good, replace the Oct Exit Sensor (PL 13.9).
+24 VDC is measured between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control
PWB and GND. With paper at the sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J562-5 and GND.
Y N Y N
Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between Replace the OCT Exit Sensor (PL 13.9).
P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J45-6 on the Dis-
tribution PWB Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) • Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9)
• Exit Roll (PL 13.9)
Y N
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires
are good, replace the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
good, ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and
that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9)
and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
A G H
11-109 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP 2-188 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long RAP 11-111 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Short RAP
The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor at power on. The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor at power on.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-110 Paper NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-111 Paper
Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Short RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed. NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed.

• Refer to BSD11.3 for the following procedure. • Refer to BSD11.3 for the following procedure.
• Ensure that no paper is blocking the Decurler Exit sensor • Ensure that no paper is blocking the Decurler Exit sensor
• Ensure that P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Double Plug J571, P/J651 and P/ • Ensure that P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Double Plug J571, P/J651 and P/
J654 on the Decurler Control PWB, and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are con- J654on the Decurler Control PWB, and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are con-
nected before beginning this RAP. nected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 011-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Enter dC330 011-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.3 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.3 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good,
replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). If the problem continues, replace the Mail replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). If the problem continues, replace the Mail
Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
More than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND on the Decurler Control More than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND on the Decurler Control
PWB. PWB.
Y N Y N
Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12).
Check the Decurler Exit Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Check the Decurler Exit Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the
Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-189 11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor
A B
11-115 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On Jam • Check the Drive Belt for Damage
RAP
The Mail Box Vertical Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper. • Entrance Roll (PL 13.9)
Initial Actions • Exit Roll (PL 13.9)
Refer to BSD11.2, BSD11.5 and BSD11.8 for the following procedure. • Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
• Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path Enter dC330 011-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor. Manually block the Mail Box Vertical Sensor
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path with a sheet of paper. The display changes from L to H to L as the paper moves in and out
• Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres- of the sensor.
sure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J551 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J818, and P/J819 The display is always H
Y N
on the Mail Box Vertical Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or
broken wires. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.5. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9).
Procedure The Vertical LED is on.

The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Mail Box Vertical Sensor Y N
Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J561-3 and P/J561-5
Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll Y N
is rotating. CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on.
Y N Y N
The Mailbox drive Belt is moving. Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1
Y N and P/J44-6 on the Distribution PWB.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail
Box Drive Motor Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD11.5. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the
Y N harness is good, replace the Vertical LED (PL 13.5).
wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace
the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9).
Y N With paper at the sensor, more than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/ P/J551-4 and
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the GND.
wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Y N
Replace the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9).
GND. Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Y N • Entrance Roll (PL 13.9)
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) • Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9)
Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
A B
11-115 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On 2-190 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
11-116 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off Jam • Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
RAP
The Mail Box Vertical Sensor did not detect the Trail edge of the paper within the specified time
after the Mail Box Vertical Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper. • Check the bin entrance area for obstructions.
• Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-116 Mailbox Ver- pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls.
tical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off Jam RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. • Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
Initial Actions Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Refer to BSD11.2 and BSD11.5 for the following procedure. • Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9)
• Pinch Rolls (PL 13.9)
Check for the following: • Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path • Check the bin entrance area for obstructions.
• Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres- • Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres-
sure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. sure to the Vertical Transport Rolls.
• Ensure that connectors P/J551 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J818, and P/J819 • Check the Mail Box Vertical Sensor for intermittent operation. Replace the Mail Box Verti-
on the Mail Box Vertical Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or cal Sensor (PL 13.9) if the problem is not resolved.
broken wires.
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the Mail Box Vertical Sensor
Y N
Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Vertical Transport Rolls
are rotating.
Y N
Y N
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail
Box Drive Motor
Y N
wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).

Y N

GND.
Y N
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-191 11-116 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off
A B C D E
11-142 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Long RAP Go to Flag 6 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires
are good, ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Sole-
The V-Tra In Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the noid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT
Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper. Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-142 Mailbox Ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it
Entrance Sensor On Jam Long RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the
OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.2 and BSD11.4 for the following procedure. • Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper not to
enter the Vertical Transport.
Check for the following: • Ensure that the OCT gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the
• Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
• Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres- Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll
is rotating.
sure to the Vertical Transport Rolls.
Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J567 on the V-Tra In
Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Y N
Procedure Y N
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the V-Tra In Sensor +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail
Y N Box Drive Motor
The paper entered the Vertical Transport. Y N
Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the
The OCT Gate is in the down or Bin Tray position wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Y N
Enter dC330 011-082 OCT Gate Solenoid Bin Tray On. Press Start. The Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND.
OCT Gate Solenoid energized. Y N
Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the
+24 VDC is measured between P/J562-2 and P/J562-3 on the Mail wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Box Control PWB.
Y N Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J562-2 Mail Box Control PWB GND.
and GND Y N
Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10)
+24 VDC is measured between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box
Control PWB and GND. Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10).
Y N
Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft.
between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/
J45-6 on the Distribution PWB • Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) • Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J562-3 and GND Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the • Exit Roll (PL 13.9)
wires are good, replace the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). • Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
A B C D E A
11-142 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Long RAP 2-192 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. 11-143 V-Tra In Sensor Off Jam RAP
Enter dC330 011-142 Vertical Transport In Sensor. Manually actuate the V-Tra In Sensor The V-Tra In Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the V-Tra In Sensor actu-
actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the ated.
sensor.
Y N NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-143 Mailbox
The display is always H Entrance Sensor Off Jam RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.4. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the har- Initial Actions
ness is good, replace the V-Tra Sensor (PL 13.9). Refer to BSD 11.2 and 11.4 for the following procedure.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J562-7 and P/J562-9 Check for the following:
Y N • Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path
CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. • Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path
Y N
• Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres-
Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and
P/J44-6 on the Distribution PWB.
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD11.4. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness Procedure
is good, replace the Oct Exit Sensor (PL 13.9).
The trail edge of the paper is past the Oct Exit Sensor
Y N
With paper at the sensor, less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/ P/J562-8 and
Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll
GND.
is rotating.
Y N
Y N
Replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9).
Y N
• Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) Y N
• Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail
• Exit Roll (PL 13.9) Box Drive Motor
Y N
Switch Off the Power. Disconnect P/J572 from the Mail Box Drive
Motor. Switch On the Power. +24 VDC is measured between P/
J572-1 and P/J572-2.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If
13.10).
Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10)

Y N

GND.
A B C D
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-193 11-142 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Long RAP, 11-143
A B C D
Y N 11-144 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Short RAP
The V-Tra In Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the
Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10). Decurler Exit Sensor detects the lead edge of the same paper.
Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-144 Mailbox
Entrance Sensor On Jam Short RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.2 and BSD11.4 for the following procedure.

• Entrance Roll
• Pinch Rollers
• Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres-
• Exit Roll
• Drive Belt
Check the V-Tra In Sensor Actuator for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. The actu-
ator is binding. Procedure
Y N The lead edge of the paper is at or past the V-Tra In Sensor
Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive Y N
belts that would cause the fed paper to be slow to deactuate the V-Tra In Sensor. The paper entered the Vertical Transport.
Y N
Replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9). The OCT Gate is in the down or Bin Tray position
Y N
Enter dC330 011-082 OCT Gate Solenoid Bin Tray On. Press Start. The
OCT Gate Solenoid energized.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J562-2 and P/J562-3 on the Mail
Box Control PWB.
Y N
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J562-2 Mail Box Control PWB
and GND
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box
Control PWB and GND.
Y N
Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire
between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/
J45-6 on the Distribution PWB

Y N
Go to Flag 6on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the
wires are good, replace the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
A B C D E
11-143 V-Tra In Sensor Off Jam RAP, 11-144 V-Tra In 2-194 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C D E A
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
are good, ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Sole-
noid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Enter dC330 011-142 Vertical Transport In Sensor. Manually actuate the V-Tra In Sensor
Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the
sensor.
Ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it Y N
moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the The display is always H
OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.4. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the har-
• Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper not to ness is good, replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9).
• Ensure that the OCT gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the +5 VDC is measured between P/J562-7 and P/J562-9
OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). Y N
CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on.
Enter dC330, 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll Y N
is rotating. Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/
Y N J44-6 on the Distribution PWB.
Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD11.4. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness
+24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail is good, replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9).
Box Drive Motor
Y N With paper at the sensor, less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J562-8 and GND.
Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the Y N
wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9).
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the • Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9)
wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). • Exit Roll (PL 13.9)
GND. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
Y N


A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-195 11-144 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Short RAP
A B C D E
11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If
The Decurler Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time the wire is good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
after the M/C Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and GND.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-145 Decurler Exit Y N
Sensor On Jam Long RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. Replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
Initial Actions Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A6 and GND
Refer toBSD11.1, BSD11.2, BSD 11.3 and BSD11.4 for the following procedure. Y N
Check for the following: the wire is good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
• Obstructions in the Decurler paper path
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Decurler paper path +less than 0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and GND.
Y N
• Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the MC Exit Roll and the Decurler Entrance Roll.
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
• Ensure that connectors P/J654, P/J653, and P/J651 on the Decurler Control PWB, Dou-
ble Plug J571, P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14).
Procedure
The Entrance Rolls are rotating.
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Decurler Exit Sensor.
Y N
Y N
Check the following parts for wear, damage, or slipping.
The paper entered the Decurler.
Y N • Entrance Roll Drive Gear (PL 13.14)
The Entrance Rolls are rotating when the Jam occurs • Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear (PL 13.14)
Y N • Decurler Stepping Motor Drive Gear (PL 13.14)
Enter dC330 011-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler
Stepping Motor rotates. Enter dC330 011-011-011 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 130. The
Y N Decurler Stepping Motor rotates.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the Decurler Y N
Control PWB. Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and
Y N GND.
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J570-A1 and GND on the Mail Y N
Box Control PWB. Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
Y N
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14).
Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.1. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the Enter dC330 011-012 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 220. The Decurler
wire is good, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Stepping Motor rotates.
Y N
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and
on the Decurler Control PWB. GND.
Y N Y N
Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). If the problem con- Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
tinues, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/J653-3,
4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Enter dC330 011-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Decurler
Y N Stepping Motor rotates.
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A5 and GND
A B C D E A B C
11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP 2-196 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C F
Y N More than +4.5 VDC is measured between P/J658-2 and GND.
Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and Y N
GND. Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12).
Y N
Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. • Exit Roll (PL 13.14)
• Entrance Roll (PL 13.14) • Drive gears (PL 13.13) (PL 13.14)

• Drive gears (PL 13.13) (PL 13.14)
Go to the 10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP

Ensure that the Decurler paper path is free of any paper. Enter dC330 011-145 Decurler Exit
Sensor. The display is L.
Y N
Y N
good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12).
Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J570-B5 and GND.

Y N
replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
Use a sheet of paper to actuate the Decurler Exit Sensor. The display changes to H.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J654-1 and P/J654-3 on the Decurler Control PWB.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wires are good,
replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12).
F
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-197 11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP
A B C D E
11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP Y N
The Decurler Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time the wire is good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
after the MC Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and GND.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-146 Decurler Exit Y N
Sensor On Jam Short RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. Replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
Initial Actions Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A6 and GND
Refer toBSD11.1, BSD11.2 BSD11.3 and BSD11.4 for the following procedure. Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If
Check for the following: the wire is good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Decurler paper path +less than 0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and GND.
Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J654, P/J653, and P/J651 on the Decurler Control PWB, Dou-
ble Plug J571, P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Decurler Exit Sensor
Y N
Y N
Y N • Entrance Roll Drive Gear
The Entrance Rolls are rotating when the Jam occurs • Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear
Y N • Decurler Stepping Motor Drive Gear
Stepping Motor rotates. Enter dC330 011-011-011 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 130. The
Y N Decurler Stepping Motor rotates.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the Decurler Y N
Control PWB. Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and
Y N GND.
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J570 -A1 and GND on the Mail Y N
Box Control PWB. Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
Y N
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14).
Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.1. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the Enter dC330 011-012 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 220. The Decurler
wire is good, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Stepping Motor rotates.
Y N
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and
on the Decurler Control PWB. GND.
Y N Y N
Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). If the problem con- Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/J653-3,
4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Enter dC330 011-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Decurler
Y N Stepping Motor rotates.
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A5 and GND
A B C D E A B C
11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP 2-198 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C F
Y N More than +4.5 VDC is measured between P/J658-2 and GND.
Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and Y N
GND. Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12).
Y N
Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
• Entrance Roll
• Pinch Rollers
• Exit Roll
• Drive gears
• Entrance Roll
• Pinch Rollers
• Exit Roll
• Drive gears
Go to the 10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP

• Entrance Roll
• Pinch Rollers
• Exit Roll
• Drive gears
Y N
Y N

Y N
Use a sheet of paper to actuate the Decurler Exit Sensor. The display changes to H.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J656-1 and P/J661-3 on the Decurler Control PWB.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wires are good,
F
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-199 11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP
11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP 11-191 Paper Remains at Mail Box Vertical Sensor / 1 Bin
The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the V-Tra In Sensor at power on. Sensor RAP
The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Mail Box Vertical Sensor at power on.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-190 Paper
Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-191 Paper
NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed. Remains at Mailbox Vertical Sensor / 1 Bin Sensor RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Initial Actions NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed.
• Refer to BSD11.4 and BSD 11.8 for the following procedure. Initial Actions
• Ensure that no paper is blocking the V-Tra In sensor and the sensor actuator moves freely. • Refer to BSD11.5 for the following procedure.
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. • Ensure that no paper or foreign object is blocking the Mail Box Vertical sensor.
• Ensure that P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J567 on the V-Tra In Sensor • Ensure that the Mail Box Vertical sensor and the Vertical LED are clean.
are connected before beginning this RAP. • Ensure that P/J551 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J818 and P/J819 on the Mail
Box Vertical Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-142 Vertical Transport In Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Procedure
Y N Enter dC330 011-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor. Press Start. The display is L.
Y N
replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9).If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Con-
+5 VDC is measured between P/J551-3 and P/J551-5 on the Mail Box Control PWB
trol PWB (PL 13.10). Y N
More than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J562-8 and GND on the Mail Box Control
Y N
PWB.
Y N
Replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9).
Check the V-Tra In Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Mail
Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, and Flag 3 on BSD 11.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If
the harness is good, replace the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9). If the problem contin-
ues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J551-4 and GND on the Mail Box Control
PWB.
Y N
Replace the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9).
Check the Mail Box Vertical Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace
the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).

11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP, 11- 2-200 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
11-192 Paper Remains at OCT Exit Sensor RAP 11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP
The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Oct Exit Sensor at power on. The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor at power on.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-192 Paper NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-193 Decurler Exit
Remains at SCT Exit Sensor RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. Sensor Static Jam RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed. NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed.

• Ensure that no paper is blocking the OCT Exit sensor and the sensor actuator moves • Ensure that no paper is blocking the Decurler Exit sensor
freely. • Ensure that P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Double Plug J571, P/J651 and P/
• Check for excessive static on copies. J654 on the Decurler Control PWB, and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are con-
• Check for any obstructions in the paper path. nected before beginning this RAP.
• Ensure that P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J567 on the V-Tra In Sensor
are connected before beginning this RAP. Procedure
Enter dC330 011-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Procedure Y N
Enter dC330 011-107 OCT Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.3 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good,
replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). If the problem continues, replace the Mail
Y N
Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
replace the OCT Exit Sensor (PL 13.9).If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box
More than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND on the Decurler Control
Control PWB (PL 13.10).
PWB.
More than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J562-5 and GND on the Mail Box Control Y N
PWB. Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12).
Y N
Check the Decurler Exit Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the
Replace the OCT Exit Sensor (PL 13.9).
Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Check the OCT Exit Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Mail
Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-201 11-192 Paper Remains at OCT Exit Sensor RAP, 11-
A
11-273 Mail Box OCT Offset Fail RAP Enter dC330 011-274 Offset Position Sensor. Press Start. Block the Offset Home sen-
sor with a sheet of paper. The display indicates H.
The Control Logic determined that either the Offset Home Sensor or the Offset Position Sensor Y N
did not detect the OCT position within 600msec. for three consecutive attempts. +5 VDC is measured between P/J564-6 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND
Y N
Initial Actions Go to Flag 4 on BSD 11.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the
wire is good, replace the Offset Position Sensor (PL 14.1).
• Refer to BSD11.7 for the following procedure.
• Ensure that connectors P/J564 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Shorting Plug P/J801A,
Double Plug J880, P/J803 on the Offset Motor, P/J806 on the Offset Position Sensor,
and P/J806 on the Offset Home Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious
Ensure that the sensor actuator is properly installed, and not bent or distorted. If the prob-
crimped or broken wires. lem continues, replace the Offset Position Sensor (PL 14.1).
Procedure Manually move the Offset Catch Tray to the front/home position. The display changes to L.
Manually move the Offset Catch Tray to the front/home position. Enter dC330 011-273 Offset Y N
Home Sensor. The display indicates H. +5 VDC is measured between P/J564-6 and GND.
Y N Y N
Remove the Offset Catch Tray from the machine. leave the Offset Catch Tray electrically Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
connected. Open the Offset Catch Tray to expose the motor and sensors.
Enter dC330 011-273 Offset Home Sensor. Press Start. Block the Offset Home sensor Disconnect P/J564 from the Mail Box Control PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/
with a sheet of paper. The display indicates H. J564-4 and GND.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J564-7 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the Go to Flag 2, Flag 4 on BSD 11.7, and Flag 5 on BSD 11.7. Check the wires for an open
wire is good, replace the Offset Home Sensor (PL 14.1). circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Offset Position Sensor (PL 14.1).
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Enter dC330 011-095 OCT Offset Motor Rear On. Press Start. The Offset Catch Tray
moves to the rear/offset position.
Ensure that the sensor actuator is properly installed, and not bent or distorted. If the prob- Y N
lem continues, replace the Offset Home Sensor (PL 14.1). Press Stop. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J564-1 and P/J564-2
Y N
Manually move the Offset Catch Tray to the rear/offset position. The display changes to L. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J564-7 and GND. Enter dC330 011-095 OCT Offset Motor Rear On. Press Start. +24 VDC is measured
Y N between P/J564-1 and P/J564-2
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Y N
Disconnect P/J564 from the Mail Box Control PWB. Press Stop. Press Start. +24
Disconnect P/J564 form the Mail Box Control PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/ VDC is measured between P/J564-1 and P/J564-2
J564-4 and GND. Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 11.7. Check the wires for a short circuit to ground. If the wires
Go to Flag 2, Flag 3, and Flag 5 on BSD 11.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the are good, replace the Offset Motor (PL 14.1).
wires are good, replace the Offset Home Sensor (PL 14.1).
Enter dC330 011-274 Offset Position Sensor. The display indicates H. replace the Offset Motor (PL 14.1).
Y N
Remove the Offset Catch Tray from the machine. leave the Offset Catch Tray electrically Enter dC330 011-093 OCT Offset Motor Front On. Press Start. The Offset Catch Tray
connected. Open the Offset Catch Tray to expose the motor and sensors. moves to the front/home position.
Y N
A B
11-273 Mail Box OCT Offset Fail RAP 2-202 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
B
The Offset Catch Tray Offset function appears to be functioning correctly. Check the sensors 11-301 Front Cover A Interlock Open RAP
for intermittent operation. Ensure that the Offset Motor gear and rack are not damaged or bind-
ing. Front Cover A Interlock Open Failure. This status code is declared when the Mailbox Front
If the problem continues, replace the following parts in the order listed. Door Interlock is open.
• Offset Sensors (PL 14.1)
• Offset Motor (PL 14.1) NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-301 Mailbox Door
Interlock Open RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
• Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10)
Initial Actions
• Ensure that P/J551 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J564 on the Mail Box Front
Cover Interlock Switch are connected before beginning this RAP.
• Check the Front Cover for proper alignment.
• Verify that the Front Cover closes properly.
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-301 Mailbox Front Cover Intlk Sw. The state of the Mail Box Front Cover
Interlock Switch is Low and switches to High when the Mail Box Front Cover is opened.
Y N
With the Front Cover closed, there is +0 VDC between P/J551-2 on the Mail Box
Control PWB and GND.
Y N
Go to the Flag 1 on BSD 11.1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, replace the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch (PL 13.4). If the problem
continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10)
Check the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the
switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace
the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the
Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-203 11-273 Mail Box OCT Offset Fail RAP, 11-301 Front
11-302 Front Cover B Interlock Open RAP 11-303 Docking Interlock Open RAP
Front Cover B Interlock Open Failure. This status code is declared when the Mail Box Front Docking Interlock Open failure. This status code is declared when the Mail Box is not properly
Cover is open. docked.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-302 Decurler NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-303 Docking
Door Interlock Open RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. Interlock Open RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.

• Ensure that P/J551 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J564 on the Mail Box Front • Ensure that P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB, P/J665 and P/J664 on the Mail Box
Cover Interlock Switch are connected before beginning this RAP. Docking Interlock Switches, and P/J652 on the Decurler Control PWB are connected
• Check the Front Cover for proper alignment. before beginning this RAP.
• Verify that the Front Cover closes properly. • Check the Mail Box for proper alignment.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 011-301 Mailbox Front Cover Intlk Sw. The state of the Mail Box Front Cover Enter dC330 011-303 Mailbox Docking INTLK Switches. The status of the Mail Box
Interlock Switch is Low and switches to High when the Mail Box Front Cover is opened. Docking Interlock Switches is High and changes to Low when the Mail Box is undocked.
Y N Y N
With the Front Cover closed, there is +0 VDC between P/J551-2 on the Mail Box With the Mail Box docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J570-B7 on the Mail Box
Control PWB and GND. Control PWB and GND.
Y N Y N
Go to the Flag 1 on BSD 11.1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are Disconnect P/J665 from the Mail Box Docking Interlock Switch 2. With the Mail
good, replace the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch (PL 13.4). If the problem Box docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J570-B7 on the Mail Box Control PWB
continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) and GND.
Y N
Check the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the Disconnect P/J664 from the Mail Box Docking Interlock Switch 1. With the
switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace Mail Box docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J570-B7 on the Mail Box
the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Control PWB and GND.
Y N
Check the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the Go to the Flag 2 on BSD 11.1. Check the wires for an short circuit to
switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the ground. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL
Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). 13.10).
Replace the Mailbox Docking Interlock Switch 1 (PL 13.12).
Replace the Mailbox Docking Interlock Switch 2 (PL 13.12).
Check the Mail Box Docking Interlock Switches for intermittent operation. Ensure that the
switches are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box
Control PWB (PL 13.10).
switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. Check that the Mail Box is standing on
an even floor. Adjust Castors if necessary. If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Con-
trol PWB (PL 13.10).

11-302 Front Cover B Interlock Open RAP, 11-303 2-204 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP Y N
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J570 -A1 and GND on the Mail Box Control
This status code is declared when the Decurler Cam Position Sensor did not energize within PWB.
the specified time (1400msec) after the Decurler Clutch is energized. Y N
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-350 Decurler 1
Fail RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.1. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good,
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD11.3 for the following procedure. Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the
• Ensure that connectors P/J652, and P/J651 on the Decurler Control PWB, Double Plug Decurler Control PWB.
J571, P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J656 on the Decurler Cam Sensor are Y N
seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). If the problem continues, replace
the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
Procedure Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and
At Power On, the Mail Box Drive Belt is moving GND on the Decurler Control PWB.
Y N Y N
Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Drive Motor is Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A5 and GND
rotating Y N
Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good,
+24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail Box Drive replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
Motor
Y N Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and GND.
Switch Off the Power. Disconnect P/ P/J572 from the Mail Box Drive Motor. Y N
Switch On the Power. +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572- Replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
2.
Y N Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A6 and GND
Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires Y N
are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is
good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10)
less than 0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and GND.
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is
good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14).
Y N
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) The Entrance Rolls are rotating.
Y N
Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10). Check the following parts for wear, damage, or slipping.
• Entrance Roll Drive Gear (PL 13.14)
Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft and the drive
• Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear (PL 13.14)
belt is properly tensioned.
• Decurler Stepping Motor Drive Gear (PL 13.14)
Enter dC330 011-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler Stepping Motor
rotates. Enter dC330 011-011-011 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 130. The Decurler Stepping
Y N Motor rotates.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N
Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND.
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-205 11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP
B C
Y N Clean the Decurler Cam Sensor and the Decurler Cam Sensor Reflector. Ensure that there are
Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). no obstructions between the Decurler Cam Sensor and the Decurler Cam sensor Reflector. If
the problem continues, replace the Decurler Cam Sensor (PL 13.13).
rotates.
Y N
Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND.
Y N
Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
rotates.
Y N
Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND.
Y N
Enter dC330 011-276 Decurler Cam Position Sensor A. Press Start. Manually move the
Reflector in and out of the sensor The Decurler Cam Sensor Roll A Position alternates
between H and L as the reflector is moved in and out of the sensor.
Y N
The Display is always L
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the
wire is good, replace the Decurler Cam Sensor (PL 13.13). If the problem con-
Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-9 and GND.

Y N
good, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). If the problem continues,
replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
+5 VDC is Measured between P/J652-1 and P/J652-3 on the Decurler Control PWB.
Y N
replace the Decurler Cam Sensor (PL 13.13). If the problem continues, replace the
Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
C
11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP 2-206 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
11-512 Offset Catch Tray / Simple Catch Tray Full Stack 11-911 Bin 1 Full Stack RAP
RAP The Control Logic detected that Bin 1 is full.
The Control Logic detected that the Offset Catch Tray/Simple Catch Tray is full.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-911 Bin 1 Full
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-512 Simple Catch Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Tray (SCT) Full Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Refer to BSD11.6 for the following procedure.
• Refer to BSD11.7 for the following procedure. • Ensure that Bin 1 is empty
• Ensure that the Offset Catch Tray/Simple Catch Tray is empty
• Ensure that connectors P/J564 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Shorting Plug P/J801A, Procedure
Double Plug J880, and P/J807 on the Full Stack Sensor are seated correctly and there Enter dC330 011-281 Bin 1 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out
are no obvious crimped or broken wires. of the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out
of the sensor.
Procedure Y N
Enter 011-275 Full Stack Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N Check the Bin 1 Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If the problem continues, replace the
+5 VDC is measured between P/J564-5 and DC-COM on the Mail Box PWB. Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is
good, replace the Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1).
Block the Full Stack Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes to L.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J564-4 and P/J564-3 on the Mail Box PWB.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 11.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1).
Check the Full Stack Sensor for intermittent operation, If the problem continues, replace the
Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-207 11-512 Offset Catch Tray / Simple Catch Tray Full
11-912 Bin 2 Full Stack RAP 11-913 Bin 3 Full Stack RAP
The Control Logic detected that Bin 2 is full. The Control Logic detected that Bin 3 is full.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-912 Bin 2 Full NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-913 Bin 3 Full
Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.

• Ensure that Bin 2 is empty • Ensure that Bin 3 is empty
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 011-282 Bin 2 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out Enter dC330 011-283 Bin 3 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out
of the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out of the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out
of the sensor. of the sensor.
Y N Y N
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Check the Bin 2 Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If the problem continues, replace the Check the Bin 3 Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If the problem continues, replace the
Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10.

11-912 Bin 2 Full Stack RAP, 11-913 Bin 3 Full Stack 2-208 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com

Procedure Procedure
Y N Y N

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-209 11-914 Bin 4 Full Stack RAP, 11-915 Bin 5 Full Stack

Procedure Procedure
Y N Y N

11-916 Bin 6 Full Stack RAP, 11-917 Bin 7 Full Stack 2-210 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com

Procedure Procedure
Y N Y N

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-211 11-918 Bin 8 Full Stack RAP, 11-919 Bin 9 Full Stack
11-920 Bin 10 Full Stack RAP 11-921 Offset Catch Tray Full Stack RAP
The Control Logic detected that Bin 10 is full. The Control Logic detected that the Offset Catch Tray is full.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-920 Bin 10 Full NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-921 SCT Tray
Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. Full Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.

• Ensure that Bin 10 is empty • Ensure that the Offset Catch Tray is empty
• Ensure that connectors P/J564 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Shorting Plug P/J801A,
Procedure Double Plug J880, and P/J807 on the Full Stack Sensor are seated correctly and there
Enter dC330 011-290 Bin 10 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
of the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out
of the sensor. Procedure
Y N Enter dC330 011-275 Full Stack Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J564-5 and DC-COM on the Mail Box PWB.
Check the Bin 10 Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If the problem continues, replace the Y N
Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is
good, replace the Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1).
Block the Full Stack Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes to L.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J564 -4 and P/J564-3 on the Mail Box PWB.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 11.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1).
the Full Stack Sensor for intermittent operation, If the problem continues, replace the Full Stack
Sensor (PL 14.1).

11-920 Bin 10 Full Stack RAP, 11-921 Offset Catch 2-212 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
11-922 Sorter Stacker Full RAP
The Control Logic has determined that bin 10 is full while operating in the Stack Mode.
NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-921 Offset Catch
Tray Full Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Initial Actions
Ensure that there are no obstructions in the Stacker area
Procedure
Go to 11-921 Offset Catch Tray Full Stack RAP to check out the Stacker Full Sensor for any
malfunctions.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-213 11-922 Sorter Stacker Full RAP
11-922 Sorter Stacker Full RAP 2-214 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
14-372 ROS Motor Fail RAP 14-376 Half Tone PWB Fail RAP
The SOS Sensor did not go Low within a specified time after the Polygon Motor energized. The System wrote data in the Asic Register on the Half Tone PWB, but could not read the data.

• Refer to BSD 6.5, BSD 6.6, and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. PO/PO the machine. If the Fault continues, perform the following.
• Verify that the Drum Unit is firmly seated and that the screws that hold the unit in place • Refer to BSD 6.5, BSD 6.6, and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
are installed. • Ensure that P/J398 on the Half Tone PWB is seated properly.
• Verify that P/J420A on the lOT Drive PWB, and P/J399 AND P/J395 on the Half Tone • Ensure that P/J345 and P/J341 on the LDD PWB are seated properly.
PWB are firmly connected. • Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 6.5 and check the wires for damage or an open or short
circuit.
Procedure • Check for other Chain 14 faults. Troubleshoot those faults first.
Open the Front Door and cheat the Interlock. Enter dC330 014-050 Polygon Motor Low Speed.
Press Start. When the Polygon Motor rotates you can feel vibrations by placing your hand on Procedure
the Drum Module Cover. The Polygon Motor is rotating.
Open the Front Door and cheat the Interlock. Enter dC330 014-050 Polygon Motor Low Speed.
Y N
Press Start. When the Polygon Motor rotates you can feel vibrations by placing your hand on
Press Stop. There is approximately 3.5 - 5.0 VDC between P/J420A-B16 on the IOT
the Drum Module Cover. The Polygon Motor is rotating.
Drive PWB and GND.
Y N Y N
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.6 and check for an open circuit or a Go to the 14-372 ROS Motor Fail RAP.
short to GND. If the wires are OK, replace the ROS Assembly (PL 4.1).
+5VDC is measured between P/J342-1 and P/J342-3 on the ROS Assembly.
Enter dC330 014-050 Polygon Motor Low Speed. Press Start. +0.0 - +1.5 VDC is mea- Y N
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 6.6. Check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the
sured between P/J420A-B16 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
wires are OK, replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.6 and check for an open circuit or a short to GND. If the wires
+5VDC is measured between P/J399-2 and gnd.
are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
There is +24 VDC from P/J420A-B14 to P/J420-B15 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.6. Check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK,
replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
Y N
Go to the +24 VDC Wirenets (Figure 5) and troubleshoot the 24 VDC circuits.
Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 6.6. Check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires
are OK, replace the ROS Assembly (PL 4.1). If the problem persists, replace the IOT CPU
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 6.6. Check for an open circuit or a short to GND. If the wires are OK,
replace the ROS (PL 4.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). PWB (PL 9.2).
Switch on the power. +5 VDC is measured between P/J399-1 and P/J399-3 on the Half-
Tone PWB.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J395-1 and P/J395-3 on the Half-Tone PWB.
Y N
Go to the +5 VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and troubleshoot the 5 VDC circuits.
Replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2)
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 6.5 and check for an open circuit. Go to
Flag 2 on BSD 6.6 and check for a short to ground. If the wires are OK, replace the following:
• lOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• ROS Assembly (PL 4.1).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-215 14-372 ROS Motor Fail RAP, 14-376 Half Tone PWB
14-380 SOS Fail 1 RAP 14-384 SOS Fail 2 RAP
The SOS Interval became longer than normal while the Polygon Motor was energized. The SOS Interval became shorter than normal while the Polygon Motor was energized.

• Refer to BSD 6.5, BSD 6.6, and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. • Refer to BSD 6.5, BSD 6.6, and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
• Verify that P/J420A on the IOT Drive PWB is firmly seated. • Verify that P/J420A on the IOT Drive PWB is firmly seated.
• Verify that P/J345 and P/J341 on the LDD PWB is firmly seated. • Verify that P/J345 and P/J341 on the LDD PWB is firmly seated.
• Verify that P/J347 and P/J342 on the ROS are firmly seated. • Verify that P/J347 on the ROS is firmly seated.
• Verify that P/J399 on the Halftone PWB is firmly seated. • Verify that P/J342 on the ROS is firmly seated.
Procedure Procedure
Replace the following: Replace the following:
• ROS (PL 4.1) • ROS (PL 4.1)
• IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) • IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)

14-380 SOS Fail 1 RAP, 14-384 SOS Fail 2 RAP 2-216 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
14-388 XPC ASIC Fail RAP
The Control Logic detected a ROS Pickup ASIC Failure
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 1.1, BSD 6.6 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
• Ensure that P/J398 on the Halftone PWB and the P/J345 and P/J341 on the LDD PWB
are fully seated.
• Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 6.5 and check the wires for an open or shorted circuit.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, go to 14-376 Half Tone PWB Fail RAP.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-217 14-388 XPC ASIC Fail RAP
14-388 XPC ASIC Fail RAP 2-218 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
15-270 Coordinate Bus Fail RAP 15-281 Pre-IPS X Recognize Fail RAP
Communication failure between IPS and UI at power-on when an Edit Pad is installed. The BR PWB Detected paper money during the first scan.
NOTE: This fault code is not displayed on the UI; it is logged into the PWS only.
NOTE: The fault code is not displayed on the UI, but is recorded in the DC120 Counter (Fail/
Initial Actions Jam) Fail Counter and DC122 History (Fail/Jam) Fail History. The UI will display the customer
message “Check copy output - see that your original is not a prohibited item for copying.”
Refer to Edit Pad BSD2.5 (Figure 1) and BSD 2.6 (Figure 2), and IOT BSD 3.1 (Figure 1)
Initial Actions
Check the following Connectors:
• Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
• P800 on the Edit Pad cable
• Verify that the original is not a prohibited item for copying.
• P491 on the UI PWB
• Ensure that P/J560 in the BR PWB and the Pre IPS PWB are firmly connected.
• P/J821 and P/J824 on the Edit Pad
• P571 on the IPS PWB Procedure
Reseat the BR PWB. If the problem continues, replace the BR PWB (PL 3.5)
Procedure
There is +3.4 VDC from P/J490 pin 14 on the UI PWB to DC COM.
Y N
Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5). Perform ADJ 9.1.18.
Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-219 15-270 Coordinate Bus Fail RAP, 15-281 Pre-IPS X
15-284 POST IPS X Recognize Fail RAP 15-342 IPS NVM Fail RAP
The BR PWB detected currency on the Platen during the 2nd scan. The control logic detected a POST IPS NVM Test Failure at power on.
NOTE: The Fault Code is not displayed on the UI, but is recorded in the DC120 Fail Counter Initial Actions
and the DC122 Fail History. The UI will display the message Check Copy Output - See that Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
your original is not a prohibited item for copying.

• Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, replace the POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
• Verify that the original is not a prohibited item for copying.
Procedure
Reset the BR PWB. If the problem continues, replace the BR PWB (PL 3.5).

15-284 POST IPS X Recognize Fail RAP, 15-342 IPS 2-220 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
15-361 POST IPS PWB Fail (Self Test) RAP 15-362 X Hard Fail RAP
The POST IPS PWB I/O Port reported an error at power on. Communication Failure between the Pre IPS PWB and the BR PWB.

• Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. • Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
• • Ensure that P/J560 in the BR PWB and the Pre IPS PWB are firmly connected.
• Ensure that the connection at the BR PWB has not been tampered with.
Procedure • Ensure that the BR PWB mounting screws are tight.
PO/PO the copier/printer. If the error code persists, replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
Procedure
Reseat the BR PWB. If the problem continues, replace the following:
• BR PWB (PL 3.5)


DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-221 15-361 POST IPS PWB Fail (Self Test) RAP, 15-362
15-363 IIT Memory Fail RAP 15-365 X Comm Fail RAP
The control logic detected a memory clearance error. The control logic detected that the POST IPS PWB could not detect a change in the signal
from the Pre IPS PWB.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Initial Actions
• Ensure that P/J514 on the Pre IPS PWB and the MEM SYS PWB are fully seated. • Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
• Ensure that P/J514 on the Pre IPS PWB, P/J560, P/J561 between the MEM SYS PWB
Procedure and the POST IPS PWB are fully seated.
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, replace the following:

Procedure
• MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5) PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, replace the following:
• POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
• MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5)

15-363 IIT Memory Fail RAP, 15-365 X Comm Fail RAP 2-222 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
15-367 X - Fail 4 RAP 15-370 X - Fail 5 RAP
The control logic on the Pre IPS PWB detected a hardware failure. The control logic on the Pre IPS PWB detected a hardware failure.

• Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
• Ensure that P/J560 on the Pre IPS PWB and the BR PWB is fully seated.
Procedure
Procedure PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, replace the following:
• BR PWB (PL 3.5)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-223 15-367 X - Fail 4 RAP, 15-370 X - Fail 5 RAP
15-371 X - Fail 6RAP 15-380/15-381 / 15-382 / 15-383 / 15-384 / 15-385 CCD AGC
The control logic on the Pre IPS PWB detected a hardware failure. Fail RAP
The Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for a specific channel from the CCD PWB failed.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: 15-380: CCD Channel 1 RED (odd) AGC Fail
• Ensure that P/J560 on the Pre IPS PWB and the BR PWB is fully seated.
15-381: CCD Channel 2 RED (even) AGC Fail.
Procedure 15-382: CCD Channel 3 GREEN (odd) AGC Fail.
15-383: CCD Channel 4 GREEN (even) AGC Fail.
• BR PWB (PL 3.5) 15-384: CCD Channel 5 BLUE (odd) AGC Fail.
15-385: CCD Channel 6 BLUE (even) AGC Fail.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 6.1, BSD 6.2, and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
• Verify that the Platen Glass is installed correctly.
• Verify that the following NVM values match the Machine Configuration on the Platen or
the DADF: NVM715-125: 0=Platen, 1=DADF.
Procedure
Enter dC330 006-002 ITT Exposure Lamp. Press Start. The Exposure Lamp lights.
Y N
Go to the 6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP.
The Exposure Lamp lights at the correct intensity without flickering.

Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. Verify that P/
J535 on the Lamp Ballast PWB and P/J521 on the IIT Driver PWB are seated. If the wires
are connectors are OK, replace the following:
• Exposure Lamp (PL 3.4)
• Lamp Ballast PWB (PL 3.4)
• IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2)
The White Reference Strip on the bottom of the Platen Glass (Platen top machines PL
3.1) or underneath the Plate (PL 12.11) for DADF machines is clean and undamaged.
Y N
Clean the White reference Strip or replace the Platen Glass (PL 3.1) or the Plate (PL
12.11) on DADF equipped machines.
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.2 and check the Flat Cable P/J510 on the Pre IPS PWB and P/J500 on
the CCD PWB for damage. Reseat the Flat Cable. If the problem continues, replace the follow-
ing:
• CCD PWB (PL 3.2)
• Pre-IPS PWB (PL 3.5)

15-371 X - Fail 6RAP, 15-380/15-381 / 15-382 / 15-383 / 2-224 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PO/PO the machine. If the Fault continues, ensure that the P/J514 on the Pre IPS PWB and 15-386 / 15-387 / 15-388 / 15-389 / 15-390 / 15-391 CCD AOC
MEM SYS PWB, P/J560 on the MEM SYS PWB and POST IPS PWB are fully seated. If the
Fault continues, replace the following: Fail RAP
• MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5)
The Automatic Offset Control (AOC) for a specific signal from the CCD PWB could not set the
• POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5) value within range.
• PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
15-386: CCD Channel 1 RED (odd) AOC Fail
15-387: CCD Channel 2 RED (even) AOC Fail
15-388: CCD Channel 3 GREEN (odd) AOC Fail
15-389: CCD Channel 4 GREEN (even) AOC Fail
15-390: CCD Channel 5 BLUE (odd) AOC Fail
15-391: CCD Channel 6 BLUE (even) AOC Fail
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.2 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
Procedure
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.2 and check the Flat Cable for damage. Reseat
the Flat Cable connector P/J500 and P/J510.
If the problem continues, replace the following

• CCD PWB (PL 3.2)
• Pre-IPS PWB (PL 3.5)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-225 15-380/15-381 / 15-382 / 15-383 / 15-384 / 15-385
15-560 Expected Time Margin Fault RAP
The control logic determined that the Image Output was requested during the transaction of the
POST IPS PWB.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
• Ensure that P/J404 on the IOT CPU PWB, J571 on the POST IPS PWB and P/J514 on
the Pre IPS PWB are fully seated.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, go to OF4-002 Drum Motor RAP. If the fault per-
sists, replace the following:
• POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5

• IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)

15-560 Expected Time Margin Fault RAP 2-226 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP • Verify that the DC wire harness connector, P/J 889 is correctly seated into the IDFE.
• From your machine log, obtain the Configuration Report and verify that the version of firm-
NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the ware and software for the IDFE and the IOT are compatible.
Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5
LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product
Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist,
Procedure (Product Code GL2)
the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. NOTE: Before evaluating the fault indicated by the Diagnostic LEDs, allow 70-180 seconds to
pass for the Diagnostic LEDs to come to a steady state condition after the IDFE has been
NOTE: Centerware Network Services is the official name for “web client” and “web UI.”
switched-on.
NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes.
NOTE: If more than one fault is detected the first error encountered is the one displayed.
This RAP is intended to help analyze the fault code(s), indicated by the LED display on the
NOTE: If a hard fault is detected during power up, the software boot sequence test stops. If a
IDFE, or by the Configuration Report and to direct the field service representative to the appli-
soft fault is detected, the Software boot process will continue.
cable RAP.
Switch on the power. Observe the IDFE Diagnostic LEDs (Figure 1) as the system performs
self -test. Compare the observations with the Fault Indication descriptions in Table 1 and
Table 2. Refer to Table 3 for a description of the function of each LED.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 16.1.
Table 1 Power-on Self Tests (GL2)

Fault Indication Fault Go to RAP: Type of Fault Comments
Within 10 seconds of Power-On if any of the LEDs on the DC Power Fault 19-001 DC Power Fault RAP Hard IDFE does not log or display fault.
IDFE are de-energized or if the Green Power LED is de-
energized.
NOTE: After a PO/PO is performed all LEDs should

energize for approximately 10 seconds. If this does not
occur, perform RAP 19-001.
Red Failure LED is energized continuously. Booting or Hardware Fail- 19-002 BIOS/Self-Test Fault RAP Hard IDFE does not log or display fault.
ure
Amber Heartbeat LED is energized continuously or de- Software Load Halted 19-003 Hard Disk Fault RAP Hard IDFE does not log or display fault.
energized continuously
Amber Heartbeat LED is energizes for 0.5 seconds and Software Running Normal operation when software is run-
de-energizes for 0.5 seconds. ning.
Red Failure LED energizes for 0.25 seconds and de- DDI IOT Failed Internal 19-004 Printer DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP Hard IDFE does not log or display fault, web UI
energizes for 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated Loop back Test remains active
pattern.
Red Failure LED energizes twice in 0.25 second inter- DDI IOT Failure, End to 19-005 Printer DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP Soft IDFE does not log or display fault, web UI
vals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern is End (Cable, IOT or IDFE remains active
continuously repeated. Failure)
Red Failure LED energizes three times in 0.25 second DDI IOT Failed Internal 19-006 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP Hard Printer and web UI remain active
intervals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern Loop back Test
is continuously repeated.
Red Failure LED energizes four times in 0.25 second DDI IOT Failure, End to 19-007 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP Soft Printer and web UI remain active
intervals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern End (Cable, IOT or IDFE
is continuously repeated. Failure)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-227 OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP
Table 2 Network/Connectivity Hardware Tests (GL2)
Green Link LED is de-energized. Network Connection Fault 19-012 Network Connection Fault RAP Soft IDFE does not log or display fault.
Amber Activity LED energized continuously with a Network Connection Fault 19-013 Network Connection Fault RAP Soft IDFE does not log or display fault.
solid non-blinking light.
NOTE: On busy networks, the Amber Activ-
ity LED may appear to be continuously
energized. Ensure that the customer can
connect to the network by using Centre-
Ware Internet Services.
N/A, fault declared through web client, XCMI settings Ethernet Speed Detection 19-014 Ethernet Speed Detection Fault RAP Soft Declared through web client, XCMI settings;
and the configuration report Fault reported on the configuration report.
N/A, fault declared through web client, XCMI settings Token Ring Speed Detec- 19-015 Token Ring Speed Detection Fault RAP Soft Declared through web client, XCMI settings,
and the configuration report tion Fault reported on the configuration report.
Table 3 (GL2) IDFE Diagnostic LEDs - Normal Operation

Green Power LED Energizes when DC Power is supplied to the IDFE (Refer to Table 3)
Red Failure LED Energizes when the power up sequence fails (Refer to Table 3)
IDFE
Amber Heartbeat LED Energizes when IDFE software is running (Refer to Table 3)
Green Link LED Energizes when the IDFE is connected to a 10/100BaseT Ethernet
Green Power LED
network
NOTE: The Green Link and Amber Diagnostic LEDs only energize Amber Activity LED
when the IDFE is connected by a 10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet Net-
work connection.
Amber Activity LED Energizes when network activity is occurring over a 10/100 BaseT
Ethernet Network (Refer to Table 2)
NOTE: The Green Link and Amber Diagnostic LEDs only energize Red Failure LED
when the IDFE is connected by a 10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet Net- Green Link LED
work connection.
Amber Heartbeat LED
Figure 1 IDFE (GL2) Diagnostic LEDs

OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP 2-228 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Procedure (product code MFY) The normal "Boot-Sequence" LED indications (MFY only) are:
NOTE: Before evaluating the fault indicated by the Diagnostic LEDs, allow 70-180 seconds to • From power on, to approximately 1 to 1.5 minutes, the ERR, HB, and PWR LEDs are on
pass for the Diagnostic LEDs to come to a steady state condition after the IDFE has been steady and the ACT LED is flashing.
switched-on. • After approximately 1.5 minutes, the ACT LED goes out.
NOTE: If more than one fault is detected the first error encountered is the one displayed. • Approximately 1 minute and 45 seconds after power on the LINK LED will light.
• After approximately 2 minutes, the HB LED will flash.
NOTE: If a hard fault is detected during power up, the software boot sequence test stops. If a
soft fault is detected, the Software boot process will continue. • Finally, (if enabled) after approximately 4 minutes, a configuration sheet is printed.
Switch on the power. Observe the IDFE Diagnostic LEDs (Figure 2) as the system performs
self -test. Compare the observations with the Fault Indication descriptions in Table 4 and
Table 5. Refer to Table 6 for a description of the function of each LED.
Table 4 Power-on Self Tests (MFY)

Within 10 seconds of Power-On if any of the LEDs on the DC Power Fault 19-001 DC Power Fault RAP Hard IDFE does not log or display fault.
IDFE are de-energized or if the Green Power LED is de-
energized.
Red Failure LED is energized continuously. Booting or Hardware Fail- 19-002 BIOS/Self-Test Fault RAP Hard IDFE does not log or display fault.
ure
Amber Heartbeat LED is energized continuously or de- Software Load Halted 19-003 Hard Disk Fault RAP Hard IDFE does not log or display fault.
energized continuously
Amber Heartbeat LED is energizes for 0.5 seconds and Software Running Normal operation when software is running.
de-energizes for 0.5 seconds.
Red Failure LED energizes for 0.25 seconds and de- DDI IOT Failed Internal 19-004 Printer DDI Communication Hard IDFE does not log or display fault, web UI remains
energizes for 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated Loop back Test Fault 1 RAP active
pattern.
Red Failure LED energizes twice in 0.25 second inter- DDI IOT Failure, End to 19-005 Printer DDI Communication Soft IDFE does not log or display fault, web UI remains
vals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern is End (Cable, IOT or IDFE Fault 2 RAP active
continuously repeated. Failure)
Red Failure LED energizes three times in 0.25 second DDI IOT Failed Internal 19-006 Scanner DDI Communication Hard Printer and web UI remain active
intervals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern Loop back Test Fault 1 RAP
is continuously repeated.
Red Failure LED energizes four times in 0.25 second DDI IOT Failure, End to 19-007 Scanner DDI Communication Soft Printer and web UI remain active
intervals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern End (Cable, IOT or IDFE Fault 2 RAP
is continuously repeated. Failure)
Table 5 Network/Connectivity Hardware Tests (MFY)

Amber 10-100 LED is de-energized. Network Connection Fault 19-012 Network Connection Fault RAP Soft IDFE does not log or display fault.
Green Activity LED energized continuously with a Network Connection Fault 19-013 Network Connection Fault RAP Soft IDFE does not log or display fault.
solid non-blinking light.
NOTE: On busy networks, the Green Activity LED may
appear to be continuously energized. Ensure that the
customer can connect to the network by using Centre-
Ware Internet Services.
N/A, fault declared through web client, XCMI set- Ethernet Speed Detection 19-014 Ethernet Speed Detection Fault Soft Declared through web client, XCMI settings; reported
tings and the configuration report Fault RAP on the configuration report.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-229 OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP
Table 6 IDFE (MFY) Diagnostic LEDs - Normal Operation 19-001 DC Power Fault RAP
Green Power LED (PWR) Energizes when DC Power is supplied to the
IDFE NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the
Red Failure LED (ERR) Energizes when the power up sequence fails
Amber Heartbeat LED (HB) Energizes when IDFE software is running
Amber 10/100 LED (100) Energizes when the IDFE is connected to a the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE.
10/100BaseT Ethernet network Solid-ON
indicates 100mbps, LED-OFF indicates A 19-001 fault is a DC Power failure to the IDFE. The green Power LED on the IDFE, when de-
10mbps connection energized, indicates a 19-001 fault.
Green Activity LED (ACT) Energizes when network activity is occurring
over a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Network Initial Actions
(Refer to Table 5) • Refer to BSD 16.1.
NOTE: The Green Link and Amber Diagnos- NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors
tic LEDs only energize when the IDFE is for the parts are correctly seated.
connected by a 10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet
• Inspect and re-seat DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). This connector sup-
Network connection.
plies DC power to the IDFE.
Red LED Not Used
• Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic
LEDs and their locations.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO) ). The green Power LED
switches off within 10 sec. of Power-On.
Red Failure LED Y N
(ERR) Red LED (not used) If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following:
• Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1. Check for loose connections.
• Open the IDFE (GL2 only) and ensure that the Connector for the LED PWBA is cor-
rectly seated.
Amber Heartbeat Green Power LED
LED (HB) • Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3).
(PWR)
• Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3).
• Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Amber 100/10 Green Activity LED
Network LED (ACT) • Check for +5 VDC at, (Flag 1, Flag 2) 1 through 8.
(100) • Check for +12 VDC at (Flag 1, Flag 2) 9,11.
• Go to Flag 1 of BSD 16.1, and check for an open/short circuit.
• Go to BSD16.1, Flag 2, and check for an open/short circuit.
• Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3).
IDFE (MFY)
Figure 2 IDFE (MFY) Diagnostic LEDs

OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP, 19-001 DC Power Fault 2-230 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
19-002 BIOS/Self-Test Fault RAP 19-003 Hard Disk Fault RAP
NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the
Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5
LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product
Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist,
the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE.
A 19-002 fault is a BIOS-level hard fault, that was detected at power up. A continuously ener- NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes.
gized red Failure LED indicates that a 19-002 fault has occurred.
A 19-003 fault indicates that the applications software could not be successfully loaded and
executed. The amber Heartbeat LED on the IDFE, when continuously energized or de-ener-
Initial Actions gized, indicates a 19-003 fault.
NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors Initial Actions
for the parts are correctly seated. • Refer to BSD 16.1.
• Inspect and re-seat DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). This connector sup- NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors
plies DC power to the IDFE. for the parts are correctly seated.
• Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic • Inspect and re-seat the IDFE DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1).
• Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). Procedure
NOTE: Check the red Failure LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 60 - 80 seconds (MFY) after PO/ PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)).
PO.
NOTE: Check the amber Heartbeat LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 90 - 120 seconds (MFY)
The red Failure LED is continuously energized after 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 60 - 80 sec- after PO/PO.
onds (MFY) s after power up.
The amber Heartbeat LED is energized or de-energized continuously without blinking.
Y N
Y N
If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following:
If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following:
• Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1, and check for loose connections.
• Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation
• Check that the Memory DIMMs are correctly installed and are not damaged (REP
(CD-ROM)).
19.3).
• Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1, and check for loose connections.
Check that the Memory DIMMs for the IDFE are correctly installed (REP 19.3).
Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
• Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-
ROM)).
• If the Heartbeat LED does not return to its heartbeat blinking pattern, replace the IDFE
(PL 19.1).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-231 19-002 BIOS/Self-Test Fault RAP, 19-003 Hard Disk
19-004 Printer DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP 19-005 Printer DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP
NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes. NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes.
A 19-004 fault indicates that the internal loop-back test failed for the printer interface. The red A 19-005 fault indicates that a problem occurred in the DDI Power-On Sequence Test. The red
Failure LED on the IDFE, when energized for 0.25 seconds and de-energized for 2.0 seconds Failure LED on the IDFE, energizing twice at 0.25 second intervals and then de-energizing for
in a continuously repeated pattern, indicates a 19-004 fault. 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern, indicates a 19-005 fault.

• Refer to BSD 16.1. • Refer to BSD 16.1.
NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors
for the parts are correctly seated. for the parts are correctly seated.
• Inspect and re-seat IDFE DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). • Inspect and re-seat the DDI Cables.
• Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic • Inspect and re-seat the IDFE DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1).
LEDs and their locations. • Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)).
NOTE: Check the red Failure LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 60 - 80 seconds (MFY) after PO/
PO for the continually repeated pattern. NOTE: Check the red Failure LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 60 - 80 seconds (MFY) after PO/
The red Failure LED is energized for 0.25 seconds and de-energized for 2.0 seconds in a PO for the continually repeated pattern.
continuously repeated pattern. The Failure LED on the IDFE energizes twice at 0.25 second intervals and then de-ener-
Y N gizes for 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern.
If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following: Y N
• Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following:
(CD-ROM)). • Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1 and check for loose connections.
• Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1, and check for loose connections. • Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation
• Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3). (CD-ROM)).
• Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3). • Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3).
• Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1). • Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3).
• Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD- Perform the following:
ROM)). • Replace the Flat Cable (PL 9.2).
• If the Failure LED energizes for 0.25 seconds and de-energizes for 2.0 seconds in a con- • Replace the V-Sel PWB (PL 9.2).
tinuously repeated pattern, replace the IDFE (PL 19.1). • Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).

19-004 Printer DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP, 19- 2-232 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
19-006 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP 19-007 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP
NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes. NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes.
A 19-006 fault indicates that the UART communication channel for the print path failed the A 19-007 fault indicates a failure in the DDI Power-on Sequence Test by the DDI Client and the
internal loop-back test. Link Layer protocols. The red Failure LED on the IDFE, energizes four times at 0.25 second
intervals and then de-energizes for 2 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern. This indi-
The red Failure LED, when energized three times at 0.25 second intervals and then de-ener- cates a 19-007 fault.
gized for 2 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern, indicates a 19-006 fault.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Refer to BSD 16.1.
NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors
NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors for the parts are correctly seated.
for the parts are correctly seated.
• Inspect and re-seat the DDI Cables.
• Inspect and reseat the IDFE DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). • Inspect and re-seat IDFE DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1).
• Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic • Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic
LEDs and their locations. LEDs and their locations.
Procedure Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)).
NOTE: Check the red Failure LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 60 - 80 seconds (MFY) after PO/ NOTE: Check the red Failure LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 90 - 120 seconds (MFY) after PO/
PO for the continually repeated pattern. PO for the continually repeated pattern.
The red Failure LED on the IDFE energizes three times at 0.25 second intervals and then The red Failure LED energizes four times at 0.25 second intervals and then de-energizes
de-energizes for 2 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern. for 2 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern.
Y N Y N
If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following: If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following:
• Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1, and check for loose connections. • Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1, and check for loose connections.
• Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation • Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation
(CD-ROM)). (CD-ROM)).
• Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3). • Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3).
• Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3). • Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3).
• Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1). • Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1). Perform the following:

• Replace the Flat Cables (PL 9.2).
• Replace the V-Sel PWB (PL 9.2).
• Replace the V-Sel E PWB (PL 9.2)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-233 19-006 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP,
19-012 Network Connection Fault RAP • Call the System Administrator.
NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the
the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE.
NOTE: The Netware Internet Services is the official name for “web client” and “web UI.”
NOTE: The green (GL2) or amber (MFY) Link and amber Diagnostic LEDs only energize when
the IDFE is connected by a 10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet Network connection.
NOTE: If a Token Ring PWBA is installed only the Power and Heartbeat LED swill energize.
NOTE: The Live Connection Test continuously monitors the network connections on the IDFE
(or optional hardware). If there is a proper hardware link to the network, the test is successful,
and the Link will be ON constantly. If there is not a proper hardware link to the network, the Link
LED will be OFF, thus indicating a 19-012 Fault.
NOTE: This note applies to the GL2 IDFE only. Xerox may elect to use a Print Server box,
and/or a BNC Transceiver that does not have a Link LED. In that case, the result of the Live
Connection Test cannot be indicated by the Link LED. Continue with this RAP, if a Network
Connection Fault is suspected in the absence of a Link LED.
A 19-012 fault indicates that the hardware link to the network has failed. When the Link LED is
de-energized a 19-012 fault is indicated.
NOTE: Hardware link failures to the Network can include IOT failure or IOT software failures.
Initial Actions
• Inspect and reseat the network connector.
• Run a Configuration Report. With the assistance of the Systems Administrator verify that
the connectivity settings for the IDFE and Network are correct.
• Remove and re-install software for the IOT. Refer to GP 11 Software Upgrade Procedure.
• Locate another working network drop or another printer to test the network connection or
cabling.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). Wait 70 - 180 seconds
(GL2) 105 - 120 seconds (MFY). The Link LED remains de-energized.
Y N
Check for an intermittent open circuit in the connectors and cabling to the network drop.
Thoroughly check the network connector and cable electrical continuity and mechanical integ-
rity.
If the connector and network cable checks OK, set up a known good printer using the connec-
tors and cabling to the network drop. The Link LED is de-energized.
Y N

• Repair/replace the connector and cabling to the network drop.

19-012 Network Connection Fault RAP 2-234 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
19-013 Network Connection Fault RAP Perform the following:
• Repair/replace the connector and cabling to the network drop.
NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the • Call the System Administrator.
NOTE: The green (GL2) or amber (MFY) Link and amber Diagnostic LEDs only energize when
the IDFE is connected by a 10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet Network connection.
NOTE: If a Token Ring PWBA is installed, only the Power and Heartbeat Diagnostic LEDs will
energize.
NOTE: (GL2 only) The IDFE (or optional hardware) continuously monitors the network con-
nections and the network traffic activity. As long as the network traffic flow is visible to the IDFE
or optional hardware, the Activity LED will switch on and off in a pattern that mimics the net-
work traffic flow. If there is not proper hardware activity to the network, the Activity LED will
remain energized, thus declaring a 19-013 Fault.
NOTE: A Print Server box, a BNC Transceiver or a Token Ring PWB that does not have an
Activity LED may be used. If this occurs, the result of Network Traffic sensing cannot be indi-
cated by an Activity LED. Continue with this RAP, if a Network Connection Failure is suspected
in the absence of an Activity LED.
A 19-013 fault indicates that the IDFE fails to detect network traffic flow. When the Activity LED
is in the energized state, this is an indication of the 19-013 fault.
Initial Actions
• Ensure that the customer can connect to the network using CentreWare Internet Ser-
vices.
• Inspect and reseat the network connector.
• Verify that the green (GL2) or amber (MFY) Link LED is energized.
• Run a Configuration Report. With the assistance of the Systems Administrator verify the
the connectivity settings for the IDFE and the Network are correct.
• Locate another working network drop or printer to test the network connection/cabling.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)).
NOTE: Check the Activity LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 90 - 120 seconds (MFY) after PO/PO.
The Activity LED is continuously energized.

Y N
Check for an intermittent open circuit in the connectors and cabling to the network drop.
Thoroughly check the network connector and cable electrical continuity and mechanical integ-
rity.
If the connector and network cable checks OK, set up a known good printer using the connec-
tors and cabling to the network drop. The Activity LED is still energized.
Y N
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-235 19-013 Network Connection Fault RAP
19-014 Ethernet Speed Detection Fault RAP NOTE: Follow the procedure closely. Ensure that you disconnect the Network Interface
Cables to the IDFE. After software reload, it is necessary to reboot, while connected to the
NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the network, or the link will not occur.
6. If necessary, replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
NOTE: The Centerware Internet Services is the official name for “web Client” or “web UI.”
NOTE: This fault is displayed via the web client, XCMI settings, and the configuration report.
NOTE: XCMI (Xerox Common Management Interface) settings is a Xerox Common Network
Interface for the (printer) systems management of Xerox products.
NOTE: Through its resident Ethernet circuitry the Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) may be
connected to either a 10 Mbps line or to a 100 Mbps line. This Ethernet circuitry automatically
detects the Ethernet line speed and reports it through the web client, XCMI settings, and the
Configuration Report. If the speed of the Ethernet line and that reported by the Configuration
Report, Web Browser client, and the XCMI settings do not agree, a 19-014 fault is declared.
A 19-014 fault indicates that the IDFE failed to detect the proper speed of the Ethernet network
to which it is connected.
Initial Actions
• Go to GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports and print a Configuration Report. Check the
Configuration Report for the speed of the connection.
NOTE: For the GL2 configuration, an Ethernet connection is required in order for the
RJ45 Ethernet Port to be enabled, otherwise the controller will default to AUI - 10 mbps.
• If the speed of the Ethernet line is manually set by the System Administrator, ask for what
speed the Ethernet line was set.
NOTE: If Ethernet connection speed is adjusted through Printer Administrative Services

or through CentreWare Internet Services, the IDFE software can fail to load. For example,
if the speed is forced to 100 Mbps but the customer has a 10 Mbps network the IDFE will
not successfully load software from the installation CD-ROM. The IDFE Software installa-
tion will freeze or lockup. Re-loading software is the only way to reset the Ethernet speed
to Auto.
Procedure
1. Review the information collected in Initial Actions.

2. (GL2 only) Verify that the green Link Diagnostic LED is energized.
NOTE: This ensures that a Ethernet Network connection is occurring.
3. Verify that the Ethernet line speed agrees with that reported by the Configuration Report
(GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports) the Web browser client, and the XCMI settings
4. (MFY only) Ensure that the status of the amber 10-100 LED matches the data checked
in step 3.
5. Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-
ROM)).

19-014 Ethernet Speed Detection Fault RAP 2-236 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
19-015 Token Ring Speed Detection Fault RAP 19-016 Token Ring Troubleshooting RAP
NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. However, this RAP applies NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. However, this RAP applies
only to the IDFE with the GL2 product code. only to the IDFE with the GL2 product code.
NOTE: This fault is declared through The Centerware Internet Services (web client or web UI), This RAP is used to isolate problems related to the IDFE Token Ring PWB. The following pro-
XCMI settings, and the Configuration Report. cedure is a checklist of potential items that could be the source of problems with the Token
Ring PWB.
NOTE: The Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) may be connected to either a 4 Mbps line or to
a 16 Mbps line. If the Token Ring PWB is enabled and the drivers properly loaded, the IDFE
automatically detects the Token Ring line speed and reports it through web client, XCMI set-
Procedure
tings, and the Configuration Report. When the known speed of the Token Ring line and that 1. Token Ring troubleshooting tips:
reported by the Configuration Report, Web Browser client, and the XCMI settings do not agree, • Ensure that the Token Ring PWB is correctly plugged into Connectors J3 and J4 of
a 19-015 fault is declared. the SCAN IIT PWBA.
A 19-015 fault indicates that the IDFE failed to detect the proper speed of the Token Ring to NOTE: This is the slot nearest the IDFE Diagnostic LEDs.
which it is connected.
NOTE: Only the Power and Heartbeat LEDs will energize when a Token Ring PWBA
is installed.
Initial Actions
• Go to GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports, and print a Configuration Report. Check the • Ensure that the Token Ring PWB is correctly seated.
Configuration Report for the speed of the Token Ring connection and verify that the Token • Ensure that the hardware connections are good between the IOT and IDFE.
Ring Interface is enabled. • Ensure that the 8 PIN Interface Connector is correctly seated in the Token Ring PWB
and is not damaged.
Procedure • Ensure that the twisted pair cable is good (RJ45)
Perform the following: • Ensure that the port on the MAU or wall drop is good.
NOTE: To be enabled, the Token Ring PWBA must be installed and connected to an
1. Review the information collected in Initial Actions.
active Token Ring by use of a MAU. This can be confirmed by reading the Configura-
2. Ensure that the Token Ring PWB is plugged into Connectors J3 and J4 of the SCAN IIT
tion Report to determine if the Token Ring is enabled.
PWBA (PL 19.1).
• Ensure that maintenance release v1.1 or later software is installed.
NOTE: This is the slot nearest the IDFE Diagnostic LEDs.
NOTE: Source routed packets with route lengths greater than two bytes could be
NOTE: Only the Power and Heartbeat LEDs will energize when a Token Ring PWBA is
dropped when packets are transmitted using IP or IPX protocols across a cus-
installed.
tomer’s combination bridge/router. Installation of maintenance release v1.1 software
3. Verify that the Token Ring drivers were loaded correctly. solves this problem.
NOTE: If the Token Ring PWB is enabled and operating correctly on the network, printed 2. Token Ring hardware not found or installed is a generic message and can be a result of:
on Configuration Report will be the MAC address for the PWB: • a bad connection to the network
• Example: MAC Address=80:99:09:E4:A7:55 • a defective Token Ring PWB
• an address conflict with the Token Ring PWB
NOTE: If the Token Ring PWB is enabled, but cannot operate on the network, printed on
the configuration report will be a MAC Address: NOTE: For TCP/IP, ensure that there is not a duplicate IP address on the customer’s
• Example: MAC Address=00:00:00:00:00:00 network.
4. Verify that the Token Ring PWB is operating correctly on the network. • the Token Ring PWB cannot sense the speed of the Token Ring Network
5. Verify that the Token Ring line speed agrees with that reported by the Configuration • the Novell File Servers are not referenced to on the network
Report, the Web browser client, and the XCMI settings.
6. Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-
ROM)).
7. If the Token Ring line speed does not agree with the Configuration Report, the Web
Browser and the XCMI settings, replace the Token Ring PWB (REP 19.2).
8. If the Token Ring PWB still does not operate correctly, replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-237 19-015 Token Ring Speed Detection Fault RAP, 19-
19-015 Token Ring Speed Detection Fault RAP, 19- 2-238 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3 Image Quality
Image Quality RAPs IQ 44 Registration Checkout Procedure.......................................................................... 3-41
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 3-3 IQ 45 Wrinkle RAP .......................................................................................................... 3-41
IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP.............................................................. 3-3 IQ 46 Black Bead Carryout RAP ..................................................................................... 3-42
IQ Isolation RAP.............................................................................................................. 3-4 IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP................................................................................................... 3-43
IQ 2 Defect Listing........................................................................................................... 3-5
Defect Description........................................................................................................... 3-7
Image Quality Specifications
Image Quality Specifications ........................................................................................... 3-47
IQ 3 Geometric RAP ....................................................................................................... 3-9
IQ 4 Developer Checkout Procedure .............................................................................. 3-10 Image Quality Defects
IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure ........................................................ 3-11 Image Quality Defects ..................................................................................................... 3-49
IQ6 IIT Checkout Procedure ........................................................................................... 3-12
IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure ...................................................................... 3-13
IQ 8 Residual Image RAP ............................................................................................... 3-13
IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP............................................................................................... 3-14
IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP ....................................................................................... 3-15
IQ 11 High Image Density RAP....................................................................................... 3-16
IQ 12 Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks RAP ................................................................ 3-16
IQ 13 White, Black or Colored Spots RAP ...................................................................... 3-18
IQ 14 IOT Solid Black (or Color) Copy RAP.................................................................... 3-19
IQ 15 Background RAP................................................................................................... 3-19
IQ 16 Blank (or Nearly Blank) Copy RAP........................................................................ 3-20
IQ 17 Deletions RAP ....................................................................................................... 3-21
IQ 18 IOT Missing Colors RAP ....................................................................................... 3-23
IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP............................................................................................... 3-23
IQ 20 IOT Graininess RAP .............................................................................................. 3-25
IQ 21 Blurred or Fuzzy Image RAP................................................................................. 3-26
IQ 22 Mottle RAP ............................................................................................................ 3-26
IQ 23 Poor Color Balance RAP ....................................................................................... 3-27
IQ 24 Back Side or Side Two Copy Contamination RAP ................................................ 3-28
IQ 25 Hollow Character RAP .......................................................................................... 3-28
IQ 26 Low Contrast Reproduction RAP .......................................................................... 3-29
IQ 27 Color-to-Color Misregistration RAP ....................................................................... 3-29
IQ 28 Moire RAP ............................................................................................................. 3-30
IQ 29 Newton Rings RAP................................................................................................ 3-30
IQ 30 Fuser Offsetting RAP ............................................................................................ 3-31
IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak RAP ............................................................................................ 3-32
IQ 32 ROS Borders RAP................................................................................................. 3-33
IQ 33 Solid Area Reproduction RAP ............................................................................... 3-33
IQ 34 Text / Image Separation RAP................................................................................ 3-34
IQ 35 Toner Starvation RAP ........................................................................................... 3-34
IQ 36 Unfused Copy RAP ............................................................................................... 3-35
IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP ................................................................................... 3-35
IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP ................................................................................ 3-36
IQ 39 Preclean Corotron HVPS RAP .............................................................................. 3-37
IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP ............................................................................................. 3-38
IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP .............................................................................................. 3-39
IQ 42 DTS HVPS RAP .................................................................................................... 3-40
IQ 43 Paper Feed Checkout Procedure.......................................................................... 3-40
Reissue 1/05 Image Quality

Image Quality 1/05 Reissue
manuals4you.com
Introduction IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP
The Image Quality Raps Section contains all the Raps used in troubleshooting image quality Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP. This RAP is used to determine the proper course of
problems. action for troubleshooting an image quality defect.
NOTE: When this procedure refers you to an Image Quality Defect Sample, or the Image Qual-
ity Specification, go to the appropriate “Hard Copy” Image Quality Supplement.
Initial Actions
• Clean the Document Glass.
• Clean the Lens and Mirrors.
• Clean/Vacuum all Paper path areas.
• Check the output copy to ensure that it is on the correct substrate size and orientation as
the original. If it is not, go to the Paper Size Sensing RAP in Section 2. If it is OK, continue
with this RAP.
Procedure
1. If the problem is Misregistration, Skew or Magnification related, go to the IQ 3 Geometric
RAP.
2. Compare the defect on the copy to the defects listed below. These defects are “normal”
for this product and require additional countermeasures. Go to the procedure indicated for
remedial activities that minimize the effects of these defects.
Table 1 DEFECTS THAT REQUIRE ADDITIONAL COUNTERMEASURES

Bead Carryout (BCO) Description - Developer beads that are electrostatically
attracted to the copy or print during the transfer process on
this product look like Mottle or low density. BCO is most
noticeable in high density areas and usually does not affect all
four colors at the same time.
IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP
IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP
Fuser Oil Streaks Description - Process direction streaks that show up first on
transparencies or coated paper as low gloss streaks in solid
areas. In severe cases, oil streaks can show up on paper as
low density streaks in large half tone areas.
IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak RAP
Moire Description - Patterns on the image areas of the output copy
or print that have the appearance of a screen or grid overlay-
ing the image. It may be uniform or nonuniform in area or
shape.
IQ 28 Moire RAP

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-3 Introduction, IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting
Table 1 DEFECTS THAT REQUIRE ADDITIONAL COUNTERMEASURES IQ Isolation RAP
Text Image Separation/Mosaic Description - (Mosaic): An image defect that can affect fine
line ladders or low screen halftones. It causes closely spaced
Procedure
lines, low frequency halftones, and certain texts to have a The defect occurs only in the Print Mode.
blotchy appearance. Y N
Description - Vacant Characters: An image defect that The defect occurs only in the Copy Mode.
results when the center of a character is filled-in with a (200R) Y N
halftone screen while its outer border is made up of a (600L) The defect is present in both modes. Print test patterns 99, 101, and 103 from the
text screen. (Note: This level of detail is best observed with an PWS. The defect is present
eye loop.) Y N
Description - Small Dark Dots on Text: An image defect that Replace the VSEL Base TTL PWB (PL 9.2).
causes a localized area of a character in a text to look like it
contains small dark dots. (Note: This level of detail is best Go to the IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure.
observed with an eye loop.)
IQ 34 Text / Image Separation RAP Print test patterns 22, 23, and 30 from the PWS. The defect is present.
Y N
Three Color Toner Explosion Description - Cyan toner particles surrounding black text and
Print test patterns 20 and 21 from the PWS. The defect is present.
lines run in three color mode.
Y N
IQ 21 Blurred or Fuzzy Image RAP
Print test patterns 1 through 10, 13, 17, and 53 from the PWS. The defect is
Toner Starvation Description - This defect occurs at the transition point
present.
between a high density area and a low density area of the
Y N
same color. A localized area of the mag brush becomes
Clean the optics (refer to Cleaning Procedures in Service Call Proce-
“starved” for toner due to development fringe field effects.
dures).
Starvation tends to worsen at low triboelectric levels (high Reprint test patterns 1 through 10, 13, 17, and 53 from the PWS. The
toner concentration). defect is present.
IQ 35 Toner Starvation RAP
Y N
IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP Go to Final Actions in Service Call Procedures.
3. If you can identify the defect by name, go to the IQ 2 Defect Listing. Replace the CCD PWB (PL 3.2).
4. If you are not sure what the defect is, or if you prefer, use the IQ Isolation RAP to isolate
your image quality problem. Replace the Pre-IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
Replace the MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5).
Replace the Post-IPS PWB (PL 3.5).

Go to the IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure.
Place the Color Test Pattern on the glass Select Photo Mode. Make a copy. The defect is
present.
Y N
Replace the following as required:
• VSEL Base TTL PWB (PL 9.2).
• VSEL Extension PWB (PL 9.2).
• If the machine is a DCCS50, go to the IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure.
• If the machine is a DC12 with DFE, check the DFE and DFE cables.
Print test patterns 99, 101, and 103 from the PWS. The defect is present.
Y N
Replace the VSEL Base TTL PWB (PL 9.2).

IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP, IQ 3-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 2 Defect Listing Contamination, Back Side of Copy or Side 2 of Copy
Background Contamination (Back Side or Side 2 of Copy) (Description/Specification)
Background (Description/Specification)
IQ 24 Back Side or Side Two Copy Contamination RAP
• Cyan (or Other Colors) - Defect Samples 26
• High Monochrome - Defect Sample 11 Deletions
• High 4-Color - Defect Sample 10 Deletions (Description/Specification)
IQ 15 Background RAP • Debris-Centered - Defect Sample 19
• Nonuniform Streak (Process Direction) - Defect Sample 8
Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks IQ 17 Deletions RAP
Bands, Lines, Smears or Streaks (Description/Specification)
• ADC Patch Printout or “Band” - Defect Sample 27 Density
• High Frequency (Black or Colored) - Defect Sample 6 Density (Description/Specification)
• Periodic - Defect Sample 9 • Mottle-like, Low Density Only in High Density Areas - Defect Sample 28
• Rainbow - Defect Sample 23 IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP.
• Line ,Single White (Process Direction) - Defect Sample 22 IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP.
• Color Streaks (Process Direction) - Defect Sample 21 • Highlight (Low or High) - Defect Sample 4
IQ 12 Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks RAP IQ 26 Low Contrast Reproduction RAP
• Uneven (Process Direction) - Defect Sample 20
Bead Carryout IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP
Bead Carryout (BCO) (Description/Specification) • Uneven (Perpendicular to Process Direction) - Defect Sample 7
• Bead Carryout - Defect Sample 10
IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP
• Mottle-like Bead Carryout - Defect Sample 28 • Image (Low) - Defect Sample 3
IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP.
IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP
• Image (High)
Blank (or Nearly Blank) Copy
IQ 11 High Image Density RAP
Blank Copy (Description/Specification)
Fuser Oil Streaks
IQ 16 Blank (or Nearly Blank) Copy RAP Fuser Oil Streaks (Description/Specification)
Solid Black (or Color) Copy IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak RAP

Black (or Color), Solid (Description/Specification)
Graininess
IQ 14 IOT Solid Black (or Color) Copy RAP Graininess (Description/Specification)
Blurred or Fuzzy Image IQ 20 IOT Graininess RAP

Blurred or Fuzzy Image (Description/Specification)
• Blur / Toner Explosion - Defect Sample 18
Hollow Characters
IQ 21 Blurred or Fuzzy Image RAP Hollow Characters (Description/Specification)
IQ 25 Hollow Character RAP

Color Balance
Poor Color Balance (Description/Specification) Low Contrast Reproduction
Low Contrast Reproduction (Description/Specification)
IQ 23 Poor Color Balance RAP
IQ 26 Low Contrast Reproduction RAP

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-5 IQ 2 Defect Listing
Misregistration (Color-to-Color) IQ 32 ROS Borders RAP
Misregistration (Color-to-Color) (Description/Specification)
• Process Direction - Defect Sample 1
Spots
• Perpendicular to Process Direction - Defect Sample 2 Spots (Description/Specification)
IQ 27 Color-to-Color Misregistration RAP • “Barcode” Marks (or Spots) - Defect Sample 25

• Periodic
Misregistration (System) • Random White, Black or Colored
Misregistration (System) (Description/Specification) IQ 13 White, Black or Colored Spots RAP
• Side Edge
• Top Edge
Solid Area Reproduction
• Skew Solid Area Reproduction (Description/Specification)
IQ 3 Geometric RAP
IQ 33 Solid Area Reproduction RAP
Missing Colors Text / Image Separation Errors

Missing Color(s) (Description/Specification)
Text / Image Separation Errors (Description/Specification)
IQ 18 IOT Missing Colors RAP • Mosaic - Defect Sample 14

• Vacant Characters - Defect Sample 15
Moire • Small Dark Dots on Text - Defect Sample 16
Moire (Description/Specification) - Defect Sample 12 IQ 34 Text / Image Separation RAP
IQ 28 Moire RAP Toner Starvation

Toner Starvation (Description/Specification) - Defect Sample 13
Mottle
Mottle (Description/Specification) - Defect Sample 5 IQ 35 Toner Starvation RAP
IQ 22 Mottle RAP Unfused Copy

Unfused Copy (Description/Specification)
Newton Rings
Newton Rings (Description/Specification) - Defect Sample 17 IQ 36 Unfused Copy RAP
IQ 29 Newton Rings RAP Wrinkled Copy

Wrinkled Copy (Description/Specification)
Offsetting, Fuser
Offsetting, Fuser (Description/Specification) IQ 45 Wrinkle RAP
IQ 30 Fuser Offsetting RAP
Residual Image
Residual Image (Description/Specification) - Defect Sample 24
• ADC Patch Printout - Defect Sample 27
IQ 8 Residual Image RAP
ROS Borders
ROS Borders (Description/Specification)

IQ 2 Defect Listing 3-6 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Defect Description NOTE: None of the image from the original is visible in the copy or print.
Background Bead Carryout (BCO)

Description - Cyan (or Other Colors): Low or medium density background usually of one color, Description - Developer beads that are electrostatically attracted to the copy or print during
but possible in more than one color. the transfer process on this product look like Mottle or low density. Bead Carryout is most
noticeable in high density areas and usually does not affect all four color at the same time.
Description - High Monochrome: High density background of a single color covering the entire
copy. NOTE: Only the effect the carrier beads have on the image of the output copy/print are visible.
The beads are physically trapped by the fuser web and therefore will not be observed on the
Description - High 4-Color: High density background of all four colors covering the entire copy copy/print.
and possibly accompanied by bead carry out.
Blank Copy
Description - General: Undesirable toner deposits on the copy or print. The toner deposits can Description - Absolutely no toner developed onto the copy or print. This defect should not be
be localized or may cover the entire copy or print. Depending on the density of the background, confused with extremely low image density, where some development actually occurs.
it is referred to as low, medium, high, or very high background. It may occur in all colors, single
colors, or any combination of single colors. Blurred or Fuzzy Image
Description - Images that are not clear, or appear out of focus.
Specification - No background is allowed.
Color Balance, Poor
Bands, Lines, Smears or Streaks
Description - Colored areas of the copy that exhibit a change in hue, as opposed to a change
Description - ADC Patch Printout or “Band”: A residual image of one or more of the ADC
in density. This is most often judged in the gray areas of the copy or print. Theoretically, a true
patches that runs in the process direction.
gray can be produced with equal amounts of magenta, yellow and cyan toner. Therefore, a
common example of poor color balance is a gray image that is reproduced with slightly more of
Description - High Frequency Bands: A 1.2 mm interval band that is most noticeable in low
one of those color toners. The result is a gray that appears to have a magenta, yellow or cyan
density (e.g., 20 -30%) halftone areas of the copy and runs perpendicular to process direction.
hue, rather than true gray.
Description - Periodic Bands: An interval band that ranges between 14 to 264 mm; is most
noticeable in low density (e.g., 20 -30%) halftone areas of the copy; and runs perpendicular to
Contamination (Back Side or Side 2 of Copy)
process direction. Description - Toner deposit on the back side of a copy or on the second side of a two-sided
copy.
Description - Rainbow Bands: Narrow bands of color most noticeable in low density (e.g., 20 -
30%) halftone areas of the copy that run in the process direction. Deletions
Description - Debris-Centered: Deletions in the areas surrounding Toner agglomerates.
Description - Color Smears: The image appears to have been disturbed (spread out, wiped, or
rubbed), usually in the process direction before the image was fused. Description - Nonuniform Streak: A deletion in the form of a single streak that runs from the
lead edge to the trail edge of the copy.
Description - Color Streaks: Usually medium-width streaks of (or shifts in) color most notice-
able in low density (e.g., 20 -30%) halftone areas of the copy that run in the process direction. Description - General: The undesirable absence of toner from the copy or print. This defect
can show as white, light, or untrue colored areas on the copy or print. The most common
Description - General: The absence or low density of toner in desired image areas, or the example is a deletion caused by the “tenting“of paper from mishandling or moisture, or by
presence of toner in undesired areas in the shape of a line, streak or band. Bands are widths dents or defects in the IBT.
greater than 0.5 mm. Lines and bands are generally uniform in shape from one end to the
other, and can run in any direction on the copy or print. Lines are defined as measuring less Specification - The Pattern 82 ROS Half Tone should not show the defect
than 0.5 mm in width: Streaks are generally shorter than lines and are of nonuniform width
along their length. They may have a more ragged or fuzzy appearance than lines, and can run Density
in any direction on the copy or print.
Description - Mottle-like, Low Density Only in High Density Areas: Developer beads that are
electrostatically attracted to the copy or print during the transfer process on this product look
Black (or Color), Solid like Mottle or low density. This defect is most noticeable in high density areas and usually does
Description - An image that is reproduced as solid black (or color) from lead edge to trail edge not affect all four color at the same time.
and from front to rear. The ROS Border may or may not be visible.
Description - Highlight (Low or High): Development of a single color is out-of-specification.

Specification - Highlight: Color Test Pattern; the 10% patches should be visible and the 5% Misregistration (System)
patches should be barely visible or not visible on the test pattern copy (except for the bottom Description - The alignment of the image to the edges of the copy paper. It is defined by lead
row). and side edge registration, and lead and side edge skew.
Description - Line: The inability to adequately reproduce a text that has low line density. Specification
Specification - Line: Using Test Pattern 82E8220, the copier should reproduce all of the text in • Lead Edge Registration: +1.6 mm (Trays 1 - 4), +2.2 mm (Tray 5)
the block. • Side Edge Registration: +2.1 mm (Trays 1 - 4), +3.0 mm (Tray 5)
• Lead Edge Skew: +1.6 mm (Trays 1 - 4), +2.0 mm (Tray 5)
Description - Low Density: A condition that results when too little toner of a single color or • Side Edge Skew: +2.4 mm (Trays 1 - 4), +3.0 mm (Tray 5)
combination of colors is developed on the copy or print. This results in lighter copies or prints
for the single-color toner or the color that results from the combination of color toners.
Missing Color(s)
Description - The loss of one or more of the color toners from the output copy or print.
Description - High Density: A condition that results when too much toner of a single color or Depending on the original, this can result in missing areas of the image, or changes in the color
combination of colors is developed on the copy or print. This results in darker copies or prints balance of the copy or print.
for the single color toner or the color that results from the combination of colors.
Moire
Description - Uneven Density: The uneven development of toner on the copy or print from one Description - Patterns on the image areas of the output copy or print that have the appear-
area to another. Typically, this results in change in density from front to rear and sometimes ance of a screen or grid overlaying the image. It may be uniform or nonuniform in area or
from lead edge to trail edge. shape.
Specification - Uneven Density: The density of both the low density and high density bands Mottle
(located near the lead edge of the Color Test Pattern) should be uniform from front to rear.
Description - Solid area, high density image areas that are reproduced with a surface that
resembles marble.
Fuser Oil Streaks
Description - Process direction streaks that show up first on transparencies or coated paper Newton Rings
as low gloss streaks in solid areas. In severe cases, Oil Streaks can show up on paper as low
Description - Repetitive, irregular-shaped marks that occur when making copies of glossy
density streaks in large half tone areas.
photographs. These marks are most noticeable in large low-density or highlight areas.
Graininess
Offsetting, Fuser
Description - An image defect that causes solid areas to have a sandy appearance. Graini-
Description - The removal of toner from the copy by the fuser and the subsequent redeposi-
ness is most noticeable in middle density solid areas.
tion of that toner on another area of the same or other another copy. Removing toner from the
image leaves the image rough and without gloss. The redeposited toner may appear as a
Hollow Characters duplicate image, partially shifted image, or lines and streaks.
Description - Small circular-shaped deletions within a character that can occur when the
image density is low or a transparency is used. Residual Image
Description - A toner image that remains on the photoreceptor or IBT after cleaning. The next
Line, Single White (Process Direction) image is place on top of the residual image and both images are transferred to the next copy.
Description - A narrow white line that runs from lead edge to trail edge across the entire copy.
ROS Borders
Low Contrast Reproduction Description - Intentional lead edge, side edges, and trail edge deletions that make a border on
Description - The inability to adequately reproduce a low contrast image. the copy paper.
Specification - Using Test Pattern 82E8220, the copier should reproduce all of the text in the Specification
0.2 G paragraphs. • Lead Edge: 5 mm +1.0 mm (All Trays)
• Side Edges: 3 mm +1.0 mm (All Trays)
Misregistration (Color-to-Color)
• Trail Edge: 3 mm +1.0 mm (All Trays)
Description - Multi-colored images that are not superimposed and should be. This can occur
in the process direction or perpendicular to process direction.

manuals4you.com
Spots IQ 3 Geometric RAP
Description - “Barcode” Marks (or Spots): An image defect that has the appearance of a small This RAP is used when Skew, Registration, or Magnification are out of spec.
barcode symbol that is read by a barcode scanner. The marks usually appear in a group of
four, and each mark is a different primary color arranged in the sequence -- yellow, magenta, Initial Actions
cyan, and black.
NOTE: (W/Tag P39): Misuse of the Expanded Imageable Area feature will cause registration
Description - All Other Spots: Generally circular in shape, these defects can be caused by an problems when printing on oversize paper (12 x 18 inch / SR-A3). This feature is available for
absence of toner in a desired area, or a deposit of toner in an undesired area. DC12 machines only, and requires specific IOT and DFE software and hardware levels. Refer
to GP 2 Increased Imageable Area Setup for details.
Solid Area Reproduction Activating this feature on a machine not listed in GP2 will result in an image shift of 0.5 inch (12
Description - The inability to adequately reproduce a high-density solid area. mm) or more toward the lead edge of the print when printing on oversize paper. On 12 x 18
inch paper, part of the interimage patch may be visible in the lower left corner of the print.
Specification - Using Test Pattern 82E8220, the copier should reproduce the 1.0K blocks with If this defect is observed, check that NVM locations 720-360 and 720-361 = 0.
minimal mottle or graininess. This feature can be activated by the customer, using the TOOLS mode. If this has occurred,
inform the customer of the limitations and requirements of this feature.
Text / Image Separation Errors
NOTE: For DCCS50: Check that NVM locations 720-360 and 720-361 = 0.
Description - (Mosaic): An image defect that can affect fine line ladders or low screen half-
tones. It causes closely spaced lines, low frequency halftones, and certain texts to have a Load some new, dry 24 lb 11X17/A3 Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech
blotchy appearance. + (ESG) into each paper tray (use 8.5X11/A4 in Tray 1). Make 3 full color copies from each
paper tray. Mark the appropriate paper tray on these copies.
Description - Vacant Characters: An image defect that results when the center of a character
is filled-in with a (200R) halftone screen while its outer border is made up of a (600L) text Procedure
screen. (Note: This level of detail is best observed with an eye loop.)
The problem is still present when using the proper paper.
Y N
Description - Small Dark Dots on Text: An image defect that causes a localized area of a char-
Explain to the customer that new, dry, 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90
acter in a text to look like it contains small dark dots. (Note: This level of detail is best observed
with an eye loop.) GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper is the specified paper for use in the DocuColor 12 copier.
The Problem occurs only in the Printer Mode

Toner Starvation Y N
Description - This defect occurs at the transition point between a high density area and a low The defect occurs when the document is manually registered on the platen glass.
density area of the same color. A localized area of the mag brush becomes “starved” for toner Y N
due to development fringe field effects. Starvation tends to worsen at low triboelectric levels Ensure that the Document Transport Belt is clean. Go to the Document Handler
(high toner concentration). Adjustment Procedures ADJ 12.1.1 through ADJ 12.4.1. If the problem continues,
check the DADF drive rolls and pinch rolls for wear or glossing.
Unfused Copy
Description - The toner on the copy wipes off easily when moderate pressure is applied. The Problem is Skew
Y N
Wrinkled Copy The Problem is MIsregistration
Y N
Description - Creasing or folds on the copy/print in the lead to trail edge direction or closely
Perform ADJ 9.1.16 IIT Horizontal Magnification/Vertical Magnification (IIT
spaced ‘waves’ in the front to rear direction.
Machine) Adjustment and ADJ 9.1.10 Side/Lead Edge Registration (dC129:
System Registration).
Select Pattern IOT #2 Black on the UI or Pattern # 84 Black on the PWS. Misregis-
tration is present on the copy
Y N
Perform ADJ 9.1.10 Side/Lead Edge Registration (dC129: System Registra-
tion) and ADJ 9.1.15 Side Registration.
The defect occurred on copies from all five paper trays.

A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-9 IQ 3 Geometric RAP
A B
Y N IQ 4 Developer Checkout Procedure
Go to the Paper Feeder Checkout Procedure
The problem is with Lead Edge Registration

Y N Initial Actions
The problem is with color to color misregistration. Ensure that the toner supply system is functioning properly and there is sufficient toner of each
Y N color.
Go to ADJ 9.1.10, Lead/Side Edge Adjustment
Procedure
Go to the Color to Color Misregistration Checkout Procedure.
Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. If the Developer Bias HVPS is good, replace the
Registration varies from copy to copy. developer material for the faulty color. If the problem continues, replace the Developer Housing
Y N for the faulty color.
Go to ADJ 9.1.10, Lead/Side Edge Adjustment.
NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set-
Go to the Registration Checkout Procedure. up procedure
The defect occurred on copies from all five paper trays.

Y N
Go to the IQ 43 Paper Feed Checkout Procedure.
Go to the IQ 44 Registration Checkout Procedure.
Go to the IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure.

IQ 3 Geometric RAP, IQ 4 Developer Checkout Proce- 3-10 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure Y N
The problem is in the IBT, the 2nd BTR, or the Fuser. Repeat the Xerographic Hard Stop
This procedure is used to isolate Image Quality faults in the Xerographic Subsystem. procedure. This time, wait until the paper is on the Vacuum Transport before removing the
interlock cheater. The defect is present on the copy that is on the Vacuum Transport.
Initial Actions Y N
If the problem is density or background related, Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. If Max Setup The problem is in the Fuser. Disassemble the fuser and carefully inspect the follow-
does not complete successfully, use the Fault Codes that are declared to troubleshoot the ing parts for damage or toner buildup.
problem. • Pressure Roll (PL 8.3)
• Heat Roll Stripper Fingers (PL 8.3)
Procedure • Heat Rolls (PL 8.3)
Perform the following Xerographic Hard Stop Procedure: • Cleaning Roll (PL 8.5)
1. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover • Web CRU (Machine Consumables)
2. Make sure that the IBT Handle is up.
3. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, replace the
4. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault. 2nd BTR (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5).
5. Press Start.
Repeat the Hard Stop procedure. The defect is present on the Photoreceptor Drum.
6. Watch the Registration Drive Gear (Figure 1). Y N
The problem is in the 2nd BTR or the IBT. Complete the steps below until the problem is
resolved
• If the image defect looks like an ADC Patch Printout (see Defect Sample 27), check
for the cause(s) of an IBT cleaning problem.
• Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP.
• If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is OK, replace the 2nd BTR (PL 9.2).
• If the problem continues replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.6).
WARNING
Electrocution Hazard! Do not disconnect the red lead labeled C (Charge Supply Wire).
This wire carries over 8000VDC.
Check the voltage from P/J82-1 on the CC/PCC HVPS to frame ground during a copy cycle.
The voltage is between +650 VDC and +750 VDC.
Y N
Registration Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron grid for defects or damage.
Drive Gear
Replace if required (Machine Consumables). If the problem continues, go to the IQ 38
Charge Corotron HVPS RAP.
Check the voltage from P/J422A-7 to frame ground during a copy cycle. The voltage is
between +3.25 VDC and +3.75 VDC.
Y N
There is 24 VDC from P/J141-1 to P/J141-4 on the ESV Sensor.
Figure 1 Registration Drive Gear Y N
There is 24 VDC from P/J422B-5 to P/J422B-13 on the IOT Drive PWB.
7. When the gear starts to rotate, remove the interlock cheater. Y N
8. Extend the Paper Handling Drawer. There is 24 VDC from P/J411-6 to P/J411-7 on the IOT Drive PWB.
9. Remove the two screws that secure the IBT Front Frame and turn IBT handle down. Y N
10. Extend the IBT Drawer to the service position. Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Observe the Image on the IBT. The defect is present on the IBT.
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-11 IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure
A B C
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 9.1 and check for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. IQ6 IIT Checkout Procedure
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.1 and check for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. If the This procedure is used when directed here by the IQ1 IQ Isolation Procedure
wire is OK, replace the ESV Sensor (PL 5.1).
Initial Actions
Check the output of the Developer Bias HVPS, as follows: Clean the following parts before proceeding
• Switch off the power. • Document Glass
• Connect the DMM (+) lead to the developer bias terminal the attaches to the front side of • Document Transport Belt
the developer housing. • Mirrors
• Cheat the Front Door Interlock • Exposure Lamp
• Connect the DMM (-) lead to the machine frame. • White Reference Strip
• Set the DMM to the 1000 VDC range.
• Switch on the power. Procedure
• Enter dC 330 [009-076].Press Start. Run IIT Test Print #1 The Defect is present.
There is a steady voltage of approximately -550 VDC present. Y N
Y N Enter DC330 [9-002],Exposure Lamp. Press Start. The Exposure Lamp comes on.
Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. Y N
Go to 6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP.
Set the DMM to measure 1000 VAC. Enter dC 330 [009-077]. Press Start. There is a steady
voltage of approximately 415 VAC present. The light from the Lamp is even from end to end, and there are no dark spots.
Y N Y N
Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. Replace the Exposure Lamp (PL 3.4).
Replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem remains, replace the ROS Assembly (PL Replace the CCD PWB (PL 3.2).
4.1).
Run IIT Test Print #28 The Defect is present.
Y N
Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5).

IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure, 3-12 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure IQ 8 Residual Image RAP
IDFE / Network Checkout. This RAP is used when the image quality problem only occurs in the Residual Image RAP. This RAP is used when the copier exhibits ghost images on the output
Printer Mode and can help isolate the source of the problem to either the IDFE or the Network. copy.
Procedure Procedure
With the aid of the customer or administrator, access the Document Centre Color Series 50 Remove the Drum CRU Assembly. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Enter dC330 [9-050] and
home page. Select the Maintenance tab on the Home page. Next, select the QuickCal radio press the Start button.
button at the top of the Maintenance page. To check the printer’s current color printing state,
NOTE: After removing the Drum CRU, cover the CRU with the black bag that is stored in Tray
select Color Chart from the Chart pull-down menu and print it. The image quality problem is
1.
present on the Color Chart.
Y N The Erase Lamp lights.
This indicates that the problem is Network-related. Y N
Press the Stop button. There is +5 VDC between P/J418A-2 and on the IOT PWB
Reload the IDFE System Software. If the problem continues, replace the IDFE. and GND.
Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J418A-1 and GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD and check the harness for an open circuit. If the circuit is OK,
replace the Erase Lamp (PL 5.1).
Enter dC330 [9-050] and press the Start button. Less than +1 VDC is measured
between P/J418B-2 and DC Com on the IOT Drive PWB
Y N
Replace the Erase Lamp (PL 5.1).
Go to the IQ 39 Preclean Corotron HVPS RAP. The Power Supply is good

Y N
Replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1).
1. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover

3. Cheat the Front Door Interlock.
4. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault.
5. Press Start.
6. Watch the Registration Drive Gear (Figure 1).
7. When the gear starts to rotate, remove the interlock cheater.
8. Extend the Paper Handling Drawer.
9. Remove the two screws that secure the IBT Front Frame and turn IBT handle down.
10. Extend the IBT Drawer to the service position.
Y N
The problem is in the 2nd BTR, or the Fuser. Perform the Xerographic Hard Stop again.
This time, wait until the paper is on the Vacuum Transport before removing the interlock
cheater. The defect is present on the copy that is on the Vacuum Transport.
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-13 IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure, IQ 8 Re-
A
Y N IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP
The problem is in the Fuser. Disassembly the fuser and carefully inspect the follow-
Uneven Density RAP. This RAP is used when the IOT output image shows uneven density in
ing parts for damage or toner buildup.
the inboard to outboard direction.
• Pressure Roll (PL 8.3)
• Heat Rolls (PL 8.3)
Initial Actions
• Web CRU (Machine Consumables)
• Ensure that all HFSI items that are near or over threshold have been replaced.
Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, inspect/ • Ensure that IBT is positioned correctly in relation to the Copy/Print Cartridge (Xero Drum).
replace the 2nd BTR (PL 9.2). • Check the Plate (PL 7.6) that supports the outboard end of the IBT Backup Roll for dam-
age.
The problem is in the Xerographic Module, the 1st BTR, or the IBT Belt. Complete the steps
below until the problem is resolved Procedure
• Check the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP
Place the Color Test Pattern on the platen and make a print in Black, Yellow, Magenta and
• Replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5) Cyan. The defect is present in all four colors.
• Clean/replace the IBT Cleaning Blade (PL 7.8) Y N
• Replace the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables) Replace the developer material for the problem color.
NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC
set-up procedure.
If the problem is still present, replace the Developer Housing for the problem color (PL
6.6).
Run ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. The Setup runs successfully.

Y N
Go to the RAP for the Fault Code indicated to troubleshoot the problem.
Xerographic Hard Stop Procedure

1. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover.
5. Press Start.
Y N
Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, replace the
2nd BTR (PL 7.9). If the problem continues, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5).
The problem is in the Xerographic Module, the 1st BTR, or the ROS. Complete the steps below
until the problem is resolved
• Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron grid for defects or damage. If
any component is questionable, replace the Drum CRU Machine Consumables.
• Go to the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP. If the 1st BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 1st
BTR (PL 7.6).

IQ 8 Residual Image RAP, IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP 3-14 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
• Replace the ROS (PL 4.1). IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP
Low Image Density RAP. This RAP is used when the output image shows image density that is
lower than the specification.
Initial Actions
This problem can be caused by the following:
• Low toner concentration.

• Out of specification paper, especially low quality, or heavy weight paper.
• Faulty IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Drum past end of life.
• Developer past end of life. Check the HFSI counters for the Developers. Refer to Detailed
Maintenance Activities in Service Call Procedures.
• Faulty ADC Sensor.
• If Tag #14 is marked off, go to IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP.
Replace the paper presently being used with new 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or
Registration 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper and run test copies. If the images reproduced are still of low
Drive Gear density, continue with this RAP.
Procedure
Clean the ADC Sensor and run ADJ 9.1.1, Max Setup. The Setup runs successfully.
Y N
Go to the RAP for the Fault Code indicated to troubleshoot the problem.
Figure 1 Registration Drive Gear

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-15 IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP, IQ 10 Low Image Density
IQ 11 High Image Density RAP IQ 12 Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks RAP
IOT High Image Density RAP. This RAP is used when the output image shows image density Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks RAP. This RAP is used when the output image shows bands,
the is higher than the specification. lines, or streaks in the lead edge to trail edge, or the front to rear direction.

This problem can be caused by the following:
NOTE: If the image defect looks like an ADC Patch Printout (see Defect Sample 27), go to IQ
8 Residual Image RAP to begin troubleshooting.
• High toner concentration.
• Faulty ADC Sensor. NOTE: The table for Banding Intervals and Causes is referenced in the paragraph below. The
• Drum, Developer or Corotrons past end of life. measurements cited in this table are based on copies made at 100% magnification.
• Faulty IOT PWB Using the 150 mm scale, measure the position and interval of the defect. Refer to Banding
• If the machine has Tag 14, refer to the IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP. Intervals and Causes (Table 1), and Checks for Front-to-Rear Banding Causes (Table 2) of this
RAP to isolate the cause of the defect. If the cause of the defect is not found in the table, con-
tinue with this RAP.
Procedure
Clean the ADC Sensor and run ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. The Setup runs successfully.
Y N
Procedure
Go to the RAP for the Fault Code indicated to troubleshoot the problem. Hard Stop Procedure
1. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover
The Xerographic Subsystems are in spec. Use Tools to set the desired density level if required. 2. Make sure that the IBT Handle is up.
up procedure 4. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault.
5. Press Start.
9. Remove the two screws that secure the IBT Front Frame and turn the IBT handle down.
Y N
The problem is in the 2nd BTR, or the Fuser. Perform the Xerographic Hard Stop again.
This time, wait until the paper is on the Vacuum Transport before removing the interlock
cheater. There are Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks on the copies on the Vacuum
Transport.
Y N
The problem is in the Fuser. Disassembly the fuser and carefully inspect the follow-
• Fuser Pressure Roll
• Fuser Heat Roll.
• Fuser Cleaning Blade
Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, check the
2nd BTR contamination or damage. If contaminated, clean with lint free cloth. If damaged,
replace the 2nd BTR (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5).
Remove the IBT Cleaning Assembly. Check for damage on the IBT Cleaner Blade or the Film
Seal. The Cleaner Assembly is good.

IQ 11 High Image Density RAP, IQ 12 Bands, Lines, 3-16 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Y N Table 2 Checks For Other Banding Causes.
Replace the Cleaner Assembly (PL 7.1)
Problem to check for Corrective Action
Check the IBT Belt for scratches lines or band. The IBT Belt is good. White deletion streak from Check for trimmer gap block-
Y N lead edge to trail edge age on developer mag rolls.
Replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Poor Developer Bias Contact Clean/Replace the Bias
Brush (PL 6.1)
Choose IOT Test Pattern #11 from the UI, or Test Pattern # 99 from the PWS, and make a
black, yellow, magenta, and cyan print of the test pattern. The defect appears in all four col-
ors.
Y N
Replace the Developer for the problem color (PL 6.6). If the problem continues, replace
the Developer Housing (PL 6.6).
• Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron grid for defects or damage. If
any component is questionable, replace the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables).
• Check the Erase Lamp for dark spots. If the lamp is questionable, Replace the Erase
Lamp (PL 5.1).
• Clean the ROS of obstructions or contamination. If the problem continues, replace the
ROS (PL 4.1).
Table 1 Banding Intervals and Causes

Banding Interval in mm Component
0.51 ROS Registration
1.02 ROS Drive Gear
6.6 Drum Motor (PL 1.1), Main Motor
(PL 1.2)
39.14 Gears associated with Mag Roll
40.84 Gears associated with Mag Roll
52.78 Gears associated with IBT Roll
105.77 IBT Drive Assy which includes Figure 1 Registration Drive Gear
double-gear 22/64T (PL 1.1),
Drum Idler Gear (PL 1.1), and
IBT Drive Roll (PL 7.6)
Table 2 Checks For Other Banding Causes.

Problem to check for Corrective Action
Dirty Drum Gear Clean the Drum Gear
Loose Drum Flange Tighten Drum Flange
Dirty Corotron Wire/Corotron Clean with brush or replace
Grid Drum CRU Machine Con-
sumables
Streak on IBT Hard stop to verify. Change
IBT Belt if defective
Streak on back side of copy. Check 2nd BTR Roll for dam-
age or contamination

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-17 IQ 12 Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks RAP
A
IQ 13 White, Black or Colored Spots RAP Inspect the IBT Belt for contamination, dents or flaws that would cause the defect. The IBT
Belt has dents or flaws that caused the defect.
IOT White, Black or Colored Spots RAP. This RAP is used when the IOT output print has white,
Y N
black, or colored spots.
• Gently clean the IBT Belt with a soft lint free cloth
Initial Actions • Check/clean or replace the IBT Cleaning Blade (PL 7.8)
NOTE: If the image defect appears as a white spot (or deletion) with a Toner agglomerate near • Clean the 1st BTR (PL 7.6).
the middle of the spot (see Defect Sample 19), go to IQ 17 Deletions RAP and troubleshoot the • Clean the 2nd BTR (PL 7.9).
defect as a Debris-Centered Deletion.
• Remove the Drum. Check the Drum for damage or excessive contamination caused
NOTE: If the image defect has the appearance of a small barcode symbol that is read by a bar- by failed cleaning brush or blade, If damage or cleaning failure is present, replace
code scanner (see Defect Sample 25), replace the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables). the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables).
NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set- Replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5).
up procedure
This failure can be caused by the following:

• Developer Problems
• Toner Dispense Problems
• Failure in the Drum Cleaning system
• Flaws on the Drum
• Flaws on the IBT Film
• Bead Carryout
• Failure of the IBT Cleaning Blade
• Clean the Document Glass.
• Clean the Lens and Mirrors.
• Clean/vacuum all Paper path areas.
• Clean/ vacuum all related xerographic components.
Procedure
Place the Color Test Pattern on the platen and make a print in Black, Yellow, Magenta and
Cyan. The defect is present in all four colors.
Y N
There is Bead Carry out on the faulty print.
Y N
Run 5 copies in each color of Test Pattern #11 UI or Test Pattern #99 PWS. Inspect
the samples for isolated defects in a specific color. Inspect the Developer Housing of
the problem color for leaks, spills, damage or flaws. The Developer Housing has
leaks, spills, damage or flaws.
Y N
Replace the developer material for the faulty color (Machine Consumables).
Replace the Developer Housing for the faulty color (PL 6.6).
Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. After Max Setup is completed, check the high density
areas of the output copies. If the high density areas are not dark enough, perform a man-
ual tone up. Also, inspect the Developer Bias Brush for contamination or wear. Clean or
replace the Brush (PL 6.1) (REP 6.1.4) as required.
A
IQ 13 White, Black or Colored Spots RAP 3-18 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 14 IOT Solid Black (or Color) Copy RAP IQ 15 Background RAP
IOT Solid Black Copy RAP. This RAP is used when the copy is solid black with no original doc- IOT RAP. This RAP is used when the output image shows background greater than the specifi-
ument image seen in the copy. cation.
Initial Actions NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set-
Because the ROS exposes the areas of drum that will receive toner, or writes the four colors, up procedure.
this failure can be caused by the following in order of probability: Procedure
Run IOT Test Pattern #9 from UI, or Test Pattern #102 from PWS in 4 color mode. Back-
• Failure to charge the drum. Caused by faulty Charge Corotron, IOT PWB, or PTC and CC
ground is present.
HVPS.
Y N
• Failure of the Developer Bias power Supply.
Perform ADJ 9.1.2.
• Overexposure of the Drum. Caused by faulty IOT PWB, or ROS Assembly.
Both of these failures will cause the output copy to be completely black, with no image vis- Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. Max setup completed successfully.
ible from the original document. Y N
• Mispositioned mirror or lens Go to the RAP for the Fault Code indicated to troubleshoot the problem
Background is present.
Procedure Y N
Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. If the Developer Power Supply is good, go to the Go to Final Actions.
IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP. If the Charge Corotron Power Supply is good, replace the
Drum CRU (Machine Consumables). If the problem remains, this indicates there is a problem Background is present in all four colors
in the ROS circuits. Replace the following components in the order shown. After each replace- Y N
ment, make a copy to check the operation of the copier: Replace the developer material for the faulty color. If the problem continues, replace the
Developer Housing for the faulty color.
• IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• ROS Assembly (PL 4.1). Perform ADJ 12.3.3 DADF Height. Background is still present.
Y N
Go to Final Actions.
Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. The Developer HVPS is good.

Y N
Replace the Developer HVPS (PL 9.1).
Enter Tools and return all density settings to nominal. If background is still present, replace the
Drum CRU, (Machine Consumables).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-19 IQ 14 IOT Solid Black (or Color) Copy RAP, IQ 15
A
IQ 16 Blank (or Nearly Blank) Copy RAP The problem is in the Xerographic Module, the 1st BTR. Complete the steps below until the
problem is resolved
This RAP is used when the output copy is completely blank, or has extremely low image den-
• Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron screen for defects or dam-
sity.
age. If any component is questionable, replace the Xerographic Module (PL 5.3).
Initial Actions • Go to the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP. If the 1st BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 1st
BTR (PL 7.6).
• Ensure that J572 is firmly connected to the Post IPS PWB and P396 is firmly connected
to the Half Tone PWB.
• The ROS does not discharge the drum properly.
• Ensure than drive from the Main Motor (PL 1.2) to the Developer Clutch (PL 1.3) is func-
tioning correctly.
Procedure
There is some image on the copy.
Y N
Remove the Print/Copy Cartridge (Drum). Wipe a section of one of the mag rolls to
remove the toner/developer. Reinstall the Drum, and run 10 copies/prints. Remove the
Drum again, and examine the mag roll on the developer housing. The wiped area
remains free from toner/developer.
Y N
• Ensure that the IBT Drawer is properly positioned.
• Go to the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP.
Registration
• Check for correct operation of the ROS. Use the procedure in the 14-372 ROS Drive Gear
Motor Fail RAP.
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 9.3. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. If the wires
are OK, replace the Developer Clutch (PL 1.3). If the problem persists replace the IOT
Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Perform the Xerographic Hard Stop Procedure:

1. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover Figure 1 Registration Drive Gear
5. Press Start.
Observe the Image on the IBT. The image density is very low on the IBT.
Y N
A
IQ 16 Blank (or Nearly Blank) Copy RAP 3-20 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
IQ 17 Deletions RAP NOTE: When perform the next step, it is very important that you follow the installa-
tion sequence for tightening the four screws of the Inner Dispense Cover.
IOT Deletions RAP. This RAP is used when the output copy is experiencing deletions.
6. Using (REP 6.7.1) as a guide, replace the Inner/Outer Dispense Housings (PL 6.5)
Initial Actions for all four colors, including the following parts, except where noted (PL 6.5),
• Outer Dispense Cover, screw and spring
NOTE: If the deletions look like mottle and are most noticeable in the high density areas of an
• Inner Dispense Cover
image, go to IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP.
• Four Outer Dispense Housings
Load some new, dry 24 lb. 11 X17” (A3) Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Col- • Four Inner Dispense Housings and their four bearings (clean with a lint-free
ortech + (ESG) into Tray 2 and make 5 single-color 20% halftone copies of IOT Pattern 11 (UI)
cloth and reinstall)
and 99 (PWS) for each color (Y, M, C, and K). Note: Set aside the best black copy for future use
• Block and black spacer
and mark its lead edge.
• Five white spacers (clean with a lint-free cloth and reinstall)
NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set- 7. Reinstall the developer housing(s) (REP 6.6.1).
up procedure. 8. Run 50 11X17/A3 single-color 20% halftone copies of IOT Pattern 11 (UI) and 99
(PWS) for the problem color(s).
Procedure
If the problem remains, inspect the Developer Bias Roll Shaft for contamination or wear.
The defect is still present with the new paper.
Clean or repair it as required (PL 7.6). Also, inspect the Developer Bias Brush for contam-
Y N
ination or wear. Clean or replace the Brush (PL 6.1) (REP 6.1.4) as required.
The paper was the problem. Tell the customer that new, dry, 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpres-
sions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper is the specified paper for use in the Inspect the IBT Belt for any foreign materials or dents. The IBT Belt is OK.
DocuColor 12 copier.
Y N
Clean IBT Belt with soft lint free cloth, or replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5).
The deletions occur with all four colors
Y N
Load the largest-size, fresh paper available in all the remaining trays, including the Paper
Deletions are Debris-Centered (that is, it has a Toner agglomerate near the center). Bypass Tray. Place the black copy you set aside earlier on the platen glass with the its lead
Y N edge facing away from the registration edge. Make several black copies from each tray with the
Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup.
Lighten / Darken Image Quality selection at its Darkest setting and mark each copy set with the
If the problem remains, inspect the following parts for damage or contamination:
corresponding tray it was fed from. The defect occurred on copies from all four trays and
• IBT Belt (dents or spots) the Paper Tray Bypass.
• Photoreceptor Drum Module (dents, scratches, or spots) Y N
• 2nd BTR Roll Repair or replace any faulty components of the Feeder Assembly for the problem paper
supply.
• Paper Path Rollers or Tray Feeders
• Fuser Module Rolls
Inspect the Drum for any defects or damage. The Drum is OK.
Y N
NOTE: Examine and identify the color of the agglomerate/grit contained in the center of
Clean or replace the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables).
the deletion(s) of a halftone image. The color(s) within the center of the deletion shall be
called the “problem” color or component. Inspect the ROS opening in the frame, above the Drum, for blockage and debris. The frame
1. Remove the problem developer housing following (REP 6.6.1). opening is clean and not blocked.
2. Remove the problem developer material (REP 6.6.2). Y N
Clear or clean the opening.
NOTE: Before replacing the developer material, vacuum any residual developer
from the housing to ensure complete removal of the problem material. Xerographic Hard Stop Procedure
3. Replace the developer material (REP 6.6.2) but DO NOT replace the developer 1. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover
housing at this time. 2. Make sure that the IBT Handle is up.
4. Remove the Rotary Dispense Assembly (REP 6.7.1). 3. Cheat the Front Door Interlock.
5. Remove, vacuum and clean the problem rotary auger(s) (REP 6.7.1). 4. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault.
5. Press Start.
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-21 IQ 17 Deletions RAP
Y N
The problem is in the IBT, the 2nd BTR, or the Fuser. Perform the Xerographic Hard Stop
again. This time, wait until the paper is on the Vacuum Transport before removing the
interlock cheater. The defect is present on the copy that is on the Vacuum Transport.
Y N
The problem is in the Fuser. Disassemble the fuser and carefully inspect the follow-
• Pressure Roll (PL 8.3).
• Heat Roll Stripper Fingers (PL 8.3),
• Heat Rolls (PL 8.3).
• Cleaning Roll (PL 8.5). Registration
Drive Gear
The problem is in the Xerographic Module, the 1st BTR, or the ROS. Complete the steps below
until the problem is resolved
• If the problem is density or background related, perform a ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. If any
Fault Codes are generated during the setup, use the RAPs for those Fault Codes to trou-
bleshoot the problem.
• Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron screen for defects or dam-
• Go to the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP. If the 1st BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 1st
BTR (PL 7.6).
• Replace the ROS (PL 4.1).

IQ 17 Deletions RAP 3-22 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 18 IOT Missing Colors RAP IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP
IOT Missing Colors RAP. This RAP is used when the output copy exhibits a consistent loss of Bead Carryout RAP. This RAP is used when the copy is experiencing bead carryout (BCO).
one of the Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black toners. This defect looks like mottle and is most noticeable in the high density areas. BCO is caused by
low toner concentration.
Initial Actions
• Check that connectors P/J140 on the TR0 Sensor and P/J139 on the ADC Sensor are NOTE: Only the effect the carrier beads have on the image of the output copy/print are visible.
seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
copy/print.
• IBT Belt is correctly installed and IBT drive appears to be normal.
Initial Actions
Procedure NOTE: If the BCO problem occurs with the color black and the IOT s/w version is 6.00.2 or
Run the # 9 IOT Test Pattern from the UI, or the 102 Test Pattern from the PWS in 4 color higher, go to IQ 46 Black Bead Carryout RAP. If the problem occurs with the color black and
mode. One of the colors is missing. the IOT s/w version is lower than 6.00.2, continue with this RAP.
Y N
Run IPS Test pattern # 22 from the UI or PWS. One of the colors is missing NOTE: For a high 4-color background / bead carryout problem (see Defect Sample 10), go to
Y N IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP to begin troubleshooting.
Run IPS Test Pattern #21 from the UI or PWS. The copy should look similar to Figure
3 in 3.2.4 IOT/IPS Internal Test Patterns of the Image Quality Supplement. The up procedure.
Copy looks similar to Figure 3.
Y N Ensure that the paper presently being used is fresh 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG),
Replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5) or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper or paper which is included in the customer’s Materials
Usage Guide and Recommended Paper List. Run test copies. If the copies reproduced still
Replace the Mem Sys PWB (PL 3.5). have Bead Carryout, continue with this RAP.
Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5). If the machine has Tag 14 ATC Sensor, refer to IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP.
Enter dC920 and move each of the housings to the development location. The Rotary Devel- Procedure
oper places each housing in the proper development location.
Y N NOTE: This procedure must be performed using UI diagnostics because some of the required
Go to the 9-363 Rotary Home Position Fail RAP. NVM locations cannot be accessed from the PWS.
Replace the problem Developer Housing (PL 6.6). If the problem continues, replace the Half NOTE: While referring to Table 1, make a drawing of this table on a sheet of 8 1/2 x 11” / A4
LEF paper. Then make a copy of your drawing. These two tables will be used to collect and
Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
analyze data when performing this procedure.
up procedure. NOTE: Ensure that 8 1/2 X 11” / A4 LEF paper is installed in Tray 2 before continuing.
Enter the diagnostic mode from the UI and select MAX Setup. Select TRC Set UP/Toner Con-
centration Adjustment. Select TRC Control (dC922). Make a ProCon test pattern by pressing
the Start button. Examine the copy for mottle-like or non-uniform (spotty) density in the high-
density patches. One of these defects is present in the 100% patch (top row) in any color.
Y N
Go to IQ 2 Defect Listing and choose one or more of the following defects to continue
troubleshooting: mottle, high image density, deletions, or spots.
Select Close three times to take you back to the main menu. Select NVM Read/Write. NVM
locations 773-021 through 773-028 are set to “1”.
Y N
Select MAX Setup. Select and run ADC AGC Setup (dC934) and VH/VM Setup (dC933)
in Max Setup (dc929) and investigate any system failure that is declared.
NVM 773-004 is set to “1”;

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-23 IQ 18 IOT Missing Colors RAP, IQ 19 Bead Carryout
A
Y N Reselect MAX Setup. Select TRC Set UP/Toner Concentration Adjustment. Select TRC Con-
Set NVM to “1”. trol (dC922). Make a ProCon test pattern by pressing the Start button. Examine the copy for
mottle-like or non-uniform (spotty) density in the high-density patches. One of these defects
The value in NVM location 773-121 is between 5 and 95 (this number represents the per- is present in the 100% patch (top row) for the problem color(s).
centage of room humidity). Y N
Y N The BCO problem is resolved.
Replace the Humidity Sensor (PL 7.1).
NOTE: If the lower limit(s) for the problem color(s) location(s) has already been reached, go
Record the ADC Target values from NVM locations 773-266 through 773-269 in Column 1 of directly to the end of this RAP and perform the corrective action steps.
the table you prepared. If the Y, M, C, and K values are EQUAL to or LESS than 230, 230,
NOTE: DO NOT set the new value(s) for the ADC Targets below the following lower limits: 773-
250, and 160 respectively, answer ‘Yes.’ If the value(s) are HIGHER than 230, 230, 250
266 = 150, 773-267 = 150, 773-268 = 170, and 773-269 = 100.
and 160 respectively, answer ‘No.’
Y N Enter a new value(s) for the problem color(s) in the appropriate NVM location(s) that is 30 bits
Set NVM locations 773-266, 267, 268, and 269 to 230, 230, 250, and 160 respectively. less (C,M,Y) or 10 bits less (K) than the current value(s) of the ADC Targets. Then record the
Then make 50 full-color copies of the top half of the Color Test Pattern on 8 1/2 X 11”/A4 new value(s) in Column 1 on one of the remaining tables you prepared. Make 50 full-color cop-
paper to stabilize the IOT. ies of the top half of color test patter 82E10810 to stabilize the IOT. Next, record the Humidity
Adjusted ADC Target value(s) for the problem color(s) from NVM locations 773-281 through
Record the Humidity Adjusted ADC Target value(s) for the problem color(s) from NVM loca- 773-284 in Column 2 and the ADC Patch Readings from NVM locations 773-606 through 773-
tions 773-281 through 773-284 in Column 2 and the ADC Patch Readings from NVM locations 609 in Column 3. The value(s) in Column 3 is within +/- 30 bits from the values in Column
773-606 through 773-609 in Column 3. The value(s) in Column 3 is within +/- 30 bits from 2 for the problem color(s).
the values in Column 2 for the problem color(s). Y N
Y N Make 50 full-color copies of the top half of the Color Test Pattern on 8 1/2 X 11” / A4 LEF
Make 50 full-color copies of the top half of the Color Test Pattern on 8 1/2 X 11” / A4 LEF paper. Repeat as necessary until the ADC Patch value(s) for the problem color(s) is within
paper. Repeat as necessary until the ADC Patch value(s) for the problem color(s) is within +/- 30 bits of the Humidity Adjusted ADC Targets. If the value(s) is not within this range
+/- 30 bits of the Humidity Adjusted ADC Targets. If the value(s) is not within this range after making 250 copies, go to IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP.
after making 250 copies, go to IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP.
Reselect MAX Setup. Select TRC Set UP/Toner Concentration Adjustment. Select TRC Con-
Reselect MAX Setup. Select TRC Set UP/Toner Concentration Adjustment. Select TRC Con- trol (dC922). Make a ProCon test pattern by pressing the Start button. Examine the copy for
trol (dC922). Make a ProCon test pattern by pressing the Start button. Examine the copy for mottle-like or non-uniform (spotty) density in the high-density patches. One of these defects
mottle-like or non-uniform (spotty) density in the high-density patches. One of these defects is present in the 100% patch (top row) for the problem color(s).
is present in the 100% patch (top row) for the problem color(s). Y N
Y N The BCO problem is resolved.
The BCO problem is resolved.
NOTE: Before performing the corrective action steps below, re-enter the original value(s) of the
NOTE: DO NOT set the new value(s) for the ADC Targets below the following lower limits: 773- ADC Targets for the problem color(s) in the appropriate NVM location(s). Make 50 full-color
266 = 150, 773-267 = 150, 773-268 = 170, and 773-269 = 100. For example, if reducing the copies of the top half of the Color Test Pattern on 8 1/2 X 11” / A4 LEF paper. Repeat as neces-
value of NVM location 773-266 by 50 bits would result in a value less than 150, you must not sary until the ADC Patch value(s) for the problem color(s) is within +/- 30 bits of the original
exceed the 150 limit for that location. Humidity Adjusted ADC Targets.
Enter a new value(s) for the problem color(s) in the appropriate NVM location(s) that is 50 bits Perform the following corrective action steps in order until the problem is resolved.
less than the current value(s) of the ADC Targets. Then record the new value(s) in Column 1 on • Check the Toner dispense system for any blockage or obstruction that could limit the
one of the remaining tables you prepared. Make 50 full-color copies of the top half of color test amount of Toner reaching the Developer Housing.
patter 82E10810 to stabilize the IOT. Next, record the Humidity Adjusted ADC Target value(s) • Replace the developer material for the problem color (Machine Consumables)
for the problem color(s) from NVM locations 773-281 through 773-284 in Column 2 and the
ADC Patch Readings from NVM locations 773-606 through 773-609 in Column 3. The
value(s) in Column 3 is within +/- 30 bits from the values in Column 2 for the problem
color(s).
Y N
Make 50 full-color copies of the top half of the Color Test Pattern on 8 1/2 X 11” / A4 LEF
paper. Repeat as necessary until the ADC Patch value(s) for the problem color(s) is within
+/- 30 bits of the Humidity Adjusted ADC Targets. If the value(s) is not within this range
after making 250 copies, go to IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP.
A
IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP 3-24 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
• Replace the problem Developer Housing (PL 6.6) IQ 20 IOT Graininess RAP
IOT Graininess RAP. This RAP is used when the output copy shows graininess, or a sandy, tex-
Table 1 Data Collection
tured appearance.
Humidity
ADC Adjusted ADC Patch Procedure
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
Targets ADC Readings
• Paper outside the specified weight and quality range can increase graininess. Heavy
Targets
weight papers are particularly susceptible.
Y 773-266 773-281 773-606
• Replace the paper currently in use with new, 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or
M 773-267 773-282 773-607 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper. If the paper change does not fix the problem, go to
C 773-268 773-283 773-608 Detailed Maintenance Activities in Section 1. Check the expected life of the Yellow,
K 773-269 773-284 773-609 Magenta, Cyan and Black Developer. If the developer material is past expected life,
replace it.
• Replace the Developer Bias Brush, if damaged (REP 6.1.4)
• Replace the Developer Housing, if damaged (PL 6.6).
• Go to IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP.
NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC
set-up procedure.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-25 IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP, IQ 20 IOT Graininess
IQ 21 Blurred or Fuzzy Image RAP IQ 22 Mottle RAP
Images that are not clear, or appear out of focus. This RAP is to be used when the output image shows Mottle.

Clean the top and bottom of the Document Glass, Lens and Mirrors with a lint free cloth and • This problem can occur when using lower quality paper, paper which is not in specification
lens and mirror cleaner. If the defect occurs only in the 3-Color Mode and appears to match the for this machine (refer to the customers Materials Usage Guide and Recommended Paper
“Toner Explosion” defect sample, recommend that the job be run in 4-Color Mode. Otherwise, List), or in paper that has a high moisture content.
continue with the Procedure below. Replace the paper presently being used with new 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions
(NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper and run test copies. If the copies repro-
Procedure duced still have Mottle, continue with this RAP.
If the defect occurs when running internal test pattern #84 on 11x17, single color from the PWS • Ensure that IBT is positioned correctly in relation to the Copy/Print Cartridge (Xero Drum).
perform the following until the problem is resolved: • Check the Plate (PL 7.6) that supports the outboard end of the IBT Backup Roll for dam-
• Perform ADJ. 3.4.1 Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage Position Adjustment. age.
• Clean the Ros Lenses.
• Replace the Ros Assembly (PL 4.1). Procedure
• Inspect the Drum surface for damage or contamination. Perform ADJ 9.1.1, Max Setup. Mottle is still present
• Inspect the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid for damage or contamination. Y N
If the defect occurs when running the Color Test Pattern from the platen perform the following
until the problem is resolved: The Defect is present only in the high density areas of the copy.
Y N
• Clean both sides of the Platen Glass and ensure that the Platen Glass is seated firmly.
Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP The Developer HVPS is good
• Perform ADJ. 3.4.1 Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage Position Adjustment. Y N
• Clean the Ros Lenses. Replace the Developer HVPS (PL 9.1). If problem continues, replace developer
• Replace the Ros Assembly (PL 4.1). material, (Machine Consumables).
If the defect continues go to IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure.
Xerographic Hard Stop Procedure
NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set- 1. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover
up procedure. 2. Make sure that the IBT Handle is up.
5. Press Start.
Y N
Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, replace
the 2nd BTR (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5).
The problem is in the Xerographic Module, the 1st BTR. Complete the steps below until
the problem is resolved
• Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron grid for defects or dam-
A
IQ 21 Blurred or Fuzzy Image RAP, IQ 22 Mottle RAP 3-26 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
• Go to the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP. If the 1st BTR Power Supply is good, replace IQ 23 Poor Color Balance RAP
the 1st BTR (PL 7.6).
Procedure
The problem is present in all four colors Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup.
Y N
This appears to be a “mottle-like” bead carryout problem (see Defect Sample 28), go to IQ
19 Bead Carryout RAP to continue troubleshooting.
Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. If any Fault Codes are generated during the setup, use the
RAPs for those Fault Codes to troubleshoot the problem. If the high density areas of the copy
appear to light, perform a manual tone up and refer to the IQ 19 RAP.
Registration
Drive Gear

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-27 IQ 22 Mottle RAP, IQ 23 Poor Color Balance RAP
IQ 24 Back Side or Side Two Copy Contamination RAP IQ 25 Hollow Character RAP
Procedure Small circular-shaped deletions within a character that can occur when the image density is
• Clean all Paper / Copy transports. low or a transparency is used.
• Clean/replace the IBT Belt.

Procedure
• Clean/inspect 2nd BTR roll
Check the following items:
• Clean/inspect Vacuum Transport Assembly
• If the problem is with Transparencies, ensure that the customer is running the correct
Clean or replace the following parts:
Transparencies. Transparencies must be run out of Tray 5, and Transparencies must be
• Heat Roll (PL 8.3) selected under Paper Type. If the transparencies have white strips, ensure that the white
• Pressure Roll (PL 8.3) strip is facing downward in the tray.
• External Heat Roll (PL 8.8) • Inspect the IBT Belt for wear, damage or IBT Belt over HFSI threshold. Replace IBT Belt
• Donor Roll Assembly (Oil System Kit) (REP 8.2.1) (PL 7.5) as needed.
• Cleaning Roll (PL 8.5) • Check for Developer over threshold.
• Advance the web manually to a clean area. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set-
up procedure.

IQ 24 Back Side or Side Two Copy Contamination 3-28 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 26 Low Contrast Reproduction RAP IQ 27 Color-to-Color Misregistration RAP
Procedure Procedure
• Clean both sides of the Document Glass. Perform the following:
• Replace developer material if near or over HFSI threshold. (Machine Consumables) • Check for IBT Belt loosing a pitch and ensure that the tensioner is engaged.
• Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup • Timing of the TR0 signal,
• Inspect the TRO Sensor. Ensure it is clean and not damaged.
• Ensure that the IBT Belt is not riding on the ridge on the outside edge of the Steering and
Drive rollers.
• Perform ADJ 9.1.1 MAX Setup.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-29 IQ 26 Low Contrast Reproduction RAP, IQ 27 Color-
IQ 28 Moire RAP IQ 29 Newton Rings RAP
Moire can occur when the original is a halftone or contains a halftone. The halftone screen in Procedure
the original can interfere with the halftone screens being generated by the copier. • Clean the Document Glass with Anti Static Fluid.
• Place a transparency between the photo and the Document Glass.
Procedure
Perform the following: NOTE: Newton Rings usually occur when copying high gloss photos in Photo/Photograph
• For Original Type of either Photo & Text or Photo, be certain to select Halftone for Photo mode.
Type.)
• Change the orientation of the original by rotating it 90 degrees.
• Decrease the Sharpness level (Softer, Softest).
• Reduce or enlarge the copy slightly (for example 95% or 105%).
• Change Original Type to Graphics & Maps (appearance may change -- some CQ adjust-
ments may be necessary).

IQ 28 Moire RAP, IQ 29 Newton Rings RAP 3-30 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 30 Fuser Offsetting RAP • Run the Fuser Break-in Procedure GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure.
• Check for indications that the Web Supply Roll is rotating normally. If there is a buildup of
Toner that was not cleaned off the Heat Roll offsets onto the front or back side of copies.
toner across the entire length of the web, perform the Web Motor Checkout.
NOTE: Offsetting is most likely to occur when running long jobs of high area coverage, trans- Web Motor Checkout
parencies or coated papers. High AC transparencies should be run using paper interleaves. +24 VDC is measured between P/J413A-2 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND.
Offsetting is also likely to occur when running heavy paper in the normal paper mode. Offset- Y N
ting is more likely to occur as the Heat Roll ages. +24 VDC is measured between P/J440-1 on the Web Drive PWB and GND.
Y N
Initial Actions Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
• Perform the Fuser Nip (dC701) ADJ 8.1.1. If the nip width is very low at one end, check OK, replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3).
that the Heat and Pressure Roll Bearings are correctly positioned. Also check that the
Pressure Roll Lift mechanism is functioning properly. Ensure that the 2 screws holding the +24 VDC is measured between P/J440-2 on the Web Drive PWB and GND.
upper and lower Fuser Frames together are tight. Y N
• In some cases, highly contaminated fuser oil can lead to offsetting, especially with trans- Check the Web Motor (PL 8.4) for an open circuit. If it is OK, replace the Web Drive
parencies and black copies. This situation is possible under the following circumstances: PWB (PL 8.4).
– The machine has a low oil supply (i.e., oil bottle is empty oil tank is low/add oil mes-
sage is displayed). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit.
– Oil level on the copies is low (indicated by the lack of oil streaks).
Enter DC330 [10-032] Web Motor. Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J413A-2
– The machine has high copy volume (more than 100K) and the oil in the tank is milky/ decreases from +24 VDC to less than +1.0 VDC.
dirty.
Y N
– Low Humidity environments may increase the likelihood of offsetting. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Install the Web CRU, Front Cover and Oil Car-
If this is suspect, replace the Oil Tank and Oil Pipe (PL 8.7) and the Oil Wick and Oil Filter tridge.
(PL 8.7), then go to the GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure.
• Excessively high Fuser temperature is a primary cause of Fuser contamination. This Replace the Web Drive PWB (PL 8.4). If that does not correct the problem, replace the Web
problem is prevalent when the machine is run in Extra Heavyweight mode, and increases Motor (PL 8.4).
when high area coverage images are run frequently. If this is suspect, change the default
values for the NVM locations in Table 1 to the values listed in the New values column. Table 1 Fuser temperature NVM values
NVM loc. Default value New value NVM loc. Default value New value
Procedure 777-001 160 155 777-137 190 183
Remove the Fuser Assembly. Check the following components. Clean excess toner from the 777-003 178 170 777-138 183 180
components using the Cleaning Procedures in Section 1. Replace the components if contami-
777-005 150 145 777-139 195 188
nation remains or if offsetting continues after cleaning.
777-010 165 161 777-166 164 156
• Heat Roll (PL 8.3)
777-013 158 153 777-194 185 165
777-016 180 170 777-195 182 165
• External Heat Roll (PL 8.8)
777-017 193 183 777-196 190 170
• Donor Roll (PL 8.9)
777-018 165 156 777-256 1050 18000
• Pick Up Roll (PL 8.9). If Roll is replaced, also replace the Metering Blade (PL 8.9).
777-019 187 167 777-257 1050 25000
• Oil Wick (PL 8.7)
777-020 193 (NASG) 172 777-272 165 161
• Cleaning Roll (PL 8.5)
185 (ESG)
Perform the actions indicated below:
777-021 162 156 777-276 160 155
• Check the Oil Bottle, if empty, replace (Machine Consumables).
777-023 163 151 777-280 156 151
• Check the Oil supply system is functioning. Go to the OF10-2 Fuser Oil Pump RAP.
777-026 161 155 777-299 193 175
• Check that the load springs and bearings for the Donor Roll Assembly are properly posi-
777-027 164 155 777-300 10 2
tioned.
777-028 162 150 777-301 168 161
• Advance the web manually to a clean area. Access NVM location 777-079 and increase
777-098 163 155 777-309 168 161
the value by 7,000 for each 25mm/one inch that the web was advanced.
777-135 193 188 777-310 169 163

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-31 IQ 30 Fuser Offsetting RAP
Table 1 Fuser temperature NVM values IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak RAP
NVM loc. Default value New value NVM loc. Default value New value Process direction streaks that show up first on transparencies or coated paper as low gloss
777-136 167 161 777-312 168 159 streaks in solid areas. In severe cases, oil streaks can show up on paper as low density streaks
in large halftone areas.
Initial Actions
NOTE: The primary cause of oil streaks is contamination of the oil Metering Blade.
While the Fuser is still warm, clean the External Heat Roll using the Cleaning Procedures in
Section 1. If the toner buildup cannot be removed, replace the roll (PL 8.8).
Check the HFSI counter for “Oil System” in the Detailed Maintenance Activities. If the count is
at or near 80,000, Install a new Oil System Repair Kit, (includes Donor Roll Assembly, Wick
and Oil Filter) (includes Tag P12 and TAG P21). After Installing a new Oil System Kit, reset
HSFI Counters 10-811 and 10-814.
Procedure
NOTE: Carefully observe the orientation of the Metering Blade to the Pickup Roll before disas-
sembling it. Notice that there is an “F” stamped into the front frame of the Metering Blade and
the Donor Roll Assembly Frame. When reassembling the Metering Blade, ensure that the two
“Fs” are located at the front of the Donor Roll Assembly.
NOTE: If the Metering Blade has less than 10,000 copies/prints on it, removing and cleaning
the Metering Blade/Oil System Roll, and Donor Roll with a lint-free cloth (600S1276) and fuser
oil should correct the problem. If the Metering Blade/Oil System has between 10,000 and
70,000 copies on it, perform the following steps:
1. Replace the Metering Blade REP 8.2.1 (PL 8.9), being careful to avoid contaminating the
blade edge during replacement. While replacing the blade, clean the Donor Roll and
Pickup Roll with a lint-free cloth (600S1276) and fuser oil. Before installing the blade, wipe
the edge with a lint-free cloth and oil. Finally, wipe the edge of the blade with a clean fin-
ger.
2. Tear off the corner from a sheet of 24#, (90 gsm) copy paper. After assembling the Meter-
ing Blade to the Pickup Roll, slide one of the clean edges of the paper between the blade
and the roll, inboard to outboard, to clean off any remaining contamination.
3. Inspect the Oil Wick and wipe off the surface with a lint-free cloth.
4. Clean or replace the following parts as required:
• Heat Roll (PL 8.3)
5. Ensure that the Donor roll and Pickup Roll are in contact with each other after the Donor
Roll Assembly has been installed (REP 8.2.1).
6. Advance the Web manually to a clean area. Enter Diagnostics. Access NVM Location
777-079 and increase the value by 7,000 for each 25mm/one inch that the web was
advanced.
7. Perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).

IQ 30 Fuser Offsetting RAP, IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak 3-32 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 32 ROS Borders RAP IQ 33 Solid Area Reproduction RAP
Intentional border deletions that exceed specifications (refer to ROS Borders for details). Initial Actions
Load some new, dry 24 lb 11X17/A3 Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech
Procedure + (ESG) into the paper tray. Make full color copies and check the Solid Area Reproduction.
Perform the ADJ 9.1.10 Side/Lead Edge Registration (dC129: System Registration).
up procedure.
Procedure
• Replace the developer if the developer is near or over HFSI threshold.
• Replace the IBT Belt if the IBT Belt is over HFSI threshold.
• Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup.
• Check for Mottle/BCO IQ 22 Mottle RAP.
• Check the 1st BTR HVPS IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP.
• Check the 2nd BRT HVPS IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-33 IQ 32 ROS Borders RAP, IQ 33 Solid Area Repro-
IQ 34 Text / Image Separation RAP IQ 35 Toner Starvation RAP
When using the Original Type options of Photo and Text or Text, the copier attempts to discrim- This defect occurs at the transition point between a high density area and a low density area of
inate between text and photo areas within the original. It then applies the appropriate image the same color. A localized area of the mag brush becomes “starved” for toner due to develop-
processing to each area. Text is reproduced at 600 lines per inch while photos are reproduced ment fringe field effects. Starvation tends to worsen at low triboelectric levels (high toner con-
at 200 lines/dots per inch. On occasion, the defect may appear where an area is classified centration).
incorrectly and text is treated as photo or vise-versa.
Initial Actions
Procedure Change the orientation of the original by rotating it 90 degrees or 180 degrees.
• Rotate the original 90 degrees.
• Reduce or enlarge slightly. If the machine shows a starvation problem and has Tag 14 ATC Sensor, refer to the IQ 47 ATC
• In Photo & Text mode, change Photo Type from Half Tone to Photograph Sensor RAP.
• Under Tools - System Image Quality - Image Recognition, the Key operator can adjust
Text & Photo Recognition and or Text & Photo Balance. It should be noted that these
up procedure.
parameters are not intended to be adjusted on a job to job basis. These adjustments are
trade-offs and should be treated with care. Procedure
• Change Original Type to Photo or to Graphic & Maps. (Appearance may change - some Place the Color Test Pattern on the platen and make a print in Black, Yellow, Magenta and
CQ adjustments may be necessary. Cyan. The defect is present in all four colors.
Y N
Ensure that developer housing for the problem color is not damaged. Replace the devel-
oper if the developer is near or over HFSI threshold.
Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup.
NOTE: If the machine is showing objectionable starvation, and has an ATC Sensor and the
sensor is activated, go to the IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP to check for proper operation.

IQ 34 Text / Image Separation RAP, IQ 35 Toner Star- 3-34 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 36 Unfused Copy RAP IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP
Unfused Image usually occurs because of lack of heat/pressure in the Fuser, or because of This RAP is used to isolate the cause of missing or out-of-specification voltages.
excess toner on the copy.
Procedure
Initial Actions WARNING
• Ensure that the correct Paper Mode (i.e Normal, Heavyweight or Extra Heavyweight) has
been selected for the paper being run.
• For electronic images, ensure that toner coverage has been limited to a total of less than the meter leads while testing the circuits.
280% or less than 70% each color.
Measure the Developer Bias output from the DB HVPS:
• Switch off the copier.
Procedure • Connect the DMM (+) lead to the developer bias terminal that attaches to the developer
• Go to ADJ 8.1.1 Fuser Nip Adjustment. Nip width near the maximum (10.6 mm) will pro- housing.
vide the best fusing. • Cheat the Front Door Interlock.
• Ensure that output image density is not too high. Compare the output image density to the • Connect the DMM (-) lead to the copier frame.
density of the original. If output density is too high, go to IQ 11 High Image Density RAP to • Set the DMM to measure 1 KVDC.
achieve the correct image density.
• Switch on the copier.
• Enter DC330 [09-076], press Start and observe the voltage measurement.
There is a steady voltage of approximately -550 VDC at this point.
Y N
Press Stop. Enter DC330 [09-077] and press Start. There is a steady voltage of
approximately 415 VAC at this point.
Y N
Press Stop. Connect the DMM (+) lead to the output terminal of the Developer Bias
HVPS. Press Start. There is approximately -550 VDC at this point.
Y N
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured at P/J91-1 on the Developer Bias HVPS.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD9.3 and check the wiring for an open circuit.
(If two or more input signal are missing, -550 VDC and 415 VAC outputs will not
be present.) Go to Flag 4 on BSD9.3and check the wiring for an open circuit. If
OK, replace the Developer Bias HVPS (PL 9.1). If the problem remains, replace
Go to Flag 3 BSD9.3 and check the Developer Bias Lead for an open circuit.
Press Stop. Enter dC330 [09-076] and press Start. Approximately +2.7 VDC is mea-
sured at J[418]-A9 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Approximately +2.7 VDC is measured at P/J91-5 on the Developer Bias HVPS.

Y N
Go to Flag 5 BSD9.3 and check for an open circuit.
Replace the Developer Bias HVPS (PL 9.1).
Press Stop. Enter DC330 [09-077] and press Start. There is a steady voltage of approxi-
mately 415 VAC at this point.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-35 IQ 36 Unfused Copy RAP, IQ 37 Developer Bias
Y N IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP
Press Stop. Approximately +3.2 VDC is measured at P/J418A-10 on the IOT Drive
This RAP is used to isolate the cause of missing or out-of-range voltages and current.
PWB when Start is pressed.
Y N
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Procedure
WARNING
Approximately +3.2 VDC is measured at P/J91-4 on the Developer Bias HVPS.
Y N
Enter dC330 [09-070]. Press Start. Observe the B Monitor (Red) LED on the CC/PCC HVPS.
Approximately +4.5 VDC is measured at P/J418A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N The LED is lit or flickering.
+24 VDC is measured at P/J82-1 on the CC/PCC HVPS.
Approximately +4.5 VDC is measured at P/J91-3 on the Developer Bias HVPS. Y N
Y N Approximately +1.0 VDC is measured at P/J82-1 on the CC/PCC HVPS.
Y N
Replace the Developer Bias HVPS (PL 9.1).
Y N
Ensure that the following are OK: Go to Flag 1 BSD9.1 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT
• Fingers in front Developer Rotor End Frame (PL 6.7) Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
• Developer Bias Brush and Plate (PL 6.1)

Go to Flag 1 BSD9.1 and check the wire for an open circuit. If OK, replace the
• Wire from Bias Plate to Developer Roll (PL 9.1) CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1).
Go to Flag 4 BSD9.1 and check the Charge output circuit, including the Charge
Corotron wire (PL 5.4), for an open circuit. If OK, replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL
9.1).
Approximately +3.5 VDC is measured at P/J92-3.

Y N
Go to Flag 2 BSD9.1 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive
PWB (PL 9.2).
The LED is on steady (not flickering).

Y N
Y N
Check for an open connection between P/J82-1 and P/J82-1. If OK, replace the
CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1).
Press Stop. Enter dC330 [09-081]. Press Start. Approximately +3.5 VDC is measure at P/
J92-4.
Y N
Go to Flag 5 BSD9.1 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL
9.2).
A
IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP, IQ 38 Charge 3-36 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
Press Stop. Perform the following: IQ 39 Preclean Corotron HVPS RAP
• Set the meter to measure micro amps.
• Disconnect the Charge output connector from the CC/PCC HVPS.
• Connect one meter lead to the supply side of the connector and the other lead to the har- Procedure
ness side.
WARNING
• Enter dC330 [09-070]. Press Start.
Approximately 600 to 800 micro amps is measured.
Y N
Ensure that NVM location [774-031] is set at 3 and location [774-029] is set at 130. Enter and
The Charge Corotron HVPS checks out OK. Check the following: operate DC330 [09-068]. Observe the G Monitor (Red) LED on the CC/PCC HVPS. The LED
• Charge Corotron Assy (PL 5.4). is lit.
Y N
• Charge Corotron connector (PL 5.2).
Enter and operate DC330 [09-070] and observe the B Monitor (Red) LED on the CC/PCC
HVPS. The LED is lit.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 2 BSD9.13 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT
Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Check for an open connection between P/J92-1 and P/J92-1. If OK, replace the
CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1).
Approximately +1.85 VDC is measured at P/J92-6.

Y N
PWB (PL 9.2).
Check for an open connection at P/J92-6. If OK, go to Flag 4 BSD9.13 and check the
Preclean output circuit, including the Preclean Corotron wire (PL 5.4) for and open circuit.
If OK, replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1).
Set your meter to measure micro amps. Disconnect the Preclean output connector from the
CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). Connect one meter lead to the supply side of the connector and the
other lead to the harness side. Make another full-color copy. Approximately 200 to 400
micro amps is measured.
Y N
The Preclean Corotron HVPS checks out OK. Check the following:
• Preclean Corotron (PL 5.4).
• Preclean Corotron connector (PL 5.2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-37 IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP, IQ 39 Preclean
A
IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP Approximately +11.5 is measured at P/J95-6 on the 2nd BTR HVPS during standby.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 BSD9.9 and check for an open connection at P/J95-6. If OK, replace the
2nd BTR HVPS (PL 9.2).
Procedure
WARNING Approximately +11.5 is measured at P/J95-5 on the 2nd BTR HVPS during standby.
Y N
tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or Go to Flag 7 BSD9.9 and check for an open connection at P/J95-5. If OK, replace the
Set your meter to measure micro amps. Disconnect the output connector from the 2nd BTR
Make one full-color copy. Voltage decreases from approximately +11.5 VDC to +0.03 VDC
HVPS (PL 9.2). Connect one meter lead to the supply side of the connector and the other lead
momentarily near the end of the copy cycle.
to the harness side. Make one full-color copy. Approximately -50 to -70 micro amps is mea-
Y N
sured momentarily near the end of the copy cycle.
Y N 9.2).
Approximately -20 to -30 micro amps is measured momentarily.
Y N
The 2nd BTR HVPS checks out OK. Check the following:
Approximately 0 micro amps is measured. • 2nd BTR Roll (PL 7.10).
Y N
• Earth Plates (PL 7.10).
(This indicates that the measurement is between -1 and -19 micro amps, or -71
micro amps or higher.) Replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 9.2). • Wire Harness (PL 7.10).
• High Voltage Lead from the IBT Assy to the 2nd BTR Roll.
Reconnect the output connector from the 2nd BTR HVPS. +24 VDC is measured
at P/J95-1 on the 2nd BTR HVPS during Standby.
Y N
PWB (PL 9.2).
Make one full-color copy. Approximately +1.5 VDC is measured momentarily at

P/J95-3 on the 2nd BTR HVPS near the end of the copy cycle.
Y N
PWB (PL 9.2).
Check for an open connection at P/J95-3, and at P/J95-1. If OK, go to Flag 3

BSD9.9 and check for an open in the output circuit. If OK, replace the 2nd BTR
HVPS (PL 9.2).
Make another full-color copy. Approximately +4.0 VDC is measured momentarily at

P/J95-7 on the 2nd BTR HVPS near the end of the copy cycle.
Y N
Check for an open connection at P/J95-7. If OK, replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL
9.2).
9.2).
Reconnect the output connector to the 2nd BTR HVPS. Approximately +11.5 is measured
at P/J95-4 on the 2nd BTR HVPS during standby.
Y N
Go to Flag 5 BSD9.9 and check for an open connection at P/J95-4. If OK, replace the
A
IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP 3-38 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP
This RAP is used to isolate the cause of missing or out-of-range voltages.
Procedure
WARNING
Failure to operate ALL the dC330 output components listed below will result in perma-
nent damage to the photoreceptor.
Enter and stack the following dC330 components in the order listed: Drum Motor [04-021];
Erase Lamp [09-050]; Charge Corotron Wire [09-070]; Charge Corotron Grid [09-81]; and 1st
BTR HVPS [09-047]. Approximately +3.0 VDC is measured at P/J416A-A4 on the IOT
Drive PWB.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured at P/J416A-A1 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N
Check for an open connection at P/J416A-A1. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB PL
9.2.
Approximately +3.5 VDC is measured at P/J416A-A3.

Y N
Check for an open connection at P/J416A-A3. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB PL
9.2.
Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, and Flag 3 BSD9.8 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the
1st BTR HVPS PL 7.6.
Check for an open connection at P/J416A-A4 on the IOT Drive PWB. If OK, go to Flag 4 and
check for an open circuit. If OK, the 1st BTR HVPS checks out OK. Check the following:
• Bias Roll (PL 7.6).
• High Voltage Lead from the HVPS to the Bias Roll. Replace the BTR HVPS if damaged
(PL 7.6).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-39 IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP
IQ 42 DTS HVPS RAP IQ 43 Paper Feed Checkout Procedure
This RAP is used to isolate the cause of missing voltages. This Procedure is used to isolate the cause of Paper Feed problems for which no faults are
declared.
Procedure
Make one full-color copy. Approximately +3.8 VDC is measured at P/J419A-7 on the IOT Initial Actions
Drive PWB near the end of the copy cycle. • Check for bent or damaged baffles and guides in the paper feed area.
Y N • Check for loose, missing or stretched springs in the paper feed area.
Y N
Check for an open connection at P/J419A-11. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL
Procedure
9.2). For Trays 1-4, check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Replace
any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved.
Approximately +1.5 VDC is measured at P/J419A-9. • Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (PL 2.5)
Y N • Retard Roll (PL 2.6)
Check for an open connection at P/J419A-9. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL
• Friction Clutch (PL 2.6)
9.2).
• T/A Roll (PL 2.7B)
Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, and Flag 3 BSD9.9 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the • T/A Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A)
DTS HVPS PL 2.14. • Pinch Rolls (PL 2.8)
For Tray 5, check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Replace
Check for an open connection at P/J419A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB. If OK, go to Flag 4 and any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved.
check for an open circuit. If OK, the DTS HVPS checks out OK. Check the following: • Feed Roll (PL 2.9)
• Wire Harness (PL 7.10).
• Retard Roll (PL 2.12)
• Nudger Roll (PL 2.11)
• High Voltage Lead from the HVPS to the DTS.
• Friction Clutch (PL 2.12)
• T/A Pinch Roll (PL 2.10)
• Pinch Roll (PL 2.10)
• Registration Guide (PL 2.13)
• Side Guide (PL 2.13)

IQ 42 DTS HVPS RAP, IQ 43 Paper Feed Checkout 3-40 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 44 Registration Checkout Procedure IQ 45 Wrinkle RAP
This procedure is used to isolate the cause of Registration problems for which no faults are This procedure is used when the copy/print contains wrinkles or closely spaced ‘waves’.
declared.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
NOTE: Wrinkles (or waves) occur when there is non-uniform stress in the paper while it passes
• Check for bent or damaged baffles and guides in the Registration area.
though the Fuser Assembly. These stresses can be caused by the following: paper type or con-
• Check for loose, missing or stretched springs in the Registration area. dition (old light-weight paper is worse), uneven oil distribution front to rear (OB to IB), differ-
ences in contact arc front to rear (OB to IB), and the type of image density (dark solid area
Procedure images, especially 2-sided copies/prints are worse).
For Trays 1-5, check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Replace • Ensure that the customer is using a fresh supply of copy paper.
any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved. • If oil streaks are present, go to the IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak RAP.
• Registration Roll (PL 2.15) • If the problem occurs only when printing, ensure that the image density is being controlled
• Pinch Roll (PL 2.15) at a maximum of 70% for each color.
• Pinch Roll(PL 2.16) • Rotate the original 180 degrees.
• Pre Registration Roll (PL 2.16)
• Pre Registration Chute (PL 2.16) Procedure
NOTE: When performing the Fuser Nip adjustment, attempt to make both rear (IB) and front
(OB) values equal to each other.
Perform the Fuser Nip Adjustment ADJ 8.1.1. If the problem remains, perform this adjustment
again and reset the nip to the low end of the specification at both ends. If the problem still
remains, perform the following actions until the problem is resolved:
• Check the HFSI status of the following fuser components: Heat Roll, Pressure Roll, Exter-
nal Heat Roll, and the Oil System (Donor Roll Assembly). Replace any item that is over
threshold.
• Ensure that the Color Gradation Check located in the Image Quality Specification section
of the Image Quality Supplement is within specification. If it is not, perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max
Setup.
• If the problem occurs when the copy paper is being fed LEF, try feeding the paper SEF.
• Try using fresh 24 lb Xerox COLOR Xpressions paper (NASG) or 90 gsm Colortech +
paper (ESG). If the problem is resolved, recommend it to the customer.
• If the problem occurs only when making 2-sided copies with high solid area density
images on both sides, it may be necessary to make single-sided copies to minimize or
eliminate the problem.
• If the problem occurs only when using plain or coated light-weight paper, it is recom-
mended that a heavier weight paper be used to minimize the problem.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-41 IQ 44 Registration Checkout Procedure, IQ 45 Wrin-
IQ 46 Black Bead Carryout RAP If the problem continues, perform the following corrective action steps in order until the problem
is resolved.
This RAP is used when the copy is experiencing bead carryout (BCO) for the color black. This
• If the density is still light, check the Toner dispense system for any blockage or obstruction
defect looks like mottle and is most noticeable in the high density areas. BCO is caused by low that could limit the amount of Toner reaching the Developer Housing.
toner concentration.
• Enter dC922 (TRC Control) from dC929 (Max Setup). Manually tone up black by setting
the Tone Interval to 12. If the problem is resolved, refer to Table 1 and set NVM 775-664
NOTE: Only the effect the carrier beads have on the image of the output copy/print are visible.
to 70 and NVM 775-669 to 65.
copy/print. • Replace the Developer Bias Brush, if damaged (REP 6.1.4)
• Replace the Developer Housing, if damaged (PL 6.6).
Initial Actions • Go to IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP.
This RAP assumes IOT s/w version 6.00.2 or higher is installed. If not, go to IQ 19 Bead Carry-
out RAP to begin troubleshooting. Table 1 NVM Settings
NVM Location NVM Value
Ensure that the paper presently being used is fresh 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG),
or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper or paper which is included in the customer’s Materials 773-223 200
Usage Guide and Recommended Paper List. Run test copies. If the copies reproduced still 773-269 160
have Bead Carryout, continue with this RAP. 775-681 1
775-664 65
Procedure 775-669 60
NOTE: Ensure that 8 1/2 X 11” LEF paper is installed in Tray 2 before continuing. 775-673 100
775-914 100
Enter the diagnostic mode from the UI and select MAX Setup. Select TRC Set UP/Toner Con-
centration Adjustment. Select TRC Control (dC922). Make a ProCon test pattern by pressing 775-924 100
the Start button. Examine the copy for mottle-like or non-uniform (spotty) density in the high-
density patches. One of these defects is present in the 100% patch (top row) in black.
Y N
Go to IQ 2 Defect Listing and choose one or more of the following defects to continue
troubleshooting: mottle, high image density, deletions, or spots.
Select Close three times to take you back to the main menu. Select NVM Read/Write. NVM
locations 773-021 through 773-028 are set to “1”.
Y N
Select MAX Setup. Select and run ADC AGC Setup (dC934) and VH/VM Setup (dC933)
in Max Setup (dC929) and investigate any system failure that is declared.
NVM 773-004 is set to “1”;

Y N
Set NVM to “1”.
The value in NVM location 773-121 is between 5 and 95 (this number represents the per-
centage of room humidity).
Y N
Replace the Humidity Sensor (PL 7.1).
Refer to Table 1 to ensure that all the NVM settings indicated are correct. If any NVM value
needs to be changed, replace the developer material (REP 6.6.2). If all NVM values are correct
but it has been less than 2,000 copies since the IOT s/w 6.00.2 was installed, replace the
developer material (REP 6.6.2).

IQ 46 Black Bead Carryout RAP 3-42 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP Table 1
The purpose of the Automatic Toner Concentration Sensor, ATC, is to detect toner concentra- NVM Content
tions within the color developer housings (Y, M, and C). The DC12 process controls use the 775-748 M_TC measured value failure at setup
input from the ATC Sensor to maintain TC in the 5-10% range (as described below) minimizing
775-749 C_TC measured value failure at setup
TC related defects such as BCO and Starvation. BCO or Bead Carry Out commonly occurs
775-750 Setup failure, any of the above failures
when the TC drops below 5%. BCO appears as mottle or white spots in high-density areas.
Starvation can occur when the TC exceeds 10%. Starvation appears as a deletion at the
boundary between a high and low-density area. Recovery procedure at NVM Failure
In the DC12 (DCCS50), 65% Y, M, C ADC process control patches are periodically read by the Table 2
ADC Sensor and compared to ADC Targets. If the readings are not within a specified range of NG action
the targets, the machine will tone up or down as required. The machine is constantly adjusting NVM Value (perform
the ADC Targets based on input from the Humidity Sensor and ATC Sensor. The process con- 1 = OK action
trols attempt to maintain densities across different environments while maintaining TC in the 5- 0 = NG Content below)
10% range.
775-741 Dark current failure 1
For Black, the machine monitors a 60% and 100% ADC patch. Since the ATC Sensor cannot 775-742 Reference plane output failure 3, 2, 1
measure Black TC, the 100% Black ADC patch was implemented in software 6.002 or Tag#16. 775-743 Y_TC measured value failure 4, 2, 1
775-744 M_TC measured value failure 4, 2, 1
The ATC Sensor consists of; ATC Sensor Assembly, wire harness (J\P 423 on the IOT Drive
775-745 C_TC measured value failure 4, 2, 1
PWB), Plate assembly, and an assisting IOT Drive PWB. Troubleshooting the functionality of
775-746 Shutter open/close failure 2
the ATC Sensor is mainly executed through NVM read and write. dC330 component control
has been implemented. 775-747 Y_TC measured value failure at setup 4, 2, 1
775-748 M_TC measured value failure at setup 4, 2, 1
Appendix 1 is the set-up procedure to turn ATC Sensor on for machines with software v7.5.3. 775-749 C_TC measured value failure at setup 4, 2, 1
775-750 Setup failure (any of the above failures 3, 2, 1
SOFTWARE (NVM) REPAIRS:
1. The machine must have software version V6.00.2 or higher installed.
Action 1: Replace the ATC Sensor and verify the connection.
2. Make sure NVM 775-731=1on (ATC function 0=OFF / 1=ON)
Action 2: Verify shutter operation. dC330 component controls 009-039 shutter operation.
3. Check the value of NVM 775-815 (TC set average). Software v6.2.0 has default 250 with- (See step 8).
out ATC Sensor set-up. Software v6.00.x has default 0 without ATC Sensor set-up. (See
Action 3: Ensure the Sensor/reference plane is free from contamination.
Appendix 3c). The value can also be affected by the space between the ATC Sensor and
Action 4: Verify correct installation of the ATC Sensor Assembly.
the Developer Housing Mag- Roll. See Appendix 1 for re-setup instructions. After a suc-
cessful set-up, NVM 775-815 should be between 150 – 230. 5. Check the following NVM. 775-761 (Measurement TC Sensor Dark Current) value should
be less than “200”. Check 775-762 (Measurement of TC Reference Plane) value range
4. Using Table 1, confirm that the following NVM values are 1. If any of the values are 0,
repeat steps b) through g) of Appendix 1. After steps b) through g) are completed, refer “200” ~ “600”. If NVM are not within given range, perform step 8 (dC330 component con-
trol). If NVM are not within range after dC330 (step 8), ensure the ATC Sensor and shut-
back to Table 1 and confirm that the values are all 1. If any values are 0, refer to the recov-
ter is free from contamination. If problem continues perform steps b) through g) of
ery procedure listed for the corrective action.
Appendix 1. If problem continues refer to the “Hardware Repairs.”
Table 1 6. ADC Targets. Check the NVM and change to given value if necessary. The ADC Targets
must be set to nominal values. 773-266=230; 773-267=230; 773-268=250; 773-269=160.
NVM Content
If any of the NVM values are not set to nominal, correct values and perform steps b)
775-741 Dark current failure through g) of Appendix 1.
775-742 Reference plane output failure 7. When ATC Sensor is installed, specified developer is noted by NVM. Machines from man-
775-743 Y_TC measured value failure ufacturing should have all new color developers. If ATC Sensor was installed in field, then
the developer that is replaced must be specified by NVM. Check the NVM and ensure it
775-744 M_TC measured value failure
corresponds with specified developer. (775-737 see Appendix 1e).
775-745 C_TC measured value failure
8. dC330 (Component Control) after the ATC Sensor is implemented.
775-746 Shutter open/close failure
The following dC330 routines have been added according to the ATC Sensor implemen-
775-747 Y_TC measured value failure at setup
tation:

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-43 IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP
009-038 (ATC_LED): actuates the LED ON/OFF. Table 3
009-039 (Opening/closing of the shutter and TC measurement): NVM designation Chain Link SET value
Measurement of the TC: NVM 775-982 (This function requires that the desired developer
TC_OUT_Hilimit2[Y] 775 825 15
housing is facing the ATC Sensor. Perform the following steps:
TC_OUT_Hilimit2[M] 775 826 15
a. Enter sub-system check on the UI and sub-system test on the PWS for machine
TC_OUT_Hilimit2[C] 775 827 15
diagnostics. Select developer unit check.
TC_OUT_Lolimit1[Y] 775 829 20
b. For best observation, remove machine Right Upper Cover PL 11.2.
TC_OUT_Lolimit1[M] 775 830 20
c. Press Start (if using the UI) or move desired developer into position. Please note the
ATC Sensor is opposite the development position. (UI diagnostics) Select Black, TC_OUT_Lolimit1[C] 775 831 20
results in Yellow at ATC Sensor position. Select Magenta, results in Cyan at ATC TC_CNT_Hi2_MAX 775 839 8
Sensor position. Select Cyan results in Black at ATC Sensor position. Select Yellow, TC_CNT_Lo2_MAX 775 840 8
results in Home position. Select Home, results in Magenta at ATC Sensor position.
TC_CYAN_OFFSET 775 850 494
d. Close “developer unit check” screen. The desired developer housing remains in
TC_RADCS_UP_STEP2 775 859 10
position.
TC_RADCS_DWN_STEP2 775 860 8
e. Enter dC330 Component control. Enter 009-039 and press Start. (Shutter activa-
Delta_RADCS_TC_MAX[Y] 775 874 592
tion). Close dC330.
Delta_RADCS_TC_MAX[M] 775 875 592
f. Enter NVM read \ write. NVM 775-982 = TC reading for desired color. (Black is not
detectable with ATC Sensors) Value range 140 ~ 200 for selected color. Delta_RADCS_TC_MAX[C] 775 876 592
g. If 775-982 is out of given range, perform steps b) through h) of Appendix 1. If prob- TC_PV_INT 775 896 4
lem continues refer to “Hardware Repairs”. Radc_SET_Adj_MIN[K] 775 914 100
9. Check the following NVM and ensure the values are set to given value. Correct values if Radc_SET_DISP_Adj_MIN[K] 775 924 100
needed and repeat steps b) through g) of Appendix 1 TC_SET_OUT_MAX[Y] 775 966 300
TC_SET_OUT_MAX[M] 775 967 300
Table 3
TC_SET_OUT_MAX[C] 775 968 300
NVM designation Chain Link SET value
TC_SET_INIT 775 991 205
TH2_100_PV_K 773 223 200
K_Delta_VHS_HUM_DWN 773 286 961 10. dC131 (NVM) after the ATC Sensor is implemented.
K_Delta_VMS_HUM_DWN 773 287 250 11.Check that the following dC131 values have been added according to the ATC Sensor
K_Delta_BIAS_HUM_DWN 773 289 624 implementation. NVM are noted if values are judgements or result readings to clarify
K_Delta_Radc_SET_HUM_K_DWN 773 309 0 some NVM are readings and may vary.
TH1_G100(K) 775 664 65 Table 4

TH2_G100(K) 775 669 60
Chain-Link NVM Initial
Delta_RADCS_100_MAX_K 775 673 100 No. Designation Value Set Range Meaning
ATC_CTRL_SW 775 731 1
775-731 ATC_CTRL_SW 1 0~65535 ATC Control Switch 1=ON,
TC_OFFSET_OUT_TH 775 773 200
0=OFF
TC_Ref_OUT_MIN 775 776 200
775-736 TC_Flag1 0 0~65535 Calibration Control of the
TC_Ref_OUT_MAX 775 777 600 ATC Sensor for M/C to M/C
TC_OUT_Adj_MAX 775 779 350 variation
TC_Ref 775 783 420 1: Execution of the TRC CON
TC_SET[Y] 775 784 173 + Diag.
0: TRC CONT + MINISET by
TC_SET[M] 775 785 173
ATC
TC_SET[C] 775 786 175
TC_OUT_Hilimit1[Y] 775 821 30
TC_OUT_Hilimit1[M] 775 822 30
TC_OUT_Hilimit1[C] 775 823 30

IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP 3-44 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 4 Table 6
Chain-Link NVM Initial Chain-Link NVM Initial
No. Designation Value Set Range Meaning No. Designation Value Set Range Meaning
0~65535 Color Selection for ATC Con- 775-752 TC_Ref_OUT_Fai 0 0~65535 Frequency of measured TC
trol l value fail with reference
1: YMC (initial value) 2: only plane (hidden fail)
Y, 3: only M, 4: only C, 5: only 775-753 TC_OUT_Fail[Y] 0 0~65535 Frequency of measured TC
YM, 6: only YC, 7: only MC value fail (hidden fail) [Y]
775-754 TC_OUT_Fail[M] 0 0~65535 Frequency of measured TC
ATC SENSORS RESULT JUDGMENT OF TC (OK or NG, see step 4) value fail (hidden fail) [M]
775-755 TC_OUT_Fail[C] 0 0~65535 Frequency of measured TC
Table 5
value fail (hidden fail) [C]
Chain-Link NVM Initial 775-756 TC_Ref_OPEN_ 0 0~65535 Frequency of measured TC
No. Designation Value Set Range Meaning OUT_Fail value fail with shutter open
775-741 TC_OFFSET_OU 1 0~65535 Judgment of TCOFFSET out- (hidden fail)
T_jd put (1: OK, 0:NG)
775-742 TC_Ref_OUT_jd 1 0~65535 Judgement of TC reference ATC SENSOR TC READING RESULTS. (see value range description detailed in step 8f).
plane measurement (1: OK,
0:NG) Table 7
775-743 TC_OUT_jd[Y] 1 0~65535 Judgement of measured TC Chain-Link NVM Initial
value (1: OK, 0:NG) [Y] No. Designation Value Set Range Meaning
775-744 TC_OUT_jd[M] 1 0~65535 Judgement of measured TC 775-791 TC_OUT_Adj[Y] 200 140 ~ 200 TC output adjustment value
value (1: OK, 0:NG) [M] [Y]
775-745 TC_OUT_jd[C] 1 0~65535 Judgement of measured TC 775-792 TC_OUT_Adj[M] 200 140 ~ 200 TC output adjustment value
value (1: OK, 0:NG) [C] [M]
775-746 TC_Ref_OPEN_ 1 0~65535 Judgement of measured TC 775-793 TC_OUT_Adj[C] 200 140 ~ 200 TC output adjustment value
OUT_jd value with shutter open (1: [C]
OK, 0:NG) 775-782 TC_OUT_Daig_A 0 140 ~ 200 Adjustment results of TC
775-747 TC_SET_OUT_jd 1 0~65535 Judgement of measured TC dj measured value at Diag I/O
[Y] value at Diag setup (1: OK, check
0:NG) [Y]
775-748 TC_SET_OUT_jd 1 0~65535 Judgement of measured TC
Appendix 1. ATC set-up procedure
[M] value at Diag setup (1: OK,
1. Install at least one new developer. The ATC Sensor must be calibrated from new devel-
0:NG) [M]
oper.
775-749 TC_SET_OUT_jd 1 0~65535 Judgement of measured TC
2. Set 775-731 to 1 turns ATC Sensor on. (0 = off).
[C] value at Diag setup (1: OK,
0:NG) [C] 3. Confirm NVM 773-266 through 269 are set to 230, 230, 250, 160. (ADC Targets nominal
values).
775-750 TC_SET_ALL_jd 1 0~65535 General judgement of ATC
control (1: OK, 0:NG) 4. Set 775-736 to 1. (Value will return to 0 after executing dC922).
5. Set 775-737 to appropriate value depending on developer material replaced for set-up.
NVM COUNTER FOR TC MEASUREMENT FAILURE. (see Appendix 3c) • 1 = replacement of YMC
• 2 = replacement of Y
Table 6 • 3 = replacement of M
Chain-Link NVM Initial • 4 = replacement of C
No. Designation Value Set Range Meaning • 5 = replacement of YM
775-751 TC_OFFSET_OU 0 0~65535 Frequency of TCOFFSET • 6 = replacement of YC
T_Fail output fail (hidden fail) • 7 = replacement of MC

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-45 IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP
A
6. Mix developer by executing three (3) internal test pattern #10 from the UI diagnostics or Enter dC330 [9-038] ATC LED. Open and close the shutter. The LED changes state.
Test Pattern #99 “other halftones” 0% Cin (blank print) from PWS. Y N
7. Execute dC922 TRC Control – Ignore Tone-up or down result. +5 VDC is measured between P/J 423-4 and DC COM.
Y N
8. Check 775-741 through 750 = 1 for successful setup. See step #4 of the “Software
Repairs” and perform action if required. Check the IOT Drive PWB for damage and loose mounting. Replace the IOT Drive
PWB (PL 9.2) as required.
Appendix 2 Necessity of Re-Setup
+ 5 VDC is measured between P/J 750-4 and DC COM.
ATC Sensor is required to be re-setup per the Setup Procedure in Appendix 1 in the following
Y N
cases.
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 9.2 and check the wires for an open. If the wires check OK,
replace the ATC Sensor Assy (PL 9.1).
• When one or more developers are replaced.
• When the sensor or sensor assembly is replaced (not required for simple removal of Inspect the LED and ensure that it is clean and free of contamination. Replace the ATC
bracket). Sensor Assy (PL 9.1) as required.
• When position of the sensor installed is obviously displaced (distortion of the bracket,
installation error etc…). The circuit appears to be functional. If the problem continues, inspect the LED and ensure that
Appendix 3 it is clean and free of contamination. Replace the ATC Sensor Assy (PL 9.1) as required.
1. If an ATC Sensor is installed in a machine and NOT calibrated (i.e. 775-736 is not set to 1
and dC922 is not executed) the default value for 775-815 (calibration reference) is
250(SW V6.1X) or 0(SW V6.00.X).
2. ATC Sensor takes readings every 5th copy based on A3 or 11 x 17 inch paper. The
machine maintains a running average of the last 3 readings.
3. Installing sw 6.12 or higher to a machine WITHOUT an ATC Sensor, 775-731 MUST BE
TURNED OFF TO “0” MANUALLY. If the ATC Sensor remains on, the NVM fail counter will
continue to count, but poses no problem to ATC related density. When upgrading software
to sw6.12 or higher (machine that has ATC Sensor turned on), value 775-815 must be
transferred to current machine NVM read and write.
Hardware Repairs
Initial Actions
• Ensure that wire harness P\J500 is connected from the ATC Sensor Assembly to P/J423
the of IOT DRV PWB.
• Inspect the ATC Sensor Assembly for shutter damage, LED/shutter for contamination, .
• Make sure the assembly is installed correctly
• If the shutter is contaminated wipe with soft cloth.
Procedure
Check function of the shutter by dC330 009-039 closes and opens the shutter, 009-038 actu-
ates the LED on and off. The ATC shutter operates.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J278-2 and P/J278-3 on the ATC Sensor Assy.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P423-1 and P423-3 on the IOT Driver PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 9.2 and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 9.2 and check the wires for an open circuit.
Replace the ATC Sensor Assy (PL 9.1)
A
IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP 3-46 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Image Quality Specifications
Refer to the hard copy supplement for Image Quality Specifications (701P15670).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-47 Image Quality Specifications
Image Quality Specifications 3-48 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Image Quality Defects
Refer to the hard copy supplement for Image Quality Defects (701P15670).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-49 Image Quality Defects
Image Quality Defects 3-50 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
4 Repairs & Adjustments
REPAIRS REP 3.3.1 Carriage Cables ............................................................................................. 4-55
REP 3.3.2 Carriage Motor ............................................................................................... 4-60
1. DRIVE REP 3.4.1 Exposure Lamp.............................................................................................. 4-61
REP 1.3.1 Belt (Developer Drive) ................................................................................... 4-3 REP 3.4.2 Lamp Wire Harness ....................................................................................... 4-62
REP 1.4.1 Belt (2nd BTR, Auger) ................................................................................... 4-5 REP 3.5.1 IPS Chassis ................................................................................................... 4-63
REP 1.5.1 Tray 5/Regi. /Tray 1 Take Away Drive........................................................... 4-8
REP 1.6.1 Exit Drive ....................................................................................................... 4-9 4. ROS
REP 1.6.2 Fuser Drive .................................................................................................... 4-11 REP 4.1.1 ROS ............................................................................................................... 4-65
REP 1.6.3 Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly ...................................................................... 4-13
5. XEROGRAPHICS
2. PAPER TRANSPORT REP 5.1.1 Erase Lamp.................................................................................................... 4-67
REP 2.1.1 Tray 1 Set Sensor.......................................................................................... 4-17 REP 5.3.1 Drum Unit....................................................................................................... 4-68
REP 2.1.2 Tray 2/3/4 Size Sensor .................................................................................. 4-17 REP 5.3.3 Cleaning Brush .............................................................................................. 4-69
REP 2.4.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feeder ....................................................................................... 4-18 REP 5.3.4 Cleaning Blade............................................................................................... 4-70
REP 2.5.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly ...................................................... 4-19 REP 5.4.1 Charge Corotron ............................................................................................ 4-71
REP 2.6.1 Feed Lift Motor............................................................................................... 4-20 REP 5.4.2 PCC Wire ....................................................................................................... 4-71
REP 2.6.2 Retard Roll..................................................................................................... 4-21 REP 5.5.1 Waste Toner Auger........................................................................................ 4-73
REP 2.7.1 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive ............................................................................. 4-22 REP 5.5.2 Auger Belt ...................................................................................................... 4-74
REP 2.7.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed T/A Clutch............................................................................ 4-22
REP 2.7.3 T/A Motor ....................................................................................................... 4-24
6. DEVELOPMENT
REP 6.1.1 Rotary PWB ................................................................................................... 4-77
REP 2.8.1 Tray 1 Feed-out Sensor, T/A Sensor............................................................. 4-24
REP 6.1.2 Rotary Home Position Sensor........................................................................ 4-78
REP 2.8.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed-out Sensor........................................................................... 4-26
REP 6.1.3 Rotary Latch Lever......................................................................................... 4-79
REP 2.9.1 Tray 5............................................................................................................. 4-27
REP 6.1.4 Bias Brush...................................................................................................... 4-82
REP 2.11.1 Tray 5 Nudger Roll....................................................................................... 4-28
REP 6.2.1 Toner Cartridge Unit ...................................................................................... 4-83
REP 2.11.2 Tray 5 Feed Roll .......................................................................................... 4-29
REP 6.3.1 Toner Cartridge Housing (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) ............................ 4-84
REP 2.12.1 Tray 5 Lift Motor........................................................................................... 4-30
REP 6.3.2 Cartridge/Dispense Motor (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)........................... 4-85
REP 2.12.2 Tray 5 Retard Roll........................................................................................ 4-32
REP 6.4.1 Dispense PWB............................................................................................... 4-86
REP 2.14.1 Regi. Unit ..................................................................................................... 4-33
REP 6.6.1 Development Housing.................................................................................... 4-87
REP 2.15.1 Regi. Sensor ................................................................................................ 4-35
REP 6.6.2 Developer Replacement ................................................................................ 4-89
REP 2.15.2 Regi. Roll ..................................................................................................... 4-36
REP 6.7.1 Rotary Auger (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)............................................... 4-92
REP 2.15.3 Regi. Motor .................................................................................................. 4-37
REP 6.7.2 Trickle Auger.................................................................................................. 4-96
REP 2.16.1 Pre Regi. Sensor ......................................................................................... 4-38
REP 2.16.2 Pre Regi. Roll............................................................................................... 4-38 7. IBT
REP 2.17.1 Vacuum Transport ....................................................................................... 4-39 REP 7.1.1 IBT ................................................................................................................. 4-99
REP 2.17.2 Vacuum Transport Belt ................................................................................ 4-40 REP 7.1.2 IBT Cleaner.................................................................................................... 4-101
REP 2.21.1 Duplex Path Sensor ..................................................................................... 4-41 REP 7.5.1 IBT Belt .......................................................................................................... 4-102
REP 2.21.2 Duplex Out Sensor ...................................................................................... 4-42 REP 7.6.1 Bias Roll......................................................................................................... 4-104
REP 2.21.3 Duplex Belt 1/2 ............................................................................................ 4-43 REP 7.6.2 Drive Roll ....................................................................................................... 4-106
REP 2.23.1 Inverter 1...................................................................................................... 4-45 REP 7.6.3 Back-up Roll................................................................................................... 4-108
REP 2.23.2 Inverter 2...................................................................................................... 4-47 REP 7.6.4 Contact Roll ................................................................................................... 4-109
REP 2.24.1 Inverter Motor .............................................................................................. 4-48 REP 7.9.1 2nd BTR......................................................................................................... 4-109
REP 2.24.2 Release Solenoid......................................................................................... 4-48 REP 7.10.1 2nd BTR Roll................................................................................................ 4-111
REP 2.26.1 Exit Roll........................................................................................................ 4-49
8. FUSER
3. IIT REP 8.1.1 Fuser Unit ...................................................................................................... 4-115
REP 3.1.1 Platen Glass .................................................................................................. 4-51 REP 8.2.1 Donor Roll Assembly ..................................................................................... 4-116
REP 3.1.2 IIT Opening/Closing ....................................................................................... 4-52 REP 8.3.1 Heat Roll ........................................................................................................ 4-117
REP 3.2.1 CCD PWB ...................................................................................................... 4-54 REP 8.3.2 Heat Roll Heater Rod..................................................................................... 4-120
Reissue 1/05 Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.3.3 Pressure Roll ................................................................................................. 4-122 REP 13.14.1 Decurler Stepping Motor ............................................................................ 4-184
REP 8.3.4 Pressure Roll Heater Rod.............................................................................. 4-125
REP 8.3.5 Heat Roll Stripper Finger ............................................................................... 4-127 14. OCT
REP 8.4.1 Web Motor/EXT-HR Retract Motor ................................................................ 4-128 REP 14.1.1 Offset Motor ................................................................................................. 4-185
REP 8.7.1 Oil Pump ........................................................................................................ 4-131 19. IDFE
REP 8.7.2 Oil Wick.......................................................................................................... 4-132 REP 19.1 Removing the IDFE......................................................................................... 4-187
REP 8.8.1 External H/R Heater Rod ............................................................................... 4-133
REP 19.2 Token Ring PWB (IDFE)................................................................................. 4-188
REP 8.8.2 External Heat Roll.......................................................................................... 4-136 REP 19.3 DIMMs on the Motherboard (IDFE)................................................................. 4-188
REP 8.10.1 Pressure Roll Stripper Finger ...................................................................... 4-137
ADJUSTMENTS
9. ELECTRICAL
REP 9.2.1 Opening/Closing the IOT Control PWB Chassis............................................ 4-139 3. IIT
REP 9.2.2 IOT Drive PWB .............................................................................................. 4-139 ADJ. 3.4.1 Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage Position............................................................ 4-189
REP 9.2.3 Half Tone PWB .............................................................................................. 4-141
REP 9.3.1 Power Chassis............................................................................................... 4-143 6. DEVELOPMENT
REP 9.3.2 IOT LVPS....................................................................................................... 4-145 ADJ 6.1.1 Rotary Home Position Sensor ........................................................................ 4-193
REP 9.3.3 B3/B3H (ESS) LVPS...................................................................................... 4-146 ADJ 6.6.1 Rotary Development Housing Position........................................................... 4-193
REP 9.5.1 Control Panel ................................................................................................. 4-148
8. FUSER
REP 9.6 Billing Data PWB Replacement ........................................................................ 4-149
ADJ 8.1.1 Fuser Nip (DC701) ......................................................................................... 4-197
10. AIR SYSTEM ADJ 8.8.1 External Heat Roll Nip Adjustment ................................................................. 4-197
REP 10.2.1 Fuser Fan .................................................................................................... 4-151
9. ELECTRICAL
REP 10.2.2 Suction Blower Motor................................................................................... 4-152
ADJ 9.1.1 MAX SET UP (dC929).................................................................................... 4-199
11. COVER ADJ 9.1.2 IIT Calibration (dC945) ................................................................................... 4-199
REP 11.1.1 Platen Cushion ............................................................................................ 4-153 ADJ 9.1.3 ADC AGC Setup (dC934)............................................................................... 4-200
ADJ 9.1.4 VH/VM Setup (dC933).................................................................................... 4-200
12. DADF ADJ 9.1.5 IOT Highlight Setup (dC918) .......................................................................... 4-201
REP 12.1.1 DADF ........................................................................................................... 4-155 ADJ 9.1.6 TRC Control/Toner Density (dC922) .............................................................. 4-201
REP 12.2.2 Registration Gate Solenoid.......................................................................... 4-156 ADJ 9.1.7 TRC Adjust (dC924)/TRC Check PG (dC939) ............................................... 4-202
REP 12.3.1 Left/Right Counter Balance.......................................................................... 4-156 ADJ 9.1.8 Color Balance Setup (dC919: Copier/Printer) ................................................ 4-203
REP 12.3.2 DADF Control PWB ..................................................................................... 4-158 ADJ 9.1.10 IOT Registration Series (dC129) .................................................................. 4-203
REP 12.4.1 Feed Motor .................................................................................................. 4-159 ADJ 9.1.14 IIT Lead Edge Registration........................................................................... 4-207
REP 12.4.2 Nudger Roll.................................................................................................. 4-160 ADJ 9.1.15 IIT Side Edge Registration............................................................................ 4-208
REP 12.4.3 Feed Roll ..................................................................................................... 4-161 ADJ 9.1.16 IIT Horizontal Magnification/Vertical Magnification (IIT Machine)................. 4-209
REP 12.5.1 Document Feed Lower Chute ...................................................................... 4-162 ADJ 9.1.17 Tray 5 Guide (dC740)................................................................................... 4-211
REP 12.5.2 Retard Roll................................................................................................... 4-163 ADJ 9.1.18 Touch Panel Starting Point Correction ......................................................... 4-212
REP 12.5.3 Set Gate Solenoid........................................................................................ 4-164 ADJ 9.1.19 Tray 2, 3, and 4 for 12 x 18 Paper................................................................ 4-213
REP 12.5.4 Registration Sensor ..................................................................................... 4-165
REP 12.5.5 Size Sensors 1/2 (Rear/Front) ..................................................................... 4-166 12. DADF
REP 12.6.1 DADF Belt Motor.......................................................................................... 4-167 ADJ 12.1.1 DADF Side Registration ............................................................................... 4-215
REP 12.7.1 Duplex Sensor ............................................................................................. 4-168 ADJ 12.3.1 Left/Right Counter Balance .......................................................................... 4-216
REP 12.8.1 Registration Pinch Roll ................................................................................ 4-170 ADJ 12.3.2 DADF Parallelism ......................................................................................... 4-217
REP 12.9.1 Exit Motor..................................................................................................... 4-172 ADJ 12.3.3 DADF Height ................................................................................................ 4-218
REP 12.10.1 Platen Belt ................................................................................................. 4-173 ADJ 12.4.1 DADF Lead Edge Registration ..................................................................... 4-221
13. MAIL BOX SORTER

REP 13.3.1 Decurler ....................................................................................................... 4-175
REP 13.5.1 Vertical LED/Sensor .................................................................................... 4-176
REP 13.5.2 Bin Tray 1 .................................................................................................... 4-177
REP 13.6.1 Bin Trays 2 - 10 ........................................................................................... 4-179
REP 13.13.1 Decurler Rolls 1/2 ...................................................................................... 4-180
REP 13.13.2 Gear and Cam ........................................................................................... 4-182
Repairs and Adjustments 1/05 Reissue

manuals4you.com
REP 1.3.1 Belt (Developer Drive) 3. Remove the main motor.
Parts List on PL 1.3

Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3).
2. Remove the Toner Waste Bottle.
3. Open the IOT Control PWB Chassis (REP 9.2.1).
4. Remove the flywheel and flange (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screws (2).
2. Remove the Flywheel.
3. Loosen the screws (2).
4. Remove the flange.
Figure 2 Removing the Main Motor
7. Remove the Main Motor Bracket (Figure 3).

2. Remove the bracket.
Figure 1 Removing the Flywheel
5. Remove the Waste Toner Auger (REP 5.5.1).

6. Remove the Main Motor (Figure 2).
1. Disconnect the connectors (2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 4-3 REP 1.3.1
Figure 3 Removing the Main Motor Bracket
8. Remove the Rotary Developer Duct (Figure 4).

2. Remove the VSEL rear bracket.
4. Remove the Rotary Developer Duct.
Figure 4 Removing the Rotary Developer Duct
9. Remove the belt (Figure 5).

1. Remove the spring.
2. Loosen the screw.
5. Remove the belt.

REP 1.3.1 4-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 1.4.1 Belt (2nd BTR, Auger)
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 7)
2. Remove the Toner Waste Bottle.
4. Remove the Flywheel and flange (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Flywheel.
4. Remove the flange.
Figure 5 Removing the Belt
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Removing the Waster Toner Auger
5. Remove the Waster Toner Auger (REP 5.5.1).

6. Remove the Main Motor (Figure 2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 4-5 REP 1.3.1, REP 1.4.1
Remove the Main Motor.
Figure 3 Removing the Main Motor Bracket

Figure 2 Removing the Main Motor
8. Remove the Auger Drive (Figure 4).
7. Remove the Main Motor Bracket (Figure 3). 1. Disconnect the connectors (2).
1. Remove the screws (7). 2. Remove the E-clip.
2. Remove the bracket. 3. Remove the gear.
5. Remove the Auger Drive.
6. Disconnect the connector.
7. Remove the bearing.

manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Removing the Auger Drive Figure 5 Removing the Belt
9. Remove the belt (Figure 5). Installation

1. Loosen the screws (2) and the belt tension. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
3. Remove the gear pulley.
4. Remove the gear pulley.
5. Remove the belt.

REP 1.5.1 Tray 5/Regi. /Tray 1 Take Away Drive
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Left Upper Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 2)
3. Remove the Tray 5/Regi. and Tray 1 Take Away Drive (Figure 1).
3. Release the clamp and remove the harness.
6. Remove the drive.
Figure 1 Removing the Drives
Installation

manuals4you.com
REP 1.6.1 Exit Drive
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Filter Unit Cover (PL 11.2 Item 4)
4. Move the wire harness (Figure 1).
1. Release the clamps (2).
2. Move the harness.
3. Remove the clamp.
Figure 1 Moving the Harness
5. Remove the duct (Figure 2).

2. Remove the duct.

Figure 2 Removing the Duct
6. Remove the Exit Drive (Figure 3).

1. Remove the screw.
2. Remove the Motor Cover.
5. Remove the motor.
7. Remove the Exit Drive.
Figure 3 Removing the Exit Drive
Installation

manuals4you.com
REP 1.6.2 Fuser Drive
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the following covers:
1. IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 7)
2. Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 11)
3. Filter Unit Cover (PL 11.2 Item 4)
4. Pull out Tray 1.
5. Remove the Auger Sensor and the 2nd BTR HVPS (Figure 1).
3. Remove the sensor.
5. Pull out the connector.
6. Remove the screws (3)
7. Remove the 2nd BTR HVPS.
Figure 1 Removing the Auger Sensor

2. Release the hook and remove the duct.

7. Remove the Filter Case (Figure 3).

1. Remove the filter.
2. Remove the duct.
4. Remove the Filter Case.
Figure 3 Removing the Filter Case
8. Remove the Fuser Drive (Figure 4).

1. Disconnect the connector (2).
3. Remove the Fuser Drive.

manuals4you.com
REP 1.6.3 Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly
Removal
1. Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
• IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 7)
• Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 11)
• Filter Unit Cover (PL 11.2 Item 4)
Figure 4 Removing the Fuser Drive
Installation Figure 1 Removing the Duct

4. Remove the Filter Case (PL 10.2 Item 3) (Figure 2).
1. Remove the filter.
2. Remove the duct by lifting up and out of the Filter Case.
4. Remove the Filter Case.

7. Remove Inverter 2 (REP 2.23.2).

8. Remove Inverter 1 (REP 2.23.1).
NOTE: Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly is mounted on the rear frame at the top of the
inverter opening
9. Remove the Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly (Figure 4 and Figure 5).
Figure 2 Removing the Filter Case
5. Lower the IOT Control PWB Chassis (REP 9.2.1).

6. Remove the Filter Duct (PL 10.2 Item 2) (Figure 3)
2. Remove the duct.

manuals4you.com
Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly is seated correctly. If assembly is not in
the correct position, the K-clips cannot be installed.
1
Remove screws (2)
from bracket (inside of
machine)
Figure 4 Removing the Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly - Inside of Machine
3
Unplug Clutch,
release harness
clamps (2)
1
Remove
Screw
2
Remove K-clips (2)
Figure 5 Removing the Nip Clutch - Rear Frame of Machine

manuals4you.com
REP 2.1.1 Tray 1 Set Sensor REP 2.1.2 Tray 2/3/4 Size Sensor
Parts List on PL 2.1 Parts List on PL 2.1
Removal Removal
WARNING NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 2 Sensor.
1. Remove trays 1 and 2 to allow easy access (PL 2.1 Item 4).
WARNING
2. Remove the Tray 1 Set Sensor (Figure 1).
1. Remove Trays 1 through 4 to allow easy access (PL 2.1 Item 4).
2. Remove the Tray 2 Size Sensor (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Tray 1 Sensor.
3. Remove the Tray 2 Size Sensor.
Figure 1 Removing the Tray 1 Set Sensor
Installation Figure 1 Removing the Tray 2 Size Sensor

Installation

REP 2.4.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feeder 4. Remove the Tray 1 Feeder (Figure 2).
2. Remove the KL-clip.
Removal
NOTE: The KL-clip exists only in trays 2/3/4. (Tray 1 does not have a KL-clip.)
NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 1 Feeder.
3. Remove the stud.
NOTE: If the Feeder Assembly must be replaced, make sure to reset the HFSI counter. 4. Remove the Tray 1 Feeder.
1. Tray 1: DC135(008-801)
2. Tray 2: DC135(008-802)
3. Tray 3: DC135(008-803)
4. Tray 4: DC135(008-804)
WARNING
1. Open the Left Lower Cover.
2. Pull out Tray 1.
3. Pull out the Tray 1 Feeder (Figure 1).
2. Pull out the Tray 1 Feeder.
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 1 Feeder
Installation
Figure 1 Pulling out the Tray 1 Feeder

manuals4you.com
REP 2.5.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly 4. Remove the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (Figure 2).
1. Push the pins on both sides.
2. Remove the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly.
Removal
NOTE: Replace the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly and the Retard Roll at the same time.
NOTE: After replacing the Feed Nudger Roll Assembly, reset the HFSI counter.
1. Tray 1: DC135(008-801)
2. Tray 2: DC135(008-802)
3. Tray 3: DC135(008-803)
4. Tray 4: DC135(008-804)
NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 1 Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly.
WARNING
1. Pull out Tray 1.
3. Pull out the Tray 1 Feeder (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Removing the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly
Installation

REP 2.6.1 Feed Lift Motor
Removal
NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 1Feed Lift Motor.
WARNING
1. Pull out the Tray 1 Feeder (REP 2.4.1).
2. Remove the bracket (Figure 1).
3. Remove the E-clip and bearings.
Figure 2 Removing the Feed Lift Motor
Installation
NOTE: Do not mistake the solenoid mounting screw for the bracket mounting screw.
Figure 1 Removing the Bracket
3. Remove the Feed Lift Motor (Figure 2).

2. Remove the Feed Lift Motor.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.6.2 Retard Roll 4. Remove the Tray 1 Retard Roll (Figure 2).
1. Push in the pins on both sides.
2. Remove the Retard Roll.
Removal
NOTE: Replace the Retard Roll and Feed/Nudger Assembly at the same time.
NOTE: After replacing the Retard Roll, reset the HFSI counter.
1. Tray 1: DC135 (008-801)
2. Tray 2: DC135 (008-802)
3. Tray 3: DC135 (008-803)
4. Tray 4: DC135 (008-804)
NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 1 Retard Roll.
WARNING
1. Pull out Tray 1.
3. Pull out Tray 1 Feeder (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 1 Retard Roll
Installation

REP 2.7.1 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive REP 2.7.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed T/A Clutch
Parts List on PL 2.7B Parts List on PL 2.7A
Removal Removal
WARNING NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 2 Feed T/A Clutch.
1. Remove the following parts:
WARNING
a. IOT LVPS (REP 9.3.2).
1. Remove the Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (REP 2.7.1).
b. LVPS bracket (PL 9.3 Item 4)
2. Disconnect the connector (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (Figure 1).
2. Remove the wire from the saddle edge.
3. Remove the Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive.
Figure 1 Disconnecting the connector
Figure 1 Removing the Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive 3. Remove the Tray 2 Feed T/A Clutch (Figure 2).
1. Remove the E-clip.
Installation 2. Remove the gear.
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. 3. Remove the bearing.
4. Remove the shaft. (Push the release button on the clutch.)
5. Remove the Tray 2 Feed T/A Clutch.

REP 2.7.1, REP 2.7.2 4-22 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 2 Feed T/A Clutch Figure 3 Reassembly
Installation
NOTE: When you reinstall the parts, make sure to insert the bracket stopper into the clutch tab
(Figure 3).

REP 2.7.3 T/A Motor REP 2.8.1 Tray 1 Feed-out Sensor, T/A Sensor
Parts List on PL 2.7A Parts List on PL 2.8
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
1. Remove the Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (REP 2.7.1). 1. Open the Left Lower Cover.
2. Remove the T/A Motor (Figure 1). 2. Move the baffle in the direction shown and remove it (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the connector. 1. Remove the baffle.
2. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the springs (2).
3. Remove the T/A Motor.
Figure 1 Removing the Baffle

Figure 1 Removing the T/A Motor
3. Move the sensor with the bracket (Figure 2).
Installation 1. Remove the screw.
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. 2. Remove the bracket.

manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Moving the Sensor Figure 3 Removing the Tray 1 Feedout Sensor and T/A Sensor
4. Remove the Tray 1 Feedout Sensor and T/A Sensor (Figure 3). Installation
1. Remove the screws (2). 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
3. Remove the sensors (2).

REP 2.8.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed-out Sensor
Removal
NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 2 Feed-out Sensor.
WARNING
2. Move the baffle in the direction shown and remove it (Figure 1).
1. Remove the baffle.
2. Remove the springs (2).
4. Remove the Tray 2 Feed-out Sensor (Figure 3).

1. Remove the Tray 2 Feed-out Sensor.
Figure 1 Removing the Baffle
3. Remove the sensor (the whole bracket) (Figure 2).


manuals4you.com
REP 2.9.1 Tray 5
Removal
NOTE: After replacing Tray 5, clear the HFSI counter [08-810].
WARNING
1. Remove Tray 5 (Figure 1).
1. Move Left Middle Cover downward.
2. Pull the hooks (2) outward.
3. Lift Tray 5 and remove it.
Figure 3 Removing the Tray 2 Feed-out Sensor
Installation
Figure 1 Removing Tray 5
Installation

REP 2.11.1 Tray 5 Nudger Roll
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the Nudger Roll, clear the HFSI counter [08-810].
NOTE: Replace the Tray 5 Nudger, Feed and Retard Rolls at the same time.
WARNING
1. Open the Tray 5 Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Pull the lever up and open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly.
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 5 Nudger Roll
Installation
Figure 1 Opening the Tray 5 Assembly
2. Remove the Tray 5 Nudger Roll (Figure 2).

2. Push in the plunger.
3. Remove the Nudger Roll.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.11.2 Tray 5 Feed Roll
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the Feed Roll, clear the HFSI counter. DC135(008-810) Diag. Screen
NOTE: Replace the Tray 5 Feed, Nudger and Retard Rolls at the same time.
WARNING
1. Open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Pull the lever up and open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly.
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 5 Feed Roll
Installation
Figure 1 Opening the Upper Tray 5 Assembly
2. Remove the Tray 5 Feed Roll (Figure 2).

1. Remove the chute.
2. Remove the collar.
3. Remove the Feed Roll.

REP 2.12.1 Tray 5 Lift Motor
Removal
WARNING
1. Open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly (Figure 1), or for ease of access, remove the Tray 5
Assembly from the machine (REP 2.9.1).
1. Pull up the lever and open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly.
Figure 2 Disconnecting the connector


1. Pull outward to extend the tray, then pivot the tray up.
3. Remove the lower cover.
5. Remove the wire from the hooks (3).

manuals4you.com
Figure 3 Removing the Bracket Figure 4 Removing the Tray 5 Lift Motor
4. Remove the Tray 5 Lift Motor (Figure 4). Installation

1. Remove the screw. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
2. Remove the switch bracket.
4. Remove the Tray 5 Lift Motor.

REP 2.12.2 Tray 5 Retard Roll
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the Retard Roll, clear the HFSI counter. DC135(008-810) Diag.Screen
NOTE: Replace the Tray 5 Retard, nudger and feed rolls at the same time.
WARNING
1. Open the upper Tray 5 Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Pull up the lever and open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly.
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 5 Retard Roll
2. Remove the Tray 5 Retard Roll (Figure 2).

1. Remove the Tray 5 Retard Roll.
2. Remove the collars (2).
3. Remove the shaft.

manuals4you.com
Installation REP 2.14.1 Regi. Unit
NOTE: When installing the Tray 5 Retard Roll, make sure that the marking is at the rear (Figure Parts List on PL 2.14
3). Removal
WARNING
1. Open the Front Door.
2. Push the lever down and pull out the drawer assembly.
3. Pull the drawer assembly out to a maintenance position. (Figure 1)
1. Push the stoppers on both sides.
2. Pull out the drawer assembly.
Figure 3 Reassembly
Figure 1 Opening the Drawer

a. Drawer Cover (PL 2.18)
b. Knob (PL 2.22 Item 9)
c. Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1 Item 5)
d. Cartridge Guide (PL 8.1 Item 4)
5. Remove the ground wire (Figure 2).

2. Remove the plate.
3. Release the clamp and remove the wire.
5. Pull out the ground wire from the hole.
Figure 3 Removing the Regi. Unit
Installation
Figure 2 Removing the Ground Wire
6. Remove the Regi. Unit. (Figure 3)

2. Remove the Regi. Unit.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.15.1 Regi. Sensor
Removal
WARNING
3. Pull the drawer assembly out to a maintenance position (Figure 1).
2. Pull out the drawer assembly.
Figure 2 Removing the Regi. Cover
5. Remove the Regi. Sensor (Figure 3).

3. Remove the Regi.Sensor.
4. Remove the Regi. Cover (Figure 2).

2. Remove the Regi. Cover.

REP 2.15.2 Regi. Roll
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Regi. Unit (REP 2.14.1).
3. Remove the Regi. Roll (Figure 1).
2. Remove the gear.
4. Move the bearings (2).
5. Remove the Regi. Roll.
Figure 3 Removing the Regi. Sensor
Installation
Figure 1 Removing the Regi. Roll
Installation

manuals4you.com
REP 2.15.3 Regi. Motor
Removal
WARNING
3. Remove the Regi. Motor (Figure 1).
2. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire.
3. Remove the wire from the edge saddle.
5. Remove the Regi. Motor.
Figure 1 Removing the Regi. Motor
Installation

REP 2.16.1 Pre Regi. Sensor REP 2.16.2 Pre Regi. Roll
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
1. Open the Front Door. 1. Open the Front Door.
2. Remove the Regi. Unit (REP 2.14.1). 2. Remove the Regi. Unit (REP 2.14.1).
3. Remove the Pre-Regi. Sensor with the bracket (Figure 1). 3. Lower the chute (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screw. 1. Remove the screw.
2. Remove the bracket. 2. Remove the coupling.
3. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the screws (2).
4. Remove the wire from the edge saddle. 4. Lower the chute.
Figure 1 Removing the Pre-Regi. Sensor Figure 1 Lowering the Chute
Installation 4. Remove the Pre-Regi. Roll (Figure 2).

1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. 1. Remove the E-clip.
2. Move the bearing in the direction of the arrow.
3. Remove the Pre-Regi. Roll.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.17.1 Vacuum Transport
Removal
WARNING
3. Pull the drawer assembly out to a maintenance position (Figure 1).
2. Pull out the Drawer Assembly.
Figure 2 Removing the Pre-Regi. Roll
Installation
4. Remove the Vacuum Transport (Figure 2).

2. Remove the Vacuum Transport.

REP 2.17.2 Vacuum Transport Belt
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Vacuum Transport (REP 2.17.1).
3. Release the hook from the duct (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Removing the Vacuum Transport
Installation
Figure 1 Releasing the Hook
4. Remove the Vacuum Transport Belt (Figure 2).

1. Remove the Idler Roll.
2. Remove the Vacuum Transport Belt.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.21.1 Duplex Path Sensor
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Vacuum Transport (REP 2.17.1).
3. Remove the Duplex Path Sensor with the bracket (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Removing the Vacuum Transport Belt
Installation
NOTE: When installing the Vacuum Transport Belt, make sure the shiny side is inside.
4. Remove the Duplex Path Sensor from the sensor bracket (Figure 2).
1. Remove the Duplex Path Sensor.

REP 2.21.2 Duplex Out Sensor
Removal
WARNING
3. Remove the Duplex Out Sensor with the bracket (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Removing the Duplex Path Sensor
Installation
4. Remove the Duplex Out Sensor from the sensor bracket (Figure 2).
1. Remove the Duplex Out Sensor.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.21.3 Duplex Belt 1/2
Removal
WARNING
a. 2nd BTR (REP 7.9.1).
b. Vacuum Transport Unit (REP 2.17.1).
Figure 2 Removing the Duplex Out Sensor
Installation
4. Remove the joint (Figure 2).

1. Remove the E-clips (2).
2. Remove the pulley.
3. Remove the bearing and shaft.
5. Remove the joint.

Figure 2 Removing the Joint Figure 3 Removing the Duplex Belt 1
5. Remove the Duplex Belt 1 (Figure 3). 6. Remove the Duplex Belt 2 (Figure 4).
1. Remove the E-clips (2). 1. Remove the E-clip.
2. Move the bearings (2) in the direction of the arrow. 2. Move the bearing in the direction of the arrow.
3. Remove the Aligner Rolls 2/3. 3. Remove the Aligner Roll 1.
4. Remove the Duplex Belt 1. 4. Remove the Duplex Belt 2.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.23.1 Inverter 1
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1)
2. Open the Inverter 2.
3. Remove the Inverter Cover (Figure 1).
2. Lift the Inverter Cover and remove it.
Figure 4 Removing the Duplex Belt 2
Figure 1 Removing the Inverter Cover


Figure 2 Disconnecting the connector Figure 3 Removing the Inverter 1
6. Remove the Inverter 1 (Figure 3). Installation

2. Lift the Inverter 1 and remove it.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.23.2 Inverter 2
Removal
WARNING
a. Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1)
b. Exit Tray (PL 2.23 Item 11)
2. Open the Inverter 2.
3. Remove the Inverter Cover (Figure 1).
2. Lift the Inverter Cover and remove it.
Figure 2 Removing the Inverter 2
NOTE: Ensure that the 5 tabs on the cover correctly latch into the Inverter before tighten-
ing the mounting screws.
Figure 1 Removing the Inverter Cover
4. Remove the Inverter 2 (Figure 2).

3. Remove the Inverter 2.

REP 2.24.1 Inverter Motor REP 2.24.2 Release Solenoid
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
1. Remove the Inverter 1 (REP 2.23.1). 1. Remove the Inverter 1 (REP 2.23.1).
2. Remove the Inverter Motor (Figure 1). 2. Remove the Release Solenoid (Figure 1).
1. Release the clamps (3) and remove the wire. 1. Disconnect the connector.
2. Remove the cable tie. 2. Cut off the cable tie.
3. Remove the screws (3). 3. Remove the screws (2).
4. Remove the Inverter Motor. 4. Remove the Release Solenoid.
Figure 1 Removing the Inverter Motor Figure 1 Removing the Release Solenoid
Installation Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.26.1 Exit Roll
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Inverter 2 (REP 2.23.2).
2. Remove the Exit Roll (Figure 1).
1. Raise the chute.
4. Move the bearing in the direction of the arrow.
5. Remove the Exit Roll.
o u.com
al s 4 y
u
man
Figure 1 Removing the Exit Roll
Installation

manuals4you.com
REP 3.1.1 Platen Glass Installation
Parts List on PL 3.1 NOTE: Press the Platen Glass in the direction of arrow A; Press the Right Side Plate in the
Removal direction of arrow B (Figure 2).
CAUTION
Ensure that Tag 8, IIT Support Weld Brace Kit, is installed before the following removal proce-
dure is performed.
WARNING
1. Open the Platen Cover.
2. Remove the Platen Glass (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Right Side Plate.
3. Remove the Platen Glass.
Figure 2 Reassembly
Figure 1 Remove the Platen Glass

REP 3.1.2 IIT Opening/Closing 1. Disconnect the connectors (2).
2. Remove screw
Removal
CAUTION
Ensure that Tag 8, IIT Support Weld Brace Kit, is installed before the following removal proce-
dure is performed.
WARNING
NOTE: Remove the DADF if the unit is so equipped. (REP 12.1.1).

a. IIT Left Cover (PL 11.3 Item 16)
b. Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1)
2. Slide the Control Panel toward the front (see Figure 1 of REP 9.5.1).
3. Remove the stopper (Figure 1).
2. Remove the stoppers (2)
Figure 2 Disconnecting the connectors
5. Open the IIT (Figure 3).

2. Open the IIT
3. Insert the brace into the hole.
4. Lock the screw removed in step 5.1.
Figure 1 Removing the Stoppers
4. Disconnect the connectors (Figure 2).

manuals4you.com
Installation
NOTE: When the stopper is installed, set it by pressing it toward the arrow. (Figure 4)
Figure 4 Reassembly
Figure 3 Opening the IIT

REP 3.2.1 CCD PWB
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Platen Glass (REP 3.1.1).
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1).
4. Remove the Lens Cover (PL 3.2 Item 11).
5. Remove the Cable Stoppers (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screws, two per stopper (4 total).
2. Remove the Cable Stoppers (2).
Figure 2 Disconnecting the Connector
7. Remove the CCD PWB (Figure 3).

2. Remove the CCD PWB.
Figure 1 Removing the Cable Stoppers

2. Remove the connector.

manuals4you.com
REP 3.3.1 Carriage Cables
Removal
NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Rear Carriage Cable.
WARNING
Turn power off disconnect the power plug.
NOTE: Do not replace both cables at the same time. Remove the front and rear cables sepa-
rately.
1. Remove the Platen Cover or DADF (REP 12.1.1).

3. Platen machines: Remove the Blind Cover (PL 11.1 Item 7).
4. Remove the Top Cover (PL 11.1 Item 1).
5. Platen machines: Remove the Registration Guide (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Registration Guide.
Figure 3 Removing the CCD PWB
Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the two locating holes line up with the semi-perf locating pin.
Figure 1 Removing the Registration Guide
6. DADF machines: Remove the registration gate and plate (Figure 2).

2. Remove the Registration Gate.
Figure 3 Positioning the Half Rate Carriage
9. Remove the Carriage Cable (Figure 4).

Figure 2 Removing the Registration Gate and Plate 2. Separate the spring and the cable.
3. Pull out the ball from the hole.
7. Remove the Full Rate Carriage from the IIT Frame (REP 3.4.2). Keep the lamp wire har- 4. Remove the cable.
ness connector connected.
8. Move the Half Rate Carriage so that the position of the Carriage Cable Ball on the Cap-
stan is one of the following: (Figure 3)
1. Two Carriage Cable Rolls in front and rear.
2. The Carriage Cable Ball is directly above.

manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Removing the Carriage Cable Figure 5 Winding the Carriage Cable
Installation 2. Wind the cable (spring hook side) onto the pulley for 2.5 turns (Figure 6).
1. Wind the Carriage Cable into the pulley (Figure 5). 3. Tape and lock the cable (on the spring hook) on the frame (Figure 6).
1. Insert the Carriage Cable Ball into the groove of the pulley.

Figure 6 Locking the Cable Figure 7 Locking the Cable
4. Wind the cable (ball side) onto the pulley for 2.4 turns (Figure 7). 6. The following figure shows the number of carriage cable windings (front/rear) (Fig-
5. Tape and lock the cable wound on the pulley (Figure 7). ure 8).

manuals4you.com
Figure 9 Installing the Carriage Cable (ball side)
3. Install the Carriage Cable (spring hook side) (Figure 10).

1. Hook the cable to the pulley (from bottom to top).
2. Hook the cable to the small pulley in the Half Rate Carriage (from bottom to top).
3. Hook the cable to the stud (from bottom to top).
4. Install the spring on the cable (spring hook side).
5. Hook the spring onto the frame.
Figure 8 Carriage Cable Windings
2. Install the Carriage Cable (ball side) (Figure 9).

1. Hook the cable to the pulley (from bottom to top).
2. Hook the cable to the large pulley in the Half Rate Carriage (from top to bottom).
3. Insert the ball into the frame hole.

REP 3.3.2 Carriage Motor
Removal
WARNING
3. Platen machine: Remove the Blind Cover (PL11.1). PL 11.1 Item 7
4. Remove the Top Cover (PL 11.1 Item 1)
5. Remove the IIT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 15)
6. Remove the Carriage Motor (Figure 1).
5. Remove the Carriage Motor.
Figure 10 Installing the Carriage Cable (spring hook side)
4. Remove the tape from the cable.

5. Install the Full Rate Carriage in the IIT Frame.
6. Adjust the positions of the Full Rate/Half Rate Carriages (ADJ. 3.4.1).
7. Manually move the Full Rate Carriage to make sure it moves smoothly.
8. Install the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly from Step 6.

manuals4you.com
REP 3.4.1 Exposure Lamp
Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
Avoid touching the exposure lamp with your bare hands during removal or installation. Oil from
your hands will contaminate the surface of the lamp.
1. Open the Platen Cover or DADF.
3. Move the Full Rate Carriage to the frame notch.
4. Remove the Exposure Lamp (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Exposure Lamp.
Figure 1 Removing the Carriage Motor
Installation
Figure 1 Removing the Exposure Lamp
Installation

REP 3.4.2 Lamp Wire Harness
Removal
WARNING
3. Platen machines: Remove the Blind Cover (PL 11.1 Item 7).
4. Remove the Top Cover (PL 11.1 Item 1).
5. Disconnect the Lamp Wire Harness connector and release the Clamp Hook (Figure 1).
2. Release the clamp.
3. Remove the clamp.
4. Release the hook.
Figure 2 Removing the Full Rate Carriage
7. Remove the Lamp Wire Harness from the Full Rate Carriage (Figure 3).
1. Flip the Full Rate Carriage.
3. Remove the guide.
5. Remove the Lamp Wire Harness.
Figure 1 Disconnecting the Lamp Wire Harness
6. Remove the Full Rate Carriage (Figure 2).

2. Remove the Full Rate Carriage.

manuals4you.com
REP 3.5.1 IPS Chassis
Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
The IPS chassis is heavy (16lb.). Take care to avoid injury when handling the IPS chassis.
1. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1).
2. Remove the IIT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 15).
3. Disconnect the connectors at the right side of the IPS chassis (Figure 1).
2. Remove the connector cover.
Figure 3 Removing the Lamp Wire Harness
Installation
NOTE: After reinstalling the parts, adjust the positions of the Full Rate/Half Rate Carriages
(ADJ. 3.4.1).
Figure 1 Disconnecting the Connectors
4. Disconnect the connectors in the rear side of the IPS chassis (Figure 2).
1. Release the clamp.

Figure 2 Disconnecting the Connectors Figure 3 Pulling out the IPS Chassis
5. Pull out the IPS chassis (Figure 3). Installation

2. Ensure that the (3) connectors on the right side of the IPS chassis are disconnect.
3. Pull out the IPS chassis.

manuals4you.com
REP 4.1.1 ROS
Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
The ROS assembly is a precision optical component. Be careful not to damage the unit when
handling it.
1. Open/close the IIT (REP 3.1.2).
2. Remove the Half Tone PWB Cover (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Half Tone PWB Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the ROS Top Cover

Figure 1 Remove the Half Tone PWB Cover
3. Remove the ROS Top Cover (Figure 2).

2. Remove the ROS Top Cover.

Figure 3 Disconnect the connectors Figure 4 Remove the ROS
5. Remove the ROS (Figure 4). Installation

1. Remove the screws (2). NOTE: If installing a new ROS ensure that the tape covering the ROS window is removed.
4. Remove the ROS.

manuals4you.com
REP 5.1.1 Erase Lamp Installation
Parts List on PL 5.1 NOTE: When installing the Erase Lamp, match the rails (on both sides of the Erase Lamp) with
Removal groove A (Figure 2).
WARNING
NOTE: When removing the Drum Unit, do not expose the Drum to direct sunlight or strong
light.
NOTE: Do not touch the Drum surface.
1. Remove the Drum Unit (REP 5.3.1).

2. Remove the Erase Lamp (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Erase Lamp.
Figure 2 Reassembly
Figure 1 Remove the Erase Lamp

REP 5.3.1 Drum Unit Installation
Parts List on PL 5.3 NOTE: When installing the Drum Unit, match the rails with groove A (Figure 2).
Removal
WARNING
light.

2. Turn the IBT Handle to the left.
3. Pull the handle and pull out the Drum Unit (Figure 1).
1. Pull the handle.
2. Pull out the Drum Unit.
Figure 2 Reassembly
1. After reinstallation of the parts, perform the following steps.

a. After replacing the Drum Unit, make sure that the Image Quality is correct (IQ 1
Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP).
b. If the Image Quality is not correct, perform the MAX set-up (ADJ 9.1.1).
Figure 1 Pull out the Drum Unit

manuals4you.com
REP 5.3.3 Cleaning Brush 4. Remove the Cleaning Brush.

Removal
WARNING
light.

2. Remove the Drum (REP 5.3.1).
3. Remove the gear (Figure 1).
1. Remove the gear.
Figure 2 Remove the Cleaning Brush
Figure 1 Remove the Gear
4. Remove the Cleaning Brush (Figure 2).

1. Remove the gear.

Installation REP 5.3.4 Cleaning Blade
NOTE: When installing the Cleaning Brush, make sure that the long shaft side is to the rear as Parts List on PL 5.3
shown in the figure below (Figure 3). Removal
WARNING
light.
1. Remove the Drum (REP 5.3.1).

2. Remove the Cleaning Blade (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Cleaning Blade.
Figure 3 Reassembly
Figure 1 Remove the Cleaning Blade
Installation
NOTE: After installing the Cleaning Blade, clean the Cleaning Blade.

manuals4you.com
REP 5.4.1 Charge Corotron REP 5.4.2 PCC Wire
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
NOTE: When removing the Drum Unit, do not expose the Drum to direct sunlight or strong NOTE: When removing the Drum Unit, do not expose the Drum to direct sunlight or strong
light. light.
NOTE: Do not touch the Drum surface. NOTE: Do not touch the Drum surface.
1. Remove the Drum Unit (REP 5.3.1). 1. Remove the Drum (REP 5.3.1).
2. Remove the Charge Corotron (Figure 1). 2. Remove the Pre-Clean Corotron (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screw. 1. Remove the screw.
2. Remove the Charge Corotron. 2. Remove the Pre-Clean Corotron.
Figure 1 Remove the Charge Corotron Figure 1 Remove the Pre-Clean Corotron
Installation 3. Remove the PCC Wire (Figure 2).

NOTE: Do not touch the Corotron Wire during installation. 1. Remove the Arc Shields on both sides.
3. Remove the PCC Wire.

Installation
NOTE: Install the PCC Wire as shown in the figure below (Figure 3).
Figure 2 Remove the PCC Wire
Figure 3 Install the PCC Wire
NOTE: After installing the PCC Wire, clean the PCC Wire.

manuals4you.com
REP 5.5.1 Waste Toner Auger
Removal
WARNING
NOTE: Protect the floor with a sheet of paper where the removed waste Toner Auger is to be
placed.
1. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 7).

2. Remove the Fly Wheel (PL 1.1 Item 10).
3. Remove the Waste Toner Auger (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Auger Sensor.
4. Remove the wire from the wire clips.
6. Remove the Waste Toner Auger.
Figure 1 Remove the Waste Toner Auger
Installation
2. Ensure that the Drum CRU,IBT Assembly, and the Waste Toner Bottle are removed before
installing the auger.

REP 5.5.2 Auger Belt
Removal
WARNING
NOTE: Protect the floor with a sheet of paper where the removed Waste Toner Auger is to be
placed.
1. Remove the Waste Toner Auger (REP 5.5.1).

2. Remove the spring (Figure 1).
2. Remove the bearings (3).
Figure 2 Remove the Auger Belt
Figure 1 Remove the Spring
3. Remove the Auger Belt (Figure 2).

2. Remove the Auger Assembly.
3. Remove the Auger Belt.

manuals4you.com
Installation
NOTE: Install the Auger Belt as shown in the figure below (Figure 3).
NOTE: Protect the floor with a sheet of paper where the Waste Toner Auger is to be installed.
Figure 3 Install the Auger Belt

manuals4you.com
REP 6.1.1 Rotary PWB
Removal
WARNING
1. Open/close the IOT Control PWB chassis (REP 9.2.1).
Figure 2 Remove the Rotary PWB and Plate
4. Remove the Rotary PWB (Figure 3).

2. Remove the Rotary PWB.
Figure 1 Remove the Bracket
3. Remove the Rotary PWB with the plate (Figure 2).


REP 6.1.2 Rotary Home Position Sensor
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
1. Remove the Rotary PWB (steps 1 -3 of REP 6.1.1).
2. Remove the Rotary Home Position Sensor with the bracket (Figure 1).
3. Remove the sensor.
Figure 3 Remove the Rotary PWB
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Rotary Home Position Sensor
Installation
1. Push the bracket in the direction of the arrow and lock it. (Figure 2).

manuals4you.com
REP 6.1.3 Rotary Latch Lever
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1)
2. Remove the Rotary PWB (Steps 1 - 3 of REP 6.1.1)
4. Pull out the connector from the hole.
Figure 2 Position the Bracket
2. Adjust the Rotary Home Position Sensor (ADJ 6.1.1).
Figure 1 Disconnect the Connectors
4. Hook the bracket hooks (Figure 2).

1. Hook the bracket hooks (2).

Figure 2 Hook the Bracket Hooks Figure 3 Remove the Rotary Latch Lever
5. Remove the Rotary Latch Lever (Figure 3). Installation

1. Remove the connectors (2). 1. Perform ADJ 6.6.1 Rotary Development Housing Position and install the locating pin to
2. Remove the screws (2). position the Black Development Housing against the Drum.
3. Remove the Rotary Latch Lever. 2. If the Solenoid Assy was replaced, install the new Solenoid on the Rotary Latch lever
4. If the Solenoid Assy is to be replaced, remove the screws (2). bracket, and reinstall the Gear. Ensure that the flag on the plunger fully blocks the sensor
when the plunger is pushed in.
5. If the Solenoid Assy is to be replaced, remove the Gear.
3. Lock the Rotary Latch Lever (Figure 4).
1. Turn the gear and push in the plunger.

manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Lock the Rotary Latch Lever Figure 5 Install the Rotary Latch Lever
4. Install the Rotary Latch Lever (Figure 5). 5. Remove the Locating Pin and return it to its storage position.
1. Push the Rotary Latch Lever in the direction of the arrow. 6. After installation, check the gear play. Manually lock and release the solenoid. Make sure
2. Fasten the screws (2). that the solenoid is properly locked.
CAUTION
Ensure that the Locating Pin is removed before attempting to run the machine.

REP 6.1.4 Bias Brush Installation
Parts List on PL 6.1 NOTE: Make sure that the protruding part of the Bias Brush is in the frame hole (Figure 2).
Removal
WARNING
a. Cover Assembly (PL 6.5 Item 18)
b. Trickle Toner Bottle (PL 6.5 Item 23)
3. Remove the Bias Brush (Figure 1).
2. Remove the fasten terminal.
3. Remove the Bias Brush.
Figure 2 Reassembly
Figure 1 Remove the Bias Brush

manuals4you.com
REP 6.2.1 Toner Cartridge Unit
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Toner Cartridge Cover (PL 6.2 Item 7).
3. Raise the Toner Cartridge Unit and close the Shutter (Figure 1).
2. Close the Shutter.
Figure 2 Remove the Toner Cartridge Unit
Installation
Figure 1 Raise the Toner Cartridge Unit
3. Remove the Toner Cartridge Unit (Figure 2).
NOTE: Since item 1 hooks onto item 2, push the Toner Cartridge Unit up and remove it
(pull it out) in the forward direction.
3. Remove the Toner Cartridge Unit.

REP 6.3.1 Toner Cartridge Housing (Cyan, Magenta, Installation
Yellow, Black) 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.

Removal
WARNING
NOTE: This page describes how to disassemble the Black Toner Cartridge Housing.
NOTE: Protect the floor by placing a sheet of paper on the floor.
1. Remove the Toner Cartridge Unit (REP 6.2.1).

2. Remove the Toner Cartridge (Yellow/Black) (PL 6.2 Item 1).
3. Remove the Toner Cartridge Housing (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Toner Cartridge Housing.
Figure 1 Remove the Toner Cartridge Housing

manuals4you.com
REP 6.3.2 Cartridge/Dispense Motor (Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow, Black)
Removal
NOTE: This page describes how to disassemble the Black Cartridge/Dispense Motor.
WARNING
3. Remove the Cartridge Motor (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Cartridge Motor.
Figure 1 Remove the Cartridge Motor
4. Remove the Dispense Motor (Figure 2).

1. Disconnect the terminals (2).
3. Remove the Dispense Motor.

REP 6.4.1 Dispense PWB
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Toner Cartridge Cover (PL 6.2).
3. Remove the Dispense PWB (Figure 1).
2. Release the hooks (4) and remove the Dispense PWB.
Figure 2 Remove the Dispense Motor

Figure 1 Remove the Dispense PWB
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Installation

manuals4you.com
REP 6.6.1 Development Housing
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the Development Housing, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135
HFSI Counters Diag. Screen:
a. Yellow: location NVM 009-851
b. Magenta: location NVM 009-852
c. Cyan: location NVM 009-853
d. Black: location NVM 009-850
WARNING
WARNING
is placed into a fire, it may explode and cause injury.
1. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2).
Figure 1 Disconnect the Connectors
3. Hook the bracket hook s (Figure 2).

1. Hook the hooks (2).

Figure 2 Hook the Bracket Hook s Figure 3 Open the Arms
4. Open the arms (white) (Figure 3). 5. Remove the Development Housing (Figure 4).
1. Rotate the Rotary Assembly. 1. Remove the development housing.
3. Open the arms (2).

manuals4you.com
REP 6.6.2 Developer Replacement
Removal
Developer Removal
WARNING
WARNING
is placed into a fire, it may explode and cause injury.
NOTE: After replacing the Development Housing, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135
HFSI Counter List Diag. Screen:
a. Yellow: location NVM 009-851
b. Magenta: location NVM 009-852
c. Cyan: location NVM 009-853
d. Black: location NVM 009-850
1. Remove the Development Housing (REP 6.6.1).

2. Place a sheet of paper on the floor or desk. Place the removed Development Housing on
it.
3. Remove the Upper Cover (Figure 1).
2. Release the hooks (4) and remove the cover.
Figure 4 Remove the Development Housing
Installation
NOTE: If the Development Housing cannot be easily installed, the gears may not be meshed
properly. Rotate the gears clockwise slightly and then install the Development Housing.
NOTE: If the developer material has been replaced, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1.
ATC set-up procedure

Figure 1 Remove the Upper Cover
Figure 2 Empty the Developer
4. Turn the Development Housing upside down. Empty the Developer (Figure 2).
5. Add the Developer (Figure 3).
NOTE: Be careful that the gear is not contaminated by Developer. If contaminated, clean
the gear and make sure that the gear is moving smoothly. 1. Rotate the Magnet Roll Gear in the direction of the arrow, move the Developer
pack right and left, while adding the Developer.
1. Turn the Development Housing in the direction of the arrow.
2. Pour out the Developer.
3. Rotate the Magnet Roll Gear in the direction of the arrow. Pour out the remaining
Developer.

manuals4you.com
Figure 3 Add the Developer Figure 4 Position the Hook
6. Make sure that the Development Housing hook is not up on the Upper Cover (Figure 4). 7. Restore the machine.
8. Make 10 copies of the Test Pattern (82E10810) to mix the Developer in the following
mode:
a. 11” x 17” or A3 and 4-color mode (full color)
b. 10 sheets
9. Perform the MAX Set Up (ADJ 9.1.1).
NOTE: After performing MA Set Up, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set-up pro-
cedure.

REP 6.7.1 Rotary Auger (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)
Removal
NOTE: This page describes how to disassemble the Magenta Rotary Auger.
WARNING
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the seals or mating surfaces of the rotary dispense parts. Contamina-
tion by skin oils can cause toner problems.
NOTE: Since a large amount of toner overflows during this procedure, use a plastic bag to
recover the overflowing toner to prevent contaminating the work area.

a. Development Housing (REP 6.6.1)
b. Toner Cartridge Cover (PL 6.2 Item 7)
c. Trickle Toner Bottle (PL 6.5 Item 23)
d. Cover Assembly (PL 6.5 Item 18)
e. Remove the Front Door Interlock Cover (PL 9.1)
5. Remove the bracket. 4. Remove the Outer Dispense Cover (Figure 2).
2. Remove the Outer Dispense Cover.
3. Disconnect the sensor.

manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Remove the Outer Dispense Cover Figure 3 Remove the Cover
5. Remove the cover (Figure 3). 6. Remove the Inner/Outer DIspense Housings (Figure 4).
1.Remove the screws (4). 1. Remove the E-clip.
2. Remove the cover. 2. Remove the bearing (plastic).
3. Remove the Inner/Outer Dispense Housings.

NOTE: Remove the Black, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Inner/Outer Dispense Housings.
Figure 5 Remove the Spacer
Figure 4 Remove the Inner/Outer DIspense Housings

8. Remove the Rotary Auger (Figure 6).
7. Remove the spacer (Figure 5). NOTE: Mark the Developer Rotary Frame Assembly with the color of the Rotary Auger if
1. Remove the block. removing more then one Rotary Auger.
2. Remove the spacer. 1. From inside the machine, release the stopper tab on the Rotary Auger (PL 6.7).
2. Push the Rotary Auger toward the front of the machine to remove it from Rotary
Frame.

manuals4you.com
Figure 6 Remove the Rotary Auger Figure 7 Tightening Sequence
Installation g. Because of the “Counter Reaction” torque from each screw, retighten the screw in the
a. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly until the installation of the Four (4) same sequence by turning each screw 1/4 (one quarter) of a turn (90 degrees).
screws that secures the Inner Dispense Cover. h. Repeat step g.
i. Remove the screws (3) that were installed in step d.
NOTE: The following procedure is instructions for tightening the four (4) screws that
j. Continue the reassembly process.
secure the Inner Dispense Assembly.
b. This procedure is to EVENLY distribute the torque throughout the Rotary Dispenser.
c. Do not use Power Screwdrivers.
d. Install the screws (3) that secure the Outer Dispense Assembly (PL 6.5) (only the screws,
not the Outer Dispense Cover). This will secure the Dispense Assembly and align the
Inner Dispense Assembly.
e. Hand tighten the screws (4) until the lock washer closes (locks) in the sequence shown
(Figure 7).
f. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN

REP 6.7.2 Trickle Auger
Removal
WARNING
1. Open/close the IOT Control PWB Chassis (REP 9.2.1).
2. Remove the Flywheel (REP 1.3.1), (See Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Rotary Developer Duct

3.Remove the screws (2).
4. Remove the Rotary Developer Duct (PL 10.2 Item 4)


manuals4you.com
Figure 3 Remove the Bracket Figure 4 Remove the Drives
7. Remove the Development/BP0 Drive and IBT Cleaner Retract (Figure 4). 8. Remove the Trickle Auger (Figure 5).
1. Remove the screws (4). 1. Remove the Trickle Auger.
2. Remove the belt.
3. Remove the Development/BP0 Drive and IBT Cleaner Retract.

NOTE: Place a sheet of paper on the floor when the Trickle Auger is pulled out to protect Installation
the floor from any spilled Developer.
NOTE: When installing the Development/BP0 Drive and IBT Cleaner Retract, make sure the
couplings are properly meshed. Push the Development Clutch in after temporarily locking the
Development BP0 Drive and the IBT Cleaner Retract (Figure 6).
Figure 5 Remove the Trickle Auger
Figure 6 Install the drives

manuals4you.com
REP 7.1.1 IBT 1. Rotate the lever in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the IBT.
Removal
WARNING
NOTE: When removing the IBT, do not expose the belt to direct sunlight or strong light.
NOTE: When removing the IBT, make sure that the IBT belt does not touch any other part.
NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with a sheet of paper).

3. Remove the Trickle Toner Bottle (PL 6.5).
4. Lower the lever and pull out the Drawer Assembly.
5. Pull the Drawer Assembly out to the work position (Figure 1).
1. Push in the stoppers on both sides.
Figure 2 Pull out the IBT
7. Remove the IBT Inner Cover (Figure 3).

2. Remove the lever.
4. Remove the IBT Inner Cover.
Figure 1 Pull out the drawer
6. Pull out the IBT (Figure 2).

Figure 3 Remove the IBT Inner Cover Figure 4 Remove the IBT
8. Remove the IBT (Figure 4). Installation

1. Remove the IBT. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.

manuals4you.com
REP 7.1.2 IBT Cleaner
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the IBT Cleaner, clear the HFSI counter. Enter thedC135 HFSI Counter
List Diag. Screen NVM 009-836.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not put the IBT Cleaner into a fire. If the IBT Cleaner is placed into a fire, it may
explode and cause injury.
NOTE: When removing the IBT, make sure that the IBT Belt does not touch any other part.
NOTE: Place the removed IBT Cleaner on the floor, protected by a sheet of paper.

2. Remove the IBT (REP 7.1.1).
3. Remove the IBT Cleaner (Figure 1).
2. Remove the IBT Cleaner.
Figure 1 Remove the IBT Cleaner
Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the inboard side of the IBT Cleaner is fully seated.

REP 7.5.1 IBT Belt 5. Raise the IBT.
6. Remove the Inlet Plate (Figure 2).
Removal 2. Remove the Inlet Plate.
NOTE: After replacing the IBT Belt, clear the HFSI. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter List Diag.
Screen:
1. DC 135 (NVM 009-805)
2. DC135 (NVM 009-806)
WARNING

3. Remove the IBT Cleaner (REP 7.1.2).
4. Move the stoppers (2) in the direction of the arrow and lock the roll (Figure 1), front and
rear.
1. Move the stoppers (2), front and rear.
Figure 2 Remove the Inlet Plate
7. Move the roll and loosen the tension (Figure 3).

4. Hold the bracket and move the roll.
5. Hook the bracket hole to the boss.
Figure 1 Move the Stoppers

manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Remove the IBT Belt
Figure 3 Loosen the Tension
8. Remove the IBT Belt (Figure 4).

1. Remove the IBT Belt.

Installation REP 7.6.1 Bias Roll
NOTE: When installing the IBT Belt, make sure that the silver seal is towards the inboard side. Parts List on PL 7.6
Also ensure that the Tracking Rings which are located on the inside of the IBT Belt, are not Removal
riding on the ends of the Steering Roll or Drive Roll (Figure 5).
WARNING
NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with the sheet of paper).

2. Remove the IBT Belt (REP 7.5.1).
3. Release the stoppers (Figure 1).
1. Move the stoppers (2) in the direction of the arrow and release them.
Figure 5 install the IBT Belt
Figure 1 Move the Stoppers
4. Remove the Bias Roll (Figure 2).

1. Raise the Tension Roll.
2. Remove the Bias Roll.

manuals4you.com
Installation
NOTE: When installing the Bias Roll, make sure that the marking on the Bias Roll is towards
the inboard side (Figure 3).
Figure 2 Remove the Bias Roll
Figure 3 Install the Bias Roll

NOTE: Install the bearings at both sides of the Bias Roll in the positions shown in the figure REP 7.6.2 Drive Roll
below (Figure 4).
Removal
WARNING
NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with sheet of paper).

2. Remove the Drive Roll Cleaning Blade (Figure 1).
1. Remove the Drive Roll Cleaning Blade.
Figure 4 Install the Bearings
Figure 1 Remove the Drive Roll Cleaning Blade

2. Remove the gear.

manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Remove the Gear Figure 3 Remove the Drive Roll
4. Remove the front lever (PL 7.7 Item 15). Installation

5. Move the Drive Roll in the direction of the arrow and remove it (Figure 3).
NOTE: To clean the Drive Roll, remove the Drive Roll Cleaning Blade and clean the Drive Roll
1.Remove the screw.
with a cloth using Film Remover.
4. Remove the Drive Roll.

REP 7.6.3 Back-up Roll
Removal
NOTE: If replacing the Back-up Roll, clear the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter
List Diag. Screen (009-808).
WARNING

2. Remove the IBT Cleaner (REP 7.1.2).
4. Remove the Back-up Roll (Figure 1).
NOTE: Do not touch or hold the rubber layer of the Back-up Roll.

3. Remove the Back-up Roll.
Figure 1 Remove the Back-up Roll
Installation

manuals4you.com
REP 7.6.4 Contact Roll REP 7.9.1 2nd BTR
Removal Removal
WARNING NOTE: After replacing the 2nd BTR, clear the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. List Diag. Screen (009-809).
NOTE: When removing the IBT, make sure that the IBT Belt does not touch any other part. WARNING
NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with a sheet of paper). Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Push the lever down and pull out the Drawer Assembly.
a. IBT (REP 7.1.1).
3. Pull the Drawer Assembly out to a maintenance position (Figure 1).
b. IBT Cleaner (REP 7.1.2).
1. Push in the stoppers on both sides.
c. IBT Belt (Disassembly 7.5.1) REP 7.5.1).
2. Remove the Back-up Roll (REP 7.6.3).
3. Remove the Contact Roll (Figure 1).
1. Remove the Contact Roll.
2. Remove the bearings on both sides.
Figure 1 Pull out the Drawer
4. Remove the following parts.

a. Knob (PL 2.22 Item 9)
Figure 1 Remove the Contact Roll b. Drawer Cover (PL 2.18 Item 6)
c. Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1 Item 5)
Installation
5. Remove the indicator (Figure 2).

2. Remove the Cartridge Guide.
3. Remove the indicator.
Figure 3 Remove the 2nd BTR
Installation
CAUTION
Be sure to rotate the drive shaft on the 2nd BTR to move the BTR Roll to the down position
before closing the Drawer Assembly.
Figure 2 Remove the Indicator
6. Remove the 2nd BTR (Figure 3).

3. Pull out the ground wire from the hole.
5. Remove the 2nd BTR.

manuals4you.com
REP 7.10.1 2nd BTR Roll
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the 2nd BTR (REP 7.9.1).
3. Remove the cover (Figure 1).
1. Remove the wire from the hooks (3).
3. Remove the cover.
5. Remove the plate grounds (2).
Figure 2 Remove the Inlet Plate
5. Remove the gears (Figure 3).

2. Remove the gears (2).
Figure 1 Remove the Cover
4. Remove the Inlet Plate (Figure 2).

2. Remove the wire from the hook.
3. Remove the Inlet Plate.

Figure 3 Remove the Gears Figure 4 Remove the Arms
6. Remove the arms (Figure 4). 7. Remove the 2nd BTR Roll (Figure 5).
1. Remove the springs (2). 1. Remove the 2nd BTR Roll.
2. Remove the E-clip and nylon washer.
3. Remove the arms (2).

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 Remove the 2nd BTR Roll
Installation
NOTE: To clean the 2nd BTR Roll, wipe the roll surface with a dry cloth.
CAUTION
Be sure to rotate the drive shaft on the 2nd BTR to move the BTR roll to the down position
before closing the drawer assembly.

manuals4you.com
REP 8.1.1 Fuser Unit 1. Lever (PL 2.22)
2. Drawer Cover (PL 2.18)
3. Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1)
Removal 5. Remove the Fuser Unit (Figure 2).
NOTE: After replacing the Fuser Unit, clear all HFSI counters related to the Fuser. 1. Lower the baffle.
WARNING
CAUTION
5. Remove the Fuser Unit.
Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold.
2. Push the lever down and pull out the Drawer Assembly.
3. Pull the Drawer Assembly out to a maintenance position (Figure 1).
1. Push in the stoppers at both sides.
Figure 2 Remove the Fuser Unit
Installation
NOTE: Make sure to re-connect the connector when the Fuser Unit is installed.
Figure 1 Pull out the Drawer Assembly
NOTE: Spread a drop cloth on the floor before removing the Oil Cartridge, in order to 2. Perform the Full Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).
avoid any spills. 3. Perform the Fuser Nip adjustment (ADJ 8.1.1).

REP 8.2.1 Donor Roll Assembly NOTE: Take care not to damage the Donor Roll on the wire ties holding the fuser har-
ness.
Removal Installation
After replacing the Donor Roll Assembly, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI NOTE: If Donor Roll is replaced separately, make sure to reinstall the Donor Roll by placing the
Counter List Diag. Screen (010-811). If the wick is also replaced, reset HFSI 10-814. long journal in the rear (Figure 2).
NOTE: When replacing only the Metering Blade, clean the Pickup Roll and the Donor Roll with
WARNING a lint free cloth (600S1276) and Fuser Oil before installing the blade. Wipe off the edge of the
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. blade with a lint free cloth and then with a clean finger. After assembling the Metering Blade to
CAUTION the Pickup Roll, use the corner of a piece of clean copy paper and slide it inboard to outboard
Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. between the blade and the roll to clean any remaining contamination.
2. Open the drawer to the maintenance position.
a. Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1)
b. Front Cover (PL 8.1)
c. Top Cover (PL 8.2)
4. Remove the Donor Roll Assembly (Figure 1). Do not remove the Fuser Assembly from
the machine.
1. Remove the springs (2).
2. Remove the KL-clips (2).
4. Remove the gear.
5. Remove the Donor Roll Assembly.
Figure 2 Install the Donor Roll

a. Ensure that Oil Metering Blade is seated correctly against the wick.
b. Ensure that springs (2) are located correctly at both ends of Donor Roll Assem-
bly(Figure 1, step 1).
NOTE: If Donor Roll, Pick up Roll, or Oil Metering Blade (PL 8.9) are replaced individually,
perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).
Figure 1 Remove the Donor Roll Assembly 2. Perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).

manuals4you.com
REP 8.3.1 Heat Roll a. Heat Roll Heater Rod (REP 8.3.2).
b. Heat Roll Finger Assembly (REP 8.3.5). (Steps 1 - 3)
6. Pull out the Stand Plate (Figure 2).
Removal 1. Pull out the Stand Plate.
NOTE: After replacing the Heat Roller, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter
WARNING
CAUTION
2. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 8.1.1).
a. Front Cover (PL 8.1)
b. Top Cover (PL 8.2)
4. Remove the Web Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Press the latch release button.
2. Remove the Web Assembly.
Figure 2 Pull out the Stand Plate
CAUTION
Be careful when opening the Upper Frame Assembly, because the springs may come off the
Donor Roll Assembly.
7. Open the Upper Frame Assembly (Figure 3).
2. Open the Upper Frame Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Web Assembly

NOTE: Before removing the Heat Roll, observe the location of the flange on each
bearing. They should be inside the Fuser Frame at each end (Figure 6).
Figure 3 Open the Upper Frame Assembly
8. Raise the stoppers on both sides (Figure 4).

Figure 4 Raise the Stoppers
2. Raise the stoppers (2).
9. Remove the Heat Roll (Figure 5).
1. Remove the Heat Roll.

manuals4you.com
Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the bearings are installed with the flanges toward the center of the roll so
that they fit inside the Fuser Frame (Figure 6).
Figure 5 Remove the Heat Roll
10. Wipe off and then inspect the Heat Roll Thermistors (2) for wear or damage and replace
them as needed. Figure 6 Install the Heat Roll
NOTE: When installing the Heat Roll, press the stoppers down and lock the Heat Roll (Figure
7).
1. Press down the stoppers (2).
2. Tighten the screws (2).

REP 8.3.2 Heat Roll Heater Rod
Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not touch the glass surface of the Heater Rod. If the glass surface is accidentally touched,
wipe it with a dry cloth.
3. Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1).
Figure 7 Lock the Heat Roll
CAUTION
After closing the Upper Frame Assembly, ensure that the two load springs are located correctly
at each end of the Donor Roll Assembly, The springs may become loose during service.
3. Perform the Fuser Nip Adjustment (ADJ 8.1.1).

manuals4you.com
Figure 1 Remove the Bracket (Front of Fuser) Figure 2 Disconnect the Connector (Rear of Fuser)
5. Disconnect the connector (Figure 2). 6. Remove the Heat Roll Heater Rod (Figure 3).
1. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 1. Remove the Heat Roll Heater Rod.

REP 8.3.3 Pressure Roll
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the Pressure Roll, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI
Counter List Diag. Screen (010-802).
WARNING
CAUTION
2. Remove the Pressure Roll Heater Rod (REP 8.3.4).
3. Pull out the Stand Plate (Figure 1).
1. Pull out the Stand Plate.
Figure 3 Remove the Heat Roll Heater Rod
Installation
Figure 1 Pull out the Stand Plate
4. Remove the Fuser Top Cover (PL 8.2).

manuals4you.com
CAUTION
Be careful when opening the Upper Frame Assembly; the load springs at each end of the
donor roll assembly may come off.
5. Open the Upper Frame Assembly (Figure 2).
2. Open the Upper Frame Assembly.
Figure 3 Remove the Pressure Roll
7. Wipe off, then inspect the Pressure Roll Thermistors (2) for wear or damage and replace
them as needed.
Figure 2 Open the Upper Frame Assembly
NOTE: Before removing the Pressure Roll, observe the location of the flange on each
bearing. They should be inside the Lift Lever Frame (Figure 5).
6. Remove the Pressure Roll (Figure 3).

1. Remove the Inlet Chute.
3. Remove the Pressure Roll.

Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the bearings are installed with the flanges inside of the Lift Lever Frame
(Figure 4) and (Figure 5).
Figure 5 Install the Pressure Roll
Figure 4 Install the Pressure Roll

manuals4you.com
NOTE: Install the spring as shown in the figure below (Figure 6). REP 8.3.4 Pressure Roll Heater Rod
Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Figure 6 Install the Spring
CAUTION
After closing the Upper Frame Assembly, ensure that the two load springs are located correctly
at each end of the Donor Roll Assembly, The springs may become loose during service.
3. Perform the Fuser Nip Adjustment (ADJ 8.1.1).
Figure 1 Remove the Bracket (Front of Fuser)

Figure 3 Remove the Pressure Roll Heater Rod
Installation
Figure 2 Disconnect the Connector (Rear of Fuser) 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
6. Remove the Pressure Roll Heater Rod (Figure 3).

1. Remove the Pressure Roll Heater Rod.

manuals4you.com
REP 8.3.5 Heat Roll Stripper Finger 3. Remove the spring.
4. Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger.
Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
3. Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger Assembly (Figure 1).
NOTE: Do not damage the Stripper finger tips.
1. Raise the Exit Chute.

4. Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger Assembly.
Figure 2 Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger
Installation
1. Install the Heat Roll Stripper Finger (Figure 3).
Figure 1 Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger Assembly
4. Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger (Figure 2).

1. Remove the spring tip from the groove.
2. Remove the stud.

REP 8.4.1 Web Motor/EXT-HR Retract Motor
Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
4. Remove the Web Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Press the Latch Release Buttons (2).
2. Remove the Web Assembly.
Figure 3 Install the Heat Roll Stripper Finger

Figure 1 Remove the Web Assembly

2. Remove the wire from the edge saddle.

manuals4you.com
Figure 3 Remove the Sensor
7. Remove the EXT-H/R Retract Motor (Figure 4).

6. Remove the sensor (Figure 3). 2. Remove the screws (3).
1. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the stud screw.
2. Remove the bracket. 4. Remove the bracket.
3. Remove the screw. 5. Remove the screws (2).
4. Remove the sensor. 6. Loosen the set screw.
7. Remove the gear.
8. Remove the motor.

Figure 5 Remove the Web Motor
Installation
Figure 4 Remove the EXT-H/R Retract Motor
8. Remove the Web Motor (Figure 5).

3. Remove the gear.
4. Remove the Web Motor.

manuals4you.com
REP 8.7.1 Oil Pump
Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
4. Move the clamp in the direction of the arrow (Figure 1).
2. Move the clamps (2) in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2 Remove the Oil Pump
Installation
2. Perform the Full Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).
Figure 1 Move the Clamps
5. Remove the Oil Pump (Figure 2).
NOTE: After removing the Oil Pump, drain the oil remaining in the tube into the tank.

2. Remove the Oil Pump.

REP 8.7.2 Oil Wick 5. Remove the Oil Wick (Figure 2).
2. Remove the Oil Wick and, if present, the backup plate.
Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE: After replacing the Oil Wick, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter

4. Remove the Oil Pipe (Figure 1).
1. Loosen the clamp.
2. Remove the Oil Pipe.
Figure 2 Remove the Oil Wick
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Oil Pipe

manuals4you.com
REP 8.8.1 External H/R Heater Rod
Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Figure 1 Disconnect the Connectors (Front of Fuser)


Figure 2 Disconnect the Connectors - Rear of Fuser Figure 3 Remove the External Heat Roll Assembly
6. Remove the External Heat Roll Assembly (Figure 3). 7. Remove the brackets (Figure 4).
1. Remove the KL-clips (2). 1. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire.
2. Move the bearing in the direction of the arrow. 2. Remove the screws (2).
3. Remove the External Heat Roll Assembly. 3. Remove the brackets (2).
4. Clean the External Heat Roll Assembly.

manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Remove the Brackets Figure 5 Remove the External H/R Heater Rod
8. Remove the External H/R Heater Rod (Figure 5). Installation

1. Remove the External H/R Heater Rod. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
4you .com
n u a l s
ma

REP 8.8.2 External Heat Roll
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the External Heat Roll, Enter dC135 HFSI Counter List and reset HFSI
counter 010-803.
WARNING
CAUTION
Since the Fuser is very hot, Wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold.
CAUTION
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the External H/R Heater Rod (REP 8.8.1).
3. Remove the External Heat Roll (Figure 1 ).
1. Remove the rings (2).
3. Remove the External Heat Roll.
4. Clean and inspect the two External Heat Roll Thermistors.
Figure 1 Remove the External Heat Roll
Installation
3. Adjust the External Heat Roll Nip (ADJ 8.8.1).

manuals4you.com
REP 8.10.1 Pressure Roll Stripper Finger NOTE: If the Pressure Roll Finger Assembly appears bent or damaged, replace the entire
finger assembly.
5. Remove the Pressure Roll Stripper Finger (Figure 2).
Removal
1. Remove the spring tip from the groove.
WARNING 2. Remove the stud.
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 3. Remove the spring.
CAUTION 4. Remove the Stripper Finger.
4. Remove the Exit Chute (Figure 1).
NOTE: Do not damage the finger tip.

3. Remove the Exit Chute Assembly.
Figure 2 Remove the Pressure Roll Stripper Finger
Installation
1. Install the spring as shown (Figure 3).
Figure 1 Remove the Exit Chute

Figure 3 Install the Spring


manuals4you.com
REP 9.2.1 Opening/Closing the IOT Control PWB Chassis REP 9.2.2 IOT Drive PWB
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
1. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3). 1. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3).
2. Remove the IOT Control PWB Cover (PL 9.2). 2. Remove the IOT Control PWB Cover (PL 9.2).
3. Open the IOT Control PWB Chassis (Figure 1). 3. Remove the IOT CPU PWB (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the connector. 1. Disconnect the connectors (5).
2. Remove the screws (3). 2. Remove the screws (3).
3. Open the PWB chassis. 3. Remove the IOT CPU PWB.
Figure 1 Open the IOT Control PWB Chassis Figure 1 Remove the IOT CPU PWB
Installation 4. Disconnect the IOT Drive PWB connectors (12) (Figure 2).

Figure 3 Remove the IOT Drive PWB
Installation
Figure 2 Disconnect the IOT Drive PWB Connectors
5. Remove the IOT Drive PWB (Figure 3).

2. Remove the IOT Drive PWB.

manuals4you.com
REP 9.2.3 Half Tone PWB
Removal
WARNING
1. Open/close the IIT (REP 3.1.2).
2. Remove the Half Tone PWB Cover (Figure 1).
2. Open the Half Tone PWB Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the VSEL BT PWB

Figure 1 Remove the Half Tone PWB Cover
3. Remove the VSEL BT PWB (Figure 2).

4. Remove the VSEL BT PWB.

Figure 3 Disconnect the Connectors Figure 4 Remove the Half Tone PWB
5. Remove the Half Tone PWB (Figure 4). Installation

2. Remove the screws (2) and washers (2). CAUTION
3. Remove the Half-Tone PWB. Failure to comply with the board replacement procedure in GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs
, could result in catastrophic NVM corruption.
2. Refer to GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs in order to synchronize the serial number of the
PWB.

manuals4you.com
REP 9.3.1 Power Chassis
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the following covers.
a. Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3)
b. Filter Unit Cover (PL 11.2)
c. Power Chassis Cover (PL 11.2)
Figure 2 Remove the Suction Blower
4. Remove the screws (large: 1/small:3) of the AC Drive PWB. Keep the AC Drive PWB con-
nector connected (Figure 3).
1. Remove the screw (large: 1).
2. Remove the screws (small: 2).
Figure 1 Remove the Duct
3. Remove the Suction Blower (Figure 2).

3. Remove the Suction Blower.

Figure 3 Remove the Screws Figure 4 Remove the Power Chassis
5. Remove the power chassis (Figure 4). Installation

1. Disconnect the connector. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
2. Remove the screws (2). CAUTION
3. Remove the screws (3). The IOT Control PWB Power Chassis contains the IOT NVM PWB, and the IOT CPU
4. Remove the power chassis. PWB. Refer to GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs , when replacing this component.

manuals4you.com
REP 9.3.2 IOT LVPS 1. Loosen the screws (2).
3. Remove the IOT LVPS.
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3).
2. Disconnect the IOT LVPS connectors (11) (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the IOT LVPS
Installation
Figure 1 Disconnect the IOT LVPS Connectors
3. Remove the IOT LVPS (Figure 2).

REP 9.3.3 B3/B3H (ESS) LVPS
Removal
WARNING
b. Filter Unit Cover (PL 11.2)
c. Power chassis cover (PL 11.2)
Figure 2 Remove the Suction Blower
4. Disconnect the AC Drive PWB connectors (Figure 3).

2. Disconnect the ESS SSR connectors (2).
3. Disconnect the AC Drive PWB connectors (8).
4. Disconnect P/J20.
3. Remove the Suction Blower (Figure 2).

3. Remove the Suction Blower.

manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Remove the AC Drive PWB
6. Remove the B3/B3H LVPS (Figure 5).

4. Remove the B3/B3H LVPS.
Figure 3 Disconnect the AC Drive PWB Connectors
5. Remove the AC Drive PWB (Figure 4).

1. Remove the screw (large: 1).
2. Remove the screws (small: 3).
3. Remove the AC Drive PWB.

REP 9.5.1 Control Panel
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Control Panel (Figure 1).
2. Slide the Control Panel to the front. (Release it from the hook.)
Figure 5 Remove the B3/B3H LVPS
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Control Panel
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Check/adjust the Touch Panel
Starting Point Correction (ADJ 9.1.18).

manuals4you.com
REP 9.6 Billing Data PWB Replacement
Procedure
CAUTION
This procedure is used to maintain the integrity of the serial number and billing data, when one
or more Billing PWBs must be replaced.
To maintain the integrity of the serial number and billing data, never replace all three PWBs at
the same time. If any of the following billing data PWBs needs replacing, only replace them
one at a time according to this procedure:
CAUTION
Failure to comply with the board replacement procedure in GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ,
could result in catastrophic NVM corruption.
Whenever any of the following PWBs are replaced, follow the procedure in GP 10 Replacing
Billing PWBs :
• IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2).
• IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
• Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
If two or more serial numbers DO NOT match the M/C label serial number, escalate the service
call to Field Engineering or the NTC.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 4-149 REP 9.6
REP 9.6 4-150 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 10.2.1 Fuser Fan
Removal
WARNING
1. Open/close the IOT Control PWB Chassis (REP 9.2.1).
2. Remove the Fuser Cover (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Fuser Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the Fuser Fan
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Fuser Cover
3. Remove the Fuser Fan (Figure 2).

1. Remove the Fuser Fan.

REP 10.2.2 Suction Blower Motor
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the following part:
Figure 2 Remove the Suction Blower Motor
Installation
3. Remove the Suction Blower Motor (Figure 2).

3. Remove the Suction Blower Motor.

manuals4you.com
REP 11.1.1 Platen Cushion
Removal
WARNING
NOTE: The Platen Cushion is fixed in place by double-sided tape.
1. Peel off the Platen Cushion (Figure 1).

2. Peel off the Platen Cushion.
Figure 2 Install the Platen Cushion
Figure 1 Remove the Platen Cushion
Installation
NOTE: After peeling off the Platen Cushion, completely remove the tape from the Platen
Cover.
1. Install the Platen Cushion (Figure 2).

1. Remove the seal.
2. Push the Platen Cushion in the direction of the arrow.
3. Slowly lower the Platen Cover and push it onto the Platen Cushion.

manuals4you.com
REP 12.1.1 DADF
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
The DADF is heavy (37.5lbs). Take care to avoid injury when handling the DADF.
Figure 2 Remove the DADF
Installation
Figure 1 Disconnect the Connector
2. Remove the DADF (Figure 2).

2. Remove the DADF.

REP 12.2.2 Registration Gate Solenoid REP 12.3.1 Left/Right Counter Balance
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
1. Remove the Front Cover (PL 12.1). WARNING
2. Remove the Registration Gate Solenoid (Figure 1). The DADF is heavy (37.5lbs). Take care to avoid injury when handling the DADF.
1. Disconnect the connector. 1. Remove the DADF (REP 12.1.1).
2. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 2. Remove the Rear Cover (PL 12.1).
3. Loosen the screws (2). 3. Remove the Left Counter Balance (Figure 1).
4. Remove the Registration Gate Solenoid. 1. Remove the screws (4).
2. Remove the Left Counter Balance.
Figure 1 Remove the Registration Gate Solenoid

Figure 1 Remove the Left Counter Balance
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. 4. Remove the Right Counter Balance (Figure 2).
2. Remove the fastening terminals (2).
3. Remove the Right Counter Balance.

manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Remove the Right Counter Balance Figure 3 Install the Left/Right Counter Balance
Installation 2. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly.

1. Make sure to install each counter balance (left/right) on the correct side since the load
applied to each balance is different (Figure 3).

REP 12.3.2 DADF Control PWB Installation
Parts List on PL 12.3 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Rear Cover (PL 12.1).
2. Remove the DADF Control PWB (Figure 1).
2. Remove the DADF Control PWB from the PWB supports (3).
Figure 1 Remove the DADF Control PWB

manuals4you.com
REP 12.4.1 Feed Motor
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Rear Cover (PL 12.1)
Figure 2 Remove the Feed Motor
Installation
3. Remove the Feed Motor (Figure 2).

2. Loosen the screws and remove the ground wire.
3. Remove the belt.
4. Remove the Feed Motor.

REP 12.4.2 Nudger Roll
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the Nudger Roll, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI
Counters Diag. Screen (NVM 005-80).
NOTE: Replace the Nudger Rolls and the Feed Roll at the same time.
WARNING
1. Open the DADF Top Cover and remove the Inner Cover (Figure 1).
1. Open the Top Cover.
3. Remove the Inner Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the Nudger Rolls
Installation
NOTE: The Nudger Rolls have a one-way clutch structure. Install them so that they rotate
freely in the clockwise direction.
Figure 1 Remove the Inner Cover
2. Remove the Nudger Rolls (Figure 2).

2. Remove the Nudger Rolls (2).

manuals4you.com
REP 12.4.3 Feed Roll
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the Feed Roll, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counters
Diag. Screen (NVM 005-805).
NOTE: Replace the Feed Roll and the Nudger Rolls at the same time.
WARNING
1. Open the Top Cover and remove the Inner Cover (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Inner Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the Feed Roll Assembly
3. Remove the Feed Roll (Figure 3).

2. Remove the gear.
4. Remove the Feed Roll.
Figure 1 Remove the Inner Cover
2. Remove the Feed Roll Assembly (Figure 2).

2. Slide the bearing.
3. Remove the Feed Roll Assembly.

REP 12.5.1 Document Feed Lower Chute
Removal
WARNING
a. Entrance Tray (PL 12.1)
b. Front Cover (PL 12.1)
2. Open the Document Feed Upper Chute.
3. Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute.
Figure 3 Remove the Feed Roll
Installation
NOTE: The Feed Rolls have a one-way clutch structure. Install them so that they rotate freely
in the clockwise direction.
Figure 1 Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute
Installation

manuals4you.com
REP 12.5.2 Retard Roll
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the Retard Roll, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI
Counters Diag. Screen (NVM 005-805).
WARNING
1. Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute (REP 12.5.1).
2. Remove the Retard Roll (Figure 1).
4. Remove the arm.
6. Remove the Retard Roll.
Figure 1 Remove the Retard Roll
Installation
NOTE: The Retard Rolls have a one-way clutch structure. Install them so that they rotate freely
in the clockwise direction.
NOTE: After replacing the Retard Roll, make sure that the Retard Roll Mylar Guard is in the
correct position. (It may be inside the document feed chute.)

REP 12.5.3 Set Gate Solenoid
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Set Gate Solenoid (Figure 1).
4. Remove the Set Gate Solenoid.
Figure 2 Install the Set Gate Solenoid
2. Install and lock the Set Gate Solenoid by pressing it in the direction of the arrow (Figure 3)
Figure 1 Remove the Set Gate Solenoid
Installation
1. Install the Set Gate Solenoid by inserting the pin into the gate (Figure 2).

manuals4you.com
REP 12.5.4 Registration Sensor
Removal
WARNING
2. Disconnect P/J580 and remove the Registration Sensor (Figure 1).
4. Remove the Registration Sensor.
Figure 3 Lock the Set Gate Solenoid
3. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Registration Sensor
Installation
1. When installing the Registration Sensor, lock it by matching the bracket hole with the half-
punch (Figure 2).

REP 12.5.5 Size Sensors 1/2 (Rear/Front)
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Set Gate Solenoid (REP 12.5.3).
3. Remove the Size Sensors 1/2 (front/rear) (Figure 1).
4. Remove the Size Sensors 1/2.
Figure 2 Installing the Registration Sensor
Figure 1 Remove the Size Sensors 1/2
Installation

manuals4you.com
REP 12.6.1 DADF Belt Motor
Removal
WARNING
2. Slide the DADF Control PWB (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Control PWB from the PWB supports (3) and slide the Control PWB
in the direction shown.
Figure 2 Remove the DADF Belt Motor
Installation
1. Install the Belt (Figure 3 - looking from the rear).
Figure 1 Slide the DADF Control PWB
3. Remove the DADF Belt Motor (Figure 2).

1. Draw a line to mark the location of the motor.
3. Remove the belt.
4. Remove the DADF Belt Motor.

REP 12.7.1 Duplex Sensor
Removal
WARNING
b. Rear Cover (PL 12.1)
2. Slide the Feed Motor (REP 12.4.1).
3. Incline the Invert Chute (Figure 1).
2. Incline the Invert Chute.
Figure 3 Install the Belt
Figure 1 Incline the Invert Chute
4. Remove the Invert Chute (Figure 2).

2. Remove the Invert Chute.

manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Remove the Invert Chute Figure 3 Remove the Duplex Sensor
5. Remove the Duplex Sensor (Figure 3). Installation

1. Remove the screw. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
2. Remove the Duplex Sensor.

REP 12.8.1 Registration Pinch Roll
Removal
WARNING
NOTE: Do not damage or scratch the surface of the Registration Pinch Roll. (Scratches may
cause skewing.)

b. Rear Cover PL 12.1)
2. Remove the Registration Gate Solenoid (REP 12.2.2).
3. Remove the Lower Chute (Figure 1).
2. Remove the pulley.
4. Remove the Lower Chute.
Figure 1 Remove the Lower Chute
4. Remove the gate (Figure 2).
NOTE: When removing the gate, make sure not to lose the springs (2) since the springs
may jump out.

2. Remove the gate.

manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Remove the Gate Figure 3 Remove the Registration Pinch Roll
5. Open the Top Cover. Press the bearing and spring in the rear so that they do not separate
and remove the Registration Pinch Roll (Figure 3).
Installation
2. Remove the C-clip.
3. Remove the C-clip.
6. Remove the Registration Pinch Roll.

REP 12.9.1 Exit Motor
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Exit Motor (Figure 1).
4. Remove the belt.
5. Remove the Exit Motor.
Figure 2 Install the Exit Motor
Figure 1 Remove the Exit Motor
Installation
1. Install and lock the motor by pressing it in the direction of the arrow (Figure 2).

manuals4you.com
REP 12.10.1 Platen Belt 2. Move the shaft support in the direction of the arrow.
3. Remove the Platen Belt.
Removal
NOTE: After replacing the Platen Belt, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counters
Diag. Screen (NVM 005-805).
WARNING
2. Remove the Document Transport (Figure 1).
NOTE: Remove the Document Transport by holding it in the rear.

2. Remove the Document Transport.
Figure 2 Remove the Platen Belt
Installation
1. Install the parts in the reverse order of the disassembly, but keep the following in mind:
Figure 1 Remove the Document Transport
CAUTION
Document Handler rises quickly when Platen Belt is removed.
3. Remove the Platen Belt (Figure 2).

NOTE: Lock the shaft support by matching the hole with the frame's half-punch (Figure NOTE: Make sure that both sides of the Platen Belt are correctly set in the pulley (Figure
3). 4).
CORRECT INCORRECT
Figure 3 Lock the shaft support Figure 4 Install the Platen Belt
2. Connect the power cord and switch on the power.

3. Select and execute the DC330 Component Control Diag. Screen (005-055 Belt Motor
CW). Press the START button.
4. Rotate the Platen Belt for 15 seconds. Press the STOP button. Check that the Platen Belt
has not shifted to either side.

manuals4you.com
REP 13.3.1 Decurler
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Decurler Front Cover (PL 13.11).
Figure 2 Remove the Decurler
Installation
3. Remove the Decurler (Figure 2).

2. Remove the Decurler.

REP 13.5.1 Vertical LED/Sensor 2. Decline the chute to the right side.
Parts List on PL 13.5 PL 13.9
4. Remove the Vertical Sensor.
Removal
WARNING
a. Rear Cover (PL 13.4)
b. Exit Cover (PL 13.4)
2. Open the front cover.
3. Remove the Vertical LED (Figure 1).
4. Remove the Vertical LED.
Figure 2 Remove the Vertical Sensor
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Vertical LED
4. Remove the Vertical Sensor (Figure 2).

1. Remove the screws (4) on the both sides.

manuals4you.com
Removal
WARNING
a. Stopper (PL 13.1)
b. Rear Cover (PL 13.4)
d. Left Cover (PL 13.4)
2. Remove the belt from the pulley.
Figure 2 Remove the ACT Cover
4. Remove the Bin Tray Pawl from the gate (Figure 3).
3. Remove the ACT Cover (Figure 2).

4. Remove the ACT Cover.

Figure 3 Remove the Bin Tray Pawl Figure 4 Remove Bin Tray 1
5. Remove the Bin Panel (Numbered Panel) (PL 13.4). Installation

6. Remove the Bin Tray 1 (Figure 4). 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
2. Remove Bin Tray 1.

manuals4you.com
REP 13.6.1 Bin Trays 2 - 10
Removal
WARNING
NOTE: This page describes how to disassemble Bin Tray 2.
NOTE: To remove any Bin Tray (n), first remove Bin Trays 1 to (n-1).
1. Remove the Bin Tray 1 (REP 13.5.2).

2. Remove the Bin Tray Pawl from the gate (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove Bin Tray 2
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Bin Tray Pawl
3. Remove the Bin Panel (Numbered Panel) (PL 13.4).

4. Remove Bin Tray 2 (Figure 2).
3. Remove bin tray 2.

REP 13.13.1 Decurler Rolls 1/2
Removal
WARNING
a. Decurler Rear Cover (PL 13.11)
b. Decurler Top Cover (PL 13.11)
c. Decurler Inner Cover (PL 13.11)
2. Remove the bearings (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Bearings
4. Remove Decurler Roll 1 (Figure 3).

1. Remove Decurler Roll 1.
Figure 1 Remove the Bearings
3. Remove the bearings (Figure 2).


manuals4you.com
Figure 3 Remove Decurler Roll 1 Figure 4 Remove Decurler Roll 2
5. Remove Decurler Roll 2 (Figure 4). Installation

1. Lower the baffle. 1. Install Decurler Rolls 1/2. Identify them by their markings (Figure 5).

REP 13.13.2 Gear and Cam
Removal
WARNING
a. Decurler rear cover (PL 13.11)
b. Decurler top cover (PL 13.11)
3. Hook the spring to the wire.
Figure 5 Install Decurler Rolls 1/2

2. Remove the gear.

manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Remove the Gear Figure 3 Remove the Cam
4. Remove the Cam (Figure 3). Installation

1. Remove the E-clips (3). This illustration shows installation for the rear side. Install the gear and cam for the front in the
2. Remove the reflector. same way as for the rear.
3. Remove the bearings (2). 1. Install the gear and cam. Align the holes in the two parts (Figure 4).
4. Remove the lever.
5. Remove the cam.

REP 13.14.1 Decurler Stepping Motor
Removal
WARNING
a. Decurler rear cover (PL 13.11)
b. Decurler top cover (PL 13.11)
2. Remove the Decurler Stepping Motor (Figure 1).
3. Remove the decurler stepping motor.
Figure 4 Install the Cam and Gear
Figure 1 Decurler Stepping Motor
Installation

manuals4you.com
REP 14.1.1 Offset Motor
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the OCT from the Sorter.
2. Remove the support (view from bottom) (Figure 1).
2. Remove the retaining covers (2).
3. Remove the support.
Figure 2 Remove the Offset Motor
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Support
3. Remove the Offset Motor (Figure 2).

2. Remove the cover.
5. Remove the Offset Motor.

manuals4you.com
REP 19.1 Removing the IDFE 8. Remove the IDFE from the Printer.
9. If necessary, remove any additional memory from the IDFE (REP 19.3).
Removal (Product Code GL2) NOTE: The IDFE comes 128 MB of memory installed. Customers may have additional
memory kit(s) installed in the IDFE. Remove this memory for installation into the replace-
NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. This REP applies generi- ment IDFE.
cally to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is specified
by the product code for the IDFE (GL2 or MFY). Replacement (Product Code GL2)
Perform the following to replace the GL2 version of the IDFE:
Perform the following to remove the GL2 version of the IDFE:
1. Print a Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports). 1. If necessary, reinstall the Token Ring PWB into the IDFE (REP 19.2).
2. If necessary, reinstall the customer’s additional memory kit(s) into the IDFE (REP 19.3).
CAUTION 3. If necessary, remove the IDFE Cover from the existing IDFE and install the Cover on the
If any of the following steps are not correctly followed, the IDFE will not shut down properly, replacement IDFE.
and steps 2-3 of this procedure must be repeated. 4. Install the IDFE on the Printer.
2. Switch OFF the Main Switch for the Printer/IDFE. 5. Tighten the 4 mounting screws that secure the IDFE to the Printer.
3. Wait for 30 seconds. 6. Install the IDFE wiring harness between the IDFE and the Printer.
NOTE: Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive. CAUTION
Do not cross the 2 DDI Cables.
4. Disconnect all network cables from the IDFE.
7. Connect the 2 DDI Cables between the IDFE and the Printer.
5. Disconnect and remove the 2 DDI Cables from the IDFE to the Printer.
8. Connect all network cables to the IDFE.
6. Disconnect the IDFE wiring harness from the Printer and the IDFE.
9. Switch on the Main Power to the Printer.
7. Loosen the 4 mounting screws that secure the IDFE to the Printer.
10. Ask the customer to use the Configuration Report to verify that the printer connectivity
8. Remove the IDFE from the Printer.
settings are correct.
9. If necessary, remove the Token Ring PWB from the IDFE (PL 19.1)
Replacement (Product Code MFY)
10. If necessary, remove any additional memory from the IDFE (REP 19.3).
Perform the following to replace the MFY version of the IDFE:
NOTE: The IDFE comes with 128 MB of memory installed. Customers may have addi-
tional memory kit(s) installed in the IDFE. Remove this memory for installation into the 1. If necessary, install the customer’s additional memory kit(s) into the IDFE (REP 19.3).
replacement IDFE. 2. If necessary, remove the IDFE Cover from the existing IDFE and install the Cover on the
replacement IDFE.
Removal (Product Code MFY)
3. Install the IDFE on the Printer.
Perform the following to remove the MFY version of the IDFE:
4. Tighten the 6 mounting screws that secure the IDFE to the Printer.
1. Print a Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports).
5. Install the IDFE wiring harness between the IDFE and the Printer.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not cross the 2 DDI Cables.
If any of the following steps are not correctly followed, the IDFE will not shut down properly,
6. Connect the 2 DDI Cables between the IDFE and the Printer.
and steps 2-3 of this procedure must be repeated.
7. Connect all network cables to the IDFE.
2. Switch OFF the Main Switch for the Printer/IDFE.
8. Switch on the power to the Printer.
3. Wait for 30 seconds.
9. Ask the customer to use the Configuration Report to verify that the printer connectivity
NOTE: Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive. settings are correct.
4. Disconnect all network cables from the IDFE.
NOTE: The 2 DDI Cables removed in the next step will be used on the replacement IDFE.
5. Disconnect and remove the 2 DDI Cables from the IDFE to the Printer.
6. Disconnect the IDFE wiring harness from the Printer and the IDFE.
7. Loosen the 6 mounting screws that secure the IDFE to the Printer.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 4-187 REP 19.1
REP 19.2 Token Ring PWB (IDFE) REP 19.3 DIMMs on the Motherboard (IDFE)
Removal Removal
CAUTION
NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. However, this procedure
applies only to the IDFE with the GL2 product code. Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when handling PWBAs, DIMMs or
accessing components within the IDFE.
CAUTION
1. Remove the IDFE from the IOT (REP 19.1).
Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when handling PWBAs or accessing 2. Place the IDFE on a clean static-free work surface.
componets within the IDFE.
3. Loosen the 9 screws and open the Cover for the IDFE (PL 19.1).
1. Remove the IDFE from the IOT (REP 19.1).
4. Remove the DIMM(s) (PL 19.1).
2. Place the IDFE on a clean static-free work surface.
3. Remove the Cover from the IDFE (PL 19.1).
4. Remove the 2 screws and the 2 grounding clips for the Token Ring PWB.
Replacement
5. Remove the 2 screws from the SCAN IIT PWBA. CAUTION
6. Remove the Token Ring PWB from connectors J3 and J4 on the SCAN IIT PWBA. Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when handling PWBAs, DIMMs or
accessing components within the IDFE.
7. Remove the 2 standoffs from the Token Ring PWB.
1. Remove the DIMM(s) from their anti-static packaging.
2. Install the DIMM(s) into the Motherboard (PL 19.1).
Replacement 3. Close the cover and tighten the 9 screws on the IDFE (PL 19.1).
CAUTION 4. Re-install the IDFE on the IOT (REP 19.1).
Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when handling PWBAs or accessing
components within the IDFE.
1. Remove the Token Ring PWB from its anti-static packaging.
2. Install the 2 standoffs and the 2 screws for the Token Ring PWB.
3. Install the Token Ring PWB into connectors J3 and J4 on the SCAN IIT PWB.
NOTE: Carefully press the Token Ring PWB down onto Connectors J3 and J4 until the
PWB is completely seated on the SCAN IIT PWBA. Do not force the PWB onto the Con-
nectors. If you have difficulty installing the Token Ring PWB, remove it completely and try
again.
NOTE: Do not install the Token Ring PWBA onto Connectors J1 and J2 on the SCAN IIT
PWBA. Connectors J1 and J2 are not functional and the Token Ring PWBA will not oper-
ate.
4. Install the 2 screws for the SCAN IIT PWBA.

5. Install the 2 grounding clips and the 2 screws.
NOTE: Ensure that the 2 grounding clips touch the Chassis to form a path to ground.
6. Replace the Cover on the IDFE (PL 19.1).

7. Reinstall the IDFE on the IOT (REP 19.1).

REP 19.2, REP 19.3 4-188 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
ADJ. 3.4.1 Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage Position
Purpose
To adjust positional relationships between the Full and Half Rate Carriages.
Adjustment
WARNING
3. Prepare the positional jigs (Figure 1).
2. Remove the jigs (4).
Figure 2 Align the Half Rate Carriage
5. Install the jigs on the Half Rate Carriage (front/rear) (Figure 3).
1. Install the jigs (front/rear).
2. Lock the jigs with the screws.
Figure 1 Prepare the Jigs
4. Align the Half Rate Carriage jig hole with the rail jig hole (front/rear) (Figure 2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 4-189 ADJ. 3.4.1
Figure 3 Install the Half Rate Jigs Figure 4 Change the Half Rate Pulley Lock Position
NOTE: If the Half Rate Carriage jig hole and the rail jig hole do not match and the jigs cannot 7. Install the jig on the frame jig hole. Check that the jig holes of the frame and the Full Rate
be installed, change the pulley lock position (Figure 4). Carriage match (front/rear) (Figure 5).
1. Install the jig (front/rear).
6. Perform the following to match the jig holes:
1. Loosen the set screws (2), rotate the pulley and match the jig holes. 2. Lock them with the screw.
2. Match the jig holes.

ADJ. 3.4.1 4-190 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 5 Install the Full Rate Jigs Figure 6 Change the Full Rate Carriage Position
NOTE: If the Full Rate Carriage jig hole and the rail jig hole do not match and the jigs cannot
be installed, loosen the lock screw of the carriage cable and match the holes (front/rear) (Fig-
ure 6).
1. Loosen the screw, move the Full Rate Carriage, and match the holes (front/rear).
2. Match the holes (front/rear).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 4-191 ADJ. 3.4.1
ADJ. 3.4.1 4-192 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
ADJ 6.1.1 Rotary Home Position Sensor ADJ 6.6.1 Rotary Development Housing Position
Purpose Purpose
This procedure sets the correct NVM values for the Rotary Home Position Sensor. To properly position the Rotary Development Housings when performing various set ups.
Adjustment Adjustment
1. Perform ADJ 6.6.1 to set the Rotary Assembly to the Cyan position. WARNING
CAUTION Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
Ensure that the Locating Pin is removed before attempting to run the machine. 1. Open the Front Door.
2. Without moving the Rotary Assembly, remove the locating pin and return it to its storage 2. Remove the following parts:
position. a. Toner Trickle Bottle (PL 6.5)
NOTE: After 776-064 is executed, the value is reset to 0 automatically. There is no need to b. Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2)
reset the NVM value. CAUTION
3. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write and change the value in NVM location 776-064 Home Ensure that the Locating Pin is removed and returned to its storage position before attempting
Sensor Adjustment Mode to 1. to run the machine.
4. Enter dC330 Component Control. Execute 009-034 (Dispense Motor C). 3. Remove the Locating Pin (Figure 1).
While the housing moves from the Cyan position to the Home position, the machine auto- 1. Loosen the screw.
matically measures and corrects the moving pulses. 2. Remove the pin.
Figure 1 Remove the Locating Pin

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 4-193 ADJ 6.1.1, ADJ 6.6.1
Figure 3 Hook the Bracket Hooks
6. Remove the plate (Figure 4).

5. Hook the bracket hooks (2) as shown in the figure below (Figure 3).
1. Hook the bracket hooks (2).

ADJ 6.6.1 4-194 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Remove the Plate
7. Rotate the Rotary Assembly until the appropriate development housing and the drum are
facing each other (Figure 5).
Figure 5 Rotate the Rotary Assembly
8. Match the front notch of the Rotary Assembly with the frame hole (Diameter 8).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 4-195 ADJ 6.6.1
9. Insert the locating pin into the frame hole (Diameter 8) and lock it with the screw (Figure
6).
1. Insert the locating pin.
2. Lock the screw.
Figure 6 Insert the Locating Pin
CAUTION
Ensure that the Locating Pin is removed and returned to its storage position before attempting
to run the machine.
10. Return to ADJ 6.1.1 to adjust the Rotary Home Position Sensor.

manuals4you.com
ADJ 8.1.1 Fuser Nip (DC701) ADJ 8.8.1 External Heat Roll Nip Adjustment
Purpose Purpose
To make a copy for checking and adjusting the Fuser Nip Width. The purpose of this adjustment is to ensure correct Heat Roll-to-External Heat Roll contact,
which will aid in proper fusing and minimize web wrapping.
Check
Check
NOTE: Use Tray 5 for making a measurement copy and a nip width measurement.
1. Enter DC701 (PWS Tool) or Subsystem Check / Fuser Nip Measurement from the UI
The paper used for the nip width measurement differs depending on the market:
diagnostic screen.
• XE, FX: A4L (90GSM Colotech+)
2. Place 24lb (90gsm) 8.5 x 11 LEF paper in Tray 5.
• XC, XCL, AO: Letter L (24# Color Expressions)
3. Select Nip Adjustment Black Copy and make 1 copy.
1. Enter dC701 Fuser Nip Measurement. 4. Cut the copy to make 6 - 70 mm x 60mm test strips as shown in Figure 1.
(PC-Diag. screen: Adjustment/Other Adjustment/Set Fuser Nip Adjustment)
2. Place the specified paper in Tray 5.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen and print three measurement copies.
4. Place the copies just made back into Tray 5, face up.
5. Select Make width measurement repeat this three times.
6. Check that the nip width is an average of 10.3 +/- 0.3mm, front to rear.
Adjustment
1. Adjust the screw (located on side requiring nip width adjustment) (Figure 1).
1. Rotate in the A direction (CCW): nip width becomes smaller.
2. Rotate in the B direction (CW): nip width becomes larger.
NOTE: 1/2 turn = approximately 0.5mm nip width change.
Figure 1 dC701 Test Page
5. Fold each test strip along the edge where the black and white portions meet.
6. Open the Front Door and pull the Drawer Assembly out to the maintenance position (REP
8.1.1).
7. Remove the Fuser Top Cover (PL 8.2 item 1).
8. Install a cheater in the Front Door Interlock, and allow the machine to come to Ready.
NOTE: If strips will not fit between Heat and External Heat Roll, close copy drawer for approxi-
mately. 3 seconds and open drawer to install strips. If, after doing this several times, you can-
Figure 1 Adjust the Nip not position the strips, replace the assembly because the frame is bent.
2. Repeat the check and adjustment until the Nip Width is within specification. 9. Insert 2 folded test strips (Figure 2) between Heat Roll and External Heat Roll approxi-
mately 50 mm from ends of rolls.

Adjustment
NOTE: If there is no fused transfer area, or if the difference between sides is excessive, preset
the height of the External Heat Roll Springs (PL 8.8 Item 18) to 24 mm (Figure 4).
TEST STRIPS
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
Figure 2 Test Strip/Adjustment Screw locations
10. Close the Copy Drawer. The External Heat Roll Retract Motor will cam and uncam Exter-
nal Heat Roll. This will take approximately 3 seconds.
11. Open the drawer and remove the Test Strips.
12. Unfold the Test Strips slowly and check for a 3mm ± 0.5 fused transfer area on both strips
(Figure 3).
Figure 4 Spring Height

3 ± 0.5mm
1. Adjust screws (Figure 2) to achieve 3mm ± 0.5 fused transfer area on both strips.
• To increase nip turn screw counterclockwise.
• To decrease nip turn screw clockwise.
2. Repeat Check/Adjustment until nip is within specification.
Figure 3 Fused Transfer Area
13. If the measurement is not within specification, perform the Adjustment.

manuals4you.com
ADJ 9.1.1 MAX SET UP (dC929) ADJ 9.1.2 IIT Calibration (dC945)
Purpose Purpose
To conduct a check of the machine and set it up so that excellent copy quality can be consis- 1. Calculate and set the white reference correction factor.
tently obtained by stabilizing the development potential and copy density. 2. Correct the IIT sensitivity dispersion.
Adjustment
Check
1. Enter the PWS Diag.Screen for dC945.
1. Enter the PWS Diag. Screen for dC929.
2. Do the MAX SETUP according to the following procedure: NOTE: Before performing the following procedure, be sure that the values for dC919
a. ADJ 9.1.2 IIT Calibration (dC945) Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine only) = 4 and the values for dC924 TRC
Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG =128 (change all values for low, medium, and high set-
b. ADJ 9.1.3 ADC AGC SET UP (dC934)
tings).
c. ADJ 9.1.4 VH/VM SET UP (dC933)
d. ADJ 9.1.5 Highlight SET UP (dC918) 2. White Reference Adjustment:
e. ADJ 9.1.6 TRC Control/Toner Density (dC922) a. Put ten sheets of 11” x 17” Color Xpressions paper (NASG) or ten sheets of A3 Colo-
tech+ paper (XE) on the Platen Glass, evenly covering the glass and registered
f. ADJ 9.1.7 TRC Adjust (dC924)/TRC Check PG (dC939) - NOT TO BE USED AT
against the registration edges.
THIS TIME
b. Select White Reference Adjustment.”
g. ADJ 9.1.8 Color Balance Setup (dC919: Copier/Printer)
c. Select Start.”
d. Follow the instructions on the screen. (Refer to step a above.)
e. The Red, Green, and Blue values in the White Reference Set Values box will auto-
matically update.
NOTE: After completing the Max Setup, check for background. If there is persistent
background in the image area on machines equipped with a DADF, manually reduce
NVM locations 715-091, 715-092, and 715-093 by five units each, until background
is acceptable. Do not exceed a maximum of ten units for each setting.
3. CCD Calibration:
a. Place the lead edge of the Color Test Pattern against the left registration edge of the
Platen Glass.
b. Select CCD Calibration.”
c. Select Start.”
d. Follow the instructions on the screen. (Refer to step a above.)
e. If OK’s are displayed for the b* Judgement and Reflection Ratio Judgement, proceed
to step 4.
f. If an NG is displayed, check the lower left corner of the screen for faults. Correct the
faults and repeat the adjustment.
4. Perform (ADJ 9.1.3) ADC AGC Setup (dC934 ADC/AGC Setup).

ADJ 9.1.3 ADC AGC Setup (dC934) ADJ 9.1.4 VH/VM Setup (dC933)
Purpose Purpose
To adjust the ADC gain to obtain the specified Vclean and to measure the Vclean non-unifor- To set the output values of the VG, LD light amount, development bias, and ASG bias.
mity on the belt.
Adjustment
Adjustment 1. Enter the PWS Diag.Screen for dC933.
1. Enter the PWS Diag.Screen for dC934. 2. Select Start.
2. Select Start. 3. If OK’s are displayed in the Judgement column, proceed to step 5.
3. If OK’s are displayed in the Set Value Judgement column, proceed to Step 5 below. 4. If an NG is displayed, check the lower left corner of the screen for faults. Correct the
4. If an NG is displayed, check the lower left corner of the screen for Faults. Correct the faults and repeat the adjustment.
faults and repeat the adjustment. 5. Perform (ADJ 9.1.5) IOT Highlight Setup (dC918 IOT Highlight Setup).
5. Perform (ADJ 9.1.4) VH/VM Setup (dC933 VH/VM Setup).

ADJ 9.1.3, ADJ 9.1.4 4-200 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
ADJ 9.1.5 IOT Highlight Setup (dC918) ADJ 9.1.6 TRC Control/Toner Density (dC922)
Purpose Purpose
a. To make the Highlight density reproduction starting points uniform for K, Y, M and C. 1. Measure the gradient patch by the ADC sensor and create the IOT TRC correction LUT. If
b. To make the In/Out Highlight density uniform. the measurement result is not within the margin, display the Tone Up/Down evaluation.
c. To set the ESV/ADC control target values. 2. Display the two patch densities for each color on the IBT belt.
Check/Adjustment Adjustment
1. Enter the PWS Diag.Screen for dC918. 1. Enter the PWS Diag.Screen for dC922.
2. Check the In(board)/Out(board) density difference. 2. Select Tray: 11” x 17” or A3.
a. Select Tray: 11” x 17” or A3. 3. Select Start.”
b. Select Screen: 300 4. Check the TRC Judge column:
c. Select Start.” • If all boxes display OK, proceed to step 5.
d. Visually check the density differences between the inboard (rear) and the outboard • If an NG is displayed, return to ADC AGC Setup (ADJ 9.1.3).
(front) side of the output print. If there is no density difference from the outboard to
NOTE: The TRC Judgement is based on the Measurement vs. Target Table for TRC
the inboard side, for all colors, go to step 3. Patches #1 and #2 at the bottom of the screen. Patch #1 is 30% Cin for all four colors,
e. If adjustment is necessary, select the In/Out box of the color to adjust and perform while Patch #2 is 65% Cin for YMC and 60% Cin for K.
one of the following:
5. Check the RADC Judge Column:
NOTE: The density of the inboard side of the output print is fixed, and the outboard
• If all boxes display OK, proceed to step 6.
side is adjusted to match the inboard.
• If an NG is displayed, return to ADC AGC Setup (ADJ 9.1.3).
• To lighten the outboard density, increase the value using the (+) button and
NOTE: The RADC Judgement is based on RADC patches: 65% Cin for YMC and 60%
press Save” to store the value.
Cin for K. (Separate patches from the TRC patches.)
• To darken the outboard density, decrease the value using the (-) button and
press Save” to store the value. 6. Check the Tone Judge column.
f. Repeat Step 2 until the inboard and the outboard densities are equal. a. If all boxes display OK, proceed to step 7.
3. Check the CMYK Highlight densities. b. If an Up or Down is displayed for a given color, that color requires toning up or down.
a. Using the print made in step 2, visually check the densities of the color squares c. Select Run” to start the tone up/down routine. The Tone Interval column automati-
(from left to right: Mono K, C, M, Y, and Process K): cally displays the required quantity.
• The Mono K, C, M, and Y squares in the fourth row down should be barely visi-
NOTE: No output prints are generated.
ble.
• The Mono K, C, M, and Y squares in the eighth row down should not be visible. d. Return to step 2 when the routine is completed. If the Tone Judge and Tone Interval
b. If the print meets specification, go to step 4. results do not change after several attempts at the tone up/down routine, go to IQ 10
Low Image Density RAP.
c. If the print does not meet specification, select the appropriate color in the Adjustment
box in the 300 Lines column. Adjust the value using the +/- buttons and select Save. NOTE: The Tone Judge column is based on the RADC patch measurements vs the
(Increasing the value increases the density.) RADC targets as follows:
d. Select Tray (11” x 17” or A3), Screen (300) and Start.” Repeat step 3 using this out- • Machines without ATC Sensors: The RADC targets shown on dC922 TRC Control/
put print. Toner Density Adjustment screen are humidity adjusted ADC targets that Corre-
4. Change the values in the 600 Lines column to match the numbers in the 300 Lines col- spond to NVM’s 773-281 thru 773-284.
umn (if they do not already match) and select Save.” • If the RADC Measurement is within ±30 bits of the RADC Target, the density of the
5. Perform (ADJ 9.1.6) TRC Control (dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment). patch is close to the target density. No tone up or down is required.
• If the RADC Measurement is more than 30 bits from the RADC Target, but is within
±100 bits of the RADC Target for YMC (±80 for K), the density of the patch is lighter
or darker than the target, but output densities will be corrected automatically by
LUT’s. No tone up or down is required.

• If the RADC Measurement is more than 100 bits from the RADC Target for YMC ADJ 9.1.7 TRC Adjust (dC924)/TRC Check PG (dC939)
(more than 80 bits for K), LUT’s cannot compensate, and toning up or down is
required. If one color is out of range, the other colors may display an Up or Down in Purpose
the Tone Judge column to move closer to their targets, even though they are within To manually fine adjust the low/medium/high densities (TRC) for each color.
the appropriate range.
• Machines with ATC Sensors: The RADC targets shown on the dC922 TRC Control/ NOT TO BE USED AT THIS TIME.
Toner Density Adjustment screen are humidity adjusted ADC targets that correspond
to NVM’s 773-281 thru 773-284. They are not the final TC adjusted ADC targets that NOTE: Although it appears that the densities can be adjusted independently for different
the RADC measurements are being compared to with this configuration. The final screen types, this is not the case. An adjustment for one screen type will affect all of the
TC adjusted ADC targets can only be found in NVM’s 773-961 thru 773-964. using screens (300, 150C, 200R, and 600). Also, there is quite a bit of overlap among the low,
these final TC adjusted ADC targets, the same 100 bits for YMC (80 bits for K) tone medium, and high densities. For these reasons, it is recommended that dC924/939 not be
up/down criteria as above applies. used.
7. Perform (ADJ 9.1.8) Color Balance Setup dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed
machine only) only if required by the customer.

manuals4you.com
ADJ 9.1.8 Color Balance Setup (dC919: Copier/Printer) ADJ 9.1.10 IOT Registration Series (dC129)
Purpose Purpose
To set the system highlight densities and highlight gray balance. The purpose is to adjust the position of the image on the page. This is done by changing the
value in the appropriate NVM location in dC129. This controls where the ROS writes the
NOTE: image.
1. This function should be done when the customer has requested further adjustment of low
end density reproduction. Introduction
2. Before executing this function, the dC918 Highlight Setup (ADJ 9.1.5) must be done cor- This series consists of 3 procedures:
rectly. Lead Edge Registration for all Paper Trays
Adjustment Side Edge Registration for Paper Trays 1 - 6
Side 2 Registration for Duplex Tray
1. Enter the PWS Diag. Screen for dC919 (IIT machines only).
All procedures must be checked.
2. Place the Color Test Pattern on the Platen Glass.
3. Select Start.” (The output copy is in Photo/Halftone mode at Normal L/D.)
Lead Edge Registration (all Paper Trays)
4. Visually check the 20% densities on the output copy against the 20% densities on the pat-
tern. Purpose
a. If necessary, adjust the Y,M,C,K density levels so that the densities on the copy NOTE: There is only one lead edge setting for the paper supply. The Duplex Tray has a sepa-
match the densities on the test pattern or the customer preference, using the + but- rate setting for second-side lead edge.
tons. (Increasing the value increases the density.)
To correctly set the lead edge of the image in relation to the edge of the paper.
b. Select Save.”
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary.
Check
NOTE: For 20% gray balance, match the Y, M, and C patch densities and let the gray be an 1. Launch the DC12 / DCCS 50 Diagnostic Tool. Select dC129 from the DC Quick menu
outcome. The gray patch on the dC 919 copy should not exactly match the gray patch on the
2. Select Start Data Read to read the NVM values for this adjustment.
test pattern. Compare the gray patch on the dC 919 copy with the drawer/shipping sample, if
available. Adjustments to dC 919 affect all modes. The grays will look different in different NOTE: Do not use Tray 5 (MSI) to set Lead Edge Registration.
modes. If dC 919 is adjusted based on the Photo/Halftone output, check the output from the
3. When the Data Read is done, select a paper tray from the Tray/Size menu. If possible,
other modes (Text, Photo, etc) to be sure that the gray is acceptable.
use a tray that contains the largest paper used by the customer.
4. Enter 3 into the Print Count: box, and click on Start.
5. Skew Check:
Compare the second print to Figure 1. If the skew is out of spec, go to the IQ3 RAP.
Resolve the cause of the skew before proceeding with this adjustment.

1 1 Lead
Check distance from intersection of lines to edge of paper at Check distance from intersection of lines to edge of Edge of
points A and B, and at points C and D paper at points A and B Paper
A A
A, B
A, B LE
B B
C, D
C D Dimension A, B
2 11x17 or 8.5x11 LEF: 10.0 mm +/- 0.5 mm
Skew is within spec. if difference A3 or A4 LEF: 7.6 mm +/- 0.5 mm
between A and B, or C and D, is 12x18inch w/Tag P39: 22.5 mm +/- 0.5 mm
less than 2.5 mm. 12x18inch w/out Tag P39: 10.0 mm +/- 0.5 mm
Figure 1 Checking Skew Figure 2 Checking Lead Edge Registration
6. Lead Edge Check: Adjustment

Check the Lead Edge Registration (Figure 2). If the measured values are not within spec- 1. Use the Right and Left Arrow buttons to move the image toward or away from the lead
ification, perform the Adjustment. edge of the paper. Each click on the button moves the image 0.11mm. The cumulative
amount of shift is indicated in the Lead Reg. box.
2. After adjusting the registration, click Set Adjust Value.
3. Select Start.
NOTE: If the Lead Edge Registration cannot be brought within specification, the NVM value for
the starting point may be out of range. Reset NVM location 761-043 to the default value of
3954 and perform the adjustment again.
4. Repeat the check/adjustment until the specifications are met.

5. Select Save [LR] to save the new NVM settings.
6. Proceed to Side Edge Registration for Paper Trays 1 - 6.
Side Edge Registration for Paper Trays 1 - 6
Purpose
NOTE: Each Paper Tray has a separate setting for side edge registration.
To correctly position the side edge of the image in relation to the outboard edge of the paper.

manuals4you.com
Check NOTE: If the Side Edge Registration cannot be brought within specification, the NVM value for
1. Check that paper is loaded in all trays, and that the paper guides are adjusted correctly. the starting point may be out of range. Reset the NVM location (Table 1) for the affected tray to
For Tray 1 and Tray 6 (if present), load 8.5 x 11 in. or A4 paper. For Tray 2 through Tray 5, the default value and perform the adjustment again.
use 11 x 17 in. or A3 paper if available. 5. Repeat the check/adjustment until the specifications are met.
2. Enter 1 into the Print Count: box, and click on Print All. 6. Select Save [SR] to save the new NVM settings.
NOTE: Print All prints from each tray in numerical sequence from Tray 1 through Tray 6 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each tray that requires adjustment.
(HCF - if installed). Make sure to keep the sheets in the correct sequence. 8. Proceed to Lead Edge/Side Edge Registration for Duplex Tray.
3. Check the Side Edge Registration (Figure 3) for each page. If the measured values are Table 1 Side Edge Reg. Defaults
not within specification, perform the Adjustment for that tray.
Tray Location Default
NOTE: When the lead edge is to the right, the side to be checked is at the bottom of the
1 720-003 7406
sheet.
2 720-004 7406
3 720-005 7406
1
4 720-006 7406
Check distance from intersection of lines to edge of paper at points C and D
5 720-007 7406
6 720-003 7406
Side 2 Registration for Duplex Tray

Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to correctly position the lead edge and side edge of the image
in relation to the edge of the paper.
LE
Check
1. Select Duplex from the Tray/Size menu. Ensure that Paper Tray 2 contains paper and
that the paper guides are adjusted correctly. If available, load the tray with 11 x 17 in. or
A3 paper.
C, D
2. Enter 1 into the Print Count: box, and click on Start.
C D NOTE: Side 2 will be face up in the output tray.
Dimension C, D 3. Check Skew:

11x17, 12x18, or 8.5x11 LEF: 10.0 mm +/- 0.5 mm Side Edge
of Paper Compare Side 2 of the print to Figure 1. If the skew is out of spec, go to the IQ3 RAP.
A3, SR-A3, or A4 LEF: 7.6 mm +/- 0.5 mm Resolve the cause of the skew before proceeding with this adjustment.
8.5x11 or 8.5x14 SEF: 7.6 mm +/- 0.5 mm
4. Check Lead Edge:
Figure 3 Checking Side Edge Registration Check the Side 2 Lead Edge Registration (Figure 2). If the measured values are not within
specification, perform the Adjustment.
Adjustment 5. Check Side Edge:
1. Select the paper tray to be adjusted from the Tray/Size menu. Check the Side Edge Registration (Figure 3). If the measured values are not within speci-
2. Use the Up and Down Arrow buttons to move the image toward or away from the out- fication, perform the Adjustment.
board edge of the paper. Each click on the button moves the image 0.0423 mm. The Adjustment
cumulative amount of shift is indicated in the Side Reg. box. Duplex Lead Edge:
3. After adjusting the registration, click Set Adjust Value. 1. Use the Right and Left Arrow buttons to move the image toward or away from the lead
4. Select Start. edge of the paper. Each click on the button moves the image 0.1mm. The cumulative
amount of shift is indicated in the Lead Reg. box.

3. Select Start.
NOTE: If the Lead Edge Registration cannot be brought within specification, the NVM value for

5. Select Save [LR] to save the new NVM settings.
Duplex Side Edge:
1. Use the Up and Down Arrow buttons to move the image toward or away from the outboard
edge of the paper. Each click on the button moves the image 0.0423 mm. The cumulative
amount of shift is indicated in the Side Reg. box.
3. Select Start.
NOTE: If the Side Edge Registration cannot be brought within specification, the NVM value for

5. Select Save [SR] to save the new NVM settings.

manuals4you.com
ADJ 9.1.14 IIT Lead Edge Registration Adjustment
Purpose 1. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write.
2. Change the value in location [715-132]:
To adjust the copy position.
a. 1 step: 0.0635mm
CAUTION b. Increase the value to move the image away from the lead edge.
Do not adjust the lead registration unless absolutely necessary, when the registration is not c. Decrease the value to move the image toward the lead edge.
correct in the IIT, since the IIT lead registration influences the precision of the document size
detection.
NOTE: Before running this function, check/adjust Side/Lead Edge Registration (ADJ 9.1.10).
Check
1. Load 11” x 17” (A3) paper in Tray 2, if available.
2. Place the B&W test pattern (82E8220) on the platen and copy it as follows:
a. Copy mode: Black
b. Paper tray: Tray 2
c. Magnification: 100
d. Number of copies: 2
3. Check on the 2nd copy that the distance from the side edge to the top of Step 3 on the
LE1 and LE3 scales is 10.0mm +/- 2.1mm (Figure 1).
10.0mm +/-
2.1mm
Figure 1 Checking the IIT Lead Registration
4. If the value is not within the allowable range, perform the Adjustment:

ADJ 9.1.15 IIT Side Edge Registration Adjustment
Purpose 1. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write [715-029] (REGI ADJ revise VAL)
2. Change the value.
To adjust the IIT scan timing in the main scanning direction and to correct the copy position.
a. 1 step: 0.0635mm
CAUTION b. Increase the value to move the image toward the edge.
Do not adjust the side registration unless absolutely necessary, when the registration is not c. Decrease the value to move the image away from the edge.
correct in the IIT, since the IIT side registration influences the precision of the document size
detection.
NOTE: Before running this function, check/adjust Side/Lead Edge Registration (ADJ 9.1.10).
Check
1. Load 11” x 17” (A3) paper in Tray 2, if available.
2. Place the test pattern (82E8220) on the platen and copy it in the following copy mode:
a. Copy mode: Black
b. Paper tray: Tray 2
3. Check on the 2nd copy that the distance from the side edge to the top of Step 3 on the
SE2 and SE3 scales is 10.0mm ± 2.1mm (Figure 1).
PAPER
FEED
DIRECTION
10.0mm ±
Edge of 2.1mm
Copy
Figure 1 Checking the IIT Side Registration
4. If the value is not within the allowable range, adjust the timing as follows:

manuals4you.com
ADJ 9.1.16 IIT Horizontal Magnification/Vertical
Magnification (IIT Machine) PAPER FEED
DIRECTION
Purpose
To correct the horizontal (main) and vertical (sub) magnification for a 100% copy.
200mm+/-
CAUTION 1mm
Do not change these magnifications unless absolutely necessary, when the magnifications in
the IIT are not correctly set. These magnifications influence the AE/ACS/TI separation.
NOTE: Before running this function, make sure that the IOT horizontal magnification/vertical
magnification are correct.
Check
1. Place the test pattern (82E8220) on the platen and copy it in the following copy mode:
a. Copy mode: Black
b. Document type: Text/Photo
c. Paper size: 11” x 17” or A3
d. Magnification: 100%
e. Number of copies: 2
2. Check the following on the 2nd copy:
a. Horizontal magnification (Figure 1):
Measure the 200mm line running from near LE1 to near LE3. If the dimension is not
200mm ±1mm, adjust the magnification as described below.
Figure 1 Checking the IIT Horizontal Magnification
b. Vertical Magnification (Figure 2):

Measure the 300mm line running from near LE1 to the trail edge of the 1.8lp ladder. If the
dimension is not 300mm ±1.5mm, adjust the magnification as described below.

1. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write.
2. Change the value in location [715-133] (MAG Revise VAL).
PAPER FEED
DIRECTION a. 1 step = 0.1%
b. Increase the value to enlarge.
c. Decrease the value to reduce.
300mm +/-
1.5mm
Figure 2 Checking the IIT Vertical Magnification
Adjustment
Horizontal magnification
NOTE: If you change the magnification, the following problems may occur:
a. Degraded resolution because of the ASIC digital correction
b. Degraded AE/ACS/TI separation
1. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write [715-023] (FS Mag Adjustment).

2. Change the value.
a. 1 step = 0.1%
b. Increase the value to enlarge.
c. Decrease the value to reduce.
Vertical magnification
NOTE: If you change the magnification, the following problems may occur:
a. Improper RGB overlapping/color shift
b. Degraded AE/ACS/TI separation

manuals4you.com
ADJ 9.1.17 Tray 5 Guide (dC740) Table 1 Paper Size Groups
Purpose Displayed paper

group A/D range Paper Width (mm)
To check if the width direction size of the Tray 5 guide is being correctly detected.
A4SEF 222`177 A4S 210
1. To set the sensor output values for the minimum/maximum position of the guide. A4SEF 222`177 8.5"~11"S 215.9
2. To display the result of the width direction size detection. A4SEF 222`177 8.5"~12.4"S 215.9
Adjustment A4SEF 222`177 8.5"~13"S 215.9
1. Enter dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment. A4SEF 222`177 8.5"~14"S 215.9
2. Move the Tray 5 guide to the minimum position. B4SEF 176`8D 8"~10L 254
3. Select Set at the minimum position on the PWS screen. Click Start. B4SEF 176`8D B5L 257
4. If OK, go to Step 5. B4SEF 176`8D B4S 257
If NG: B4SEF 176`8D TFX Special Paper 267
L
a. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write and record the value in location [760-001] (Tray 5
Size Sensor Analog Value). B4SEF 176`8D TFX Special Paper 267
S
b. Enter the recorded value into loc. [760-002] Tray 5 Size Sensor analog smallest
Value. Exit dC131. B4SEF 176`8D 8.5"~11"L 279.4
5. Move the Tray 5 guide to the maximum position. B4SEF 176`8D 11"~17"S 279.4
6. Enter dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment. Select Set at the maximum position on the PWS A3SEF 8C`00 A4L 297
screen. Click Start. A3SEF 8C`00 A3S 297
7. If OK, go to Step 8. A3SEF 8C`00 12"~18S" 304.8
If NG: A3SEF 8C`00 12.6"~18S" 320
a. Enter the dC131 NVM Read/Write and record the NVM (760-001 Tray 5 Size Sensor
Analog Value) data.
b. Enter the 760-001 data in the 760-002 Tray 5 Size Sensor analog smallest Value.
Exit dC131.
8. If the Minimum and Maximum are being set, all sizes are automatically adjusted. If a par-
ticular size sheet causes a problem, check the following.
9. Set the particular paper sheet in Tray 5 and adjust the guide accordingly.
10. Enter the dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment. Select Guide Test” in the PWS screen. Click
Start.”
The paper size group is displayed in the result window in the PWS screen.
11. Consult the table below and check if the correct group is displayed for the particular paper
type. If an incorrect group is displayed, repeat Steps 2 - 7.
Table 1 Paper Size Groups

Displayed paper
group A/D range Paper Width (mm)
Postcard 3FF`385 Postcard S 100
Postcard 3FF`385 A6S 105
A5SEF 385`2AC B6S 128
A5SEF 385`2AC 5.5"~8.5"S 139.7
A5SEF 385`2AC A5S 148
B5SEF 2AB`223 B5S 182
A4SEF 222`177 A5L 210

ADJ 9.1.18 Touch Panel Starting Point Correction 5. Press the ‘starting point connection’ switch again in order to display the adjustment
screen (Figure 2).
Purpose • A pattern of intersecting grid lines (P1 thru P9) will be displayed.
To align the starting points of the UI display and the touch panel switches.
Check
This adjustment is required when replacing the Control Panel or the UI PWB.
Adjustment
NOTE: Each copier is equipped with an adjusting pen for this adjustment, which is stored
under the right side panel of the control panel.
1. Switch off the power.

2. Access the UI touch panel and adjusting pen.
a. Remove the right side panel from the control panel.
b. Remove the adjusting pen.
Figure 2 Adjustment Screen #1
3. Switch on the copier.
4. Push the ‘starting point correction’ switch on the lower right corner of the UI PWB (Figure 6. Apply the point of the adjusting pen in sequence to each line intersection(P1 thru P9) on
1). the adjustment screen.
• A blank screen will be displayed. • One or more LEDs may light on the UI PWB.
7. Press the ‘starting point correction’ switch again to display the next screen.
ADJUSTING • A new pattern of intersecting grid lines will be displayed.

PEN 8. Apply the adjusting pen to each of the four line intersections (Figure 3).
• If four audible beeps are heard, adjustment is OK.
• If you don’t hear four beeps, perform the adjustment again from the third step.
DISPLAY
Figure 3 Adjustment Screen #2
9. Reinstall the adjusting pen and all removed parts.
LED(S) STARTING POINT

CORRECTION
SWITCH
Figure 1 UI PWB and Touch Panel Display

manuals4you.com
ADJ 9.1.19 Tray 2, 3, and 4 for 12 x 18 Paper
Purpose
To set Paper Trays 2, 3, and 4 to use 12 x 18 paper.
Adjustment
1. Remove the Paper Tray from the machine.
2. Remove the Rear Stop (PL 2.1) item 17.
3. Remove the Side Guide Plate (PL 2.3) item 1.
4. Remove the Bottom Plate (PL 2.3) item 2.
5. Remove the (3) screws securing the Regi. Side Guide (PL 2.3) item 8. Position the guide
flush with the front wall and secure it with the (3) screws.
6. Remove the End Guide (PL 3.2) item 10 by removing the E-rings and washers on the
underside of the tray.
7. Slide the guide to align the slot (Figure 1).
1. Align the slot in the guide with the hole in the tray, and secure with a screw.
8. Install the Bottom Plate and the Side Guide Plate.
9. Install the tray into the machine.
10. Store the Regi. End Guide, E-rings, washers and the Rear Stop Bracket in the tray 1 stor-
age compartment.
NOTE: The UI will sense and display the 12 x 18 size for the modified tray.
NOTE: Paper specifications for Trays 2, 3, and 4; Standard Weight 16 to 24 #, Heavy

Weight 32 #. Figure 1 Align the Slot
NOTE: If heavy weight paper is to be fed from the modified tray a set up change is
required. Go to Tools Management, disable Auto Tray and set up the modified tray for
Heavy Weight paper.

manuals4you.com
ADJ 12.1.1 DADF Side Registration 5. Check that the value A is 10.0mm ± 0.6mm. If the value is not within the range, perform
Side/Lead Edge Registration(ADJ 9.1.10), then return to this procedure.
Parts List on PL 12.1 6. Place the two document pages in the DADF. (The number "1" page is on top, and the bot-
Purpose tom edge is fed in first.)
To ensure that the document is set into the correct position on the Platen (front-to-rear drum 7. Set the following copy mode and make a copy.
axis direction). a. Copy mode: Black
b. Paper tray: 11” x 17” or A3
Check c. Magnification: 100
NOTE: Before running this function, the side registration in the Platen mode must be properly d. Number of copies: 1
adjusted (ADJ 9.1.15). 8. Using the number “2” copy, measure the distance between the paper side edge and the
target line. Assume this distance is B (Figure 2).
1. Place the test pattern (82E8220) on the Platen so that there is no gap between the test
pattern and the Registration Guide at the rear.
2. Copy the test pattern in the following copy mode:
a. Copy mode: Black
PAPER
c. Magnification: 100 FEED
d. Number of copies: 2 DIRECTION
3. Number the ejected document pages as "1" and "2" in the order that they are ejected.
4. Measure the distance between the paper side edge of the second document (2) and the
target line. Assume this distance is A (Figure 1).
PAPER
FEED
DIRECTION
B
Edge of
Copy
Figure 2 Checking the Side Registration B
9. Check if B - A is 0 ± 1mm.
Adjustment
A
NOTE: You can adjust the side registration of the DADF simplex or duplex.
Edge of
Copy 1. Enter the dC131 NVM Read/Write[715-028] (DADF IPS Offset)
2. If B in step 8 of the check is,
a. 10.6mm or more: Increase the NVM value;
b. 9.4mm or less: Decrease the NVM value.
Figure 1 Checking the Side Registration A
(each NVM step=1mm)

3. Repeat check steps 1 - 5 and adjustment steps 1- 2 until the value is within the allowed ADJ 12.3.1 Left/Right Counter Balance
range (B=10mm ± 0.6mm).
Purpose
To correct the spring pressure on the Left/Right Counter Balance.
Check
1. Operate the DADF so that it closes from the Open state. Check whether the DADF
remains in the open position when fully raised and closes under its own weight from a
height of 100 ± 50mm (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Checking the Counter Balance
Adjustment
WARNING
1. Remove the rear cover PL 12.1.
2. Adjust the Left/Right Counter Balance (Figure 2).
NOTE: If item b in the check steps is adjusted, adjust only the Left Counter Balance (as a
rule). (This is because floating may occur at the right side due to DADF rigidity.)
a. Rotate in the A direction for stronger spring pressure.

b. Rotate in the B direction for weaker spring pressure.

manuals4you.com
1. Loosen the nut. ADJ 12.3.2 DADF Parallelism
2. Turn the set screw to adjust the spring pressure.
3. Tighten the nut.
Purpose
To correct the ADF front/back position by adjusting the Right Counter Balance and to correct
any skew problems.
Check
WARNING
1. Remove the Front Cover, PL 12.1.
2. Remove the Entrance Tray, PL 12.1.
3. Remove the Document Transport (REP 12.10.1. Steps 1 and 2).
4. Measure the distance between the DADF rear frame and the front surface of the Paper
Side Guide. Check that the distance is 20mm (Figure 1).
NOTE: (Figure 1) The measurement point must be the center of the Right Counter Balance.
Press the scale onto the DADF rear frame.
Figure 2 Adjusting the Left/Right Counter Balance
Figure 1 Checking the Frame-to-Guide Dimension

Adjustment ADJ 12.3.3 DADF Height
CAUTION Parts List on PL 12.3
The front/back position adjustment must be within ± 1mm. Do not adjust more than that.
Purpose
1. Rotate the adjustment screw and adjust the DADF front/back position (Figure 2).
To correct the DADF operation by adjusting the Counter Balance height.
a. Rotate in the A direction: The DADF moves to the rear.
b. Rotate in the B direction: The DADF moves to the front. a. If the DADF mounting height is too low (23.5mm or less), too much load will be applied to
1. Loosen the screws (4). the DADF Transport Motor, causing problems such as paper jams and malfunctions.
2. Loosen the screws (2). b. If the DADF mounting height is too high (24.5mm or more), small-size paper may cause
3. Rotate the adjusting screw. problems such as skewing and jams.
4. Tighten the screws (2). Check
5. Tighten the screws (4). WARNING
a. Front Cover, PL 12.1 Item 11
b. Rear Cover, PL 12.1 Item 1
c. Entrance Tray, PL 12.1 Item 6
2. Check the height of the Left/Right Counter Balance. At the two measurement positions
shown in the figure, make sure that the gap between the Platen Glass Side Guide and the
Transport Assembly Frame is 24 ± 0.3mm (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Adjusting the DADF Front/Back Position
2. Adjust the left side according to the right side adjustment.

3. Repeat the check steps to make sure that the adjustment has been done properly.
4. Set various size paper sheets in the DADF and make sure there is no skew.

manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Preparing to Adjust
2. Close the DADF and, by turning the Adjusting Screw, adjust the gap between the Platen
Figure 1 Checking the Gap Glass Side Guide and the Transport Assembly Frame (Figure 3).
Adjustment
NOTE: The steps are the same for the left and right sides.
1. Open the DADF and loosen the screws (Figure 2).


Figure 3 Adjusting the Gap Figure 4 Tightening the Screws
NOTE: 4. Repeat the check steps and make sure that the height is correct.
a. Rotate once in the A direction, approximately 0.75mm lower.
b. Rotate once in the B direction, approximately 0.75mm higher.
3. Open the DADF and tighten the screws (Figure 4).

1. Tighten the screws (2).

manuals4you.com
ADJ 12.4.1 DADF Lead Edge Registration 3. Check that the distance between the paper top and the target line in the second copy is
10mm ± 0.6mm. If the distance is not within this range, do the following to adjust the reg-
Parts List on PL 12.4 istration (Figure 1).
Purpose
To ensure that the document is set into the correct position on the Platen (document feed direc-
tion).
NOTE: Before running this function, the lead edge registration in platen mode must be
adjusted (ADJ 9.1.14). 10.0 +/- 0.6
mm
Check
Check (Simplex mode)
1. Place the test pattern (82E8220) on the Platen so that there is no gap between the test
pattern and the Top Registration Gate.
2. Copy the test pattern in the following copy mode:
a. Copy mode: Black PAPER
FEED
DIRECTION
3. Measure the distance between the paper top edge and the target line of the second docu-
ment and check if the distance is 10mm ± 0.6mm. If the distance is not within this range,
perform IIT Lead Edge Registration (ADJ 9.1.14), then return to this procedure.
4. Place the copies made in Step 2 into the DADF. Place the second page at the bottom.
Make sure the bottom edge (trail edge) is fed first.
5. Measure the distance from the top of the paper to the target line of the copies made in
Step 2 and Step 4. the difference between the two dimensions must be ± 1.5mm or less.
Figure 1 Checking the Top Registration
Adjustment
Adjustment steps (Simplex mode) Adjustment
Adjustment steps (Duplex mode)
1. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write [710-004] (DADF Lead Registration Time Simplex).
2. If the value obtained in the check steps is: NOTE: Depending on the paper size, the NVM adjustment differs.
a. 10.6mm or more, decrease the NVM value; a. DC131 [10-007] (Lead Registration Time Duplex 8.5x11LEF): Default 59): B5LEF, A5LEF,
b. 9.4mm or less, increase the NVM value. 8.5 x 11LEF
(each NVM step=0.3mm) b. DC131 [710-008] (Lead Registration Time Duplex A4SEF): Default 60): B5SEF, A5SEF,
c. Repeat Step 2 until the value is within the range (10mm ± 0.6mm). 8.5 x 11SEF
c. DC131 [710-009] (Lead Registration Time Duplex 8.5x13LEF): Default 61): 8.5 x 14SEF,
Check
B4, A3
Check (Duplex mode)
1. Check the paper size, enter dC131 NVM Read/Write and select the DC131 Chain Code
1. Place the test pattern (82E8220) on the platen and make an A4S duplex copy. from above 9each NVM step=0.3mm).
2. Place the copy made in Step 1 in the DADF and make a copy in the following mode: 2. Change the NVM value as shown below and adjust the registration to be within the
Copy mode: Black allowed range (10mm ± 0.6mm).
Paper tray: 8.5” x 11” or A4S If the distance between the paper top and the target line measured in the check steps is:
Magnification: 100 a. 10.6mm or more, decrease the NVM value;
Number of copies: 1 b. 9.4mm or less, increase the NVM value.
Mode: duplex-single (1 Step=0.3mm)

3. Repeat the adjustment steps until the registration is within the allowed range (10mm ±
0.6mm).

manuals4you.com
5 Parts List
Overview PL 3.4 Full/Half Rate Carriage ........................................................................................ 5-43
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 5-3 PL 3.5 IPS ....................................................................................................................... 5-44
Subsystem Information ................................................................................................... 5-4
Symbology ...................................................................................................................... 5-5
ROS
PL 4.1 ROS ..................................................................................................................... 5-45
Parts Lists
Xerographics
Drive PL 5.1 ESV Sensor, Erase Lamp .................................................................................... 5-46
PL 1.1 Drum/IBT Drive .................................................................................................... 5-7 PL 5.2 CC/PCC Connector, Waste Toner Bottle (IOT Rear)........................................... 5-47
PL 1.2 Main Motor, Drum Brush Drive ............................................................................ 5-8 PL 5.3 Drum Component................................................................................................. 5-48
PL 1.3 Deve./BPD Drive, IBT Cleaner Retract ................................................................ 5-9 PL 5.4 Charge/Pre Clean Corotron ................................................................................. 5-49
PL 1.4 2nd BTR/Oil Roll/Auger Drive .............................................................................. 5-10 PL 5.5 Waste Toner Auger.............................................................................................. 5-50
PL 1.5 Main Motor 2, Tray 5/Regi./Tray 1 Take Away Drive ........................................... 5-11
PL 1.6 Fuser/Exit Drive ................................................................................................... 5-12
Development
PL 6.1 Development Components .................................................................................. 5-51
Paper Transport PL 6.2 Toner Cartridge Unit ............................................................................................ 5-52
PL 2.1 Tray 1/2/3/4, Tray Sensor, Label ......................................................................... 5-13 PL 6.3 Toner Cartridge Component (Part 1 of 2) ............................................................ 5-53
PL 2.2 Tray 1 Component ............................................................................................... 5-14 PL 6.4 Toner Cartridge Component (Part 2 of 2) ............................................................ 5-54
PL 2.3 Tray 2/3/4 Component ......................................................................................... 5-15 PL 6.5 Rotary Dispenser ................................................................................................. 5-55
PL 2.4 Tray 1-4 Feeder ................................................................................................... 5-16 PL 6.6 Deve. Housing ..................................................................................................... 5-56
PL 2.5 Feeder Component (Part 1 of 2).......................................................................... 5-17 PL 6.7 Rotary Frame/Auger ............................................................................................ 5-57
PL 2.6 Feeder Component (Part 2 of 2).......................................................................... 5-18
PL 2.7A Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (Part 1 of 2)............................................................. 5-19
IBT
PL 7.1 IBT System Component....................................................................................... 5-58
PL 2.7B Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (Part 2 of 2)............................................................. 5-20
PL 7.2 Rail Front Plate .................................................................................................... 5-59
PL 2.8 Left Lower Cover ................................................................................................. 5-21
PL 7.3 Left/Right Rail ...................................................................................................... 5-60
PL 2.9 Tray 5 Unit, Tray 5 Feed Clutch/Roll ................................................................... 5-22
PL 7.5 IBT-Belt, Sensor, Steering Roll ............................................................................ 5-61
PL 2.10 Tray 5 Upper (Part 1 of 2).................................................................................. 5-23
PL 7.6 IBT Component (Part 1 of 2)................................................................................ 5-62
PL 2.11 Tray 5 Upper (Part 2 of 2).................................................................................. 5-24
PL 7.7 IBT Component (Part 2 of 2)................................................................................ 5-63
PL 2.12 Tray 5 Base ....................................................................................................... 5-25
PL 7.8 IBT Cleaner.......................................................................................................... 5-64
PL 2.13 Tray 5 Tray ........................................................................................................ 5-26
PL 7.9 2nd BTR............................................................................................................... 5-65
PL 2.14 Regi. Unit, DTS HVPS ....................................................................................... 5-27
PL 7.10 2nd BTR Component ......................................................................................... 5-66
PL 2.15 Regi.-Regi.......................................................................................................... 5-28
PL 2.16 Regi.-Pre Regi. .................................................................................................. 5-29 Fusing
PL 2.17 Vacuum Transport ............................................................................................. 5-30 PL 8.1 Fuser Unit, Front Cover ....................................................................................... 5-67
PL 2.18 Drawer Accessory, Duplex Baffle ...................................................................... 5-31 PL 8.2 Fuser Sub Assembly............................................................................................ 5-68
PL 2.19 Drawer Frame, Duplex Out Motor/Roll, Duplex Chute....................................... 5-32 PL 8.3 Heat/Pressure Roll............................................................................................... 5-69
PL 2.20 Duplex In/Aligner Baffle Component.................................................................. 5-33 PL 8.4 Heat Roll Sensor, External Heat Roll Retract/Web Motor.................................... 5-70
PL 2.21 Duplex In/Aligner Chute Component ................................................................. 5-34 PL 8.5 Web Shutter, Cleaning Roll (Heat Roll) ............................................................... 5-71
PL 2.22 Drawer Frame Component ................................................................................ 5-35 PL 8.6 Pressure Roll Sensor, Pressure Roll Nip ............................................................. 5-72
PL 2.23 Inverter Unit ....................................................................................................... 5-36 PL 8.7 Oil Pump/Tank ..................................................................................................... 5-73
PL 2.24 Inverter 1 Component ........................................................................................ 5-37 PL 8.8 External Heat Roll ................................................................................................ 5-74
PL 2.25 Inverter 2 Component (Part 1 of 2) .................................................................... 5-38 PL 8.9 Pick Up/Donor Roll............................................................................................... 5-75
PL 2.26 Inverter 2 Component (Part 2 of 2) .................................................................... 5-39 PL 8.10 Exit Chute .......................................................................................................... 5-76
IIT Electrical
PL 3.1 Platen Glass: ITT ................................................................................................. 5-40 PL 9.1 Front, Right .......................................................................................................... 5-77
PL 3.2 CCD PWB, Sensor .............................................................................................. 5-41 PL 9.2 IOT Top/Rear ....................................................................................................... 5-78
PL 3.3 Carriage Cable/Motor .......................................................................................... 5-42 PL 9.3 Tray Module, Rear ............................................................................................... 5-79
Reissue 1/05 Parts Lists

PL 9.4 Drawer Connectors.............................................................................................. 5-80 Part Number Index .......................................................................................................... 5-119
PL 9.5 Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 5-81
PL 9.6 EMI/Safety for Fuser Heat Lamp (50 Hz) ............................................................ 5-82
Air System
PL 10.1 Air System-Front Door ....................................................................................... 5-83
PL 10.2 Air System-Rear, Right ...................................................................................... 5-84
Cover
PL 11.1 Platen/Top Cover............................................................................................... 5-85
PL 11.2 Front/Right Cover .............................................................................................. 5-86
PL 11.3 Rear/Left Cover ................................................................................................. 5-87
DADF
PL 12.1 Front/Rear Cover, Entrance Tray ...................................................................... 5-88
PL 12.2 Top Cover, Registration Gate Solenoid ............................................................. 5-89
PL 12.3 Counter Balance, DADF Control PWB .............................................................. 5-90
PL 12.4 Document Feed Chute (Upper), Feed Motor ..................................................... 5-91
PL 12.5 Document Feed Chute (Lower) ......................................................................... 5-92
PL 12.6 DADF Belt Motor, Duplex Roll ........................................................................... 5-93
PL 12.7 Duplex Chute ..................................................................................................... 5-94
PL 12.8 Registration Roll ................................................................................................ 5-95
PL 12.9 Exit Motor/Chute ................................................................................................ 5-96
PL 12.10 Document Transport, Platen Belt..................................................................... 5-97
PL 12.11 Platen Glass, Registration Gate, Exit Tray: DADF .......................................... 5-98
Mail Box
PL 13.1 Mail Box Accessory ........................................................................................... 5-99
PL 13.2 Docking Rail....................................................................................................... 5-100
PL 13.3 Mail Box Sub Assembly ..................................................................................... 5-101
PL 13.4 Mail Box Cover .................................................................................................. 5-102
PL 13.5 ACT Cover, Bin Tray 1....................................................................................... 5-103
PL 13.6 Bin Tray 2/4/6/8 ................................................................................................. 5-104
PL 13.7 Bin Tray 3/5/7/9 ................................................................................................. 5-105
PL 13.8 Bin Tray 10 ........................................................................................................ 5-106
PL 13.9 Mail Box Roll, Chute .......................................................................................... 5-107
PL 13.10 Mail Box Motor, PWB....................................................................................... 5-108
PL 13.11 Decurler Cover................................................................................................. 5-109
PL 13.12 Decurler Chute, PWB ...................................................................................... 5-110
PL 13.13 Decurler Roll .................................................................................................... 5-111
PL 13.14 Decurler Transport Roll.................................................................................... 5-112
PL 13.15 Cabinet ............................................................................................................ 5-113
Offset Catch Tray

PL 14.1 Offset Catch Tray............................................................................................... 5-114
IDFE Components
PL 19.1 IDFE Assembly and Components...................................................................... 5-115
Electrical Connectors
PL 25.1 Electrical Connectors ......................................................................................... 5-116
Common Hardware
Common Hardware ......................................................................................................... 5-117
Parts Lists 1/05 Reissue

manuals4you.com
Introduction Table 1
Overview Abbreviation Meaning
The Parts List section identifies all part numbers and the corresponding location of all spared R/E Reduction/Enlargement
subsystem components. REF: Refer to
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface
Organization W/ With
Parts Lists W/O Without
Each item number in the part number listing corresponds to an item number in the related illus-
tration. All the parts in a given subsystem of the machine will be located in the same illustration Table 2
or in a series of associated illustrations.
Operating Companies
Electrical Connectors and Fasteners Abbreviation Meaning
This section contains the illustrations and descriptions of the plugs, jacks, and fasteners used
AO Americas Operations
in the machine. A part number listing of the connectors is included.
NASG - US North American Solutions Group - US
Common Hardware NASG - North American Solutions Group -
The common hardware is listed in alphabetical order by the letter or letters used to identify Canada Canada
each item in the part number listing and in the illustrations. Dimensions are in millimeters XE Xerox Europe
unless otherwise identified.
Symbology
Part Number Index Symbology used in the Parts List section is identified in the Symbology section.
This index lists all the spared parts in the machine in numerical order. Each number is followed
by a reference to the parts list on which the part may be found. Service Procedure Referencing
If a part or assembly has an associated repair or adjustment procedure, the procedure number
Other Information will be listed at the end of the part description in the parts lists e.g. (REP 5.1, ADJ 5.3)
Abbreviations
Abbreviations are used in the parts lists and the exploded view illustrations to provide informa-
tion in a limited amount of space. The following abbreviations are used in this manual:
Table 1
Abbreviation Meaning
A3 297 x 594 Millimeters
AD Auto Duplex
AWG American Wire Gauge
EMI Electro Magnetic Induction
GB Giga Byte
KB Kilo Byte
MB Mega Byte
MM Millimeters
MOD Magneto Optical Drive
NOHAD Noise Ozone Heat Air Dirt
PL Parts List
P/O Part of

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 5-223 Introduction
Subsystem Information
Use of the Term “Assembly”
The term “assembly” will be used for items in the part number listing that include other itemized
parts in the part number listing. When the word “assembly” is found in the part number listing,
there will be a corresponding item number on the illustrations followed by a bracket and a list-
ing of the contents of the assembly.
Brackets
A bracket is used when an assembly or kit is spared, but is not shown in the illustration. The
item number of the assembly or kit precedes the bracket; the item numbers of the piece parts
follow the bracket.
Tag
The notation “W/Tag” in the parts description indicates that the part configuration has been
updated. Check the change Tag index in the General Information section of the Service Data
for the name and purpose of the modification.
In some cases, a part or assembly may be spared in two versions: with the Tag and without the
Tag. In those cases, use whichever part is appropriate for the configuration of the machine on
which the part is to be installed. If the machine does not have a particular Tag and the only
replacement part available is listed as “W/Tag”, install the Tag kit or all of the piece parts. The
Change Tag Index tells you which kit or piece parts you need.
Whenever you install a Tag kit or all the piece parts that make up a Tag, mark the appropriate
number on the Tag matrix.

Subsystem Information 5-224 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Symbology A Tag number within a circle having a shaded bar and pointing to an item number shows that
the configuration of the part shown is the configuration before the part was changed by the Tag
A Tag number within a circle pointing to an item number shows that the part has been changed
number within the circle (Figure 2).
by the tag number within the circle (Figure 1). Information on the modification is in the Change
Tag Index.
Figure 2 Without Tag Symbol
Figure 1 With Tag Symbol

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 5-225 Symbology
A tag number within a circle with no apex shows that the entire drawing has been changed by A tag number within a circle with no apex and having a shaded bar shows that the entire draw-
the tag number within the circle (Figure 3). Information on the modification is in the Change Tag ing was the configuration before being changed by the tag number within the circle (Figure 4).
Index.
Figure 4 Entire Drawing Without Tag Symbol

Figure 3 Entire Drawing With Tag Symbol

Symbology 5-226 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PL 1.1 Drum/IBT Drive
Item Part Description
1 007K84662 IBT Drive Assembly
2 007K84671 Gear (22/64)
3 – Bracket (Motor) (P/O PL 1.1 Item 1)
4 – Bearing (P/O PL 1.1 Item 1)
6 007E55221 Gear
7 007E55230 Gear (IBT Drive)
8 – Bracket (IBT Drive) (P/O PL 1.1
Item 1)
9 – Shaft (P/O PL 1.1 Item 1)
10 – Fly Wheel (Not Spared)
11 – Stopper Ring (Not Spared)
12 – Spacer Ring (Not Spared)
13 – Flange (Not Spared)
14 007E52280 Gear
15 009E32160 Spring
16 127K21671 Drum Motor
– 600K86080 Drum Motor Kit (W/TAG P34)
17 – Pin (Not Spared)
18 – Bearing (Not Spared)
19 007K84871 Drum Idler Gear Assembly
20 007K84680 Gear (23/64)
21 – Stud (P/O PL 1.1 Item 19)
22 – Bracket (P/O PL 1.1 Item 19)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 5-227 PL 1.1
PL 1.2 Main Motor, Drum Brush Drive
1 007K84820 Main Motor Bracket Assembly
2 – Bracket (Main Motor) (P/O PL 1.2
Item 1)
3 007K84170 Gear (56/20)
4 007K84634 Drum Brush Drive Assembly
7 007E50120 Gear (Drum Brush)
8 007E49980 Gear
11 007K84701 Gear
12 007E50112 Gear
14 – Screw (P/O PL 1.2 Item 4)
15 007K84641 Gear Pulley (42/27)
16 007K84650 Gear Pulley (56/27)
17 127K21321 Main Motor

PL 1.2 5-228 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PL 1.3 Deve./BPD Drive, IBT Cleaner
Retract
1 007K84468 Developer/BPO Drive and IBT
Cleaner Retract Assembly
2 007K84282 BPO Roll Drive Assembly
3 007K84291 Developer Drive
4 006K84003 Developer Housing Drive Shaft
7 007E51790 Gear
8 007E50052 Gear
9 – Pulley (P/O PL 1.3 Item 2)
10 – Coupling (BPO Drive) (P/O PL 1.3
Item 2)
11 809E08690 Spring
13 007E50030 Gear (18/44 )
14 007E51800 Gear (16/26 )
15 007E51810 Gear (22)
16 – Gear (P/O PL 1.3 Item 3) (40/44 )
19 121K14881 Developer Clutch
20 007K84332 Gear (Developer Housing Drive)
24 007E52290 Gear
25 – Coupling (IBT Cleaner Retract)
(P/O PL 1.3 Item 1)
26 121K17941 Cleaner Retract Clutch
33 – Connector (P/O PL 1.3 Item 1)
34 – Bracket (Not Spared)
35 007E50042 Gear Pulley
36 – Spring (Not Spared)
37 423W55355 Belt (Developer Drive) (REP 1.3.1 )

PL 1.4 2nd BTR/Oil Roll/Auger Drive
1 600K85872 2nd BTR Drive Assembly (W/TAG
P33)
4 007E57660 Gear (16 ) (2nd BTR Roll )
5 007K84160 Gear
8 – Truque Limiter (P/O PL 1.4 Item 1)
11 – 2nd BTR Retract Clutch Assembly
(P/O PL 1.4 Item 42)
12 – Gear (28) (2nd BTR Retract)
15 007K84265 Oil Roll/Auger Drive Assembly
16 007K84231 Auger Drive (23T) (Includes gear
and bracket)
17 007K84240 Tension Roll
18 – Spring (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15)
20 423W57554 Belt (2nd BTR, Auger) (REP 1.4.1 )
22 007E49950 Gear
23 – Oil Roll Clutch (P/O PL 1.4 Item
15)
27 – Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 1.4 Item
15)
28 – Cam (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15)
29 – Pin (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15)
30 – Wheel (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15)
33 130E82190 Oil Roll Home Position Sensor
34 007E49940 Gear (Waste Toner Bottle Auger)
37 – Connector (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15)
39 007K84251 Gear Pulley
40 – E-Ring (P/O PL 1.4 Item 42)
41 – E-Ring (P/O PL 1.4 Item 42)
42 604K14830 2BTR Clutch Kit

manuals4you.com
PL 1.5 Main Motor 2, Tray 5/Regi./Tray
1 Take Away Drive
1 007K84313 Tray 5/Regi./Tray 1 Take Away
Drive Assembly (REP 1.5.1 )
4 127K21311 Main Motor 2
5 007E46890 Gear
6 007E46880 Gear
7 – Dumper (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1)
8 407W08223 Gear
9 407W08273 Gear
10 407W08222 Gear
11 407W08328 Gear (28)
14 – Coupling (Slide) (P/O PL 1.5 Item
1)
15 – Coupling (Transmitter) (P/O PL 1.5
Item 1)
16 009P62975 Spring
17 121K30050 T/A Feed Clutch
19 007E52250 Gear (Tray 1 T/A Roll)

PL 1.6 Fuser/Exit Drive
1 007K84577 Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly
(W/TAG P9) (REP 1.6.3)
3 121K21612 Fuser Nip Clutch
6 007E50270 Gear (26)
7 007E50280 Gear (16) (Exit Roll)
10 – Gear (25/19) (P/O PL 1.6 Item 1)
11 007K84553 Exit Drive Assembly (REP 1.6.1 )
14 007K84800 Gear (41)
15 007E51490 Gear (23)
19 007K84690 Gear (27)
20 007K84360 Gear (37/28) (Fuser Nip)
21 007K84922 Fuser Drive Assembly (Includes
PWB) (REP 1.6.2 )
22 007K84110 Gear (Fuser/V-Tra. Drive)
(Fuser/V-tra. Drive )
23 – Fuser Motor (P/O PL 1.6 Item 21)
25 007E51680 Gear (22)
26 127K21301 Exit Motor
29 – Motor Cover (Not Spared)
30 – Fuser Rear Bracket (Not Spared)
31 – Screw (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 2.1 Tray 1/2/3/4, Tray Sensor, Label
1 130E82190 Tray 1 Set Sensor (REP 2.1.1 )
2 110K10460 Tray 2 Size Sensor, Tray 3 Size
Sensor, Tray 4 Size Sensor (REP
2.1.2 )
3 003E38110 Stopper
4 050K33129 Tray 1 Assembly
5 891E76090 Label (Tray 1)
6 891E78030 Label (Max)
7 891E82980 Label (Installation)
8 050K40941 Tray 2 Assembly, Tray 3 Assembly,
Tray 4 Assembly
9 891E49510 Label (Tray 3)
– 891E49520 Label (Tray 4)
– 891E49060 Label (Tray 2)
10 – Label (Max) (Not Spared)
11 891E80410 Label (Size E End 1)
13 891E80400 Label (Size E Side)
14 891E78020 Label (Max)
15 891E80420 Label (Size E End 2)
16 – Stopper (Not Spared)

PL 2.2 Tray 1 Component
1 015K34310 Bottom Plate Assembly
2 – Bottom Plate (P/O PL 2.2 Item 1)
3 – Pad (P/O PL 2.2 Item 1)
4 038E88641 Side Guide
5 038E88650 End Guide
6 050E87465 Cassette
7 019E39131 Pad
8 019K94390 Pad
9 015K41381 Right Rail Plate
11 015K41370 Left Rail Plate
13 015K31460 Rear Plate
14 007E50410 Gear (18/30)
15 007E30970 Gear (13)
16 013E83730 Bearing
17 007E50430 Gear (60)
18 007E50420 Gear (20/53)
19 – Cover (P/O PL 2.1 Item 4)

manuals4you.com
PL 2.3 Tray 2/3/4 Component
1 038K84621 Side Guide Plate
3 – Plate (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8)
4 019K94400 Pad
5 – Actuator End Guide (P/O PL 2.1
Item 8)
6 015K41503 Plate
7 – Actuator Side Guide (P/O PL 2.1
Item 8)
8 038E88922 Regi. Side Guide
9 019E39131 Pad
10 038K83973 End Guide
11 050E88159 Cassette
12 – Link (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8)
13 – Roll (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8)
14 – Spacer (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8)
18 007E50410 Gear (18/30)
19 007E30970 Gear (13)
20 007E50420 Gear (20/53)
21 007E50430 Gear (60)

PL 2.4 Tray 1-4 Feeder
1 059K09948 Tray 1 Feeder Assembly, Tray 2
Feeder Assembly, Tray 3 Feeder
Assembly, Tray 4 Feeder Assembly
(REP 2.4.1 )
2 054E88230 Chute
3 054E88220 Chute
4 003E40140 Hinge
5 – Stud (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 2.5 Feeder Component (Part 1 of 2)
1 059K09561 Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (REP
2.5.1 )
2 – Pin (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1)
3 007E52210 Gear (14)
4 007E52220 Gear (15)
5 007E52230 Gear (13/16)
6 007E52240 Gear (17)
8 – Support (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1)
9 032E10250 Paper Guide
10 – Nudger Roll (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1)
12 – Feed Roll (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1)
14 – Paper Guide (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1)
15 011E08060 Lever
16 011E08050 Lever
17 809E19530 Spring
20 011E08071 Lever
21 012E98281 Link
22 809E19540 Spring
23 121K17561 Nudger Solenoid
24 130E82190 No Paper Sensor, Tray Stack
Height Sensor
25 130E82650 Pre Feed Sensor
26 – Front Up Chute (P/O PL 2.4 Item
1)
27 – Actuator (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1)

PL 2.6 Feeder Component (Part 2 of 2)
1 830E09140 Motor Bracket
2 127K23230 Feed/Lift Motor (REP 2.6.1 )
4 009E61300 Spring
5 – Gear (31) (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1)
7 413W75959 Bearing
8 007K83610 Gear (24)
9 006K83280 Shaft
10 007E31090 Gear (13)
12 007E52150 Gear (16)
13 005K81750 One Way Clutch
14 007E52130 Gear (26)
15 007E52140 Gear (13)
18 007E52171 Gear (20)
20 007E52161 Gear (17)
21 809E19560 Spring
22 – Retard Lever (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1)
25 007E56210 Gear (15)
26 – Collar (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1)
27 005K81600 Friction Clutch
30 059K09591 Retard Roll Assembly (REP 2.6.2 )
31 – Retard Roll (P/O PL 2.6 Item 30)
32 809E09100 Spring
33 – Pin (P/O PL 2.6 Item 30)

manuals4you.com
PL 2.7A Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive
(Part 1 of 2)
1 007K84415 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (REP
2.7.1 )
2 – Bearing (P/O PL 2.7A Item 1)
3 – Shaft (P/O PL 2.7A Item 1)
4 121K30050 Tray 2 T/A Feed Clutch, Tray 3 T/A
Feed Clutch, Tray 4 T/A Feed
Clutch (REP 2.7.2 )
5 007K84422 Gear (43)
6 – Motor Plate (P/O PL 2.7A Item 1)
7 007E51580 Gear (22)
8 007K84731 Gear (23/45)
9 007E56020 Gear (56)
10 007E56030 Gear (45)
11 007E56010 Gear (100)
12 – Bracket (P/O PL 2.7A Item 1)
13 127K23051 T/A Motor (REP 2.7.3 )

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 5-239 PL 2.7A
PL 2.7B Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive
(Part 2 of 2)
1 – Gear (Teeth on both gears, pitch in
different directions) (Not Spared)
3 059K06831 T/A Roll 1
4 059K09930 T/A Roll 2, T/A Roll 3, T/A Roll 4
5 – Bearing (P/O PL 2.7A Item 1)
6 600K74790 Noise Impulse Kit
7 – T/A Roll 3, T/A Roll 4 (P/O PL 2.7B
Item 6)
8 – One Way Clutch (P/O PL 2.7B Item
6)
9 – Bracket (P/O PL 2.7B Item 6)

PL 2.7B 5-240 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PL 2.8 Left Lower Cover
1 048K65250 Left Lower Cover (Upper) and
Chute 1 Assembly
2 054K10350 Chute 1 Assembly
3 – Left Lower Cover (Upper) (P/O PL
2.8 Item 1)
4 809E07780 Spring
5 809E07770 Spring
6 054E10780 Baffle
7 130E82650 T/A Sensor, Tray 1 Feed Out Sen-
sor (REP 2.8.1 )
8 013E83380 Bearing
10 162K37160 Wire Harness
11 059E92920 Pinch Roll
12 009E63110 Spring
13 003E38120 Hinge
14 048E61482 Left Lower Cover (Lower)
15 011E07950 Handle
16 003E38130 Latch
18 003K84500 Hinge
21 054K10341 Chute 2/3/4 Assembly
22 – Baffle (P/O PL 2.8 Item 21)
24 130K60770 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor, Tray 3
Feed Out Sensor, Tray 4 Feed Out
Sensor (REP 2.8.2 )
25 068K14170 L/H Cover Interlock Switch

PL 2.9 Tray 5 Unit, Tray 5 Feed
Clutch/Roll
1 059K08821 Tray 5 Feed Roll
2 – Collar (Not Spared)
3 121K17550 Tray 5 Feed Clutch
4 113E22970 Holder
6 – Gear (Not Spared)
7 – Core (Not Spared)
8 114E11400 Connector (P703)
9 121E89780 Magnet
10 830E09840 Bracket
11 830E17961 Stopper Plate
12 – Pad (Not Spared)
13 – Chute (Not Spared)
14 059K31171 Tray 5 Assembly (REP 2.9.1 )
15 891E51581 Label (Max)
17 891E73982 Label (Size)
18 891E73971 Label (5)

manuals4you.com
PL 2.10 Tray 5 Upper (Part 1 of 2)
1 130E82190 Tray 5 Paper Sensor
2 059K08831 Pinch Roll
4 059E90770 Take Away Pinch Roll (P/O PL 2.9
Item 14)
5 130K58070 Tray 5 Feed Sensor
6 009E56020 Spring
7 009E56030 Spring
8 120E13100 Actuator
9 809E09470 Spring
10 – Latch Lever (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
11 809E09410 Spring
12 – Upper Cover (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
13 – Latch Bracket (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
14 – Inner Cover (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)

PL 2.11 Tray 5 Upper (Part 2 of 2)
1 – Chute (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
6 059K08850 Tray 5 Nudger Roll, Tray 5 Feed
Roll (REP 2.11.1 REP 2.11.2 )
7 007E31180 Gear
9 130E82190 Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor
10 – Gear (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
11 121K17561 Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid
12 007E31160 Gear
13 009E76430 Spring
14 – Lever Plate (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
15 – Chute (Upper Front) (P/O PL 2.9
Item 14)
22 809E09410 Spring
23 – Lever (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)

manuals4you.com
PL 2.12 Tray 5 Base
1 – Bracket (Rear) (P/O PL 2.9 Item
14)
2 – Bracket (Front) (P/O PL 2.9 Item
14)
3 – Damper (Front) (P/O PL 2.9 Item
14)
4 – Damper (Rear) (P/O PL 2.9 Item
14)
6 110E93440 Tray 5 Interlock Switch
7 – Switch Bracket (P/O PL 2.9 Item
14)
8 – Frame (Front) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
9 – Frame (Rear) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
10 007E23260 Gear (12/28)
11 007E50250 Gear (10/20)
12 007E51430 Gear
13 – Frame (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
14 007E22430 Gear (12/28)
15 127K23470 Tray 5 Lift Motor (REP 2.12.1 )
18 059K08840 Tray 5 Retard Roll (REP 2.12.2 )
26 007E54910 Gear
27 005K82490 Fiction Clutch
31 130E82190 Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor
33 – Tray 5 Feeder Harness (P/O PL
2.9 Item 14)
34 – Bracket Cover (Front) (P/O PL 2.9
Item 14)
35 – Bracket Cover (Rear) (P/O PL 2.9
Item 14)
36 – Gear Cover (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
37 113E24030 Connector (J703)

PL 2.13 Tray 5 Tray
2 009E53370 Spring
5 130K58001 Tray 5 Size Sensor
6 – Tray (Lower) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
7 – Rail Bracket (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
8 – Tray (Extension) (P/O PL 2.13 Item
21)
9 – Pad (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
10 038K14700 Regi. Guide
11 038E89060 Side Guide
12 019K93320 Pad (Bottom)
14 – Tray 5 Tray (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
15 – Lift Shaft (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
16 007E66030 Gear
18 – Tie Plate (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
19 – Lower Cover (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
20 600K82960 Size Sensor Kit
21 604K07960 Tray 5 Extension Kit
22 600K85970 Lift Shaft and Gear Kit

manuals4you.com
PL 2.14 Regi. Unit, DTS HVPS
1 059K10025 Regi. Unit Assembly (REP 2.14.1 )
4 – Cover (Not Spared)
5 – Guide (Not Spared)
7 105K14923 DTS HVPS

PL 2.15 Regi.-Regi.
1 048K65921 Regi. Cover Assembly
2 – Regi. Cover (P/O PL 2.15 Item 1)
3 160K46290 OHP Sensor 1, OHP Sensor 2
4 130K60600 Regi. Sensor (REP 2.15.1 )
5 127K21871 Regi. Motor (REP 2.15.3 )
6 054K11072 Upper Chute
7 809E09430 Spring
9 013E88020 Bearing
14 – Label (P/O PL 2.15 Item 6)
15 809E08090 Spring
17 059K08790 Regi. Roll (REP 2.15.2 )
18 007E51370 Gear

manuals4you.com
PL 2.16 Regi.-Pre Regi.
1 005E85810 Coupling
2 130K58030 Pre Regi. Sensor (REP 2.16.1 )
4 059K08780 Pre Regi. Roll (REP 2.16.2 )
5 054K11090 Pre Regi. Chute Assembly
6 – Pre Regi. Chute (P/O PL 2.16 Item
5)
7 013E88030 Bearing
13 009P61135 Spring

PL 2.17 Vacuum Transport
1 059K10122 Vacuum Transport Assembly (REP
2.17.1 )
2 023E15480 Vacuum Transport Belt (REP
2.17.2 )
3 059E92950 Idler Roll
4 – Snap Bearing (P/O PL 2.17 Item 1)
7 – Seal (P/O PL 2.17 Item 1)
8 413W77359 Bearing
9 007E46610 Gear
10 006K84210 Shaft
11 007E49781 Gear

manuals4you.com
PL 2.18 Drawer Accessory, Duplex
Baffle
1 054K11395 Duplex In Baffle Assembly
2 054K11416 Aligner Baffle Assembly (W/TAG
P3)
3 003K84760 Hinge
4 003K84750 Hinge
5 032K93621 Guide
6 – Drawer Cover (Not Spared)
7 891E51561 Label
8 891E51571 Label
9 891E74062 Label
11 015K33973 Drawer Interlock Switch

PL 2.19 Drawer Frame, Duplex Out
Motor/Roll, Duplex Chute
1 054K11363 Duplex In Chute Assembly
2 054K11373 Aligner Chute Assembly
3 059K08600 Duplex Out Roll
7 007E51840 Gear
8 – Pulley (Not Spared)
10 423W82555 Belt
11 011K90420 Joint
12 – Shaft (Not Spared)
13 127K23191 Duplex Out Motor
14 050K34065 Drawer Frame Assembly
16 – Link (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 2.20 Duplex In/Aligner Baffle
Component
1 – Pinch Roll (Duplex In) (Roll:F) (P/O
PL 2.18 Item 1)
2 – Duplex In Baffle (P/O PL 2.18 Item
1)
4 011E08041 Lever
5 003E40151 Latch
6 003E36290 Knob
7 809E16590 Spring
8 809E16580 Spring (16MM)
9 809E14710 Spring (12.4MM)
11 – Pinch Roll (Duplex Path) (Roll: F)
12 – Stopper (P/O PL 2.18 Item 1)
13 – Guide (P/O PL 2.18 Item 1)
15 059K05750 Pinch Roll (Duplex Out)
16 – Aligner Baffle (P/O PL 2.18 Item 2)
20 809E20210 Spring
23 011E08031 Lever
25 809E09040 Spring

PL 2.21 Duplex In/Aligner Chute
Component
1 059K08610 Duplex In Roll
2 059K08621 Duplex Path Roll
5 – Duplex In Chute (P/O PL 2.19 Item
1)
6 423W11055 Duplex Belt 1, Duplex Belt 2 (REP
2.21.3)
8 809E09150 Spring
9 – Coupling (Trans) (P/O PL 2.19 Item
1)
10 – Coupling (Slide) (P/O PL 2.19 Item
1)
11 – Pipe (P/O PL 2.19 Item 1)
12 – Aligner Chute (P/O PL 2.19 Item 2)
13 059K09331 Aligner Roll 1
2)
17 130K93210 Duplex Path Sensor, Duplex Out
Sensor (REP 2.21.1 REP 2.21.2 )
18 – Frange (P/O PL 2.19 Item 2)
20 423W10055 Belt
2)

manuals4you.com
PL 2.22 Drawer Frame Component
1 001E50590 Rail (Left)
2 001E46411 Rail (Right)
5 – Wire Harness (P/O PL 2.19 Item
14)
8 003K85871 Latch Assembly
9 003K85851 Knob
11 003E37791 Latch
12 006E56620 Shaft
14 008E93261 Cam
15 011E08111 Joint
16 – Handle (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8)
20 809E09210 Spring
22 – Block (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8)
23 809E09171 Spring
24 809E09180 Spring
25 – Finger Guide (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8)
26 114E11390 Frame Connector
27 113E24020 Drawer Connector (P701)

PL 2.23 Inverter Unit
1 059K08686 Inverter 1 Assembly (REP 2.23.1 )
2 059K33080 Inverter 2 Assembly (REP 2.23.2)
3 054K11512 Inverter 3 Upper Chute Assembly
4 015E58040 Stopper
5 012E98271 Link
6 009E84220 Spring
7 – Inverter 3 Upper Chute (P/O PL
2.23 Item 3)
8 – Inverter 3 Lower Chute (Not
Spared)
9 003K84472 Hinge
10 003K84792 Hinge
11 050K36514 Exit Tray

manuals4you.com
PL 2.24 Inverter 1 Component
1 054K10303 Inverter 1 Upper Chute
2 127K21661 Inverter Motor (REP 2.24.1 )
3 121K16372 Release Solenoid (REP 2.24.2 )
4 110E93440 Inverter Cover Switch
7 001K56820 Rear Frame
8 009E84220 Spring
9 059K09022 Inverter Roll (Upper)
10 130K93220 Inverter Path Sensor
11 007E50130 Gear (14)
12 059K09030 Inverter Roll (Duplex)
13 007E51630 Gear (25/30)
14 007E51641 Gear
16 059K09040 Inverter Roll (Lower)
18 007K84601 Gear
19 007E91170 Gear (27)
20 130K57810 Duplex In Sensor
21 007E50140 Gear (15/20)
22 059E92850 Roll
23 011K94050 Lever
25 – Solenoid Cover (P/O PL 2.23 Item
1)

PL 2.25 Inverter 2 Component (Part 1
of 2)
1 054K10317 Inverter 2 Upper Chute
2 105E98690 Eliminator
3 – Inverter 2 Transport (P/O PL 2.23
Item 2)
4 121K16383 Inverter Gate Solenoid
6 130K59660 Exit Path Sensor
7 – Gate 1 Link (P/O PL 2.23 Item 2)
8 802E30660 Inverter 2 Cover
9 054K14675 Exit Chute
10 130K57820 M/C Exit Sensor
11 050K36851 Gate 1
12 891E82991 Label

manuals4you.com
PL 2.26 Inverter 2 Component (Part 2
of 2)
1 054K10323 Inverter 2 Lower Baffle
2 – Inverter 2 Lower Chute (P/O PL
2.26 Item 1)
3 – Pinch Roll (P/O PL 2.26 Item 1)
4 009E62420 Spring
6 001K57333 Frame
7 059K14872 Exit Roll Assembly (W/TAG P23)
(REP 2.26.1)
8 054K10333 Inverter 2 Mid.1 Baffle
12 038E88772 Guide
14 054K11161 Inverter 2 Mid. 2 Baffle
15 – Link Shaft (P/O PL 2.25 Item 3)
17 809E09530 Spring
18 011K94391 Lever
20 413W66250 Bearing
21 – Roller Shaft (P/O PL 2.26 Item 7)
22 005K82470 Clutch (One-way)
24 600K79560 Offset Roller Kit (W/O TAG P23)
25 600K83590 Offset Corrugation Mark Roller Kit
(W/O TAG P23)

PL 3.1 Platen Glass: ITT
1 – Stopper (Not Spared) (REP 3.1.2 )
2 – Bracket (Rear) (Not Spared)
3 – Stopper (Rear) (Not Spared)
4 – Bracket (Front) (Not Spared)
5 – Stopper (Front) (Not Spared)
6 – Brace (Not Spared)
8 – Right Side Plate (Not Spared)
9 090K92572 Platen Glass (With ADF) (REP
3.1.1)
10 015K37641 Left Side Plate

manuals4you.com
PL 3.2 CCD PWB, Sensor
1 – Cable Stopper (Not Spared)
2 048K71860 Cable Stopper
3 127K23590 IPS Fan
5 107E06650 IIT Regi. Sensor
6 110K08471 Platen Open Switch
7 130K57990 Platen Angle Sensor
8 160K48230 IIT Driver PWB
9 – Lens Assembly (Not Spared)
10 160K51931 CCD PWB Assembly (REP 3.2.1 )
11 – Lens Cover (Not Spared)
12 130K87150 APS Sensor
15 – Shield (Not Spared)
16 – Ribbon Cable (P/O PL 3.2 Item 10)
17 – CCD PWB (P/O PL 3.2 Item 10)

PL 3.3 Carriage Cable/Motor
1 063E94040 Tape
2 – Frame (Not Spared)
3 020K94970 Pulley
4 012K93440 Front Carriage Cable (REP 3.3.1 )
5 012K93450 Rear Carriage Cable (REP 3.3.1 )
6 063E94050 Tape
7 020E25100 Timing Pulley
8 023E15550 Belt
9 – Capstan Shaft (Not Spared)
10 020E25090 Capstan Pulley
12 009E62830 Spring
13 017E92140 Foot
15 – Pin (Not Spared)
16 127K21513 Carriage Motor (REP 3.3.2 )

manuals4you.com
PL 3.4 Full/Half Rate Carriage
1 – Harness Guide (Not Spared)
2 041K94210 Full Rate Carriage Assembly
3 – Full Rate Carriage (P/O PL 3.4
Item 2)
4 117E15970 Lamp Wire Harness (REP 3.4.2 )
6 062E98370 No.1 Mirror
7 019E50400 Clip (Single)
8 118E12090 Insulator
9 122E92000 Exposure Lamp (REP 3.4.1 )
10 105E08900 Lamp Ballast PWB
11 041K93792 Half Rate Carriage Assembly (REP
3.4.1 )
12 – Half Rate Carriage (P/O PL 3.4
Item 11)
13 062E98380 No.2, No.3 Mirror
14 – Dumper (P/O PL 3.4 Item 11)
15 – Clamp (Not Spared)
16 809E09110 Clip (Double)
– 809E15210 Clip (Single)

PL 3.5 IPS
1 – IPS Chassis (Not Spared) (REP
3.5.1 )
2 105E07351 IIT/IPS LVPS (50 Hz)
– 105E07322 IIT/IPS LVPS (60 Hz)
3 160K57369 Pre. IPS PWB
4 160K42710 BR PWB
– 160K60380 XCD PWB
5 160K84771 Post. IPS PWB
6 160K57375 Mem. Sys PWB
7 160K46113 Option Memory PWB (Duplex)
8 – Wire Harness (DC) (Not Spared)
9 – Wire Harness (AC) (Not Spared)
10 048E62151 Cover
12 117E15951 Cable
13 160K53462 IPS Edit PWB
14 – Spacer Screw (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 4.1 ROS
1 062K10670 ROS Assembly (W/TAG P5, TAG
P32) (REP 4.1.1)
2 – ROS (P/O PL 4.1 Item 1)
3 160K42851 Ldd PWB
5 – Wire Harness (Not Spared)
9 048K76921 ROS Top Cover
10 600K86001 ROS and Halftone PWB Repair Kit
(W/TAG P32)

PL 5.1 ESV Sensor, Erase Lamp
1 114K81062 Connector (EP ROM PWB)
2 054K10151 Duct and Erase Lamp Assembly
3 122K92892 Erase Lamp (REP 5.1.1 )
4 – Duct (P/O PL 5.1 Item 2)
5 – Duct (Not Spared)
6 – ESV Sensor and Cover Assembly
(Not Spared)
7 130K57720 ESV Sensor
8 – ESV Sensor Cover (P/O PL 5.1
Item 6)
11 006K84192 Drum Shaft

manuals4you.com
PL 5.2 CC/PCC Connector, Waste
Toner Bottle (IOT Rear)
1 114K81082 CC Connector
2 114K81362 PCC Connector
3 115K91160 Earth Plate
4 007K84593 Gear (Bottle Auger)
5 130E91010 Waste Toner Full Sensor
7 130K82921 Waste Toner Bottle Sensor
9 – Waste Toner Bottle (REF: PL 5.2)
(Not Spared)

PL 5.3 Drum Component
1 – Front Plate (Not Spared) (REP
5.3.1 )
2 802K04428 Front Cover
3 – Drum (REP 5.3.1)
6 – Seal (Top Cover) (Not Spared)
7 – Top Cover (Not Spared)
8 – Seal (Blade Side) (Not Spared)
9 – Shutter Spring (Not Spared)
10 – Shutter Pipe (Not Spared)
11 059K09532 Auger (Not Spared)
12 – EP ROM PWB (Not Spared)
13 – Rear Cover (Not Spared)
14 042K91811 Cleaning Brush (REP 5.3.3 )
16 033K92970 Cleaning Blade (REP 5.3.4 )
19 035E40690 Side Seal

manuals4you.com
PL 5.4 Charge/Pre Clean Corotron
1 – BPO Roll and Duct (Not Spared)
2 125K03650 Charge Corotron Assembly
4 – CC Wire (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2) (REP
5.4.1 )
5 – Arc Shield (Front) (P/O PL 5.4 Item
2)
6 – Arc Shield (Rear) (P/O PL 5.4 Item
2)
7 – CC Shield (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2)
8 – Insulator (Front) (P/O PL 5.4 Item
2)
9 – Insulator (Rear) (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2)
10 – Grid Spring (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2)
11 – CC Grid (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2)
12 125K93062 Pre Clean Corotron Assembly
13 – PCC Shield (P/O PL 5.4 Item 12)
14 118E12251 Insulator (Front)
15 118K91900 Insulator (Rear)
16 – Arc Shield (Rear) (Not Spared)
17 – Arc Shield (Front) (Not Spared)
18 009P62935 Spring
19 117K92100 PCC Wire (REP 5.4.2 )
21 – Earth Wire (Not Spared)
22 604K22290 Wire Repair Kit

PL 5.5 Waste Toner Auger
1 119K90765 Waste Toner Junction Assembly
(REP 5.5.1 )
2 059K09510 Auger (Waste Toner Bottle)
3 059K09500 Auger (Drum)
4 059K09490 Auger
5 – Wing Plate (P/O PL 5.5 Item 1)
6 011K94141 Joint (Drum)
7 011K93990 Joint (IBT)
8 011K94160 Joint (Rear)
9 011E08021 Joint (Front)
10 011K94150 Joint (Rear)
11 011E08010 Joint (Front)
12 052E93470 Pipe
13 005E85760 Ring
14 052E93460 Pipe
15 013K81260 Bearing
17 007E52030 Gear
21 423W82054 Auger Belt (REP 5.5.2 )
23 052E93640 Shutter
25 009E84150 Spring
26 052E93480 Pipe (Waste Toner Bottle)
27 013K81270 Bearing
28 068K14541 Bracket
29 007E52040 Gear
30 007E52050 Gear
31 068K14550 Auger Sensor
32 020E26710 Pulley
33 035E45550 Seal
34 020E26990 Pulley

manuals4you.com
PL 6.1 Development Components
1 011K94091 Rotary Latch Lever Assembly
(REP 6.1.3 )
2 121K16401 Rotary Latch Solenoid Assembly
3 – Solenoid (P/O PL 6.1 Item 2)
4 – Lever (P/O PL 6.1 Item 2)
5 809E15180 Spring
8 130E82190 Rotary Latch Sensor
10 – Rotary PWB (P/O PL 6.1 Item 22)
11 600K82900 High Frequence Noise Rotary PWB
Kit (W/TAG P18) (REP 6.1.1)
12 – Film Seal (Not Spared)
14 068K86934 Gear Assembly
15 115K91133 Bias Brush (REP 6.1.4 )
16 127K28490 Rotary Motor
17 130K87380 Rotary Home Position Sensor
(REP 6.1.2 )
19 – Support Tray (Not Spared)
20 – High Frequence Noise Rotary PWB
21 099P03019 Fuses
22 – Rotary PWB Assembly (Not
Spared) (W/TAG P2)

PL 6.2 Toner Cartridge Unit
1 – Toner Cartridge (Y) (Not Spared)
(REF: PL 6.2)
2 – Toner Cartridge (M) (Not Spared)
(REF: PL 6.2))
3 – Toner Cartridge (C) (Not Spared)
(REF: PL 6.2)
4 – Toner Cartridge (K) (Not Spared)
(REF: PL 6.2))
5 094K91307 Toner Cartridge Unit Assembly
(REP 6.2.1 )
6 055E30790 Shutter
7 – Toner Cartridge Cover (Not
Spared)
8 891E74014 Label (Y)
9 891E74023 Label (M)
10 891E74033 Label (C)
11 891E74003 Label (K)

manuals4you.com
PL 6.3 Toner Cartridge Component
(Part 1 of 2)
1 802K08652 Toner Cartridge Housing (C) (REP
6.3.1 )
2 130E82720 Low Toner Sensor (C), Low Toner
Sensor (M), Low Toner Sensor (Y),
Low Toner Sensor (K)
3 802K08662 Toner Cartridge Housing (M) (REP
6.3.1 )
5 802K08672 Toner Cartridge Housing (Y) (REP
6.3.1 )
6 127K32940 Cartridge Motor (C), Cartridge
Motor (M), Cartridge Motor (Y),
Cartridge Motor (K) (REP 6.3.2 )
7 802K08682 Toner Cartridge Housing (REP
6.3.1 )
8 127K21270 Dispense Motor (REP 6.3.2 )
9 413W11660 Bearing
10 005E85181 Coupling
11 007E46710 Gear
12 809E06790 Spring

PL 6.4 Toner Cartridge Component
(Part 2 of 2)
2 – Shaft (K) (P/O PL 6.2 Item 5)
3 – Shaft (C, M) (P/O PL 6.2 Item 5)
4 007E46680 Gear (43)
5 007E46780 Gear (23)
6 007E46760 Gear (23)
7 007E49650 Gear
8 007E46700 Gear (25)
9 007E46720 Gear (21)
11 007E46740 Gear
12 009E34940 Spring
14 015E54911 Shutter
15 015K29910 Plate
16 048K61830 Auger (M, K)
17 048K61840 Auger (C)
18 – Pipe (Y) (P/O PL 6.2 Item 5)
19 160K45930 Dispense PWB (REP 6.4.1 )

manuals4you.com
PL 6.5 Rotary Dispenser
5 019K94332 Block
6 026E58330 Screw
7 026K80730 Screw
8 026K80740 Screw Assembly (With Spring )
9 026K80750 Screw
11 – Outer Dispense Housing (P/O PL
6.5 Item 24) (W/TAG P26)
12 048K61963 Inner Dispense Housing (W/TAG
P26)
14 049E85681 Outer Dispense Cover
15 068K87041 Inner Dispense Cover
16 130K57930 Trickle Toner Full Sensor
18 048K76720 Cover Assembly
19 802K08850 Cover
20 809E08810 Spring
21 011E08640 Lever
23 – Trickle Toner Bottle (REF: PL 6.5)
(Not Spared)
24 600K83451 DCD Kit (Tag P26) (W/TAG P26)

PL 6.6 Deve. Housing
1 007E46820 Auger Gear (19) (M/C)
2 048K61638 Deve. Housing Assembly (Y/M/C)
(REP 6.6.1 REP 6.6.2 )
3 096E75880 Label (C)
4 096E75850 Label (K)
5 048K77228 Deve. Housing Assembly (REP
6.6.1 REP 6.6.2 )
6 007K84881 Auger Gear (19) (Y/K)
7 096E75860 Label (Y)
8 096E75870 Label (M)
9 – Deve. Housing (Y/M/C) (P/O PL 6.6
Item 2)
10 019E39442 Holder
11 – Deve. Housing (K) (P/O PL 6.6 Item
5)
12 007E46650 Developer Housing Shaft Gear

manuals4you.com
PL 6.7 Rotary Frame/Auger
1 – Rotary Frame (Not Spared)
2 019K94230 Holder Assembly (Rear)
3 – Holder (P/O PL 6.7 Item 2)
4 019E33780 Clamp
5 809E06550 Spring
6 019K94221 Holder Assembly (Front)
8 106K90660 Rotary Auger (Y) (REP 6.7.1)
9 – Brush (Not Spared)
10 052K91470 Trickle Auger (REP 6.7.2 )
11 106K90650 Rotary Auger (M) (REP 6.7.1 )
12 106K90640 Rotary Auger (C) (REP 6.7.1)
13 106K90670 Rotary Auger (K) (REP 6.7.1)

PL 7.1 IBT System Component
1 600K86096 IBT Assembly (REP 7.1.1 )
2 – Screw (M3 X 4) (Not Spared)
3 042K91906 IBT Cleaner Assembly (W/TAG P1)
(REP 7.1.2 )
4 130K57690 Temp Humidity Sensor
7 015K36962 Right Rail Assembly
8 015K36972 Left Rail Assembly
9 015K29634 Rail Front Plate Assembly
10 048K77264 IBT Inner Cover
11 011E07092 Lever (Yellow Color)
12 – Screw (M3 X 12) (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 7.2 Rail Front Plate
1 – Front Plate (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9)
2 014E87701 Block
3 006E56632 Shaft
4 – Cam (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9)
5 009E43970 Spring
7 008E93400 Retract Cam
8 – Pin (P/O PL 7.1 Item 1)

PL 7.3 Left/Right Rail
1 – Left Tie Plate (P/O PL 7.1 Item 8)
2 – Left Rail (P/O PL 7.1 Item 8)
5 – Harness Cover
7 130E82190 IBT Cleaner Blade Home Position
Sensor
9 – Cam (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7)
10 – Pin (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7)
14 – Wheel (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7)
15 – Coupling (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7)
16 – Plate Spring (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7)
17 001K59370 Right Rail
18 – Right Tie Plate (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7)

manuals4you.com
PL 7.5 IBT-Belt, Sensor, Steering Roll
1 – IBT Assembly (P/O PL 7.1 Item 1)
2 064K91243 IBT Belt (REP 7.5.1 )
4 130K57973 ADC Sensor
5 048E64920 Harness Cover
7 130E84270 TRO Sensor
8 600K82710 Drive Roll Kit (W/TAG P20)
11 015K35842 Inlet Plate
12 – IBT Rear Cover (P/O PL 7.1 Item
1)

PL 7.6 IBT Component (Part 1 of 2)
1 059K07800 Bias Roll (REP 7.6.1 )
2 013K81510 Bearing and Spring Assembly
3 013E88310 Bearing
5 059K07843 Drive Roll (Pre-Tag 20) (REP 7.6.2
)
6 007E46502 Gear
7 048K61601 Gear Cover
9 059K07812 Back Up Roll (REP 7.6.3)
10 059K08160 Contact Roll (REP 7.6.4)
12 809E06330 Spring
13 042K91650 Drive Roll Cleaning Blade
16 830E81410 Plate
17 105K14062 1st BTR HVPS

manuals4you.com
PL 7.7 IBT Component (Part 2 of 2)
1 059E92720 Idler Roll
4 012E98080 Link (Rear)
5 029E26770 Arm Pivot
6 012E98070 Link (Front)
8 031E94101 Arm
9 809E06360 Spring
10 003E39980 Stopper
11 008E93250 Rear Cam
12 008E93090 Front Cam
13 – Earth Plate (Not Spared)
14 008E93270 Foot Cam
15 011E08081 Front Lever
16 006E56290 Shaft
17 – Earth Plate (Not Spared)
18 031E93022 Inboard Tension Roll Arm

PL 7.8 IBT Cleaner
1 035K81498 Seal (W/TAG P17)
2 033K93272 Cleaning Blade
3 809E17001 Spring
4 809E17010 Spring
5 – Housing (P/O PL 7.1 Item 3)
6 035E48290 Seal
7 035E48300 Seal
8 809E06401 Spring

manuals4you.com
PL 7.9 2nd BTR
1 059K14186 2nd BTR (REP 7.9.1 )
2 029E26180 Screw
3 – Indicator (Not Spared)
4 – Label (Not Spared)
5 – Plate (Not Spared)
6 130E82190 2nd BTR Retract Home Position
Sensor

PL 7.10 2nd BTR Component
1 – Inlet Plate (Not Spared)
2 130K60600 Pre IBT Sensor
3 – Cleaning Blade Assembly (P/O PL
7.9 Item 1)
4 – Cleaning Blade (P/O PL 7.10 Item
3)
7 809E06380 Spring
8 059K13021 2nd BTR Roll (REP 7.10.1 )
9 031K92420 Front Arm
10 809E06370 Spring
11 006K84114 Cam Shaft Assembly
13 – Pin (P/O PL 7.10 Item 11)
15 – Cam (P/O PL 7.10 Item 11)
16 007E46530 Gear
17 048K69086 2nd BTR Housing
18 048E64910 Cover
21 031K92410 Rear Arm
22 007E46541 Gear
23 007E46551 Gear
24 054K19721 Exit Chute Assembly
26 054E88182 Guide
27 130E91120 Pre Fuser Sensor
24)
29 – Screw
30 – BTR Brush (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 8.1 Fuser Unit, Front Cover
1 604K00846 Fuser Unit (50 Hz) (W/TAG P12)
(REP 8.1.1,ADJ 8.1.1)
– 604K00836 Fuser Unit (60 Hz) (W/TAG P12)
(REP 8.1.1,ADJ 8.1.1)
2 048E52741 Front Cover
3 068K87161 Pin Bracket
4 – Cartridge Guide (Not Spared)
5 – Oil Cartridge (Not Spared) (REF:
PL 8.1)

PL 8.2 Fuser Sub Assembly
1 – Top Cover (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
2 891E76040 Label
3 891E76001 Label
4 013E87700 Bearing
6 891E75990 Label
9 809E09190 Spring
10 – Web CRU (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
11 007E49730 Gear (19)
12 007K84120 Gear (28/49)
15 – Pin (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
18 007E49831 Gear
19 – Donor Roll Assembly (P/O PL 8.2
Item 20) (REP 8.2.1)
20 604K08100 Fuser Reliability Improvement Kit
(For Streaks and Offsetting)

manuals4you.com
PL 8.3 Heat/Pressure Roll
1 059K39500 Heat Roll (REP 8.3.1 )
2 126K07960 Heat Roll Heater Rod (60 Hz) (REP
8.3.2 )
– 126K08510 Heat Roll Heater Rod (50 Hz)
(REP 8.3.2 )
3 – Heat Roll Stopper (Front) (P/O PL
8.1 Item 1)
4 049E86600 Heater Rod Bracket (Front)
5 – Heater Rod Bracket (Rear) (P/O PL
8.1 Item 1)
6 – Heat Roll Stopper (Rear) (P/O PL
8.1 Item 1)
7 019K94651 Heat Roll Finger Assembly
9 009E59690 Spring
10 019E42010 Heat Roll Striper Finger (REP 8.3.5
)
11 026P63503 Stud
12 059K39670 Pressure Roll (REP 8.3.3 )
13 126K07970 Pressure Roll Heater Rod (60 Hz)
(REP 8.3.4 )
– 126K08520 Pressure Roll Heater Rod (50 Hz)
(REP 8.3.4 )
14 809E06730 Spring
15 049E86370 Heater Rod Bracket (Rear)

PL 8.4 Heat Roll Sensor, External Heat
Roll Retract/Web Motor
1 130K57471 Heat Roll Sensor Assembly
3 130K57430 H/R Thermostat
4 130K57390 H/R Control Thermistor
5 130K57400 H/R Overheat Thermistor
6 – Upper Frame (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
7 127K27910 Web Motor (REP 8.4.1 )
9 007E82390 Gear
10 121K16800 Magnet
15 160K46120 Web Drive PWB
16 – PWB Support (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
17 127K21351 External Heat Roll Retract Motor
(REP 8.4.1 )
18 007E51980 Gear
19 130K57490 External Heat Roll Retract Sensor

manuals4you.com
PL 8.5 Web Shutter, Cleaning Roll
(Heat Roll)
1 – Web Guide Block Assembly (P/O
PL 8.1 Item 1)
2 – Rear Guide Block (P/O PL 8.5 Item
1)
3 – Front Guide Block (P/O PL 8.5
Item 1)
4 – Contact Plate (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
5 – Wire Harness (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
6 003K85453 Front Latch Assembly
7 003K85483 Rear Latch Assembly
8 – Upper Frame (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
12 913W02310 Connector (Blue) (PJ700)
– 162K37050 Fuser Side Harness
– 162K36960 Frame Side Harness
13 600K84050 Web Shutter Repair Kit
15 – Shutter (P/O PL 8.5 Item 13)
18 059K24360 Cleaning Roll
20 – Tie Plate (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
21 014K81273 CRU Block Guide Assembly
22 – Front Latch (P/O PL 8.5 Item 6)
23 003K85731 Web Release Button
24 – Rear Latch (P/O PL 8.5 Item 7)

PL 8.6 Pressure Roll Sensor, Pressure
Roll Nip
1 130K57380 P/R Overheat Thermistor
2 130K57370 P/R Control Thermistor
3 130K87470 P/R Thermostat
4 068K87410 Bracket
6 – Harness Cover (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
7 007E49760 Gear (28)
8 007E51500 Gear (20)
9 007E49740 Gear (20)
10 007K84130 Gear (32)
11 007K84140 Gear (34)
13 011K94040 Rear Lever Assembly
14 – Rear Lever (P/O PL 8.6 Item 13)
15 026K80720 Adjust Screw
16 011K94030 Front Lever Assembly
17 – Front Lever (P/O PL 8.6 Item 16)
21 008E93160 Cam
23 015K33670 Nip Sensor
25 – Stand Plate (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
26 – Harness Guard (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)

manuals4you.com
PL 8.7 Oil Pump/Tank
1 127K21410 Oil Pump (REP 8.7.1 )
2 052E92750 Tube
3 019E39570 Clamp
4 052E93181 Oil Pipe
5 809E06530 Spring Plate
6 039K90592 Oil Wick (W/TAG P12) (REP 8.7.2 )
7 068K21850 Bracket
8 050E17450 Oil Pan
9 054K11220 Inlet Chute
10 093E91961 Oil Tank
11 130K57940 Oil Empty Sensor
12 052E93920 Tube
– 052E96630 Tube (Alternate)
13 809E19010 Support Plate Spring
14 053E92650 Oil Filter
15 019E49780 Hose Clamp
16 604K01911 Oil System Upgrade Kit (W/TAG
P37)

PL 8.8 External Heat Roll
1 001K62603 External Heat Roll Assembly (60
Hz)
– 001K62613 External Heat Roll Assembly (50
Hz)
3 130K87520 External H/R Overheat Thermistor
4 130K87500 External H/R Control Thermistor
5 130K57350 External H/R Thermostat
7 013E87600 Bearing
8 – Ring (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1)
9 013E87700 Bearing
10 049E86030 Heater Rod Bracket (Rear)
13 007K85270 Gear (18) (18 )
15 – Shaft Cam (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1)
17 – Lever (Rear) (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1)
18 809E06770 Spring
19 – Lever (Front) (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1)
20 059E92780 External Heater Roll (REP
8.8.2,ADJ 8.8.1)
21 126K07980 External H/R Heater Rod (60 Hz)
(REP 8.8.1 )
– 126K08530 External H/R Heater Rod (50 Hz)
(REP 8.8.1 )

manuals4you.com
PL 8.9 Pick Up/Donor Roll
2 013E94380 Bearing
3 600K83631 Pick Up Roll Kit (W/TAG P21)
4 033K92892 Blade
6 013E94320 Bearing
8 022K62370 Donor Roll

PL 8.10 Exit Chute
1 054K10114 Exit Chute Assembly (50 Hz)
– 054K10115 Exit Chute Assembly (60 Hz)
2 – Chute Frame (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1)
4 130K92950 Fuser Exit Sensor
7 – Wire Cover (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1)
8 413W77559 Bearing
9 007E84880 Gear (17)
10 – Handle (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1)
11 – Lower Chute (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1)
12 022K48250 Exit Roll
15 019E33860 Pressure Roll Stripper Finger (REP
8.10.1 )
16 009E59690 Spring
17 – Stud (P/O PL 8.10 Item 18)
18 019K94202 Pressure Roll Finger Assembly

manuals4you.com
PL 9.1 Front, Right
1 910W00211 Main Switch
4 910W00122 Front Door Interlock Switch
7 015K38560 Deve. Bias and CC/PCC HVPS
Assembly
8 015K33986 Deve. Bias HVPS Assembly
11 – Deve. Bias HVPS (P/O PL 9.1 Item
7)
12 105E99122 CC/PCC HVPS
13 048E65041 Interlock Cover
14 117E22350 Power Cord (120V) (60 Hz)
– 117K31400 Power Cord (110V)
– 117E10550 Power Cord (220V) (60 Hz)
– 152S05105 Power Cord (United Kingdom
250V/10A Gray)
– 152S05121 Power Cord (United Kingdom
240V/10A Black)
– 152S05106 Power Cord (Denmark 250V/10A
Gray)
– 152S05122 Power Cord (Denmark 250V/10A
Black)
– 152S05107 Power Cord (Switzerland 250V/10A
Gray)
– 152S05123 Power Cord (Switzerland 250V/10A
Black)
– 152S05104 Power Cord (Europe 250V/10A
Gray)
– 152S05120 Power Cord (Europe 250V/10A
Black)
– 117K23770 Power Cord (19A)
– 117K22350 Power Cord (20A)
– 117E25300 1670 Epson Scanner Power Cord
– 962K01820 Power Cord (United Kingdom)
– 962K01830 Power Cord (Denmark)
– 962K01810 Power Cord (Europe)
– 962K01840 Power Cord (CH)
15 130K60561 Atc Sensor Bracket (W/TAG P14)
16 606K91040 ATC Sensor Kit (W/TAG P14)

PL 9.2 IOT Top/Rear
1 162K41511 Flat Cable (FPC-IOT)
2 162K41521 Flat Cable (FPC-ROS) (W/TAG
P42)
3 160K74412 Half Tone PWB (W/TAG P32)
(REP 9.2.3 )
4 – PWB Bracket (Not Spared)
6 – Washer (Not Spared)
7 – IOT Control PWB Chassis Assem-
bly (Not Spared) (REP 9.2.1)
8 – PWB Chassis (P/O PL 9.2 Item 7)
9 160K61620 IOT Drive PWB (W/TAG P14)
(REP 9.2.2)
10 160K61611 IOT CPU PWB (W/TAG P6)
11 160K47911 IOT NVM PWB (REF: PL 9.2) (Rep
9.2.2 )
13 – PWB Support (P/O PL 9.2 Item 7)
15 105K14914 2nd BTR HVPS
16 127K21750 Rotary Fan
17 048K76941 Half Tone PWB Cover
18 – IOT Control PWB Cover (Not
Spared)
19 – Extension Plate (Not Spared)
20 160K48688 VSEL Base TTL PWB
21 160K48704 VSEL Extension PWB (W/TAG
P13)
22 162K42260 Flat Cable (J388/J389)
24 – Blind Cover (Not Spared)
25 026E56431 VSEL Screw

manuals4you.com
PL 9.3 Tray Module, Rear
1 160K45940 Distribution PWB Assembly
– 160K60770 Distribution PWB Assembly (Alter-
nate)
2 – PWB (P/O PL 9.3 Item 1)
3 108E94360 Fuse (5A/125V)
4 – LVPS Bracket (Not Spared)
5 101K33185 Power Chassis Assembly (50 Hz)
(W/TAG P28) (REP 9.3.1)
– 101K31295 Power Chassis Assembly (60 Hz)
(W/TAG P28) (REP 9.3.1 )
6 – Power Chassis (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5)
7 – Inlet (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5)
8 908W00914 Circuit Breaker (60 Hz)
– 908W00909 Circuit Breaker (50 Hz)
9 – Noise Filter (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5)
10 – Outlet (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5)
11 – Inlet Plate (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5)
12 – Outlet Plate (FX/TFX) (P/O PL 9.3
Item 5)
13 101K31312 AC Driver PWB Assembly (60 Hz)
(REP 9.3.1 )
– 101K31322 AC Driver PWB Assembly (50 Hz)
(REP 9.3.1 )
14 – PWB Chassis (P/O PL 9.3 Item 13)
15 – AC Driver PWB (P/O PL 9.3 Item
13)
16 908W00134 Fuse (6.3A/125V)
17 908W00131 Fuse (3.15A/125V)
18 109E93220 SSR (60 Hz)
– 109E93230 SSR (50 Hz)
19 101K31342 Transformer Assembly (60 Hz)
– 101K31352 Transformer (50 Hz)
20 105E07314 IOT LVPS (60 Hz) (REP 9.3.2 )
– 105E07344 IOT LVPS (50 Hz) (REP 9.3.2 )
21 160K48351 Tray PWB Assembly
22 – Tray PWB (P/O PL 9.3 Item 21)
23 – Fuse (P/O PL 9.3 Item 21)
24 – Cap (Not Spared)
25 105E98090 Printer B3 LVPS (60 Hz) (REP
9.3.3 )
– 105E98110 Printer B3H LVPS (50 Hz) (REP
9.3.3 )
26 – LVPS Bracket (Not Spared)
27 – Connector Bracket (Not Spared)
29 – Transformer (P/O PL 9.3 Item 19)
30 109E93260 ESS SSR

PL 9.4 Drawer Connectors
2 – C/R Connector (Not Spared)
3 009E73310 Spring
6 – Connector Housing (P702 ) (Not
Spared)
9 009E81210 Spring
10 – Connector Housing (J700 ) (Not
Spared)
13 – Connector Housing (P701 ) (Not
Spared)
14 – Foreign Interface Bracket (Not
Spared)
15 101K24030 Foreign Interface Chassis Assem-
bly
16 – Foreign Interface Chassis (P/O PL
9.4 Item 15)
17 160K29150 A I/F PWB (Foreign Interface PWB)
– 160K80150 I/F PWB (Foreign Interface PWB)
18 537K49510 ROM (Coin Vend/Debit Card)
– 537K43720 ROM (External Auditron)
19 – Chassis Cover (P/O PL 9.4 Item
15)

manuals4you.com
PL 9.5 Control Panel
1 048K77776 Control Panel Assembly (W/TAG
P24) (REP 9.5.1 )
2 802K31691 Control Panel Housing Assembly
3 – Panel Housing (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2)
4 – Set Key (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2)
5 – Display (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2)
6 – Lamp (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2)
7 – Touch Panel (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2)
(ADJ 9.1.18 )
8 – Power Supply (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2)
9 – VR PWB (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2)
10 600K83650 UI PWB Kit (W/TAG P24)
12 – Panel (Right) (P/O PL 9.5 Item 1)
13 – Panel (Center) (P/O PL 9.5 Item 1)
14 – Panel (Left) (P/O PL 9.5 Item 1)
18 – Adjust Pen (Not Spared)
19 – Wire Harness (Edit Pad) (Not
Spared)

PL 9.6 EMI/Safety for Fuser Heat
Lamp (50 Hz)
1 103E24040 Surge Resistor
2 109E93260 Surge SSR
3 160K61560 Varistor PWB

manuals4you.com
PL 10.1 Air System-Front Door
1 127K21761 Fuser Intake Fan and Duct Assem-
bly
2 127K21801 Fuser Intake Fan
3 054K99181 Duct (Fuser Intake)
4 054K99191 Duct (CC Intake)

PL 10.2 Air System-Rear, Right
3 – Filter Case (Not Spared)
4 – Duct (Rotary Deve.) (Not Spared)
5 – Vacuum Transport Duct (Not
Spared)
6 127K21770 Fuser Fan and Duct Assembly
7 – Duct Fuser (P/O PL 10.2 Item 6)
8 – Fan Cover (P/O PL 10.2 Item 6)
9 127K21780 Fuser Fan (REP 10.2.1 )
12 – Duct (Xero. Module) (Not Spared)
13 – Filter Assembly (Not Spared)
14 053K91410 Filter (Suction)
15 053K91420 Filter (Ozone)
16 053K91430 Filter (Ozone)
17 127K21822 Suction Blower Motor (REP 10.2.2
)

manuals4you.com
PL 11.1 Platen/Top Cover
1 048E61921 Top Cover
5 004E08250 Platen Cushion (REP 11.1.1 )
6 048E66331 Blind Cover
8 048K71213 Platen Cover Assembly
9 048E62452 Platen Cover
10 048E62462 Pocket Cover
11 003E40250 Hinge
12 003K85090 Stopper
13 121E90620 Magnet
14 050E88440 Wing Tray
15 003E43840 Thumb Screw (Not Spared)
16 830E20010 Bracket

PL 11.2 Front/Right Cover
1 802K06232 Right Upper Cover
2 048E60750 Right Lower Front Cover
3 048K77462 Filter Unit Cover and Seal Assem-
bly
4 048E60741 Filter Unit Cover
6 048E60762 Power Chassis Cover
7 – Hinge (Not Spared)
8 048E60670 Blind Cover (PSW)
9 048E60690 Blind Cover (AC Out)
10 891E75721 Name Plate (DC12)
– 892E02000 Name Plate (DCCS50)
12 891E75951 Logo Plate
13 048K69818 Front Door Assembly
14 – Front Door (P/O PL 11.2 Item 13)
15 – Block (P/O PL 11.2 Item 13)
17 – Blind Cover (Not Spared)
18 017E93753 Caster (Front) (Locking)
19 017E93743 Caster (Rear) (Unlocking)
20 802E61690 Front Lower Cover
21 600K82870 Cover Seal Kit (W/TAG P15)

manuals4you.com
PL 11.3 Rear/Left Cover
1 048E60772 Left Upper Front Cover
2 048E60781 Left Upper Rear Cover
3 048E60790 Left Inner Cover
4 – Bracket (Front) (Not Spared)
5 – Bracket (Rear) (Not Spared)
6 802K04681 Left Middle Cover
7 802K31420 IOT Rear Cover (W/TAG P38)
8 048E65171 Blind Cover (EPSV)
9 048E65391 ESS Cover
10 – Data Plate (Not Spared)
11 048K76341 Tray Module Rear Cover
12 – Connector Cover (Not Spared)
13 048E65330 ESS Left Cover
14 048E65341 ESS Rear Cover
15 048E61933 IIT Rear Cover
16 048E61941 IIT Left Cover
18 – Blind Cover (P/O PL 11.3 Item 23)
19 – Blind Cover (P/O PL 11.3 Item 23)
20 – Left Lower Rear Cover (Not
Spared)
21 802E61670 Left Lower Front Cover
22 – Extension Bracket (Not Spared)
23 600K84700 Cover Kit

PL 12.1 Front/Rear Cover, Entrance
Tray
1 048K76181 Rear Cover Assembly (REP 12.1.1
)
2 – Rear Cover (P/O PL 12.1 Item 1)
3 140K60480 Led PWB
5 891E65180 Label (Display)
6 050K36410 Entrance Tray Assembly
7 – Entrance Tray (P/O PL 12.1 Item
6)
10 032K93800 Document Guide
11 048E64201 Front Cover
12 891E77561 Label
13 891E65210 Label (Size)
14 059K23063 DADF Feeder Assembly

manuals4you.com
PL 12.2 Top Cover, Registration Gate
Solenoid
1 054K13622 Top Cover Assembly
2 – Top Cover (P/O PL 12.2 Item 1)
3 015E48890 Plate (Front Magnet)
4 809E11130 Spring
6 015E48900 Plate (Rear Magnet)
7 110K91972 Top Cover Interlock Switch (Front),
Top Cover Interlock Switch (Rear)
10 121K93870 Magnet
13 121K87790 Registration Gate Solenoid Assem-
bly
15 121K86550 Registration Gate Solenoid (REP
12.2.2 )
16 031E92550 Regi. Arm
17 – Push Rivet (P/O PL 12.2 Item 13)

PL 12.3 Counter Balance, DADF
Control PWB
1 003K91881 Knob Screw
2 036K91431 Right Counter Balance Assembly
(ADJ 12.3.1 ADJ 12.3.3 )
3 – Counter Balance (P/O PL 12.3
Item 2)
4 – DADF Interlock Switch (P/O PL
12.3 Item 2)
8 036K91420 Left Counter Balance (ADJ 12.3.1
ADJ 12.3.3 )
9 – PWB Support (Not Spared)
12 – Safety Bracket (Not Spared)
14 160K51502 DADF Control PWB Assembly
(ADJ 12.3.2 )
15 – Fuse (F2 ) (P/O PL 12.3 Item 14)
16 – Fuse (F1 ) (P/O PL 12.3 Item 14)
17 537K51016 ROM
18 – DADF Control PWB (P/O PL 12.3
Item 14)

manuals4you.com
PL 12.4 Document Feed Chute
(Upper), Feed Motor
1 054K13600 Document Feed Upper Chute
Assembly
2 059K11840 Feed Roll Assembly
3 – Upper Baffle (P/O PL 12.4 Item 1)
4 – Shaft (Drive) (P/O PL 12.4 Item 1)
5 007E39420 Gear
6 013E92760 Bearing
7 007E39430 Gear
8 600K90370 Nudger Roll Kit, Feed Roll Kit
(2/Kit) (REP 12.4.2 )
11 007E39410 Gear
12 007E39390 Gear
13 – Shaft (Feed) (P/O PL 12.4 Item 1)
15 007E39400 Gear
16 – Housing (P/O PL 12.4 Item 1)
17 802K08320 Inner Cover
18 020E22160 Pulley
19 023E12610 Belt
21 127K27590 Feed Motor (REP 12.4.1 )

PL 12.5 Document Feed Chute
(Lower)
1 054K13591 Document Feed Lower Chute
Assembly (REP 12.5.1 )
3 009E71890 Spring
5 809E11120 Plate Spring
6 – Arm (P/O PL 12.5 Item 1)
7 055K19260 Guard
8 – Shaft (Arm) (P/O PL 12.5 Item 1)
9 – Shaft (Retard) (P/O PL 12.5 Item 1)
10 022K46560 Retard Roll (REP 12.5.2 )
11 – Screw (M3 X 12) (P/O PL 12.5 Item
1)
12 121K87800 Set Gate Solenoid Assembly (REP
12.5.3 )
14 121K87810 Set Gate Solenoid
17 130E80890 Size Sensor 1 (Rear), Size Sensor
2 (Front) (REP 12.5.5 )
18 130E91220 Registration Sensor, Document
Sensor (REP 12.5.4 )
19 – Damper (Not Spared)
20 050K27660 Set Gate

manuals4you.com
PL 12.6 DADF Belt Motor, Duplex Roll
1 127K83520 DADF Belt Motor Assembly (REP
12.6.1 )
2 – DADF Belt Motor (P/O PL 12.6
Item 1)
3 – Damper (P/O PL 12.6 Item 1)
5 013P60566 Tension Roll
8 023E92341 Belt
9 – Spacer (Not Spared)
10 020K91230 Pulley
12 022E93660 Tension Roll
13 023E94140 Belt
14 020E21050 Pulley
17 022K37080 Duplex Roll (Upper)
18 022K37070 Duplex Roll (Lower)
19 023E12230 Belt

PL 12.7 Duplex Chute
1 054K06692 Duplex Chute
3 130E91220 Duplex Sensor (REP 12.7.1 )
4 050K27670 Gate
6 – Tapping Screw (Not Spared)
7 054K18790 Lower Chute Assembly
10 121E90640 Magnet (Open Switch)

manuals4you.com
PL 12.8 Registration Roll
4 059K11830 Registration Roll
5 007K91860 Gear
6 009E28580 Spring (Rear)
7 – C-Clip (Not Spared)
8 013E94561 Bearing
9 – Cam (Rear) (Not Spared)
11 022K38040 Registration Pinch Roll (REP
12.8.1 )
12 – Cam (Front) (Not Spared)
13 009E39080 Spring (Front)
14 009E28570 Spring
15 050K43870 Gate
16 009E28560 Spring

PL 12.9 Exit Motor/Chute
1 127K24060 Exit Motor Assembly (REP 12.9.1 )
2 127K24070 Exit Motor
3 020E93240 Pulley
7 423W07753 Belt
8 020E93230 Pulley
11 130E80890 DADF Exit Sensor
13 054K18770 Exit Upper Chute Assembly
15 – Exit Upper Chute (P/O PL 12.9
Item 13)
16 054K13082 Exit Lower Chute Assembly
17 – Exit Lower Chute (P/O PL 12.9
Item 16)
18 019E92320 Sensor Pad

manuals4you.com
PL 12.10 Document Transport, Platen
Belt
1 059K11870 Document Transport Assembly
2 – Self Lock Screw (P/O PL 12.10
Item 1)
3 007E83141 Gear
5 013E80970 Bearing
6 049E91070 Tension Plate
7 022K39710 Idler Roll
8 023E15690 Platen Belt (REP 12.10.1 )
9 022K39700 Drive Roll
10 – Belt Guide (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1)
11 – Belt Guide (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1)
12 – Transport Frame (P/O PL 12.10
Item 1)
13 – Deflector (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1)
18 – Eliminator (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1)

PL 12.11 Platen Glass, Registration
Gate, Exit Tray: DADF
1 090K92572 Platen Glass (REP 3.1.1 )
2 050K36421 Registration Gate
3 015K83700 Plate
4 673K51383 Exit Roll Kit
5 003E43840 Knob Screw

manuals4you.com
PL 13.1 Mail Box Accessory
1 – Mail Box Assembly (Not Spared)
2 001K57693 Docking Rail Assembly
4 830E19412 Docking Plate
5 029E21610 Docking Pin

PL 13.2 Docking Rail
1 015K31853 Rail Assembly
2 015K35862 Rail
3 068K14921 Bracket (Mail Box Left)
4 015K31871 Plate (Tray Module Left)
5 830E17801 Bracket (Mail Box Right)
6 032E10210 Guide (Tray Module Right)
7 015K31860 Bracket
8 – Gasket (P/O PL 13.1 Item 2)

manuals4you.com
PL 13.3 Mail Box Sub Assembly
1 059K17861 Mail Box Assembly
2 022K65790 Decurler Assembly (REP 13.3.1)
3 802K07903 Cabinet Assembly
4 048K77410 Decurler Front Cover
5 121E90490 Catch Magnet

PL 13.4 Mail Box Cover
3 009E94910 Spring
4 110K08600 Mail Box Front Cover Interlock
Switch
5 003K85101 Hinge
6 – Exit OCT Cover (Rear) (P/O PL
13.3 Item 1)
7 048K77952 Front Cover
8 048E66520 Left Cover
9 048K77971 Top Cover
10 048E66540 Exit OCT Cover (Rear)
11 802K08530 Exit Cover
12 048E66560 Panel
13 891E73451 Label
15 048E66571 Rear Lower Cover
16 048E66581 Rear Cover
17 891E73441 Label

manuals4you.com
PL 13.5 ACT Cover, Bin Tray 1
1 160K53431 Vertical Led (REP 13.5.1 )
2 802K09190 ACT Cover Assembly
3 – ACT Cover (P/O PL 13.5 Item 2)
10 050K36832 Bin Tray 1 Assembly (REP 13.5.2 )
11 005E83570 Collar
13 020E21490 Pulley
14 022E83451 Roll
15 – Tapping Screw (M3 X 10) (P/O PL
13.5 Item 10)
16 830E32600 Support
17 050E88781 Bin Tray

PL 13.6 Bin Tray 2/4/6/8
1 050K36822 Bin Tray 2/4/6/8 Assembly (REP
13.6.1 )
2 009E64140 Spring
3 013E89540 Bearing
4 020E21490 Pulley
5 022E83451 Roll
13.6 Item 1)
8 050E88781 Bin Tray
9 050K33220 Gate
13 121E83120 Gate Solenoid

manuals4you.com
PL 13.7 Bin Tray 3/5/7/9
13.6.1 )
2 009E64140 Spring
3 013E89540 Bearing
4 020E21490 Pulley
5 022E83451 Roll
13.7 Item 1)
9 050K33220 Gate

PL 13.8 Bin Tray 10
1 050K36801 Bin Tray 10 Assembly (REP 13.6.1
)
2 005E83570 Collar
3 009E64140 Spring
4 013E89540 Bearing
5 020E21490 Pulley
6 022E83451 Roll
13.8 Item 1)
9 050K33220 Gate

manuals4you.com
PL 13.9 Mail Box Roll, Chute
1 121K19230 Magnet
2 059K12460 Entrance Roll
4 050K30120 OCT Gate
6 121K14541 OCT Gate Solenoid
8 054K14091 Entrance Lower Baffle Assembly
9 – Entrance Lower Baffle (P/O PL
13.9 Item 8)
10 003E36290 Knob
12 891E73331 Label (7)
13 – Exit Lower Chute (P/O PL 13.3
Item 1)
14 – Entrance Upper Chute (P/O PL
13.3 Item 1)
15 054K14102 Exit Upper Chute Assembly
16 – Exit Upper Chute (P/O PL 13.9
Item 15)
18 130E80100 OCT Exit Sensor
19 130K94740 V-Tra. In Sensor
21 – Lower Tray Chute (P/O PL 13.3
Item 1)
22 160K53431 Mail Box Vertical Sensor (REP
13.5.1 )
23 068K15350 Magnet
24 054K14131 Transport Baffle Assembly
25 – Transport Baffle (P/O PL 13.9 Item
24)
29 891E73431 Label (8)
30 005K82400 Torque Limiter Gear

PL 13.10 Mail Box Motor, PWB
4 007E56970 Gear Pulley (Not Spared)
5 022E83460 Roller
6 023E13160 Belt
7 127K24943 Mail Box Drive Motor Assembly
8 – Motor Bracket (P/O PL 13.10 Item
7)
9 127K24952 Mail Box Drive Motor
10 162K47062 Wire Harness (PWB-IOT)
11 162K47500 Wire Harness (PWB-Motor)
12 162K47510 Wire Harness (PWB-Sensor)
15 – Core (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1)
16 162K47050 Wire Harness (PWB-Decurler)
17 – Wire Harness (PWB-OCT) (P/O PL
13.3 Item 1)
18 160K56450 Mail Box Control PWB (Sorter Con-
figuration Only)
19 539K90924 ROM

manuals4you.com
PL 13.11 Decurler Cover
1 003K85570 Knob Assembly
2 003E46501 Handle
3 003K85101 Hinge
5 048K77420 Decurler Inner Cover Assembly
6 048E65721 Decurler Inner Cover
7 110E97990 Decurler Front Cover Interlock
Switch
8 048E65730 Decurler Top Cover
9 048E65740 Decurler Rear Cover
10 809E02991 Spring
11 003K83211 Knob
12 121E90490 Catch Magnet

PL 13.12 Decurler Chute, PWB
1 054K15550 Entrance Lower Chute Assembly
2 – Entrance Lower Chute (P/O PL
13.12 Item 1)
4 110K91391 Mail Box Docking Interlock Switch
5 – Mail Box Docking Interlock Switch
(P/O PL 13.12 Item 1)
6 054K13920 Exit Lower Baffle Assembly
7 – Exit Lower Baffle (P/O PL 13.12
Item 6)
9 003E36290 Knob
11 – Upper Chute (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2)
12 121E89780 Magnet Catch
13 160K52902 Decurler Control PWB
14 – Wire Harness (PWB-Mail Box) (P/O
PL 13.3 Item 2)
15 130E82970 Decurler Exit Sensor

manuals4you.com
PL 13.13 Decurler Roll
1 006E61320 Cam Drive Shaft
2 007E54990 Gear (32)
3 007E55010 Gear (28/33)
4 – Gear (32) (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2)
5 007E55030 Gear (52/56)
6 007E55040 Gear (20) (REP 13.13.2 )
7 – Gear (32) (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2)
8 015K28141 Idler Gear Assembly
10 007E45091 Gear
11 008E93390 Cam (REP 13.13.2 )
12 011K94401 Lever (Front)
13 011K94411 Lever (Rear)
14 022K57120 Decurler Roll 1 (Upper) (REP
13.13.1 )
15 022K57130 Decurler Roll 2 (Lower) (REP
13.13.1 )
16 062E98711 Reflector
17 121K83981 Decurler Clutch
2)
19 130E82530 Decurler Cam Sensor
20 809E14570 Spring

PL 13.14 Decurler Transport Roll
1 007E54960 Gear (38)
2 – Torque Limiter Gear (P/O PL 13.3
Item 2)
3 007E54980 Gear (16)
4 007E54990 Gear (32)
5 007E55000 Gear (16)
6 – Gear (32) (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2)
7 407W08220 Gear (20)
8 007E54970 Gear (34)
9 022E19660 Decurler Drive Roll
10 022E19670 Decurler Drive Roll
11 022K51610 Entrance Roll
13 – Motor Shaft (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2)
14 127K24901 Decurler Stepping Motor (REP
13.14.1 )
16 413W75959 Bering

manuals4you.com
PL 13.15 Cabinet
1 – Cabinet (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3)
2 – Caster (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3)
3 – Nut (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3)
4 021E96430 Cap
5 – Front Cover (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3)
6 – Hinge (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3)
7 – OCT Guide (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3)

PL 14.1 Offset Catch Tray
1 050K36782 Offset Catch Tray Assembly
2 – Tray (Lower) (P/O PL 14.1 Item 1)
4 007E40060 Rack
5 049E58660 Support
6 127K18372 Offset Motor (REP 14.1.1 )
7 006E50190 Shaft
8 013E85922 Bearing
9 130E82190 Offset Home Sensor, Offset Posi-
tion Sensor
12 015K30880 Plate
13 050E88161 Tray
14 130K60600 Full Stack Sensor
15 048E30000 Cover
16 – Topping Screw (M3 X 14) (P/O PL
14.1 Item 1)
17 049E86811 Motor Cover
18 – Baffle (P/O PL 14.1 Item 1)
19 830E33491 Extention Plate
20 809E08900 Spring
21 029E96861 Rivet
22 026E68120 Thumb Screw
23 004K92210 Exit Poper Guide

manuals4you.com
PL 19.1 IDFE Assembly and
Components
1 600N01584 IDFE Assembly (GL2) (REP 19.1 )
2 604K13420 IDFE Assembly (MFY) (REP 19.1)
3 600N01593 Cobra AUI to BNC Transceiver
(REP 19.2)
4 144N00070 256MB Memory DIMM (REP 19.3 )
5 152N01668 IDFE DC Wiring Harness
6 101N01175 DDI Cable
7 – IDFE Rear Cover (P/O PL 19.1
Item 1)
8 – IDFE Housing (P/O PL 19.1 Item 1)

PL 25.1 Electrical Connectors
1 114E08970 Connector (P543)
– 913W01400 Connector (P702)
– 114E11400 Connector (P703)
– 113E24020 Connector (P701)
2 113E20900 Connector (J543)
– 913W01399 Connector (J702)
– 113E24030 Connector (J703)
3 114E18430 Europe Converter
4 498K02510 Adapter

manuals4you.com
Common Hardware AZ – Screw (M4 X 16)
BA 158W35855 Screw
BB 158W36050 Screw
A 112W27651 Screw BC 158W36255 Screw
B 112W27851 Screw BD 158W36655 Screw
C 112W27859 Screw BE 158W45055 Screw
D 112W28051 Screw BF 201W21251 Nut (M3 )
E 112W28251 Screw BG 220W21250 Flange Nut (M3 )
F 112W29151 Screw BH 251W19251 Washer (2.5 )
G 112W29751 Screw BJ 251W21251 Washer (3 )
H 113W15551 Screw BK 251W24251 Washer (4 )
J 113W20457 Screw BL 251W27251 Washer (6 )
K 113W20657 Screw BM 252W26450 Nylon Washer (5 )
L 113W20857 Screw BN 252W27350 Nylon Washer (6 )
M 113W21057 Screw BP 252W27450 Nylon Washer (6 )
N 113W21257 Screw BQ 252W29350 Nylon Washer (8 )
P – Screw (M2.5 X 14) BR 252W29450 Nylon Washer (8 )
Q 113W21651 Screw BS 252W31350 Nylon Washer (10 )
R 113W21657 Screw BT 271W21650 Dowel (2.5 X 16 )
S 113W27451 Screw BU 271W28050 Dowel Pin (3 X 10 )
T 113W27456 Screw BV 271W28250 Dowel Pin (3 X 12 )
U 113W27551 Screw BW 271W28650 Dowel Pin (3 X 16 )
V 113W27651 Screw BX 271W28850 Dowel Pin (3 X 20 )
W 113W27851 Screw BY – Dowel Pin (3 X 25 )
X 113W28451 Screw BZ 271W37150 Dowel Pin (4 X 25 )
Y 113W35657 Screw CA – Dowel Pin (5 X 36 )
Z 113W35851 Screw CB – Spring Pin (2 X 12 )
!! 158W27663 (DB) Screw (M3 X 6) CC 285W16251 Spring Pin (2 X 12 )
– 158W35863 (DR) Screw (M4 X 8) CD 354W15251 E-clip (2 )
AA 113W36051 Screw CE 354W19251 E-clip (2.5 )
AB 113W36057 Screw CF 354W21251 E-clip (3 )
AC 113W36251 Screw CG 354W20952 KL-Clip (3)
AD 113W36851 Screw – 354W21254 Kl-clip (3 )
AE 113W37457 Screw CH 354W24251 E-clip (4 )
AF 113W38257 Screw CJ 354W24254 Kl-clip (4 )
AG 141W27351 Setscrew CK 354W26251 E-clip (5 )
AH 141W27451 Setscrew CL 354W27251 E-clip (6 )
AJ 141W27851 Setscrew CM 354W27254 Kl-clip (6 )
AK 141W35451 Setscrew CN 354W29251 E-clip (8 )
AL 153W17655 Tapping Screw CP 354W29254 Kl-clip (8 )
AM 153W17855 Tapping Screw CQ 220W24350 Flange Nut (M4 )
AN 153W18055 Tapping Screw CR 285W15851 Spring Pin (2 X 8 )
AP 153W18255 Tapping Screw CS – Spring Pin (1.6 X 10 )
AQ 153W27650 Tapping Screw CT 113W35857 Screw
AR 153W27655 Tapping Screw CU 252W27250 Nylon Washer (6 )
AS 158W27655 Screw CW 113W15851 Screw
AT 158W27855 Screw CX 113W28056 Screw
AU 158W27863 Screw (M3 X 8) CY 113W28251 Screw
AV 158W28055 Screw CZ 141W27651 Setscrew
AW 158W28255 Screw DA 153W27850 Tapping Screw
AX 158W28655 Screw DB – Screw (M3 X 6)
AY 158W35655 Screw DC 158W27650 Screw

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 5-337 Common Hardware
DD – Setscrew (M4 X 5)
DE 251W29251 Washer (8 )
DF 153W16055 Tapping Screw
DG – Tapping Screw (M3 X 10)
DH 113W22557 Screw
DJ 113W35557 Screw
DK – Screw (M4 X 16)
DL – Spring Washer (12 )
DM 113W27656 Screw
DN 113W35850 Screw
DP 285W28651 Spring Pin (3-16 )
DQ 285W29151 Spring Pin (3 X 25 )
DR – Screw (M4 X 8)
DS 351W29250 Retaining Clip (8 )
DT 113W28856 Screw
DU – Dowel Pin Pin (3 X 22 )
DV 113W20557 Screw
DW – Capscrew (M3 X 8)
DX 102W27651 Screw
DY 153W28050 Screw
DZ – Screw (M3 X 8)
EA 112W25255 Screw (M3 X 8)
EB 153W23452 Screw (2.9 X 9.5)
EC 354W00555 Retaining Ring (4MM)
ED 354W20852 Retaining Ring (5 - 7MM)
– 354W20952 Retaining Ring (5 - 7mm)
EE 354W21052 Retaining Ring
EF 153W23852 Screw

Common Hardware 5-338 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Part Number Index Table 1 Part Number Index
Part Number Part List
Table 1 Part Number Index
PL 13.1
Part Number Part List 004E08250 PL 11.1
001E46411 PL 2.22 004K92210 PL 14.1
001E50590 PL 2.22 005K81600 PL 2.6
001K56820 PL 2.24 005K81750 PL 2.6
001K57333 PL 2.26 005K81760 PL 2.6
001K57693 PL 13.1 005K82400 PL 13.9
001K59370 PL 7.3 005K82470 PL 2.26
001K62603 PL 8.8 005K82490 PL 2.12
001K62613 PL 8.8 005K82730 PL 2.7B
003E36290 PL 13.12 005E83570 PL 13.5
PL 2.20 PL 13.8
PL 13.9 005E85181 PL 6.3
003E37791 PL 2.22 005E85760 PL 5.5
003E38110 PL 2.1 005E85810 PL 2.16
003E38120 PL 2.8 006E50190 PL 14.1
003E38130 PL 2.8 006E56290 PL 7.7
003E39980 PL 7.7 006E56620 PL 2.22
003E40140 PL 2.4 006E56632 PL 7.2
003E40151 PL 2.20 006E61320 PL 13.13
003E40250 PL 11.1 006K83280 PL 2.6
003E43840 PL 11.1 006K84003 PL 1.3
PL 12.11 006K84114 PL 7.10
003E46501 PL 13.11 006K84192 PL 5.1
003K83211 PL 13.11 006K84210 PL 2.17
003K84472 PL 2.23 007E22430 PL 2.12
003K84500 PL 2.8 007E23260 PL 2.12
003K84750 PL 2.18 007E30970 PL 2.2
003K84760 PL 2.18 PL 2.3
003K84792 PL 2.23 007E31090 PL 2.6
003K85090 PL 11.1 007E31160 PL 2.11
003K85101 PL 13.11 007E31180 PL 2.11
PL 13.4 007E39390 PL 12.4
003K85453 PL 8.5 007E39400 PL 12.4
003K85483 PL 8.5 007E39410 PL 12.4
003K85570 PL 13.11 007E39420 PL 12.4
003K85731 PL 8.5 007E39430 PL 12.4
003K85851 PL 2.22 007E40060 PL 14.1
003K85871 PL 2.22 007E45091 PL 13.13
003K91881 PL 12.3 007E46502 PL 7.6
PL 13.15 007E46530 PL 7.10

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 5-339 Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Table 1 Part Number Index
Part Number Part List Part Number Part List
007E46541 PL 7.10 007E51490 PL 1.6
007E46551 PL 7.10 007E51500 PL 8.6
007E46610 PL 2.17 007E51580 PL 2.7A
007E46650 PL 6.6 007E51630 PL 2.24
007E46680 PL 6.4 007E51641 PL 2.24
007E46700 PL 6.4 007E51680 PL 1.6
007E46710 PL 6.3 007E51790 PL 1.3
007E46720 PL 6.4 007E51800 PL 1.3
007E46740 PL 6.4 007E51810 PL 1.3
007E46760 PL 6.4 007E51830 PL 5.5
007E46780 PL 6.4 007E51840 PL 2.19
007E46820 PL 6.6 007E51980 PL 8.4
007E46880 PL 1.5 007E52030 PL 5.5
007E46890 PL 1.5 007E52040 PL 5.5
007E49650 PL 6.4 007E52050 PL 5.5
007E49730 PL 8.2 007E52130 PL 2.6
007E49740 PL 8.6 007E52140 PL 2.6
007E49760 PL 8.6 007E52150 PL 2.6
007E49781 PL 2.17 007E52161 PL 2.6
007E49831 PL 8.2 007E52171 PL 2.6
007E49940 PL 1.4 007E52210 PL 2.5
007E49950 PL 1.4 007E52220 PL 2.5
007E49980 PL 1.2 007E52230 PL 2.5
007E50030 PL 1.3 007E52240 PL 2.5
007E50042 PL 1.3 007E52250 PL 1.5
007E50052 PL 1.3 007E52280 PL 1.1
007E50112 PL 1.2 007E52290 PL 1.3
007E50120 PL 1.2 007E54910 PL 2.12
007E50130 PL 2.24 007E54960 PL 13.14
007E50140 PL 2.24 007E54970 PL 13.14
007E50250 PL 2.12 007E54980 PL 13.14
007E50270 PL 1.6 007E54990 PL 13.13
007E50280 PL 1.6 PL 13.14
007E50410 PL 2.2 007E55000 PL 13.14
PL 2.3 007E55010 PL 13.13
007E50420 PL 2.2 007E55030 PL 13.13
PL 2.3 007E55040 PL 13.13
007E50430 PL 2.2 007E55221 PL 1.1
PL 2.3 007E55230 PL 1.1
007E51370 PL 2.15 007E55351 PL 13.10
007E51430 PL 2.12 007E55361 PL 13.10

Part Number Index 5-340 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
007E56010 PL 2.7A 007K84701 PL 1.2
007E56020 PL 2.7A 007K84731 PL 2.7A
007E56030 PL 2.7A 007K84800 PL 1.6
007E56210 PL 2.6 007K84820 PL 1.2
007E56970 PL 13.10 007K84871 PL 1.1
007E57660 PL 1.4 007E84880 PL 8.10
007E66030 PL 2.13 007K84881 PL 6.6
007K81120 PL 12.8 007K84922 PL 1.6
007E82390 PL 8.4 007K85270 PL 8.8
007E83141 PL 12.10 007E91170 PL 2.24
007E83260 PL 12.6 007K91860 PL 12.8
007K83610 PL 2.6 007K91871 PL 12.6
007K84110 PL 1.6 008E93090 PL 7.7
007K84120 PL 8.2 008E93160 PL 8.6
007K84130 PL 8.6 008E93250 PL 7.7
007K84140 PL 8.6 008E93261 PL 2.22
007K84160 PL 1.4 008E93270 PL 7.7
007K84170 PL 1.2 008E93390 PL 13.13
007K84231 PL 1.4 008E93400 PL 7.2
007K84240 PL 1.4 009E28560 PL 12.8
007K84251 PL 1.4 009E28570 PL 12.8
007K84265 PL 1.4 009E28580 PL 12.8
007K84282 PL 1.3 009E32160 PL 1.1
007K84291 PL 1.3 009E34940 PL 6.4
007K84313 PL 1.5 009E39080 PL 12.8
007K84332 PL 1.3 009E43970 PL 7.2
007K84360 PL 1.6 009E53370 PL 2.13
007K84415 PL 2.7A 009E56020 PL 2.10
007K84422 PL 2.7A 009E56030 PL 2.10
007K84468 PL 1.3 009E59690 PL 8.10
007K84553 PL 1.6 PL 8.3
007K84577 PL 1.6 009P61135 PL 2.16
007K84593 PL 5.2 009E61300 PL 2.6
007K84601 PL 2.24 009E62420 PL 2.26
007K84634 PL 1.2 009E62830 PL 3.3
007K84641 PL 1.2 009P62935 PL 5.4
007K84650 PL 1.2 009P62975 PL 1.5
007K84662 PL 1.1 009E63110 PL 2.8
007K84671 PL 1.1 009E64140 PL 13.6
007K84680 PL 1.1 PL 13.8
007K84690 PL 1.6 PL 13.7

009E71890 PL 12.5 013K81260 PL 5.5
009E73310 PL 9.4 013K81270 PL 5.5
009E76430 PL 2.11 013K81510 PL 7.6
009E81210 PL 9.4 013E82490 PL 2.15
009E84150 PL 5.5 PL 2.16
009E84220 PL 2.23 013E83380 PL 2.8
PL 2.24 013E83730 PL 2.2
009E94910 PL 13.4 013E85430 PL 7.6
011E07092 PL 7.1 013E85922 PL 14.1
011E07950 PL 2.8 013E87551 PL 8.5
011E08010 PL 5.5 013E87600 PL 8.8
011E08021 PL 5.5 013E87620 PL 8.8
011E08031 PL 2.20 013E87700 PL 8.2
011E08041 PL 2.20 PL 8.8
011E08050 PL 2.5 013E87730 PL 8.6
011E08060 PL 2.5 013E88020 PL 2.15
011E08071 PL 2.5 PL 2.16
011E08081 PL 7.7 013E88030 PL 2.15
011E08111 PL 2.22 PL 2.16
011E08640 PL 6.5 013E88310 PL 7.6
011K90420 PL 2.19 013E89540 PL 13.5
011K93990 PL 5.5 PL 13.6
011K94030 PL 8.6 PL 13.8
011K94040 PL 8.6 PL 13.7
011K94050 PL 2.24 013E92760 PL 12.4
011K94091 PL 6.1 013E94320 PL 8.9
011K94141 PL 5.5 013E94380 PL 8.9
011K94150 PL 5.5 013E94561 PL 12.8
011K94160 PL 5.5 014K81273 PL 8.5
011K94391 PL 2.26 014E87701 PL 7.2
011K94401 PL 13.13 015K28141 PL 13.13
011K94411 PL 13.13 015K29634 PL 7.1
012K93440 PL 3.3 015K29910 PL 6.4
012K93450 PL 3.3 015K30880 PL 14.1
012E98070 PL 7.7 015K31460 PL 2.2
012E98080 PL 7.7 015K31853 PL 13.2
012E98271 PL 2.23 015K31860 PL 13.2
012E98281 PL 2.5 015K31871 PL 13.2
013E15290 PL 2.5 015K33670 PL 8.6
013P60566 PL 12.6 015K33973 PL 2.18
013E80970 PL 12.10 015K33986 PL 9.1

manuals4you.com
015K34310 PL 2.2 PL 13.8
015K35800 PL 7.10 PL 13.6
015K35842 PL 7.5 PL 13.7
015K35862 PL 13.2 020E22160 PL 12.4
015K36962 PL 7.1 020E25090 PL 3.3
015K36972 PL 7.1 020E25100 PL 3.3
015K37641 PL 3.1 020E26710 PL 5.5
015K38560 PL 9.1 020E26990 PL 5.5
015K39880 PL 7.10 020K91230 PL 12.6
015K41370 PL 2.2 020E93230 PL 12.9
015K41381 PL 2.2 020E93240 PL 12.9
015K41503 PL 2.3 020K94970 PL 3.3
015K48190 PL 13.10 021E96430 PL 13.15
015E48890 PL 12.2 022E19660 PL 13.14
015E48900 PL 12.2 022E19670 PL 13.14
015E54911 PL 6.4 022K37070 PL 12.6
015E58040 PL 2.23 022K37080 PL 12.6
015K83700 PL 12.11 022K38040 PL 12.8
017E92140 PL 3.3 022K39700 PL 12.10
017E93743 PL 11.2 022K39710 PL 12.10
017E93753 PL 11.2 022K43710 PL 13.5
019E33780 PL 6.7 022K43720 PL 13.9
019E33860 PL 8.10 022K46560 PL 12.5
019E39131 PL 2.2 022K48240 PL 13.9
PL 2.3 022K48250 PL 8.10
019E39442 PL 6.6 022K48260 PL 8.10
019E39570 PL 8.7 022K51610 PL 13.14
019E42010 PL 8.3 022K51621 PL 13.14
019E49780 PL 8.7 022K57120 PL 13.13
019E50400 PL 3.4 022K57130 PL 13.13
019E92320 PL 12.9 022K62370 PL 8.9
019K93320 PL 2.13 022K65790 PL 13.3
019K94202 PL 8.10 022E83451 PL 13.5
019K94221 PL 6.7 PL 13.7
019K94230 PL 6.7 PL 13.8
019K94332 PL 6.5 PL 13.6
019K94390 PL 2.2 022E83460 PL 13.10
019K94400 PL 2.3 022E93660 PL 12.6
019K94651 PL 8.3 023E12230 PL 12.6
020E21050 PL 12.6 023E12610 PL 12.4
020E21490 PL 13.5 023E13160 PL 13.10

023E15480 PL 2.17 038K84621 PL 2.3
023E15550 PL 3.3 038E86180 PL 13.5
023E15690 PL 12.10 038E88641 PL 2.2
023E92341 PL 12.6 038E88650 PL 2.2
023E94140 PL 12.6 038E88772 PL 2.26
026E56431 PL 9.2 038E88922 PL 2.3
026E58330 PL 6.5 038E88980 PL 13.5
026P63503 PL 8.3 PL 13.7
026E68120 PL 14.1 PL 13.6
026K80720 PL 8.6 038E89060 PL 2.13
026K80730 PL 6.5 038E89071 PL 2.19
026K80740 PL 6.5 038E89072 PL 2.19
026K80750 PL 6.5 039K90592 PL 8.7
029E21610 PL 13.1 041K93792 PL 3.4
029E26180 PL 7.9 041K94210 PL 3.4
029E26770 PL 7.7 042K91650 PL 7.6
029E96861 PL 14.1 042K91811 PL 5.3
031K92410 PL 7.10 042K91906 PL 7.1
031K92420 PL 7.10 048E30000 PL 14.1
031E92550 PL 12.2 048E52741 PL 8.1
031E93022 PL 7.7 048E60670 PL 11.2
031E94101 PL 7.7 048E60690 PL 11.2
032E10010 PL 2.11 048E60741 PL 11.2
032E10210 PL 13.2 048E60750 PL 11.2
032E10250 PL 2.5 048E60762 PL 11.2
032E13130 PL 2.16 048E60772 PL 11.3
032K93621 PL 2.18 048E60781 PL 11.3
032K93800 PL 12.1 048E60790 PL 11.3
033K92892 PL 8.9 048E61482 PL 2.8
033K92970 PL 5.3 048K61601 PL 7.6
033K93272 PL 7.8 048K61638 PL 6.6
035E40661 PL 5.3 048K61830 PL 6.4
035E40690 PL 5.3 048K61840 PL 6.4
035E45550 PL 5.5 048E61921 PL 11.1
035E48290 PL 7.8 048E61933 PL 11.3
035E48300 PL 7.8 048E61941 PL 11.3
035K81498 PL 7.8 048E61950 PL 11.3
036K91420 PL 12.3 048K61963 PL 6.5
036K91431 PL 12.3 048E62151 PL 3.5
038K14700 PL 2.13 048E62452 PL 11.1
038K83973 PL 2.3 048E62462 PL 11.1

manuals4you.com
048E64201 PL 12.1 049E86030 PL 8.8
048E64910 PL 7.10 049E86040 PL 8.8
048E64920 PL 7.5 049E86360 PL 8.3
048E65041 PL 9.1 049E86370 PL 8.3
048E65171 PL 11.3 049E86600 PL 8.3
048K65250 PL 2.8 049E86811 PL 14.1
048E65330 PL 11.3 049E91070 PL 12.10
048E65341 PL 11.3 050E17450 PL 8.7
048E65391 PL 11.3 050K27660 PL 12.5
048K65660 PL 5.1 050K27670 PL 12.7
048E65721 PL 13.11 050K30120 PL 13.9
048E65730 PL 13.11 050K33129 PL 2.1
048E65740 PL 13.11 050K33220 PL 13.6
048K65921 PL 2.15 PL 13.8
048E66221 PL 11.1 PL 13.7
048E66331 PL 11.1 050K34065 PL 2.19
048E66520 PL 13.4 050K36410 PL 12.1
048E66540 PL 13.4 050K36421 PL 12.11
048E66560 PL 13.4 050K36514 PL 2.23
048E66571 PL 13.4 050K36782 PL 14.1
048E66581 PL 13.4 050K36801 PL 13.8
048K69086 PL 7.10 050K36812 PL 13.7
048K69818 PL 11.2 050K36822 PL 13.6
048K71213 PL 11.1 050K36832 PL 13.5
048K71860 PL 3.2 050K36851 PL 2.25
048K76181 PL 12.1 050K40941 PL 2.1
048K76341 PL 11.3 050K43870 PL 12.8
048K76720 PL 6.5 050E87465 PL 2.2
048K76921 PL 4.1 050E88159 PL 2.3
048K76941 PL 9.2 050E88161 PL 14.1
048K77228 PL 6.6 050E88440 PL 11.1
048K77264 PL 7.1 050E88781 PL 13.5
048K77410 PL 13.3 PL 13.6
048K77420 PL 13.11 PL 13.8
048K77462 PL 11.2 PL 13.7
048K77776 PL 9.5 052K91470 PL 6.7
048K77952 PL 13.4 052E92750 PL 8.7
048K77971 PL 13.4 052E93181 PL 8.7
049E58660 PL 14.1 052E93460 PL 5.5
049E77290 PL 13.4 052E93470 PL 5.5
049E85681 PL 6.5 052E93480 PL 5.5

052E93640 PL 5.5 054E88220 PL 2.4
052E93920 PL 8.7 054E88230 PL 2.4
052E96630 PL 8.7 054K99181 PL 10.1
053K91410 PL 10.2 054K99191 PL 10.1
053K91420 PL 10.2 055K19260 PL 12.5
053K91430 PL 10.2 055E30790 PL 6.2
053E92650 PL 8.7 059K05750 PL 2.20
054K06692 PL 12.7 059K05780 PL 2.20
054K10114 PL 8.10 059K06831 PL 2.7B
054K10115 PL 8.10 059K07800 PL 7.6
054K10151 PL 5.1 059K07812 PL 7.6
054K10303 PL 2.24 059K07843 PL 7.6
054K10317 PL 2.25 059K07882 PL 7.7
054K10323 PL 2.26 059K08160 PL 7.6
054K10333 PL 2.26 059K08590 PL 13.12
054K10341 PL 2.8 PL 13.9
054K10350 PL 2.8 059K08600 PL 2.19
054E10780 PL 2.8 059K08610 PL 2.21
054K11072 PL 2.15 059K08621 PL 2.21
054K11090 PL 2.16 059K08686 PL 2.23
054K11161 PL 2.26 059K08760 PL 2.15
054K11220 PL 8.7 059K08770 PL 2.16
054K11363 PL 2.19 059K08780 PL 2.16
054K11373 PL 2.19 059K08790 PL 2.15
054K11395 PL 2.18 059K08821 PL 2.9
054K11416 PL 2.18 059K08831 PL 2.10
054K11512 PL 2.23 059K08840 PL 2.12
054K13082 PL 12.9 059K08850 PL 2.11
054K13591 PL 12.5 059K09022 PL 2.24
054K13600 PL 12.4 059K09030 PL 2.24
054K13622 PL 12.2 059K09040 PL 2.24
054K13920 PL 13.12 059K09331 PL 2.21
054K14091 PL 13.9 059K09341 PL 2.21
054K14102 PL 13.9 059K09350 PL 2.21
054K14131 PL 13.9 059K09490 PL 5.5
054K14675 PL 2.25 059K09500 PL 5.5
054K15550 PL 13.12 059K09510 PL 5.5
054K18770 PL 12.9 059K09532 PL 5.3
054K18790 PL 12.7 059K09561 PL 2.5
054K19721 PL 7.10 059K09591 PL 2.6
054E88182 PL 7.10 059K09930 PL 2.7B

manuals4you.com
059K09948 PL 2.4 068K14541 PL 5.5
059K10025 PL 2.14 068K14550 PL 5.5
059K10122 PL 2.17 068K14921 PL 13.2
059K11821 PL 12.9 068K15350 PL 13.9
059K11830 PL 12.8 068K21850 PL 8.7
059K11840 PL 12.4 068K86934 PL 6.1
059K11850 PL 12.7 068K87041 PL 6.5
059K11860 PL 12.9 068K87161 PL 8.1
059K11870 PL 12.10 068K87410 PL 8.6
059K11880 PL 12.2 090K92572 PL 12.11
059K12140 PL 2.20 PL 3.1
059K12460 PL 13.9 093E91961 PL 8.7
059K12471 PL 13.9 094K91307 PL 6.2
059K13021 PL 7.10 096E75850 PL 6.6
059K13261 PL 13.7 096E75860 PL 6.6
059K13440 PL 12.10 096E75870 PL 6.6
059K14186 PL 7.9 096E75880 PL 6.6
059K14872 PL 2.26 099P03019 PL 6.1
059K17861 PL 13.3 101N01175 PL 19.1
059K23063 PL 12.1 101K24030 PL 9.4
059K24360 PL 8.5 101K31295 PL 9.3
059K31171 PL 2.9 101K31312 PL 9.3
059K33080 PL 2.23 101K31322 PL 9.3
059K39500 PL 8.3 101K31342 PL 9.3
059K39670 PL 8.3 101K31352 PL 9.3
059E90770 PL 2.10 101K33185 PL 9.3
059E92720 PL 7.7 103E24040 PL 9.6
059E92780 PL 8.8 105E06910 PL 12.9
059E92841 PL 2.26 105E07314 PL 9.3
059E92850 PL 2.24 105E07322 PL 3.5
059E92920 PL 2.8 105E07344 PL 9.3
059E92950 PL 2.17 105E07351 PL 3.5
059E92980 PL 2.20 105E08900 PL 3.4
062K10670 PL 4.1 105K14062 PL 7.6
062E98370 PL 3.4 105K14914 PL 9.2
062E98380 PL 3.4 105K14923 PL 2.14
062E98711 PL 13.13 105E98090 PL 9.3
063E94040 PL 3.3 105E98110 PL 9.3
063E94050 PL 3.3 105E98450 PL 13.5
064K91243 PL 7.5 PL 13.7
068K14170 PL 2.8 PL 13.6

105E98690 PL 13.9 117K22350 PL 9.1
PL 2.25 117K23770 PL 9.1
105E99122 PL 9.1 117E25300 PL 9.1
106K90640 PL 6.7 117K31400 PL 9.1
106K90650 PL 6.7 117K92100 PL 5.4
106K90660 PL 6.7 118E12090 PL 3.4
106K90670 PL 6.7 118E12110 PL 9.3
107E06650 PL 3.2 118E12251 PL 5.4
108E94360 PL 9.3 118K91900 PL 5.4
109E93220 PL 9.3 119K90765 PL 5.5
109E93230 PL 9.3 120E11991 PL 14.1
109E93260 PL 9.3 120E12630 PL 8.6
PL 9.6 120E13100 PL 2.10
110K08471 PL 3.2 120E13130 PL 13.5
110K08600 PL 13.4 PL 13.6
110K10460 PL 2.1 PL 13.7
110K91391 PL 13.12 120E17020 PL 13.5
110K91972 PL 12.2 PL 13.7
110E93440 PL 2.12 PL 13.6
PL 2.24 121K14541 PL 13.9
110E97990 PL 13.11 121K14881 PL 1.3
113E20900 PL 25.1 121K16372 PL 2.24
113E22970 PL 2.9 121K16383 PL 2.25
113E24020 PL 2.22 121K16401 PL 6.1
PL 25.1 121K16800 PL 8.4
113E24030 PL 2.12 121K17550 PL 2.9
PL 25.1 121K17561 PL 2.11
114E08970 PL 25.1 PL 2.5
114E11390 PL 2.22 121K17941 PL 1.3
114E11400 PL 2.9 121K19230 PL 13.9
PL 25.1 121K21612 PL 1.6
114E18430 PL 25.1 121K30050 PL 1.5
114K81062 PL 5.1 PL 2.7A
114K81082 PL 5.2 121E83120 PL 13.6
114K81362 PL 5.2 PL 13.8
115K91133 PL 6.1 PL 13.7
115K91160 PL 5.2 121K83981 PL 13.13
117E10550 PL 9.1 121K86550 PL 12.2
117E15951 PL 3.5 121K87790 PL 12.2
117E15970 PL 3.4 121K87800 PL 12.5
117E22350 PL 9.1 121K87810 PL 12.5

manuals4you.com
121E89780 PL 13.12 127K24901 PL 13.14
PL 2.9 127K24943 PL 13.10
121E90490 PL 13.11 127K24952 PL 13.10
PL 13.3 127K27590 PL 12.4
121E90620 PL 11.1 127K27910 PL 8.4
121E90640 PL 12.7 127K28490 PL 6.1
121K93870 PL 12.2 127K32940 PL 6.3
122E92000 PL 3.4 127K83520 PL 12.6
122K92892 PL 5.1 130K57350 PL 8.8
125K03650 PL 5.4 130K57370 PL 8.6
125K93062 PL 5.4 130K57380 PL 8.6
126K07960 PL 8.3 130K57390 PL 8.4
126K07970 PL 8.3 130K57400 PL 8.4
126K07980 PL 8.8 130K57430 PL 8.4
126K08510 PL 8.3 130K57471 PL 8.4
126K08520 PL 8.3 130K57490 PL 8.4
126K08530 PL 8.8 130K57690 PL 7.1
127K18372 PL 14.1 130K57720 PL 5.1
127K21270 PL 6.3 130K57810 PL 2.24
127K21301 PL 1.6 130K57820 PL 2.25
127K21311 PL 1.5 130K57930 PL 6.5
127K21321 PL 1.2 130K57940 PL 8.7
127K21351 PL 8.4 130K57973 PL 7.5
127K21410 PL 8.7 130K57990 PL 3.2
127K21513 PL 3.3 130K58001 PL 2.13
127K21661 PL 2.24 130K58030 PL 2.16
127K21671 PL 1.1 130K58070 PL 2.10
127K21750 PL 9.2 130K59660 PL 2.25
127K21761 PL 10.1 130K60561 PL 9.1
127K21770 PL 10.2 130K60600 PL 14.1
127K21780 PL 10.2 PL 2.15
127K21801 PL 10.1 PL 7.10
127K21822 PL 10.2 130K60770 PL 2.8
127K21871 PL 2.15 130E80100 PL 13.9
127K23051 PL 2.7A 130E80890 PL 12.5
127K23191 PL 2.19 PL 12.9
127K23230 PL 2.6 130E82190 PL 1.4
127K23470 PL 2.12 PL 7.9
127K23590 PL 3.2 PL 7.3
127K24060 PL 12.9 PL 6.1
127K24070 PL 12.9 PL 2.5

PL 2.12 160K46113 PL 3.5
PL 2.11 160K46120 PL 8.4
PL 2.10 160K46290 PL 2.15
PL 2.1 160K47911 PL 9.2
PL 14.1 160K48230 PL 3.2
130E82530 PL 13.13 160K48351 PL 9.3
130E82650 PL 2.5 160K48688 PL 9.2
PL 2.8 160K48704 PL 9.2
130E82720 PL 6.3 160K51502 PL 12.3
130K82921 PL 5.2 160K51931 PL 3.2
130E82970 PL 13.12 160K52902 PL 13.12
130E84270 PL 7.5 160K53431 PL 13.5
130K87150 PL 3.2 PL 13.9
130K87380 PL 6.1 160K53462 PL 3.5
130K87470 PL 8.6 160K56450 PL 13.10
130K87500 PL 8.8 160K57369 PL 3.5
130K87520 PL 8.8 160K57375 PL 3.5
130E91010 PL 5.2 160K60380 PL 3.5
130E91120 PL 7.10 160K60770 PL 9.3
130E91220 PL 12.5 160K61560 PL 9.6
PL 12.7 160K61611 PL 9.2
130K92950 PL 8.10 160K61620 PL 9.2
130K93210 PL 2.21 160K74412 PL 9.2
130K93220 PL 2.24 160K80150 PL 9.4
130K94740 PL 13.9 160K84771 PL 3.5
140K60480 PL 12.1 162K36860 PL 9.3
144N00070 PL 19.1 162K36960 PL 8.5
152N01668 PL 19.1 162K37050 PL 8.5
152S05104 PL 9.1 162K37160 PL 2.8
152S05105 PL 9.1 162K37360 PL 7.3
152S05106 PL 9.1 162K41511 PL 9.2
152S05107 PL 9.1 162K41521 PL 9.2
152S05120 PL 9.1 162K42260 PL 9.2
152S05121 PL 9.1 162K43311 PL 12.3
152S05122 PL 9.1 162K47050 PL 13.10
152S05123 PL 9.1 162K47062 PL 13.10
160K29150 PL 9.4 162K47500 PL 13.10
160K42710 PL 3.5 162K47510 PL 13.10
160K42851 PL 4.1 407W08220 PL 13.14
160K45930 PL 6.4 407W08222 PL 1.5
160K45940 PL 9.3 407W08223 PL 1.5

manuals4you.com
407W08273 PL 1.5 600K82900 PL 6.1
407W08328 PL 1.5 600K82960 PL 2.13
413W08350 PL 13.13 600K83451 PL 6.5
PL 13.14 600K83590 PL 2.26
PL 5.5 600K83631 PL 8.9
413W10650 PL 8.6 600K83650 PL 9.5
413W11660 PL 6.3 600K84050 PL 8.5
PL 6.4 600K84700 PL 11.3
413W66250 PL 2.26 600K85872 PL 1.4
413W75959 PL 13.13 600K85970 PL 2.13
PL 2.6 600K86001 PL 4.1
PL 13.9 600K86080 PL 1.1
PL 13.14 600K86096 PL 7.1
PL 7.10 600K90370 PL 12.4
413W77359 PL 2.17 604K00836 PL 8.1
413W77559 PL 12.4 604K00846 PL 8.1
PL 13.5 604K01911 PL 8.7
PL 13.6 604K07960 PL 2.13
PL 8.10 604K08100 PL 8.2
PL 5.5 604K13420 PL 19.1
PL 13.8 604K14830 PL 1.4
PL 13.7 604K22290 PL 5.4
413W88650 PL 5.5 606K91040 PL 9.1
423W07753 PL 12.9 673K51383 PL 12.11
423W10055 PL 2.21 802K04428 PL 5.3
423W11055 PL 2.21 802K04681 PL 11.3
423W55355 PL 1.3 802K06232 PL 11.2
423W57554 PL 1.4 802K07903 PL 13.3
423W82054 PL 5.5 802K08320 PL 12.4
423W82555 PL 2.19 802K08530 PL 13.4
498K02510 PL 25.1 802K08652 PL 6.3
537K43720 PL 9.4 802K08662 PL 6.3
537K49510 PL 9.4 802K08672 PL 6.3
537K51016 PL 12.3 802K08682 PL 6.3
539K90924 PL 13.10 802K08850 PL 6.5
600N01584 PL 19.1 802K09190 PL 13.5
600N01593 PL 19.1 802E30660 PL 2.25
600K74790 PL 2.7B 802K31420 PL 11.3
600K79560 PL 2.26 802K31691 PL 9.5
600K82710 PL 7.5 802E61670 PL 11.3
600K82870 PL 11.2 802E61690 PL 11.2

809E02991 PL 13.11 809E19530 PL 2.5
809E06330 PL 7.6 809E19540 PL 2.5
809E06360 PL 7.7 809E19560 PL 2.6
809E06370 PL 7.10 809E20210 PL 2.20
809E06380 PL 7.10 830E09140 PL 2.6
809E06401 PL 7.8 830E09800 PL 9.3
809E06530 PL 8.7 830E09840 PL 2.9
809E06550 PL 6.7 830E17550 PL 9.3
809E06730 PL 8.3 830E17801 PL 13.2
809E06770 PL 8.8 830E17961 PL 2.9
809E06790 PL 6.3 830E19412 PL 13.1
809E07770 PL 2.8 830E20010 PL 11.1
809E07780 PL 2.8 830E32600 PL 13.5
809E08090 PL 2.15 PL 13.8
809E08690 PL 1.3 PL 13.7
809E08810 PL 6.5 PL 13.6
809E08900 PL 14.1 830E33491 PL 14.1
809E09040 PL 2.20 830E81410 PL 7.6
809E09100 PL 2.6 891E48750 PL 2.1
809E09110 PL 3.4 891E49060 PL 2.1
809E09150 PL 2.21 891E49510 PL 2.1
809E09171 PL 2.22 891E49520 PL 2.1
809E09180 PL 2.22 891E50480 PL 8.2
809E09190 PL 8.2 891E51561 PL 2.18
809E09210 PL 2.22 891E51571 PL 2.18
809E09410 PL 2.10 891E51581 PL 2.9
PL 2.11 891E51590 PL 2.9
809E09430 PL 2.15 891E51600 PL 2.9
809E09470 PL 2.10 891E65180 PL 12.1
809E09530 PL 2.26 891E65210 PL 12.1
809E11120 PL 12.5 891E73331 PL 13.9
809E11130 PL 12.2 891E73431 PL 13.9
809E14570 PL 13.13 891E73441 PL 13.4
809E14710 PL 2.20 891E73451 PL 13.4
809E15180 PL 6.1 891E73880 PL 2.9
809E15210 PL 3.4 891E73900 PL 2.9
809E16580 PL 2.20 891E73914 PL 2.9
809E16590 PL 2.20 891E73971 PL 2.9
809E17001 PL 7.8 891E73982 PL 2.9
809E17010 PL 7.8 891E74003 PL 6.2
809E19010 PL 8.7 891E74014 PL 6.2

manuals4you.com
891E74023 PL 6.2
891E74033 PL 6.2
891E74062 PL 2.18
891E75721 PL 11.2
891E75951 PL 11.2
891E75990 PL 8.2
891E76001 PL 8.2
891E76010 PL 8.2
891E76020 PL 8.2
891E76040 PL 8.2
891E76090 PL 2.1
891E77561 PL 12.1
891E78020 PL 2.1
891E78030 PL 2.1
891E80400 PL 2.1
891E80410 PL 2.1
891E80420 PL 2.1
891E80481 PL 2.1
891E82980 PL 2.1
891E82991 PL 2.25
892E02000 PL 11.2
908W00131 PL 9.3
908W00134 PL 9.3
908W00909 PL 9.3
908W00914 PL 9.3
910W00122 PL 9.1
910W00211 PL 9.1
913W01399 PL 25.1
913W01400 PL 25.1
913W02310 PL 8.5
962K01810 PL 9.1
962K01820 PL 9.1
962K01830 PL 9.1
962K01840 PL 9.1

manuals4you.com
6 General Procedures & Information
General Procedures dC131 Developer NVM List (776) ................................................................................... 6-90
GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure...................................................................................... 6-3 dC131 Fuser NVM List (777)........................................................................................... 6-92
GP 2 Increased Imageable Area Setup ......................................................................... 6-4 dC131 Sorter/Finisher NVM List (780)(790).................................................................... 6-93
GP 4 Intermittent Problem RAP ...................................................................................... 6-4 dC132 Serial Number/Billing Meter Synchronization ...................................................... 6-93
GP 5 Verifying the Administration Tools Password......................................................... 6-5 dC135 HFSI Counters ..................................................................................................... 6-94
GP 6 Verifying the Auditron Password............................................................................ 6-8 dC135 HFSI Counter List ................................................................................................ 6-94
GP 7 Verifying Tools Mode Password ............................................................................ 6-11 dC140 Analog Monitor..................................................................................................... 6-95
GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO) Procedure ................................................. 6-11 dC188 How to Exit from Service Mode ........................................................................... 6-96
GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM) Procedure.................................................. 6-12 dC301 NVM Initialization ................................................................................................. 6-96
GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ...................................................................................... 6-13 dC305 UI Component Check .......................................................................................... 6-99
GP 11 PWS (Diagnostics) Software Installation Procedure............................................ 6-13 dC330 Component Control.............................................................................................. 6-99
GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports ............................................................................. 6-14 dC351 NVM Initialize, Save/Restore ............................................................................... 6-115
GP 13 Printing a Complex Test Page ............................................................................. 6-14 dC361 NVM Save/Restore .............................................................................................. 6-117
GP 15 Setting the Machine for a Time & Materials (T & M) Account .............................. 6-15 dC371 Configuration Page .............................................................................................. 6-118
GP 16 Setting the Machine to recognize the Sorter as a Mailbox................................... 6-15 dC391 Edit Pad .............................................................................................................. 6-119
GP 17 IDFE Software Update (CD-ROM) ....................................................................... 6-16 dC612 Color Test Pattern Print ....................................................................................... 6-119
GP 18 IOT UI Language Change.................................................................................... 6-17 dC701 Fuser Nip Measurement ...................................................................................... 6-122
GP 20 2nd BTR Service Procedure ............................................................................... 6-17 dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment ..................................................................................... 6-123
dC915 Machine Output .................................................................................................. 6-123
PWS Diagnostics dC918 IOT Highlight Setup ............................................................................................. 6-125
Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS ................................................... 6-19 dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine only)................................................ 6-126
DC Quick (CODE Number LIST)..................................................................................... 6-20 dC920 Developer Unit Check.......................................................................................... 6-126
dC100 Service Entry ....................................................................................................... 6-22 dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment .............................................................. 6-127
dC110 Displaying the CRU-Related Data ....................................................................... 6-23 dC923 PROCON PG....................................................................................................... 6-127
dC118 Jam Counter ........................................................................................................ 6-23 dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG ................................................................... 6-128
dC120 Fail Counter ......................................................................................................... 6-24 dC929 Max Setup............................................................................................................ 6-128
dC122 Shutdown History ................................................................................................ 6-25 dC933 VH/VM Setup ....................................................................................................... 6-129
dC129 System Registration Adjustment ........................................................................ 6-26 dC934 ADC/AGC Setup .................................................................................................. 6-129
dC131 NVM Read/Write.................................................................................................. 6-26 dC945 IIT Calibration ...................................................................................................... 6-130
dC131 UI/Tools (700)...................................................................................................... 6-27
dC131 UI NVM List (702) ................................................................................................ 6-30 UI (IOT) Diagnostics
dC131 UI NVM List (800) ................................................................................................ 6-33 How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics Mode ........................................................... 6-131
dC131 UI NVM List (850) ................................................................................................ 6-33 UI (IOT) Diagnostic Modes.............................................................................................. 6-131
dC131 DADF NVM List (710).......................................................................................... 6-39 NVM Reset / NVM Initialization (dC301 UI Diagnostics) ................................................. 6-132
dC131 IIT NVM List (715, 719) ....................................................................................... 6-40 NVM Read / Write (dC131 NVM UI Diagnostics) ............................................................ 6-132
dC131 ROS NVM List (720)............................................................................................ 6-41 Component Control (dC330 UI Diagnostics) ................................................................... 6-133
dC131 IPS NVM List (730).............................................................................................. 6-43 Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics) ...................................................................... 6-133
dC131 PH NVM List (749)............................................................................................... 6-44 Fuser Nip Measurement (dC701 UI Diagnostics)............................................................ 6-137
dC131 PH NVM List (760)............................................................................................... 6-44 Developer Unit Check (dC920 UI Diagnostics) ............................................................... 6-138
dC131PH NVM List (761)................................................................................................ 6-47 Max Setup (UI Diagnostics)............................................................................................. 6-138
dC131SYS NVM List (752) ............................................................................................. 6-81 IIT Calibration (dC945 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed machine only)................................ 6-139
dC131SYS NVM List (759) ............................................................................................. 6-82 ADC/AGC Setup (dC934 UI Diagnostics) ....................................................................... 6-139
dC131 BILLING NVM List (990)...................................................................................... 6-83 VH/VM Setup (dC933 UI Diagnostics) ............................................................................ 6-140
dC131 Procon1 NVM List (773) ...................................................................................... 6-84 IOT Highlight Setup (dC918 UI Diagnostics)................................................................... 6-140
dC131 Procon2 NVM List (774) ...................................................................................... 6-86 TRC Setup/Toner Concentration Adjustment (dC922 UI Diagnostics)............................ 6-141
dC131 Procon3 NVM List (775) ...................................................................................... 6-87 TRC Adjustment (dC924 UI Diagnostics)........................................................................ 6-141
dC131 IBT NVM List (771), dC131 Drive NVM List (772) ............................................... 6-88 Color Balance Setup (dC919 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed machine only) ..................... 6-142
Reissue 1/05 General Procedures

Product Specifications
General Information ........................................................................................................ 6-143
Installation Space Requirements .................................................................................... 6-143
Product Specifications..................................................................................................... 6-148
Tools and Supplies

Common Tools ................................................................................................................ 6-157
Product Tools and Test Patterns..................................................................................... 6-157
Cleaning Materials .......................................................................................................... 6-158
Machine Consumables.................................................................................................... 6-158
Change Tag Information

Change Tag Introduction................................................................................................. 6-159
Processor (P) Tags ......................................................................................................... 6-159
Mail Box / Sorter Tags..................................................................................................... 6-166
High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Tags.................................................................................. 6-167
Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) Tags........................................................................ 6-168
General Procedures 1/05 Reissue

manuals4you.com
GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure 5. Visually observe that the clear oil tubes above and below the oil pump are full of oil and
have no air bubbles and show no sign of leaks. If leaks or air bubbles are found, reposition
CAUTION
clamps/fittings and repeat steps 3 and 4 above.
Without following proper Fuser Break-In Procedures after servicing the Fuser Assembly, dam-
6. Place a blank sheet of paper on the Platen Glass. Run 20 blank copies from Tray 1 in Full
age to the Fuser may occur due to lack of oil in the system.
Color mode.
Standard Break-In Procedure 7. Place the Color Test Pattern on the Platen Glass. Run 20 copies from Tray 1 in Full Color
1. Perform this procedure whenever any of the following components are either cleaned or mode. (While running these copies, listen for unusual fuser or exit noises and observe
replaced: output for Image Quality.)
• Donor Roll Assembly or Oil System Kit 8. When entire Fuser Assembly is replaced, also perform Fuser Nip Adjustment (ADJ 8.1.1).
• Heat Roll If the External Heat Roll is replaced, adjust the External Heat Roll nip (ADJ 8.8.1).
• External Heat Roll
• Donor Roll
• Pickup Roll
• Pressure Roll
• Wick
• Heat Roll Stripper Fingers
• Pressure Roll Stripper Fingers
• Cleaning Roll
2. After performing service, allow the machine to come to the “Ready Condition”.
NOTE: During a full warm-up cycle, the Fuser Drives rotate for 2 minutes and Oil Pump
runs for 5 minutes.
3. Place a blank sheet of paper on the Platen Glass. Run 20 blank copies from Tray 1 in Full
Color mode.
4. Place the Color Test Pattern on the Platen Glass. Run 20 copies from Tray 1 in Full Color
mode.
5. When Heat or Pressure Rolls are replaced, also perform Fuser Nip Adjustment (ADJ
8.1.1).
If the External Heat Roll is replaced, adjust the External Heat Roll nip (ADJ 8.8.1).
Full Break-In Procedure
1. Perform this procedure whenever any of the following components are replaced or the oil
supply system has been emptied:
• Entire Fuser Assembly
• Oil Pump
• Oil Supply Tubes
• Oil Drip Pipe
• Oil Tank
2. After performing service, allow the machine to come to the Ready condition.
NOTE: During a full warm-up cycle, the Fuser Drives rotate for 2 minutes and Oil Pump
runs for 5 minutes.
3. Enter Diagnostics. Select dC330 Component Control.

4. Enter Code 10-033 (oil Pump ON) and press Start, repeat twice (pump will run for 90 sec-
onds each time).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-3 GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure
GP 2 Increased Imageable Area Setup GP 4 Intermittent Problem RAP
CAUTION The purpose of this RAP is to provide guidance for resolving an intermittent problem. This is
This procedure is for DC12 Copier/Printers only. Attempting to use this setup on DCCS50 not an exact procedure, but a set of recommended actions that use the resources of the ser-
machines may result in Image Quality problems. vice manual to help locate the cause of an intermittent problem.
The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the maximum imageable area to allow for full-bleed
printing of 11 x 17 in. images onto 12 x 18 in. paper, or A3 images onto SR-A3 paper. This will Procedure
allow oversize sheets to be trimmed to 11 x 17 or A3, with the image extending through the 1. Check the service log. Recent service actions may provide information about the problem.
trimmed area. For example, a component that was recently replaced to correct another problem may be
the cause of the new intermittent problem.
Prerequisites 2. Run the machine in a mode that vigorously exercises the function that is suspected. The
The following hardware/software are required in order to implement this procedure: machine may fail more frequently or may fail completely under these conditions. Look for
• Tag P39 (V5) or higher IOT software level signs of failure or abnormal operation.
• DC12 with one of the following DFEs: An intermittent problem can usually be associated with a RAP, since when it does fail, it
results in a Fail Code, a Jam Code, or some other observable symptom.
– EFI X12 with V1.5 software
3. Using the RAP that is associated with the symptom of the intermittent problem, examine
– Splash G620 with V2.5 software
all of the components that are referenced in the RAP. Look for:
– Splash G630 with V3.0 software
• contamination, such as a feed roller that has a build up of dirt or toner
Specifications • wear, such as gear teeth that are rounded or have excessive backlash
The guaranteed imageable area is as follows: • HFSI, even if they are not near or have not exceeded the SPEC LIFE or COPY
• Print mode COUNT value
12 x 18” paper - 297mm (+2.0/-0.5mm) x 438 mm (+13.0/- 0.5mm) • wires chafing against components of the machine, especially against moving com-
SR A3 paper - 297mm (+6.0/-0.5mm) x 438 mm (+6.0/- 0.5mm) ponents
• Copy mode • misaligned, misadjusted, or incorrectly installed components
12 x 18” or SR A3 paper - 297mm x 432 mm (+/-0.5mm) @105% R/E • slow or slipping clutches; slow or binding solenoids
Procedure • damaged components
• excessive heat, or symptoms of excessive heat, such as the discoloration of a com-
NOTE: Registration adjustments are not affected by this procedure. ponent
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode • loose cables or wires
using the PWS. 4. Using the RAP that is associated with the symptom of the intermittent problem, perform
2. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the default all of the adjustments for the components or functions that are referenced in the RAP.
screen. Check to ensure that the adjustment CAN BE MADE and that there is an adequate range
3. Select the ROS tab. of adjustment, and that it can be set to or near the nominal value. Any abnormality that is
observed may be an indication of the cause of the problem. For example, a component
CAUTION
can be adjusted to the nominal value, but it is at the limit of the adjustment range. This is
Make sure to change both NVM locations. Changing only one location will result in Image not normal and may be an indication of the cause of the problem.
Quality problems.
5. Operate all of the components in the appropriate RAP that is associated with the symp-
4. Change the value in locations 720-360 and 720-361 to 1. tom of the intermittent problem with DC330 Component Control (refer to dC330 Compo-
nent Control). Observe the components for any symptoms of abnormal operation, such as
a hesitation, or an unusual sound.
6. Check that the AC and DC power are within specification.
7. Get technical advice or assistance when it is appropriate. This will depend upon the situa-
tion and the established local procedures.
8. Examine the components that are not in the RAP, but are associated with the function that
is failing. Refer to the BSDs. Look for:
• contamination, such as a feed roller that has a build up of dirt or toner
• wear, such as gear teeth that are rounded or have excessive backlash

GP 2 Increased Imageable Area Setup, GP 4 Intermit- 6-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
• HFSI, even if they are not near or have not exceeded the SPEC LIFE or COPY GP 5 Verifying the Administration Tools Password
COUNT value
This procedure will enable the CSE to read a machine Administration Tools password if the SA
• wires chafing against components of the machine, especially against moving com-
has forgotten their password or if the SA is unavailable.
ponents
• misaligned, misadjusted, or incorrectly installed components CAUTION
• slow or slipping clutches; slow or binding solenoids Use this procedure only to read the password resident on the machine. Then use the pass-
• damaged components word to access the Administration Tools Screen and change the password using the normal
• excessive heat, or symptoms of excessive heat, such as the discoloration of a com- procedure.
ponent Procedure
• loose cables or wires 1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
9. Perform the adjustments for the components that are not in the RAP, but are associated using the PWS.
with the function that is failing. Refer to the BSDs. Check to ensure that the adjustment 2. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen.
CAN BE MADE and that there is an adequate range of adjustment, and that it can be set 3. The system displays one of the Read/Write Screens. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the
to or near the nominal value. Any abnormality that is observed may be an indication of the
default screen.
cause of the problem. For example, a component can be adjusted to the nominal value,
4. Select UI/Tools from the Vertical Left Tab List.
but it is at the limit of the adjustment range. This is not normal and may be an indication of
the cause of the problem 5. The system displays one of the Read/Write Screens. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the
default screen.
10. Operate all of the components that are not in the RAP, but are associated with the function
that is failing with DC330 Component Control (refer to dC330 Component Control). Refer 6. Record and Retain NVM Values for the following locations:
to the BSDs. Observe the components for any symptoms of abnormal operation, such as • 702-180
a hesitation, or an unusual sound. • 702-181
11. Replace any components or consumables that are known to be a frequent cause of the • 702-182
problem. When doing this, consider the cost and time required. If the suspected item is • 702-183
inexpensive, can be installed quickly, and has a high probability of resolving the problem,
• 702-184
then it is reasonable to replace it.
• 702-185
12. Leave an accurate and detailed record of your actions in the service log. Describe what
you have observed, what actions you took, and the recommended next steps. Calculating the Administration Tools Password
1. Exit from dC131 NVM Read/Write Mode.
2. Exit the Diagnostic Mode.
3. Using the PWS, go to Programs/Accessories/Scientific Calculator (This is the stan-
dard accessory in Microsoft Windows)
a. Calculator has two operating modes, select Scientific Format. To do this, on the
calculator icon, go to “View” and click Scientific.
b. Make sure the “Decimal” and the “Deg” formats are selected.
c. Enter decimal number.
4. Convert the numbers recorded from the list above to hexadecimal.
a. Click the Hex format. (Select Dword on calculator) This will leave you with a pair of
two digit hex words.
5. Convert the hexadecimal numbers to their ASCII code equivalent. Refer to Table 1.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-5 GP 4 Intermittent Problem RAP, GP 5 Verifying the
NOTE: The results from the above conversion will be the Administration Tools Password. Table 2 . 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code /
Each memory location holds two digits of the Administration Tools Password. The Admin- Hecadecimal Conversion Matrix
istration Tools Password may be 4-12 digits long. Unused memory will hold the ASCII
2 Digits
code character for a space (20). Refer to Table 1.
NVM Value Password
NOTE: If you DO NOT have the capability above, (Steps 6 through 8) on your PC or Lap- (Decimal) (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code
top, please use the conversion matrix in Table 2. 12856 3238 28
12857 3239 29
Table 1 Hex/ASCII Conversion
13104 3330 30
HEX ASCII
13105 3331 31
30 0 13106 3332 32
31 1 13107 3333 33
32 2 13108 3334 34
33 3 13109 3335 35
34 4 13110 3336 36
35 5 13111 3337 37
36 6 13112 3338 38
37 7 13113 3339 39
38 8 13360 3430 40
39 9 13361 3431 41
20 Space 13362 3432 42
13363 3433 43
Table 2 . 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code /
13364 3434 44
Hecadecimal Conversion Matrix
13365 3435 45
2 Digits
13366 3436 46
NVM Value Password
13367 3437 47
(Decimal) (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code
13368 3438 48
12592 3130 10
13369 3439 49
12593 3131 11
13616 3530 50
12594 3132 12
13617 3531 51
12595 3133 13
13618 3532 52
12596 3134 14
13619 3533 53
12597 3135 15
13620 3534 54
12598 3136 16
13621 3535 55
12599 3137 17
13622 3536 56
12600 3138 18
13623 3537 57
12601 3139 19
13624 3538 58
12848 3230 20
13625 3539 59
12849 3231 21
13872 3630 60
12850 3232 22
13873 3631 61
12851 3233 23
13874 3632 62
12852 3234 24
13875 3633 63
12853 3235 25
13876 3634 64
12854 3236 26
13877 3635 65
12855 3237 27

GP 5 Verifying the Administration Tools Password 6-6 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 2 . 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / Table 2 . 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code /
Hecadecimal Conversion Matrix Hecadecimal Conversion Matrix
2 Digits 2 Digits
NVM Value Password NVM Value Password
(Decimal) (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code (Decimal) (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code
13878 3636 66 13344 3420 *4 + (SPACE)
13879 3637 67 13600 3520 *5 + (SPACE)
13880 3638 68 13856 3620 *6 + (SPACE)
13881 3639 69 14112 3720 *7 + (SPACE)
13888 3640 70 14368 3820 *8 + (SPACE)
13889 3641 71 14624 3920 *9 + (SPACE)
13890 3642 72
13891 3643 73 * # + (SPACE) Key applies only on the last digit of the password, which was at 5th, 7th, 9th
or 11th.
13892 3644 74
13893 3645 75
13894 3646 76
13895 3647 77
13896 3648 78
13897 3649 79
14384 3830 80
14385 3831 81
14386 3832 82
14387 3833 83
14388 3834 84
14389 3835 85
14390 3836 86
14391 3837 87
14392 3838 88
14393 3839 89
14640 3930 90
14641 3931 91
14642 3932 92
14643 3933 93
14644 3934 94
14645 3935 95
14646 3936 96
14647 3937 97
14648 3938 98
14649 3939 99
12320 3020 *0 + (SPACE)
12576 3120 *1 + (SPACE)
12848 3230 *2 + (SPACE)
13088 3320 *3 + (SPACE)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-7 GP 5 Verifying the Administration Tools Password
GP 6 Verifying the Auditron Password
This procedure will enable the CSE to read a machine Auditron password if the SA has forgot-
ten their password or if the SA is unavailable.
CAUTION
Use this procedure only to read the password resident on the machine. Then use the pass-
word to access the Auditron Administrator Screen and change the password using the normal
procedure.
Procedure
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode, refer to: Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
using the PWS
2. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen.
3. The system displays one of the Read/Write Screens. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the
default screen.
4. Select Other from the Vertical Left Tab List.
5. The system displays one of the Read/Write Screens. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the
default screen.
6. Record and Retain NVM Values for the following locations:
• 850-001
• 850-002
• 850-003
• 850-004
• 850-005
• 850-006
• 850-007
Exiting from the Auditron Password
1. Exit from dC131 NVM Read/Write Mode.
3. Using the PWS, go to Programs/Accessories/Scientific Calculator (This is the stan-
dard accessory in Microsoft Windows)
a. Calculator has two operating modes, select Scientific Format. To do this, on the
calculator icon, go to “View” and click Scientific.
b. Make sure the “Decimal” and the “Deg” formats are selected.
c. Enter decimal number.
4. Convert the numbers recorded from the list above to hexadecimal (Select Dword on cal-
culator)
a. Click the Hex format. This will leave you with a pair of two digit hex words.
5. Convert the hexadecimal numbers to their ASCII code equivalent. Refer to Table 1.

GP 6 Verifying the Auditron Password 6-8 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
NOTE: NVM Location 850-007 is a binary switch that turns Auditron ON and OFF. It’s Table 2 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code /
value will be 0 or 1 only. Hexadecimal Conversion Matrix
NOTE: The results from the above conversion will be the Auditron Password. Each mem- 2 Digits
ory location holds two digits of the Auditron password. The Auditron password may be 4- NVM Value Password
12 digits long. Unused memory will hold the ASCII code character for a space (20). Refer (Decimal) (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code
to Table 1. 12853 3235 25
NOTE: If you DO NOT have the capability above, (Steps 6 through 8) on your PC or Lap- 12854 3236 26
top, please use the conversion matrix in Table 2. 12855 3237 27
12856 3238 28
Table 1 Hex/ASCII Conversion
12857 3239 29
HEX ASCII 13104 3330 30
30 0 13105 3331 31
31 1 13106 3332 32
32 2 13107 3333 33
33 3 13108 3334 34
34 4 13109 3335 35
35 5 13110 3336 36
36 6 13111 3337 37
37 7 13112 3338 38
38 8 13113 3339 39
39 9 13360 3430 40
20 Space 13361 3431 41
13362 3432 42
Table 2 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / 13363 3433 43
Hexadecimal Conversion Matrix
13364 3434 44
2 Digits 13365 3435 45
NVM Value Password
13366 3436 46
(Decimal) (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code
13367 3437 47
12592 3130 10
13368 3438 48
12593 3131 11
13369 3439 49
12594 3132 12
13616 3530 50
12595 3133 13
13617 3531 51
12596 3134 14
13618 3532 52
12597 3135 15
13619 3533 53
12598 3136 16
13620 3534 54
12599 3137 17
13621 3535 55
12600 3138 18
13622 3536 56
12601 3139 19
13623 3537 57
12848 3230 20
13624 3538 58
12849 3231 21
13625 3539 59
12850 3232 22
13872 3630 60
12851 3233 23
13873 3631 61
12852 3234 24
13874 3632 62

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-9 GP 6 Verifying the Auditron Password
Table 2 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / Table 2 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code /
Hexadecimal Conversion Matrix Hexadecimal Conversion Matrix
2 Digits 2 Digits
NVM Value Password NVM Value Password
(Decimal) (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code (Decimal) (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code
13875 3633 63 12576 3120 *1 + (SPACE)
13876 3634 64 12848 3230 *2 + (SPACE)
13877 3635 65 13088 3320 *3 + (SPACE)
13878 3636 66 13344 3420 *4 + (SPACE)
13879 3637 67 13600 3520 *5 + (SPACE)
13880 3638 68 13856 3620 *6 + (SPACE)
13881 3639 69 14112 3720 *7 + (SPACE)
13888 3640 70 14368 3820 *8 + (SPACE)
13889 3641 71 14624 3920 *9 + (SPACE)
13890 3642 72
13891 3643 73 * # + (SPACE) Key applies only on the last digit of the password, which was at 5th, 7th, 9th
or 11th.
13892 3644 74
13893 3645 75
13894 3646 76
13895 3647 77
13896 3648 78
13897 3649 79
14384 3830 80
14385 3831 81
14386 3832 82
14387 3833 83
14388 3834 84
14389 3835 85
14390 3836 86
14391 3837 87
14392 3838 88
14393 3839 89
14640 3930 90
14641 3931 91
14642 3932 92
14643 3933 93
14644 3934 94
14645 3935 95
14646 3936 96
14647 3937 97
14648 3938 98
14649 3939 99
12320 3020 *0 + (SPACE)

GP 6 Verifying the Auditron Password 6-10 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
GP 7 Verifying Tools Mode Password GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO) Procedure
Entering, exiting and changing the Tools Mode Password. Description
This procedure is used when a full PO/PO is required for the Integrated Digital Front End
Procedure (IDFE).
Entering Tool Mode
NOTE: You can use the default password (11111) to enter the Tools mode the first time.
Procedure
CAUTION
1. Press the Administration button on the Control Panel.
If any of the following steps are not correctly followed, the IDFE will not shut down properly,
2. Select the Tools button on the Touch Screen. and the PO/PO process must be repeated.
3. Use the keypad to key-in the password (default is 11111).
NOTE: The IDFE will take approximately three to five minutes to load its software after per-
Exit the Tool Mode
forming the following steps:
1. Select the Close button to exit any Tools Mode function without saving.
2. Select Close to return to the Basic Copy tab.
1. Switch OFF the Main Switch for the Printer.
Changing the Password
CAUTION
1. Select Change Tools Access Number button on the Tools screen.
When power to the IOT is switched-off, the IDFE Hard Disk Drive goes into a software shut-
2. Key-in a New Number in the New Number field.
down. Damage to the Hard Disk Drive could occur if the IDFE is not allowed to complete the
3. Key-in the same number in Confirm New Number in the Confirm New Number field.
software shutdown process.
4. Press the Enter button.
2. Wait for 30 seconds.
5. Select the Close button to return to System Administration Item.
3. Switch ON the Main Switch for the Printer.
NOTE: The configuration report may take 2 or 3 minutes to print.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-11 GP 7 Verifying Tools Mode Password, GP 8 IDFE
GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM) Procedure NOTE: The loading process should take less than 10 minutes. The CD-ROM will eject if
the software load was successful.
Description
This procedure is used to install software for the IDFE by using a CD-ROM. Refer to GP 17 NOTE: If the CD-ROM does not eject within 10 minutes, press the Eject Button, and
ensure that the CD-ROM is inserted correctly. Now, switch off power to the Printer, wait
IDFE Software Update (CD-ROM) for the procedure to update software for the IDFE.
for the LEDs on the IDFE to switch off and then switch on the Printer. Now, wait for the
NOTE: The installation CD-ROM completely reformats the IDFE Hard Disk Drive and re-initial- software to load.
izes the printer’s network configuration parameters. You will lose all information stored on the NOTE: After the software has successfully loaded, a configuration report may be printed
Hard Disk Drive. You will also lose your network configuration parameter setups. whenever the Printer is powered on.
Software installations will change network parameters and require that customers re-establish 11. Remove the CD-ROM and close the CD-ROM Tray.
Printer/IDFE network parameters. When in doubt always run a configuration report first and 12. Switch off power to the Printer and the IDFE.
verify that Printer/IDFE network parameters are correct.
13. Wait for the LEDs on the IDFE to switch off.
NOTE: After completing the following procedure, ensure that the CD-ROM has been removed NOTE: The LEDs will switch off in 18-22 seconds. Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete
from the CD-ROM Drive. If the CD-ROM is not removed from the Drive the Controller will boot shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive.
from the CD-ROM each time the Controller is switched-on.
14. Re-connect all network interface cables to the IDFE.
Procedure 15. Switch on power to the Printer/IDFE.
NOTE: Be sure to read and follow the instructions in the release documentation, which is 16. Wait for the IDFE to re-boot.
included with the software to be loaded. NOTE: It takes approximately 5 to 7 minutes for the IDFE to reboot.
NOTE: Be sure to record the release version of the software being loaded.
NOTE: After the new software has been loaded a Configuration Report may print.
Perform the following: 17. Use the Configuration Report to verify that the new “Controller Software Version” is cor-
1. Print a Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports). rect. If the new software version is not correct, perform steps 4-17 of this procedure again.
2. If necessary, switch on power to the Printer/Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE). If the new software version is still not correct obtain a new installation CD-ROM and
3. Remove or open the Cover for the IDFE CD-ROM Drive. repeat steps 4-17 of this procedure.
NOTE: The Cover is located on the right end of the IDFE. NOTE: If repeated (several occurrences of) “Network Controller Disabled” messages are
displayed on the Local User Interface, obtain a new installation CD-ROM and repeat
NOTE: Some versions of the IDFE use a Cover and Screw to provide EME protection for steps 4-17 of this procedure.
the IOT. Some versions of the IDFE use a hinged Cover Assembly to provide EME protec-
tion. 18. Ask your customer to perform the network setup procedures for re-establishing the Printer
and IDFE network parameters.
4. Press the Eject button on the IDFE CD-ROM Drive.
19. Ask your customer to perform the Printer Driver installation for the type of workstation you
5. Carefully insert the CD-ROM, and press the Eject Button to close the CD-ROM Tray. have.
6. Switch off power to the Printer/IDFE.
NOTE: If necessary, ask your customer to refer to the Document Centre ColorSeries 50
7. Wait for the Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) on the IDFE to switch off.
Printer Installation Guide for Print Driver installation instructions.
NOTE: The LEDs will switch off in 18-22 seconds. Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete
20. Install or close the Cover for the CD-ROM Drive.
shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive.
8. Disconnect all Network Interface Cables to the IDFE.
NOTE: Do Not disconnect the Digital to Digital Interface (DDI) Cables between the IDFE
and the Printer.
9. Switch on power to the Printer/IDFE.

10. Wait for the software to load.

GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM) 6-12 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs GP 11 PWS (Diagnostics) Software Installation Procedure
Description Procedure
This procedure is used to maintain serial number and billing data integrity when Billing PWBs
NOTE: For the PWS S/W Upgrade Installation Procedure, go to the DocuColor 12 PWS / IOT
must be replaced.
Software upgrade CD Installation Instructions, Section 1.
Procedure
CAUTION
To maintain the integrity of the serial number and billing data never replace all three PWBs at
once. If any of the following billing data PWBs needs replacing, only replace them ONE AT A
TIME according to this procedure:
• IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2).
• IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
• Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
1. Connect the PWS. Select dC 132 in the DC Quick Pull-down menu.
2. Compare the serial numbers displayed for the three PWBs with the serial number on the
data plate. Note any that do not agree.
NOTE: If any of the following conditions exist, escalate the call to Field engineering or the
NTC:
• The displayed serial numbers match each other but do not match the data plate.
• Two or more numbers do not agree with the data plate and the third number
• The displayed numbers are all different.
3. If one serial number does not match the others, the Set Serial Number button will
become active. Click on the button. A series of pop-up windows will open. Follow the
instructions on the screen to synchronize the serial numbers.
CAUTION
To maintain the integrity of the serial number and billing data never replace all three PWBs at
once. Replacing all three PWBs at once will cause unrecoverable NVM corruption. If a PWB
needs replacing, only replace ONE AT A TIME. If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the orig-
inal PWB and renter the serial number before attempting to replace a different PWB.
4. If any PWB will not synchronize, replace that PWB (PL 9.2) and re-synchronize.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-13 GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ,
GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports GP 13 Printing a Complex Test Page
Description Description
This procedure describes how to print a Configuration Report. Printing Configuration Reports This procedure describes how to print a Test Page. Printing Test Pages can help you trouble-
can help you troubleshoot and configure the Printer. shoot the Printer and IDFE.
Procedure Procedure
NOTE: You can print a configuration report by using CentreWare Internet Services. Use this NOTE: It is NOT possible to print the Complex Test Page from the PWS. Ask the customer to
configuration report as a guide to help you re-establish network settings for the printer when perform steps 1-4 of this procedure.
new software is installed.
NOTE: Test Pages can only be printed from the customer’s client or workstation to the printer.
NOTE: To access CentreWare Internet Services you will need to obtain the network IP
1. Select the “Print” tab from the “CentreWare Internet Services” Home Page.
address. The IP address can be obtained from the Printer UI.
2. Select “Reports” from the “Print” window.
NOTE: Perform steps 6-9 of this procedure to print a Configuration Report directly from the 3. Select “Test Page” from the “Report Type” pop up menu.
workstation.
4. Select the “Print” button.
NOTE: It is NOT possible to print a Configuration Report from the PWS. Ask the customer to
NOTE: Printing a Complex Test Page could take up to several minutes to print depending
print a Configuration Report.
on your Network Configuration.
1. Select the “Properties” tab from the “CentreWare Internet Services” Home Page.
2. Select “Printer Defaults”
3. Select “Print Start Up Page”
4. Select “Apply New Settings”.
NOTE: A password dialog box will appear. You must enter the correct user name and
password before the new settings are enabled.
5. PO/PO the Printer and IDFE (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)).
NOTE: The configuration report may take 2 or 3 minutes to print.
NOTE: The configuration report will print every time the Printer and IDFE are powered off
and powered on.
NOTE: If the configuration report does not print ask the customer to enable it for you from
the web UI.
6. Select the “Print” tab from the “CentreWare Internet Services” Home Page.
7. Select “Reports” from the “Print” window.
8. Select “Configuration” from the “Report Type” pop up menu.
9. Select the “Print” button.

GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports, GP 13 Printing 6-14 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
GP 15 Setting the Machine for a Time & Materials (T & M) GP 16 Setting the Machine to recognize the Sorter as a
Account Mailbox
Description Description
This procedure sets the machine for a T&M Account. This procedure configures the machine to recognize the Sorter as a Mailbox.
NOTE: If the Customer was on a FSWA and is now a T & M, the message “Draw Type Mis- NOTE: This procedure cannot be used with a Copier only configuration.
match” will appear on the UI. To remove this message and continue the make copies, the Cus-
NOTE: This procedure uses the machine UI to set the machine to recognize the Sorter as a
tomer will need to order a T & M Xerographic CRU.
Mailbox. To set the machine to recognize the Sorter as a Mailbox using the PWS, use the alter-
Procedure nate procedure below.
1. While holding down the “0" Button, press Start. A screen displays asking you to Enter Procedure
your Access Number.
1. While holding down the “0" Button, press Start. A screen will display, asking you to Enter
2. Using the Keypad, enter 6789.
your Access Number.
3. Press Confirm when finished. If you make a mistake press “C”. The Customer Support
2. Using the Keypad, Enter 6789.
Engineer Tools screen will display.
3. Press Confirm when finished. If you make a mistake, press “C". The Customer Support
4. Press the NVM Read/Write button in the center of the top row. The NVM Read/Write
(dC131) screen will display.
4. Press the NVM Read / Write button in the center of the top row.
5. Press the Enter Number button to begin.
5. The NVM Read / Write (dC131) screen will display.
6. Using the Keypad, enter 774-056.
6. Press the Enter Number button to begin.
7. Press Start to bring up the current value. The Current Value will display in the box on the
7. Using the Keypad, enter 780-001.
Left. If the current value is 48 the machine setup for a Full Service Maintenance Agree-
ment FSMA account. 8. Press Start to bring up the current value. The Current Value will appear in the box on the
left. If the current value is “0" the device is set up as a Sorter.
8. Using the Keypad press 49 to set the account to T & M.
9. The number you entered will display in the New Value box on the right. 9. Using the Keypad, press “1" to set the device up as a Mailbox. The number you entered
will appear in the New Value box on the right.
10. Press Start to accept the change. The number should now appear in the Current Value
10. Press Start to accept the change. The new number should now appear in the Current
box.
Value.
11. Press Close to exit this screen.
11. Press Close to exit this screen.
12. After you press Close, the machine will re-start.
12. After you press Close the machine will re-start.
13. When the screen returns, press Done to finish.
13. When the screen returns press Done to finish.
14. The machine will now re-start and will recognize the account as T & M.
14. The machine will re-start and will recognize the devise as a Mailbox.
NOTE: The procedure below is an alternate method for setting the machine to recognize the
Sorter as a Mailbox using the PWS.
Procedure
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode, refer to: Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
using the PWS.
2. Select Configuration Page (dC371) from the DC Quick pull down menu.
3. Select Mailbox from “Output Devices(s)”.
4. Select the Save Button.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-15 GP 15 Setting the Machine for a Time & Materials (T
GP 17 IDFE Software Update (CD-ROM) NOTE: The loading process should take less than 10 minutes. The CD-ROM will eject if
the software load was successful.
Description
This procedure is used to update software for the IDFE by using a CD-ROM. Refer to GP 9 NOTE: If the CD-ROM does not eject within 10 minutes, press the Eject Button, and
ensure that the CD-ROM is inserted correctly. Now, switch off power to the Printer, wait
IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM) to install software for the IDFE by using a CD-ROM.
for the LEDs on the IDFE to switch off and then switch on the Printer. Now, wait for the
NOTE: The update CD-ROM does not format the IDFE Hard Disk Drive or re-initialize the software to load.
printer’s network configuration parameters. A software update or patch will not typically change NOTE: After the software has successfully loaded, a configuration report may be printed
network parameters unless indicated in the release documentation. whenever the Printer is switched on.
When in doubt always run a Configuration Report first and verify that Printer/IDFE network 11. Remove the CD-ROM and close the CD-ROM Tray.
parameters are correct. 12. Switch off power to the Printer and the IDFE.
13. Wait for the LEDs on the IDFE to switch off.
NOTE: After completing the following procedure, ensure that the CD-ROM has been removed
from the CD-ROM Drive. If the CD-ROM is not removed from the Drive the Controller will boot NOTE: The LEDs will switch off in 18-22 seconds. Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete
from the CD-ROM each time the Controller is switched-on. shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive.
Procedure 14. Re-connect all Network Interface Cables to the IDFE.
15. Switch on power to the Printer/IDFE.
NOTE: Be sure to read and follow the instructions in the release documentation, which is
included with the software. 16. Wait for the IDFE to re-boot.
NOTE: Be sure to record the release version of the software being loaded. NOTE: It takes approximately 5 to 7 minutes for the IDFE to re-boot.
Perform the following: NOTE: After the new software has been loaded a configuration report may print.
1. Print a Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports). 17. Use the Configuration Report to verify that the new “Controller Software Version” is cor-
2. If necessary, switch on power to the Printer/Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE). rect. If the new software version is not correct, perform steps 4-17 of this procedure again.
3. Remove or open the Cover for the IDFE CD-ROM Drive. If the new software version is still not correct obtain a new installation CD-ROM and per-
form steps 4 -17 of GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM), then repeat steps 4-17 of
NOTE: The Cover is located on the right end of the IDFE. this procedure (GP 17).
NOTE: Some versions of the IDFE use a Cover and Screw to provide EME protection for NOTE: If repeated (several occurrences of) “Network Controller Disabled” messages are
the IOT. Some versions of the IDFE use a hinged Cover Assembly to provide EME protec- displayed on the Local User Interface, obtain a new installation CD-ROM and perform
tion. steps 4-17 of GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM), then repeat steps 4-17 of this
4. Press the Eject button on the IDFE CD-ROM Drive. procedure (GP 17).
5. Carefully insert the CD-ROM, and press the Eject Button to close the CD-ROM Tray. 18. Ask your customer to perform the network setup procedures for re-establishing the Printer
6. Switch off power to the Printer/IDFE. and IDFE network parameters.
7. Wait for the Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) on the IDFE to switch off. 19. Ask your customer to perform the Printer Driver installation for the type of workstation you
have.
NOTE: The LEDs will switch off in 18-22 seconds. Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete
shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive. NOTE: If necessary, ask your customer to refer to the Document Centre ColorSeries 50
Printer Installation Guide for Print Driver installation instructions.
8. Disconnect all Network Interface Cables to the IDFE.
9. Switch on power to the Printer IDFE. 20. Install or close the Cover for the CD-ROM Drive.
10. Wait for the software to load.

GP 17 IDFE Software Update (CD-ROM) 6-16 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
GP 18 IOT UI Language Change GP 20 2nd BTR Service Procedure
Description At assembly install or at first call after machine install:
·Apply a small amount of Plastislip Grease (43E550) to both cams on the Cam Shaft Assembly
NOTE: For IOT UI Language Change Procedure, go to Appendix D of the IOT software
v6.00.2 Install Instructions or Appendix B in any other IOT software above 6.00.2. This proce- (PL 7.10, item # 11).
dure is located in the IOT software CD.
At 100k Interval:
• ·Remove the Inlet Plate (PL 7.10, item #1), and thoroughly vacuum the assembly sump.
Refer to REP 7.9.1 as required.
• ·Clean the plate, the 2nd BTR Roll and the Cleaning Blade with a clean, dry cloth.
• Check all four locating pins to ensure they are secured firmly on the assembly frame.
Epoxy may be used for any loose pins.
At 200K Interval:
• ·Perform the 100k Interval Maintenance
• ·Check all drive gears on the rear of the assembly for wear or damage, and replace as
required (PL 7.10, item # 16, 22 and 23). Check the stub shaft which supports the drive
gear (# 22). If the shaft is loose, Epoxy may be applied to the inside frame where the shaft
attaches to the assembly.
At 300K Interval:
• Perform the 100k Interval Maintenance.
• Remove the front cover of the Assembly (1 screw), and check the copper contact points
at the front of the 2nd BTR Roll, and also below the large front camming spring. These
two contact points provide a ground path through the drawer frame for the 2nd BTR Roll.
If necessary, buff the contact points with an Emery cloth.
• Check the condition of the 2nd BTR Roll, and replace if wear or damage is observed (PL
7.10, item # 8). Refer to REP 7.10.1 as required.
• Replace the Cam Shaft Assembly (PL 7.10, item # 11).
• Apply a small amount of Plastislip Grease (43E550) to both cams on the Cam Shaft
Assembly.
• Replace the Zinc Stearate Bar (655N00080).
NOTE: A worn Zinc Stearate Bar will cause streaks in the process direction, because of
inconsistent stearate coating of the 2nd BTR Roll
• Replace the Cleaning Blade (655N00081).
NOTE: A worn Cleaning Blade will cause streaks in the process direction, because of
inconsistent cleaning of the 2nd BTR Roll.
At 400K Interval:
Replace the 2nd BTR (REP 7.9.1). Reset HFSI Counter 009-809.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-17 GP 18 IOT UI Language Change, GP 20 2nd BTR
GP 18 IOT UI Language Change, GP 20 2nd BTR Ser- 6-18 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS NOTE: A Cord Adapter must be used for 115V machines.
Procedure NOTE: If the Service Outlet is being used by the Convenience Stapler and PWS power
The following procedure describe how to enter the Service Diagnostics Mode with the PWS. must be supplied, unplug the Convenience Stapler and install Cord Adapter between the
machine and the PWS Power Cord.
CAUTION 3. Switch on the PWS.
If the PWS power is supplied from the service outlet of the machine, take the following precau- 4. Make sure the machine is not copying or printing. The machine UI should display Ready
tions: to Copy when there are no pending jobs.
• Do not connect any device to this service outlet except the Convenience Stapler or the 5. Enter the GSNLock Password and select OK.
PWS. Connecting another device to this outlet may cause a fire or result in electrocution. 6. Double-click the Internet Explorer Icon.
• This outlet is designed to be used by service personnel only. After service, place the cover
on the outlet to prevent customer use. NOTE: The PWS Home Screen will display. Functions not available in the service mode
1. Inform the customer that the machine will be undergoing service and will not be available. are displayed in gray.
(Copy jobs and local print jobs will be stopped) 7. Click on the Case Server not running Click here to Start box. Wait for the Case server
2. Connect the Portable Work Station (PWS) to the machine (Figure 1). to load. If necessary, minimize the Case Server Box.
8. On the Internet Explorer menu bar select the Contents Icon.
9. Double-click the Product Tool Folder.
PWS Connector
10. Scroll down and click Docu12 Diagnostics from Product Tools.
11. Select the Docu12 Diagnostics Button.
a. Select Use Local DB from the opening screen.
b. While the machine is connecting to the PWS, the machine UI will display the mes-
sage, Please wait. Then the message will change to CE Remote Maintenance
Mode is working.
c. After the PWS connects to the machine, the message will change to connecting to
the machine completed.
12. When the system starts obtaining the machine data, the system displays that data (at the
time you entered into the Service Mode) on the Service Entry Screen. When the system
has obtained the machine data, it displays Complete at the top left corner of the Service
Entry Screen. Table 1 list the Machine Data displayed at Service Entry
13. If communication is lost between the PWS and the machine, click Reconnect from the
main file menu.
Serial Cable NOTE: The machine cannot exit from the Service Mode while in the PWS Service Diagnostic
Mode.
PWS Power Cord
14. To exit the Diagnostic Mode:
Service Outlet a. Select the Service Exit Tab.
b. Click on the appropriate close-out buttons:
Cord Adapter
• Complete Closeout
• Temporary Closeout
• Exit PWS
Figure 1 Connecting the PWS

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-19 Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the
DC Quick (CODE Number LIST)
Once in the Service Mode, dC Routines can be selected by dC Number or by selecting the
Table 1 Machine Data displayed at Service Entry
appropriate tabs starting at the Service Entry Screen.
Heading Contents Description
Machine Data Product Code Displays a 3-digit code allo- Procedure
cated to each machine to 1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
identify the machine. using the PWS.
Serial Number Displays a 6-digit number (0- 2. Using the DC Quick pull-down menu (upper-right side of Diagnostics Service Entry
9) allocated to each machine Screen), select the desired dC routine.
type to identify the machine. Table 1 is a complete list of dC Routines that are available from the DC Quick pull-down
Total Copies Displays the total number of menu.
copies/prints
Copies Since Last Call Displays the total number of Table 1 dC Routines
copies/prints since the last
dC Number Name Description
CSE visit (complete closeout).
100 Service Entry Screen
Software Version Displays current IOT S/W Ver-
sion 1. Displays the Service Routine
Tabs.
Non-Zero Jams ID, Description, Occurrences Displays the Jams that have
2. Lists Active Faults
occurred since the last com-
plete closeout. 3. Lists the item names of the
HFSIs that exceeded life expect-
HFSI Requiring Replacement ID, Description, Threshold, Displays the component(s)
ancy.
Count. (HFSI) that has exceeded the
life Threshold). 4. Lists the jams that have
occurred since the last Call
Closeout.
Faults in Progress (Current ID, Description, Primary Displays current (active) faults
Faults) in the machine. 5. Displays IOT S/W Version.
110 CRU data Lists current and last 2 Xerographic
CRU data.
118 Jam Counter Displays the following: Number of jam
events since the last Complete Close-
out (performed in Service Exit) to the
current Number of jams.
120 Fail Counters Displays the following: Number of
Fault events after the last Complete
Closeout (performed in Service Exit)
to the current copy count.
122 Shut-down History
1. Displays the history in three cat-
egories: Document Jam, Paper
Jam and Other Fault.
2. Displays the most recent 40
Faults (without categorizing)
129 Automatic Setting: Adjust System The IOT lead registration and side
Registration registration are matched.
131 NVM access: Read/Write NVM You can reference or set/change the
NVM data.

Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS, 6-20 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 dC Routines Table 1 dC Routines
dC Number Name Description dC Number Name Description
132 Set Machine Serial Number. If you have replaced the PWB that 351 NVM Background Processing 1. Saves and restores values of all
Read Billing Meter Information has a Machine Serial Number, check NVM in PWS dC131 databank.
the PWB and set the Machine Serial
NOTE: Background Read must
Number.
complete prior to saving.
Reads Billing Meter Information for
the following: 2. Start and Stop background NVM
• IOT CPU PWB Read.
• Half-Tone PWB 3. Saves/restores machine set-
• IOT NVM PWB tings. Saves NVM values listed:
135 Service Data Displays the regular part replacement 4. Resets all HFSI.
HFSI Counter life expectancy (threshold) and cur- 361 NVM access: Save/Restore NVM Saves the machine NVM data in the
rent value (usage). You can change PWS. Restores the machine NVM
the replacement life expectancy to a data (stored in the PWS) back to the
preset value in the PWS database machine.
and reset the current value.
371 Configuration Page Allows viewing of current software
140 Component Check: Analog Monitor Monitor the analog values of the sen- version and Market Place setting,
sors (A/D conversion) while operating Machine Configuration, Output
the components (e.g., C.C). You can Device(s), Accessories, Tray 1 Paper
temporarily change the output value. Size setting, Feature Config., and
188 Service Mode Exit Screen Displays the requirements for exit Input Device.
from the Service Mode. These settings can be changed to
301 NVM access: NVM initialization Commands NVM Data initialization align with the machine configuration.
for initialization of: 391 Edit Pad Can change the Edit Pad custom
• IISS color(s).
• Post IPS 612 Color Test Pattern Print 1. Outputs a test pattern to identify
• IOT a copy quality problem.
• SYS 2. Generates a test pattern from
• UI the Pattern Generator in the
machine.
305 System Test: Component Operation Checks the UI Screen and Compo-
701 Other Adjust/Set: Fuser Nip Measure- Make a copy for a contact arc adjust-
Check UI Component Check nent Panel Button operation.
ment ment and measure the fuser nip width
330 Component Check: Component Con- Displays the instructions and results
by a simple operation.
trol of the Input Component Check and
740 Tray 5 (Bypass) guide adjustment 1. Re-calibrate Size Sensor
Output Component Check
1. You can monitor each Input 2. Check if the Tray 5 guide size in
Component or check the opera- the width direction has been
tion of each Output Component. properly detected.
2. You can simultaneously check 915 Machine data output: XERO data dis- Displays the machine Xerographic
multiple Input Components and play data in the PWS in a format that is
Output Components up to 11 easy to see and understand.
total. 918 IOT Highlight Setup Uniform the Highlight Density Repro-
duction Starting Point (for each K, Y,
M, C) and the Highlight Density of In/
Out.
919 Color Balance Setup Make a 4C copy in the Photo mode.
(IIT machine only) Adjust the YMCK color balance.

Table 1 dC Routines dC100 Service Entry
dC Number Name Description When entering Diagnostics, this routine allows you to view faults in progress, Non-Zero Jams
920 Developer Unit Check Rotate the Rotary Developer and set and HFSI items requiring replacement. Service entry allows you to view product information,
it at the predetermined position. such as:
922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjust- Measure the grayscale patch by the
• Product Code
ment ADC sensor. Make the LUT for IOT
TRC correction. • Machine Serial Number
923 ProCon PG Print the ProCon PG. • Total Copies
924 TRC Adjustment Manually fine adjust each color (low/ • Copies since Last Call
mid/high density) in PG. • IOT Software Version
933 VH/VM Setup Set VG, VD light amount, Developing Procedure
Bias and ASG Bias output.
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
934 ADC/AGC Setup Execute automatic adjustment of the using the PWS.
ADC Sensor Gain. 2. Check the HFSI Requiring Replacement.
939 TRC Check PG Print the TRC Check PG. 3. Check the Non-Zero Jams. Jams that have occurred since the last service exit with the
945 IIT calibration 1. Calculate and set the white ref- “Complete Closeout” option selected. Check for any Jams that have a high number of
(IIT machine only) erence compensation coeffi- occurrences.
cient.
4. Check the Faults In Progress. If any faults in progress are displayed, troubleshoot
2. Correct the IIT sensitivity varia- accordingly.
tion. 5. Select the Refresh button to have the PWS request and receive the latest information on
Total Copies, Copies Since Last Call, Non-Zero Jams or HFSI Requiring Replacement.

dC100 Service Entry 6-22 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC110 Displaying the CRU-Related Data dC118 Jam Counter
Purpose Purpose
Displays the Xerographic CRU NVM data (current and previous data items) in a format that can Displays the number of occurrences of Jams from time of previous Complete Closeout on ser-
be easily understood for effective operation. vice exit until present.
Procedure The following screen information displays on the Jam Counters Screen:
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode • All Jams
using the PWS. • DADF Jams
2. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen. • Paper Jams
3. Select Other Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen. • Non-Zero Jams
4. Select Display CRU Related Data (dC110).
NOTE: This procedure does not count jams detected while in the Service Mode.
5. The system displays:
a. The Current-CRU Related Data and the Previous-CRU Related Data. Procedure
6. Scroll the lists to review the displayed Current and Previous CRU Related Data. All Jams
7. Select the Refresh button to have the PWS request and receive the latest information on 1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
CRU-Related Data. using the PWS.
2. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen.
3. Select All Jams tab (default).
4. The Diagnostic Screen displays all Fault codes in this category since the last Service Exit
with the Complete Closeout option selected.
DADF Jams
2. Select DADF Jams tab.
3. The Diagnostic Screen displays all DADF Jams that have occurred since the last Service
Exit with the Complete Closeout option selected.
Paper Jam History
using the PWS.
3. Select Paper Jams tab.
4. The Diagnostic Screen displays all Paper Jams that have occurred since the last Service
Exit with the Complete Closeout option selected.
Non-Zero Jams
using the PWS.
3. Select Non-Zero Jams tab.
4. The Diagnostic Screen displays all Jams that have occurred since the last Service Exit
with the Complete Closeout option selected.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-23 dC110 Displaying the CRU-Related Data, dC118
dC120 Fail Counter System Faults
Purpose NOTE: This procedure displays System Faults only.

Displays the Number of occurrences of each fault since the last Service Exit with the Call NOTE: This procedure displays the list in the ascending order of ID number (fault code).
Closeout option selected.
This procedure displays from the time when the machine last exited the Service Mode with using the PWS.
“Complete Closeout” until present. 2. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen.
3. Select Fail Counters dC120 on the Maintenance Screen. The "All Faults" screen is dis-
NOTE: played.
• The machine does not count the faults detected while in the Service Mode. 4. Select the System Faults tab. The default is the ascending order of NVM ID number.
• The machine does not count the “interlock open detected” while the Main Processor is 5. Click on Chain/Link ID Box in the table heading to change the order of the ID number
stopped. from maximum to minimum.
• The data is obtained when opening the screen or entering the Service Mode. 6. Click on Chain/Link ID Box again restores the original order of the ID number from mini-
NOTE: If the previous call was saved and closed on diskettes when dC120 was read, and the mum to maximum.
Diagnostic Mode was entered again with the read from diskettes option selected, the previous Xero Faults
fault history #Occurrence will display in the P1 column. If this same procedure was performed NOTE: This procedure displays System Faults only.
previously, the fault history #Occurrence will display in P2, then P3, up to columns P7.
NOTE: This procedure displays the list in the ascending order of ID number (fault code).
Procedure
All Faults
using the PWS.
NOTE: This procedure displays the list in the ascending order of ID number (fault code). 2. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen.
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode 3. Select Fail Counters dC120 on the Maintenance Screen. The "All Faults" screen is dis-
using the PWS. played.
2. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen. 4. Select the Xero Faults tab. The default is the ascending order of NVM ID number.
3. Select Fail Counters dC120 on the Maintenance Screen. The "All Faults" screen is dis- 5. Click on Chain/Link ID Box in the table heading to change the order of the ID number
played. The default is the ascending order of NVM ID number. from maximum to minimum.
4. Click on Chain/Link ID Box in the table heading to change the order of the ID number 6. Click on Chain/Link ID Box again restores the original order of the ID number from mini-
from maximum to minimum. mum to maximum.
5. Click on Chain/Link ID Box again restores the original order of the ID number from mini-
mum to maximum.
DADF Faults
NOTE: This procedure displays DADF Faults only.
NOTE: This procedure displays the list in the ascending order of ID number (fault code).
using the PWS.
3. Select Fail Counters dC120 on the Maintenance Screen. The "All Faults" screen is dis-
played.
4. Select the DADF Faults tab. The default is the ascending order of NVM ID number.
5. Click on Chain/Link ID Box in the table heading to change the order of the ID number
from maximum to minimum.
6. Click on Chain/Link ID Box again restores the original order of the ID number from mini-
mum to maximum.

dC120 Fail Counter 6-24 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC122 Shutdown History 2. Select Paper Jams in the Shutdown History screen.
a. Based on data read from the machine, the system displays the Paper Jam History.
Purpose
b. The system displays the last 20 Paper Jam Faults that occurred in Customer Mode
1. To display the Last 40 Faults (History) without categorization.
after the data was cleared upon completing the last operation.
2. To categorize the faults (document jams [DADF], paper jams and failures) and displays
Failures
their histories.
NOTE: 1. Select Fail on the Shutdown History Screen. The system displays the fault screen.
1. A fault detected while in Service Mode is not counted. An Interlock Open detected while a. The system displays the Non-paper faults that are included in the Last 40 Faults His-
the machine is being stopped is not counted. tory.
2. If multiple faults occurred in the machine, the primary fault is recorded. (Primary fault: The
first fault occurred.)
3. To clear data select Complete Closeout in the Service Mode Exit screen (dC188). Exit-
ing from the Service Mode clears all data in the Shut-Down History.
Procedure
Last 40 Faults History
using the PWS.
2. Select the Diagnostics Tab.
3. Select Last 40 Faults History in the Shut-down History screen. Last 40 Faults History is
the default screen.
4. The information in the lower right corner of the screen (Input, Original, Paper, Tray, Out-
put) reflects the fault highlighted in the Table.
a. Based on data read from the machine, the system displays the copy count when
each of the last 40 faults occurred.
b. The system displays the Last 40 Faults that occurred in Customer Mode after the
data was cleared upon completing the last Complete Closeout.
Last 40 Faults Occurrences
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using
the PWS
2. Select the Diagnostics Tab. dC122 displays as the default screen.
3. Select Last 40 Fault Occurrences.
a. Based on data read from the machine, the system displays the number of occur-
rences of the last 40 faults.
b. The system displays the last 40 faults that occurred in Customer Mode after the data
was cleared upon completing the last operation.
DADF Jams
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using
the PWS.
2. Select DADF Jams in the Shutdown History Screen.
a. Based on data read from the machine, the system displays the DADF Jams.
b. The system displays the last DADF Jams that occurred in Customer Mode after the
data was cleared upon completing the last operation.
Paper Jams
using the PWS.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-25 dC122 Shutdown History
dC129 System Registration Adjustment dC131 NVM Read/Write
Purpose Purpose
Performs the Lead Registration and Side Registration Adjustments by looking at the output of Reads, sets or changes the NVM data.
the built-in Test Pattern for adjustment.
NOTE: You can access all NVMs including the NVM for a key operator. The billing forgery pre-
NOTE: For details on the dC129 System Registration adjustment, see ADJ 9.1.10: IOT Side/ vention function and the auditron administration password cannot be overwritten.
Lead Edge Registration (dC129: System Registration Adjustment).
Procedure
Procedure Module Selection
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode 1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
using the PWS. using the PWS.
2. Select the Adjustments Tab on the Service Entry Screen. 2. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen.
3. Select Other Adjustments Tab on the Adjustment/Setup Screen. The System Registra- 3. The system displays one of the Read/Write Screens. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the
tion Adjustment Screen is displayed. default screen.
4. Specify the Tray at the Tray/Size pull-down and the number of copies at the Print Count 4. Select a Sub-System from the Vertical Left Tab List. The default tab is ‘All’.
Window.
NOTE: Tray1 is the default Tray and cannot be changed to another Tray from the PWS. Table 1 Module Selection
Module item Chain number allocation
NOTE: Number of copies can be set between 1-99.
All 700 - 999
NOTE: Selecting Print All will print a test pattern from each tray.
UI/Tools 700,702
5. Select Print All. The message, executing System Registration Setup (dc129) is dis- IISS 715
played. Config 719
6. The specified number of built-in patterns is output and the message, “Completed” is dis- ROS 720
played in the status area. IPS 730
a. The message screen informing that the Main Processor is, “abnormal” will be dis- PHM 740, 749, 760, 761
played if Test Copy of the built-in pattern cannot be executed.
System 752, 759
7. Add/Subtract the Registration Adjustment Value by looking at the copy. Using the arrows
Xero 771, 774
for the “Lead Reg” and “Side Reg”, adjust the Lead and Side Registrations:
Drives / Output 772, 780, 790
a. Lead Reg. 1step (click) =.1100mm. Maximum steps (clicks) = 100
ProCon 773
b. Side Reg. 1step (click) = 0.0423mm. Maximum steps (clicks) = 300
Developer 776
8. Select Set Adjust Value after confirming the Registration Adjustment Value.
Fuser 777
a. “Current NVM Value” of the Lead Registration/Side Registration are renewed when
this, “Set Adjust Value” and “Save (LR)” is selected. Restore (LR) and Restore (SR) Other 775, 800, 850
buttons will restore the “Current NVM Value” to the initial value. Errors (number of errors) Displays and NVM outside of the ranges listed
b. “NVM Value at Save” is displayed. This display will be changed when Save (LR) or in the PWS database.
Save (SR) is selected again. Changed (number pending change) Displays any with new value entered in the
c. Save (LR), Save (SR) will save “LR” or “SR” NVM in “NVM Value at Save”. "New" column, but not written yet.
9. The message, “In Progress” is displayed.
a. When the machine cannot change the NVM value, the message, “! Unable to set up Reading NVM
adjustment value. Cancel Adjustment Value Setup” is displayed on the Information 1. Select an ID from the Sub-System Table, then click Read NVM or double click on the line
screen. ID (line) and the value will be read in the value column. The "Range Check" column will fill
10. Verify the adjustment by printing another pattern. in.
11. If the pattern does not meet Image Quality requirements, repeat steps 8-11 of this adjust-
ment procedure.

dC129 System Registration Adjustment, dC131 NVM 6-26 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
NOTE: Values that are out of range will cause the Error Tab to turn “Red”. dC131 UI/Tools (700)
NOTE: While a value is highlighted, you can write an NVM value in it.
Table 1 UI/Tools (700)
Writing NVM
Chain-
1. To write a new value, first enter a new value in the "New" column
Link Name Default Range Description
2. Select Write NVM.
700-091 Customer Paper Size FS 200 0-297 Free Paper Size Registration (FS)
a. If the input value is valid (within the range), the system writes the new NVM value in
the NVM code in the machine. 700-092 Customer Paper Size SS 300 0-432 Free Paper Size Registration (SS)
b. If the input value is invalid, the system displays the following message in the informa- 700-093 Equal Magnification - 20 0-40 98-102%. In 0.1% increments.
Fine Adjustment (FS) The equation is (98+(set value x
tion screen, “The given NVM value is out of range. NVM was not changed”.
0.1)). Default of 20 = 100%
c. If the NVM cannot be changed (Write protected NVM), the system displays the fol-
From IOT S/W 6.00.2, can be set in
lowing message, “! The specified NVM is read only”.
tools mode
d. When the system writes the new value in the specified NVM code, the value is 700-094 Equal Magnification - 0 0-40 98-102%. In 0.1% increments.
updated in the “New Box” and reduces the count in the “Changed Tab”.
Fine Adjustment (FS) The equation is (98+(set value x
NOTE: When a value is written in the vertical “Changed Tab”, the tab will turn green. 0.1)). Default of 20 = 100%
The number in “parenthesis“() will count the number of pending NVM values. Click- 700-096 PA Entry Key - Coin Kit 0 0-1 To enable or disable PA Entry Key
ing the tab once will show a list of all the changed values. If a new value is input but Display (for Coin Kit)
not yet written, the changed value is captured in the “Changed” Vertical Left Tab List. 0= OFF
1= ON
700-097 ACS Platen Start Check 0 0-1 0= Check on
1= Check off
700-098 Tray 5 Paper Size 1 0-5 0= Heavyweight Paper/Tracking
film.
1= Heavyweight Paper, duplex (MN
default.
2= Labels.
3= Label/tracing paper.
4= Duplex middle weight.
5= Label/Duplex heavy weight
paper.
700-099 UI Post Flag 1 0-1 UI Flag - enables features such as

Posters, Cover Sheets, HCF
0= Poster Flag Off
1= Poster Flag On
700-100 Lighter - Darker Default 3 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
copying see-thru image)
700-101 Hue Control Default 3 0-5 1= 20
2= 10
3= 0
4= 10
5= 20
700-102 Chroma Control Default 0 0-5
700-103 Sharpness Default 0 0-5
700-104 Color Balance Default (Y 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
High) copying see thru image)
Middle) copying see-thru image)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-27 dC131 NVM Read/Write, dC131 UI/Tools (700)
Table 1 UI/Tools (700) Table 1 UI/Tools (700)
Chain- Chain-
Link Name Default Range Description Link Name Default Range Description
700-106 Color Balance Default (Y 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-127 Color Balance Default (C 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
Low) copying see thru image) Middle) copying see thru image)
700-107 Color Balance Default (M 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-128 Color Balance Default (C 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
High) copying see thru image) Low) copying see thru image)
700-108 Color Balance Default (M 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-129 Color Balance Default (K 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
Middle) copying see thru image) High) copying see thru image)
700-110 Color Balance Default (C 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-131 Color Balance Default (K 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-111 Color Balance Default (C 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-132 Lighter - Darker 0 0-5 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
Middle) copying see thru image) copying see-thru image)
700-112 Color Balance Default (C 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-133 Hue Control Default 0 0-5 1= 20
Low) copying see thru image) 2= 10
700-113 Color Balance Default (K 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 3= 0
High) copying see thru image) 4= 10
5= 20
700-114 Color Balance Default (K 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
Middle) copying see thru image) 700-134 Chroma Control Default 0 0-5
700-115 Color Balance Default (K 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-135 Sharpness Default 0 0-7
Low) copying see thru image) 700-136 Color Balance Default (Y 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-116 Lighter - Darker Default 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents High) copying see thru image)
copying see-thru image) 700-137 Color Balance Default (Y 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-117 Hue Control Default 0 0-5 1= 20 Middle) copying see thru image)
2= 10 700-138 Color Balance Default (Y 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
3= 0 Low) copying see thru image)
4= 10 700-139 Color Balance Default (M 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
5= 20 High) copying see thru image)
700-118 Chroma Control Default 0 0-5 700-140 Color Balance Default (M 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-119 Sharpness Default 0 0-5 Middle) copying see thru image)
700-120 Color Balance Default (Y 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-141 Color Balance Default (M 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-123 Color Balance Default (M 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-144 Color Balance Default (C 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-126 Color Balance Default (C 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-147 Color Balance Default (K 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents

dC131 UI/Tools (700) 6-28 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 UI/Tools (700) Table 1 UI/Tools (700)
Chain- Chain-
700-148 Lighter - Darker Default 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-169 Color Balance Default (Y 1 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
copying see-thru image) Middle) copying see thru image)
700-149 Hue Control Default 0 0-5 1= 20 700-170 Color Balance Default (Y 4 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
2= 10 Low) copying see thru image)
4= 10 High) copying see thru image)
700-150 Chroma Control Default 0 0-5 Middle) copying see thru image)
700-151 Sharpness Default 0 0-5 700-173 Color Balance Default (M 4 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-152 Color Balance Default (Y 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents Low) copying see thru image)
High) copying see thru image) 700-174 Color Balance Default (C 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-153 Color Balance Default (Y 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents High) copying see thru image)
Middle) copying see thru image) 700-175 Color Balance Default (C 1 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-154 Color Balance Default (Y 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents Middle) copying see thru image)
Low) copying see thru image) 700-176 Color Balance Default (C 4 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-155 Color Balance Default (M 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents Low) copying see thru image)
High) copying see thru image) 700-177 Color Balance Default (K 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-156 Color Balance Default (M 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents High) copying see thru image)
Middle) copying see thru image) 700-178 Color Balance Default (K 1 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-157 Color Balance Default (M 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents Middle) copying see thru image)
Low) copying see thru image) 700-179 Color Balance Default (K 4 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
700-158 Color Balance Default (C 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents Low) copying see thru image)
High) copying see thru image) 700-180 Edit Clear Sure 0 0-1 Sure Screen with all Edit settings
700-159 Color Balance Default (C 1 0-7 Color Balance Setup (To stress cleared= ON/OFF
Middle) Bluish tone) 0= OFF
700-160 Color Balance Default (C 1 0-7 Color Balance Setup (To stress 1=ON
Low) Bluish tone) 700-181 Enhance Edit Number 0 0-1 Edit No. Extension Switching (4/8)
700-161 Color Balance Default (K 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 0= 4
High) copying see thru image) 1= 8
700-162 Color Balance Default (K 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 700-182 Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper 1 0-65535 0= None
Middle) copying see thru image) Type 1= Plain Paper
700-163 Color Balance Default (K 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents 2= Transparencies
4= Labels
Low) copying see thru image)
5= Tack Paper
700-164 Lighter - Darker Default 0 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents
6= Translucent Paper
copying see thru image)
7= Heavyweight Paper (1)
700-165 Hue Control Default 0 0-5 1= 20 8= Super Heavyweight Paper (2)
2= 10 9= Tracing Paper
3= 0 10= Postcards
4= 10 0 0-65535 0= Standard Setting
700-183 Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper
5= 20
Size Type 1= Manual Setting
700-166 Chroma Control Default 0 0-5
700-184 Tray 5 (Bypass) Standard 255 0-65535 255= Undefined
700-167 Sharpness Default 0 0-5 Size Code
High) copying see thru image)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-29 dC131 UI/Tools (700)
Table 1 UI/Tools (700) dC131 UI NVM List (702)
Chain-
Link Name Default Range Description Table 1 UI NVM List (702)
700-185 Tray 5 (Bypass) Fast 0 0-65535 Only valid with Tray 5 manual set- Chain-
Scan Size ting selected. Range is 148 to 297. Link Name Default Range Description
Added with V7.3.3 IOT Software
702-056 R/E Presets 7 [0.500]: 25-400: Fixed magnification 7 (every 1%).
700-186 Tray 5 (Bypass) Slow 0 0-65535 Only valid with Tray 5 manual set- (Upper) [0.250]: (every 1%)
Scan Size ting selected. Range is 182 to 432. 702-180 Key Operator Tools [31h][31h] 0-65535 Password setting - see General Pro-
Added with V7.3.3 IOT Software
Password1/6 cedures
702-181 Key Operator Tools [31h][31h] 0-65535 Password setting - see General Pro-
Password2/6 cedures
Password3/6 cedures
Password4/6 cedures
Password5/6 cedures
Password6/6 cedures
702-186 CSE Tools [31h][31h] 0-65535 Password setting - see General Pro-
Password1/6 cedures
702-187 CSE Tools Password [31h][31h] 0-65535 CSE Tools password 2 of 6

2/6
3/6
4/6
5/6
6/6
702-200 Color Palette 1 (Y) 100 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-201 Color Palette1 (M) 100 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-202 Color Palette1 (C) 100 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-204 Color Palette 2 (M) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-205 Color Palette 2 (C) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-207 Color Palette 3 (M) 64 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color

dC131 UI/Tools (700), dC131 UI NVM List (702) 6-30 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 UI NVM List (702) Table 1 UI NVM List (702)
Chain- Chain-
702-208 Color Palette 3 (C) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-248 Color Palette17(Y) 17 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-209 Color Palette 4 (Y) 20 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-249 Color Palette17(M) 50 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-210 Color Palette 4 (M) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-250 Color Palette17 (C) 41 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-211 Color Palette 4 (C) 17 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-251 Color Palette18 (Y) 39 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-212 Color Palette 5 (Y) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-252 Color Palette18 (M) 19 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-213 Color Palette 5 (M) 17 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-253 Color Palette18(C) 12 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-214 Color Palette 5 (C) 43 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-254 Color Palette19 (Y) 28 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-215 Color Palette 6 (Y) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-255 Color Palette19(M) 22 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-216 Color Palette 6 (M) 31 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-256 Color Palette19(C) 46 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-217 Color Palette 6 (C) 41 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-257 Color Palette 20(Y) 20 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-218 Color Palette 7 (Y) 45 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-258 Color Palette 20 (M) 26 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-219 Color Palette 7 (M) 6 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-259 Color Palette 20 (C) 60 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-223 Color Palette 8 (C) 44 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-263 Color Palette 22 (Y) 21 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-230 Color Palette 11(Y) 29 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-270 Color Palette 24 (M) 10 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-232 Color Palette 11(C) 4 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-272 Color Palette 25 (Y) 28 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-233 Color Palette 12(Y) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-273 Color Palette 25 (M) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-234 Color Palette12(M) 33 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-274 Color Palette 25 (C) 52 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-235 Color Palette12(C) 43 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-275 Color Palette 26(Y) 63 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-236 Color Palette13(Y) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-276 Color Palette 26 (M) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-237 Color Palette13(M) 48 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-277 Color Palette26 40 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-238 Color Palette13(C) 30 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-278 Color Palette 27(Y) 71 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-239 Color Palette14 (Y) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-279 Color Palette 27 (M) 37 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color
702-240 Color Palette14(M) 45 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-280 Color Palette 27 (M) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-241 Color Palette14(C) 48 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-281 Color Palette 28(Y) 100 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-242 Color Palette15(Y) 18 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-282 Color Palette 28 (M) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-243 Color Palette15(M) 52 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-283 Color Palette 28 (C) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-244 Color Palette15(C) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-284 Color Palette 29 (Y) 62 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-245 Color Palette16(Y) 21 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-285 Color Palette 29 (M) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-246 Color Palette16(M) 11 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-286 Color Palette 29 (C) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-247 Color Palette16(C) 8 0-100(%) Edit Pad CE registered color 702-287 Color Palette 30 (Y) 33 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-31 dC131 UI NVM List (702)
Chain- Chain-
702-288 Color Palette 30 (M) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color 702-328 Color Palette 43 (C) 75 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-289 Color Palette 30 (C) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color 702-329 Color Palette 44 (Y) 50 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-290 Color Palette 31 (Y) 100 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color 702-330 Color Palette 44 (M) 1 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-292 Color Palette 31 (C) 2 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color 702-332 Color Palette 45 (Y) 30 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-293 Color Palette 32(Y) 60 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color 702-333 Color Palette 45 (M) 0 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-295 Color Palette 32 (C) 4 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-296 Color Palette 33 (Y) 33 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color
702-297 Color Palette 33 (M) 15 0-100(%) Edit Pad User registered color

dC131 UI NVM List (702) 6-32 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC131 UI NVM List (800) dC131 UI NVM List (850)
Chain- Chain-
800-001 ESS IP Address - 0-255: 1Byte CP 850-001 Auditron Admin. [31h][31h] 0-65535 Password setting - see General Pro-
(Upper) +0-255: 1Byte Password1/6 cedures
800-002 ESS IP Address - 0-255: 1Byte CP
(Lower) +0-255: 1Byte 850-002 Auditron Admin. [31h][31h] 0-65535 Password setting - see General Pro-
800-003 ESS Sub-Net Address - 0-255: 1Byte CP Password2/6 cedures
(Upper) +0-255: 1Byte 850-003 Auditron Admin. [31h][20h] 0-65535 Password setting - see General Pro-
800-004 ESS Sub-Net Address - 0-255: 1Byte CP Password3/6 cedures
(Lower) +0-255: 1Byte 850-004 Auditron Admin. [20h][20h] 0-65535 Password setting - see General Pro-
800-005 ESS Gateway Address - 0-255: 1Byte CP Password4/6 cedures
(Upper) +0-255: 1Byte 850-005 Auditron Admin. [20h][20h] 0-65535 Password setting - see General Pro-
800-006 ESS Gateway Address - 0-255: 1Byte CP Password5/6 cedures
(Lower) +0-255: 1Byte 0=[802.2]
1=[802.3] 850-006 Auditron Admin. [20h][20h] 0-65535 Password setting - see General Pro-
2=[Ethernet Password6/6 cedures
II]
3=[802.5] 850-008 Auditron User - 0-65535 Password setting - see General Pro-
100Password cedures
800-007 ESS Frame Type 2 0-3 CP
0=[802.2] NOTE: User Account 101 or later:
1=[802.3] Chain Link number search method
2=[Ethernet Assume the Password 1/6 Link Num-
II] ber of the Auditron User Account X
3=[802.5] (100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be
obtained as follows:
800-008 ESS Source Routing 1 0-1 CP
0=[Yes] 1=[No] 1. Y=16(X-100)+8
(Link number: Lower 3 digits of
Y) Number with 4 digits or
more: Carried over to the Chain
number.
Ex:)
1. Password 1/6 Chain-Link num-
ber of the Auditron User
Account 2099:
Y=31992
Chain number =850 (Fixed) +
31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881
Link number =992 (Lower 3 dig-
its of Y): Chain-Link number
=881-992

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-33 dC131 UI NVM List (800), dC131 UI NVM List (850)
Chain- Chain-
850-009 Auditron User - 0-65535 3rd and 4th digit of the password - 850-010 Auditron User - 0-65535 5th and 6th digit of the password -
100Password see General Procedures 100Password see General Procedures
NOTE: User Account 101 or later: NOTE: User Account 101 or later:
Chain Link number search method Chain Link number search method
Assume the Password 2/6 Link Num- Assume the Password 3/6 Link Num-
ber of the Auditron User Account X ber of the Auditron User Account X
(100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be (100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be
obtained as follows: obtained as follows:
1. Y=16(X-100)+9 1. Y=16(X-100)+10
(Link number: Lower 3 digits of (Link number: Lower 3 digits of
Y) Number with 4 digits or Y) Number with 4 digits or
more: Carried over to the Chain more: Carried over to the Chain
number number
Ex) Ex)
1. Password 2/6 Chain-Link num- 1. Password 3/6 Chain-Link num-
ber of the Auditron User ber of the Auditron User
Account 2099: Account 2099:
Y=31993 Y=31994
Chain number =850 (Fixed) + Chain number =850 (Fixed) +
31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881
Link number =993 (Lower 3 dig- Link number =994 (Lower 3 dig-
its of Y): Chain-Link number its of Y): Chain-Link number
=881-993 =881-994

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
850-011 Auditron User - 0-65535 7th and 8th digit of the password - 850-012 Auditron User - 0-65535 9th and 10th digit of the password -
100Password see General Procedures 100Password see General Procedures
Assume the Password 4/6 Link Num- Assume the Password 5/6 Link Num-
ber of the Auditron User Account X ber of the Auditron User Account X
(100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be (100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be
obtained as follows: obtained as follows:
1. Y=16(X-100)+11 1. Y=16(X-100)+12
number number.
Ex) Ex)
1. Password 4/6 Chain-Link num- 1. Password 5/6 Chain-Link num-
ber of the Auditron User ber of the Auditron User
Y=31995 Y=31996
=881-995 =881-996

Chain- Chain-
850-013 Auditron User - 0-65535 11th and 12th digit of the password - 850-014 Auditron User 100: - 0-65535 2Bytes: Color mode for every 100
100Password see General Procedures Copy Count Limit pages. Default: Total pages of C/
L+B/W
NOTE: User Account 101 or later:
Chain Link number search method NOTE: User Account 101 or later:
Chain Link number search method
Assume the Password 6/6 Link Num-
Assume the Link number of the copy
ber of the Auditron User Account X
count limit in the Auditron User
(100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be
Account X (100<X<=2099), then Y
obtained as follows:
can be obtained as follows:
1. Y=16(X-100)+13
1. Y=16(X-100)+14
Y) Number with 4 digits or (Link number: Lower 3 digits of
more: Carried over to the Chain Y) Number with 4 digits or
number. more: Carried over to the Chain
number.
Ex)
1. Password 6/6 Chain-Link num- Ex)
ber of the Auditron User 1. Chain-Link number of the copy
Account 2099: count limit in the Auditron User
Y=31997 Account 2099:
Chain number =850 (Fixed) + Y=31998
31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Chain number =850 (Fixed) +
Link number =997 (Lower 3 dig- 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881
its of Y): Chain-Link number Link number =998 (Lower 3 dig-
=881-997 its of Y): Chain-Link number
=881-998

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
850-015 Auditron User 100: - 0= [No NOTE: User Account 101 or later: 850-017 - 0- 4Byte
Color Mode Limit limit] Chain Link Number search method Auditron User: 9999999:
1= [C/L Assume the Link number of the color 100B/W copy count Upper 2
Chain Link number search method
only] mode copy count limit in the Auditron Limit L bytes
2= [B/W Assume the Link number of the color
User Account X (100<X<=2099),
only] mode copy count limit in the Auditron
then Y can be obtained as follows:
1. Y=16(X-100)+15
(Link Number: Lower 3 digits of
1. Y=16(X-100)+17
more: Carried over to the Chain (Link number: Lower 3 digits of
Number. Y) Number with 4 digits or
Ex) number.
1. Chain-Link Number of the color
Ex)
mode copy count limit in the
1. Chain-Link number of B/W copy
Auditron User Account 2099:
counts in the Auditron User
Y=31999
Account 2099:
Chain Number =850 (Fixed) +
Y=32001
Link Number =999 (Lower 3
digits of Y): Chain-Link Number
=881-999
850-016 Auditron User: - 0- 4Byte
=882-001
100B/W copy count 9999999:
Limit H Upper 2
bytes Chain Link number search method
Assume the Link number of the color
mode copy count limit in the Auditron
1. Y=16(X-100)+16
number.
Ex)
1. Chain-Link number of B/W copy
counts in the Auditron User
Account 2099:
Y=32000
=882-000

Chain- Chain-
850-018 Auditron User: - 0- 4Byte 850-019 Auditron User: - 0- 4Byte
100C/L copy count 9999999: 100C/L copy count 9999999:
Limit H Upper 2 Limit L Upper 2
bytes bytes
Assume the Link number of the color Assume the Link number of the color
1. Y=16(X-100)+18 1. Y=16(X-100)+19
number. number.
Ex) Ex)
1. Chain-Link number of B/W copy 1. Chain-Link number of B/W copy
counts in the Auditron User counts in the Auditron User
Y=32002 Y=32003
=882-002 =882-003
850-020 Auditron User: 100 - - 0-9999999: Upper 2 bytes - Only
B/W Large copy 4Byte ESG (TBD)
count
Limit H
850-021 Auditron User: 100 - - 0-9999999: lower 2bytes - Only
(Lower) B/W Large 4Byte ESG (TBD)
copy count
Limit L
850-022 Auditron User: 100 - - 0-9999999: Upper 2 bytes - Only
(Upper) C/L Large 4Byte ESG (TBD)
copy count
Limit H
850-023 Auditron User: 100 - - 0-9999999: Lower 2 bytes - Only
(Lower) C/L Large 4Byte ESG (TBD)
copy count
Limit L

manuals4you.com
dC131 DADF NVM List (710) Table 1 DADF NVM List (710)
Chain-
Table 1 DADF NVM List (710) Link Name Default Range Description
Chain- 710-044 Feed Count 0 0-65535 Write protected: Accumulated
Link Name Default Range Description value of DADF Feeds after reset
710-001 DADF Fail Bypass 0 0-1 Fault bypass= 1, No Fault
bypass= 0 (Used in DADF)
710-002 DADF Jam bypass 0 0-1 Jam bypass= 1, No Jam bypass=
0 (Used in DADF)
710-004 Document Lead Registra- 59 1-255 Adjustment value for document
tion Timer value in the registration (number of pulses
DADF Simplex Mode from Registration Sensor OFF to
Belt Motor Slow Down) (Used in
DADF)
710-005 DADF Feed Motor OFF 10 4-16 Time period from Registration
adjustment value SNR ON to Feed Motor OFF
(5ms step, Default= 50ms) (Used
in DADF)
710-006 DADF B4 document size 373 360-460 Threshold to determine the B4S
threshold or 11 X 17S in the RX mode.
(Used in DADF)
710-007 Document Lead Registra- 59 0-100 Number of pulses from Registra-
tion Timer value in the tion Sensor OFF to Belt Motor
DADF Duplex Mode (S: 8.5 Slow Down
X 11LEF or smaller)
DADF Duplex Mode (M: Slow Down
A4SEF or smaller)
DADF Duplex Mode (L: 8.5 Slow Down
X 13LEF or larger)
710-010 Belt Motor Stop Timer value 280 200-400 Time period from Duplex Sensor
in DADF Duplex Mode ON to Belt Motor OFF (Number of
(Loop in reverse) (S: 8.5 X pulses until Belt Motor Slow
11LEF or smaller) Down)
(Loop in reverse) (M: pulses until Belt Motor Slow
A4SEF or smaller) Down)
(Loop in reverse) (L: 8.5 X pulses until Belt Motor Slow
13LEF or larger) Down)
710-043 Total Feed Count 0 0-65535 Write protected: Number of total
DADF Feeds

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-39 dC131 DADF NVM List (710)
dC131 IIT NVM List (715, 719) Table 1 IIT NVM List (715, 719)
Chain-
Table 1 IIT NVM List (715, 719) Link Name Default Range Description
Chain- 715-119 CCD Calibration PK 0 0-1023 CCD Calibration: PK patch read
Link Name Default Range Description read: Red - Red (Reflection rate LSB)
715-012 BW/Color automatic rec- 2 0-4 Level 0 (B/W) - Level 4 (Color) 715-120 CCD Calibration PK 0 0-1023 CCD Calibration: PK patch read
ognition level adjust- read: Green - Green (Reflection rate LSB)
ment 715-121 CCD Calibration PK 0 0-1023 CCD Calibration: PK patch read
715-023 PMadjF 50 0-100 Main scanning direction: Magni- read: Blue - Blue (Reflection rate LSB)
fication correction value (Digital 715-123 Side Registration Shift (- 0 0-256 Minus direction offset (Dot/step)
correction by ASCI: Low ACS/TI ) for Side Registration adjustment/
separation) check
715-028 DADF FS offset 32 0-100 Side Registration Offset when 715-124 A6 document/Postcard 0 0-1 0= A6 document, 1= Postcard
DADF is used (0.6mm/step) check
Side Registration correction 715-125 Platen/ADF 0 0-1 0= Platen 1= ADF
value (Dot/setp) 715-126 A4S/Letter document 3 0-6 A4S/Letter document size
715-029 PRadjF 50 0-100 Main scanning direction - REJI size detection threshold
correction value (Dot) Default 3=213mm (Data 1=
715-062 AOCerr 0 0-255 Number of abnormal AOC flow 2mm change)
terminations 0 (Letter) - 6(A4S)
715-091 Pshad(1) 150 115-255 Red W-Ref correction factor 715-132 Sub-scanning direction: 50 20-75 Sub-scanning direction: Lead
715-092 Pshad(2) 160 115-255 Green W-Ref correction factor Registration correction Registration correction
715-093 Pshad(3) 167 115-255 Blue W-Ref correction factor (0.076mm/step)
715-103 SB SCAN 220 0-255 b* Correction standard value 715-133 Sub-scanning direction: 50 44-56 Scan magnification correction
(Upper 8 bits in the 10 bits) Magnification correction (0.1%/step)
715-106 HOSEI SCAN 3 0-6 Correction factor number 715-136 IIT Fault bypass 0 0-1 Fault bypass= 1, No fault
bypass=0
715-107 MB SCAN 0 0-511 Patch b* Measure value (9 bits
including overflow) 715-137 PreIPS fault bypass 0 0-1 Fault bypass= 1, No fault
715-110 CCD Calibration Y read: 0 0-1023 CCD Calibration: Y patch read - bypass=0
Red Red (Reflection rate LSB) 715-165 DSWTh 780 0-1023 Platen half-open: White docu-
715-111 CCD Calibration Y read: 0 0-1023 CCD Calibration: Y patch read - ment detection threshold
0= White 1023= Black
Green Green (Reflection rate LSB)
715-166 DSLTh 140 0-1023 Main scanning direction: Ladder
715-112 CCD Calibration Y read: 0 0-1023 CCD Calibration: Y patch read -
Blue Blue (Reflection rate LSB) document detection threshold
Data: B/W change (Ladder edge
715-113 CCD Calibration M read: 0 0-1023 CCD Calibration: M patch read -
change)
Red Red (Reflection rate LSB)
715-167 DSLNum 3 0-255 Main scanning direction - Num-
715-114 CCD Calibration M read: 0 0-1023 CCD Calibration: M patch read -
ber of ladder detection threshold
Number of changes obtained in
715-115 CCD Calibration M read: 0 0-1023 CCD Calibration: M patch read - 715-166 3 =< Document, <3= No
Blue Blue (Reflection rate LSB) document
715-116 CCD Calibration C read: 0 0-1023 CCD Calibration: C patch read -
Red Red (Reflection rate LSB)
Blue Blue (Reflection rate LSB)

dC131 IIT NVM List (715, 719) 6-40 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 IIT NVM List (715, 719) dC131 ROS NVM List (720)
Chain-
Link Name Default Range Description Table 1 ROS NVM List (720)
715-168 DSMMLimit 100 1-1023 Document detection contrast Chain-
allowance Link Name Default Range Description
Document detection final check.
720-001 PS OFFSET 1 525 1-16383 Number of lines (Unit= 2 lines) from
The document is detected by
[0.0846- TR0 to the image write start position
checking the difference between
1387.094 (sub-scanning direction) [change per 1
the maximum and minimum mm] step= about 0.0846mm] A side lead
between 97mm - 294mm. Differ- registration adjustment
ence =<100= Document, <100=
[525=44.45mm]
No document
720-002 PS OFFSET 2 413 1-16383 Number of lines (Unit= 2 lines) from
715-171 DSBTh 700 0-1023 Platen closed: Black document
[0.0846- TR0 to the image write start position
detection threshold
1387.094 (sub-scanning direction) [change per 1
0= White, 1023= Black
mm] step= about 0.0846mm] B side lead
719-005 IISS Major Version 0 0-65535 IISS SW Major Version number registration adjustment
(Write protected) [413=34.967mm]
719-006 IISS Minor Version 0 0-65535 IISS SW Minor Version number 720-003 LS OFFSET T1 7406 7106- Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from
(Write protected) 7706 Paper Registration to the image (main
719-007 IISS Revision Version 0 0-65535 IISS SW Revision Version num- scanning direction) [change per 1
ber (Write protected) step= about 0.0423mm] Tray 1 side
719-008 IISS Patch Version 0 0 - 65535 IISS SW Patch Version number lead registration adjustment
(Write protected) [7406=311.05mm]
719-010 ADF Major Version 0 0-65535 ADF SW Major Version number 720-004 LS OFFSET T2 7406 7106- Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from
(Write protected) 7706 Paper Registration to the image (main
719-011 ADF Minor Version 0 0-65535 ADF SW Minor Version number scanning direction) [change per 1
(Write protected) step= about 0.0423mm] Tray 2 side
lead registration adjustment
719-012 ADF Revision Version 0 0-65535 ADF SW Revision Version num-
720-005 LS OFFSET T3 7406 7106- Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from
ber (Write protected)
7706 Paper Registration to the image (main
719-013 ADF Patch Version 0 0-65535 ADF SW Patch Version number
scanning direction) [change per 1
(Write protected)
step= about 0.0423mm] Tray 3 side
720-006 LS OFFSET T4 7406 7106- Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from
step= about 0.0423mm] Tray 4 side
720-007 LS OFFSET S 7406 7106- Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from
step= about 0.0423mm] SMH (Tray 5)
side lead registration adjustment
720-008 LS OFFSET D 7406 7106- Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from
step= about 0.0423mm] Duplex (Side
2) side lead registration adjustment

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-41 dC131 IIT NVM List (715, 719), dC131 ROS NVM List
Table 1 ROS NVM List (720) Table 1 ROS NVM List (720)
Chain- Chain-
720-018 ERASE LE 35 0-255 [0- Top edge erase (Unit= 2 lines) 720-794 PRPS_DELAY 0 0-65535 Use value of 62 for EPC
21.59mm [35=2.96mm] [Change per step=
] About 0.0846mm]
720-019 ERASE TE 35 0-255 [0- Bottom edge erase (Unit= 2 lines)
] About 0.0846mm]
720-020 ERASE SIDE 70 0-255 [0- Side edge erase (Unit= 1 dot)
] About 0.0423mm]
720-036 ROS FAIL BYPASS 0 0-1 ROS module fault bypass
0= Bypass 1= No bypass
720-155 MOT TIME OUT 600 0-65535 ROS MOT time out= Unit= 100msec/
step Default= 1 minute
720-170 AUTO HALF LIMIT 0 0-65535 Automatic gray-scale correction -
Range
0= Copy/Printer
1= Copy
2= None
720-181 ERASE SIDE 12C 0 0-65535 Side edge erase= 12 X 18 paper Copy
Mode (Unit= dot)
720-182 ERASE SIDE 12P 271 0-65535 Side edge erase= 12 X 18 paper Print
Mode (Unit= dot)
720-185 ERASE LE 18 112 0-65535 Top edge erase= 18-inch paper (Unit:
SCAN) Erase LE 18 Top edge erase:
18-inch paper (Unit SCAN)
720-200 DEBUG (ASIC RW 0 0-65535 ASIC R/W CHECK ERROR: ERR
ERR CODE) component details
0= Normal
1=PGD ASIC ERR
2=TIGER ASIC ERR
3=LAPD ASIC ERR
4=DIANA ASIC ERR
5=TIE ASIC ERR
6=PICUP ASIC ERR
720-269 SCRN300 180 ST 0 0-65535 300-line screen operation
0= 0 degree
1= 180 degrees
720-360 Max image area 0 0-1 0 = normal
adjust - FS direction 1=enable increased image area (valid
w/ TAG P39 S/W for DC12 w/DFE only)
720-361 Max image area 0 0-1 0 = normal

adjust - SS direction 1=enable increased image area (valid
w/ TAG P39 S/W for DC12 w/DFE only)

dC131 ROS NVM List (720) 6-42 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC131 IPS NVM List (730) Table 1 VM List (&30)
Chain-
Table 1 VM List (&30) Link Name Default Range Description
Chain- 730-050 Y-Regi 50 0-100 Editor main scanning direction: Ori-
Link Name Default Range Description gin position (1=0.5mm)
730-001 TIS PARAMETER 2 0-4 TIS parameter 730-051 X-Mag 50 0-100 Editor sub-scanning direction:
Coordinate magnification correc-
730-002 MUC ADJ 0 0-8 MUL ADJ in Normal Paper Mode
tion (1=0.1%)
730-003 MUL ADJ for OHP 0 0-8 MUL ADJ in OHP Mode
730-052 Sharpness Level 2 0-4 L/L (Enhanced black) Sharpness
730-004 MUL M.Rate for Y-Y 128 0-255 Y Mono Color ratio: Y
level adjustment value
730-005 MUL M.Rate for M-Y 0 0-255 Y Mono Color ratio: M
730-097 Photo Mode AE ON/OFF 0 0,1 0= Document type=AE OFF in
730-006 MUL M.Rate for C-Y 0 0-255 Y Mono Color ratio: C photo
730-007 MUL M.Rate for Y-M 0 0-255 M Mono Color ratio: Y 1= Document type=AE ON in photo
730-008 MUL M.Rate for M-M 128 0-255 M Mono Color ratio: M 730-098 Color Output Copy 0 0,1 0= Photo paper
730-009 MUL M.Rate for C-M 0 0-255 M Mono Color ratio: C 1= Photo paper using the G func-
730-010 MUL M.Rate for Y-C 0 0-255 C Mono Color ratio: Y tion
730-011 MUL M.Rate for M-C 0 0-255 C Mono Color ratio: M 730-116 Non Edit Board 1 0-1 Edit board (0= No/1= Yes) (Read
only)
730-012 MUL M.Rate for C-C 128 0-255 C Mono Color ratio: C
730-117 Non Option MEM 0 0-1 Option MEM(0= No/1= Yes) (Read
730-013 MUL M.Rate for Y-B 0 0-255 B Mono Color ratio: Y
only)
730-014 MUL M.Rate for M-B 128 0-255 B Mono Color ratio: M
730-123 IPS Fail By Pass 0 0-1 Fail By Pass [0= No / 1= Yes]
730-015 MUL M.Rate for C-B 128 0-255 B Mono Color ratio: C
730-126 PostIPS Major Version PostIPS SW Version (1) (0-99)
730-016 MUL M.Rate for Y-G 128 0-255 G Mono Color ratio: Y
730-127 PostIPS Minor Version PostIPS SW Version (2) (0-99)
730-017 MUL M.Rate for M-G 0 0-255 G Mono Color ratio: M
730-128 PostIPS Revision PostIPS SW Version (3) (0-9)
730-018 MUL M.Rate for C-G 128 0-255 G Mono Color ratio: C
730-129 PostIPS Patch - 0-9 PostIPS SW Version 4 ASCII Code
730-019 MUL M.Rate for Y-R 128 0-255 R Mono Color ratio: Y a-z
730-020 MUL M.Rate for M-R 128 0-255 R Mono Color ratio: M 730-141 V-Min Reg aC-Loop 64 0-255 Closed area detection
730-021 MUL M.Rate for C-R 0 0-255 R Mono Color ratio: C 730-160 PLT-TH Reg 64 0-255 Binary level
730-022 SB 230 0-255 b* Standard value
730-023 TH 12 0-30 Maximum allowance
730-024 TH-STE 5 0-15 Step allowance
730-025 HOSEI 3 0-6 Correction coefficient Number
730-026 MB 0 0-511 Measured patch
730-027 MB-Max 250 0-511 Patch measurement: Upper limit
730-028 MB-Min 190 0-255 Patch measurement: Lower limit
730-045 CBY 4 0-8 Y Color balance default setting
number
730-046 CBM 4 0-8 M Color balance default setting
number
730-047 CBC 4 0-8 C Color balance default setting
number
730-048 CBK 4 0-8 K Color balance default setting
number
730-049 X-Regi 50 0-100 Editor sub-scanning direction: Ori-
gin position correction (1=0.5mm)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-43 dC131 IPS NVM List (730)
dC131 PH NVM List (749) dC131 PH NVM List (760)
Table 1 PH NVM List (749) Table 1 PH NVM List (760)
Chain- Chain-
749-001 B/W VARIABLE PITCH1 1200 None Pitch width for paper size 8.5” or less 760-001 Tray 5 SIZE SENSOR 0 0-65535 Always saves the current Tray 5 sensor
(Tray) ANALOG VALUE analog value.
749-002 B/W VARIABLE PITCH2 2083 None Pitch width for paper size B4S or less Default=0V
(Tray) Range=0-5V (0-1023)
749-003 B/W VARIABLE PITCH3 2400 None Pitch width for paper size 17” or less Unit=0.0048V
(Tray) 760-002 Tray 5 SIZE SENSOR 972 0-65535 Saves the Tray 5 size sensor analog
749-004 B/W VARIABLE PITCH4 3000 None Pitch width for paper size 18” or less ANALOG SMALL- value of the minimum position.
(Tray) EST VALUE Default=0V
749-005 B/W VARIABLE PITCH5 2400 None Pitch width for paper size 8.5” or less Range=0-5V (0-1023)
(Tray 5) Unit=0.0048V
749-006 B/W VARIABLE PITCH6 2400 None Pitch width for paper size B4S or less 760-003 Tray 5 SIZE SENSOR 51 0-65535 Saves the Tray 5 size sensor analog
(Tray 5) ANALOG GREAT- value of the maximum position.
749-007 B/W VARIABLE PITCH7 3000 None Pitch width for paper size 17” or less EST VALUE Default=0V
(Tray 5) Range=0-5V (0-1023)
749-008 B/W VARIABLE PITCH8 3000 None Pitch width for paper size 18” or less Unit=0.0048V
(Tray 5) 760-004 TRAY 1 PAPER SIZE 1=FX/ 0-3 Tray 1 paper size
749-009 B/W VARIABLE PITCH9 3000 None Pitch width for all thick paper sizes AP/ 0=B5 LEF (257 X 182mm)
(Tray 5) NASG 1=A4 LEF (297 X 210mm)
749-010 B/W VARIABLE 3000 None Pitch width for ultra thick paper longer 2=NAS
2=8.5 x 11.0” LEF (279.4 X
PITCH10 148mm (Tray 5) G
215.9mm)
749-011 B/W VARIABLE 3000 None Pitch width for ultra thick paper
3=A5S (210 x 148mm)
PITCH11 148mm or shorter (Tray 5)
Higher=Free
760-007 TRAY 2 PAPER 0 0-65535 Tray 2: Free size - feed length (SS
SIZE(SS) direction)
Default=0mm (Automatic detec-
tion)
Range=182-432mm
Other: Determined by the Tray
Size S/W (AD value). (0-65535)
Unit=1mm
760-008 TRAY 2 PAPER 0 0-65535 Tray 2: Free size width (FS direction)
SIZE(FS) Default=0mmb (Automatic detec-
tion)
Range=148-297mm
Other: Detected by the Tray Size
S/W (AD value). (0-65535)
Unit=1mm

dC131 PH NVM List (749), dC131 PH NVM List (760) 6-44 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
760-009 TRAY 3 PAPER 0 0-65535 Tray 3: Free size - Feed length (SS 760-015 TRAY 2 PAPER THE 0 0-65535 Saves the lifter-up accumulation time
SIZE(SS) direction) REST from Tray 2 insertion.
Default=0mm (Automatic detec- Default=0ms
tion) Range=None (0-65535)
Range=182-432mm Unit=10ms/step
Other: Detected by the Tray Size Default DATA=0 (10msRTMR)
S/W (AD value). (0-65535) (Supplement)
Unit=1mm 760-016 TRAY 3 PAPER THE 0 0-65535 Saves the lifter-up accumulation time
760-010 TRAY 3 PAPER 0 0-65535 Tray 3: Free size width (FS direction) REST from Tray 3 insertion.
SIZE(FS) Default=0mm (Automatic detec- Default=0ms
tion) Range=None (0-65535)
Range=148-297mm Unit=10ms/step
Other: Detected by the Tray Size Default DATA=0 (10msRTMR)
S/W (AD value). (0-65535) (Supplement)
Unit=1mm 760-017 TRAY 4 PAPER THE 0 0-65535 Saves the lifter-up accumulation time
760-011 TRAY 4 PAPER 0 0-65535 Tray 4: Free size - feed length (SS REST from Tray 4 insertion.
SIZE(SS) direction) Unit=10ms/step
Default=0mm (Automatic detec- Default DATA=0 (10msRTMR)
tion) (Supplement)
Range=182-432mm 760-018 TRAY 1 STATE 0 None Saves the Tray 1 status.
Other: Detected by the Tray Size 0=Tray dislocation
S/W (AD value). (0-65535) 1=Tray lifter down (e.g. Insertion)
Unit=1mm 2=Tray lifter up
760-012 TRAY 4 PAPER 0 0-65535 Tray 4: Free size width (FS direction) 3=Tray lifter up - interrupted
SIZE(FS) Default=0mm (Automatic detection) 4=Tray lifter up (READY)
Other: Detected by the Tray Size S/W
5=Fault
(AD value).
Range=148-297mm (0-65535) 6=Last P-OFF - Tray dislocation
Unit=1mmDefault DATA=0 7=Last P-OFF - Lifter down
760-013 Tray 5 PAPER WIDTH 0 None Tray 5 size sensor size (mm) 8=Last P-OFF - Lifter up
760-014 TRAY 1 PAPER THE 0 0-65535 Saves the lifter-up accumulation time 9=Last P-OFF - Lifer up inter-
REST from Tray 1 insertion. rupted
Default=0ms 10=Last P-OFF - Lifter up
Range=None () 11=Last P-OFF - Fault
Unit=10ms/step Other=Unknown
Default DATA=0 (10msRTMR)
(Supplement)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-45 dC131 PH NVM List (760)
Chain- Chain-
760-019 TRAY 2 STATE 0 None Saves the Tray 2 status. 760-021 TRAY 4 STATE 0 None Saves the Tray 4 status.
0=Tray dislocation 0=Tray dislocation
1=Tray lifter down (e.g. Insertion) 1=Tray lifter down (e.g. Insertion)
2=Tray lifter up 2=Tray lifter up
3=Tray lifter up - interrupted 3=Tray lifter up - interrupted
4=Tray lifter up (READY) 4=Tray lifter up (READY)
5=Fault 5=Fault
6=Last P-OFF - Tray dislocation 6=Last P-OFF - Tray dislocation
7=Last P-OFF - Lifter down 7=Last P-OFF - Lifter down
8=Last P-OFF - Lifter up 8=Last P-OFF - Lifter up
9=Last P-OFF - Lifter up inter- 9=Last P-OFF - Lifter up inter-
rupted rupted
10=Last P-OFF - Lifter up 10=Last P-OFF - Lifter up
11=Last P-OFF - Fault 11=Last P-OFF - Fault
Other=Unknown Other=Unknown
760-020 TRAY 3 STATE 0 None Saves the Tray 3 status.
0 =Tray dislocation
1=Tray lifter down (e.g. Insertion)
2=Tray lifter up
3=Tray lifter up - interrupted
4=Tray lifter up (READY)
5=Fault
6=Last P-OFF - Tray dislocation
7=Last P-OFF - Lifter down
8=Last P-OFF - Lifter up
9=Last P-OFF - Lifter up inter-
rupted
10=Last P-OFF - Lifter up
11=Last P-OFF - Fault
Other=Unknown

dC131 PH NVM List (760) 6-46 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC131PH NVM List (761) Table 1 PH NVM List (761)
Chain-
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Link Name Default Range Description
Chain- 761-007 PRE FEED START 779 754-804 #3 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to
Link Name Default Range Description TIMING- Regi-Feed (B side)
TRAY3(PANEL B) Default=1558ms
761-001 PRE FEED START 590 565-615 #1 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed Start to
TIMING-TRAY1 Regi-Feed (Except B side) Range=±50ms (±25)
Default=1180ms Unit=2ms/step
Range=±50ms (±25) 761-008 PRE FEED START 910 885-935 #4 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to
Unit=2ms/step TIMING-TRAY4 Regi-Feed (Except B side)
Default=1820ms
761-002 PRE FEED START 559 534-624 #1 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed Start to
TIMING- Regi-Feed (B side feed length: Less than Range=±50ms (±25)
TRAY1(PANEL B) 190mm (*)) Unit=2ms/step
Default=1118ms 761-009 PRE FEED START 879 854-904 #4 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to
Range=±50ms (±25) TIMING- Regi-Feed (B side)
Unit=2ms/step TRAY4(PANEL B) Default=1758ms
Default DATA=559 (Quadrant Range=±50ms (±25)
Machine CLOCK) Unit=2ms/step
(*) Applied in the Nudger Roll 2-Drops 761-010 TRAY1 NUDGER 39 0-45 #1 Tray Pre-Feed: Nudger Roll SOL ON
Mode ROLL SOLENOID time
761-003 DOUBLE PRE 559 534-624 #1 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed Start to ON TIME Default=390ms
FEED START TIM- Regi-Feed (B side feed length: 190 mm or Range=0-450ms (0 - 45)
ING-TRAY1 longer (*)) Unit=10ms/step
Default=1118ms
Default DATA=39 (10ms RTMR)
Range=±50ms (±25)
761-011 TRAY2 NUDGER 39 0-45 #2 Tray Pre-Feed: Nudger Roll SOL ON
Unit=2ms/step ROLL SOLENOID time
(*) Applied in the Double Pre Feed Mode. ON TIME Default=390ms
761-004 PRE FEED START 710 685-735 #2 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to Range=0-450ms (0-45)
TIMING-TRAY2 Regi-Feed (Except B side) Unit=10ms/step
Default=1420ms Default DATA=39 (10ms RTMR)
Range=±50ms (±25) 761-012 TRAY3 NUDGER 39 0-45 #3 Tray Pre-Feed: Nudger Roll SOL ON
Unit=2ms/step ROLL SOLENOID time
761-005 PRE FEED START 679 654-704 #2 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to ON TIME Unit=10ms/step
TIMING- Regi-Feed (B side) Default DATA=39 (10ms RTMR)
TRAY2(PANEL B) Default=1358ms 761-013 TRAY4 NUDGER 39 0-45 #4 Tray Pre-Feed: Nudger Roll SOL ON
Range=±50ms (±25) ROLL SOLENOID time
Unit=2ms/step ON TIME Unit=10ms/step
761-006 PRE FEED START 810 785-835 #3 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to Default DATA=39 (10ms RTMR)
TIMING-TRAY3 Regi-Feed (Except B side) 761-014 ADJUST TRAY 1 24 4-39 Time from #1 Feed Out SNR ON to #1
Default=1620ms PRE FEED STOP Feed Motor OFF (Feed Roll 300mm/s -
Range=±50ms (±25) POSITION(FEED Stop timing)
Unit=2ms/step ROLL 1 SPEED Default=48ms
300mm/s) Range=8-78ms (4-39)
Unit=2ms/step

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-47 dC131PH NVM List (761)
Chain- Chain-
761-015 ADJUST TRAY 1 24 0-39 Time from #1 Feed Out SNR ON to #1 761-021 ADJUST TRAY 4 10 10-31 Time from #4 Feed Out SNR ON to #4
PRE FEED STOP Take Away Feed Clutch OFF (Take Away PRE FEED STOP Take Away Feed Clutch OFF (Take Away
POSITION(TAKE Roll 220mm/s- Stop timing) POSITION(TAKE Roll 450mm/s - Stop timing)
AWAY ROLL 1 Default=48ms AWAY ROLL 4 Default=20ms
SPEED 220mm/s) Range=0-78ms (0-39) SPEED 450mm/s) Range=0-62ms (0-31)
Unit=2ms/step Unit=2ms/step
Default DATA=24 (2ms RTMR) Default DATA=10 (2ms RTMR)
761-016 ADJUST TRAY 2 20 10-31 Time from #2 Feed Out SNR ON to #2 761-022 TRAY 1 LIFTER UP 5 0-23 #1 Lift Up time (Applied only to Lift Up
PRE FEED STOP Feed Motor OFF (Feed Roll 300mm/s- TIME(DURING during Feed)
POSITION(FEED Stop timing) FEED) Default=50ms
ROLL 2 SPEED Default=40ms Range=0-230ms (0-23)
300mm/s) Range=20-62ms (10-31) Unit=10ms/step
Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=5 (10ms RTMR)
Default DATA=20 (2ms RTMR) 761-023 TRAY 2 LIFTER UP 5 0-23 #2 Lift Up time (Applied only to Lift Up
761-017 ADJUST TRAY 2 10 0-31 Time from #2 Feed Out SNR ON to #2 TIME(DURING during Feed)
PRE FEED STOP Take Away Feed Clutch OFF (Take Away FEED) Default=50ms
POSITION(TAKE Roll 450mm/s - Stop timing) Range=0-230ms (0-23)
AWAY ROLL 2 Default=20ms Unit=10ms/step
SPEED 450mm/s) Range=0-62ms (0-31) Default DATA=5 (10ms RTMR)
Unit=2ms/step 761-024 TRAY 3 LIFTER UP 5 0-23 #3 Lift Up time (Applied only to Lift Up
Default DATA=10 (2ms RTMR) TIME(DURING during Feed)
761-018 ADJUST TRAY 3 20 10-31 Time from #3 Feed Out SNR ON to #3 FEED) Default=50ms
PRE FEED STOP Feed Motor OFF (Feed Roll 300mm/s- Range=0-230ms (0-23)
POSITION(FEED Stop timing) Unit=10ms/step
ROLL 3 SPEED Default=40ms
300mm/s) Range=20-62ms (10-31)
761-025 TRAY 4 LIFTER UP 5 0-23 #4 Lift Up time (Applied only to Lift Up
Unit=2ms/step TIME(DURING during Feed)
Default DATA=20 (2ms RTMR) FEED) Unit=10ms/step
761-019 ADJUST TRAY 3 10 0-31 Time from #3 Feed Out SNR ON to #3 Default DATA=5 (10ms RTMR)
PRE FEED STOP Take Away Feed Clutch OFF (Take Away
761-026 TRAY 1 FEED 252 227-277 Time from #1 Take Away Feed Clutch ON
POSITION(TAKE Roll 450mm/s - Stop timing)
START TIMING to Registration Motor ON (Feed start)
AWAY ROLL 3 Default=20ms (Except B side)
SPEED 450mm/s) Range=0-62ms (0-31) Default=504ms
Unit=2ms/step Range=±50ms (±25)
Default DATA=10 (2ms RTMR) Unit=2ms/step
761-020 ADJUST TRAY 4 20 10-31 Time from #4 Feed Out SNR ON to #4 761-027 TRAY 1 FEED 245 220-270 Time from #1 Take Away Feed Clutch ON
PRE FEED STOP Feed Motor OFF (Feed Roll 300mm/s - START TIM- to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (B
POSITION(FEED Stop timing) ING(PANEL B) side)
ROLL 4 SPEED Default=40ms Default=490ms
300mm/s) Range=20-62ms (10-31) Range=±50ms (±25)

dC131PH NVM List (761) 6-48 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
761-028 TRAY 2 FEED 364 347-397 Time from #2 Take Away Feed ClutchON 761-035 ADJUST REGI 32 7-57 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main
START TIMING to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) LOOP(FROM TRAY Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjust-
(Except B side) & NORMAL ment - TRAY) (Normal paper)
Default=728ms PAPER) Default=64ms
Range=744±50ms (372±25) Range=±50ms (±25)
761-029 TRAY 2 FEED 357 340-390 Time from #2 Take Away Feed Clutch ON Default DATA=32 (2ms RTMR)
START TIM- to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (B 761-036 ADJUST REGI 32 7-57 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main
ING(PANEL B) side) LOOP(FROM TRAY Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjust-
Default=714ms & THICK PAPER) ment - TRAY) (Thick paper)
Range=730±50ms (365±25) Default=64ms
Unit=2ms/step Range=±50ms (±25)
761-030 TRAY 3 FEED 464 447-497 Time from #3 Take Away Feed Clutch ON Unit=2ms/step
START TIMING to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) Default DATA=32 (2ms RTMR)
(Except B side) 761-038 ADJUST REGI 67 42-92 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main
Default=928ms LOOP(FROM Tray Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjust-
Range=944±50ms (472±25) 5 & NORMAL ment - Tray 5) (Normal paper)
Unit=2ms/step PAPER) Default=134ms
761-031 TRAY 3 FEED 457 440-490 Time from #3 Take Away Feed Clutch ON Range=±50ms (±25)
START TIM- to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (B Unit=2ms/step
ING(PANEL B) side) Default DATA=67 (2ms RTMR)
Default=914ms
761-039 ADJUST REGI 67 42-92 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main
Range=930±50ms (465±25) LOOP(FROM Tray Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjust-
Unit=2ms/step 5 & THICK PAPER) ment - Tray 5) (Thick paper)
761-032 TRAY 4 FEED 564 547-597 Time from #4 Take Away Feed Clutch ON Default=134ms
START TIMING to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) Range=±50ms (±25)
(Except B side) Unit=2ms/step
Default=1128ms
Range=1144±50ms (572±25)
Unit=2ms/step
LOOP(FROM Tray Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjust-
761-033 TRAY 4 FEED 557 540-590 Time from #4 Take Away Feed ClutchON 5 & STRONG ment - Tray 5) (Ultra thick paper)
START TIM- to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (B THICK PAPER) Default=134ms
ING(PANEL B) side)
Range=±50ms (±25)
Default=1114ms
Unit=2ms/step
Range=1130±50ms (565±25)
Unit=2ms/step
761-034 FRAME OHP 0 0-1 Enable/Disable the B/W OHP (with frame) LOOP(FROM Tray Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjust-
ENABLE/DISABLE 0= Disable
5 & OHP) ment - Tray 5) (OHP)
1=Enable Default=134ms
Range=±50ms (±25)
Unit=2ms/step

Chain- Chain-
761-042 ADJUST REGI 32 7-57 Time from Registration SENSOR ON to 761-048 ADJUST REGI 1000 900- Time from the last image Pitch generation
LOOP(DUPLEX Main Motor 2, DUP Motor OFF (Registra- MOTOR ON TIM- 1100 to Registration Motor ON
MODE) tion Loop adjustment - Duplex) ING (DUPLEX (Duplex Mode adjusting value) Duplex
Default=64 ms MODE) Registration Feed Timing=(761-
Range=±50ms (±25) 043)+(761-048)-1000
Unit=2ms/step Default=0ms
Default DATA=32 (2ms RTMR) Range=±50ms (±100)

Unit=0.5ms/step, 0.11mm/step
761-043 REGI MOTOR ON 3962 3862- Time from the last image Pitch generation
TIMING(PANEL A & 4062 to Registration Motor ON (Applied to all 761-049 ADJUST REGI 4800 4700- Time from the last image Pitch generation
B) modes.) MOTOR ON TIM- 4900 to Registration Motor ON
Default=1981ms ING(OHP FULL (4C OHP adjusting value) OHP Timing
Range=±50ms (±100) COLOR MODE) (420mm or less)=(761-043)+(761-
049)OHP Timing (Longer than
420mm)=(761-043) +(761-049) -(761-
761-044 ADJUST REGI 86 0-186 Time from the last image Pitch generation 044)
MOTOR ON TIM- to Registration Motor ON Default=2400ms
ING(PANEL B & 17 (Adjusting value when the B side feed
Range=±50ms (±100)
INCH PAPER) length is longer than A3) B side or feed
length is longer than 420mm=(761-043) -
(761-044) 761-050 ADJUST REGI 2680 2546- Registration Feed: Registration Motor
Default=43ms MOTOR 2814 speed
SPEED(NORMAL (Normal paper) Dividing
Range=0-93ms (0-186)
PAPER:221.168mm ratio=20MHz÷Octant division÷Fre-
/s) quency÷2+1
761-045 ADJUST REGI 4800 4700- Time from the last image Pitch generation Default=2680PPS
MOTOR ON TIM- 4900 to Registration Motor ON
Range=2546-2814PPS (2546-2814)
ING(THICK (Thick paper adjusting value) Thick paper
761-051 ADJUST REGI 1583 1503- Registration Feed: Registration Motor
PAPER) Timing (420mm or less)=(761-043) +
(761-045) Thick paper Timing (longer MOTOR 1662 speed
SPEED(STRONG (Thick paper) Dividing
than 420mm)=(761-043) + (761-045) -
THICK PAPER: ratio=20MHz÷Octant division÷Fre-
(761-044)
130mm/s) quency÷2+1
Default=2400ms
Default=1583PPS
Range=±50ms (±100)
Range=1503-1662PPS (1503-1662)
761-052 ADJUST REGI 731 694-768 Registration Feed: Registration Motor
761-046 ADJUST REGI 4800 4700- Time from the last image Pitch generation
MOTOR speed
MOTOR ON TIM- 4900 to Registration Motor ON
SPEED(OHP: (OHP) Dividing ratio=20MHz÷Octant divi-
ING(STRONG (Ultra thick paper adjusting value) Ultra
60.301mm/s) sion÷Frequency÷2+1
THICK PAPER) thick paper Timing (420mm or less)=(761-
761-053 Tray 5 FEED 0 None Time from Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid ON to
043)+(761-046) Ultra thick paper Timing
CLUTCH ON TIM- Tray 5 Feed Clutch OFF
(Longer than 420mm)=(761-043)+(761-
ING unit=10ms/step
046) -(761-044)
Default=2400ms
Range=±50ms (±100)

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
761-054 ADJUST PRE 0 0-31 Time from #1 Feed Out SNR ON to #1 761-063 INVERT MOTOR 51 38-68 Time from Invert Path SNR OFF to Invert
FEED STOP POSI- Nudger Roll OFF (PRE Feed stop position OFF TIM- Motor OFF (Duplex Invert Point stop posi-
TION(TRAY 1 - Adjustment) ING(DUPLEX tion - Adjustment)
NUDGER ROLL) Default=0ms MODE) Default=102ms
Range=0-62ms (0-31) Range=76-136ms (38-68)
Default DATA=0 (2ms RTMR) 761-064 INVERT MOTOR 328 325-331 Time from Registration Motor ON using
761-055 ADJUST PRE 0 0-39 Time from #2 Feed Out SNR ON to #2 ON TIM- Pitch 1200ms Duplex(*1) to Invert Motor
FEED STOP POSI- Nudger Roll OFF (PRE Feed stop position ING(DUPLEX ON (Duplex inversion start timing)
TION(TRAY 2 - Adjustment) MODE:PITCH Default=3280ms
NUDGER ROLL) Default=0ms 1200ms ONLY) Range=3250-3310ms (±30ms) (325-
Range=0-78ms (0-39) 331)
761-056 ADJUST PRE 0 0-39 Time from #2 Feed Out SNR ON to #2 (*1)LETL, A4L, B5L B/W, 4C MODE
FEED STOP POSI- Nudger Roll OFF (PRE Feed stop position 761-065 INVERT MOTOR 426 423-429 Time from Registration Motor ON using
TION(TRAY 3 - Adjustment) ON TIM- Pitch 2400ms Duplex(*2) to Invert Motor
NUDGER ROLL) Default=0ms ING(DUPLEX ON (Duplex inversion start timing)
Range=0-78ms (0-39) MODE: PITCH Default=4260ms
2400ms ONLY) Range=4230-4290ms (±30ms) (423-
Unit=2ms/step
429)
Unit=10ms/step
761-057 ADJUST PRE 0 0-39 Time from #2 Feed Out SNR ON to #2
FEED STOP POSI- Nudger Roll OFF (PRE Feed stop position Default DATA=4260 (10ms RTMR)
TION(TRAY 4 - Adjustment) (*2) B/W Mode except LETL, A4L, B5L
NUDGER ROLL) Default=0ms and B4S, and, 4C Mode except LETL,
Range=0-78ms (0-39) A4L and B5L
Unit=2ms/step 761-066 INVERT MOTOR 395 392-398 Time from Registration Motor ON using
Default DATA=0 (2ms RTMR) ON TIM- Pitch 2083ms Single Leaf Duplex(*3) to
ING(DUPLEX Invert Motor ON (Duplex inversion start
761-058 FUSER ENTRANS 1 None Switches the Fuser Entrance Sensor On
MODE: PITCH timing)
SENSOR ON JAM Jam Timer
2083ms ONLY) Default=3950ms
TIMER SELECT 0:PM1
Range=3920-3980ms (±30ms) (392-
Non 0: PM2 or later 398)
761-061 ADJUST INVERT 101 91-121 Time from Fuser Exit SNR OFF to Invert Unit=10ms/step
MOTOR STOP Motor OFF (Exit Invert Point stop position
POSITION(FROM - Adjustment)
FUSER EXIT SEN- Default=202ms (*3)B4S B/W MODE
SOR OFF) Range=182.-242ms (91-121)
Unit=2.ms/step
761-062 INVERT MOTOR 55 40-70 Time from Invert Motor OFF to Invert
ON TIMING(FACE Motor ON (Exit Invert Point stop time)
DOWN MODE) Default=110ms
Range=80-140ms (40-70)
Unit=2ms/step

Chain- Chain-
761-067 ADJUST DUPLEX 16 0-85 Time from Duplex Out Sensor ON to 761-092 TAKE AWAY 2 15 10-20 Time from #3 Take Away Feed Clutch ON
OUT MOTOR OFF Duplex Out Motor OFF (Duplex Wait Point CLUTCH ON TIM- to #2 Take Away Feed Clutch ON (Feed
TIMING(FROM stop position - Adjustment) ING(USED TRAY 3) from #3 Tray)
DUPLEX OUT Default=32ms Default=150ms
SENSOR ON) Range=0-170ms (±40ms) (0-85) Range=100-200ms (10-20)
Default DATA=16 (Quadrant MC Default DATA=15 (10ms RTMR)
CLK) 761-095 ADJUST REGI 58 33-83 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main
761-068 ADJUST DUPLEX 246 221-271 Duplex Out Motor ON start time to send LOOP(From Tray 5 Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjust-
OUT MOTOR ON paper from the Duplex Tray (Duplex Feed Postcard) ment - Tray 5: Postcard)
START TIM- start timing) Default=116ms
ING(FROM Default=492 ms Range=±50ms (±25)
DUPLEX TRAY) Range=442-542ms (±50ms) (221- Unit=2ms/step
271) Default DATA=58 (2ms RTMR)
Unit=2ms/step 761-101 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
Default DATA=246 (Quadrant MC PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR
CLK) SOR 1(USED ON
761-069 SPAREINVERT 383 380-386 Time from Registration Motor ON using TRAY 1) Theoretical value=115ms
MOTOR ON TIM- Pitch 1500ms Single Leaf Duplex(*4) to JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
ING(DUPLEX Invert Motor ON (Duplex inversion start 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other)
MODE: PITCH timing) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper)
1500ms ONLY) Default=3830ms
Range=3800-3860ms (±30ms) (380-
Last storage location - see 761-351.
386)
761-102 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
Unit=10ms/step
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR
SOR 2(USED ON
(*4)40 PPM MODE TRAY 1) Theoretical value=115ms
761-090 TAKE AWAY 3 15 10-20 Time from #4 Take Away Feed Clutch ON JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
CLUTCH ON TIM- to #3 Take Away Feed Clutch ON 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other)
ING(USED TRAY 4) Default=150ms
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper)
Range=100-200ms (10-20)
Unit=10ms/step
761-091 TAKE AWAY 2 20 15-25 Time from #3 Take Away Feed Clutch ON PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR
CLUTCH ON TIM- to #2 Take Away Feed Clutch ON (Feed SOR 3(USED ON
ING(USED TRAY 4) from #4 Tray) TRAY 1) Theoretical value=115ms
Default=200ms
JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
Range=150-250ms (15-25) 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other)
Unit=10ms/step Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper)

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
761-104 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray 761-109 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR
SOR 4(USED ON SOR 9(USED ON
TRAY 1) Theoretical value=115ms TRAY 1) Theoretical value=115ms
JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other)
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper)
Last storage location - see 761-351. 761-110 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
761-105 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR SOR 10(USED ON
SOR 5(USED ON TRAY 1) Theoretical value=115ms
TRAY 1) Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other)
12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper)
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-351.
Last storage location - see 761-351. PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON
SOR 1(USED Theoretical value=155ms
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
SOR 6(USED ON 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other)
TRAY 1) Theoretical value=115ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper)
12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Last storage location - see 761-352.
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) 761-112 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray
761-107 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray SOR 2(USED Theoretical value=155ms
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) 761-113 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray
TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR

Chain- Chain-
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON
SOR 4(USED Theoretical value=155ms SOR 9(USED Theoretical value=155ms
TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper)
Last storage location - see 761-352. Last storage location - see 761-352.
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON
SOR 7(USED Theoretical value=155ms SOR 2(USED Default=0ms
TRAY 3) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, TRAY 4) Range=None
12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Theoretical value=155ms
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other)
Last storage location - see 761-353. Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
761-128 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper)
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON
SOR 8(USED Theoretical value=155ms Last storage location - see 761-354.
TRAY 3) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 761-133 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray
12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other)
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), SOR 3(USED Theoretical value=155ms
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) TRAY 4) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM,
Last storage location - see 761-353. 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other)
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper)

Chain- Chain-
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON
TRAY 4) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, TRAY1) JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM,
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper)
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-355.
Last storage location - see 761-354. 761-142 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
761-137 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON SOR 2(USED Theoretical value=291ms
SOR 7(USED Theoretical value=155ms TRAY 1) JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM,
TRAY 4) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other)
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), Last storage location - see 761-355.
Last storage location - see 761-354. FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON
PRE FEED SEN- Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON TRAY 1) JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM,
SOR 8(USED Theoretical value=155ms 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other)
TRAY 4) JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper)

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
Last storage location - see 761-355. 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper)
761-146 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Last storage location - see 761-356.
FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON 761-152 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray
SOR 6(USED Theoretical value=291ms FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON
TRAY 1) JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, SOR 2(USED Theoretical value=276ms
12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM,
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other)
761-147 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper)
FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Last storage location - see 761-356.
SOR 7(USED Theoretical value=291ms 761-153 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray
TRAY 1) JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON
12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) SOR 3(USED Theoretical value=276ms
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM,
761-148 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other)
FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
SOR 8(USED Theoretical value=291ms 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper)
TRAY 1) JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, Last storage location - see 761-356.
12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) 761-154 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON
Last storage location - see 761-355. SOR 4(USED Theoretical value=276ms
FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other)
SOR 9(USED Theoretical value=291ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
TRAY 1) 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper)

Chain- Chain-
TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, TRAY 3)A JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM,

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-

Chain- Chain-
761-176 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray 761-181 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
SOR 6(USED Theoretical value=276ms 1(USED TRAY 1) Theoretical value=130ms
TRAY 4) JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, JAM TIMER=80-180ms
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) 761-182 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
Last storage location - see 761-358. REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
761-177 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray 2(USED TRAY 1) Theoretical value=130ms
FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON JAM TIMER=80-180ms
761-183 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
3(USED TRAY 1) Theoretical value=130ms
JAM TIMER=80-180ms
FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON
TRAY 4) 761-184 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
JAM TIMER=80-180ms
Last storage location - see 761-358. Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper)
761-179 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 Last storage location - see 761-359.

None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray
FEED OUT SEN- Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON 761-185 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
SOR 9(USED Theoretical value=276ms REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
TRAY 4) JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 5(USED TRAY 1) Theoretical value=130ms
12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) DSP: ARRV JAM TIMER=80-180ms
PreRegiSNR5
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper)
Tray1
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-359.

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
761-186 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray 761-192 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray
REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON REGI Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
6(USED TRAY 1) Theoretical value=130ms SENSOR2(USED Theoretical value=370ms
JAM TIMER=80-180ms TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=320-420ms
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
Last storage location - see 761-359. 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1)
761-187 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Last storage location - see 761-360.
REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON 761-193 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray
7(USED TRAY 1) Theoretical value=130ms REGI Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
JAM TIMER=80-180ms SENSOR3(USED Theoretical value=370ms
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=320-420ms
761-188 ARRIVE AT PRE 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1)
0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray
REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Last storage location - see 761-360.
8(USED TRAY 1) Theoretical value=130ms 761-194 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray
JAM TIMER=80-180ms REGI Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) SENSOR4(USED Theoretical value=370ms
TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=320-420ms
761-189 ARRIVE AT PRE Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
REGI SENSOR 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1)
Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
9(USED TRAY 1) Theoretical value=130ms Last storage location - see 761-360.
JAM TIMER=80-180ms 761-195 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray
REGI Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
SENSOR5(USED Theoretical value=370ms
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1)
JAM TIMER=80-180ms
REGI Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
761-191 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=320-420ms
JAM TIMER=320-420ms

Chain- Chain-
REGI Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
SENSOR7(USED Default=0ms 2(USED TRAY 3) Theoretical value=370ms
TRAY 2) Range=None JAM TIMER=320-420ms
DSP: ARRV
Theoretical value=370ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
PreRegiSNR7 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1)
JAM TIMER=320-420ms
Tray2
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) 761-203 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray
Last storage location - see 761-360. REGI Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
761-198 ARRIVE AT PRE SENSOR3(USED Theoretical value=370ms
REGI TRAY 3) JAM TIMER=320-420ms
SENSOR8(USED Theoretical value=370ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
TRAY 2) JAM TIMER=320-420ms 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1)
None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray
REGI SENSOR TRAY 3) JAM TIMER=320-420ms
1(USED TRAY 3) Theoretical value=570ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper),
AM TIMER=520-620ms 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1)

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
REGI Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
SENSOR8(USED Theoretical value=370ms 4(USED TRAY 4) Theoretical value=770ms
TRAY 3) JAM TIMER=320-420ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), Unit=0.5ms/step
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-361.
Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-215 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray
761-209 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
REGI Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON 5(USED TRAY 4) Theoretical value=770ms
SENSOR9(USED Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms
TRAY 3) JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step
Last storage location - see 761-360. REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
761-210 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray 6(USED TRAY 4) Theoretical value=770ms
REGI Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON JAM TIMER=720-820ms
SENSOR10(USED Theoretical value=370ms Unit=0.5ms/step
TRAY 3) JAM TIMER=320-420ms Last storage location - see 761-361.
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 761-217 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray
0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON
Last storage location - see 761-360. 7(USED TRAY 4) Theoretical value=770ms
761-211 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray JAM TIMER=720-820ms
Unit=0.5ms/step
JAM TIMER=720-820ms
Unit=0.5ms/step
REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Unit=0.5ms/step
JAM TIMER=720-820ms
Unit=0.5ms/step
REGI SENSOR Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Unit=0.5ms/step
JAM TIMER=720-820ms
Unit=0.5ms/step
JAM TIMER=720-820ms
Unit=0.5ms/step

Chain- Chain-
761-221 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 None #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registra- 761-226 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 None #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registra-
SENSOR 1(USED tion Sensor ON timing after Feed start. SENSOR 6(USED tion Sensor ON timing after Feed start.
JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM,
12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms
(Other) (Other)
(Other) (Other)
(Other) (Other)
SENSOR tion Sensor ON timing after Feed start. SENSOR 9(USED tion Sensor ON timing after Feed start.
4(USEDTRAY 1) Theoretical value=367ms TRAY 1) Theoretical value=367ms
(Other) (Other)
SENSOR tion Sensor ON timing after Feed start. SENSOR 10(USED tion Sensor ON timing after Feed start.
5(USEDTRAY 1) Theoretical value=367ms TRAY 1) Theoretical value=367ms
(Other) (Other)

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
(Other) (Other)
0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1)
TRAY 2) Theoretical value=607ms TRAY 2) theoretical value=607ms
(Other) (Other)
TRAY) Theoretical value=607ms TRAY 2) Theoretical value=607ms
(Other) (Other)
(Other) (Other)

Chain- Chain-
(Other) (Other)
(Other) (Other)
(Other) (Other)
(Other) (Other)

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM,
(Other) (Other)
(Other) (Other)
TRAY 3)A Theoretical value=807ms TRAY 4) Theoretical value=1007ms
(Other) (Other)
(Other) (Other)

Chain- Chain-
AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM,
(Other) (Other)
AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM,
(Other) (Other)
761-257 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 None #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registra- 761-261 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
SENSOR 7(USED tion Sensor ON timing after Feed start. SOR 1(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed
TRAY 4) Theoretical value=1007ms TRAY 1) (paper fed from Tray 1).
AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, Theoretical value=Paper
12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms length÷221.168mm/S
(Other) Unit=2ms/step
0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) 761-262 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
Last storage location - see 761-366. SOR 2(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed
761-258 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 None #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registra- TRAY 1) (paper fed from Tray 1).
SENSOR 8(USED tion Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=Paper
TRAY 4) Theoretical value=1007ms length÷221.168mm/S
AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, Unit=2ms/step
12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms Last storage location - see 761-367.
(Other) 761-263 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), SOR 3(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed
0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) TRAY 1) (paper fed from Tray 1).
Last storage location - see 761-366. Theoretical value=Paper
length÷221.168mm/S
Unit=2ms/step

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
761-264 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor 761-270 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
SOR 4(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed SOR 10(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed
TRAY 1) (paper fed from Tray 1). TRAY 1) (paper fed from Tray 1).
Theoretical value=Paper Theoretical value=Paper
length÷221.168mm/S length÷221.168mm/S
length÷221.168mm/S length÷0.221168mm/s (Normal
Unit=2ms/step paper)
Last storage location - see 761-367. Theoretical value=Paper
length÷0.130mm/s (This paper 1)
761-266 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
SOR 6(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper)
TRAY 1) (paper fed from Tray 1). Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1)
Theoretical value=Paper Last storage location - see 761-368.
length÷221.168mm/S 761-272 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
Unit=2ms/step SOR 2(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed
Last storage location - see 761-367. TRAY 2) (paper fed from Tray 2).
761-267 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor Theoretical value=Paper
SOR 7(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed length÷0.221168mm/s (Normal
TRAY 1) (paper fed from Tray 1). paper)
length÷221.168mm/S length÷0.130mm/s (This paper 1)
Unit=2ms/step Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper)
Last storage location - see 761-367. Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1)
761-268 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor Last storage location - see 761-368.
SOR 8(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed 761-273 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
TRAY 1) (paper fed from Tray 1). SOR 3(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed
Theoretical value=Paper TRAY 2) (paper fed from Tray 2).
length÷221.168mm/S Theoretical value=Paper
Unit=2ms/step length÷0.221168mm/s (Normal
Last storage location - see 761-367. paper)
761-269 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor Theoretical value=Paper
SOR 9(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed length÷0.130mm/s (This paper 1)
TRAY 1) (paper fed from Tray 1). Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper)
Theoretical value=Paper Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1)
length÷221.168mm/S Last storage location - see 761-368.
Unit=2ms/step

Chain- Chain-
length÷0.221168mm/s (Normal length÷0.221168mm/s (Normal
paper) paper)
length÷0.130mm/s (This paper 1) length÷0.130mm/s (This paper 1)
Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper)
Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1)
paper) paper)
paper) paper)
paper) paper)

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
paper) paper)
paper) paper)
paper) paper)
761-285 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor 761-289 PASS REGI 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
SOR 5(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed SENSOR9(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed
paper) paper)

Chain- Chain-
DSP: Pass Default=0ms Theoretical value=Paper
RegiSNR10 Tray3 Range=None length÷0.221168mm/s (Normal
paper)
Theoretical value=Paper
length÷0.221168mm/s (Normal Theoretical value=Paper
paper) length÷0.130mm/s (This paper 1)
Theoretical value=Paper Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper)
length÷0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1)
Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-370.
Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) 761-294 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
761-291 PASS REGI SEN- TRAY 4) (paper fed from Tray 4).
0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
SOR 1(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed Theoretical value=Paper
length÷0.221168mm/s (Normal
TRAY 4) (paper fed from Tray 4).
paper)
761-292 PASS REGI SEN- TRAY 4) (paper fed from Tray 4).
0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
SOR 2(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed Theoretical value=Paper
paper)
paper)
Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper)
Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1)

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
Theoretical value=Paper DSP: Pass Default=0ms
length÷0.221168mm/s (Normal RegiSNR10 Tray4 Range=None
paper)
Theoretical value=Paper length÷0.221168mm/s (Normal
length÷0.130mm/s (This paper 1) paper)
Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper
Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) length÷0.130mm/s (This paper 1)
Last storage location - see 761-370. Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper)
761-298 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1)
SOR 8(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed
TRAY 4) (paper fed from Tray 4). Last storage location - see 761-370.
761-301 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor
EXIT SENSOR 1 ON timing from Registration Feed start.
paper)
DSP: ARRV Fuser Default=0ms
Exit SNR 1 Range=None
Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms
(This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper
2)
Unit=10ms/step
761-299 PASS REGI SEN- 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor
SOR 9(USED OFF timing from the Registration Feed
DSP: Pass Default=0ms 761-302 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor
RegiSNR9 Tray4 EXIT SENSOR 2 ON timing from Registration Feed start.
Range=None
Exit SNR 2 Range=None
paper) Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms
2)
Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=10ms/step


Chain- Chain-
761-303 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor 761-307 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor
EXIT SENSOR 3 ON timing from Registration Feed start. EXIT SENSOR 7 ON timing from Registration Feed start.
DSP: ARRV Fuser Default=0ms Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms
Exit SNR 3 Range=None (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper
2)
Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms
(This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper Unit=10ms/step
2) Last storage location - see 761-371.
Unit=10ms/step 761-308 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor
Last storage location - see 761-371. Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms
2)
Unit=10ms/step
Exit SNR 4 Last storage location - see 761-371.
Range=None
2)
Unit=10ms/step
2)
Unit=10ms/step
Exit SNR 5 Range=None (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper
Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms 2)
(This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper Unit=10ms/step
2) Last storage location - see 761-371.
Unit=10ms/step 761-311 PASS Machine 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine
EXIT SENSOR 1 Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit
Last storage location - see 761-371. Sensor OFF.
761-306 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor Theoretical value=221ms (Straight
EXIT SENSOR 6 ON timing from Registration Feed start. ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper
DSP: ARRV Fuser Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms
Exit SNR 6 (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper (Reverse ejection)
2) Unit=10ms/step
Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372.

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
761-312 PASS Machine 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine 761-316 PASS Machine 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine
EXIT SENSOR 2 Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit EXIT SENSOR 6 Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit
DSP: Pass Machine Sensor OFF. Sensor OFF.
Exit SNR 2 Default=0ms Theoretical value=221ms (Straight
Range=None ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper
lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms
Theoretical value=221ms (Straight
(Reverse ejection)
ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper
lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms Unit=10ms/step
(Reverse ejection) Last storage location - see 761-372.
Unit=10ms/step 761-317 PASS Machine 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine
Last storage location - see 761-372. Sensor OFF.
761-313 PASS Machine 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine
Sensor OFF.
(Reverse ejection)
Unit=10ms/step
lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms Last storage location - see 761-372.
(Reverse ejection) 761-318 PASS Machine 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine
Unit=10ms/step EXIT SENSOR 8 Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit
Sensor OFF.
Sensor OFF.
(Reverse ejection)
Unit=10ms/step
Sensor OFF.
Sensor OFF.
(Reverse ejection)
Unit=10ms/step
Sensor OFF.
(Reverse ejection)
Unit=10ms/step

Chain- Chain-
761-321 1PASS INVERT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path 761-326 PASS INVERT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path
PATH SENSOR 1 Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sen- PATH SENSOR 6 Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sen-
sor OFF. sor OFF.
Theoretical value=331ms Theoretical value=331ms
JAM TIMER=250-532ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms
761-322 PASS INVERT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path 761-327 PASS INVERT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path
sor OFF. sor OFF.
sor OFF. sor OFF.
sor OFF. sor OFF.
sor OFF. sor OFF.

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
761-331 ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path 761-337 ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path
DUPLEX PATH Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor DUPLEX PATH Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor
SENSOR 1 ON. SENSOR 7 ON.
761-335 ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path 761-341 ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out
DUPLEX PATH Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor DUPLEX OUT Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sen-
SENSOR 5 ON. SENSOR 1 sor ON.
DSP: ARRV DUP Theoretical value=570ms Theoretical value=808ms
Path SNR 5 Unit=10ms/step Unit=10ms/step
761-336 ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path 761-342 ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out
DUPLEX PATH Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor DUPLEX OUT Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sen-
SENSOR 6 ON. SENSOR 2 sor ON.

Chain- Chain-
761-343 3ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out 761-348 ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out
DUPLEX OUT Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sen- DUPLEX OUT Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sen-
SENSOR 3 sor ON. SENSOR 8 sor ON.
DSP: ARRV DUP Default=0ms Theoretical value=808ms
out SNR 3 Range=None Unit=10ms/step
Theoretical value=808ms Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR)
Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) 761-349 ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out
Last storage location - see 761-375. DUPLEX OUT Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sen-
761-344 ARRIVE AT SENSOR 9 sor ON.
0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out
DUPLEX OUT Theoretical value=808ms
Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sen-
SENSOR 4 sor ON. Unit=10ms/step
Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) 761-350 ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out
Last storage location - see 761-375. DUPLEX OUTSEN- Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sen-
761-345 ARRIVE AT SOR 10 sor ON.
DUPLEX OUT Theoretical value=808ms
SENSOR 5 sor ON. Unit=10ms/step
Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) 761-351 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
Last storage location - see 761-375. PRE FEED SEN- (761-101-110) (#1 Pre-Feed Sensor
761-346 ARRIVE AT SOR INDICATE arrival timings 1-10)
DUPLEX OUT POINT e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is
saved in 5, the previous data is saved in
SENSOR 6 sor ON.
4, and the data prior to the previous data
Theoretical value=808ms
is saved in 3.
Unit=10ms/step
761-352 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
PRE FEED SEN- (761-111-120) (#2 Pre-Feed Sensor
Last storage location - see 761-375. SOR INDICATE arrival timings 1-10)
761-347 ARRIVE AT 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out POINT e.g.;: If the value is 5, the latest data is
DUPLEX OUT Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sen- saved in 5, the previous data is saved in
SENSOR 7 sor ON. 4, and the data prior to the previous data
Theoretical value=808ms is saved in 3.
Unit=10ms/step 761-353 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) PRE FEED SEN- (761-121-130) (#3 Pre-Feed Sensor
Last storage location - see 761-375. SOR INDICATE arrive timings 1-10)
POINT e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is
is saved in 3.

manuals4you.com
Chain- Chain-
761-354 ARRIVE AT TRAY4 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings 761-360 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
PRE FEED SEN- (761-131-140) (#4 Pre-Feed Sensor REGI SENSOR (761-191-200) (#2 Pre-Regi Sensor
SOR INDICATE arrival timings 1-10) INDICATE arrival timings 1-10)
POINT e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is POINT(USED e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is
saved in 5, the previous data is saved in TRAY 2) saved in 5, the previous data is saved in
4, and the data prior to the previous data 4, and the data prior to the previous data
is saved in 3. is saved in 3.
761-355 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings 761-361 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
FEED OUT SEN- (761-141-150) (#1 Feed Out Sensor REGI SENSOR (761-201-210) (#3 Pre-Regi Sensor
761-356 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings 761-362 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
FEED OUT SEN- (761-151-160) (#2 Feed Out Sensor REGI SENSOR (761-211-220) (#4 Pre-Regi Sensor
761-357 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings 761-363 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
FEED OUT SEN- (761-161-170) (#3 Feed Out Sensor SENSOR INDI- (761-221-230) (#1 Regi Sensor arrival
SOR INDICATE arrival timings 1-10) CATE timings 1-10)
761-358 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings 761-364 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
FEED OUT SEN- (761-171-180) (#4 Feed Out Sensor SENSOR INDI- (761-231-240) (#2 Regi Sensor arrival
SOR INDICATE arrival timings 1-10) CATE timings 1-10)
761-359 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings 761-365 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
REGI SENSOR (761-181-190) (#1 Pre-Regi Sensor SENSOR INDI- (761-241-250) (#3 Regi Sensor arrival
INDICATE arrival timings 1-10) CATE timings 1-10)
POINT(USED e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is POINT(USED e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is
TRAY 1) saved in 5, the previous data is saved in TRAY 3) saved in 5, the previous data is saved in

Chain- Chain-
761-366 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings 761-372 Machine EXIT 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
SENSOR INDI- (761-251-260) (#4 Regi Sensor arrival SENSORINDI- (761-311-320) (Machine Exit Sensor
CATE timings 1-10) CATE POINT arrival timings 1-10)
POINT(USED e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is
TRAY 4) saved in 5, the previous data is saved in saved in 5, the previous data is saved in
761-367 PASS REGI SEN- 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings 761-373 PASS A INVERT 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
SOR INDICATE (761-261-270) (#1 Regi Sensor pass tim- PATH SENSOR (761-321-330) (Invert path Sensors 1-10)
POINT(USED ings 1-10) INDICATE POINT e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is
TRAY 1) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in
saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data
4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3.
is saved in 3. 761-374 ARRIVE AT 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
761-368 PASS REGI SEN- 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings DUPLEX PATH (761-331-340) (Invert path Sensors 1-10)
SOR INDICATE (761-271-280) (#2 Regi Sensor pass tim- SENSOR INDI- e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is
POINT(USED ings 1-10) CATE POINT saved in 5, the previous data is saved in
TRAY 2) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is 4, and the data prior to the previous data
saved in 5, the previous data is saved in is saved in 3.
4, and the data prior to the previous data 761-375 ARRIVE AT 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
is saved in 3. DUPLEX OUT (761-341-350) (Duplex Out Sensors 1-10)
761-369 PASS REGI SEN- 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings SENSOR INDI- e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is
SOR INDICATE (761-281-290) (#3 Regi Sensor pass tim- CATE POINT saved in 5, the previous data is saved in
POINT(USED ings 1-10) 4, and the data prior to the previous data
TRAY 3) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is is saved in 3.
is saved in 3.
761-370 PASS REGI SEN- 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
SOR INDICATE (761-291-300) (#4 Regi Sensor pass tim-
POINT(USED ings 1-10)
TRAY 4) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is
is saved in 3.
761-371 FUSER EXIT SEN- 0 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings
SORINDICATE (761-301-310) (#1 Fuser Exit Sensor
POINT arrival timings 1-10)
e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is
is saved in 3.

manuals4you.com
dC131SYS NVM List (752) Table 1 SYS NVM List (752)
Chain-
Table 1 SYS NVM List (752) Link Name Default Range Description
Chain- 752-011 MULTI TRAY CONFIG - 0-1 0= No,
Link Name Default Range Description 1= HCF
For the optional data sent when
752-001 MARKET - 0-3 0=FX
entering into the PWS Service
1=AP
Mode (Automatically set at Power
2=NASG
On)
3=ESG
Machine determines the market 752-012 (Spare) - 0-1 -
from this parameter. This area is 752-013 PRODUCT CODE No 1 - 0-255 Product code (ASCII Code)
not initialized. 752-014 PRODUCT CODE No 2 - 0-255 Product code (ASCII Code)
752-002 EPSV EXIST - 0-1 0= No 752-015 PRODUCT CODE No 3 - 0-255 Product code (ASCII Code)
1= Yes
752-016 PRODUCT CODE No 4 - 0-255 Product code (ASCII Code)
752-003 TELEPHONE LINE - 0-1 0= No
752-017 EPC Option Config 0 0-2 0 = no EPC
EXIST 1= Yes This is sent as optional
1 = EPC @ 1st DDI
data when entering into the PWS
2 = EPC @ 2nd DDI
Service Mode.
752-018 Auto Upgrade NVM - 0-65535 NVM automatic upgrade function
752-004 MDSS EXIST 0 0-1 0 = No MDSS
after introduction in the market.
1 = MDSS Connected
752-005 XJ CODE PIN Number 1 - 0-255 Factory management code
752-008 Machine CONFIG - 0-4 0=DC
1=CP
2=CPS
3=P
4=P (with UI)
Mode
752-009 DADF EXIST - 0-1 0= None (Platen)
1= DADF
On)
752-010 OUTPUT CONFIG - 0-3 0= No (Top tray),
1= Offset Catch Tray,
2= Sorter,
3= Mail Box
For the option data sent when
On)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-81 dC131SYS NVM List (752)
dC131SYS NVM List (759) Table 1 SYS NVM List (759)
Chain-
Table 1 SYS NVM List (759) Link Name Default Range Description
Chain- 759-054 Scan ESS INFO 0 0-5 Valid if Machine Config is CPS, and
Link Name Default Range Description sets the Print ESS connection sta-
tus.
759-005 FORCED FACE UP EXIT 0 0-1 0= Invert ejection
0= 1st I/F Port connection
1= Straight ejection
759-006 REPEAT MARGIN 0 0-1 0= Repeat margin= 3mm 1= 2nd I/F Port connection
1= Repeat margin= 0mm 2= 1st, 2nd I/F Port connection
759-011 APS PRIORITY 0 0-1 The meaning differs depending on 3= 1st I/F Port connection
the Market data in SYS NVM num- (+Scan to File Job)
ber 752-001. 4= 2nd I/F Port connection
(FX/AP, RX) 0= AB 1= Inch (+Scan to File Job)
(NASG) 0= Inch 1= AB 5= 1st, 2nd I/F Port connection
759-014 NVM VERSION (for EP) - - (TBD) (+Scan to File Job)
759-018 A-I/F SET 0 0-1 0= No A-I/F KIT, 1= with A-I/F KIT 759-073 Accessory Kit Control 1 0 0-1 Sets the Print Job accessory (1st
(MN unique FX/FXAP is not used.) DDI Port).
759-021 DADF MODE MAG100 1 0-1 0= Equal magnification - Fine adjust 0= With Card, No Job permis-
ADJ 1= Equal magnification - No fine sion without job count card
adjustment 1= With Card, No Job permis-
sion without job count card
759-023 GRADATION ADJ RST 1 0-2 0= No Tools setup/No MAX-
SEL SETUP 759-074 Accessory Kit Control 2 0 0-1 Sets the Print Job accessory (2nd
1= Tools reset/No MAXSETUP DDI Port).
0= With Card, No Job permis-
2= Tools reset/MAXSETUP
reset
1= With Card, No Job permis-
759-024 NO PAPER RUN SEL 0 0-2 0= No Paper Run - Not
selected
759-075 Billing Counter Display 0 0-1 0= Not displayed, 1= Displayed
1= Stop at page count limit
759-113 SET Major Version - - SW Set Version 1 (0-99)
2= Infinite Copy
759-114 SET Minor Version - - SW Set Version 2 (0-99)
759-042 Product Code Switch 0 0-1 0 = 4 digit Product Code
1 = 8 digit Product Code 759-115 SET Revision - - SW Set Version 3 (0-9)
759-051 ESS PORT PRIORITY 0 0-1 0= 1st I/F Port connection - 759-116 SET Patch - 0-9 SW Set Version 4
ESS priority a-z
1= 2nd I/F Port connection - 759-117 IOSS Major Version - - IOSS SW Version1 (0-99)
ESS priority 759-118 IOSS Minor Version - - IOSS SW Version2 (0-99)
759-052 Job Acceptance Prohibi- 30 1-255 (Unit= Second) Max= 4 minutes 15 759-119 IOSS Revision - - IOSS SW Version3 (0-9)
tion Timer seconds 759-120 IOSS Patch - 0-9 IOSS SW Version
759-053 Print ESS INFO 0 0-2 Valid if Machine Config is P, P(with a-z
UI), CP, or CPS, and sets the Print 759-121 UI-P Major Version - - UI Program SW Version1 (0-99)
ESS connection status. 759-122 UI-P Minor Version - - UI Program SW Version2 (0-99)
0= 1st I/F Port connection 759-123 UI-P Revision - - UI Program SW Version3 (0-9)
1= 2nd I/F Port connection 759-124 UI-P Patch - 0-9 UI Program SW Version4
2= 1st, 2nd I/F Port connection a-z
759-125 UI-F Major Version - - UI Frame SW Version1 (0-99)
759-126 UI-F Minor Version - - UI Frame SW Version2 (0-99)
759-127 UI-F Revision - - UI Frame SW Version3 (0-9)

dC131SYS NVM List (759) 6-82 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 SYS NVM List (759) dC131 BILLING NVM List (990)
Chain-
Link Name Default Range Description Table 1 Billing NVM List (900)
759-128 UI-F Patch - 0-9 UI Frame SW Version4 Chain-
a-z Link Name Default Range Description
759-139 IOT-SYS ROM VER 1 - - (Initialization/Write: prohibited) Cap 990-001 Full Color Copy billing meter - - Full Color Copy electronic
(ex: a ->10, b->11) (Upper) (IOT EEP-ROM) billing (001& 002: One bill-
759-140 IOT-SYS ROM VER 2 - - (Initialization/Write: prohibited) ing)
VERSION (0-999) 990-002 Full Color Copy billing meter - - (001& 002: One)
759-141 P-SYS 1 ROM VER 1 - - (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Lower) (IOT EEP-ROM)
759-142 P-SYS 1 ROM VER 2 - - (Initialization/Write: prohibited) 990-003 Full Color Print billing meter - - Full Color Print electronic
759-143 P-SYS 2 ROM VER 1 - - (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Upper) (IOT EEP-ROM) billing (003& 004: One bill-
759-144 P-SYS 2 ROM VER 2 - - (Initialization/Write: prohibited) ing)
759-145 S-SYS 1 ROM VER 1 - - (Initialization/Write: prohibited) 990-004 Full Color Print billing meter - - (003& 004: One)
(Lower) (IOT EEP-ROM)
759-146 S-SYS 1 ROM VER 2 - - (Initialization/Write: prohibited)
990-005 B/W Copy billing meter (Upper) - - B/W Copy electronic billing
(IOT EEP-ROM) (005& 06: One billing)
990-006 B/W Copy billing meter (Lower) - - (005& 006: One)
759-149 JOB CON ROM VER 1 - - (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (IOT EEP-ROM)
759-150 JOB CON ROM VER 2 - - (Initialization/Write: prohibited) 990-007 B/W Print billing meter (Upper) - - B/W Print electronic billing
(IOT EEP-ROM) (007& 008: One billing)
990-008 B/W Print billing meter (Lower) - - (007& 008: One)
(IOT EEP-ROM)
990-009 Large Size Full Color billing meter - - Large Size Full Color elec-
(Upper) (IOT EEP-ROM) tronic billing (009& 010: One
billing)
990-010 Large Size Full Color billing meter - - (009& 010: One)
990-011 Large Size B/W billing meter - - Large Size B/W electronic
(Upper) (IOT EEP-ROM) billing (011& 012: One bill-
ing)
990-012 Large Size B/W billing meter - - (011& 012: One)
990-013 Full Color Copy billing meter - - Full Color Copy electronic
(Upper) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) billing (013& 014: One bill-
ing)
990-014 Full Color Copy billing meter - - (013& 014: One)
(Lower) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM)
990-015 Full Color Print billing meter - - Full Color Print electronic
(Upper) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) billing (015& 016: One bill-
ing)
990-016 Full Color Print billing meter - - (015& 016: One)
(Lower) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM)
990-017 B/W Copy billing meter (Upper) - - B/W Copy electronic billing
(Half-Tone EEP-ROM) (017& 018: One billing)
990-018 B/W Copy billing meter (Lower) - - (017& 018: One)
(Half-Tone EEP-ROM)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-83 dC131SYS NVM List (759), dC131 BILLING NVM
Table 1 Billing NVM List (900) dC131 Procon1 NVM List (773)
Chain-
Link Name Default Range Description Table 1 Procon 1 NVM List (773)
990-019 B/W Print billing meter (Upper) - - B/W Print electronic billing Chain-
(Half-Tone EEP-ROM) (019& 020: One billing) Link Name Default Range Description
990-020 B/W Print billing meter (Lower) - - (019& 020: One) 773-001 DISP SW 1 0-65535 Toner control switch
(Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 0= Display control by NVM
990-021 Large Size Full Color billing meter - - Large Size Full Color elec- timer
(Upper) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) tronic billing (021& 022: One 1= Display control by
billing) ADC+ICDC
990-022 Large Size Full Color billing meter - - (021& 022: One) 2 or more= Display control by
(Lower) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) ICDC
990-023 Large Size B/W billing meter - - Large Size B/W electronic 773-002 ELEC SW 1 0-65535 Potential/Light control switch
(Upper) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) billing (023& 024: One bill- 0= Fixed NVM (773-401 - 773-
ing) 404): VG control, Fixed NVM
990-024 Large Size B/W billing meter - - (023& 024: One) (773-421): LD control, Fix
(Lower) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) NVM: BIAS/ASG control (VH/
990-025 Full Color Copy billing meter - - Full Color Copy electronic VM Setup and LDCONT func-
(Upper) (NVM) billing (025& 026: One bill- tions: Not done) (VH/VM patch:
ing) Created and measured,
LDCONT VM patch: Not cre-
ated)
1= VH/VM Setup - VG/BIAS/
ASG value corrected, LD
CONT-LD value corrected
2 or more= VH/VM Setup - VG/
BIAS value/LD value corrected
(LDCONT function not done.
No VM patch is created)
773-007 TRC SW 1 0-65535 Gray scale control switch
0= LUT through - ADC patch is
measured.
1= LUT calculation in the Gray
scale control (TRC CONT MIN/
JOB)
2= LUT calculation only in TRC
CONT MIN. ADC measure-
ment.
3 or more= LUT is not calcu-
lated. ADC patch is measured.
773-011 Vclean Fail 0 0-65535 Vclean measurement= Number of
Faults (Hidden Fault)
773-012 VHVM Fail 0 0-65535 VH/VM Setup= Number of Faults
(Hidden Fault)
773-013 LDCONT Fail 0 0-65535 LD CONTROL= Number of Faults
(Hidden Fault)
773-014 Hum Fail 0 0-65535 Humidity measurement= Number of
Faults (Hidden Fault)

dC131 BILLING NVM List (990), dC131 Procon1 NVM 6-84 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 Procon 1 NVM List (773) Table 1 Procon 1 NVM List (773)
Chain- Chain-
773-016 ADC Vp Fail (Y) 0 0-65535 ADC patch Fault (Y) 773-283 Radc SET Adj [C] 280 0-65535 C-color: Correction target ADC
773-017 ADC Vp Fail (M) 0 0-65535 ADC patch Fault (M) patch density (after correction) at
773-018 ADC Vp Fail (C) 0 0-65535 ADC patch Fault (C) VH/VM SETUP
773-019 ADC Vp Fail (K) 0 0-65535 ADC patch Fault (K) 773-284 Radc SET Adj [K] 180 0-65535 K-color: Correction target ADC
patch density (after correction) at
773-071 VGS Fail 0 Number of VGS Faults
VH/VM SETUP
773-072 VHS FAIL 0 Number of VHS Faults
773-382 VGS CALC 710 0-1023 VGS calculated value (VH/VM
773-073 LDS FAIL 0 Number of LDS Faults SETUP)
773-074 VMS FAIL 0 Number of VMS Faults 773-384 LDS CALC 126 0-255 LDS calculated value (VH/VM
773-231 AGCS S 300 0-1023 Gain output for ADC SNR mirror fin- SETUP)
ished surface element 773-421 LD JOB 126 0-255 LD light amount during copy
773-251 ADC Vclean S A 0 0-65535 ADC non development output: A- (Updated: VH/VM SETUP and
surface measurement (Mirror sur- LDCONT)
face element) 773-516 Kicdc [Y] 7 0-65535 Y-color: ICDC supply calculation
773-252 ADC Vclean S B 0 0-65535 ADC non development output: B- coefficient (positive only)
surface measurement (Mirror sur- 773-517 Kicdc [M] 7 0-65535 M-color: ICDC supply calculation
face element) coefficient (positive only)
773-256 ADC Vclean D A 0 0-65535 ADC non development output: A- 773-518 Kicdc [C] 7 0-65535 C-color: ICDC supply calculation
surface measurement (diffusion ele- coefficient (positive only)
ment)
773-519 Kicdc [K] 10 0-65535 K-color: ICDC supply calculation
773-257 ADC Vclean D B 0 0-65535 ADC non development output: B- coefficient (positive only)
surface measurement (diffusion ele- 773-571 Kadc posi [Y] 250 0-65535 Y-color: ADC toner supply calcula-
ment) tion coefficient (for positive value)
773-261 VHS target 717 0-65535 Target VH potential (before correc- 773-572 Kadc posi [M] 250 0-65535 M-color: ADC toner supply calcula-
tion) at VH/VM SETUP: 700v
tion coefficient (for positive value)
773-266 Radc SET [Y] 250 0-65535 Y-color - Target ADC patch density
773-573 Kadc posi [C] 250 0-65535 C-color: ADC toner supply calcula-
(before correction) at VH/VM tion coefficient (for positive value)
SETUP
773-574 Kadc posi [K] 350 0-65535 K-color: ADC toner supply calcula-
773-267 Radc SET [M] 250 0-65535 M-color - Target ADC patch density
tion coefficient (for positive value)
(before correction) at VH/VM
773-576 Kadc nega [Y] 375 0-65535 Y-color: DSP: ADC toner supply cal-
SETUP
culation coefficient (for negative
773-268 Radc SET [C] 280 0-65535 C-color - Target ADC patch density
value)
SETUP 773-577 Kadc nega [M] 375 0-65535 M-color: DSP: ADC toner supply cal-
773-269 Radc SET [K] 180 0-65535 K-color - Target ADC patch density
value)
SETUP 773-578 Kadc nega [C] 375 0-65535 C-color: DSP: ADC toner supply cal-
773-276 VHS Adj 717 0-65535 Correction target VH potential (after
value)
correction) at VH/VM SETUP
773-579 Kadc nega [K] 500 0-65535 K-color: DSP: ADC toner supply cal-
773-281 Radc SET Adj [Y] 250 0-65535 Y-color: Correction target ADC patch
density (after correction) at VH/VM
value)
SETUP
773-591 ADC Vpatch S [Y] 0 0-65535 Y-color: ADC patch measurement
773-282 Radc SET Adj [M] 250 0-65535 M-color: Correction target ADC
value (Mirror element)
patch density (after correction) at
VH/VM SETUP

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-85 dC131 Procon1 NVM List (773)
Table 1 Procon 1 NVM List (773) dC131 Procon2 NVM List (774)
Chain-
Link Name Default Range Description Table 1 Procon2 NVM List (774)
773-592 ADC Vpatch S [M] 0 0-65535 M-color: ADC patch measurement Chain-
value (Mirror element) Link Name Default Range Description
773-593 ADC Vpatch S [C] 0 0-65535 C-color: ADC patch measurement 774-001 CC I TOT 717 0-1023 Current total CC electric current
value (Mirror element) (0=0 micro ampere 1023=1000
773-594 ADC Vpatch S [K] 0 0-65535 K-color: ADC patch measurement micro ampere)
value (Mirror element) 774-004 CC V GRID 717 0-1023 Current grid CC voltage (0=0V
773-596 ADC Vpatch D [Y] 0 0-65535 Y-color: DSP: ADC patch measure- 1023=1000V)
ment value (Diffusion element) 774-005 CC V GRID DFLT 717 0-1023 Grid voltage to check the CC
773-597 ADC Vpatch D [M] 0 0-65535 M-color: DSP: ADC patch measure- output (0=0V 1023=1000V)
ment value (Diffusion element) 774-008 BOTTLE NOT IN POSI- 0 Waste bottle (0=Yes 1=No)
773-598 ADC Vpatch D [C] 0 0-65535 C-color: DSP: ADC patch measure- TION
ment value (Diffusion element) 774-015 BOTTLE EMP 0 EMPTY counter
773-599 ADC Vpatch D [K] 0 0-65535 K-color: DSP: ADC patch measure- COUNTER
ment value (Diffusion element) 774-017 BOTTLE EMP HOLD 0 EMP Counter record when the
773-606 Radc patch [Y] 0 0-65535 Y-color: ADC patch measurement Bottle Goal was determined.
density 774-018 BOTTLE FULL 0 Collection status FLG (0= Empty
773-607 Radc patch [M] 0 0-65535 M-color: ADC patch measurement 1= Near Full 2= Full)
density 774-019 BOTTLE FULL 0 Near Full Counter
773-608 Radc patch [C] 0 0-65535 C-color: ADC patch measurement COUNTER
density 774-020 BOTTLE GOAL 300 0-65536 Threshold to generate a Bottle
773-609 Radc patch [K] 0 0-65535 K-color: ADC patch measurement Full Fault
density 774-029 PCC dC 12 130 0-255 DC current to reduce cycle 1-2
(0=0 micro ampere 255=800
micro ampere)
(If out of the range, MAX value is
output.)
774-033 PCC dC ER 96 0-255 DC current for elimination= Nom-
inal (0=0 micro ampere 255=800
micro ampere)
(If out of the range, MAX value is
output.)
774-056 X CRU TYPE 48=FSMA 0-255 Drum unit type (0XAA)
49=T&M
774-057 CRU COUNT MODE 0 0-1 Shut-down condition setting flag
0= Shut-down with the set
count value.
1= Shut-down when
exceeding the set count
value.
774-070 DRUM CYCLEUPPER 0 Drum cycle count: L side count
L (0-99)
774-071 DRUM CYCLEUPPER 3400 Drum cycle count: H side count
H (0-65535)

dC131 Procon1 NVM List (773), dC131 Procon2 NVM 6-86 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 Procon2 NVM List (774) dC131 Procon3 NVM List (775)
Chain-
Link Name Default Range Description Table 1 Procon3 NVM List (775)
774-074 DISP TIMELOWER 0 Toner dispense time: L side Chain-
value (0-3599/Unit: 0.1 second) Link Name Default Range Description
774-075 DISP TIMEUPPER 2000 Toner dispense time: H side 775-001 Vclean TRC Fail 0 0-65535 TRC ADC non-develop-
value (0-65535/Unit: 0.1 hour) ment: Output Fault counter
774-081 SIGN DRUM 0 Drum cycle counter: Counter 775-002 TRC MINI Fail [Y] 0 0-65535 TRC patch fault counter (Y)
sign (0: Positive, 256: Negative)
775-003 TRC MINI Fail [M] 0 0-65535 TRC patch fault counter (M)
Upper byte: Drum cycle counter
775-004 TRC MINI Fail [C] 0 0-65535 TRC patch fault counter (C)
sign
775-005 TRC MINI Fail [K] 0 0-65535 TRC patch fault counter (K)
774-173 AUGER STOP 0 0-3 Auger rotation detection Status
flag 775-019 MINI Timer SW 1 0-1 For Run Length=0 uncon-
0= Normal trollable fault at Maxsetup
1= Normal now but abnormal (Tone Up/Down)
rotation before 0= Tone Up/Down
2= Abnormal minimum run pages=3
3= Machine stop) (Mixing)
774-174 AUGER COUNTER 0 0-65535 Collection Auger Stop counter 1 or more= Tone Up/
(Unit= Print) Down minimum run
774-175 AUGER GOAL 200 0-65535 Threshold to generate the page=0
Cleaning AUGER Broken Fault <1 or more= Not available
in PWS. Cannot be set.>

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-87 dC131 Procon2 NVM List (774), dC131 Procon3
dC131 IBT NVM List (771), dC131 Drive NVM List (772) Table 1 IBT/Drive NVM List (771, 772)
Chain-
Table 1 IBT/Drive NVM List (771, 772) Link Name Default Range Description
Chain- 771-046 IBTCLN CAM TIME 650 0-65535 IBT Cleaner Blade cam - One
Link Name Default Range Description rotation time (Unit: MC)
771-003 ENV CTL ON 0 0-65535 Env. Control On/Off
0= Controls the environ- 771-051 BTR1 CD1 DUMMY 60 0-65535 1st BTR output correction (Thick
ment. paper dummy cycle) Unit:% (Valid
range: 0-100)
1= Does not control the envi-
ronment (Uses the Environ- 771-052 BTR1 CD2 DUMMY 30 0-65535 1st BTR output correction (Ultra
ment Number in ENV NO thick paper dummy cycle) Unit:%
SET.) (Valid range: 0-100)
Other= No environment con- 771-053 BTR1 OHP DUMMY 30 0-65535 1st BTR output correction (OHP
trol (Determines the Environ- dummy cycle) Unit:% (Valid
ment Number based on range: 0-100)
temperature/humidity data 771-054 BTR1 BW REVISE 10 0-65535 1st BTR output correction (B/W
specified in DBG TMP DAT mode) Unit:% (Valid range: 0-200)
and DBG HUM DATA) 771-055 BTR1 COL REVISE 100 0-65535 1st BTR output correction (Color
771-012 BTR1 HV 32 5-65535 1st BTR Remote output unit: mode) Unit:% (Valid range: 0-200)
micro ampere (Valid range= 400- 771-056 BTR1 SIMP REVISE 100 0-65535 1st BTR output correction (Sim-
800) plex mode) Unit:% (Valid range:
771-013 BTR2 HV 18 10-65535 2nd BTR Remote output unit: - 0-200)
0.1kV (Valid range: 10-75) 771-057 BTR1 DUP REVISE 100 0-65535 1st BTR output correction (Duplex
771-014 DTS dC HV 30 10-65535 DTS dC Remote output unit: - mode) Unit:% (Valid range: 0-200)
0.1kV (Valid range: 10-45) 771-063 OIL TONER BAND 32 0-65535 Oil Roll stripe - Toner band write
771-017 BTR1 REVISE 100 0-65535 1st BTR Remote correction value OFFSET (Valid range: 1-258)
Unit:% (Valid range: 0-100) Unit: mm
771-018 BTR2 REVISE 100 0-100 2nd BTR Remote correction value 771-064 OIL TONER BAND FS 303 0-65535 Oil Roll stripe - Toner band SF
Unit:% (Valid range: 0-100) direction (Valid range: 1-303)
771-019 DTS dC REVISE 100 0-65535 DTS dC Remote correction value Unit: mm
Unit:% (Valid range: 0-100) 771-074 DTS MONITOR 0 - Monitor value (Storage)
771-026 ENV NO 0 - Environment Table No (Storage) 771-083 BTR1 ON ADJ 0 0-65535 1st BTR HV ON time adjustment
771-037 BTR1 HV REM 0 - 1st BTR HV output (Storage) unit: Unit: MC
micro ampere
771-038 BTR2 HV REM 0 - 2nd BTR HV output (Storage) 771-085 BTR2HV ON ADJ NP 1121 0-65535 2nd BTR HV ON time adjustment
unit: -0.1kV (Normal paper/Second original)
771-039 DTS dC REM 0 - DTS dC HV output (Storage) unit: Unit: MC
-0.1kV 771-086 BTR2HV OFF ADJ NP 3 0-65535 2nd BTR HV Off time adjustment
(Normal paper/Second original)
771-042 BTR2 FAILBYPASS 0 0-65535 2nd BTR Contact/Retract Fail
Bypass (Valid range: 0-1) Unit: MC
0: Yes 1: No 771-087 BTR2HV ON ADJ CD1 1121 0-65535 2nd BTR HV ON time adjustment
771-043 IBTCLN FAILBYPASS 0 0-65535 IBT Cleaner Contact/Retract Fail (Thick paper) Unit: MC
Bypass (Valid range: 0-1) 771-088 BTR2HV OFF ADJ 3 0-65535 2nd BTR HV Off time adjustment
0: Yes 1: No CD1 (Thick paper) Unit: MC
771-045 BTR2 CAM TIME 500 0-65535 2nd BTR cam - One rotation time 771-089 BTR2HV ON ADJ CD2 1121 0-65535 2nd BTR HV ON time adjustment
(Unit: MC) DSP: BTR 2 HV ON (Ultra thick paper) Unit: MC
ADJ S-HVY

dC131 IBT NVM List (771), dC131 Drive NVM List (772) 6-88 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 IBT/Drive NVM List (771, 772) Table 1 IBT/Drive NVM List (771, 772)
Chain- Chain-
771-090 BTR2HV OFF ADJ 3 0-65535 2nd BTR HV Off time adjustment 771-122 IBTCLN CONT OFF 1 0-65535 IBT Cleaner Blade Contact
CD2 (Ultra thick paper) Unit: MC ADJ Off(From Home SNR start-up
771-091 BTR2HV ON ADJ 1121 0-65535 2nd BTR HV ON time adjustment detection to Clutch stop) time
POST (Post card) Unit: MC adjustment Unit: MC
771-092 BTR2HV OFF ADJ 3 0-65535 2nd BTR HV Off time adjustment 771-124 IBTCLN RET OFF 1 0-65535 IBT Cleaner Retract Off(From
POST (Post card) Unit: MC ADJI Home SNR stop detection to
771-093 BTR2HV ON ADJ OHP 1121 0-65535 2nd BTR HV ON time adjustment Clutch stop) time adjustment Unit:
(OHP/Tuck film) Unit: MC MC
771-094 BTR2HV OFF ADJ 3 0-65535 2nd BTR HV Off time adjustment 772-238 nvm sp updn 1000 0-65535 Magnification storage NVM for
IOT vertical magnification
OHP (OHP/ Tuck film) Unit: MC
(Input range: 996-1004)
771-095 DTS ON ADJ NP 1155 0-65535 DTS dC HV ON time adjustment
Unit: MC
771-096 DTS OFF ADJ NP 3 0-65535 DTS dC HV Off time adjustment
Unit: MC
771-097 DTS ON ADJ CD1 1155 0-65535 DTS dC HV ON time adjustment
(Thick paper) Unit: MC
771-098 DTS OFF ADJ CD1 3 0-65535 DTS dC HV Off time adjustment
(Thick paper) Unit: MC
771-099 DTS ON ADJ CD2 1155 0-65535 DTS dC HV ON time adjustment
(Ultra thick paper) Unit: MC
771-100 DTS OFF ADJ CD2 3 0-65535 DTS dC HV Off time adjustment
(Ultra thick paper) Unit: MC
771-101 DTS ON ADJ POST 1155 0-65535 DTS dC HV ON time adjustment
(Post card) Unit: MC
771-102 DTS OFF ADJ POST 3 0-65535 DTS dC HV Off time adjustment
(Post card) Unit: MC
771-103 DTS ON ADJ OHP 1155 0-65535 DTS dC HV ON time adjustment
(OHP/Tuck film) Unit: MC
771-104 DTS OFF ADJ OHP 3 0-65535 DTS dC HV Off time adjustment
(OHP/ Tuck film) Unit: MC
771-109 BTR2CONT ON ADJ 203 0-65535 2nd BTR Contact On(Contact
NP start) time adjustment (Normal
paper/2nd original) Unit: MC
771-114 BTR2CONT OFF ADJ 1 0-65535 2nd BTR Contact Off(From Home
SNR start-up detection to Clutch
stop) time adjustment Unit: MC
771-120 BTR2RET OFF ADJ 1 0-65535 2nd BTR Retract Off(From Home
SNR stop detection to Clutch
stop) time adjustment Unit: MC

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-89 dC131 IBT NVM List (771), dC131 Drive NVM List
dC131 Developer NVM List (776) Table 1 Developer NVM List (776)
Chain-
Table 1 Developer NVM List (776) Link Name Default Range Description
Chain- 776-372 NVM TNR STS Y 0 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: Y
Link Name Default Range Description 0=TONER FULL
776-367 RESERVE TANK STS 0 0-3 Toner Cartridge Empty status man- 1=LOW TONER
K agement: K 2=TONER NEAR EMPTY
FULL=0 3=TONER EMPTY
LOW=1 776-373 NVM TNR STS M 0 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection M
NEAR EMPTY=2 0=TONER FULL
EMPTY=3 1=LOW TONER
776-060 NVM dispense status 0 0-65535 0= dispense ready. 2=TONER NEAR EMPTY
(Y) 1= dispense near broken. 3=TONER EMPTY
2= dispense broken.
776-374 NVM TNR STS C 0 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: C
776-061 NVM dispense status 0 0-65535 0= dispense ready.
776-375 TONER NEAR 250 (X 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection:
(M) 1= dispense near broken. EMPTY 100ms) NEAREMPTY threshold - K default:
2= dispense broken.
25s
776-376 TONER EMPTY 1000 (X 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection:
(C) 1= dispense near broken.
100ms) EMPTY threshold - K default: 100s
2= dispense broken.
776-377 K DISP SUM 0 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection:
DISPENSE accumulation time
(K) 1= dispense near broken.
776-378 Y DISP SUM 0 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection:
2= dispense broken.
776-368 RESERVE TANK STS 0 0-3 Toner Cartridge - Empty status man-
776-379 M DISP SUM 0 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection:
Y agement: Y
FULL=0
776-380 C DISP SUM 0 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection:
LOW=1
NEAR EMPTY=2
776-381 K TNR LCK 0 0-65535 DISPENSE Black Dispense time
EMPTY=3 accumulation (up to LOW TONER)
776-369 RESERVE TANK STS 0 0-3 Toner Cartridge - Empty status man- 776-382 Y TNR LCK 0 0-65535 DISPENSE Yellow Dispense time
M agement: M
accumulation (up to LOW TONER)
FULL=0
776-383 M TNR LCK 0 0-65535 DISPENSE Magenta Dispense time
LOW=1 accumulation (up to LOW TONER)
NEAR EMPTY=2 776-384 C TNR LCK 0 0-65535 DISPENSE Cyan Dispense time
EMPTY=3 accumulation (up to LOW TONER)
776-370 RESERVE TANK STS 0 0-3 Toner Cartridge - Empty status man- 776-385 K WRN COUNT 0 0-65535 DISPENSE Black Dispense amount
C agement: C (up to NEAR EMPTY)
FULL=0
776-386 Y WRN COUNT 0 0-65535 DISPENSE Yellow Dispense amount
LOW=1 (up to NEAR EMPTY)
NEAR EMPTY=2 776-387 M WRN COUNT 0 0-65535 DISPENSE Magenta Dispense
EMPTY=3 amount (up to NEAR EMPTY)
776-371 NVM TNR STS K 0 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: K 776-388 C WRN COUNT 0 0-65535 DISPENSE Cyan Dispense amount
0=TONER FULL (up to NEAR EMPTY)
1=LOW TONER
2=TONER NEAR EMPTY
3=TONER EMPTY

dC131 Developer NVM List (776) 6-90 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 Developer NVM List (776) Table 1 Developer NVM List (776)
Chain- Chain-
776-395 DISPENSER STS K 0 0-65535 Dispenser status detection STATUS 776-441 DISP TIMER K 90 - Timer Dispense (K)
management - K Dispense time/Unit: 1ms
READY=0 776-442 DISP TIMER Y 90 - Timer Dispense (Y)
DOUBT=1 Dispense time/Unit: 1ms
NEAR BROKEN=2 776-443 DISP TIMER M 90 - Timer Dispense (M)
BROKEN=3 Dispense time/Unit: 1ms
776-405 NVM SUB CHK SW 0 0-2 Subsystem Check (Rotary move- 776-444 DISP TIMER C 90 - Timer Dispense (C)
ment) Dispense time/Unit: 10ms
I/O component check switch:
sw/0 component check= 0
Angle specification= 1
Target color - Move= 2
776-406 NVM SUB CHK 0 0-2 Subsystem Check (Rotary move-
RPOF ment) Profile selection
Fast= 0
Middle= 1
Slow= 2
776-407 NVM SUB CHK AGL 90 45,90,135, Subsystem Check (Rotary move-
180,225 ment) rotation angle
270,315,3 45= 45 degrees
60(degree) 225= 225 degrees
90= 90 degrees
135= 135 degrees
180= 180 degrees
225= 225 degrees
270= 270 degrees
315= 315 degrees
360= 360 degrees
776-408 NVM SUB CHK H 0 0-1 Subsystem Check (Rotary move-
ment) Home Position - Move
0= (default) - K-color move
1= HomePosition move
776-409 NVM SUB CHK 90 0 0-1 Subsystem Check (Rotary move-
ment) - 90 degree rotation pattern
selection
0= 1 rotation
1= 45+45 rotations
776-410 NVM SUB CHK 360 0 0 Subsystem Check (Rotary move-
ment) - 360 degree rotation pattern
selection
0= 315+45-2 rotations
776-436 ROTARY HOMEADJ 8(step) 0-65535 Home Position correction fault - gen-
FAIL eration threshold

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-91 dC131 Developer NVM List (776)
dC131 Fuser NVM List (777) Table 1 Fuser NVM list (777)
Chain-
Table 1 Fuser NVM list (777) Link Name Default Range Description
Chain- 777-109 SIZE MIX TIME 5 1-15 Threshold to determine whether
Link Name Default Range Description to do a dry run for size mix paper
feed interval. (Unit= Minute)
777-001 TEMP1 160 150-165 H/R1st temperature control
(Unit:degree (C)) 777-110 SIZE MIX DEF 0 0-1 Determines whether to do a dry
777-002 TEMP2 130 70-135 P/R1st temperature control run for size mix paper feed inter-
val.
(Unit:degree (C))
0= Yes 1= No
777-003 TEMP3 178 170-198 Ext H/R1st temperature control
(Unit: degree (C)) 777-135 TH0 4C NOR 193 100-200 HR & PR Not Ready temperature
start threshold: 4C/Normal paper
777-006 TEMP8 143 100-160 H/R Power save temperature
777-136 TH0 BW NOR 170 100-200 BW, Normal paper
(Unit: degree (C))
777-137 TH0 4C HVY 190 100-200 4C, Thick paper
777-007 TEMP9 130 70-135 P/R Power save temperature
(Unit: degree (C)) 777-138 TH0 BW HVY 183 100-200 BW, Thick paper
777-008 TEMP10 165 100-180 Ex. H/R Power save temperature 777-139 TH0 4C OHP 195 100-200 4C, OHP
(Unit: degree (C)) 777-140 TH0 BW OHP 213 100-200 BW, OHP
777-010 TEMP12 158 150-160 H/R Ready temperature (Unit: 777-160 LAMP OVHT FAIL 0 0-7 Overheating fault
degree (C)) 0= None
777-011 TEMP13 115 70-130 P/R Ready temperature (Unit: 1=HR
degree (C)) 2=HR Safety
777-012 TEMP14 165 165-180 Ex. H/R Ready temperature (Unit: 3=PR
degree (C)) 4=PR Safety
777-051 OIL PUMP ON 3000 40- OIL PUMP ON time (ms) 5=Ext HR
10000
6=Ext HR Safety
777-055 OIL CV CNTR 0 Number of pages ejected after
7= Environment sensor
OIL NEAR EMPTY (Max: 5000)
777-231 HR TEMP 0 - HR temperature: Current calcu-
777-056 OIL NEAR TO EMP 2000 500- Number of pages allowed from
lated value
3000 NEAR EMPTY to EMPTY.
777-232 PR TEMP 0 - PR temperature: Current calcu-
777-058 OIL LIMIT TIME 10 1-20 Time allowed after OIL NEAR
lated value
EMPTY/EMPTY (Unit: Minute)
777-233 Ext HR TEMP 0 - Ext HR temperature: Current cal-
777-075 WEB NEMP 1994 0-65534 Accumulated ON time threshold
culated value
to detect WEB NEAR EMPTY
(Minute) 777-321 Auto Set Up NVM 0 0-1 Automatic Set Up
0= Yes (default)
777-077 WEB STATE 0 - Displays the WEB status.
0=Full 1= No
1=Near Empty
2=Empty
777-079 WEB MOT ON TIME (L) 0 0-65535 Indicates Web material used.
7000 = 1 inch of Web.
777-081 AIR TMP 0 - Environment temperature
777-082 ENV TIME 30 - Environment temperature moni-
toring interval (min)
777-083 ENV TARGET 20 - Environment temperature correc-
tion threshold

dC131 Fuser NVM List (777) 6-92 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC131 Sorter/Finisher NVM List (780)(790) dC132 Serial Number/Billing Meter Synchronization
Purpose
Table 1 Sorter/Finisher NVM List (780, 790)
Checks the Billing Meters and sets the Machine Serial Number when fault 3-397 occurs. This
Chain- routine also reads the Billing Meters and can be accessed at any time for this purpose.
Link Name Default Range Description
780-001 Sorter Mail Box switching 0 0-1 0= Sorter, 1= MailBox Procedure
780-002 JAM counter (011-145) 0 0-99 number of jams CAUTION
780-003 JAM counter (011-146) 0 0-99 number of jams Failure to comply with the board replacement procedure in GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ,
780-004 JAM counter (011-142) 0 0-99 number of jams could result in catastrophic NVM corruption.
780-005 JAM counter (011-144) 0 0-99 number of jams Follow the procedure described in GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs .
780-006 JAM counter (011-143) 0 0-99 number of jams
780-012 Fail counter (011-273) 0 0-99 number of jams
780-013 Fail counter (011-274) 0 0-99 number of jams
780-020 Humidity (%) 0 0-100 Current humidity data
(Detected by the environment
sensor)
780-021 Toner ratio: Zl Side1 (%) 0 0 - 100 Last Copy Side1: Toner ratio
of first 1/3
780-022 Toner ratio: Zl Side2 (%) 0 0 - 100 Last Copy Side2: Toner ratio
of first 1/3
780-023 Toner ratio: Zt Side1 (%) 0 0 - 100 Last Copy Side1: Toner ratio
of last 1/3
780-024 Toner ratio: Zt Side2 (%) 0 0 - 100 Last Copy Side2: Toner ratio
of last 1/3
780-028 Decurler: Forced control 0 0-3 0= AUTO
1= Dec1 Only
2= Dec2 Only
3= Release Only
790-032 Stacker Capacity 0 0-1 0= 100 sets
1= 60 sets
790 -033 Set Eject 0 0-1 0= 50 sheets
1= 25 sheets

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-93 dC131 Sorter/Finisher NVM List (780), dC132 Serial
dC135 HFSI Counters dC135 HFSI Counter List
Purpose NOTE: Refer to Detailed Maintenance Activities in Section 1.
This routine displays the service life (Threshold) and the current value (count) of the periodic
replacement parts. Replacement life change, and current value resets are possible.
Procedure
using the PWS.
2. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. The All Jams screen displays as the
default screen.
3. Select HFSI Counters (dC135) tab on the Maintenance screen.
4. The HFSI Counters screen displays the replacement life (Threshold) and the current
value (count) of the periodic replacement parts. Two vertical tabs allow display of all HFSI
counters, or only those counters that are over threshold.
5. Refer to Detailed Maintenance Activities in Section 1. Perform the listed Service Action for
all HSFI counters that are at or near threshold.
6. To reset the count after replacing the parts, select the appropriate HFSI item, then select
the Reset Counter button.

dC135 HFSI Counters, dC135 HFSI Counter List 6-94 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC140 Analog Monitor 3. Increment or decrement the output level by 1. The new output level is input into the sys-
tem and the Analog Monitor shows the new output level in the Level column. If the output
Purpose level entered is out of the range, the Information screen shows the following message: “!
Monitors the analog values of the A/D converter sensors by driving each component (e.g.;, Invalid value. Enter again”. (A value that is out of the range is a value that is higher than
C.C). Temporary change of output values is possible. Output component check is also possi- the upper limit or lower than the lower limit defined by the machine.)
ble.
Procedure
using the PWS.
2. Select Diagnostics in the “Service Entry” Screen.
3. Select the Analog Monitor (dC140) Tab in the “Diagnostics Screen."
4. The system displays the “Analog Monitor” Screen.
a. The system displays the analog output component names and the analog input com-
ponent names with the Chain Link Numbers (ID column) in the table in the order of
Chain Link number.
b. The status of all output components show “Disabled”. The Level columns are blank.
5. Run the output component check:
a. Select a component to check.
b. Select Start in the output component check.
c. The output component in the machine turns “ON”.
d. The PWS changes the output component status to “Enable”.
e. Turn ON another component to check the output component in the machine.
NOTE: If the component has “ON Time Restriction”, the component is turned “ON”
for that period and automatically turned “OFF”.
NOTE: Some components cannot be turned “ON” at the same time another compo-
nent is turned “ON”. If you turn “ON” a component, the first component turned “ON”
will be automatically turned “OFF”.
NOTE: If the component cannot be automatically turned “OFF”, the following mes-
sage appears: “! Cannot check the component. Stop another output component”.
Check Multiple Components

1. To check multiple components simultaneously, repeat Step 5a through 5e.
2. To stop the check, select Stop while the component is selected, or select Stop All which
turns OFF all output components.
NOTE: The output component is turned OFF. The status shows “Disabled”.
Changing Output Levels

1. If you temporarily change the output level, you can check the output component by using
the [+] or [-] to increment/decrement the output level by 1.
2. Select the component whose output level you want to change. Select [+] to increment or [-
] to decrement.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-95 dC140 Analog Monitor
dC188 How to Exit from Service Mode dC301 NVM Initialization
Procedure Purpose
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode This procedure may be needed when the machine cannot recover for some unknown reasons,
using the PWS. including problems such as producing blank copies/prints, Xerographic CRUs not recognized,
2. Select the Service Exit Tab on the Screen. continuously giving system fault, etc.
3. The Service Exit Screen (dC188) displays.
4. The exit options are:
Prerequisites
Ensure that the following conditions are met:
• Complete Closeout
• IOT software level is v7.06.3 or higher.
• Temporary Closeout
• The PWS is running Next Generation PWS Tool Set Release 8.1 or higher.
NOTE: Selecting Complete Closeout resets the Shutdown History (dC122), Fault
• The PWS is running DC 12 PWS Tools v 7.1 or higher.
Counter (dC120), Jam Counters (dC118) and the numbers of copies since the last call.
• The current IOT SW Upgrade CD (Tag P39 or higher) is available.
5. Select Complete Closeout. The machine reboots. The UI Message “Ready to Copy” dis- • The customer has recorded any settings from Tools Mode, and all Auditron account data.
plays.
Procedure
NOTE: Selecting Temporary Closeout exits from the Service Mode without resetting the 1. Disconnect any Foreign Interface devices. Disregard the FI fault codes that will be
Shutdown History (dC122), Fault Counter (dC120), Jam Counter (dC118) and the number declared at power-up.
of copies since last call. 2. Obtain the following data:
6. Select Temporary Closeout. • NVM Value Factory Setting Report (typically it is located in the Tray 1 pocket).
7. Select Exit PWS to exit from the PWS Diagnostic Tool even if the PWS has been discon- • Any setting changes (specifically NVM settings) shown on the machine’s service log.
nected from the machine. • Any previously-saved machine NVM data on floppy disk.
8. After Exit PWS is selected, the following message will display, “Would you like to copy 3. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
Machine Data to the a:drive? Yes or No.” using the PWS.
• If "Yes" is selected, insert a diskette into a:drive and the PWS will write Machine Data 4. Go to dC371 Configuration Page. Verify the machine configuration. Correct any errors
to a:drive and the Diagnostics Tool will close. before continuing.
• If "No" is selected the Diagnostics Tool will close. 5. Go to dC351 NVM Background Processing. Select Save Machine Settings to save
NVM data. If the process is successful, proceed to step 7. If the NVM data was not saved
NOTE: If the PWS is disconnected from the machine after the machine entered the Ser-
vice Mode, the PWS and the machine does not automatically exit from the Service Mode. correctly, continue with step 6.
If the machine is disconnected from the PWS, Power-OFF/ON to exit from the Service NOTE: You may be unable to read or save NVM values using the PWS Diagnostics Tool due
Mode. to either a failed IOT CPU PWB or a failed NVM PWB. If you were sent here by the IOT PWB
replacement procedure, it may be possible to save NVM after the PWB is replaced.
If the NVM PWB has failed you will be required to re-enter the values from the Factory NVM
Settings or from a previous floppy disk database, and any other NVM changes retrieved in Ini-
tial Actions. You may need to perform setup and alignment procedures after initialization.
6. Go to dC131 NVM R/W. Record the values for the following locations:
• 749-030 Fault detection
• 759-053 Print ESS data
• 759-054 Scan ESS data
• 771-138 IBT Cleaner retract start time
• 772-017 Fuser Fan fail detection
• 773-004 Target Density switch
• 775-731 ATC Enable
• 775-750 ATC Calibration successful
• 775-815 TC set average
• 775-851 ADC change by ATC (Y)

dC188 How to Exit from Service Mode, dC301 NVM 6-96 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
• 775-852 ADC change by ATC (M) Table 1 NVM Initialization
• 775-853 ADC change by ATC (C) Name Description Remarks
7. Go to dC131 NVM R/W:
IOT (IOSS) The following NVM will be initial- Default: See dC131.
• Record the value in location 990-302 (v7.06.3 software only) ized. a.
• Record the value in location 759-039 (v7.06.3 software only) a. ROS NVM: Chain720 (All)
• If IOT software v11.50.3 is loaded, set NVM location 752-017 to 0. b. PH NVM: Chain740, 749,
• If a Foreign Interface was enabled, record the value in NVM location 759-015, then 760, 761 (All)
set location 752-002 to 0. c. Marking NVM: Chain770 (All
CAUTION except 087-100)
DO NOT use the Select All button to perform a complete NVM Initialization! If a full initializa- d. IBT NVM: Chain771 (All)
tion is indicated, reset each area one-at-a-time, in the following sequence: e. Drive NVM: Chain772 (All)
• IISS f. Procon NVM: Chain773,
• POST IPS 774, 775, 779 (All)
• IOSS g. Deve NVM: Chain776 (All)
• Sys h. Fuser NVM: Chain777 (All)
• UI i. SorterNVM: Chain780 (All)
• Sys (again) j. Billing NVM: Chain990: 037,
8. Select dC301 NVM Initialize. 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,
298, 299, 300, 301, 302
9. Select the appropriate area(s) to be initialized. Table 1 lists the NVM locations that are ini-
tialized with each area selection. SYS Default: See dC131.
a. SYS NVM: Chain752 (All a.
Table 1 NVM Initialization except the following codes)
(752-001-016)
Name Description Remarks
b. SYS NVM: Chain759 (All
IISS (PreIPS) The following NVM will be initial- Default: See dC131. except the following codes)
ized. a. (759-130-150)
a. IIT NVM: Chain710 (All)
UI The following NVM will be initial- Default: See dC131. Chain802 is
b. IIT NVM: Chain715 (All) ized: not initialized.
c. IIT NVM: Chain719 (All) a. UI NVM: Chain700 (All) a.
POST IPS The following NVM will be initial- Default: See dC131. b. UI NVM: Chain702 (All)
ized. a.
c. UI NVM: Chain850 (1-006)
a. IPS NVM:Chain730-001-169
10. After all initializations are complete, go to dC131 NVM R/W. Re-enter the values for those
locations (759-015, 759-039, and/or 990-302) that were saved in step 7.
11. If NVM was successfully saved in step 5, go to dC351 and select Restore Machine Set-
tings. If NVM was not successfully saved, use the date a from step 2 and step 6 to man-
ually restore NVM.
12. Re-enter the values in the following tables even if the display indicates that the values are
already correct.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-97 dC301 NVM Initialization
Table 3 v7.06.3 software
Location Value
759-004 0 = DC12 with DFE
Location Value
1 = DCCS 50
700-191 1 Use default for DC12 w/o DFE
700-193 0
700-099 1 13. Go to dC371 Configuration Page. Verify the machine configuration. Correct any errors
710-062 0 before continuing.
710-063 0 14. Exit the Diagnostic Mode. To exit Diagnostic Mode, refer to dC188 How to Exit from Ser-
vice Mode.
720-794 62
15. Reconnect any Foreign Interface devices.
730-027 260 (C/P only)
16. Run several copies/prints to confirm normal machine behavior.
752-002 0 = no Foreign Interface
17. Re-enter the Diagnostic Mode.
NOTE: When F/I is plugged in at 18. Set NVM location 715-001 to 0.
power-up, software will automati-
Set NVM location 720-368 to 0
cally enable F/I (value=1).
19. Perform Max Setup (ADJ 9.1.1).
752-004 0
752-012 0 = No Edit Pad
1 = Edit Pad Installed
752-017 1
759-004 0 = DC12 with DFE
1 = DCCS 50
Use default for DC12 w/o DFE
759-047 0
759-051 0
759-041 1
759-042 1
761-424 0
990-302 1
990-303 0

Location Value
710-062 0
710-063 0
752-002 0 = no Foreign Interface
NOTE: When F/I is plugged in at

power-up, software will automati-
cally enable F/I (value=1).
752-012 0 = No Edit Pad
1 = Edit Pad Installed

dC301 NVM Initialization 6-98 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC305 UI Component Check dC330 Component Control
Purpose Purpose
Checks the operations of the UI Screen and Control Panel buttons. The purpose of the dC330 Component Control is to display the logic state of input signals and
to energize output components.
Procedure
NOTE: Refer to Table 1 for a list of all Input Components listed by Chain/Link ID number. Refer
to Table 2 for a list of all Output Components listed by Chain/Link ID number.
using the PWS.
2. Select the Diagnostics Tab in the “Service Entry” Screen. Procedure
3. Select the System Test Tab in the “Diagnostics Screen”. The System Test Screen dis- 1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
plays. The UI Component Check dC305 is the default screen. using the PWS.
4. Select Start. The following message displays, “Perform the UI Component Check on the 2. Select the Diagnostics Tab on the “Service Entry” Screen.
Machine. When complete, select Stop”. 3. Select Component Control (dC330) on the “Diagnostic Entry” Screen.
5. Select OK. 4. The dC330 Screen is displayed. The display indicates the following:
6. Touch the UI Screen in a different locations. The highlighted point moves to the new loca- • Input/Output Components
tion.
• ID Number (chain/function order)
7. All LEDs should be illuminated when the dC305 Touch Screen Test is displayed. Select
• Active Stack (including ID and state of component)
Stop to Turn-OFF all LEDs.
8. Select Stop on the “Component Check” Screen. NOTE: The Component Control Codes can be selected in categories by their related sys-
9. The “Touch Screen Test” Screen on the machine UI closes. tem, such as: Processor, System, Sorter / OCT / Mailbox, Finisher, DADF, HCF and ITT.
5. Activate the desired component code by double clicking on the Chain/Link ID number or
by clicking once on the Chain/Link ID number then selecting the Start Button.
NOTE: The ID’s will display on the "Active Stack."
6. Press the Stop button or double click the active component in the active stack box to end
the test. The “ID” and “Active Stack” components are removed from the “Active Stack”
box.
Stacking Component Codes
1. To”stack” several codes, select the first code and press Start, then select the next code
and press Start. Continue to enter up to eleven codes.
2. The selected ID appears in the ID column of the Active Stack box and the state changes
to Run; H or L as applicable.
3. Stop a highlighted component by pressing Stop or double click the active component in
the “Active Stack” Box
4. To switch Off all components and clear the screen press Stop All.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-99 dC305 UI Component Check, dC330 Component
NOTE: Components that are currently running are shaded in Green. Components that have Table 1 Input Component Control Codes
been run are shaded in Yellow.
Module_I
ID Description In_Out Smart Help D
NOTE: When exiting dc330, the machine resets and communication between the PWS and
the machine is momentarily lost. The PWS will reconnect automatically. 005-301 TOP COVER I/L Input High: Open DADF
SWITCH Low: Closed
Input CC Codes 006-201 SHEET ABORT Input x IIT
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes
006-212 REGI SENSOR Input H: Light block IIT
Module_I L: Light reception
ID Description In_Out Smart Help D 006-240 DADF EXIST Input H: No DADF IIT
001-200 POWER SAVE BUT- Input High: Button press System L: DADF
TON Low: Button release 006-251 APS SENSOR 1 Input High: No document IIT
001-201 FOREIGN INTERFACE Input Low: Document
High: Not Connected System
EXIST Low: Connected 006-253 APS SENSOR 3 Input APS Sensor3 IIT
DSP: APS Sensor3
001-202 PWS EXIST Input High: Not Connected System
Low: Connected 006-272 PW-0 Input x IIT
001-300 FRONT DOOR INTER- Input High: Open Processor 006-280 FAN FAIL Input H: Failure IIT
LOCK Low: Closed L: No Failure
001-304 LEFT HAND COVER Input High: Open Processor 006-300 PLATEN I/L SWITCH Input High: Open IIT
INTERLOCK Low: Closed Low: Closed
001-306 DRAWER HANDLE Input H: Mark detected Processor 006-301 ANGLE SENSOR Input H: Light block IIT
INTERLOCK L: Not a mark L: Light reception
003-213 TRO SENSOR Input Run Drum Motor (004-021) simulta- Processor 007-100 HCF FEED TAR SEN- Input High: Paper HCF
neously. SOR Low: No Paper
High: Mark detected Detects the presence / absence of
Low: Not a Mark a sheet in the HCF paper path.
005-102 DOCUMENT SENSOR Input High: No document DADF 007-185 HCF Exist Input High: Stack is NOT home HCF
Low: Document Low: Stack is home
Detects the height of the HCF
005-110 REGI SENSOR Input High: Document DADF
Low: No document paper stack.
007-186 HCF STACK HEIGHT Input High: Stack is NOT home HCF
005-115 EXIT SENSOR Input High: Document DADF
SENSOR Low: Stack is home
Low: No document
Detects the height of the HCF
005-119 DUP SENSOR Input High: Document DADF paper stack.
Low: No Document
007-187 HCF 8.5x11 / A4 Input High: 8.5 x 11 HCF
005-150 1 SIZE SENSOR Input High: No document DADF SWITCH Low: A4
Low: Document Detects the size of the paper
005-151 2 SIZE SENSOR Input High: No document DADF loaded in the HCF.
Low: Document 007-188 NO PAPER SENSOR Input High: Paper HCF
005-201 EXCHANGE FROM Input High: Document Exchange IISS DADF Low: Now paper
IISS exchange to DADF Detects the presence / absence of
a sheet in the HCF paper path.
005-300 PLATEN I/L SWITCH Input High: Open DADF
Low: Closed

dC330 Component Control 6-100 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Table 1 Input Component Control Codes
Module_I Module_I
ID Description In_Out Smart Help D ID Description In_Out Smart Help D
007-189 TRAY CLOSED Input High: Drawer / Tray is closed HCF 008-163 BEHIND REGI JAM Input High: No Paper Processor
SWITCH Low: Drawer / Tray is open. SENSOR Low: Paper
Detects when the HCF paper
008-198 TRANSPERENCY Input High: No Transparency Processor
Drawer / Tray is closed. (OHP) 1 SENSOR Low: Transparency
007-190 HCF FEED HOT LINE Input Signal from the IOT to initiate paper HCF
008-199 OHP 2 SENSOR Input High: No Transparency Processor
feed from the HCF. In run mode a
Low: Transparency
high to low transition on this signal
will cause the HCF to feed paper. In 008-221 #1 TRAY STACK Input High: Light block Processor
the diagnostic mode, this signal has HEIGHT (LEVEL) SEN- Low: Light reception
no effect on the HCF. SOR
007-301 #1 TRAY SENSOR Input High: Tray Inserted Processor 008-222 #2 TRAY STACK Input High: Light block Processor
Low: Tray out HEIGHT (LEVEL) SEN- Low: Light reception
SOR
007-308 HCF INTERLOCK Input High: HCF is docked HCF
SWITCH Low: HCF is not docked. 008-223 #3 TRAY STACK Input High: Light block Processor
Detects that the HCF is properly HEIGHT (LEVEL) SEN- Low: Light reception
docked to the IOT. SOR
008-104 #1 PRE FEED SEN- Input High: No Paper Processor 008-224 #4 TRAY STACK Input High: Light block Processor
SOR Low: Paper HEIGHT (LEVEL) SEN- Low: Light reception
SOR
008-105 #1 FEED OUT SEN- Input High: No Paper Processor
SOR Low: Paper 008-226 #5 TRAY BYPASS) Input Run #5 (Bypass) Nudger Roll Sole- Processor
STACK HEIGHT LEVEL noid Simultaneously.
008-109 #2 PRE FEED SEN- Input High: No Paper Processor
UP SENSOR
SOR Low: Paper
High: Lift up state
008-110 #2 FEED OUT SEN- Input High: No Paper Processor Low: Lift down State
SOR Low: Paper
008-227 #5 TRAY (BYPASS) Input High: Lift Down State Processor
008-114 #3 PRE FEED SEN- Input High: No Paper Processor STACK HEIGHT LEVEL Low: Lift Up State
SOR Low: Paper DOWN SENSOR
008-115 #3 FEED OUT SEN- Input High: No Paper Processor 008-231 #1 TRAY NO PAPER Input High: No Paper Processor
SOR Low: Paper SENSOR Low: Paper
008-119 #4 PRE FEED SEN- Input High: No Paper Processor 008-232 #2 TRAY NO PAPER Input High: No Paper Processor
008-120 #4 FEED OUT SEN- Input High: No Paper Processor 008-233 #3 TRAY NO PAPER Input High: No Paper Processor
008-135 TRAY 5 FEED SEN- Input High: Paper Processor 008-234 #4 TRAY NO PAPER Input High: No Paper Processor
SOR Low: No Paper SENSOR Low: Paper
008-150 TAKE AWAY SENSOR Input High: No Paper Processor 008-236 TRAY 5 PAPER SEN- Input High: No Paper Processor
Low: Paper SOR Low: Paper
008-153 PRE REGI SENSOR Input High: No Paper Processor 008-240 #2 TRAY SIZE S/W 1 Input High: Switch on (soft data) Processor
Low: Paper Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch
1,2,3,4
008-155 REGI SENSOR Input High: No Paper Processor
Low: Paper Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch
1,2,3,4

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-101 dC330 Component Control
Module_I Module_I
008-241 #2 TRAY SIZE S/W 2 Input High: Switch on (soft data) Processor 008-251 #4 TRAY SIZE S/W 2 Input High: Switch on (Soft data) Processor
Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch
1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
008-242 #2 TRAY SIZE S/W3 Input High: Switch on (soft data) Processor 008-252 #4 TRAY SIZE S/W 3 Input High: Switch on (Soft data) Processor
1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
008-243 #2 TRAY SIZE S/W4 Input High: Switch on (soft data) Processor 008-253 #4 TRAY SIZE S/W 4 Input High: Switch on (Soft data) Processor
1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
008-245 #3 TRAY SIZE S/W1 Input High: Switch on (Soft data) Processor 008-305 Tray 5 Interlock Input High: Tray 5 (bypass) feeder open. Processor
Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch Low: Tray 5 feeder closed.
1,2,3,4
008-306 DRAWER HANDLE Input High: Open Processor
Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch
INTERLOCK Low: Close
1,2,3,4
009-215 2ND BELT TRANSFER Input High: Light block Processor
008-246 #3 TRAY SIZE S/W2 Input High: Switch on (soft data) Processor ROLL HOME POSI- Low: Light reception
Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch TION SENSOR
1,2,3,4
Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch 009-216 IBT CLEANER Input High: Home detected Processor
1,2,3,4 RETRACT HOME
POSITION
008-247 #3 TRAY SIZE S/W 3 Input High: Switch on (soft data) Processor
Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch 009-217 OIL ROLL RETRACT Input High: Light block Processor
1,2,3,4 HOME POSITION Low: Light reception
Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch 009-220 ROTARY HOME POSI- Input High: Home detected Processor
1,2,3,4 TION SENSOR
008-248 #3 TRAY SIZE S/W 4 Input High: Switch on (Soft data) Processor 009-237 ROTARY LOCK MECH Input High: Latch Processor
Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch SENSOR Low: Release
1,2,3,4
009-245 CRU POSITION Input High: If CRUM (X CRU Type) is cor- Processor
rectly read
1,2,3,4
009-246 CRU TYPE Input High: If CRUM (X CRU Type) is cor- Processor
008-250 #4 TRAY SIZE S/W 1 Input High: Switch on (Soft data) Processor
rectly read and NVM (CRU type)
matches.
1,2,3,4
Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch 009-248 WASTE AUGER Input x Processor
1,2,3,4 ROTATE SENSOR
009-249 WASTE BOTTLE POSI- Input High: Set Processor
TION SENSOR Low: Not Set

manuals4you.com
Module_I Module_I
009-250 WASTE BOTTLE FULL Input High: Full Processor 010-296 OCT DETECT Input High: OCT not connected Processor
SENSOR Low: Not Full Low: OCT connected
009-251 TRICKLE BOTTLE Input High: Trickle Bottle Full Processor 010-297 OCT FULL SENSOR Input High: Empty Processor
SENSOR Low: Not Full Low: Not Empty
009-255 LOW TONER SEN- Input High: Toner Processor 010-298 OCT HOME SENSOR Input High: Home position detected Processor
SOR K Low: No Toner 010-299 OCT POSITION SEN- Input High: Offset position detected Processor
009-257 LOW TONER SEN- Input High: Toner Processor SOR
SOR Y Low: No Toner 010-300 INVERT COVER Input High: Open Processor
009-258 LOW TONER SEN- Input High: Toner Processor INTERLOCK Low: Close
SOR M Low: No Toner
011-107 OCT EXIT SENSOR Input High: Paper Sorter
009-259 LOW TONER SEN- Input High: Toner Processor Low: No Paper
SOR C Low: No Toner Checks the paper ejection detection
sensor input (OCT)
010-100 FUSER ENTRANCE Input High: No Paper Processor
SENSOR Low: Paper 011-115 MAILBOX VERTICAL Input High: Paper Sorter
SENSOR Low: No Paper
010-105 FUSER EXIT SENSOR Input High: No Paper Processor
Low: Paper Checks the paper ejection detection
sensor input
010-110 MACHINE EXIT SEN- Input High: Paper Processor
SOR Low: No Paper 011-117 DECURLER EXIT SEN- Input x Sorter
SOR
010-115 EXIT PATH SENSOR Input High: Paper Processor
Low: No Paper 011-142 VERTICAL TRANS- Input High: Paper Sorter
PORT IN SENSOR Low: No Paper
010-125 INVERT PATH SEN- Input High: Paper Processor Checks the paper ejection sensor
SOR Low: No Paper input. (Bin 1-10)
010-130 DUPLEX IN SENSOR Input High: Paper Processor 011-250 OCT DEVICE DETECT Input x Sorter
Low: No Paper
011-273 OCT OFFSET HOME Input High: Home Sorter
010-132 DUPLEX PATH 1 SEN- Input High: Paper Processor SENSOR
SOR Low: No Paper
011-274 OCT OFFSET POSI- Input High: Offset Sorter
010-133 DUPLEX OUT SEN- Input High: Paper Processor TION SENSOR Checks the OCT Offset position
SOR Low: No Paper detection sensor input
010-220 PRESSURE ROLL Input High: Release Position Processor 011-275 OCT FULL STACK Input High: Not Full Sorter
RETRACT SENSOR Low: NIP Position SENSOR Low: Full
010-221 EXTERNAL HEAT Input High: Retract Position Processor 011-276 DECURLER CAM Input Checks the Decurler Cam Position Sorter
ROLL RETRACT SEN- Low: Contract Position POSITION SENSOR A sensor A input
SOR
011-277 DECURLER CAM Input x Sorter
010-222 OIL SENSOR Input High: Empty Processor POSITION SENSOR B
Low: Oil Not Empty
011-281 BIN 1 FULL SENSOR Input High: Not Full Sorter
010-223 WEB CRU HOME Input High: No CRU Processor Low: Full
Low: CRU Checks Bin 1 full detection sensor
010-224 IIT HOTLINE Input Normal state is Low Processor status

Module_I Module_I
011-282 BIN 2 FULL SENSOR Input High: Not Full Sorter 011-303 MBX DOCKING INTLK Input High: Docking Sorter
Low: Full SWITCHES Low: Open
Checks Bin 3 full detection sensor Checks the IOT docking
status.
012-107 SCT EXIT SENSOR Input High: Paper sensed Finisher
011-283 BIN 3 FULL SENSOR Input High: Not full Sorter Low: No paper sensed
Low: Full Senses Paper Ejected to SCT Tray
Checks Bin 3 full detection sensor
012-115 VERTICAL SENSOR Input High: Paper detected Finisher
status
Low: No paper detected
011-284 BIN 4 FULL SENSOR Input High: Not full Sorter Detects paper ejected to Bins 1-10
Low: Full
012-120 COMPILER EXIT SEN- Input High: Paper detected Finisher
Checks the Bin 4 full detection sen-
SOR Low: No paper detected
sor status
INTERRUPT TAMPER MOTOR
011-285 BIN 5 FULL SENSOR Input High: Not full Sorter drive starting signal, EJECT
Low: Full CLAMP & OFFSET MOTOR drive
Checks Bin 5 full detection sensor starting signal, STAPLER MOVE
status MOTOR drive starting signal, COM-
011-286 BIN 6 FULL SENSOR Input High: Not full Sorter PILER TRAY UP/DOWN SOLE-
NOID drive starting signal.
Low: Full
Checks Bin 6 full detection sensor 012-142 MAILBOX ENTRANCE Input High: Paper detected Finisher
status SENSOR Low: No paper detected
011-287 BIN 7 FULL SENSOR Input High: Not full Sorter Senses paper ejected to Mailbox
Low: Full 012-145 DECURLER EXIT SEN- Input High: Paper detected Finisher
Checks Bin 7 full detection sensor SOR Low: No paper detected
status Senses paper ejected to Decurler
Exit
011-288 BIN 8 FULL SENSOR Input High: Not full Sorter
Low: Full 012-200 MACHINE EXIT SEN- Input HOTLINE Finisher
Checks Bin 8 full detection sensor SOR
status 012-210 STACKER FULL SEN- Input High: Paper sensed Finisher
011-289 BIN 9 FULL SENSOR Input High: Not full Sorter SOR Low: Paper not Sensed
Low: Full Senses STACKER TRAY full of
Checks Bin 9 full detection sensor small sized paper.
status
012-212 STACKER FULL Input High: Paper sensed Finisher
011-290 BIN 10 FULL SENSOR Input High: Not full Sorter (MIXED SET SENSOR Low: Paper not Sensed
Low: Full Senses STACKER TRAY full of
Checks Bin 10 full detection sensor large sized paper.
status 012-240 EJECT CLAMP SEN- Input High: Sensed Finisher
011-301 MAILBOX FRONT Input High: Open Sorter SOR Low: Not Sensed
COVER INTERLOCK Low: Close Senses EJECT ROLL UP/DOWN
SWITCH Position.
STAPLER MOVE MOTOR drive
011-302 DECURLER FRONT Input High: Open Sorter
starting signal, END WALL OPEN/
COVER INTERLOCK Low: Close
CLOSE MOTOR drive-for-open
SWITCH Checks the Front Cover B
starting signal.

manuals4you.com
Module_I Module_I
012-241 EJECT CLAMP HOME Input High: Not Sensed Processor 012-271 STAPLE HEAD HOME Input High: Sensed Finisher
SENSOR Low: Sensed SENSOR Low: Not Sensed
Senses SET CLAMP HOME Posi- Senses Staple Head Home Posi-
tion. SET CLAMP MOTOR drive tion. Stapler Motor stop signal
stopping signal. (hardware stops driving). Eject
Motor drive starting signal.
012-250 STACK HEIGHT SEN- Input High: Not Sensed Finisher
SOR Low: Sensed 012-272 LOW STAPLE SWITCH Input High: Sensed Finisher
STACKER TRAY drive stopping sig- Low: Not Sensed
nal. Senses Low Staple status (40 or
012-252 COMPILER PAPER Input High: Paper sensed Finisher less staples remain).
SENSOR Low: No paper sensed 012-273 STAPLE READY SEN- Input High: Not closed Finisher
Senses paper (un)available on SOR Low: Closed
COMPILER TRAY. Senses a staple at front end of Sta-
012-253 STACKER PAPER Input High: Paper sensed Finisher ple Head.
SENSOR Low: No paper Available 012-274 CARTRIDGE SET Input High: Sensed Finisher
Senses paper (un)available on SWITCH Low: Not Sensed
STACKER TRAY. Senses Staple Cartridge is properly
installed.
012-259 STACKER UPPER Input High: Sensed Finisher
LIMIT SENSOR Low: Not Sensed 012-275 SCT FULL SENSOR Input High: Tray not full Finisher
Senses STACKER TRAY up limit. Low: Tray full
012-260 STACKER LOWER Input High: Sensed Finisher Senses SCT Tray full of paper.
LIMIT SENSOR Low: Not Sensed 012-276 DEC CAM POSITION Input High: Reflector sensed Finisher
Senses STACKER TRAY down SENSOR Low: Reflector not sensed
limit. Checks Decurler Cam Position
Sensor inputting.
012-265 TAMPER HOME SEN- Input High: Sensed Finisher
SOR Low: Not Sensed 012-277 OFFSET HOME SEN- Input High: Not sensed Finisher
Senses INTERRUPT TAMPER SOR Low: Sensed
HOME Position. TAMPER MOTOR Senses Eject Roll Home Position.
drive stopping signal. Eject Clamp & Offset Motor drive
starting signal.
012-269 STAPLER FRONT Input High: Sensed Finisher
CORNER SENSOR Low: Not Sensed 012-278 STAPLE FRONT Input High: Sensed Finisher
Senses INTERRUPT FRONT COR- STRAIGHT SENSOR Low: Not Sensed
NER Position. STAPLER MOVE Interrupt Front Straight Position.
MOTOR drive stopping signal. Stapler Move Motor drive stopping
signal.
012-270 END WALL OPEN Input High: Sensed Finisher
SENSOR Low: Not Sensed 012-279 STAPLE REAR Input High: Sensed Finisher
Senses End Wall open. Stapler STRAIGHT SENSOR Low: Not Sensed
Move Motor drive starting signal. Senses Rear Straight Position. Sta-
pler Move Motor drive stopping sig-
nal.

Module_I Module_I
012-281 BIN 1 FULL SENSOR Input High: Bin not full Finisher 012-300 COMPILER COVER Input High: Open Finisher
Low: Bin full INTERLOCK SWITCH Low: Closed
Checks Bin 1 Full Detection SNR Senses Compiler Cover Interlock
inputting. Open. IOT Feed stop signal.
012-282 BIN 2 FULL SENSOR Input High: Bin not full Finisher 012-301 MAILBOX DOOR Input High: Open Finisher
Low: Bin full INTERLOCK SWITCH Low: Closed
Checks Bin 2 Full Detection SNR Front Cover A Interlock Switch.
inputting.
012-302 DECURLER DOOR Input High: Open Finisher
012-283 BIN 3 FULL SENSOR Input High: Bin not full Finisher INTERLOCK SWITCH Low: Closed
Low: Bin full Front Cover B Interlock Switch
Checks Bin 3 Full Detection SNR 012-303 DOCKING INTERLOCK Input High: Docked Finisher
inputting. SWITCH Low: Undocked
012-284 BIN 4 FULL SENSOR Input High: Bin not full Finisher Senses the docking to Processor.
Low: Bin full IOT Feed stop signal.
Checks Bin 4 Full Detection SNR
012-304 STAPLE DOOR INTER- Input High: Open Finisher
inputting. LOCK SWITCH Low: Closed
012-285 BIN 5 FULL SENSOR Input High: Bin not full Finisher Senses Front Cover C Interlock
Low: Bin full open. IOT Feed Stop signal.
Checks Bin 5 Full Detection SNR 012-306 COMPILER COVER Input High: Closed Finisher
inputting.
SAFETY SWITCH Low: Open
012-286 BIN 6 FULL SENSOR Input High: Bin not full Finisher Senses Compiler Upper Chute
Low: Bin full open. IOT Feed stop signal that
Checks Bin 6 Full Detection SNR turns off 24V to Staple Motor.
inputting. 014-260 ROS READY Input High: Stop
012-287 BIN 7 FULL SENSOR Input High: Bin not full Finisher Low: Regular Rotation
Low: Bin full Checks the Polygon Motor
Checks Bin 7 Full Detection SNR Run Polygon Motor High Speed
inputting. (014 - 051) simultaneously
012-288 BIN 8 FULL SENSOR Input High: Bin not full Finisher 015-200 ITT IMAGE AREA Input Checks IIT image area IIT
Low: Bin full Output CC Codes
Checks Bin 8 Full Detection SNR Table 2 Output Component Control Codes
inputting.
012-289 BIN 9 FULL SENSOR Input High: Bin not full Finisher Module_I
Low: Bin full ID Description In_Out Smart Help D
Checks Bin 9 Full Detection SNR 003-001 TRD ENABLE Output x Processor
inputting.
003-002 24 OK Output Turn on (force) the K1 Relay of the Processor
012-290 BIN 10 FULL SENSOR Input High: Bin not full Finisher
AC Drive PWBA
Low: Bin full
Checks Bin 10 Full Detection SNR
inputting.
012-291 UNLOAD WHITE RUN Input High: Open Finisher
SWITCH Low: Closed
IOT Feed stop signal.

manuals4you.com
Table 2 Output Component Control Codes Table 2 Output Component Control Codes
Module_I Module_I
004-007 MAIN MOTOR Output The Main Motor rotates at a fre- Processor 006-003 COOLING FAN LOW Output ON: L IIT
quency of 2000.8 Hz SPEED Cooling Fan: High
The PR and IVT are turned on
006-005 IIT SCAN MOTOR Output Moves the Carriage 50mm in the IIT
simultaneously (Scan) scan direction and stops automati-
IF you operate the Drum Motor and
cally
the main Motor at the same time,
then start one of them, the other 006-006 IIT SCAN MOTOR Output IIT Scan Motor (Return) IIT
Motor will shut down. (This is (Return)
because they are both using the 006-007 FUSER CUT Output On: Active IIT
same Hard signal)
006-013 COOLING FAN HIGH Output On: L IIT
004-009 FUSER MOTOR Output The fuser motor rotates with a fre- Processor SPEED
quency of 1495.886 Hz.
006-086 IIT IMAGE AREA Output On: Active IIT
Note: also used with V-TRA
006-091 EXCHANGE TO ADF Output On: Active IIT
004-021 DRUM MOTOR Output - The drum motor rotates with a Processor
Simultaneous on item
frequency of 1495.886 Hz.
- Drum Motor Gain sell, 2 (low) 007-078 HCF FEED CLUTCH Output Engages the HCF Nudger Roll to HCF
- PR and IBT are turned on simul- the Feed Motor.
taneously 007-079 HCF ELEVATE MOTOR Output Unidirectional Motor to move the HCF
- If you operate the drum motor
HFC Paper Tray in the up direction
and the main motor at the same only (motor is not engaged in the
time, then stop one of them, the
down direction).
other motor will slow down. (This is
because they are both using the 007-080 HCF FEED MOTOR Output Unipolar 200 step / rev stepper HCF
same hard signal) motor with a maximum 800 PPS.
One revolution = 200 steps = 152
005-011 SET GATE SOLENOID Output After 5 sec., turned OFF automati- DADF
mm paper travel.
OPEN cally
008-006 #1 NUDGER ROLL Output ON time is 2000 msec Processor
005-012 SET GATE SOLENOID Output After 5 sec., turned OFF automati- DADF
SOLENOID
CLOSE cally
008-007 #1 FEED MOTOR CCW Output Motor reverse. Tray lift up (upper Processor
005-040 FEED MOTOR Output After 2 sec., turned OFF automati- DADF
limit detection stop)
cally
ON time: 5500 msec
005-055 BELT MOTOR CW Output The DADF Belt Motor forwards DADF
008-008 #1 FEED MOTOR CW Output Motor normal rotation: Feed Roll Processor
005-056 BELT MOTOR CCW Output Belt Motor (Normal rotation) DADF rotation
The DADF Belt Motor reverses 008-009 #1 TAKE AWAY FEED Output On drives connection Processor
005-075 REGI GATE SOLE- Output After 5 sec., turned OFF automati- DADF CLUTCH
NOID cally 008-011 #2 NUDGER ROLL Output ON time is 2000 msec Processor
005-081 EXIT MOTOR Output On: Rotates DADF SOLENOID
005-083 DOC READY Output Simultaneous Output item: (IISS DADF 008-012 #2 FEED MOTOR CCW Output Motor reverse: Tray lift up (upper Processor
sheet abort) limit detection stop)
005-084 DOC SET LED Output On: L DADF Does not turn on if the tray is not
set
006-002 ITT EXPOSURE LEAP Output After 180 sec., Turns OFF automat- IIT ON time: 6000 msec
ically

Module_I Module_I
008-013 #2 FEED MOTOR CW Output Motor normal rotation: Feed Roll Processor 009-011 CARTRIDGE MOTOR K Output Automatically turns OFF after 10 Processor
rotation sec.
Cannot run with Cartridge Motors Y
008-014 #2 TAKE AWAY FEED Output On drives connection Processor
CLUTCH (009-012), M (009-013), or C (009-
014)
008-016 #3 NUDGER ROLL Output ON time is 2000 msec Processor
SOLENOID 009-012 CARTRIDGE MOTOR Y Output Automatically turns OFF after 10 Processor
sec.
008-017 #3 FEED MOTOR CCW Output Motor reverse: Tray lift up (upper Processor Cannot run with Cartridge Motors
limit detection stop) M (009-013), C (009-014) or K
Does not turn on if the tray is not (009-011).
set.
ON time: 6000 msec 009-013 CARTRIDGE MOTOR Output Automatically turns OFF after 10 Processor
M sec.
008-018 #3 FEED MOTOR CW Output Motor normal rotation: Feed roll Processor Cannot run with Cartridge Motors Y
rotation (009-012), C (009-014) or K (009-
008-019 #3 TAKE AWAY FEED Output On drives connection Processor 011).
CLUTCH 009-014 CARTRIDGE MOTOR Output Automatically turns OFF after 10 Processor
008-021 #4 NUDGER ROLL Output ON time is 2000 msec Processor C sec.
SOLENOID Cannot run with Cartridge Motors Y
(009-012), C (009-013) or K (009-
008-022 #4 FEED MOTOR CCW Output Motor reverse: Tray lift up (upper Processor 011).
limit detection stop)
Does not turn on if the tray is not 009-018 ROTARY LOCK MECH Output Latch - High: Rotary Lock SEL Processor
set LATCH RETN
ON time: 6000 msec Low: Rotary Lock SEL SUCF
Release - High: Rotary Lock SEL
008-023 #4 FEED MOTOR CW Output Motor normal rotation: Feed Roll Processor
RETN
rotation
009-021 DEVE MOTOR Output On (High): Latch Processor
008-024 #4 TAKE AWAY FEED Output On drives connection Processor
CLUTCH Off (Low): Release
CLUTCH
009-025 IBT ROLL CONTACT Output Run simultaneously with Main Processor
008-025 TAKE AWAY MOTOR Output On (rotation) Processor
Motor (004-007)
008-030 Tray 5 NUDGER ROLL Output x Processor Automatically turns OFF after the
SOLENOID Roll Retract Home Position Sensor
008-037 TRAY 5 FEED CLUTCH Output On drives connection Processor detects the Contact Position (On:
Low, Off: High)
008-049 TRAY 5 LIFTER Output x Processor
MOTOR CCW (up) 009-026 IBT ROLL RETRACT Output Run simultaneously with Main Processor
Motor (004-007)
008-042 TRAY 5 LIFTER Output Lower limit detection stop ON time: Processor Automatically turns OFF after the
MOTOR CW (down) 300 msec Roll Retract Home Position Sensor
Tray 5 Lift Motor CCW detects the Retract Position (On:
008-043 MAIN MOTOR 2 Output On: Port (L) Processor Low, Off: High)
008-054 REGI MOTOR Output On: Port (L) Processor 009-031 DISPENSE MOTOR K Output Start after moving the Rotary to the Processor
K color and dispensing the toner.
NOTE: To drive the rotary, Move the
rotary to the K color in dC920
(Developer Unit Check).

manuals4you.com
Module_I Module_I
009-032 DISPENSE MOTOR Y Output Start after moving the Rotary to the Processor 009-059 2ND BELT TRANSFER Output Run simultaneously with Drum Processor
Y color and dispensing the Toner. ROLL RETRACT Motor (004-021) and Main Motor
NOTE: To drive the rotary, move the (004-007)
rotary to the Y color in dC920 Automatically turns off after the 2nd
(Developer Unit Check) BTR Home Position Sensor detects
Automatically turns off after 2 sec. the Retract Position, On: Low
Cannot run with Dispense Motor M Cannot run with 2nd BTR CL On -
(009-033), C (009-034) or K (009- Contact (009-058)
031).
009-066 IBT CLEANER CON- Output Run simultaneously with Main Processor
009-033 DISPENSE MOTOR M Output Start after moving the Rotary to the Processor TACT Motor (004-007)
Y color and dispensing the Toner. Automatically turns off after the IBT
NOTE: To drive the rotary, move the Cleaner Contact Home Position
rotary to the Y color in dC920 Sensor detects the contact position.
(Developer Unit Check) ON: Low, OFF: High
Automatically turns off after 2 sec. Output Run simultaneously with Main
009-067 IBT CLEANER Processor
Cannot run with Dispense Motor Y Motor (004-007)
RETRACT
(009-032), C (009-034) or K (009-
Automatically turns off after the IBT
031).
Cleaner Contact Home Position
009-034 DISPENSE MOTOR C Output Start after moving the Rotary to the Processor Sensor detects the contact position.
Y color and dispensing the Toner. Cannot run with IBT Cleaner Con-
NOTE: To drive the rotary, move the tact (009-066).
rotary to the Y color in dC920
009-068 PRE CLEAN Output Run simultaneously with Main Processor
(Developer Unit Check)
COROTRON dC Motor (004-021)
Automatically turns off after 2 sec. DC ON: PWM Output value = NVM
Cannot run with Dispense Motor Y
(0-255) - Discharge (variable value)
(009-032), C (009-033) or K (009- / NVM 774-031 = 1 o’clock output
031).
value = 0 / NVM 774-031 = 2
009-040 ADC LED Output On: L Processor o’clock output value = 96.
009-050 ERASE LAMP Output On: Turns on the lamp. Processor NVM 774-033 / NVM 774-031 = 3
o’clock output value = 130 NVM
009-057 2ND BELT TRANSFER Output Run simultaneously with Drum Processor 774-029
ROLL Motor (004-021) and 2nd BTR CL
009-070 CHARGE COROTRON Output Run Simultaneously with Drum Processor
ON - Contact (009-058)
WIRE Motor (004-021)
DC ON: 2.2kV - Discharge (can be
changed in NVM 771-033) 009-074 SAW COROTRON dC Output ON: 3 KV - Discharge. (can be Processor
changed in NVM 771-034)
009-058 2ND BELT TRANSFER Output Run simultaneously with Drum Processor
ROLL CONTACT Motor (004-007) 009-076 DEVE BIAS dC Output ON: PWM Output Value - 573 Processor
Automatically turns off after the 2nd fixed - Apply
BTR Home Position sensor detects 009-077 DEVE BIAS AC COLOR Output ON: PWM Output Value - 165 Processor
the Contact On Position, On: Low
fixed - Apply
Cannot run with 2nd BTR CL On - Cannot be run with Deve Bias - AC
Retract (009-059) B/W (009-079)
009-079 DEVE BIAS AC BLACK Output ON: PWM Output Value - 165 Processor
Cannot be run with Deve Bias - AC
Color (009-077)

Module_I Module_I
009-081 CHARGE COROTRON Output Run simultaneously with Drum Processor 010-024 PRESSURE ROLL Output Turn on Exit Motor (010-040) simul- Processor
GRID Motor (004-021) RETRACT taneously.
ON: PWM Output Value = 717 ON: L
(NVM 774-005) Automatically turns off after Pres-
009-085 ROTARY MOT FAN Output ON: L Processor sure Roll Retract Sensor detects
the contact position.
009-088 BLOWER Output ON: L Processor Cannot run with Fuser Nip CL OFF
009-089 CC FAN Output ON: L Processor (010-023).
010-004 FUSER FAN-LOW Output ON: Port H Processor 010-025 INVERT ROLL NIP Output On (Roll Nip): L Processor
SPEED NOTE: When you exit from the I/O SOLENOID Reverse: Keep the state.
check, exit at high speed. ON time: 100 msec
Cannot run with Fuser Fan High Cannot run with Invert Nip Solenoid
Speed (010-018). Release (010-026).
010-005 INVERT GATE SOLE- Output ON (INV): L Processor 010-026 INVERT ROLL Output On (Roll Nip): L Processor
NOID INVERT Reverse: Keep the state RELEASE SOLENOID Reverse: Keep the state.
ON time: 100 msec ON time: 100 msec
Cannot run with Invert Gate Sole- Cannot run with Invert Nip Solenoid
noid Exit (010-006) Release (010-025).
010-006 INVERT GATE SOLE- Output On (Exit): L Processor 010-027 EXTERNAL HEAT Output ON: L Processor
NOID EXIT Reverse: Keep the state ROLL CONTACT Automatically turns off after the
ON time: 100 msec External Heat Roll Retract Sensor
Cannot run with Invert Gate Sole- detects the Contact position.
noid Invert (010-005). Cannot run with External Heat Roll
Retract Motor - Retract (010-028)
010-018 FUSER FAN-HIGH Output ON: L Processor
SPEED NOTE: When you exit from the I/O 010-028 EXTERNAL HEAT Output ON: L Processor
check, exit at high speed. ROLL RETRACT Automatically turns off after the
Cannot run with Fuser Fan Low External Heat Roll Retract Sensor
Speed (010-004) detects the Contact position.
Cannot run with External Heat Roll
010-020 INVERT MOTOR CW Output Motor On: Port (L) [CW] normal Processor
Retract Motor - Retract (010-027)
rotation (upward): Port (H) Motor
Speed = 350 mm/s 010-029 EXTERNAL HEAT Output ON: L Processor
Cannot run with Invert Motor CW ROLL LAMP Automatically turns off after 1 sec.
NOTE: The fuser temperature con-
010-021 INVERT MOTOR CCW Output Motor On: Port (L) [CCW] reverse Processor trol will be halted during the Diag.
rotation (downward): Port (L) Motor
Component Control and Diag. sub-
Speed = 450 mm/s
system check. The fuser tempera-
Cannot run with Invert Motor CW
ture control continues in any other
010-023 PRESSURE ROLL Output Turn on Exit Motor (010-040) simul- Processor Diag.
CONTACT taneously.
ON: L
Automatically turns off after Pres-
sure Roll Retract Sensor detects
the contact position.
Cannot run with Fuser Nip CL OFF
(010-024).

manuals4you.com
Module_I Module_I
010-030 HEAT ROLL LAMP Output ON: L Processor 011-005 MAILBOX DRIVE Output Starts / Stops the Paper Transport Sorter
Automatically turns off after 1 sec. MOTOR Roll
NOTE: The fuser temperature con-
011-010 DECURLER STEP- Output Starts / Stops driving the Decurler Sorter
trol will be halted during the Diag. PING MOTOR SPEED Transport Roll.
Component Control and Diag. sub- 60 Speed: 60 mm / sec.
system check. The fuser tempera-
ture control continues in any other 011-011 DECURLER STEP- Output Starts / Stops driving the Decurler Sorter
Diag. PING MOTOR SPEED Transport Roll.
130 Speed: 130 mm / sec.
010-031 PRESSURE ROLL Output ON: L Processor
LAMP Automatically turns off after 1 sec. 011-012 DECURLER STEP- Output Starts / Stops driving the Decurler Sorter
NOTE: The fuser temperature con- PING MOTOR SPEED Transport Roll.
trol will be halted during the Diag. 220 Speed: 220 mm / sec.
Component Control and Diag. sub- 011-013 DECURLER STEP- Output Starts / Stops driving the Decurler Sorter
system check. The fuser tempera- PING MOTOR SPEED Transport Roll.
ture control continues in any other 350 Speed: 350 mm / sec.
Diag.
011-081 OCT GATE SOLENOID Output Must have the OCT Gate Solenoid Sorter
010-032 WEB MOTOR Output ON: H Processor OCT-ON Bin Tray On (011-082).
010-033 OIL PUMP Output ON: H Processor Switch the OCT Gate to the OCT
Automatically turns off after 10 sec. direction. Return: OCT direction.
Time: 150 msec
010-040 EXIT MOTOR Output ON: L Processor
011-082 OCT GATE SOLENOID Output Switch the OCT Gate to the Bin Sorter
010-047 1ST BELT TRANSFER Output x Processor BIN TRAY-ON Tray direction.
ROLL
Suction: Bin tray direction.
010-050 DUPLEX OUT MOTOR Output ON: Port (L) Processor Cannot run with OCT Gate Sole-
noid OCT ON.
010-060 FUSER INT FAN-LOW Output ON: H Processor
SPEED NOTE: When you exit the I/O 011-083 BIN 2 GATE SOLE- Output Switch the 2 Bin Gate to the Bin Sorter
check, exit at high speed. NOID Tray direction.
Cannot run with Fuser INT Fan Cannot run with the 3 to 10 Bin
High Speed (010-061) Gate Solenoids (011-084 through
011-091).
010-061 FUSER INT FAN-HIGH Output ON: L Processor
SPEED NOTE: When you exit the I/O 011-084 BIN 3 GATE SOLE- Output Switch the 3 Bin Gate to the Bin Sorter
check, exit at low speed. NOID Tray direction.
Cannot run with Fuser INT Fan Low Cannot run with the 2,4 to 10 Bin
Speed (010-060) Gate Solenoids (011-083, 011-085
through 011-091).
010-085 OCT MOTOR Output CCW (moves to the home position): Processor
REVERSE Port (H) Home detected. 011-085 BIN 4 GATE SOLE- Output Switch the 4 Bin Gate to the Bin Sorter
Stop ON time: 600 msec NOID Tray direction.
Cannot run with OCT Motor For- Cannot run with the 2, 3, 5 to 10 Bin
ward (010-086) Gate Solenoids (011-083, 011-084,
011-086 through 011-091).
010-086 OCT MOTOR FORE- Output CW (moves to the offset position): Processor
WARD Port (H) Offset detected.
Stop ON time: 600 msec
Cannot run with OCT Motor
Reverse (010-085)

Module_I Module_I
011-086 BIN 5 GATE SOLE- Output Switch the 5 Bin Gate to the 5 Bin Sorter 011-095 OCT OFFSET MOTOR Output Moves the OCT to the rear direction Sorter
NOID Tray direction. BACK and stops at the OCT Offset Posi-
Cannot run with the 2 to 4, 6 to 10 tion.
Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083 (CCW) Moves the OCT to the front
through 011-085, 011-087 through Direction and stops 20 msec after
011-091). the OCT Offset Position Sensor
detects it.
011-087 BIN 6 GATE SOLE- Output Switch the 6 Bin Gate to the 6 Bin Sorter
Cannot run with Offset Position
NOID Tray direction.
Sensor ON.
Cannot run with the 2 to 5, 7 to 10
Cannot run with OCT Offset Motor
Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083
through 011-086, 011-088 through Front.
011-091). 012-005 MBX DRIVE MOTOR Output Low: On Finisher
Drives MBX Drive Motor
011-088 BIN 7 GATE SOLE- Output Switch the 7 Bin Gate to the 7 Bin Sorter
NOID Tray direction. 012-010 DEC MOTOR ON/OFF Output Low: On Finisher
Cannot run with the 2 to 6, 8 to 10 60 Drives DEC Paper Transport Roll at
Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083 60mm/s (actually 130mm/s)
through 011-087, 011-089 through 012-011 DEC MOTOR ON/OFF Output Low: On Finisher
011-091).
130 Drives DEC Paper Transport Roll at
011-089 BIN 8 GATE SOLE- Output Switch the 8 Bin Gate to the 8 Bin Sorter 130mm/s.
NOID Tray direction. 012-012 DEC MOTOR ON/OFF Output Low: On Finisher
Cannot run with the 2 to 7, 9, 10 Bin
220 Drives DEC Paper Transport Roll at
Gate Solenoids (011-083 through
220mm/s.
011-088, 011-090, 011-091).
012-013 DEC MOTOR ON/OFF Output Low: On Finisher
011-090 BIN 9 GATE SOLE- Output Switch the 9 Bin Gate to the 9 Bin Sorter 350 Drives DEC Paper Transport Roll at
NOID Tray direction.
130mm/s.
Cannot run with the 2 to 8,10 Bin
Gate Solenoids (011-083 through 012-020 FINSHER TRANS- Output Low: On Finisher
011-089, 011-091). PORT MOTOR Drives Finisher Transport Motor.
011-091 BIN 10 GATE SOLE- Output Switch the 10 Bin Gate to the 10 Sorter 012-024 EJECT MOTOR FOR- Output Not measurable Finisher
NOID Bin Tray direction. WARD Drives Eject Roll forward.
Cannot run with the 2 to 4, 6 to 10 Note: Not measurable in field due to
Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083 24V Clock.
through 011-085, 011-087 through 012-025 EJECT MOTOR Output Not measurable Finisher
011-091). REVERSE Drives Eject Roll backward.
011-093 OCT OFFSET MOTOR Output Moves the OCT to the front direc- Sorter Note: Not measurable in field due to
FRONT tion and stops at the OCT Offset 24V Clock.
Position. 012-026 EJECT CLAMP AND Output High: On Finisher
(CW) Moves the OCT to the front OFFSET MOTOR UP/ Drives Eject Roll up/down. (500ms)
direction and stops 20 msec after DOWN
the OCT Offset Position Sensor
012-027 EJECT CLAMP AND Output High: On Finisher
detects it.
OFFSET MOTOR F/R Drives Eject Roll to front/rear.
(500ms)

manuals4you.com
Module_I Module_I
012-030 END WALL MOTOR Output High: On Finisher 012-065 TAMPER MOTOR MID- Output Not measurable Finisher
OPEN Drives End Wall to open it (300ms) DLE REAR Drives Tamper to rear at a medium
speed. (1000pps) (100 pulses)
012-031 END WALL MOTOR Output High: On Finisher
CLOSE Drives End Wall to close it (300ms) Note: Not measurable in field due to
24V Clock.
012-036 COMPILER TRAY Output Low: On Finisher
SOLENOID Lowers Compiler Tray. 012-070 FIN GATE SOLENOID- Output Low: On Finisher
MBX/SCT POSITION Switches Gate for MBX/SCT. (100
012-040 STACKER MOTOR UP Output High: On Finisher pulses)
No output is allowed if a response
is sensed from Tray Upper Limit 012-071 FIN GATE SOLENOID- Output Low: On Finisher
FINSHER POSITION Switches Gate for Finisher. (100
SNR before or while Stacker Tray
pulses)
being driven upward. (500ms)
012-075 STAPLER MOTOR Output High: On Finisher
012-041 STACKER MOTOR Output High: On Finisher
No output is allowed if a response CLOSE Does stapling. (Compiler cover
DOWN
Safety ON) (Stops at Home or
is sensed from Tray Upper Limit
times out in 500ms).
SNR before or while Stacker Tray
being driven downward. 012-076 STAPLE POSITION Output Not measurable Finisher
MOTOR TOP FRONT Drives Stapler Unit to front at a high
012-053 EJECT PADDLE Output High: On Finisher
Drives Set Clamp. (300ms) speed (2700pps). If End Wall Open
MOTOR
Sensor doesn’t sense any, no out-
012-060 TAMPER MOTOR LOW Output Not measurable Finisher put is allowed. (250 pulses).
FRONT Drives Tamper to front at a low
012-077 STAPLE POSITION Output Not measurable Finisher
speed. (560pps) (100 pulses)
MOTOR LOW FRONT Drives Stapler Unit to front at a low
Note: Not measurable in field due to
speed (2000pps). If End Wall Open
24V Clock.
Sensor doesn’t sense any, no out-
012-061 TAMPER MOTOR TOP Output Not measurable Finisher put is allowed. (250 pulses).
FRONT Drives Tamper to front at a high Note: Not measurable in field due to
speed. (2000pps) (100 pulses) 24V Clock
Note: Not measurable in field due to
012-078 STAPLE POSITION Output Not measurable Finisher
24V Clock.
TOP REAR Drives Stapler Unit to rear at a high
012-062 TAMPER MOTOR LOW Output Not measurable Finisher speed (2700pps). If End Wall Open
REAR Drives Tamper to rear at a low Sensor doesn’t sense any, no out-
speed. (560pps) (100 pulses) put is allowed. (250 pulses).
Note: Not measurable in field due to Note: Not measurable in field due to
24V Clock. 24V Clock
012-063 TAMPER MOTOR TOP Output Not measurable Finisher 012-079 STAPLE POSITION Output Not measurable Finisher
REAR Drives Tamper to rear at a high MOTOR LOW REAR Drives Stapler Unit to rear at a low
speed. (2000pps) (100 pulses) speed (2000pps). If End Wall Open
Note: Not measurable in field due to Sensor doesn’t sense any, no out-
24V Clock. put is allowed. (250 pulses).
012-064 TAMPER MOTOR MID- Output Not measurable Finisher Note: Not measurable in field due to
DLE FRONT Drives Tamper to front at a medium 24V Clock
speed. (1000pps) (100 pulses) 012-081 MBX GATE SOLE- Output Low: On Finisher
Note: Not measurable in field due to NOID CLOSE Switches MBX Gate for SCT.
24V Clock. (150ms)

Module_I Module_I
012-082 MBX GATE SOLE- Output Low: On Finisher 014-053 LASER DIODE A ON Output ON: Port (H) Processor
NOID OPEN Switches MBX Gate for MBX.
014-054 LASER DIODE B ON Output ON: Port (H) Processor
(150ms)
015-001 MEMORY READY Output Scan Start OK signal from IPS Processor
012-083 2 BIN GATE SOLE- Output Low: On Finisher
(Done with IPS memory ready sig-
NOID Switches 2Bin Gate for Bin 2
nal output check
012-096 DEC PENETRATION Output Low: On Finisher
CHANGE Drives MBX Drive Motor, and
500ms after then switches Decurler
Penetration (from Release position
to Weak position or Weak to Strong
or Strong to Release). (Completes
at Cam position.
012-099 UNLOAD WHILE RUN Output Low: On Finisher
LED Turns on per the Start instruction.
Turns off per the Stop instruction.
(250 pulses)
014-050 POLYGON MOTOR Output Polygon Motor ON Signal ON: L Processor
LOW SPEED Polygon Speed Signal ON: L
Cannot run with Polygon Motor
High speed (014-051).
014-051 POLYGON MOTOR Output Processor
HIGH SPEED Polygon Motor ON Signal ON: L
Polygon Speed Signal ON: H
Cannot run with Polygon Motor Low
speed (014-050).

manuals4you.com
dC351 NVM Initialize, Save/Restore Table 1
Purpose Code Description
Save / Restore NVM 710-007 L-REGI Pulse Duplex 8.5x11

This option saves current NVM settings that were changed since the last service call or to 710-008 L-REGI Pulse Duplex A4 S
restore the saved NVM settings since the last service call. 710-009 L-REGI Pulse Duplex 8.5x13
715-028 DADF IPS Offset- FS
Machine Settings
715-029 REGI ADJ revise VAL-FS
This option saves the machine settings that were changed since the last service call or to
715-091 White Ref Adjustment Coefficient - Red
restore the machine settings since the last service call.
715-092 White Ref Adjustment Coefficient - Green
Dust Off Reset 715-093 White Ref Adjustment Coefficient - Blue
Turns all counters back to zero. 715-106 HOSEI SCAN
715-107 MB_SCAN
NVM Background Read 715-110 CCD Calibration Y Patch-R
This option will read/save all NVM locations found in dC131. 715-111 CCD Calibration Y Patch-G
715-112 CCD Calibration Y Patch-B
Procedure 715-113 CCD Calibration M Patch-R
715-114 CCD Calibration M Patch-G
using the PWS.
715-115 CCD Calibration M Patch-B
2. Select Adjustments on the “Service Entry Screen.”
715-116 CCD Calibration C Patch-R
3. Select NVM Init, S/R. The "NVM Initialize Screen (dC301)" is displayed.
715-117 CCD Calibration C Patch-G
4. Select the NVM Background Processing (dC351) Tab.
715-118 CCD Calibration C Patch-B
5. Select Reset All HFSI to reset all HFSI counters to zero.
715-119 CCD Calibration K Patch-R
6. Select Start Background Read to read the NVM settings to be saved/restored.
715-120 CCD Calibration C Patch-G
NOTE: Select Stop Background Read to stop a "Background Read" in progress. 715-121 CCD Calibration C Patch-B
NOTE: Table 1 list all NVM values read, saved or restored in NVM Background Process- 715-125 Platen / DADF Selection
ing dC351. 715-132 REGI Revise VAL- SS
715-133 MAG Revise VAL- SS
7. Once the Background Read has completed, select Save Current NVM Settings or
Restore NVM Settings. 720-003 LS OFFSET Tray 1
8. Once the NVM Settings have been "Saved" or "Restored", select Save Machine Settings 720-004 LS OFFSET Tray 2
or Restore Machine Settings. 720-005 LS OFFSET Tray 3
720-006 LS OFFSET Tray 4
Table 1
720-007 LS OFFSET Tray 5
Code Description 720-008 LS OFFSET Duplex
702-002 Tools mode information 720-018 ERASE LE
702-003 Tools mode information 720-019 ERASE TE
702-004 Tools mode information 720-020 ERASE SIDE
702-020 Tools mode information 730-001 TIS Parameter
702-022 Tools mode information 730-002 MUC Adj
702-057 Document Size 1 730-003 MUC Adj for OHP
702-122 Tools mode information 730-004 MUL M Rate for Y-Y
702-130 Tools mode information 730-005 MUL M Rate for M-Y
702-168 Tools mode information 730-006 MUL M Rate for C-Y
710-004 DADF Lead REGI Time Simplex 730-007 MUL M Rate for Y-M

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-115 dC351 NVM Initialize, Save/Restore
Table 1 Table 1
Code Description Code Description
730-008 MUL M Rate for M-M 773-276 VHS ADJ
730-009 MUL M Rate for C-M 773-381 VGS
730-010 MUL M Rate for Y-C 773-383 LDS
730-011 MUL M Rate for M-C 773-456 ALC 300L BIAS SET Y
730-012 MUL M Rate for C-C 773-476 ALC 300L BIAS Y
730-013 MUL M Rate for Y-B 773-477 ALC 300L BIAS M
730-014 MUL M Rate for M-B 773-478 ALC 300L BIAS C
730-015 MUL M Rate for C-B 773-479 ALC 300L BIAS K
730-016 MUL M Rate for Y-G 773-481 ALC 600 BIAS Y
730-017 MUL M Rate for M-G 773-482 ALC 600 BIAS M
730-018 MUL M Rate for C-G 773-483 ALC 600 BIAS C
730-019 MUL M Rate for Y-R 773-484 ALC 600 BIAS K
730-020 MUL M Rate for M-R 773-496 ALC_IO[Y]
730-021 MUL M Rate for C-R 773-497 ALC_IO[M]
730-025 HOSEI 773-498 ALC_IO[C]
730-026 MB 773-499 ALC_IO[K]
730-045 CBY 773-606 RADC Patch Y
730-046 CBM 773-607 RADC Patch M
730-047 CBC 773-608 RADC Patch C
730-048 CBK 773-609 RADC Patch K
730-049 X - Regi- Editor 774-018 Bottle Full Flag
730-050 Y - Regi- Editor 774-019 Bottle Near Full Counter
730-051 X - Mag- Editor 774-020 Bottle Goal
730-052 Sharpness Level 774-179 Drum Cycle Ini
760-002 Tray 5 Size Sensor analog smallest Value 775-085 Radc_TRC_CinB [Y]
760-003 Tray 5 Size Sensor Analog Greatest Value 775-086 Radc_TRC_CinB [M]
760-004 Tray 1 Paper Size 775-087 Radc_TRC_CinB [C]
761-043 Regi Motor On Timing (Panel A& B) 775-088 Radc_TRC_CinB [K]
761-048 Adjust Regi Motor On Timing (Duplex Mode) 775-279 Val LUT Manu Adj (Y)
773-102 HILITE FLAG 775-280 Val LUT Manu Adj (M)
773-115 TEMP 1S 775-281 Val LUT Manu Adj (C)
773-121 HUM VH/VM ADJ 775-282 Val LUT Manu Adj (K)
773-231 ADC Sensor Gain - mirror 775-415 P_LUT_B[Y]
773-253 ADC VCLEAN S AVE 775-416 P_LUT_B[M]
773-258 ADC VCLEAN D AVE 775-417 P_LUT_B[C]775-418
773-263 VALCS TARGET 775-418 P_LUT_B[K]
773-265 VALCS2 TARGET 775-815 TC_SET_Kari_Ave
773-266 RADC set Y 776-010 Trickle bottle near full
773-267 RADC Set M 776-011 Trickle Bottle Full
773-268 RADC Set C 776-012 NVM TRICKLE STS
773-269 RADC Set K 776-136 DEVE HOME SENSOR

dC351 NVM Initialize, Save/Restore 6-116 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 dC361 NVM Save/Restore
Code Description Purpose
776-367 Toner Cartridge Status (K) Restores the NVM data of the Main Processor after saving it to the PWS.
776-368 Toner Cartridge Status (Y)
776-369 Toner Cartridge Status (M) Procedure
776-370 Toner Cartridge Status (C) A. Saving NVM Data
776-371 Toner Cartridge Empty Detection (K) 1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
776-372 Toner Cartridge Empty Detection (Y) using the PWS.
776-373 Toner Cartridge Empty Detection (M) 2. Select Adjustments on the “Service Entry Screen.”
776-374 Toner Cartridge Empty Detection (C) 3. Select NVM Save/Restore (dC361). The NVM Save/Restore Screen is displayed.
776-375 Toner Cartridge Near Empty Threshold 4. Select the desired target module from Select All or Specify an Item from the “Initialize
Area” screen.
776-376 Toner Cartridge Empty Detection
a. Module specification items are as described below. (Default: IISS)
777-001 H/R Temperature 1
i. When selecting the target module of IISS or PostIPS, initialize area by selecting
777-002 P/R Temperature 1
the desired target module and check that the selection is highlighted in blue.
777-003 Ext. H/R Temperature 1
Hold the Shift Key and click other desired target modules to make multiple
777-006 H/R Power Save Temperature selections.
777-007 P/R Power Save Temperature ii. Select All will select all the modules of Initialize Area.
777-008 Ext. H/R Power Save Temperature iii. The NVM areas do not include the Dust Off target modules.
777-010 Heat Roll Ready Temperature 5. Select Start dC 361 Save.
777-011 Pressure Roll Ready Temperature
NOTE: It may take several moments to save the NVM data.
777-012 Ext. Heat Roll Ready Temperature
777-051 Oil Pump On Time 6. Select OK to start.
777-055 PV after Oil Near Empty
777-056 PV from Oil Near Empty to Empty B. Restoring NVM Data
777-057 OIL LIMIT PAP 1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
using the PWS.
777-058 Limit Time after Oil Empty
2. This function performs PWB Replacement or NVM Initialization. Refer to dC301 NVM Ini-
777-075 Threshold time Web Near Empty
tialization.
777-076 WEB EMP
3. Select Adjustments in the Service Mode.
777-077 Web Status
4. Select NVM Save/Restore. NVM Save/Restore Screen is displayed.
777-081 Environment temperature
5. Select the desired target module from Select All or Specify an item from the Initialize
777-109 TH - Rotate woPPR-size Mix
Area Screen.
777-110 Rotate woPPR-size Mix
6. Select Start dC 361 Restore. The message confirming the start of restoring is displayed.
777-135 TH TEMP Not RDY PPR 4C
7. Select Yes.
777-136 HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold B/W
a. An error message will be displayed if the “Storage Medium” has a problem.
777-137 HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold 4C HVY
8. “Restoring Completed” is displayed after the restoring.
777-138 HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold B/W HVY
a. When restoring is not completed successfully, the message, “! The operation
777-139 HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold 4C OHP requested was not completed successfully” will be displayed.
777-140 HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold B/W OHP
999-002 Output Configuration - Sorter / Mailbox
999-004 CRU Type

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-117 dC351 NVM Initialize, Save/Restore, dC361 NVM
dC371 Configuration Page h. Input Device
• DADF
Purpose
• Platen Only
Allows easy viewing and set-up of machine configuration.
6. Select Save to save the options or select Reset to reset the default settings back to origi-
nal options prior to entering Configuration Page (dC371).
Procedure
using the PWS.
2. Select Adjustments on the “Service Entry Screen.”
3. Select NVM Init, S/R. "NVM Init, S/R" is the default screen.
4. Select Configuration Page (dC371). The Configuration Page Screen is displayed.
5. Make selections on the screen from the following categories:
a. Market Place
• XC (NASG)
• XE (ESG)
• FX
• FX / AP
b. Machine Config
• Digital Copier
• Copier / Printer
• Copier / Printer / Scanner
• Printer with UI
c. Output Device(s)
• Simple Catch Tray
• Offset Catch Tray
• Sorter
• Mailbox
• Finisher / Sorter
• Finisher / Mailbox
d. Accessories
• Accessory Connection
e. Foreign Interface
• None
• Auditron
• Card Prepaid
• Coin Kit
f. Tray 1 Paper Size
• 8.5" x 11"
• A4
• B5
• A5
g. Feature Config
• Edit Pad
• High Capacity Feeder

dC371 Configuration Page 6-118 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC391 Edit Pad dC612 Color Test Pattern Print
Purpose Purpose
This routine allows you to set custom colors easily for the Customer Color Palette. Once a color Prints the test pattern in the machine, to help identify Copy Quality problems.
is selected the Color Indices can be adjusted by percentage to obtain the custom color for a
specific color. Procedure
NOTE: The numbered locations on the dC391Color Palette match the colored locations on the
using the PWS.
Customer Color Palette.
2. Select Diagnostics in the Service Entry Screen.
NOTE: The Edit Pad feature must be selected on the dC371 Configuration Page to enable the 3. Select Test Pattern (dc612).
Edit Pad. a. To print an “Image Process System Test Pattern”, select Image Process System:
Procedure i. Select the Pattern Number from the menu.
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode ii. Select the Paper Tray.
using the PWS. iii. Set the number of prints to output in the “Print Count Box” and select Start.
2. Select Adjustments on the “Service Entry Screen.” b. To print the “Image Output Test Pattern”, select Image Output System.
3. Select Edit Pad (dC391). The Edit Pad Screen is displayed. i. Image Output System
4. Select the number on the Color Palette that corresponds to the Customer Color Palette. ii. Paper (Simplex/Duplex)
5. Once the color is selected, Click and drag the slide bars in the Color Indices box to iii. Paper Tray/Size
obtain the Custom Colors or click the arrow right of the slide bar to increase and click the iv. Paper Type
left arrow to decrease. v. Screen Type
6. Select Save to save the changes. vi. Color Mode
7. Select Reset to restore the original settings prior to entering dC Edit Pad. vii. Set the number of prints to output and select Start.
Test Patterns
For details on the test pattern generation location and output path, Table 1:
Table 1 Test Patterns

Pattern
Number Pattern Name Description Remarks
1 IIT Analog Gradation Ch1- 3C color gradation PG PreIPS (Image Process-
6-RGB - 300 lines (3C) with all CCD RGB Odd/ ing)
Even data
2 IIT Analog Gradation Ch1, K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Process-
2-R - 300 lines (K) CCD R Odd/Even data ing)
4-G - 300 lines (K) CCD G Odd/Even data ing)
6-B - 300 lines (K) CCD B Odd/Even data ing)
5 IIT Analog Gradation Ch1- K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Process-
R - 300 lines (K) CCD R Odd data ing)
R - 300 lines (K) CCD R Even data ing)
G - 300 lines (K) CCD G Odd data ing)
G - 300 lines (K) CCD G Even data ing)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-119 dC391 Edit Pad , dC612 Color Test Pattern Print
Table 1 Test Patterns Table 1 Test Patterns
Pattern Pattern
Number Pattern Name Description Remarks Number Pattern Name Description Remarks
9 IIT Analog Gradation Ch5- K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Process- 28 MWAH PG 300 lines (3C) Solid L*, a*, b* - 300 lines PostIPS (Image Process-
B - 300 lines (K) CCD B Odd data ing) PG ing)
10 IIT Analog Gradation Ch6- K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Process- 29 MAD PG - 300 lines (4C) Solid M - 300 lines PG PostIPS (Image Process-
B - 300 lines (K) CCD B Even data ing) ing)
11 IIT digital FS gradation - FS direction gradation PG PreIPS (Image Process- 30 TRE PG - 300 lines (4C) Solid YC - 300 lines PG PostIPS (Image Process-
300 lines (3C) ing) ing)
12 IIT digital SS gradation - SS gradation PG PreIPS (Image Process- 31 SFM PG (Post IPS) 300 Solid K 300 lines PG PostIPS (Image Process-
300 lines (3C) ing) lines (B/W) ing)
13 IIT digital FS/SS grada- FS/SS gradation PG PreIPS (Image Process- 32 TBC PG(Post IPS)- 300 Solid YMCK - 300 lines PostIPS (Image Process-
tion - 300 lines (3C) ing) lines (4C) PG ing)
14 IIT shading data output - Current shading correction PreIPS (Image Process- 33 TBC horizontal stripe Horizontal stripe - Solid PostIPS (Image Process-
300 lines (3C) data is output. (PC with ing) YMCK (Post IPS) 300 YMCK - 300 lines PG ing)
dark center) lines (4C)
15 SID horizontal stripe Each Y.M.C.K developer: PreIPS (Image Process- 34 TBC vertical stripe Vertical stripes - Solid PostIPS (Image Process-
YMCK - 300 lines (4C) PreIPS horizontal stripe ing) YMCK(Post IPS) - 300 YMCK - 300 lines PG ing)
PG lines (4C)
16 SID slant lines - 600 lines Each Y.M.C.K developer: PreIPS (Image Process- 35 Edit Bypass (Post IPS) - Output a normal copy PostIPS (Image Process-
(4C) PreIPS slant lines PG ing) 200R - 4C (bypassed the Editor) in ing)
17 SID grid: YMCK repeated Each Y.M.C.K developer: PreIPS (Image Process- 200R (4C).
- 600 lines(4C) PreIPS grid PG ing)
NOTE: Set the test chart
18 First phase TRE PG1 - Half tone (AAH) PG PreIPS (Image Process- on the platen and output
300 lines (3C) ing) the PG.
19 First phase TRE PG2 - Half tone (55H) PG PreIPS (Image Process- 36 Edit Bypass (Post IPS) - Set the test chart on the PostIPS (Image Process-
300 lines (3C) ing) 200R - 3C platen and output the PG. ing)
20 MEM SYS PG1 (MEM Solid RGB AAH - 300 PostIPS (Image Process-
SYS) - 300 lines (3C) lines PG ing)
on the platen and output
21 MEM SYS PG2 (MEM Solid RGB 55H: 300 lines PostIPS (Image Process-
the PG.
SYS) - 300 lines (3C) PG ing)
37 Edit Bypass (Post IPS) - Output a normal copy PostIPS (Image Process-
22 CST horizontal stripe Each Y.M.C.K developer: PostIPS (Image Process-
200R - B/W (bypassed the Editor) in ing)
YMCK (Post IPS) - 300 PostIPS horizontal stripe ing)
200R (B/W).
lines (4C) PG. (Pattern: Same as
number 15) NOTE: Set the test chart
23 CST vertical stripe YMCK Each Y.M.C.K developer: PostIPS (Image Process- on the platen and output
(Post IPS) - 300 lines (4C) PostIPS vertical stripe PG ing) the PG.
24 64 gray-scale patch (Post 64 gray-scale patch PG PostIPS (Image Process- 38 Edit Bypass (Post IPS) - Output a normal copy PostIPS (Image Process-
IPS) - 200R lines (4C) ing) 200R - Y (bypassed the Editor) in ing)
200R (Yellow).
25 YMCK overlaid grid - 600 4C grid PG PostIPS (Image Process-
lines-CST (4C) ing) NOTE: Set the test chart
26 Slant lines - 600 lines-CST Each Y.M.C.K developer: PostIPS (Image Process- on the platen and output
(4C) PostIPS horizontal stripe ing) the PG.
PG (Pattern: Same as
number 16)
27 Grid YMCK repeated - 600 4C grid repeated PG PostIPS (Image Process-
lines-CST (4C) ing)

dC612 Color Test Pattern Print 6-120 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 Test Patterns Table 1 Test Patterns
Pattern Pattern
Number Pattern Name Description Remarks Number Pattern Name Description Remarks
39 Edit Bypass (Post IPS) - Output a normal copy PostIPS (Image Process- 46 Normal copy (Post IPS)- Output a normal copy in PostIPS (Image Process-
200R - M (bypassed the Editor) in ing) 200R - B/W 200R (B/W). ing)
200R (Magenta).
NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output
on the platen and output the PG.
the PG. 47 Normal copy (Post IPS)- Output a normal copy in PostIPS (Image Process-
40 Edit Bypass(Post IPS) - Output a normal copy PostIPS (Image Process- 200R - Y 200R (Yellow). ing)
200R - C (bypassed the Editor) in ing)
200R (Cyan).
NOTE: Set the test chart the PG.
on the platen and output 48 Normal copy (Post IPS)- Output a normal copy in PostIPS (Image Process-
the PG. 200R - M 200R (Magenta). ing)
41 Edit Bypass(Post IPS) - Output a normal copy PostIPS (Image Process-
200R - R (bypassed the Editor) in ing)
200R (Red).
the PG.
NOTE: Set the test chart 49 Normal copy (Post IPS)- Output a normal copy in PostIPS (Image Process-
on the platen and output 200R - C 200R (Cyan). ing)
the PG.
200R - G (bypassed the Editor) in ing)
the PG.
200R (Green).
50 Normal copy (Post IPS)- Output a normal copy in PostIPS (Image Process-
NOTE: Set the test chart 200R - R 200R (Red). ing)
the PG. NOTE: Set the test chart
the PG.
200R - B (bypassed the Editor) in ing)
200R (Blue). 51 Normal copy (Post IPS)- Output a normal copy in PostIPS (Image Process-
200R - G 200R (Green). ing)
on the platen and output NOTE: Set the test chart
the PG. on the platen and output
the PG.
200R - 4C 200R (4C). ing) 52 Normal copy (Post IPS)- Output a normal copy in PostIPS (Image Process-
200R - B 200R (Blue). ing)
on the platen and output NOTE: Set the test chart
the PG. on the platen and output
the PG.
200R - 3C 200R (3C). ing) 53 ALL IPS PG(ANA- Simplified output - PWB PostIPS (Image Process-
LOG+PRE+MEM+POST) PG (Analog, CMM and ing)
NOTE: Set the test chart PostIPS) in one sheet out-
on the platen and output put
the PG.
54 Color patch: 1st page The upper color patch for PostIPS (Image Process-
the Editor Pad is output. ing)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-121 dC612 Color Test Pattern Print
Table 1 Test Patterns dC701 Fuser Nip Measurement
Pattern Purpose
Number Pattern Name Description Remarks
Makes a copy for the Contact Arc Adjustment and measures the Fuser Nip Width with a simple
55 Color patch: 2nd page The middle color patch for PostIPS (Image Process- operation.
56 Color patch: 3rd page The bottom color patch for PostIPS (Image Process- NOTE: For details, see Adjustments Section 4:ADJ 8.1.1 Fuser Nip Adjustment (dC701).
82 Grid (Measurement) - 600 20mm pitch/2dotline grid IOT (Image output)
Procedure
Paper size: A3 or 17 1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
using the PWS.
84 Grid (Registration) - 600 Scale/2dotline grid IOT (Image Processing)
Paper size: A3A4L/A4S/ 2. Select Adjustments on the Service Entry Screen.
B4S/B5L/B5S/LetterL/Let- 3. Select Other Adjustments on the Adjustments Screen. Other Adjustments Screen is dis-
terS played.
85 Grid (45 degree) - 600 45 degree grid/2dotline IOT (Image Processing) 4. Select Fuser Nip Adjustments (dC701). Fuser Nip Adjustment Screen is displayed.
Paper size: A3 or 17 5. Check that A4 LEF or Letter LEF paper has been loaded into Tray 5.
88 Color registration (Mea- Cross mark/4dotline IOT (Image Processing) 6. Select Nip Adjustment Black Copy and press Start.
surement) - 600 Paper size: A3 or 17 7. The message execute is displayed.
89 Color registration (Visual Color registration visual IOT (Image Processing) a. Make a copy for measuring the nip width by using A4 LEF or Letter LEF.
observation) - 600 check pattern
b. A error message screen will be displayed if there is no paper tray loaded with A4
Paper size: 17 or A3
LEF or Letter LEF.
97 Half tone - 4C Any density pattern (Vari- IOT (Image Processing)
8. The message “Completed” is displayed when the “Nip Adjustment Black Copy” is com-
able Cin% can be set).
pleted successfully.
Paper size: A3 or 17
a. When the “Nip Adjustment Black Copy” is not completed successfully, the message
98 Halftone - 3C Any density pattern (Vari- IOT (Image Processing)
“Not completed successfully” will be displayed.
able Cin% can be set).
Paper size: A3 or 17 9. Select Nip Adjustment Sequence.
99 Other Halftones Any density pattern (Vari- IOT (Image Processing) 10. The message “Executing in Progress” is displayed at the same time the Nip Width Mea-
able Cin% can be set). surement begins.
Paper size: A3 or 17 11. The message “Completed” is displayed when the “Nip Adjustment Sequence” is com-
100 16 grasslike SS SS direction: 16 gray- IOT (Image Processing) pleted successfully. The message “Not completed successfully” will be displayed when
scale the “Nip Adjustment Sequence” is not completed successfully.
Paper size: A3 or 17 12. Measure the nip width of the output paper for “Nip Adjustment Sequence”.
101 ProCon ProCon patch pattern/ IOT (Image Processing)
16.3x19.3 mm patch
102 TED/STV - 600 TED/STV IOT (Image Processing)
Paper size: A4L
103 Wedge SS - 600 SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image Processing)
gray-scale

dC612 Color Test Pattern Print, dC701 Fuser Nip Mea- 6-122 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment dC915 Machine Output
Purpose Purpose
Checks whether the Tray 5 guide size (width) has been properly detected. Displays Xerographic information on the Main Processor in an easily seen and understandable
format on the PWS.
NOTE: For details on adjustment, see ADJ 9.1.17 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment (dC740).
1. XERO Related Data Display: Displays all the NVM data related to the Copy Quality as a
Procedure set.
1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode 2. Displays the machine NVM data on the PWS UI.
using the PWS.
Procedure
2. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen.
Displaying the dC915 XERO Data
3. Select Other Adjustments in the Adjustments screen.
4. In the “Other Adjustments” Screen, select and execute the Tray 5 Guide Adjustment
using the PWS.
(dC740).
2. Select Adjustments on the “Service Entry” Screen.
5. Run the guide detection.
3. Select Machine Output on the “Adjustments” Screen. Machine Data Output Screen is
a. Set at the minimum position.
displayed.
i. Set the Tray 5 Guide at the minimum position.
4. Select PWS Display for the “Output Medium.”
ii. In the “Tray 5 Guide Adjustment Selection” Screen, select Minimum Position
5. Select Start. “XERO Related Data Display Screen” is displayed.
and press Start.
6. Refer to “XERO Related Chain Link Number List” for the Output Items by the “XERO
iii. If the sensor output is within the range, the system displays OK.
Related Data Display” and the details of “XERO Related NVM Data.”
iv. If the sensor output is out of the range, the system displays NG.
XERO Related Chain Link Number List
b. Set at the maximum position.
i. Set the guide at the maximum position. Table 1 Xero-related NVM
ii. In the “Tray 5 Guide Adjustment Selection” Screen, select Maximum Position ID (dec) NVM Number Item Max. (dec)
and press Start.
1 773-028 ADC Vpatch Fault flag 1
iii. If the sensor output is within the range, the system displays OK.
2 773-021 ADC Vclean Fault flag 1
iv. If the sensor output is out of the range, the system displays NG.
3 775-010 Gray-scale ADC Vpatch Fault flag 1
c. Guide test
4 775-011 Gray-scale ADC V clean Fault flag 1
i. Set the guide at the position.
5 773-022 VH/VM Fault flag 1
ii. Select and run the Guide Test in the Tray 5 Guide Adjustment Selection
6 773-027 LD CONT Fault flag 1
Screen.
7 773-099 HUM Fault flag 1
iii. The system displays the detected paper size group in the "Results" (Tray 5
Guide Adjustment Selections). 8 773-016 ADC V patch Fault counter: Y 65535
9 773-017 ADC V patch Fault counter: M 65535
10 773-018 ADC V patch Fault counter: C 65535
11 773-019 ADC V patch Fault counter: K 65535
12 773-011 ADC V clean Fault counter 65535
13 775-002 Gray-scale ADC V patch Fault counter: Y 65535
14 775-003 Gray-scale ADC V patch Fault counter: M 65535
15 775-004 Gray-scale ADC V patch Fault counter: C 65535
16 775-005 Gray-scale ADC V patch Fault counter: K 65535
17 775-001 Gray-scale ADC V clean Fault counter 65535
18 773-012 VH/VM Fault counter 65535
19 773-013 LD CONT Fault counter 65535
20 773-014 HUM Fault counter 65535

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-123 dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment, dC915 Machine
Table 1 Xero-related NVM Table 1 Xero-related NVM
ID (dec) NVM Number Item Max. (dec) ID (dec) NVM Number Item Max. (dec)
21 773-357 Number of drum cycles: Sign (0: Positive/10: 1 57 773-277 VM target 1023
Negative) 58 773-396 Vadc target 1023
22 773-356 Number of drum cycles (Unit: 100cycle decre- 65535 59 773-278 V hi-light control target 1023
menting count)
60 773-388 VH measurement 1023
23 773-342 Number of developer cycles: Y (Unit: Mot. ON 65535
61 773-394 VM measurement 1023
0.1 hour)
62 773-397 Vadc measurement 1023
24 773-343 Number of developer cycles: M (Unit: Mot. ON 65535
63 773-431 V hi-light control measurement 1023
0.1 hour)
64 773-401 VG setup 1023
25 773-344 Number of developer cycles: C (Unit: Mot. ON 65535
0.1 hour) 65 773-421 LD setup 255
26 773-345 Number of developer cycles: K (Unit: Mot. ON 65535 66 773-406 Vbias setup 1023
0.1 hour) 67 773-451 Hi-light setup: Y(300) 1023
27 - Number of transfer belt cycles (Unit: TBD) 65535 68 773-452 Hi-light setup: M(300) 1023
28 773-281 ADC target/gray-scale target1: Y 1023 69 773-453 Hi-light setup: C(300) 1023
29 773-282 ADC target/gray-scale target1: M 1023 70 773-454 Hi-light setup: K(300) 1023
30 773-283 ADC target/gray-scale target1: C 1023 71 773-461 Hi-light setup: Y(600) 1023
31 773-284 ADC target/gray-scale target1: K 1023 72 773-462 Hi-light setup: M(600) 1023
32 775-036 ADC gray-scale target2: Y 1023 73 773-463 Hi-light setup: C(600) 1023
33 775-037 ADC gray-scale target2: M 1023 74 773-464 Hi-light setup: K(600) 1023
34 775-038 ADC gray-scale target2: C 1023 75 775-741 TC Offset Out ID 65535
35 775-039 ADC gray-scale target2: K 1023 76 775-742 TC Ref OUT id 65535
36 773-606 ADC measurement: Y 1023 77 775-746 TC Ref OPEN OUT id 65535
37 773-607 ADC measurement: M 1023 78 775-743 TC OUT id - Y 65535
38 773-608 ADC measurement: C 1023 70 775-744 TC OUT id - M 65535
39 773-609 ADC measurement: K 1023 80 775-745 TC OUT id - C 65535
40 775-085 ADC gray-scale measurement1: Y 1023 81 775-750 TC SET ALL id 65535
41 775-086 ADC gray-scale measurement1: M 1023 82 775-747 TC SET OUT id - Y 65535
42 775-087 ADC gray-scale measurement1: C 1023 83 775-748 TC SET OUT id - M 65535
43 775-088 ADC gray-scale measurement1: K 1023 84 775-749 TC SET OUT id - C 65535
44 775-081 ADC gray-scale measurement2: Y 1023 85 775-751 TC OFFSET OUT Fail 65535
45 775-082 ADC gray-scale measurement2: M 1023 86 775-752 TC Ref OUT Fail 65535
46 775-083 ADC gray-scale measurement2: C 1023 87 775-756 TC Ref OPEN OUT Fail 65535
47 775-084 ADC gray-scale measurement2: K 1023 88 775-753 TC OUT Fail - Y 65535
48 773-251 ADC Vclean1_QA 1023 89 775-754 TC OUT Fail - M 65535
49 773-252 ADC Vclean1_QB 1023 90 775-755 TC OUT Fail - C 65535
50 773-256 ADC Vclean2_QA 1023 91 775-761 TC OFFSET OUT 65535
51 773-257 ADC Vclean2_QB 1023 92 775-762 TC Ref OUT 65535
52 773-231 ADC Gain 1023 93 775-763 TC Ref 65535
53 773-114 Humidity raw data (%) 1023 94 775-764 TC OUT Adj - Y 65535
54 773-115 Temperature raw data (degree (C)) 1023 95 775-765 TC OUT Adj - M 65535
55 773-121 Set-up humidity (%) 1023 96 775-766 TC OUT Adj - C 65535
56 773-276 VH target 1023 97 775-784 TC SET - Y 65535

dC915 Machine Output 6-124 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 Xero-related NVM dC918 IOT Highlight Setup
ID (dec) NVM Number Item Max. (dec) Purpose
98 775-785 TC SET - M 65535 • Sets the same Hi-Light density reproduction start points (for K, Y, M and C) and sets the
99 775-786 TC SET - C 65535 same Hi-Light densities for In-Board and Out-Board.
• Sets the ESV/ADC control target values.
NOTE: For details on dC918 IOT Highlight Setup, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.5 IOT
Highlight Setup (dC918).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-125 dC915 Machine Output , dC918 IOT Highlight Setup
dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine only) dC920 Developer Unit Check
Purpose Purpose
Takes a 4C copy in the Photo Mode and visually checks the Color Balance and then sets the Rotates the Rotary Developer and sets it at the desired position.
KYMC Color Balance NVM.
Procedure
NOTE:
1. Run this function only when requested by the customer for a Color Adjustment after the using the PWS.
Automatic Gray-Scale Correction has been performed (Tool mode).
2. Select Diagnostics on the “Service Entry Screen.”
2. Before running this function the dC918 High Light Setup must have been performed prop- 3. Select System Test in the “Fault Diagnostics Screen”.
erly.
4. Select Developer Unit Check (dc920).
NOTE: For details on dC919 Color Balance Setup, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.8 5. Select the Developer Unit to move. Select Start.
Color Balance Setup (dC919). 6. After checking, move the Developer Unit to the Home Position.

dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine 6-126 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment dC923 PROCON PG
Purpose Purpose
• Measures the Gray-Scale Patch with the ADC Sensor and creates the TRC Correction • Outputs the PRCON PG (ProCon pattern), measures the ADC Patch density by the ADC
LUT in the IOT. If the result is not within the range, the system displays the Tone up/down Sensor and displays the result on the PWS Screen.
result. • The PRCON PG should be used only for individual Adjust/Recover.
• Displays the density of the 2 patches for each color on the IBT Belt. Procedure
NOTE: For details on dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment, see Adjustments 1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode
Section 4: ADJ 9.1.6 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment (dC922). using the PWS.
2. Select Adjustments on the Service Entry Screen.
3. Select the MAX Setup (dC929) Tab.
4. Select ProCon PG (dC923) in the “Max Setup (dC929) Screen.”
5. Select a Tray from the Tray Drop Down List (paper: 11x17/A3 or 8.5x11/A4L) and click
Start.
• The ProCon PG is printed. (normal paper, full color, 300-lines, LUT off)
• The system generates an ADC Patch for each color and updates the NVM value
after measuring the density.
• The system checks the RADC Patch.
6. If OK, click Close to return to the “Max Setup Screen.”
NOTE: It is not necessary to run this routine to perform Max Setup. This routine can be
used as a quick check of the ADC Patch status.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-127 dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment,
dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG dC929 Max Setup
NOTE: NOT TO BE USED AT THIS TIME. Purpose
The system displays the following Setup functions which you can use to set the image quality.
Purpose
To manually fine adjust the low/medium/high densities (TRC) for each color. 1. dC945 IIT Calibration (See dC945 IIT Calibration) (IIT installed machine only)
2. dC934 ADC/AGC Setup (See dC934 ADC/AGC Setup)
NOTE: Although it appears that the densities can be adjusted independently for different
3. dC933 VH/VM Setup (See dC933 VH/VM Setup)
screen types, this is not the case. An adjustment for one screen type will affect all of the
4. dC918 IOT Highlight Setup (See dC918 IOT Highlight Setup)
screens (300, 150C, 200R, and 600). Also, there is quite a bit of overlap among the low,
medium, and high densities. For these reasons, it is recommended that dC924/939 not be 5. dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment (See dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density
used. Adjustment)
6. dC924 TRC Adjustment/939TRC Check (See dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check
PG)
7. dC919 Color Balance Setup (See dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine
only)) (IIT installed machine only)
8. dC923 PROCON PG (See dC923 PROCON PG).
NOTE: For the execution sequence of the Max Setup Functions, see Adjustments Section 4:
ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup (dC929).
NOTE: If a 3-510 fault occurs while performing Max Setup, ensure that Automatic Tray switch-
ing for Trays 1 - 4 is enabled in Customer Tools

dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG, dC929 Max 6-128 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
dC933 VH/VM Setup dC934 ADC/AGC Setup
Purpose Purpose
Sets the VG, LD light amount, Development Bias and ASG Bias output value by determining: Automatically adjusts the ADC Sensor Gain.
• The VG value wherein the Drum surface potential becomes the target VH in two different • Adjusts the ADC Sensor Gain and automatically sets the gain so that the Vclean within
VGs. the range is obtained.
• The LD light that is the target VM in three different LD light amounts. • At the same time, measures the Vclean irregularity (Vclean P-P) for one belt circumfer-
• The ASG Bias to correct the high light unit. ence.
NOTE: For details on dC933 VH/VM Setup, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.4 VH/VM NOTE: For details on dC934 ADC/AGC Setup, see Adjustment Section 4: ADJ 9.1.3 ADC/
Setup (dC933). AGC Setup (dC934).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-129 dC933 VH/VM Setup, dC934 ADC/AGC Setup
dC945 IIT Calibration
Purpose
Functional details:
• Computes and sets the White Reference Correction Coefficient.
• Corrects the IIT Sensitivity Dispersion.
NOTE: For details on dC945 IIT Calibration, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.2 IIT Calibra-
tion (dC945).

dC945 IIT Calibration 6-130 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics Mode UI (IOT) Diagnostic Modes
Procedure The UI (IOT) Diagnostic supports the following modes. These selections are displayed on the
1. Power ON the machine. “UI Customer Support Engineer Tools Screen.”
2. While holding down the “0" Button, press Start. A screen will display, asking you to Enter
• NVM Reset / NVM Initialization (dC301 UI Diagnostics)
your Access Number.
• NVM Read / Write (dC131 NVM UI Diagnostics)
3. Using the Keypad, Enter 6789.
• Component Control (dC330 UI Diagnostics)
4. Press Confirm when finished. If you make a mistake, press “C". The Customer Support
• Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics)
• Subsystem Check
5. Select one of the following options on the screen:
1. Fuser Nip Measurement (dC701 UI Diagnostics)
• NVM Initialize
2. Developer Unit Check (dC920 UI Diagnostics)
• NVM Read/Write
• Max Setup (UI Diagnostics)
• Component Control
1. ADC/AGC Setup (dC934 UI Diagnostics)
• Print
• Subsystem Check 2. VH/VM Setup (dC933 UI Diagnostics)
• Max Setup 3. IOT Highlight Setup (dC918 UI Diagnostics)

4. TRC Setup/Toner Concentration Adjustment (dC922 UI Diagnostics)
6. To exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics Mode, select Done.
a. TRC Control
b. Toner Concentration Adjustment
c. TRC Adjustment (dC924 UI Diagnostics)
5. Color Balance Setup (dC919 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed machine only)
6. IIT Calibration (dC945 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed machine only)
a. White Reference Adjustment
b. CCD Calibration

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-131 How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics, UI (IOT)
NVM Reset / NVM Initialization (dC301 UI Diagnostics) NVM Read / Write (dC131 NVM UI Diagnostics)
Purpose Purpose
Initializes NVM for each subsystem and Initializes NVM for the entire system. Accesses NVM Read/Write Data by specifying the Chain-Link Number.
NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics.
UI Diag.: UI Diag.:
1. No dust-off function. 1. No module specification. All direct code specification.
Procedure Procedure
1. To perform NVM Reset or NVM Initialization, refer to dC301 NVM Initialization. 1. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics.
2. In the “Diagnostics Setup Screen”, select NVM Read/Write.
3. See the “dC131 Code List” and enter the Chain-Link Number. Selecting the “Enter Num-
ber Button” allows you to enter the number from the “Ten-key Pad.” for the “Read/Write
dC131 NVM List.”
CAUTION
Enter a correct number. (Make sure you have entered a correct number before you execute the
function. If you enter an invalid number, a secondary problem will occur.)
4. Select the Start Button.
The Screen shows the current “NVM Value.”
5. Enter a new value from the ten-key pad. Select Start.
6. After the operation, return to the “Diagnostics Setup Screen” by selecting Close on the
“UI Screen.”

NVM Reset / NVM Initialization (dC301 UI Diagnos- 6-132 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Component Control (dC330 UI Diagnostics) Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics)
Purpose Purpose
Checks the Input/Output of each component by specifying the Chain-Link Number. Provides a Print Pattern for “Setup” and “Diagnostics”, performing a faster and more efficient
service.
NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics:
NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics:
1. UI Diag.: No module specification. All direct code specification.
UI Diag. restrictions:
2. Counter:
1. Paper type cannot be specified (Normal paper - Fixed)
a. Input/Output display - Input: The count is increased every time the “High/Low Level”
2. Tray cannot be specified (Normal paper - Fixed)
changes. The maximum count is 256. After reaching the maximum count, the
counter starts from 0. 3. Duplex cannot be specified (Normal paper - Fixed)
3. Number of simultaneous executions: 4. Half-tone Cin%=20% fixed
a. 12 (Same as PWS). If the number exceeds 12, the oldest code is stopped. 5. You cannot select a pattern with the “Color Test Pattern.” You must enter a number from
the “Code Table.”
4. Other message:
a. A warning message is displayed on the UI when the following occurs: Procedure
• Number of simultaneous executions exceeded 12 and you pressed Start. 1. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics.
• You stopped a code that is not being executed or displayed the status. 2. Select Print in the “Diagnostics Setup Screen.”
• You specified a cycle for the code that cannot be cycled. 3. Select a Test Pattern to output in the “Test Pattern Print List” and set the following on the
• The combination of a code that has already been executed and the new code is screen:
illegal. a. Category: IOT (Image output) or IPS (Image process)
• You specified an undefined code. b. Pattern No: 1-30(IOT), 1-56(IPS)
• You stopped the code from being executed. c. Mode: 4C, 3C, K, Y, M, C, R, G, B
Procedure 4. Select the Start Button.
1. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. 5. After the operation completes, select Close and return to the “Diagnostics Setup Screen.”
2. Select Component Control in the “Diagnostics Setup Screen.” Test Pattern Print List (UI Diagnostic Mode)
3. Select the Input Number Button on the “UI Screen”.
4. See the “dC330 Code List (Input), (Output)”, and enter an appropriate Chain-Link No. Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode)
NOTE: Selecting the “Input Number Button” allows you to enter a number from the ten- PG NO ASIC name Pattern name Description Remarks
key pad. 1 ANALOG IIT Analog Gradation 3C gradation PG - PreIPS (Image pro-
Ch1 - 6-RGB, 300 Reading all CCD cess)
CAUTION
lines (3C) RGB Odd/Even data.
Enter a correct number. (Make sure you have entered a correct number before you execute the
2 ANALOG IIT Analog Gradation 3C gradation PG - PreIPS (Image pro-
function. If you enter an invalid number, a secondary problem will occur.)
Ch1,2-R, 300 lines Reading all CCD cess)
5. Select the Start Button. (K) RGB Odd/Even data.
The Status Screen shows “Low/High (Input)” or “ON/Off (Output).” 3 ANALOG IIT Analog Gradation K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro-
6. To stop the operation, select the Stop Button. Ch3,4-G, 300 lines - Reading CCD G cess)
7. After the operation, all “Input/Output” tasks being executed will stop.The system returns to (K) Odd/Even data.
the “Diagnostics Setup Screen.” 4 ANALOG IIT Analog Gradation K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro-
Ch5,6-B, 300 lines (K) - Reading CCD B cess)
Odd/Even data.
5 ANALOG IIT Analog Gradation K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro-
Ch1-R, 300 lines (K) - Reading CCD R cess)
Odd data.
6 ANALOG IIT Analog Gradation K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro-
Ch2-R, 300 lines (K) - Reading CCD R cess)
Even data.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-133 Component Control (dC330 UI Diagnostics), Print
Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode) Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode)
PG NO ASIC name Pattern name Description Remarks PG NO ASIC name Pattern name Description Remarks
7 ANALOG IIT Analog Gradation K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro- 23 CST CST vertical stripes: PostIPS vertical stripe PostIPS (Image pro-
Ch3-G, 300 lines (K) - Reading CCD G cess) YMCK(POST PG for each Y.M.C.K cess)
Odd data. IPS)300 lines (4C) developer.
8 ANALOG IIT Analog Gradation K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro- 24 CST 64 gray-scale patch 64 gray-scale patch PostIPS (Image pro-
Ch4-G, 300 lines (K) - Reading CCD G cess) (POST IPS)200R PG cess)
Even data. lines (4C)
9 ANALOG IIT Analog Gradation K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro- 25 CST YMCK overlaid grid: 4C grid PG PostIPS (Image pro-
Ch5-B, 300 lines (K) - Reading CCD B cess) 600 lines-CST (4C) cess)
Odd data. 26 CST Slant line: 600 lines- PostIPS horizontal PostIPS (Image pro-
10 ANALOG IIT Analog Gradation K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro- CST (4C) stripe PG for each cess)
Ch6-B, 300 lines (K) - Reading CCD B cess) Y.M.C.K developer.
Even data. (Pattern: Same as
11 IIC IIT DIGITAL FS gra- FS direction gradation PreIPS (Image pro- No. 16)
dation, 300 lines (3C) PG cess) 27 CST Grid: Repeated for 4C grid repeated PG PostIPS (Image pro-
12 IIC IIT DIGITAL SS gra- SS gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro- YMCK, 600 lines-CST cess)
dation, 300 lines (3C) cess) (4C)
13 IIC IIT DIGITAL FS/SS FS/SS gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro- 28 MWAH MWAH PG300 lines Solid L*, a*, b*300 PostIPS (Image pro-
gradation, 300 lines cess) (3C) lines PG cess)
(3C) 29 MAD MAD PG300 lines Solid M 300 lines PG PostIPS (Image pro-
14 IIC IIT shading data out- Outputs the current PreIPS (Image pro- (4C) cess)
put, 300 lines (3C) shading correction cess) 30 TRE TRE PG300 lines Solid YC 300 lines PostIPS (Image pro-
data. (PG with dark (4C) PG cess)
center). 31 SFM SFM PG (POST Solid K 300 lines PG PostIPS (Image pro-
15 SID SID horizontal PreIPS horizontal PreIPS (Image pro- IPS)300 lines (B/W) cess)
stripes: YMCK, 300 stripe PG for each cess) 32 TBC TBC PG (POST Solid YMCK 300 lines PostIPS (Image pro-
lines (4C) Y.M.C.K developer IPS)300 lines (4C) PG cess)
16 SID SID slant lines, 600 PreIPS slant line PG PreIPS (Image pro- 33 TBC TBC horizontal Horizontal stripe - PostIPS (Image pro-
lines (4C) for each Y.M.C.K cess) stripes: YMCK (POST solid: YMCK 300 lines cess)
developer IPS) 300 lines (4C) PG
17 SID SID grid: Repeated PreIPS grid PG for PreIPS (Image pro- 34 TBC TBC vertical stripes: Vertical stripes - PostIPS (Image pro-
for YMCK, 600 lines each Y.M.C.K devel- cess) YMCK(POST Solid: YMCK 300 cess)
(4C) oper IPS)300 lines (4C) lines PG
18 TRE 1st phase TRE PG1, Half-tone (AAH)PG PreIPS (Image pro- 35 TBC EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
300 lines (3C) cess) IPS), 200R, 4C copy (bypassing the cess)
19 TRE 1st phase TRE PG2, Half-tone (55H)PG PreIPS (Image pro- Editor): 200R (4C)
300 lines (3C) cess) Note: Place the test
20 CMM MEM SYS PG1(MEM Solid RGB AAH 300 PostIPS (Image pro- chart on the platen
SYS)300 lines (3C) lines PG cess) and output the PG.
21 CMM MEM SYS PG2(MEM Solid RGB 55H 300 PostIPS (Image pro- 36 TBC EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
SYS)300 lines (3C) lines PG cess) IPS), 200R, 3C copy (bypassing the cess)
22 CST CST horizontal Editor): 200R (3C)
PostIPS horizontal PostIPS (Image pro-
stripes: YMCK(POST stripe PG for each Note: Place the test
cess)
chart on the platen
IPS)300 lines (4C) Y.M.C.K developer.
and output the PG.
(Pattern: Same as
No. 15)

Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics) 6-134 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
37 TBC EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image pro- 44 TBC Normal copy (POST Output a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
IPS), 200R, B/W copy (bypassing the cess) IPS), 200R, 4C copy: 200R (4C) cess)
Editor): 200R (B/W) Note: Place the test
Note: Place the test chart on the platen
chart on the platen and output the PG.
and output the PG. 45 TBC Normal copy (POST Output a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
38 TBC EDIT BYPASS(POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image pro- IPS), 200R, 3C copy: 200R (3C) cess)
IPS), 200R, Y copy (bypassing the cess) Note: Place the test
Editor): 200R (Yellow) chart on the platen
Note: Place the test and output the PG.
chart on the platen 46 TBC Normal copy (POST Output a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
and output the PG. IPS), 200R, B/W copy: 200R (B/W) cess)
39 TBC EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image pro- Note: Place the test
IPS), 200R, M copy (bypassing the cess) chart on the platen
Editor): 200R and output the PG.
(Magenta) 47 TBC Normal copy (POST Output a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
Note: Place the test IPS), 200R, Y copy: 200R (Yellow) cess)
chart on the platen Note: Place the test
and output the PG. chart on the platen
40 TBC EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image pro- and output the PG.
IPS), 200R, C copy (bypassing the cess) 48 TBC Normal copy (POST Output a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
Editor): 200R (Cyan) IPS), 200R, M copy: 200R cess)
Note: Place the test (Magenta)
chart on the platen Note: Place the test
and output the PG. chart on the platen
41 TBC EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image pro- and output the PG.
IPS), 200R, R copy (bypassing the cess) 49 TBC Normal copy (POST Output a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
Editor): 200R (Red) IPS), 200R, C copy: 200R (Cyan) cess)
Note: Place the test Note: Place the test
chart on the platen chart on the platen
and output the PG. and output the PG.
42 TBC EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image pro- 50 TBC Normal copy (POST Output a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
IPS), 200R, G copy (bypassing the cess) IPS), 200R, R copy: 200R (Red) cess)
Editor): 200R (Green) Note: Place the test
Note: Place the test chart on the platen
chart on the platen and output the PG.
and output the PG. Output a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
51 TBC Normal copy (POST
43 TBC EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image pro- IPS), 200R, G copy: 200R (Green) cess)
IPS), 200R, B copy (bypassing the cess) Note: Place the test
Editor): 200R (Blue) chart on the platen
Note: Place the test and output the PG.
chart on the platen
52 TBC Normal copy (POST Output a normal PostIPS (Image pro-
and output the PG.
IPS), 200R, B copy: 200R (Blue) cess)
Note: Place the test
chart on the platen
and output the PG.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-135 Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics)
53 TBC ALL IPS PG(ANA- Integrated the PWB PostIPS (Image pro- 12 HALFTONE 16 gray-scale SS, 300 16 GRAY-SCALES IN IOT (Image output)
LOG+PRE+MEM+PO PGs of Analog, CMM cess) THE SS DIRECTION
ST) and PostIPS into one Paper size: A3
simplified output. 13 HALFTONE ProCon, 300 ProCon patch pat- IOT (Image output)
54 TBC Color patch: 1st page Outputs the top color PostIPS (Image pro- tern/16.3 X 19.3mm
patch for the Editor cess) patch
Pad. Paper size: A3
55 TBC Color patch: 2nd Outputs the middle PostIPS (Image pro- 14 HALFTONE TED/STV, 300 TED/STV IOT (Image output)
page color patch for the cess) Paper size: A4
Editor Pad. 15 HALFTONE Wedge SS, 300 SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image output)
56 TBC Color patch: 3rd page Outputs the lower PostIPS (Image pro- gray-scale width:
color patch for the cess) 12dots
Editor Pad. Paper size: A3
1 HALFTONE Grid (Measurement), 20mm pitch/2dotline IOT (Image output) 16 HALFTONE Half-tone, 200R Any density pattern IOT (Image output)
600 grid Paper size: A3 or 17”
Paper size: A3 or 17” 17 HALFTONE 16 gray-scale SS, 16 GRAY-SCALES IN IOT (Image output)
2 HALFTONE Grid (Registration), Scale/2dotline grid IOT (Image output) 200R THE SS DIRECTION
600 Paper size:A3A4L/ Paper size: A3
A4S/B4S/B5L/B5S/ 18 HALFTONE ProCon, 200R ProCon patch pat- IOT (Image output)
LetterL/LetterS tern/16.3 X 19.3mm
3 HALFTONE Grid 45 degree, 600 45 degree grid/ IOT (Image output) patch
2dotline Paper size: A3S
Paper size: A3 or 17” 19 HALFTONE TED/STV, 200R TED/STV IOT (Image output)
4 HALFTONE Color registration Cross mark/4dotline IOT (Image output) Paper size: A4L
(Measurement), 600 Paper size: A3 or 17” 20 HALFTONE Wedge SS, 200R SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image output)
5 HALFTONE Color registration Color registration - IOT (Image output) gray-scale width:
(Visual check), 600 visual check pattern 12dots
Paper size: A3 or 17” Paper size: A3S
6 HALFTONE Half-tone, 600 Any density pattern IOT (Image output) 21 HALFTONE Half-tone, 200C Any density pattern IOT (Image output)
Paper size: A3 or 17” Paper size: A3S or
7 HALFTONE 16 gray-scale SS, 600 16 gray-scales in the IOT (Image output) 17”S
SS direction 22 HALFTONE 16 gray-scale SS, 16 GRAY-SCALES IN IOT (Image output)
Paper size: A3 200C THE SS DIRECTION
8 HALFTONE ProCon, 600 ProCon patch pat- IOT (Image output) Paper size: A3S
tern/16.3 X 19.3mm 23 HALFTONE ProCon, 200C ProCon patch pat- IOT (Image output)
patch tern/16.3 X 19.3mm
Paper size: A3 patch
9 HALFTONE TED/STV, 600 TED/STV IOT (Image output) Paper size: A3S
Paper size: A4L 24 HALFTONE TED/STV, 200C TED/STV IOT (Image output)
10 HALFTONE Wedge SS, 600 SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image output) Paper size: A4L
gray-scale width: 25 HALFTONE Wedge SS, 200C SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image output)
12dots gray-scale width:
Paper size: A3 12dots
11 HALFTONE Half-tone, 300 Any density pattern IOT (Image output) Paper size: A3S
Paper size: A3 or 17”

Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics) 6-136 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode) Fuser Nip Measurement (dC701 UI Diagnostics)
PG NO ASIC name Pattern name Description Remarks Purpose
26 HALFTONE Half-tone, 150C Any density pattern IOT (Image output) Creates a special copy and measures the Fuser Nip pressure.
Paper size: A3S or
17”S NOTE:
27 HALFTONE 16 gray-scale SS, 16 GRAY-SCALES IN IOT (Image output) • The External Heat Roll is not latched while this function is running.
150C THE SS DIRECTION • Measurement must be done after the P/R is warm. If the P/R is not warm, copy 40 or 50
Paper size: A3S pages first.
28 HALFTONE ProCon, 150C ProCon patch pat- IOT (Image output)
tern/16.3 X 19.3mm NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics:
patch UI Diag.:
Paper size: A3S 1. Measurement copy is limited only to 1 page.
29 HALFTONE TED/STV, 150C TED/STV IOT (Image output) 2. dC701 Jam: Close first and re-run the function.
Paper size: A4L
NOTE: Paper used varies depending on the market.
30 HALFTONE Wedge SS, 150C SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image output)
gray-scale width: • XE: A4L
12dots • NASG: Letter, 8.5x11 LEF
Paper size: A3S
Procedure
1. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics.
2. Select Subsystem Check in the “Diagnostics Setup Screen.”
3. Select Fuser Nip Measurement in the “Subsystem Screen.”
4. Select the following instructions on the screen:
a. Set the A4L (8.5 X 11 LEF) in the Tray 5 and select Start.
b. Set the measurement copy in the Tray 5 and select Start.
5. Measure the In/Out Nip Width on the “measurement copy.” (Use the scale.)
a. Normal value
i. In: 10.3 ±0.3mm
ii. Out: 10.3 ±0.3mm
6. If the measurement value differs, adjust the value. See ADJ 8.1.1 Adjusting the Fuser Nip
Pressure. Repeat Steps 4-5.
7. If the correct value is obtained, select Close and return to the “Diagnostics Setup Screen.”

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-137 Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics), Fuser
Developer Unit Check (dC920 UI Diagnostics) Max Setup (UI Diagnostics)
Purpose Purpose
Specifies the K/Y/M/C Home Positions and rotates the Rotary Developer to the Home Position. The “Max Set Up” in the UI Diagnostics does not have all the functions of the PWS Diagnos-
tics. If you need to adjust the following, do so using the PWS Diagnostics:
NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics.
UI Diag.: NOTE: For the execution sequence of the Max Setup Functions, see Adjustments Section 4:
ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup (dC929).
1. You cannot select and execute the function.
2. When the developer moves to the Home Position correctly, the system turns on the “Yel- 1. The following describes the Max Setup flow.
low Indicator” and then, at every Start, the developer moves to the “Magenta, Cyan and a. dC945 IIT Calibration (IIT installed machine only)
Black Home Positions”. If you select the “End Button”, the developer automatically moves b. dC918 IOT Highlight Setup
back to the “Home Position.” c. dC922 TRC Setup/Toner Density Adjustment
Procedure d. dC924 TRC Adjustment
1. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. e. dC939 TRC Check PG
2. Select Subsystem Check in the “Diagnostics Setup Screen.” f. dC934 ADC/AGC Setup
3. Select Developer Unit Check in the “Subsystem Check Screen.” The indicator arrow is g. dC933 VH/VM Setup
located at the “HomePosition.” h. dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine only)
NOTE: The Rotary Developer Unit moves to the Home Position. 2. Functions that the UI Diag. supports:
a. dC945 IIT Calibration
b. dC934 ADC/AGC Setup
5. Every time you select the “Start Button”, the “Developer Unit” moves as follows:
c. dC933 VH/VM Setup
Yellow→N Magenta→N Cyan→N Black→N Home
d. dC918 IOT Highlight Setup
6. When the Developer Unit Check ends, select Close. The system returns to the “Diagnos-
e. dC922 TRC Setup/Toner Density Adjustment
tics Setup Screen.”
f. dC924 TRC Adjust
g. dC919 Color Balance Setup
NOTE: Execute 2f and 2g above only if a fault has occurred after the setup.
3. Functions that the UI Diag. does not support:

a. dC939 TRC Check PG
b. dC923 ProCon PG

Developer Unit Check (dC920 UI Diagnostics), Max 6-138 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
IIT Calibration (dC945 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed ADC/AGC Setup (dC934 UI Diagnostics)
machine only) Purpose
Purpose Automatically adjusts and sets the “ADC Sensor Gain” so that the Vclean within the range is
• Sets the “Correction Coefficient” that corrects the dispersion of the “B-CCD Sensor Color obtained. At the same time, the “Vclean Irregularity” (Vclean RD) for the belt circumference is
Sensitivity” caused by dispersion in the “Blue Filter's Spectral Distribution.” measured.
• Calculates the “IIT Correction Coefficient” and “IPS Correction Coefficient.”

• Sets the “IIT Density Target Value” for “Automatic Gray-Scale Correction.”
UI Diag.:
NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. 1. No Target Value displays.
UI Diag.:
NOTE: This section only describes the “ADC/AGC Setup” in the UI-Diagnostics. For details on
1. The White Reference function in the PWS-Diagnostics is not provided in the UI-Diagnos- PWS-Diagnostics, see Adjustment Section 4: ADJ 9.1.3 ADC/AGC Setup (dC934).
tics.
Procedure
NOTE: This section only describes the calibration in the UI-Diagnostics. For details, see
Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.2 IIT Calibration (dC945).
2. Select Max Setup→ADC/AGC Setup.
Procedure 3. Select Start.
1. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. 4. The system displays the “Set Value” on the UI.
2. Select Max Setup IIT Calibration. 5. Select Close and return to the “Max Setup Screen.”
3. Place the Color Test Pattern on the Platen Glass.
4. Select Start.
5. The system displays the “Coefficient” and the results display on the UI.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-139 IIT Calibration (dC945 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed
VH/VM Setup (dC933 UI Diagnostics) IOT Highlight Setup (dC918 UI Diagnostics)
Purpose Purpose
Sets the “VG/LD Light Amount”, “Development Bias” and the “ASG Bias Output.” Sets the “Hi-Light Density Reproduction Start Points” for K/Y/M/C and “Uniform Hi-Light Den-
sity” for “In-board/Out-board.”
• From any 2 VGs, set the “VG Value” so that the “Drum Surface Potential” becomes the
“Target VH.” • Visually check the “PG Copy”, adjust the "IOT Reproduction Start Points” for K/Y/M/C Col-
• From any 3 Light Amounts, set the “LD Light Amount” that is the “Target VM.” ors (300/600) using the “ASG Bias.”
• Adjust the “IOT IN/OUT Density Difference” for K/Y/M/C colors (common to 300 and 600
lines) using the “ASG Bias” (EOS side).
UI Diag.:
• Measure the “ASG Bias” and “Highlight Potential” after “In/Out Adjustment”, and set the
1. No Target Value displays. “Target Control Value.”
NOTE: This section only describes the Setup in the UI-Diagnostics. For details on PWS-Diag- NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics.
nostics, see dC933 VH/VM Setup.
UI Diag.:
Procedure 1. No “Target Value” displays
1. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. 2. Tray 2 fixed
2. Select Max Setup→VH/VM Setup. NOTE: This section only describes the Setup in the UI-Diagnostics. For details, see dC918 IOT
3. Select Start. Highlight Setup.
4. The system displays the results on the UI.
Procedure
5. Select Close and return to the “Max Setup Screen.”
2. Select Max Setup→IOT Highlight Setup.
3. Check and adjust the In/Out Density Difference.
NOTE: If the paper is “A3” or “A4L”, select 300.
a. Select “PG Print 300/600”. Select Start. The system prints the checking PG.
b. Visually check the “In/Out Density Differences” for all 4 colors. If there is NO differ-
ence, proceed to Step 4. If there is difference, perform the following steps:
• Select In/Out on the Screen. Select the Color (Y, M, C, K) to be adjusted. Change
the value by using the +/- Button.
NOTE: To darken the density for “Out”, decrease the value.
• Repeat Steps 3-a through 3-b until there is no density difference.

4. Check and adjust the “Hi-Light Density Start Point.”
a. Select the PG Print 300 or 600 (A4L). The system prints a “300” or “600” line PG.
b. Visually check the “300” or “600” line PG if Cin 8.6% (for each K, Y, M and C) has
been reproduced and Cin 7.1% is NOT reproduced.
c. Select the mode 300 or 600 to adjust. Select a color (Y, M, C, K) to be adjusted.
Change the value by using the +/- Button.
d. Check the Highlight as described in 4-b. Repeat Steps 4-a through 4-c until the
“High Light” is satisfactory.
5. Select Close and return to the “Max Setup Screen.”

VH/VM Setup (dC933 UI Diagnostics), IOT Highlight 6-140 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
TRC Setup/Toner Concentration Adjustment (dC922 UI TRC Adjustment (dC924 UI Diagnostics)
Diagnostics) Purpose
Purpose Checks the PG Output with the PG Test Print Pattern. Manually fine-adjusts the density (low/
The system displays the control function buttons (TRC Control, TRC Adjustment,) for the TRC middle/high) for each color.
Setup.
NOTE: This section only describes the Adjustment in the UI-Diagnostics. For details, see
NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG.
UI Diag.: Preparation
1. No target value display
2. Tray2 fixed Visually check the PG with all OK colors in dC924 TRC Setup. Check the density (low/middle/
high) and perform the following steps as needed:
NOTE: This section only describes the Setup in the UI-Diagnostics. For details see dC922
TRC Setup/Toner Density Adjustment. Procedure
Procedure 1. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics.
2. Select the following:
Max Setup→TRC Setup/Toner Concentration Adjustment→TRC Adjustment.
3. Select a Color to adjust and the Density (Low, Mid, High). Change the Value with the
Max Setup→TRC Setup/Toner Concentration Adjustment→TRC Control
up/down button. (up: Darker density/down: Lighter density)
4. Perform Step 3 in all modes that need an adjustment.
4. The system displays the measurement value and displays the results on the UI.
5. Select Close twice to return to the “Max Setup Screen.”
5. If the evaluation of each color is OK, select Close twice and return to the “Max Setup
Screen.”
6. Select the Toner Density Adjustment.
7. Select an NG Color (Y, M, C, K) in Step 5. Select the Start Button.
8. Run Step 8 in all NG items.
9. Select Close to return to the “TRC Setup/Toner Density Adjustment Screen.”
10. Select the TRC Control and check if there is no “NG.”
If there is an “NG”, repeat Steps 2-10.
11. Select Close twice to return to the “Max Setup Screen.”
12. Visually check the low/middle/high density of the “PG” with all OK colors. Adjust the
density if needed, refer to; TRC Adjustment (dC924 UI Diagnostics).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-141 TRC Setup/Toner Concentration Adjustment
Color Balance Setup (dC919 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed
machine only)
Purpose
• To correct the YMCK Color Balance.
• Take a 4C copy in the Photo Mode. Visually check the copy. Reset the YMCK Color Bal-
ance Value.
NOTE: Run this function at the customer’s request, after the automatic gray-scale is corrected.
NOTE: The Hi-Light Setup must be performed before running this function.
NOTE: This section only describes the setup in the UI-Diagnostics. For details, see IOT High-
light Setup (dC918 UI Diagnostics).
Procedure
Max Setup→Color Balance Setup.
3. Place Test Pattern (82E10810) on the Platen Glass. Select the Start Button.
Take a PG Print in the following mode:
a. APS, 100%, Normal paper, LUTON
NOTE: If each color has no defects in density, go to Step 4.

If there are defects in color density, adjust the color balance for colors with defects using
the UI.
4. Select Close to return to the Max Setup Screen.

Color Balance Setup (dC919 UI Diagnostics) (IIT in- 6-142 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
General Information Installation Space Requirements
Product Codes Installation Space Requirements without Accessories
(Figure 1)
Table 1 Product Codes
Latin Latin Xerox
USA Canada America America Europe
Product (60Hz) (60Hz) (110V) (220V) (220V)
DocuColor 12 Digital Copier/Printer FU2 FU2 FU2 FU3 FU3
DocuColor 12 LP FU0 FU0 FU0 FU1 FU1
Wing (Left/Right) GC1 GC1 GC1 GC1 GC1
Convenience Stapler Kit KM6 KM6 KM6 KM6 KM6
Off-Set Catch Tray GF6 GF6 GF6 GF6 GF6
High Capacity Feeder FT4 FT4 FT4 FT4 FT4
Sorter/Mailbox FY8 FY8 FY8 FY8 FY8
Finisher RV8 RV8 RV8 RV8 RV8
IDFE MFY MFY MFY MFY MFY
Cobra L (1 Byte) GL2 GL2 GL2 GL2 GL2
Cobra Memory Upgrade Kit HY6 HY6 HY6 HY6 HY6
Cobra Token Ring Kit LY7 LY7 LY7 LY7 LY7
BNC Transceiver Kit HY8 HY8 HY8 HY8 HY8
Mobility Kit MC4 MC4 MC4 MC4 MC4
DocuColor 12 Edit Pad GC0 GC0 GC0 GC0 GC0
DocuColor 12 Edit Pad w/o DADF VM0 VM0 VM0 VM0 VM0 Figure 1 Installation Space Requirements without Accessories
Electronic Pre Collation (EPC) Kit FKP FKP FKP FKP FKP
Table 1 Installation Space Requirements without Accessories
EPC Enablement Kit FGT FGT FGT FGT FGT
Fixed Space Requirements Movable Space Requirements
DocuColor 12 Foreign Interface GL1 GL1 GL1 GL1 GL1
Dimensions
in. mm in. mm
A 21 533 21 533
B¹ 24 610 4 100
C 23 585 23 585
D w/o IDFE 91.5 ² 2324 ² 71.5 1816 *
D w/ IDFE 95.5 ³ 2426 ² 75.5 ** 1918 **
E 68.5 1740 68.5 1740
¹ Measured from the rear of processor if IDFE is not present.
² 106.5 in. (2705mm) if installed in hallway.
³ 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway.
* 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway.
**90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-143 General Information, Installation Space Require-
Installation Space Requirements with Edit Pad (Right Side) Installation Space Requirements with HCF
(Figure 2)
Figure 3 Installation Space Requirements with HCF
Figure 2 Installation Space Requirements with Edit Pad (Right Side) Table 3 Installation Space Requirements with HCF
Fixed Space Requirements Movable Space Requirements
Table 2 Installation Space Requirements with Edit Pad Dimensions
Fixed Space Requirements Movable Space Requirements in. mm in. mm
Dimensions A 51 1300 51 1300
in. mm in. mm
B¹ 24 610 4 100
A 21 533 21 533 C 23 585 23 585
B¹ 24 610 4 100 D w/o IDFE 91.5 ² 2324 ² 71.5 * 1816 *
C 55 1400 55 1400 D w/ IDFE 95.5 ³ 2426 ² 75.5 ** 1918 **
D w/o IDFE 91.5 ² 2324 ² 71.5 * 1816 * E 98.5 2500 98.5 2500
D w/ IDFE 95.5 ³ 2426 ² 75.5 ** 1918 **
E 100.5 2555 100.5 2555
¹ Measured from the rear of processor if IDFE is not present. ² 106.5 in. (2705mm) if installed in hallway.
² 106.5 in. (2705mm) if installed in hallway. ³ 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway.
³ 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway. * 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway.
* 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway. ** 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway.
** 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway. Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Edit Pad (Right Side)
(Figure 4)

Installation Space Requirements 6-144 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Edit Pad (Right Side) Figure 5 Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Sorter/Mailbox
Table 4 Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Edit Pad Table 5 Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Sorter/Mailbox
Fixed Space Requirements Movable Space Requirements Fixed Space Requirements Movable Space Requirements
Dimensions Dimensions
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
A 51 1300 51 1300 A 51 1300 51 1300

B¹ 24 610 4 100 B¹ 24 610 4 100
C 55 1400 55 1400 C 65.5 1665 65.5 1665
D w/o IDFE 91.5 ² 2324 ² 71.5 * 1816 * D w/o IDFE 91.5 ² 2324 ² 71.5 * 1816 *
D w/ IDFE 95.5 ³ 2426 ² 75.5 ** 1918 ** D w/ IDFE 95.5 ³ 2426 ² 75.5 ** 1918 **
E 130.5 3315 130.5 3315 E 141 3580 141 3580
¹ Measured from the rear of processor if IDFE is not present. ¹ Measured from the rear of processor if IDFE is not present.
² 106.5 in. (2705mm) if installed in hallway. ² 106.5 in. (2705mm) if installed in hallway.
³ 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway. ³ 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway.
* 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway. * 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway.
** 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway. ** 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway.
Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Sorter/Mailbox Installation Space Requirements with HCF, Sorter/Mailbox and Edit
(Figure 5) Pad (Left Side)
(Figure 6)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-145 Installation Space Requirements
Figure 6 Space Requirements with HCF, Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad (Left Side) Figure 7 Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox
Table 6 Space Requirements with HCF, Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad Table 7 Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox
A 86 2185 86 2185 A 21 533 21 533

B¹ 24 610 4 100 B¹ 24 610 4 100
C 65.5 1665 65.5 1665 C 65.5 1665 65.5 1665
D w/o IDFE 91.5 ² 2324 ² 71.5 * 1816 * D w/o IDFE 91.5 ² 2324 ² 71.5 * 1816 *
D w/ IDFE 95.5 ³ 2426 ² 75.5 ** 1918 ** D w/ IDFE 95.5 ³ 2426 ² 75.5 ** 1918 **
E 176 4470 176 4470 E 111 2819 111 2819
¹ Measured from the rear of processor if IDFE is not present. ¹ Measured from the rear of processor if IDFE is not present.
² 106.5 in. (2705mm) if installed in hallway. ² 106.5 in. (2705mm) if installed in hallway.
³ 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway. ³ 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway.
* 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway. * 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway.
** 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway. ** 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway.
Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad
(Figure 7) (Left Side)
(Figure 8)

Installation Space Requirements 6-146 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 8 Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad (Left Side) Figure 9 Installation Space Requirements without Accessories (LP Only)
Table 8 Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad Table 9 Installation Space Requirements without Accessories (LP Only
A 86.5 2185 86 2185 A 21 533 21 533

B¹ 24 610 4 100 B¹ 24 610 4 100
C 65.5 1665 65.5 1665 C 23 585 23 585
D w/o IDFE 91.5 ² 2324 ² 71.5 * 1816 * D 95.5 ² 2324 ² 71.5 ³ 1918 ³
D w/ IDFE 95.5 ³ 2426 ² 75.5 ** 1918 ** E 68.5 1740 68.5 1740
E 176 4470 176 4470
¹ Measured from the rear of Integrated Digital Front End.
Installation Space Requirements with HCF
* 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway. (Figure 10)
** 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway.
Installation Space Requirements without Accessories

(Figure 9)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-147 Installation Space Requirements
Product Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Input Service Requirements
The requirements for input power in each market are shown below:
Table 1 Line Requirements

Specification NASG ESG
Voltage 115VAC ± 10% * 220-240VAC ± 10%
line - to - neutral line - to - neutral
Frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz
Phase Single phase, 2-wire Single phase, 2-wire
plus earth ground plus earth ground
Service **
C/P 20 Amps 15 Amps
LP 15 Amps 15 Amps
Figure 10 Installation Space Requirements with HCF NOTE: * For Mexico only, the machine must be functional at 10% above the rated voltage input
of the power supply.
Table 10 Installation Space Requirements with HCF
NOTE: ** Dedicated service line is recommended, but not required. System plugs into stan-
Fixed Space Requirements Movable Space Requirements dard office outlets with a single power cord.
Dimensions
in. mm in. mm Current/ Power Requirements
Current and Power specifications for each market are as follows:
A 51 1300 51 1300
B¹ 24 610 4 100
Table 2 Power Consumption
C 23 585 23 585
Specification NASG ESG
D 95.5 ² 2426 ² 75.5 ³ 1918 ³
Max Power Consumption (@ 115VAC) (@ 220VAC)
E 98.5 2500 98.5 2500
C/P 2.112 kVA 2.2 kVA
LP 1.584 kVA 1.584KVA
¹ Measured from the rear of Integrated Digital Front End.
Avg. Warm-up Current (@ 115VAC) (@ 240VAC)
² 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway. C/P 12.5A (1.6 kVA) 8.0A (1.6kVA)
LP 11.0A (1.265 kVA) 6.3A (1.265 kVA)
³ 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway. Avg. Standby Current (@ 115VAC) (@ 240VAC)
C/P 7.0A (0.8 kVA) 3.8A (0.8 kVA)
LP 5.3A (0.6 kVA) 3.0A (0.6 kVA)
Avg. Run Current (4-color) (@ 115VAC) (@ 240VAC)
C/P 10.0A (1.2 kVA) 5.7A (1.2 kVA)
LP 7.5A (0.9 kVA) 4.5A (0.9 kVA)
Current Rating
C/P 16 Amps 10 Amps
LP 12 Amps 10 Amps

Installation Space Requirements, Product Specifica- 6-148 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Other Electrical Specifications • 201% through 400%: ±1.5%
1. Leakage protection Copy Speed
• Internal earth leakage breaker First copy out time
2. Electrical Noise • Black/White: 7.9 sec. 8.5×11 (A4) LEF
• VCCI Class 1 compliance • Full Color: 18 sec. 8.5×11 (A4) LEF
3. Ground First copy out time with EPC option - Collated mode
• Class 3 • Black/White 10 sec. - 8.5×11 (A4) LEF
Environmental Specifications • Full Color: 22 sec. - 8.5×11 (A4) LEF
Heat Output Tray 5 or Transparency mode
• 1.8 copies/min.
Table 3 Continuous copy in copies/min.
Model avg. BTU/hr. avg. BTU/hr.
(operating) (standby) Table 5 Copies per Minute
C/P 4080 2720 Paper Copy Mode

LP 3755 1230 Size
B/W 4 Color
Audible Noise 11×17 (A3) 25 6.2

8.5×14 (B4) 28.8 6.2
Table 4 Audible Noise 8.5×11 (A4) LEF 50 12.5
Continuous Noise Impulse Noise (db) 8.5×11 (A4) SEF 28.8 6.2
Stand by 48.3 -
Image Loss
Copy Cycle 67.1 62.2
• Lead Edge: 3±1mm or the optional setting of 4mm
• Sides: 3±1mm
Ozone Generation
• Trail Edge: 3±1mm
• Maximum 0.02 ppm
Copy Paper Capability
Temperature
Paper Trays
• 50°F (10°C) to 95°F (35°C)
Relative Humidity
Tray 1
• 15% TO 85% (Non-condensing)
• 16 lb. (64 G/m2) through 24 lb. (90 G/m2)
Altitude
Tray 2, 3, 4
• 0-10,000 ft. (3050M) (Above 2,000 meters requires adjustment by a CSE)
Levelness
Tray 5
• Maximum level difference - 5mm or less (front to back)
• Maximum level difference - 10mm or less (right to left)
System Capability
Warm-up Time
• 100V: 8 minutes 45 seconds or less (20°(C) 68°(F), 60%)
Magnification
• 25% to 400% in 1% increments
• 25% through 200%: ±1%

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-149 Product Specifications
Paper Cassette Sizes Available
Table 6 Paper Cassette Sizes - NASG and ESG

NASG ESG
8×10 LEF A4 LEF
A4 LEF 215×279 LEF
8.5×11 LEF A3 SEF
A3 SEF 215×279 SEF
8.5×11 SEF B4 ISO SEF
9×12 SEF 215×315 SEF
8.5×13 SEF 215×330 SEF
8.5×14 SEF 215×356 SEF
A4 SEF A4 SEF
11×17 SEF 279×432 SEF
Paper Cassette/receiving Tray Capacity

• Cassette 500 sheets
• Paper Tray Bypass 100 sheets (20 lb./80gsm)
• Receiving tray 100 Sheets

Product Specifications 6-150 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Size Sensing (NASG) DADF Product Specifications
DADF Physical Characteristics
Table 7 Size Sensing - (NASG)
Dimensions (DADF)
Document Size Sensed Size
11×17 ±4mm 11×17 (280×432) Table 9 DADF Dimensions and Weights
9×12 SEF ±4mm 9×12 (229×305) Dimensions US Metric
8.5×14 SEF ±4mm 8.5×14 (216×356) Width 24" 640mm
8.5×13 SEF ±4mm 8.5×13 (216×331) Depth 20.5" 535mm
8.5×12.4 SEF ±4mm 8.5×12.4 (216×315) Height 9" 130mm
8.5×11 SEF ±4mm 8.5×11 (216×280) Weight: DADF only 31lb. 14kg
8.5×11 LEF ±4mm 11×8.5 (280×216) Machine with DADF 549 lb. 249kg
8×10 SEF ±4mm 8×10 (204×254)
8×10 LEF ±4mm 10×8 (254×204) DADF Electrical Specifications
8.5×5.5 SEF ±4mm 5.5×8.5 (140×216) FREQUENCY
8.5×5.5 LEF ±4mm 8.5×5.5 (216×140)
• 50/60Hz ±2%
Size Sensing (ESG) INPUT VOLTAGE
Table 8 Size Sensing - (ESG) • Supplied by machine

POWER CONSUMPTION
A3 ±4mm A3 (297×420) • 120 Watts
B4 SEF ±4mm B4 (257×364) DADF System Capability
A4 SEF ±4mm A4 (210×297) DOCUMENT SIZE
A4 LEF ±4mm A4 (297×210)
B5 SEF ±4mm B5 (182×257) • Maximum 11×17 (A3)
B5 LEF ±4mm B5 (257×182) • Minimum 5.5×8.5 (A5)
A5 SEF ±4mm A5 (148×210) DOCUMENT TRAY
A5 LEF ±4mm A5 (210×148)
• Capacity 50 documents
B6 SEF ±4mm B6 (128×182)
SIZE MIXED MODE
B6 LEF ±4mm B6 (182×128)
A6 SEF ±4mm A6 (105×148) • In this mode sizes from 5.5×8.5 (A5) to 11×17 (A3) can be mixed.
A6 LEF ±4mm A6 (148×105) REGISTRATION
B7 SEF ±4mm B7 (91×128)
B7 LEF ±4mm B7 (128×91) • Lead edge ±2.5
A7 SEF ±4mm A7 (74×105) • Side edge ±3
A7 LEF ±4mm A7 (105×74) • Skew ±2.5
B8 SEF ±4mm B8 (64×91)
B8 LEF ±4mm B8 (91×64)
A8 SEF ±4mm A7 (52×74)
A8 LEF ±4mm A7 (74×52)
B9 SEF ±4mm B9 (45×64)
B9 LEF ±4mm B9 (64×45)

DADF SIZE SENSING (NASG) Table 12 Sorter/Mailbox Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions US Metric
Table 10 DADF Size Sensing - (NASG)
Depth 29" 744mm
Height 46" 1170mm
11×17 11×17 (280×432)
Weight: 110lb. 50kg
11×14.9 SEF 11×17 (280×432) Sorter/Mailbox Only
8.5×14 SEF 8.5×14 (216×356)
8.5×13 SEF 8.5×14 (216×356) Sorter/Mailbox Electrical Specifications
8.5×12.4 SEF -- FREQUENCY
8.5×11 SEF 8.5×11 (216×280)
• 50/60Hz ±2%
8.5×11 LEF 11×8.5 (280×216)
INPUT VOLTAGE
8×10 SEF 8×11 (216×280)
8×10 LEF 11×8.5 (280×216)
• Supplied by machine
8.5×5.5 SEF 5.5×8.5 (140×216)
POWER CONSUMPTION
8.5×5.5 LEF 8.5×5.5 (216×140)
A4 SEF A4 (210×297) • 70 Watts
A4 LEF A4 (297×210) Sorter/Mailbox System Capability
COPY SORT SIZE
DADF SIZE SENSING (ESG)
• Maximum 12×18
Table 11 DADF Size Sensing - (ESG) • Minimum A6 Postcard-OCT
Sensed Size TRAY CAPACITIES
Document Size
ESG
• Copy Output Tray 400 Copies-OCT
11×14.9 SEF 11×17 (280×432)
BASIC WEIGHT RANGE
8.5×14 SEF 8.5×14 (216×356)
8.5×13 SEF 8.5×14 (216×356) • Sorter/Mailbox 60-105 gsm
8.5×12.4 SEF -- • Offset Catch Tray 60-250 gsm
A3 A3 (297×420) Finisher Product Specifications
B4 SEF B4 (257×364)
Finisher Physical Characteristics
A4 SEF A4 (210×297)
Dimensions (Finisher)
A4 LEF A4 (297×210)
B5 SEF B5 (182×257) Table 13 Finisher Dimensions and Weights
B5 LEF B5 (257×182) Dimensions US Metric
A5 SEF A5 (148×210)
Width 29.9" 760mm
A5 LEF A5 (210×148)
Depth 25.9" 660mm
Height 41.7" 1060mm
Sorter/Mailbox Product Specifications Weight: 132lb. 60kg
Sorter/Mailbox Physical Characteristics Finisher Only
Dimensions (Sorter)
Finisher Electrical Specifications
Table 12 Sorter/Mailbox Dimensions and Weights
FREQUENCY
Dimensions US Metric
• 50/60Hz ±2%
Width 23.5" 599mm

manuals4you.com
INPUT VOLTAGE Table 14 Magnification Accuracy
UI display Actual magnification Actual magnification
• Supplied by machine
magnification (%) (%) (Reference)
POWER CONSUMPTION
282 282.8 A6→A3
• 70 Watts 400 400.0 -
Finisher System Capability
NOTE: Variable magnification (25~400%) for every 1%.
COPY SORT SIZE
2. Variable magnification
• Maximum 12×18
a. 25%~400% (every 1%)
• Minimum A6 Postcard-OCT
Magnification Precision
TRAY CAPACITIES
1. Longitudinal magnification precision
• Copy Output Tray 400 Copies-OCT a. Fixed magnification: 100%±0.5%
BASIC WEIGHT RANGE b. Free magnification: 25% ~200%:±1.0%
201% ~400%:±1.5%
• Finisher 60-105 gsm 2. Lateral magnification precision
• Offset Catch Tray 60-250 gsm a. Fixed magnification: 100%±0.5%
Magnification b. Variable magnification: 25% ~200%: ±1.0%
1. Fixed Magnification 201% ~400%:±1.5%
a. The key operator tool provides 7 types of fixed magnification. Copy Speed (CPM)
From these, 6 types can be selected from the table below. 1. Tray 1-4
One type can be set for every 1%. (m in the table: Factory default) a. Regular paper (Continuous copy - Unit: sheets/minute)
CPM (Regular paper (64gsm~less than 105gsm)/No1~No4 trays)
Table 14 Magnification Accuracy
UI display Actual magnification Actual magnification Table 15 Copy Speed
magnification (%) (%) (Reference) Black/White Black/White Full color Full color
25 25.0 - Simplex Duplex Simplex Duplex
35 35.4 A3→A6 A3 25 25 6.2 6.2
50 50.0 A3→A5 B4 28.8 28.8 6.2 6.2
64 64.7 11X17→8.5X11 A4 LEF 50 50 12.5 12.5
70 70.7 A3→A4, B4→B5 A4 SEF 28.8 28.8 6.2 6.2
78 78.0 8.5X14→8.5X11
81 81.6 B4→A4, B5→A5
b. Thick paper (Continuous copy - Unit: sheets/minute)
86 86.6 A4→B5, A3→B4
CPM - Simplex Mode (Thick paper (105~128gsm))
97 97.3 A4→8.5X11
115 115.0 B5→A4, B4→A3
122 122.4 A4→B4, A5→B5 Table 16 Thick paper Copy Speed
127 127.3 8.5X13→A3 Black/White Full color
129 129.4 8.5X11→11X17
A3 5.8 3.5
141 141.4 A4→A3, B5→B4
B4 5.8 3.5
154 154.5 5.5X8.5→8.5X14
A4 LEF 5.8 3.5
180 180.0 8.5X13→A2 A4 SEF 5.8 3.5
200 200.0 A5→A3
220 220.0 5.5X8.5→11X17

2. Tray 5 (Continuous copy - Unit: sheets/minute) a. Maximum: 297X432mm (A3,11X17”)
CPM - Tray 5 b. Minimum: No limitation
2. Document size/weight through the DADF:
Table 17 Tray 5 Copy Speed a. Maximum: 297X432mm (A3,11X17”)
Black/White Full color Weight b. Minimum: 148.5mmX210mm (A5S, 5.83X8.27)
Regular paper A4 L/Letter L 25 6.2 64~105gsm c. Weight (DADF): 38gsm~128gsm (Duplex: 50gsm~110gsm)
Regular paper A3 20 6.2 64~105gsm Document Size Detection
OHPA4 L/Letter L 20 2.4 - 1. Document scanning
OHPA3 ¹ ¹ -
Thick paper A4 L/Letter L 5.8 3.5 105~162gsm Table 20 Document Size Detection
Thick paper A3 5.8 3.5 105~162gsm Machine can detect the
Extra thick paper A4 L/Letter L 3.3 2.4 163~250gsm following sizes of originals. Platen DADF
Extra thick paper A3 3.3 2.4 163~250gsm Document Document
Postcard 3.3 2.4 - orientation size (mm) NASG ESG NASG ESG
Postcard SEF 100X148 - - - -
¹ A3OHP - Feed 1 sheet at a time. No CPM specification. (Post Card) (101X152) X ALT ² - -
Copy Speed (DPM) A6 SEF 105X148 ALT ³ X - -
1. Auto Feed (Duplex) (Continuous copy - Unit: sheets/minute) B6 SEF 128X182 X X - -
B6 LEF 182X128 - - - -
Table 18 Duplex Copy Speed
A5 SEF 148X210 X X - X¹
AE either on/off. ACS A5 LEF 210X148 X X - X
Paper size AE off/ACS off AE ON/ACS Off must be on.
5.5X8.5 SEF 140X215.9 X X X¹ -
Black/White A4 LEF 40 40 40 5.5X8.5 LEF 215.9X140 X X X -
Black/White B4 25.7 23.6 19 B5 SEF 215.9X279.4 X X X X
Black/White A3 22 20 16.6 B5 LEF 279.4X215.9 X X X X
Full color A4 LEF 12.5 12.5 12.5 8.5X13 SEF 215.9X330.2 - X - X
Full color B4 6.2 6.2 6.2 8.5X14 SEF 215.9X355.6 X - X X
Full color A3 6.2 6.2 6.2 B4 SEF 257X364 X X X
8th Opening 267X388 X X - -
2. Auto Feed (Simplex) (Continuous copy - Unit: sheets/minute) SEF
A3 SEF 297X420 X X X X
Table 19 Auto Feed Copy Speed 11X17 SEF 297.4X431.8 X X X X
AE either on/off. ACS
Paper size AE off/ACS off AE ON/ACS Off must be on. NOTE:
Black/White A4 LEF 40 40 23.6 ¹ Mix Mode only
Black/White B4 25 14 14 ² Default is A6S, Postcard S is selectable.
Black/White A3 20 12.5 12.5 ³ Default is Postcard S; A6 S is selectable.
Full color A4 LEF 12.5 9.3 9.4
Full color B4 6.2 5 6.2
Image Loss
1. Lead edge: 3±1mm
Full color A3 6.2 5 6.2
2. Bottom edge: 3±1mm
3. Side edge: 3±1mm
Document Size/Weight (DADF)
1. Document sizes using Platen:

manuals4you.com
Copy (Print) Paper
1. Tray (B5~A3, Letter)
Table 24 Tray Settings
a. NO1 Tray: 64~105gsm
Tray 1 Refer to: Table 22
b. NO2~4 Tray: 64~128gsm (105~128gsm paper: Select “Thick Paper 1”.)
Tray 2-4 Adjustable Tray ²
2. Tray 5: 64~250gsm
Tray 5 Adjustable Tray ¹
Table 21 Paper Part Numbers HCF (option) Adjustable Tray ² (8.5x11 or A4 only)
¹ Set Paper Guides at new paper position and select the loaded
NASG Market ESG Market
paper size using the User Interface.
For B/W 4024DP (20#) 80 gsm Premier ² Paper size setting is performed automatically at setting the guide
3R91720,
for the regular sized paper.
3R91721
For Color Color Xpressions Colortech Plus
NOTE: Tray 5 paper sizes are selected from the Control Panel.
93 (24# bond) (90gsm)
3R5464, 3R94641 (A4),
3R5465 3R94642 (A3)
Table 25 Tray 5 Paper Sizes
Paper Cassette Type Machine can detect the
Paper sizes and orientation loadable in each tray are as follows: following sizes of originals. Tray 5
Paper Size / Orientation

Table 22 Paper Size Specifications NASG ESG
Tray 1 Postcard SEF 100X148 - -
NASG spec (8.5x11) LEF (Post Card) LEF (101X152) X ALT ²
ESG spec A4 LEF (Post Card) LEF (101X152) X ALT ²
A5 SEF, A4 LEF, Letter (8.5x11) LEF paper load is possible if A6 SEF 105X148 ALT ³ X
paper guide position is changed and the size is input in “NVM R/W A6 LEF 105X148 ALT ³ X
(dC131)” or in “Configuration Page (dC371)”.
B6 SEF 128X182 X X
B6 LEF 182X128 - -
A5 SEF 148X210 X X
Table 23 Paper Size Specifications A5 LEF 210X148 X X
5.5X8.5 SEF 140X215.9 X X
Tray 2,3 and 4
5.5X8.5 LEF 215.9X140 X X
NASG spec. Common specification among NASG and
B5 SEF 215.9X279.4 X X
ESG spec. ESG. A3SEF, B4SEF, A4SEF, A4LEF, B5SEF,
B5LEF, Letter (8.5x11) SEF, Letter (8.5x11) B5 LEF 279.4X215.9 X X
LEF, Legal (8.5x14) SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8th A4 SEF 210x297 X X
Opening SEF, Suryu-kai LEF, Legal (8.5x13) A4 LEF 297x210 X X
SEF, 8x10 LEF 8x10 SEF X -
12x18 SEF can be loaded in special Tray 5. 8x10 SEF X -
12x18 SEF can be loaded in Trays 2,3 or 4 if modified by the CSE
8x11 SEF 215.9x279.4 X -
per ADJ 9.1.19 (Tray 2, 3, and 4 for 12 x 18 Paper).
For the irregular sized paper, tray can be used if paper guide posi- 8x11 LEF 279.4x215.9 X X
tion is changed and the size is input using the User Interface. 8.5X13 SEF 215.9X330.2 - X
8.5X14 SEF 215.9X355.6 X X
8.5X14 SEF 215.9X355.6 X -
B4 SEF 257X364 - X

Table 25 Tray 5 Paper Sizes Table 27 Platen Registration
Machine can detect the Tray 5 (Platen) Tray (Platen) DADF DADF single unit
following sizes of originals. Tray 5
Side registration ±3.0 ±2.1 (Side1) ±2.5 (Side1) -
Paper Size / Orientation (mm) ±2.1 (Side2) ±2.5 (Side2)
NASG ESG Lead skew (200mm) ±2.0 ±1.6 (Side1) ±2.0 (Side1) ±1.5 (Side1)
(mm) ±1.6 (Side2) ±2.2 (Side2) ±1.5 (Side2)
8th Opening 267X388 - -
SEF Size skew (400mm) ±4.0 ±3.2 (Side1) ±4.0 (Side1) -
(mm) ±3.2 (Side2) ±4.0 (Side2)
A3 SEF 297X420 X X
Linearity (Longitudi- ±1.0 (Side1) ±1.0 (Side1) ±1.0 (Side1) -
11X17 SEF 297.4X431.8 X X
nal: 400mm) (mm) ±1.0 (Side2) ±1.0 (Side2) ±1.0 (Side2)
12X18 SEF X X
Linearity (Lateral/ ±1.0 (Side1) ±1.0 (Side1) ±1.0(Side1) -
SRA3:12.6x17.7 320x450 X X
Skew: 280mm) (mm) ±1.0 (Side2) ±1.0 (Side2) ±1.0 (Side2)
SEF
Perpendicularity ±2.0 (Side1) ±2.0 (Side1) ±2.0 (Side1) -
(400mm) (mm) ±2.0 (Side2) ±2.0 (Side2) ±2.0 (Side2)
Others: Non-standard size (Enter the size from the Control Panel).
Parallelism (400mm) ±1.3 (Side1) ±1.3 (Side1) ±1.3 (Side1) -
Range (mm) ±1.3 (Side2) ±1.3 (Side2) ±1.3 (Side2)
Lateral magnifica- ±0.5%/280mm ±0.5%/280mm ±0.5%/280mm -
1. Main scanning direction: 148~297mm (Default: 257mm) tion% (100%) ±0.5%/280mm ±0.5%/280mm ±0.5%/280mm
2. Subscanning direction: 203~432mm (Default: 257mm) Lateral magnifica- ±1.0%/280mm ±1.0%/280mm ±1.0%/280mm -
tion% (25~200%) ±1.0%/280mm ±1.0%/280mm ±1.0%/280mm
Tray/Cassette Capacity
Lateral magnifica- ±2.0%/280mm ±2.0%/280mm ±2.0%/280mm -
1. Tray 1: 500 sheets (4024DP20lb)
tion% (201~400%) ±2.0%/280mm ±2.0%/280mm ±2.0%/280mm
2. Tray 2~4: 550 sheets (4024DP20lb)
Longitudinal magnifi- ±0.5%/200mm ±0.5%/200mm ±0.5%/200mm -
3. Tray 5: 100 sheets (15mm stack) (4024DP20lb) cation (Top half)% ±0.5%/200mm ±0.5%/200mm ±0.5%/200mm
4. HCF: 2000 sheets (4024DP20lb) (100%)
Document Input Tray, Tray/Exit Tray Capacity (DADF) (Unit: sheet) Longitudinal magnifi- ±0.5%/200mm ±0.5%/200mm ±0.5%/200mm -
cation (Bottom ±0.5%/200mm ±0.5%/200mm ±0.5%/200mm
Both Input tray and exit tray have the same capacity, as follows:
half)% (100%)
Table 26 Longitudinal magnifi- ±0.5%/400mm ±0.5%/400mm ±0.5%/400mm -
cation% (100%) ±0.5%/400mm ±0.5%/400mm ±0.5%/400mm
A4 or less B4 A3
Longitudinal magnifi- ±0.5%/280mm ±0.5%/280mm ±0.5%/280mm -
Thin paper (38~49gsm) 50 50 50 cation% ±0.5%/280mm ±0.5%/280mm ±0.5%/280mm
Regular paper (50~100gsm) 50 50 50 (25%~200%)
Thick paper (101~128gsm) 40 40 40 Longitudinal magnifi- ±2.0%/280mm ±2.0%/280mm ±2.0%/280mm -
cation% ±2.0%/280mm ±2.0%/280mm
(201%~400%)
Output Tray (Bin) Capacity (Unit: sheet)
1. Exit Tray: 200 Sheets
2. OCT (Offset Catch Tray): 500 sheets
3. Sorter/Mailbox Bin: 100 sheets/Bin (No. of bins: 10 Bins)
Copy Consistency
Table 27 Platen Registration

Tray 5 (Platen) Tray (Platen) DADF DADF single unit
Lead edge registra- ±2.2 ±1.6 (Side1) ±2.5 (Side1) ±1.5 (Side1)
tion (mm) ±1.6 (Side2) ±2.5 (Side2) ±1.5 (Side2)

manuals4you.com
Common Tools Product Tools and Test Patterns
Table 1 Common Tools Table 1 Tools and Test Patterns
Description Part Number Description Part Number
Screw Driver (-) 3 x 50 600T40205 Color Test Pattern 82E13120
Screw Driver (+) 6 x 100 600T1989 Black & White Test Pattern 82E8220
Screw Driver (+) NO.1 499T356 0.3 Density Gray Test Pattern 82P207
Stubby Driver (+) (-) 600T40210 HVPS test probe 600T1653
Screw Driver (=) 100MM 499T355 HVPS test probe adapter 600T1996
Spanner and Wrench 5.5 x 5.5 600T40501 Corotron wire installation tool 600T1990
Spanner and Wrench 7x 7 600T40502 Corotron cleaning wand (20 per kit) 600K39410
Hex Key Set 600T02002 Copy Paper Carrying Case 600T1999
Box Driver 5.5MM 600T1988 Copy Paper Zip Lock Bag 600T2000
Side Cutting Nipper 600T40903 Xerox Color Xpressions 24# 11× 17 3R5465
Round Nose Pliers 600T40901 Colourtech 90 GSM A3 3R94642
Digital Multi-meter Set 600T2020 Service and Machine NVM Log 700P97436
Interlock Cheater 600T91616 Serial Cable 600T2058
Silver Scale 150MM 600T41503 Parallel Cable 600T2065
CE Tool Case 600T1901 PWS Powercord Adapter (for convenience outlet) 600T2018
Magnetic Screw Pick-up Tool 600T41911 Miniature Test Probe 600T02177
Scriber Tool 600T41913
Magnetic pickup 600T41911
Loupe 600T42008
Flash Light 600T1824
Brush 600T41901
Tester Lead Wire (red) 600T 9583
Tester Lead Wire (black) 600T2030

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-157 Common Tools, Product Tools and Test Patterns
Cleaning Materials Machine Consumables
Table 1 Cleaning Materials
NASG Part ESG Part Table 1 Machine Consumables
Description
Number Number NASG ESG Remarks
Description Weight Capacity
Cleaning fluid 43P48 8R90034 Part # Part # (Nominal Life)
(8oz., Formula A) Developer - Black 5R616 5R90241 490g - Replace when
Film remover (8 oz.) 43P45 8R90176 an error occurs.
Lens/mirror cleaner 43P81 8R90178 Developer - Cyan 5R617 5R90242 490g - Replace when
Lint-free (white) cleaning 19P3025 19P3025 an error occurs.
cloth Developer - Magenta 5R618 5R90243 490g - Replace when
Lint-free Optics cleaning cloth 499T90417 499T90417 an error occurs.
Cleaning towels 35P3191 600S4372 Developer -Yellow 5R619 5R90244 490g - Replace when
an error occurs.
Drop cloth 35P1737 35P1737
Toner Cartridge - Black 6R945 6R90280 490g (full) Toner:284g 5,000 images
Cotton Swab 35P2162 35P2162
140g (empty) Carrier:66.3g (Note 1)
Toner Cartridge - Cyan 6R946 6R90281 490g (full) Toner:284g 5,000 images
Toner Cartridge- 6R947 6R90282 490g (full) Toner:284g 5,000 images
Magenta 140g (empty) Carrier:66.3g (Note 1)
Toner Cartridge - Yellow 6R948 6R90283 490g (full) Toner:284g 5,000 images
Xerographic Module 13R558 13R560 1,900g 40,000 (Note 2)
(Copy/Print Cartridge)
T&M Drum
Xerographic Module 13R557 13R559 1,900g 40,000 (Note 2)
(Copy/Print Cartridge)
FSMA Drum
Fuser Oil Cartridge, 8R7975 8R7982 450g (full) 300cc/CRU 40,000 prints
CRU 150g (empty)
Toner Waste Bottle 8R7976 8R7983 1,600g (full) 40,000 prints
250 (empty)
Waste Carrier Bottle 8R7977 8R7984 1,000g (full) 40,000 prints
160g (empty)
Fuser Web Assembly, 8R7980 8R7985 950g 40,000 prints
CRU
NOTE:
1. Toner Life
• Y, M, C: 5,000 images when documents with a 5% image density are copied in full
color mode using A4 paper.
• K: 5,000 images when documents with a 5% image density are copied in black mode
using A4 paper.
2. C.C assembly life is 50,000 prints.

Cleaning Materials, Machine Consumables 6-158 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Change Tag Introduction Processor (P) Tags
Important modifications to the copier are identified by a tag number which is recorded on a tag Processor Tags
matrix label attached to the inside of the Front Fuser Cover, or inside the Front Door. This sec-
tion describes all of the tags associated with the copier, as well as multinational applicability, TAG: P1
classification codes, and permanent or temporary modification information.
CLASS: N
Classification Codes USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 040199 FU0: 025021
A tag number may be required to identify differences between parts that cannot be inter-
changed, or differences in diagnostic, repair, installation, or adjustment procedures. FU3: 310512043x FU1: 310512691x
NAME: IBT Cleaner Assy.
A tag number may also be required to identify the presence of optional hardware, special non- PURPOSE:
volatile memory programming, or whether mandatory modifications have been installed. Each
KIT NUMBER: N/A
tag number is given a classification code to identify the type of change that the tag has made.
REFERENCE: PL 7.1
The classification codes and their descriptions are listed in the table below.
Table 1
Classification Code Description
M Mandatory tag.
N Tag not installed in the field. TAG: P2
O Optional tag.
CLASS: N
R Repair Tag.
USE: ALL
FU3: 310512153x FU1: 310512691x
NAME: Rotary PWB/Plate Assy.
PURPOSE: Countermeasure for Rotary PWB short circuit problem
KIT NUMBER: N/A
REFERENCE: PL 6.1
TAG: P3
CLASS: N
USE: ALL
FU3: 310512332x FU1: 310512707x
NAME: Aligner Baffle Assy.
PURPOSE: Duplex Aligner performance improvement
KIT NUMBER: N/A
REFERENCE: PL 2.18

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-159 Change Tag Introduction, Processor (P) Tags
TAG: P4 TAG: P7
CLASS: N CLASS: N
USE: ALL USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: N/R MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: Cut-in: Oil Roll Assembly deleted from BI first M/C:
NAME: BR PWB FU2: 040051 FU0: 025010
PURPOSE: This Tag indicates presence of Omron BR PWB (before cut-in of XCD PWB) FU3: 310512016x FU1: 310512684x
KIT NUMBER: N/A Cut-in: Deletion of Drive Assy:
REFERENCE: PL 3.5 FU2: 040329 FU0:025037
FU3: 310512332x FU1: 310512707x
Cut-in: Tag 7 marked (Harness change):
FU2: 040321 FU0:025022
FU3: 310512332x FU1: 310512707x
NAME: IBT Oil Roll Assembly and Drives removal.
TAG: P5 PURPOSE: IBT redesign
CLASS: N
KIT NUMBER: N/A
USE: ALL
REFERENCE: N/A
FU3: 310512545 FU1: 310512719
NAME: ROS Assembly
PURPOSE: Updated Assy to correct 1mm banding problem
KIT NUMBER: N/A
REFERENCE: PL 4.1 TAG: P8
CLASS: M
USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: Cut-in: New Welding cutin:
FU2: 040199 FU3: 3105123123x,
Cut-in: Tag 8 marked:
TAG: P6 FU2: 040321 FU3: 3105123332x
CLASS: M NAME: IIT Brace Kit
USE: ALL PURPOSE: The purpose of this kit is to install a new Brace in the IIT Assembly
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: Cut-in FU2:040321, FU0:025022, FU3:310512332x, KIT NUMBER: 605K91041
FU1:310512707x
REFERENCE: PL 3.1
NAME: IOT CPU PWB
PURPOSE: New pull up resistor on the IOT CPU PWB allows use of all WCS-approved
PWBs for downloading of IOT Software.
KIT NUMBER: N/A
REFERENCE: PL 9.2

Mail Box / Sorter Tags, Mail Box / Sorter Tags 6-160 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
TAG: P9 TAG: P12
CLASS: N CLASS: R
USE: ALL USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: Cut-in: Temporary change: MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 040823 FU0: 025093
FU2: 040199 FU0: 025022 FU3: 310512545x FU1: 310512719x
FU3: 310512179x FU1: 310512691x NAME: Wick Assembly Kit
Cut-in: Permanent change: PURPOSE: Wick Assembly change for image disturbance correction
FU2:040321, FU0:025022, FU3:310512332, KIT NUMBER: NASG - 600K78063 ESG - 600K78073
FU1:310512702x REFERENCE: PL 8.7
Cut-in: Tag 9 marked:
FU2: 040479 FU0: 025052
FU3: 310512394x FU1:310512707x
NAME: Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly
PURPOSE: To repair Exit Drive short circuit due to excessive cable length
KIT NUMBER: N/A TAG: P13
REFERENCE: PL 1.6 CLASS: M
USE: ALL
FU3: 310512538x FU1: 310512719x
NAME: VSEL Extension PWB
PURPOSE: PWB Update
TAG: P10 KIT NUMBER: N/A
CLASS: M REFERENCE: PL 9.2
USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 040547 FU0:025052
FU3: 310512438x FU1:310512707x
NAME: IOT CPU S/W V4.43.1h CD-ROM
PURPOSE: IOT CPU S/W upgrade with alternate UI language support
KIT NUMBER: 133K21302 TAG: P14
REFERENCE: CLASS: M
USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 041304 FU3: 310512662x
FU1: 310512729x FU0:025138
NAME: ATC Sensor Kit
PURPOSE: The kit adds ATC Sensor and revised IOT Drive PWB, to detect TC from the
TAG: P11 Developer Roll surface.
CLASS: M KIT NUMBER: 606K91040
USE: ALL REFERENCE: PL 9.2
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 040592 FU0:025052
FU3: 310512438x FU1: 310512707x
NAME: Support weld for Fuser Exit ON Jam
PURPOSE: Support weld for Fuser Exit ON Jam
KIT NUMBER: 605K91060
REFERENCE:

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-161 Mail Box / Sorter Tags, Mail Box / Sorter Tags
TAG: P15 TAG: P18
CLASS: N CLASS: S
USE: ALL USE:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 041442 FU3: 310512781x MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: N/A
FU1: 310512734x FU0: 025138 NAME: Rotary Motor Noise Kit
NAME: Cyan Toner Leak Fix PURPOSE: Change to Rotary Motor switching frequency to eliminate high frequency sound
PURPOSE: Eliminate gap in Cyan Oil Seal, to prevent Cyan Toner leakage complaints
KIT NUMBER: 600K82870 KIT NUMBER: 600K82900
REFERENCE: REFERENCE: PL 6.1
TAG: P16 TAG: P19

CLASS: N CLASS: M
USE: ALL USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 041304 FU3: 310512662x MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 041496 FU0: 025138
FU1: 310512729x FU0: 025138 FU3: 310512785x FU1: 310512734x
NAME: IOT Software Retrofit Kit NAME: DADF Software Upgrade to V2.2
PURPOSE: Software Upgrade to V6.00.2 PURPOSE: The purpose of this kit is to install new DADF Software
KIT NUMBER: 605K07201 KIT NUMBER: 635K07220 (XC)
REFERENCE: TAG P6 is a prerequisite for this Kit. REFERENCE: TAG P16 is a prerequisite for this Kit.
TAG: P17 TAG: P20

CLASS: M CLASS: R
USE: ALL USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 041496 FU0: 025138 MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
FU3: 310512785x FU1: 310512734x NAME: Roll Assy Field Retrofit Kit
NAME: Film Seal Assy Mandatory Retrofit Kit PURPOSE: Exchange IBT Drive Roll to improve banding (105mm pitch, etc.) occurring in
PURPOSE: Install thicker Film Seal to prevent toner splatter A-zone.

REFERENCE: PL 7.1
REFERENCE: PL 7.1, PL 7.8

manuals4you.com
TAG: P21 TAG: P24
CLASS: N CLASS: N
USE: ALL USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 041496 FU0: 025138 MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
FU3: 310512785x FU1: 310512734x NAME: UI PWB with Edit Function
NAME: Pickup Roll for Fuser Assy improvement PURPOSE: UI PWB with Edit function added to all machines; PWB removed from Edit Pad
PURPOSE: To improve life of Oil Metering System Kit
REFERENCE: PL 8.9 REFERENCE: Kit purpose is to add updated PWB to pre-Tag 24 cutin machines when
installing new Edit Pad kit
TAG: P22
CLASS: N
TAG: P25
USE: CLASS: M
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: USE: ALL
NAME: IOT Software Retrofit Kit MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 041496, FU0: 025138
PURPOSE: IOT S/W upgrade to V6.20.2h FU3: 310512785x FU1: 310512734x
KIT NUMBER: 630K11450 NAME:

PURPOSE: Repair miswiring of AC outlet
KIT NUMBER: N/A
REFERENCE: This Tag cancelled; replaced by TAG P28
TAG: P23
CLASS: N
USE: ALL
TAG: P26
FU3: 310512785x FU1: 310512734x CLASS: R
NAME: Exit Roll USE: ALL
PURPOSE: To reduce corrugation marks MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 046765, FU0: 025138
KIT NUMBER: N/A FU3: 310868820x FU1: 31051273x

NAME: Distributor Field Repair Kit
REFERENCE: PL 2.26
PURPOSE: To repair DCD (debris centered deletions problem) and prevent damage to Dis-
penser seals.
REFERENCE: PL 6.5
NOTE: Certain machines received the change during manufacturing, but were not tagged. The
serial number for these machines are as follows:
• FU2: 044535 - 046764
• FU3: 310868415x - 310868819x

TAG: P27 TAG: P30
CLASS: N CLASS: M
USE: ESG only MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: N/A
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: 213 7078999 NAME: S/W V 7.06 for Finisher upgrade
NAME: XCD PWB (Mitcheldean Production Only) PURPOSE: Finisher upgrade to S/W V 7.06
PURPOSE: ESG-specific XCD PWB KIT NUMBER: 635K7230
KIT NUMBER: N/A
REFERENCE: PL 3.5
TAG: P31
CLASS: N
TAG: P28 USE: ESG Only
CLASS: M MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
USE: ALL NAME: EU Safety/EMI fix
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 043894 FU0: 025138 PURPOSE: Fuser modifications to accommodate new EMI requirements
FU3: 31086831x FU1: 310512734x REFERENCE: PL 9.6
NAME: Incorrect AC Inlet and Outlet connector wiring
PURPOSE: To correct the AC wiring problem on the AC Power Inlet and Outlet connectors
REFERENCE: Kit number is for RITS tracking purposes
TAG: P32
CLASS: R
USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2: 054790 FU0: 310868312x
TAG: P29 FU3: 310869570x FU1: 310512734x
CLASS: R NAME: New ROS and Half Tone PWB design (42.37 MHz)
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: N/A PURPOSE:
NAME: Magnification Distortion Kit KIT NUMBER: 600K86000
PURPOSE: Kit provides new Half Tone PWB to alleviate interval distortion REFERENCE: PL 4.1, PL 9.2
REFERENCE: PL 9.2

manuals4you.com
TAG: P33 TAG: P36
CLASS: R CLASS: N
USE: ALL USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
NAME: Toner Spray Kit NAME: Sorter/Mailbox Crease Reduction Kit
PURPOSE: Reduce trail edge toner spray and banding that occurs 150 mm from trail edge PURPOSE:
REFERENCE: REFERENCE: TAG S2
TAG: P34 TAG: P37

CLASS: R CLASS: N
USE: ALL USE:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2:58493 - 059335 FU0:025257 - 025357
NAME: NAME:
PURPOSE: To reduce the appearance of 6.6 mm pitch banding PURPOSE: Countermeasure for oil leak from Oil Pan
KIT NUMBER: 600K86080 REFERENCE:
REFERENCE:
TAG: P38
TAG: P35 CLASS: N
CLASS: R USE: ALL
USE: ALL MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FU2:58884
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: EPC Enablement
NAME: PURPOSE: Harnessing changes to allow installation of EPC option
PURPOSE: To reduce banding that occurs 60 mm from the trail edge KIT NUMBER: 498K2440
KIT NUMBER: 600K86090 REFERENCE: PL 20.1
REFERENCE:

TAG: P39 Mail Box / Sorter Tags
CLASS: O
USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: TAG: S1
NAME: V11.5x Software update CLASS: R
PURPOSE: Updates software to enable EPC and increased imageable area. USE: ALL
KIT NUMBER: 630K12210 MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: 830564
REFERENCE: NAME: S/W and Tag Matrix
PURPOSE: Adds Tag Matrix to the Mail Box/Sorter and firmware upgrade
KIT NUMBER: 635K780
TAG: P40
CLASS: N
USE: ESG ONLY TAG: S2
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: CLASS: N
NAME: ESS PS Removal USE: ALL
PURPOSE: Component not required in DC12 - DCCS50 Only MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
KIT NUMBER: N/A NAME: Sorter/Mailbox Crease Reduction Kit
REFERENCE: PURPOSE:
REFERENCE: TAG P36
TAG: P41
CLASS: N
USE: ALL
NAME: VOID
REFERENCE:
TAG: P42
CLASS: N
USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
NAME: 3-380 Fault Countermeasures
PURPOSE: Mfg. change to prevent short circuits
KIT NUMBER: N/A
REFERENCE:

manuals4you.com
High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Tags TAG: HCF4
CLASS: N
USE: ALL
TAG: HCF1 MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FT4:688798
CLASS: N NAME: HCF Control PWB w/ V2.5 software
USE: ALL PURPOSE: New software to fix 8-190 and 8-192 faults
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FT4 685969 REFERENCE: PL 15.16
NAME: HCF Control PWB w/V2.4 S/W update
PURPOSE: V2.4 software fixes 8-190 and 8-192 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam
faults
KIT NUMBER: N/A
REFERENCE: PL 15.16
TAG: HCF5
CLASS: N
USE:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
NAME: Lift Motor Fix
TAG: HCF2 PURPOSE:
CLASS: N REFERENCE:
USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FT4 687185
NAME: Drive Belt Tensioner
PURPOSE: Feed Head modification
KIT NUMBER: N/A
REFERENCE: PL 15.10 TAG: HCF6
CLASS: R
USE: All
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
NAME: Low torque HCF kit
PURPOSE: Paper feeder modified to reduce mis-feeds
TAG: HCF3 KIT NUMBER: 604K22210
CLASS: N REFERENCE: PL 15.10
USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: FT4 687185
NAME: Skew Kit
PURPOSE: Resolve skewed feeding problem
REFERENCE:

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 6-167 High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Tags, Integrated Digi-
Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) Tags TAG: IDFE 5
CLASS: O
USE: NASG (US), NASG (Canada), AO, ESG.
TAG: IDFE 1 MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: GL2 - 385719
CLASS: N NAME: DCCS 50 Controller/Software
USE: ALL PURPOSE: Software roll from version 1.02 to 1.07 (System Software installation CD-ROM
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: Manufacturing Cut-in S/N GL2 383925 and above v1.1)
NAME: EME fixes/UL Label KIT NUMBER: 701P33191 Software Upgrade Kit, 701P33197 Software Upgrade Kit
Instructions
PURPOSE: Support of Manufacturing Standard Configuration
KIT NUMBER:
TAG: IDFE 2
CLASS: N
USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: Manufacturing Cut-in S/N GL2 384046 and above TAG: IDFE 6
NAME: Manufacturing Firmware Upgrades for U33 and U34 CLASS: N
PURPOSE: Print and Image Quality fixes USE: ALL
KIT NUMBER: MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: GL2 386198 - QC47 350216
TAG: IDFE 3 NAME: Electromagnetic Compliance
PURPOSE: Comply with EMC limits, addition of Ethernet grounding, filter array to power
CLASS: N
connector, copper fingers and tape to DDI Connector Plate
USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: Manufacturing Cut-in S/N GL2 384331 and above
NAME: EE Seal Noise Fix
PURPOSE: EE Seal added to DB 15 to solve IOT noise problem
KIT NUMBER:
TAG: IDFE 4 TAG: IDFE 7
CLASS: M CLASS: N
USE: ALL USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: Manufacturing Cut-in S/N GL2 384467 and above MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: GL2 386533
NAME: DCCS 50 Controller/Software NAME: Maintenance release V1.2
PURPOSE: Launch Software Version 1.0 PURPOSE: Software to support TAG IDFE 8, and fix reported field problems
KIT NUMBER: software is available by ordering Customer Support Pack 701P31194 KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:

Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) Tags, 6-168 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
TAG: IDFE 8 TAG: IDFE 11
CLASS: N CLASS: N
USE: ALL USE: ALL
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: GL2 387285 MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: GL2 393154
NAME: New hardware configuration NAME: S/W release V2.1
PURPOSE: Hardware update to obsolete components PURPOSE: Fixes reported field problems
REFERENCE: KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
TAG: IDFE 9
CLASS: N TAG: IDFE 12
USE: ALL CLASS: N
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: GL2 387895 USE: ALL
NAME: S/W release V2.0 MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: GL2 395206
PURPOSE: New software to support Finisher option NAME: Centreware S/W release V3.1
KIT NUMBER: PURPOSE: Features enhancement
REFERENCE: KIT NUMBER:
REFERENCE:
TAG: IDFE 10
CLASS: O TAG: IDFE 13
USE: ALL CLASS: N
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: GL2 392943 USE: ALL
NAME: Video Board PWB MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
PURPOSE: Hardware change to eliminate system crashes NAME: New hardware configuration
KIT NUMBER: 606K7490 PURPOSE: Hardware update to obsolete components
REFERENCE: REFERENCE:

manuals4you.com
7 Wiring Data
Plug/Jacks
Wiring Connector List ...................................................................................................... 7-3
Plug/Jack IndexP/JP/JP/J .............................................................................................. 7-3
Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams ........................................................................................... 7-9
Wirenets
AC Power Wirenets ....................................................................................................... 7-41
18VAC Wirenet ............................................................................................................... 7-42
3.3VDC/3.3V RET/3.5VDC/3.5V RET Wirenets.............................................................. 7-44
+5VDC Wirenets ............................................................................................................. 7-48
DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets ....................................................................................... 7-57
+12/-12VDC Wirenet ....................................................................................................... 7-65
DC COM (+12/-12V RET) Wirenet .................................................................................. 7-66
13.3VDC Wirenet ............................................................................................................ 7-67
DC COM (13.V RET) Wirenet ........................................................................................ 7-68
+24VDC Wirenets ........................................................................................................... 7-69
DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets ....................................................................................... 7-76
BSDs ............................................................................................................................... 7-81
Chain 01.......................................................................................................................... 7-83
Chain 02.......................................................................................................................... 7-91
Chain 03.......................................................................................................................... 7-97
Chain 04.......................................................................................................................... 7-107
Chain 05.......................................................................................................................... 7-109
Chain 06.......................................................................................................................... 7-117
Chain 07.......................................................................................................................... 7-125
Chain 08.......................................................................................................................... 7-141
Chain 09.......................................................................................................................... 7-155
Chain 10.......................................................................................................................... 7-179
Chain 11.......................................................................................................................... 7-199
Chain 16.......................................................................................................................... 7-211
Reissue 1/05 Wiring Data

Wiring Data 1/05 Reissue
manuals4you.com
Wiring Connector List Plug/Jack IndexP/JP/JP/J
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list
How to use the Wiring Connector List P/J No. Illustration No. Item No.
1. To find the location of a connector, refer to the Figure and Item Number of the Plug/Jack P/J1 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 11
Location Drawings section, by referring to Figure and Item Number of the Wiring Connec-
P/J2 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 11
tor List.
P/J3 7.2.4 IPS 15
2. The Plug/Jack and P/J in the Index are identified by following method:
P/J4 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 12
a. J250 represents Jack 250.
J5 7.2.3 IIT 8
b. P250 represents Plug 250
P5 7.2.4 IPS 14
c. Numerals without P or J represent both Jack and Plug
P10 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 12
d. CN1 represents Connector 1.
P/J11A 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 6
Refer to Figure 1 for an example of a Plug/Jack Index connector list entry.
P/J11B 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 6
P12 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 5
P/J13 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 4
Figure x 3 P/J16 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 19
Item number in the
Illustration that shows J20 7.2.25 1
the specific location of P20 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 10
a Plug/Jack. P/J21 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 6
Figure number of the Illustra- P/J22 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 5
tion showing the area of the P/J23 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 2
Finisher where the Plug/Jack
can be located. P/J24 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 3
P/J Number
P/J25 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 4
P/J31 7.2.4 IPS 12
P/J33 7.2.4 IPS 10
P/J34 7.2.4 IPS 11
P/J35 7.2.4 IPS 9
Figure 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list example
P/J53 7.2.23 Power Chassis 12

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-3 Wiring Connector List, Plug/Jack Index
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list
P/J No. Illustration No. Item No. P/J No. Illustration No. Item No.
P/J59 7.2.23 Power Chassis 1 P/J119 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 15
P/J70 7.2.30 w/Tag P31 (ESG only) 3 P/J120 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 16
J71 7.2.30 w/Tag P31 (ESG only) 6 P/J121 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 16
J72 7.2.30 w/Tag P31 (ESG only) 5 P/J122 7.2.2 Front Upper 15
P/J76 7.2.30 w/Tag P31 (ESG only) P/J125 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 13
P/J81 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 19 P/J127 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 17
P/J81 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7 P/J128 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 4
P/J82 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 14 P/J129 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 3
P/J82 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 8 P/J130 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 2
P/J83 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 10 P/J131 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 4
P/J84 7.2.10 Registration 8 P/J132 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 5
P/J84 7.2.25 9 P/J134 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 6
P/J91 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 18 P/J136 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 7
P/J92 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 15 P/J139 7.2.8 IBT 1
P/J93 7.2.8 IBT 3 P/J140 7.2.8 IBT 2
P/J95 7.2.20 Rear Upper 23 P/J141 7.2.2 Front Upper 10
P/J96 7.2.10 Registration 7 P/J142 7.2.2 Front Upper 16
P/J98 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 1 P/J144 7.2.17 Tray 5 8
P/J98 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 4 P/J145 7.2.17 Tray 5 10
P/J99 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7 P/J146 7.2.17 Tray 5 9
P/J99 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 6 P/J147 7.2.17 Tray 5 7
P/J100 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 13 P/J148 7.2.17 Tray 5 11
P/J101A 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 1 P/J149 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 6
P/J101B 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 6 P/J150 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 2
P/J101C 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 3 P/J151 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 3
P/J101D 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 4 P/J152 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 10
P/J101E 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 5 P/J153 7.2.9 Drawer 2
P/J101F 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 2 P/J154 7.2.9 Drawer 7
P/J105 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 14 P/J157 7.2.11 2nd BTR 2
P/J109 7.2.17 Tray 5 13 P/J158 7.2.11 2nd BTR 1
P/J110 7.2.20 Rear Upper 3 P/J159 7.2.9 Drawer 3
P/J111 7.2.8 IBT 5 P/J160 7.2.10 Registration 3
P/J112 7.2.20 Rear Upper 11 P/J161 7.2.10 Registration 1
P/J113 7.2.2 Front Upper 2 P/J162 7.2.10 Registration 2
P/J114 7.2.2 Front Upper 1 P/J163 7.2.10 Registration 4
P/J115 7.2.20 Rear Upper 29 P/J164 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 5
P/J116 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 8 P/J167 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 16
P/J117 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 13 P/J168 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 1
P/J118 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 14 P/J169 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 6

Plug/Jack Index 7-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
P/J170 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7 P/J254 7.2.17 Tray 5 6
P/J171 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 20 P/J255 7.2.20 Rear Upper 15
P/J191 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 2 P/J264 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 3
P/J194 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 12 P/J272 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 12
P/J195 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 14 P/J273 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7
P/J196 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 11 P/J274 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 1
P/J198 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 4 P/J275 7.2.17 Tray 5 1
P/J199 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 18 P/J276 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 1
P/J201 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7 P/J280 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 21
P/J202 7.2.20 Rear Upper 26 P/J281 7.2.20 Rear Upper 35
P/J203 7.2.20 Rear Upper 5 P/J282 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 15
P/J204 7.2.20 Rear Upper 32 P/J283 7.2.2 Front Upper 11
P/J209A 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 11 P/J284 7.2.2 Front Upper 12
P/J209B 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 12 P/J289 7.2.2 Front Upper 14
P/J210A 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 9 P/J341 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 3
P/J210B 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 10 P/J342 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 1
P/J211A 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7 P/J345 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 4
P/J211B 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 8 P/J347 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 2
P/J212A 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 5 J387 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 6
P/J212B 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 6 P387 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 10
P/J213 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 1 P/J388 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 1
P/J214 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 2 P/J389 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 2
P/J215 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 3 P/J391 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 7
P/J216 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 4 J393 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 5
P/J217 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 2 P393 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 8
P/J218 7.2.10 Registration 9 P/J395 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 9
P/J220 7.2.9 Drawer 9 J396 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 17
P/J222 7.2.20 Rear Upper 18 P396 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7
P/J223 7.2.17 Tray 5 12 P/J397 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 6
P/J224 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 5 P/J398 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 5
P/J233 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 8 P/J399 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 11
P/J251 7.2.20 Rear Upper 4 P/J400 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 20
P/J252 7.2.20 Rear Upper 30 P401 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 21
P/J253 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 1 P402 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 22

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-5 Plug/Jack Index
P/J403 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 4 P491 7.2.1 Control Panel 14
P/J404 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 6 P/J492(CN4) 7.2.1 Control Panel 8
P/J405 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 23 P/J493 7.2.1 Control Panel 13
P/J406 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 5 P/J500 7.2.3 IIT 1
P/J411 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 12 P/J508 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 3
P/J412A 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 16 P/J509 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 2
P/J412B 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 16 P/J510 7.2.4 IPS 1
P/J413A 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 9 P512 7.2.4 IPS 8
P/J414A 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7 P/J514 7.2.4 IPS 26
P/J417A 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 19 P/J520 7.2.3 IIT 10
P/J417B 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 19 P/J521 7.2.3 IIT 14
P/J422B 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 13 P536 7.2.4 IPS 17
P/J431 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 18 P/J537 7.2.3 IIT 2
P/J432 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 17 P/J540 7.2.3 IIT 18
P/J433A 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 20 P/J541 7.2.3 IIT 4
P/J433B 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 20 P/J542 7.2.3 IIT 16
P/J434 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 19 J543A 7.2.3 IIT 17
P/J440 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 10 J543B 7.2.3 IIT 17
P/J441 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 9 P543A 7.2.26 DADF-1 10
P/J482A (CN1) 7.2.1 Control Panel 9 P543B 7.2.26 DADF-1 10
P/J482A 7.2.1 Control Panel 10 P/J544 7.2.3 IIT 15
P/J482B(CN2) 7.2.1 Control Panel 7 P/J550 7.2.27 DADF-2 5
P/J482B 7.2.1 Control Panel 11 P/J550 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 26
P/J484 7.2.1 Control Panel 5 P/J551 7.2.27 DADF-2 4
P/J486 7.2.1 Control Panel 4 P/J551 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 6
P/J490 7.2.1 Control Panel 12 P/J552 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7

manuals4you.com
P/J553 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 8 P/J585 7.2.26 DADF-1 4
P/J560 7.2.4 IPS 23 P/J592 7.2.27 DADF-2 1
P/J560 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 33 J594 7.2.20 Rear Upper 37
P/J561 7.2.4 IPS 3 P/J594 7.2.27 DADF-2 9
P/J562 7.2.4 IPS 24 P/J596 7.2.27 DADF-2 12
P/J563 7.2.4 IPS 22 P/J598 7.2.27 DADF-2 11
P/J564 7.2.4 IPS 20 P/J651 7.2.29 Decurler 10
P/J564 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 29 P/J652 7.2.29 Decurler 8
P567 7.2.4 IPS 16 P/J658 7.2.29 Decurler 2
P/J569 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 16 P658 7.2.4 IPS 7
P/J570 7.2.4 IPS 5 P/J659 7.2.29 Decurler 4
J571 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 11 P/J661 7.2.29 Decurler 3
J571 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 17 P/J664 7.2.29 Decurler 7
P571 7.2.4 IPS 28 P/J665 7.2.29 Decurler 6
P571 7.2.29 Decurler 9 J700A 7.2.20 Rear Upper 31
P/J572 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 10 P700B 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 8
J572 7.2.4 IPS 30 J701A 7.2.9 Drawer 5
P572 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 10 P701A 7.2.20 Rear Upper 22
P/J573 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 5 J701B 7.2.9 Drawer 6
P573 7.2.4 IPS 6 P701B 7.2.20 Rear Upper 21
P573 7.2.4 IPS 2 J701C 7.2.9 Drawer 4
P575 7.2.4 IPS 29 P701C 7.2.20 Rear Upper 20
P578 7.2.4 IPS 4 J702A 7.2.8 IBT 4
P/J580 7.2.26 DADF-1 8 P702A 7.2.20 Rear Upper 9
P/J581 7.2.26 DADF-1 9 J702B 7.2.8 IBT 4
P/J582 7.2.26 DADF-1 6 P702B 7.2.20 Rear Upper 9
P/J583 7.2.26 DADF-1 5 J703A 7.2.17 Tray 5 3
P/J584 7.2.26 DADF-1 7 P703A 7.2.17 Tray 5 5

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-7 Plug/Jack Index
J703B 7.2.17 Tray 5 3 P/J803B 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 25
P703B 7.2.17 Tray 5 5 P/J804 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 22
P/J704 7.2.2 Front Upper 4 P/J805 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 3
P/J710 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 9 P/J805 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 21
P/J711 7.2.20 Rear Upper 38 P/J806 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 22
P/J712 7.2.2 Front Upper 7 P/J807 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 24
P/J713 7.2.20 Rear Upper 24 P/J818 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 30
P/J714 7.2.2 Front Upper 3 P/J819 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 3
P/J715 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 12 P/J823 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 4
P/J716 7.2.9 Drawer 1 P/J880 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 19
P/J717 7.2.20 Rear Upper 27 P/J880A 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 19
P/J718 7.2.10 Registration 6 J880 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 24
P/J719 7.2.10 Registration 5 J880A 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 24
P/J720 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 3 P880 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 15
P/J722 7.2.9 Drawer 8 J880B 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 24
P/J723 7.2.2 Front Upper 13 P880B 7.2.28 15
P/J724 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7 P/J892 7.2.20 Rear Upper 14
P/J725 7.2.20 Rear Upper 34 P899 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 5
P/J726 7.2.20 Rear Upper 33 J900 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 16
P/J728 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 9 P903 7.2.20 Rear Upper 12
P/J729 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 8 P905 7.2.20 Rear Upper 13
P/J730 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 4 P906 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 11
P/J731 7.2.20 Rear Upper 17 P/J1100 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7
P/J732 7.2.20 Rear Upper 16 P/J1150 7.2.20 Rear Upper 28
P/J734 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 7 P/J2010 7.2.20 Rear Upper 6
J765 7.2.26 DADF-1 3 P/J2020 7.2.20 Rear Upper 25
P769 7.2.26 DADF-1 3 P/J2030 7.2.20 Rear Upper 8
P/J791 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 18 CN1 7.2.1 Control Panel 3
P/J795 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 5 CN6 7.2.1 Control Panel 2
P/J796 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 10 DP J2 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 3
P799 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 9 DS J2 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 2
P/J800 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 2 F51 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 23
P/J801A 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 26 F52 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 22
P/J801B 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 26 F53 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 2
P/J802A 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 23 F54 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 3
P/J802B 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 23 F55 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 4
P/J803 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 25 F56 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 5
P/J803A 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 25 FS1 7.2.2 Front Upper 8

manuals4you.com
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams
P/J No. Illustration No. Item No.
FS2 7.2.2 Front Upper 6
FS11 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 2
FS12 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 1
FS50 7.2.23 Power Chassis 8
FS800 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7
FS801 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 6
JC 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 13
JD 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 16
SJ10 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 27
SJ51 7.2.17 Tray 5 4
SJ52 7.2.17 Tray 5 2
SJ801 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 23
SP71 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 6
SP72 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 1
TIJ1 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 4
TPJ1 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 3
TSJ1 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 1

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-9 Plug/Jack Index, Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams
Figure 1 - 7.2.1 Control Panel

Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams 7-10 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 - 7.2.2 Front Upper

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-11 Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams
Figure 3 - 7.2.3 IIT

manuals4you.com
Figure 4 - 7.2.4 IPS

Figure 5 - 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge

manuals4you.com
Figure 6 - 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB

Figure 7 - 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP)

manuals4you.com
Figure 8 - 7.2.8 IBT

Figure 9 - 7.2.9 Drawer

manuals4you.com
Figure 10 - 7.2.10 Registration

Figure 11 - 7.2.11 2nd BTR

manuals4you.com
Figure 12 - 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front)

Figure 13 - 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear)

manuals4you.com
Figure 14 - 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor

Figure 15 - 7.2.15 Tray Feeder

manuals4you.com
Figure 16 - 7.2.16 Inverter Unit

Figure 17 - 7.2.17 Tray 5

manuals4you.com
Figure 18 - 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS

Figure 19 - 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB

manuals4you.com
Figure 20 - 7.2.20 Rear Upper

Figure 21 - 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR

manuals4you.com
Figure 22 - 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS

Figure 23 - 7.2.23 Power Chassis

manuals4you.com
Figure 24 - 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer

Figure 25 - 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP)

manuals4you.com
Figure 26 - 7.2.26 DADF-1

Figure 27 - 7.2.27 DADF-2

manuals4you.com
Figure 28 - 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter

Figure 29 - 7.2.29 Decurler

manuals4you.com
Figure 30 - 7.2.30 Tag P 31 Components

manuals4you.com
AC Power Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet AC Power (Neutral)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-41 AC Power Wirenets
Figure 2 Wirenet AC Power (HOT)
18VAC Wirenet

AC Power Wirenets , 18VAC Wirenet 7-42 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 1 Wirenet AC 18V

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-43 18VAC Wirenet
3.3VDC/3.3V RET/3.5VDC/3.5V RET Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet 3.3VDC

3.3VDC/3.3V RET/3.5VDC/3.5V RET Wirenets 7-44 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Wirenet DC COM (3.3V RET)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-45 3.3VDC/3.3V RET/3.5VDC/3.5V RET Wirenets

3.3VDC/3.3V RET/3.5VDC/3.5V RET Wirenets 7-46 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Wirenet DC COM (3.5V RET)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-47 3.3VDC/3.3V RET/3.5VDC/3.5V RET Wirenets
+5VDC Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet +5VDC-1

+5VDC Wirenets 7-48 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-49 +5VDC Wirenets
Figure 3 Wirenet +5VDC-2 (con’t)

manuals4you.com

Figure 5 Wirenet +5VDC-3 (con’t)

manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com
DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet DC COM (+5V RET) -1

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-57 DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets

DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets 7-58 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com
+12/-12VDC Wirenet
Figure 1 Wirenet +12/-12VDC

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-65 +12/-12VDC Wirenet
DC COM (+12/-12V RET) Wirenet
Figure 1 Wirenet DC COM (+12/-12V RET)

DC COM (+12/-12V RET) Wirenet 7-66 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
13.3VDC Wirenet

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-67 13.3VDC Wirenet
DC COM (13.V RET) Wirenet
Figure 1 Wirenet DC COM (13.V RET)

DC COM (13.V RET) Wirenet 7-68 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
+24VDC Wirenets


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com
Figure 7 IIT/IPS LVPS Wirenet +24VDC-7

DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet DC COM (24V RET) -1

DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets 7-76 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-77 DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets

manuals4you.com

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-79 DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets
manuals4you.com
BSDs
Purpose
The Block Schematic Diagrams (BSD’s), show the distribution of electrical and mechanical
power.
Each functional chain is represented by a BSD. A BSD is a functional flow diagram containing
electrical circuit information and mechanical inputs and outputs. The functional flow is from left
to right (inputs on the left, outputs on the right).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-81 BSDs
BSDs 7-82 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Chain 01
Figure 1 BSD 1.1 Main Power On (1 of 2)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 7-83 Chain 01
Figure 2 BSD 1.1 Main Power On (2 of 2)

Chain 01 7-84 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 3 BSD 1.2 DC Power Generation (IOT LVPS) (1 of 2)

Figure 4 BSD 1.2 DC Power Generation (IOT LVPS) (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 BSD 1.3 DC Power Generation (IIT LVPS) (1 of 2)

Figure 6 BSD 1.3 DC Power Generation (IIT LVPS) (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 7 BSD 1.4 Power Interlock Switching

Figure 8 BSD 1.5 Monitoring

manuals4you.com
Chain 02
Figure 1 BSD 2.1 Control Panel Switches and LEDs (1 of 2)

Figure 2 BSD 2.1 Control Panel Switches and LEDs (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 3 BSD 2.2 UI Display

Figure 4 BSD 2.3 Power Save Switch and LED

manuals4you.com

manuals4you.com
Chain 03
Figure 1 BSD 3.1 PWB Communications (UI)

Figure 2 BSD 3.2 PWB Communications (IPS) (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 3 BSD 3.2 PWB Communications (IPS) (2 of 2)

Figure 4 BSD 3.3 PWB Communications (DADF)

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 BSD 3.4 PWB Communications (Mailbox)

Figure 6 BSD 3.5 PWB Communications (PWS)

manuals4you.com
Figure 7 BSD 3.6 Foreign Interface

Figure 8 BSD 3.12 Monitoring (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com

manuals4you.com
Chain 04
Figure 1 BSD 4.1 Main and Drum Drive Control (1 of 2)

Figure 2 BSD 4.2 Main and Drum Drive Control (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Chain 05
Figure 1 BSD 5.1 Interlock Switching

Figure 2 BSD 5.2 Document Setting and Feeding

manuals4you.com
Figure 3 BSD 5.3 Document Transportation (1 of 2)

Figure 4 BSD 5.3 Document Transportation (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 BSD 5.4 Document Transport Mechanism

Figure 6 BSD 5.5 Document Exit Transportation

manuals4you.com

manuals4you.com
Chain 06
Figure 1 BSD 6.1 Document Illumination

Figure 2 BSD 6.2 Image Input

manuals4you.com
Figure 3 BSD 6.3 Carriage Control

Figure 4 BSD 6.4 Video Data and Signal Control

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 BSD 6.5 Laser Control

Figure 6 BSD 6.6 Laser Scanning

manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com
Chain 07
Figure 1 BSD 7.1 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com
Figure 5 Tray 1 BSD 7.5 Paper Stacking (1 of 2)

Figure 6 Tray 1 BSD 7.5 Paper Stacking (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 7 BSD 7.6 Tray 2 Paper Stacking (1 of 2)


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com
Chain 08
Figure 1 BSD 8.1 Tray 1 Paper Feed


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com

Figure 6 BSD 8.6 Vertical Transportation

manuals4you.com
Figure 7 BSD 8.7 Vertical Transport Control

Figure 8 BSD 8.8 Registration (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 9 BSD 8.8 Registration (2 of 2)

Figure 10 BSD 8.9 Registration Control Mechanism (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 11 BSD 8.9 Registration Control Mechanism (2 of 2)


manuals4you.com

Figure 14 Monitoring (3 of 3)

manuals4you.com
Chain 09
Figure 1 BSD 9.1 Charging and Exposure (1 of 2)

Figure 2 BSD 9.1 Charging and Exposure (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 3 BSD 9.2 Developer Rotor Drive Control (1 of 2)

Figure 4 BSD 9.2 Developer Rotor Drive Control (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 BSD 9.3 Development

Figure 6 BSD 9.4 Toner Loading (Black/Yellow) (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 7 BSD 9.4 Toner Loading (Black/Yellow) (2 of 2)

Figure 8 BSD 9.5 Toner Loading (Magenta/Cyan) (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 9 BSD 9.5 Toner Loading (Magenta/Cyan) (2 of 2)

Figure 10 BSD 9.6 Toner Dispense Control

manuals4you.com
Figure 11 BSD 9.7 Toner Dispense Mechanism

Figure 12 BSD 9.8 IBT Belt Drive and 1st Transfer (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 13 BSD 9.8 IBT Belt Drive and 1st Transfer (2 of 2)

Figure 14 BSD 9.9 2nd Transfer and IBT Cleaning (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 15 BSD 9.9 2nd Transfer and IBT Cleaning (2 of 2)

Figure 16 BSD 9.10 2nd BTR Contact/Retract Switching

manuals4you.com
Figure 17 BSD 9.11 2nd Belt Cleaner Contact/Retract Switching

Figure 18 BSD 9.12 Oil Winding

manuals4you.com
Figure 19 BSD 9.13 Drum Cleaning and Toner Reclaim (1 of 2)

Figure 20 BSD 9.13 Drum Cleaning and Toner Reclaim (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 21 BSD 9.14 Fan Control (1 of 2)

Figure 22 BSD 9.14 Fan Control (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com
Chain 10
Figure 1 BSD 10.1 Pre-Fusing and Fuser Air Control (1 of 2)

Figure 2 BSD 10.1 Pre-Fusing and Fuser Air Control (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 3 BSD 10.2 Fusing Heat Control (1 of 2 w/o Tag P31)

Figure 4 BSD 10.2 Fusing Heat Control (1 of 2 with Tag P31)

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 BSD 10.2 Fusing Heat Control (2 of 2)

Figure 6 BSD 10.3 External Heat Control

manuals4you.com
Figure 7 BSD 10.4 Fuser Drive Control

Figure 8 BSD 10.5 Fuser Oil Dispense and Web Winding Mechanism (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 9 BSD 10.5 Fuser Oil Dispense and Web Winding Mechanism (2 of 2)

Figure 10 BSD 10.6 External Heat Roll and Pressure Roll Nip Control

manuals4you.com
Figure 11 BSD 10.7 Fuser Exit Transportation

Figure 12 BSD 10.8 Inverter Transportation

manuals4you.com
Figure 13 BSD 10.9 Exit and Inverter Motor Drive

Figure 14 BSD 10.10 Duplex Transportation

manuals4you.com
Figure 15 BSD 10.11 OCT Control


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com

manuals4you.com
Chain 11
Figure 1 BSD 11.1 Mail Box DC Power & Interlock Switching (1 of 2)

Figure 2 BSD 11.1 Mail Box DC Power & Interlock Switching (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 3 BSD 11.2 Mail Box Drives (1 of 2)

Figure 4 BSD 11.2 Mail Box Drives (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 BSD 11.3 Decurler Control

Figure 6 BSD 11.4 Mail Box Transportation

manuals4you.com
Figure 7 BSD 11.5 Bin Tray Transportation

Figure 8 BSD 11.6 Bin Full Sensors

manuals4you.com
Figure 9 BSD 11.7 Mail Box OCT Control


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com
Chain 16
Figure 1 BSD 16.1 Integrated Digital Front End

manuals4you.com
8A HCF
Status Indicator RAPs PL 15.10 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 1 OF 6.............................................................. 8a-36
PL 15.11 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 2 OF 6.............................................................. 8a-37
HCF Paper Faults PL 15.12 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 3 OF 6.............................................................. 8a-38
07-280 HCF Communication Fault RAP ........................................................................ 8a-3 PL 15.13 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 4 OF 6.............................................................. 8a-39
07-289 HCF Broken Failure RAP ................................................................................... 8a-3 PL 15.14 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 5 OF 6.............................................................. 8a-40
07-308 Interlock Switch Open RAP ................................................................................ 8a-4 PL 15.15 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 6 OF 6.............................................................. 8a-41
OF7-001 HCF Out of Paper RAP.................................................................................... 8a-5 PL 15.16 Elevator Motor and Feed Motor ....................................................................... 8a-42
Part Number Index .......................................................................................................... 8a-43
HCF Handling Faults
08-190 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP ....................................................... 8a-7 Plug/Jacks
08-191 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP ....................................................... 8a-8 Wiring Connector List ...................................................................................................... 8a-45
08-192 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP ....................................................... 8a-9 Plug/Jack Index ............................................................................................................... 8a-45
8-193 HCF (Tray 6) Pre Registration Sensor On Jam .................................................... 8a-10 Plug/Jack Locator Diagram ............................................................................................. 8a-46
8-194 HCF (Tray 6) Registration Sensor On Jam ........................................................... 8a-10
OF8-001 HCF Does not feed - No Fault Code RAP ....................................................... 8a-11 Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs)
HCF BSDs....................................................................................................................... 8a-47
HCF Paper Supply
8-501 HCF Paper Size Mismatch RAP ......................................................................... 8a-13
Repairs
7. HCF
REP 2.7.5 HCF Assembly............................................................................................... 8a-15
REP 2.7.6 HCF Elevator Motor ....................................................................................... 8a-16
REP 2.7.7 HCF Elevator Long/Short Cables .................................................................. 8a-17
REP 2.7.8 HCF Brake ..................................................................................................... 8a-19
REP 2.7.9 HCF Control PWB.......................................................................................... 8a-20
8. HCF
REP 2.8.26 HCF Feed Motor .......................................................................................... 8a-21
REP 2.8.27 HCF Feeder Assembly ................................................................................ 8a-21
REP 2.8.35 HCF Front/Rear Spring................................................................................ 8a-22
REP 2.8.36 HCF Baffle Assembly................................................................................... 8a-23
REP 2.8.37 HCF Feed Belt ............................................................................................. 8a-24
REP 2.8.38 HCF Feed/Nudger/Retard Rolls................................................................... 8a-24
REP 2.8.39 HCF One-Way Feed/Gear Clutch ................................................................ 8a-25
REP 2.8.40 HCF Friction Clutch ..................................................................................... 8a-25
REP 2.8.41 HCF Feed Clutch ......................................................................................... 8a-26
REP 2.8.42 HCF TAR Sensor ......................................................................................... 8a-26
REP 2.8.43 HCF Tray Empty/Stack Height Sensors ...................................................... 8a-27
Adjustments
ADJ 2.1 HCF Registration............................................................................................... 8a-29
Parts Lists
HIGH CAPACITY FEEDER
PL 15.1 Elevator Assembly: Part 1 OF 3 ........................................................................ 8a-33
Reissue 1/05 High Capacity Feeder

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-1
High Capacity Feeder 1/05 Reissue
8a-2 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
07-280 HCF Communication Fault RAP 07-289 HCF Broken Failure RAP
Fault Code 07-280 indicate that an HCF communication fault has occurred. The HCF Stack Height Sensor failed to change state within the specified time after the HCF
Tray started to lift.
Procedure
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.13. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. If the NOTE: Prior to switching off the machine, ensure all pending jobs are saved.
wires are good, replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). If the problem continues, replace Initial Actions
the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
• Ensure connector P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB is seated properly.
• Refer to BSD 7.11 and 7.12 in the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330, 007-186 HCF Stack Height Sensor and press Start. Pull the HCF Tray out.
The display changed from L to H.
Y N
Check for +5VDC between pins 1 and 3 of P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is
measured between pins 1 and 3 of P/J841.
Y N
Check for +5VDC between pins 3 and 4 of J2 HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is mea-
sured between pins 3 and 4 of J2.
Y N
Check for +5VDC between pins 20 and 9 of P/J44 Distribution PWB. +5VDC is
measured between pins 20 and 9 ofP/J44.
Y N
Go to Wirenet +5 VDC-1 Figure 7.
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.13. Check the connector and wiring for an open circuit.
Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16).
Go to Flag 2 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.11. Check the connectors and wiring for an open cir-
cuit. If the connectors and wiring are OK, then replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL
15.12).
Enter dC330, 007-079 HCF Elevator Motor and press Start.

CAUTION
lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven it will be
Ensure that the Elevator Motor energizes. The Elevator Motor energizes and then deener-
gizes within 30 seconds.
Y N
Check for +24VDC between pins 2 and 1 of P/J845 HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is mea-
sured between pins 1 and 2 of P/J845 on the HCF Control PWB (This measurement
must be taken within 30 seconds after closing the tray.)
Y N
Check for +24VDC between pins 1 and 2 of J2HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is mea-
sured between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB.
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-3 07-280 HCF Communication Fault RAP , 07-289
A B
Y N 07-308 Interlock Switch Open RAP
Check for +24VDC between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB.
+24VDC is measured between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution HCF Interlock is open.
PWB.
Y N Initial Actions
Go to Wirenet +24 VDC-1 Figure 29. Ensure that the HCF is properly aligned and pushed tightly against the IOT.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.13. Check the connectors and wiring. Refer to BSD 7.12 and 8.13 in the following procedure.

Procedure
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.12. Check the connectors and wiring. If the connectors and wiring Enter dC330, 007-308 HCF Interlock Switch and press Start.
are OK, then replace the HCF Elevator Motor Assembly (PL 15.16) Move the HCF away from the machine. The displays changes.
Y N
Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any Check for +5VDC between pins NO and C of P/J-847 on the HCF Interlock Switch.
parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping: +5VDC is measured between pins NO and C of P/J-847on the HCF Interlock Switch.
• Elevator Motor (PL 15.16) Y N
• HCF Stack Height Sensor (PL 15.12) Check for +5VDC between pins 1 and 2 of P/J843 on the HCF Control PWB.
+5VDC is measured between pins 1 and 2 of P/J843.
• HCF Feeder Assembly (PL 15.10)
Y N
• HCF Assembly (PL 15.1) Check for +5VDC between pins 3 and 4 of J2 HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is
• Wiring Harness measured between pins 3 and 4 of J2.
Y N
Check for +5VDC between pins 20 and 9 of P/J44 Distribution PWB.
+5VDC is measured between pins 20 and 9 of P/J44.
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD8.13 and check the connector and wiring for an open
circuit.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD7.12 and check the connector and wiring for an open circuit.
Replace the HCF Interlock Switch (PL 15.1).
Ensure that there are no obstacles in the docking area of HCF or the machine.

07-289 HCF Broken Failure RAP , 07-308 Interlock 8a-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
OF7-001 HCF Out of Paper RAP Y N
The HCF Stack Height Sensor failed to change state within the specified time after the HCF
+24VDC is measured between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution
Tray started to lift.
PWB.
Y N
NOTE: Prior to switching off the machine, ensure all pending jobs are saved.
Initial Actions
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.13. Check the connectors and wiring.
• Ensure connector P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB is seated properly. Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16).
• Refer to BSD 7.11 and 7.12 in the following procedure.
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.12. Check the connectors and wiring. If the connectors and wiring
Procedure are OK, then replace the HCF Elevator Motor Assembly PL 15.16.
Enter dC330, 007-186 HCF Stack Height Sensor and press Start. Pull the HCF Tray out.
The display changed from L to H.
parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping:
Y N
• Elevator Motor (PL 15.16)
Check for +5VDC between pins 1 and 3 of P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is
measured between pins 1 and 3 of P/J841. • HCF Stack Height Sensor (PL 15.12)
Y N • HCF Feeder Assembly (PL 15.10)
Check for +5VDC between pins 3 and 4 of J2 HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is mea- • HCF Assembly (PL 15.1)
sured between pins 3 and 4 of J2. • Wiring Harness
Y N
Check for +5VDC between pins 20 and 9 of P/J44 Distribution PWB. +5VDC is
measured between pins 20 and 9 of P/J44.
Y N
Go to Wirenet +5 VDC-1 Figure7.
Go to Flag 3 and check the connector and wiring for an open circuit.
Go to Flag 2 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.11. Check the connectors and wiring. If the connectors
and wiring are OK, then replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 15.12).
Enter dC330, 007-079 HCF Elevator Motor and press Start.

CAUTION
lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven it will be
Ensure that the Elevator Motor energizes. The Elevator Motor energizes and then deener-
gizes within 30 seconds.
Y N
Check for +24VDC between pins 2 and 1 of P/J845 HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is mea-
sured between pins 1 and 2 of P/J845 on the HCF Control PWB (This measurement
must be taken within 30 seconds after closing the tray.)
Y N
Check for +24VDC between pins 1 and 2 of J2 HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is
measured between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB.
A B
manuals4you.com
A
08-190 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP If the connectors and wiring are OK, then replace the HCF Feed Motor (PL 15.16).
The control logic detected that paper from the HCF was late to the HCF TAR sensor. Enter dC330, 007-078 HCF Feed Clutch and press Start.
Check that the HCF Feed Clutch energizes. The HCF Feed Clutch energizes.
Initial Actions Y N
• Check for obstructions in the paper path Check for +24VDC at pins 1 and 3 of J-851 on the HCF Feed Clutch. 24VDC is mea-
sured at pins 1 and 3 of J-851 on the HCF Feed Clutch.
• Check to ensure that the Feed Belt is not overtensioned
Y N
• Check for contamination on the HCF TAR Sensor lens Check for +24VDC between pins 11 and 10 of P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB.
• Ensure that connector P/J405 on the IOT CPU PWB is seated correctly +24VDC is measured between pins 11 and 10 of P/J841 on the HCF Control
• Refer to BSD 8.11 and 8.12 in the following procedure. PWB.
Y N
Procedure
Enter dC330, 007-100 HCF TAR Sensor and press Start. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.12. Check the connectors and wiring. repair or replace as
Block the HCF TAR Sensor with paper. The Display changes from H to L. required (PL 15.11).
Y N
The display indicates a constant H. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.12. Check the connectors and wiring.
Y N If the connectors and wiring are OK, then replace the HCF Feed Clutch (PL 15.13).
good, replace the TAR Sensor (PL 15.11). Check /replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any compo-
nents that are worn, broken, binding, loose or slipping.
Connect the meter from P/J841-5 on the HCF Control PWB to machine frame. Block the • Drive Roll (PL 15.12)
TAR Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J841-5 goes from +5 VDC when
the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked.
Y N • Feeder Housing (PL 15.14)
There is +5 VDC between P/J841-4 and P/J841-6 on the HCF Control PWB. • Feed/Nudger Roller (PL 15.14)
Y N • One Way Clutch (PL 15.14)
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.12 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the har- • Gear Clutch (PL 15.14)
ness is good, replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16.)
• Paper Feeder Harness (PL 15.11)
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 8.12 and check the harness for an open circuit. If • HCF Mounting Bracket
the harness is OK, replace the HCF TAR Sensor (PL 15.11). If the problem contin-
ues, replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16).
Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16.)
Enter dC330, 007-080 HCF Feed Motor and press Start.

Check that the HCF Feed Motor energizes. The HCF Feed Motor energizes.
Y N
Check for +24VDC between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is
Y N
PWB.
Y N
Go to Wirenet +24 VDC-1 (Figure 29).

A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-7 08-190 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP
A
The control logic detected that paper from the HCF was late to the IOT Takeaway Sensor. Enter dC330, 007-078 HCF Feed Clutch and press Start.
Initial Actions Y N
Y N
Y N
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor and press Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.12. Check the connectors and wiring. repair or replace as
Start. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. required (PL 15.11).
Y N
good, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). Check /replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any compo-
Connect the meter from P/J420-B5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the • Drive Roll (PL 15.12)
Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J420-B5 goes from +5 VDC
when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked.
There is +5 VDC between P/J420-B6 and P/J420-B4 on the IOT Drive PWB. • Feed/Nudger Roller (PL 15.14)
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the • HCF Mounting Bracket
harness is OK, replace the Takeaway (D1-T/A) Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem con-

Y N
Y N
PWB.
Y N

A
08-191 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP 8a-8 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
The control logic detected that paper from the HCF was late to the IOT Takeaway Sensor. Enter dC330, 007-078 HCF Feed Clutch and press Start.
Initial Actions Y N
Y N
Y N
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor and press Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.12. Check the connectors and wiring. repair or replace as
Start. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. required (PL 15.11).
Y N
good, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). Check /replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any compo-
Connect the meter from P/J420-B5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the • Drive Roll (PL 15.12)
Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J420-B5 goes from +5 VDC
when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked.
There is +5 VDC between P/J420-B6 and P/J420-B4 on the IOT Drive PWB. • Feed/Nudger Roller (PL 15.14)
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the • HCF Mounting Bracket
harness is OK, replace the Takeaway (D1-T/A) Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem con-

Y N
Y N
PWB.
Y N

A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-9 08-192 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP
8-193 HCF (Tray 6) Pre Registration Sensor On Jam 8-194 HCF (Tray 6) Registration Sensor On Jam
The Pre Registration Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the feed started The Registration Sensor did not actuate within 956 - 1056 msec after the feed started from
from HCF (Tray 6). HCF (Tray 6).

Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is H. Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is H.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measure between P/J419-13 on the IOT Drive and GND. +5 VDC is measure between P/J421-11 on the IOT Drive and GND.
Y N Y N
good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 15.2). good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 15.1).
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Registration Sensor with a Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Registration Sensor with a
sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and
and press Start. The display is L. press Start. The display is L.
Y N Y N
There is +5 VDC between P/J419-14 and P/J419-12 on the IOT Drive PWB. There is +5 VDC between P/J421-12 and P/J421-10 on the IOT Drive PWB.
Y N Y N
ness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, ness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 15.1). If the problem continues, replace
replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes. Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start. The Registration Motor energizes.
Y N Y N
Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Go to the Registration Motor RAP.
• Pre Registration Roller and Bearings (PL 15.2) • Registration Roller and Roller, Springs, and Bearings in the Registration Assembly (PL
• Rollers and Springs (PL 15.2) 15.1)
• Check for burrs on the Chute and Upper Chute in the Pre Registration Assembly (PL 15.2) • Gear in the Registration Assembly (PL 15.1)
• All components in the Main Motor 2 Assembly (PL 1.5) • Check for burrs on the Upper Chute and Chute in the Registration Assembly (PL 15.1).
• Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Lower Left Cover (PL 2.8)

8-193 HCF (Tray 6) Pre Registration Sensor On Jam, 8a-10 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
OF8-001 HCF Does not feed - No Fault Code RAP
The HCF will not feed paper and does not display a Fault Code.
Initial Actions
• Ensure that the machine Software is at 6.00.2h or higher.
• Check the following NVM locations: 761-070 = 608 and 761-071 = 601
Procedure
Go to 08-190 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP .

manuals4you.com
8-501 HCF Paper Size Mismatch RAP
An incorrect paper size was selected for HCF Tray.
Initial Actions
• Ensure HCF Rear Paper Guide is installed correctly.
• Ensure HCF Tray paper size selected matches the paper size loaded in HFC Tray.
• Ensure that the HCF Paper Tray Size Switch is not obstructed.
• Ensure HCF Tray paper size selected matches the Paper Guide size selection.
• Ensure connector P/J405 on the IOT CPU PWB is seated properly.
• Refer to BSD 7.11 in the following procedure.
Procedure
Set the HCF Rear Paper Guide to the A4 position. Enter dC330 007-187 HCF Paper Size
Switch and press Start.
Pull out the HCF Paper Tray. The Display changes.
Y N
Check for +5VDC at pins NO and C of P/J-849 at the HCF Paper Size Switch, Tray In
Switch. +5VDC is measured at pins NO and C of P/J-849 at the HCF Paper Size
Switch.
Y N
Check for +5VDC between pins 5 and 6 of P/J843 on the HCF Control PWB.
+5VDC is measured between pins 5 and 6 of P/J843 on the HCF Control PWB.
Y N
Check for +5VDC between pins 3 and 4 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB.
+5VDC is measured between pins 3 and 4 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB
Y N
Check for +5 VDC between pins 20 and 9 of P/J45 on the Distribution
PWB. +5 VDC is measured between pins 20 and 9 of P/J45 on the Dis-
tribution PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.13 and check the wiring for an open circuit.
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.11 and check the wiring for an open circuit.
Replace the HCF Paper Size Switch (PL 15.16).
Remove the obstruction and check/replace the following parts until the problem is resolved.
Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping:
• High Capacity Feeder Assembly (PL 15.1)
• HCF Paper Size Switch (PL 15.16)
• Wiring Harness.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-13 8-501 HCF Paper Size Mismatch RAP
8-501 HCF Paper Size Mismatch RAP 8a-14 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 2.7.5 HCF Assembly
Removal
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power
Cord.
1. Pull out the HCF Assembly (Figure 1).
Unscrew the knurled knob
Figure 2 Preparing to remove the HCF Assembly
CAUTION
Support the HCF Drawer on a ream of paper so as not to put undue stress on the Drawer
Cover.
3. Remove the HCF Assembly (Figure 3).
Figure 1 Pull out the HCF Drawer
2. Prepare to remove the HCF Assembly (Figure 2).
Remove the Assembly
Figure 3 Removing the HCF Assembly

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-15 REP 2.7.5
Replacement REP 2.7.6 HCF Elevator Motor
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the HCF Assembly. Parts List on PL 15.16
Removal
WARNING
Cord.
1. Remove the HCF Rear Cover.
2. Remove the HCF Assembly (REP 2.7.5).
3. Remove the HCF Elevator Motor (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect P/J-845
3. Remove the
HCF Elevator 2. Remove the Screws (2) from
Motor the Motor.
Figure 1 Removing the HCF Elevator Motor
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Elevator Motor.

REP 2.7.5, REP 2.7.6 8a-16 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 2.7.7 HCF Elevator Long/Short Cables
Removal
WARNING 3. Pull out the cables
Cord.
1. Remove the HCF Assembly (REP 2.7.5).
2. Remove the Front Cover to access the Long Cables only. (Figure 1).
1. Remove the
2. Remove the cover Screws (4)
1. Remove the screw
2. Slide the Pulley
Figure 2 Removing the Cable from the Drive Shaft.
Figure 1 Removing the Front Cover 4. Remove the Cables from the Front Pulley's (Figure 3).
3. Remove the Cables (Figure 2).

2. Remove the
Cables from
2. Remove the Cables Pulleys
from the Pulleys
1. Lift the Elevator

Plates
1. Lift the Elevator Plates
Figure 3 Removing the Cables from the Front Pulleys. Figure 4 Removing the Cables from the Rear Pulleys
5. Remove the Cables from the Rear Pulleys (Figure 4). Replacement
1. Ensure that the Cables are positioned correctly (Figure 5).

REP 2.7.7 8a-18 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 2.7.8 HCF Brake
Cable guides Parts List on PL 15.3
Removal
WARNING
Cord.
1. Pull open the HCF Drawer.
2. Remove the HCF Brake (Figure 1).
Short cable Remove the screws (2) while

Long cable
holding Brake
Figure 5 Positioning the Cables in the correct position

Figure 1 Removing the HCF Brake
2. Reconnect the Cable Ends to the Shaft refer to (Figure 2).
Replacement
NOTE: Position the Long Cable to the rear of the short cable on the two pulleys.
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the HCF Brake.
3. Manually rotate the drive shaft to check that the elevator plate raises and lowers evenly
and without interference.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-19 REP 2.7.7, REP 2.7.8
REP 2.7.9 HCF Control PWB
Removal
WARNING
Cord.
1. Remove the HCF Rear Cover.
2. Remove the Control PWB (Figure 1).
Disconnect the P/Js

and remove the PWB
Figure 1 Removing the Control PWB
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Feeder Control PWB.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.8.26 HCF Feed Motor REP 2.8.27 HCF Feeder Assembly
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power
Cord. Cord.
1. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5). 1. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5).
2. Remove the HCF Rear Cover (PL 15.3) 2. Remove the HCF Rear Cover (PL 15.10).
3. Remove the HCF Feed Motor (Figure 1). 3. Disconnect P/J 841 from the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16).
4. Remove the 2 screws on the right side and 1 from the front of the HCF.
2. Remove the Screws (4) 5. Remove the HCF Feeder Assembly (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Feeder Assembly

1. Remove the Feed Belt
1. Disconnect
P/J-842 3. Remove the Feed Motor
Figure 1 Removing the HCF Feed Motor
Replacement Figure 1 Removing the HCF Feeder Assembly

NOTE: Do not over tension the Feed Belt. The tension produced by the weight of the motor is
sufficient. Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the HCF Feed Motor. NOTE: Ensure that the Clutch and Locator Tab are engaged.
2. Set the belt tension by loosening the four screws securing the Feed Motor and bias the NOTE: Do not over tension the Feed Head Drive Belt. The tension produced by the spring is
motor down to the bottom of the slots and tighten the four screws. sufficient.
3. Loosen the screw securing the tensioning bracket and allow it to pivot into the drive belt.
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the HCF Feeder Assembly.
Tighten the screw
2. Set the belt tension by loosening the four screws securing the Feed Motor and bias the
motor down to the bottom of the slots and tighten the four screws.
3. Loosen the screw securing the tensioning bracket and allow it to pivot into the drive belt.
Tighten the screw.

REP 2.8.35 HCF Front/Rear Spring 2. Remove the HCF Feeder Assembly (REP 2.8.27).
3. Remove the HCF Front/Rear Spring (Figure 1).
Removal
WARNING
Cord.
1. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5).
1. Remove the KL-clips and Bushings (2) at shaft ends 4. Slide the shaft left/right to remove the Front/Rear Springs
3. Release the Spring from the Spring Stop
2. Remove the Retard Spring at rear
Figure 1 Removing the Front/Rear Spring
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Front/Rear Spring.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.8.36 HCF Baffle Assembly 2. Remove the HCF Feeder Assembly (REP 2.8.27).
3. Remove the HCF Front/Rear Springs (REP 2.8.35).
4. Remove the HCF Baffle Assembly (Figure 1).
Removal
WARNING
Cord.
1. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5).
1. Remove the KL-clip and Bushing at

each end of shaft
2. Remove the Baffle Assembly
Figure 1 Removing the Baffle Assembly
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the HCF Baffle Assembly.

REP 2.8.37 HCF Feed Belt REP 2.8.38 HCF Feed/Nudger/Retard Rolls
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Cord. Cord.
2. Remove the HCF Rear Cover (PL 15.10). 2. Remove the HCF Feed/Nudger/Retard Rolls (Figure 1).
3. Remove the HCF Feed Belt (Figure 1). NOTE: The Front Chute must be removed to allow clearance to remove the Feed Roll.
Rolls are identical and interchangeable.
2. Remove KL-clip and Pulley 3. Remove Drive Motor
and Mounting Bracket as
one (4 screws) Feed Roll Front Chute
Nudger Roll
Retard Roll Push the Lock

Tab and slip Roll
off shaft (3)
Figure 1 Removing the Feed/Nudger/Retard Rolls

4. Remove Feed Belt
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Rolls.
1. Remove the KL-clip and Feed Clutch
Figure 1 Removing the Feed Belt
Replacement
NOTE: Place the Feed Belt on the Pulley before replacing the Drive Motor.
NOTE: Do not over tension the Feed Belt. The tension produced by the spring is sufficient.
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Feed Belt.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.8.39 HCF One-Way Feed/Gear Clutch REP 2.8.40 HCF Friction Clutch
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Cord. Cord.
2. Remove the HCF Feeder Assembly (REP 2.8.27). 2. Remove the Friction Clutch (Figure 1).
3. Remove the One-Way Feed/Gear Clutch (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Friction Clutch 2. Remove the Spacer
1. Remove the Front Chute 2. Push the Lock Tab and slide
the Feed Roll off shaft
3. Remove the C-clip and Gear
1. Push the Release

4. Remove the Feed and Tab and slide the
Gear Clutch Retard Roll off shaft
Figure 1 Removing the Friction Clutch

Figure 1 Removing the Feed/Gear Clutch
Replacement
Replacement 1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Friction Clutch.
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the One-Way Feed/Gear Clutch.

REP 2.8.41 HCF Feed Clutch REP 2.8.42 HCF TAR Sensor
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Cord. Cord.
1. Remove the HCF Rear Cover (PL 15.10) 1. Remove the HCF Assembly (REP 2.7.5).
2. Remove the Feed Clutch (Figure 1). 2. Remove the HCF Feeder Assembly (REP 2.8.27).
3. Remove the Feed Sensor (Figure 1).
1.Remove the KL-clip 2. Disconnect P/J851
2. Remove Screws (2) and Bracket 1. Disconnect P/J-853
3. Remove the Sensor
3. Remove the Feed Clutch
Figure 1 Removing the Feed Clutch

Figure 1 Removing the Feed Sensor
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Feed Clutch Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Feed Sensor.

manuals4you.com
REP 2.8.43 HCF Tray Empty/Stack Height Sensors
Removal
WARNING
Cord.
1. Remove the HCF (REP 2.7.5).
2. Remove the Tray Empty/Stack Height Sensor (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the connectors
2. Remove the
Sensor (s)
Figure 1 Removing the Sensor(s)
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Sensor.

manuals4you.com
ADJ 2.1 HCF Registration
Purpose
The purpose of this adjustment is to set HCF Side Edge Registration to within specification.
Check
1. Load HCF with 8.5X11/A4 long edge feed paper.
2. Make a 100% copy of Test Pattern 82P522 side A (USO) 82P521 side A (XL).
3. Registration should be 5.0 +/-1.1mm (Figure 1).
Side Registration 5.0 +/-1.1mm
Figure 1 Checking the Registration

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-29 ADJ 2.1
Adjustment
NOTE: It may be necessary to perform this adjustment more than once to obtain the correct
Side Edge Registration.
1. Pull out the HCF.

2. Adjust the HCF Side Edge Registration (Figure 2).
3. If necessary, loosen the two Front Cover alignment screws and adjust the Front Cover
gap (Figure 2).

ADJ 2.1 8a-30 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
1. Loosen Two Screws on Both Sides
Front Cover Alignment Screws
2. Adjust the Tray

Scale
Figure 2 Adjusting the Registration
NOTE: Ensure that both sides of the High Capacity Feeder are positioned at the same point on the scales before tightening the screws.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-31 ADJ 2.1
ADJ 2.1 8a-32 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PL 15.1 Elevator Assembly: Part 1 OF
3
1 – Elevator Assembly (Not Spared)
(REP 2.7.5)
2 010K02271 Slide
4 026E57490 Screw
5 110E10051 HCF Interlock Switch
6 017E09330 Front Caster (Adjustable)
7 – Rear Caster (Not Spared)
8 030K68140 Docking Bracket

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-33 PL 15.1
3
1 – Flexure Spring (Not Spared)
2 – Elevator Housing (Not Spared)
3 802K21821 Front Cover (Includes Brackets)
4 – Paper Guide (Not Spared)
5 – Left Hand Bracket (Not Spared)
6 – Latch (Not Spared)

PL 15.2 8a-34 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3
1 – Long Cable (Not Spared)
2 – Elevator Housing (Not Spared)
3 – Wire Guide (Not Spared)
5 – Short Cable (Not Spared)
6 – Cable Pulley (Not Spared)
9 – Brake (Not Spared)
10 – Bumper (Not Spared)

PL 15.10 Paper Feeder Assembly:
Part 1 OF 6
1 022K78881 HCF Feeder Assembly (W/TAG
HCF2) (REP 2.8.27)
– 604K22210 HFC Feeder Assmebly Kit (W/TAG
6)
2 892E26370 Paper Jam Instruction Label (REP
2.8.37)
3 127K34670 HCF Feed Motor
4 004E11220 Bumper
5 – Pin Lock (Not Spared)
6 003E28840 Latch

manuals4you.com
Part 2 OF 6
1 – Bumper (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
2 030K70290 Feeder Housing
3 – Sensor Bracket (P/O PL15.10 Item
1)
4 130E81311 HCF Tar Sensor (REP 2.8.42)
5 – Wire Harness (P/O PL15.10 Item
1)
6 – Wire Clip (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
7 913W01205 Connector

Part 3 OF 6
1 007E89010 Gear (22/20T)
2 – Feeder Housing (P/O PL15.11 Item
2)
3 054E06492 Front Chute
4 120E15182 Sensor Actuator
5 074E91050 Actuator Support
6 107E08680 Tray Empty Sensor (REP 2.8.43),
Stack Height Sensor (REP 2.8.43)
7 022K55041 Drive Roll
8 413W29457 Bearing
9 020E31540 Pulley
10 – Gear/Pulley (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
11 121K10533 Clutch
12 023E23160 Feed Belt
13 – Idler Bracket (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
14 – Idler Roller (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
15 007E88990 Gear (22T)

manuals4you.com
Part 4 OF 6
1 005K04490 One Way Clutch (REP 2.8.41)
2)
3 – Bearing (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
4 – Front Spring (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
(REP 2.8.35)
5 – Rear Spring (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
(REP 2.8.35)
6 809E25230 Retard Spring
7 809E02540 Link Spring
8 023E15032 Stopper Link

Part 5 OF 6
2)
2 – Nudger Feeder Assembly (P/O
PL15.10 Item 1)
3 005K04460 One Way Clutch (REP 2.8.39)
4 007E88971 Gear (25T)
5 013E92890 Bearing
6 022K64850 Feed/Nudger Roller (REP 2.8.38)
– 059K27640 Feed/Nudger Roller (Alternate)
– 022K49980 Feed/Nudger Roller (Alternate)
7 – Support (P/O Item 2)
8 006E58342 Feed Shaft
9 413W29357 Bearing
10 007E88961 Gear (31T)
11 – Nudger Shaft (P/O Item 2)
12 005K04470 Gear Clutch (25T) (REP 2.8.39)

manuals4you.com
Part 6 OF 6
1 – Retard Assembly (P/O PL15.10
Item 1)
3 – Pivot Shaft (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
5 – Exit Baffle (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
(REP 2.8.36)
7 – Extension Spring P/O PL15.10 Item
1)
8 005K04480 Friction Clutch (REP 2.8.40)
9 – Retard Shaft (P/O PL15.10 Item 1)
10 014E83230 Spacer
11 022K64850 Retard Roller
– 022K49980 Retard Roller (Alternate)
– 059K27640 Retard Roller (Alternate)
12 – Retard Support (P/O PL15.10 Item
1)
2)
15 600K89040 HCF Skew Repair Kit (W/TAG 3)

PL 15.16 Elevator Motor and Feed
Motor
1 127K40720 HCF Elevator Motor Assembly
2 127K34670 Feed Motor (REP 2.8.26)
4 160K72183 HCF Control PWB (W/TAG HCF1,
TAG HCF4, TAG HCF5) (REP
2.7.9)
5 001E51850 Rear Frame
6 – Spring (P/O Item 1)
7 – Harness Clip (Not Spared)
8 162K51600 HCF/IOT Interface Harness
9 – Bushing (Not Spared)
10 420W10201 Cable Tie
11 116P20301 PWB Standoff
12 116P20612 Standoff
13 – Harness (Not Spared)
14 162K21160 Switch Harness
15 110E07300 HCF Paper Size Switch, Tray In
Switch
16 – Coupler (P/O Item 1)
17 – HCF Elevator Motor (P/O Item 1)
(REP 2.7.6)

manuals4you.com
054E06492 PL 15.12
Part Number Part List 059K00470 PL 15.15
001E51850 PL 15.16 059K27640 PL 15.14
003E28840 PL 15.10 PL 15.15
003E80700 PL 15.3 068K26210 PL 15.12
004E11220 PL 15.10 068K91010 PL 15.2
005K04460 PL 15.14 074E91050 PL 15.12
005K04470 PL 15.14 107E08680 PL 15.12
005K04480 PL 15.15 110E07300 PL 15.16
005K04490 PL 15.13 110E10051 PL 15.1
006E58342 PL 15.14 116P20301 PL 15.16
007E88961 PL 15.14 116P20612 PL 15.16
007E88971 PL 15.14 120E15182 PL 15.12
007E88990 PL 15.12 121K10533 PL 15.12
007E89010 PL 15.12 127K34670 PL 15.10
010K02271 PL 15.1 PL 15.16
012E07691 PL 15.3 127K40720 PL 15.16
013E14600 PL 15.15 130E81311 PL 15.11
013E82480 PL 15.15 160K72183 PL 15.16
013E92890 PL 15.14 162K21160 PL 15.16
014E83230 PL 15.15 162K51600 PL 15.16
017E09330 PL 15.1 413W29357 PL 15.14
017E09680 PL 15.1 413W29457 PL 15.12
020E17410 PL 15.3 420W10201 PL 15.16
020E25770 PL 15.3 600K89040 PL 15.15
020E31540 PL 15.12 604K22210 PL 15.10
022E24880 PL 15.12 802K21821 PL 15.2
022K49980 PL 15.14 809E02540 PL 15.13
PL 15.15 809E25230 PL 15.13
022K55041 PL 15.12 892E26370 PL 15.10
022K64850 PL 15.14 913W01205 PL 15.11
PL 15.15
022K78881 PL 15.10
023E15032 PL 15.13
023E23160 PL 15.12
026E57490 PL 15.1
029E29580 PL 15.10
030K68140 PL 15.1
030K70290 PL 15.11
032E91250 PL 15.3
050K39670 PL 15.15

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-43 Part Number Index
Part Number Index 8a-44 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Wiring Connector List Plug/Jack Index
How to use the Wiring Connector List
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index
1. To find the location of a connector, refer to the Figure and Item Number of the Plug/Jack
Location Drawings section, by referring to Figure and Item Number of the Wiring Connec- P/J No. Figure No. Item No.
tor List. J1 Figure 1 4
2. The Plug/Jack and P/J in the Index are identified by following method: J2 Figure 1 5
a. J250 represents Jack 250. P/J7 Figure 1 3
b. P250 represents Plug 250 P/J841 Figure 1 1
c. Numerals without P or J represent both Jack and Plug P/J842 Figure 1 7
Refer to Figure 1 for an example of the Plug/Jack Index connector list. P/J843 Figure 1 6
P/J845 Figure 1 2
1056 Figure x 3
Item number in the

Illustration that shows
the specific location of
a Plug/Jack.
Figure number of the Illustra-
tion showing the area of the
can be located.
P/J Number

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-45 Wiring Connector List, Plug/Jack Index
Plug/Jack Locator Diagram
Figure 1 HCF Control PWB

Plug/Jack Locator Diagram 8a-46 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
HCF BSDs
Purpose
The Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs) show the distribution of electrical and mechanical
power.
electrical information and mechanical inputs and outputs. The functional flow is from left to right
(inputs on the left and outputs on the right).
The HCF BSDs are divided into the following functional chains:
Chain 7 Paper Supply

Chain 8 Paper Feed

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-47 HCF BSDs
Chain 7 Paper Supply
Figure 1 BSD 7.11 HCF Paper Stacking

HCF BSDs 8a-48 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 BSD 7.12 HCF Elevator Motor Control

Chain 8 Paper Feed
Figure 3 BSD 8.11 HCF Drive Control

manuals4you.com
Figure 4 BSD 8.12 HCF Paper Feed

Figure 5 BSD 8.13 HCF Communication

manuals4you.com
8B Convenience Stapler
Status Indicator RAPs
Convenience Stapler RAPs
ST-1 Convenience Stapler RAP...................................................................................... 8b-3
OF-8 Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure .................................................................. 8b-5
Repairs
REP 15-1 Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness..................................................... 8b-7
Parts Lists
Convenience Stapler
PL 16.1 Convenience Stapler ......................................................................................... 8b-9
Part Number Index .......................................................................................................... 8b-10
Reissue 1/05 Convenience Stapler

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8b-1
Convenience Stapler 1/05 Reissue
8b-2 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
ST-1 Convenience Stapler RAP The Convenience Stapler Top Cover closes securely and remains closed during
operation of the Stapler.
The Convenience Stapler is exhibiting one or more of the following problems:
Y N
• The Stapler is not operating correctly; poorly clinched staples, no staples. Replace the Convenience Stapler Top Cover (PL 16.1).
• The green LED is not illuminated; indicating low staples, jammed staple, or loss of power
to the Stapler. Check the red LED on the Convenience Stapler. The red LED is illuminated.
• The red LED is illuminated; indicating low staples. Y N
Go to the Stapler Checkout Procedure.
Initial Actions
• Ensure there is power to the Convenience Stapler. Replace the Staple Cartridge. If the problem continues after replacing the Staple Car-
• Ensure that the Stapler Top Cover is closed and that Interlock Actuator is not damaged. tridge, replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1).
Do the following:
Check the position of the Stapler Head. • Close the Convenience Stapler Top Cover to actuate the interlock switch.
• Ensure there is power at the Convenience Stapler.
The Convenience Stapler is stuck in the down (clinched or stapled) position.
Y N Check the position of the Stapler Head. The Convenience Stapler remains stuck in the
Close the Convenience Stapler Top Cover and attempt to staple a stack of paper. down (clinched or stapled) position.
Check the green LED on the Convenience Stapler. The green LED is illuminated. Y N
Y N Go to Final Actions.
Check the Stapler Interlock Switch Actuator, located on the Convenience Stapler Top
Cover. Ensure that it is not missing or damaged. The check of the Stapler Inter- Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1).
lock Switch Actuator is good.
Y N Convenience Stapler Electrical Check
Replace the Convenience Stapler Top Cover (PL 16.1). Check for 110 VAC at the Convenience Stapler. The voltage is 110 VAC.
Y N
Check the Convenience Stapler Power Cord. The Power Cord for the Conve- Remove the Stapler PWB Cover to gain access to Stapler Power Cord to PWB connector.
nience Stapler is connected securely to the Convenience Stapler. Measure the voltage across the connector. The voltage is 110 VAC.
Y N Y N
Ensure the Convenience Stapler Power Cord is connected securely. Ensure that the wires are seated securely into the connector on the PWB. Repair as
Check the green LED on the Convenience Stapler. The green LED is illumi- required.
nated.
Y N Do the following:
Go to the Convenience Stapler Electrical Check.
• Ensure the Stapler Harness is connected to the Convenience Stapler PWB.
• Remove the Staple Cartridge.
Check the red LED on the Convenience Stapler. The red LED is illuminated.
Y N • Close the Convenience Stapler Top Cover.
Remove and the reinstall the Staple Cartridge. The Convenience Stapler Check the red LED on the Convenience Stapler. The red LED is illuminated.
operates correctly after reinstalling the Staple Cartridge. Y N
Y N Replace the Convenience Stapler PWB (PL 16.1). If the problem continues, replace
Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1). the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1).
Go to Final Actions. Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1).
Replace the Staple Cartridge. If the problem continues after replacing the Sta- Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1).
ple Cartridge, replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1)
Go to the Convenience Stapler Electrical Check.
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8b-3 ST-1 Convenience Stapler RAP
Stapler Checkout Procedure
NOTE: The customer has described the problem as poorly clinched staples or missing staples. Convenience
Stapler Top
The customer describes the problem as poorly clinched staples. Cover
Y N
Remove and then reinstall the Staple Cartridge. The Convenience Stapler operates Stapler
correctly after reinstalling the Staple Cartridge. Head
Y N
The unformed staple roll may be wound too tightly or the Driver Bar may be out of
position.
Do the following:
• Remove the Staple Cartridge.
• Perform the OF-8 Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure OF-8 Staple Cartridge
Checkout Procedure.
• Reinstall the Staple Cartridge.
The Convenience Stapler operates correctly after performing the Staple Car-
tridge Checkout Procedure.
Y N
Replace the Staple Cartridge and attempt to staple a stack of documents. The red LED green LED
Convenience Stapler operates correctly after replacing the Staple Car-
tridge.
Y N
Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1).
Go to Final Actions. Figure 1 Stapler Components
The customer is attempting to staple a set that is greater than 50 sheets of 24 lb (120
gsm) or equivalent thickness.
Y N
Replace the Staple Cartridge in the Convenience Stapler
Inform the customer the stapling capacity of the Convenience Stapler is 50 sheets of 24 lb (120
gsm) or equivalent thickness.

ST-1 Convenience Stapler RAP 8b-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
OF-8 Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure
The unformed staple roll is wound too tightly in the Staple Cartridge and/or the Driver Bar is out
of position. This may cause the following:
• The Convenience Stapler is failing to staple documents. NOTE: Do not grasp the
• The Staple Cartridge cannot be installed correctly in the Convenience Stapler. exposed staple roll
• The Staple Cartridge pops out of the Convenience Stapler when attempting to staple.
Staple Cartridge Checkout
To ensure the unformed staple roll in the Staple Cartridge is not wound too tight, do the follow-
ing:
• Orient the Staple Cartridge as shown in Figure 1.
• Using one hand, grasp the Staple Cartridge along the top and bottom.
• Vigorously snap the cartridge in the direction of the arrow (refer to Figure 1) about 10
times being careful not to squeeze the cartridge too tightly. You should be able to hear the
roll ‘clunking’ back and forth inside the cartridge.
To ensure the Driver Bar is in the correct position, do the following:
• Check to see if the Driver Bar is flush with the leading edge of the cartridge as shown in
Figure 2.
• If necessary, use a pen or other pointed tool to move the plate edge tab located on the left
side of the cartridge.
• Move the tab until the Driver Bar is even with the leading edge of the cartridge.
• Ensure the stapler is in the home position when re-inserting the cartridge into the Staple
Head.
Ensure the first staple is in the correct position and the staple is not damaged:
• If correctly positioned, the staple will be laying down flat on the Driver Bar.
• If the staple is oriented on end, as shown in Figure 3, or if the staple appears to be mal-
formed in any way, remove it.
Figure 1 Checking the Cartridge

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8b-5 OF-8 Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure
If the Driver Bar is not even
with the edge of the cartridge,
use a pen or other pointed tool
to move the edge tab to the
Incorrect edge Correct edge correct position.
tab position tab position
Ensure the Driver Bar is even

with the edge of the cartridge.
Figure 2 Checking the Driver Bar
Remove the staple if it is mal-

formed, or it is in this position.
Figure 3 Checking the Staples

OF-8 Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure 8b-6 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 15-1 Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness
Removal
1. Disconnect the Convenience Stapler Harness from the back of the Convenience Stapler.
2. Remove the bottom plate from the Convenience Stapler (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness (Figure 2).
1
Remove the screws (3).
1
Disconnect the
connectors.
2
Carefully separate the
bottom plate just enough
to access the connector
for the stapler.
2
Remove the harness
Figure 2 Remove the Harness
3 Replacement
Disconnect the stapler 1. Install the new Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness.
connector from the
PWB. 2. Reconnect the stapler connector to the PWB.
3. Reinstall the bottom plate.
4. Connect the Convenience Stapler Harness to the Convenience Stapler.
Figure 1 Remove the Plate 5. Check the operation of the Convenience Stapler by removing the Staple Cartridge and
closing the Convenience Stapler Cover. The red LED should be illuminated.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8b-7 REP 15-1
REP 15-1 8b-8 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PL 16.1 Convenience Stapler
1 802K22721 Stapler Cover
2 014K06500 Stapler Head
3 108R00152 Cartridge (3 Packs)
4 802K23162 Stapler Mounting Cover (Not
Spared)
5 – PWB Cover (Not Spared)
6 160K65236 Stapler PWB
7 117E22380 Wire

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8b-9 PL 16.1
Part Number Index
014K06500 PL 16.1
108R00152 PL 16.1
117E22380 PL 16.1
160K65236 PL 16.1
802K22721 PL 16.1
802K23162 PL 16.1

Part Number Index 8b-10 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
8C Edit Pad
02-282 Edit Pad PWB Communication Fail RAP ............................................................ 8c-3
OF-2 LED/Switch Panel PWB Communication Fail RAP ............................................... 8c-3
Parts Lists
Edit Pad Components
PL 17.1 Edit Pad Components (1 of 2) ........................................................................... 8c-5
PL 17.2 Edit Pad Components (1 of 2) ........................................................................... 8c-6
Common Hardware
Common Hardware ......................................................................................................... 8c-7
Part Number Index .......................................................................................................... 8c-8
Plug/Jacks
Wiring Connector List ...................................................................................................... 8c-9
Plug/Jack Index............................................................................................................... 8c-10
Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs)

Edit Pad BSDs ................................................................................................................ 8c-13
Reissue 1/05 Edit Pad

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8c-1
Edit Pad 1/05 Reissue
8c-2 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
02-282 Edit Pad PWB Communication Fail RAP OF-2 LED/Switch Panel PWB Communication Fail RAP
The UI PWB detected a communication fault between the UI PWB and the Edit Pad PWB. The UI PWB detected a communication fault between the UI PWB and the LED/Switch Panel
PWB.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD 2.5 and BSD 2.6 on the following procedure.
• Verify that P800 at the rear of machine is firmly connected.
• Verify that P800 at the rear of machine is firmly connected.
• Verify that P/J820 and P/J824 on the Edit Pad are firmly connected.
• Verify that P/J821 and P/J824 on the Edit Pad are firmly connected.
Procedure
Procedure
There is +24 VDC between P/J824-19 and P/J824-18,20,21.
Select the Edit Pad option. The LEDs on the Edit Pad Switch Panel light.
Y N
Y N
Switch off the power. Disconnect P800. Switch on the power. There is +24 VDC
between P800-19 and P800-18,20,21. There is +5 VDC between P800-5,6,23,24 and P800-10,25,26 on the Edit Pad.
Y N
Y N
Switch off the power. Disconnect P800. Switch on the power. There is +5 VDC
Go to the +24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP.
between P800-5,6,23,24 and P800-10,25,26.
Y N
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 4 and check the harness between P800 and P/J824 for
an open circuit. Switch off the power. Go to the +5VDC Power (IIT/IPS) RAP.
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 1 and check the harness between P800 and P/
There is +24 VDC between P/J820-7 and P/J820-6,8,9.
J821 for an open circuit.
Y N
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 4 and check the harness between P/J824 and P/J820
There is +5 VDC between P/J824-5,6,23,24 and P/J824-10,25,26 on the Edit Pad.
for an open circuit.
Y N
There is +24 VDC between CN1-7 and CN1-6,8,9. Switch off the power. Go to Flag 1 and check the harness between P800 and P/
J821 for an open circuit.
Y N
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 4 and check the harness between P/J820 and CN1 for
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
an open circuit.
ness is OK replace the LED/Switch Panel (PL 17.1). If the problem continues replace the
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the UI PWB (PL9.5).
harness is OK replace the Edit Pad Control PWB (PL 17.2). If the problem continues replace
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is
the UI PWB (PL 9.5). If the problem continues replace the IPS-EDIT PWB (PL 3.5).
OK replace the LED/Switch Panel (PL 17.1). If the problem continues replace the UI PWB (PL
9.5).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8c-3 02-282 Edit Pad PWB Communication Fail RAP,
02-282 Edit Pad PWB Communication Fail RAP, OF-2 8c-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PL 17.1 Edit Pad Components (1 of 2)
1 802K10992 Edit Pad Assembly
3 802K10950 Edit Panel Assembly
4 802K08940 Platen Cover Assembly
5 – Platen Stopper (P/O PL 17.1 Item
1)
6 003E48130 Hinge
7 – Inner Cover (P/O PL 17.1 Item 1)
8 – Clamp (P/O PL 17.1 Item 1)
9 177K99192 Edit Cable
10 – Connector Support (P/O PL 17.1
Item 1)
12 117K19730 Led/Switch Cable
13 019E31060 Pen Holder
14 121E90620 Magnet
15 004E99060 Cushion
16 – Platen Cover (P/O PL 17.1 Item 4)
17 120K91660 Actuator
18 – Sheet (P/O PL 17.1 Item 3)
19 048E35191 Color Sheet
20 048K37862 Led/Switch Panel
21 – Top Overlay (P/O PL 17.1 Item 3)
– 892E27311 Top Overlay (Portugese)
– 892E27301 Top Overlay (Spanish)
– 892E27291 Top Overlay (French)
22 – Platen Cushion (Not Spared)
23 – Platen Inner Cover (Not Spared)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8c-5 PL 17.1
PL 17.2 Edit Pad Components (1 of 2)
1 802K10940 Edit Pad Assembly
3 – PWB Cover (P/O PL 17.2 Item 1)
5 802K10960 Edit Pad
6 802E09660 Sheet
7 002K48500 Sheet Cover
8 – Clamp Plate (P/O PL 17.2 Item 1)
9 120E92600 Lock Pin
10 071K90530 Pen
12 160K62600 Edit Pad Control PWB
13 – Shield Sheet (P/O PL 17.2 Item 1)
14 – Edit Pad Control PWB Kit (Not
Spared)

PL 17.2 8c-6 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Common Hardware
A 113W20857 Screw (M5 x 8)
B 113W36057 Screw (M4 x 10)
C 158W27855 Screw (M3 x 8)
D 153W16055 Screw (M2 x 10)
E 153W27850 Screw (M3 x 8)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8c-7 Common Hardware
Part Number Index
002K48500 PL 17.2
003E48130 PL 17.1
004E99060 PL 17.1
019E31060 PL 17.1
048E35191 PL 17.1
048K37862 PL 17.1
071K90530 PL 17.2
117K19730 PL 17.1
120K91660 PL 17.1
120E92600 PL 17.2
121E90620 PL 17.1
160K62600 PL 17.2
177K99192 PL 17.1
802K08940 PL 17.1
802E09660 PL 17.2
802K10940 PL 17.2
802K10950 PL 17.1
802K10960 PL 17.2
802K10992 PL 17.1
892E27291 PL 17.1
892E27301 PL 17.1
892E27311 PL 17.1

Part Number Index 8c-8 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Wiring Connector List
How to use the Wiring Connector List
1. To find the location of a connector, refer to the Figure and Item Number of the Plug/Jack
Location Drawings section, by referring to Figure and Item Number of the Wiring Con-
nector List.
2. The Plug/Jack and P/J in the Index are identified by following method:
a. J250 represents Jack 250.
b. P250 represents Plug 250
c. Numerals without P or J represent both Jack and Plug
Refer to Figure 1 for an explanation of each column heading in the Plug/Jack Index.
P/J No. Figure No. Item No.
Item number in the

Illustration that shows
a Plug/Jack.
tion showing the area of the
can be located.
P/J Number or
Designator

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8c-9 Wiring Connector List
Plug/Jack Index
P/J No. Figure No. Item No.
CN1 Figure 1 4
CN2 Figure 1 1
CN3 Figure 1 3
P800 Figure 1 7
P/J820 Figure 1 5
P/J821 Figure 1 2
P/J824 Figure 1 6

Plug/Jack Index 8c-10 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Plug/Jack Locator Diagram
Figure 1 Edit Pad

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8c-11 Plug/Jack Index
Plug/Jack Index 8c-12 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Edit Pad BSDs
Purpose
power.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8c-13 Edit Pad BSDs
Figure 1 BSD 2.5 Edit Pad

Edit Pad BSDs 8c-14 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 BSD 2.6 Edit Pad Monitoring

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8c-15 Edit Pad BSDs
Edit Pad BSDs 8c-16 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
8D Finisher
Chain 03 12-246 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-41
3-319 Finisher/Sorter Communication Failure RAP ........................................................ 8d-3 12-248 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-42
12-249 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-43
Chain 11 12-251 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-43
11-107 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP .................................................................. 8d-5 12-253 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-44
11-108 SCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP ........................................................................... 8d-7 12-254 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-45
11-109 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP ................................................................. 8d-8 12-255 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-46
11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long RAP ............................................ 8d-10 12-256 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-47
11-111 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Short RAP ........................................... 8d-10 12-264 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-48
11-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On Jam RAP......................................... 8d-11 12-265 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-49
11-116 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off Jam RAP......................................... 8d-12 12-266 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-50
11-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Long RAP..................................................... 8d-13 12-302 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-51
11-143 Mailbox Entrance Sensor Off Jam RAP .............................................................. 8d-15 12-303 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-51
11-144 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Short RAP .................................................... 8d-16 12-305 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-52
11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP ............................................................ 8d-17 12-306 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-52
11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP ........................................................... 8d-19 12-400/12-538 RAP......................................................................................................... 8d-53
11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP ........................................................... 8d-21 12-531 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-53
11-191 Paper Remains at Mailbox Vertical Sensor / 1 Bin Sensor RAP ........................ 8d-22 12-536 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-54
11-192 Paper Remains at SCT Exit Sensor RAP ........................................................... 8d-22 12-537 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-55
11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP ................................................................. 8d-23 12-570 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-55
11-301 Mailbox Door Interlock Open RAP ...................................................................... 8d-23 12-571 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-56
11-302 Decurler Door Interlock Open RAP ..................................................................... 8d-24 12-580 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-57
11-303 Docking Interlock Open RAP .............................................................................. 8d-24
11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP ............................................................................................ 8d-25 15.1
11-512 Simple Catch Tray (SCT) Full Stack RAP........................................................... 8d-26 REP 15.1.1 Decurler ....................................................................................................... 8d-59
11-911 Bin 1 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 8d-27 REP 15.1.2 Decurler Rolls 1 and 2 ................................................................................. 8d-59
11-912 Bin 2 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 8d-27 REP 15.1.3 Reflector and Cam ....................................................................................... 8d-62
11-913 Bin 3 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 8d-28 REP 15.1.4 Decurler Stepper Motor................................................................................ 8d-63
11-914 Bin 4 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 8d-28 REP 15.1.5 Entrance Lower Chute and Pinch Roll ......................................................... 8d-64
11-915 Bin 5 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 8d-29 REP 15.1.6 Exit Lower Baffle and Pinch Roll.................................................................. 8d-65
11-916 Bin 6 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 8d-29 REP 15.1.7 Decurler PWB .............................................................................................. 8d-65
11-917 Bin 7 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 8d-30 REP 15.1.8 Cam Drive Shaft........................................................................................... 8d-66
11-918 Bin 8 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 8d-30 REP 15.1.9 Torque Limiter Gear and Stopper ................................................................ 8d-67
11-919 Bin 9 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 8d-31 REP 15.1.10 Decurler Drive Roll 2.................................................................................. 8d-68
11-920 Bin 10 Full Stack RAP......................................................................................... 8d-31 REP 15.1.11 Decurler Drive Roll 1.................................................................................. 8d-69
11-921 SCT Tray Full Stack RAP ................................................................................... 8d-32 REP 15.1.12 Decurler Entrance Roll............................................................................... 8d-70
11-922 Sorter Stacker Full RAP...................................................................................... 8d-32 REP 15.1.13 Decurler Exit Roll ....................................................................................... 8d-71
REP 15.1.14 Entrance Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll ....................................................... 8d-72
Chain 12 REP 15.1.15 Finisher Transport Motor............................................................................ 8d-73
12-120 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-33 REP 15.1.16 Finisher Drive Belt...................................................................................... 8d-73
12-121 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-34 REP 15.1.17 Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly ........................................................... 8d-74
12-170 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-36 REP 15.1.18 SCT Static Eliminator................................................................................. 8d-75
12-180 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-37 REP 15.1.19 SCT Exit Sensor ........................................................................................ 8d-75
12-181 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-37 REP 15.1.20 SCT Pinch Roll........................................................................................... 8d-76
12-240 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-38 REP 15.1.21 Finisher Transport Roll 1............................................................................ 8d-76
12-243 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-39 REP 15.1.22 Finisher Transport Roll 2............................................................................ 8d-77
12-244 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-39
12-245 RAP..................................................................................................................... 8d-40 15.2
Reissue 1/05 Finisher/Sorter

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-1
REP 15.2.1 Compiler Tray Solenoid ............................................................................... 8d-79 REP 15.3.19 Stapler Position Motor................................................................................ 8d-123
REP 15.2.2 Stacker Tray Assembly................................................................................ 8d-80 REP 15.3.20 Mailbox Drive Motor ................................................................................... 8d-123
REP 15.2.4 Stacker Full Sensors.................................................................................... 8d-81 REP 15.3.21 Mailbox Drive Belt ...................................................................................... 8d-124
REP 15.2.5 Stacker Upper and Lower Limit Sensors ..................................................... 8d-82 REP 15.3.23 Docking Interlock Switch............................................................................ 8d-125
REP 15.2.6 Stacker Tray Paper Sensor ......................................................................... 8d-82 REP 15.3.25 Decurler Door Interlock Switch .................................................................. 8d-125
REP 15.2.7 Stacker Motor .............................................................................................. 8d-83 REP 15.3.28 Finisher PWB ............................................................................................. 8d-126
REP 15.2.8 Lower Exit Chute Assembly ......................................................................... 8d-83 REP 15.3.29 Finisher PWB EPROM............................................................................... 8d-126
REP 15.2.9 Stacker Tray Drive Belts .............................................................................. 8d-84 REP 15.3.30 Vertical LED and Sensor............................................................................ 8d-127
REP 15.2.10 Stacker Tray .............................................................................................. 8d-85 REP 15.3.31 Bin Tray 1................................................................................................... 8d-128
REP 15.2.11 Tamper Motor ............................................................................................ 8d-87 REP 15.3.32 Bin Trays 2 - 10.......................................................................................... 8d-129
REP 15.2.12 Tamper Home Sensor ............................................................................... 8d-88
REP 15.2.13 Compiler Paper Sensor ............................................................................. 8d-89 Adjustments
REP 15.2.14 End Wall Open Sensor .............................................................................. 8d-90 ADJ 15.3.1 Staple Position Adjustment........................................................................... 8d-131
REP 15.2.15 Tamper Motor Drive Belt............................................................................ 8d-91 ADJ 15.3.2 Stacker Tray Level........................................................................................ 8d-132
REP 15.2.16 End Wall Motor .......................................................................................... 8d-92 Parts Lists
REP 15.2.17 Eject Clamp Sensor ................................................................................... 8d-93
REP 15.2.18 Stacker Offset Home Sensor ..................................................................... 8d-94 Sorter/Finisher
REP 15.2.19 Eject Bracket Assembly ............................................................................. 8d-95 PL 18.1 Finisher Accessory............................................................................................. 8d-135
REP 15.2.20 Eject Paddle Motor and Drive Belt ............................................................. 8d-96 PL 18.2 Covers - Left, Front ............................................................................................ 8d-136
REP 15.2.21 Eject Shaft Assembly ................................................................................. 8d-97 PL 18.3 Covers - Right, Rear .......................................................................................... 8d-137
REP 15.2.22 Compiler Cover Assembly ......................................................................... 8d-98 PL 18.4 Finisher Components......................................................................................... 8d-138
REP 15.2.23 Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly................................................................ 8d-99 PL 18.5 Decurler Cover................................................................................................... 8d-139
REP 15.2.24 Upper Exit Chute Assembly ....................................................................... 8d-100 PL 18.6 Decurler Chute, PWB......................................................................................... 8d-140
REP 15.2.25 Exit Roll...................................................................................................... 8d-101 PL 18.7 Decurler Roll ...................................................................................................... 8d-141
REP 15.2.26 Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly .............................................................. 8d-102 PL 18.8 Decurler Transport Roll...................................................................................... 8d-142
REP 15.2.27 Paddle Drive Belt ....................................................................................... 8d-104 PL 18.9 Mailbox - Stapler Entrance Roll ......................................................................... 8d-143
REP 15.2.28 Stacker Height Sensor............................................................................... 8d-105 PL 18.10 Mailbox Entrance Roll, Sct Exit Roll................................................................. 8d-144
REP 15.2.29 Unload While Run Switch .......................................................................... 8d-106 PL 18.11 Mailbox - Gate, PWB, Interlock Switch ............................................................ 8d-145
REP 15.2.30 Compiler Entrance Sensor......................................................................... 8d-106 PL 18.12 Mailbox - Stapler Entrance Chute .................................................................... 8d-146
REP 15.2.31 Eject Paddle Home Sensor........................................................................ 8d-107 PL 18.13 Mailbox Chute .................................................................................................. 8d-147
REP 15.2.32 Eject Motor................................................................................................. 8d-108 PL 18.14 Stapler - Exit Chute.......................................................................................... 8d-148
REP 15.2.33 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor........................................................................... 8d-109 PL 18.15 Stapler-Compiler .............................................................................................. 8d-149
PL 18.16 Compiler Tray Components ............................................................................. 8d-150
15.3 PL 18.17 Stapler Accessory ............................................................................................ 8d-151
REP 15.3.1 Finisher ........................................................................................................ 8d-111
PL 18.18 Stapler Rail Component................................................................................... 8d-152
REP 15.3.2 Stapler Door Assembly ................................................................................ 8d-111
PL 18.19 Offset And Set Eject......................................................................................... 8d-153
REP 15.3.3 Stapler Cover Assembly .............................................................................. 8d-112
PL 18.20 Eject And Paddle Components ........................................................................ 8d-154
REP 15.3.4 Decurler Door Assembly.............................................................................. 8d-112
PL 18.21 Eject And Offset Components.......................................................................... 8d-155
REP 15.3.5 Mailbox Door Assembly ............................................................................... 8d-113
PL 18.22 Bin Tray 1......................................................................................................... 8d-156
REP 15.3.6 Left Lower Cover ......................................................................................... 8d-113
PL 18.23 Bin Tray 2/4/6/8................................................................................................ 8d-157
REP 15.3.7 Rear Upper Cover........................................................................................ 8d-114
PL 18.24 Bin Tray 3/5/7/9................................................................................................ 8d-158
REP 15.3.8 IOT Connector Cover................................................................................... 8d-114
PL 18.25 Bin Tray 10....................................................................................................... 8d-159
REP 15.3.9 Finisher PWB Cover .................................................................................... 8d-115
PL 18.26 Stacker Tray Drive ........................................................................................... 8d-160
REP 15.3.10 Left Upper Cover ....................................................................................... 8d-115
PL 18.27 Stacker Tray..................................................................................................... 8d-161
REP 15.3.11 Top Cover .................................................................................................. 8d-116
REP 15.3.12 Decurler Top Cover ................................................................................... 8d-116 Common Hardware
REP 15.3.13 Decurler Rear Cover.................................................................................. 8d-117 Common Hardware ......................................................................................................... 8d-162
REP 15.3.14 Decurler Inner Cover ................................................................................. 8d-117 Part Number Index .......................................................................................................... 8d-163
REP 15.3.15 Rear Lower Cover...................................................................................... 8d-118
REP 15.3.16 Stapler Assembly ....................................................................................... 8d-118 Finisher Plug/Jacks
REP 15.3.17 Stapler Position Sensors ........................................................................... 8d-119 Wiring Connector List ...................................................................................................... 8d-167
REP 15.3.18 Stapler Rail Belt ......................................................................................... 8d-121 Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams .......................................................................................... 8d-169
Finisher/Sorter 1/05 Reissue

8d-2 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Wirenets
Finisher Wirenets ............................................................................................................ 8d-175
Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs)

Finisher BSDs ................................................................................................................. 8d-183

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-3
8d-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
3-319 Finisher/Sorter Communication Failure RAP
The 3-319 Fault Code indicates a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the Fin-
isher PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.4 PWB Communications (Finisher) and to BSD 12.7, Monitoring, in this proce-
dure.
Procedure
Y N
If an intermittent is suspected, perform the following:
• Check the connections to the IOT CPU PWB and the Finisher PWB, and the inter-
connecting harness
• Reseat P/J405 at the IOT CPU PWB, P/J1027, and P/J1026 at the Finisher PWB,
and P880, the Double Plug
Check for +5 VDC at P/J1026-3. +5 VDC is measured at P/J1026-2 on the Finisher PWB.
Y N
• Go to +5VDC Wire Nets and check for an open/short circuit
Check for +24 VDC at P/J1026-1 on the Finisher PWB. +24 VDC is measured at P/J1026 -
4.
Y N
• Go to +24VDC-1 Wire Net and check for an open/short circuit

• Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.4, and check the following wires for an open/short circuit:
J405-1
J405-2
J405-3
J405-4
• Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-3 3-319 Finisher/Sorter Communication Failure RAP
3-319 Finisher/Sorter Communication Failure RAP 8d-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C D E F
11-107 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP Y N
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.5. Check for an open circuit. If the
The SCT Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after wires are OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check for an open circuit.
NOTE: “Long” indicates that the trail edge of the paper has not passed through the Machine If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
Exit Sensor.
Press Start. There is less than +1 VDC from P/J1021-3 to GND.
Initial Actions Y N
Refer to BSD12.1, BSD12.5, BSD12.10 and BSD12.17 for the following procedure. Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
Check for the following: Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10).
• Obstructions in the Mailbox/Sorter paper path
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox/Sorter paper path Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft.
• Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mailbox/Sorter Entrance Roll and the SCT
• Check the Drive Belt Tension Pulley for proper tension
Exit Roll.
• Ensure that connectors P/J1040 on the Finisher PWB, P/J1076, and P/J1078 on the
SCT Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.

Procedure • Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10)
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the SCT Exit Sensor. • Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12)
Y N
• SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10)
Y N • Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
Roll is rotating.
Y N The Mailbox Gate is in the Up position
The Mailbox Drive Belt is moving. Y N
Y N Enter dC330 012-081 Mailbox Gate Solenoid Closed. Press Start. The Mailbox
The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating. Gate Solenoid energized.
Y N Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2,4 of +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-15 and P/J1042-13 on the Fin-
the Mailbox Drive Motor. isher PWB.
Y N Y N
There is +24 VDC from pin 1 to pin 4 of P/J1025 on the Mail- +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-15 on the Finisher PWB and
box PWB. GND.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.5. Check for an open circuit. If the +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB
wires are OK, go to Flag 1 through Flag 5 on BSD 12.1. and GND.
Check the interlock circuit for an open wire or a malfunc- Y N
tioning interlock switch. If the circuit is OK, replace the Fin- Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between
isher PWB (PL 18.4). P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribu-
tion PWB.
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If
the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1042-15 on the Finisher
Y N PWB and GND
There is +5 VDC from pin 3 to pin 4 of P/J1025 on the Mail- Y N
box PWB. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
A B C D E F A G H I J
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-5 11-107 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP
A G H I J A
Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires • Ensure that the Finisher Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Fin-
are good, replace the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). isher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
• Ensure that the Finisher Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Fin-
Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are isher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
good, ensure that the Mailbox gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate Solenoid
and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL Enter dC330 012-107 SCT Entrance Sensor. Manually actuate the SCT Exit Sensor actuator.
18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor.
Y N
Ensure that the Mailbox gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate Solenoid and that it The display is always H
moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Y N
Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.10. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the
harness is good, replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
The Finisher Gate is in the Down position
Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1078-1 and P/J1078-3 at the SCT Exit Sensor.
Enter dC330 012-070 Finisher Gate Solenoid Closed. Press Start. The Finisher Y N
Gate Solenoid energized. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-2 and P/J1040-3 on the Finisher PWB.
Y N Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-16 and P/J1042-14 on the Fin- +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and P/J1026-2 on the Finisher
isher PWB. PWB.
Y N Y N
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J1042-16 on the Finisher PWB and +5 VDC is measured between P/J880-3 and P/J880-2.
GND Y N
Y N Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenet and check wires for an open or
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-14 on the Finisher PWB short circuit.
and GND.
Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD12.1 and check the harness for an open circuit.
Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between
P/J1042-14 on the Finisher PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribu- Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
tion PWB
Go to Flag 2 on BSD12.10 and check the harness for an open or a short circuit.
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace or repair as required.
Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1042-16 on the Finisher Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.10. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good,
PWB and GND replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
Y N
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) With paper at the sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1040-1 and GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires Replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
are good, replace the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are • Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10)
good, ensure that the Finisher gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid
and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL
18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). • SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10)
Ensure that the Finisher Gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid and that it Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL 18.11) and the
Finisher Solenoid (PL 18.11).
• Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper to enter the
Vertical Transport.
A
11-107 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP 8d-6 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
11-108 SCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
• Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10)
The SCT Exit Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the SCT Exit Sensor • Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12)
actuated.
Initial Actions • Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Check the SCT Exit Sensor Actuator for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. The
actuator is binding.
• Obstructions in the Mailbox paper path
Y N
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox paper path Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive
• Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mailbox Transport Roll and the SCT Exit belts that would cause the copy to be slow to actuate the SCT Exit Sensor.
Roll.
• Ensure that connectors P/J1040 on the Mailbox PWB and P/J1076 on the SCT Exit Sen- Replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
sor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the SCT Exit Sensor
Y N
Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is
rotating.
Y N
Y N
The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2 of the Mail-
box Drive Motor
Y N
wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).

Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open
circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).

GND.
Y N
Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11)
Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10).
Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft.

A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-7 11-108 SCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP
A B C D E
11-109 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft.
The SCT Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after • Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the trail edge of the same paper. • Check the Drive Belt for Damage
NOTE: “Short” indicates that the trail edge of the paper has passed through the Machine Exit
Sensor.
Initial Actions • Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10)
Refer to BSD12.5, BSD12.7, BSD12.10 and BSD12.17 for the following procedure. • Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12)
Check for the following: • Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
• Obstructions in the Mailbox paper path Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox paper path
• Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mailbox Transport Roll and the SCT Exit The SCT Gate is in the Up position.
Roll. Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J1040 on the Mailbox PWB and P/J1076 on the SCT Exit Sen- Enter dC330 012-061 Tamper Motor Top Front. Press Start. The SCT Gate Sole-
noid energized.
sor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-15 and P/J1042-13 on the Mail-
Procedure box PWB.
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the SCT Exit Sensor Y N
Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J1042-15 Mailbox PWB and GND
The paper entered the Vertical Transport. Y N
Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-13 on the Mailbox PWB
Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport and GND.
Roll is rotating. Y N
Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between
The Mailbox Drive Belt is moving. P/J1042-13 on the Mailbox PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribu-
Y N tion PWB
Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Mailbox Drive Motor Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1042-13 and GND
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. are good, replace the SCT Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wire for an Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL good, ensure that the SCT gate is connected to the SCT Gate Solenoid and
18.11). that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the SCT Gate (PL 18.11)
and the SCT Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
and GND. Ensure that the SCT gate is connected to the SCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves
Y N freely. If the problem continues replace the SCT Gate (PL 18.11) and the SCT Gate
Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11) Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). The Finisher Gate is in the Down position
A B C D E A
11-109 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP 8d-8 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A F G
Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1078-1 and v-3
Enter dC330 012-070 Finisher Gate Solenoid Closed. Press Start. The Finisher Y N
Gate Solenoid energized. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-2 and P/J1040-3.
Y N Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-16 and P/J1042-14 on the Fin- +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and P/J1026-2.
isher PWB. Y N
Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J880-3 and P/J880-2.
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J1042-16 on the Finisher PWB and Y N
GND Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenet and check wires for an open or
Y N short circuit.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-14 on the Finisher PWB
and GND. Go to Flag 17 on BSD12.1 and check the harness for an open circuit.
Y N
Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
P/J1042-14 on the Finisher PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribu-
tion PWB Go to Flag 2 on BSD12.10 and check the harness for an open or a short circuit.
Replace or repair as required.
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.10. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good,
Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1042-16 on the Finisher replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
PWB and GND
Y N With paper at the sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1040-1 and GND.
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Y N
Replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires
are good, replace the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, ensure that the Finisher gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid
and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL
18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). • Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Ensure that the Finisher Gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid and that it
moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL 18.11) and the
Finisher Solenoid (PL 18.11).
• Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper to enter the
Vertical Transport.
• Ensure that the Mailbox Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the
Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
• Ensure that the Finisher Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Fin-
isher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Enter dC330 012-107 SCT Entrance Sensor. Manually actuate the SCT Exit Sensor actuator.
The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.10. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the
harness is good, replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
F G
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-9 11-109 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP
11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long RAP 11-111 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Short RAP
The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor at power on. The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor at power on.

• Ensure that no paper is blocking the Decurler Exit sensor • Ensure that no paper is blocking the Decurler Exit sensor
• Ensure that P/J651 and P/J654 on the Decurler Control PWB, and P/J658 on the • Ensure that P/J651 and P/J654 on the Decurler Control PWB, and P/J658 on the
Decurler Exit Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP. Decurler Exit Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 012-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Enter dC330 012-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 9, Flag 10, and Flag 11 on BSD12.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. Go to Flag 9, Flag 10, and Flag 11 on BSD12.6 and check the harness for a short circuit.
If the harness is good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). If the problem contin- If the harness is good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). If the problem contin-
ues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). ues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
+5VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND on the Decurler PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND on the Decurler PWB.
Y N Y N
Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6).
Check the Decurler Exit Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Check the Decurler Exit Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the
Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).

11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long 8d-10 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
11-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On Jam RAP • Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
The Mailbox Vertical Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper. • Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10)
Initial Actions • SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10)
Refer to BSD12.5, BSD12.8 , BSD12.9, and BSD12.17 for the following procedure. • Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Enter dC330 012-115 Vertical Sensor. Manually block the Mailbox Vertical Sensor with a sheet
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox paper path of paper. The display changes from L to H to L as the paper moves in and out of the sen-
• Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres- sor.
sure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J1004 on the Mailbox PWB, P/J1022 double plug, P/J1023 The display is always H
and P/J1024, on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor is seated correctly and there are no obvious Y N
crimped or broken wires. Go to Flag 21 and Flag 22 on BSD12.8. Check the harness for a short circuit to
ground. If the harness is good, replace the Mailbox Vertical Sensor (PL 18.13).
Procedure The Vertical LED is on.
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Mailbox Vertical Sensor Y N
Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1004-3 and P/J1004-1 on the Mailbox PWB.
Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is Y N
rotating. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1025-3 and P/J1025-4 on the Mailbox
Y N PWB.
The Mailbox drive Belt is moving. Y N
Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1029-3 and P/J1029-4 on the Fin-
The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating isher PWB
Y N Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2, 4, 6 of the Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/
Mailbox Drive Motor J1029-1 and P/J44-22 on the Distribution PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
Y N Go to Flag 19 and Flag 20 on BSD12.8. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open harness is good, replace the Vertical LED (PL 18.22).
Go to Flag 21 and Flag 22 on BSD12.8. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is
Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and good, replace the Mailbox Vertical Sensor (PL 18.13).
GND.
Y N With paper at the sensor, more than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J1004-3 and DC
Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). If the problem continues, Com.
replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Y N
Replace the Mailbox Vertical Sensor (PL 18.13).
Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. • Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10)
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-11 11-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On
• Drive Belt (PL 18.10) 11-116 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off Jam RAP
The Mailbox Vertical Sensor did not detect the Trail edge of the paper within the specified time
after the Mailbox Vertical Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Initial Actions

• Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres-
• Ensure that connectors P/J1004 on the Mailbox PWB, P/J1022 double plug, P/J1023
and P/J1024, on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor is seated correctly and there are no obvious
crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the Mailbox Vertical Sensor
Y N
rotating.
Y N
Y N
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2, 4, 6 of the
Mailbox Drive Motor
Y N

Y N

GND.
Y N
Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). If the problem continues,
replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).

A B
11-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On Jam 8d-12 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
• Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls 11-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Long RAP
• Check the bin entrance area for obstructions. The Mailbox Entrance Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified
• Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls.
• Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Initial Actions
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Refer to BSD12.5, BSD12.7 and BSD12.17 for the following procedure.
• Check the bin entrance area for obstructions. • Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres-
• Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls.
sure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. • Ensure that connectors P/J1004 on the Mailbox PWB, P/J1022 double plug, P/J1023
• Check the Mailbox Vertical Sensor for intermittent operation. Replace the Mailbox Vertical and P/J1024, on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor is seated correctly and there are no obvious
Sensor (PL 18.13) if the problem is not resolved.
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Mailbox Entrance Sensor.
Y N
Y N
The Mailbox Gate is in the down or Bin Tray position.
Y N
Enter dC330 012-082 Mailbox Gate Solenoid Open. Press Start. The Mailbox
Gate Solenoid energized.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1024-15 and P/J1024-17 on the
Finisher PWB.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1024-15 Finisher PWB and
GND
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher
PWB and GND.
Y N
between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB and P/J45-6
on the Distribution PWB

Y N

circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL
18.11).
A B C D E
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-13 11-116 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off
A B C D E A
Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires • SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10)
are good, ensure that the Mailbox gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate • Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues, replace the Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
Enter dC330 012-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor. Manually actuate the Mailbox Entrance Sen-
Ensure that the Mailbox Gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate Solenoid and sor actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of
that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL
the sensor.
18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Y N
• Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper not to
Y N
Go to Flag 8 on BSD12.7. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the har-
• Ensure that the Mailbox Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the ness is good, replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J1017-1 and P/J1017-3 on the Mailbox Entrance
Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is Sensor.
rotating. Y N
Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-2 and P/J1040-3 on the Finisher PWB.
The Mailbox Drive Belt is moving. Y N
Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J880-3 and P/J880-2.
The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating Y N
Y N Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenet and check wires for an open or short
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2 of the Mail- circuit.
box Drive Motor
Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD12.1 and check the harness for an open circuit.
circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). If Go to Flag 7 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open. If the wires are OK, replace
the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Go to Flag 8 and Flag 7 on BSD12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
Y N ness is good, replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wire for an open cir-
cuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). With paper at the sensor, less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-4 and GND.
Y N
Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and Replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13).
GND.
Y N Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). If the problem continues, • Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10)
Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). • SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10)
Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.


A
11-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Long RAP 8d-14 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
11-143 Mailbox Entrance Sensor Off Jam RAP • Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
The Mailbox Entrance Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the V-Tra In Sen- Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
sor actuated. • Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10)
Initial Actions • SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10)
Refer to BSD12.5 and BSD12.7 for the following procedure. • Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Check the Mailbox Entrance Sensor Actuator for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor.
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox paper path The actuator is binding.
• Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres- Y N
sure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive
• Ensure that connectors P/J1004 on the Mailbox PWB, P/J1022 double plug, P/J1023 belts that would cause the fed paper to be slow to deactuate the Mailbox Entrance Sen-
and P/J1024, on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor is seated correctly and there are no obvious sor.
Replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13).
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the SCT Exit Sensor
Y N
rotating.
Y N
The Mailbox Drive Belt is moving.
Y N
Y N
box Drive Motor
Y N

Y N
cuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).

GND.
Y N

A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-15 11-143 Mailbox Entrance Sensor Off Jam RAP
A B C D E
11-144 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Short RAP Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit.
If the wires are good, ensure that the Mailbox gate is connected to the
The Mailbox Entrance Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified Mailbox Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues,
time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detects the lead edge of the same paper. replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL
18.11).
Initial Actions
Ensure that the Mailbox Gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate Solenoid and
that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL
Check for the following: 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).

• Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper not to
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox paper path enter the Vertical Transport.
• Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pres- • Ensure that the Mailbox Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the
sure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
• Ensure that connectors P/J1004 on the Mailbox PWB, P/J1022 double plug, P/J1023
and P/J1024, on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor is seated correctly and there are no obvious Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is
crimped or broken wires. rotating.
Y N
Procedure The Mailbox Drive Belt is moving.
Y N
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Mailbox Entrance Sensor.
Y N
Y N
Y N
box Drive Motor
The Mailbox Gate is in the down or Bin Tray position. Y N
Y N Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open
Enter dC330 012-082 Mailbox Gate Solenoid Open. Press Start. The Mailbox
Gate Solenoid energized.
Y N Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-15 and P/J1042-17 on the
Y N
Finisher PWB.
Y N cuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J1042-15 Finisher PWB and
GND Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and
Y N GND.
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher
Y N
PWB and GND.
Y N replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB and P/J45-6 Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10).
on the Distribution PWB
Y N
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) • Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL • Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10)
18.11). • Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12)
A B C D E A
11-144 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Short RAP 8d-16 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
• SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) 11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. The Decurler Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time
after the M/C Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Enter dC330 012-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor. Manually actuate the Mailbox Entrance Sen-
sor actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of Initial Actions
the sensor. Refer toBSD12.1, BSD12.5, BSD 12.6 and BSD12.7 for the following procedure.
Y N
The display is always H Check for the following:
Y N • Obstructions in the Decurler paper path
Go to Flag 8 on BSD12.7. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the har- • Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Decurler paper path
ness is good, replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-2 and P/J1040-3 • Ensure that connectors P/J654, P/J653, and P/J651 on the Decurler PWB, Double Plug
Y N P/J661, P/J1028 on the Finisher PWB and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are
CR1 on the Mailbox PWB is on. seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Y N
Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J1040-4 and Procedure
Y N
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Y N
Go to Flag 8 and Flag 7 on BSD12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
The Entrance Rolls are rotating when the Jam occurs
ness is good, replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13).
Y N
Enter dC330 012-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler Step-
With paper at the sensor, less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-4 and GND.
ping Motor rotates.
Y N
Y N
Check F1 fuse on the Decurler PWB. The fuse is open (blown).
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the
• Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Decurler PWB.
• Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) Y N
• SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) +24 VDC is measured between P/J1026-1 and GND on the
• Drive Belt (PL 18.10) Finisher PWB.
Y N
Go to Wire Net +24VDC-2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If

the wire is good, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and

GND on the Decurler PWB.
Y N
Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). If the problem continues,
replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/

J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB.
Y N
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and
GND
A B C D E F
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-17 11-144 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Short
A B C D E F A B C G
Y N Y N
Go to Wire Net +5VDC-1. Check the wire for an open cir- Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
cuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL
18.4). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8).
Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and Enter dC330 012-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Decurler
GND. Stepping Motor rotates.
Y N Y N
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and
GND.
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and Y N
GND Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open cir- Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8).
18.4). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and • Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12)
GND.
Y N
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). • Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Go to the 10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam
Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). RAP.
Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Y N
• Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear (PL 18.8) • Drive gears (PL 18.7) (PL 18.8)

Y N
Stepping Motor rotates.
Y N Y N
Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and Go to Flag 10 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is
GND.
Y N
Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J1028-B5 and GND.
Y N
Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Go to Flag 11 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good,
Y N
Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and Use a sheet of paper to actuate the Decurler Exit Sensor. The display changes to H.
GND. Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J654-1 and P/J654-3 on the Decurler PWB.
A B C G H
11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP 8d-18 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
H
Y N 11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP
+5 VDC is measured between P/J651-3 and P/J651-4 on the Finisher PWB.
Y N The Decurler Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time
+5 VDC is measured between P/J1028-3 and P/J1028-4 on the Finisher after the MC Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
PWB.
Y N Initial Actions
Refer toBSD12.1, BSD12.5, BSD 12.6 and BSD12.7 for the following procedure.
Y N
Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenets and check wires for an open or Check for the following:
short circuit.
Go to Flag 17 on BSD12.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. • Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Decurler paper path
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). • Ensure that connectors P/J654, P/J653, and P/J651 on the Decurler PWB, Double Plug
P/J661, P/J1028 on the Finisher PWB and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are
Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Go to Flag 9 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wires are good,
Procedure
More than +4.5 VDC is measured between P/J658-2 and GND on the Decurler Exit Sen- Y N
sor. The paper entered the Decurler.
Y N Y N
Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). The Entrance Rolls are rotating when the Jam occurs
Y N
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Enter dC330 012-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler Step-
ping Motor rotates.
Y N
Check F1 fuse on the Decurler PWB. The fuse is open (blown).
• SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Y N
• Drive Belt (PL 18.10) +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the
• Drive gears (PL 18.7) (PL 18.8) Decurler PWB.
Y N
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J1026-1 and GND on the
Finisher PWB.
Y N
Go to Wire Net +24VDC-2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If

the wire is good, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and

GND on the Decurler PWB.
Y N
Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). If the problem continues,
Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/

J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB.
Y N
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and
GND
A B C D E F
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-19 11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP, 11-
A B C D E F A B C G
Y N Y N
Go to Wire Net +5VDC-1. Check the wire for an open cir- Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
18.4). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8).
Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and Enter dC330 012-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Decurler
GND. Stepping Motor rotates.
Y N Y N
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and
GND.
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and Y N
GND Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open cir- Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8).
18.4). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and • Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12)
GND.
Y N
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). • Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Go to the 10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam
Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). RAP.
Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Y N
• Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear (PL 18.8) • Drive gears (PL 18.7) (PL 18.8)

Y N
Y N Y N
Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and Go to Flag 10 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is
GND.
Y N
Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J1028-B5 and GND.
Y N
Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Go to Flag 11 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good,
Y N
Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and Use a sheet of paper to actuate the Decurler Exit Sensor. The display changes to H.
GND. Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J654-1 and P/J654-3 on the Decurler PWB.
A B C G H
11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP 8d-20 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
H
Y N 11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP
Y N The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the V-Tra In Sensor at power on.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J1028-3 and P/J1028-4 on the Finisher
PWB. Initial Actions
Y N • Refer to BSD12.7 and BSD12.17 for the following procedure.
• Ensure that no paper is blocking the V-Tra In sensor and the sensor actuator moves freely.
Y N
Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenets and check wires for an open or • Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
short circuit. • Ensure that P/J1040 on the Finisher PWB, P/J1076 double plug, and P/J1017 on the
Mailbox Entrance Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1 and check the harness for an open circuit.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor. Press Start. The display is L.
Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). Y N
Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD12.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the har-
Go to Flag 9 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ness is good, replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13). If the problem continues,
More than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J1040-4 and GND on the Finisher PWB.
More than +4.5 VDC is measured between P/J658-2 and GND on the Decurler Exit Sen-
Y N
sor.
Y N
Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6).
Check the Mailbox Entrance Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace
the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-21 11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP, 11-
11-191 Paper Remains at Mailbox Vertical Sensor / 1 Bin 11-192 Paper Remains at SCT Exit Sensor RAP
Sensor RAP The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the SCT Exit Sensor at power on.
The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor at power on.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Refer to BSD12.10 for the following procedure.
• Refer to BSD12.8 for the following procedure. • Ensure that no paper is blocking the SCT Exit sensor and the sensor actuator moves
• Ensure that no paper or foreign object is blocking the Mailbox Vertical sensor. freely.
• Ensure that the Mailbox Vertical sensor and the Vertical LED are clean. • Check for excessive static on copies.
• Ensure that P/J1004 on the Finisher PWB, and P/J1023 and P/J1024 on the Mailbox • Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
Vertical Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP. • Ensure that P/J1040 on the Mailbox PWB, and P/J1017 on the Mailbox Entrance Sensor
are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-115 Vertical Sensor. Press Start. The display is L.
Procedure
Y N Enter dC330 012-107 SCT Entrance Sensor. Press Start. The display is L.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J1004-3 and P/J1004-1 on the Mailbox PWB. Y N
Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J1025-3 and P/J1025-4 on the Mailbox PWB.
Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J1040-1 and GND on the Mailbox PWB.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J1029-3 and P/J1029-4 on the Finisher Y N
PWB Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.10 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is
Y N good, replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J1029-1
and P/J44-22 on the Distribution PWB. If the problem is intermittent, ensure that the SCT Exit Sensor is clean. If the problem contin-
ues, go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.10 and check for loose connectors or crimped wires. If
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) the problem continues, replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
Go to Flag 19 and Flag 20 on BSD12.8. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the har-
ness is good, replace the Vertical LED (PL 18.13).
Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J1004-3 and DC COM on the Mailbox PWB.
Y N
Replace the Mailbox Vertical Sensor (PL 18.13).
Check the Mailbox Vertical Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the
Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).

11-191 Paper Remains at Mailbox Vertical Sensor / 1 8d-22 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP 11-301 Mailbox Door Interlock Open RAP
The Control Logic detected paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor. Mailbox Door Interlock Open Failure. This status code is declared when the Mailbox Door Inter-
lock Switch is open.
Initial Actions
• Refer to BSD12.6 for the following procedure. Initial Actions
• Ensure that no paper is blocking the Decurler Exit sensor • Refer to BSD12.1 for the following procedure.
• Ensure that P/J651 and P/J654 on the Decurler Control PWB, and P/J658 on the • Ensure that P/J1033 on the Finisher PWB, and P/J1018 on the Mailbox Door Interlock
Decurler Exit Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP. Switch are connected before beginning this RAP.
• Check the Front Door for proper alignment.
Procedure • Verify that the Front Door closes properly.
Enter dC330 012-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N Procedure
Go to Flag 9, Flag 10, and Flag 11 on BSD12.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. Enter dC330 012-301 Mailbox Door Intlk Sw. The state of the Mailbox Door Interlock
If the harness is good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). If the problem contin- Switch is Low and switches to High when the Mailbox Door is opened.
ues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Y N
With the Front Cover closed, there is +0 VDC between P/J1033-1 on the Finisher
+5VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND on the Decurler PWB. and GND.
Y N Y N
Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). Go to the Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the
wires are good, replace the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch (PL 18.11). If the problem
Check the Decurler Exit Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Check the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch
and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the
Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Check the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and
the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Finisher
PWB (PL 18.4).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-23 11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP, 11-
11-302 Decurler Door Interlock Open RAP 11-303 Docking Interlock Open RAP
Decurler Door Interlock Open Failure. This status code is declared when the Decurler Front Docking Interlock Open failure. This status code is declared when the Mailbox is not properly
Cover is open. docked.

• Ensure that P/J1033 on the Finisher PWB, and P/J1018 on the Decurler Door Interlock • Ensure that P/J1028 on the Finisher PWB, P/J664 and P/J665 on the Docking Interlock
Switch are connected before beginning this RAP. Switches, P/J651 and P/J652 on the Decurler PWB are connected before beginning this
• Check the Front Cover for proper alignment. RAP.
• Verify that the Front Cover closes properly. • Check the Finisher/Mailbox for proper alignment.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 012-302 Decurler Door Intlk Sw. The state of the Decurler Door Interlock Enter dC330 012-303 Mailbox Docking INTLK Switches. The status of the Docking Inter-
Switch is Low and switches to High when the Decurler Door is opened. lock Switches is High and changes to Low when the Mailbox is undocked.
Y N Y N
With the Front Cover closed, there is +0 VDC between P/J1028-B6 on the Finisher With the Finisher/Mailbox docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J1028-B7 on the Fin-
PWB and GND. isher PWB and GND.
Y N Y N
Go to the Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the Disconnect P/J665 from the Docking Interlock Switch 2. With the Finisher/Mail-
wires are good, replace the Decurler Door Interlock Switch (PL 18.11). If the problem box docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J1028-B7 on the Finisher PWB and
continues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). If the problem continues, replace GND.
the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Y N
Disconnect P/J664 from the Mailbox Docking Interlock Switch 1. With the Fin-
Check the Decurler Door Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the isher/Mailbox docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J1028-B7 on the Fin-
switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace isher PWB and GND.
the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL Y N
18.4). Go to the Flag 10, Flag 11 and Flag 13 on BSD12.1. Check the wires for
an short circuit to ground. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB
Check the Decurler Door Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and (PL 18.4).
the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Finisher
PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Docking Interlock Switch 1 (PL 18.6).
Replace the Docking Interlock Switch 2 (PL 18.6).
Check the Docking Interlock Switches for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switches
are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB
(PL 18.4).
Check the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and
the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. Check that the Finisher/Mailbox is standing on an
even floor. Adjust Castors if necessary. If the problem continues, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL
18.11).

11-302 Decurler Door Interlock Open RAP, 11-303 8d-24 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP Y N
This status code is declared when the Decurler Cam Position Sensor did not energize within
the specified time (1400msec) after the Decurler Cam Clutch is energized. Go to Wire Net +24VDC-2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good,
Initial Actions
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the
Decurler PWB.
• Ensure that connectors P/J652, and P/J651 on the Decurler PWB, P/J1028 on the Fin-
Y N
isher PWB, and P/J656 on the Decurler Cam Sensor are seated correctly and there are
Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler
no obvious crimped or broken wires.
PWB (PL 18.6).
Procedure Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and
At Power On, the Mailbox Drive Belt is moving GND on the Decurler Control PWB.
Y N Y N
Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Drive Motor is Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and GND
rotating Y N
Y N Go to Wire Net +5VDC-1. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good,
+24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2 of the Mailbox Drive replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Motor
Y N Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and GND.
Switch Off the Power. Disconnect P/ P/J1021 from the Mailbox Drive Motor. Y N
Switch On the Power. +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/ Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
J1021-2.
Y N Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and GND
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. Y N
If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Go to Flag 4 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good,
Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10)
less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and GND.
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND on the Mailbox Y N
Drive Motor. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
wire is good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8).
Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND on
the Mailbox Drive Motor. The Entrance Rolls are rotating.
Y N Y N
Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11) Check the following parts for wear, damage, or slipping.
Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). • Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear (PL 18.8)
Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft and the drive
belt is properly tensioned. Enter dC330 012-011 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 130. The Decurler Motor rotates.
Y N
Enter dC330 012-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler Motor rotates.
Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND.
Y N
Y N
+24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the Decurler PWB.
Y N
+24 VDC is Measured between P/J1026-1 and GND on the Finisher PWB. Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8).
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-25 11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP
C
Enter dC330 012-012 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 220. The Decurler Motor rotates. 11-512 Simple Catch Tray (SCT) Full Stack RAP
Y N
Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. The Control Logic detected that the Simple Catch Tray is full.
Y N
Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Initial Actions
• Ensure that the Simple Catch Tray is empty
Enter dC330 012-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Decurler Motor rotates. • Ensure that connectors P/J1040 on the Finisher PWB, Double Plug P/J1080, and P/
Y N J1079 on the SCT Full Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or
Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. broken wires.
Y N
Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Procedure
Enter dC330 012-275 SCT Full Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-6 and DC-COM on the Finisher PWB.
Enter dC330 012-276 Decurler Cam Position Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the Reflec-
Y N
tor in and out of the sensor The Decurler Cam Position Sensor alternates between H and
L as the reflector is moved in and out of the sensor.
good, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3).
Y N
The Display is always L Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J652-2 and GND. Block the SCT Full Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes to L.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 8 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the
+5 VDC is measured between P/J1079-1 and P/J1079-3 on the SCT Full Sensor.
wire is good, replace the Decurler Cam Position Sensor (PL 18.7). If the prob-
Y N
lem continues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Y N
Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenets and check wires for an open or short circuit.
Y N
Go to Flag 12 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is
Go to Flag 1 on BSD12.4. Check the harness for an open or short circuit. If the har-
good, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). If the problem continues, replace
ness is good, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3).
Replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3).
Check the Full Stack Sensor for intermittent operation, If the problem continues, replace the
+5 VDC is Measured between P/J652-1 and P/J652-3 on the Decurler PWB.
SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3).
Y N
Go to Flag 7 on BSD12.6. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good,
replace the Decurler Cam Position Sensor (PL 18.7). If the problem continues, replace
the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Clean the Decurler Cam Position Sensor and the Decurler Cam Position Sensor Reflector.
Ensure that there are no obstructions between the Decurler Cam Position Sensor and the
Decurler Cam Position Sensor. If the problem continues, replace the Decurler Cam Position
Sensor (PL 18.7).

11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP, 11-512 Simple Catch Tray 8d-26 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com

Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 012-281 Bin 1 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out of Enter dC330 012-282 Bin 2 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out of
the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out of the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out of
the sensor. the sensor.
Y N Y N
Press Stop. +5VDC is measured between P/J1002-1 and DC COM on the Mailbox Press Stop. +5VDC is measured between P/J1002-2 and DC COM on the Mailbox
PWB. PWB.
Y N Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J1031-11 and DC COM on the Finisher PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J1031-10 and DC COM on the Finisher PWB.
Y N Y N
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Go to Flag 1 on BSD12.9 and check the wires for an open circuit. Go to Flag 2 on BSD12.9 and check the wires for an open circuit.
Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-27 11-911 Bin 1 Full Stack RAP, 11-912 Bin 2 Full Stack

Procedure Procedure
Y N Y N
PWB. PWB.
Y N Y N
Y N Y N

11-913 Bin 3 Full Stack RAP, 11-914 Bin 4 Full Stack 8d-28 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com

Procedure Procedure
Y N Y N
PWB. PWB.
Y N Y N
Y N Y N

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-29 11-915 Bin 5 Full Stack RAP, 11-916 Bin 6 Full Stack

Procedure Procedure
Y N Y N
PWB. PWB.
Y N Y N
Y N Y N

11-917 Bin 7 Full Stack RAP, 11-918 Bin 8 Full Stack 8d-30 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com

Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 012-289 Bin 9 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out of Enter dC330 012-290 Bin 10 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out
the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out of of the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out
the sensor. of the sensor.
Y N Y N
PWB. PWB.
Y N Y N
Y N Y N

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-31 11-919 Bin 9 Full Stack RAP, 11-920 Bin 10 Full
11-921 SCT Tray Full Stack RAP 11-922 Sorter Stacker Full RAP
The Control Logic detected that the SCT Tray is full. The Control Logic has determined that bin 10 is full while operating in the Stack Mode.

• Refer to BSD12.10 for the following procedure. Ensure that there are no obstructions in the Stacker area
• Ensure that the SCT Tray is empty
• Ensure that connectors P/J1040 on the Finisher PWB, Shorting Plug P/J1080, and P/ Procedure
J1079 on the SCT Full Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or
broken wires.
Go to 11-921 SCT Tray Full Stack RAP to check out the SCT Full Sensor for any malfunctions.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-275 SCT Full Sensor. Press Start. The display is H.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-6 and DC-COM on the Finisher PWB.
Y N
good, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3).
Block the SCT Full Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes to L.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J1079-1 and P/J1079-3 on the SCT Full Sensor.
Y N
Y N
Y N
Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenets and check wires for an open or short
circuit.
Check the wires between P/J44 on the Distribution PWB and P/J1026 on the
Finisher PWB. If the wires are OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 on BSD12.10. Check the harness for an open or a short cir-
cuit. If the harness is good, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3).
Go to Flag 4 and check for an open or short circuit. If the problem continues, replace the
Check the SCT Full Sensor for intermittent operation, If the problem continues, replace the

11-921 SCT Tray Full Stack RAP, 11-922 Sorter Stack- 8d-32 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
12-120 RAP Check the paper path for any obstructions that could prevent the sheet from entering
the Finisher Transport.
The Compiler Entrance Sensor did not detect the lead edge of a sheet of paper within a speci- Ensure that the Finisher Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Fin-
fied period of time after the lead edge of the same sheet was detected by the Decurler Exit isher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Sensor.
Enter dC330 012-020 Finisher Transport Motor. Press Start. The Finisher Transport
Initial Actions Rolls are rotating.
Refer to BSD12.7, BSD 12.5, and BSD 12.1 for the following procedure. Y N
The Finisher Drive Belt is moving.
Y N
The Finisher Transport Motor is rotating.
• Obstructions in the Finisher Transport paper path
Y N
• Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Finisher Transport paper path +24 VDC is measured from P/J1084-1 to P/J1084-2 of the Finisher
• Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Finisher Transport Rolls and the Exit Roll. Transport Motor.
• Ensure that connectors P/J1039 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1052 on the Compiler Y N
Entrance Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the
wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Procedure Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured from P/J1084-3 to GND.
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Compiler Entrance Sensor. Y N
Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the
The paper entered the Finisher Transport. wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Y N
The Finisher Gate is in the Compiler position. Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured from P/J1084-3 to GND.
Y N Y N
Enter dC330 012-071 Finisher Gate Solenoid Open. Press Start. The Fin- Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
isher Gate moved to the Compiler position.
Y N Replace the Finisher Transport Motor (PL 18.9).
+24 VDC is measured from P/J1081-A2 to GND.
Y N Ensure that the Finisher Transport Motor Pulley (PL 18.9) is fastened to the
+24 VDC is measured from P/J1042-16 on the Finisher PWB to motor shaft.
GND.
Y N Check the Finisher Drive Belt for slipping or damage.
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check that the gears/ pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls.
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. Ensure that the Finisher Entrance Baffle is correctly positioned and free from damage.
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping:
There is +24 VDC from P/J1042-18 to GND.
• Finisher Transport Rolls (PL 18.9)
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the
wires are good, replace the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). • Exit Roll (PL 18.14)
• Finisher Drive Belt (PL 18.9)
Ensure that the Finisher Gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid
and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate NOTE: The output of the Compiler Entrance Sensor is Low when the sensor is blocked, and
Solenoid (PL 18.11). If this does not resolve the problem, replace the Fin- High when the sensor is not blocked. Paper on the sensor moves the actuator away from the
isher PWB (PL 18.4). sensor, unblocking it.
Ensure that the Finisher Gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid and Enter dC330 012-120 Compiler Entrance Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Compiler
Entrance Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in
that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate and the
Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). and out of the sensor.
Y N
The display is always Low.
A B C D
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-33 12-120
D
Y N 12-121 RAP
Disconnect P/J1052. There is +5 VDC from J1052-1 to J1052-3.
Y N The Compiler Entrance Sensor does not detect the trail edge of a sheet of paper within a spec-
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1039-1 to P/J1039-3. ified period of time after the lead edge of the same sheet was detected.
Y N
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Initial Actions
Y N
Refer to BSD 12.1, BSD 12.5, and BSD 12.7 and for the following procedure.
Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open cir-
cuit. Check for the following:
• Obstructions in the Finisher paper path
• Obstructions in the Compiler Tray
Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. • Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Finisher Transport Rolls and the Entrance
Roll.
There is +5 VDC from J1052-2 to J1052-3. • Ensure that connectors P/J1039 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1052 on the Compiler
Y N Entrance Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Go to Flag 10 on BSD 12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is
good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Procedure
Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). If the problem continues, replace The trail edge of the paper is past the Compiler Entrance Sensor.
Enter dC330012-020 Finisher Transport Motor. Press Start. The Finisher Transport
Disconnect P/J1052. The display is High. Rolls are rotating.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 10 on BSD12.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is The Finisher Drive Belt is moving.
good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Y N
The Finisher Transport Motor is rotating.
Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). Y N
+24 VDC is measured from P/J1084-1 to P/J1084-2 of the Finisher
Check the actuator of the Compiler Entrance Sensor for binding as it moves in and out of the Transport Motor.
sensor. Y N
Check Flag 9 and Flag 10 on BSD12.7 for loose connectors or an intermittent short circuit. Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the
Check the paper path for scraps of paper or other obstructions. wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured from P/J1084-3 to GND.
• Finisher Transport Rolls (PL 18.9)
Y N
• Exit Roll (PL 18.14) wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
• Finisher Drive Belt (PL 18.9)
Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured from P/J1084-3 to GND.
Y N
good, replace the Finisher Transport Motor (PL 18.9).
Ensure that the Finisher Transport Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft.
Check the Compiler Drive Belt for proper tension or damage.

Check that the gears/ pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls.
The Exit Roll Belt is moving.

A
12-120, 12-121 8d-34 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
Y N Y N
Check the gears and pulleys. Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive
belts that would cause the copy to be slow to actuate the sensor.
• Lower Exit Chute (PL 18.14) Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14).
• Exit Roll Belt (PL 18.14)
• Compiler Drive Belt (PL 18.9)
NOTE: The output of the Compiler Enter Sensor is Low when the sensor is blocked, and High
when the sensor is not blocked. Paper on the sensor moves the actuator away from the sen-
sor, unblocking it.
Enter dC330 012-120 Compiler Entrance Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Compiler
Entrance Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in
and out of the sensor.
Y N
Y N
Y N
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1039-1 to P/J1039-3.
Y N
Y N
cuit.
There is +5 VDC from J1052-2 to J1052-3.

Y N
Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). If the problem continues, replace
Disconnect P/J1052. The display is High.

Y N
Go to Flag 10 on BSD12.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is
Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14).
Check the actuator for the Compiler Entrance Sensor for binding as it moves in and out of the
sensor. The actuator is binding.

A B
12-170 RAP Check the actuator for the Compiler Paper Sensor for binding as it moves in and out of
the sensor. The actuator is binding.
The Compiler Paper Sensor detects a sheet of paper present 250 ms. after Eject drive is initi- Y N
ated. Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies, or
slipping drive rolls that would cause the copy to be slow to actuate the sensor.
Initial Actions
Replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16).
Enter dC330 012-024 Eject Motor Forward. Press Start. The Eject Roll is rotating.
Y N
• Obstructions in the Finisher paper path
The Eject Motor is rotating.
• Obstructions in the Compiler Tray Y N
• Ensure that connectors P/J1035 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1048 on the Compiler Press Stop. Disconnect the Eject Motor Drive Belt. Press Start. The Eject Motor is
Paper Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. rotating.
Y N
Procedure Go to Flag 8 and Flag 9 on BSD 12.14. Check the wires for an open circuit or a
short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Eject Motor (PL 18.19).
There is a sheet of paper in the Compiler Tray.
If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Y N
Enter dC330 012-252 Compiler Paper Sensor.Press Start.Manually actuate the Compiler
Check the Eject Roll and Bearing (PL 18.19) for damage or contamination.
Paper Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves
in and out of the sensor. Check the following:
Y N
• Ensure that the Eject Motor Drive Belt PL 18.19 is clean and undamaged.
Y N • Ensure that the Pulley is fastened to the Exit Roll shaft (PL 18.19).
Disconnect P/J1048. There is +5 VDC from J1048-1 to J1048-3. • Check that the teeth in the Eject Motor pulley are clean and undamaged(PL 18.19).
Y N
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1035-10 to P/J1035-8. Check the Eject Clamp Pinch Rolls (PL 18.20) and Eject Roll PL 18.19 for glazing or contami-
Y N nation.
Y N
Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an
open circuit.

Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.11. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the
wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues,

Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.11. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire
is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16).

A B
12-170 8d-36 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
12-180 RAP 12-181 RAP
The Compiler Entrance Sensor detects a sheet of paper present in standby or at initialization. The Compiler Paper Sensor detects a sheet of paper present at power up or at Job Complete.

Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.7 for the following procedure. Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.11 for the following procedure.
Check the Finisher Transport paper path for uncleared jams or obstructions. If no obstruction or Check the Compiler Tray for uncleared jams or obstructions. If no obstruction or paper is found,
paper is found, continue with this RAP. continue with this RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 012-120 Compiler Entrance Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Compiler Enter dC330 012-252 Compiler Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Compiler
Entrance Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in Paper Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in
and out of the sensor. and out of the sensor.
Y N Y N
The display is always Low. The display is always Low.
Y N Y N
Disconnect P/J1052. There is +5 VDC from J1052-1 to J1052-3. Disconnect P/J1048. There is +5 VDC from J1048-1 to J1048-3.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1039-1 to P/J1039-3. +5 VDC is measured from P/J1035-10 to P/J1035-8.
Y N Y N
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open cir- Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open cir-
cuit. cuit.
Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 12.11. Check the harness for an open circuit.
There is +5 VDC from J1052-2 to J1052-3. There is +5 VDC from J1048-2 to J1048-3.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 10 on BSD 12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.11. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is
good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). If the problem continues, replace Replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace
the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Disconnect P/J1052. The display is High. Disconnect P/J1048. The display is High.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 10 on BSD12.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is Go to Flag 4 on BSD12.11. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is
good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). Replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16).
Check the Compiler Entrance Sensor Actuator for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. Check the actuator for the Compiler Paper Sensor for binding as it moves in and out of the sen-
sor. If the actuator is binding, replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-37 12-180 , 12-181
A
12-240 RAP Press Stop. Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-036 Compiler Tray Solenoid Down. Press
Start. The Compiler Tray Solenoid energizes.
The Control Logic does not detect one of the following conditions: Y N
• End Wall Open (H) +5 VDC, from the End Wall Open Sensor, within 300msec after the The solenoid is always in the energized position.
signal, End Wall Motor Open. Y N
• End Wall Open (L) +5 VDC, from the End Wall Open Sensor, within 300msec after the sig- Press Stop. There is + 24 VDC from P/J1041-2 to GND.
nal, End Wall Motor Close.
Y N
Initial Actions Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 12.11. Check the wires for an open circuit. If
Refer to BSD 12.1, BSD 12.11, and BSD 12.12 for the following procedure. the circuit is good, replace the Compiler Tray Solenoid (PL 18.15).
Procedure Press Start. There is less than 1.0 VDC from P/J1041-2 to GND.
Y N
NOTE: The output of the End Wall Open Sensor is Low when the sensor is blocked, and High Replace the Finisher PWB.
when the sensor is not blocked.
Check the alignment of the solenoid. Check for binding of the linkage. If the checks
Open the Stapler Door and cheat the interlock. Enter dC330 012-270 End Wall Open Sensor.
are good, replace the Compiler Tray Solenoid (PL 18.15).
Press Start.
Block and unblock the End Wall Open Sensor with a piece of paper. The display changes Disconnect P/J1082. The solenoid deenergizes.
from High to Low to High as the paper moves in and out of the sensor.
Y N
Y N
Replace the Compiler Tray Solenoid (PL 18.15).
Y N
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 12.11. Check the harness for a short circuit. If the circuit is good,
Disconnect P/J1046. There is +5 VDC from J1046-1 to J1046-3. replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Y N
Press Stop. Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-030 End Wall Motor Open. Press Start.
Y N
The End Wall moves to the open position.
Y N
Y N
The End Wall can be manually moved to the open position.
Y N
cuit.
Check for binding of the linkage, or damage to the End Wall.

Connect the DMM between P/J1083-1 (+) and P/J1083-2 (-). set the meter for negative
Peak Hold. Press Start. A pulse of -20 VDC or greater is recorded.
Y N
Go to Flag 12 and Flag 13 on BSD 12.12. Check the harness for an open circuit or a
short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Y N
Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.12. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is Replace the End Wall Motor (PL 18.15).
Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-031 End Wall Motor Close. Press Start. The End Wall
Replace the End Wall Open Sensor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace the
moves to the closed position.
Y N
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). If the problem persists, replace the End Wall Motor
(PL 18.15).
Y N
Go to Flag 9 on BSD12.12. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is
Go to Flag 8, Flag 9, Flag 12, and Flag 13 on BSD 12.12. Check the circuit for an intermittent
connection.
Replace the End Wall Open Sensor (PL 18.16).
A
manuals4you.com
12-243 RAP 12-244 RAP
The Staple Ready Sensor does not detect the Staple sheet in the Ready position just prior to The Staple Head Home Sensor does not detect the Stapler in the home position within 600 ms
stapling, or within 13 dummy staplings at Stapler initialization. from the start of Stapler Motor reverse.

Refer to BSD 12.13 for the following procedure: Refer to BSD 12.13 for the following procedure:
• Ensure that connector P/J1092 is seated correctly to the Stapler Assembly, that connec- • Ensure that connector P/J1092 is seated correctly to the Stapler Assembly, that connec-
tor P/J1044 is seated correctly to the Finisher PWB and that there are no obvious tor P/J1044 is seated correctly to the Finisher PWB and that there are no obvious
crimped or broken wires on either connector. crimped or broken wires on either connector.
• Ensure that the Staple Cartridge contains staples and that it is correctly installed in the • Check for staple jams.
Stapler Assembly.
Procedure
Procedure Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Staple Cartridge. Push the
Remove, then reinstall, the Staple Cartridge. Enter dC330 012-273 Staple Ready Sensor. Staple Assembly toward the rear of the Finisher until the semicircular cam on the front of the
Press Start. The display indicates Low. assembly is facing forward. Rotate the cam in a clockwise direction until the flat portion of the
Y N cam is facing up. Enter dC330 012-273 Staple Ready Sensor. Press Start. The display indi-
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.13. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. cates High.
If the wires are good, go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.13. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the Y N
wire is good, replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). Disconnect P/J1092 from the Stapler. The display indicates High.
Y N
The Stapler Assembly appears to be operating correctly. If the problem continues, replace the Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.13. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is
Staple Cartridge and test the system. If the problem continues, replace the Stapler Assembly good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
(PL 18.17).
Replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17).
Rotate the cam in a clockwise direction until the flat portion of the cam is facing down. The
display changes to Low.
Y N
Disconnect P/J1092 from the Stapler. +5 VDC is measured between J1092-9 and
GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.13. Check the wires for an open circuit or short circuit to GND. If
the wires are good, replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17).
Replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB
(PL 18.4).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-39 12-243, 12-244
A B C
12-245 RAP Go to Flag 10 on BSD 12.12. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If
the wires are good, replace the Stapler Position Motor (PL 18.17). If the problem
This fault is declared when either of the following occur: continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
• The Stapler is not detected at the Front Corner position within 2000msec (1000ms if shift-
ing from Front Straight to Front Corner), after the Stapler Position Motor was energized to Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Ensure that the Stapler is in the front
move the Stapler to the front. position and that the Stapler Front Corner Sensor is blocked (manually move the Stapler
toward the front if necessary). Enter dC330 012-269 Stapler Front Corner Sensor. Press
• The Stapler remains at the Front Corner position xxx msec after Stapler Position Motor
On Start. The display indicates High.
Y N
Initial Actions Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is
Refer to BSD 12.12 for the following procedure. good, replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues,
Move the Stapler to the rear, to unblock the Stapler Front Corner Sensor. The display
• Obstructions in the Stapler Rail Assembly (PL 18.18) that would prevent movement of the changes to Low.
Stapler Y N
• Bent or out of position End Wall Disconnect P/J1057 from the Stapler Front Corner Sensor. +5 VDC is measured
• Bent or out of position Compiler Tray between J1057-1 and J1057-3.
Y N
• Clean the Stapler Front Corner Sensor
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.12. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit
• Ensure that connectors P/J1043 and P/J1035 on the Finisher PWB, P/J1089 on the Sta- to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
pler Position Motor, and P/J1057 on the Stapler Front Corner Sensor and seated cor-
rectly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good,
replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues,
Procedure replace the Finisher PWB.
Open the Stapler Cover. The Stapler is in the home position (at the front of the Fin-
isher). Perform the following:
• Manually move the Stapler toward the front and rear of the Finisher to ensure that it
Y N
moves smoothly and that there are no obstructions in the Stapler travel. Correct any
NOTE: In the following step, dC330 [12-076] should move the Stapler toward the front of problems found.
the Finisher in small steps. Each time Start is pressed, the Stapler should move. • Replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18).
Cheat the Stapler Door Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 012-030 End Wall Motor Open. • If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Press Start. Press Clear then enter 012-036 Compiler Tray Solenoid Down. Press Start.
Press Clear then enter 012-076 Staple Move Motor Top Front. Press Start. The Stapler NOTE: In the following step, dC330 [12-078] should move the Stapler toward the rear of the
Position Motor moves the Stapler toward the front of the Finisher each time the Finisher in small steps. Each time Start is pressed, the Stapler should move.
Start button is pressed. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Cheat the Stapler Door Interlock Switch.
Y N
Enter dC330 012-030 End Wall Motor Open. Press Start. Press Clear then enter 012-036
Check the Stapler Drive Belt (PL 18.17), the Stapler Rail Belt (PL 18.18), and Pulleys Compiler Tray Solenoid Down. Press Start. Press Clear then enter 012-078 Staple Move
to ensure they are in place and are not loose or broken. The Belts and Pulleys are
Motor Top Rear. Press Start. The Stapler Position Motor moves the Stapler toward the
OK.
rear of the Finisher each time the Start button is pressed.
Y N Y N
Replace any defective components as required. Check the Stapler Drive Belt (PL 18.17), the Stapler Rail Belt (PL 18.18), and Pulleys to
ensure they are in place and are not loose or broken. The Belts and Pulleys are OK.
Remove the IOT Connector Cover (REP 15.3.8). +24 VDC is measured from P/ Y N
J1089-2 to GND and from P/J1089-5 to GND.
Replace any defective components as required.
Y N
Go to Flag 11 on BSD 12.12. Check for an open circuit. If the problem contin- Remove the IOT Connector Cover (REP 15.3.8). +24 VDC is measured from P/J1089-
ues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
2 to GND and from P/J1089-5 to GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 11 on BSD 12.12. Check for an open circuit.
A B C D E
manuals4you.com
D E
Go to Flag 10 on BSD 12.12. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the 12-246 RAP
wires are good, replace the Stapler Position Motor (PL 18.17). If the problem continues,
replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). This fault is caused by one of the following conditions:
• During Initialization, the Control Logic does not detect the Stacker Offset Home Sensor in
Ensure that the Stapler is in the front position and that the Stapler Front Corner Sensor is the home position (High) within 500ms of the start of Offset Home recovery operation.
blocked (manually move the Stapler toward the front if necessary). Enter dC330 012-269 Sta- • During Set Eject, the Control Logic does not detect the Stacker Offset Home Sensor in
pler Front Corner Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates High.
the offset position (Low) within 300ms from the start of the offset cycle.
Y N
• During Set Eject, the Control Logic does not detect the Stacker Offset Home Sensor in
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good,
replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the the home position (High) within 300ms of the command to return to the home position.
Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.14 for this procedure.
Move the Stapler to the rear, to unblock the Stapler Front Corner Sensor. The display
changes to Low.
Y N
Procedure
Disconnect P/J1057 from the Stapler Front Corner Sensor. +5 VDC is measured Enter dC330 012-027 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor F/R. Press Start. The Eject Roll and Clamp
between J1057-1 and J1057-3. move to the offset position and back to home.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.12. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to Switch off the power. Remove the rear covers. Manually rotate the shaft of the Eject
GND. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) clockwise. The shaft moves freely.
Y N
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace Disassemble the gear cluster (PL 18.21) connected to the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor.
the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher Manually rotate the motor shaft The shaft moves freely.
PWB. Y N
Replace the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21).
• Manually move the Stapler toward the front and rear of the Finisher to ensure that it Check the following:
moves smoothly and that there are no obstructions in the Stapler travel. Correct any prob- • Check the gears for damage or dirt that may cause binding
lems found. • Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage or binding.
• Replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). • Check the Pinch Roll/Compiler Cover/Set Separator area for binding (PL
• If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). 18.20).
• Ensure that the Offset Lever and Cam Follower (PL 18.19) are correctly
installed, and that the Cam follower is positioned in the spiral groove in the Off-
set Cam (PL 18.21).
The Eject Shaft moves front/rear as the motor shaft is rotated

Y N
• Check the gears for damage or dirt that may cause binding
• Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage or binding.
• Check the Pinch Roll/Compiler Cover/Set Separator area for binding (PL
18.20).
set Cam (PL 18.21).
Go to Flag 10 and Flag 11 on BSD 12.14. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short
circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21).
A
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-41 12-245 , 12-246
A
NOTE: The output of the Stacker Offset Home Sensor is Low when the sensor is blocked, and 12-248 RAP
High when the sensor is not blocked.
The Stapler Front Straight Sensor does not detect the presence of the Stapler within 1200
Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-277 Offset Home Sensor. Press Start. Manually rotate
msec. after the Stapler Position Motor was energized to move the Stapler.
the shaft of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) in the clockwise direction (as viewed from
the rear). The display changes from High to Low as the motor shaft rotates.
Y N
Initial Actions
Unfasten the bracket for the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (refer to REP 15.2.18). Block Refer to BSD 12.12 for the following procedure.
and unblock the sensor with a sheet of paper The display changes from High to Low
to High as the sensor is blocked and unblocked. Check the following:
Y N
The display is always Low. • Obstructions in the Stapler Rail Assembly (PL 18.18) that would prevent movement of the
Y N Stapler
Disconnect P/J1051. There is +5 VDC from J1051-1 to J1051-3. • Bent or out of position End Wall
Y N • Bent or out of position Compiler Tray
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1037-7 to P/J1037-5. • Clean the Stapler Front Straight Sensor
Y N
• Ensure that connector P/J1035 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1059 on the Stapler Front
Straight Sensor and seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Y N
open circuit. Procedure
Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Manually move the Stapler toward the rear
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). of the Finisher until it has cleared the Stapler Front Straight Sensor and the sensor is not
blocked. Enter dC330 012-278 Stapler Front Straight Sensor. Press Start. The display indi-
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. cates Low.
Y N
There is +5 VDC from J1051-2 to J1051-3. Go to Flag 3 and Flag 5 on BSD 12.12. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short cir-
Y N cuit to GND. If the wires are good, go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for an open
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Front Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). If the
wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB.
Replace the Offset Home Sensor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues, replace Block the Stapler Front Straight Sensor. The display changes to High.
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good,
Disconnect P/J1051. The display is High. replace the Stapler Front Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the
Y N Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Go to Flag 2 on BSD12.14. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the
wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Perform the following:
Replace the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (PL 18.19). moves smoothly and that there are no obstructions in the Stapler travel. Correct any prob-
lems found.
Check the actuator on the Offset Cam (PL 18.21) for damage. Ensure that the Sensor is
• Replace the Stapler Front Straight Sensor (PL 18.18).
installed so that the actuator passes through the center of the sensor.
• If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.14. Check the wiring for a loose connection or an intermit-
tent short circuit.

12-246 , 12-248 8d-42 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
12-249 RAP 12-251 RAP
The Stapler Rear Straight Sensor does not detect the presence of the Stapler within 1600 When either of the following occur:
msec. after the Stapler Position Motor was energized to move the Stapler. • The Eject Paddle Home Sensor does not detect the Eject Paddle in the Home position
within 400msec of the signal, Eject Paddle Motor On.
Initial Actions • The Eject Paddle remains at the Home position 200msec after the signal, Eject Paddle
Refer to BSD 12.12 for the following procedure. Motor On.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.14 for the following procedure
• Obstructions in the Stapler Rail Assembly (PL 18.18) that would prevent movement of the
Stapler Procedure
• Bent or out of position End Wall Enter dC330 012-053 Eject Paddle Motor. Press Start. The Eject Paddle rotates.
• Bent or out of position Compiler Tray Y N
• Clean the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor Remove the Belt from the Eject Paddle Motor (PL 18.19). Enter dC330 012-053 Eject
Paddle Motor. Press Start. The Eject Paddle Motor rotates.
• Ensure that connector P/J1035 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1060 on the Stapler Rear
Y N
Straight Sensor and seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Go to Flag 12 and Flag 13 on BSD 12.14. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the
wires are good, replace the Eject Paddle Motor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues,
Procedure replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Manually move the Stapler to the rear of
the Finisher until it has cleared the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor and the sensor is not blocked. Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage, binding or misalignment
Enter dC330 012-279 Stapler Rear Straight Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates
Low. NOTE: The output of the Eject Paddle Home Sensor is Low when the sensor is blocked, and
Y N High when the sensor is not blocked.
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 5 on BSD 12.12. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short cir-
Enter dC330 012-241 Eject Paddle Home Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Eject
cuit to GND. If the wires are good, go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for an open
Paddle Home Sensor. The display changes from High to Low to High as the actuator
circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). If the prob-
moves in and out of the sensor.
lem continues, replace the Finisher PWB.
Y N
Block the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor. The display changes to High.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, Y N
replace the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the
Y N
Perform the following: Y N
moves smoothly and that there are no obstructions in the Stapler travel. Correct any prob- cuit.
lems found.
• Replace the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
• If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).

Y N
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-43 12-249 , 12-251
A B C
Replace the Eject Paddle Home Sensor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues, 12-253 RAP
When one of the following occur:
Disconnect P/J1055. The display is High. • The Tamper Home Sensor detects that the Tamper remained in the Home position
Y N 800msec after Tamper Motor On.
Go to Flag 6 on BSD12.14. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is • The Tamper is not detected in the Home position after the Tamper cycle is complete.
Initial Actions
Replace the Eject Paddle Home Sensor (PL 18.19). NOTE: It is much easier to access the Tamper components if the Stacker Assembly is
removed. Refer to REP 15.2.2 for this procedure.
Check the actuator for the Eject Paddle Home Sensor for binding as it moves in and out of the
sensor. Ensure that the actuator is secured to the shaft. Refer to BSD 12.1 and 12.11 for the following procedure.
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 12.14. Check for an intermittent short circuit or loose connec-
tions. If the problem continues, replace the Eject Paddle Home Sensor (PL 18.19). Procedure
CAUTION
Do not continue to press the Start button after the Tamper reaches either the fully-forward or
fully-rearward position.
Push the Tamper towards the rear of the Finisher. Enter dC330 012-060 Tamper Motor Low
Front. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward the front each time the Start button is
pressed.
Y N
There is 24 VDC from P/J1087- 3 to GND and from P/J1087-6 to GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires
are good, Replace the Tamper Motor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace The
Enter dC330 012-062 Tamper Motor Low Rear. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward the
rear each time the Start button is pressed.
Y N
Enter dC330 012-061 Tamper Motor Top Front. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward the
front each time the Start button is pressed.
Y N
Enter dC330 012-063 Tamper Motor Top Rear. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward the
rear approximately 30-50 mm each time the Start button is pressed.
Y N
A
12-251 , 12-253 8d-44 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A
Enter dC330 012-064 Tamper Motor Middle Front. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward 12-254 RAP
the front each time the Start button is pressed.
Y N This fault is declared if one of the following occurs:
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires • The Stack Height Sensor does not detect the Tray descending, upon initialization.
are good, Replace the Tamper Motor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace The • The Stack Height Sensor does not detect the Tray ascending within 5000msec from the
Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). start of tray-ascend.
Enter dC330 012-065 Tamper Motor Middle Rear. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward Initial Actions
the rear each time the Start button is pressed. Refer to BSD 12.1 and 12.15 for the following procedure
Y N
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires Procedure
are good, Replace the Tamper Motor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace the
Remove the Front and Rear Lower Covers. Manually rotate the Stacker Motor shaft counter-
clockwise until the Stacker Tray is at the top of its range of travel. Enter dC330 012-041 Stacker
Motor Down and press Start. The Stacker Tray moves down.
Enter dC330 012-265 Tamper Home Sensor. Press Start. Push the Tamper to the rear of the
Compiler Tray. The display is High. Y N
Remove the Stacker Motor Belt. Enter dC330 012-041 Stacker Motor Down and press
Y N
The Actuator is blocking the Tamper Home sensor. Start. The Stacker Motor rotates.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 15 and Flag 16 on BSD 12.15 Check for an open circuit or a short to
Check that the Tamper, Belt, Sensor, and Motor are correctly mounted (PL 18.16).
GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Motor (PL 18.26) If the problem con-
Disconnect P/J1045. The display is High. tinues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Y N
Ensure that the gears in the Stacker Motor Assembly are installed correctly, and are free
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.11. Check for a short circuit. If the wire is good, replace the
from damage.
Ensure that the Front and Rear Stacker Tray Drive Belts are installed correctly (refer to
Replace the Tamper Home Sensor (PL 18.16). REP 15.2.9).
Enter dC330 012-250 Stack Height Sensor. Press Start. The display is High.
Push the Tamper toward the front. The display changes to Low
Y N Y N
Disconnect P/J1045. There is +5 VDC from J1045-1 to J1045-3. Remove the Compiler Cover Sensor (REP 15.2.22). Check that the Actuator is positioned
correctly, and is blocking the sensor.
Y N
If the actuator is functioning correctly, Disconnect P/J1073. The display changes to
High.
Y N
Y N
Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.15. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good,
Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit.
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20).
Raise the Actuator. The display changes to Low.

Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit Y N
Y N
Replace the Tamper Home Sensor (PL 18.16).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.11. Check the circuit of the Tamper Home Sensor for loose Y N
connections or an intermittent short circuit.
Y N
A B C
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-45 12-253 , 12-254
A B C
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. 12-255 RAP
There is +5 VDC from J1073-2 to J1073-3. The Stacker Upper Limit Sensor detects the Stacker Tray at the upper limit during ascension,
Y N or does not detect a change of state during descension
good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Initial Actions
Refer to BSDs 12.1 and 12.15 for the following procedure.
Replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20). If the problem continues, replace the Fin-
isher PWB (PL 18.4).
Procedure
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.15. Check for loose connections or an intermittent short cir- Remove the Rear Lower Cover. The Stacker Upper Limit Sensor is blocked by the Actua-
cuit to GND. If the problem continues, replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20). tor.
Y N
Enter dC330 012-259 Stacker Upper Limit Sensor.Press Start. Manually actuate the
Stacker Upper Limit Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low.
Y N
Y N
Y N
Y N
Y N
open circuit.
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 7 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open cir-
cuit.

Y N
Replace the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor (PL 18.27). If the problem continues,

Y N
Go to Flag 4 and Flag 7 on BSD12.15. Check the wire for a short circuit to
GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Replace the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor (PL 18.27).
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 12.15. Check for a loose connection or an intermittent
short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor (PL
18.27).
Enter dC330 012-041 Stacker Motor Down and press Start. The Stacker Tray moves down.

12-254, 12-255 8d-46 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Y N 12-256 RAP
Remove the Stacker Motor Belt. Enter dC330012-041 Stacker Motor Down and press
Start. The Stacker Motor rotates. The Stacker Lower Limit Sensor detects the Stacker Tray at the lower limit during ascension, or
Y N does not detect a change of state during ascension.
GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Motor (PL 18.26) If the problem con- Initial Actions
tinues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Refer to BSD 12.1 and 12.15 for the following procedure
from damage. Procedure
Ensure that the Front and Rear Stacker Tray Drive Belts are installed correctly (refer to Remove the Rear Lower Cover. The Stacker Lower Limit Sensor is blocked by the Actua-
REP 15.2.9). tor.
Y N
The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 3, Flag 4, Flag 7, Flag 15, and Flag 16 on Enter dC330 012-260 Stacker Lower Limit Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the
BSD 12.15. Check the circuits of the Stacker Motor and the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor for a Stacker Lower Limit Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low.
loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND. Y N
Y N
Y N
Y N
Y N
open circuit.
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 7 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open cir-
cuit.

Y N
Replace the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor (PL 18.27). If the problem continues,

Y N
Go to Flag 6 and Flag 7 on BSD12.15. Check the wire for a short circuit to
GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Replace the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor (PL 18.27).
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 12.15. Check for a loose connection or an intermittent
short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor (PL
18.27).
Enter dC330 012-040 Stacker Motor Up and press Start. The Stacker Tray moves up.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-47 12-255, 12-256
Y N 12-264 RAP
Remove the Stacker Motor Belt. Enter dC330 012-040 Stacker Motor Up and press
Start. The Stacker Motor rotates. The Eject Clamp Sensor does not detect the Eject Clamp in the open position within 500msec
Y N from the start of Eject Roll Up.
GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Motor (PL 18.26) If the problem con- Initial Actions
tinues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.14 for the following procedure
from damage. Procedure
Ensure that the Front and Rear Stacker Tray Drive Belts are installed correctly (refer to Enter dC330 012-026 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor Up/Down. Press Start. The Eject Clamp
REP 15.2.9). opens and/or closes.
Y N
The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 5, Flag 6, Flag 7, Flag 15, and Flag 16 on Switch off the power. Remove the rear covers. Manually rotate the shaft of the Eject
BSD 12.15. Check the circuits of the Stacker Motor and the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor for a Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) counterclockwise. The shaft moves freely.
loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND. Y N
Disassemble the gear cluster (PL 18.21) connected to the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor.
Manually rotate the motor shaft The shaft moves freely.
Y N

18.20).
set Cam (PL 18.21).
The Eject Clamp opens and/or closes as the motor shaft is rotated
Y N
18.20).
Go to Flag 10 and Flag 11 on BSD 12.14. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short
circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21).
Remove the rear covers. Enter dC330 012-240 Eject Clamp Sensor. Press Start. Manually
rotate the shaft of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) counterclockwise. The display
changes from High to Low as the motor shaft is rotated.
Y N
The display is a constant Low.
Y N
A B
12-256, 12-264 8d-48 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B
Y N 12-265 RAP
Y N The Eject Clamp Sensor does not detect the Eject Clamp in the closed position within
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. 500msec from the start of Eject Roll Down.
Y N
Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open cir- Initial Actions
cuit.

Procedure
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 7 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. Enter dC330 012-026 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor Up/Down. Press Start. The Eject Clamp
opens and/or closes.
There is +5 VDC from J1054-2 to J1054-3. Y N
Y N Switch off the power. Remove the rear covers. Manually rotate the shaft of the Eject
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) counterclockwise. The shaft moves freely.
good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Y N
Disassemble the gear cluster (PL 18.21) connected to the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor.
Replace the Eject Clamp Sensor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues, replace the Manually rotate the motor shaft The shaft moves freely.
Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Y N
Y N Check the following:
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.14. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is • Check the gears for damage or dirt that may cause binding
good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) • Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage or binding.
Replace the Eject Clamp Sensor (PL 18.19).
18.20).
The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 3, Flag 4, Flag 7, Flag 10, and Flag 11 on • Ensure that the Offset Lever and Cam Follower (PL 18.19) are correctly
BSD 12.14. Check the circuits of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) and the Eject Clamp installed, and that the Cam follower is positioned in the spiral groove in the Off-
Sensor (PL 18.19) for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND set Cam (PL 18.21).
The Eject Clamp opens and/or closes as the motor shaft is rotated
Y N
18.20).
Go to Go to Flag 10 and Flag 11 on BSD 12.14. Check the wires for an open circuit or a
short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL
18.21).
Remove the rear covers. Enter dC330 012-240 Eject Clamp Sensor. Press Start. Manually
rotate the shaft of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) counterclockwise. The display
changes from High to Low as the motor shaft is rotated.
Y N
The display is a constant Low.
Y N
A B
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-49 12-264, 12-265
A B
Y N 12-266 RAP
Y N The Compiler Cover Safety Switch is closed within 60msec since the completion of Eject Roll
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Up.
Y N
Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open cir- Initial Actions
cuit.
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Ensure that the Compiler Cover Moves freely.
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 7 on 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit.
Procedure
There is +5 VDC from J1054-2 to J1054-3. Enter dC330 012-306 Compiler Cover Safety Sw. Press Start. The display is Low.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly. The actuator on the Compiler cover presses
good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) down on the metal leaf of the Compiler Safety Switch.
Y N
Replace the Eject Clamp Sensor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues, replace the There is 24 VDC from J1099-2 to GND.
Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Y N
Y N Disconnect P/J1099. There is 24 VDC from J1099-2 to GND.
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.14. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is Y N
good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15).
Replace the Eject Clamp Sensor (PL 18.19). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.2. Check for a short circuit between the two
wires. If the wires are OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 3, Flag 4, Flag 10, and Flag 11 on BSD
12.14. Check the circuits of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) and the Eject Clamp Sen- Check for damage or incorrect installation of the Compiler Cover (REP 15.2.22). Ensure
sor (PL 18.19) for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND. that the metal leaf of the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15) is not bent.
The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.2. Check the circuit for
loose connections. Ensure that the Compiler cover is correctly installed. If the problem per-
sists replace the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15).

12-265, 12-266 8d-50 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
12-302 RAP 12-303 RAP
The Compiler Cover Interlock Switch detects the Compiler Cover open. The Compiler Cover was detected in the up position during the period between Eject Roll
Down and Eject Roll Up.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.3 for the following procedure. Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.2 for this procedure.
Ensure that the Compiler Cover moves freely.
Procedure
Procedure Enter dC330 012-306 Compiler Cover Safety Sw. Press Start. Press down on the Compiler
Enter dC330012-300 Compiler Cover Intlk Sw. Press Start. Raise and lower the Compiler cover. The display changes from Low to High.
Cover. The display changes from Low to High to Low. Y N
Y N Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly. The actuator on the Compiler cover presses
The display is always Low. down on the metal leaf of the Compiler Safety Switch.
Y N Y N
There is less than 1.0 VDC from P/J1033-5 to GND. There is 24 VDC from J1099-2 to GND.
Y N Y N
Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 12.3. Check for an open circuit. If the problem Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
persists, replace the Compiler Cover Interlock Switch (PL 18.15).
Disconnect P/J1099. There is 24 VDC from J1099-2 to GND.
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Y N
Replace the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15).
Disconnect P/J1098. Enter dC330 012-300 Compiler Cover Intlk Sw. The display is
High. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK,
Y N replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.3. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good,
replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check for damage or incorrect installation of the Compiler Cover (REP 15.2.22). Ensure
that the metal leaf of the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15) is not bent.
Replace the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15).
The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.2. Check the circuit for
The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 12.3. Check for a loose con- loose connections. Ensure that the Compiler cover is correctly installed. If the problem per-
nection. If the problem persists, replace the Compiler Cover Interlock Switch (PL 18.15). sists replace the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-51 12-302, 12-303
12-305 RAP 12-306 RAP
The Stacker Tray could not be lowered to the correct height, relative to the ejected sheets, The Stapler Door Interlock Switch detects the Stapler Door open.
within 250msec during the height adjustment operation.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions Refer to BSD 12.3 for the following procedure.
Ensure that the Stapler Door is closed. Check for damage to the actuator, or an incorrectly
Check that the actuator for the Stack Height Sensor is free to move. installed door. If the fault remains when the door is closed, continue with this RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 012-250 Stack Height Sensor. Press Start. The display is High. Close the Stapler Door. Enter dC330 012-304 Staple Door INTLK Switch. Press Start. The
Y N display is Low.
Remove the Compiler Cover (REP 15.2.22). Check that the Actuator is positioned cor- Y N
rectly, and is blocking the sensor. Open the Stapler Door. Use the Interlock Cheater to actuate the Interlock Switch. The
If the actuator is functioning correctly, Disconnect P/J1073. The display changes to display is Low.
High. Y N
Y N There is +5 VDC from P/J1033-3 to GND.
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.15. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, Y N
replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 12.3. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are
good, replace the Stapler Door Interlock Switch (PL 18.11).
Raise the Actuator. The display changes to Low.
Y N Check the Stapler Door (PL 18.2) for damage.
Y N Open the Stapler Door. The display is High.
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1039-10 to P/J1039-8. Y N
Y N There is less than 1 VDC from P/J1033-5 to GND.
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N
Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 12.3. Check for a short circuit. If the wires are good,
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). replace the Stapler Door Interlock Switch (PL 18.11)
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. The problem may be intermittent. Check the Stapler Door for warping or damage. Ensure that
the actuator lines up with the switch.
There is +5 VDC from J1073-2 to J1073-3. Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 12.3. Check for loose connections or an intermittent short cir-
Y N cuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stapler Door Interlock Switch (PL 18.11)
Replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20). If the problem continues, replace the Fin-
isher PWB (PL 18.4).
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.15. Check for loose connections or an intermittent short cir-
cuit to GND. If the problem continues, replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20).

12-305, 12-306 8d-52 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
12-400/12-538 RAP 12-531 RAP
12-400: The Low Staple Sensor detects the Stapler is nearly empty. This fault is declared if Control Logic detects more than 100 stapled sets in the Stacker Tray.
12-538: The Stapler is empty. This fault is declared if 30 sets are stapled after 12-400 is NOTE: The actual number of stapled sets allowed in the Stacker is determined by NVM loca-
declared. tion 790-032. a value of 0 (default) allows 100 sets to accumulate before declaring the fault. A
value of 1 limits the number of sets to 60.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure Ensure that the Stacker Tray is empty. If the fault is declared with an empty Stacker Tray, con-
There are at least three sheets of staples in the Staple Cartridge. tinue with this RAP.
Y N
Replace the Staples. Procedure
Enter dC330 012-253 Stacker Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Stacker Paper
Enter dC330 012-272 Low Staple Switch. Press Start. The display is Low.
Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in and out
Y N
of the sensor.
There is less than 1 VDC from P/J1044-7 to GND.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 3 on BSD 12.13. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is good, Replace The display is always Low.
the Stapler (PL 18.17). Y N
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Y N
+5 VDC is measured from P/J1038 -1 to P/J1038-3.
Y N
The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 12.13. Check for a loose connection. If
the wire is good, Check for damage to the Staple Cartridge. if the problem persists, replace the +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2.
Y N
Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17).
cuit.

Y N
Replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27). If the problem continues, replace the

Y N
Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.15. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is
Replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27).
The problem may be intermittent. Remove the Stacker Tray Bottom Cover. Check the actuator
of the Stacker Paper Sensor for damage or binding.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-53 12-400/12-538, 12-531
If the actuator is OK, go to Flag 8 and Flag 9 on BSD 12.15. Check for a loose connection or an 12-536 RAP
intermittent short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27).
The Staple Cartridge Set Switch does not detect the presence of a Staple Cartridge.
Initial Actions

• A loaded Staple Cartridge is installed in the Stapler.
• Connectors P/J1044 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1092 on the Stapler are seated cor-
rectly, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-274 Cartridge Set Switch. Press Start. The display is Low.
Y N
There is less than 1 VDC from P/J1044-8 to GND.
Y N
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.13. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the
The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.13. Check for a loose connection. If
the wire is good, Check for damage to the Staple Cartridge. if the problem persists, replace the

12-531, 12-536 8d-54 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
12-537 RAP 12-570 RAP
Control Logic does not detect the signal Staple Head Home (L) within 450msec since the start This fault is declared if one of the following occur:
of Staple Head Close operation. • Stacker Full (H) is detected during the Stacker Tray height adjustment (descending).
• Stacker Full (Mixed Size) (H) is detected during the Stacker Tray height adjustment
Initial Actions (descending) while ejecting mixed-size sets.
Refer to BSD 12.13 for the following procedure: • A mixed-size set is ejected after Stacker Full (Mixed Size) (H) is detected.
• Ensure that connector P/J1092 is seated correctly to the Stapler Assembly, that connec-
Initial Actions
tor P/J1044 is seated correctly to the Finisher PWB and that there are no obvious Refer to BSD 12.15 for the following procedure.
crimped or broken wires on either connector.
Ensure that the Stacker Tray is empty. If the fault is declared with an empty Stacker Tray, pro-
• Check for staple jams.
ceed with this RAP.
Procedure
Procedure
Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Staple Cartridge. Push the
Enter dC330 012-253 Stacker Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Stacker Paper
Staple Assembly toward the rear of the Finisher until the semicircular cam on the front of the
Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in and out
assembly is facing forward. Manually rotate the cam in a clockwise direction until the flat por-
of the sensor.
tion of the cam is facing up. Enter dC330 012-273 Staple Ready Sensor. The display indi-
Y N
cates High.
Y N
Y N
Disconnect P/J1092 from the Stapler. The display indicates High.
Y N Disconnect P/J1069. There is +5 VDC from J1069-1 to J1069-3.
Y N
good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). +5 VDC is measured from P/J1038 -1 to P/J1038-3.
Y N
Replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17).
Y N
Rotate the cam in a clockwise direction until the flat portion of the cam is facing down. The Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open cir-
cuit.
display changes to Low.
Y N
Disconnect P/J1092 from the Stapler. +5 VDC is measured between J1092-9 and
GND.
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.13. Check the wires for an open circuit or short circuit to GND. If Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is
the wires are good, replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17).
Replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB Replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27). If the problem continues, replace the
(PL 18.4).

Y N
Replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27).
Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-210 Stacker Full Sensor. Press Start. The display is
Low.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-55 12-537, 12-570
Y N 12-571 RAP
Go to Flag 10, Flag 11 and Flag 14 on BSD 12.15. Check for an open circuit. If the wires
are good, replace the Stacker Full (Mixed Size) Sensor (PL 18.27). Control Logic detected the signal Stacker Full (Mixed Set) (H) while mixed-size sets were
present in the Stacker Tray.
Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-212 Stacker Full (Mixed Sets) Sensor. Press Start. The
display is Low. Initial Actions
Y N
are good, replace the Stacker Full Sensor (PL 18.27). Ensure that the Stacker Tray is empty. If the fault is declared with an empty Stacker Tray, pro-
ceed with this RAP.
The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 8, Flag 9,Flag 10, Flag 11, Flag 12, Flag 13,
and Flag 14 on BSD 12.15. Check the circuits of the Stacker Sensor s for a loose connection or
an intermittent short circuit to GND Procedure
Enter dC330 012-253 Stacker Paper Sensor. Press Start. The display is Low.
Y N
Go to Flag 8 and Flag 9 on BSD 12.15. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are good,
replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27).
Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-210 Stacker Full Sensor. Press Start. The display is
Low.
Y N
are good, replace the Stacker Full (Mixed Size) Sensor (PL 18.27).
The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 8, Flag 9, Flag 10, Flag 11, and Flag 14 on
BSD 12.15. Check the circuits of the Stacker Sensors for a loose connection or an intermittent
short circuit to GND

12-570, 12-571 8d-56 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A B C
12-580 RAP Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the
Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15).
This fault is declared if Control Logic detects the Unload While Run Switch activated while a job
is being printed. The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 3, Flag 4, Flag 5, and Flag 6on BSD 12.2.
Check for an intermittent short circuit or a loose connection. If the problem is unresolved,
Initial Actions replace the Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15).
Enter dC330 012-099 Unload while Run LED. The LED remains lit.
Ensure that connectors P/J1039 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1075 on the Unload While Run Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is OK, replace the
Switch are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15). If the problem is unresolved, replace the Finisher
PWB (PL 18.4).
Procedure Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the Unload
The Unload While Run LED is always lit. While Run Switch (PL 18.15).
Y N
Press the Unload While Run Switch several times. The Unload While Run LED Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.2. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is OK, replace the Fin-
switches on and off. isher PWB (PL 18.4).
Y N
Enter dC330 012-291 Unload While Run Switch. Press Start. Press the Unload
While Run Switch several times. The display alternates from High to Low.
Y N
Disconnect P/J1075 from the Unload While Run Switch. There is +5VDC
from J 1075-3 to GND
Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is
OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is OK, replace
the Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15).
There is +5 VDC from P/J1075-1 to GND.

Y N
the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Enter dC330 012-099 Unload while Run LED. Press Start There is less than 1
VDC from P/J1075-2 to GND.
Y N
Replace the Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15).
Enter dC330 012-291 Unload While Run Switch. Press Start. Press the Unload While
Run Switch several times. The display alternates from High to Low.
Y N
Disconnect P/J1075 from the Unload While Run Switch.There is +5VDC from J
1075-3 to GND
Y N
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is OK,
A B C
manuals4you.com
REP 15.1.1 Decurler REP 15.1.2 Decurler Rolls 1 and 2
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher Cable Connector. Switch off
the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
1. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4). 1. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4).
2. Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). 2. Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13).
3. Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). 3. Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14).
4. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). 4. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12).
5. Remove the Decurler (Figure 1). 5. Remove the bearings (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screws (2). 1. Remove shouldered screws (2).
2. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the E-clips (2).
3. Remove the Decurler. 3. Remove the bearings (2).
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Figure 1 Remove the Bearings
Replacement 6. Remove the bearings (Figure 2).

Reinstall the Decurler in the reverse order of disassembly. 1. Remove the screws (2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-59 REP 15.1.1, REP 15.1.2
Figure 2 Remove the Bearings Figure 3 Remove Decurler Roll 1
7. Remove Decurler Roll 1 (Figure 3). 8. Remove Decurler Roll 2 (Figure 4).
1. Remove Decurler Roll 1. 1. Lower the baffle.

REP 15.1.2 8d-60 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Remove Decurler Roll 2
Figure 5 Install the Rolls
Replacement
1. Install the Rolls with the marks towards the rear of the Finisher (Figure 5).
1. Roll 1 has one mark.
2. Roll 2 has two marks.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-61 REP 15.1.2
REP 15.1.3 Reflector and Cam 5. Remove the lever.
6. Remove the cam.
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13).
2. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12).
2. Release the harness from the Clamps (4).
5. Remove the spring from the Bracket.
Figure 2 Remove the Cam
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Cam (Figure 3).
1. Align the hole on the Cam with the hole on the Gear.
2. Reinstall the remaining components in the reverse order of disassembly.
4. Remove the cam (Figure 2).

1. Remove the shoulder screw.
3. Remove the reflector.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.1.4 Decurler Stepper Motor
Removal
WARNING
3. Remove the Decurler Stepper Motor (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the connector from the Decurler Control PWB.
3. Remove the Decurler Stepping Motor.
Figure 3 Reinstall the Cam
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Stepper Motor
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler Stepper Motor in the reverse order of disassembly.

REP 15.1.5 Entrance Lower Chute and Pinch Roll
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4).
4. Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14).
5. Remove the Entrance Lower Chute (Figure 1).
1. Remove screws (4).
2. Disconnect P/J664 and P/J665.
3. Remove the Entrance Lower Chute.
Figure 2 Remove the Pinch Rolls
Replacement
Reinstall the Entrance Lower Chute and Pinch Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Entrance Lower Chute
6. Remove the Pinch Rolls (Figure 2).

1. Remove Pinch Rolls (5) from the Entrance Lower Chute.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.1.6 Exit Lower Baffle and Pinch Roll REP 15.1.7 Decurler PWB
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
1. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4). 1. Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13).
2. Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). NOTE: Observe the ESD procedures when removing the Decurler PWB.
3. Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13).
2. Remove the Decurler PWB (Figure 1).
4. Remove the Exit Lower Baffle (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the PWB connectors (4).
2. Remove the Exit Lower Baffle.
3. Remove the PWB.
3. Remove Pinch Rolls.
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler PWB

Figure 1 Remove the Exit Lower Baffle
Replacement Replacement
Reinstall the Exit Lower Baffle and Pinch Roll in the reverse order of disassembly. Reinstall the Decurler PWB in the reverse order of disassembly.

REP 15.1.8 Cam Drive Shaft 2. Remove the Gear.
3. Remove the Cam Drive Shaft.
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4).
2. Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13).
3. Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12).
4. Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14).
5. Remove the Reflector and Cam (REP 15.1.3).
6. Remove the Gear and Decurler Cam Clutch (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the connector from Clutch.
2. Remove E-clip.
3. Remove the Gear.
4. Remove the Decurler Cam Clutch.
6. Remove the Bearing.
Figure 2 Remove the Cam Drive Shaft
8. Remove the Bearing from the Shaft (Figure 3).

1. Remove E-Clip
2. Remove Bearing.
Figure 1 Remove the Gear and Decurler Cam Clutch
7. Remove the Cam Drive Shaft (Figure 2).

1. Remove the E-Clip.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.1.9 Torque Limiter Gear and Stopper
Removal
WARNING
3. Remove the Torque Limiter Gear (Figure 1).
1. Remove E-Clip.
2. Remove the Stopper.
3. Remove the Torque Limiter Gear.
Figure 3 Remove the Bearing
Replacement
Reinstall the Cam Drive Shaft in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Torque Limiter Gear
Replacement
Reinstall the Torque Limiter Gear and Stopper in the reverse order of disassembly.

REP 15.1.10 Decurler Drive Roll 2
Removal
WARNING
2. At the front of the Finisher, remove the Bearing (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Decurler Drive Roll 2
Replacement
1. Install the Bearing at the gear end of the shaft, into the frame, prior to installing the Drive
Roll.
2. Reinstall the remaining components in the reverse order of disassembly.
3. At the rear of the Finisher, remove the Decurler Drive Roll 2 (Figure 2).
2. Remove the gear.
3. Remove the Bearing and Drive Roll from the rear of the Finisher.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.1.11 Decurler Drive Roll 1
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Decurler Door (REP 15.3.4).
6. Remove the Front Lever (PL 18.7).
7. Remove the Bearing from the roll at the front of the Finisher (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Decurler Drive Roll 1
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler Drive Roll 1 in the reverse order of disassembly.
8. Remove the Decurler Drive Roll 1 at the rear of the Finisher (Figure 2).
1. Disengage the Drive Roll from the frame.
3. Remove the gear.
4. Remove the bearing and then remove the Drive Roll.

REP 15.1.12 Decurler Entrance Roll 3. Remove the Torque Limiter.
Removal
WARNING
5. Remove the Sensor Bracket (Figure 1).
2. Release the harness from the Clamps (4).
5. Remove the spring from the Bracket.
7. Remove the Decurler Entrance Roll at the front of the Finisher (Figure 3).
1. Remove the C-Clip.
2. Remove the Bushing.
3. Remove the Decurler Entrance Roll.
Figure 1 Remove the Sensor Bracket
6. Remove the Torque Limiter Gear at the rear of the Finisher (Figure 2).

manuals4you.com
REP 15.1.13 Decurler Exit Roll
Removal
WARNING
5. Remove the Torque Limiter, from the roll, at the rear of the Finisher (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Torque Limiter Gear.
Figure 3 Remove the Decurler Entrance Roll
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler Entrance Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.
6. Remove the Decurler Exit Roll at the front of the Finisher (Figure 2).
1. Disengage the Exit Roll from the frame.
3. Remove the Bearing, then remove the roll.

REP 15.1.14 Entrance Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5).
2. Remove the Entrance Chute Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll (Figure 1).
2. Remove the Entrance Upper Baffle.
3. Remove the appropriate Pinch Roll(s).
Figure 2 Remove the Decurler Exit Roll
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler Exit Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Entrance Chute Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll
Replacement
Reinstall the Entrance Chute Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.

REP 15.1.13, REP 15.1.14 8d-72 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 15.1.15 Finisher Transport Motor REP 15.1.16 Finisher Drive Belt
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
1. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). 1. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7).
2. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). 2. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15).
3. Remove the Finisher Transport Motor (Figure 1). 3. Remove the Finisher Drive Belt (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the connector P/J1084. 1. Disconnect the connector P/J1084.
2. Remove the three screws securing the motor. 2. Disengage the wire harnesses from the harness holders.
3. Pull the motor straight out to remove. 3. Remove the three screws securing the motor bracket.
4. Remove the bracket with the motor.
5. Remove the E-clip and the Decurler Gear.
6. Remove the two screws securing the belt idler bracket.
7. Remove the Finisher Drive Belt.
Figure 1 Remove the Finisher Transport Motor
Replacement
Reinstall the Finisher Transport Motor in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Finisher Drive Belt
Replacement
1. Reinstall the shaft and the one-way pulleys onto the belt idler bracket, ensuring that the
Finisher Drive Belt and Mailbox Drive Belt are installed onto the correct one-way pulley.

2. Route the Finisher Drive Belt onto the gears per the illustration (Figure 2). REP 15.1.17 Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly
Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7).
2. Remove the Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Remove the SCT Exit Cover.
2. Remove one screw from the bottom of the tray.
3. Lift up the tray, tilt out, and move the tray slightly away from the Finisher.
4. Disconnect the sensor connector.
5. Disengage the wire harness from the harness holders on the tray and remove the
tray.
Figure 2 Install the Finisher Drive Belt
3. Reinstall the belt idler bracket.

4. Reinstall the E-clip and the gear.
5. Reinstall the bracket with the motor.
NOTE: In the following step, ensure that the wires are secured away from belts, pulleys,
and all moving components.
6. Reinstall the wire harnesses into the harness holders and reconnect the connector P/
J1084.
Figure 1 Remove the Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly
Replacement
Reinstall the Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly in the reverse order of disassembly.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.1.18 SCT Static Eliminator REP 15.1.19 SCT Exit Sensor
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Remove the SCT Static Eliminator (Figure 1). 2. Remove the SCT Exit Sensor (Figure 1).
1. Remove the SCT Exit Cover. 1. Remove the SCT Cover.
2. Remove the Static Eliminator. 2. Disconnect the Sensor Connector.
3. Remove the SCT Exit Sensor.
Figure 1 Remove the SCT Static Eliminator Figure 1 Remove the SCT Exit Sensor
Align the Static Eliminator strip with the top of the SCT Exit Upper Chute, from which you Reinstall the SCT Exit Sensor in the reverse order of disassembly.
removed the old Static Eliminator, and stick the strip in place.

REP 15.1.20 SCT Pinch Roll REP 15.1.21 Finisher Transport Roll 1
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Remove the SCT Pinch Roll (Figure 1). 2. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15).
1. Remove the SCT Exit Cover. 3. Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5).
2. Remove the Mailbox Rear Lower Cover. 4. Remove the Stapler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.2).
3. Remove the four screws securing the SCT Exit Upper Chute, in order to provide 5. Remove the wire harness from the Finisher Transport Motor Bracket (PL 18.9 item 10).
access to the Pinch Rolls. 6. Remove the Finisher Transport Motor Bracket from the Finisher (3 screws).
4. Remove the appropriate Pinch Roll(s). 7. Remove the Transport Roll 1 (Figure 1).
1. On the rear of the Finisher Transport Roll shaft 1, remove the E ring, Stopper Collar,
Friction Clutch, Pulley and the Bearing.
2. On the front of the Finisher Transport Roll shaft 1, remove the E ring and Bearing.
3. Remove the Finisher Transport Roll from the front of the Finisher.
Replacement
1. Install the Finisher Transport Roll 1 into the frame in reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the SCT Pinch Roll
Replacement
Reinstall the SCT Pinch Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.1.22 Finisher Transport Roll 2
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15).
3. Remove the MailBox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5).
4. Remove the Transport Roll 2 (Figure 1).
1. Remove the E ring and Collar from the Idler Pulley that is being driven by the Fin-
isher Transport Roll 2.
2. Remove the E ring, Idler Pulley and Bearing from the rear of the Finisher Transport
Roll shaft.
3. Remove the E ring and Bearing from the front of the Finisher Transport Roll 2 shaft.
4. Remove the screws (4) securing the Entrance Lower Chute to the frame (PL 18.14
item 25). Do not remove the Entrance Lower Chute. This will provide enough room
to allow the Finisher Transport Roll 2 shaft to be removed.
5. Remove the Finisher Transport Roll 2 from the front of the Finisher.
Replacement
1. Install the Finisher Transport Roll 2 into the Finisher frame.
2. Install the Bearing and E ring onto the front end of the Finisher Transport Roll 2 shaft.
3. Install the Bearing, Idler Pulley, and E ring onto the rear of the Finisher Transport Roll 2
shaft. Ensure the Finisher Drive Belt is installed on the Pulley.
4. Reinstall the Entrance Lower Chute to the frame using the screws (4).
5. Install the Collar and E ring on the Idler Pulley that is driven by the Finisher Transport Roll
2.
6. Install the Rear Upper Cover.
7. Install the Rear Lower Cover.
8. Install the Mailbox Door Assembly.
9. Install the Stapler Cover.
Figure 1 Remove the Transport Roll 1

Figure 1 Remove the Transport Roll 2

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.1 Compiler Tray Solenoid Replacement
Parts List on PL 18.15 1. Reconnect P/J1082.
2. Route the wire harness through the harness clips and lock the clips.
Removal
3. Slide the solenoid Link onto the End Wall Shaft.
WARNING 4. Slide the End Wall Motor Link onto the End Wall Motor Shaft, and use a K Clip to secure
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the Link to the shaft.
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 5. Install the End Wall Spring.
1. Move the Stapler to the rear end of the Stapler track. 6. Install the Compiler Tray Solenoid Plunger into the Solenoid and secure the solenoid with
2. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. the screws (2).
3. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). 7. Install the wire harness bracket to the Compiler Tray Solenoid with the screw (1).
4. Remove the wire harness from the harness clamps. 8. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
5. Remove the lower screw that secures the wire harness holder to the Compiler Tray Sole-
noid (PL 18.15 item 6).
6. Remove the Compiler Tray Solenoid (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the Compiler Tray Solenoid Connector P/J1082.
2. Remove the End Wall Spring (PL 18.15 item 2).
3. Remove the K Clip securing the End Wall Motor Link to the End Wall Motor, and
remove the Link.
4. Remove the two screws securing the Compiler Tray Solenoid to the Finisher frame.
Remove the Compiler Tray Solenoid.
5. Slide the solenoid plunger Link off the End Wall Shaft, and remove the solenoid
plunger and Link.
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Tray Solenoid

REP 15.2.2 Stacker Tray Assembly 3. Tighten the two middle screws.
4. Reconnect P/J1090, P/J1071, P/J1067 and P/J1064 (Figure 1).
5. Secure the wire harness into the harness clips.
Removal 6. Install the Front Wheel Caster Cap.
WARNING 7. Install the Rear Lower Cover.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off 8. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly.
1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord.
2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3).
4. Remove the front wheel Caster Cap (PL 18.4 item 8).
5. Disconnect P/J1090, P/J1071, P/J1067 and P/J1064 and remove the wire harness from
the harness clips.
6. Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screws (5) securing the Stacker Tray Assembly to the Finisher frame
front and rear.
2. Lift the Stacker Tray Assembly off the screws and remove the assembly from the
frame.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly by hooking the keyhole screw holes at the middle of
the Assembly over the two screws on the frame.
2. Use two screws to secure the bottom of the Assembly to the frame.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.4 Stacker Full Sensors 3. Position the Stacker Full (Mixed Sizes) Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor
Bracket.
Parts List on PL 18.27 4. Reconnect P/J1062 to the Stacker Full (Mixed Sizes) Sensor.
Removal 5. Reinstall the Sensor Bracket on the Stacker Tray frame, ensure the Limit Actuator tab is
WARNING aligned properly in the Sensor Bracket. Use screws (2) to secure the Bracket.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off 6. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
3. Remove the Stacker Tray Full Sensors (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screws (2) securing the Sensor Bracket to the Stacker Tray frame, and
remove the Bracket.
2. Disconnect P/J1062 from the Stacker Full (Mixed Sizes) Sensor. Press in and
release the Stacker Full (Mixed Sizes) Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor
to the Sensor Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
3. Disconnect P/J1063 from the Stacker Full Sensor. Press in and release the Stacker
Full Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor to the Sensor Bracket, and remove
the Sensor.
Figure 1 Stacker Tray Full Sensors
Replacement
1. Position the Stacker Full Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket.
2. Reconnect P/J1063 to the Stacker Full Sensor.

REP 15.2.5 Stacker Upper and Lower Limit Sensors REP 15.2.6 Stacker Tray Paper Sensor
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. 1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord.
2. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). 2. Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2).
3. Remove the Stacker Lower and Upper Limit Sensors (Figure 1). 3. Remove the Stacker Tray Paper Sensor (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect P/J1065 from the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor. Press in and release the 1. Turn the Stacker Tray Assembly upside down. Remove the screws (3) that secure
Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor. the Bottom Cover to the bottom of the Tray.
2. Disconnect P/J1066 from the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor. Press in and release the 2. Remove the Bottom Cover.
Sensor latches that secures the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor. 3. Disconnect P/J1069 from the Sensor. Press in and release the Sensor latches that
are securing the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
Figure 1 Stacker Limit Sensors

Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Tray Paper Sensor
Replacement
1. Position the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Replacement
2. Reconnect P/J1066 to the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor. 1. Position the Stacker Tray Paper Sensor and insert it into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor
3. Position the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Bracket.
4. Reconnect P/J1065 to the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor. 2. Reconnect P/J1069 to the Sensor.
5. Reinstall the Sensor Bracket on the Stacker Tray Assembly, ensure the Limit Actuator tab 3. Reinstall the Bottom Cover to the Tray, and use screws (3) to secure the Cover.
is aligned properly in the Sensor Bracket. Use screws (2) to secure the Bracket. 4. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly.
6. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.7 Stacker Motor REP 15.2.8 Lower Exit Chute Assembly
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). 2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3).
3. Remove the Stacker Motor (Figure 1). 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15).
1. Remove the screws (3) securing the Motor to the Bracket, and remove the Motor. 4. Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22).
2. Disengage the Drive Belt from the Motor Pulley. 5. Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (REP 15.2.23).
3. Disconnect P/J1090, remove the wire harness from the harness clips and remove 6. Remove the Upper Exit Chute Assembly (REP 15.2.24).
the Motor. 7. Remove the Exit Roll (REP 15.2.21).
8. Remove the Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Remove the E-ring securing the rear bearing to the Paddle Drive Shaft, and slide the
bearing off the Shaft.
2. Remove the screws (2) securing the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the rear of the
Finisher frame.
3. Remove the screws (2) securing the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the front of the
Finisher frame.
4. Remove the Lower Exit Chute Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Motor
Replacement
1. Engage the Drive Belt then use the screws (3) to secure the Motor.
2. Reconnect P/J1090.
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly

Replacement REP 15.2.9 Stacker Tray Drive Belts
1. Reinstall the Lower Exit Chute Assembly onto the Finisher frame. Parts List on PL 18.26
2. Use the screws (4) to secure the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the Finisher frame.
Removal
3. Slide the metal bearing onto the rear of the Paddle Drive Shaft, and use an E-ring to
secure the bearing to the rear of the Finisher. WARNING
4. Reinstall the Exit Roll. To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
5. Reinstall the Upper Exit Chute Assembly. the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
6. Reinstall the Eject Pinch Roll Assembly. 1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord.
7. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. 2. Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2).
8. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 3. Remove the Stacker Motor Bracket and the Sensor Bracket (Figure 1).
9. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly. 1. Remove the screws (3) securing the Stacker Motor Bracket.
2. Pull the Dog Clutch Gear away from the Dog Clutch Pulley then remove the Bracket.
3. Remove the screws (2) securing the Sensor Bracket to the Tray Frame, and remove
the Sensor Bracket.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Motor Bracket
4. Remove the Front Stacker Tray Drive Belt (Figure 2).

1. To remove the front Stacker Tray Drive Belt, raise the Stacker Tray to the top of the
stacker. Remove the screws (2) from the front Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp.
Remove the E-ring from the top front Pulley and remove the Flange.
2. Support the Stacker Tray with one hand and pull the front Stacker Tray Drive Belt and
the Belt Clamp from the Tray bracket. Remove the Belt Clamp from the Front Belt,
and remove the Front Belt from the Stacker Tray Assembly.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.10 Stacker Tray
Removal
WARNING
2. Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2).
3. Removing the Stacker Motor Bracket and Sensor Bracket (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screws (3) that secures the Stacker Motor Bracket and set the
Bracket to one side.
2. Remove the screws (2) the secures the Sensor Bracket and set the Bracket to one
side.
3. Disconnect the Stacker Tray in line connector P/J1070 from the Sensor Bracket
and remove the wire harness from the harness clamps.
4. Pull the Dog Clutch Gear away from the Dog Clutch Pulley then remove the
Stacker Motor Bracket.
Figure 2 Remove the Front Stacker Tray Drive Belt
3. To remove the Rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt, raise the Stacker Tray to the top of the
stacker. Remove the screws (2) from the Rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp (Figure 2).
4. Remove the E-ring from the top rear Pulley and remove the Flange.
5. Support the Stacker Tray with one hand and pull the Rear Belt and the Belt Clamp from
the Tray bracket.
6. Remove the Belt Clamp from the Rear Belt.
7. Remove the Rear Belt from the Stacker Tray Assembly.
Replacement
1. Install the front and rear Belts onto the top pulleys and install the Pulley Flanges on the
front and rear pulley and secure with E-rings (2).
2. Reinstall the Stacker Motor Bracket. ensure that the rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt is routed
under the Worm Wheel, and secure the Stacker Motor Bracket with screws (3).
3. Reinstall the Sensor Bracket onto the Stacker Frame, ensure the Actuator tab is aligned
properly in the Sensor Bracket. Also ensure that the rear Drive Belt Clamp properly
engages the Sensor Actuator. Use the screws (2) to secure the Bracket.
4. Install the Belts Clamps (2) onto the front and rear Stacker Tray Drive Belts.
5. Ensure the Stacker Tray is level with the Stacker Tray Assembly and install the Belt Figure 1 Removing the Stacker Motor Bracket and Sensor Bracket
Clamps into the Stacker Tray brackets.
6. Adjust the Stacker Tray Level (ADJ 15.3.2). 4. Removing the Stacker Drive Belt Clamps (Figure 2).
7. Install the Stacker Tray Assembly. 1. Remove the screws (2) from the Front Drive Belt Clamp and the Rear Drive Belt
8. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Clamp.
9. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly.

Figure 2 Removing the Stacker Drive Belt Clamps Figure 3 Remove the Stacker Tray
5. Remove the Stacker Tray (Figure 3). Replacement

1. Support the Stacker Tray with one hand and pull the front and rear Belt Clamps 1. Reinstall the Stacker Tray into the slots in the Front and Rear Tray Frames.
from the Tray brackets.
2. Install the Drive Belts and Belt Clamps into the Stacker Tray Brackets.
2. With one end of the Tray Carriage at the bottom of the Carriage track, raise the
3. Reinstall the Sensor Bracket onto the Stacker Frame, ensure the Actuator tab is aligned
opposite end of the Tray Carriage out of the slots in the Front and Rear Tray Frames, properly in the Sensor Bracket. Also ensure that the rear Drive Belt Clamp properly
and remove the Stacker Tray.
engages the Sensor Actuator. Use the screws (2) to secure the Sensor Bracket.
4. Connect the Stacker Tray in line connector P/J1070 from the Sensor Bracket and install
the wire harness into the harness clamps.
5. Adjust the Stacker Tray Level (ADJ 15.3.2).
6. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly.
8. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.11 Tamper Motor Replacement
Parts List on PL 18.16 1. Install the Tamper Motor onto the Compiler Bin and secure it with two screws.
2. Reinstall the Tamper Motor Drive Belt over the Tamper Motor Pulley.
Removal
3. Reinstall the Tie Plate and secure it to the Finisher Frame with the screws (4).
WARNING 4. Connect connector P/J1087 and install the Tamper Motor wiring harness into the cable
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off ties.
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 5. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly.
1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. 6. Install the Rear Lower Cover.
2. Lower the Stacker Elevator so the tray is at the lowest possible position. 7. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly.
3. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer. 8. Connect the Finisher to the Printer.
7. Remove the screws (4) from the Tie Plate and remove the Tie Plate from the Finisher
Frame.
8. Remove the Tamper Motor (Figure 1).
1. Remove the Drive Belt from the Tamper Motor Pulley.
2. Disconnect connector P/J1087 and remove the Tamper Motor wiring harness from
all cable ties.
3. Accessing the rear of the Tamper Motor, remove the two screws that secure the
Motor to the Compiler Bin and remove the Tamper Motor.
Figure 1 Remove the Tamper Motor

REP 15.2.12 Tamper Home Sensor 2. Connect P/J1045 to the Sensor.
3. Reinstall the Tamper Home Sensor Bracket onto the Compiler and use the screw (1) to
Parts List on PL 18.16 secure the Bracket.
Removal 4. Reinstall the Tie Plate and use the screws (4) to secure it to the frame.
WARNING 5. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off 6. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 7. Install the Rear Lower Cover.
1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. 8. Connect the Finisher to the Printer.
2. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer.
6. Remove the screws (4) securing the Tie Plate to the Finisher Frame. Remove the Tie
Plate.
7. Remove the Tamper Home Sensor (Figure 1).
1. Loosen the screw (1) securing the Tamper Home Sensor Bracket to the Compiler
and remove the Bracket along with the Tamper Home Sensor.
2. Disconnect P/J1045 from the Sensor.
3. Press in and release the Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor to the Bracket,
and remove the Sensor.
Figure 1 Remove the Tamper Home Sensor
Replacement
1. Position the Tamper Home Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.13 Compiler Paper Sensor 3. Reinstall the Compiler Paper Sensor Bracket onto the Compiler and use the screw (1) to
secure the Bracket.
Parts List on PL 18.16 4. Reinstall the Tie Plate and use the screws (4) to secure it to the frame.
Removal 5. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly.
WARNING 6. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off 7. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 8. Connect the Finisher to the Printer.
6. Remove the screws (4) securing the Tie Plate to the Finisher frame. Remove the Tie
Plate.
7. Remove the Compiler Paper Sensor (Figure 1).
1. Press in and release the Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor Bracket.
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Paper Sensor
Replacement
1. Position the Compiler Paper Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket.
2. Connect P/J1048 to the Sensor.

REP 15.2.14 End Wall Open Sensor 2. Position the End Wall Open Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket.
3. Reinstall the Tie Plate and use the screws (4) to secure it to the frame.
Removal 5. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
WARNING 6. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off 7. Connect the Finisher to the Printer.
6. Remove the screws (4) securing the Tie Plate to the Finisher frame (Figure 1). Remove
the Tie Plate.
7. Remove the End Wall Open Sensor (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screw (1) securing the Compiler Paper Sensor Bracket to the Compiler.
Remove the Bracket along with the Compiler Paper Sensor.
3. Press in and release the Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor to the Bracket.
Remove the Sensor.
Figure 1 Remove the End Wall Open Sensor
Replacement
1. Reconnect P/J1046 to the Sensor.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.15 Tamper Motor Drive Belt Replacement
Parts List on PL 18.16 1. Position the Tamper Motor Drive Belt so the ribs are on the inside of the Belt loop.
2. Slip the Belt over the Tension Pulley.
Removal
3. Insert the Belt between the top and bottom of the Belt Holder, and tighten the screw on
WARNING the Belt Holder.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off 4. Reinstall the Tamper Motor.
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 5. Tighten the Belt Tension Screw.
1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. 6. Reinstall the Tie Plate and use the screws (4) to secure it to the frame.
2. Lower the Stacker Elevator so the Stacker Tray is at the lowest possible position. 7. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly.
3. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer. 8. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
4. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). 9. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
5. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). 10. Connect the Finisher to the Printer.
7. Remove the screws (4) securing the Tie Plate to the Finisher Frame. Remove the Tie
Plate.
8. Remove the Tamper Motor (REP 15.2.11).
9. Remove the Tamper Motor Drive Belt (Figure 1).
1. Loosen, do not remove, the screw (1) on the Belt Holder, and slip the Belt out of the
holder.
2. Loosen the screw that secures the Belt Tension Pulley.
3. Slip the Belt off of the Tension Pulley, and remove the Belt.
Figure 1 Remove the Tamper Motor Drive Belt

REP 15.2.16 End Wall Motor Replacement
Parts List on PL 18.15 1. Reinstall the End Wall Motor onto the Motor Bracket.
2. Reconnect the End Wall Motor Wire Harness.
Removal
3. Reinstall the End Wall Motor Bracket onto the Finisher frame, making sure the End Wall
WARNING Link is captured inside the End Wall Motor yoke.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off 4. Connect the End Wall Motor Connector P/J1083.
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 5. Use the screws (2) to secure the End Wall Motor Bracket to the Finisher frame.
1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. 6. Reinstall the End Wall Spring, with one end of the Spring attached to the End Wall
2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). 7. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly.
3. Remove the End Wall Motor (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screws (2) securing the Harness Holder to the Finisher frame and push
the wire harness to one side.
2. Remove the End Wall Spring.
3. Remove the screws (2) securing the End Wall Motor Bracket to the finisher frame.
Remove the Bracket along with the attached End Wall Motor.
4. Release the end Wall Motor wire harness from the harness clips.
5. Disconnect the End Wall Motor wire harness at the back of the motor or disconnect
P/J1083.
6. Remove the screws (2) securing the End Wall Motor to the Bracket, and remove the
Motor.
Figure 1 Remove the End Wall Motor

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.17 Eject Clamp Sensor 4. Reinstall the wire harnesses to the wire clamps that are attached to the Eject Bracket.
Removal
WARNING
3. Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor (Figure 1).
1. Remove the wire harnesses from the wire clamps that are attached to the Eject
Bracket.
2. Remove the screw (1) securing the Eject Clamp Sensor Bracket to the Eject Bracket,
and remove the Sensor Bracket, along with Sensor.
4. Press in and release the Sensor latches that secure the Sensor to the Bracket, and
remove the Sensor.
Figure 1 Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor
Replacement
1. Position the Eject Clamp Sensor into the Eject Clamp Sensor Bracket.
2. Reconnect P/J1054 to the Sensor.
3. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Sensor Bracket onto the Eject Bracket. Use the screw (1) to
secure the Sensor Bracket.

REP 15.2.18 Stacker Offset Home Sensor 5. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.

Removal
WARNING
3. Remove the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screws (2) securing the Offset Home Sensor Bracket to the Finisher
frame, and remove the Bracket.
2. Free the two wire harnesses from the wire clamp that is attached to the Bracket. Dis-
connect P/J1051 from the Stacker Offset Home Sensor.
remove the Sensor.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Offset Home Sensor
Replacement
1. Position the Stacker Offset Home Sensor into the cutout in the Sensor Bracket.
2. Reconnect P/J1051 to the Stacker Offset Home Sensor.
3. Secure the two wire harnesses in the wire clamp that is attached to the Bracket.
4. Reinstall the Stacker Offset Home Sensor Bracket onto the Finisher frame. Use two
screws to secure the Bracket to the frame.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.19 Eject Bracket Assembly 2. Use the screws (4) to secure the Assembly.
3. Hook the Tension Spring onto the Eject Bracket Assembly.
4. Reinstall the Harness Bracket Assembly to the Finisher frame, and use the screws (3) to
Removal secure the Bracket.
WARNING 5. Ensure that P/J1055 to the Eject Paddle Sensor did not accidentally become discon-
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off nected when the Harness Bracket Assembly was moved.
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 6. Reinstall the Stacker Offset Home Sensor.
1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. 7. Reconnect P/J1086 and replace the harness in the harness clamps.
2. Move the Finisher away from the Printer. 8. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Sensor.
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). 9. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
4. Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor (REP 15.2.17). 10. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer.
5. Remove the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (REP 15.2.18).
6. Remove the Eject Bracket Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect P/J1086 and free the harness from all cable clamps.
2. Remove the screws (3) securing the Harness Bracket Assembly to the Finisher
frame, and remove the Assembly.
3. Unhook the Tension Spring from the Eject Bracket Assembly.
4. Remove the screws (4) securing the Eject Bracket Assembly to the finisher frame,
and remove the Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Eject Bracket Assembly
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Eject Bracket Assembly onto the Finisher frame. Ensure the cam follower pin
on the Offset Lever is correctly positioned in the cam in the Exit Bracket Assembly.

REP 15.2.20 Eject Paddle Motor and Drive Belt
Removal
WARNING
2. Roll the finisher away from the printer until it stops.
4. Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor (REP 15.2.17).
6. Remove the Eject Bracket Assembly (REP 15.2.19).
7. Remove the Eject Paddle Motor and Drive Belt (Figure 1).
3. Remove the screws (2) securing the Motor Bracket to the finisher frame, and pull the
Bracket away from the Finisher frame.
4. Free the Eject Paddle Drive Belt from the Motor Pulley, and remove the Motor
Bracket.
5. Remove the E-ring securing the Shaft Pulley to the Motor Shaft, and remove the Pul-
ley. Figure 1 Remove the Eject Paddle Motor and Drive Belt
6. Remove the screws (2) securing the Eject Paddle Motor to the Motor Bracket, and
remove the Motor. Replacement
7. Remove the Eject Paddle Motor Drive Belt from the Eject Pulley.
1. Reinstall the Eject Paddle Motor onto the Motor Bracket, and use the screws (2) to secure
the Motor.
2. Slide the Shaft Pulley, with the lip facing away from the Motor onto the Motor Shaft. Use
the E-ring to secure the Pulley onto the Shaft.
3. Reinstall the Motor Bracket onto the Finisher frame, by first slipping the Eject Paddle Drive
Belt over the Shaft Pulley. Use the screws (2) to secure the Motor Bracket to the Finisher
frame.
4. Reconnect P/J1088 and P/J1055.
5. If removed, reinstall the Finisher PWB Cover and the Harness Cover.
6. Reinstall the Eject Bracket Assembly.
7. Reinstall the Stacker Offset Home Sensor.
8. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Sensor.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.21 Eject Shaft Assembly
Removal
WARNING
2. Roll the Finisher away from the Printer.
6. Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22).
10. Remove the Eject Paddle Motor (REP 15.2.20).
11. Remove the Eject Shaft Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screws (4) securing the Frame tie plate, and remove the plate.
2. Remove the E-ring securing the Set Clamp Actuator to Shaft 1, and remove the
Actuator, Pulley, and rear metal bearing.
3. Remove the E-ring securing the front metal bearing for Shaft 1, and remove the front
bearing.
4. Remove the E-ring securing the Offset Lever to Shaft 2, and remove the Offset
Lever.
5. Remove the E-ring securing the Eject Gear to Shaft 2, and remove the Eject Gear.
6. Remove the screw (1) securing the rear plastic bearing to Shaft 2, and slide the front
bearing off of the Shaft.
7. Remove the screw (1) securing the front plastic bearing to Shaft 2, and slide the front
bearing off of the Shaft.
8. Remove Shaft 1 and Shaft 2 (the Eject Shaft Assemblies) as a unit.
Figure 1 Remove the Eject Shaft Assembly
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Eject Shaft Assemblies into the Finisher frame.
2. Slide the front and the rear metal bearings over the ends of Shaft 1.
3. Position the Compiler Bin so the arms at the front and rear of the Bin line up with Shaft 1.
4. Slide the front and the rear metal bearings into the bearing cutouts in the Finisher frame,
and through the arms of the Compiler Bin.
5. use an E-ring to secure the front metal bearing to the front end of Shaft 1.
6. Slide the Pulley and the Set Clamp Actuator over the rear end of Shaft 1, and use an E-
ring to secure them to the Shaft.
7. Slide the front plastic bearing onto the front end of Shaft 2, and use the screw (1) to
secure the bearing to the Finisher frame.

8. Slide the rear plastic bearing onto the rear end of Shaft 2, and use the screw (1) to secure REP 15.2.22 Compiler Cover Assembly
the bearing to the Finisher frame.
9. Slide the Eject Gear onto the rear end of Shaft 2, and use an E-ring to secure the Gear to
the Shaft. Removal
10. Slide the Offset Lever over the rear end of Shaft 2, and use an E-ring to secure the Offset WARNING
Lever.
11. Reinstall the Eject Paddle Motor. the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
12. Reinstall the Eject Bracket Assembly. 1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord.
13. Reinstall the Stacker Offset Home Sensor. 2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3).
14. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Sensor. 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15).
15. Reinstall the Eject Roll Chute, and use the screws (4) to secure the Chute. 4. Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2).
16. Reinstall the Harness Cover. 5. Remove the Eject Cover (PL 18.15 item 10).
17. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. 6. Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (Figure 1).
18. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 1. Remove the E-ring securing the Offset Lever to the rear of the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft.
19. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer. Slide the Offset lever off the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft (rotate the Offset Cam if neces-
sary).
2. Remove the screw securing the Lever to the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. Remove the
Lever.
3. Remove the screw (1) securing the rear Pinch Roll Bearing to the finisher frame, and
slide the Bearing to the rear.
4. Remove the screw securing the front Pinch Roll Bearing to the Finisher frame, and
slide the Bearing to the front.
5. Lift the Compiler Cover Assembly and the Pinch Roll Assembly and remove the
Compiler Cover Assembly from the finisher frame.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.23 Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly
Removal
WARNING
5. Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Remove the front and rear bearings from the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft.
2. Disconnect P/J1075 from the Stack Height Sensor.
3. Slide the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly to the rear and remove it from the Finisher.
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly by first sliding the Stack Height Actuator and the
Pinch Rolls through the cutout in the Assembly.
2. Hook the two arms of the Compiler Cover Assembly over the Pinch Roll Shaft.
3. Slide the front Pinch Roll Bearing to the rear so the arms of the Compiler Cover Assembly
ride on the Bearing. Use the screw (1) to secure the Bearing to the Finisher frame.
4. Slide the rear Pinch Roll Bearing to the front so the arms of the Compiler Cover Assembly
ride on the Bearing. Use the screw (1) to secure the Bearing to the Finisher frame.
5. Insert the Lever on the shaft and secure with the screw (1).
6. Insert the Offset Lever into the Offset Cam and onto the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. Use the E-
ring to secure the lever.
7. Raise and lower the Compiler Cover Assembly to make sure it moves freely, and the
Stack Height Actuator and Pinch Rolls also move freely.
9. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Figure 1 Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly

Replacement
1. Insert the rear of the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly into the bearing hole at the rear of
the Finisher.
2. Insert the front of the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly into the bearing hole at the rear of
the Finisher.
3. Reconnect P/J1075 to the Stack Height Sensor.

4. Slide the front and rear bearings over the ends of the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. REP 15.2.24 Upper Exit Chute Assembly
5. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly.
6. Raise and lower the Compiler Cover Assembly to make sure it moves freely, and the
Stack Height Actuator and Pinch Rolls also move freely. Removal
7. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. WARNING
8. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly. To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
5. Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (REP 15.2.23).
6. Remove the Upper Exit Chute Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Remove the screw (1) securing the Finisher Interlock Switch Bracket to the front of
the Finisher frame, and remove the Bracket to gain access one of the Upper Exit
Chute Assembly screws.
2. Remove the screws (2) securing the Upper Exit Chute Assembly to the front Finisher
frame.
3. Remove the screws (2) securing the Upper Exit Chute Assembly to the rear Finisher
frame.
4. Rotate the Upper Exit Chute Assembly and remove the Assembly from the Finisher.
Figure 1 Remove the Upper Exit Chute Assembly

manuals4you.com
Replacement REP 15.2.25 Exit Roll
1. Reinstall the Upper Exit Chute Assembly into the Finisher frame. Use the screws (4) to Parts List on PL 18.14
secure the front and rear of the Upper Exit Chute Assembly.
2. Reinstall the finisher Interlock Switch Bracket to the front of the Finisher frame, and use
Removal
one screw to secure the Bracket. WARNING
3. Reinstall the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly. To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
4. Reinstall the Exit Chute Assembly. the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
5. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. 1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord.
6. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3).
7. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly. 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15).
6. Remove the Upper Exit Chute Assembly (REP 15.2.24).
7. Remove the Exit Roll (Figure 1).
1. Remove the E-ring securing the Paddle Shaft Drive Gear, that is located just below
the Exit Shaft Pulley, and remove the Drive Gear.
2. Loosen the screws (2) that secure the Transport Motor Drive Belt Tension Assembly.
Push the idler pulley up to release the tension. Tighten the screws (2).
3. Remove the screw securing the Exit Shaft Pulley to the Shaft, and remove the Pulley.
4. Remove the E-ring securing the front and rear Exit Shaft bearings, and remove the
bearings.
5. Slide the Exit Roll out of the Finisher frame.
Figure 1 Remove the Exit Roll

Replacement REP 15.2.26 Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly
1. Reinstall the Exit Roll. Parts List on PL 18.14
2. Reinstall the Exit Roll front and rear bearings into the bearing cutouts at the front and rear
of the finisher frame. Use an E-ring at both ends of the Shaft.
Removal
3. Reinstall the Exit Shaft Pulley onto the Exit Shaft, and use one screw to secure the Pulley WARNING
to the Shaft. To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
4. Ensure the Transport Motor Drive Belt is properly installed on all pulleys. the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
5. Loosen the screws that secures the Belt Tension Assembly. 1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord.
6. Allow the assembly to properly tension the belt, then tighten the two screws. 2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3).
7. Reinstall the Paddle Shaft Drive Gear and use the E-ring to secure the Gear to the Shaft. 3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15).
8. Reinstall the Upper Exit Chute Assembly. 4. Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22).
9. Reinstall the Eject Pinch Roll Assembly. 5. Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (REP 15.2.23).
10. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. 6. Remove the Upper Exit Chute Assembly (REP 15.2.24).
11. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 7. Remove the Exit Roll (REP 15.2.21).
12. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly. 8. Remove the Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Remove the E-ring securing the rear bearing to the Paddle Drive Shaft, and slide the
bearing off the Shaft.
2. Remove the screws (2) securing the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the rear of the
Finisher frame.
3. Remove the screws (2) securing the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the front of the
Finisher frame.
4. Remove the Lower Exit Chute Assembly and place it on a stable work surface.
5. Remove the E-rings from both ends of the Paddle Shaft.
6. Slide the Paddle Drive Belt off of the Paddle Drive Pulley.
7. Slide the Paddle Drive Pulley off of the Paddle Shaft.
8. Remove the screw securing the front Paddle Bearing, and slide the bearing off of the
Shaft.
9. Remove the screw securing the rear Paddle Bearing, and remove the bearing, Drive
Belt, Drive Shaft, and Paddle Shaft from the Lower Exit Chute Assembly.
10. Slide the Paddle Shaft out of the rear bearing.

manuals4you.com
7. Use an E-ring to secure the front of the Paddle Shaft to the front bearing.
8. Reinstall the Lower Exit Chute Assembly onto the Finisher frame.
9. Use the screws (4) to secure the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the Finisher frame.
10. Slide the metal bearing onto the rear of the Paddle Drive Shaft, and use an E-ring to
secure the bearing to the rear of the Finisher.
11. Reinstall the Exit Roll.
12. Reinstall the Upper Exit Chute Assembly.
13. Reinstall the Eject Pinch Roll Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Drive Belt onto the Drive Pulley.
2. Slide the end of the Paddle Shaft into the rear bearing.
3. Install the Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly, along with the attached rear Paddle Bearing,
onto the Lower Exit Chute Assembly. Use the screw (1) to secure the rear bearing to the
Exit Chute.
4. Reinstall the front Paddle Bearing by sliding the bearing over the front end of the Paddle
Shaft.
5. Slide the Paddle Drive Pulley, with a lip facing in, onto the rear of the Paddle Shaft, and
use an E-ring to secure the drive Pulley to the Shaft.
6. Slide the Drive Belt onto the Paddle Drive Pulley.

REP 15.2.27 Paddle Drive Belt Replacement
Parts List on PL 18.14 1. Slip the Paddle Drive Belt over the Paddle Gear.
2. Press the Paddle onto the Paddle Cover Assembly.
Removal
3. Reinstall the Sensor Bracket Assembly onto the Paddle Cover Assembly, and use the
WARNING screw (1) to secure the Bracket.
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off 4. Reinstall the Drive Gear onto the other end of the Belt, and position the Gear in the Pad-
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. dle Cover Assembly.
1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. 5. Slide the Paddle Cover Assembly onto the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. Use an E-ring to secure
2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). the Paddle Cover Assembly to the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft.
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). 6. Slide the Front Pinch Roll Cover onto the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft, and use the screws (2) to
4. Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22). secure the Cover to the Shaft.
5. Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (REP 15.2.23). 7. Reinstall the Eject Pinch Roll Assembly.
6. Remove the Paddle Drive Belt (Figure 1). 8. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly.
1. Remove the two screws securing the Front Pinch Roll Cover to the Eject Pinch Roll 9. Raise and loser the Compiler Cover Assembly to make sure it moves freely, and the Stack
Shaft, and slide the Cover off of the Shaft. Height Actuator and Pinch Rolls also move freely.
2. Remove the E-ring securing the Paddle Cover Assembly to the Eject Pinch Roll 10. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
Shaft, and slide the Cover Assembly off of the Shaft. 11. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
3. Remove the screw securing the Sensor Bracket to the Paddle Cover Assembly, and
remove the Bracket.
4. Remove the Paddle out of the Paddle Cover Assembly.
5. Remove the Paddle Drive Belt.
Figure 1 Remove the Paddle Drive Belt

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.28 Stacker Height Sensor 5. Raise and lower the Compiler Cover Assembly to make sure it moves freely.
6. Check that the Stack Height Actuator and Pinch Rolls moves freely.
Removal 8. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
WARNING
6. Remove the Stacker Height Sensor (Figure 1).
1. Release the latches that are securing the Stack Height Sensor to the Sensor
Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Height Sensor
Replacement
1. Position the Stack Height Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket.
2. Raise and lower the Stack Height Sensor Actuator to make sure the Actuator arm moves
freely between the arms of the Stack Height Sensor.
3. Reinstall the eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly.

REP 15.2.29 Unload While Run Switch REP 15.2.30 Compiler Entrance Sensor
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). 2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3).
3. Remove the Unload While Run Switch (Figure 1). 3. Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5).
1. Remove the screw (1) securing the Switch Bracket to the Finisher frame, and 4. Remove the Compiler Entrance Sensor (Figure 1).
remove the Bracket. 1. Disconnect the Compiler Entrance Sensor Connector P/J1052.
2. Disconnect P/J1075 from the Switch. 2. Remove the screws (2) securing the Compiler Entrance Sensor Bracket.
3. Remove the screw (1) securing the Switch to the Bracket, and remove the Switch. 3. Pull the Sensor Bracket up and remove the Compiler Enter Sensor.
Figure 1 Remove the Unload While Run Switch Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Entrance Sensor
1. Reinstall the Unload While Run Switch onto the Switch Bracket. 1. Install the Compiler Entrance Sensor bracket into place.
2. With the screw (1) secure the Switch to the Bracket. 2. Route the Compiler Entrance Sensor harness through the opening in the frame and con-
3. Reconnect P/J1075 to the Switch. nect P/J1052 connector.
4. Reinstall the Bracket to the Finisher frame, and use the screw (1) to secure it to the frame. 3. Install the screws (2) and secure the Compiler Entrance Sensor Bracket.
5. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly. 4. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.31 Eject Paddle Home Sensor 3. Reinstall the Eject Bracket Assembly.
Removal 6. Reinstall the Upper Rear Cover.
WARNING 7. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer.
2. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until it stops.
7. Remove the Eject Paddle Motor (REP 15.2.20).
NOTE: Do not remove the Motor from the Bracket.
8. Remove the Eject Paddle Home Sensor (Figure 1).

remove the Sensor.
Figure 1 Remove the Eject Paddle Home Sensor
Replacement
1. Position the Eject Paddle Home Sensor into the cutout in the Motor Bracket.
2. Reinstall the Eject Paddle Motor.

REP 15.2.32 Eject Motor 2. Reinstall the Motor Bracket onto the Finisher frame, making sure to loop the free end of
the Eject Motor Drive Belt over the Motor shaft pulley. Use the screws (2) to secure the
Parts List on PL 18.19 Eject Motor Bracket to the Finisher frame, but do not tighten the screws at this time.
Removal 3. Push down slightly on the Eject Motor, to apply tension to the Drive Belt, and hold the
WARNING Motor down while tightening the screws (2) securing the Bracket to the frame.
4. Reconnect P/J1091.
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 5. Reinstall the Harness Bracket to the Finisher frame, and use the screws (3) to secure it to
the frame.
6. Route the wire harnesses through the clips that run the length of the Harness Bracket.
8. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer.
4. Remove the Eject Motor (Figure 1).
1. Free the wire harnesses that run the length of the Harness Bracket.
2. Remove the screws (3) securing the Harness Bracket to the Finisher frame, and
remove the Bracket.
4. Remove the screws (2) securing the Eject Motor Bracket to the Finisher frame.
5. Slip the Motor shaft pulley free of the Eject Motor Drive Belt, and remove the Bracket
and Motor. Remove the screws (2) securing the Eject Motor to the Motor Bracket,
and remove the Motor.
Figure 1 Remove the Eject Motor
Replacement
1. Position the Eject Motor against the Eject Motor Bracket. Use the screws (2) to secure the
Motor to the Bracket.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.2.33 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor
Removal
WARNING
7. Remove the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (Figure 1).
1. Remove the E ring securing the One Way Gear to the Offset Cam Assembly, and
remove the Gear.
2. Remove the E ring securing the Rear Offset Cam Assembly Bearing, and remove
the Bearing.
3. Remove the Offset Cam Assembly from the Eject Bracket.
4. Remove the E ring securing the Drive Gear, and remove the Gear.
5. Remove the two Idler Gears.
6. Remove the screws (3) securing the Eject Clamp Offset Motor, and remove the Figure 1 Remove the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor
Motor from the Eject Bracket Assembly.
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Offset Motor into the Eject Bracket Assembly, and use the
screws (3) to secure the Motor.
2. Reinstall the two idler Gears.
3. Reinstall the Drive Gear, and use an E ring to secure the Gear.
4. Reinstall the Offset Cam Assembly, with the Actuator toward the inside wall of the Eject
Bracket, into the Eject Bracket Assembly.
5. Reinstall the bearings to both ends of the Offset Cam Assembly Shaft.
6. Reinstall an E ring to the short end of the Offset Cam Assembly Shaft.
7. Reinstall the One Way Gear to the end of the Offset Cam Assembly Shaft, and use an E
ring to secure the Gear to the Shaft.
8. Reinstall the Eject Bracket Assembly.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.3.1 Finisher REP 15.3.2 Stapler Door Assembly
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Move the Finisher away from the printer. 2. Remove the Stapler Door Assembly (Figure 1).
3. Disconnect the Finisher (Figure 1). 1. Open the Stapler Door.
1. Remove the thumb screw from the end of the Docking Rail Assembly, and pull the 2. Remove the C-Clip securing the top hinge.
Finisher free from the Docking Rail Assembly. 3. Lift and remove the Stapler Door.
2. Disconnect the Finisher IOT Connector from the rear of the printer. Replacement
3. Roll the Finisher away from the printer.
1. Reinstall the Stapler Door in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
1. Move the Finisher to within 12 inches (304.8 mm) of the printer.
2. Reinstall the Docking Rail Assembly under the printer.
3. Secure the Docking Rail Assembly with the thumb screw.
4. Reconnect the Finisher IOT Connector to the printer.
5. Push the Finisher in against the printer, making sure that the Docking pin on the printer is
aligned with the Docking Plate locating hole on the Finisher.
Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Door Assembly
Figure 1 Disconnect the Finisher

REP 15.3.3 Stapler Cover Assembly REP 15.3.4 Decurler Door Assembly
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5). 2. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (Figure 1). 1. Open the Decurler Door Assembly.
1. Open the Stapler Door Assembly. 2. Remove the C-clip securing the bottom hinge.
2. Remove the three screws securing the Cover Assembly. 3. Lift and remove the Decurler Door Assembly.
3. Lift and pull to remove the Stapler Cover Assembly. Replacement
Replacement 1. Reinstall the Decurler Door Assembly in the reverse order of removal.
1. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Door Assembly

Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly

manuals4you.com
REP 15.3.5 Mailbox Door Assembly REP 15.3.6 Left Lower Cover
Parts List on PL 18.2 Parts List on 18.2
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly (Figure 1). 2. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until the Finisher stops.
1. Open the Mailbox Door Assembly. 3. Remove the Left Lower Cover (Figure 1).
2. Remove the C-clip securing the top hinge. 1. Remove the two screws securing the Left Lower Cover.
3. Lift and remove the Mailbox Door Assembly. 2. Remove the Left Lower Cover.
1. Reinstall the Mailbox Door Assembly in the reverse order of removal. 1. Replace the Left Lower Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly Figure 1 Remove the Left Lower Cover

REP 15.3.7 Rear Upper Cover REP 15.3.8 IOT Connector Cover
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Figure 1). 2. Remove the IOT Connector Cover (Figure 1).
1. Remove the three screws securing the Rear Upper Cover. 1. Remove the rear left Caster Cap.
2. Pull out while lifting, to remove the Rear Upper Cover. 2. Remove the one screw securing the cover.
Replacement 3. Disengage the wire harness and the IOT Connector support link from the cover to
remove the IOT Connector Cover.
1. Ensure that the tabs of the Rear Upper Cover are snapped onto the ledge of the Rear
Lower Cover before installing the three screws. Replacement
1. Replace the IOT Connector Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Rear Upper Cover

Figure 1 Remove the IOT Connector Cover

manuals4you.com
REP 15.3.9 Finisher PWB Cover REP 15.3.10 Left Upper Cover
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until the Finisher stops. 2. Remove the Left Upper Cover (Figure 1).
3. Remove the Left Lower Cover (REP 15.3.6). 1. Remove the two screws securing the cover.
4. Remove the Finisher PWB Cover (Figure 1). 2. Remove the Left Upper Cover.
1. Remove the 12 screws securing the Finisher PWB Cover. Replacement
2. Remove the Finisher PWB Cover. 1. Replace the Left Upper Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
1. Replace the Finisher PWB Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Left Upper Cover
Figure 1 Remove the Finisher PWB Cover

REP 15.3.11 Top Cover REP 15.3.12 Decurler Top Cover
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). 2. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until the Finisher stops.
3. Remove the Top Cover (Figure 1). 3. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (Figure 1).
1. Open the Mailbox Door. 1. Remove the two screws on the left side of the cover.
2. Loosen the one screw at the front of the cover. 2. Remove the one screw on the rear side of the cover.
3. Loosen the screw at the rear and the screw at the top inside. 3. Remove the Decurler Top Cover.
4. Lift to remove the Top Cover. Replacement
Replacement 1. Replace the Decurler Top Cover in the reverse order of removal.
1. Replace the Top Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Top Cover

Figure 1 Remove the Top Cover

manuals4you.com
REP 15.3.13 Decurler Rear Cover REP 15.3.14 Decurler Inner Cover
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Move the Finisher away from the printer until the Finisher stops. 2. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12).
3. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). 3. Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (Figure 1).
4. Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (Figure 1). 1. Open the Decurler Door.
1. Remove the three screws securing the Decurler Rear Cover. 2. Remove the 6 Knob.
2. Disengage the wire harness from the cover at the bottom, as you remove the 3. Remove the two screws securing the Decurler Inner Cover.
Decurler Rear Cover. 4. Disconnect the connector to the Decurler Door Interlock Switch as you remove the
Replacement Decurler Inner Cover.
1. Reinstall the Decurler Rear Cover in the reverse order of removal. Replacement
1. Reinstall the Decurler Inner Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Rear Cover

Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Inner Cover

REP 15.3.15 Rear Lower Cover REP 15.3.16 Stapler Assembly
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). 2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3).
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (Figure 1). 3. Reach in from the side and pull the Stapler Assembly to the front of the Finisher, if
1. Remove the three screws securing the Rear Lower Cover. required.
2. Snap off the Rear Panel securing the wire harness to the cover. 4. Remove the Stapler Assembly (Figure 1).
3. Lift up and remove the Rear Lower Cover. 1. Disconnect P/J1092 from the Stapler Assembly.
Replacement 2. Release the harness clip from the side of the Stapler Assembly.
3. Observe the orientation of the scribe lines so that the Stapler Assembly can be repo-
1. Place the cover back into position and secure it with the three screws.
sitioned correctly during the replacement.
2. Align the wire harness into the cutout of the Rear Panel and snap the Rear Panel into
4. Remove the two screws securing the Stapler Assembly to the Slider Bracket, and
place.
remove the Stapler Assembly.
5. Release the wire harness from the harness clip near the rear of the Stapler Assem-
bly.
6. Remove the screw to remove the green ground wire.
Figure 1 Remove the Rear Lower Cover
Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly

manuals4you.com
Replacement REP 15.3.17 Stapler Position Sensors
1. Position the Stapler Assembly near the Slider Bracket. Parts List on PL 18.18
2. Route the wire harness through the harness clip near the rear of the Stapler Assembly.
Removal
3. Install the screw to secure the green ground wire to the Stapler Assembly.
4. Reinstall the Stapler Assembly onto the Slider Bracket, making sure to slide the rear tab
WARNING
of the Stapler Assembly into the cutout on the Slider Bracket. To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
5. Position the Stapler assembly to align with the scribe lines as observed during the the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
removal, and then use two screws to secure the Stapler Assembly to the Rail. 1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord.
6. Reinstall the harness clip to the side of the Stapler Assembly. 2. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer (REP 15.3.1).
7. Reconnect P/J 1092 to the Stapler Assembly. 3. Remove the Stapler Cover (REP 15.3.3).
8. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). 4. Remove the Rear Lower Cover REP 15.3.15.
9. Check the Staple Position Adjustment (ADJ 15.3.1). 5. Remove the Stapler Assembly (REP 15.3.16).
7. At the rear of the Finisher, prepare to remove the Stapler Position Sensors by rotating the
Stapler Position Motor Drive Belt as you slip the Belt off of the Drive Pulley.
8. Remove the Stapler Position Sensors (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the three connectors from the Stapler Sensors, and free the wire har-
nesses from the harness clip that is located on the Stapler Rail.
2. Remove two screws at the rear of the Finisher and two screws at the front of the Fin-
isher that secure the Stapler Rail to the Finisher frame, and remove the Rail.
3. Place the Stapler Rail on a flat work surface.
4. Remove the screw that secures the sensor bracket of the sensor you are changing.
Remove the Bracket along with the attached sensor.
5. Press in and release the Sensor latch that is securing the Sensor to the Bracket, and
remove the Sensor.

2. Reinstall the Sensor Bracket onto the Stapler Rail, and use one screw to secure the
Bracket to the Rail.
3. Reinstall the Stapler Rail into the Finisher frame. Use four screws to secure the Rail to
the frame.
4. Reconnect the three connectors to the three sensors.
5. Route the wire harness through the harness clips that are located on the Stapler Rail.
6. Rotate the Stapler Transport Motor Drive Belt as you slip the Belt onto the Drive Pulley.
7. Reinstall the Stapler Assembly.
9. Reinstall the Stapler Cover.
10. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer
Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Position Sensors
Replacement
1. Position the Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.3.18 Stapler Rail Belt
Removal
WARNING
2. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer (REP 15.3.1).
3. Remove the Stapler Cover (REP 15.3.3).
4. Remove the Rear Lower Cover REP 15.3.15.
5. Remove the Stapler Assembly (REP 15.3.16).
7. At the rear of the Finisher, prepare to remove the Stapler Position Sensors by rotating the
Stapler Position Motor Drive Belt as you slip the Belt off of the Drive Pulley.
8. Remove the Stapler Rail (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the three connectors from the Stapler Sensors, and free the wire har-
nesses from the harness clip that is located on the Stapler Rail.
2. Remove two screws at the rear of the Finisher and two screws at the front of the
Finisher that secure the Stapler Rail to the Finisher frame, and remove the Rail.
3. Place the Stapler Rail on a flat work surface.
Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Rail
9. Remove the Stapler Rail Belt (Figure 2).

1. Remove the two screws securing the Tension Cover to the Rail, and remove the
Cover.

2. Remove the ten screws securing the Upper Rail to the Lower Rail, and remove the 3. Reinstall the Belt Clamp onto the Slider Bracket, and use one screw to secure the Clamp.
Upper Rail. Ensure that the tension idler engages the belt.
3. Remove the screw securing the Belt Clamp to the Slider Bracket. 4. Push out on the Tension Bracket so that the springs are stretched, and reinstall the Upper
4. Disengage the Belt from the Lower Rail. Rail onto the Lower Rail.
5. Remove the Belt from the Belt Clamp. 5. Reach under the Lower Rail and position the Belt so the back (non-ribbed side) of the Belt
rides against the Tension Roll.
6. Release the Tension Bracket.
7. Use the remaining screws to secure the Upper Rail to the Lower Rail. Ensure that the belt
moves freely without binding.
8. Reinstall the Tension Cover over the Tension Bracket, and use two screws to secure the
Cover to the Upper Rail.
9. Rotate the Drive Pulley to make sure that the Belt tracks correctly and that the Slider
Bracket moves smoothly along the Rail.
10. Reinstall the Stapler Rail into the Finisher frame. Use four screws to secure the Rail to
the frame.
11. Reconnect the P/J connectors to the sensors.
12. Route the wire harness through the harness clips that are located on the Stapler Rail.
13. Rotate the Stapler Transport Motor Drive Belt as you slip the Belt onto the Drive Pulley.
14. Reinstall the Stapler Assembly.
16. Reinstall the Stapler Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the Stapler Rail Belt
Replacement
1. Ensure that the belt is positioned as shown in the illustration and reinstall the Belt Clamp
onto the Belt.
2. Reinstall the Belt on the Lower Rail.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.3.19 Stapler Position Motor REP 15.3.20 Mailbox Drive Motor
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). 3. Remove the Mailbox Drive Motor (Figure 1).
4. Remove the Stapler Position Motor (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the P/J1021 from the connector on the motor PWB.
1. Open the harness clamp securing the wire harness and disconnect the motor con- 2. Remove the two screws at the bottom of the motor bracket.
nector P/J1089. 3. While holding the motor bracket, remove the top screw from the bracket and remove
2. Remove the two screws securing the motor to the motor bracket. the Mailbox Drive Motor.
3. Disengage and remove the belt. Replacement
4. Remove the Stapler Position Motor. 1. Engage the teeth of the motor gear onto the Mailbox Drive Belt and ensure that the motor
Replacement shaft is installed into the hole in the frame.
1. Install the Stapler Position Motor onto the motor bracket. 2. Secure the motor bracket with the three screws.
2. Place the drive belt onto the gear. 3. Rotate the motor in order to ensure that the drives are engaged correctly.
3. Bring the motor into position and engage the belt and the motor drive gear. 4. Reconnect P/J1021.
4. Secure the motor with the screws.
Figure 1 Remove the Mailbox Drive Motor

Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Position Motor

REP 15.3.21 Mailbox Drive Belt
Removal
WARNING
3. Remove the SCT Exit Cover (PL 18.3).
4. Remove the Mailbox Drive Motor (REP 15.3.20).
5. Remove the Mailbox Drive Belt (Figure 1).
1. Remove the two screws securing the Belt Idler Bracket.
2. Remove the Mailbox Drive Belt.
Figure 2 Install the Mailbox Drive Belt
2. Reinstall the Belt Idler Bracket and secure with the two screws.
3. Reinstall the Mailbox Drive Motor (REP 15.3.20).
4. Reinstall the SCT Exit Cover (PL 18.3).
5. Reinstall the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7).
Figure 1 Remove the Mailbox Drive Belt
Replacement
1. Route the Mailbox Drive Belt onto the gears per the illustration (Figure 2).

manuals4you.com
REP 15.3.23 Docking Interlock Switch REP 15.3.25 Decurler Door Interlock Switch
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Move the Finisher away from the printer until the Finisher stops. 2. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12).
3. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). 3. Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14).
4. Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). 4. Remove the Decurler Door Interlock Switch (Figure 1).
5. Remove the appropriate Docking Interlock Switch (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector, then push in the tabs to remove the Decurler Door Inter-
1. Disconnect the Docking Switch Connector, P/J664 or P/J665. lock Switch from the Decurler Inner Cover.
2. Remove the four screws securing the Entrance Lower Chute. Replacement
3. Disengage the switch harness from the harness clamps. 1. Reinstall the Decurler Door Interlock Switch in the reverse order of removal.
4. Remove the two screws to remove the appropriate Docking Interlock Switch.
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Docking Interlock Switch in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Door Interlock Switch
Figure 1 Remove the Docking Interlock Switches

REP 15.3.28 Finisher PWB REP 15.3.29 Finisher PWB EPROM
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
2. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until it stops. 2. Observe the ESD procedures.
3. Remove the Left Lower Cover (REP 15.3.6). 3. Remove the Finisher PWB (REP 15.3.28).
NOTE: Observe the ESD procedures while removing the Finisher PWB. 4. Remove the EPROM.
Replacement
4. Remove the Finisher PWB (Figure 1).
1. Reinstall the EPROM in the reverse order of removal.
1. Remove the Finisher PWB Cover.
2. Disconnect the 18 connectors from the Finisher PWB. Remove the harness from the
harness holder and move the harness lines away.
3. Remove eight screws securing the Finisher PWB.
4. Grasp the PWB at the bottom and move the bottom away first to remove the Finisher
PWB.
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Finisher PWB in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Finisher PWB

manuals4you.com
REP 15.3.30 Vertical LED and Sensor 1. Remove the four screws securing the chute to the frame at the front and at the
rear.
Parts List on PL 18.22 2. Rotate the chute to the right side to access the screw securing the sensor.
Removal 3. Remove the screw.
WARNING 4. Remove the Vertical Sensor.
a. Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7).
b. SCT Exit Cover (PL 18.3).
c. Top Cover (REP 15.3.11).
2. Remove the Mailbox Door (REP 15.3.5).
3. Remove the Vertical LED (Figure 1).
3. Remove the LED Sensor screw.
Figure 2 Remove the Vertical Sensor
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Vertical LED and Sensor in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Vertical LED
4. Remove the Vertical Sensor (Figure 2).

Removal
WARNING
a. Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7)
b. Top Cover (REP 15.3.11)
c. Left Upper Cover (REP 15.3.10)
2. Remove the Mailbox Drive Belt from the pulley.
Figure 2 Remove the Bin Tray Cover
4. Remove the Panel Assembly (Numbered Panel) (PL 18.2 item 25).
5. Remove the Bin Tray 1 (Figure 3).
2. Lift up on Bin Tray 1 to snap the pawl free from the gate, then remove Bin Tray 1.
3. Remove the Bin Tray Cover (Figure 2).

1. Remove the screw from the Vertical LED.
3. Remove the screws (3) from the Bin Tray Cover.
4. Remove the Bin Tray Cover.

manuals4you.com
REP 15.3.32 Bin Trays 2 - 10
Removal
WARNING
NOTE: This page describes how to disassemble Bin Tray 2.
NOTE: To remove any Bin Tray (n), first remove Bin Trays 1 to (n-1).
1. Remove the Bin Tray 1 (REP 15.3.31).

2. Remove the Panel Assembly (Numbered Panel) (PL 18.2 item 25).
3. Remove the Bin Tray 2 (Figure 1).
1. Disconnect the connector (if required).
3. Lift up on Bin Tray 2 to snap the pawl free from the gate, then remove Bin Tray 2.
Figure 3 Remove Bin Tray 1
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Bin Tray 1 in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Bin Tray 2
Installation
1. Reinstall the Bin Trays 2 - 10 in the reverse order of removal.

manuals4you.com
ADJ 15.3.1 Staple Position Adjustment 2. Using the scribe lines as a reference, move the Stapler Assembly to achieve the
desired dimension. Dimension A changes in increments of approximately 4 mm. To
Purpose increase the dimension A, move the stapler in the direction of the (+) sign. To
The purpose is to ensure that the staples are in the correct position. decrease the dimension A, move the stapler in the direction of the (-) sign (Figure 2).
3. Tighten the two screws.
Check 4. Perform the check again.
1. Run a copy set into the Finisher in the staple mode.
2. Check the staple position (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Adjust the Staple position (Dimension A)

Figure 1 Check the Staple Position
Adjustment
3. To change dimension A, perform Dimension A adjustment. Dimension B adjustment
4. To change dimension B, perform Dimension B adjustment.
Adjustment WARNING
Dimension A adjustment To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
WARNING 1. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7).
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 3. Adjust the position of the Compiler Tray (Figure 3).
1. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). 1. Loosen the screw.
2. Adjust the position of the Stapler Assembly (Figure 2). 2. Using the scribe lines as a reference, move the Compiler Tray to achieve the desired
1. Loosen the two screws. dimension. Dimension B changes in increments of approximately 6 mm. To increase
the dimension B, move the tray in the direction of the (+) sign. To decrease the
dimension B, move the tray in the direction of the (-) sign (Figure 3).
3. Tighten the screw.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-131 ADJ 15.3.1
ADJ 15.3.2 Stacker Tray Level
Purpose
The purpose of this adjustment is to ensure the Stacker Tray Carriage is level with the frame of
the Stacker Tray Assembly.
Check
1. Lower the Stacker Tray to the bottom of the Stacker Tray Assembly by supporting the
Stacker Tray with one hand then pull to separate the Dog Clutch Gear from the Dog
Clutch Pulley.
2. Check that the Stacker Tray Carriage is touching the Stacker Tray Assembly Tie Plate on
the front and rear of the Assembly (Figure 1).
3. If both ends of the Stacker Tray Carriage are touching the Tie Plate, the check is good.
Figure 3 Adjust the Staple position (Dimension B)
4. Perform the check again.
Figure 1 Checking the Stacker Tray Carriage
Adjustment
NOTE: If entering this procedure from REP 15.2.9 Stacker Tray Drive Belts or REP 15.2.10
Stacker Tray, proceed to Step 4.
3. Support the Stacker Tray with one hand and pull the Dog Clutch Gear away from the Dog
Clutch Pulley and lower the Tray to the bottom of the Stacker Tray Assembly (PL 18.22).
4. Remove the screws (2) from the front Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp and remove the
Clamp (Figure 2).

ADJ 15.3.1, ADJ 15.3.2 8d-132 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
5. Adjust the Tray level by pulling the Belt Clamp off the front Drive Belt and reinstalling the
Clamp up or down the Belt to move the front end of the Stacker Tray Carriage up or down
in order to be level with the rear end of the Stacker Tray Carriage.
6. Install the Drive Belt and Belt Clamp into the Tray bracket.
7. Check the adjustment and repeat step 5 and step 6 if necessary.
8. Install the screws (2) to secure the front Belt Clamp to the front Drive Belt.
9. Return to REP 15.2.9 or REP 15.2.10 or reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP
15.2.2).
11. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Figure 2 Leveling the Stacker Tray

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-133 ADJ 15.3.2
ADJ 15.3.2 8d-134 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PL 18.1 Finisher Accessory
1 – Finisher Assembly (Not Spared)
(REP 15.3.1)
2 015K35862 Docking Rail
5 029E21610 Docking Pin
7 – Vcci Bracket (Not Spared)
8 – Thumb Screw (Not Spared)
9 015K31860 Rail Bracket
10 015K31871 Plate (Tray Module Left)
11 032E10210 Guide (Tray Module Right)
13 – Bracket (Mailbox Left) (P/O PL 18.1
Item 2)
14 – Bracket (Mailbox Right) (P/O PL
18.1 Item 2)
16 – Docking Rail (P/O PL 18.1 Item 2)
17 – Rail Assembly (Not Spared)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-135 PL 18.1
PL 18.2 Covers - Left, Front
1 – Finisher (REF: PL 18.4) (Not
Spared)
2 – Finisher PWB Cover (Not Spared)
(REP 15.3.9)
3 802E13930 Left Lower Cover (REP 15.3.6)
4 048K77410 Decurler Door Assembly (REP
15.3.4)
5 – Decurler Door (P/O PL 18.2 Item 4)
6 – Magnet Plate (P/O PL 18.2 Item 4)
7 – Hinge (P/O PL 18.2 Item 4)
10 802K14650 Stapler Door Assembly (REP
15.3.2)
11 – Stapler Cover (P/O PL 18.2 Item
10)
12 830E59990 Magnet Plate
13 048E65721 Stapler Cover Assembly (REP
15.3.3)
14 – Stapler Cover (P/O PL 18.2 Item
13)
17 802K14660 Mailbox Door Assembly (REP
15.3.5)
18 – Mailbox Door (P/O PL 18.2 Item
17)
19 – Wrench (P/O PL 18.2 Item 17)
20 892E13300 Label
22 891E73451 Label
23 048E66520 Left Upper Cover (REP 15.3.10)
24 048K77971 Top Cover (REP 15.3.11)
25 802K05082 Panel Assembly
26 048E66560 Panel

PL 18.2 8d-136 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PL 18.3 Covers - Right, Rear
1 – Finisher (REF: PL 18.4) (Not
Spared)
2 048E65740 Decurler Rear Cover (REP
15.3.13)
3 802E13940 IOT Connector Cover (REP 15.3.8)
4 – Rear Panel (Not Spared)
5 802E13950 Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7)
6 802E13960 Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15)
7 050K41310 Single Catch Tray Assembly (REP
15.1.17)
8 – Single Catch Tray (P/O PL 18.3
Item 7)
9 130K60600 SCT Full Sensor
11 162K60401 Wire Harness (Finisher PWB-IOT)
12 830E34990 Support Link (Left)
13 830E35000 Support Link (Right)
11)
15 048E66571 Mailbox Rear Lower Cover
16 802E13990 SCT Exit Front Cover
17 802E14000 SCT Exit Cover
18 802E14010 SCT Exit Rear Cover

PL 18.4 Finisher Components
1 – Stapler (Not Spared)
2 – PWB Chassis (Not Spared)
3 160K67951 Finisher PWB (REP 15.3.28)
4 – Decurler (Not Spared) (REP
15.1.1)
5 – Cabinet (Not Spared)
6 – Nut (Not Spared) (4 Places)
7 417W30349 Caster (4 Places)
8 021E96430 Caster Cap (4 Places)
9 050K41320 Stacker
10 – Mailbox (Not Spared)
11 – Front Bracket (Not Spared)
12 – Rear Bracket (Not Spared)
13 – Magnet Bracket (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 18.5 Decurler Cover
1 003K85570 Knob Assembly
2 003K83211 Knob
4 003E46501 Handle
5 003K85101 Hinge
6 048K77420 Decurler Inner Cover (REP
15.3.14)
7 – Decurler Inner Cover (P/O PL 18.5
Item 6)
8 110E97990 Decurler Door Interlock Switch
(REP 15.3.25)
9 048E65730 Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12)
10 809E02991 Spring

PL 18.6 Decurler Chute, PWB
1 – Entrance Lower Chute (Not
Spared)
2 – Entrance Lower Chute (P/O PL
18.6 Item 1)
3 – Wire Harness (Decurler PWB-Fin-
isher PWB) (P/O PL 18.6 Item 1)
4 – Docking Interlock Switch 1, Switch
2 (P/O PL 18.6 Item 1) (REP
15.3.23)
5 054E14510 Chute
6 054K13920 Exit Lower Baffle Assembly
7 – Exit Lower Baffle (P/O PL 18.6
Item 6)
8 059K08590 Pinch Roll (5 Places) (REP 15.1.6
REP 15.1.5)
9 003E36290 Knob
10 – Label (5) (P/O PL 18.6 Item 6)
11 – Upper Chute (Not Spared)
12 105E09160 Static Eliminator
14 160K67991 Decurler PWB (REP 15.1.7)

manuals4you.com
PL 18.7 Decurler Roll
1 006E61320 Cam Drive Shaft (REP 15.1.8)
2 007E54990 Gear (32)
3 007E55010 Gear (28/33)
4 007E45131 Gear (32)
5 007E55030 Gear (52/56)
6 007E55040 Gear (20)
7 015K28141 Idler Gear Assembly
8 007E45091 Gear (32)
11 008E93390 Cam (REP 15.1.3)
12 011K94401 Front Lever
13 011K94411 Rear Lever
14 022K57120 Decurler Roll 1 (Upper) (REP
15.1.2)
15 022K57130 Decurler Roll 2 (Lower) (REP
15.1.2)
16 062E98711 Reflector (REP 15.1.3)
17 121K83981 Decurler Cam Clutch
18 – Sensor Bracket (Not Spared)
19 130E82530 Decurler Cam Position Sensor
20 809E14570 Spring

PL 18.8 Decurler Transport Roll
1 007E54960 Gear (38)
2 – Torque Limiter Gear (Not Spared)
(REP 15.1.9)
3 007E54980 Gear (16)
4 007E54990 Gear (32)
5 007E55000 Gear (16)
6 007E45091 Gear (32)
7 407W08220 Gear (20)
8 007E54970 Gear (34)
9 022E19660 Decurler Drive Roll 2 (REP 15.1.10)
10 022E19670 Decurler Drive Roll 1 (REP 15.1.11)
11 022K61500 Decurler Entrance Roll (REP
15.1.12)
12 022K51621 Decurler Exit Roll (REP 15.1.13)
13 – Motor Shaft (Not Spared)
14 127K24901 Decurler Stepper Motor (REP
15.1.4)
17 – Wheel (Not Spared)
18 – Stopper (One-Way Clutch) (Not
Spared)
19 003E48920 Stopper
20 604K13030 Finisher/Sorter Mailbox Gear
Repair Kit

manuals4you.com
PL 18.9 Mailbox - Stapler Entrance
Roll
2 005E15360 Friction Clutch
3 007E62850 Decurler Gear
4 007E62860 Idler Pulley
5 009E72520 Spring
7 020E33850 Pulley (21)
8 022K61450 Finisher Transport Roll 1 (REP
15.1.21)
9 022K61460 Finisher Transport Roll 2 (REP
15.1.21)
10 – Motor Bracket (Not Spared)
13 015K44950 Transmission Gear Assembly
16 020K09460 One Way Pulley (23)
17 020K98320 One Way Pulley (26)
18 423W87254 Finisher Drive Belt
21 015K44960 Tension Pulley
22 – Stopper Collar (Not Spared)
25 499W14524 Idler Pulley
26 127K24952 Finisher Transport Motor (REP
15.1.15)
29 423W30754 Compiler Drive Belt

PL 18.10 Mailbox Entrance Roll, Sct
Exit Roll
2 005E15350 Friction Clutch
3 020E33840 Pulley (23)
4 022K61470 Mailbox Entrance Roll
5 023E13160 Mailbox Drive Belt (Not Spared)
(REP 15.3.21)
6 015K48190 Belt Tension Bracket
7 – Tension Pulley (Not Spared)
9 809E14980 Spring
11 – Stopper Collar (Not Spared)
12 022K61490 SCT Exit Roll (REP 15.1.20)
13 127K37840 Mailbox Drive Motor Assembly
(REP 15.3.20)
13)
15 – Mailbox Drive Motor (P/O PL 18.10
Item 13)
16 7E56970 Pulley (P/O PL 18.10 Item 13)
18 – Belt (P/O PL 18.10 Item 13)
22 499W17061 Idler Pulley
23 499W14123 Pulley
24 162K47500 Wire Harness (Motor Mailbox PWB)

manuals4you.com
PL 18.11 Mailbox - Gate, PWB,
Interlock Switch
1 – Hinge (Not Spared)
2 012E09860 Link (Finisher Gate)
3 012E09870 Link (SCT Gate)
4 – Switch Bracket (Not Spared)
5 110E97990 Stapler Door Interlock Switch, Mail-
box Door Interlock Switch
7 121E87250 Magnet Catch (3 Places)
10 050E16500 Mailbox Gate
11 – E-Ring (Not Spared)
12 050E16510 Finisher Gate
13 160K67960 Mailbox PWB
14 121K14541 Mailbox Solenoid, Finisher Gate
Solenoid

PL 18.12 Mailbox - Stapler Entrance
Chute
1 032E15690 Chute Guide
2 054K16800 Entrance Upper Baffle
3 – Entrance Upper Baffle (P/O PL
18.12 Item 2)
4 003E36290 Knob
5 059K00521 Pinch Roll (8 Places)
6 – Label 7 (P/O PL 18.12 Item 2)
7 – Entrance Lower Chute (Not
Spared)
8 054K16810 Finisher Entrance Baffle Assembly
9 054K16790 Finisher Entrance Baffle 1
10 054K16820 Finisher Entrance Baffle 2
11 – Finisher Entrance Baffle 1 (P/O PL
18.12 Item 8)
12 891E73431 Label 8 (P/O PL 18.12 Item 9)
13 – Finisher Entrance Baffle 2 (P/O PL
18.12 Item 10)

manuals4you.com
PL 18.13 Mailbox Chute
1 – SCT Exit Lower Chute (Not
Spared)
2 – Bin Tray Lower Chute (Not Spared)
3 162K60451 Wire Harness (Sensor-Mailbox
PWB)
4 054K16780 Mailbox Transport Baffle Assembly
8 – Knob (P/O PL 18.13 Item 4)
10 127K31260 10-SCT Exit Upper Chute
11 059K08590 Lower Baffle Pinch Rolls (4 Places)
(REP 15.1.20)
12 130E80100 SCT Exit Sensor (REP 15.1.19)
13 130K94740 Mailbox Entrance Sensor
14 105E98690 Static Eliminator (REP 15.1.18)
15 160K53431 Mailbox Vertical Sensor (REP
15.3.30)
17 – Mailbox Transport Baffle (P/O PL
18.13 Item 4)

PL 18.14 Stapler - Exit Chute
2 006K83590 Exit Roll (REP 15.2.25)
3 006K83620 Reverse Paddle Drive Shaft
6 054K09360 Lower Exit Chute Assembly (REP
15.2.26)
7 054K09462 Lower Exit Chute
9 – Compiler Paddle (P/O PL 18.14
Item 6) (REP 15.2.26)
10 – Paddle Drive Shaft (P/O PL 18.14
Item 6)
13 423W23354 Compiler Paddle Belt
14 054K16770 Upper Exit Chute Assembly (REP
15.2.24)
15 – Upper Exit Chute (P/O PL 18.14
Item 14)
16 – Plate Spring (P/O PL 18.14 Item
14)
17 105K18810 Static Eliminator
18 407W08174 Gear
20 423W24953 Belt
21 020E33860 Pulley
22 499W15121 Pulley
24 130K94740 Compiler Entrance Sensor (REP
15.2.30)
25 – Tie Plate (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 18.15 Stapler-Compiler
1 009E72530 Spring
2 009E72550 Spring
3 012E94950 Link
4 013E13600 Bearing
5 – Support (Not Spared)
6 – Harness Holder (Not Spared)
7 – Registration Guide (Not Spared)
8 038K83030 End Guide
10 – Eject Cover (Not Spared)
11 050K41330 Compiler Tray Assembly (REF: PL
18.16)
12 054K09382 Compiler Exit Cover (REP 15.2.22)
13 110K10710 Switch Assembly
14 – Switch Bracket (P/O PL 18.15 Item
13)
15 110E94510 Compiler Cover Safety Switch (1
Place), Compiler Cover Interlock
Switch (2 Places)
18 110K08140 Unload While Run Switch (REP
15.2.29)
19 121K13070 Compiler Tray Solenoid (REP
15.2.1)
20 127K23320 End Wall Motor (REP 15.2.16)

PL 18.16 Compiler Tray Components
1 – Compiler Tray (Not Spared)
2 038K83340 Tamper
3 – Actuator (Not Spared)
4 – Holder (Not Spared)
5 – Belt Clip (Not Spared)
6 423W21053 Tamper Drive Belt (REP 15.2.15)
7 015K28290 Tension Pulley Assembly
10 005E91640 Flange
11 009E72520 Spring
12 127K20871 Tamper Motor (REP 15.2.11)
14 004E08030 Damper
18 130E82530 Tamper Home Sensor (REP
15.2.12)
19 130E82540 Compiler Paper Sensor (REP
15.2.13), End Wall Open Sensor
(REP 15.2.16)
21 120E99480 Actuator (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 18.17 Stapler Accessory
1 029K91881 Stapler Assembly (REP
15.3.16,ADJ 15.3.1)
2 – Stapler Housing (P/O PL 18.17
Item 1)
3 050K41290 Staple Cartridge
4 015K45020 Stapler Rail Assembly (REF: PL
18.18)
5 – Harness Arm (Not Spared)
6 127K18880 Stapler Position Motor Assembly
6)
8 127K16600 Stapler Position Motor (REP
15.3.19)
10 423W46753 Belt

PL 18.18 Stapler Rail Component
1 015K28452 Stapler Rail
2 – Slider (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1)
3 – Upper Bracket (P/O PL 18.18 Item
1)
4 – Lower Bracket (P/O PL 18.18 Item
1)
5 005E91660 Flange
6 020E22210 Pulley
7 020E22220 Pulley
8 – Belt Clamp (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1)
9 023E15560 Stapler Rail Belt (REP 15.3.18)
11 – Tension Pulley (P/O PL 18.18 Item
1)
12 – Rear Spring (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1)
13 – Front Spring (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1)
14 130K55360 Stapler Position Sensor (Front Cor-
ner, Front Straight, Rear Straight) (3
Places) (REP 15.3.17)
15 – Tension Cover (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 18.19 Offset And Set Eject
1 006K21000 Eject Clamp Pinch Roll And
Reverse Paddle (REF: PL 18.20)
2 006K83642 Eject Paddle Eject Roll (REP
15.2.21)
3 007E45170 Gear
4 011K93650 Offset Lever
5 011K93870 Eject Clamp Lever
6 013E85870 Bearing
7 013P60796 Bearing
8 015K89062 Eject Clamp/Offset Cam (REF:PL
18.21)
13 059E92070 Cam Follower
14 120E99651 Eject Paddle Actuator
15 127K20930 Eject Motor Assembly
15)
17 127K20900 Eject Motor (REP 15.2.32)
18 127K29540 Eject Paddle Motor Assembly
19 – Eject Paddle Motor (P/O PL 18.19
Item 18) (REP 15.2.20)
20 130E82540 Eject Paddle Home Sensor (REP
15.2.31), Offset Home Sensor
(REP 15.2.18)
22 130E82530 Eject Clamp Sensor (REP 15.2.17)
24 499W15123 Pulley
25 423W25953 Eject Paddle Drive Belt (REP
15.2.20)
26 423W46753 Eject Motor Belt

PL 18.20 Eject And Paddle
Components
1 – Pinch Roll Shaft (Not Spared)
(REP 15.2.23)
2 048K62471 Pinch Roll Cover
3 – Pinch Spring (Not Spared)
5 022K61480 Eject Clamp Pinch Roll
7 033K92751 Reverse Paddle Assembly
9 – Paddle (P/O PL 18.20 Item 7)
10 – Paddle Drive Belt (P/O PL 18.20
Item 7) (REP 15.2.27)
11 130K87332 Stack Height Sensor Assembly
13 130E82530 Stack Height Sensor (REP
15.2.28)
16 – Lever (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 18.21 Eject And Offset
Components
1 – Eject Bracket Assembly (Not
Spared) (REP 15.2.19)
2 008K91360 Eject Clamp Cam
3 008K91370 Offset Cam
4 007K83910 One Way Gear
5 007E39910 Gear
6 407W07626 Gear
7 127K16360 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (REP
15.2.33)
9 012K93390 Clamp Up Lever
10 809E03071 Plate Spring
11 809E03080 Spring

PL 18.22 Bin Tray 1
1 160K53431 Vertical LED (REP 15.3.30)
2 802K09190 Bin Tray 1 Cover Assembly
3 – Bin Tray 1 Cover (P/O PL 18.22
Item 2)
6 038E21280 Static Eliminator
10 050K36832 Bin Tray 1 Assembly (REP
15.3.31)
11 005E83570 Collar
14 022E83451 Roll
15 – Tapping Screw (P/O PL 18.22 Item
10)
17 050E88781 Bin Tray

manuals4you.com
PL 18.23 Bin Tray 2/4/6/8
15.3.32)
2 009E64140 Spring
3 013E89540 Bearing
5 022E83451 Roll
1)
9 050K33220 Gate
10 – Static Eliminator (P/O PL 18.23
Item 1)

PL 18.24 Bin Tray 3/5/7/9
15.3.32)
2 009E64140 Spring
3 013E89540 Bearing
5 022E83451 Roll
1)
9 050K33220 Gate
11 – Static Eliminator (P/O PL 18.24
Item 1)

manuals4you.com
PL 18.25 Bin Tray 10
1 050K36801 Bin Tray 10 Assembly (REP
15.3.32)
2 005E83570 Collar
3 009E64140 Spring
4 013E89540 Bearing
6 022E83451 Roll
1)
9 050K33220 Gate

PL 18.26 Stacker Tray Drive
1 – Front Frame (Not Spared)
2 005E91640 Flange
3 020E24770 Pulley
5 – Rear Frame
6 006E70950 Shaft
7 007E62840 Dog Clutch Gear
8 809E26230 Dog Clutch Spring
10 – Tie Plate (Not Spared)
11 020E33820 Dog Clutch Pulley
12 – Guide Tray (Not Spared)
13 802E13970 Rear Inner Cover
14 802E13980 Front Inner Cover
15 127K29491 Stacker Motor Assembly
16 127K29500 Stacker Motor (REP 15.2.7)
15)
18 007K85791 Worm
20 499W14233 Pulley
21 423W25954 Belt
22 020E33830 Worm Wheel
23 – Shaft (P/O PL 18.26 Item 15)
24 – Nylon Washer (P/O PL 18.26 Item
15)
26 423W90654 Stacker Tray Drive Belt (REP
15.2.9)
27 499W14432 Pulley
28 809E27360 Spring
29 – Washer (Not Spared)

manuals4you.com
PL 18.27 Stacker Tray
1 019E31680 Belt Clamp
2 050K41330 Stacker Tray Assembly (REP
15.2.2,ADJ 15.3.2)
3 – Tray Spacer (P/O PL 18.27 Item 2)
4 – Carriage (P/O PL 18.27 Item 2)
5 048E45760 Bottom Cover
6 050E86731 Stacker Tray (REP 15.2.10)
7 – Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 18.27
Item 2)
8 130E82530 Stacker Upper Limit Sensor (REP
15.2.5), Stacker Full (Mixed Size)
Sensor (REP 15.2.4), Stacker Full
Sensor (REP 15.2.4), Stacker
Lower Limit Sensor (REP 15.2.5),
Stacker Paper Sensor (REP
15.2.10)
10 – Stacker Harness (P/O PL 18.27
Item 2)
11 809E02941 Spring

Common Hardware BX 271W28850 Dowel Pin (3 X 20)
BY – Dowel Pin (3 X 25)
BZ 271W37150 Dowel Pin (4 X 25)
C 112W27859 Screw CA – Dowel Pin (5 X 36)
G 112W29751 Screw CB – Spring Pin (2 X 12)
H 113W15551 Screw CC 285W16251 Spring Pin (2 X 12)
J 113W20457 Screw (M3 X 4) CE 354W19251 E-clip (2.5)
K 113W20657 Screw (M3 X 6) CF – E-clip (3)
L 113W20857 Screw (M3 X 8) CG 354W21254 Kl-clip (3)
M 113W21057 Screw (M3 X 10) CH – E-clip (4)
N 113W21257 Screw (M3 X 12) CJ 354W24254 Kl-clip (4)
P – Screw (M2.5 X 14) CK – E-clip (5)
R 113W21657 Screw (M3 X 16) CL – E-clip (6)
S – Screw (M3 X 4) CM 354W27254 Kl-clip (6)
T 113W27456 Screw (M3 X 4) CP 354W29254 Kl-clip (8)
X 113W28451 Screw (M3 X 14) CQ 220W24350 Flange Nut (M4)
Y 113W35657 Screw (M4 X 6) CS – Spring Pin (1.6 X 10)
AB 113W36057 Screw CT 113W35857 Screw (M4 X 8)
AE 113W37457 Screw CW 113W15851 Screw (M2 X 8)
AF 113W38257 Screw (M4 X 45) CX 113W28056 Screw (M3 X 10)
AG 141W27351 Setscrew (M3 X 3) CZ 141W27651 Setscrew (M3 X 6)
AH 141W27451 Setscrew (M3 X 4) DB – Screw (M3 X 6)
AJ 141W27851 Setscrew (M3 X 8) DC 158W27650 Screw (M3 X 6)
AK 141W35451 Setscrew (M4 X 4) DD – Setscrew (M4 X 5)
AL 153W17655 Tapping Screw (M3 X 6) DF 153W16055 Tapping Screw (M4 X 10)
AM 153W17855 Tapping Screw (M3 X 8) DG – Tapping Screw (M3 X 10)
AN 153W18055 Tapping Screw (M3 X 10) DH 113W22557 Screw (M3 X 25)
AP 153W18255 Tapping Screw (M3 X 12) DJ 113W35557 Screw (M4 X 5)
AQ – Tapping Screw (M3 X 6) DK – Screw (M4 X 16)
AR 153W27655 Tapping Screw (M3 X 6) DL – Spring Washer (12)
AS 158W27655 Screw (M3 X 6) DP 285W28651 Spring Pin (3-16)
AT 158W27855 Screw (M3 X 8) DQ 285W29151 Spring Pin (3 X 25)
AU – Screw (M3 X 8) DR – Screw (M4 X 8)
AV 158W28055 Screw (M3 X 10) DT 113W28856 Screw (M3 X 20)
AW 158W28255 Screw (M3 X 12) DU – Dowel Pin Pin (3 X 22)
AX 158W28655 Screw (M3 X 16) DV 113W20557 Screw (M3 X 5)
AY 158W35655 Screw (M4 X 12) DW – Capscrew (M3 X 8)
AZ – Screw (M4 X 16) DY 153W28050 Screw (M3 X 10)
BA 158W35855 Screw (M4 X 8) DZ – Screw (M3 X 8)
BC 158W36255 Screw (M4 X 12)
BD 158W36655 Screw (M4 X 16)
BE 158W45055 Screw (M5 X 10)
BH – Washer (2.5)
BL – Washer (6)
BM 252W26450 Nylon Washer (5)
BQ 252W29350 Nylon Washer (8)
BR – Nylon Washer (8)
BS 252W31350 Nylon Washer (10)
BT 271W21650 Dowel (2.5 X 16)
BU 271W28050 Dowel Pin (3 X 10)
BV 271W28250 Dowel Pin (3 X 12)
BW 271W28650 Dowel Pin (3 X 16)

Common Hardware 8d-162 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
007E62840 PL 18.26
Part Number Part List 007E62850 PL 18.9
003E36290 PL 18.12 007E62860 PL 18.9
PL 18.6 007E62870 PL 18.9
003E46501 PL 18.5 007E62880 PL 18.9
003E48920 PL 18.8 007E62890 PL 18.9
003K83211 PL 18.5 007K83910 PL 18.21
003K85101 PL 18.5 007K85791 PL 18.26
003K85570 PL 18.5 008K91360 PL 18.21
003K91881 PL 18.1 008K91370 PL 18.21
004E08030 PL 18.16 008E93390 PL 18.7
005E15350 PL 18.10 009E64140 PL 18.23
005E15360 PL 18.9 PL 18.24
005E83570 PL 18.22 PL 18.25
PL 18.25 009E72520 PL 18.16
005E91640 PL 18.16 PL 18.9
PL 18.26 009E72530 PL 18.15
005E91660 PL 18.18 009E72550 PL 18.15
006K21000 PL 18.19 011K93650 PL 18.19
006E61320 PL 18.7 011K93870 PL 18.19
006E70950 PL 18.26 011K94401 PL 18.7
006K83590 PL 18.14 011K94411 PL 18.7
006K83620 PL 18.14 012E09860 PL 18.11
006K83642 PL 18.19 012E09870 PL 18.11
007E39910 PL 18.21 012K93390 PL 18.21
007E45091 PL 18.7 012E94950 PL 18.15
PL 18.8 013E13600 PL 18.15
007E45120 PL 18.14 013P60796 PL 18.19
007E45131 PL 18.7 013E85870 PL 18.19
007E45170 PL 18.19 013E89540 PL 18.22
007E54960 PL 18.8 PL 18.23
007E54970 PL 18.8 PL 18.25
007E54980 PL 18.8 PL 18.24
007E54990 PL 18.7 015K28070 PL 18.26
PL 18.8 015K28141 PL 18.7
007E55000 PL 18.8 015K28290 PL 18.16
007E55010 PL 18.7 015K28452 PL 18.18
007E55030 PL 18.7 015K31853 PL 18.1
007E55040 PL 18.7 015K31860 PL 18.1
007E56970 PL 18.10 015K31871 PL 18.1
007E62830 PL 18.9 015K35862 PL 18.1

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-163 Part Number Index
015K44950 PL 18.9 029E21610 PL 18.1
015K44960 PL 18.9 029K91881 PL 18.17
015K45020 PL 18.17 032E10210 PL 18.1
015K48190 PL 18.10 032E15690 PL 18.12
015K89062 PL 18.19 033K92751 PL 18.20
019E31680 PL 18.27 038E21280 PL 18.22
020K09460 PL 18.9 038K83030 PL 18.15
020E22210 PL 18.18 038K83031 PL 18.15
020E22220 PL 18.18 038K83340 PL 18.16
020E24770 PL 18.26 038E86180 PL 18.22
020E24800 PL 18.20 038E88980 PL 18.22
020E24820 PL 18.19 PL 18.24
020E25141 PL 18.9 PL 18.23
020E33820 PL 18.26 048E45760 PL 18.27
020E33830 PL 18.26 048K62471 PL 18.20
020E33840 PL 18.10 048E65721 PL 18.2
020E33850 PL 18.9 048E65730 PL 18.5
020E33860 PL 18.14 048E65740 PL 18.3
020K98320 PL 18.9 048E66520 PL 18.2
021E96430 PL 18.4 048E66560 PL 18.2
022E19660 PL 18.8 048E66571 PL 18.3
022E19670 PL 18.8 048K77410 PL 18.2
022K43710 PL 18.22 048K77420 PL 18.5
022K43720 PL 18.13 048K77971 PL 18.2
022K48240 PL 18.13 050E16500 PL 18.11
022K51621 PL 18.8 050E16510 PL 18.11
022K57120 PL 18.7 050K33220 PL 18.23
022K57130 PL 18.7 PL 18.25
022K61450 PL 18.9 PL 18.24
022K61460 PL 18.9 050K36801 PL 18.25
022K61470 PL 18.10 050K36812 PL 18.24
022K61480 PL 18.20 050K36822 PL 18.23
022K61490 PL 18.10 050K36832 PL 18.22
022K61500 PL 18.8 050K41290 PL 18.17
022E83451 PL 18.22 050K41310 PL 18.3
PL 18.24 050K41320 PL 18.4
PL 18.25 050K41330 PL 18.15
PL 18.23 PL 18.27
022E83460 PL 18.10 050E86731 PL 18.27
023E13160 PL 18.10 050E88781 PL 18.22
023E15560 PL 18.18 PL 18.25

Part Number Index 8d-164 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PL 18.24 PL 18.24
PL 18.23 PL 18.25
054K09360 PL 18.14 121K83981 PL 18.7
054K09382 PL 18.15 121E84720 PL 18.2
054K09462 PL 18.14 121E87250 PL 18.11
054K13920 PL 18.6 PL 18.4
054E14510 PL 18.6 121E90490 PL 18.2
054K16770 PL 18.14 121E91450 PL 18.6
054K16780 PL 18.13 127K16360 PL 18.21
054K16790 PL 18.12 127K16600 PL 18.17
054K16800 PL 18.12 127K18880 PL 18.17
054K16810 PL 18.12 127K20871 PL 18.16
054K16820 PL 18.12 127K20900 PL 18.19
059K00521 PL 18.12 127K20930 PL 18.19
059K08590 PL 18.13 127K23320 PL 18.15
PL 18.6 127K24901 PL 18.8
059K13261 PL 18.24 127K24952 PL 18.9
059E92070 PL 18.19 127K29491 PL 18.26
062E98711 PL 18.7 127K29500 PL 18.26
105E09160 PL 18.6 127K29540 PL 18.19
105K18810 PL 18.14 127K31260 PL 18.13
105E98690 PL 18.13 127K37840 PL 18.10
110K08140 PL 18.15 130K55360 PL 18.18
110K10710 PL 18.15 130K60600 PL 18.3
110E94510 PL 18.15 130E80100 PL 18.13
110E97990 PL 18.11 130E82530 PL 18.16
PL 18.5 PL 18.20
120E12360 PL 18.27 PL 18.7
120E13130 PL 18.22 PL 18.27
PL 18.24 PL 18.19
PL 18.23 130E82540 PL 18.16
120E17020 PL 18.22 PL 18.19
PL 18.24 130E82970 PL 18.6
PL 18.23 130K87332 PL 18.20
120E18280 PL 18.27 130K94740 PL 18.13
120E99480 PL 18.16 PL 18.14
120E99651 PL 18.19 160K53431 PL 18.13
120E99661 PL 18.15 PL 18.22
121K13070 PL 18.15 160K67951 PL 18.4
121K14541 PL 18.11 160K67960 PL 18.11
121E83120 PL 18.23 160K67991 PL 18.6

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-165 Part Number Index
162K47500 PL 18.10 802E13940 PL 18.3
162K60401 PL 18.3 802E13950 PL 18.3
162K60451 PL 18.13 802E13960 PL 18.3
407W07626 PL 18.21 802E13970 PL 18.26
407W08174 PL 18.14 802E13980 PL 18.26
407W08220 PL 18.8 802E13990 PL 18.3
413W08350 PL 18.7 802E14000 PL 18.3
PL 18.8 802E14010 PL 18.3
413W75959 PL 18.10 802K14650 PL 18.2
PL 18.7 802K14660 PL 18.2
PL 18.26 809E02941 PL 18.27
PL 18.9 809E02991 PL 18.5
PL 18.8 809E03071 PL 18.21
413W77559 PL 18.21 809E03080 PL 18.21
PL 18.24 809E14570 PL 18.7
PL 18.25 809E14980 PL 18.10
PL 18.23 809E26230 PL 18.26
PL 18.22 809E27360 PL 18.26
PL 18.26 830E19412 PL 18.1
417W30349 PL 18.4 830E32600 PL 18.22
423W21053 PL 18.16 PL 18.23
423W23354 PL 18.14 PL 18.25
423W24953 PL 18.14 PL 18.24
423W25953 PL 18.19 830E34990 PL 18.3
423W25954 PL 18.26 830E35000 PL 18.3
423W30754 PL 18.9 830E59990 PL 18.2
423W46753 PL 18.17 891E73431 PL 18.12
PL 18.19 891E73451 PL 18.2
423W87254 PL 18.9 892E13300 PL 18.2
423W90654 PL 18.26
499W14123 PL 18.10
499W14233 PL 18.26
499W14432 PL 18.26
499W14524 PL 18.9
499W15121 PL 18.14
499W15123 PL 18.19
499W17061 PL 18.10
604K13030 PL 18.8
802K05082 PL 18.2
802K09190 PL 18.22
802E13930 PL 18.2

Part Number Index 8d-166 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Wiring Connector List Table 1 Plug/Jack Index
How to use the Wiring Connector List P/JNo. FigureNo. ItemNo.
1. To find the location of a connector in the Finisher, perform the following steps. P/J659 Figure 6 4
a. Refer to the Plug/Jack Index. P/J660 Figure 6 11
b. Find the connector number in the P/J No column. P/J661 Figure 6 3
c. Find the Figure number and Item number in that row. P/J664 Figure 6 7
d. Go to the Diagram and find the Figure, then locate the Item number that identifies P/J665 Figure 6 6
the specific location of the Plug/Jack. P/J800/800B Figure 5 9
Refer to Figure 1 for an example of the Plug/Jack Index connector list. P/J1001 Figure 3 15
P/J1002 Figure 3 16
P/J1004 Figure 3 3
P/J1005 Figure 3 2
P/J1006 Figure 3 1
P/J1007 Figure 3 18
1056 Figure x 3
P/J1008 Figure 3 4
P/J1009 Figure 3 5
P/J1010 Figure 3 17
Item number in the P/J1011 Figure 3 10
Illustration that shows P/J1012 Figure 3 11
a Plug/Jack. P/J1013 Figure 3 12
P/J1014 Figure 3 14
tion showing the area of the P/J1017 Figure 2 2
Finisher where the Plug/Jack P/J1018 Figure 1 3
P/J Number can be located. P/J1019 Figure 1 14
P/J1020 Figure 5 7
P/J1021 Figure 3 8
P/J1022 Figure 3 7
P/J1023 Figure 3 6
P/J1024 Figure 3 9
P/J1025 Figure 3 13
P/J1026 Figure 4 13
Figure 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list example P/J1027 Figure 4 11
P/J1028 Figure 4 14
Plug/Jack Index P/J1029 Figure 4 15
P/J1030 Figure 4 16
P/J1031 Figure 4 17
P/JNo. FigureNo. ItemNo.
P/J1032 Figure 4 12
P/J651 Figure 6 9
P/J1033 Figure 4 10
P/J652 Figure 6 8
P/J1034 Figure 4 7
P/J653 Figure 6 5 P/J1035 Figure 4 4

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-167 Wiring Connector List
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index Table 1 Plug/Jack Index
P/JNo. FigureNo. ItemNo. P/JNo. FigureNo. ItemNo.
P/J1053 Figure 1 8
P/J1054 Figure 5 2
P/J1055 Figure 5 3
P/J1056 Figure 5 20
P/J1057 Figure 1 11
P/J1058 Figure 5 25
P/J1059 Figure 1 15
P/J1060 Figure 1 16
P/J1061 Figure 5 10
P/J1062 Figure 2 12
P/J1063 Figure 2 11
P/J1064 Figure 5 17
P/J1065 Figure 2 8
P/J1066 Figure 2 10
P/J1067 Figure 5 18
P/J1069 Figure 2 13
P/J1070 Figure 2 9
P/J1071 Figure 5 16
P/J1073 Figure 2 4
P/J1074 Figure 1 9
P/J1075 Figure 1 5
P/J1076 Figure 5 4
P/J1078 Figure 2 1
P/J1079 Figure 2 3
P/J1080 Figure 5 6
P/J1081 Figure 5 5
P/J1082 Figure 1 13
P/J1083 Figure 1 10

Wiring Connector List 8d-168 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams
Figure 1 Compiler Plug/Jack Locations

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-169 Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams
Figure 2 Stacker Plug/Jack Locations

Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams 8d-170 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 3 Mail Box Plug/Jack locations

Figure 4 Finisher PWB Plug/Jack Locations

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 Finisher Rear (Inline) Plug/Jack Locations

Figure 6 Decurler Plug/Jack Locations

manuals4you.com
Finisher Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet Finisher/Mailbox Sorter +5VDC-1

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-175 Finisher Wirenets

Finisher Wirenets 8d-176 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com

Figure 4 Wirenet Finisher/Mailbox Sorter +5VDC RTN-1

manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com

manuals4you.com
Finisher BSDs
Purpose
power.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8d-183 Finisher BSDs
Figure 1 BSD 12.1 Finisher/MBS DC Power and Interlock Switching (1 of 2)

Finisher BSDs 8d-184 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 BSD 12.1 Finisher/MBS DC Power and Interlock Switching (2 of 2)

Figure 3 BSD 12.2 Unload While Run and Compiler Cover Safety Switch

manuals4you.com
Figure 4 BSD 12. 3 Interlock Monitoring

Figure 5 BSD 12.4 Finisher-IOT CPU Communication

manuals4you.com
Figure 6 BSD 12.5 Transport Drives

Figure 7 BSD 12.6 Decurler Control (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 8 BSD 12.6 Decurler Control (2 of 2)

Figure 9 BSD 12.7 Finisher Transportation (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 10 BSD 12.7 Finisher Transportation (2 of 2)

Figure 11 BSD 12.8 Bin Tray Transportation (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 12 BSD 12.8 Bin Tray Transportation (2 of 2)

Figure 13 BSD 12.9 Bin Full Sensors

manuals4you.com
Figure 14 BSD 12.10 SCT Tray Control

Figure 15 BSD 12.11 Compiling

manuals4you.com
Figure 16 BSD 12.12 Stapler Positioning (1 of 2)

Figure 17 BSD 12.12 Stapler Positioning (2 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 18 BSD 12.13 Stapler Control

Figure 19 BSD 12.14 Offset and Eject (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 20 BSD 12.14 Offset and Eject (2 of 2)

Figure 21 BSD 12.15 Stacker Tray Control (1 of 2)

manuals4you.com
Figure 22 BSD 12.15 Stacker Tray Control (2 of 2)


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com


manuals4you.com
8E Electronic Pre-Collation
Chain 3
OF3-1 EPC Fault Entry RAP ........................................................................................... 8e-3
OF3-2 Operator Message RAP ....................................................................................... 8e-3
3-285 EPC Communications Fault RAP ......................................................................... 8e-4
Chain 40
40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283 EPC PWB Failure RAP........................................................... 8e-5
40-281 / 40-282 HDD Failure RAP.................................................................................. 8e-5
40-284 EPC Hard Drive Detection RAP.......................................................................... 8e-6
40-285 / 40-286 EPC Memory Failure RAP .................................................................... 8e-6
40-287 EPC HDD Format Failure RAP ........................................................................... 8e-7
Repairs
REP 20.1 EPC PWB ....................................................................................................... 8e-9
REP 20.2 EPC Hard Drive .............................................................................................. 8e-10
REP 20.3 EPC Scan Cable............................................................................................. 8e-11
REP 20.4 EPC Print Cable.............................................................................................. 8e-12
REP 20.5 EPC Memory PWB ......................................................................................... 8e-13
Parts Lists
EPC Module
PL 20.1 EPC Components .............................................................................................. 8e-15
Part Number Index .......................................................................................................... 8e-16
General Procedures
GP 1 EPC Initialization.................................................................................................... 8e-17
dC131 EPC NVM Read/Write ......................................................................................... 8e-17
Wiring Data
EPC Plug/Jacks
EPC Plug/Jack Locator Diagram..................................................................................... 8e-19
EPC BSDs
EPC BSDs (Chain 01)..................................................................................................... 8e-21
EPC BSDs (Chain 03)..................................................................................................... 8e-22
Reissue 1/05 Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8e-1
Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) 1/05 Reissue
8e-2 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
OF3-1 EPC Fault Entry RAP OF3-2 Operator Message RAP
Listing of operator message codes declared by EPC-enabled machines.
NOTE: Use this RAP if the IOT does not recognize the presence of the EPC unit. For Finisher
configurations, correct communications is determined by the presence of the Stapling and
More . . option under Copy Output, on the Basic Copying Tab. Procedure
For other configurations, check for Additional Originals and Output Delivery options on the If one of the codes in Table 1 is displayed, perform the actions listed in the third column of the
Job Assembly Tab. row corresponding to the displayed code. Ensure that the customer understands the specifica-
tions and limitations of the copier (refer to the EPC Customer Supplement).
Use this RAP to determine where to start troubleshooting EPC failures when no fault code is
displayed on the copier UI. Table 1 Operator Message/Fault Code Table
Fault
Initial Actions Code Description Action
Check that NVM location 752-017 [EPC Option Config] is set to 1.
3-513 The paper in the tray selected by APS (Auto Paper Cancel the job. Reload
Select) cannot be output to the Stacker. appropriate paper in the
Procedure tray(s), and/or deselect APS
Connect the PWS and launch the DC12/DCCS 50 Diagnostic Tool. A Fault Code is dis- 3-514 Paper too heavy to feed through Stacker. Cancel the job. Reload cor-
played in Active Faults or in Last 40 Faults. rect paper in the tray(s).
Y N
3-515 One of the following occurs when the non-stapled Press Start to continue
Go to the 3-285 RAP.
stacker output is selected with Mix Original Size spec- (forces the job to the Top
ified or with the addition of originals for platen copy Tray), or select Job Cancel.
The fault is a 3-5XX-series fault.
specified:
Y N
• Paper in the tray selected by APS is different in
For the following faults, go to the associated RAP. If the fault does not appear on this list,
size from previously selected paper.
return to Section 2 in the main portion of this Service Manual to locate the fault.
• The paper in the tray selected by APS cannot be
• Fault Code 3-285 - go to the 3-285 RAP
output to the stacker.
• Fault Code 40-040 - go to the 40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283 RAP
• The paper selected by APS is different in size
• Fault Code 40-280 - go to the 40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283 RAP
from the paper already output to the stacker.
• Fault Code 40-281 - go to the 40-281 / 40-282 RAP
3-516 One of the following occurs when stacker stapled out- Press Start to continue, can-
• Fault Code 40-282 - go to the 40-281 / 40-282 RAP put is selected with Mix Original Size specified or with cel Staple, (forces the job to
• Fault Code 40-283 - go to the 40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283 RAP the addition of originals for platen copy specified: the Top Tray) or select Job
• Fault Code 40-284 - go to the 40-284 RAP • Paper selected by the APS is different in size Cancel. Reload correct paper
from previously selected paper. in the tray(s) if indicated.
• The paper in the tray selected by APS cannot be
output to the Stacker.
• Fault Code 40-287 - go to the 40-287 RAP
3-517 APS invert NG Cancel the job. Reload
Go to the OF3-2 RAP. appropriate paper in the
tray(s), and/or deselect APS
3-545 Staple position is different than that specified. Cancel Staple or select Job
Cancel.
03-555 For the 2nd and subsequent originals, with APS or Cancel Staple or select Job
AMS, cannot staple at the position specified, or staple Cancel.
position is different from that specified.
03-590 EPC memory full failure. Select Job Cancel or Con-
tinue. If the problem persists,
initialize the EPC (GP 1).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8e-3 OF3-1, OF3-2
Table 1 Operator Message/Fault Code Table 3-285 EPC Communications Fault RAP
Fault Control Logic was unable to communicate with the EPC PWB.
Code Description Action
03-591 The number of originals exceeds the EPC controllable Select Job Cancel or Con- Initial Actions
number limit. tinue. If the code is displayed Refer to EPC BSDs (Chain 01) and EPC BSDs (Chain 03) for this procedure.
before the limit is actually • Check that the EPC Scan Cable and Print Cable are seated correctly.
reached, initialize the EPC
• Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
(GP 1).
Procedure
There is +5VDC from pin 8 to pin 5 of P640 on the EPC PWB.
Y N
Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 1.1 (EPC DC Power). check for an open circuit or an
open fuse F6. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3).
Check the EPC Scan Cable and Print Cable for damage or poor connections. If the problem
continues, replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved:
• EPC Print Cable (PL 20.1)
• EPC Scan Cable (PL 20.1)
• EPC PWB (PL 20.1)
• VSEL Base TTL PWB (PL 9.2)

OF3-2, 3-285 8e-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283 EPC PWB Failure RAP 40-281 / 40-282 HDD Failure RAP
40-040: Control Logic detects that the IOT cannot retrieve image(s) from the EPC. 40-281: Control Logic detects an EPC Hard Drive read/write check error.
40-280: Control Logic has detected an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) failure on 40-282: Control Logic detects an unlogged bad sector on the EPC Hard Drive.
the EPC PWB.
Procedure
40-283: Control Logic detects a file system failure in EPC NVM.
Switch off the power. Reseat the EPC Hard Drive Cable on the Hard Drive and on the EPC
PWB. Switch on the power. If the problem continues, initialize the EPC (GP 1). If the problem
Procedure continues, replace the EPC Hard Drive (PL 20.1).
Switch the power off then on. If the problem continues, initialize the EPC (GP 1). If the problem
remains replace the EPC Memory PWB (PL 20.1). If the problem continues, replace the EPC
PWB (PL 20.1).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8e-5 40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283, 40-281 / 40-282
40-284 EPC Hard Drive Detection RAP 40-285 / 40-286 EPC Memory Failure RAP
Control Logic did not detect the presence of an EPC Hard Drive. 40-285: Page Buffer read/write check error
Initial Actions 40-286: DIMM Failure

Refer to EPC BSDs (Chain 01) and EPC BSDs (Chain 03) for this procedure.
Initial Actions
Initialize the EPC (GP 1). • Switch the power off then on.
• Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
Procedure Procedure
There is +5VDC from pin 4 to pin 3 of P656 on the EPC Hard Drive. If the problem continues, reseat the Memory PWB (PL 20.1). If the problem persists, replace
Y N the Memory PWB. If the fault remains, replace the EPC PWB (PL 20.1).
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 1.1 (EPC DC Power). Check for an open circuit
or an open fuse F6. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3).
Replace the EPC PWB (PL 20.1).
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 1.1 (EPC DC Power). check for an open circuit.
There is +12VDC from pin 1 to pin 2 of P656 on the EPC Hard Drive.
Y N
Y N
Y N
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 1.1 (EPC DC Power). Check for an open cir-
cuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3).
Replace the EPC PWB (PL 20.1).
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 1.1 (EPC DC Power). check for an open circuit.
Reseat the EPC Hard Drive Cable on the Hard Drive and on the EPC PWB. Switch the power
off then on. If the problem continues, replace the following parts in the order listed until the
problem is resolved:
• EPC Hard Drive Cable (PL 20.1)
• EPC Hard Drive (PL 20.1)
• EPC PWB (PL 20.1)

40-284, 40-285 / 40-286 8e-6 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
40-287 EPC HDD Format Failure RAP
Control Logic detects EPC Hard Drive format failure.
Procedure
Switch the power off then on. If the problem continues, initialize the EPC (GP 1). If the fault
persists or is a recurring problem, replace the EPC Hard Drive (PL 20.1).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8e-7 40-287
40-287 8e-8 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 20.1 EPC PWB
Parts List on PL 20.1 4 1 3
Disconnect the Remove the
Removal Remove the screws (3)
Connectors (3) screws (12)
CAUTION
Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when replacing the EPC PWB. The EPC
PWB can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
1. For DCCS50:
• Switch Off the power. Wait 30 seconds, then unplug the power cord. Disconnect the
IDFE DDI Cables.
For DC12 with attached Fiery or Splash DFE:
• Perform the correct power down procedure. Disconnect the DFE DDI cables.
For DC12 without an attached DFE:
• Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Access the EPC PWB (Figure 1).
2
Remove the Mem-
ory PWB
Figure 2 Removing the EPC PWB
Replacement
2 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Loosen the screws 2. Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
(6)
1
Disconnect the
3
Connectors (2) Lower the Cover
Figure 1 Accessing the EPC PWB
3. Remove the EPC PWB (Figure 2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8e-9 REP 20.1
REP 20.2 EPC Hard Drive
1
Parts List on PL 20.1 Disconnect the
Removal Connectors (2)
CAUTION
Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when replacing the EPC PWB. The EPC
PWB can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
1. For DCCS50:
IDFE DDI Cables.
2. Access the EPC Hard Drive (Figure 1).
3
Remove the EPC Hard Drive 2
Remove the
screws (4)
Figure 2 Removing the EPC Hard Drive.
Replacement
2. Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
1
Loosen the screws (6) 2
Lower the Cover
Figure 1 Accessing the EPC Hard Drive
3. Remove the EPC Hard Drive (Figure 2).

REP 20.2 8e-10 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 20.3 EPC Scan Cable
Removal
1. For DCCS50:
IDFE DDI Cables.
2. Undock the Finisher or Mailbox/Sorter, if present.
3. Remove the following:
• Exit Tray (PL 12.11)
• Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2)
2
• IIT Rear Cover (PL 11.3) Remove the Cover
• IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3)
4. Open the IIT (REP 3.1.2)
CAUTION
1
Remove the screws (2)
Take note of the routing for the Scan Cable, the Print Cable and the Ribbon Cable. These com-
ponents must be reinstalled carefully to avoid damage.
5. Remove the Scan Cable (Figure 1 and Figure 2):
Figure 1 Accessing the VSEL PWB

REP 20.4 EPC Print Cable
2 Parts List on PL 20.1
Disconnect the Scan Cable
Removal
1. For DCCS50:
IDFE DDI Cables.
4. Remove the Print Cable (Figure 1):
1
Disconnect the Flat
Cable
Figure 2 Removing the Scan Cable
Replacement
Disconnect the
Connector
Figure 1 Removing the Print Cable
Replacement

REP 20.3, REP 20.4 8e-12 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
REP 20.5 EPC Memory PWB
1
Parts List on PL 20.1 Remove the Memory PWB
Removal
CAUTION
Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when replacing the Memory PWB. The
Memory PWB can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
1. For DCCS50:
IDFE DDI Cables.
2. Access the Memory PWB (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Removing the Memory PWB.
Replacement
2. Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
1
Loosen the screws (6) 2
Lower the Cover
Figure 1 Accessing the Memory PWB
3. Remove the Memory PWB (Figure 2).

REP 20.5 8e-14 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PL 20.1 EPC Components
1 962K22550 EPC Enablement Harness (W/TAG
P38)
2 117E20391 Scan Cable (W/TAG P38)
3 162K63570 EPC LV Harness
4 162K64021 EPC Hard Drive Cable
5 160K76442 EPC PWB Assembly (Includes Item
7)
6 121K24580 EPC Hard Drive
7 133E69730 EPC Memory PWB
8 117E20380 Print Cable
9 802K31420 EPC IOT Rear Cover (W/TAG P38)
10 027E92270 Thumbscrews
11 – EPC Hard Drive Bracket (Not
Spared)
12 – Clamp (Scan Cable) (Not Spared)
13 – Clamp (Print Cable) (Not Spared)
14 – EPC Mounting Plate (Not Spared)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8e-15 PL 20.1
Part Number Index
027E92270 PL 20.1
117E20380 PL 20.1
117E20391 PL 20.1
121K24580 PL 20.1
133E69730 PL 20.1
160K76442 PL 20.1
162K63570 PL 20.1
162K64021 PL 20.1
802K31420 PL 20.1
962K22550 PL 20.1

Part Number Index 8e-16 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
GP 1 EPC Initialization dC131 EPC NVM Read/Write
Perform this procedure whenever the EPC PWB or the EPC Hard Drive is replaced, or when Procedure
directed to do so by another procedure.
NOTE: Currently, EPC NVM locations can only be accessed through the UI Diagnostic Mode.
Procedure 1. Enter the UI Diagnostic Mode
1. Enter the UI Diagnostic Mode (refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics). 2. From the Diagnostics Setup Screen, select NVM Read/Write.
2. From the Diagnostics Setup Screen, select NVM Read / Write (dC131 NVM UI Diag- 3. Press the Enter Number button on the display.
nostics). 4. Enter the Chain-Link number of the location you wish to view. Refer to Table 1.
3. Check that NVM location 752-017 [EPC Option Config] is set to 1.
4. Set the value for location 757-020 [Dustoff Init] to 6789. CAUTION
5. Close the NVM Read/Write screen. Enter a correct number. (Make sure you have entered a correct number before you execute the
6. From the Diagnostics Setup Screen, select NVM Initialize. function. If you enter an invalid number, a secondary problem will occur.)
7. Select EPC. Initialize the EPC NVM. 5. Press the Start button. The display will shows the current value of the displayed location.
8. Exit NVM Initialize. Select NVM Read/Write. 6. To change the value enter the new number using the ten-key pad and press the Start but-
9. Set the value for location 757-102 [HDD Control] to 22184. ton.
10. Exit the UI Diagnostic Mode. 7. After the operation, return to the Diagnostics Setup Screen by selecting Close on the
UII screen.
Table 1 EPC NVM List

Chain-Link
Number Name Default Range Description
757-010 SW Set Version 0 0 -65535 NOTE: Octal value
757-011 PRODUCT CODE 1 0 0-255
757-012 PRODUCT CODE 2 0 0-255
757-013 PRODUCT CODE 3 0 0-255
757-014 PRODUCT CODE 4 0 0-255
757-015 PRODUCT CODE 5 0 0-255
757-016 PRODUCT CODE 6 0 0-255
757-017 PRODUCT CODE 7 0 0-255
757-018 PRODUCT CODE 8 0 0-255
757-020 DUSTOFF_INIT 0 0-65535 0 = Disable
6789 = Enable
757-102 HDD Control 0 0-65535 22184 = formatting and initializa-
tion command (GP 1)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8e-17 GP 1, dC131
GP 1, dC131 8e-18 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
EPC Plug/Jack Locator Diagram
Figure 1 EPC Assembly

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8e-19 EPC Plug/Jack Locator Diagram
EPC Plug/Jack Locator Diagram 8e-20 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
EPC BSDs (Chain 01)
Figure 1 BSD 1.1 EPC DC Power

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8e-21 EPC BSDs (Chain 01)
EPC BSDs (Chain 03)
Figure 1 BSD 3.1 EPC System Interconnections

EPC BSDs (Chain 03) 8e-22 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
9 Installation
Edit Pad Installation Instructions
Edit Pad Installation ........................................................................................................ 9-3
Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit Installation Instructions

Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit Installation ........................................................................ 9-9
High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Installation

High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Installation ........................................................................ 9-13
Convenience Stapler Installation Instructions

Convenience Stapler Installation..................................................................................... 9-25

Foreign Interface Install Instructions .............................................................................. 9-35
Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) Kit Installation

Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) Enablement Kit Installation ............................................ 9-37
Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) Kit Installation ................................................................ 9-42
Reissue 1/05 Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions 1/05 Reissue
manuals4you.com
Edit Pad Installation
Procedure
NOTE: Ensure that TAG P30, 7.06.3 IOT SW or higher is installed in the machine.
TAG P24 must also be installed in the machine. It will be added as part of this procedure if not
already installed.
1. Power OFF the machine and disconnect the power plug.

2. Remove the IIT Rear Cover and the IOT Rear Cover. (PL 11.3)
3. Remove the IOT Control PWB Assy Cover. (PL 9.2)
4. Disconnect the Flat Cable (FPC-IOT). (PL 9.2)
5. Remove the (3) screws and lower the IOT Control PWBA Assy.
6. Remove the (2) screws securing the Ground Strips. (Figure 1)
Figure 2 Connect the Connectors
8. Loosen the screws (4) securing the Extension Plate to allow assembly of the Edit Pad
Harness Connector. Ensure that the connector orientation is correct. Secure the connec-
tor with the (2) screws removed in step (7). (Figure 2)
9. Tighten the screws securing the Extension Plate.
10. Connect the connector from the Edit Pad Harness P594 (4 pin) to J594 on the machine
harness. P594 is located in the harness bundle that is clamped to the right rear vertical
frame rail. (Figure 2)
11. Remove the Right Upper Cover. Route the Edit Pad Harness (yellow wires), with connec-
tor J491, under the Extension Plate and along the machine harness (yellow & blue wires)
on the right side. (PL 11.2) (Figure 3)
Figure 1 Remove the Screws
7. Remove (2) screws securing the port cover on the Extension Plate. (save the screws)
(Figure 1)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 9-3 Edit Pad Installation
Figure 3 Route the Edit Pad Harness Figure 4 Route the Edit Pad Harness
12. Remove the (2) screws securing the UI Assy and slide it forward to gain access to the har- 14. If TAG P24 is marked off go to step 21.
ness below. REP 9.5.1. 15. Disconnect connectors P/J490, P/J492 and P/J493 from the UI Assy.
13. Route the Edit Pad Harness up through the harness clamps behind the UI Assy. 16. Remove the UI Assy Bottom Plate to gain access to the UI PWB. (PL 9.5)
(Figure 4) 17. Disconnect connectors P/J486, P/J484, P/J482A and J482B from the UI PWB.
18. Replace the UI PWB with the UI PWB supplied in kit 600K83650. (PL 9.5)
19. Reconnect connectors P/J486, P/J484, P/J482A and J482B to the UI PWB.
20. Reinstall the UI Assy Bottom Plate.
21. Connect Connectors P/J490, P/J492 and P/J493.
22. Connect Connector J491 on the Edit Pad Harness to P491 on the UI PWB.
23. Reinstall the UI Assy and secure with (2) screws. REP 9.5.1
24. Disconnect the Video Cable and the Black Cable. Remove the CCD Cable Cover (2
screws) and disconnect the CCD Cable. (Figure 5)

Edit Pad Installation 9-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 5 Disconnect the Cables Figure 6 Remove Screws and Disconnect the Connectors
25. Remove the (6) screws securing the IPS Drawer. (Figure 6) 26. Disconnect (5) connectors. (2) red and (3) white (Figure 6)
27. Slide open the IPS PWB Drawer to gain access to the PWBs. (Figure 7)

Figure 7 Open the IPS PWB Drawer Figure 8 Install the Stand-offs
28. Remove the (3) screws securing the Post IPS PWB. (save the screw) Install the (3) 29. Install the IPS-EDIT PWB, supplied in the kit, on the mounting stand-offs and secure with
mounting stand-offs, supplied in the kit, in the screw holes. (Figure 8) the screws removed in step 28. (Figure 9)

manuals4you.com
Figure 9 Install the IPS-EDIT PWB Figure 10 Secure the Edit Pad Harness
30. Close the IPS PWB drawer and secure with (6) screws. 34. Install the IOT Control PWB Assy into its upright position and secure with (3) screws.
31. Reconnect the (5) connectors. (2) red and (3) white 35. Reconnect the Flat Cable (FPC-IOT).
32. Reconnect the Video Cable, Black Cable and the CCD Cable. Install the CCD Cable 36. Secure the Ground Strips to the Extension Plate.
Cover. 37. Install the IOT Control PWB Assy Cover and secure with (7) screws.
33. Secure the Edit Pad Harness in the harness clamps. Use additional cable ties as 38. Install the IIT Rear Cover, IOT Rear Cover and the Right Upper Cover.
required. (Figure 10) 39. Reconnect the Power Cord and power up the machine.
40. Enter dc131 and set location 752-012 to 1, to enable Edit Pad (can also be enabled via
dc371).
41. Adjust the Touch Panel Starting Point (ADJ 9.1.18).
42. Verify that the machine and the Edit Pad work correctly.
43. Mark off TAG P24 on the IOT Change Tag Matrix if not already marked off.

manuals4you.com
Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit Installation
Remove Foot Pads (4)
These instructions provide the installation procedure for the optional Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting
Kit, 98S4450.
Kit Contents
Table 1 Kit Contents

Quantity Description Part Number
1 Actuator 120K91660
2 Hinges 3E48130
1 Stopper 3K85090
1 Magnet 121E90620
1 Epoxy Adhesive 43P73
1 Blind Covers 48E66220
1 Platen Cushion 4E8250
2 M3 X 12 Screws 158W28255
2 Screws (for actuator) 26E14060
8 Screws (for hinges) 153W16055
1 Kit Instructions 602E74330
Procedure Figure 1 Remove Foot Pads

1. Place the Edit Pad on a work surface with the bottom side facing up to allow for part
removal and installation. NOTE: The Cover has a post and the Actuator has a hole for proper orientation for installation.
2. Gently pry the Foot Pads loose from the Edit Pad (Figure 1).
3. Install the Actuator (Figure 2).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 9-9 Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit Installation
M3 x 10 mm
screws (2)
M4 x10 mm
screws
(4 each side)
Figure 2 Install the Actuator Figure 3 Install the Hinges
4. Install the Hinges (Figure 3). 5. Install the Stopper (Figure 4).

Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit Installation 9-10 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Stopper
Magnet
Remove the peel-off

adhesive backing.
Orientation
Mark
Figure 4 Install the Stopper Figure 5 Install the Magnet
6. Install the Magnet (Figure 5). 7. Disconnect the DADF Wire Harness (PL 12.3) from the IOT.
a. Slide the Magnet, with proper orientation - white marking, into the slot in the Cover. 8. Remove the two Knob Screws. (PL 12.3).
b. Place a small amount of Epoxy Adhesive along the post of the Cover. Allow the 9. Lift the DADF off the IOT and set aside.
adhesive to set. 10. Install two Blind Covers (PL 11.1).
11. Install the Edit Pad onto the IOT. Leave the assembly in the up (open) position.
12. Insure that the Edit Pad Harness is connected to the IOT.
13. Install the Platen Cushion (refer to REP 11.1.1)
a. Place the Platen Cushion against the registration edges on the Platen Glass with the
adhesive side of the Cushion facing UP.
b. Remove the peel-off adhesive backing from the Cushion.
c. Position the Edit Pad to the down (closed) position and press on the Edit Pad Cover
to insure adhesion of the Cushion to the bottom of the Edit Pad Cover.
14. Reconnect the power cord and switch on the power.
NOTE: MAX Set Up is not required. DO NOT adjust NVM location 715-125.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 9-11 Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit Installation
Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit Installation 9-12 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Installation
Procedure
1. Cut the bands and remove the outer box (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Plastic Bag
3. Break the perforated corners on the corrugated tray (Figure 3).
Figure 1 Remove the Outer Box
2. Remove the corrugated sleeve.

Remove the plastic bag. (Figure 2).

Figure 3 Break the Perforated Corners Figure 4 Roll the HCF
4. Roll the HCF off of the corrugated tray (Figure 4). 5. Remove the paper from the HCF Exit Baffle (Figure 5).

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 Remove the Paper Figure 6 Open the HCF Drawer
6. 1. Open the HCF drawer (Figure 6). 7. Put the packaged paper size guide to one side (Figure 7).
2. Remove the packaged paper size guide.
3. Remove the HCF mounting bracket and thumbscrews from the drawer.
4. Close the HCF drawer.

Figure 7 Move the Guide Figure 8 Unpack the HCF Mounting Bracket
8. 1. Unpack the HCF mounting bracket (Figure 8). 9. Open the processor left side door (Figure 9).
2. Remove the bag containing the thumbscrews

manuals4you.com
Figure 9 Open the Left Side Door Figure 10 Insert the Bracket
10. 1. Insert the bracket up and over the processor (Figure 10). 11. 1. Secure the bracket to the underside of the processor with the thumbscrew attached to
2. Slide the bracket toward the front of the machine until the front tab engages the slot in the left side of the bracket (Figure 11).
the processor. 2. Close the processor left side door.
3. Lift the left side of the bracket until it engages the other slot in the processor.

Figure 11 Secure the Bracket Figure 12 Unpack the Paper Size Guide
NOTE: The paper size guide is found inside the HCF drawer. It is held in place by a magnet NOTE: The paper size guide can be set for either 8.5 x 11 or A4.
under the top edge, as well as top and bottom tabs.
13. 1. Align the bottom guide tabs with the appropriate slots on the HCF (Figure 13).
12. Unpack the paper size guide (Figure 12). 2. Align the top guide tabs with the appropriate indicator slots on the HCF.

manuals4you.com
Figure 13 Align the Bottom Guide Tabs Figure 14 Unlock the Rails
NOTE: The HCF is shipped with the rails in the locked position. CAUTION
Do not pull the rails all the way out. If fully extended, the HCF will tip.
14. Unlock the rails on the HCF (Figure 14):
15. 1. Close the HCF drawer (Figure 15).
1. Locate the locking pin.
2. Lift the pin and rotate it 1/2 turn CCW to unlock the rail. 2. Pull out the rails enough to allow the rail to mate with the mounting bracket.

Figure 15 Close the HCF Drawer Figure 16 Lock the Casters
16. 1. Ensure that the processor casters are locked (Figure 16). 17. Attach the rails to the bracket with the two thumbscrews (Figure 17).
2. Align the notches on the rails with the slots in the bracket.

manuals4you.com
Figure 17 Attach the Rails Figure 18 Inspect the Gap
NOTE: If the gap between the processor and HCF is uniform, go to step 22. If the gap is not 19. 1. Push the HCF away from the processor (Figure 19).
uniform, complete steps 19 through 21. 2. Remove the caster wrench from the HCF rails.
18. 1. Push the HCF against the processor (Figure 18).
2. Visually inspect the gap between the HCF and processor.

Figure 19 Remove the Caster Wrench Figure 20 Adjust the Casters
WARNING 21. 1. Place the HCF wrench back onto the rails (Figure 21).
The underside of the HCF has very sharp edges! Use caution when adjusting. 2. Push the HCF against the processor.
NOTE: To adjust the casters, raise the HCF by turning the caster nut CCW. Turn the caster nut
CW to lower the HCF. For best results, alternate between casters. The two INSIDE casters
(near the processor) are off the floor when installed, and do not require adjustment.
20. If the gap is not wide enough or is not uniform, adjust the two outside casters (Figure 20).

manuals4you.com
Figure 21 Store the Wrench Figure 22 Remove the Knockout
22. Remove the lower knockout on the processor (to the rear of the bypass tray) (Figure 22). 23. Connect the HCF harness to the processor (Figure 23).

Figure 23 Connect the HCF Harness Figure 24 Close the HCF Drawer
24. Close the HCF drawer (Figure 24).

manuals4you.com
Convenience Stapler Installation
Procedure
NOTE: The wing with convenience stapler may come pre assembled.
1. Unpack the wing with convenience stapler and hardware (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Screws
3. 1. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (Figure 3).

2. Remove the mounting bracket from the Convenience Stapler.
Figure 1 Unpack
2. 1. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (Figure 2).

2. Remove the upper left side panel.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 9-25 Convenience Stapler Installation
Figure 3 Remove the Screws Figure 4 Remove the Corner Support Bracket
4. Remove the corner support bracket attached to the wing with convenience stapler (Figure 5. 1. Slip the corner support bracket into the opening at the left rear (Figure 5).
4). 2. Insert the tab on the bracket through the hole in the frame.

Convenience Stapler Installation 9-26 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 5 Position the Bracket Figure 6 Install the Bracket
CAUTION 7. 1. Orient the bracket so that the threaded hole is parallel to the frame of the copier (Figure
There is very little room to install the M4 screw. Be careful not to drop the screw into the 7).
machine. 2. Use a 5.5 mm wrench to tighten the screw.
6. Insert an M4 screw into the bottom of the bracket (Figure 6).

Figure 7 Align the Bracket Figure 8 Install the Bracket
8. 1. Slip the mounting bracket up and behind the platen surround (Figure 8). 9. Secure the bracket using seven 5.5 mm M3 screws (Figure 9).
2. Ensure that the holes on the bracket align with the holes on the left side of the proces-
sor.

manuals4you.com
Figure 9 Secure the Bracket Figure 10 Prepare the Wing
10. 1. Turn the wing with convenience stapler upside down (Figure 10). 11. Hang the wing with convenience stapler onto the mounting bracket (Figure 11).
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the stabilizer bracket from the bottom of the tray. Set the bracket aside.

Figure 11 Install the Wing Figure 12 Secure the Wing
NOTE: Be sure to attach the wing with convenience stapler through the mounting bracket and 13. Install the stabilizer bracket and secure using two 5.5 mm screws (Figure 13).
into the corner support bracket.
12. Install two 5.5 mm M4 screws to secure the wing with convenience stapler to the mount-
ing bracket (Figure 12).

manuals4you.com
Figure 13 Attach the Stabilizer Bracket Figure 14 Install the Stabilizer Bracket
14. Attach the stabilizer bracket to the wing with convenience stapler using two 5.5 mm 15. Attach the convenience stapler ground strap to the processor (Figure 15).
screws (Figure 14).

Figure 15 Attach the Ground Strap Figure 16 Prepare the Cutout
16. 1. Remove the screw (Figure 16). 17. Connect the stapler power cord to the processor (Figure 17).
2. Remove the cutout.

manuals4you.com
Figure 17 Connect the Power Cord Figure 18 Install the Cable Anchors
18. Install the two cable anchors on the rear of the processor (Figure 18). 19. Secure the stapler power cord in the cable anchors (Figure 19).

Figure 19 Secure the Power Cord

manuals4you.com
NOTE: Ensure that the third party device is available before starting this procedure. Table 1 Accessory Types
WARNING Interface Type NVM Value
Power-OFF the machine and disconnect the Power Plug. Adder Type (Auditron) 1
Procedure Subtraction Type (Pre- 2
paid) Coin Vend
1. DCCS50: Remove the Digital Front End (IDFE), by performing steps 1 - 9 of REP 19.1
Removing the IDFE.
2. Remove the IOT Rear Cover. (PL 11.3) Removal Procedures
3. Remove the Tray Module Rear Cover. (PL 11.3) 1. Reverse the Installation procedures sequence.
4. Remove the ESS Left Cover. (PL 11.3) 2. Enter Diagnostics.
5. Install the Foreign Interface Chassis Assembly. (Figure 1) Place the F/I Chassis Assembly 3. Enter dC131 [752-002] and change the NVM value to 0.
pivot pin into the hole on the machine frame use the shoulder screw to secure the upper
NOTE: If Fault Code 3-333 displays, repeat steps 2 and 3.
end of the chassis to the machine.
6. Remove the Blind Cover. (PL 11.3)
7. Break away the cable access tab on the Blind Cover.
8. If the Foreign Device being used is a Coin Op. device, complete steps 9-11. If not, go to
step 12.
9. Remove the screw that secures the Foreign Interface Module to the mounting bracket and
remove the module.
10. Remove the four screws that secure the module cover and remove the cover.
11. Exchange the ROM in position U2 with the ROM supplied in the kit. Install the module
cover and reinstall the module to the mounting bracket.
12. Connect J905 of the F/I Chassis Assembly to P905.
13. Replace the Blind Cover.
14. Connect the Foreign Device Cable (external auditron) to J940 on the F/I Chassis Assem-
bly. Route the Cable through the two cable clamps on the F/I Chassis Assembly to the
outside of the machine.
15. Secure the F/I Chassis Assembly with the 3 screws from the kit.
16. Replace the IOT Rear Cover and the Tray Module Rear Cover.
17. DCCS50: Replace the Digital Front End (IDFE).
18. Connect the machine Power Plug.
19. Power-ON the machine and allow the machine to warm up.
20. Make the following NVM changes, using either UI Diagnostics (steps 21-23) or the PWS
step 24.
21. Enter Diagnostics from the Machine UI. Refer to NVM Read / Write (dC131 NVM UI Diag-
nostics).
22. Enter dC131 [759-015], set the NVM value for the Foreign Interface type being used
(Table 1).
23. Enter [752-002], set to 1 - Accessory Connection.
24. Use the PWS to enter dC371 Configuration Page and set the Accessory Connection to
match the accessory being used (Table 1).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 9-35 Foreign Interface Install Instructions
Shoulder
Screw
J940
Pivot Pin
Figure 1 Foreign Interface Chassis Assembly

Foreign Interface Install Instructions 9-36 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) Enablement Kit Installation 4. If the Convenience Stapler is not installed: Go to, step 11 and continue with the Scan
Cable installation.
Purpose If the Convenience Stapler is installed: Continue with these instructions at step 5.
The purpose of this kit is to enable installation of EPC (Electronic Pre-Collation) on machines
5. Locate and disconnect the stapler power cord.
without TAG P38. If TAG P38 is already installed Place the Shipping Label on this Kit and
6. Remove the stapler power cord from the cable anchors (2) on the rear of the machine.
Return it.
7. Locate and remove the 5.5mm screw securing the green ground wire to the left side of the
Prerequisites machine.
8. Remove the two 5.5mm screws that secure the stabilizer bracket to the bottom of the Sta-
The machine must have the following Tags installed:
pler Mounting Cover.
• NOTE: The affected machines that require Tag P8 fall within the serial number ranges: 9. Remove the 2 stabilizer bracket screws M4x5.5mm.
– FU2: 040051 to 040198 10. Remove the Stapler Mounting Cover (PL 16.1) from the mounting bracket.
– FU3: 310512016x to 310512122x 11. Open the IIT (REP 3.1.2)
TAG P8 CAUTION
• TAG P39 (Check that NVM location 752-017 is set to 1). The VSEL PWB is susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge Observe all ESD proce-
dures to avoid component damage.
Kit Contents
12. Access the VSEL PWB (Figure 1):
The EPC Enablement Kit consists of the following items:
• EPC Scan Cable - qty. 1
1
• EPC Mounting Plate - qty. 1
Remove the screws (2)
• Thumb Nuts- qty. 4
• Connector Bracket - qty. 1
• Harness Assembly - qty. 1
• Connector Cover - qty. 1 (not used)
• Locking Clamp - qty. 1
Procedure
Installing the Scan Cable
1. For DCCS50:
• Switch off the power. Wait 30 seconds, then unplug the power cord. Remove the
IDFE (REP 19.1).
For DC12 with attached Splash DFE:
• Obtain permission from the network administrator and perform the proper shut down
procedure. Switch off the Server power. Disconnect the DocuColor 12 interface
cables (print and scan) from the IOT.
• Switch off the machine power. Unplug the power cord. 2
Remove the Cover
For DC12 with attached Fiery DFE:
procedure. Switch off the Server power. Disconnect the Copier Interface Cables
(print and scan) from the interface ports on the copier.
Figure 1 Accessing the VSEL PWB
• Switch off the machine power. Unplug the power cord.
• IIT Rear Cover (PL 11.3)
• IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3)
• Wing Tray (PL 11.1), If Present

CAUTION
it is possible that there is a shorting condition between the EPC Scan Cable and the FPC-ROS
Flat Cable connector (P/J 398). Foam on top of the connector is intended to insulate the pins
from contact. However, the foam can be compressed by the EPC Scan Cable and the pins may
stick through and short against the Scan Cable connector housing.
Using a sheet of transparency or shim stock, cut a strip 45mm X 12mm and adhere to the top
of the foam on the FPC-ROS Cable connector (P/J 398). This strip will function as an insulator.
NOTE: The 80 to 68 pin EPC Scan Cable is longer in length than the 80 to 80 pin Print Cable.
Connect the Scan Cable (Figure 2):
2
Connect the Scan Cable to
TSJ1
Figure 3 Routing the Scan Cable
14. NOTE: Do not reinstall the Right Upper Cover after closing the IIT. The Right Upper Cover
will be reinstalled, later in these instructions.
Close the IIT (REP 3.1.2)

3
1 Reconnect the flat cable.
Disconnect the flat 15. If the EPC Kit is being installed at the same time as the enablement kit: Perform Print
Ensure that the cable is routed
cable (P/J389) Cable Installation step 2 in the EPC Kit installation instructions, then resume this proce-
under the frame
dure at Step 17.
16. Route the Scan Cable (and Print Cable if present) as shown in Figure 4:
Figure 2 Connecting the Scan Cable
13. Reinstall the Half Tone PWB Cover. Route the Scan Cable as shown in Figure 3.

manuals4you.com
1 2
Remove the Slide bracket left
screw (1) then down, to
2 remove
Route the Scan cable,
with the ferrite in front of
the Print cable, towards
the rear of the machine
1 3
Route the Print cable Detach P/J 899
towards the rear of the
machine
Figure 4 Routing the Scan Cable and Print Cable Figure 5 Removing the Connector Bracket
17. If the EPC Kit is being installed at the same time as the enablement kit: Perform Print 3. Install the EPC Harness Assembly:
Cable Installation (steps 4 and 5) of the EPC Kit installation instructions, then resume this a. Disconnect P/J22 from the IOT LVPS.
procedure at Step 19.
b. Connect J22A (new harness) to P22 on the IOT LVPS.
18. Reinstall the following:
c. Connect J22 (existing harness) to P22A (new harness).
d. Disconnect P/J21 from the IOT LVPS.
e. Connect J21A (new harness) to P21 on the IOT LVPS.
• IIT Rear Cover (PL 11.3)
f. Connect J21 (existing harness) to P21A (new harness).
• Wing Tray (PL 11.1), If Present
4. Install the new Connector Bracket (Figure 6):
• Convenience Stapler, If present.
Installing the Harness Assembly

1. Remove the Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3).
2. Remove the existing Connector Bracket (Figure 5):

1
Insert P899 and
P657 (new)-
from rear
1
Install the
2 Clamp
Install Connector
Bracket at same
location as the old
bracket, using
existing screw
2
Gather the harness
and lock the clamp
Figure 6 Installing the new Connector Bracket Figure 7 Installing the Locking Clamp
6. Reinstall the Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3).

5. Install the Locking Clamp (Figure 7). CAUTION
Use caution when aligning the Mounting Plate with the IOT Rear Cover. It may be extremely
difficult to separate the Mounting Plate from the IOT Rear Cover, after they have been pressed
together.
7. Place the IOT Rear Cover face up on a flat surface. Remove the protective backing from
the five adhesive strips of tape located on the back of the Mounting Plate. Align the
Mounting Plate over the IOT Rear Cover, align the 4 holes, and Press down to fasten
(adhere) the Mounting Plate to the IOT Rear Cover. (see Figure 8)
8. Install the EPC Mounting Plate and the IOT Rear Cover (Figure 8):

manuals4you.com
1
Line up the 4
holes
2
Install the IOT Rear Cover and the
EPC Mounting Plate at the same
time. Use the same screws (4)
Figure 8 Installing the Mounting Plate
9. For DCCS50:
• Reinstall the IDFE (REP 19.1).
For DC 12:
• Continue with this installation at step 10.
10. Mark off Tag 38 on the IOT Tag Matrix.
11. If the EPC Kit is being installed at the same time as the enablement kit: Go to the
EPC Assembly Installation instructions in the EPC Kit installation instructions and com-
plete the installation.
If the EPC Kit is not being installed at this time: Continue with these instructions.
12. Dock the Finisher.
13. For DC 12 with attached Splash DFE:
• Reconnect the DocuColor 12 interface Cables (left side print and right side scan) to
the IOT.
• Switch On the Server power.
For DC 12 with attached Fiery DFE:
• Reconnect the Copier Interface Cables (left side print and right side scan) to the
interface ports on the copier.
• Switch On the Server power.
14. Reconnect the machine power cord; switch On the power.

Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) Kit Installation
Purpose 1
The purpose of this kit is to install the EPC (Electronic Pre-Collation) option on machines man- Disconnect the
ufactured with TAG P38. Scan cable
Prerequisites
The machine must have the following Tags installed:
• TAG P38
• TAG P39 (Ensure that NVM location 752-017 is set to 1).
Kit Contents
The EPC Kit consists of the following items:
• EPC Print Cable - qty. 1
• EPC Assembly - qty. 1
• P-Clamp (6N) - qty. 1
• P-Clamp (7N) - qty. 1
• Screw M3 - qty. 2
• Screw M4x6mm - qty. 4
Procedure
1. For DCCS50:
• Switch off the power. Wait 30 seconds, then unplug the power cord. Remove the
IDFE DDI Cables. Figure 1 Disconnecting the Scan Cable From the Terminator
For DC12 with attached Splash DFE:
• Obtain permission from the network administrator and perform the proper shut down 2. If the EPC Enablement Kit is being installed at the same time as the EPC kit: Con-
procedure. Switch off the Server power. Disconnect the DocuColor 12 interface nect the Print cable as shown in Figure 2, then return to Installing the Scan Cable Step 17
cables (print and scan) from the IOT. of the EPC Enablement Kit installation instructions.
• Switch off the machine power. Unplug the power cord. If the EPC Enablement Kit is not being installed at the same time: Connect the Print
cable as shown in Figure 2, then continue with these instructions.
For DC12 with attached Fiery DFE:
procedure. Switch off the Server power. Disconnect the Copier Interface Cables
(print and scan) from the interface ports on the copier.
• Switch off the machine power. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2).
Print Cable Installation

1. Disconnect the Scan Cable (Figure 1):

manuals4you.com
2
Route the Scan
cable, in front of
the Print cable,
towards the rear
of the machine
1
Route the Print
1 Cable towards
Connect the Print the rear of the
cable (TPJ1) machine
Figure 2 Installing the Print Cable Figure 3 Routing the Scan and Print Cables
3. Route the Scan and Print cables (Figure 3): 4. Provide a cable exit on the Right Upper Cover (Figure 4):

EPC Assembly Installation
1. NOTE: If you are installing the EPC Enablement Kit at the same time as the EPC Kit
1
locate the 4 thumb nuts provided with the enablement kit, they will be used in place of the
Right Upper
Cover with 4 (M4x6mm) screws for Steps (1 and 2)
break-away Install and temporarily tighten the 2 upper screws on the IOT Rear Cover (Figure 5):
tab
2
Right Upper Cover
with break-away Tab
removed
1
M4x6mm
screws (2)
Figure 5 Preparing to install EPC Assembly
2. Install the EPC Assembly (Figure 6):
Figure 4 Right Upper Cover Cable Exit
5. If the EPC Enablement Kit is being installed at the same time as the EPC Kit: Return
to step 19 of Installing the Scan Cable in the EPC Enablement Kit installation instructions.
If the EPC Enablement Kit is not being installed at the same time: Continue with
these instructions.
6. Reinstall the Right Upper Cover.

manuals4you.com
2
Secure the upper
screws (2)
1
Install the EPC 1
Assembly Connect the EPC DC Power
Connector
3
Install the
remaining lower
screws (2)
Figure 6 Installing the EPC Assembly Figure 7 Connecting EPC DC Power
3. Remove the Connector Cover, if present (PL 11.3 Item 12). 4. Connect the EPC DC Power connector (Figure 7):
5. Connect the Scan Cable (Figure 8):

3 3
Secure the P-Clamp Secure the P-Clamp
(1) M3 screw (1) M3 screw
1
Connect the Scan
Cable
1
Connect the Print
Cable
2
Install the P-Clamp (6N) 2
Install the P-Clamp
(7N)
Figure 8 Connecting the Scan cable Figure 9 Connecting the Print Cable
6. Connect the Print Cable (Figure 9): DC 12 / DCCS 50 Machine Checkout

1. For DC 12 with attached Splash DFE:
Reconnect the DocuColor 12 interface Cables (left side print and right side scan) to the
IOT. Switch On the Server power.
2. For DC 12 with attached Fiery DFE:
Reconnect the Copier Interface Cables (left side print and right side scan) to the inter-
face ports on the copier. Switch On the Server power.
3. For DCCS 50:
Reconnect the DDI Cables to the IOT.
4. Dock the Finisher.
5. Reconnect the machine power cord; switch On the power.
6. For DC 12 / DCCS 50 machines with a finisher installed:
From the User Interface, Touch the Job Assembly tab. Ensure Additional Originals and
Output Delivery buttons are displayed. Place 5 colored pages on the DADF, from the
Basic Copying tab select Stapling & More...., select Collated (Staple Options), select
the desired stapling option. Touch Save to return to the Copy Output screen. Touch Save
again to return to the Basic Copying tab, Place 5 colored pages on the DADF, select 3
copies and press Start.
7. For DC 12 / DCCS 50 machines without a finisher installed:
From the User Interface, Touch the Job Assembly tab. Ensure Additional Originals and
Output Delivery buttons are displayed. Place 5 colored pages on the DADF, from the
Basic Copying tab select the Auto Output collated feature, select 3 copies and press
Start.

manuals4you.com
10 Principles of Operation
0. Machine Overview 6. Imaging
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 10-3 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-67
Product Configurations.................................................................................................... 10-3 Image Sensing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer Configuration) ...................................... 10-70
Principles of Operation Overview.................................................................................... 10-5 IIT/IPS Cooling ................................................................................................................ 10-80
Image Processing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer Configurations)................................ 10-80
1. Standby Power Image Source Selection .................................................................................................. 10-85
Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-11 Image Processing (All Configurations) ............................................................................ 10-86
Voltage Dependent Assemblies ...................................................................................... 10-11 Photoreceptor Exposure.................................................................................................. 10-88
Unswitched AC Power .................................................................................................... 10-12
Power Switching Control Circuitry ................................................................................... 10-14 7. Paper Supply
Unswitched DC Power .................................................................................................... 10-16 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-91
Switched AC Power ........................................................................................................ 10-16 Paper Tray Specifications ............................................................................................... 10-92
Switched DC Power ........................................................................................................ 10-17 Paper Size Sensing......................................................................................................... 10-95
Electrical Interlocks ......................................................................................................... 10-23 Tray Level Lift and Sensing............................................................................................. 10-96
No Paper Sensing ........................................................................................................... 10-97
2. User Interface Tray 5 .............................................................................................................................. 10-97
Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-27
User Interface Base PWBA............................................................................................. 10-28 8. Paper Transportation
LCD Display PWBA and Contrast Control PWBA ........................................................... 10-30 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-99
LCD Backlight Lamp and Power Supply PWBA.............................................................. 10-32 Paper Feeders................................................................................................................. 10-102
Key/LED PWBA .............................................................................................................. 10-32 Vertical Transport ............................................................................................................ 10-104
Analog Touch Panel........................................................................................................ 10-35 Tray 5 .............................................................................................................................. 10-104
Paper Registration and Pre-Fuser Transport .................................................................. 10-106
3. Machine Run Control Inverter and Duplex Paper Path ...................................................................................... 10-107
Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-37 Print Exit .......................................................................................................................... 10-107
Control Architecture ........................................................................................................ 10-37
Non-Volatile Memory....................................................................................................... 10-38 9. Xerographics
Machine Usage Modes ................................................................................................... 10-39 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-109
Self-test ........................................................................................................................... 10-40 Photoreceptor Drum ........................................................................................................ 10-110
PWBA LEDs.................................................................................................................... 10-41 Charging.......................................................................................................................... 10-112
PWBA Test Points........................................................................................................... 10-43 Development ................................................................................................................... 10-114
Copier Timing.................................................................................................................. 10-44 Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT)...................................................................................... 10-122
Job Control...................................................................................................................... 10-45 IBT Assembly .................................................................................................................. 10-123
Digital Front End ............................................................................................................. 10-49 Motors ............................................................................................................................. 10-126
Foreign Interface ............................................................................................................. 10-49 Cleaning Systems ........................................................................................................... 10-126
Air Flow ........................................................................................................................... 10-129
4. Start Power Process Controls ............................................................................................................. 10-131
Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-51
Main Motor ...................................................................................................................... 10-51 10. Fusing
Drum Motor ..................................................................................................................... 10-52 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-135
The Fusing Process ........................................................................................................ 10-135
5. Document Transportation Functional Description of Fuser Subassemblies ............................................................. 10-136
Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-55 Copy Exit ......................................................................................................................... 10-143
Electrical Power .............................................................................................................. 10-56
DADF System Control..................................................................................................... 10-57 11. Sorter / Mailbox
DADF Document Transport............................................................................................. 10-59 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-145
DADF Operation.............................................................................................................. 10-63 Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections............................................................................. 10-146
Offset Catch Tray Electrical Connections........................................................................ 10-148
Mailbox/Sorter Interlocks................................................................................................. 10-149
Reissue 1/05 Principles of Operation

Mailbox/Sorter PWBAs.................................................................................................... 10-150
Print Transport through the Mailbox/Sorter ..................................................................... 10-150
Offset Catch Tray (OCT) ................................................................................................. 10-153
Mailbox/Sorter Operation. ............................................................................................... 10-153
12. Finisher
Finisher Power ................................................................................................................ 10-155
Finisher Interlocks ........................................................................................................... 10-155
Finisher Power Components .......................................................................................... 10-156
Finisher Control............................................................................................................... 10-157
The Finisher Paper Path ................................................................................................. 10-159
The Decurler ................................................................................................................... 10-160
The Finisher Gate ........................................................................................................... 10-160
The Mailbox Gate............................................................................................................ 10-161
Finisher Path for Stacking without Stapling..................................................................... 10-161
Finisher Paper Path for Stapling and Stacking ............................................................... 10-162
Compiler/Tamper Functional Description........................................................................ 10-164
Stapler Functional Description ........................................................................................ 10-168
Eject/Offset Functional Description ................................................................................. 10-171
Stacker Functional Description ....................................................................................... 10-174
Mechanical Drive............................................................................................................. 10-174
Finisher Transport Motor................................................................................................. 10-175
Eject Motor ...................................................................................................................... 10-175
End Wall Motor................................................................................................................ 10-178
Tamper Motor.................................................................................................................. 10-179
Eject Paddle Motor .......................................................................................................... 10-180
Eject Clamp/Offset Motor ................................................................................................ 10-182
Stacker Tray Motor and Sensors .................................................................................... 10-183
19. Digital Front End

Overview ......................................................................................................................... 10-187
Electrical and Mechanical Operation of the IDFE ........................................................... 10-187
Power Distribution - Solid State Relay ............................................................................ 10-188
Power Distribution - Printer Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)..................................... 10-188
Power Distribution - IDFE................................................................................................ 10-188
Digital Signal Distribution from the IDFE to the IOT ........................................................ 10-189
IDFE Enclosure ............................................................................................................... 10-190
Network Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-190
Image Processing ........................................................................................................... 10-191
Print Interface.................................................................................................................. 10-191
Scan Interface ................................................................................................................ 10-192
Principles of Operation 1/05 Reissue

manuals4you.com
Introduction Product Configurations
This machine is a multipurpose device: The machine is available in the following configurations:
• It is available as a Printer (Figure 1) Copier or Copier/Printer/Scanner (Figure 2 and Fig- • As a color and monochrome Printer connected to a local area network
ure 3) • As a stand-alone color and monochrome Copier
• It can operate in black and white monochrome and 4-color modes • As a combined color and monochrome Printer, document Scanner and Copier, also con-
• It can produce 50 copies per minute monochrome or 12.5 copies per minute color nected to a local area network
This chapter introduces the following areas: This machine is available with the following optional accessories:
• Product Configurations • High Capacity Paper Feeder (HCF) for input paper
• Principles of Operation Overview • Edit Pad
• Standby Power • Billing accessories for the Foreign Interface
• Local User Interface • Mailbox/Sorter for output material
• Remote User Interface • 500 Sheet Offset Catch Tray (OCT)
• Machine Run Control • Envelope Tray
• Start Power • Intergrated or external Digital Front End (DFE)
• Document Transportation • Stapler
• Imaging
• Paper Supply
• Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
• Paper Transportation
• Xerographics
• Fuser Assembly
• Mailbox/Sorter and Offset Copy Tray
• Digital Front End (Integrated/External)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-3 Product Configurations
Figure 1 Basic Printer Configuration Figure 2 Basic Copier and Printer/Copier Configuration (With DADF)

Product Configurations 10-4 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Principles of Operation Overview
The Principles of Operation manual is written on a Block Schematic Diagram (BSD) chain-by-
chain basis. This is done because the BSDs form a good outline for describing copier opera-
tion.
The numbers of the chapters in this manual are the BSD chain numbers found in Section 7 of
the Service Manual. Figure 1 shows the interaction between the chains.
Figure 3 Printer/Copier with Mailbox/Sorter/OCT Options

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-5 Product Configurations, Principles of Operation
Figure 1 Interaction between BSD Chains
Standby Power interlock system. Standby Power filters the AC power input, generates various DC voltages,
and distributes the AC and DC voltages to the subsystems.
Standby Power includes the AC power distribution, DC power distribution, and the electrical

Principles of Operation Overview 10-6 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Local User Interface • It provides cycle-up and cycle-down commands to all other subsystems.
The local User Interface, shown in Figure 2, includes the Control Panel, the optional Edit Pad Start Power
Assembly and the electronics associated with these assemblies. The User Interface sends Start Power refers to the motors and drives which are activated when the START button is
operator commands to Machine Run Control, and displays messages and graphics in pressed on the User Interface, or downloads a print file from a remote user workstation. Start
response to commands from Machine Run Control. The displayed messages and their lan- Power is comprised of the Main Motor and the Photoreceptor Motor and their associated driv-
guage can be changed by downloading software from a Portable Workstation (PWS) con- etrains. However, these two motors do not provide all of the mechanical drive in the machine.
nected at the rear of the machine. Motors powering other machine subsystems are described in the chapters associated with
these subsystems.
Document Transportation
In a machine configured as a Copier or Copier/Printer/Scanner, the document is placed on the
Platen Glass. This can either be done manually by the user or automatically by the Duplex
Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) (Figure 4). In both cases, the machine can automatically
determine the size of the original document.
A machine configured as a Copier/Printer/Scanner can also scan documents, and the resulting
images are routed to a user client workstation by the DFE.
Imaging
Imaging is the acquisition and processing the document image, up to being written to the Pho-
toreceptor Drum. As shown in Table 1, the source and destination of the image depends on the
machine configuration.
LCD TOUCHSCREEN TOUCH PAD and Table 1 Image Sources and Destinations
LEDS
Configuration Image Sources Image Destinations
Printer User workstation via LAN and Photoreceptor Drum
DFE
Copier IIT Photoreceptor Drum
Copier/Printer/ IIT Photoreceptor Drum
Scanner or or
Figure 2 User Interface User workstation via LAN and User workstation via DFE and
DFE LAN
Remote User Interface
When the machine is configured as a printer or Copier/Printer/Scanner, its Digital Front End Scan and copy images are created at the IIT when the Xenon lamp illuminates the original doc-
(DFE) appears as an Internet or Intranet server. Users can send their print jobs to the machine, ument on the Platen Glass, and the Charge Coupled Device (CCD) samples the document at
and retrieve images, which have been scanned from the Platen Glass. 400 dots per inch (DPI). The image is then manipulated by the Image Input Terminal (IIT) and
the Image Processing System (IPS):
Machine Run Control
1. They determine if the original document is color or monochrome
Machine Run Control is the hardware and software that controls machine printing and copying
2. They digitize the analog data from the CCD
operations. It accepts status information from all machine subsystems and controls their oper-
ation. Specifically, Machine Run Control performs the following functions: 3. They separate the image into its component colors
4. They perform any other processing, such as image enlargement or reduction, that the
• It analyzes and implements operator inputs from the User Interface and sends display user has specified
messages for the operator to the User Interface. When copying, the image is routed to additional processing circuitry in the Image Output Termi-
• It receives status inputs from machine sensors and provides timing and sequencing nal (IOT). The IOT circuitry drives the laser diode in the Raster Output Scanner (ROS). This
instructions to machine motors and clutches. diode writes the latent image onto the Photoreceptor Drum.
• It identifies machine faults, initiates appropriate recovery operations and notifies the oper-
ator.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-7 Principles of Operation Overview
When scanning, the image is sent to the remote user workstation via the Digital Front End
(DFE).
Print images come from the user workstation via the LAN and DFE. These images are also
routed through the IOT processing circuitry to the ROS, which writes them onto the Photore-
ceptor Drum.
Paper Supply
The Paper Supply provides the paper and other blank copy material for the machine. There are
six possible sources: four paper trays (Trays 1-4), a manual side feeding tray (Tray 5) and the
optional High Capacity Feeder (HCF, Tray 6) (Figure 3). The media which these sources can High Capacity
hold are different: Feeder
• Paper Tray 1 and the HCF can hold only for A4 or 8-1/2” x 11” lightweight papers.
• Paper Tray 2, 3 and 4 can hold light and medium weight papers up to 11” X 17”, and can
be set to accept and detect 12”x18” paper.
• The Tray 5 can pass any type of paper, cover stock or transparency material which the
machine can process.
The Tray 5 is covered in the Paper Transportation section, and the HCF (Tray 6) is covered in
the Paper Supply and Paper Transportations sections.
Figure 3 High Capacity Feeder
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder

The Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) (Figure 4) permits stacks of original docu-
ments to be automatically fed to the Platen Glass where they can be scanned or copied. The
originals can be one-sided or two-sided. Duplex documents are automatically turned over
within the DADF so that both sides can be scanned. The user selects between these choices at
the machine’s local User Interface.

manuals4you.com
4. All of the components of the developed image are transferred from the IBT Belt to blank
copy media. After the image is transferred to the blank media, the image charge and
DADF INPUT residual toner are removed from the IBT Belt, preparing the IBT Belt for the next charging
TRAY
cycle.
5. The unfused copy is moved from the IBT to the Vacuum Transport, so that it can be
moved to the Fuser Assembly.
Fuser Assembly
The Fuser Assembly (Figure 5) receives the unfused copy, fuses the image to the copy mate-
rial and moves the copy to the output device or inverter. The Fuser Assembly uses heat and
pressure between two rollers to bond toner on to the copy media. The Heat Roll is both inter-
nally and externally heated, while the Pressure Roll is internally heated.
DADF OUTPUT
TRAY
Figure 4 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
Paper Transportation
Paper transportation retrieves sheets of blank copy media from the selected source, registers
them, and moves them to the IBT. In addition, Paper Transportation automatically detects the
size of media from the Tray 5 and automatically detects transparencies.
Xerographics
The Xerographics Module develops the latent image written onto the Photoreceptor Drum by
the ROS, transfers the developed image onto the Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) and transfers
the image(s) to the paper. This process comprises the following steps:
1. The ROS writes the image onto the charged Photoreceptor Drum, creating a latent elec-
trostatic image. This is done once for monochrome images and once per color or four
times total for color images. Figure 5 Fuser Assembly
2. The latent image is developed by depositing toner of the proper color onto the Photore-
ceptor Drum. This is also done once for monochrome images and four times for color Mailbox/Sorter and Offset Copy Tray
images. The combination of the Mailbox/Sorter and/or OCT can stack completed copies in a variety of
3. The toner comprising the developed image is transferred from the Photoreceptor Drum ways, depending on the mode selected by the operator.
onto the Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) Belt. The residual toner and image charge are
then removed from the Drum. This is the last step which is done a different number of • Collated sets
times for monochrome and color images. • Uncollated sets
• Sorted by user

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-9 Principles of Operation Overview
The Offset Copy Tray (OCT) is a standard accessory for Printer configurations. and an optional • 10 or 100 Mbps Ethernet
accessory for Copier and Copier/Printer configurations. The Mailbox/Sorter (Figure 6) is an • 4 or 16 Mbps Token Ring
optional accessory. The OCT can be mounted on either the basic machine or the Mailbox/ • TCP/IP, SMB, NetWare or AppleTalk protocol
Sorter. However, the OCT can offset only for print jobs received over the network via the DFE.
• Banyan VINES or NetBEUI/NetBIOS protocol via an external adaptor
The DFE is included for machine Printer configuration and is an option for Copier/Printer con-
figurations. With the DFE attached, users on the LAN can download Postscript, Adobe PDL,
Hewlett-Packard PCL or ASCII files from their workstations through the LAN, and the machine
will print them. In addition, when the machine is configured as a Copier/Printer/Scanner,
images scanned at the IIT can be sent via the DFE to the remote user workstation.
Figure 6 Mailbox/Sorter
Digital Front End (Integrated/External)

The DFE is designed to appear as an internet or intranet server when connected to a local
area network (LAN). Several different LAN interfaces are possible:

manuals4you.com
Overview Voltage Dependent Assemblies
This chapter describes the control, distribution and processing of electrical power, the safety Since this machine is used worldwide, the voltage of the Prime AC Power Input can vary. Sev-
interlock function, and the power saving function. The machine generates a several DC volt- eral machine assemblies have different part numbers depending on the voltage of the Prime
ages from its AC power input. Certain machine circuits are powered regardless of whether the AC Power input. The Prime AC Power is:
main power switch is off or on. There are four types of Standby Power:
• 115 VAC at 16 amperes in the digital copier configuration and 12 amperes in the printer
• AC power which is present when the machine’s main power switch is off (Unswitched AC configuration for Xerox Corporation (XC) markets
Power) • 220/230/240 VAC at 10 amperes for the Xerox Europe (XE) markets
• DC power which is also present when the Main Power Switch is off (Unswitched DC The modules which are changed depending on the Prime AC Power Input are:
Power)
• AC power which is only present when the Main Power Switch is on (Switched AC Powerr) • The IDFE Low Voltage Power Supply (IDFE LVPS)
• DC power which also is present only when the Main Power Switch is on (Switched DC • The Image Output Terminal Low Voltage Power Supply (IOT LVPS)
Power) • The Image Input Terminal/Image Processing System Low Voltage Power Supply (IIT/IPS
This chapter also describes Electrical Interlocks. LVPS)
• The 18 VAC Transformer
• The Fuser Solid State Relay (SSR)
• The IDFE LVPS SSR
• The Oil Pump
• The External Heat Roll Lamp
• The Pressure Roll Lamp
• The Heat Roll Lamp

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-11 Overview, Voltage Dependent Assemblies
Unswitched AC Power As shown in Figure 1, unswitched Prime AC Power enters the machine and is immediately
routed through the GFI Circuit Breaker and the Noise Filter. The Noise Filter prevents
unwanted signals from entering the machine on the power line. The Noise Filter Output is pro-
vided to the 18 VAC Transformer and to the Choke Coil. The Choke Coil is another type of
noise filter and supplies the IDFE LVPS. The output of the 18 VAC Transformer goes back to
the AC Driver PWBA. Figure 2 shows the locations of the assemblies used for Unswitched AC
Power.
Figure 1 Unswitched AC Power Routing

Unswitched AC Power 10-12 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
NOISE
FILTER
18 VAC
GFI TRANSFORMER
CIRCUIT (BEHIND IOT
BREAKER LVPS)
AC DRIVER PWBA
Figure 2 Locations of Assemblies Using Unswitched AC Power

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-13 Unswitched AC Power
Power Switching Control Circuitry
As shown in Figure 1, power switching control uses circuitry on the AC Driver PWBA with
inputs from other assemblies. Machine power can only be switched on by toggling the Main
Power Switch. When pressed, this switch energizes the Set Coil of Power Relay 1, which ener-
gizes Power Relay 2 and causes Switched AC Power to be supplied by the AC Driver PWBA.
AC power can be switched off by any of three events:
• The operator toggles the Main Power Switch.

• The IOT CPU PWBA asserts the Main Power Off line. This only occurs due to abnormal
execution of CPU firmware. When the operator again toggles the Main Power Switch, the
entire machine, including the IOT CPU, is rebooted.
• The IOT CPU PWBA asserts the Power Off line. This places the machine in to Sleep
Mode and is done as a power saving technique.
Each of these inputs activates the Reset Coil of Power Relay 1, deenergizing the relay and
releasing Power Relay 2. This removes Switched AC Power from the machine.
The machine saves power in two stages. The first transition is from Ready Mode to Low Power
Mode. This occurs 15 minutes (default time) after the machine operation initiated by the user.
This delay period is stored in IOT NVM and can be adjusted over a range of 1 to 240 minutes.
When in Low Power Mode, the fuser heaters are off.
The second transition is to Sleep Mode. The default delay is 60 minutes after the transition to
Low Power Mode. The delay value is also stored in IOT NVM and can be adjusted over a range
of 15 to 240 minutes.

Power Switching Control Circuitry 10-14 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 1 Power Switching Control Circuitry Block Diagram

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-15 Power Switching Control Circuitry
Unswitched DC Power Switched AC Power
All unswitched DC power originates from the AC Driver PWBA. Switched AC Power from Power Relay 2 on AC Driver PWBA goes to the following assemblies:
AC Driver PWBA • IOT LVPS

The AC Driver PWBA generates +5 VDC and +12 VDC. Both DC voltages are derived from the • Oil Pump
output of the 18 VAC Transformer. The +12 VDC output goes to the Fuser Fan, while the • IIT/IPS LVPS
+5VDC is supplied as EVER +5V to several assemblies: • Fuser Solid State Relay (SSR)
AC Power from the Fuser SSR goes to the following assemblies:
• The IOT Drive PWBA
• Vsel PWBA • External Heat Roll Lamp
• Halftone PWBA • Pressure Roll Lamp
• EPSV • Heat Roll Lamp
• The IOT CPU PWBA, via the IOT Drive PWBA
• The Main Power Switch
The AC Driver PWBA contains Prime AC Power switching relays, but control of these relays is
distributed among several assemblies. The topic is covered in detail in the Power Switching
Control Circuitry section.

Unswitched DC Power, Switched AC Power 10-16 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Switched DC Power The IDFE LVPS has two outputs:
Switched DC Power comprises the outputs of the IDFE LVPS, IOT LVPS and the IIT/IPS LVPS.
• +5.1 VDC at 11 amps
• +12 VDC at 2 amp
IDFE Low Voltage Power Supply (IDFE LVPS)
Figure 2 shows the location of the IDFE LVPS.
As shown in Figure 1, the AC input power to the IDFE LVPS is supplied by Unswitched AC
Power through a Choke Coil and an SSR. The SSR is controlled by the IDFE LV SEQ from the
AC Driver PWBA; IDFE LV SEQ is controlled by the Main Power Switch. When switching off
machine power, an RC network on the AC Driver PWBA delays the change of state of IDFE LV
SEQ by approximately 22 seconds. This permits the IDFE to perform an orderly shutdown.
Figure 1 IDFE LVPS AC Power Switching and DC Power Distribution

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-17 Switched DC Power
IDFE LVPS
(Behind AC
Driver PWBA)
Figure 2 IDFE LVPS Location
IOT Low Voltage Power Supply (IOT LVPS)

The IOT LPVS has four outputs:
• +5 VDC at 11 amps
• +12 VDC at 1.8 amps
• -12 VDC at 1.0 amps
Figure 3 and Figure 4 show the assemblies supplied by the IOT LVPS. Figure 5 shows the
location of the IOT LVPS, Distribution PWBA and IOT Drive PWBA.

Switched DC Power 10-18 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 3 IOT LVPS +24 VDC Power Distribution

Figure 4 IOT LVPS +5 VDC and +/- 12 VDC Power Distribution

manuals4you.com
DISTRIBUTION
PWBA
IOT DRIVE
PWBA (BEHIND
IOT CPU PWBA IOT LVPS (BEHIND
AND IOT NVM COVER)
PWBA)
Figure 5 IOT LVPS, Distribution PWBA and IOT Drive PWBA Locations
IIT/IPS Low Voltage Power Supply

The IIT/IPS LVPS has 4 outputs:

• +13.3 VDC at 1.1 amps
• +24.5 VDC at 4.5 amps
Figure 6 shows the assemblies supplied by the IIT/IPS LVPS, and Figure 7 shows the location
of the IIT/IPS LVPS.

Figure 6 IIT/IPS LVPS DC Power Distribution

manuals4you.com
Electrical Interlocks
Equipment interlocks are devices which disconnect power to machine circuitry when a particu-
lar condition occurs. In this machine, they disconnect power when a machine outer door is
opened and when internal assemblies are moved into their service position. This machine uses
the following interlocks:
• Front Door Interlock Switch (shown in Figure 1)

• Inverter Cover Interlock Switch (R/H) (shown in Figure 2)
• Drawer/IBT Interlock Switch
• Paper Takeaway Cover (L/H) Interlock Switch
IIT/IPS LOW VOLTAGE

POWER SUPPLY
Figure 7 IIT/IPS LVPS Location
FRONT PANEL
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
Figure 1 Front Door Interlock Switch Location

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-23 Switched DC Power, Electrical Interlocks
• +5 VDC is interlocked by the machine paper path Drawer and front door. Figure 3 shows
the associated signal routing.
• +5 VDC is interlocked by the machine Inverter Cover
• +24 VDC is interlocked by the machine front door Figure 4 shows the associated signal
routing.
• +24 VDC is also interlocked by the machine left hand door. Figure 5 shows the associated
signal routing.
Figure 2 Inverter Cover (L/H Door) Interlock Switch Location
Whenever an interlocked assembly is opened, the associated interlock switch disconnects

power from the supplied circuitry.
Figure 3 Front Door +5 VDC Power Interlock Signal Flow

Electrical Interlocks 10-24 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Front Door & Drawer +24 VDC Power Interlock Signal Flow

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-25 Electrical Interlocks
Figure 5 Paper Takeaway Cover (L/H) +24 VDC Power Signal Flow

Electrical Interlocks 10-26 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview 3. Key/LED PWBA
4. Analog Touch Panel
As shown in Figure 1, the User Interface (UI) consists of:
5. LCD Backlight Lamp and Power Supply PWBA
1. User Interface Base PWBA 6. Edit Pad
2. LCD Display PWBA and Contrast Control PWBA The locations of these assemblies are shown in Figure 2.
Figure 1 User Interface Simplified Block Diagram

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-27 Overview
User Interface Base PWBA
The UI Base PWBA contains the logic to control the remaining assemblies in the UI. As shown
in Figure 1, this PWBA includes three microcontrollers:
• a PWBA Microcontroller
• an LCD Display Microcontroller
• a Control Panel/Touch Panel Microcontroller
LCD BACK-
LIGHT POWER
CONTRAST SUPPLY PWBA ANALOG TOUCH PANEL (TOP);
CONTROL LCD PWBA/DISPLAY;
PWBA LCD BACKLIGHT LAMP; KEYPAD /LED
UI BASE PWBA (BOTTOM) PWBA
Figure 2 User Interface Assemblies Locations

Overview, User Interface Base PWBA 10-28 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 1 User Interface Base PWBA Block Diagram
The PWBA Microcontroller and Display Microcontroller share DRAM and ROM. (Both micro- The Control Panel/Touch Panel Microcontroller detects changes in the status of the push-but-
controllers also include on board RAM and ROM.) The PWBA Microcontroller disables the LCD ton using seven row lines and four column lines. It also drives the LEDs on the Key/LED
Display Microcontroller whenever it must access that memory. The PWBA Microcontroller also PWBA, and connects with the Left, Right, Up and Down analog input/outputs from the Analog
multiplexes the communications links with the IOT CPU PWBA and Edit Pad LED Control Touch Panel.
between itself and the LCD Display PWBA. It also provides separate communications inter-
faces with the Edit Pad and the Portable Workstation (PWS). The PWS is used to download
software into the UI Base PWBA.
The LCD Display Microcontroller uses the data in the Frame Buffer RAM to drive the display on
the LCD Display PWBA. The LCD Display Microcontroller also outputs drive signals to the
buzzer located on the Push-button/LED PWBA. These outputs are routed through individual
attenuators, each of which has a different value of attenuation. This permits the buzzer to have
three different volume levels and an almost infinite number of tones.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-29 User Interface Base PWBA
LCD Display PWBA and Contrast Control PWBA
The LCD PWBA, shown in Figure 1, contains the 640 by 240 pixel LCD display as well as its
drive circuitry. All data and timing signals to the LCD are generated by the LCD Display Micro-
controller on the UI Base PWBA and routed through the Contrast Control PWBA. Two DC volt-
ages, V-EE (+28 VDC) and V-LCD (0 to +5 VDC adjustable), control the brightness and
contrast of the LCD display. V-LCD can be adjusted by a variable resistor located on the Con-
trast Control PWBA and accessible to user.

LCD Display PWBA and Contrast Control PWBA 10-30 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 1 LCD Display PWBA and Contrast Control PWBA

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-31 LCD Display PWBA and Contrast Control PWBA
LCD Backlight Lamp and Power Supply PWBA Key/LED PWBA
The LCD Backlight Power Supply PWBA (Figure 1) accepts +24 VDC from the UI Base PWBA The Key/LED PWBA contains 25 push-button switches, a buzzer and 10 LEDs. The push-but-
and a Backlight Enable control signal from the UI Base PWBA. When enabled, the LCD Back- ton are shown in Figure 1, and the LEDs and buzzer are shown in Figure 2. Twenty four of the
light Power Supply PWBA outputs 585 VAC to the LCD Backlight Lamp. The level of LCD illu- switches are electrically arranged in a row-column matrix. The LED/Push-button Processor on
mination isn’t adjustable. the UI Base PWBA individually and sequentially asserts the matrix rows while accepting inputs
from all of the matrix columns simultaneously. A column line will be asserted only when a push-
button is pressed and that push-button’s row line is asserted. The Power Saver push-button
also connects between row and column when pressed, but the connection is made through an
IC analog switch. A separate section of the same switch routes the V-DD input to the Power
Saver LEDs on this PWBA.
Eight of the ten LEDs are controlled by discrete lines from the LED/Push-button Interface Pro-
cessor on the UI Base PWBA. The remaining two LEDs are controlled by a signal from IOT
CPU PWBA.
The Buzzer is driven by outputs from the LCD Display Microcontroller on the UI Base PWBA.

LCD Backlight Lamp and Power Supply PWBA, Key/ 10-32 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 1 Push-button/LED PWBA Input Device Control and Connections

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-33 Key/LED PWBA
Figure 2 Push-button/LED PWBA Output Device Control and Connection

Key/LED PWBA 10-34 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Analog Touch Panel The LCD Display Microcontroller takes a Y dimension measurement by driving the Y dimen-
sion lines (Up and Down) as outputs and accepting the Right X dimension line as an input.
The Analog Touch Panel is mounted over the LCD Display PWBA. As shown in Figure 1, the
When used as an output, the Up output is grounded and a Down output is at about +5 VDC.
touch panel is connected to the UI Base PWBA via the Key/LED PWBA by four analog input/
When the panel is touched, two internal conductive layers make contact. The voltage at the
output lines. The LCD Display Microcontroller on the UI Base PWBA alternately samples the
Right input is proportional to the Y position where the touch occurred.
touchscreen’s X dimension and its Y dimension. These samples alternate rapidly enough that
when the user presses the touchscreen, at least one X dimension measurement and at least The X dimension input is taken in a similar fashion. The LCD Display Microcontroller drives the
one Y dimension measurement are taken.
X dimension lines and samples the Up line as an input. When driven, Right is at ground and
Left is at about +5 VDC.
Figure 1 Analog Touchscreen Interconnect Block Diagram

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-35 Analog Touch Panel
Analog Touch Panel 10-36 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview Control Architecture
This machine uses distributed computer technology and data communications to control its As shown in Figure 1, the center of the control architecture is the IOT CPU PWBA. This
operation. Overall machine control is provided by the Image Output Terminal (IOT) CPU assembly uses 2-wire and 4-wire serial communications links to pass command and status
Printed Wiring Board Assembly (PWBA). However, additional intelligent PWBAs control sub- messages with several other standard and optional assemblies.
system functions. These PWBAs talk with each other using serial communications paths.
There is no local network bus. Run-time monitoring and self-tests allow the control system to • The Post-IPS (Image Processing System) PWBA
detect faults. • The Pre-IPS PWBA via the Post-IPS PWBA
• The Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) via the Post-IPS PWBA and Pre-IPS
This chapter will discuss the following subjects: PWBA
• The User Interface (UI) Base PWBA
1. Control Architecture
• The Portable Workstation (PWS)
2. Non-Volatile Memory
• The Tray 6 (High Capacity Feeder - HCF)
3. Machine Usage Modes
• The Sorter/Mailbox/Offset Copy Tray (OCT)
4. Self-test
• The Foreign Interface
5. Copier Timing
• The Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE)
6. Job Control
In addition, the address and data buses from the IOT CPU are connected to the following:
7. Digital Front End
8. Foreign Interface
• The IOT Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) PWBA
• The IOT Drive PWBA
• The Halftone PWBA.
Three of these PWBAs deserve special mention. First, the IOT Drive PWBA contains the
decoders and drive circuitry which connect the IOT CPU with discrete line outputs and discrete
line inputs. These discrete lines are connected with motors, clutches, solenoids and sensors
throughout the machine.
Second, the IOT CPU PWBA provides all of the connections between the User Interface and
the rest of the machine. All status data from other PWBAs must be processed by the IOT CPU
PWBA, which then provides the appropriate messages to the UI Base PWBA. When some-
thing is entered at the UI, the UI Base PWBA typically sends messages to the IOT CPU PWBA.
As a result of these messages and its own processing, the IOT CPU PWBA sends commands
to the rest of the machine.
Third, the control and status communications path between the IOT CPU PWBA and the DADF
is routed via both the Post-IPS PWBA and Pre-IPS PWBA. The nature of the routing differs
between the two PWBAs. The signal path through the Post-IPS PWBA is direct, and no active
circuitry on that PWBA is involved. However, all messages between the IOT CPU PWBA and
DADF are handled by the control processor on the Pre-IPS PWBA. Therefore, the Pre-IPS
PWBA control processor shares control of the DADF with the IOT CPU.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-37 Overview, Control Architecture
Figure 1 Communications Architecture Block Diagram
Non-Volatile Memory

Control Architecture, Non-Volatile Memory 10-38 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Three PWBAs include Non-Volatile Memory (NVM). These are shown in Table 1. This memory Machine Usage Modes
holds setup parameters which are specific to the particular machine. The NVM for the IOT CPU
The machine has both local and remote usage modes. The remote usage mode is accessible
PWBA is located on the IOT NVM PWBA. This PWBA includes a 3 volt lithium battery. This
from a client workstation connected to the network. This is described in the Chapter 12, Inte-
battery supplies RAM power when the PWBA is disconnected from the IOT CPU PWBA or
grated Digital Front End. The local mode is accessible only from the machine local User Inter-
when prime AC power is removed from the machine. When the IOT CPU PWBA is replaced,
face and is described below.
the IOT NVM PWBA must be disconnected from the old PWBA and reinstalled onto the new
PWBA.
The local usage mode has five submodes:
Table 1 NVM Locations and Contents
• User Mode
Location Memory Type Values For
• System Administrator Tools Mode
Pre-IPS PWBA Flash ROM IIT and DADF • Auditron Administrator Tools Mode
Post-IPS PWBA Flash ROM IPS • User Interface Diagnostic Mode
IOT NVM PWBA (for IOT CPU PWBA) Battery-Backed RAM IOT and UI Copier User Mode
The User Mode provides all copier functions not reserved for System Administrator Tools
Mode, Auditron Administrator Tools Mode and User Interface Diagnostic Mode.
Copier System Administrator Tools Mode

The System Administrator can select the following parameters:
• Paper tray defaults

• Copy density and color defaults
• Copy position and shift
• Document orientation defaults
• Simplex/Duplex default
• N-up default
• System Administrator password
• Reduction/enlargement default
• User registered colors
• Photo/text separation levels
• Audio tone
• Copy quantity limit
• Timer values
• Tone reproduction parameter values
Copier Auditron Administrator Tools Mode
The following parameters can be selected in this mode:
• Auditron Administrator password

• Auditron mode on/off
• Password, copy limit and copy counter by user number
Copier User Interface Diagnostic Mode
The following parameters can be selected in this mode:
• Remote Maintenance Mode

• NVM Reset
• NVM Read/Write

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-39 Non-Volatile Memory, Machine Usage Modes
• NVM Initialize Self-test
• Password
All machine subsystems which contain microcontrollers and microprocessors perform Power-
On Self-Test (POST) when DC power is first applied to them. If all POST procedures are
passed, the machine goes to normal operation. If a circuit fails a POST procedure, the machine
will attempt to notify the user. However, some failures may be due to a catastrophic hardware
failure which causes the machine to completely suspend operations.
The following are the PWBAs that are connected together or that communicate the machine
status and operation.
• The IOT CPU PWBA (Image Output Terminal) checks communications for the following:
– UI PWBA
– Post IPS PWBA
– Mail Box Control PWBA
– Serial Port for the PWS
• Pre IPS PWBA (Image Process System):
– Checks communications through the Post IPS PWBA and MEM. SYS PWBA
– Controls the IOT through a direct connection with the IOT Drive PWBA
– Checks DADF Control PWBA communications
• UI PWBA (User Interface) Controls:
– Control Panel Switches, LCD and the Touch Panel
– Self-test for RAM and Control Panel
• Post IPS PWBA implements image processing.
– Post IPW PWBA and the MEM SYS PWBA are connected together and assist com-
munications between the Pre IPS PWBA and the IOT CPU PWBA.
• MEM SYS PWBA stores the Image Data sent from the Pre IPS PWBA
• IOT Drive PWBA controls the IOT by signals sent from the IOT CPU PWBA
• DADF Control PWBA controls the DADF and runs self-test of the RAM
• Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA controls the Mailbox/Sorter
Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) Self-Test
Table 1 lists the POST routines performed by the IDFE.
Table 1 IDFE Power-On Self-Test

Test Performed What’s Tested Pass Indication Fail Indication
DC Power Test - DC Power to IDFE Power LED stays on Power LED is off
Power Switch ON Motherboard
BIOS Level Test IDFE Motherboard Failure LED goes off at Failure LED remains on
components end of test at end of test
Software Bootup Application soft- Heartbeat LED blinks Software load attempts
Sequence Test ware integrity continuously fail; Heartbeat LED
remains on constantly
Printer Interface UART (internal Client level command to Failure LED blinks pat-
DDI Comms Test 1 loopback) IOT tern 2, but software boot
continues

Machine Usage Modes, Self-test 10-40 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 IDFE Power-On Self-Test PWBA LEDs
Test Performed What’s Tested Pass Indication Fail Indication Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, Table 4, Table 5, Table 6, Table 7, and Table 8 list the diagnostic
Printer Interface End-to-End Failure LED doesn’t Failure LED blinks pat- LEDs on various machine PWBAs. These can be used to determine the status of both on-
DDI Comms Test 2 Comms test to IOT blink pattern tern 2, but software boot board and off-board circuitry.
CPU PWBA continues
Table 1 IOT CPU PWBA LEDs
Scan Out Interface UART (internal Client level command to Failure LED blinks pat-
DDI Comms Test 1 loopback) IOT tern 3, but printer oper-
ates normally LED Color Signal Comment
Scan Out Interface End-to-End Failure LED doesn’t Failure LED blinks pat- CR5 Red CPU Reset Lit indicates that reset line to CPU is being
DDI Comms Test 2 Comms test to IOT blink pattern tern 4, but printer oper- asserted
CPU PWBA ates normally CR6 Green PWS Rx Data Flickering indicates data transitions
Network/connec- Network link hard- Link LED stays lit Link LED isn’t lit CR7 Green Tray 6 (HCF) Flickering indicates data transitions
tivity Hardware, ware
CR8 Green ESPV Rx Data Flickering indicates data transitions
part 1
CR9 Green Decurler Rx Data Flickering indicates data transitions
Network/connec- Network visibility to Activity LED flashes pat- Activity LED does not
tivity Hardware, IDFE tern mimicking network flash CR10 Green +5 VDC Lit indicates presence of PWBA power
part 2 traffic flow CR14 Green UI PWBA Tx Data Flickering indicates data transitions
Network/connec- Ethernet speed Configuration report, Configuration report, CR16 Green UI PWBA Rx Data Flickering indicates data transitions
tivity Hardware, detection circuitry web client and XCMI web client and XCMI CR17 Green IIT PWBA Rx Data Flickering indicates data transitions
part 3 setting contain correct setting contain incor- CR18 Green IPS PWBA Rx Flickering indicates data transitions
speed connection rect speed connection Data
Network/connec- Token Ring speed LED or other media dis- LED or other media indi-
tivity Hardware, detection circuitry plays sensed or set cates wrong speed con-
Table 2 Pre-IPS PWBA LEDs
part 4 speed connection nection. Desired speed
can be set manually LED Color Signal Comment
Network/connec- TCP/IP connectiv- At least 1 ICMP echo No response is CR5 Green T1 Firmware check
tivity Software, part ity and SMB test response is received received; message CR6 Green IIT_CMD, SYS Flickering indicates command being
1 using Ping func- and message is printed printed on configuration received from IOT
tionality on configuration report report CR7 Green ADF_SYS, ADF Flickering indicates status information being
Network/connec- Netware connec- A GetNearestServer No response is received from DADF
tivity Software, part tivity using Get- response is received received; message
CR8 Green LED_MEM_RDY, Lit indicates that MEM_RDY signal is active
2 NearestServer and message is printed printed on configuration MRDY
functionality on configuration report report
CR9 Red RST_LED, RST Lit indicates that reset line from IOT is active
Network/connec- Appletalk connec- A Zone response is No response is
CR10 Red CPU_HG, MRST Not lit when CPU firmware operating cor-
tivity Software, part tivity using Get- received and message received; message
rectly
3 MyZone is printed on configura- printed on configuration
functionality tion report report
Table 3 Memory System PWBA LEDs
LED Color Signal Comment
CR1 Yellow POWER Indicates +3.3 VDC is present on the PWBA
CR2 Yellow IPSPSI/IPS-PS Page Sync signal from POST to MEMORY, lit
when signal is active
CR3 Yellow CPE_PS/CMM- Output Page Sync signal from CMM1 (blue),
PS(B) Lit when signal is active.
CR3 Yellow CMMPSG/CMM- Output Page Sync signal from CMM2
PS(G) (green), Lit when signal is active.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-41 Self-test, PWBA LEDs
Table 3 Memory System PWBA LEDs Table 6 IDFE Print Server LEDs
LED Color Signal Comment LED Color Signal Comment
CR4 Yellow CMMPSR/CMM- Output Page Sync signal from CMM3 (red), Link Indicates integrity of Ethernet connection
PS(R) Lit when signal is active Activity Indicates activity on the Ethernet connection
CR5 Yellow IIT-PS/IITPSI Page Sync signal from Pre-IPS to memory.
Lit when signal is active. Table 7 IDFE BNC Transceiver LEDs
CR6 Yellow nMEMRDYd/ Lit indicates that memory can be written to.
nMEMRDY
Link Indicates integrity of Ethernet connection
CR7 Yellow DRRE Lit indicates that memory can be red from
Activity Indicates activity on the Ethernet connection
Table 4 Post-IPS PWBA LEDs
Table 8 Edit PWBA LEDs
CR1 Yellow /IPSRST IPS Reset from IOT CPU PWBA
CR2 Yellow /LIPS-STAT From Post-IPS PWBA CPU; Status output to CR1 Yellow +3.3 VDC Indicates presence of +3.3 VDC to PWBA
IOT CPU PWBA CR2 Yellow +5 VDC Indicates presence of +5 VDC to PWBA
CR3 Yellow /IPS-CON Control input from IOT CPU PWBA; after CR3 Yellow CPE_PS Page Sync signal from Post-IPS PWBA to
buffer Edit PWBA
CR4 Yellow /LIOTEPS1 Page Sync from IOT CPU PWB to Post-IPS CR4 Yellow PS0 Page Sync signal from Edit PWBA to Post-
PWBA. Lit when signal is active. IPS PWBA
CR5 Yellow /LIOT\PS0 Page Sync from Post-IPS PWBA to IOT CPU
PWBA
CR6 Yellow LSFMSP0 Output Page Sync signal from SFM1 ASIC.
Lit when signal is active.
CR7 Yellow LED0, TIOCA3 From Post-IPS PWBA CPU
CR8 Yellow LED1, TIOCB3 From Post-IPS PWBA CPU
CR9 Yellow LED2, TIOCC3 From Post-IPS PWBA CPU
CR10 Yellow LED3, TIOCD3, From Post-IPS PWBA CPU
Table 5 IDFE Motherboard LEDs

<To Be Green Power Indicates DC power available to Mother-
Supplied> board
<To Be Green Link Indicates integrity of Ethernet connection
Supplied>
Yellow Activity Indicates activity on the Ethernet connection
Red Failure Software controlled with various patterns;
indicates fault detection Drente software
boot-up sequence test
Yellow Heartbeat Software controlled with stable pattern; indi-
cates proper operation of software

PWBA LEDs 10-42 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
PWBA Test Points Table 2 IOT Drive PWBA Test Points
As shown in Table 1 and Table 2, some of the PWBAs contain test points which can be moni- Test Point Level Comment
tored. TP11 +5VDC IC Supply Voltage
TP12 Ground IC Supply Ground
Table 1 IOT CPU PWBA Test Points
TP13 Ground IC Supply Ground
Test Point Level Comment
TP14 +5VDC IC Supply Voltage
TP2 TTL Send data to PWS TP15 0 to +5VDC HR_Cont_Sys From Fuser
TP3 TTL Receive data from PWS TP16 0 to +5VDC E_HR_Cont_Sys
TP4 TTL Send data to IIT TP17 +12VDC Supply Input
TP5 TTL Send to EPSV (FX only) TP18 +24VDC Interlocked Supply Input
TP6 TTL Send to Tray 6 (HCF) TP19 0 to +5VDC PR_Cont_Sys
TP7 TTL Send to Decurler TP20 0 to +5VDC ADC_SNR_VP
TP8 TTL Receive from IIT TP21 0 to +5VDC ADC_SNR_V_DIF
TP9 TTL Receive from IPS TP22 TTL ADC_LED_ON
TP11 TTL Receive from UI TP23 0 to +5 VDC DTS_DC_V_MONI
TP12 TTL Receive from EMB Scan TP24 0 to +15 VDC 2BTR_V_MONI
TP13 +5V DC Power Input TP26 0 to +5VDC Pre Reg1 Snr
TP14 TTL Receive from EMB Print TP27 0 to +5VDC Reg1 Snr
TP15 TTL Receive from Dual Device Interface TP28 +24VDC Supply Input
(DDI) Scan
TP16 TTL Receive from DDI Print
TP17 TTL Send to DDI Print
TP18 TTL Send to DDI Scan
TP19 TTL Send to EMB Print
TP20 TTL Send to EMB Scan
TP21 0V Ground
TP22 +5V DC Power Input
TP23 ---- Not Used
TP24 TTL Send to UI
TP25 TTL Send to IPS
TP26 0V Ground
Table 2 IOT Drive PWBA Test Points

Test Point Level Comment
TP1 +5VDC VAREF
TP2 TTL /Fuser On
TP3 TTL PCC_AC_PWH
TP5 0 to +5VDC PR_DH_Sys, From Fuser
TP6 0 to +5VDC Sys_Ext_H/R_Cont From Fuser
TP7 0 to +5VDC Temp_Air_Therm1
TP8 0 to +5VDC HR_On_Sys From Fuser
TP9 Ground 12V Return
TP10 -12VDC Supply Input

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-43 PWBA Test Points
Copier Timing
The main machine timing signal is the Transfer Roll Zero (TR0) Signal. This signal is used to
synchronize the various steps of the process to correctly position the image on the output
media. TR0 is produced when the leading edge of a timing strip across the Intermediate Belt
Transfer (IBT) Belt passes over the TR0 sensor.
The IBT has two timing patches which are separated by one-half of the IBT circumference.
Since the IBT has a circumference of the IBT is 527.81 mm, this means that the two timing
patches are 263.905 mm apart. Therefore, an 8-1/2” x 11” or A4 sheet (or smaller) will fit LEF
on the IBT between the timing patches and two sheets will fit on the entire IBT. An 11” x 17,”
12”x18” or A3 sheet will fit SEF on the entire IBT, across one of the patches.
In addition, the Drum Motor includes an encoder which outputs one pulse per revolution to the
IOT Drive and Control PWBAs. This is used for motor speed control rather than as a paper
transport timing reference. The Interval between TR0 pulses and the frequency of the Drum
Motor output pulses depends on the process speed. The process speed depends, in turn, on
the type of media being used for the copies. The following Table shows the correlation between
these three factors.
Table 1 Copy Input Media, Process Speed and TR0 Interval

Motor Clock
Input Media Process Speed Pulse Frequency TR0 Interval
Extra Heavy Weight 59.82 mm/sec 544.0 Hz 4.412 sec
164-250 gsm paper
90-140 lb index
90 lb cover
Transparencies
Heavy Weight 129.68 mm/sec 1179.4 Hz 2.035 sec
106-163 gsm paper
28-90 lb index
Normal 219.47 mm/sec 1996.0 Hz 1.202 sec
less than 105 gsm paper
less than 28 lb index
Transparency material must be inserted in Tray 5 and can be detected automatically. For other
media, the user must manually enter its weight at the start of a job. Therefore, the machine
knows the paper copy weight of the start of a job and adjusts the process speed accordingly.
The default value is paper less than 105 gsm or 28 lb. Therefore, the default process speed is
220 mm/sec.

Copier Timing 10-44 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Job Control
The User Interface (UI) PWBA provides overall job control through communications with the
IOT CPU PWBA. The TR0 signal controls the timing of the job control sequence.
Job Control Sequence

This machine is capable of a large variety of job control sequences, depending on how it is
being used:
• Is the task a print job from the DFE or a copy job from the Platen?
• Is the output sheet size larger than 8.5” X 11” and A4?
• Is the output simplex or duplex?
• Does the output include color?
• Does the unit include a DADF? Is its automatic feed function being used?
• Does the unit include an output Mailbox/Sorter option?
• Does the unit include an OCT option?
These factors can be mixed in any combination.
Figure 1 shows the job control sequence when using the machine as a Printer accessed from
the DFE. This figure shows decisions for:
• Small prints (8.5” x 11”/A4 and smaller) vs. larger sheets

• Color vs. black and white images. Note that this decision is made on a sheet by sheet
basis, not for the entire print job
• Simplex vs. duplex operation
This figure ignores Mailbox/Sorter and OCT operation.
Figure 2 shows the job control sequence shows decisions for print size and color/B&W opera-
tion. This figure ignores the simplex/duplex output decision, Mailbox/Sorter operation and OCT
operation.
Figure 3 shows the job control sequence with originals placed in the DADF. Like Figure 2, this
figure shows the job control sequence making decisions for print size and color/B&W opera-
tion. However, it ignores the simplex/duplex output decision, Mailbox/Sorter operation and
OCT operation.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-45 Job Control
Figure 1 Machine as a Printer: Print Simplified Job Control Sequence

Job Control 10-46 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Machine as a Copier: Copy Simplified Job Control Sequence - Original on Platen

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-47 Job Control
Figure 3 Machine as a Copier with DADF: Copy Simplified Job Control Sequence - Originals in DADF

Job Control 10-48 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Digital Front End Foreign Interface
The DFE includes the hardware and software which permits the machine to function as an The following Figure 1 shows the Foreign Interface permits connection of external accessories.
Internet server. In this capacity, the machine can be used as a 400 dpi color scanner or 600 dpi These accessories include a Copylyzer, Coin Operation Unit, Xerox Card unit, Foot Switch
color printer using a variety of software. Refer to Chapter 12, which describes the IDFE in and/or a Key Switch.
detail.
Figure 1 Foreign Interface Simplified Block Diagram

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-49 Digital Front End, Foreign Interface
Digital Front End, Foreign Interface 10-50 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview Main Motor
The Start Power Chain comprises the Main Motor and Drum Motor, their control circuitry and The Main Motor is a multispeed motor whose speed is controlled by a clock signal from the IOT
their mechanical drive systems. The Start Power Chain is activated when the user presses the CPU PWBA. As shown in Figure 1, the Main Motor drives the following machine elements:
Start button on the User Interface with the machine powered.
• The Mag Roller, the Auger, and the Pickoff Roll (BPO) in the Developer Subsystem
• The Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) Cleaner Cam and the IBT Cleaner Auger
• The IBT Second Bias Transfer Roller (BTR)
• The Waste Toner Auger, the Waste Toner Bottle Entrance Auger and the Toner Bottle
• The Photoreceptor (PR) Drum Brush, the PR Drum Cleaner Auger Rear and the PR Drum
Cleaner Auger Front
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE MAIN MOTOR

BELT (1 OF 2)
Figure 1 Main Motor Location and Mechanical Drive System
The Main Motor operates at three speeds, depending on the type of blank media being pro- Motor speed is controlled by the IOT CPU PWBA which uses its address and data buses to
cessed. Motor speed is controlled by the IOT CPUIOT CPU PWBA which uses its address and write control data to decoder circuitry on the IOT Drive PWBA. As shown in Figure 2, the indi-
data buses to write control data to decoder circuitry on the IOT Drive PWBA. vidual outputs from the decoders are sent through drivers to the motor. Table 2 shows the Main
Motor operating states resulting from various combinations of control lines.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-51 Overview, Main Motor
Figure 2 Main Motor Control Circuit
Table 1 Main Motor Control Lines and Condition

On Sel 1 Sel 2 CLK Main Motor Operating Condition
0 X X N/A Motor Off
1 0 0 545.37 Hz 59.82 mm/sec process speed
1 0 1 N/A Not used
1 1 0 1182.31 Hz 130 mm/sec process speed
Drum Motor
The Drum Motor is a clock-controlled multispeed device which can operate at three different
speeds, as shown in Table 2. Also like the Main Motor, the Photoreceptor Motor is controlled by
the IOT CPU PWBA and IOT Drive PWBA. The Photoreceptor Motor includes two additional
connections: BRAKE ON and ENC A. Figure 1 shows the control and power lines going to the
Drum Motor, and Figure 2 shows the motor’s location.

Main Motor, Drum Motor 10-52 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 1 Photoreceptor Motor Control Circuit
Table 1 Photoreceptor Motor Control Lines and Condition

On Gain 1 Gain 2 CLK Brake ENC A Main Motor Operating Condition
0 X X N/A X 0 Hz Motor Off
1 0 0 544.0 Hz 1 544.0 59.82 mm/sec process speed
1 0 1 N/A 1 Not used
0 0 Hz Locked
The Photoreceptor Motor drives the Photoreceptor Drum and the IBT Drive Roll.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-53 Drum Motor
PHOTORECEPTOR
DRUM DRIVE-
SHAFT END
PHOTORECEPTOR
DRUM MOTOR
Figure 2 Photoreceptor Motor Location and Mechanical Drive System

Drum Motor 10-54 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview The original documents are placed face up onto the Input Tray. The documents are fed from the
top of the stack into the DADF. A Nudger Roll supplies the top sheet to the nip of the Feed and
This chapter describes the electrical and mechanical components of the Duplex Automatic
Retard Roll. The Feed Roll transports the document sheet to the Registration Roll. The DADF
Document Feeder (DADF). The DADF performs these primary functions:
temporarily stalls the Registration Roll to deskew the document before sending it to the Platen
Belt. The Platen Belt, driven by a Belt Motor, positions the document on the Platen Glass. For
• Automatically feeds a document or a stack of documents, one at a time, from an Input
one-sided documents, the Platen Belt moves each document to the Output Tray when scan-
Tray onto the Platen Glass of the machine for copying.
ning is complete. For two-sided documents, each document is routed through an invert path,
• Deskews the document before copying. then scanned again. Depending on a user selection, the document can be again routed
• Aligns the document onto the Platen Glass for proper copier registration. through the invert path to preserve original order stacking after scanning. Regardless of what
• Automatically inverts (turns over) a two-sided document, deskews, and registers it onto has proceeded, the document is ultimately routed to the Output Tray by the Platen Belt and Exit
the Platen Glass for copying the second side of the document. rolls. Refer to DADF Document Transport and Inverting Documentation for additional informa-
• Automatically stacks the documents that have been copied onto an Output Tray. A user tion.
selected option allows two-sided documents to be re-inverted (turned over again) for
proper stacking onto the DADF Output Tray. The DADF can automatically sense the document size. This is done by:
This chapter will cover the following: • Two Size Sensors in the DADF read front to back dimensions (feed width)
• A pulse count of the Belt Motor while the Registration sensor is blocked and reads the
• Overview
(run) length dimension
• Electrical Power
The DADF has two operator selectable modes:
• DADF System Control
• DADF Document Transport • Same Size Mode is used when all documents are of the same size. This mode provides
• DADF Operation the highest productivity, since the copier does not slow down to detect the size of each
Figure 1 shows the DADF. document.
• Mixed Size Mode is used when documents of different sizes are placed in the DADF. The
copier automatically detects the size of each document as it is fed onto the Platen Glass.
DADF INPUT TRAY When either of these modes are selected, they will be applied to all the documents in the stack.
Refer to DADF Document Size Sensing for more information on this function.
DADF OUTPUT
TRAY
Figure 1 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder

Electrical Power
All electrical components in the DADF operate on +5 VDC or +24 VDC power supplied by the
IIT/IPS LVPS. Figure 1 shows the location of the power supply. The +24 VDC power for the
Exit and Belt Motors is routed through individual fuses on the DADF Control PWBA.
IIT/IPS LVPS
Figure 1 IIT/IPS LVPS

Electrical Power 10-56 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
DADF System Control
The DADF Control PWB monitors the status and controls the operation of the DADF. The
DADF Control PWBA also accepts commands from the Pre-IPS PWBA and provides it with
status information, such as DADF Belt Motor status and a Document Ready signal. However,
the Pre-IPS is itself partially controlled by the IOT CPU PWBA (via the Post-IPS PWBA).
Therefore, DADF control is ultimately a shared function of these three PWBAs. Command and
status communication with the DADF uses a bidirectional serial communications port. Refer to
Figure 1 for a DADF simplified block diagram and Figure 2 for the communication links
between the DADF and the machine.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-57 DADF System Control
Figure 1 DADF Control Simplified Block Diagram

DADF System Control 10-58 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
DADF Document Transport
The DADF feeds the documents in the Input Tray Assembly from the top of the stack. For sin-
gle-sided document copying, the following process is used:
1. The document is transported from the Input Tray onto the Platen Glass.
2. The downward facing side of the document is scanned.
3. The document is transported to the Output Tray
For two-sided copying, additional steps are required.
1. The document is transported from the Input Tray onto the Platen Glass.
2. Side one is scanned
3. The document is transported through an inverter paper path within the DADF and back to
the Platen Glass for copying the second side.
Figure 2 DADF Simplified Control Communications Path 4. Side two is scanned
5. When selected by the user, the document may again be sent through the inverter and
The DADF Control PWBA includes several LEDs to rapidly determine the status of selected again placed on the Platen Glass. This preserves the original order of the documents.
signals. Table 1 lists these LEDs. 6. The document is transported to the Output Tray.
To load the Input Tray, the user positions the document by placing its left side against the raised
Table 1 DADF Control PWBA LEDs Entrance Gate. The back edge of the document is placed against the Back Guide of the Input
LED Color Signal Comment Tray.
CR2 Green RXD Flickering indicated serial data from Pre-IPS
The DADF can automatically feed up to 40 copies/minute (A4 or 8.5x11 LEF) onto the Platen
PWBA
Glass for copying.
CR3 /Reset Lit when DADF Control PWBA CPU is being
reset The Input Tray capacity is:
CR4 +5 VDC Lit when +5 VDC present
CR5 +24 VDC Lit when +24 VDC present • 50 sheets of 38-100 gsm (10-24 lb.)
• 40 sheet of 101-128 gsm (24-30 lb.)
DADF and IIT Interaction The document weight range for duplex copying from the DADF is 50 - 110 gsm (13-28 lb.). This
is because the DADF has a sharp turn in the inverter paper path.
The DADF detects the size of each original document while the document is fed from the input
tray onto the platen glass. The Fast Scan or Y dimension is determined by two size sensors
just before the Registration Roll in the paper feed path. The Slow Scan or X dimension is deter- Document Feeding Components
mined by measuring the length of time that Registration Sensor is blocked for a known trans- Figure 1 shows the document transport components of the DADF. Figure 2 shows the locations
port speed. of the sensors.
These dimensions are passed from the DADF Control PWBA to the Pre-IPS PWBA using their
serial communications link. The Pre-IPS PWBA compares these values with the contents of a
lookup table in its NVM. This measurement technique reduces the delay between the docu-
ment’s arrival on the platen glass and the start of document scanning.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-59 DADF System Control, DADF Document Transport
Drive Motors
Feed Roll
Upper Duplex Roll Retard Roll Exit Roll Table 1 DADF Motor Driven Rolls
Transport Speed Transport Speed
Nudger Roll Motor Rolls (Forward - ccw) (Reverse - cw)
Feed Motor Nudger Roll (cw) 223.9 mm/sec
+ 24 VDC Feed Roll (cw) 268.7 mm/sec
Belt Motor Registration Rolls 810.6 mm/sec
+24 VDC Stepper Belt Drive Rolls 806.0 mm/sec 873.7 mm/sec
Bi-directional
Lower Duplex Roll 671.7 mm/sec
873.7 mm/sec
when re-inverting
Belt Idler Roll for exit stacking
only
Belt Drive Roll Upper Duplex Rolls 671.7 mm/sec
Pinch Rolls 873.7 mm/sec
Registration Roll when re-inverting
for exit stacking
Registration Pinch Roll
only
Lower Duplex Roll Exit Motor Exit Rolls 840.2 mm/sec
+24 VDC Stepper
Figure 1 DADF Drive Component Locations
Feed Motor
SIZE SENSORS TOP COVER INTERLOCK The Feed Motor is controlled by the DADF Control PWBA and turns the Nudger and Feed
(F and R) SWITCHES (F and R) Rolls. The Nudger Rolls feeds the top sheet into the nip of the Feed and Retard Roll. The Feed
Roll turns against the Retard Roll, which drags against sheets below the top and prevents pre-
vent multiple sheet feeds.
The Feed Motor is energized 200 msec. after the user presses the Start Button. The Feed Roll
takes the top document in the stack and transports it into the nip of the stationary Registration
Rolls. The Feed Motor deenergizes 50 msec.after the trailing edge of the document passes the
Registration Sensor.
The DADF Control PWBA does not energize the DADF Feed Motor unless the following safety
EXIT interlock switches are closed:
DUPLEX DOCUMENT REGISTRATION DADF OPEN- SENSOR
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SWITCH (R) • The Platen Interlock is closed by lowering the DADF onto the Platen Glass.
• Two Top Cover Interlocks are closed by closing the top cover on the left side of the DADF.
Belt Motor Drive
Figure 2 DADF Sensor Locations
The DADF Belt Motor is a +24 VDC, bidirectional stepper motor. This motor drives these roll-
ers:
• Registration Roll
• Belt Roll
• Lower Duplex Roll
• Upper Duplex Roll

DADF Document Transport 10-60 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Table 1 shows the speed and direction of the rollers driven by the DADF Belt Motor drive. A description of these sensors follows:
The DADF Belt Motor operates in the forward direction when moving documents from the Input • Document Set Sensor - When a document is loaded into the Input Tray, it pushes a lever
Tray Assembly to the Platen Glass, and when moving documents from the Platen Glass to the causing a flag to block this sensor. This signal is sent to the DADF Control PWB.
Output Tray. • Size Sensors (2) - These are reflective Optical Sensors that sense the document length of
the leading edge. See DADF Document Size Sensing for more information on this func-
The Belt Motor moves in the reverse direction to turn over the document for copying the section.
ond side, and for re-inverting the document for correct order stacking in the Output Tray. Refer • Registration Sensor - This is a reflective Optical Sensor that is before the Registration
to Inverting Documentation for more information on this function. Roll. It is used to sense misfeeds from the Input Tray and to start the time sequence for
deenergizing the Feed Motor and energizing the Belt Motor.
This sensor also is used to determine the document’s transport run length. This is calcu-
lated by multiplying the length of time that the sensor is blocked by the transport speed of
the DADF.
• Duplex Sensor - This is a reflective Optical Sensor in the inverter paper path the senses
paper jams.
• Exit Sensor - This is a reflective Optical Sensor that is used to verify documents exit to the
Output Tray, indicate paper jams, signal the DADF PWB to deenergize the Exit Motor and
to energize the Set Gate Solenoid to raise the Set Gate.
Refer to Figure 2 for more information on the use of sensors for DADF control.
Document Feeding Control

The document is fed from the top of the stack. The feed edge of the document is placed
against the Entrance Gate in the Input Tray Assembly. The Entrance Gate is in the raised posi-
tion when no documents are covering the Document Set Sensor, and the front and rear Top
Cover Interlocks are both closed.
When the Document Sensor senses a document in the DADF Input Tray Assembly and after
the user presses the machine’s Start button, the Entrance Gate Solenoid drops the Entrance
Gate so that the document can be fed into the DADF.
DADF Document Size Sensing

The document length (transport dimension) is measured by the DADF Control PWBA counting
the number of Belt Motor pulses while the document passes the Registration Sensor. The
Figure 3 Belt Motor Drive Rotation width of the document is determined by the Front and Rear DADF Size Sensors. The Rear (#1)
DADF Size Sensor is positioned 226 mm from the rear guide of the Input Tray Assembly. The
Exit Motor Front (#2) DADF Size Sensor is positioned 287 mm from the rear guide of the Input Tray
Assembly. Table 2 lists the states of these two sensors for the different sizes of documents.
The Exit Motor is a +24 VDC stepper motor that drives the Exit Roll. The Exit Motor is ener-
gized when each document has been scanned and the document is not being routed through Table 2 DADF Document Size Sensing
the invert path. It’s run duration depends on the document run length dimension. The DADF Length of
Control PWBA provides drive to the Exit Motor in intermittent pulses. This technique is used to Document Size DADF Rear (#1) DADF Front (#2) detected Original Length of
help conserve energy consumption in the machine. An Exit Senor senses the document trailing (in) Sensor Sensor (mm) Original (mm)
edge and this signal is sent to the DADF Control PWB. This signal deenergizes the Exit Motor.
A4 SEF OFF OFF 240.14 297
Refer to Figure 1 for more information on the timing of the DADF motors. B5 SEF OFF OFF 200.14 257
A5 SEF OFF OFF 153.14 210
DADF Sensors A5 LEF OFF OFF 91.14 148
The DADF uses six sensors for detecting document transport and document size. Refer to Fig- 8.5x14 SEF OFF OFF 298.74 355.6
ure 2 for more information on the DADF sensor timing. (Regal)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-61 DADF Document Transport
Table 2 DADF Document Size Sensing
Length of
Document Size DADF Rear (#1) DADF Front (#2) detected Original Length of
(in) Sensor Sensor (mm) Original (mm)
8.5x11 SEF (letter) OFF OFF 197.14~222.54 254~279.4
8” x10.5” SEF
8”x10” SEF
8.5x13 SEF OFF OFF 258.1~273.34 314.96~330.2
8.5x12.4 SEF
5.5X8.5 OFF OFF 82.84 139.7
11X17 SEF ON OFF 321.6~374.94 378.46~431.8
11X14.9 SEF
B4 SEF ON OFF 307.14 364
8.5X11 LEF (letter) ON OFF 159.04 215.9
8.5X11 LEF ON OFF 146.34~159.04 203.2~215.9
8X10.5 LEF
8X10 LEF
B5 LEF ON OFF 125.14 182
A3 SEF ON 0N 363.14 420
A4 LEF ON ON 153.14 210
There are two possible document path faults that can be determined by the size sensing sys-
tem. The following message is displayed by the IOT. “The Document Feeder has a failure”. This
message is displayed when:
• The Front and Rear Size Sensors detect a document and the DADF is not in use.
• The Front and Rear Size Sensor detects a document, but the Registration Sensor does
not detect a document.

DADF Document Transport 10-62 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
DADF Operation
Document Loading
The operator loads the original documents face up into the Input Tray Assembly. The operator
aligns one edge against the Rear Paper Guide and moves the documents to the left until the
documents stop against the Entrance Gate.
Entrance Gate and Entrance Gate Solenoid

The Entrance Gate is raised and lowered by a Entrance Gate Solenoid. The Entrance Gate is
in the raised position for any of the following conditions:
• There are no documents covering the Document Set Sensor and the trailing edge of the
last document passes the DADF Exit Sensor from this or a previous job.
• The copier machine runs through the Start Power procedure.
The DADF Document Set Sensor senses when documents are loaded into the Input Tray
Assembly. A green arrow appears in the LED window at the top back cover of the DADF to indi-
cate proper document loading of the DADF. When the Entrance Gate is in the raised (up) posi-
tion, it also holds up the Nudger Roll so that documents can be loaded into the Tray.
When the Start Button is pressed on the machine, the Entrance Gate Solenoid energizes
downward for 300 ms, and the solenoid magnetically latches in that position. In this position,
the solenoid holds the Entrance Gate down, allowing documents to be fed past the Gate. This
Gate remains down for the entire copy job.
After the last document has passed the DADF Exit Sensor, the DADF Control PWBA energizes
the Entrance Gate Solenoid in the up direction, causing it to release the Entrance Gate. The
solenoid latches in the up position.
Refer to Figure 1 for more information on DADF operation timing.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-63 DADF Operation
Figure 1 DADF Timing Sequence

DADF Operation 10-64 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Prefeed and Feed operation • #2 Duplex Roll (one-way clutch)
The document Prefeed and Feed operation is activated when the Start Button is pressed. This The Belt Motor operates in one direction during document feed, registration, transport to the
energizes the Feed Motor, which drives both the Nudger Roll and Feed Roll. The Nudger Roll Platen Glass and document exit. The Belt Motor reverses direction when inverting the docu-
feeds the top document into the nip of the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll. The Feed Roll trans- ment.
ports the document, one sheet at a time, into the DADF. The Feed Rolls work against friction
Retard Rolls to assure single feed operation. There are two steps used in the DADF to register the document:
Two-sided documents are routed through the DADF differently than single sided documents: • The document is first de-skewed at the Registration Rollers.
• The document is registered on the Platen Glass by the Platen Belt.
• For single sided documents, the new document sheet is not fed from the Input Tray Registration Roll and Registration Pinch Roll
Assembly until the current document sheet passes and clears the DADF Registration The Belt Motor drives the Registration Roll through a belt. The Registration Roll uses a one-
Sensor.
way clutch and rotates forward only when the Belt Motor is rotating in the forward direction. The
• For two-sided documents, the new document sheet is not fed from the Input Tray Assem- Registration Roll creates a nip with the Registration Pinch Roll.
bly until the current document sheet has been inverted through the DADF inverter path
and clears the DADF Registration Sensor a second time. The Belt Motor is deenergized and the Registration Roll is stationary when the lead edge of the
• For two-sided documents to be re-inverted, the new document sheet is not fed from the document enters the registration nip. The Feed Motor continues to drive the document for 50
Input Tray Assembly until the current document sheet has been sent through the DADF msec to de-skew the lead edge of the documentation against the Registration Roller nip. Then,
inverter path a second time, and it passes and clears the Registration Sensor for a third the Belt Motor turns the Registration Roll and transports the document to the Platen Belt.
time.
Nudger Roll Platen Belt and Belt Roll
When the Entrance Gate is in the up position, it holds the Nudger Roll up so that documents The Belt Motor drives the Belt Roll through a belt. The Belt Roll moves the Platen Belt, trans-
can be loaded into the Input Tray. When the Start Button is pushed on the copier machine, the porting the document onto and across the Platen Glass. The Belt Motor pulses for 51 counts
Entrance Gate drops. This allows the Nudger Roll to drop onto the top copy of the documenta- after the trailing edge of the document passes the Registration Sensor. This positions the doc-
tion and feed a sheet into the nip of the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll. The Feed Motor drives ument onto the Platen Glass for copying.
the Nudger Roll through a belt drive, and operate in one direction using internal one-way
clutches. For single sided documents: Immediately after the document has been scanned by the copier,
the Belt Motor energizes in the forward direction. This moves the copied document off the
Feed Roll Platen Glass and feeds the next document to be copied from the Registration Roll onto the
The Feed Motor drives the Feed Rolls through a belt. The Feed Rolls rotate in only one direc- Platen Glass. Again, the Belt Motor pulses for 51 counts to register the second document to be
copied onto the Platen Glass.
tion, using a one-way internal clutch. The Feed Roll transports the document from the Input
Tray Assembly, past the Registration Sensor and into the nip of stationary Registration Rolls.
For two sided documents: See Inverting Documentation
The Feed Motor deenergizes 50 msec after the Registration Senor senses the lead edge of the
document. The document being fed by the Feed Roll into the stationary Registration Rolls de-
skews the document. Inverting Documentation
The DADF can automatically turn over two sided documents to copy both sides.
Retard Roll
The Retard Roll is not motor driven. This roll uses internal one-way clutches to provide the Belt Motor Reversing
needed friction resistance for single sheet feed operation. A spring lever rests against surface The DADF uses a bi-directional stepper Belt Motor to invert the documents. For two-sided doc-
of the Retard Roll inside the mounting assembly. The lever rotates the Retard Roll a small ument handling, the Belt Motor first energizes in the forward direction (ccw when viewed from
amount each time the Retard Roll is pushed down and released by a passing document. This the machine front) to feed the top, or side one, of the document onto the Platen Glass for copy-
movement prevents uneven wear around the Retard Rolls. (verify!) ing. After side one has been copied, the Belt Motor reverses direction. This causes the Platen
Belt to run in reverse direction, transporting this original document from the Platen Glass into
Registration System the inverter path. See Figure 3 concerning the assemblies driven by the Belt Motor in forward
The DADF Belt Motor drives the registration system. This bi-directional stepper motor uses a and reverse directions.
belt drive to power the following rollers:
The Lower and Upper Duplex Rollers are driven through one-way clutches. They activate only
when the Belt Motor is energized in the reverse (cw) direction. The Lower and Upper Duplex
• Registration Roll (one-way clutch)
Rolls turn over the document so that side two will face the Platen Glass for copying.
• Belt Roll (bi-directional)
• #1 Duplex Roll (one-way clutch)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-65 DADF Operation
As the document comes out of the inverter path, the lead edge passes the Registration Sensor
and enters the nip of the stationary Registration Roller for deskewing. 50 msec after the lead
edge passes the Registration Sensor, the Belt Motor deenergizes for 200 msec. The Belt Motor
then energizes in the forward (ccw) direction. This activates the Registration Roll in the forward
direction which transports the inverted document to the forward running Platen Belt. Side two
of the document is then registered onto the Platen Glass for copying.
The user has the option to re-invert the duplex document, so that side one is stacked face
down on the Output Tray. This is initiated after the second side has been copied. The Belt
Motor reverses direction again to transport the document back through the inverter path. Com-
ing out of the inverter path, the document delays at the Registration Roll, primarily so the Belt
Motor can change back to the forward direction. The document is then transported through the
Registration Roll, across the Platen Glass and to the Exit Rolls. The speed through the inverter
path and across the Platen Glass is increased for this inversion process.
Registration Gate Solenoid

The Registration Gate on the copier by the Platen Glass must be lowered at the start of the
inversion cycle, so the document can enter the inverter path as the Platen Belt reverses for
duplex copying. This is accomplished by activating a Registration Solenoid in the DADF. This
solenoid presses down on the gate any time the Platen Belt is in reverse. When the Belt Motor
changes to a forward direction, the Solenoid deenergizes. This permits springs to raise the
Registration Edge.
Inverter Drive Rollers

The DADF Lower and Upper Duplex Roll transport the document as it travels through the
DADF Inverter Paper Path. Because of their one-way clutches, the rolls are driven only when
the Belt Motor energized in the reverse (cw) direction. A belt connects the motor to the rolls.
Exit System
Documents are moved to the Output Tray by a the Exit Roll. This is a +24 VDC stepper motor,
which is pulsed conserve energy. The Exit Motor is controlled by the DADF Control PWBA,
when it is informed by the Pre-IPS PWBA that the page has been scanned.
When the Exit Sensor detects the lead edge of the document, the DADF Control PWBA begins
counting Exit Motor pulses. The Exit Motor continues running until an adequate number of
pulses has been counted. The exact number depends on the run dimension of the document,
as determined while the document was being fed onto the Platen.
After the document has been removed from the Platen, the Exit Motor is deenergized.

DADF Operation 10-66 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview
This machine performs three possible functions: scanning, printing and copying. As shown in
Figure 1, the sources of the image and its processing paths are different, although several
assemblies are used by more than one function. Figure 2, Figure 3 and Figure 1 show the loca-
tions of some of the assemblies related to image processing.
As shown in Figure 1, imaging includes the following subsystems:
1. The Image Input Terminal (IIT) senses the image, converts it to a digital format and com-
pensates for differences in original document attributes.
2. The Image Processing System (IPS) converts between color spaces, provides for image
editing and converts the signal from 400 dpi to 600 dpi.
3. The Image Source Selector (ISS) permits a Digital Front End (DFE) to provide a print
image to the following subsystems or the preceding subsystems to provide a scanned
image to the DFE.
4. The IOT Image Processing subsystem selects between inputs from the DFE and the pre-
liminary IPS, converts the image from digital form to analog form and provides the analog
signal to the Laser Diode Driver (LDD).
5. The Image Output subsystem accepts the analog drive signal and uses it to modulate the
Raster Output Scanner (ROS).
The machine can have two possible configurations: Digital Copier (DC) or Copier Printer (CP).
These correlate to functions and assemblies as shown in Table 1. The DC configuration cannot
perform either scanning or printing because it lacks a DFE.

Figure 1 Imaging Simplified Signal Flow Diagram

Overview 10-68 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
A separate IIT/IPS Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) supplies all of the preliminary IPS
assemblies, the Pre-IPS PWBA in the IIT and most of the image scanning assemblies and cir-
cuitry. However, the Xenon Lamp which illuminates original document is powered by a dedi-
LASER DIODE
cated power supply.
DRIVE PWBA
POST-IPS PWBA IIT/IPS LVPS
VSEL EXTENSION
PWBA
RASTER OUTPUT
SCANNER (ROS)
VIDEO SELECT (VSEL)

PWBA (TOP LAYER)
PRE-IPS PWBA
(TOP LAYER) HALFTONE PWBA
(BOTTOM LAYER)
MEMORY PWBAS
(MIDDLE LAYER)
MEMORY SYS- BR PWBA
TEM PWBA (BOT- (TOP LAYER)
TOM LAYER)
Figure 3 IPS Major Assemblies Locations (Below IIT/IPS Tray)
Table 1 Machine Configuration vs. Included Imaging Functions and Assemblies

Included Imaging
Configuration Functions Included Imaging Assemblies
Figure 2 IIT and IPS Major Assemblies Locations (IIT/IPS Tray)
Digital Copier Copying Scanning Assemblies and Circuits, Pre-
IPS PWBA, Memory PWBA, Post-IPS
PWBA, VSEL PWBA, Halftone PWBA,
LDD PWBA, ROS
Copier/Printer Scanning, Printing and Copy- Same as Copier Only
ing

Image Sensing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer
Configuration)
The image sensing components are shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3.
XENON LAMP FULL-RATE

CARRIAGE
HALR-RATE
CARRIAGE CARRIAGE
MOTOR
MOTOR/
LAMP/FAN
DRIVE PWBA
CCD LENS
CCD ARRAY
Figure 1 Scanning Optical System Mechanical Components Locations
Figure 2 Motor/Lamp/Fan Drive PWBA Location
Xenon Lamp and Drive Circuitry

A Xenon Lamp (Figure 1) is used in this machine as a means of reducing heat. Unlike incan-
descent Lamps, including quartz Lamps, the illumination of Xenon Lamp is not continuous It
varies directly with the instantaneous voltage of the driving signal. This is similar to fluorescent
bulbs and means that if the driving signal is AC (Alternating Current), the bulb emits no light
when the instantaneous voltage is zero.
If the bulb drive frequency is 60 Hz or higher, the human eye sees this as a constant level of
illumination. However, the CCDs on the CCD PWBA are fast enough to see the change in illu-
mination caused by the AC drive signal used for the Xenon Lamp. Therefore, the CCD must
capture its image when the Xenon Lamp outputs are known to be non-zero.
Two techniques are used to compensate for this:

Image Sensing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer Con- 10-70 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
• The Pre-IPS PWBA adjusts the effective sensitivity of the CCD so that it is the inverse of • The drive signal to the Xenon Lamp is intermittently interrupted as shown in Figure 4.
the Xenon Lamp AC drive signal.
Figure 3 IIT Lamp, Motor and Fan Simplified Block Diagram

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-71 Image Sensing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer
Figure 4 Xenon Lamp Interrupted Drive Waveform
Carriage Motor and Drive • B is the minimum distance between the Full-Rate Carriage mirror and the top mirror on
the Half-Rate Carriage. This occurs when the two carriages are at the start of their travel.
The Carriage Motor is a high-torque five-phase stepping motor driven by five magnetic control
lines: A through E. These lines are +24 VDC outputs of the Motor/Fan/Lamp Driver PWBA During carriage travel, this distance increases to a maximum of B + 2T - T=B + T.
which is under the control of the CPU on the Pre-IPS PWBA. +24 VDC is applied to all lines • C is the distance between the mirrors on the Half-Rate Carriage, and is constant
when the motor is locked in one position. • D is the maximum distance between the bottom Half-Rate Carriage mirror and the station-
ary mirror in front of the CCD PWBA. This occurs when the two carriages are at the start
The motor uses rubber dampers to isolate vibrations from the rest of the IIT. It also uses mag- of their travels. During carriage travel, this distance decreases to a minimum of D - T.
netic damping to maintain a constant speed. At the start of carriage travel, the conjugate is A + B + C + D. At the end of carriage travel, the
distance is A + (B + 2T - T) + C + (D - T) = A + B + C + D.
The motor emits a pulse ever 0.72 degrees of rotation. This is equivalent to 500 pulses per one
complete motor revolution. These pulses are routed back to the Motor/Fan/Lamp Driver PWBA.
This assembly uses the interval between the pulses to determine if the carriage speed is cor-
rect and the cumulative number of pulses to determine the current location of the carriage.
Full and Half-Rate Carriages

The Xenon Lamp is mounted in the Full-Rate Carriage (Figure 1). Reflected light from the orig-
inal document is passed via mirrors through a stationary lens to a CCD PWBA. To maintain a
constant image size, the distance between the original document and CCD (known as the con-
jugate) must remain constant. Therefore, an additional Half-Rate Carriage, traveling at half the
speed of the Full-Rate Carriage, is used. Figure 5 shows the carriages and their relative
motion.
• T is the distance which the Half-Rate Carriage Moves

• 2T is the distance which the Full-Rate Carriage moves
• A is the distance from the original document to the mirror on the Full-Rate Carriage. This
distance is constant

manuals4you.com
Figure 5 Constant Optical Path Length
CCD Color Image Sensor Refer to Figure 7. Each row of the array acquires its image from the original document in a par-
allel fashion. However, the image is retrieved serially at a 9.97 MHz rate. and passed to the
The CCD Array is 3 sets of 2 rows of 500 pixels (Figure 6). Each set of pixel rows is filtered to
Pre-IPS PWB. While an image is being shifted out, the CCD array cannot acquire another
detect a different color: red, green and blue. The two rows within each set are offset by.0025
image. In addition, image acquisition takes time, reducing slightly the image line acquisition
inches (0.0635 mm), permitting the array to gather two lines of data at once. The sensor can
scan a document 12.5 inches wide. rate. However, having two CCD rows per color doubles the image line acquisition rate. Further-
more, the image acquisition line rate must be the same as the rate at which the Full-Rate Car-
riage sweeps the document original (225 mm/sec. [8.858 inches/second] at 100%
magnification) X the desired pixel rate (400 pixels/inch or 15.748 pixels/mm). The end result is
that the CCD acquires image lines, in all three colors, at a rate of 3543.3 per second.

Figure 6 CCD Color Image Sensor
Figure 7 CCD Image Data Clocking
Initialization 3. Shading Control

Initialization includes several measurements and calculations to calibrate the image scanning 4. White Variation Correction
and processing circuits to images of known color and color purity. These include: 5. Automatic Density Control
1. Automatic Gain Control

2. Automatic Output Control

manuals4you.com
Automatic Gain Control Document Size Detection
Automatic Gain Control (AGC) compensates for variations in the sensitivity of pixels in the CCD
NOTE: APS means Automatic Paper Sensing. SEF means Short Edge Feed. LEF means
array, while the array looking at an brightly-illuminated pure-white image. During this calibra-
Long Edge Feed
tion, the Full Rate Carriage is placed under the White Reference Strip, the Xenon Lamp is lit
and readings are taken from all pixels in the CCD array. The most extreme (highest) value from This machine determines document size by one of two methods:
any pixel is taken to be the “correct” value. A multiplier is then calculated for each remaining
pixel to make its measured white value equal to this reference. During document scanning, all • Through the DADF (See DADF Document size sensing)
readings from each pixel which are above a threshold value are adjusted by this multiplier to • From the Platen Glass
create a corrected value. When reading the document size from the Platen Glass, the machine does this by detecting
the number of Pixels of Image Data read by the CCD Color Image Sensor (for Feed Side, FS)
Automatic Output Control
and the reading by the document edge (Sub-Scanning) with the Automatic Paper Sensor
Automatic Output Control (AOC) compensates for variations in the readings between pixels in (APS) Sensor.
the CCD array, when looking at a black image. Immediately after the AGC readings, with the
Full Rate Carriage still under the White Reference Strip, the Xenon Lamp is shut off and read- Two switches are used to sense the position of the Platen Cover. A Platen Open Switch and a
ings are taken from all pixels in the CCD array. The most extreme (lowest) value from any pixel Platen Angle Sensor (a switch).
is taken to be the correct value. A multiplier is calculated for each remaining pixel to make its
measured black value equal to this reference. During document scanning, all readings from The Platen Open Switch is in a LOW state when the Platen Cover is up off the Platen Glass
each pixel which are below a threshold value are adjusted by this multiplier to create a cor- and goes to a HIGH state when the Platen Cover is closed against the Platen Glass (or on the
rected value document).
Shading Control The Platen Angle Sensor, located by the Cover Hinge, detects the angle of the Platen Cover.
Shading Correction compensates for the fact that the Xenon Lamp does not provide consistent As the Platen Cover is closed, (approximately <40degree angle off the Platen) the Angle Sen-
illumination across its length. The ends of the Lamp are dimmer than the center. Because of sor energizes the Xenon Lamp.
this, a multiplier is calculated which is then applied to the pixels on the end. One distinct differ-
ence between Shading Correction and AGC is that readings for Shading Correction are taken The detection of the Sub-Scanning dimension of the document is done by taking two readings
in two places on the White Reference Strip. with the APS Sensor. The first reading is done with the Lamp energized and the Platen Cover
in an angled position (See Figure 8, Case B, not closed against the Platen Glass). The APS
White Variation Correction Sensor detects the document edge by sensing the dark background around the document.
White Variation Correction compensates for the fact that the White Reference Strip isn’t white This value is stored as “X1” by the Pre IPS PWBA.
everywhere. In this test, a lighted reading is taken from two separate locations on the White
Reference Strip. The more extreme (higher) value is taken to be correct and is used in future The second reading by the APS Sensor is done when the Platen Cover is down and the Platen
calculations. Open Switch is in the HIGH state (Case C in Figure 8). The APS Sensor performs this second
edge detection reading of the document and against the reflective Platen Cover. This value is
Automatic Density Control stored as “X2” in the Pre IPS PWBA. A comparison of the values for “X1” and “X2” will deter-
Automatic Density Control (ADC) is a joint function of the Imaging circuitry and the Xerograph- mine the edge for the Sub-Scanning dimension of the document. (See Figure 9.)
ics module. It ensures that the density of the image on the copy doesn’t change over time with
The Feed Side dimension of the document is done by the CCD Color Imaging Sensor. This is
a constant image input density
accomplished by detecting the number of Pixels for that dimension.
Determining the Attributes of the Document Original
Certain attributes of the document originals must be determined so that machine circuits can
be configured. These include:
1. Document Size Detection

2. Color Document Detection
Unlike most machines, this unit typically doesn’t require a prescan to determine these
attributes. They are calculated during normal machine operation

Scanning the Document
Carriage Positions
Refer to Figure 10 and Figure 11. The True Registration Position is where the Full-Rate Car-
riage begins to scan the document original. It occurs where the REG1 Sensor detects a partic-
ular left edge on the Full-Rate Carriage. All other carriage positions are calculated relative to
True Registration Position.
The White Reference Position is where the CCD Array is directly under the middle 100 pixels of
the White Reference Strip. For machines without a DADF, this is 20 mm to the left of the True
Reference Position. For machines with a DADF, it is 62 mm to the left of the True Reference
Position.
The Home Position is where the Full-Rate Carriage rests after initialization and between jobs.
In all machines (with and without a DADF installed), this is 30 mm to the right of True Registra-
tion Position. This location places the CCD array under the document original. Therefore, the
CCD array is used to detect the Fast-Scan dimension of the original document.
The Start Position is where the Full-Rate Carriage begins moving when scanning. In the inter-
Figure 8 Document Size Detection with Platen Cover
val between the Start Position and the True Registration Position, the carriage accelerates to
the appropriate speed for the selected image reproduction ratio. All possible start positions are
given in Table 1, and an example is shown in Figure 10 and Figure 11. Since the Full-Rate Car-
riage moves faster at lower magnifications, a longer acceleration distance is required and the
Start Position is further from the True Registration Position.
NOTE: The Scanning speed of the Full Rate Carriage/Half Rate Carriage is determined by the
following formula:
• Scanning Speed = 225 X 100 / magnification (mm/s) for 50 - 400% magnification
• Scanning Speed = 225 X 100 / (Magnification X 2) (mm/s) for 2 to 49% magnification
Table 1 Full-Rate Carriage Start Positions

Start Position (Relative to
Configuration: Reproduction Ratio True Registration Position)
Without DADF 25% to 97.1% 40 mm Left
Without DADF 97.2% to 400% 20 mm Left
With DADF 25% to 97.1% 35 mm Left
With DADF 97.2% to 400% 15 mm Left
The End Position is the furthest that the Full-Rate Carriage travels when finishing a scan. The
maximum possible distance between the End Position and the True Reference Position is
approximately 432 mm or 17 inches. However, the Slow-Scan dimension of the document orig-
inal may be less than this. (The size of the original can be detected automatically or entered
manually, see Document Size Detection.) The carriages will travel no further than necessary
Figure 9 Cluster Dot Screen Patterns
for the original’s Slow-Scan dimension.
Color Document Detection
Color is detected during original scanning by examining the a* parameter for a non-zero value.
is examined.

manuals4you.com
Figure 10 Home and Start Positions of Full Range Carriage - Without DADF
Figure 11 Home and Start Positions of Full Range Carriage - With DADF

Carriage Speed Control Post-Initialization AGC/AOC/Shading Operations and Carriage Motions
The Carriage Motor is driven at different speeds depending on the task being performed. In (No DADF)
addition, while scanning, the Carriage Motor speed depends on the selected magnification set- If the machine includes a Platen Cover and no DADF, the following events occur during initial
ting. Both the Full-Rate Carriage and the Half-Rate Carriage must be driven at faster speeds calibrations:
as the magnification ratios are reduced. Selected values are shown in Table 2. The forward
scanning speed equals 225 mm/sec. divided by the magnification expressed in decimal form. 1. The FRC moves from the Home Position to the White Reference Position, which is 20 mm
to the left of Registration Position.
Table 2 Full-Rate Carriage Speeds
2. The Xenon Lamp is lit for 2 seconds.
Mode of Operation Full-Rate Carriage Speed 3. AGC readings are taken.
Initialization 112.5 mm/sec or 225 mm/sec 4. The Xenon Lamp is shut off.
Scanning Forward, 400% magnification 56.25 mm/sec 5. AOC readings are taken.
Scanning Forward, 100% magnification 225 mm/sec 6. The Lamp is lit for 2 seconds
Scanning Forward, 25% magnification 900 mm/sec 7. The first of two readings for Shading Correction is taken.
Scanning Return, all magnifications 675 mm/sec or 927 mm/sec 8. The FRC moves rightward 2 mm and takes the second Shading Correcting reading.
9. The FRC moves leftward 2 mm and takes a White Variation Correction reading. This
Scan Length Control value is stored in the NVM.
The Carriage Motor emits a pulse every 0.72 degrees of rotation (500 pulses per one complete 10. The Xenon Lamp is shut off and the FRC goes back to the Home Position.
revolution). This corresponds to 0.0761565 mm of linear travel by the Full-Rate Carriage.
These pulses are routed to the Pre-IPS PWBA. Carriage position is determined by keeping
track of the total number of pulses which have occurred in each direction since the last transi- Post-Initialization AGC/AOC/Shading Operations and Carriage Motions
tion of the REG1 Sensor.
(With DADF)
Carriage Overrun If the machine includes a DADF, the following events occur during initial calibrations:
Unlike some machine designs, this machine includes no over-limit sensors in either the forward 1. The FRC moves from the Home Position to the White Reference Position., which is 62
or reverse directions. Instead, the current position of the carriages is calculated based on the mm to the left of the Registration Position.
REG1 Sensor transitions and Carriage Motor pulses. 2. The Xenon Lamp is lit for 2 seconds.
3. AGC readings are taken.
Initialization Carriage Motions 4. The Xenon Lamp is shut off.
Upon equipment power up or when returning from low power state, the Full-Rate Carriage 5. AOC readings are taken.
(FRC) moves to its Home Position. This is 30 mm to the right of the Registration Position. The 6. The Lamp is lit for 2 seconds
sequence of motions to get there depends entirely on where the FRC was initially. The initial
7. The first of two readings for Shading Correction is taken.
position can be accurately determined by the state of the REG1 Sensor. An On state indicates
the FRC is left of the Registration Position, and an Off state indicates that the FRC is right of 8. The FRC moves rightward 2 mm and takes the second Shading Correction reading.
the Registration Position. If the FRC started left of the Registration Position, it does the follow- 9. The FRC moves rightward 5 mm and a second White Variation Correction reading is
ing: taken.
10. The FRC moves rightward 40 mm to a location 20 mm to the left of the True Registration
1. It moves rightward to a position 20 mm right of the Registration Position Position. The first White Variation Correction reading is taken.
2. It waits 30 msec 11. The Xenon Lamp is shut off and the FRC goes back to the Home Position.
3. It moves leftward to a position 20 mm left of the Registration Position
4. It waits 30 msec
5. It moves rightward to the Home Position. Document Scanning Carriage Motions (Manual Document Positioning)
If the FRC started to the right of the Registration Position, it does the following: These events are performed whenever the user places a document on the platen manually.
They occur regardless of whether a DADF is installed. However, the physical locations of the
1. It moves leftward to a position 20 mm left of the Registration Position. White Reference Positions and Start Scan Positions differ between units with or without a
2. It waits 30 msec. DADF. These are shown in Figure 8 and Figure 9. In both cases, however, the events are as
3. It moves rightward to the Home Position. follows:
1. The user opens the platen cover and places a document original on the platen.

manuals4you.com
2. While the user lowers the platen cover, the Xenon Lamp is lit and the CCD array detects 8. The Full-Rate Carriage returns to the high magnification Start Position, 15 mm to the left
the Fast-Scan (Y or Front-Back) dimension of the original. Simultaneously, the Slow-Scan of the True Reference Position.
size sensors determine the left-right (or Y) dimension of the document original. 9. The DADF removes the current document from the platen.
3. The Xenon Lamp is shut off and the document original size is calculated. If the size is • If there are no more documents in the DADF and the time interval since the most
unrecognizable, the user is prompted to enter its size manually. recent AGC/AOC/Shading readings are less than a threshold value stored in the
4. The user presses the Start key on the User Interface. NVM, the FRC moves to the Home Position.
5. The FRC moves to the White Reference Position and performs additional readings calcu- • If there are no more documents in the DADF, but the time interval since the most
lations necessary for White Reference Correction. recent AGC/AOC/Shading readings is greater than the threshold value, then the
6. For magnifications between 97.2% and 400%, the FRC doesn’t move; it is already at the Xenon Lamp is lit for 2 seconds, and the Post-initialization AGC/AOC/Shading Oper-
appropriate Start Position. However, if the magnification is between 25% and 97.1%, the ations and Carriage Motions are repeated. At the end of these operations, the FRC
FRC moves leftward to a different Start Position. This permits the carriages more distance goes to its Home Position
in which to accelerate. • If there are more documents in the DADF, then the DADF places the new document
7. The Lamp is lit and the FRC scans at a rate determined by the magnification for a dis- on the platen. When a image processing PWBAs indicate that they are ready to
tance determined by the document original’s Slow-Scan dimension. While scanning, the receive scan data, the Xenon Lamp is lit and White Variation Correction is per-
document original is examined for color content. formed. Depending on the magnification rate, the FRC may remain stationary or
8. The Lamp is shut off and the FRC returns to the White Reference Position. move to the low magnification Start Position. In either case, it then scans at the rate
dictated by the magnification rate.
9. If another scan is required, then either step 6 through 9 are repeated. Additional scans
Steps 7. through 9 are repeated until the DADF Input Tray is empty.
may be delayed by image processing PWBAs until they are ready to receive scan data.
10. The next steps depends on how long the job has taken to run.
• If the time interval since the last AGC/AOC/Shading readings is less than a threshold
value stored in the NVM, then the FRC moves rightward to the Home Position.
• If the time interval since the last AGC/AOC/Shading reading exceeds the threshold,
then the Xenon Lamp is lit for 2 seconds, and the Post-initialization Operations and
Carriage Motions are repeated. At the end of these operations, the FRC goes to its
Home Position.
Document Scanning Carriage Motion (DADF Document Positioning)

The events described in this subsection apply only if the document original is placed on the
platen by the DADF. These events are as follows:
1. The user places the originals in the DADF, and presses the Start key on the User Inter-
face.
2. The DADF places the first document original on the platen. While moving the document,
the DADF determines the document’s Slow-Scan (X or Left-Right) and Fast-Scan (Y or
Front-Back) dimensions.
3. The Xenon Lamp is lit and the FRC moves to the Start Position associated with higher
magnification values. This is 15 mm to the left of True Reference Position.
4. White Variation Correction is performed.
5. For magnifications between 97.2% and 400%, the Full-Rate Carriage doesn’t move; it is
already at the appropriate Start Position. However, if the magnification is between 25%
and 97.1%, the Full-Rate Carriage moves leftward 20 mm to a different Start Position.
This permits the carriages more distance in which to accelerate.
6. The Full-Rate Carriage scans at a rate determined by the magnification for a distance
determined by the document original’s Slow-Scan dimension. While scanning, the docu-
ment original is examined for color content.
7. The Xenon Lamp is shut off.

IIT/IPS Cooling Image Processing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer
The IIT drawer (including the carriages, lamp, lens and CCD array) includes no fan, since the Configurations)
Xenon Lamp is much cooler than a quartz halogen Lamp. As shown in Figure 1, the IPS Image Processing for copiers and copier/printers is divided into two groups of PWBAs. The
drawer includes a small fan to remove heat from the PWBAs located there.
Pre-IPS PWBA, Memory System PWBA, Memory PWBAs and Post-IPS PWBA are only
included in these configurations and perform all image processing associated with image sens-
The circuitry for fan power and control is shown in Figure 3.
ing and scanning.
The remaining PWBAs in the image processing path are common to all machine configuration.
MOTOR/LAMP/FAN Of these, only the Halftone PWBA performs significant image processing.
IPS FAN DRIVE PWBA
All image processing PWBAs in all configurations are shown in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3.
Pre-IPS PWBA
The Pre-IPS PWBA accepts six line of analog color data from the CCD PWBA. These are in
the form of two sets of three color lines: Red, Green and Blue. The Pre-IPS PWBA contains the
Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs) listed in Table 1, which also contains their func-
tions. Figure 1 shows the signal flow through the PWBA.
Table 1 Pre-IPS PWBA ASICs and Their Functions

ASIC Name Functions
Analog Interface 1. Amplifies the analog signal
2. Offsets DC offset for varying analog AC signal
3. Multiplexes between two analog inputs for each color
Analog-to-Digital Converts analog input to digital value between 0 and 1023 (10 bit res-
Converter olution)
IIC 1. Converts W-Reference
2. Corrects W-Level
3. Corrects shading using 7.5 kilobytes of RAM for each color
4. Corrects gap using a 7.5 kilobyte FIFO (First In First Out) chain
for each color
5. 1 X 5 Filter
6. Generates the CCD PWBA 9.97 MHz sample and shift clock.
SID 1. Senses original document size
2. Senses background color (ENL [Equivalent Neutral Lightness])
3. Senses original color (ACS [Automatic Color Sensing])
4. Corrects color (ACC [Automatic Color Correction])
TRE 1. Enlarges/reduces image in one direction, when enlargement/
reduction is requested by user
2. Rotates/repeats image, when requested by user
Figure 1 IPS Fan Location
3. Creates mirror image, when requested by user
In addition, the Central Processing Unit (CPU) on the Pre-IPS PWBA accepts inputs from the
following sensors:
• Platen Sensor, indicating the presence of paper on the platen

IIT/IPS Cooling, Image Processing (Digital Copier & 10-80 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
• Angle Sensor, indicating that the cover is angled approximately less than <40 degrees • One Automatic Paper Sensor (APS), indicating how far the document original extends
from horizontal from the True Reference Position
• Reg1 Sensor, indicating when the Full Rate Sensor passes through the True Registration
Position
Figure 1 Pre-IPS PWBA Simplified Block Diagram
BR PWBA
The BR PWBA contains the currency detection functionality. Because disabling this functional-
ity would enable counterfeiting, no information is being given of this PWBA.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-81 Image Processing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer
Memory System PWBA and Memory PWBAs Each Memory PWBA is controlled by a unique CMM, located on the Memory System PWBA.
Each scanned image is stored in a memory subsystem comprising a Memory System PWBA The three CMMs are themselves controlled by common address and data buses from the Post-
and three Memory PWBAs. As partially shown in Figure 2, the image is accepted by the Mem- IPS PWBA.
ory System PWBA from the Pre-IPS PWBA and is provided to the Post-IPS PWBA. Each
image pixel is defined by eight bits for each of three colors: red, green and blue. The images
are actually stored in three Memory PWBAs, one per color. Each Memory PWBA has a stan-
dard capacity of 32 MBytes or an optional capacity of 64 MBytes of Random Access Memory
(RAM). The standard 96 MB total RAM capacity is large enough to store a single 11” by 17”
image or two 8-1/2” by 11” images. The optional RAM capacity of all three Memory PWBAs
provides storage for 11” by 17” images.
Figure 2 Red Memory Simplified Block Diagram
Post-IPS Table 2 Post-IPS PWBA ASICs and Their Functions

The Post-IPS PWBA (Figure 3) processes 8-bit RGB image pixels retrieved from the Memory ASIC Name Functions
PWBA and provides them in YMCK (yellow, magenta, cyan, black) format to the Video Select TRE Enlarges/Reduces in one dimension; Creates mirror image; Shifts
PWBA. The Post-IPS PWBA first converts the RGB data to a L*a*b* format. This intermediate Image
data can be passed to and from the optional Edit PWBA. All of the board’s functionality is con-
TBC Converts 400 DPI to 600 DPI; generates timing signals
tained in the ASICs listed in Table 2, which also describes the functions included in the
devices. CPI Generates chip selects; Contains priority interrupt controller; Gener-
ates delay signals
Table 2 Post-IPS PWBA ASICs and Their Functions
ASIC Name Functions The Post IPS PWBA retrieves the RGB information from the Memory PWBA four times on a
pixel by pixel basis. This is because all three input values are required to construct all four out-
CST Converts image from RGB format to L*a*b* format put values. The image’s pixel color information is provided to the VSEL PWBA circuitry four
MAX (3 total) Differentiates between text and image areas of document original times, once per output color, in the following order:

Image Processing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer 10-82 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
1. All yellow (Y) information 2. R2, G2, B2 simultaneously
2. All magenta (M) information However, the images are extracted from the Memory PWBA in a different order:,
3. All cyan (C) information
4. All black (K) information 1. R1, G1, B1 simultaneously to construct Y1 and L1*a1*b1*
This ensures that toner will be placed onto the paper in the order: black (bottom), cyan, 2. R2, G2, B1 simultaneously to construct Y2 or L2*a2*b2*
magenta, yellow (top). 3. R1, G1, B1 simultaneously to construct M1
4. R2, G2, B2 simultaneously to construct M2
Likewise, all of a pixel’s RGB data must be extracted from memory before it can be translated 5. R1, G1, B1 simultaneously to construct C1
to L*a*b* format and provided to the Edit PWBA. 6. R2, G2, B2 simultaneously to construct Y2
7. R1, G1, B1 simultaneously to construct K1
This process is modified if the document originals are 8-1/2” X 11”/A4 or smaller. In this case,
the two images are loaded sequentially into the Memory PWBA in the following order: 8. R2, G2, B2 simultaneously to construct Y2
This enables the Post-IPS PWB to present the color information in the following order: Y1, Y2,
1. R1, G1, B1 simultaneously M1, M2, C1, C2, K1, K2, enabling the Xerographic subsystem to simultaneously process two 8-
1/2” X 11”/A4 sheets.
Figure 3 Post IPS PWBA Simplified Block Diagram
Edit PWBA
The optional Edit PWBA permits portions of the scanned image to be removed. As shown in
Figure 2 and Figure 3, the Edit PWBA is a daughterboard of the Post-IPS PWBA. The image is
accepted from the Post-IPS PWBA format in L*a*b* format and processed in two ASICs.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-83 Image Processing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer
Figure 4 Edit PWBA Simplified Block Diagram

Image Processing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer 10-84 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Image Source Selection The Halftone PWBA controls the selection of input and output. In addition, it can load a test
image into the VSEL PWBA, permitting an end-to-end test of the all succeeding assemblies.
As shown in Figure 1, the VSEL PWBA controls the routing of the image. The possible sources
are the scanned image from the Post-IPS PWBA and the print image from the Digital Front End
(DFE). The selected image is always routed to the Halftone PWBA. In addition, the selected
image can be routed to the DFE. Therefore, the machine can be used as a scanner, with the
resulting images being sent to client workstations.
Figure 1 VSEL PWBA Simplified Block Diagram

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-85 Image Source Selection
Image Processing (All Configurations) All machine configurations include a Halftone PWBA. This board accepts the image from the
VSEL PWBA four times, once per color: yellow, magenta, cyan and black. For each color, each
pixel has a value from 0 to 255 (8 bits/pixel). This value controls the amount of time that the
ROS drive pulse is active. A value of 0 shuts off the pulse completely, while a value of 255 pro-
vides the maximum pulse width. Most the functionality in this PWBA is located in six ASICs.
Figure 1 LDD PWBA and ROS Simplified Schematic Diagram
The Halftone PWBA uses its 600 DPI image data input to create pixels of various sizes and at
various pitches when printing text and graphics. As shown in Table 1, these include the follow-
ing combinations of types and resolutions:
• 600 vertical and horizontal lines per inch (600L)

• 300 vertical and horizontal lines per inch (300L)
• 200 rotated lines per inch (200R)
• 200 pixel clusters per inch (200C)
• 150 pixel clusters per inch (150C) (Only available for files received from the DFE).
The positioning of the rotated lines depends on the color of the line. Magenta is placed at 45°
clockwise of horizontal, yellow and black are vertical and cyan is placed at 45° clockwise from
vertical. These are shown in Figure 2.

Image Processing (All Configurations) 10-86 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Line Screen Rotation
Table 1 Print Screen for Modes

Photo Type
Original Copied Map

Mode Color Type Text Halftone Original Original Mode
Color 4 Color Text/ 600L/ 600L/ 600L/ 600L/ N/A
Photo 200R 200R 200C 200R
Text 600L/ N/A N/A N/A N/A
200R
Photo N/A 200R 200C 200R N/A
Map N/A N/A N/A N/A 300L
3 Color Text/ 600L/ 600L/ 600L/ 600L/ N/A
Photo 200R 200R 200C 200R
Text 600L/ N/A N/A N/A N/A
200R
Single Black, Text/ 600L/ 600L/ 600L/ 600L/ N/A
Color Yellow, Photo 200R 200R 200C 200R
Magenta, Text 600L/ N/A N/A N/A N/A
Cyan 200R
In cluster mode, the ROS laser beam is modulated to create fewer but larger pixels on the pho-
toreceptor drum. The size of these pixels by can be changed by changing the total amount of
energy which the lasers transmit to the photoreceptor drum. The pixels are arranged in groups
or clusters with one pixel per color, with each pixel being effectively rotated. The arrangement
of pixels is shown in Figure 3.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-87 Image Processing (All Configurations)
Photoreceptor Exposure
Photoreceptor exposure is the function of the Laser Diode Driver (LDD) PWBA and the Raster
Output Scanner (ROS).
Figure 3 Cluster Dot Screen Patterns

Image Processing (All Configurations), Photorecep- 10-88 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 1 LDD PWBA and ROS Simplified Schematic Diagram
LDD PWBA The output wavelength is 780 nm which is in the infrared range of the electromagnetic spec-
trum. Therefore, the laser diode outputs are invisible to the human eye. By precisely timing
The LDD PWBA provides the interface between the Halftone PWBA and the ROS. The LDD
when the LED is lit, the LED output can be reflected from a mirror face anywhere along a line
PWBA switches on the ROS laser diodes while the pulse from the Halftone PWBA is active.
extending across the width of the photoreceptor drum. The light striking the photoreceptor
See Figure 1.
drum causes a latent image on the drum.
ROS Since the rotational velocity of the mirror must be both very accurate and stable, the mirror is
The ROS, shown in Figure 2, includes two solid-state diode lasers whose output is directed as mounted on air bearing. Control signals for the ROS are provided by the IOT Drive PWBA,
follows: under the control of the IOT CPU. The IOT LVPS provides +24 VDC via the IOT Drive PWBA.
1. Slit
2. Expander Lens
3. Two Mirrors
4. Rotating 12-sided Polygonal Mirror
5. Scan Ray Mirror
6. Mirror Cylinder
7. Photoreceptor Drum

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-89 Photoreceptor Exposure
MIRROR LDD PWBA
SOS PICKUP SLIT

CYLINDER LENS DUAL SPOT LD
LENS
MIRROR
START-OF- SCAN
LENSES PWBA
MIRROR
MOTOR CYLINDER
POLYGON HOUSING
ASSY
Figure 2 ROS Components Locations

Photoreceptor Exposure 10-90 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview
The paper supplies for the DocuColor 12 and the DocuCentre Color Series 50 machines are
the same. They consist of four (4) Paper Trays and a bypass tray (Tray 5) for single feeding or
special weights of copy material. Refer to Figure 1
This Paper Supply chapter will describe up to the point where the paper or copy material is
ready to feed into the paper path. Chapter 7 includes:
• Paper Tray Specifications

• Paper Size Sensing
• Tray Level Lift and Sensing
• No Paper Sensing
• Tray 5
Refer to Chapter 8 for paper transportation issues.
Paper Size Guides
Tray 5
Paper Trays 1-4
Tray 2
Figure 1 Paper Supply Trays

Paper Tray Specifications
The Paper Trays are numbered 1-4, with Tray 1 at the top. Tray 1 is different in size and paper
holding capacity from the other trays. Trays 2, 3 and 4 are identical and can be interchanged
within the machine. The trays slide in and out on a side rail assembly from of the front of the
machine. When the trays are inserted all the way into the machine, a switch is activated to indi-
cate on the User Interface that a tray is present.
Each tray has Paper Guides that can be adjusted by the user to accommodate different paper
sizes. The Paper Guides in each tray automatically indicate to the machine the paper size in
that tray. This information is provided on the User Interface for the operator.
Tray 5 is located on the side of the machine. This is used for feeding 1 to 100 sheets of paper
(28lb-30lb), heavier weight papers and transparency material. It also holds the optional enve-
lope feeder.
Refer to Table 1 for the tray specifications. Figure 1 shows the electrical interface for Tray 1,
and Figure 2 shows the electrical interface for Tray 2. The electrical interfaces for Trays 3 and
4 are the same as Tray 2.
Table 1 Paper Tray Specifications

Trays Capacity Paper Sizes Paper Weights Notes
Tray 1 500 sheets 8.5x11.0 No envelopes,
8x10 transparencies, or
A4 heavy weight
B5 paper
Trays 2, 3, 4 550 sheets 11x17 No envelopes,
8.5x14 transparencies, or
8.5x13 heavy weight
8.5x11 paper
8x10
B4
A3
B5
A4
Tray 5 100 sheets Any less than 250 Optional envelope
(20 lb, or less gsm, feeder; usable for
sheets for less than 140 lb transparencies,
heavier weights) index; heavy weight and
less than90 lb hole punched/
cover drilled papers

Paper Tray Specifications 10-92 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 1 Tray 1 Interface Block Diagram

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-93 Paper Tray Specifications
Figure 2 Trays 2 - 4 Interface Block Diagram (Tray 2 Shown)

Paper Tray Specifications 10-94 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Paper Size Sensing The tray Size Sensor Assembly reads the paper size in the tray. This assembly uses four
switches that read high and low conditions, The Size Sensor Actuator pushes different combi-
The user must manually enter the paper size in Tray 1, and the value is stored in the IOT CPU
nations of high/low switch settings which correspond to specific paper sizes and configurations.
NVM. Trays 2 through 4 have a paper Size Sensor Assembly which automatically reads the Refer to Table 1.
paper size loaded in that Tray. These switches are located in the back of the machine where
the trays are slid. Table 1 Paper Size Switch Settings, Trays 2-4
Paper Size & Orientation Tray Size Switch
Paper Guides in the trays slide for selecting various papers sizes. As the Paper Guides slide,
camming levelers on the bottom of the tray move a Size Sensor Actuator on the back of the 1 2 3 4
tray. This Size Sensor Actuator pushes the switches on the Size Sensor Assembly to indicate No Tray Present low low low low
what paper is loaded in that tray. The paper tray needs to be inserted all the way into the 11.0x17.0” SEF low low low hi
machine for the Actuator to engage the Size Sensor switches, activating this paper size sens- 8.5x14.0” SEF low low hi low
ing feature. Refer to Figure 1 for Sensor locations.
B4 SEF low low hi hi
A3 SEF low hi low low
(TFX Special) SEF low hi low hi
8.5x13.0” SEF low hi hi low
Paper Size Sensors B5 SEF low hi hi hi
A4 SEF hi low low low
Paper Tray Sensor (TFX Special) LEF hi low low hi
Size Sensor Actuator
8.5x11.0” SEF (Letter) hi low hi low
B5 LEF hi low hi hi
Paper Size Guides
Nudger Solenoid A4 LEF hi hi low low
8.5x11.0” LEF (Letter) hi hi low hi
A5 SEF hi hi hi low
8.0x10.0” LEF hi hi hi hi
Paper Feed Motor
Paper Out Sensor

Prefeed Sensor
Figure 1 Paper Size Sensors (Shown Inside the Machine)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-95 Paper Size Sensing
Tray Level Lift and Sensing
The paper level within the trays must be maintained within a certain height range for proper
paper feeding into the machine. This is achieved by the Tray Level Left mechanism and the
Stack Height Sensor within each Paper Tray. Figure 1 shows the relationship between motor
rotation and the resulting action.
As paper is fed from the tray, the following process keeps the paper at the correct height to feed
into the machine:
1. Paper level in the tray drops as paper is fed into the machine.
2. As the paper level drops, the Nudger Roll also drops further into the tray to reach the top
sheet of paper. The Nudger Roll Solenoid activates, allowing a spring to push the Nudger
Roller onto the paper stack
3. When the Nudger Roll drops into the tray to a certain level, a flag on the Nudger Roll
mechanism blocks the Stack Height Sensor.
4. When the Stack Height Sensor is blocked, its output line to the IOT Drive and Control
PWBAs changes its level.
5. The IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs activate the Feed Motor for that tray, causing it run in the
clockwise direction.
6. The Feed Motor running in a clockwise direction results in:
• The Nudger Roll stops rotating, because of its one-way clutch.
• The Feed Roll stops rotating, again due to a one-way clutch.
• The Lift Shaft starts turning, raising the paper level in the tray.
7. As the paper level rises, it raises the Nudger until the Stack Height Sensor is no longer
blocked.
8. When the Stack Height Sensor is no longer blocked, its output line to the IOT Drive and
Control PWBAs changes back to its original level.
9. The IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs activate the tray’s Feed Motor in the counter-clockwise
direction. Figure 1 Tray Motor Rotation
10. The Feed Motor running in the counter-clockwise direction results in:
• The Paper Tray Level Lift stops rising.
• The Nudger Roll starts rotating.
• The Feed Roll starts rotating.
11. The paper is at the proper height and is fed into the machine.
When opening or removing the Paper Trays from the machine, the tray’s Paper Level Lift Mech-
anism automatically drops the paper level. Inserting or closing the Paper Trays automatically
raises the paper level by the Paper Feed Motor.

Tray Level Lift and Sensing 10-96 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
No Paper Sensing Tray 5
A No-Paper Sensor detects when the Paper Tray is empty. When the last sheet is fed from the Tray 5 is used mainly to feed transparencies, thick paper, and envelopes. It can also be used to
tray, the No-Paper Sensor actuator drops into a hole within the Tray Level Lift. The actuator feed small quantities of paper not in Paper Trays 1 through 4. Tray 5 has a maximum capacity
blocks the sensor and the sensor’s output switches to high. of 1-100 copies.
This level is sent to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs, which deactivates the tray’s Feed Motor. When material is placed in Tray 5, it pushes against an actuator finger of the Tray 5 Paper Sen-
In addition, these PWBAs cause a message to appear on the User Interface display. send a sor, causing it to change level. The switch output is routed to the IOT Drive and Control
status message to the User Interface Base PWBA. Figure 1 shows the circuitry relating to the PWBAs.
No Paper Sensor. This circuitry is the same for Trays 1 through 4.
Refer to Figure 1 for the Tray 5 components.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-97 No Paper Sensing, Tray 5
Figure 1 Tray 5 Electrical Block Diagram.
Paper feeding and paper size sensing is described in Section 8, Paper Transport.

Tray 5 10-98 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview Paper Path Description
Paper Transportation includes: The paper feeding process is the same for all four paper trays. The following is a brief descrip-
tion of the copy paper path through the entire machine. For a more detailed explanation, refer
• Paper Path Description to each subassembly listed above.
• Paper Feeders
The Tray Lift raises the paper in the Paper Trays to the Feeder Assembly. A solenoid activated
• Tray 5
Nudger Roll feeds paper into the nip of the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll. These two rolls
• Paper Registration and Pre-Fuser Transport advance the paper into the vertical transport area which have a series of magnetically clutched
• Inverter and Duplex Paper Path Take Away Rollers (TAR).
• Print Exit
The Take Away Rollers advance the paper to the Preregistration Rollers. As the paper
advances through the Preregistration Roller, the lead edge of the paper passes a reflective
sensor. The signal from this sensor is compared to the TR0 signal from the IBT by the machine
run control. The machine run control will have the Preregistration Roller run slower or faster so
that the paper will synchronize for proper image transfer at the IBT.
The Registration Rollers are not energized and their movement is momentarily delayed as the
lead edge of the paper enters the nip. The Registration Sensor sees the lead edge of the paper
and starts a timing delay for energizing the Registration Rollers. While these rollers are not
moving, the paper is still being advanced by the Preregistration Rollers. This forces the lead
edge of the paper onto the non-moving Registration Rolls, and aligns or “de-skews” the paper
square to the Registration Rollers. After de-skewing, the Registration Rolls are energized and
advance the paper to the xerographic marking area of the machine.
The IBT allows all 4 color layers of toner to be transferred to the paper in one pass. The paper
goes between the IBT Belt and the second Bias Transfer Roll. There, a combination of pres-
sure and electrostatic charge transfers the toner from the belt to the paper. Exiting the IBT
area, the paper is transported to the Fuser by a Vacuum Belt. A metal guide directs the lead
edge into the nip of the Fuser.
The Fuser has a Heat Roll and Pressure Roll which cam together to create a “Contact Arc” or
pressure point in the roller nip. The Heat Roll and Pressure Roll apply heat and pressure which
fuses the toner into the paper. The paper leaves the Fuser, passing into the nip of the Fuser
Exit Rollers. If the paper is exiting the machine, it is guided by Exit Inverter Rolls to the Paper
Shelf or the Mailbox/Sorter.
For duplex copying, or for paper that is to be stacked in reverse order, the paper is diverted by
a solenoid activated Invert Gate before reaching the Exit Inverter Rolls. The Invert Gate directs
the paper into the duplex paper path.
Two pairs of Inverter Rolls drive the paper down into the duplex path. Copy that is to be
reversed stacked is stopped before the trailing edge reaches the second set of Inverter Rolls.
At this position, the paper has passed a strip of Mylar which acts as a gate. The paper reverses
its direction of travel and moves up into the Mylar gate, which guides the paper to the Exit
Invert Roll to leave the machine for reverse stacking.
Figure 1 Motor Drives of the Paper Path

For Duplex printing, the paper travels further into the duplex path to a “dup point.” At this posi- Table 1 Paper Transport Motors
tion, the paper has passed a second Mylar gate. The copy reverses direction, driven by the Function
Duplex Inverter Roll, and the Mylar gate guides the paper to the Dup Path. Two sets of pre- Motor (drives the following:)
alignment rolls (Duplex In Roll and Duplex Path Roll) drive the copy, while three sets of crossed
rolls (Alignment Rolls 1, 2 and 3) push the copy into the Side Guide Rail for alignment prior to Duplex Out Motor • Align Roll 1
copying on the second side. • 24 VDC • Align Roll 2
• Align Roll 3
Duplex Out Rolls transport the copy to the Preregistration Rolls. From there, the copy is again • Dup Out Roll
de-skewed and sent for copying on the second side by passing through the IBT, Fuser and then
Exit Motor • Machine Exit Inverter Roll
exiting the machine as a finished duplex copy.
• +/- 24 VDC • Pressure Roller Cam
Refer to Table 1 for information on the different drive motors used to transport the paper
through the machine.
Table 1 Paper Transport Motors

Function
Motor (drives the following:)
Trays 1-4 Feed/Lift Motors • Feed Roller (ccw)
• 24 VDC • Nudger Roller (ccw)
• Bidirectional Stepper Motor • Paper Level Lift (cw)
• 300 mm/sec (feed operation)
Take Away Motor • Take Away Clutch

• 24 VDC – Take Away Rollers 2-4
• 450 mm/sec.
Tray 5 Motor • Tray 5 Feed Clutch
• 24 VDC – Nudger Roll
• 220 mm/sec. – Feed Roll
• 130 mm/sec. • Tray 5 Take Away Roll
• 60 mm/sec. • Take Away Feed Clutch
– #1 Take Away Roll
• Pre-Registration Roll
Tray 5 Lifter Motor • Tray 5 Lifter-Up
• 24 VDC • Tray 5 Lifter-Down
• Stepper Motor
Regi Motor • Registration Roll
• 24 VDC
• Stepper Motor
• 220 mm/sec.
• 130 mm/sec.
• 60 mm/sec.
Invert Motor • Invert Roll 1
• 24 VDC • Invert Roll 2
• Reversing Stepper Motor • Dup Invert Roll
• 350 mm/sec. • Dup In Roll
• 450 mm/sec. • Dup Path Roll

Overview 10-100 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Paper Path

Paper Feeders
Paper Path Component Description and Locator (See Figure 2) The purpose of the Paper Feeders is to:
Item Description Item Description

• Extract the copy material, a single sheet at a time, from the Paper Trays and feed this
1 Tray 1 Sensor 28 Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor copy material into the vertical transport area of the machine
2 Tray 1 Level Sensor 29 Take Away Motor • Maintain the correct height levels in the Paper Trays for proper feeding
3 Tray 1 No Paper Sensor 30 Tray 1 Take Away Feed Clutch • Indicate when there is a jam or double feed from the Paper Feeder mechanism
4 Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor 31 Tray 2 Take Away Feed Clutch • Sense when the Paper Tray is empty
5 Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor 32 Tray 3 Take Away Feed Clutch Each of the four Paper Trays have their own motor driven Paper Feeder Assembly. The four
6 Tray 1 Nudger Solenoid 33 Tray 4 Take Away Feed Clutch Feeder Assemblies are located above each Paper Tray, in the lower left side of the machine.
7 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor 34 Take Away Sensor
8 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensor 35 Pre Registration Sensor
9 Tray 2 Level Sensor 36 Tray 5 Motor
10 Tray 2 No Paper Sensor 37 Regi Sensor
Retard Roll
11 Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor 38 Transparency Sensor (OHP)
12 Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor 39 Regi Motor Friction Clutch
13 Tray 2 Nudger Solenoid 40 Pre IBT Sensor
Feed Roll
14 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor 41 Pre Fuser Sensor
15 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensor 42 Fuser Exit Sensor Feed/Lifter Motor
16 Tray 3 Level Sensor 43 Invert Gate
17 Tray 3 No Paper Sensor 44 Invert Gate Solenoid
18 Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor 45 Exit Path Sensor
19 Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor 46 M/C Exit Sensor
20 Tray 3 Nudger Solenoid 47 Invert Motor
Paper Out Sensor
21 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor 48 Release Solenoid
22 Tray 4 Paper Size Sensor 49 Inverter Path Sensor
23 Tray 4 Level Sensor 50 Duplex In Sensor
24 Tray 4 No Paper Sensor 51 Duplex Path Sensor Nudger Roll
25 Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor 52 Duplex Out Sensor
26 Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor 53 Duplex Out Motor Nudger Roll Sensor
27 Tray 4 Nudger Solenoid
Nudger Roll Solenoid
NOTE: Bottom View
Figure 1 Paper Feeder Assembly
Feed Motors
Each Tray Assembly has a +/- 24 VDC, bidirectional stepper Feed Motor:

Overview, Paper Feeders 10-102 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
• When rotating clockwise, it raises the Tray Lifter in the Paper Tray.
• When rotating counterclockwise, it rotates the Nudger and Feed Rolls for the tray.
The Feed Motors are controlled by the IOT Control and Drive PWBAs. The circuit is the same
for all four Paper Trays and their Feeder Assemblies. See Figure 2 for the electrical schematic.
The paper feed process starts either when:
• The machine functioning as a printer, receives a print job from the network connection.
• The machine functioning as a copier, the user enters a print job on the User Interface cor-
rectly, provides the document in the Document Feeder or on the Platen Glass and
presses the Start Button, and there is the correct copy material in one of the paper supply
sources.
Paper Feed
The IOT Control PWBA manages paper feed timing using the TR0 signal from the IBT Belt as a
reference. In the selected tray, the Feed Motor is energized, rotating the Nudger Roll, and the
Feed Roll. The Retard Roll rotates by being cammed against the Feed Roll. For each sheet of
paper to be fed, the Nudger Roll solenoid momentarily activates, allowing a spring to push the
Nudger Roll down to the top sheet of paper in the tray. The Nudger Roll feeds the paper into the
nip of the Feed/Retard Roll. The paper is fed at a rate of 300 mm/sec. to the Take Away Rollers.
If the lead edge of the paper is not sensed by the Pre-Feed Sensor within the correct time dura-
tion, then a Feed Sensor jam is declared. (See Tray Level Lift and Sensing for maintaining the
paper level in the Paper Trays)
Retard Roller Operation

The Retard Roll prevents more than one sheet of paper from being fed into the paper path at
the same time. Figure 2 Partial electrical schematic for paper feed control in Trays 1-4
The Retard Roll in each Paper Tray is classified as a semi-active type. The Retard Roll is
mechanically cammed against the motor-driven Feed Roll when the Paper Tray is inserted into
the machine. The rotation of the Retard Roll comes from this contact with the Feed Roll.
A friction clutch on the shaft of the Retard Roll provides rotation resistance. When there is no
copy, or a single sheet of copy in the nip of the Retard/Feed Roll, the resistance from the fric-
tion clutch is not enough to prevent the Retard Roll from rotating with the motor-driven Feed
Roll. This allows the rotating Retard and Feed Rolls to feed a single sheet of copy. If more than
one sheet of copy is fed into the Retard/Feed Roll nip, then the resistance from the Friction
Clutch is greater than the resistance between the multiple sheets of copy. This resistance pre-
vents the Retard Roll from rotating, which holds the extra sheets of copy back in the tray while
only the top copy is advanced by the motor-driven Feed Roll.
Paper Feed Control

Figure 2 is a partial electrical schematic of the paper feed control.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-103 Paper Feeders
Vertical Transport Tray 5
The purpose of the Vertical Transport module is to provide copy transportation from the Paper Tray 5 is used to feed copy material that cannot be reliably fed from one of the four Paper Trays,
Trays to the registration system. The vertical Transport also provides access to the paper jams or for a copy size that is not available in any of the Paper Trays. Copy material that is to be fed
in the Paper Feeders and Take Away Rolls (TAR). from Tray 5 includes:
As paper is feed from the Paper Trays, it enters the Vertical Transport module. The Take Away • Transparency material
Rolls 2 through 4 are individually clutched magnetically and are driven by the Take Away Motor. • Heavy weight paper (105 gsm - 190 gsm)
Paper transport speed is at 450 mm/sec. Each TAR clutch can engage or disengage from the • Extra heavy weight paper (191 gsm - 250 gsm)
TAR Motor as the paper enters and leaves the nip. This function reduces the energy used by
• Manual duplex copy needs
the TAR Motor and also releases the paper as required when the paper enters the variable
speed Preregistration Rolls. • Multi-hole drill/punched paper
Tray 5 feed operation
The Take Away Roll 1 is clutch driven by Tray 5 Motor at 450 mm/sec. These rolls are also elec-
Tray 5 has a switch that is activated when the top of the tray is dropped down. This sends a sig-
tromagnetically clutched to disengage from the Tray 5 Motor. These rolls disengage when the nal to the machine run control, which energizes the Tray 5 sensor circuitry and indicates on the
paper enters the nip of the Preregistration Rolls. User Interface screen that the Tray 5 is open.
An optical Feed Out Sensor at each TAR reads the lead and trail edge of the paper to energize
When copy material is placed in Tray 5 with the lead edge of the material against the Tray 5
the clutched rolls and to detect paper jams at each of Paper Trays.
Gate, a Paper Set Sensor is actuated. This sensor signals machine run control that copy is
present in this tray. A paper Size Guide is manually adjusted to accommodate the lead edge
dimension of the copy. The Size Guide uses a variable resistor sensor for providing the lead
edge dimension to the machine run control.
Two optical sensors are used to monitor the copy stack height that is placed in Tray 5 for proper
feeding into the machine:
• Tray 5 Level Up Sensor - This sensor performs the same way as the Stack Height Sen-
sor in Paper Trays 1-4. When the Nudger Roll has to drop too far down to reach the top
sheet of paper, the Tray 5 Level Up Sensor is unblocked and the Tray 5 Lifter motor is
energized counterclock wise to raise the Paper Lifter, bring the paper level up to the
Nudger Roll for proper feeding.
• Tray 5 Level Down Sensor - This sensor indicates when the Paper Lifter is down. The
Tray 5 Lifter Motor is energized clockwise to lower the paper.
A delayed time interval from the TR0 signal starts the Tray 5 Motor. The Nudger Roll Solenoid
momentarily energizes to lower the Nudger Roll to the top copy. This feeds the top copy into
the nip of the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll. The Retard Roll has a friction clutch which pro-
vides resistance to prevent multiple copy feedings (See Retard Roller Operation for more
details of this roller function.)
The copy travels from Tray 5 Feed/Nudger Rolls to the Tray 5 Take Away Rolls. The Tray 5 Feed
Sensor detects the lead and trail edge. If the lead edge is not sensed within the designated
time, then a paper jam error is generated.
The Tray 5 feed mechanism is similar to that used in Paper Trays 1-4 (See Paper Feeders for
more information on paper feeding). Tray 5 Nudger Roll feeds the paper to the nip of the Feed
and Retard Roll. The Retard Roll is a semi-active type. From there, the single sheet of paper is
fed to the Tray 5 Take Away Rolls.

Vertical Transport, Tray 5 10-104 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
As the paper advances through Tray 5 Take Away Rolls, the lead edge of the paper passes a
reflective sensor. The signal from this sensor is compared to the TR0 signal from the IBT by the PAPER LEVEL SENSOR FEED ROLL
machine run control. The machine run control signals Tray 5 Motor to run the Take Away Rolls NUDGER ROLL
faster or slower so that the paper will synchronize with the IBT for proper image transfer. SOLENOID PAPER OUT
SENSOR
The same alignment procedure occurs when the paper comes from the Vertical Transport and
Paper Tray direction. In this case, a Preregistration Sensor signals the machine run control
which has the Tray 5 Motor vary the speed of the Preregistration Rolls. Refer to Figure 1 for
Tray 5 Motor speed adjustments of these rollers. From either Tray 5 Take Away Rolls or the
Preregistration Rolls, the copy is advanced to the Registration Rolls for “deskewing”. (See
Paper Registration and Paper Transport to the IBT Belt.)
SIZE
GUIDE
PAPER TRAY
LIFT FEED OUT
RETARD ROLL SENSOR
Figure 2 Tray 5 components
Tray 5 Copy Size Sensing

When paper is placed in Tray 5, a paper Size Guide is manually adjusted to accommodate the
lead edge dimension of the copy. The Size Guide uses a variable resistor sensor (0-5 VDC) for
providing the lead edge dimension to the machine run control. The length of the paper (run
dimension) is determined by the activation time of the Pre Fuser Sensor.
Nudger Roll
Tray 5 Motor
Tray 5 Take Away Roll
Figure 1 Motor Speed Adjustments for Paper and Image Alignment
Tray 5 Mechanical Drives

Tray 5 uses two motors:
• Tray 5 Motor drives Tray 5 Nudger roll, Tray 5 Feed Roll, Tray 5 Take Away Rolls, Pre-
Registration Rolls and Take Away Rolls #1.
• Tray 5 Lifter Motor raises or lowers the Paper Lifter to control the paper level for correct
feed height in Tray 5. Paper Size Sensor
- Clockwise raises the Paper Lifter
- Counter clockwise lowers the Paper Lifter
Figure 3 Tray 5 Drive and Size Sensor

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-105 Tray 5
Paper Registration and Pre-Fuser Transport Differentiating between paper and transparencies
The components and assemblies involved in paper registration accept a sheet of blank copy Transparencies can only be fed from Tray 5. When transparency material is detected, the trans-
material and ensure that its edges are absolutely parallel or perpendicular to the sheet’s direc- port speed for IBT, the Vacuum Transport, Fuser and Fuser Exit Rolls drops to its slowest
tion of travel. This is done immediately before feeding the sheet to the IBT Belt. speed of approximately 60 mm/sec. When copy material is fed from Tray 5, two OHP Sensors
examine the edges of the material to determine if the material is opaque on that edge through
Paper Registration and Paper Transport to the IBT Belt its whole length. The outputs of these sensors are routed to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs
for processing.
The paper registration system uses a stalled-roll technique. As the blank copy material is being
transported by the Preregistration Rollers (from trays 1 through 4) or by the Tray 5 Take Away
The OHP Senors are a LED transmitted-light-detection type. Since paper is opaque, it blocks
Rollers, the lead edge of the media reaches the nip of the Registration Rollers. At that instant,
light from the sensors’ LEDs to their photoreceptors. This isn’t the case with transparency
the Registration Rollers are not rotating. This forces the lead edge of copy into the nip, causing material, except for a short interval when either or both sensors encounter the opaque white
the copy to buckle and making the lead edge parallel with the nip. strip on some transparency material.
After a 100 to 140 ms delay, the Registration Motor begins turning the Registration Rollers, When the Registration Sensor detects the lead edge of the copy material, the signal from both
moving the blank copy material to the nip between the IBT Belt and the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll. OHP Senors is also read. If the material is paper, then these sensors are blocked. If the trans-
parency material is fed with the white strip (5 mm in width) first, then the OHP Sensors are also
The start of the developed image on the IBT Belt and the leading edge of the copy material
blocked. Readings from the OHP Sensors are taken at 0.1 second intervals. If the LED of the
must be synchronized so that they meet. Therefore, the IOT Control and Drive PWBAs can
sensors are detected, this indicates the material is a transparency that is being transported.
vary the speed of the Preregistration Rollers and the Dup Out Rollers from 360 mm/sec. to 540
mm/sec. This results from comparing the timing of the Preregistration Sensor signal caused by
the blank copy material’s leading edge with the timing signal from the TR0 Sensor on the IBT.
Any timing difference causes the speed of the Tray 5 Motor and Duplex Out Motor to be
adjusted.
After the copy material has been set to synchronize with the IBT and has been deskewed at the
Registration Rollers, it enters the nip of the Second Bias Transfer Roll (BTR) with the IBT Belt.
Refer to Xerographics for more information on the Xerographics process.
Paper Transport from the IBT Belt

A Vacuum Transport Belt carries the unfused print to the Fuser Subassembly. To maintain con-
sistent print transport speed during the Fusing process, the Fuser Motor transports the print
into, through and out of the Fuser Assembly. (See Table 1 for Drive Motor information).
The vacuum that is used to hold the print to the belt comes from the Exhaust Blower Assembly
through the Xerographic and Vacuum Transport duct system. This means that the belt vacuum
may be diminished if the machine’s service doors are open.
The Fuser Entrance Sensor detects the lead edge for paper jams on the Vacuum Transport
Belt or from the IBT.
Refer to the Fuser Section for more information on this subassembly.
As the fused print exits the Fuser, the lead edge enters the Fuser Exit Roller nip. A Fuser Exit
Sensor detects the lead edge of the print as it leaves the Fuser Exit Rollers. If the lead edge is
more then 20 ms late, the Fuser will stop and a jam error code will be indicated.

Paper Registration and Pre-Fuser Transport 10-106 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Inverter and Duplex Paper Path Print Exit
After fusing, a print would enter the Inverter Path, instead of exiting the machine, for one of two Print exit moves the finished print out of the machine. Depending upon machine options, exit-
reasons: ing prints can go to a Sorter, a Mailbox or a Tray Stacker.
• To be stacked in the Exit Tray or Stacker/Mailbox/Sorter in the same order that they were Prints can reach the exit port from either the Inverter Paper Path or the Fuser Path. When the
printed or copied. print is coming from the Inverter Path, the critical condition is the state of the solenoid control-
• As the first step in duplex printing or copying ling the Inverter Gate. When the print is to exit the machine, the solenoid is not activated. This
The print is diverted into this paper path by a solenoid activated Inverter Gate. This solenoid allow the print to be transported directly to the Exit Invert Rolls instead of being routed into the
and gate is activated by the IOT Control and Drive PWBA. Inverter Paper Path.
When the print is coming from the Inverter Path, the critical condition is how far down the
Duplex Path Inverter Path the print is driven by Invert Rolls 1 and 2 and Duplex Invert Roll. If the trailing
The Duplex Path transports the print back to a location before IBT image transfer so that its edge of the print goes down past the Mylar Duplex Gate, it will be directed along the Duplex
reverse side can be marked. Paper Path when it reverses direction and moves upward. If the Mylar Duplex Gate isn’t
passed, the upwardly moving print will be routed to the Exit Inverter Rolls when it reaches the
When duplex printing is required, the Invert Solenoid activates the Inverter Gate. This Inverter Mylar Inverter Gate.
Gate directs the lead edge of print down the Invert/Duplex paper path to Inverter Rolls 1 and 2,
and the Duplex Inverter Roll. These rolls transport the print down past a Duplex Gate to a The Exit Sensor detects paper jams by monitoring the leading and trailing edges of the print.
Duplex Invert Point. At this Duplex Invert Point, the Invert Motor stops and reverses direction to The Exit Motor drives only the Exit Invert Rolls. This allows the print material to exit the
move the print up in the paper path. The Mylar Duplex Gate directs the print into the duplex machine at a transport speed of 350 mm/sec.
paper path.
The print enters the Duplex Paper Path, and the print’s leading edge passes the Duplex In Sen-
sor. This sensor detects paper jams, and initiates a timing sequence which eventually results in
the IOT Control and Drive PWBAs energizing the Duplex Out Motor. The Invert Motor drives
Duplex In Roll and the Duplex Path Roll. These rolls transport the print to the duplex alignment
area.
When the Duplex Path Sensor detects the leading edge of the print, the Invert Motor deener-
gizes and the Duplex Out Motor energizes. The Duplex Out Motor drives three sets of Align
Rolls which are rotating at an angle to the transportation direction of the print. This angled drive
pushes the print edge into a Side Guide Rail and aligns the running side dimension to the side
dimension of the IBT for the second marking process. After the print is aligned, it is sent to the
Preregistration Rolls to be again deskewed against the Registration Rolls. A Duplex Out Sen-
sor detects the leading and trailing edge of the print, to detect paper jams as the print leaves
the Duplex Paper Path.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-107 Inverter and Duplex Paper Path, Print Exit
Inverter and Duplex Paper Path, Print Exit 10-108 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview
This module describes the electrical and mechanical components of the Xerographics process. Photoreceptor Drum
Xerographics includes these primary functions:
• Providing a charge to the Photoreceptor Drum which can then be exposed with a laser for
the image data. This creates a latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum.
• Develop the latent electrostatic image on the Photoreceptor Drum by depositing toner
onto the image areas.
• Transfer the developed image from the Photoreceptor Drum to the Intermediate Transfer
Belt (IBT). The IBT receives all required toner colors before the image is transferred to the
paper.
• Transfer the complete toner image from the IBT to the paper.
• Clean both the IBT and the Photoreceptor Drum of developer residue.
• Suppling developer to the Developer Rotary Assembly
The major sections in this module are:
• Photoreceptor Drum IBT Belt

• Charging
• Development
• Toner Supply
• Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT)
• Motors
• Cleaning Systems Figure 1 Two Step Image Transfer Process
• Air Flow
The advantage of the IBT is that it provides a more stable and consistent base than paper for
• Process Controls receiving the toner from the Photoreceptor Drum. When transferring four different toner layers
The Xerographics processes in this machine use a number of design improvements which onto a substrate, factors such as: registration, surface charge, consistent transport speed,
helps it achieve the full color copy rate of 12.5 copies per minute. Unlike other color copier moisture content, and surface texture all are critical variables that impact quality of that toner
technology that has the developed image on the Photoreceptor Drum layering one color at a transfer process. The wide variety of copy materials (different paper/plastic surfaces and
time directly onto the paper, this machine makes use of a subassembly called the “Intermedi- weights) make it difficult to control these variables, which impacts the color toner layering pro-
ate Belt Transfer” (IBT). The IBT receives and accumulates all four color toner layers from the cess.
Photoreceptor Drum, and then passes this completed image onto the paper in one pass. Using
this process there are actually two steps for image transfer. These are: By using the IBT, the variables of surface charge, speed, registration, moisture content and sur-
face texture are either eliminated or reduced. This allows for more consistency in building the
1. The charged and developed image on the Photoreceptor Drum is transferred to the Inter- toner layers. Once all the required image layers have been accumulated onto the IBT, this final
mediate Belt Transfer (IBT). The IBT accepts the image from the Photoreceptor Drum, image is then passed onto the paper at the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll (BTR) through a controlled,
one color at a time, until all four colors are layered on top of each other on the IBT. electrically charged, roller nip. By using one pass to transfer the complete image onto the
Layering sequence: YMCK, where Y is the first color put onto the Photoreceptor Drum paper, an increase in image quality, image consistency and color copy rate is achieved.
and transferred onto the IBT.
Because of this two step transfer process, the image on the IBT is an upside-down, mirror
imaged and reversed colored layered of the image that ends up on the copy material. Refer to
2. The complete colored image on the IBT is transferred to the final copy material in one
Figure 1 for more information on this two step image transfer process.
pass.
Layered sequence: KCMY, where K is the bottom color layer that is on the copy material
and Y is the top color layer.

Photoreceptor Drum Photoreceptor Drum
This machine uses the “black writing” or Discharge Area Development (DAD) system for This machine uses a STX Organic Photoreceptor Drum. The multiple layered, organic coated
exposing and charging the Photoreceptor Drum. With black writing, a high negative charge is aluminum drum is 84 mm in diameter. The layers on the Photoreceptor Drum are:
placed uniformly on the drum and forms the image background. The Photoreceptor drum is
discharged in those areas written by the ROS. The developer is also highly charged negatively • The bottom layer is called a Blocking Layer and forms the interface to the grounding alu-
and is only attracted to the more discharged areas. Therefore, if there is an image writing fail- minum layer.
ure, such as a ROS failure, the result will be blank prints. • The middle layer is called the Charge Generation Layer and has the capability of generat-
ing charges in the presence of light.
• The top layer is called the Charge Transport Layer and it transports charges from the sur-
face.
NOTE: The top STX organic layer is more sensitive to light than some other Photoreceptor
Drums. When removing from the machine, cover the Drum with the black plastic bag, which is
located in the closed compartment of Tray 1. Do not leave the Drum exposed to direct ambient
light for more than one minute at 1000 lux. If this time limit is exceeded, the drum becomes
desensitized and unusable. Unlike other Photoreceptor Drums, this unit cannot be refreshed
by placing it in a dark environment. It must be replaced.
For information on cleaning the Photoreceptor Drum, refer to Cleaning Systems
Photoreceptor grounding
The Photoreceptor Drum must be electrically grounded in order to function properly. The alumi-
num substrate of the Photoreceptor Drum is electrically common with the Drum Shaft. The
Drum Shaft is grounded through the Photoreceptor CRU, which is itself grounded to the
machine through a connector pin.
Drum Drive
The Photoreceptor Drum is driven by a 24 VDC brushless DC motor. This motor also drives the
IBT. In this manner, synchronization between the Drum and IBT Belt is easier to maintain for
the image transfer process.
A 9.38 pound (3.5 kilogram) flywheel is installed on the IBT Drive Roll Shaft to prevent fluctua-
tions in speed that would impact image quality.
Figure 1 Black Writing Xerographics Process
The black writing steps used on this rotating Photoreceptor Drum are as follows:
1. Charging the Drum (see: Charge Corotron)
2. Exposing the image onto the Drum with the Laser (see: Imaging section)
3. Developing the image on the Drum (see: Development)
4. Transferring the image to the IBT (see: Toner Transfer Overview)
5. Cleaning the Drum and IBT Belt (see: Cleaning Systems)

Photoreceptor Drum 10-110 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
The IOT CPU PWBA and IOT Drive PWBA control the Drum Motor. This PWBA contains the
electronics that drive the Drum Motor and converts the encoder pulses into the Machine Clock.
Motor Control is described in detail in the Start Power section.
Drum Data
The Photoreceptor Drum has a PWBA that contains Drum data and that provides information
that is used by various machine control functions. The data that is stored on the Drum PWBA
is:
• Drum Type
• Drum serial number
• Drum usable cycles number
• Drum Initial installation date
• Drum final installation date
• Drum installation frequency
• Dispense Motor usable time
• Charge Corotron discharge time
• Preclean Charge Corotron discharge time
• B/W and Color copy counters
PHOTORECEPTOR When a new Photoreceptor Drum (a CRU) is inserted into the machine, the new Drum serial
DRUM number is read and compared to the serial number stored in the NVM of the machine. When
the machine senses a different serial number, it interprets that a new Photoreceptor Drum has
been installed. The following occurs when a new Drum is installed:
• The Drum “Initial installation date” is stored when the machine detects the “Drum Installa-
tion Frequency” is read as “0”
• The Drum “Installation Frequency”, “Serial Number”, “Final Installation Date” and other
Drum data is read and then stored on NVM of the machine.
• The previous Drum data in NVM is stored as back-up data.
• Detection of the Drum “Replacement Time” is implemented after the Drum data is stored
Figure 2 Photoreceptor Drum CRU
and determined usable. When this is done, then any fail status related to the Drum CRU is
cancelled.
The Drum Motor assembly includes an encoder that provides pulses at the rate of once per
revolution. The IOT CPU PWBA uses these pulses to accurately time many of the copier func- The various Drum run times and cycles from the Drum PWBA are stored and counted. Drum
tions. replacement time is detected by the value of “Drum Usable Cycles Number” and “Dispense
Motor Usable Time.” The following error codes are related to the Drum CRU:
The Drum Motor rpm speed varies, depending upon what type of copy job is being processed.
Table 1 show the relationship between paper transport speed and Drum Motor speed. • 09-410: Drum CRU Change Soon - when the values of the above cycle numbers and time
reach a fixed value.
Table 1 Photoreceptor Speeds • 09-378: Drum CRU Change - when the values of the above cycle numbers and time are
zero (0).
Transport Speed Motor Speed
(mm/sec) (rpm) • 09-372: Drum Not In Position - when the machine can not detect the Photoreceptor Drum.
• 09-311: Drum Type Mismatch - when the machine detects the incorrect type of Photore-
Normal Copy 219.47 1996.0
ceptor Drum.
Heavy weight 129.68 1179.4
•
Super Heavy Wt. + Transparencies 59.82 544.0

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-111 Photoreceptor Drum
Charging
The surface of the rotating Photoreceptor Drum receives negative charge VH from the Charge
Corotron in preparation to the image exposure from the Laser. The level of this negative charge
on the Drum is measured by the Electrostatic Voltmeter (ESV) and is shown in Table 1. Note
that the charge voltage varies with the temperature and humidity as measured by the
machine’s Environmental Sensor (ENV). The charge voltage will also decrease after the first
50,000 cycles of the Photoreceptor Drum at a ratio of -1 V per 10,000 cycles.
Table 1 Photoreceptor Drum Voltages

Zone Temperature Humidity VH VL VBias
A 28° C 85% 623 300 510
B 22° C 55% 700 300 560
(for 0-50K cycles,
then decreases by -1
V/10K cycles)
C 10° C 20% 710 300 656
The laser beam from the ROS writes an image onto the negatively charged Photoreceptor
Drum. When the laser writes the image data to the Photoreceptor Drum, the voltage on the
part of the Drum containing the image is discharged from VH to VL, also shown in Table 2.
Figure 1 Charging Circuit
(The background or non-image areas remain at VH.) This “black writing” technique creates the
latent image that the negatively charged developer will be attracted to, developing this image
area.
Note that the level of Vh varies with ambient temperature and humidity. Temperature and
humidity are measured by a dedicated sensor which is connected to the IOT Drive and Control
PWBAs. The IOT CPU PWBA uses these parameters as one input in adjusting the output volt-
age and current of the Charge Corotron Grid/Preclean Corotron High Voltage Power Supply
(CC/PCC-HVPS) (PSHV-L2).
Charge Corotron
The Charge Corotron is replaced every time the customer replaces the Photoreceptor Drum (a
CRU). The Charge Corotron can also be replaced by the service engineer (an Engineer
Replaceable Unit, ERU) This unit consists of a single 30 micron diameter wire and a metal
screen grid positioned between the Corotron Wire and the Drum.
The Charge Corotron provides a constant current for charging the surface of the Photoreceptor
Drum with a uniform negative potential. This bias voltage on the Corotron Grid determines the
potential to which the drum is charged. As shown in Figure 2, this bias voltage and current is
supplied by the CC/PCC-HVPS (PSHV-L2). The power supply output voltage can vary
between -300 VDC and -1000 VDC. The output current is a constant 700 microamperes. The
IOT Drive provides the +24 VDC power source to the power supply. It also controls and moni-
tors the output voltage. Figure 2 shows the location of the CC/PCC-HVPS (PSHV-L2)
The Corotron Grid is coated with a neutralizing agent (catalyst) so that it cannot give off any
substance that would be detrimental to the life of the Photoreceptor.

Charging 10-112 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 3 ESV circuit
Charge Corotron HVPS

The CC/PCC-HVPS (HVPS-L2) provides a regulated constant current to the Charge Corotron.
DEVELOPER BIAS HIGH VOLTAGE This is typically in the range of 630 to 770 microamperes. To accomplish this, the power supply
CC/PCC HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY (PSHV-L1) charges the Charge Corotron to -300 to -1000 VDC. The output current and voltage are con-
POWER SUPPLY (PSHV-L2)
trolled by Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) control signals from the IOT Drive and Control
PWBAs. Interlocked +24 VDC from the IOT Drive PWBA is the power input from which the high
voltage output is generated.
Figure 2 Charge Corotron Grid/Preclean Corotron High Voltage Power Supply (PSHV-L2)
and Developer Bias High Voltage Power Supply (PSHV-L1) Location (09-095)
Charge Corotron Cleaning

The Charge Corotron is not cleaned. It is part of the Photoreceptor Drum CRU, or can be
changed by a service engineer (ERU).
ESV
The Electrostatic Voltmeter (ESV) consists of an ESV Sensor and an ESV PWBA. The ESV
Sensor produces an output which is proportional to the drum surface potential. The ESV
PWBA processes this output and provides a signal to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs. This
output is a scaled representation of the drum surface potential and has a range of 0 - 4.9 VDC.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-113 Charging
Development Developer Rotary Assembly
The Developer Rotary Assembly contains all four color Developer Housings (YMCK). These
NOTE: In common practice, the terms “toner” and “developer” are often used interchangeably,
are separated by 90° angles in the Rotary Assembly. A 24 V, 4 Phase Stepper Rotary Motor
which can result in confusion. For the purpose of this discussion, the following definitions
drives the assembly. The Rotary Motor is controlled by 3 signals:
apply.
Developer consists of a mixture of toner particles and carrier beads and exists before develop- • Rotary Motor HIGH
ing the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum. • Rotary Motor ON
Toner particles are used to develop the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum and then
• Rotary Motor CLOCK
transfers as the final image onto the copy material.
The Rotary Motor Clock is a pulse output signal coming from the Rotary Stepper Motor. It is
This machine starts with developer (a toner and carrier bead mixture) within the Toner Car-
used to determine the Rotary Housing position. The Rotary Assembly rotates once every 2,400
tridges and the Developer Housings. For that reason, this documentation will use the term
steps.
“developer” throughout the Toner Supply processes, and the term “toner” for the developed
image on the Photoreceptor Drum, the IBT and on the copy material.
Braking of the Rotary Assembly is performed by directly controlling the stepping-type Rotary
The Development subsystem consists of four color Developer Housings mounted on a Devel- Motor. In B&W operation, the Rotary Assembly is mechanically locked via a Rotary Latch Sole-
oper Rotary Assembly. This Rotary Assembly rotates the four individual color Developer Hous- noid and gear.
ings, one at a time, into position in order to transfer the developer to the electrostatic latent
image on the Photoreceptor Drum. (See Developer Rotary Assembly)
The development method in this machine is called Semi-Conductive Magnetic Brush (S-CMB) Rotary Assembly
development. It is a compromise between Insulative Magnetic Brush (IMB) and Conductive
Magnetic Brush (CMB). The advantages of IMB and CMB are retained with S-CMB. The disad-
vantages of rough graininess and the CMB disadvantages of brush marks and a non-linear
tone reproduction curve are minimized.
The high negative charge (VH) on the Photoreceptor Drum represents the background, or non-
image area. This will repel the developer, which is charged at -500 to -565 VDC (VBias). This
VBias varies, depending upon humidity and Photoreceptor Drum cycles.
NOTE: Vdev (=VL-VBias) and Vclean (=VH-VBias) are always constant. VBias is changed by
the VH value.
When the Laser beam exposes the image area onto the Drum, it reduces the negative potential
charge in the Image area of the drum to approximately -300 VDC (VL). This image area will
attract the negatively charged toner from the Developer Roll, creating a developed image for
that particular color.
The developed image on the Photoreceptor Drum rotates down to the IBT. The developed
image will then transfer from the Drum to the IBT at the First Bias Transfer Roll (1st BTR). If
there is more than one color in the copy job, these colors will follow the same development and
transfer process as just explained, with the different color layers accumulating on top of each Development Point
other onto the IBT. When all colors have been transferred to the IBT, then the final image will be
transferred to the paper in one pass. This is done at the Second Bias Transfer Roll (2nd BTR)
which cams up to the IBT, with the copy material passing through this nip. Developer Roll
The developer is delivered from the four Toner Cartridges to the Developer Housings by a sys-
tem of augers. These augers deliver the different toner colors to a Toner Dispenser which fun- Developer Housing
nels the toner into the appropriate Developer Housings. (See Toner Supply.) Assemblies (4)
Figure 1 Developer Rotor Assembly

Development 10-114 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Developer Rotary Position • 53 steps before the Developer Housing reaches the Development Point, the Devel-
The Developer Rotary Assembly has a “home position” that it always returns to at the start of oper Clutch is deenergized and the Main Motor drives the Developer Roll in the
any print job. The home position for the Rotary Assembly places the development point with Developer Housing.
the Photoreceptor Drum between the Black and Cyan Developer Housing Assemblies. (Black 4. Rotary Stepper Motor electronically locks the Developer Housing at the Development
is 45° before the development point and Cyan is 45° past the development point). This allows Point. The latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum is then developed.
the Machine Run Control to have a consistent reference point to move the correct color into a • If any color is not used in the image, the ROS does not write to the Photoreceptor
development point for each image pass on the Photoreceptor Drum. A flag mounted on the out- Drum and no Development Bias is applied to the Developer Roll in the Developer
side of the Rotary Assembly end frame is detected by the Rotary Home Position Sensor. Housing for that particular color.
5. When the Yellow development is completed, the Development Clutch is energized and the
The Rotary Assembly rotates only in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front of the
Rotary Motor is electronically released.
machine. The Rotary Assembly moves a color Developer Housing Assembly into the develop-
6. The Rotary Motor rotates the Developer Rotary Assembly clockwise 90° to the Magenta
ment point with the clockwise rotating Photoreceptor Drum. When in the development point,
Developer Housing. Steps 3 - 5 is implemented for Magenta, Cyan and Black colors.
the Developer Roll begins to rotate counter clockwise and receives the bias charge. This bias
charge causes the toner leave the rotating Developer Roll, developing the latent image on the 7. When Black Developing is completed, the Developer Rotary Assembly resets to Home
Photoreceptor Drum. The carrier beads are mostly held onto by the magnetic polarity of the Position.
Developer Roll.
One color at a time is transferred to the Photoreceptor Drum and then to the IBT before the The steps for the Rotary Developer Assembly for B/W Copying are as follows:
next color is used to develop the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum. The order that the
color moves into the development point with the Photoreceptor Drum is: 1. When the Copy process is started, the Developer Rotary Assembly rotates and resets to
Home Position. (Home Position = Development Point between Black and Cyan Developer
1. Yellow (Y) Housings.)
2. Magenta (M) 2. The Rotary Motor is switched off and the electric lock of the Developer Rotor is released.
3. Cyan (C) 3. Developer Rotary Assembly rotates clockwise 45° (300 steps) to bring the Black Devel-
4. Black (K) oper Housing to the Development Point.
Black will always be the last color to be transferred to the Photoreceptor Drum (and also laid • 99 steps before the Developer Housing reaches the Development Point, the Devel-
onto the IBT) for a copy job. This order is required so that Black will be the first layer placed opment Bias is energized.
onto the final copy material when transferred from the IBT to the copy material. • 53 steps before the Developer Housing reaches the Development Point, the Devel-
oper Clutch is deenergized and the Main Motor drives the MAG Roll in the Developer
When a certain color is not used for a color copying job, the Developer Housing for that color is Housing.
still moved into the development point with the Photoreceptor Drum. No development occurs 4. When the Black Developer Housing reaches the Development Point, the Rotary Latch
because the Laser does not mark a latent image on the Drum and no charge is applied to the (self-holding) Solenoid is energized to lock the Rotary Assembly in place and the latent
Developer Roll in the Developer Housing. The exception to this Rotary Assembly rotation image on the Photoreceptor Drum is developed.
sequences is for black only copies. For this type of job, The Rotary Assembly does not stop at 5. When the Black development is completed, the Rotary Latch (self-holding) Solenoid is
any of the other colors (Y, M, C). See Table 1 for the Developer Rotary sequences and refer to energized to unlock the Rotary Assembly.
Developer Bias and Power Supply for more information on the charging the Development Roll.
6. The Developer Rotary Assembly resets to Home Position.
The steps for the Rotary Developer Assembly for Color Copying are as follows:
1. When the Copy process is started, the Developer Rotary Assembly rotates and resets to
Home Position. (Home Position = Development Point between Black and Cyan Developer
Housings.)
2. The Rotary Motor is switched off and the electric lock of the Rotary Developer Assembly
is released.
3. Developer Rotary Assembly rotates clockwise 135° (900 steps) to bring the Yellow Devel-
oper Housing to the Development Point.
• 99 steps before the Developer Housing reaches the Development Point, the Devel-
opment Bias is energized.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-115 Development
NOTE: * Rotary Sequence Key for the previous Table:
• “ → “ represents the Developer Rotary rotating to the next color Developer Housing
Assembly
• “ / “ represents the repeated development by one color, with the Developer Housing
Assembly remaining stationary
Developer Housing Assembly

Each Developer Housing Assembly is made up of the following components:
• Toner Entrance Port - accepts replenishment developer from the Rotary Dispenser and
Toner Cartridge.
• Admix Auger - distributes the developer from the Toner Entrance Port to the full length of
the Developer Housing Assembly.
• Supply Auger - distributes the developer to the Developer Roll and remixes the recycled
carrier beads from the Photoreceptor Drum with new developer.
• Developer Roll - collects the developer within the assembly by internal magnets and
transfers it to the Photoreceptor Drum for developing the latent image.
• Trim Bar - scrapes of excess developer from the Developer Roll, leaving a metered
amount of developer on the Developer Roll.
• Trickle Shutter - a small gate that opens to allow waste carrier beads to be dispensed
into the Trickle Auger, which empties into the Waste Developer Bottle.
Each Developer Housing Assembly has a unique registration pin to prevent it from being
placed in the wrong color location.
Each Developer Housing Assembly holds approximately 420 grams of developer. Two augers
Figure 2 Developer Rotor Home Positioning Components
mix the toner and carrier which make up the developer, This helps evenly distribute the devel-
oper throughout the length of the assembly. The augers also transport the old developer to the
The user has the option of selecting the type of copying/printing required. These user selected
discharge gate as part of the “trickle” development system.
parameters include: B/W and color copying, single or multiple copies, duplex or simplex, differ-
ent paper sizes, and LEF or SEF. These variables can impact the rotation sequence for the
A new type of developer is used for this machine. The color toners are smaller 6.5 micron diam-
Developer Rotary.
eter courser cut particles. The courser cut allows more pigment to be carried, compensating for
their smaller size. The black toner particles are 8.5 microns in diameter. The average carrier
Table 3 represents the development sequence for the Developer Assemblies for different types
bead size for all toners is 35 microns.
of print jobs.
The Developer Roll is hollow Aluminum with five magnet poles inside. The magnet polarity is
Table 1 Developer Assembly sequence
designed to draw the metal carrier beads, covered with toner, onto the Developer Roll and hold
Type of Print/Copy Job Rotary Sequence for laying colors * the beads on this roll as it passes the development point. The magnetic draw on the beads is
Black only copy, single sheet Home→ Black→ Home minimized after passing the development point, allowing the used beads to drop off the Devel-
(1 image on IBT) oper Roll into the Developer Housing Assembly.
Black only copies, multiple sheets Home→ Black / Black → Home
A Trim Bar in the Developer Housing Assembly scrapes off the excess developer and is set for
(2 images on IBT)
a trim gap of 0.7 mm for all colors. There is a gap of 0.5 mm in the Photoreceptor Drum to
Any or all Colors, single sheet Home→ Yellow→ Magenta→ Cyan→ Black→ Home Developer Roll spacing (DRS). This is factory set and will be field adjustable, if required.
(1 image on IBT)
Any or all Colors, multi-sheet Home→ Yellow / Yellow→ Magenta / Magenta→ The Developer Roll rotates at 1.75 times the speed of the Photoreceptor Drum. In addition, the
81/2x11 LEF or smaller Cyan / Cyan→ Black / Black→ Home Developer Roll rotates counter clockwise while the Photoreceptor Drum rotates clockwise.
(2 images on IBT)

manuals4you.com
Developer Bias and Power Supply Toner Supply
The Developer Bias High Voltage Power Supply (PSHV-L1) provides a DC voltage with an AC The developer composition (toner and carrier beads) and how the carrier beads are reused in
signal superimposed on it. This composite voltage is provided to the developer before it is pre- this machine is different from other color machines. The developer that is supplied in the Toner
sented to the Photoreceptor Drum to form the image. These voltages are derived from inter- Cartridges consist of both toner and carrier beads mixed together. As the toner is used to
locked +24 VDC provided by the IOT Drive PWBA. The power supply’s DC output level is develop the electrostatic image, the carrier beads are recycled back into the developer to be
typically in the range of -510 VDC to -560 VDC, but can be set over the range of -205 VDC and remix with new toner and carrier beads. New developer is added to the system as determined
-800 VDC. The AC component is 1.0 KV peak-to-peak with a frequency of 9 kHz. As shown in by Process Controls using ADC (Automatic Density Control) readings. As new developer is
Figure 4, signals from the IOT Drive PWBA control the voltage of the DC component, the volt- being added to the toner supply system and as the carrier beads are recycled, excess waste
age of the AC component and the frequency of the AC component. Figure 3 shows the location carrier beads can accumulate which needs to be siphoned off. The excess waste carrier beads
of the Developer Bias High Voltage Power Supply (PSHV-L1). are disposed of to the Waste Carrier Bottle. This Trickle System for developer supply (referred
to here as toner supply) is unique to this color machine.
Because the Develop Rotor has four Developer Assemblies that are not stationary, the system
suppling the developer to the Developer Assemblies is complex.
The four colors of developer are stored in individual Toner Cartridges. For each of the four col-
ors, the developer is moved from the Toner Cartridges to the Toner Cartridge Housing, through
the Conveyor Auger, to the Rotary Dispenser, out through the Rotary Auger and into the Devel-
oper Housing Assembly.
The following will explain this process in detail, starting with the Toner Cartridge Unit.
Toner Cartridge Unit

The Toner Cartridge Unit contains 4 Toner Cartridges and their motors. This unit can be
removed from the machine as one complete assembly. This Toner Cartridge Unit contains the
following components: (Refer to Figure 4.)
• 4 Toner Cartridges (one each for yellow, magenta, cyan and black)
• 4 Cartridge Motors
Figure 3 Developer Bias Block Diagram • 4 Toner Dispenser Motors
• 4 Toner Cartridge Housings
As the AC component of the Developer Bias swings through its high negative values, toner is
driven from the Developer Roll to the image areas on the Photoreceptor. As the Bias swings • 3 Conveyor Augers (Yellow does not use this auger)
lower negative, excess toner is retrieved from the Photoreceptor. • 4 Toner Sensors
• Associated drive gears
A wire carries the Developer Bias voltage from the Developer Bias PWBA to a Bias Plate at the
front of the Developer Rotary Assembly. The center shaft of the Developer Roll makes direct
contact with the Bias Plate when the Developer Housing Assembly is in the development point.
This direct contact transfers the bias charge to the Developer Roll.
Developer Clutch
The Developer Clutch is a reversal-type clutch. When the clutch is de-energized, the Main
Motor through a gear meshing drives both the magnetic Developer Roll and the internal augers
in the Developer Housing. The internal augers mix the toner and carrier beads while the mag-
netic Developer Roll moves the developer (toner plus carrier) to the Photoreceptor Drum for
developing the latent image.
The drive from the Developer Clutch to the Developer Roll and augers occurs only when two
conditions are met: (1) the roll is in the development point, and (2) there is a latent electrostatic
image on the Photoreceptor Drum to be developed.

Table 2 Developer Mixture in Toner Cartridges
Y Developer M/K/C Developer
Toner by weight 284 g 284 g
Carrier Beads by 37.9 g 66.3 g
weight
Total Developer in new 321.9 g 350.3 g
Toner Cartridge
The Cartridge Motors is powered by 24 VDC derived from Interlocked +24 VDC and controlled
Toner Cartridge Housings (4) by enable signals from the IOT Drive PWBA. When the Low Toner Sensor in the Toner Car-
(Magenta) tridge Housing is activated, the Cartridge Motor runs for:
Dispense Motors (4) • 10 second intervals when the machine is actively making prints.
C (Cyan)
• 20 second intervals when the Low Toner Sensor senses low toner levels and when
M machine power is on and the front Door Interlock is closed.
Y Toner Cartridge Housing
K The Toner Cartridge Housing contains:
• Agitator
• Auger
• Paddle
• Low Toner Sensor (Piezo type, located outside the Toner Cartridge Housing unit)
The agitator and paddle help prevent the developer from becoming compacted. The auger
moves the developer to the outlet where the developer falls into the conveyor. These compo-
nents are driven by a Toner Dispense Motor, one motor for each of the four colors. This motor
also drives a Conveyor Auger for transporting the developer out of the Toner Cartridge Hous-
ing.
Cartridge Motors (4)

(Yellow)
Figure 4 Toner Cartridge Assembly (Back View)
Toner Cartridge
Each Toner Cartridge has an Agitator driven by a unique Cartridge Motor. The Agitator serves
two functions; it prevents the developer from becoming compacted, and it moves the developer
to the outlet port where it falls through to the Toner Cartridge Housing. This Cartridge port
shutter closes when the Toner Cartridge is rotated for removal from the machine. Each Toner
Cartridge holds a mixture of toner and carrier beads. Table 2 show the composition by weight
for each developer that are within the new Toner Cartridges.

manuals4you.com
The Conveyor Augers are driven by the Dispense Motors. The Dispense Motors are energized
CARTRIDGE AGITATOR when the IOT CPU PWBA senses low reflective readings from the ADC Sensor for the patch
MOTOR on the IBT.
DISPENSE
MOTOR
TONER
CARTRIDGE
LOW
TONER CONVEYOR
SENSOR AUGER
CARTRIDGE
HOUSING
(LOWER)
Figure 5 Toner Cartridge and Cartridge Housing
A piezo electric Low Toner Sensor located under the shutter opening monitors the level of toner
in the Toner Cartridge Housing.
The IOT CPU PWBA samples the Low Toner Sensor status every 0.1 second while the
machine is making and moving the Developer out of the Toner Cartridge Housing into the con-
veyor. When a low developer level is detected 5 times in succession, the Toner Cartridge Motor
is energized for 10 seconds. This moves additional developer from the Toner Cartridge to the
Toner Cartridge Housing. Figure 6 Developer Distribution Path
When a low developer level is detected 20 times in succession or for longer than 25 seconds, a Rotary Dispenser
“low toner” message is displayed. If the Toner Cartridge is replaced, the “low toner” message is
The Rotary Dispenser accepts the four different developers and deposits them into their appro-
removed as soon as a low toner level is no longer detected by the sensor 10 times in succes-
priate Developer Housing Assembly within the Developer Rotary. Figure 7 shows the Rotary
sion.
Assembly for one color system.
If 100 seconds of “low toner” is sensed while the Toner Dispense Motor is running, then the
As toner is deposited into the Rotary Dispenser by the Conveyor Auger, it is transported out to
controls will not allow another copy job to be stated. At the end of the current job, a “do not
the Developer Housing Assembly by a Rotary Auger.
copy” message is displayed and the copier will not start another job.
The Rotary Augers have a Axel shaft that goes to the back side of the Developer Housing
Conveyer Auger
Assembly. This shaft has a gear that is driven whenever the Developer Clutch is energized and
The 4 toner Cartridge Housings are different distances from the Rotary Dispenser. For that is powered by the Main Drive. The Rotary Auger rotates at 345 rpm to move the toner quickly
reason, there are different lengths of Conveyor Augers and one Cartridge Housing (Y) does not from the Rotary Dispenser to the Developer Housing Assembly.
use a Conveyor Auger. Refer to Figure 6.

The carrier beads are brought back into the Developer Housing and remixed with the existing
developer. New developer is added to the Developer Housing (see Toner Supply) at a rate
DEVELOPER ROTARY determined by readings taken from the ADC patch on the Photoreceptor Drum.
ASSEMBLY
DEVELOPER INLET Excess waste carrier beads for each Developer Housing are trickled out automatically through
a shutter gate into a center Waste Auger when the Developer Housing is at 90° above the
development point.
When performing black only copying, the black Developer Housing needs to rotate up to the
90° location to remove the depleted waste carrier beads into the center Waste Auger. This is
done when:
• The copy job is completed

• The Toner Dispense Motor runs continuously for 17 seconds.
Waste Carrier Bottle

AXEL SHAFT
The Waste Carrier Bottle receives the waste developer from all four Developer Housings. A
magnetic sensor is used to detect a full Waste Carrier Bottle. The sensor is monitored once
every second. When the waste carrier full status is detected by the sensor five times in succes-
sion, then a “caution” notice (09-423) for the status of this bottle is sent to the User Interface
ROTARY screen.
AUGER
The machine monitors both the sensor status and the rotating time of the Toner Dispense
Motor from this caution status. When a specific accumulated NVM value for the Toner Dis-
ROTARY
DISPENSER pense Motor is reached, then a Waste Carrier Bottle fail signal (09-379) is sent to the User
Interface.
Toner Supply Control

Toner supply is controlled by the IOT CPU PWBA, through the IOT Drive and Dispense
Figure 7 Rotary Dispenser and Developer Housing Assembly (Example) PWBAs. The Low Toner Sensor output is routed to an input port on the IOT Drive PWBA,
where it can be read by the CPU on the IOT CPU PWBA. Likewise, the CPU controls a port
Trickle System output from the IOT Drive PWBA for both the Cartridge and Dispense Motor control lines.
This machine uses a “Trickle System” for replenishing the developer. This system increases the These control lines enable Dispense PWBA circuitry which converts Interlock +24 VDC to 24
usable life of the Developer Assemblies. It includes the following: VAC, 60 Hz power for the motors. Note that in Figure 9, only the black control and status lines
are shown. The yellow, magenta and cyan circuitry is exactly the same.
• New developer (toner plus carrier beads) is supplied to the Developer Housings by the
Toner Supply system.
• Used carrier beads from the Developer Roll are remixed back in with the new developer at
the Developer Housing.
• Any excess waste carrier beads that accumulates in the Developer Housing is discharged
into a central Waste Auger and transported to the Waste Carrier Bottle. This Waste Auger
and Waste Carrier Bottle accepts the excess developer from all four colors.
This system starts with the Toner Cartridges which carry a mixture of both toner and carrier
beads. The different colors of developer are transported to the appropriate Developer Housing
within the Developer Rotary Assembly. When the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum is
developed, the toner is electrostatically attracted to the drum and the metal carrier beads
remain on the magnetic Developer Roll.

manuals4you.com
Figure 8 Toner Supply Control Simplified Block Diagram (Black)
ADC (Automatic Density Control)

The ADC Sensor is a Polarized Color Densitometer (PcDM) consisting of a Light Emitting TR0 SENSOR
Diode (LED), a phototransistor and a polarizing filter. The ADC Sensor is located in the IBT
Assembly. This sensor reads the reflected light from a toner patch placed on the IBT Belt. This
reflective reading is used by Process Controls to determine the density level of the image
which will then determine the required running times for toner dispensing. ADC SENSOR
The current through the phototransistor is proportional to the amount of light reflected from the
developed patch. The current is converted to a voltage level on the ADC Sensor PWB and that
voltage signal is sent as two analog signals through IOT Drive PWB to the IOT CPU PWBA
where it is used for process control functionality. The ADC Sensor and ADC Sensor PWB are
part of the ADC Sensor Assembly. Refer to Figure 10 for a block diagram of the ADC Sensor
control.
STEERING IBT BELT

ROLL
(INSIDE
BELT) DRIVE ROLL (INSIDE
BELT)
Figure 9 IBT and Selected Subassemblies Locations
ADC patches are made and read:

• During Max Setups (in Diagnostics) The dynamic range of the ADC Sensor is from 0% to about 80% area coverage. The ADC
• During Mini Setups patches are made at area coverage of 60% (for black toner) or 65% (for yellow, magenta and
• During run mode after every 26th copy for A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 inch copies cyan toner). In addition, for a given coverage, the black patch reflects less light than the
remaining colors. These two factors result in differences in sensor outputs: Vpatch, and affects
• During run mode after every 13th copy for A3 or 11 x 17 inch copies
the ratio Vpatch / Vclean. Later circuitry compensates for these differences.
The readings are used by Process Controls to determine the developer dispensing run time.
Refer to Process Controls for more information on this function. The physical positioning of the ADC Sensor is critical.
• The distance between the ADC Sensor and the IBT Belt must be 8mm, ± 0.5 mm
• The sensor angle with the IBT Belt must be less than ± 2° in the process direction and
less than ±1° across the belt.
Figure 10 ADC Sensor Simplified Block Diagram
Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) After each image is developed on the Photoreceptor Drum, the Drum rotates clockwise to
make contact with the IBT Belt, which is rotating counter clockwise. This contact occurs at the
Toner Transfer Overview First Bias Transfer Roll (1st BTR) position on the Belt. The 1st BTR and Photoreceptor Drum
Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) is new technology for this type of machine. This technology create a nip, through which the IBT Belt passes. The 1st BTR roll always remains in contact
permits increased color print speed and higher image quality. Using an IBT results in two with the back side of the IBT Belt, and the IBT Belt is always in contact with the Photoreceptor
image transfer points. Drum. (The 1st BTR Roll is cammed away from the Photoreceptor Drum by the IBT lever on
the IBT Drawer. This is done when sliding this drawer open or closed.)
1. The first image transfer point is from the Photoreceptor Drum to the IBT (the colors trans-
fer one at a time from the Drum to the IBT.) The 1st BTR inside the IBT Assembly is charged to +32 microamps at +1200 VDC by the 1st
2. The second image transfer is the complete image for the IBT to the copy material. (All BTR HVPS. This causes the negatively charged toner on the PR Drum to be attracted to the
color layer transfer in one pass.) surface of the IBT Belt at this 1st BTR point. The charge to the 1st BTR remains on from the
When making color images, one color at a time is developed on the Photoreceptor Drum and start to the end of a job.
then transferred to the IBT before the next color is used to develop the latent image on the Pho-
toreceptor Drum. The IBT Belt accumulates all four separate color images from the Photore- When all four color image components have been transferred to the IBT, this image is trans-
ceptor (PR) Drum. During a four color image copy job, the IBT Belt cycles four times to accept ferred to the final copy material using one pass. This second image transfer takes place where
the IBT Belt contacts the Second Bias Transfer Roll (2nd BTR).
the individual colors from the Photoreceptor Drum.
The 2nd BTR is part of a separate assembly, below the IBT Assembly. This 2nd BTR Assembly
Because the toner transfer process occurs in two steps (PR Drum to IBT Belt, then IBT Belt to
includes:
copy material), the image and the layers of toner on the IBT are reversed from what the fin-
ished copy is.
• Inlet Plate
• Pre IBT Sensor (for the paper path)

Development, Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) 10-122 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
• Cleaning Blade Assembly IBT Assembly
• Second BTR Roll
CAUTION
• Camshaft Assembly and Cam Sensor
The IBT Belt is fragile. It can be damaged by handling with bare hands or having items (i.e.
• Detack (DTS) Comb screws, tools or even excess dust/dirt) dropped on it.
• Lubricating Brush The IBT Assembly has its own tray with slide tracks which allow this assembly to be pulled out
• Pre Fuser Sensor (for the paper path) for access and servicing. Figure 2 shows some of the components in the IBT Assembly.
• Exit Chute Detailed descriptions of the components follow.
IBT Belt
The 2nd BTR Roll cams up to make contact with the IBT Belt. The Main Motor drives both the The IBT uses a carbon-impregnated polyamid belt that carries the image toner from the Photo-
2nd BTR Roll and the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch and Shaft. The Shaft with cams rotates, raising receptor (PR) Drum to the paper. This belt holds a residual charge from the First Bias Transfer
and lowering the 2nd BTR Roll when energized by the IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs. A Flag on Roll (BTR), which attracts the toner particles and holds them until that part of the belt reaches
the Shaft passes through a 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor. The status of the Sensor the nip between the Second BTR and the Back Up Roll. At that point, the voltage from the Back
is as follows: Up Roll causes the toner particles to be expelled from the Belt to the blank copy material. The
Belt has a circumference of 527.91 mm, which is twice the circumference of the PR Drum. At a
• Sensor blocked - 2nd BTR Roll is down (retracted from the IBT) process speed of 220 mm/sec., the belt takes 2.399 sec. to complete one complete revolution.
• Sensor transmits - 2nd BTR Roll is up (contacting the IBT) The belt has two TR0 strips, separated by one-half the belt circumference and located on the
back edge of the belt. As shown in Figure 2, there are eight rolls inside the belt:
• Steering Roll keeps the IBT on track and centered on the rolls.
The 2nd BTR HVPS (PSHV-L3) is located in the back of the machine and supplies a charge of
approximately -2.2 kVDC to the Contract Roll inside the IBT Assembly (NOT the 2nd BTR • Tension Roll keeps the belt taut.
Roll). The Contact Roll transfers this charge to the Back Up Roll by contact. The Back Up Roll • First Idler Roll is passive and directs the belt towards the Photoreceptor Drum. It is
inside the IBT Assembly remains in contact with the inside of IBT Belt at all times. It is this Back located between the Tension Roll and the First BTR Roll.
Up Roll that repels the toner image off the IBT Belt onto the copy material. The 2nd BTR cams • First BTR Roll holds the charge which attracts the toner from the Photoreceptor Drum to
up to the IBT Belt to create a nip with the IBT Belt and the Back Up Roll behind the Belt. The the belt
copy material has the image transferred to it at this 2nd BTR and IBT nip. The copy material • Drive Roll is driven by the PR Drum Motor, which causes the IBT Belt to turn. It also
holds the toner by a residual static charge. helps keep the belt on track.
• Contact Roll receives the charge from the 2nd BTR HVPS and transfers this charge to
A Detack Comb (DTS) is located on the 2nd BTR Assembly. The purpose of this Detack Comb
the Back Up Roll.
is to neutralize the copy material and assure the copy material does not tack to the IBT Belt. A
DTS HVPS within the Registration Roll Assembly provides a negative charge to the Detack • Back Up Roll provides a charge for toner transfer from the IBT Belt to the copy material.
Comb. It also creates a nip with the Second BTR Roll, through which both the IBT Belt and the
copy material passes through.
Most of the machine timing and image quality controls are generated from readings taken of • Second Idler Roll is passive and positions the belt between the Steering Roll and the
the IBT. The belt has two TR0 marks which pass under a TR0 sensor to provide a timing refer- Backup Roll/Second BTR nip.
ence pulse. Also, toner patches are laid down onto the PR Drum, are passed to the IBT Belt,
then measured for density by the ADC (Automatic Density Control) Sensor. This allows the
machine to maintain a consistent toner level for the same input color.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-123 Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT), IBT Assembly
Figure 1 IBT Belt Rolls and Assemblies
Figure 2 HVPS for IBT Assembly
Drive Roll
The Drive Roll is driven by the Drum Motor. As such, Its speed changes to conform to nominal
process speeds of as the 220 mm/sec., 130 mm/sec. and 60 mm/sec. depending upon to the
copy material in use.
Tension Roll
The Tension Roll is constantly being forced upward, against the IBT Belt, by an arm-and-spring
arrangement. This is done to keep the belt tight.
IBT Cleaning Assemblies

After the toner has been passed from the IBT Belt to the blank copy media, the residual toner is
removed from the belt by a plastic blade in the IBT Cleaner Assembly. This blade is retracted
by the Main Motor when the IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs engage the Cleaner Retract Clutch.
For color images, the blade touches the belt only one belt rotation in four. The toner falls into
the IBT Waste Toner Auger, part of the Waste Toner Auger Junction. (See Cleaning Systems.)

IBT Assembly 10-124 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
TR0 Sensor
As shown in Figure 10 and Figure 3, the TR0 Sensor is mounted on the back left side of the
IBT Frame Assembly. This sensor monitors two TR0 patches on the IBT to monitor cycle
speed. As shown in Figure 4, the sensor output goes to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs.
There, it forms the basis for synchronizing all paper transport activities.
Figure 3 TR0 Circuit Block Diagram
IBT/Media Transport Sensors

There are two sensors to detect IBT paper jams.
• The Pre-IBT Sensor monitors for paper jams between the Registration Roll and the 2nd
BTR. Located on the 2nd BTR Inlet Chute. Figure 4 IBT/Media Transport Sensor Locations
• The Pre-Fuser Sensor detects the print as it reaches the Vacuum Transport. An abnormal
indication is that the leading edge of the print is not detected by this sensor within approx-
imately 400 msec (at 220 mm/sec. process speed) after the 2nd IBT Sensor detects the
same edge. Located in the 2nd BTR Exit Chute.
Figure 5 Partial electrical schematic for IBT Sensors
In addition to the paper jam sensors for the IBT, there is the ADC (Automatic Density Control)
Sensor and the TR0 Sensor. Refer to these sections for more information on these two sen-
sors.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-125 IBT Assembly
Motors Cleaning Systems
Xerographics Motors Residual toner is removed from the Photoreceptor Drum by using a Preclean Corotron, a
Table 1 lists the motors associated with the Xerographic function. Cleaning Blade and a Brush. The IBT uses a camming Cleaning Blade. A Waste Toner Auger
system is used to transport the waste toner to a Waste Toner Bottle.
Table 1 Xerographics Drive Motors
In addition, there is a Developer Waste Bottle which accumulates overflow developer from the
Motor Function Activated By Deactivated By Developer Assemblies. This is a part of the Trickle System. Refer to that section for more infor-
Cartridge Motors (4) Each motor drives a Low Toner Sensor is Ten seconds after mation on that function.
Toner Cartridge Agita- activated. being activated
tor The carrier beads that come back off each Developer Roll during the development process are
recycled into the corresponding Developer Housing Assembly and are remixed with the other
Toner Dispense Drives the following in Low Density ADC Acceptable ADC
developer for reuse.
Motors (4) the Toner Cartridge patches on IBT Belt, patches on IBT Belt.
Housing: Mini Set-up or normal
• Cartridge Agitator toner supply Photoreceptor Cleaning
• Paddle The components of the cleaning system for the Photoreceptor Drum includes: (See Figure 1.)
• Cartridge Auger
• Bead Pickup Roll (BPO)
• Conveyor Auger
• Preclean Corotron (PCC)
Main Motor Drives the following Start of Job End of Job
• Photoreceptor Clean Brush
within the Developer
system: • Flicker Bar
• Trickle Auger • Blade
• IBT Cleaner • Auger
Retract • Duct
• IBT Cleaner • Erase Lamp (Located in the machine, not mounted on Photoreceptor Drum)
Auger (Front) After the Drum has transferred the image to the IBT, the Drum turns past a Preclean Corotron.
• IBT 2nd BTR This single wire Corotron neutralizes any charge on the Drum so that the Clean Brush and
• IBT 2nd BTR scraper Blade can clean the Drum more easily. The rotating Brush cleans off the Drum and
Retract carries toner residue away that the Blade scrapes off. A Flicker Bar cleans the toner particles
• Waste Toner off the Brush and an auger moves this waste toner out of the Xerography module to the Waste
Auger Toner Auger unit for transport to the Waste Toner Bottle.
• Bottle Entrance
Auger
• Bottle Inner Auger
• IBT Cleaner
Auger Rear
• Drum Cleaner
Auger Rear
• IBT Oil Roll
Retract
Rotary Motor Drives the following:
• Developer Rotary
Assembly
Drum Motor Drives the following: Start of Job End of Job
• Photoreceptor
Drum
• IBT

Motors, Cleaning Systems 10-126 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Cleaner Assembly
After the Photoreceptor Drum rotates past the PCC, the residual toner is brushed and
PHOTORECEPTOR scrapped off the Drum surface by the Photoreceptor Cleaning Brush and a plastic Cleaning
CLEANING BRUSH CLEANING Blade. The Cleaning Brush picks up the loose toner from the Drum and the Clean Blade. This
BLADE brush is 19mm in diameter. It is driven by the Main Motor and rotates counterclockwise at
approximately 249 RPM. It forms a nip measurement with the Photoreceptor Drum of 6 to 9
PHOTORECEPTOR mm. After the brush contacts the drum, it rotates past the Flicker Plate, which dislodges the
DRUM toner from the Brush. This toner residue falls onto the Drum Auger, part of the Waste Toner
Auger Junction.
After contacting the brush, drum is cleaned by a plastic blade. The Cleaning Blade is 22 mm
thick polyrethane and makes a 20 to 24° angle with the Photoreceptor surface. The blade is
always against the drum and does not retract. This blade angle was selected to provide effec-
tive cleaning without filming.
AUGER BPO ROLL Erase Lamp

The Erase Lamp is mounted in the machine and is not a part of the Photoreceptor Drum CRU.
The Lamp is an LED array and is used to irradiate the Drum, which erases the remaining elec-
trical charge.
Photoreceptor Drum Cleaning Electrical Control

All of the mechanisms to clean the Photoreceptor Drum are either passive or are constantly
PRECLEAN COROTRON driven by the Main Motor. This motor is activated by the IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs whenever
a job is started.
IBT Cleaning
After the IBT has transferred the image to the copy material, it rotates counter clockwise past a
IBT Clean Blade. Refer to the IBT Cleaning Assemblies section for more information.
Waste Toner System

This machine uses a cleaning system to dispose of waste toner from both the Photoreceptor
Figure 1 Photoreceptor Cleaning Components and Location Drum and the IBT. The residue cleaned from both of these components is transported by one
common system and disposed of into one common waste bottle.
Bead Pick Off Roll (BPO)
The first cleaning function on the Photoreceptor Drum takes place after the latent image has The Waste Toner System consist of the following:
been developed with toner and before the image transfers to the IBT. A metal Bead Pick Off
Roll is used to pick off the toner agglomerates. This is an 8 mm diameter Stainless Steel roll • Waste Toner Bottle with internal Coil Auger
the rotates counter clockwise at 44 rpm, against the direction of the Photoreceptor Drum. This • Waste Bottle Sensor (photo sensor)
roll is driven by the Main Motor during the print job. The drum-to-roll space is 0.5 mm ± 0.1 mm. • Waste Bottle Full Sensor (photo sensor)
• Waster Toner Auger Junction Assembly components -
Preclean Corotron
– Jointed Slanting Auger
After the Drum has transferred the image to the IBT, the Drum turns past a Preclean Corotron.
– Jointed auger from the Photoreceptor
The Preclean Corotron (PCC) is a single wire corotron which neutralizes any charge on the
Photoreceptor prior to the cleaning zone so that the Photoreceptor can be more easily cleaned – Jointed auger from the IBT
of residual toner. – Bottle Auger
– Drive gears and timing belt
Preclean Corotron power comes from the CC/PCC-HVPS (HVPS-L2 - see Figure 3) that sup- – Auger Sensor (photo sensor)
plies the Charge Corotron. Energy to the PCC is supplied as a constant current type DC bias.
• Photoreceptor Drum cleaning components -
Machine Run Control regulates the DC current based on the humidity level. In actual operation,
the DC current is controlled within the average operation at -300 microamps constant currant. – Photoreceptor Cleaning Brush

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-127 Cleaning Systems
– Photoreceptor Scraping Blade Figure 3 shows part of the Waste Toner Auger Junction Assembly which is located in the back
– Flicker Bar of the machine. This system uses separate jointed augers to acquire waste toner from the Pho-
– Bead Pick-off Roll (BPO) toreceptor Drum and the IBT. These augers transport the waste toner the Slanting Auger,
which transports the toner to the Bottle Auger. The Bottle Auger transports the waste toner into
– Pre-Clean Corotron
Waste Toner Bottle.
– Photoreceptor Waste Auger
• IBT cleaning components - The Waste Toner Bottle is a CRU with the capacity to hold 2600cc of toner residue with full vol-
– IBT Scraping Blade (cammed) ume at 80% (expected bottle life to full at 40Kpv). As shown in Figure 1, two augers are used to
– IBT Waste Auger fill the bottle:
– Film Blade (thin Mylar seal)

• Bottle Auger - This feeds the waste toner into the bottle and is a part of the Auger Junction
Assembly.
• Coil Auger - This is inside the bottle and is part of it. It helps distribute and pack the waste
The Toner Recovery Auger rotation is monitored by an Auger Sensor. A semi-circle flag
toner within the bottle.
attached to the end of the Auger rotates through the Sensor as the Auger rotates. The Sensor
The Main Motor drives the jointed augers, the Slanting Auger the Bottle Auger and the Coil
is sampled 10 times (0.1 sec. cycle) every 2 seconds while the Drum Motor rotates. An Auger
Auger. This motor is energized at the start of a copying or printing job.
“caution” (09-424) is indicated at the User Interface when the Sensor does not detect move-
ment (high/low status of rotating flag) 4 times continuously.
The Waste Toner Sensor is a photoelectric sensor that checks for the presence of the Waste
Toner Bottle. This is done when the machine is powered on and the Front Interlock Switch is
An Auger Broken “fail” status (09-358) is indicated when the number of copies reaches a spec-
ified value after the “caution” status is activated and remains. closed. A No Waste Bottle failure (09-374) is indicated when the sensor does not see the Bot-
tle.
The Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor is monitored 3 times a second while the Drum Motor
rotates. When the sensor detects a full status continuously for 3 seconds, then a near full “cau-
tion” (09-420) is indicated at the User Interface.
After the “caution” status, the machine counter monitors and compares to an NVM value the
following cycles to determine a Waste Bottle Full status“fail” (09-376):
• Toner Dispense Motor run time

• Number of copies
The “near full” and “full” status for the Waste Toner Bottle is reset by using the same bottle
sampling method, and the bottle is sensed empty 2 or more times per second.
Figure 2 Junction Assembly for Waste Toner Disposal

Cleaning Systems 10-128 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Air Flow
The air flow system used in this machine performs the following functions:
• Eliminates the toner and dust particles that float around inside the machine
WASTE TONER
• Discharges the ozone generated by the Corotrons
BOTTLE AUGER
• Provides machine cooling
• Provides suction for paper transport
There are a total of five fans used to vent or cool various parts of the machine. In addition to the
fans, this system consists of ducts to channel the air flow, filters to collect particle contaminants
and safety interlock switches. In general, the air is drawn into the machine from the front and it
COIL AUGER exits the back. The five fans in this machine are:
• Charge Corotron Intake Fan

• Fuser Intake Fan
• Fuser Exhaust Fan
WASTE TONER • Suction Blow
BOTTLE • IIT Fan (See Imaging)
Charge Corotron Intake Fan

The located on the inside of the front door, closest to the door hinge. It draws the room air into
the machine, directing it through a filter that is attached to the Waste Toner Bottle and into the
Charge Corotron Duct system. This Duct system for the Photoreceptor Drum draws the ozone
away from both the Charge Corotron and the Preclean Corotron. A duct is also around the Seal
Roll to extract any stray toner residue prior to the Drum transferring the developed image to the
IBT.
Fuser Intake and Exhaust Fans

Two fans remove heat generated by the three heated rollers of the Fuser Assembly. The Fuser
Intake Fan is located on the inside of the front door, furthest away from the hinge. It draws room
air into the Fuser Duct system. The Fuser Exhaust Fan is located by the top right side of the
machine, at the exit side of the Fuser Duct System. The Fuser Duct sits above the Fuser
Assembly drawing the radiant heat generated by the Fuser away from the other components
Figure 3 Waste Toner Bottle and Associated Augers within the machine.
Suction Blower
The Suction Blower is located on the bottom, right side of the back of machine. It is a 24 VDC
fan that draws the air out of the machine, taking the air from the ducts for the Photoreceptor
Drum and the Vacuum Transport. The duct before this fan contains a three part ozone and dust
filter.
Air System Electrical Control

As shown in Figure 1, the Fuser Fan is powered by unswitched +12 VDC directly from the AC
Driver PWBA. Therefore, anytime that the machine is plugged in and the machine circuit
breaker is closed, the fan is running. The FAN HI/LO speed control originates from the IOT
Drive PWBA and is routed to through the AC Driver PWBA.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-129 Cleaning Systems, Air Flow
The Suction Blower, Rotary Fan, Fuser Intake Fan and Charge Corotron Fan are all controlled
by the IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs. +12 VDC, +24 VDC and +5 VDC power originates at the
IOT Low Voltage Power Supply, but is routed through the IOT Drive PWBA. Fan power is not
interlocked. Therefore, when machine doors are open, the fans still run.
Figure 1 IOT Fans Simplified Block Diagram

Air Flow 10-130 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Process Controls The Set Up procedures are as follows:
Overview 1. Setting Target Values: Accounting to the number of Photoreceptor Drum cycles and the
The purpose of Process Controls is to maintain consistent image density and color balance. humidity as sensed by the EVN Sensor, the machine sets target values for Drum Surface
Control of the image density is more critical for color images then it is for black copies. Slight electrical potential (Vh and Vm), Development Bias for each color, ASG Bias, and density
variations in any color density (C, M, Y) can result in a significant hue shift in the final color of the ADC Patch.
image. 2. Setting Grid Voltage: The Grid voltage of the Charge Corotron is calculated so that the
Drum surface electrical potential meets the target values as established in step 1.
Process Controls has two primary monitoring and control functions: 3. Setting ROS LED Quantity: An electric potential background voltage (Vh) Patch is created
on the Photoreceptor Drum and read by the ESV Sensor in step 2. The light quantity of
• Electrostatic and ROS LED Quantity Control - The surface electrical potential of Photore-
the ROS LED is calculated so that the exposed image voltage (Vm) of that Patch meets
ceptor Drum monitored by the ESV sensor. And setting the intensity of the ROS LED so
the target values as established in step 1.
that the Electrostatic patch on the Drum is within the target value for the exposed back-
4. Correction of ASG Bias: The ASG Bias target values for each color established in step
ground charge (Vm).
one is corrected by the actual readout value of the Patch on the Drum.
• Developability Control - The supply of developer and the control of toner density and gra-
5. Setting the Target Value for the ADC Density Patch: The target electrical potential of the
dation on the IBT as monitored by the ADC Sensor.
ADC Density Patch, as read by the ADC Sensor on the IBT Assembly is done.
Electrostatic and ROS LED Quantity Control

Developability Control
The basic purpose of Electrostatic Control is to maintain the Photoreceptor Drum unexposed
This function monitors and controls the dispensing of developer in order to control the density
background voltage (Vh) and the exposed image voltage (Vm) constant over time.
of the developed image. The monitoring is done from two inputs:
This function monitors and controls the electrostatic charge level on the Photoreceptor Drum
• Automatic Density Control (ADC) - This measures the density of the developed reflective
and the level of exposure to create the latent electrostatic image. This drum charge level is
patch on the IBT by the ADC Sensor. The Gain of the ADC Sensor is adjusted during the
read by the Electrostatic Voltmeter (ESV). The drum charge is applied by the Charge Corotron,
Set Up cycle.
with the Corotron Wire suppling a constant voltage and the Corotron Grid Bias adjusting the
voltage to various levels in order to maintain a constant background voltage on the drum. • Image Count Dispensing Control (ICDC) - This provides a pixel count for an image to help
determine the demand for the various color developers. This is done during the copy
A background charge (Vh) is to be maintained by Electrostatic Control at the Photoreceptor cycle.
Drum. This is done by adjusting the Charge Corotron Grid Bias (Vg). During setups, Electro- The supply of developer to the Xerographics process is controlled by Image Coverage Dis-
static Control adjusts the Charge Corotron Grid Bias (Vg) to various levels and reads the pense Control (ICDC), and the reflective readings off the IBT Belt by the ADC Sensor. The fol-
resulting Photoreceptor voltage using the Electrostatic Voltmeter (ESV). With a Developer Bias lowing steps are performed for the Toner Supply Control:
of -500 VDC, this results in a cleaning field (Vclean) of 150 volts. This cleaning field is the
potential difference which causes toner particles to return to the Developer Roll from the back- 1. ADC Sensor set up for the Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
ground areas of the electrostatic latent image. • The ADC Sensor reads the reflective density of the clean IBT Belt (non-developed).
• This density reading is check in LUT to be in range or the high and low limit values.
The exposed image charge (Vm) is the electrostatic voltage level on the Drum image area with
• The gain of the ADC sensor is adjusted when the density readings are too high or
a 50% density. Electrostatic Control is always trying to maintain Vm by adjusting the Laser
low.
Diode power level after the Vh is set.
2. Image Coverage Dispense Control (ICDC) is implemented during the copying cycle.
During the machine Set Up Cycle, target values are established for Charge Corotron Grid volt- • When the ROS Laser exposes the Photoreceptor Drum, the number of pixels is cal-
ages and the light quantity of the ROS LED, accounting to both temperature and humidity vari- culated for each color.
ables as sensed by the Environmental Sensor (EVN). Once these target values are • These pixel counts is converted to a rotation time of the Developer Dispense Motor
established, then the following are set: for each color.
3. ADC Set Up Cycle is performed by reading the actual reflective density of the developed
• Development Bias for each color
patch on the IBT Belt. This reading is used to calculate the demand for the Developer.
• ASG Bias
• An ADC Patch is formed on the IBT in a location between the copying images. All
• Electrical potential of the ADC Density Patch colors are laid down in the same patch and each is read by the ADC Sensor.
• The densities for the ADC Patch on the Belt is read and calculated against the read-
ing in the non-developed part of the IBT (clean IBT).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-131 Process Controls
• The calculated ADC Density from the IBT is converted to a rotation time of the Refer to the following Figure 1 for an illustrative overview of how Electrostatic and Developabil-
Developer Dispense Motor for each color. ity Controls function.
Figure 1 Process Controls overview

Process Controls 10-132 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
There are several different control routines which Process Controls runs in order to maintain Table 1 Process Controls routines
consistent image density and color balance. The following Table lists the routines and shows
CONTROL ROUTINE WHEN PERFORMED WHAT IS PERFORMED
when and what is performed.
Run Mode Control Runs automatically during all The following items are con-
Table 1 Process Controls routines jobs trolled:
• Vm patch is made and
CONTROL ROUTINE WHEN PERFORMED WHAT IS PERFORMED
laser diode (LD) power is
Max Set Up Performed in Diagnostics by Any or all the following sub- adjusted about every 12
the Service Representative routines can be performed: IBT cycles and at the
• At machine install • ESV Sensor check end of every job,
• After changing the ADC • Environmental Sensor depending upon paper
Sensor, ENV Sensor, (ENV) check size.
Developer Housings or • Vh/Vm Setup • Toner dispensing is con-
developer materials • ADC Automatic Gain trolled by pixel count
• During repair or cleaning Control (AGC) Setup (ICDC) and periodic
of the xerographics ADC readings (approx.
• ADC Setup
• During any service call every 13 copies, depend-
• IOT Hi-light Setup ing upon paper size)
as a precaution measure
• Color Balance Setup • Using the same patch
• Adjust color density
readings a in previous
Mini Setup Runs automatically at the start Two subroutines run in the
reading, set TRC Cont2
of the first job after: order listed:
• Power up, if the Fuser • Vh/Vm Setup
temperature has • Two patches are made
Setup Mode
dropped below 120°C for each color and read Most of the Process Controls routines run as setup routines. There are other routines that run
• Rest (Stand-by Mode) of by the ADC to determine during Run Mode or during Standby Mode.
more than 4 hours the amount of toner to
dispense The Setup Mode will be split into two groups:
• When Fuser temp is less
than 120°C • Using the same patch
• Setup routines in Diagnostics - These are procedures that are performed by the Service
readings as in previous
Representative while running Diagnostics routines.
routine, set TRC Cont 1
Checkup Runs automatically at the start One Subroutine runs:
of the first job after: • Vh/Vm Setup • Setup routines that run automatically - These are procedures which Process Controls will
• Power up, if the Fuser run automatically and are a subgroup of Diagnostics.
temperature is above
____°C
• A paper jam Setup routines in Diagnostics
• 30 minutes of elapsed The Service Representative enters Max Set Up from the Diagnostics menu to perform the bal-
time since the last ance of the Setup routines. The Max Set Up menu includes nine (9) routines:
Checkup
• end of a job run Table 2 Max Setup Routines
Diagnostic Code Description Contents
dC945 IIT Calibration IIT and CCD Calibration, and White Refer-
ence Adjustment
dC934 ADC/AGC Setup Adjusts ADC Sensor gain to get a constant
Vclean

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-133 Process Controls
Table 2 Max Setup Routines Checkup
Diagnostic Code Description Contents
There is only one routine in the automatic Checkup routine. This routine is Vh/Vm Setup
dC933 VH/VM Setup Adjusts VG/LD/BIAS to achieve the target described previously. This runs because the electrostatics need to be checked more often than
VH, VM developability. There are three separate conditions which will cause a Checkup to run:
Changes VH/VM target to extend Develop-
ment and Photoreceptor life. 1. When power is switched on to the machine and the Fuser temperature is above 120°C, a
Changes ADC target by Environmental Sen- Checkup will run automatically. This condition occurs when the power has been off for a
sor (humidity) short time and the Fuser has not had the time to cool down. A full Mini Setup is not
Changes ASG Bias to keep V10% constant required for this condition.
dC918 IOT Highlight Adjusts Highlight legible and in/out balance 2. A Checkup will run after a paper jam has occurred.
Setup by ASG Bias
3. Whenever 30 minutes has elapsed since the last Checkup.
dC923 ProCon PG Print PCON pattern (w/o LUT) and shows
Run Mode
ADC patch values.
dC922 TRC CONT Makes a TRC LUT based on 2 ADC patches There are 3 routines which run while copies are being made. Process Controls uses these rou-
on the IBT Belt. If ADC is >D60% (0.3) Tone tines to monitor and adjust the electrostatics and developability parameters in order to maintain
Up/Tone Down is required (w/o paper) copy quality. These routines are: LD CONT, Toner Dispense Control and TRC Control.
dC924 TRC Adjust Adjusts density by TRC LUT offset manually
dC939 TRC Check PG Print PCON pattern with LUT for TRC adjust- Standby Mode
ment
When the machine is resting in Standby, there are no setup routines running and none of the
dC919 Color Balance Adjusts a center value of user color balance
electrostatic or developability parameters need to be controlled. The only function Process
mode (for Digital Copier only)
Controls is doing during Standby is keeping track of elapsed time. This is done to track the time
between jobs to determine if a Checkup or Mini Setup is required.
Setup routines that run automatically
Process Controls must automatically perform setup operations at frequent intervals in order to
maintain image quality. The setup routines which run automatically are one of two types,
depending on the conditions: Mini Setup or a Checkup.
Mini Setup
The Mini Setup consist of three subroutines:
1. Vh/Vm Setup
This electrostatic routine is the same as DC933. This routine may result in new set values
for the Charge Corotron Grid Voltage (Vg) and Laser Diode power (LD) to maintain a Vh
equal to -650 volts and a Vm approximately equal to -350 volts (voltage varies with humid-
ity and Photoreceptor Drum cycles).
2. ADC Patch readings
This developability routine causes ADC patches to be made for each color. The patches
are measure by the ADC and if the values are different than the target values, the Run
time dispensing algorithm is adjusted. See Run time toner dispensing for more informa-
tion.
3. TRC CONT 1

Process Controls 10-134 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview The Fusing Process
The Fuser bonds the toner to the copy material (paper or transparency) by applying heat and The copy with the unfused toner is transported from the Intermediate Belt Transport (IBT) by
pressure to the toner and copy material. the Vacuum Transport. The Vacuum Transport moves the copy to the Inlet Chute where the
lead edge of the copy is guided into the nip of the Fuser. The Pressure Roll is cammed up into
Functions of the Fuser Subassembly the Heat Roll to create a nip or a Contact Arc between the two rollers. This Contact Arc serves
This Fuser chapter will describe the following functions: two functions:
• The Fusing Process • Creates a relatively large roller contact area (about 10.3 mm) in which to apply heat and
pressure to the copy for the fusing process.
• Mechanical Drives
• Directs the lead edge of the copy down to assist in releasing it from the Heat Roll.
• Copy Transport and Sensors
Both the Heat Roll and Pressure Roll apply heat and pressure to the copy. This action fuses the
• Temperature Control and Power Usage
toner into the paper. The Heat Roll and Pressure Roll are heated from the inside by their own
• Camming of Rollers Quartz Lamp. There is also a metal External Heat Roll that is heated internally by a Quartz
• Fuser Release Agent Lamp. The External Heat Roll cams into contact with the top of the Heat Roll to help maintain a
• Web Cleaning of the Heat Roll consistent surface temperature on the Heat Roll.
• Copy Exit
This machine can handle a wide variety of paper weights and material types. The different
materials and weights often require different dwell times in the Fuser Contact Arc to correctly
fuse the toner to the various materials. To achieve these different dwell times, three different
transport speeds are used in the Fuser. The three Fuser transports speeds are:
• 220 mm per second (nominal) - Normal Paper Mode providing normal fusing speed for
copy weights up to 105 gsm (28 lb bond). B/W, B/W Transparencies and all Color. Note,
this speed equals approximately 1 revolution per second of the Heat and Pressure Rolls.
• 130 mm per second (nominal) - Heavy Weight Paper Mode providing slower fusing
speed for copy weights of 106 - 163 gsm (28 lb - 90 lb index), plus other special materials.
Both B/W and Color. Note, this speed equals approximately 1 revolution per 2 seconds of
the Heat and Pressure Rolls.
• 60 mm per second (nominal) - Extra Heavy Weight Paper Mode providing the slowest
fusing speed for copy weights of 164 - 250 gsm (>90 lb - 140 lb index or 90 lb cover), Both
B/W and Color, plus Color Transparency. Note: this speed equals approximately 1 revolu-
tion per 3 seconds of the Heat and Pressure Rolls.
Contact Arc
The Pressure Roll is raised into the Heat Roll to form the Contact Arc. The outer core of both
rolls are covered with silicon rubber. Because the Heat Roll rubber layer is thicker (3 mm) than
the Pressure Roll (2 mm), the Pressure Roll sinks into the Heat Roll. This forms a Contact Arc
(a Heat Roll indentation) that curves away from the Heat Roll. When the copy leaves the Fuser
nip, the copy curls towards the Pressure Roll because the Contact Arc is curved in that direc-
tion. This paper curl towards the Pressure Roll helps strip the fused copy from the Heat Roll.
The size of the Contact Arc (nip widths of 9.8 mm at the center and 10.3 mm at the ends) pro-
vides a relatively large surface area for fusing. This increased surface area enables for a faster
copy transport speed.
The width of the Contact Arc is critical for proper fusing. When the Contact Arc is too narrow,
there is not enough heat and pressure applied to the copy for fusing to occur, and there is a
tendency for the copies to wrap around the Heat Roller. A Contact Arc that is too wide results in
Figure 1 Fuser Cross Section View excessive fusing and a tendency for the copy to wrap around the Pressure Roll, creating a
paper jam.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-135 Overview, The Fusing Process
The Contact Arc adjustment is done by raising or lowering the end support brackets on the Functional Description of Fuser Subassemblies
Pressure Roll with two adjustment screws. This bracket and the Pressure Roll cam up into the
Heat Roll. See the Contact Arc adjustment procedures in the Service Manual. Mechanical Drives
There are four motors that operate the Fuser functions. The motors, their functions and what
The Heat Roll has a light coating of oil applied to its outer surface. The oil helps prevent the activates/deactivates the motors are listed in Table 1
toner and paper from sticking to the Heat Roll. The metering of the oil is important in preventing
toner contamination on the rollers, copy jams and an excessive coating of oil on the copy. Refer Table 1 Fuser Drives
to Fuser Release Agent section for more information. Motor Function Activated By Deactivated By
Fuser Motor Drives the following: TR0 signal for first Trail edge of last
• Heat Roll color sheet passing the
• Pressure Roll Fuser Exit Sensor
• Vacuum Trans- or the Heat Roll
port warming up to
Ready Tempera-
• Oil Pick-up Roll
ture for the next
• Fuser Exit Rolls color job.
Exit Motor Drives the following: Print Start Button Drum Motor off sig-
• Inverter 1 Roll nal
• Pressure Roll
Camming
• Machine Exit
Roll
Retract Motor External Heat Roller TR0 signal for first Trail edge of last
Cam color sheet passing the
Fuser Exit Sensor
or the Heat Roll
warming up to
Ready Tempera-
ture for the next
color job.
Web Motor Web Take-Up Roller Fuser Exit Sensor ON time ended by
ON S/W timer
The Fuser Motor is controlled by the IOT Control and Drive PWBAs. Motor operation is syn-
chronized with the TR0 signal from the IBT Belt.
Through gearing, the Fuser Motor drives the Heat Roller, Pressure Roller, Vacuum Transport,
Fuser Exit Rollers and Oil Pick-up Roll. Therefore, the Fuser Motor drives all of the copy trans-
port mechanisms entering, within and exiting the Fuser Assembly. This means that the three
different copy transport speeds will always be synchronized in the Fuser area.
The Exit Motor drives the Pressure Roller Cam and the Exit Rollers for the machine. Through
gearing and a clutch, the Exit Motor rotates a shaft with eccentric cams at each end. These
cams lift the Pressure Roll up into the Heat Roll forming the Fuser Nip. Brackets and adjust-
ment screws at each end of the Pressure Roll Assembly allows for Fuser Nip adjustment with-
out having to remove an of the Fuser Assembly from the machine. Refer to the Contact Arc
adjustment in your service manual for this procedure.

The Fusing Process, Functional Description of Fuser 10-136 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
The Pressure Roller Cam is a clutch-driven shaft with cams on each end. When rotated, it
raises and lowers the Pressure Roller. Attached to the shaft is a flag that passes through an
optical sensor. The sensor is blocked by the flag and indicates the Pressure Roller is cammed
up and in contact with the Heat Roller. The normal position of the Pressure Roll is away from
the Heat Roll when the fusing process is not required. For the 220 mm/sec. transport speed),
the Pressure Roll remains in contact with the Heat Roll during the print run. For the 130 mm/
sec and 60 mm/sec transport speeds, the Pressure Roll cams away from the Heat Roll
between copies within a print run.
The Retract Motor rotates an eccentric cam shaft that is used to raise and lower the External
Heat Roll against the Heat Roll. A flag on the end of this shaft actuates an optical sensor to sig-
nal that the External Heat Roll is in the correct position. See “Camming of Rollers” section for
more details.
The Web Motor drives the Take-up Roll on the Web Assembly. This motor pulls the Web mate-
rial across the Heat Roll and Cleaning Roll. Refer to the Web Cleaning of the Heat Roll for
more information on the Web subassembly.
Figure 1 Fuser Motors Electrical Block Diagram
Table 2 Fuser Motor Control Lines and Condition

On Sel 1 Sel 2 CLK Fuser Motor Operating Condition
0 X X N/A Motor Off
1 0 1 N/A Not used
1 1 0 1182.31 Hz 130 mm/sec process speed

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-137 Functional Description of Fuser Subassemblies
Copy Transport and Sensors Table 3 Fuser Thermistor Resistance Values
The unfused print is transported from the IBT Belt to the Fuser by the Vacuum Belt. A Fuser Thermistor Temperature (°C) Thermistor Resistance (kOhms)
Entrance Sensor just before the Vacuum Transport Assembly is used to detect paper jams from
50 10 - 40
the IBT by sensing the lead edge and trail edge of the copy. The lead edge of the copy is
100 5.7 - 6.9
guided into the Contact Arc of the Fuser by the Inlet Chute.
130 2.46 - 2.95
Stripper Fingers on the Pressure Roller and Heat Roller help prevent the copy from wrapping 160 1.22 - 1.35
around these Rollers. As the copy leaves the Fuser nip, the lead edge enters the nip of the 180 0.78 - 0.87
Fuser Exit Rollers. A Fuser Exit Sensor detects the lead edge of the copy as it leaves the Fuser
Exit Rollers. This sensor looks for the lead edge of the copy as it exits the Fuser. If the lead
• The Heat Roll (HR) is 65mm in diameter, with a 4.5mm aluminum thick wall and 3mm Sil-
edge is more than 20 ms late to this sensor, the Fuser will stop, the Fuser nip will open and a icon Rubber base coating and a layer of Viton on the outside. The Heat Roll has priority
jam error code will be generated. The quick stopping of the Fuser helps prevent the copy from
over the other two rolls for power required for the heat lamp. The Heat Roll has its own
getting wrapped around the Heat or Pressure Rolls. Copy jams of this type can always be drive motor for copy transport.
cleared from the Fuser entrance area.
• The Pressure Roll (PR) is 65mm in diameter, with a 4.5mm aluminum thick wall and a
2mm Silicon Rubber base coating and a layer of Viton on the outside. The Pressure Roll
Refer to Standby Power, Section 1 for information on machine safety interlocks.
is mounted on brackets, which cam up to the bottom of the Heat Roll to create the Fuser
Contact Arc. The Pressure Roll is gear driven by the Fuser Motor.
Temperature Control and Power Usage
• The External Heat Roll (EHR) is a 23mm diameter stainless steel roll with a 2.5mm thick
The Fuser Assembly includes three heated rollers. Each of these rollers have Tungsten Halo-
wall. Its purpose is to help regulate the surface temperature of the Heat Roll by applying
gen Quartz Lamps in their centers, and the heat generated by the lamp migrates to the surface
additional heat directly to the surface of the Heat Roll. This reduces variations in tempera-
of the roller for the fusing process.
ture of the Heat Roll surface. The External Heat Roll rotation comes from direct contact
with the motor driven Heat Roll.
Fuser temperature control is complicated and as shown in Figure 3. there are four classes of
required components:
1. Thermistors to measure the temperature of each Fuser roll.

2. Lamps to heat the rolls
3. Control hardware and software to read the temperature and switch the lamps on and off.
4. Thermostats to prevent the Fuser from catastrophically overheating due to a component
failure.
To monitor and regulate the Fuser heating cycles, each roll has two thermistors (Table 3) and a
thermostat on or near the external surfaces of the rolls. The functions of each are as follows:
• Control Thermistors - These determine the nominal set and run temperatures of the
associated roll. The current through these devices is monitored by the IOT Drive and Con-
trol PWBAs. These are in direct contact with each roll.
• Overheat Thermistors - These are also monitored by the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs.
When the current through one of these devices reaches a particular value, the IOT Con-
trol and Drive PWBAs attempt to completely shut off the heater for the associated roll.
This occurs when the thermistors sense a temperature of 230° C or more. These Ther-
mistors are in direct contact with each roll.
• Overheat Thermostats - These are Fail-Safe switches. When a Thermostat senses an
overheat condition (>230° C), it opens and disconnects power from the associated heat
lamp. the Thermostats are spaced approximately 3 mm from the surface of each Roll.
These thermostats cannot be reset.
Table 3 Fuser Thermistor Resistance Values

Thermistor Temperature (°C) Thermistor Resistance (kOhms)
20 102 - 150

Functional Description of Fuser Subassemblies 10-138 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
• Fuser Not Ready - At least one of the HR, PR and/or EHR is below its Not Ready Temper-
ature. (See Table 4.)
The Fuser Ready state can be divided into two substates:
• Standby - The Fuser Motor isn’t running.

• Run - The Fuser Motor is running.
The Fuser Not Ready state can be divided into three substates:
• Preheat - The Fuser lamps are heating the rolls to their Preheat Temperatures. (See Table
4.) These temperatures are below the Ready Temperatures. This is done as a means of
reducing First Copy Out time.
• Warm-up - The Fuser lamps are heating the rolls to their Ready Temperatures.
• Stop - All Fuser lamps are shut off due to a paper jam, a machine failure has occurred or
a machine interlock is open.
• Heat Roll Empty Rotation - When printing small copy media sizes, heat will be transferred
to the media from isolated parts of the Heat Roll. Over time, this may cause the tempera-
ture of the HR surface to become uneven. Therefore, under certain conditions, the Fuser
will perform a Empty Rotation Operation for approximately 40 seconds. This allows the
EHR to make the HR surface temperature more uniform. This only occurs if the HR tem-
perature is above the HR Empty Rotation Operation Floor Temperature.
• Primary and Secondary Control Temperatures - Control temperatures are the tempera-
tures that the IOT Control PWBA attempts to maintain during Fuser Run. Each of the rolls
has both Primary and Secondary Control Temperatures. Primary temperatures are the
starting target temperatures. Secondary Control Temperatures are calculated values
which depend on the NVM values shown in Table 4 and the difference between maximum
and minimum temperatures measured in ten consecutive samples (Table 5). If the tem-
perature difference is small enough, then the heat lamp can be switched on less often
than normal, and the Secondary Control Temperatures can be used. This reduces the
likelihood of the roll temperature will overshoot its maximum temperature after a job
because its heating lamp is unnecessarily switched on immediately before the end of the
job.
Table 4 IOT Control NVM Fuser Roller Temperature Entries

Temp No. Min Nominal Max Description
1 130 160 200 HR Primary Control Temperature
2 70 120 180 PR Primary Control Temperature
3 160 190 220 EHR Control Temperature (Primary)
4 PR Not Ready Temperature; Formula-based
5 100 115 180 PR Secondary Control Temperature
6 HR Not Ready Temperature; Formula-based
7 100 150 180 EHR Not Ready Ceiling Temperature
Figure 2 Fuser Heaters and Heater Control Block Diagram 8 100 130 150 HR Preheat Temperature
9 80 100 150 PR Preheat Temperature
All aspects of Fuser operation, including its temperature, are controlled by the IOT Control and
Drive PWBAs. At the highest level, the Fuser has two operating states: 10 100 120 150 EHR Preheat Temperature
11 100 140 160 HR Empty Rotation Operation Floor Tempera-
• Fuser Ready - The HR, PR and EHR have all reached their Ready Temperatures. (See ture
Table 4.) 12 150 155 170 HR Ready Floor Temperature

Table 4 IOT Control NVM Fuser Roller Temperature Entries Table 5 Fuser Warm up Sequence
Temp No. Min Nominal Max Description Step 1: Step 2: Step3: Fuser Step 4:
Power On Initialize Drive Fuser Ready
13 110 115 150 PR Ready Floor Temperature
14 180 185 200 EHR Ready Floor Temperature Fuser Motor off off on on
15 140 155 170 HR Nip Width Adjustment Floor Temperature
The user is given a ready indication when the Heat Roll reaches 160° and the Process Control
16 100 115 130 PR Nip Width Adjustment Floor Temperature
Setup routines are complete.
17 150 170 190 EHR Nip Width Adjustment Allowed Tempera-
ture
Fuser Cooling System
18 160 195 220 EHR Secondary Control Temperature when
The Fuser has an air circulation system to prevent excess heat build up in the machine. This
using normal paper for 4-color
system consists of:
19 160 210 220 EHR Secondary Control Temperature when
using normal paper for B&W • Fuser Intake Fan
20 160 210 220 EHR Secondary Control Temperature when • Fuser Duct
using OHP material for B&W • Fuser Exhaust Fan
21 160 190 220 EHR Secondary Control Temperature when The Fuser Intake Fan is mounted on the front door of the machine. This fan draws room air into
using OHP material or heavyweight or very
the Fuser Duct, which is attached to the top of the Fuser Assembly. The Fuser Duct has metal
heavyweight paper for 4-color
panel on its bottom which absorbs the radiant heat generated by the Fuser. The circulating air
22 160 190 220 EHR Secondary Control Temperature when in the duct passes over this metal panel and draws this heat out of the machine as the air exits
using heavyweight or very heavyweight paper through the Fuser Exhaust Fan on the right side of the machine.
for B & W
24 155 165 170 EHR temperature Control Determination Tem- Camming of Rollers
perature There are two rolls in the Fuser that use camming action:
22 10 20 30 PR Post-Job Temperature Difference
• Pressure Roll - Cams up to contact the Heat Roll to create the Fuser nip (Contact Arc)
The IOT Control and Drive PWBAs manage power to the three heated rolls to reduce maxi- for the copy fusing process.
mum energy usage within the machine. The energizing cycles vary, depending upon the • External Heat Roll - Cams down to contact the Heat Roll to provide supplemental heat-
machines operating status (warm-up, stand-by or running) and the type of copy job running ing to the surface of the Heat Roll.
through the machine (standard weight, heavy weight, or larger quantities of copies to run). At When the External Heat Roll and the Pressure Roll are cammed away from the Heat Roll, there
no time during the copy run cycle are the Heat Roll and Pressure Roll energized for heat at the
is a 3 mm gap between the Heat Roll and the other two rollers.
same time.
PR/HR Nip (Pressure Roll Camming)
Each roll’s temperature is read by the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs every 500ms. Power to
The IOT Control PWBA creates a PR/HR nip by engaging the Fuser Nip Clutch and the Exit
the rolls is changed only after ten consecutive readings.
Motor. This combination rotates a shaft with an eccentric cam attached that forces the Pres-
Fuser Warm Up Sequence sure Roll up into the Heat Roll.
Warm up time for the Digital Copier is about 7.5 minutes. Warm up time for the Copier/Printer is
Two factors combine to determine when this nip is created. The first factor is the TR0 pulse
about 8 minutes, and for the Printer, about 9.5 minutes.
which starts movement of blank print media from a tray. The second factor is delay interval
stored in the IOT NVM. This is shown as B in Figure 4 and Figure 5. There are actually 7 inter-
The temperature control and sequence for Fuser warm up is a four stage process. Refer to
vals stored in the IOT NVM. Which one is used depends on three factors:
Table 5 for this sequence.
• The type of blank media being used.
Table 5 Fuser Warm up Sequence
• The thickness of the blank media being used
Step 1: Step 2: Step3: Fuser Step 4: • Whether the job is color or B & W
Power On Initialize Drive Fuser Ready
• Whether the Fixing Surface is on the top or bottom.
H/R Lamp 630W 630W 481W 379W
Default values of interval B range from 01 seconds for B & W jobs on normal paper and trans-
P/R Lamp 350W 350W 350W 350W parency material to 10 seconds for color jobs on extremely heavyweight paper.
Ext H/R Lamp 62W 218W 340W 340W

manuals4you.com
EHR/HR Fuser Nip (External Heat Roll Camming)
The IOT Control PWBA creates a nip between the External Heat Roll and the Heat Roll by
energizing the Retract Motor. This motor rotates a eccentric shaft that is above the External
Heat Roll. This rotating shaft cams the External Heat Roll into or away from the Heat Roll.
As with the PR/HR nip, two factors combine to determine when the External Heat Roll is moved
into contact with the Heat Roll. The first factor is the TR0 event which starts the movement of
the copy material from the Trays. The second is 1 of 5 delay intervals stored in the IOT NVM.
This delay interval is shown as D in Figure 4.
As shown in Figure 5, for B & W jobs on normal paper, there is no delay. However, for color
jobs on extremely heavyweight paper and transparency material, the default delay is 10 sec-
Figure 3 Fuser Nip Timing Diagram (Color, 11” X 17”) onds.
The status of this nip is monitored by the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor. This is an optical
sensor which is blocked with the two rolls in contact, and unblocked in the retracted position
(approximately 3 mm away from the Heat Roll). To correctly read this sensor, the External Heat
Roll Retract Motor must be stopped for 100 msec after a change is sensor state is detected.
Rotation of the External Heat Roll is done by contact with the motor driven Heat Roll.
Fuser Release Agent

The Heat Roll is lubricated with fuser oil which acts as a release agent to prevent the toner and
copy from sticking to the roll. (See Figure 1.) Amino Silicone oil is used as the fuser oil.
Figure 4 Fuser Nip Timing Diagram (B & W, 8-1/2 X 11) The Fuser Oil Pump is turned ON whenever the Fuser Drive Motor is on. There is no way to
adjust the oil pump ON time. The pump takes the oil from the Oil Tank to the Drip Pipe. The oil
A PR/HR nip is removed: drips onto the Oil Wick from eleven (11) evenly spaced holes in the Drip Pipe. The holes in the
drip pipe increases in size from front to rear to ensure uniform oil flow at the rear end.
• For simplex jobs in color - when the trailing edge of the print passes the Fuser Exit Sensor
• For duplex jobs in color - when the trailing edge of the each even numbered print passes The oil moves by capillary action through the Oil Wick to the Pick-up Roll. A Metering Blade
the Fuser Exit Sensor regulates the thickness of the oil coating on the Pick-up Roll. Any excess oil from the Metering
• For B & W jobs - never during the job run. Blade or Oil Wick is caught by the Oil Pan. The oil pan contains a replaceable oil filter to collect
contaminants that get into the oil. A Return Tube takes this oil back to the Oil Tank for reuse.
For all Black only jobs, the Pressure Roll remains in contact with the Heat Roll during the entire
print run. For all Color jobs, the Pressure Roll cams away form the Heat Roll between each
The Pick-up Roll transfers the oil to the Donor Roller. The Donor Roller then delivers the final
sheet in 1 pitch mode (i.e. 11x17”), and cams away between each pair of sheets in 2 pitch
thin coating of oil to the surface of the Heat Roller. The system dispenses a constant volume
mode (i.e. 8.5x11”). These modes of operation apply for both paper and transparencies.
(microliters) of oil per letter size copy.
Brackets with adjustment screws on each end of the Pressure Roll allows for Fuser nip adjust-
The Fuser Motor drives the Pick-up Roll through a geared connection. The Donor Roller is
ment without having to remove any of the Fuser Assembly from the machine. Refer to Contact
freewheeling and is rotated by its contact with the Pick-up Roll and the Heat Roller.
Arc adjustment in your service manual for this procedure.
A customer replaceable (CRU) Oil Cartridge is used to supply a permanent Oil Tank that is in
The status of this nip is monitored by the Nip Sensor. This is an optical sensor that is blocked
the bottom of the Fuser Assembly. A new Oil Cartridge contains approximately 350 ml of oil.
when the two rolls are in contact, and unblocked when the rolls are in the retracted position.
The Oil Tank capacity is 150 ml. An Oil Sensor is located within the Oil Tank to sense when the
However, the design of the sensor is such in order to accurately detect its state, the IOT Control
oil level becomes low. The IOT Control PWBA checks the status of this sensor every 500 msec.
PWBA must disengage the Fuser Nip Clutch for approximately 100 msec after detecting a
When the Photo Coupler type of sensor detects the absence of oil on its surface, the sensor
change in sensor state. When fusing is not required, the normal position of the Pressure Roll is
triggers a “Replace Fuser Oil Cartridge Soon” message on the User Interface.
approximately 3 mm away from the Heat Roll.

The low oil signal from the sensor also starts a software timer in the machine. The timer will
allow approximately 2000 additional copies to be run during this “warning period” before the
machine will shut down. During this warning period, if the front door interlock is opened, the
“Replace Fuser Oil Cartridge Soon” message will disappear from the UI for 10 minutes. If after
the 10 minutes, the Oil Sensor still detects a low oil condition, the message will be displayed
again on the UI.
When the software timer expires (approximately 2000 copies), a “Replace Fuser Oil Cartridge”
message is displayed on the UI. When this condition occurs, the machine shuts down. Install-
ing a new Oil Cartridge will enable the machine to run jobs again.
Oil usage rates vary, depending upon the types of images and media being run. Under normal
conditions, an Oil Cartridge should last approximately 25-40K copies/prints. Oil rates can be
much higher when the oil metering system is in need of service.
Web Cleaning of the Heat Roll

The Web Assembly is a Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU). The Web material is a low fiber,
paper-like material that removes toner and paper particles which may adhere to the Heat Roll
during the fusing process. A metal Cleaning Roller is also used to remove toner residue from
the Heat Roll. The Cleaning Roller is driven by direct contact with the Heat Roll.
The Web material is held in constant contact with both the Heat Roll and the Cleaning Roll.
Furthermore, the Cleaning Roll is held in constant contact with the Heat Roller by two foam-
covered Web Pressure Rollers. The Web Pressure Roller holding Web against the Heat Roller
is spring loaded. The Web Pressure Roller holding the Web against the Cleaning Roll and the
Cleaning Roller against the Heat Roll is held by gravity.
Figure 5 Web Assembly circuit
The Web material moves in the opposite direction as the surface of the Heat Roller as it travels
from a Supply Roll to a Take-up Roll. The IOT Control and Status PWBAs can approximately The IOT Control and Drive PWBAs advances the Web Material by activating a dedicated Web
determine how much of the Web Material has been used. Through a hard stop circuit, the Motor. This causes Web Material to pass from the Web Supply Roll to the Web Take-up Roll.
machine is shut down when the Web material runs out. The interval that the motor is activated can vary between one and four seconds. How long the
motor is activated depends on two factors.
There are three physical stages to metering the Web usage; New, In Use, and Empty. There is
also a non-physical stage where the machine software determines a “Web Low” warning state • The motor is on for twice as long for color jobs than B & W jobs.
on the UI. These stages are detailed below. • The period that the motor is on decrease with the amount of Web Material that has been
used in the current Web Assembly
First, as shown in Figure 5, the Web Assembly has an electrical circuit that contains a fuse. As more material is used, the effective diameter of the Take-up Roll core increases. Therefore,
When a new Web Assembly is installed, the fuse is immediately opened. This transition indi- the Web Material is transferred between rolls more rapidly. The IOT Control PWBA uses a copy
cates to the Control Logic that a new Web Assembly has been installed. The IOT Control count variable to estimate the amount of Web material that has been used. This determines the
PWBA resets to “0” a variable indicating how many copies have occurred for this Web Assem- amount of Web Motor activation time for each copy, based upon a rough estimate of the Take-
bly. As copies are made, this variable is incriminated. up Roll core diameter.
Once the total Web Motor ON time reaches 1458 minutes (approximately 40,000 copies), a
“Replace Cleaning Web Soon” message is displayed on the UI. This message will remain dis-
played for approximately 3,000 - 5,000 copies until the Web Assembly circuit detects the Web
Supply Roll is empty. When empty, two metal contacts touch the metal Supply Roll core and
completes a circuit. When this occurs, the machine becomes disabled and a “Replace Clean-
ing Web” message is displayed on the UI. This condition ends when a new Cleaning Web
Assembly is installed.

manuals4you.com
In addition to the general Web advancement described above, the Web will also advance for Copy Exit
two minutes after any jams that occurred in the Fuser Assembly. This is done to clean any
As the fused print leaves the nip (Contact Arc) between the Heat and Pressure Rolls, Stripper
excess toner that might be left from the jam.
Fingers on both rolls keep the copy from wrapping around these two rollers. A Fuser Exit Sen-
sor looks for the leading edge of the copy material and stops the Fuser Motor if the lead edge
is not detected within a designated time. This feature prevents sheets from wrapping around
the Fuser Rolls and enables all Fuser jams to be cleared from the entrance side of the Fuser
Assembly.
The copy material then proceeds through Fuser Exit Rolls and past a Exit Path Sensor to either
the paper duplex/inverter path or out of the machine to the Exit Tray or the Mailbox/Sorter. If a
jam is detected by any of the paper path sensors in the Exit or Inverter areas, the Fuser will
immediately stop to prevent accordion jams from damaging the Fuser.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-143 Functional Description of Fuser Subassemblies,
Functional Description of Fuser Subassemblies, 10-144 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview
This chapter describes the electrical and mechanical components of the Mailbox/Sorter and Mailbox/Sorter Bins (1-10)
Offset Catch Tray optional accessories. The Mailbox/Sorter is a single set of hardware whose
functionality is determined by the configuration of the machine to which it is connected.
The Mailbox/Sorter performs these primary functions:

• Decurls finished copies for easier paper stacking and handling
• When attached to the DocuColor 12/Document Centre Color Series 50 (DC) it:
– Collates finished copies by stacking them into bins
– Collates finished copies by sorting into bins
– Stacks into one pile or into an offset pile finished copies onto an Offset Catch Tray
(OCT)
• When attached to the Digital Networked Copier/Printer (DC/P) or the Digital Networked
Printer (PR), the Mailbox/Sorter can function as:
– A printer, stacking finished copies into bins (mailboxes) assigned by a user
– A copier/printer, stacking finished copies onto the Offset Catch Tray (OCT) in one
pile or in offset piles
The Mailbox/Sorter, shown in Figure 1, always includes a Decurler Assembly and a Mailbox/
Sorter Assembly.
The Offset Catch Tray (OCT) is another optional accessory that can be used with a machine
alone or combined with the Mailbox/Sorter. Decurler
This Chapter will cover the following:

• Overview Offset Catch Tray
Mailbox/Sorter Assembly
(OCT)
• Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections
• Mailbox/Sorter PWBAs
• Print Transport through the Mailbox/Sorter
• Offset Catch Tray (OCT) Figure 1 Mailbox/Sorter attached to the machine
• Mailbox/Sorter Operation.
This same hardware accessory can function either as a Sorter or as a Mailbox. The function of
The Mailbox/Sorter is an optional accessory to the DC, CP and LP machines. It connects to the this accessory is determined by the type of machine and the software configuration installed.
right (output) side of the machine using a sliding rail which attaches to the lower front frame of Table 1 shows the different types of machine configurations, which then determines the type of
the machine. This rail provides a sliding track that allows for 300 mm of separation between the function for the Mailbox/Sorter accessory.
Mailbox/Sorter and the machine for clearing of paper jams.
Table 1 Machine Configurations for Mailbox/Sorter
Machine Machine Sorter / Mailbox
Type Configuration Function
Digital Copier (DC) Image Input Terminal (IIT) Sorter
Digital Network Printer (PR) Digital Front End (DFE) Mailbox
Digital Copier (DC) Image Input Terminal (IIT) Mailbox
and and
Digital Network Printer (PR) Digital Front End (DFE)

Sorter Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections
When the Mailbox/Sorter is being used as a Sorter, it receives finished copies from the copier A single connector provides all electrical connections between the basic machine and the Mail-
and collates them into different bins. This collation process can be done in either Sort Mode or box/Sorter. The connections include power, serial communications links, and discrete control
Stack Mode. The Sorter has ten (10) bins for this collating function. Each bin can hold 100 and status lines. The Mailbox/Sorter operates entirely on either +24 VDC or +5 VDC power,
sheets (1,000 sheet total capacity for the bins). When a bin contains approximately 100 sheets, which originates in the IOT PWBA LVPS in the basic machine.
a switch is activated which causes a “Bin Full” message on the machine UI screen. Any addi-
tional copies for that bin are directed to the Catch Tray until the prints are removed from the bin. Figure 1 shows power lines, discrete command and status lines, and serial communication
links between the Machine IOT and both the Mailbox/Sorter and OCT. Figure 2 shows the
Both Catch Trays can accept up to 500 prints in a single stack, and each contains a sensor to block diagram of the Mailbox/Sorter. Figure 3 shows the block diagram of the Decurler.
indicate when it is full. The OCT provides offsetting capability of finished copies for all sizes
except 12”x18” and 12.6”x18” papers. Both the IOT CPU PWBA and the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA include microcontrollers.
Therefore, much of the command and status information passed between these assemblies
The Sorter function is available only when the machine is configured as Digital Copier. When uses their shared command and status serial data link. The IOT CPU PWBA becomes aware
the machine is configured as a Copier/Printer, the hardware can only function as a Mailbox. of the Mailbox/Sorter by detecting the proper level on the Output Detect line. It also passes a
discrete line (Sys Reset) indicating that the Mailbox/Sorter processor should reset itself to a
Refer to Sorter Operation Overview for more information. start-up condition.
Mailbox
When the Mailbox/Sorter is being used as a Mailbox, the bins can be assigned independently
for individual users or groups of users. These bin assignments are programmed into the IOT
CPU NVM (Non-Volatile Memory) by the printer network system administrator. The capacity for
each bin is the same as the Sorter: 100 sheets/bin. A “Bin Full” indication is sent to the sender
of the document, and any extra copies designated for that bin go to the Catch Tray.
When the copier/printer machine is used as a walk-up copier, all finished copies go to the
Catch Tray.
When attached to either the Printer (PR) or the Copier/Printer (CP), the Mailbox does not pro-
vide sorting capabilities.
Refer to Mailbox Operation Overview for more information on the operation of this accessory.
Offset Catch Tray

The Offset Catch Tray (OCT) accepts finished copies in a single stack, providing an offsetting
function for most size papers. The OCT is an optional accessory for a machine with or without
a Mailbox/Sorter installed.
Decurler
The Mailbox/Sorter includes a dual Decurler Assembly. The Decurler Assembly removes the
upward or downward paper curl that typically results from the toner fusing process. Because a
print can exit from the machine either face-up or face-down, the assembly has separate
upward and downward decurling mechanisms. Prints are decurled by creating a nip between a
pair of Decurler Rolls. One roll has a soft surface and the other roll has a hard surface. If the
paper requires decurling in a downward direction, a Cam moves the Lower Decurler Roll
toward the Decurler Entrance Roll, increasing the nip. To decurl paper in a downward direction,
the Cam moves the Upper Decurler Roll toward the Decurler Exit Roll. At the same time, the
nip in the opposite pair of rolls becomes neutral. The size of the nip and the transport speed
are adjustable, depending upon the type of material being processed. Refer to Decurler control
for more information.

Overview, Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections 10-146 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Mailbox/Sorter Subassembly Simplified Block Diagram
Figure 1 Mailbox/Sorter Connections to IOT

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-147 Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections
Offset Catch Tray Electrical Connections
The Offset Catch Tray (OCT) does not have a control processor. Discrete lines from one of two
assemblies provide direct control of the OCT. If a Mailbox/Sorter is not installed, the OCT is
connected to the IOT Drive PWBA, as shown in Figure 1. If the OCT is installed with a Mailbox/
Sorter, the OCT is connected to the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA as shown in Figure 1. These
PWBAs become aware of the OCT by detecting the level on the OCT Det line. The OCT Mot
Fwd and OCT Mot Rev control lines directly control the OCT motor and cause it to move the
tray toward the front or back of the machine. The OCT Full status line indicates that the OCT
paper capacity has been reached. The OCT Home Sensor indicates when the OCT is in the
front-most (Home) position, while the OCT Position Sensor indicates that the tray is in the rear-
most position.
Figure 3 Decurler Simplified Block Diagram

Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections, Offset Catch 10-148 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Mailbox/Sorter Interlocks The Decurler Front Cover Interlock is actually two switches. When the cover is off, one pole of
this switch disconnects +24 VDC supply voltage from the Decurler Stepper Motor. The other
The Mailbox/Sorter has four (4) pairs of interlock switches:
switch and all of the remaining interlock outputs are all normally at +5 VDC, but are grounded
• Two Docking Interlocks that detect when the Decurler is connected to the basic machine. when opened. The microcontroller on the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA reads the voltage sig-
• Decurler Front Cover Interlock nals. An open interlock causes the microcontroller to send a message to the IOT CPU PWBA,
• Mailbox/Sorter Front Cover Interlock informing it of the interlock condition. An appropriate message displays on the machine User
Interface.
Sorter Front Cover

Interlock
Decurler Front Cover

Interlock
Docking Interlocks (2)
Figure 1 Interlock Switch locations for the Mailbox/Sorter

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-149 Mailbox/Sorter Interlocks
Mailbox/Sorter PWBAs Print Transport through the Mailbox/Sorter
The Mailbox/Sorter has two PWBAs: The Mailbox/Sorter contains three (3) motors. Table 1 shows the Mailbox/Sorter motor func-
• The Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA, shown in Figure 2, monitors paper path sensors, inter- tions.
lock switches, bin full switches, OCT full switch and OCT present and home position sta-
tus. Table 1 Mailbox/Sorter Motors and Functions
• The Decurler PWBA, shown in Figure 3, monitors the paper path through the Decurler Motors Drives: Transport Speed
and controls the decurling function and communicates with the Mailbox/Sorter Control
Decurler Motor Decurler In Roll 350, 220, 130, 60 mm/sec.
PWBA.
(+24 VDC Stepper) 1st Decurler Roll
The Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA includes four (4) LEDs. The IOT CPU PWBA has LEDs that
2nd Decurler Roll
light to indicate active communication between the two PWBAs.
Decurler Exit Roll
Table 1 Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA LEDs
Sorter Motor Sorter Entrance Roll
LED Color Signal Comment (+24 VDC Stepper) 1-10 Vertical Bin Rolls
CR1 Vcc Lit indicates that digital logic power is avail- Sorter Exit Roll
able OCT Motor Offset Catch Tray
CR2 RxD Flickering indicates command data being (+24 VDC Bi-directional)
received from IOT CPU PWBA (optional with printer)
CR3 Reset Lit indicates that PWBA microcontroller is
being reset by IOT CPU PWBA Decurler control
CR4 /Lock Lit indicates that Mailbox/Sorter Assembly
The Decurler neurtralizes paper curl that results from the Xerographic process. The basic con-
Motor is locked. cept of decurling is to force a smaller diameter metal roll with a hard surface into the much
softer foam surface of a larger diameter roll. This creates a valley in the larger roll, and the print
A self-test is performed on the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA during power on. is forced into this valley in the opposite direction of its natural curl. Prints curl toward the side
having fused toner.
Paper curl and the decurling process is dependent upon these variables:
• Paper weight and type
• Single or two sided copies
• Black-and-white or Color copies
• Pixel density
• Humidity
To address the different amount and directions of paper curl, the Decurler Motor operates at
different speeds and one of the two Decurling Rollers cam up or down by different distances to
decurl the paper.
The Decurler Motor has the following adjustable parameters:

• The distance by which the harder roll is forced into the surface of the softer roll, called the
Nip Shift
• The speed at which the paper travels through the decurler
• Which decurler (upper or lower) is active
Refer to Figure 1 and Table 2 for details of the components for this function.

Mailbox/Sorter PWBAs, Print Transport through the 10-150 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
OCT Gate Control
The OCT Gate is moved up or down by the OCT Solenoid. This gate diverts the copy material
to either the bins or to the OCT. The status of the OCT Gate is determined by the IOT CPU
PWBA, which sends an appropriate message to the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA. The Mail-
box/Sorter Control PWBA enables or disables the OCT Solenoid as required.
Mailbox/Sorter Control
The sorter and mailbox functions use the same hardware. The difference between them results
from the configuration of the attached machine and the type of print or copy job being per-
formed. These differences result in different control messages from the IOT CPU PWBA and
different control signals from the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA. In particular, the machine con-
figuration determines whether sorter or mailbox functionality is available. Table 3 shows the
types of collating functions that are available for the different machine configurations.
Table 3 Functions for different configurations

Printer Copier Copier/Printer
(PR) (DC) (DC/PR)
Only Only Mailbox
Figure 1 Paper Decurling components and function Output Functions functioning as a:
Mailbox Sorter
Therefore, prints exiting with image side down are forced through the Upper Decurling Nip with Copier Printer
2, 6 or 10 mm of shift and through the Lower Decurling Nip with no nip shift. The controls
Sorts into bins X
required for this function originate in the machine IOT CPU PWBA. This information is then
(1,2,3...1,2,3...etc.)
sent through the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA to the Decurler Control PWBA. This last PWBA
regulates the amount of Nip Shift and which nip is shifted. Table 2 shows the distance of the Stacks into bins X
Nip Shift in the Decurling Roll for various paper types and copy modes. (1,1,1...2,2,2...etc.)
Sorts into bins by user X X
The Decurler transport speed is to match the transports speed of the copy job through the (User A: 1,2,3...User B: 1,2,3...etc.)
xerographics process. The speed of the Decurler Motor is determined by the IOT CPU PWBA. Offset Catch Tray (OCT) X X X X
straight stack
Table 2 Decurler Shift Requirements & Motor Speeds Offset Catch Tray (OCT) X X X X
Decurler Roll Nip Shift offset stacks
Media Type Image Type Transport Speed 2 mm 6 mm 10 mm

Transparency Black and White 160 mm/sec X
Sorter Functions
Transparency 4-Color 60 mm/sec X NOTE: Sorter operation is possible only when the Mailbox/Sorter is attached to the Digital
Lightweight Plain Black + 1 Color 160 mm/sec X Copier machine (DC).
Paper When a Sorter is connected to the Digital Copier, four (4) different finishing outputs are avail-
Lightweight Plain 4-Color; Image 160 mm/sec X able. See Table 3 for these outputs.
Paper Density < 50%
Lightweight Plain 4-Color; Image 160 mm/sec X When the Mailbox/Sorter is configured as a Sorter, the user can select from the User Interface
Paper Density > 50% screen either Sort Mode or Stack Mode for outputs to the bins. Copies for bin output are
Heavyweight Plain Black + 1 color 60 mm/sec X diverted into the Vertical Transport area of the Sorter by the OCT Gate. At the appropriate bin
Paper level, a bin solenoid energizes to push a Bin Diverter Gate (one gate per output bin) into the
paper path. This directs the copy into that bin. The selection of the Bin Diverter Gate is made
Heavyweight Plain 4-Color; Image 60 mm/sec X
by the Sorter Control PWBA in response to control messages from the IOT CPU PWBA. The
Paper Density < 50%
appropriate Bin Solenoid is energized only as the copy enters the vertical transport area. When
Heavyweight Plain 4-Color; Image 60 mm/sec X the trailing edge of the copy passes the Bin Sensor, the Bin Solenoid deenergizes to close the
Paper Density > 50% Bin Gate.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-151 Print Transport through the Mailbox/Sorter
Refer to Offset Catch Tray (OCT) for the finishing functions of this component.
Mailbox Configuration Bin In Sensors (10)
NOTE: When this device is attached to the Digital Network Copier/Printer or the Digital Net-
Sorter Front Cover Interlock
work Printer, it operates as a Mailbox. The OCT is an optional accessory to the Mailbox.
For Mailbox bin outputs when working with the Printer mode, the user sends a print job to the
printer. The bin addresses are programmed by the printer system administrator and stored in Vertical Transport In Sensor
the NVM associated with the IOT CPU PWBA.
The copies for the Mailbox bin are diverted into the Vertical Transport area of the Mailbox by Decurler Front Cover Interlock
the OCT Gate. At the appropriate bin level, a Bin Solenoid energizes to push a Bin Diverter
Gate (one gate per output bin) into the paper path. The selection of the Bin Diverter Gate is
made by the Sorter Control PWBA in response to control messages from the IOT CPU PWBA. Docking Interlocks (2)
The appropriate Bin Solenoid is energized only as the copy enters the vertical transport area.
When the trailing edge of the copy passes the Bin Sensor, the Bin Solenoid deenergizes to
close the Bin Gate.
Jam Sensing Machine Exit

The Mailbox/Sorter has thirteen (13) sensors for detecting the leading and trailing edges of Sensor
copies:
• Decurler Exit Sensor
• Vertical Transport-In Sensor
• Ten (10) Bin-In Sensors (one for each bin)
• OCT Exit Sensor
Figure 2 shows the sensor locations.
The IOT Machine Exit Sensor is also used by the Decurler PWBA or the Sorter Control PWBA.
Decurler Exit Sensor OCT Exit Sensor
Figure 2 Mailbox/Sorter and Decurler Sensor Locations

Print Transport through the Mailbox/Sorter 10-152 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Offset Catch Tray (OCT) Mailbox/Sorter Operation.
The Offset Catch Tray (OCT) is an optional accessory. The OCT can be attached directly to the This device can operate as either a Sorter or as a Mailbox, depending upon what type of
machine or to the Mailbox/Sorter. If connected to a Mailbox/Sorter, the OCT replaces the stan- machine it is attached to. Refer to Overview at the beginning of this Chapter for information on
dard non-offsetting catch tray. the Sorter and Mailbox functionality with the different machines.
The OCT is used to compile copy output into a single stack or to provide offsetting stacks onto Sorter Operation Overview
a single tray. The OCT does not provide offsetting for paper sizes of 12x18” or larger.
The Sorter can collate copy output in the following modes:
• Stack mode into bins (1,1,1... 2,2,2... 3,3,3...etc.)
The OCT can attach to a machine or to the Mailbox/Sorter by two (2) Thumb Screws. A multi-
pin plug connects the OCT to the machine or the Mailbox/Sorter for communications and DC • Sort mode into bins (1,2,3... 1,2,3... 1,2,3...etc.)
power needs. • Straight stack into the Catch Tray
• Offset stack into the optional OCT, if connected
A +24 VDC bi-directional motor shifts the OCT toward the front of the machine or toward the
The user selects the type of output on the UI touch pad of the copier. Depending upon the copy
back of the machine when performing the offset stacking function. The OCT straight stack or material used or selected, the control logic will determine if the user selection is valid (i.e. the
“home” position is with the catch Tray toward the front of the machine.
selected paper weight is within the operational range of the Sorter).
Two (2) sensors monitor the offset paper stacking function:

Mailbox Operation Overview
• The Offset Home Sensor indicates when the OCT is in the straight stack or “home” posi-
The Mailbox can collate copy output in the following modes:
tion.
• Sort mode into bins assigned to users or group addresses (1,2,3... 1,2,3... 1,2,3...etc.)
• The Offset Position Sensor indicates when the OCT is in the offset position.
• Straight stack into the Catch Tray when one or more mailbox bins are full.
An OCT Motor moves the tray between the two positions. The OCT Motor is controlled by dis-
crete control lines from the IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs. • Offset stack into the optional OCT, if connected
The system administrator for the printer network assigns the addresses used for the Mailbox
Single stacks of copy are discharged within a paper alignment of approximately 20 mm of function. The address data are stored in the NVM associated with the IOT CPU PWBA.
“scatter.” Offset stacks will have approximately 10 mm offset between sets of stacks.
When the machine is used as a networked printer, the user sends a print job to the machine
When copy output is to be stacked in offsetting piles, the first stack is always placed with the from a workstation terminal to the Digital Front End (DFE). The address is sent to the IOT CPU
OCT in the Home Position. Additional stacks are placed with the tray alternating between the PWBA, which uses data stored in the NVM to correlate the address to a bin. The bin address is
Home and Offset Positions. When a copy job is complete, the OCT always returns to the Home then sent to the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA, which activates the appropriate motors and
Position. solenoids to route the prints into the correct bin.
The OCT can hold 500 sheets of standard weight paper. When the tray capacity is reached, the When the machine is configured as a copier/printer and is being used as a copier, the local
Full Stack Sensor is activated, and a status line is asserted to the IOT CPU PWBA. user can only send the job to the catch tray. If the OCT is attached, the user can choose to sin-
gle stack or offset stack the job.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-153 Offset Catch Tray (OCT), Mailbox/Sorter Operation.
Offset Catch Tray (OCT), Mailbox/Sorter Operation. 10-154 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Finisher Power The Finisher PWB uses these voltages to run internal logic, sensors, solenoids, and the Fin-
isher Motors. The Distribution PWB +24VDC output is controlled by the Decurler Door Inter-
The Finisher requires +5VDC and +24VDC for normal operation. The Finisher receives these
lock, the Stapler Door Interlock, the Compiler Cover Interlock, and the Mailbox Door Interlock
voltages from the Distribution PWB in the IOT (Figure 1).
switches. The +24VDC from the Distribution PWB is cut whenever any of these door interlocks
are opened.
Figure 1 DC Power Circuits
Finisher Interlocks
The interlocks on the doors of the Finisher have two circuits, a +24VDC circuit and a +5VDC
circuit. Generally speaking, the +24VDC side of the interlock is used to interrupt Finisher power
when a door is opened, and the +5VDC side of the interlock controls interlock fault declaration.
The door interlocks work by interrupting power to the finisher. When a door is opened, the
+24VDC side of the switch is opened and the finisher functions that use +24VDC are shut
down. The +5VDC side of the interlock is also opened, resulting in a fault declaration (Figure
1).
The Docking Interlocks are located on the left side of the Finisher assembly. These are mag-
netic interlocks that are held open when the Finisher is docked. When the Finisher is
undocked, the switches will close, completing a path to ground. The resulting drop in voltage is
sensed on the Finisher PWB, and will result in an indication that the Finisher is undocked.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-155 Finisher Power, Finisher Interlocks
Finisher Power Components
WARNING
In the undocked condition, +24VDC to the finisher is NOT interrupted.
1. Distribution PWB
Provides +24VDC and +5VDC to the Finisher PWB.
2. Finisher PWB
The Finisher PWB controls all Finisher functions, executes commands sent from the IOT
CPU PWB, and sends information back to the Printer Engine Controller PWB. All Finisher
components are connected to the Finisher PWB.
3. Stapler Door Interlock
Monitors the state of the Stapler door and cuts +24VDC to the Finisher when the Stapler
Door is open.
4. Compiler Door Interlock
Monitors the state of the Compiler door and cuts +24VDC to the Finisher when the Com-
piler Door is open.
5. Mailbox Door Interlock
Monitors the state of the Mailbox door and cuts +24VDC to the Finisher when the Mailbox
Figure 1 +5 VDC Interlock Circuit Door is open.
6. Decurler Door Interlock
Monitors the state of the Decurler door and cuts +24VDC to the Finisher when the
Decurler Door is open.
7. Docking Interlock 1 and 2
Magnetic interlocks that indicate an undocked condition. These interlock switches are
open in the docked position, and closed in the undocked position.

Finisher Interlocks, Finisher Power Components 10-156 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Finisher Control Every electrical component within the Finisher is connected to the Finisher PWB. Sensors in
the Finisher send status information to the Finisher PWB. The Finisher PWB processes this
Finisher Control is a term used to describe the resources that monitor and control the actions
information, shares it with the IOT CPU PWB, and compares it to timing tables stored in ROM.
and operations of the Finisher -- from paper entrance to paper stacking.
Acting on the results of the processing, the Finisher PWB sends commands to the various Fin-
isher components; for example, switching on a motor or switching off a solenoid (Figure 1).
The Finisher PWB controls all Finisher functions, executes commands sent from the IOT CPU
PWB, and sends information back to the IOT CPU PWB. All Finisher components are con-
nected to the Finisher PWB. The IOT CPU PWB provides the logic and information processing
that is necessary for the printer to function, and the Finisher PWB provides the logic and infor-
mation processing that is necessary for the Finisher to function.
Figure 1 Finisher Control Paths
Table 1 Input and Output Devices

Input Devices Output Devices
SCT Full Sensor Decurler Stepper Motor
Decurler Door Interlock Switch Finisher Transport Motor
Docking Interlock Switch Mailbox Drive Motor
Decurler Exit Sensor Mailbox Gate Solenoid
Stapler Door Interlock Switch Mailbox Solenoid
Mailbox Door Interlock Switch Finisher Gate Solenoid
SCT Exit Sensor Finisher Gate Solenoid
Mailbox Entrance Sensor Compiler Tray Solenoid
Compiler Entrance Sensor End Wall Motor

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-157 Finisher Control
Table 1 Input and Output Devices
Input Devices Output Devices
Compiler Cover Safety Switch Tamper Motor
Compiler Cover Interlock Switches Stapler Position Motor
Unload While Run Switch Eject Motor
Tamper Home Sensor Eject Paddle Motor
Compiler Paper Sensor Eject Clamp/Offset Motor
End Wall Open Sensor Gate Solenoid
Stapler Position Sensors Stacker Motor
Eject Paddle Home Sensor
Offset Home Sensor
Eject Clamp Sensor
Stack Height Sensor
Stacker Upper Limit Sensor
Stacker Full (Mixed Size) Sensor
Stacker Full Sensor
Stacker Lower Limit Sensor
Stacker Paper Sensor

Finisher Control 10-158 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
The Finisher Paper Path There are two major diversion points for paper traveling through the subsystem. The first is the
Finisher Gate. At this gate, the paper can be directed toward the Finisher, or the Sorter/Mail-
The Finisher Paper Path is the physical route that paper takes through the Finisher, from leav-
box. The second gate is the Mailbox Gate, where paper that has been directed to the Sorter/
ing the IOT to arriving at the Finisher Bin, the Simple Catch Tray, or a bin in the Sorter/Mailbox
Mailbox can be sent either to the Simple Catch Tray, or to the Sorter/Mailbox bins.
(Figure 1).
Figure 1 Finisher Paper Path

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-159 The Finisher Paper Path
The Decurler The Finisher Gate
Paper exiting the fuser is fed first through the Decurler. The Decurler is capable of correcting The Finisher Gate is the first point at which the paper in the path can be diverted to either the
curl up, or curl down. This is achieved through the use of two sets of rollers (Figure 1). Finisher or the Sorter/Mailbox (Figure 1).
The first set of rollers in the Decurler Assembly will correct for curl up. This is accomplished The gate consists of a rod with fingers that is controlled by the Finisher Gate Solenoid. The Fin-
through the use of two rollers, one larger and made of a soft, foam material, and the other is a isher Gate Solenoid is a latching solenoid. When a signal is received from the Finisher PWB,
metal rod. The foam roll is positioned over the top of the paper path. The metal rod is located the solenoid will either lift the gate to send paper to the Finisher, or lower it to send paper to the
below the path. When the paper enters the decurler, and if it is to be processed for curl up, the Sorter/Mailbox.
two rolls will come together with the paper between them. Because the top roll is soft, the lower
rod will slightly deform it, and the paper will pass through the nip created at this point. The
shape of the nip will remove the curl from the paper as it passes through.
To reduce curl down, the second set of rolls in the Decurler are used. In this set of rolls, the
foam roll is on the bottom of the path and the metal rod is on the top. The rolls come in contact
with each other and the paper is passed through the resulting nip.
The decurled media is then passed into the Finisher.
Figure 1 Finisher Gate
Figure 1 Decurler Assembly and Paper Path

The Decurler, The Finisher Gate 10-160 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
The Mailbox Gate Finisher Path for Stacking without Stapling
The Mailbox Gate provides diversion to either the Sorter/Mailbox, or the Simple Catch Tray The Finisher options that are available depend upon whether a Print or Copy job has been
(SCT). Lie the Finisher Gate, the Mailbox Gate is a plastic rod with fingers that is positioned sent. The table below indicates which options are available for each type of job.
across the paper path (Figure 1). The gate is controlled by the Mailbox Gate Solenoid. The
solenoid will latch the gate up to divert the paper to the Simple Catch Tray, or down to divert the The explanation below assumes the following:
paper to the Sorter/Mailbox.
1. The job is a print job.
2. No stapling was requested.
3. The paper has been decurled.
4. The paper has passed through the Finisher Gate and was directed to the Finisher.
The Transport Rolls within the Compiler continue driving the paper into the Compiler (Figure 1).
The Compiler Transport Rolls drive the paper further into the Compiler where the leading edge
of the paper actuates the Compiler Entrance Sensor. The Exit Rolls and Paddle Assembly
drive the paper to the Eject Roll. The Eject Roll and Paddle Assembly drive the paper out into
the Stacker Tray.
Figure 1 Mailbox Gate
Figure 1 Compiler Paper Transport
Exit/Eject Paper Path Components
1. Transport Rolls and Pinch Rolls

Drives paper through the Compiler.
2. Complier Entrance Sensor
Monitors paper entering and leaving the Compiler entrance.
3. Exit Roll and Paddle Assembly

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-161 The Mailbox Gate, Finisher Path for Stacking with-
Drives paper to the Eject Roll. Finisher Paper Path for Stapling and Stacking
4. Eject Roll and Paddle Assembly
The following explanation assumes the following:
Drives paper into a Finisher Bin Tray.
1. The job is a print job.
The Eject Roll assembly is shifted from side-to-side so that each set entering the Finisher Bin 2. Stapling was requested.
Tray is offset slightly from the previous set. 3. The paper has been decurled.
4. The paper has passed through the Finisher Gate and was directed to the Finisher.
For additional information, see Eject Paddle Motor
The Exit Chute uses rolls and rubber paddles to move the paper into the Eject area. If the
paper is to be collected into sets and stapled, the Eject Rolls rotate in reverse and drive the
paper back into the Compiler Bin (Figure 1). When the correct number of sheets has entered
the Bin, the Tamper aligns the edges of the paper sheets to form a neat paper set. The Stapler
then drives a staple through the set. As the Eject Rolls drive the paper set out of the Stapler,
they offset each paper set slightly from the previous set as they are delivered into the Stacker
Tray.

Finisher Path for Stacking without Stapling, Finisher 10-162 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 1 Paper Path Through Stapler

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-163 Finisher Paper Path for Stapling and Stacking
Compiler/Tamper Functional Description 1. Tamper Motor
Drives the paper stack Tamper.
The Compiler arranges paper into sets.
2. Tamper Home Sensor
Monitors the position of the Tamper (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Tamper Assembly
3. Compiler Tray Solenoid

Tilts the Compiler Bin when the paper stack reaches 25 sheets (Figure 2).

Compiler/Tamper Functional Description 10-164 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Compiler Tray End Wall
4. End Wall Motor

Controls the opening and closing of the End Wall.
5. End Wall Open Sensor
Monitors the position of the End Wall.
6. Compiler Entrance Sensor
Monitors paper entering the Compiler. The signal from the Sensor is used by the Finisher
logic to start and stop the Transport Motor and the Eject Motor.
7. Compiler Paper Sensor
Monitors paper on the Compiler Tray.
8. Compiler Cover Interlock Switch
Monitors the position of the Compiler Cover.
The Eject Roll reverses rotation and drives the sheet of paper back into the Compiler Tray. A
motor raises the End Wall to block the end of the Compiler Tray. When a set of paper (maxi-
mum of 25 sheets) is transported to the Compiler Tray, the Tamper taps the side of the paper to
square up the set (Figure 3).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-165 Compiler/Tamper Functional Description
Figure 3 Paper Being Compiled for Stapling
The End Wall Motor lowers the End Wall and the Compiler Tray Solenoid tilts the Tray, causing
the paper set to move into the Stapler (Figure 4).
For additional information, see End Wall Motor and Tamper Motor.

Compiler/Tamper Functional Description 10-166 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 4 Paper Set Positioned for Stapling
Compiler /Tamper Paper Path Components 6. Compiler Tray Solenoid

Tilts the Compiler Tray so the paper set slides into the Stapler.
1. Eject Roll
Drives paper into the Compiler Tray
2. Compiler Tray
Staging area used to collect sheets of paper into sets for stapling.
3. End Wall
Closes the end of the Compiler Tray so paper can be collected into sets. Is moved out of
the way when the set is ready to be sent to the Stapler.
4. End Wall Motor
5. Tamper
Taps the sides of every sheet to square up the edges before stapling.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-167 Compiler/Tamper Functional Description
Stapler Functional Description Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling at the front edge of a paper set.
3. Stapler Rear Straight Sensor
The Stapler staples sets of paper.
Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling at the rear edge of a paper set.
1. Stapler Front Corner Sensor
Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling in the front corner of a paper set. 4. Stapler Position Motor
2. Stapler Front Straight Sensor Moves the Stapler Head into position (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Stapler Unit and Position Motor
5. Stapler Position Motor

Drives the Stapler Head while it is stapling a paper set.
6. Eject Paddle Home Sensor
Monitors whether or not the Eject Paddle is in the home position.
7. Eject Paddle Motor
Drives the Eject Paddles to clamp a paper set onto the Compiler Tray prior to stapling.
8. Eject Paddle Drive Belt
Drives the Eject Paddles to clamp a paper set onto the Compiler Tray prior to stapling.
(Figure 2)

Stapler Functional Description 10-168 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Eject Paddle Assembly
For additional information, see Eject Paddle Motor.
The Stapler Position Motor slides the Stapler Unit along a fixed rail. Set locations along the rail
place the Stapler in position to perform one of four possible staple configurations; front corner,
front straight, rear corner, and rear straight. Sensors along the rail monitor the position of the
Stapler Unit. Once the stapler is in position, it drives a single staple at a selected area of the
set (Figure 3).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-169 Stapler Functional Description
Figure 3 Staple Position Options

Stapler Functional Description 10-170 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
1. Stapler Paper Path Components Eject/Offset Functional Description
1. Stapler Front Corner Sensor
The Eject and Offset transport and offset compiled sets of paper into the Stacker Bin.
Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling in the front corner of a paper set.
2. Stapler Front Straight Sensor 1. Eject Clamp/Offset Motor
Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling at the front edge of a paper set. Raises and lowers the Eject Chute and Pinch Roll, and drives the Offset Actuator.
3. Stapler Rear Straight Sensor 2. Eject Clamp Sensor
Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling at the rear edge of a paper set. Monitors whether the Eject Roll is in the up or the down position.
4. Stapler Assembly 3. Offset Home Sensor
Contains the Stapler Head and Stapler Cartridge. Monitors whether or not the Eject Roll is in the home position.
4. Eject Motor
Drives the Eject Shaft Assembly.
After the set is stapled, the Eject Roll rotates clockwise and drives the set out of the Compiler
Tray and toward the Offset Rolls (Figure 1).

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-171 Stapler Functional Description, Eject/Offset Func-
Figure 1 Stapled Paper Set Eject
A cam and gear set shift the Offset Pinch Rolls and Paddle Assembly back and forth across the
Eject paper path, shifting the exiting sheet of paper so each sheet of paper entering the Fin-
isher Tray is offset slightly from the previous sheet (Figure 2).
For additional information, see Eject Clamp/Offset Motor.
(Figure 2.)

Eject/Offset Functional Description 10-172 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Set Offest Mechanism
Eject/Offset Paper Path Components Helps drive paper out of the Compiler Tray and into the Stacker.
1. Pinch Roll Assembly

Shifts alternate paper sets back and forth so they are offset as they stack in the Stacker.
2. Pinch Roll Assembly

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-173 Eject/Offset Functional Description
Stacker Functional Description Mechanical Drive
Provides the mechanism for sensing paper in the Stacker Tray. Mechanical Drive is the term used to describe the various motors, solenoids, gears, and belts
that are used to generate, control, and transmit drive to the various paper path components
1. Stacker Full Sensor within the Finisher.
Monitors the Stacker Tray and detects when the stacker is full.
2. Stacker Full (Mixed Set) Sensor
Monitors the Stacker Tray and detects when the stacker is full if mixed sets are being sent
to it.

Stacker Functional Description, Mechanical Drive 10-174 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Finisher Transport Motor
The Finisher Transport Motor is located in the Compiler section of the Finisher. The Finisher
PWB sends power to the Transport Motor, which uses gears and pulleys to drive the Stapler
Entry/Exit, and the paper Exit functions (Figure 1). +5 VDC voltages from the Finisher PWB are
used to switch the Transport Motor on, and to control its speed. The Transport Motor is pow-
ered by +24 VDC.
Figure 1 Finisher Transport Assembly Eject Motor

The Finisher PWB switches the Eject Motor clockwise to Eject paper into the Stacker. The Fin-
Finisher Transport Mechanical Drive Components
isher PWB switches the Eject Motor counter clockwise to drive the paper back into the Com-
piler Tray. The Eject Motor Drive Belt transmits drive from the Motor to Eject Gear B. Gear B
1. Finisher Transport Motor
drives Eject Shaft 2. Eject Shaft 1 is driven by the Eject Paddle Motor, while the Eject Rolls on
A +24 VDC stepper motor. Provides drive for the Transport.
Eject Shaft 1 are independently driven by gearing from Eject Shaft 2 (Figure 1, Figure 2).
2. Transport Gears
Transmits Motor drive to Pulley.
3. Compiler Transport Drive Belt
Transmits Finisher Transport Motor drive to the Eject Shaft, Exit Shaft, and the Paddle
Shaft.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-175 Finisher Transport Motor, Eject Motor
Figure 1 Eject Motor and Its Associated Components

Eject Motor 10-176 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Figure 2 Eject Paddle Motor and Its Associated Components

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-177 Eject Motor
End Wall Motor The End Wall Motor raises and lowers the Compiler Tray End Wall (Figure 1). When paper is
sent to the Compiler Bin, the Finisher PWB switches on the End Wall Motor. The End Wall
Motor raises the End Wall of the Compiler Tray. When a set of paper is collected in the Com-
piler Bin and the set is ready to be sent to the Stapler, the End Wall Motor lowers the End Wall
to allow the paper set to move to the Stapler.
Figure 1 Compiler End Wall and Its Associated Components
End Wall Mechanical Drive Components
1. End Wall Motor

A +24 VDC stepper motor. Raises and lowers the End Wall.
2. End Wall
Raised to close off the end of the Compiler Tray. Lowered to open the end of the Compiler
Tray and allow the paper set to move to the Stapler.

End Wall Motor 10-178 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Tamper Motor The Finisher PWB switches on the Tamper Motor when a paper set in the Compiler Tray is
ready to be sent to the Stapler. The Tamper is attached to the Tamper Drive Belt (Figure 1).
When the Tamper Motor is switched on, it pulses, which in turn taps the Tamper against the
side of the paper set. The Tamper Home Sensor monitors the position of the Tamper.
Figure 1 Compiler Tamper and Its Associated Components
Tamper Mechanical Drive Components
1. Tamper Motor
A +24 VDC stepper motor. Drives the Tamper Drive Belt.
2. Tamper Drive Belt
Drives the Tamper.
3. Tamper
Attached to the Drive Belt. The side of the Tamper taps the edge of each sheet of paper to
align the set before stapling.
4. Tamper Home Sensor
Monitors the position of the Tamper when it is not activated.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-179 Tamper Motor
Eject Paddle Motor
The Finisher PWB switches on the Eject Paddle Motor (Figure 1). The Eject Paddle Drive Belt
transmits drive to the Paddle Shaft Assembly. Paddles on the Assembly drive a stapled set of
paper into the Finisher Tray. The Eject Paddle Home Sensor monitors the home position of the
Paddle Shaft Assembly (Figure 2).
Eject Paddle Mechanical Drive Components
1. Eject Paddle Motor

A +24 VDC motor. Provides drive for the Paddle Shaft Assembly.
2. Eject Paddle Motor Drive Belt
Transmits Set Clamp Motor drive to the Paddle Shaft Assembly.
3. Eject Paddle Home Position
Monitors the home position of the Paddle Assembly.

Eject Paddle Motor 10-180 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-181 Eject Paddle Motor
Eject Clamp/Offset Motor The Eject Clamp/Offset Motor drives the Offset Cam. As the Cam rotates, the high and low
points of the Cam drive the Eject Clamp Rolls back and forth across the paper path. The Eject
Clamp/Offset Motor also drives the Eject Clamp Cam. As the Cam rotates, the high and low
points of the Cam drive the Eject Clamp Pinch Rolls up and down (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Eject/Offest Mechanical Details 1

Eject Clamp/Offset Motor 10-182 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Offset Mechanical Drive Components 3. Eject Clamp Cam
Driven by the Eject Clamp Offset Motor. As the cam rotates, the high and low points move
1. Eject Clamp/Offset Motor the Eject Clamp Pinch Rolls up and down.
A +24 VDC motor. Provides drive for both the Eject Clamp Pinch Rolls and the Eject Rolls. 4. Eject Clamp Sensor
2. Offset Cam Monitors the position of the Eject Clamp Cam.
Driven by the Eject Clamp Offset Motor. As the cam rotates, the high and low points slide (See Figure 2.)
the Offset Rolls across the paper path.
Figure 2 Eject/Offset Mechanical Details 2 Stacker Tray Motor and Sensors

The Stacker Tray has a separate Motor that raises or lowers the Tray to accommodate the
amount of paper sent to it. The Stacker Tray is moved by Stacker Tray Drive Belts that are
driven by the Stacker Motor. As the Belts rotate, the Tray raises or lowers depending on the
direction of Belt rotation. Sensors monitor the presence of paper and the position of the Tray.
(See Figure 1.)

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-183 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor, Stacker Tray Motor and
Figure 1 Stacker Tray Details
Stacker Tray Mechanical Drive Components Stacker Tray Sensors
1. Stacker Motor: A +24 VDC stepper motor. Provides forward and reverse drive for the Eject 1. Stacker Upper Limit Sensor: Monitors when the Stacker Tray has reached the highest
Roll. point that it can safely travel.
2. Pulleys, Belt, Worm Wheel, and Shaft: Transmits Motor drive to the Stacker Tray Drive 2. Stacker Full (Mixed Size) Sensor: Monitors when the Stacker tray has received all the sets
Belts. The Shaft drives the belts and pulleys on the opposite side of the Stacker from the of mixed sizes that it can hold.
motor. 3. Stacker Full Sensor: Monitors when the Stacker tray has received all the sets of uniform
3. Stacker Tray Drive Belts: Raise and lower the Stacker Tray. size that it can hold.
4. Stacker Lower Limit Sensor: Monitors when the Stacker Tray has reached the lowest point
that it can safely travel.
5. Stacker Paper Sensor: Monitors the presence of paper on the Stacker Tray.

Stacker Tray Motor and Sensors 10-184 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-185 Stacker Tray Motor and Sensors
Stacker Tray Motor and Sensors 10-186 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Overview Electrical and Mechanical Operation of the IDFE
The Splash Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) is a color server option that provides an inte- This section describes the electrical distribution and mechanical operation of the IDFE. For
grated link between the DC CS50 (IOT) and the Local Area Network (LAN) of the customer. more information describing AC and DC Power distribution to the DC CS50, refer to Stand-By
The server transforms the DC CS50 into a network-based printer and scanner, capable of Power, Chapter 1 in the Principles of Operation for the DocuColor 12.
working with a variety of high-end graphics and color printing applications.
The IDFE uses a process called Raster Image Processing (RIP) to translate PostScript print
files into raster images specifically formatted for the DC CS50. The IDFE then sends images to
the IOT for printing.
Customers can generate and submit jobs to the IDFE for printing. The IDFE supports print driv-
ers for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Mac OS v7.x and the MAC OS v8.x operat-
ing systems. In addition, a web browser such as Netscape Communicator or Microsoft Internet
Explorer allows customers to access the IDFE Web client.
NOTE: The job files are PostScript ready files only.
The web client allows customers to submit jobs to the IDFE for printing, to view the current sta-
tus of the IDFE, to view the current status of the DC CS50, to set-up scanning jobs, to perform
job and device management, and to perform color calibration. The web client also allows the
system administrator to configure the IDFE network settings.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-187 Overview, Electrical and Mechanical Operation of
Power Distribution - Solid State Relay NOTE: When an operator removes power from the IOT by switching off the main switch, an
RC network located on the AC Driver PWBA delays release of the Coil for the Main Switch for
The AC Driver PWB supplies +5 VDC to the Coil of the Main Switch (BSD 1.1). When the Main
18-22 seconds. This delay is used to allow the IDFE Hard Disk Drive to safely shut down (Fig-
Switch is pressed, the Coil for the Switch is energized, providing +5 VDC to Connector J83 Pin
ure 1).
1 of the Printer Solid State Relay (SSR) (BSD 16.1). To complete the DC circuit, Connector J84
Pin 1 provides the return path to ground from the SSR to the AC Driver PWBA at Connector Power Distribution - Printer Low Voltage Power Supply
J20 Pin 2.
(LVPS)
From Connector J2 (BSD 16.1), the AC Driver PWBA (PL 9.3) provides 120 VAC @ 16 When energized, the Printer SSR provides 120 VAC @ 16 Amperes (220/240 VAC @ 10
amperes (220/240 VAC @ 10 Amperes) to Connector J81 Pin 1 of the Printer SSR (PL9.3). Amperes) to the Printer LVPS at Connector J4 Pin 4 (BSD 16.1). The Printer LVPS converts
When this DC circuit is energized, the SSR will switch on, allowing high voltage AC from the AC this AC power into a regulated +5.1 VDC @ 11 Amperes Power Supply, and a regulated +12
Driver PWBA to pass through the Printer SSR to Connector J82 Pin 1 and onto Connector J4 VDC @ 1.6 Amperes Power Supply within the LVPS (BSD 16.1).
Pin 4 of the Printer Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS).
Figure 1 IDFE Power Interface Block Diagram
NOTE: There is a ground wire attached to the Chassis Frame at P/J 899 Pin 12. This is not Power Distribution - IDFE
shown on BSD 16.1.
The IDFE (PL 19.1) is an enclosed color server mounted on the back of the DocuColor 12,
NOTE: The Printer and IOT LVPS are separate. The Printer LVPS is located behind the AC which converts the IOT into a network printer. The IDFE uses +5 VDC power, supplied from the
Driver PWBA. Printer LVPS to power the following parts inside the IDFE (PL 19.1):
The return path to Frame Ground for the Printer LVPS is provided through Connector J4 Pin 1
• IDFE Motherboard
(BSD 16.1).
• Diagnostic LEDs
• CD-ROM Drive
• Token Ring PWBA
• Hard Disk Drive
The DC returns for the IDFE Motherboard, CD-ROM Drive, Token Ring PWBA and the Hard
Disk Drive are provided through the Connector P/J 899 Pins 5, 6, 7,and 8 (BSD 16.1) to Con-
nector J508 Pins 3 and 4 on the Printer LVPS.

Power Distribution - Solid State Relay, Power Distri- 10-188 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
The IDFE also uses +12 VDC power, supplied from the Printer LVPS to transfer power to the Digital Signal Distribution from the IDFE to the IOT
IDFE Wiring Harness at P/J 899 Pin 9. This +12 VDC circuit is used to provide additional power
Two 80 pin cables provide Digital to Digital Interface (DDI) connections at Connector DPJ2 for
to the CD-ROM Drive, the Fan and the AUI Transceiver for the IDFE. The DC return for the CD-
the Printer and Connector DSJ2 for the Scanner. These two cables provide the DDI link
ROM Drive, the Hard Disk Drive, the Fan and the AUI TRansceiver is provided by Connector P/
between the VSEL EXT PWBA on the DC CS50 and the IDFE Interface Card contained within
J 899 Pin 11 through Connector J509 Pin 4 (BSD 16.1).
the IDFE. (BSD 16.1)
The Print and Scan DDI Cables for the IOT and the IDFE are identical. The Print and Scan DDI
Cables must not be crossed.
CAUTION
To assure that the Print and Scan Cables are installed correctly and are not crossed in manu-
facturing or service repair, a pair of ICONS (Paper > Scanner, Printer > Paper) will be printed
onto the IOT and IDFE covers.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-189 Power Distribution - IDFE, Digital Signal Distribu-
IDFE Enclosure Network Interface
The IDFE Enclosure is formed from a single piece of 22 gauge galvanized steel to provide EMI The IDFE can interface
and EME suppression for the noise sensitive components in the IDFE and the IOT. A Cover
Plate is added for the CD-ROM Drive to help suppress additional EME emissions from the CD- with local area networks by use of several different protocols:
ROM Drive. The IDFE uses an internal Fan to provide air flow through the IDFE in a right to left
direction. The Internal Fan is powered by +12 VDC from the Printer LVPS. The fully assembled • TCP/IP
IDFE weighs 13.5 lbs. (6.1 kg). • Netware IPX (NDS and Bindery only)
• AppleTalk
• LPD network protocol stack
• Banyan VINES (requires additional hardware through an external print server using a par-
allel port or controller)
• NetBEUI
• Netbios
The IDFE supports the following physical interfaces:
• Parallel printer interface (For external print server to support Banyan VINES)
• Ethernet (10 or 100 Mbps)
• Token Ring (4 or 16 Mbps)
NOTE: Installation of the Token Ring PWBA requires optional hardware.

IDFE Enclosure, Network Interface 10-190 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
Image Processing Print Interface
Refer to Chapter 6 - Imaging, in the Principles of Operation for the DocuColor 12 and BSD 16.1
for more information on how the following PWBAs perform signal flow and Image Processing:
• Half Tone PWBA

• Post IPS PWBA
• VSEL Base PWBA
• VSEL Extension PWBA
Figure 1 IDFE Print Interface Block Diagram
The print interface between the DC CS50 and the IDFE is shown in Figure 1. The signals are
as follows:
• VIDEO DATA ODD and VIDEO DATA EVEN - Each is a set of eight parallel lines which
provide the print data to the IOT.
• TAG ODD and TAG EVEN - Each is a set of four parallel lines which provides auxiliary
data for images sent using YMCK color space.
• nPAGE REQ - The IDFE must provide an entire print page of data to the IOT during the
active (negative) period of this signal.
• nLINE REQ - The IDFE must provide a pair of data lines during the active (negative)
period of this signal.
• VCLK - The IOT uses this signal to sample the video data and tag information.
• nVALID - This indicates that the data on the video data and tag lines is valid and may be
sampled.
The odd and even data and tag buses are used simultaneously to pass 600 dpi images. Either
the even or odd busses can be used individually to pass a 400 dpi image.

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 10-191 Image Processing, Print Interface
Scan Interface
Figure 1 IDFE Scan Interface Block Diagram
The scan interface is very similar to the print interface, except that image data flows in the
opposite direction. The interface is shown in Figure 1. The signals are:
• SVDATA ODD and SVDATA EVEN - Each is a set of eight parallel lines which provide the
scan data from the IOT.
• STAG ODD and STAG EVEN - Each is a set of four parallel lines which provides auxiliary
data for images sent using YMCK color space.
• nSEPAGE REQ - The IOT must provide an entire print page of data to the IOT during the
active (negative) period of this signal.
• nSLINE REQ - The IOT must provide a pair of data lines during the active (negative)
period of this signal.
• SVCLK - The controller uses this signal to sample the video data and tag information.
• nSVALID - This indicates that the data on the video data and tag lines is valid and may be
sampled.
As with the print interface, the odd and even data and tag buses are used simultaneously to
pass 600 dpi images. In addition, either the even or odd buses can be used individually to pass
a 400 dpi image.

Scan Interface 10-192 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
manuals4you.com
11 Glossary of Terms
Glossary of Terms and Contractions............................................................................... 11-3
Reissue 1/05 Glossary of Terms

Glossary of Terms 1/05 Reissue
manuals4you.com
Glossary of Terms and Contractions Table 1 Glossary of Terms
Purpose Term Description
This section provides a list of acronyms and new words used in conjunction with this machine. CCW Counterclockwise (left-hand rotation)
CD Circuit Diagram
Table 1 contains the terms and acronyms that are used throughout the Service Documentation. CDIC Compression Decompression Interface Controller
CD-ROM Compact Disc Read only Memory
Table 1 Glossary of Terms
CGROM Character Generator Read Only Memory
Term Description
CMP Call Maintenance Practices
A/E or AE Auto Exposure CPM Copies per Minute
A3 Paper size 11.69 x 16.54 inches (297 x 420mm) CPU Central Processing Unit
A4 Paper size 8.27 x 11.69 inches (210 x 297mm) CQ Copy Quality, refers to characteristics that are xerographic and\or
A4 Cover Paper size 8.78 x 11.69 inches (223 x 297mm) cosmetic related
A5 Paper size 5.8 x 8.27 inches (148 x 210mm) CRU Customer Replaceable Unit
ACH AC High CRUM Customer Replaceable Unit Monitor, individual CRU usage moni-
AC Alternating Current tor (internal to each CRU)
ACL AC Line CRUM-COD-ID Crum Code Identification
ACN AC Neutral CSDNO Circuit Switched Digital Network
ADC Auto Density Control CSE Customer Service Engineer
AGC Automatic Gain Control CSI Called Subscriber Identification
AOC Automatic Offset Control CTC Continue to Correct
APS Auto Paper Sensor CVT Constant Velocity Transport
ASCII (American Standard Code for Informational Interchange) A 7-bit CW Clockwise (right-hand rotation)
code providing 128 possible character combinations. DAD Discharge Area Development
ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit) A chip that is designed for DADF Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
a specific purpose within a highly vertical application. DATAMAN Data Management Application
ATS Auto Tray Selection DC Direct Current
Auditron Electronic counters for tracking customer usage of the machine. dC Diagnostic Routine
B4 Paper size 10.12 x 14.33 inches (247 x 364mm) DC COM Direct Current, Common
B5 Paper size 7.17 x 10.12 inches (182 x 257mm) DFE Digital Front End
BBS Bulletin Board System, Electronic Bulletins can be downloaded to DMM Digital Multi-meter
the PWS via this system. Dog Ear A condition when the corner or corners of the paper are curled or
BCO Bead Carryout folded
BCR Bias Charge Roll DOS Disk Operating System) A generic term for operating system.
BIOS Basic Input/Output System DPI Dots Per Inch
Bit Binary digit (1 or 0), representing an electrical state. DPM Duplex Copies per Minute
BSD Block Schematic Diagram DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
BTR Bias Transfer Roll DSS Disk Stacker Stapler
BUS An electrical connection that allows data flow in two directions at DTS Detack Saw
the same time.
ECM Error Correction Mode
C Cyan
EDOC Electronic Documentation
CB Chute Bias
EEPROMS (Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) A
CCD Charge Coupled Device memory chip that holds its content without power.
CCITT International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee

Table 1 Glossary of Terms Table 1 Glossary of Terms
Term Description Term Description
ELOG Electronic Service-Log, an electronic tool used to track machine IOT Image Output Terminal
service history. IPS Image Processing System
EME Electromagnetic Emissions IQ Image Quality
EPC Electronic Page Collation IQ defects Image Quality defects (see CQ)
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. A ROM that can be ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
erased and then programmed again with new software.
ISDN1 ISDN Channel 1
EQM Eye Quality Monitor
ISDN-CSDN1 Circuit Switched Digital Network
ES Expert System
ISDNO ISDN Channel 0
ESD Electrostatic Discharge. A transfer of charge between bodies at
IVCM Integrated Video and Control Module
different electrostatic potential. Could be damaging to sensitive
K Black
devices.
KO Key Operator
ESV Electro Static Voltage
L Low
Executive Paper size 7.25 x 10.5 inches (184 x 267mm)
LAN Local Area Network
FAX Facsimile Product, the conversion of paper media to electronic
impulses that are transmitted over the phone lines and then re- Laser SOS Laser Start of Scan
compiled at the receive end LCD Liquid Crystal Display
FCC Federal Communications Commission LD Laser Diode Driver
FIP Fault Isolation Procedure LDD Laser Diode Driver
FRU Field Replaceable Unit LE Lead Edge
FX Fuji Xerox LED Light Emitting Diode
PPM Prints Per Minute Ledger Paper size 11 x 17 inches (297 x 420mm)
G4M Group 4 Module LEF Long Edge Feed; Portrait orientation
GFI Ground Fault Interrupter Legal Paper size 8.5 x 14 inches (216 x 356mm)
GND Ground Letter Paper size 8.5 x 11 inches (216 x 279mm)
GSM Grams per Square Meter Letter Cover Paper size 9 x 11 inches (229 x 279mm)
H High LP Laser Printer
HCF High Capacity Feeder LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply
HDD Hard Disk Drive M/C Machine Clock or Mean Copies or Machine (Depending on con-
HDIF Hard Disk Interface text)
HFSI High Frequency Service Items (parts in a machine that have an M Magenta
anticipated known life) MB Megabyte
HVPS High Voltage Power Supply Mbps Mega bits per second
HZ Hertz, cycles per second MBX Mailbox
I/F Interface MBX P(s) Mailbox Passwords
I/O Inputs and Outputs MMB PWBA ID Main Mailbox
IB Inboard; the side of the paper path closer to the rear of the MMR Modified Read
machine; toward the inside of the machine. MN Multi-National
IBT Intermediate Belt Transfer Moire Patterns on the image areas of the output copy or print that have
IDFE Integrated Digital Front End the appearance of a screen or grid overlaying the image.
IE Image Enhancement MPSX MPS Xerox Signal
IIT Integrated Input Terminal, or Image Input Terminal MR Modified Read
IIT/IPS Integrated Input Terminal/Image Processing System MRC Machine Run Control
Glossary of Terms 1/05 Reissue

manuals4you.com
Table 1 Glossary of Terms Table 1 Glossary of Terms
Term Description Term Description
MRD Machine Resident Diskette, 3.5-inch floppy diskette stored on the RTC Return to Control
bottom rear cover of the machine. Used to store NVM (backup) RTN Retrain Negative
and ELOG files.
RTP Retrain Positive
msec. milliseconds
RX Rank Xerox (obsolete term, see XL)
MSI Multi-Sheet Inserter
SA System Administrator
NASG North American Solutions Group
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface
NSF Non-Standard Facilities
SEF Short Edge Feed; Landscape orientation
NVM Non-Volatile Memory. Random Access Memory device (RAM)
SIMM Single Inline Memory Module
OB Outboard; the side of the paper path closer to the front of the
Skew Angular error between the xerographic image and the copy paper,
machine; toward the outside of the machine. measured at the lead edge.
OCT Offset Catch Tray
SOS Start of Scan
Ohms a unit of measurement of electrical resistance
SPI Spots per Inch
OPC Organic Photo Conductor
SR Service Representative
PC Personal Computer
SSR Solid State Relay
PCL5 Printer Control Language
SW Switch or Software
PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
T/A Takeaway
PIX Picture data (pixel)
TAG Hardware upgrade information
PL Parts List
TMB Tower Mailbox
PMC Preventive Maintenance Call
TP Test Point
PO/PO Power Off/Power On the machine.
TRC Toner Reference Control
POST Power On Self Test
TRC RADC Toner Reference Control Random Access Density Control
PPI Pixels per Inch
TRN Train
PPM Prints per Minute
TTL Transistor Logic: A digital circuit with transistor input and transistor
PPM Pages per Minute output.
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory TTM Tray Turn Module
PS PostScript UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network UI User interface
PWB(A) Printed Wiring Board Assembly USCO United States Customer Operations
PWS Portable Workstation VAC Voltage Alternating Current
RADC Random Access Density Control VCE Video Compression and Expansion
R/E Reduction/Enlargement VDC Voltage Direct Current
RAM Random Access Memory. A digital memory circuit from which Xero Xerographics
information can be accessed or where software information can be
VRAM Volatile Random Access Memory
stored.
XE Xerox Europe (formerly RX, or Rank Xerox)
RAP Repair Analysis Procedure
XVDC Generic Voltage DC
R/H Right Hand
XPC ASIC X direction pixel count application specific integrated circuit
RE Reduction, Enlargement
Y Yellow
Regi. Registration
RGB Red Green Blue
ROM Read Only Memory. A digital memory circuit that is designed to
contain permanent software information.
ROS Raster Output Scanner (name given to a laser unit)


Docucolor 12dccs50

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Docucolor 12dccs50

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DocuColor 12/DCCS50

© 2001, 2002, 2004 by Xerox Corporation.

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Figure 1 Laser Hazard Symbol

Laser Hazard Statement

DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Section 1. Service Call Procedures

Detailed Maintenance Activities

Section 2. Status Indicator Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs)

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

Section 4. Repairs and Adjustments

Section 5. Parts List

Section 6. General Procedures

Section 7. Wiring Data

Section 8. Accessories / Options

Section 9. Installation and Removal

Section 10. Principles of Operations

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Figure 1 General Information

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

Table 1 DC Voltage Levels

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

REP 7.1.1 IBT REP 7.10.1 2nd BTR Roll

REP 8.1.1 Fuser Unit

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

REP 12.1.1 DADF WARNING

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

Reissue 1/05 Introduction

Introduction 1/05 Reissue

Reissue 1/05 Service Call Procedures

Reissue 1/05 Service Call Procedures

Color Shift to Normal

Go to the RAP for the displayed fault code.

.Go to the OF5-1 DADF Jam Recovery RAP.

Go to the RAP for the displayed fault code.

The Image Quality of the copies produced is acceptable.

The machine is a DCCS50 or a DC12 C/P with DFE.

Send a simple print job. The Copier/Printer produces acceptable prints.

The Printer can print from all trays.

A fault code is displayed.

Go to the RAP for the displayed fault code.

The Image Quality of the prints produced is acceptable.

Reissue 1/05 Service Call Procedures

NOTE: Perform GP 20 2nd BTR Service Procedure at 100K intervals

Service Call Procedures 1/05 Reissue

Reissue 1/05 Service Call Procedures

Service Call Procedures 1/05 Reissue